RM0090 Reference manual

STM32F40xxx, STM32F41xxx, STM32F42xxx, STM32F43xxx advanced ARM-based 32-bit MCUs

Introduction
This reference manual targets application developers. It provides complete information on how to use the STM32F405xx/07xx, STM32F415xx/17xx, STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx microcontroller memory and peripherals. The STM32F405xx/07xx, STM32F415xx/17xx, STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx constitute a family of microcontrollers with different memory sizes, packages and peripherals. For ordering information, mechanical and electrical device characteristics please refer to the datasheets. For information on the ARM Cortex-M4F core, please refer to the Cortex-M4F Technical Reference Manual.

Related documents
Available from STMicroelectronics web site (http://www/st.com):
STM32F40x and STM32F41x datasheets STM32F42x and STM32F43x databriefs

For information on the ARM Cortex-M4 core with FPU, refer to the STM32F3xx/F4xxx Cortex-M4 programming manual (PM0214). Applicable products
Product family Part numbers and product categories STM32F405xx, STM32F407xx, STM32F415xx, STM32F417xx, STM32F427xx, STM32F437xx

Table 1.

Microcontrollers

February 2013

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

www.st.com

1/1422

RM0090

Contents

Contents
1 Documentation conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.1 1.2 1.3 List of abbreviations for registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Peripheral availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Memory and bus architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2.1 System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.9 S0: I-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S1: D-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S2: S-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S3, S4: DMA memory bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S5: DMA peripheral bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S6: Ethernet DMA bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 S7: USB OTG HS DMA bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 BusMatrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 AHB/APB bridges (APB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2.2 2.3

Memory organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 Embedded SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Flash memory overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Bit banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

2.4

Boot configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Embedded Flash memory interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Embedded Flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Read interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.4.1 3.4.2 Relation between CPU clock frequency and Flash memory read time . 61 Adaptive real-time memory accelerator (ART Accelerator) . . . . . . . . 63

3.5

Erase and program operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

3.5.1 3.5.2 Unlocking the Flash control register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Program/erase parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

2/1422

Contents 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5

RM0090 Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

3.6

Option bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 Description of user option bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Programming user option bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Read protection (RDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Write protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

3.7 3.8

One-time programmable bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Flash interface registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 3.8.7 3.8.8 3.8.9 Flash access control register (FLASH_ACR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Flash key register (FLASH_KEYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Flash option key register (FLASH_OPTKEYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Flash status register (FLASH_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Flash control register (FLASH_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Flash control register (FLASH_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Flash option control register (FLASH_OPTCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Flash option control register (FLASH_OPTCR1) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Flash interface register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

CRC calculation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 CRC introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 CRC main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 CRC functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 CRC registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 Data register (CRC_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Independent data register (CRC_IDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Control register (CRC_CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 CRC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Power controller (PWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

5.1 Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.1.1 5.1.2 Independent A/D converter supply and reference voltage . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Battery backup domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

3/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 5.1.3

Contents Voltage regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

5.2

Power supply supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Power-on reset (POR)/power-down reset (PDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Brownout reset (BOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Programmable voltage detector (PVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

5.3

Low-power modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 Slowing down system clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Peripheral clock gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Programming the RTC alternate functions to wake up the device from the Stop and Standby modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

5.4

Power control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

5.5

PWR register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Reset and clock control for (RCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

6.1 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 System reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Power reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Backup domain reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

6.2

Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 HSE clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 HSI clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 PLL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 LSE clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 LSI clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 System clock (SYSCLK) selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Clock security system (CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 RTC/AWU clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Watchdog clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Clock-out capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

4/1422

Contents 6.2.11

RM0090 Internal/external clock measurement using TIM5/TIM11 . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.3

RCC registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.3.13 6.3.14 6.3.15 6.3.16 6.3.17 6.3.18 6.3.19 RCC clock control register (RCC_CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 RCC PLL configuration register (RCC_PLLCFGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 RCC clock interrupt register (RCC_CIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 RCC AHB1 peripheral reset register (RCC_AHB1RSTR) . . . . . . . . . . 132 RCC AHB2 peripheral reset register (RCC_AHB2RSTR) . . . . . . . . . . 134 RCC AHB3 peripheral reset register (RCC_AHB3RSTR) . . . . . . . . . . 135 RCC APB1 peripheral reset register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx(RCC_APB1RSTR) . . . 135 RCC APB1 peripheral reset register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB1RSTR) . . . . . . . . . . . 138 RCC APB2 peripheral reset register (RCC_APB2RSTR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 RCC APB2 peripheral reset register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB2RSTR) . . . . . . . . . . . 143 RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB1ENR) . . . . . 145 RCC AHB2 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB2ENR) . . . . . 147 RCC AHB3 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB3ENR) . . . . . 148 RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx(RCC_APB1ENR) . . 148 RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx(RCC_APB1ENR) . . . . . . . . . . 151 RCC APB2 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_APB2ENR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 RCC APB2 peripheral clock enable register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx(RCC_APB2ENR) . . . . . . . . . . 156 RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx (RCC_AHB1LPENR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_AHB1LPENR) . . . . . . . . 161 RCC AHB2 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register (RCC_AHB2LPENR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 RCC AHB3 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register (RCC_AHB3LPENR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx (RCC_APB1LPENR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB1LPENR) . . . . . . . . 168

6.3.20 6.3.21 6.3.22 6.3.23

6.3.24

5/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 6.3.25

Contents RCC APB2 peripheral clock enabled in low power mode register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx(RCC_APB2LPENR) . . 171 RCC APB2 peripheral clock enabled in low power mode register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB2LPENR) . . . . . . . . 173 RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 RCC clock control & status register (RCC_CSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 RCC spread spectrum clock generation register (RCC_SSCGR) . . . . 178 RCC PLLI2S configuration register (RCC_PLLI2SCFGR) . . . . . . . . . 179 RCC Dedicated Clocks Configuration Register (RCC_DCKCFGR) . . 180 RCC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

6.3.26 6.3.27 6.3.28 6.3.29 6.3.30 6.3.31 6.3.32

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

7.1 7.2 7.3 GPIO introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 GPIO main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 GPIO functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.3.7 7.3.8 7.3.9 7.3.10 7.3.11 7.3.12 7.3.13 7.3.14 7.3.15 General-purpose I/O (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 I/O pin multiplexer and mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 I/O port control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 I/O port data registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 I/O data bitwise handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 GPIO locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 I/O alternate function input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 External interrupt/wakeup lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Input configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Alternate function configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Analog configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Using the OSC32_IN/OSC32_OUT pins as GPIO PC14/PC15 port pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Using the OSC_IN/OSC_OUT pins as GPIO PH0/PH1 port pins . . . . 196 Selection of RTC_AF1 and RTC_AF2 alternate functions . . . . . . . . . . 197

7.4

GPIO registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 GPIO port mode register (GPIOx_MODER) (x = A..I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 GPIO port output type register (GPIOx_OTYPER) (x = A..I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 GPIO port output speed register (GPIOx_OSPEEDR) (x = A..I/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

6/1422

Contents 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9 7.4.10 7.4.11

RM0090 GPIO port pull-up/pull-down register (GPIOx_PUPDR) (x = A..I/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 GPIO port input data register (GPIOx_IDR) (x = A..I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 GPIO port output data register (GPIOx_ODR) (x = A..I) . . . . . . . . . . . 200 GPIO port bit set/reset register (GPIOx_BSRR) (x = A..I) . . . . . . . . . . 201 GPIO port configuration lock register (GPIOx_LCKR) (x = A..I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 GPIO alternate function low register (GPIOx_AFRL) (x = A..I) . . . . . . 202 GPIO alternate function high register (GPIOx_AFRH) (x = A..I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 GPIO register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

System configuration controller (SYSCFG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

8.1 8.2 I/O compensation cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 SYSCFG registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.2.9 SYSCFG memory remap register (SYSCFG_MEMRMP) . . . . . . . . . . 206 SYSCFG peripheral mode configuration register (SYSCFG_PMC) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 SYSCFG peripheral mode configuration register (SYSCFG_PMC) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 1 (SYSCFG_EXTICR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 2 (SYSCFG_EXTICR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 3 (SYSCFG_EXTICR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 4 (SYSCFG_EXTICR4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Compensation cell control register (SYSCFG_CMPCR) . . . . . . . . . . . 210 SYSCFG register maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

DMA controller (DMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

9.1 9.2 9.3 DMA introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 DMA main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 DMA functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 DMA transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Channel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

7/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9 9.3.10 9.3.11 9.3.12 9.3.13 9.3.14 9.3.15 9.3.16 9.3.17 9.3.18

Contents DMA streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Source, destination and transfer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Pointer incrementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Circular mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Double buffer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Programmable data width, packing/unpacking, endianess . . . . . . . . . 225 Single and burst transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 DMA transfer completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 DMA transfer suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Flow controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Summary of the possible DMA configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Stream configuration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Error management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

9.4 9.5

DMA interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 DMA registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.5.7 9.5.8 9.5.9 9.5.10 9.5.11 DMA low interrupt status register (DMA_LISR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 DMA high interrupt status register (DMA_HISR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 DMA low interrupt flag clear register (DMA_LIFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 DMA high interrupt flag clear register (DMA_HIFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 DMA stream x configuration register (DMA_SxCR) (x = 0..7) . . . . . . . 239 DMA stream x number of data register (DMA_SxNDTR) (x = 0..7) . . . 242 DMA stream x peripheral address register (DMA_SxPAR) (x = 0..7) . 242 DMA stream x memory 0 address register (DMA_SxM0AR) (x = 0..7) 243 DMA stream x memory 1 address register (DMA_SxM1AR) (x = 0..7) 243 DMA stream x FIFO control register (DMA_SxFCR) (x = 0..7) . . . . . . 244 DMA register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

10

Interrupts and events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

10.1 Nested vectored interrupt controller (NVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 NVIC features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 SysTick calibration value register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Interrupt and exception vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

10.2

External interrupt/event controller (EXTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 EXTI main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 EXTI block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Wakeup event management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

8/1422

Contents 10.2.4 10.2.5

RM0090 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 External interrupt/event line mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

10.3

EXTI registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 Interrupt mask register (EXTI_IMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Event mask register (EXTI_EMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Rising trigger selection register (EXTI_RTSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Falling trigger selection register (EXTI_FTSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Software interrupt event register (EXTI_SWIER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Pending register (EXTI_PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 EXTI register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

11

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

11.1 11.2 11.3 ADC introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ADC main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ADC functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4 11.3.5 11.3.6 11.3.7 11.3.8 11.3.9 ADC on-off control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 ADC clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Channel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Single conversion mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Continuous conversion mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Analog watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Scan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Injected channel management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

11.3.10 Discontinuous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8

Data alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Channel-wise programmable sampling time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Conversion on external trigger and trigger polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Fast conversion mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Data management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
11.8.1 11.8.2 11.8.3 Using the DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Managing a sequence of conversions without using the DMA . . . . . . 276 Conversions without DMA and without overrun detection . . . . . . . . . . 277

11.9

Multi ADC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

11.9.1 11.9.2 Injected simultaneous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Regular simultaneous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

9/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 11.9.3 11.9.4 11.9.5 11.9.6

Contents Interleaved mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Alternate trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Combined regular/injected simultaneous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Combined regular simultaneous + alternate trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . 287

11.10 Temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 11.11 Battery charge monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 11.12 ADC interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 11.13 ADC registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
11.13.1 ADC status register (ADC_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 11.13.2 ADC control register 1 (ADC_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 11.13.3 ADC control register 2 (ADC_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 11.13.4 ADC sample time register 1 (ADC_SMPR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 11.13.5 ADC sample time register 2 (ADC_SMPR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 11.13.6 ADC injected channel data offset register x (ADC_JOFRx)(x=1..4) . . 298 11.13.7 ADC watchdog higher threshold register (ADC_HTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 11.13.8 ADC watchdog lower threshold register (ADC_LTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 11.13.9 ADC regular sequence register 1 (ADC_SQR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 11.13.10 ADC regular sequence register 2 (ADC_SQR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 11.13.11 ADC regular sequence register 3 (ADC_SQR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 11.13.12 ADC injected sequence register (ADC_JSQR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 11.13.13 ADC injected data register x (ADC_JDRx) (x= 1..4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 11.13.14 ADC regular data register (ADC_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 11.13.15 ADC Common status register (ADC_CSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 11.13.16 ADC common control register (ADC_CCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 11.13.17 ADC common regular data register for dual and triple modes (ADC_CDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 11.13.18 ADC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

12

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

12.1 12.2 12.3 DAC introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 DAC main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 DAC functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 12.3.5 DAC channel enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 DAC output buffer enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 DAC data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 DAC conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 DAC output voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 10/1422

Contents 12.3.6 12.3.7 12.3.8 12.3.9

RM0090 DAC trigger selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 DMA request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Noise generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Triangle-wave generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

12.4

Dual DAC channel conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 12.4.5 12.4.6 12.4.7 12.4.8 12.4.9 Independent trigger without wave generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Independent trigger with single LFSR generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Independent trigger with different LFSR generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Independent trigger with single triangle generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Independent trigger with different triangle generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Simultaneous software start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Simultaneous trigger without wave generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Simultaneous trigger with single LFSR generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Simultaneous trigger with different LFSR generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

12.4.10 Simultaneous trigger with single triangle generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 12.4.11 Simultaneous trigger with different triangle generation . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

12.5

DAC registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

12.5.1 12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6 12.5.7 12.5.8 12.5.9 DAC control register (DAC_CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 DAC software trigger register (DAC_SWTRIGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 DAC channel1 12-bit right-aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12R1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 DAC channel1 12-bit left aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 DAC channel1 8-bit right aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR8R1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 DAC channel2 12-bit right aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12R2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 DAC channel2 12-bit left aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 DAC channel2 8-bit right-aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR8R2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Dual DAC 12-bit right-aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12RD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

12.5.10 DUAL DAC 12-bit left aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12LD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 12.5.11 DUAL DAC 8-bit right aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR8RD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 12.5.12 DAC channel1 data output register (DAC_DOR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 12.5.13 DAC channel2 data output register (DAC_DOR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

11/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Contents 12.5.14 DAC status register (DAC_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 12.5.15 DAC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

13

Digital camera interface (DCMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 DCMI introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 DCMI main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 DCMI pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 DCMI clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 DCMI functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 13.5.4 13.5.5 13.5.6 13.5.7 DMA interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 DCMI physical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Capture modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Crop feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 JPEG format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

13.6

Data format description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

13.6.1 13.6.2 13.6.3 13.6.4 Data formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Monochrome format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 RGB format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 YCbCr format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

13.7 13.8

DCMI interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 DCMI register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

13.8.1 13.8.2 13.8.3 13.8.4 13.8.5 13.8.6 13.8.7 13.8.8 13.8.9 DCMI control register 1 (DCMI_CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 DCMI status register (DCMI_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 DCMI raw interrupt status register (DCMI_RIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 DCMI interrupt enable register (DCMI_IER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 DCMI masked interrupt status register (DCMI_MIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 DCMI interrupt clear register (DCMI_ICR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 DCMI embedded synchronization code register (DCMI_ESCR) . . . . . 347 DCMI embedded synchronization unmask register (DCMI_ESUR) . . 348 DCMI crop window start (DCMI_CWSTRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

13.8.10 DCMI crop window size (DCMI_CWSIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 13.8.11 DCMI data register (DCMI_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 13.8.12 DCMI register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

12/1422

Contents

RM0090

14

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

14.1 14.2 14.3 TIM1&TIM8 introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 TIM1&TIM8 main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 TIM1&TIM8 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3 14.3.4 14.3.5 14.3.6 14.3.7 14.3.8 14.3.9 Time-base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Counter modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Repetition counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Clock selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Capture/compare channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Input capture mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 PWM input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Forced output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Output compare mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

14.3.10 PWM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 14.3.11 Complementary outputs and dead-time insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 14.3.12 Using the break function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 14.3.13 Clearing the OCxREF signal on an external event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 14.3.14 6-step PWM generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 14.3.15 One-pulse mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 14.3.16 Encoder interface mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 14.3.17 Timer input XOR function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 14.3.18 Interfacing with Hall sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 14.3.19 TIMx and external trigger synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 14.3.20 Timer synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 14.3.21 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

14.4

TIM1&TIM8 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 14.4.4 14.4.5 14.4.6 14.4.7 14.4.8 14.4.9 TIM1&TIM8 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 TIM1&TIM8 control register 2 (TIMx_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 TIM1&TIM8 slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR) . . . . . . . . . . . 398 TIM1&TIM8 DMA/interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER) . . . . . . . . . . 400 TIM1&TIM8 status register (TIMx_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 TIM1&TIM8 event generation register (TIMx_EGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1) . . . . . 405 TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare mode register 2 (TIMx_CCMR2) . . . . . 408 TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER) . . . . . . . 409

14.4.10 TIM1&TIM8 counter (TIMx_CNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

13/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Contents 14.4.11 TIM1&TIM8 prescaler (TIMx_PSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 14.4.12 TIM1&TIM8 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 14.4.13 TIM1&TIM8 repetition counter register (TIMx_RCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 14.4.14 TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 14.4.15 TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 2 (TIMx_CCR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 14.4.16 TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 3 (TIMx_CCR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 14.4.17 TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 4 (TIMx_CCR4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 14.4.18 TIM1&TIM8 break and dead-time register (TIMx_BDTR) . . . . . . . . . . 416 14.4.19 TIM1&TIM8 DMA control register (TIMx_DCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 14.4.20 TIM1&TIM8 DMA address for full transfer (TIMx_DMAR) . . . . . . . . . . 419 14.4.21 TIM1&TIM8 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

15

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

15.1 15.2 15.3 TIM2 to TIM5 introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 TIM2 to TIM5 main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 TIM2 to TIM5 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
15.3.1 15.3.2 15.3.3 15.3.4 15.3.5 15.3.6 15.3.7 15.3.8 15.3.9 Time-base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Counter modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Clock selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Capture/compare channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Input capture mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 PWM input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Forced output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Output compare mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 PWM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

15.3.10 One-pulse mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 15.3.11 Clearing the OCxREF signal on an external event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 15.3.12 Encoder interface mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 15.3.13 Timer input XOR function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 15.3.14 Timers and external trigger synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 15.3.15 Timer synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 15.3.16 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

15.4

TIM2 to TIM5 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

15.4.1 15.4.2 15.4.3 15.4.4 TIMx control register 1 (TIMx_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 TIMx control register 2 (TIMx_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 TIMx slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 TIMx DMA/Interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

14/1422

Contents 15.4.5 15.4.6 15.4.7 15.4.8 15.4.9

RM0090 TIMx status register (TIMx_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 TIMx event generation register (TIMx_EGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 TIMx capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1) . . . . . . . . . . . 468 TIMx capture/compare mode register 2 (TIMx_CCMR2) . . . . . . . . . . . 471 TIMx capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

15.4.10 TIMx counter (TIMx_CNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 15.4.11 TIMx prescaler (TIMx_PSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 15.4.12 TIMx auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 15.4.13 TIMx capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 15.4.14 TIMx capture/compare register 2 (TIMx_CCR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 15.4.15 TIMx capture/compare register 3 (TIMx_CCR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 15.4.16 TIMx capture/compare register 4 (TIMx_CCR4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 15.4.17 TIMx DMA control register (TIMx_DCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 15.4.18 TIMx DMA address for full transfer (TIMx_DMAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 15.4.19 TIM2 option register (TIM2_OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 15.4.20 TIM5 option register (TIM5_OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 15.4.21 TIMx register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

16

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 TIM9 to TIM14 introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 TIM9 to TIM14 main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
16.2.1 TIM9/TIM12 main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

TIM10/TIM11 and TIM13/TIM14 main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 TIM9 to TIM14 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
16.4.1 16.4.2 16.4.3 16.4.4 16.4.5 16.4.6 16.4.7 16.4.8 16.4.9 Time-base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Counter modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Clock selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Capture/compare channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Input capture mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 PWM input mode (only for TIM9/12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Forced output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Output compare mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 PWM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

16.4.10 One-pulse mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 16.4.11 TIM9/12 external trigger synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 16.4.12 Timer synchronization (TIM9/12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 16.4.13 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

15/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Contents

16.5

TIM9 and TIM12 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

16.5.1 16.5.2 16.5.3 16.5.4 16.5.5 16.5.6 16.5.7 16.5.8 16.5.9 TIM9/12 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 TIM9/12 control register 2 (TIMx_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 TIM9/12 slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 TIM9/12 Interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 TIM9/12 status register (TIMx_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 TIM9/12 event generation register (TIMx_EGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 TIM9/12 capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1) . . . . . . . . 509 TIM9/12 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER) . . . . . . . . . . 512 TIM9/12 counter (TIMx_CNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

16.5.10 TIM9/12 prescaler (TIMx_PSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 16.5.11 TIM9/12 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 16.5.12 TIM9/12 capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 16.5.13 TIM9/12 capture/compare register 2 (TIMx_CCR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 16.5.14 TIM9/12 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

16.6

TIM10/11/13/14 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

16.6.1 16.6.2 16.6.3 16.6.4 16.6.5 16.6.6 16.6.7 16.6.8 16.6.9 TIM10/11/13/14 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 TIM10/11/13/14 status register (TIMx_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 TIM10/11/13/14 event generation register (TIMx_EGR) . . . . . . . . . . . 517 TIM10/11/13/14 capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 TIM10/11/13/14 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 TIM10/11/13/14 counter (TIMx_CNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 TIM10/11/13/14 prescaler (TIMx_PSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 TIM10/11/13/14 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 TIM10/11/13/14 capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) . . . . . . . . 523

16.6.10 TIM11 option register 1 (TIM11_OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 16.6.11 TIM10/11/13/14 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

17

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

17.1 17.2 17.3 TIM6&TIM7 introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 TIM6&TIM7 main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 TIM6&TIM7 functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
17.3.1 17.3.2 17.3.3 Time-base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Counting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Clock source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

16/1422

Contents 17.3.4

RM0090 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

17.4

TIM6&TIM7 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

17.4.1 17.4.2 17.4.3 17.4.4 17.4.5 17.4.6 17.4.7 17.4.8 17.4.9 TIM6&TIM7 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 TIM6&TIM7 control register 2 (TIMx_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 TIM6&TIM7 DMA/Interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER) . . . . . . . . . . 532 TIM6&TIM7 status register (TIMx_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 TIM6&TIM7 event generation register (TIMx_EGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 TIM6&TIM7 counter (TIMx_CNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 TIM6&TIM7 prescaler (TIMx_PSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 TIM6&TIM7 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 TIM6&TIM7 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

18

Independent watchdog (IWDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

18.1 18.2 18.3 IWDG introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 IWDG main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 IWDG functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
18.3.1 18.3.2 18.3.3 Hardware watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Register access protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

18.4

IWDG registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

18.4.1 18.4.2 18.4.3 18.4.4 18.4.5 Key register (IWDG_KR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Prescaler register (IWDG_PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Reload register (IWDG_RLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Status register (IWDG_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 IWDG register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

19

Window watchdog (WWDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 WWDG introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 WWDG main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 WWDG functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 How to program the watchdog timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 WWDG registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
19.6.1 19.6.2 19.6.3 Control register (WWDG_CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Configuration register (WWDG_CFR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Status register (WWDG_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

17/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 19.6.4

Contents WWDG register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

20

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

20.1 20.2 20.3 CRYP introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 CRYP main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 CRYP functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
20.3.1 20.3.2 20.3.3 20.3.4 20.3.5 20.3.6 20.3.7 DES/TDES cryptographic core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 AES cryptographic core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Initialization vectors - CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 CRYP busy state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 Context swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

20.4 20.5 20.6

CRYP interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 CRYP DMA interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 CRYP registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
20.6.1 20.6.2 20.6.3 20.6.4 20.6.5 20.6.6 20.6.7 20.6.8 20.6.9 CRYP control register (CRYP_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 CRYP control register (CRYP_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 CRYP status register (CRYP_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 CRYP data input register (CRYP_DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 CRYP data output register (CRYP_DOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 CRYP DMA control register (CRYP_DMACR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 CRYP interrupt mask set/clear register (CRYP_IMSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . 584 CRYP raw interrupt status register (CRYP_RISR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 CRYP masked interrupt status register (CRYP_MISR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

20.6.10 CRYP key registers (CRYP_K0...3(L/R)R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 20.6.11 CRYP initialization vector registers (CRYP_IV0...1(L/R)R) . . . . . . . . . 588 20.6.12 CRYP context swap registers (CRYP_CSGCMCCM0..7R and CRYP_CSGCM0..7R) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . 590 20.6.13 CRYP register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

21

Random number generator (RNG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

21.1 21.2 21.3 RNG introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 RNG main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 RNG functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

18/1422

Contents 21.3.1 21.3.2

RM0090 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Error management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

21.4

RNG registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

21.4.1 21.4.2 21.4.3 21.4.4 RNG control register (RNG_CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 RNG status register (RNG_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 RNG data register (RNG_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 RNG register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

22

Hash processor (HASH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

22.1 22.2 22.3 HASH introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 HASH main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 HASH functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
22.3.1 22.3.2 22.3.3 22.3.4 22.3.5 22.3.6 22.3.7 22.3.8 Duration of the processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Message digest computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Message padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 Hash operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 HMAC operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 Context swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 HASH interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

22.4

HASH registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

22.4.1 22.4.2 22.4.3 22.4.4 22.4.5 22.4.6 22.4.7 22.4.8 22.4.9 HASH control register (HASH_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 HASH control register (HASH_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 HASH data input register (HASH_DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 HASH start register (HASH_STR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 HASH digest registers (HASH_HR0..4/5/6/7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 HASH interrupt enable register (HASH_IMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 HASH status register (HASH_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 HASH context swap registers (HASH_CSRx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 HASH register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

23

Real-time clock (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

23.1 23.2 23.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 RTC main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 RTC functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

19/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 23.3.1 23.3.2 23.3.3 23.3.4 23.3.5 23.3.6 23.3.7 23.3.8 23.3.9

Contents Clock and prescalers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Real-time clock and calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 Programmable alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Periodic auto-wakeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 RTC initialization and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Reading the calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 Resetting the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 RTC synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 RTC reference clock detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

23.3.10 RTC coarse digital calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 23.3.11 RTC smooth digital calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 23.3.12 Timestamp function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 23.3.13 Tamper detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 23.3.14 Calibration clock output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 23.3.15 Alarm output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

23.4 23.5 23.6

RTC and low power modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 RTC interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 RTC registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
23.6.1 23.6.2 23.6.3 23.6.4 23.6.5 23.6.6 23.6.7 23.6.8 23.6.9 RTC time register (RTC_TR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 RTC date register (RTC_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 RTC control register (RTC_CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 RTC initialization and status register (RTC_ISR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 RTC prescaler register (RTC_PRER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 RTC wakeup timer register (RTC_WUTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 RTC calibration register (RTC_CALIBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 RTC alarm A register (RTC_ALRMAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 RTC alarm B register (RTC_ALRMBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

23.6.10 RTC write protection register (RTC_WPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 23.6.11 RTC sub second register (RTC_SSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 23.6.12 RTC shift control register (RTC_SHIFTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 23.6.13 RTC time stamp time register (RTC_TSTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 23.6.14 RTC time stamp date register (RTC_TSDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 23.6.15 RTC timestamp sub second register (RTC_TSSSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 23.6.16 RTC calibration register (RTC_CALR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 23.6.17 RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register (RTC_TAFCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 23.6.18 RTC alarm A sub second register (RTC_ALRMASSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

20/1422

Contents

RM0090 23.6.19 RTC alarm B sub second register (RTC_ALRMBSSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 23.6.20 RTC backup registers (RTC_BKPxR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 23.6.21 RTC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

24

Controller area network (bxCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

24.1 24.2 24.3 bxCAN introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 bxCAN main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 bxCAN general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
24.3.1 24.3.2 24.3.3 24.3.4 CAN 2.0B active core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Control, status and configuration registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Tx mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Acceptance filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

24.4

bxCAN operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

24.4.1 24.4.2 24.4.3 Initialization mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Sleep mode (low power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

24.5

Test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

24.5.1 24.5.2 24.5.3 Silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Loop back mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Loop back combined with silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670

24.6 24.7

Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 bxCAN functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

24.7.1 24.7.2 24.7.3 24.7.4 24.7.5 24.7.6 24.7.7 Transmission handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Time triggered communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Reception handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Identifier filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Message storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Error management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 Bit timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

24.8 24.9

bxCAN interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 CAN registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

24.9.1 24.9.2 24.9.3 24.9.4 24.9.5 Register access protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 CAN control and status registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 CAN mailbox registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694 CAN filter registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 bxCAN register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

21/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Contents

25

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

25.1 25.2 25.3 I2C introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 I2C main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 I2C functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
25.3.1 25.3.2 25.3.3 25.3.4 25.3.5 25.3.6 25.3.7 25.3.8 25.3.9 Mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 I2C slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 I2C master mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Error conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 Programmable noise filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 SDA/SCL line control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 SMBus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 DMA requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Packet error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

25.4 25.5 25.6

I2C interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 I2C debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728 I2C registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
25.6.1 25.6.2 25.6.3 25.6.4 25.6.5 25.6.6 25.6.7 25.6.8 25.6.9 I2C Control register 1 (I2C_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728 I2C Control register 2 (I2C_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 I2C Own address register 1 (I2C_OAR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 I2C Own address register 2 (I2C_OAR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732 I2C Data register (I2C_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 I2C Status register 1 (I2C_SR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 I2C Status register 2 (I2C_SR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 I2C Clock control register (I2C_CCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 I2C TRISE register (I2C_TRISE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

25.6.10 I2C FLTR register (I2C_FLTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 25.6.11 I2C register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

26

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742

26.1 26.2 26.3 USART introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 USART main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 USART functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
26.3.1 26.3.2 26.3.3 USART character description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

22/1422

Contents 26.3.4 26.3.5 26.3.6 26.3.7 26.3.8 26.3.9

RM0090 Fractional baud rate generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 USART receiver tolerance to clock deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 Multiprocessor communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Parity control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 LIN (local interconnection network) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 USART synchronous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

26.3.10 Single-wire half-duplex communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 26.3.11 Smartcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 26.3.12 IrDA SIR ENDEC block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 26.3.13 Continuous communication using DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 26.3.14 Hardware flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

26.4 26.5 26.6

USART interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 USART mode configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 USART registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
26.6.1 26.6.2 26.6.3 26.6.4 26.6.5 26.6.6 26.6.7 26.6.8 Status register (USART_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 Data register (USART_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 Baud rate register (USART_BRR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Control register 1 (USART_CR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Control register 2 (USART_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Control register 3 (USART_CR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 Guard time and prescaler register (USART_GTPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 USART register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

27

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

27.1 27.2 SPI introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 SPI and I2S main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
27.2.1 27.2.2 SPI features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795 I2S features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796

27.3

SPI functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

27.3.1 27.3.2 27.3.3 27.3.4 27.3.5 27.3.6 27.3.7 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Configuring the SPI in slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 Configuring the SPI in master mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Configuring the SPI for half-duplex communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 Data transmission and reception procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 CRC calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Status flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

23/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 27.3.8 27.3.9

Contents Disabling the SPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 SPI communication using DMA (direct memory addressing) . . . . . . . 816

27.3.10 Error flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 27.3.11 SPI interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

27.4

I2S functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

27.4.1 27.4.2 27.4.3 27.4.4 27.4.5 27.4.6 27.4.7 27.4.8 27.4.9 I2S general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 I2S full duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 Supported audio protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 Clock generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 I2S master mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 I2S slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 Status flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 Error flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835 I2S interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

27.4.10 DMA features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

27.5

SPI and I2S registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

27.5.1 27.5.2 27.5.3 27.5.4 27.5.5 27.5.6 27.5.7 27.5.8 27.5.9 SPI control register 1 (SPI_CR1) (not used in I2S mode) . . . . . . . . . . 837 SPI control register 2 (SPI_CR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 SPI status register (SPI_SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840 SPI data register (SPI_DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 SPI CRC polynomial register (SPI_CRCPR) (not used in I2S mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 SPI RX CRC register (SPI_RXCRCR) (not used in I2S mode) . . . . . . 842 SPI TX CRC register (SPI_TXCRCR) (not used in I2S mode) . . . . . . 842 SPI_I2S configuration register (SPI_I2SCFGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843 SPI_I2S prescaler register (SPI_I2SPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

27.5.10 SPI register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

28

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846

28.1 28.2 28.3 SDIO main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 SDIO bus topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 SDIO functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
28.3.1 28.3.2 SDIO adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 SDIO APB2 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

28.4

Card functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861

28.4.1 28.4.2 Card identification mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 Card reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

24/1422

Contents 28.4.3 28.4.4 28.4.5 28.4.6 28.4.7 28.4.8 28.4.9

RM0090 Operating voltage range validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 Card identification process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 Block write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 Block read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 Stream access, stream write and stream read (MultiMediaCard only) 864 Erase: group erase and sector erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 Wide bus selection or deselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

28.4.10 Protection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 28.4.11 Card status register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 28.4.12 SD status register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 28.4.13 SD I/O mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876 28.4.14 Commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877

28.5

Response formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

28.5.1 28.5.2 28.5.3 28.5.4 28.5.5 28.5.6 28.5.7 28.5.8 R1 (normal response command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 R1b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 R2 (CID, CSD register) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 R3 (OCR register) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 R4 (Fast I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 R4b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 R5 (interrupt request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

28.6

SDIO I/O card-specific operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

28.6.1 28.6.2 28.6.3 28.6.4 SDIO I/O read wait operation by SDIO_D2 signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 SDIO read wait operation by stopping SDIO_CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 SDIO suspend/resume operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 SDIO interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

28.7

CE-ATA specific operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

28.7.1 28.7.2 28.7.3 28.7.4 Command completion signal disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Command completion signal enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 CE-ATA interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 Aborting CMD61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

28.8 28.9

HW flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 SDIO registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

28.9.1 28.9.2 28.9.3 SDIO power control register (SDIO_POWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887 SDI clock control register (SDIO_CLKCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887 SDIO argument register (SDIO_ARG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

25/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 28.9.4 28.9.5 28.9.6 28.9.7 28.9.8 28.9.9

Contents SDIO command register (SDIO_CMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 SDIO command response register (SDIO_RESPCMD) . . . . . . . . . . . 891 SDIO response 1..4 register (SDIO_RESPx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 SDIO data timer register (SDIO_DTIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 SDIO data length register (SDIO_DLEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 SDIO data control register (SDIO_DCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

28.9.10 SDIO data counter register (SDIO_DCOUNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 28.9.11 SDIO status register (SDIO_STA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 28.9.12 SDIO interrupt clear register (SDIO_ICR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 28.9.13 SDIO mask register (SDIO_MASK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898 28.9.14 SDIO FIFO counter register (SDIO_FIFOCNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 28.9.15 SDIO data FIFO register (SDIO_FIFO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 28.9.16 SDIO register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

29

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
29.1 29.2 Ethernet introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903 Ethernet main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
29.2.1 29.2.2 29.2.3 MAC core features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904 DMA features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905 PTP features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

29.3 29.4

Ethernet pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906 Ethernet functional description: SMI, MII and RMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
29.4.1 29.4.2 29.4.3 29.4.4 Station management interface: SMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907 Media-independent interface: MII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910 Reduced media-independent interface: RMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912 MII/RMII selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913

29.5

Ethernet functional description: MAC 802.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914

29.5.1 29.5.2 29.5.3 29.5.4 29.5.5 29.5.6 29.5.7 29.5.8 29.5.9 MAC 802.3 frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 MAC frame transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 MAC frame reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 MAC interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930 MAC filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931 MAC loopback mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 MAC management counters: MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 Power management: PMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 Precision time protocol (IEEE1588 PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

26/1422

Contents

RM0090

29.6

Ethernet functional description: DMA controller operation . . . . . . . . . . . 944

29.6.1 29.6.2 29.6.3 29.6.4 29.6.5 29.6.6 29.6.7 29.6.8 29.6.9 Initialization of a transfer using DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Host bus burst access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Host data buffer alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 Buffer size calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 DMA arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947 Error response to DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947 Tx DMA configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947 Rx DMA configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 DMA interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

29.7 29.8

Ethernet interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Ethernet register descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

29.8.1 29.8.2 29.8.3 29.8.4 29.8.5 MAC register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 MMC register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 IEEE 1588 time stamp registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 DMA register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 Ethernet register maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017

30

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

30.1 30.2 OTG_FS introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 OTG_FS main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
30.2.1 30.2.2 30.2.3 General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 Host-mode features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Peripheral-mode features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

30.3

OTG_FS functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

30.3.1 30.3.2 OTG full-speed core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 Full-speed OTG PHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025

30.4

OTG dual role device (DRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

30.4.1 30.4.2 30.4.3 ID line detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 HNP dual role device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 SRP dual role device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027

30.5

USB peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027

30.5.1 30.5.2 30.5.3 SRP-capable peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 Peripheral states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 Peripheral endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

30.6

USB host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

27/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 30.6.1 30.6.2 30.6.3 30.6.4

Contents SRP-capable host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 USB host states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 Host channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 Host scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035

30.7

SOF trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036

30.7.1 30.7.2 Host SOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036 Peripheral SOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037

30.8 30.9

Power options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037 Dynamic update of the OTG_FS_HFIR register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

30.10 USB data FIFOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 30.11 Peripheral FIFO architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
30.11.1 Peripheral Rx FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 30.11.2 Peripheral Tx FIFOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

30.12 Host FIFO architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

30.12.1 Host Rx FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040 30.12.2 Host Tx FIFOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

30.13 FIFO RAM allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

30.13.1 Device mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 30.13.2 Host mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042

30.14 USB system performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 30.15 OTG_FS interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043 30.16 OTG_FS control and status registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
30.16.1 CSR memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 30.16.2 OTG_FS global registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 30.16.3 Host-mode registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 30.16.4 Device-mode registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083 30.16.5 OTG_FS power and clock gating control register (OTG_FS_PCGCCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 30.16.6 OTG_FS register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

30.17 OTG_FS programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113

30.17.1 Core initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 30.17.2 Host initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114 30.17.3 Device initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114 30.17.4 Host programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115 30.17.5 Device programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132 30.17.6 Operational model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

28/1422

Contents

RM0090 30.17.7 Worst case response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151 30.17.8 OTG programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152

31

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159

31.1 31.2 OTG_HS introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 OTG_HS main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
31.2.1 31.2.2 31.2.3 General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160 Host-mode features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161 Peripheral-mode features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

31.3

OTG_HS functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162

31.3.1 31.3.2 31.3.3 High-speed OTG PHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162 External Full-speed OTG PHY using the I2C interface . . . . . . . . . . . 1162 Embedded Full-speed OTG PHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162

31.4

OTG dual-role device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

31.4.1 31.4.2 31.4.3 ID line detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163 HNP dual role device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163 SRP dual-role device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

31.5

USB functional description in peripheral mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164

31.5.1 31.5.2 31.5.3 SRP-capable peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 Peripheral states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 Peripheral endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

31.6

USB functional description on host mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168

31.6.1 31.6.2 31.6.3 31.6.4 SRP-capable host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 USB host states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 Host channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170 Host scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171

31.7

SOF trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

31.7.1 31.7.2 Host SOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172 Peripheral SOFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173

31.8 31.9

USB_HS power modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174 Dynamic update of the OTG_HS_HFIR register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
31.10.1 Peripheral mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175 31.10.2 Host mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175

31.10 FIFO RAM allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175

31.11 OTG_HS interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 31.12 OTG_HS control and status registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
29/1422 Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Contents 31.12.1 CSR memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179 31.12.2 OTG_HS global registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184 31.12.3 Host-mode registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208 31.12.4 Device-mode registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220 31.12.5 OTG_HS power and clock gating control register (OTG_HS_PCGCCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247 31.12.6 OTG_HS register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248

31.13 OTG_HS programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260

31.13.1 Core initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260 31.13.2 Host initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261 31.13.3 Device initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 31.13.4 DMA mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 31.13.5 Host programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 31.13.6 Device programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 31.13.7 Operational model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292 31.13.8 Worst case response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 31.13.9 OTG programming model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310

32

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317

32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 FSMC main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318 AHB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
32.3.1 Supported memories and transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319

External device address mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320

32.4.1 32.4.2 NOR/PSRAM address mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320 NAND/PC Card address mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321

32.5

NOR Flash/PSRAM controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322

32.5.1 32.5.2 32.5.3 32.5.4 32.5.5 32.5.6 External memory interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Supported memories and transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325 General timing rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 NOR Flash/PSRAM controller asynchronous transactions . . . . . . . . 1327 Synchronous burst transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345 NOR/PSRAM control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351

32.6

NAND Flash/PC Card controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357

32.6.1 32.6.2 32.6.3 External memory interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358 NAND Flash / PC Card supported memories and transactions . . . . . 1360 Timing diagrams for NAND and PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 30/1422

Contents 32.6.4 32.6.5 32.6.6 32.6.7 32.6.8 32.6.9

RM0090 NAND Flash operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361 NAND Flash pre-wait functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362 Error correction code computation ECC (NAND Flash) . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 PC Card/CompactFlash operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 NAND Flash/PC Card control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366 FSMC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373

33

Debug support (DBG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375

33.1 33.2 33.3 33.4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375 Reference ARM documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376 SWJ debug port (serial wire and JTAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
33.3.1 Mechanism to select the JTAG-DP or the SW-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377

Pinout and debug port pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377

33.4.1 33.4.2 33.4.3 33.4.4 SWJ debug port pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378 Flexible SWJ-DP pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378 Internal pull-up and pull-down on JTAG pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379 Using serial wire and releasing the unused debug pins as GPIOs . . 1380

33.5 33.6

STM32F4xx JTAG TAP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 ID codes and locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
33.6.1 33.6.2 33.6.3 33.6.4 MCU device ID code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 Boundary scan TAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 Cortex-M4F TAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 Cortex-M4F JEDEC-106 ID code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383

33.7 33.8

JTAG debug port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 SW debug port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385

33.8.1 33.8.2 33.8.3 33.8.4 33.8.5 33.8.6 SW protocol introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 SW protocol sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 SW-DP state machine (reset, idle states, ID code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386 DP and AP read/write accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387 SW-DP registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387 SW-AP registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388

33.9

AHB-AP (AHB access port) - valid for both JTAG-DP and SW-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389

33.10 Core debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 33.11 Capability of the debugger host to connect under system reset . . . . . 1391 33.12 FPB (Flash patch breakpoint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391

31/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Contents

33.13 DWT (data watchpoint trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392 33.14 ITM (instrumentation trace macrocell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
33.14.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392 33.14.2 Time stamp packets, synchronization and overflow packets . . . . . . . 1392

33.15 ETM (Embedded trace macrocell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394

33.15.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394 33.15.2 Signal protocol, packet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394 33.15.3 Main ETM registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395 33.15.4 Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395

33.16 MCU debug component (DBGMCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395

33.16.1 Debug support for low-power modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395 33.16.2 Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 33.16.3 Debug MCU configuration register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 33.16.4 Debug MCU APB1 freeze register (DBGMCU_APB1_FZ) . . . . . . . . 1398 33.16.5 Debug MCU APB2 Freeze register (DBGMCU_APB2_FZ) . . . . . . . . 1399

33.17 TPIU (trace port interface unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400

33.17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 33.17.2 TRACE pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 33.17.3 TPUI formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 33.17.4 TPUI frame synchronization packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 33.17.5 Transmission of the synchronization frame packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 33.17.6 Synchronous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 33.17.7 Asynchronous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404 33.17.8 TRACECLKIN connection inside the STM32F4xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404 33.17.9 TPIU registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 33.17.10 Example of configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406

33.18 DBG register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406

34

Device electronic signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407

34.1 34.2 Unique device ID register (96 bits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 Flash size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408

Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

32/1422

List of tables

RM0090

List of tables
Table 1. Table 2. Table 3. Table 4. Table 5. Table 6. Table 7. Table 8. Table 9. Table 10. Table 11. Table 12. Table 13. Table 14. Table 15. Table 16. Table 17. Table 18. Table 19. Table 20. Table 21. Table 22. Table 23. Table 24. Table 25. Table 26. Table 27. Table 28. Table 29. Table 30. Table 31. Table 32. Table 33. Table 34. Table 35. Table 36. Table 37. Table 38. Table 39. Table 40. Table 41. Table 42. Table 43. Table 44. Table 45. Table 46. Table 47. Table 48. Applicable products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 STM32F4xx register boundary addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Boot modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Memory mapping vs. Boot mode/physical remap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Flash module organization (STM32F40x and STM32F41x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Flash memory organization (STM32F42x and STM32F43x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Number of wait states according to CPU clock (HCLK) frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Program/erase parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Flash interrupt request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Option byte organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Description of the option bytes (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) . . . . . . . . 69 Description of the option bytes (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Access versus read protection level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 OTP area organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Flash register map and reset values (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) . . . . 84 Flash register map and reset values (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 CRC calculation unit register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Low-power mode summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Sleep-now entry and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Sleep-on-exit entry and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Stop operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Stop mode entry and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Standby mode entry and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 PWR - register map and reset values for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx. 109 PWR - register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . 110 RCC register map and reset values for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . 181 RCC register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Port bit configuration table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Flexible SWJ-DP pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 RTC_AF1 pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 RTC_AF2 pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 GPIO register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 SYSCFG register map and reset values STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . 211 SYSCFG register map and reset values (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) . . . . . . . . . 212 DMA1 request mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 DMA2 request mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Source and destination address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Source and destination address registers in Double buffer mode (DBM=1). . . . . . . . . . . 225 Packing/unpacking & endian behavior (bit PINC = MINC = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Restriction on NDT versus PSIZE and MSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 FIFO threshold configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Possible DMA configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 DMA interrupt requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 DMA register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 External interrupt/event controller register map and reset values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ADC pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

33/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 49. Table 50. Table 51. Table 52. Table 53. Table 54. Table 55. Table 56. Table 57. Table 58. Table 59. Table 60. Table 61. Table 62. Table 63. Table 64. Table 65. Table 66. Table 67. Table 68. Table 69. Table 70. Table 71. Table 72. Table 73. Table 74. Table 75. Table 76. Table 77. Table 78. Table 79. Table 80. Table 81. Table 82. Table 83. Table 84. Table 85. Table 86. Table 87. Table 88. Table 89. Table 90. Table 91. Table 92. Table 93. Table 94. Table 95. Table 96. Table 97.

List of tables Analog watchdog channel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Configuring the trigger polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 External trigger for regular channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 External trigger for injected channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 ADC interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 ADC global register map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 ADC register map and reset values for each ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ADC register map and reset values (common ADC registers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 DAC pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 External triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 DAC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 DCMI pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 DCMI signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (8-bit width) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (10-bit width) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (12-bit width) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (14-bit width) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Data storage in monochrome progressive video format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Data storage in RGB progressive video format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Data storage in YCbCr progressive video format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 DCMI interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 DCMI register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Counting direction versus encoder signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 TIMx Internal trigger connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Output control bits for complementary OCx and OCxN channels with break feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 TIM1&TIM8 register map and reset values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Counting direction versus encoder signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 TIMx internal trigger connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Output control bit for standard OCx channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 TIM2 to TIM5 register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 TIMx internal trigger connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Output control bit for standard OCx channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 TIM9/12 register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Output control bit for standard OCx channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 TIM10/11/13/14 register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 TIM6&TIM7 register map and reset values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Min/max IWDG timeout period at 32 kHz (LSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 IWDG register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Timeout values at 30 MHz (fPCLK1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 WWDG register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Number of cycles required to process each 128-bit block (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Number of cycles required to process each 128-bit block (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Data types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 CRYP register map and reset values for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . 591 CRYP register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . 592 RNG register map and reset map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 HASH register map and reset values on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . 622 HASH register map and reset values on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . 623 Effect of low power modes on RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

34/1422

List of tables Table 98. Table 99. Table 100. Table 101. Table 102. Table 103. Table 104. Table 105. Table 106. Table 107. Table 108. Table 109. Table 110. Table 111. Table 112. Table 113. Table 114. Table 115. Table 116. Table 117. Table 118. Table 119. Table 120. Table 121. Table 122. Table 123. Table 124. Table 125. Table 126. Table 127. Table 128. Table 129. Table 130. Table 131. Table 132. Table 133. Table 134. Table 135. Table 136. Table 137. Table 138. Table 139.

RM0090

Interrupt control bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 RTC register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662 Transmit mailbox mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Receive mailbox mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 bxCAN register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 Maximum DNF[3:0] value to be compliant with Thd:dat(max) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 SMBus vs. I2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 I2C Interrupt requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 I2C register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741 Noise detection from sampled data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 12 MHz, oversampling by 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK =12 MHz, oversampling by 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 16 MHz or fPCLK = 24 MHz, oversampling by 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 16 MHz or fPCLK = 24 MHz, oversampling by 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 16 MHz, oversampling by 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 16 MHz, oversampling by 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 30 MHz or fPCLK = 60 MHz, oversampling by 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 30 MHz or fPCLK = 60 MHz, oversampling by 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 Hz, oversampling by 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 MHz, oversampling by 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 USART receivers tolerance when DIV fraction is 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 USART receivers tolerance when DIV_Fraction is different from 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Frame formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 USART interrupt requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 USART mode configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 USART register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 SPI interrupt requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 Audio frequency precision (for PLLM VCO = 1 MHz or 2 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 I2S interrupt requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 SPI register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 SDIO I/O definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 Command format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 Short response format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855 Long response format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855 Command path status flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855 Data token format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 Transmit FIFO status flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 Receive FIFO status flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 Card status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870 SD status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 Speed class code field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874 Performance move field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

35/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 140. Table 141. Table 142. Table 143. Table 144. Table 145. Table 146. Table 147. Table 148. Table 149. Table 150. Table 151. Table 152. Table 153. Table 154. Table 155. Table 156. Table 157. Table 158. Table 159. Table 160. Table 161. Table 162. Table 163. Table 164. Table 165. Table 166. Table 167. Table 168. Table 170. Table 171. Table 172. Table 173. Table 174. Table 175. Table 176. Table 177. Table 178. Table 179. Table 180. Table 181. Table 182. Table 183. Table 184. Table 185. Table 186. Table 187. Table 188. Table 189. Table 190. Table 191.

List of tables AU_SIZE field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874 Maximum AU size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Erase size field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Erase timeout field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Erase offset field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876 Block-oriented write commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878 Block-oriented write protection commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 Erase commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 I/O mode commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 Lock card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 Application-specific commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 R1 response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 R2 response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 R3 response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 R4 response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 R4b response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 R5 response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 R6 response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Response type and SDIO_RESPx registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 SDIO register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Alternate function mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906 Management frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908 Clock range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910 TX interface signal encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 RX interface signal encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 Frame statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Destination address filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 Source address filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 Receive descriptor 0 - encoding for bits 7, 5 and 0 (normal descriptor format only, EDFE=0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Ethernet register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Core global control and status registers (CSRs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046 Host-mode control and status registers (CSRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 Device-mode control and status registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048 Data FIFO (DFIFO) access register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 Power and clock gating control and status registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 Minimum duration for soft disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085 OTG_FS register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 Core global control and status registers (CSRs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179 Host-mode control and status registers (CSRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 Device-mode control and status registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 Data FIFO (DFIFO) access register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183 Power and clock gating control and status registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183 Minimum duration for soft disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223 OTG_HS register map and reset values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 NOR/PSRAM bank selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 External memory address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 Memory mapping and timing registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 NAND bank selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Programmable NOR/PSRAM access parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Nonmultipled I/O NOR Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Multiplexed I/O NOR Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

36/1422

List of tables

RM0090

Table 192. Nonmultiplexed I/Os PSRAM/SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324 Table 193. Multiplexed I/O PSRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325 Table 194. NOR Flash/PSRAM controller: example of supported memories and transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325 Table 195. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 Table 196. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 Table 197. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331 Table 198. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331 Table 199. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332 Table 200. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 Table 201. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 Table 202. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 Table 203. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 Table 204. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 Table 205. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 Table 206. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 Table 207. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 Table 208. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 Table 209. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 Table 210. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 Table 211. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347 Table 212. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348 Table 213. FSMC_BCRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349 Table 214. FSMC_BTRx bit fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350 Table 215. Programmable NAND/PC Card access parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358 Table 216. 8-bit NAND Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358 Table 217. 16-bit NAND Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359 Table 218. 16-bit PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359 Table 219. Supported memories and transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360 Table 220. 16-bit PC-Card signals and access type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364 Table 221. ECC result relevant bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372 Table 222. FSMC register map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373 Table 223. SWJ debug port pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378 Table 224. Flexible SWJ-DP pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378 Table 225. JTAG debug port data registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 Table 226. 32-bit debug port registers addressed through the shifted value A[3:2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 Table 227. Packet request (8-bits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386 Table 228. ACK response (3 bits). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386 Table 229. DATA transfer (33 bits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386 Table 230. SW-DP registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387 Table 231. Cortex-M4F AHB-AP registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 Table 232. Core debug registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 Table 233. Main ITM registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393 Table 234. Main ETM registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395 Table 235. Asynchronous TRACE pin assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 Table 236. Synchronous TRACE pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 Table 237. Flexible TRACE pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 Table 238. Important TPIU registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 Table 239. DBG register map and reset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406 Table 240. Document revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413

37/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

List of figures

List of figures
Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Figure 5. Figure 6. Figure 7. Figure 8. Figure 9. Figure 10. Figure 11. Figure 12. Figure 13. Figure 14. Figure 15. Figure 16. Figure 17. Figure 18. Figure 19. Figure 20. Figure 21. Figure 22. Figure 23. Figure 24. Figure 25. Figure 26. Figure 27. Figure 28. Figure 29. Figure 30. Figure 31. Figure 32. Figure 33. Figure 34. Figure 35. Figure 36. Figure 37. Figure 38. Figure 39. Figure 40. Figure 41. Figure 42. Figure 43. Figure 44. Figure 45. Figure 46. Figure 47. System architecture for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx devices. . . . . . . . . 50 System architecture for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Flash memory interface connection inside system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Sequential 32-bit instruction execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 RDP levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 CRC calculation unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Power supply overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Backup domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Power-on reset/power-down reset waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 BOR thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 PVD thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Simplified diagram of the reset circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Clock tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 HSE/ LSE clock sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Frequency measurement with TIM5 in Input capture mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Frequency measurement with TIM11 in Input capture mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Basic structure of a five-volt tolerant I/O port bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Selecting an alternate function on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . 190 Selecting an alternate function on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Input floating/pull up/pull down configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Alternate function configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 High impedance-analog configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 DMA block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 System implementation of the two DMA controllers (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 System implementation of the two DMA controllers (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) 217 Channel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Peripheral-to-memory mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Memory-to-peripheral mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Memory-to-memory mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 FIFO structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 External interrupt/event controller block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 External interrupt/event GPIO mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Single ADC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Analog watchdogs guarded area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Injected conversion latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Right alignment of 12-bit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Left alignment of 12-bit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Left alignment of 6-bit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Multi ADC block diagram(1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Injected simultaneous mode on 4 channels: dual ADC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Injected simultaneous mode on 4 channels: triple ADC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Regular simultaneous mode on 16 channels: dual ADC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Regular simultaneous mode on 16 channels: triple ADC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Interleaved mode on 1 channel in continuous conversion mode: dual ADC mode. . . . . . 283 Interleaved mode on 1 channel in continuous conversion mode: triple ADC mode . . . . . 284

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

38/1422

List of figures Figure 48. Figure 49. Figure 50. Figure 51. Figure 52. Figure 53. Figure 54. Figure 55. Figure 56. Figure 57. Figure 58. Figure 59. Figure 60. Figure 61. Figure 62. Figure 63. Figure 64. Figure 65. Figure 66. Figure 67. Figure 68. Figure 69. Figure 70. Figure 71. Figure 72. Figure 73. Figure 74. Figure 75. Figure 76. Figure 77. Figure 78. Figure 79. Figure 80. Figure 81. Figure 82. Figure 83. Figure 84. Figure 85. Figure 86. Figure 87. Figure 88. Figure 89. Figure 90. Figure 91. Figure 92. Figure 93. Figure 94. Figure 95. Figure 96. Figure 97.

RM0090

Alternate trigger: injected group of each ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Alternate trigger: 4 injected channels (each ADC) in discontinuous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Alternate trigger: injected group of each ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Alternate + regular simultaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Case of trigger occurring during injected conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Temperature sensor and VREFINT channel block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 DAC channel block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Data registers in single DAC channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Data registers in dual DAC channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Timing diagram for conversion with trigger disabled TEN = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 DAC LFSR register calculation algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 DAC conversion (SW trigger enabled) with LFSR wave generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 DAC triangle wave generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 DAC conversion (SW trigger enabled) with triangle wave generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 DCMI block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Top-level block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 DCMI signal waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Frame capture waveforms in Snapshot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Frame capture waveforms in continuous grab mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Coordinates and size of the window after cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Data capture waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Pixel raster scan order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Advanced-control timer block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded) . . . . . 359 Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Counter timing diagram, update event when repetition counter is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1, TIMx_ARR = 0x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4, TIMx_ARR=0x36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Counter timing diagram, update event with ARPE=1 (counter underflow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Counter timing diagram, Update event with ARPE=1 (counter overflow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Update rate examples depending on mode and TIMx_RCR register settings . . . . . . . . . 366 Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 TI2 external clock connection example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Control circuit in external clock mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 External trigger input block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Control circuit in external clock mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

39/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 98. Figure 99. Figure 100. Figure 101. Figure 102. Figure 103. Figure 104. Figure 105. Figure 106. Figure 107. Figure 108. Figure 109. Figure 110. Figure 111. Figure 112. Figure 113. Figure 114. Figure 115. Figure 116. Figure 117. Figure 118. Figure 119. Figure 120. Figure 121. Figure 122. Figure 123. Figure 124. Figure 125. Figure 126. Figure 127. Figure 128. Figure 129. Figure 130. Figure 131. Figure 132. Figure 133. Figure 134. Figure 135. Figure 136. Figure 137. Figure 138. Figure 139. Figure 140. Figure 141. Figure 142. Figure 143. Figure 144. Figure 145. Figure 146. Figure 147. Figure 148. Figure 149.

List of figures Capture/compare channel 1 main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1 to 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 PWM input mode timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Output compare mode, toggle on OC1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Edge-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Center-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Complementary output with dead-time insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Dead-time waveforms with delay greater than the negative pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Dead-time waveforms with delay greater than the positive pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Output behavior in response to a break.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Clearing TIMx OCxREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 6-step generation, COM example (OSSR=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Example of one pulse mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Example of counter operation in encoder interface mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Example of encoder interface mode with TI1FP1 polarity inverted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Example of hall sensor interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Control circuit in reset mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Control circuit in gated mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Control circuit in trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Control circuit in external clock mode 2 + trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 General-purpose timer block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Counter timing diagram, Update event when ARPE=0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded). . . . . 427 Counter timing diagram, Update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded). . . . . . . . 428 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Counter timing diagram, Update event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1, TIMx_ARR=0x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4, TIMx_ARR=0x36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Counter timing diagram, Update event with ARPE=1 (counter underflow). . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Counter timing diagram, Update event with ARPE=1 (counter overflow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 TI2 external clock connection example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Control circuit in external clock mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 External trigger input block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Control circuit in external clock mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Capture/compare channel 1 main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 PWM input mode timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Output compare mode, toggle on OC1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Edge-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

40/1422

List of figures Figure 150. Figure 151. Figure 152. Figure 153. Figure 154. Figure 155. Figure 156. Figure 157. Figure 158. Figure 159. Figure 160. Figure 161. Figure 162. Figure 163. Figure 164. Figure 165. Figure 166. Figure 167. Figure 168. Figure 169. Figure 170. Figure 171. Figure 172. Figure 173. Figure 174. Figure 175. Figure 176. Figure 177. Figure 178. Figure 179. Figure 180. Figure 181. Figure 182. Figure 183. Figure 184. Figure 185. Figure 186. Figure 187. Figure 188. Figure 189. Figure 190. Figure 191. Figure 192. Figure 193. Figure 194. Figure 195. Figure 196. Figure 197.

RM0090

Center-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Example of one-pulse mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Clearing TIMx OCxREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Example of counter operation in encoder interface mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Example of encoder interface mode with TI1FP1 polarity inverted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Control circuit in reset mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Control circuit in gated mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Control circuit in trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Control circuit in external clock mode 2 + trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Master/Slave timer example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Gating timer 2 with OC1REF of timer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Gating timer 2 with Enable of timer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Triggering timer 2 with update of timer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Triggering timer 2 with Enable of timer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Triggering timer 1 and 2 with timer 1 TI1 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 General-purpose timer block diagram (TIM9 and TIM12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 General-purpose timer block diagram (TIM10/11/13/14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 TI2 external clock connection example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Control circuit in external clock mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Capture/compare channel 1 main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 PWM input mode timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Output compare mode, toggle on OC1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Edge-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Example of one pulse mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Control circuit in reset mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Control circuit in gated mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Control circuit in trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Basic timer block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE = 0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

41/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 198. Figure 199. Figure 200. Figure 201. Figure 202. Figure 203. Figure 204. Figure 205. Figure 206. Figure 207. Figure 208. Figure 209. Figure 210. Figure 211. Figure 212. Figure 213. Figure 214. Figure 215. Figure 216. Figure 217. Figure 218. Figure 219. Figure 220. Figure 221. Figure 222. Figure 223. Figure 224. Figure 225. Figure 226. Figure 227. Figure 228. Figure 229. Figure 230. Figure 231. Figure 232. Figure 233. Figure 234. Figure 235. Figure 236. Figure 237. Figure 238. Figure 239. Figure 240. Figure 241. Figure 242. Figure 243. Figure 244. Figure 245. Figure 246. Figure 247. Figure 248. Figure 249.

List of figures Independent watchdog block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Watchdog block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Window watchdog timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Block diagram (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 Block diagram (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 DES/TDES-ECB mode encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 DES/TDES-ECB mode decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 DES/TDES-CBC mode encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 DES/TDES-CBC mode decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 AES-ECB mode encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 AES-ECB mode decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 AES-CBC mode encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 AES-CBC mode decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 AES-CTR mode encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 AES-CTR mode decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Initial counter block structure for the Counter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 64-bit block construction according to DATATYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Initialization vectors use in the TDES-CBC encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 CRYP interrupt mapping diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Block diagram for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 Block diagram for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Bit, byte and half-word swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 HASH interrupt mapping diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 RTC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 CAN network topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Dual CAN block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 bxCAN operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 bxCAN in silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 bxCAN in loop back mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 bxCAN in combined mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Transmit mailbox states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 Receive FIFO states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Filter bank scale configuration - register organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 Example of filter numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Filtering mechanism - example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 CAN error state diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Bit timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 CAN frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 Event flags and interrupt generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 I2C bus protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 I2C block diagram for STM32F40x/41x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 I2C block diagram for STM32F42x/43x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 Transfer sequence diagram for slave transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 Transfer sequence diagram for slave receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Transfer sequence diagram for master transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716 Transfer sequence diagram for master receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 I2C interrupt mapping diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 USART block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Word length programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Configurable stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748 TC/TXE behavior when transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

42/1422

List of figures Figure 250. Figure 251. Figure 252. Figure 253. Figure 254. Figure 255. Figure 256. Figure 257. Figure 258. Figure 259. Figure 260. Figure 261. Figure 262. Figure 263. Figure 264. Figure 265. Figure 266. Figure 267. Figure 268. Figure 269. Figure 270. Figure 271. Figure 272. Figure 273. Figure 274. Figure 275. Figure 276. Figure 277. Figure 278. Figure 279. Figure 280. Figure 281. Figure 282. Figure 283. Figure 284. Figure 285. Figure 286. Figure 287. Figure 288. Figure 289. Figure 290. Figure 291. Figure 292. Figure 293. Figure 294. Figure 295.

RM0090

Start bit detection when oversampling by 16 or 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 Data sampling when oversampling by 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Data sampling when oversampling by 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 Mute mode using Idle line detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 Mute mode using address mark detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 Break detection in LIN mode (11-bit break length - LBDL bit is set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Break detection in LIN mode vs. Framing error detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 USART example of synchronous transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 USART data clock timing diagram (M=0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 USART data clock timing diagram (M=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 RX data setup/hold time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 ISO 7816-3 asynchronous protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 Parity error detection using the 1.5 stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 IrDA SIR ENDEC- block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 IrDA data modulation (3/16) -Normal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776 Transmission using DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 Reception using DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779 Hardware flow control between 2 USARTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779 RTS flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 CTS flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 USART interrupt mapping diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 SPI block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Single master/ single slave application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Data clock timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 TI mode - Slave mode, single transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 TI mode - Slave mode, continuous transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 TI mode - master mode, single transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 TI mode - master mode, continuous transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804 TXE/RXNE/BSY behavior in Master / full-duplex mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 TXE/RXNE/BSY behavior in Slave / full-duplex mode (BIDIMODE=0, RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 TXE/BSY behavior in Master transmit-only mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809 TXE/BSY in Slave transmit-only mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 RXNE behavior in receive-only mode (BIDIRMODE=0 and RXONLY=1) in the case of continuous transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 TXE/BSY behavior when transmitting (BIDIRMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of discontinuous transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Transmission using DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 Reception using DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 TI mode frame format error detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 I2S block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 I2S full duplex block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 I2S Philips protocol waveforms (16/32-bit full accuracy, CPOL = 0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 I2S Philips standard waveforms (24-bit frame with CPOL = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 Transmitting 0x8EAA33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 Receiving 0x8EAA33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 I2S Philips standard (16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame with CPOL = 0) . . . . . . . . . 824 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 MSB Justified 16-bit or 32-bit full-accuracy length with CPOL = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

43/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 296. Figure 297. Figure 298. Figure 299. Figure 300. Figure 301. Figure 302. Figure 303. Figure 304. Figure 305. Figure 306. Figure 307. Figure 308. Figure 309. Figure 310. Figure 311. Figure 312. Figure 313. Figure 314. Figure 315. Figure 316. Figure 317. Figure 318. Figure 319. Figure 320. Figure 321. Figure 322. Figure 323. Figure 324. Figure 325. Figure 326. Figure 327. Figure 328. Figure 329. Figure 330. Figure 331. Figure 332. Figure 333. Figure 334. Figure 335. Figure 336. Figure 337. Figure 338. Figure 339. Figure 340. Figure 341. Figure 342. Figure 343. Figure 344. Figure 345. Figure 346. Figure 347.

List of figures MSB Justified 24-bit frame length with CPOL = 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 MSB Justified 16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame with CPOL = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 LSB justified 16-bit or 32-bit full-accuracy with CPOL = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 LSB Justified 24-bit frame length with CPOL = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 Operations required to transmit 0x3478AE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 Operations required to receive 0x3478AE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 LSB justified 16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame with CPOL = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 Example of LSB justified 16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 PCM standard waveforms (16-bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 PCM standard waveforms (16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 Audio sampling frequency definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 I2S clock generator architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 SDIO no response and no data operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 SDIO (multiple) block read operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 SDIO (multiple) block write operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848 SDIO sequential read operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848 SDIO sequential write operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848 SDIO block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 SDIO adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 SDIO adapter command path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 Command path state machine (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853 SDIO command transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 Data path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 Data path state machine (DPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 ETH block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907 SMI interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908 MDIO timing and frame structure - Write cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 MDIO timing and frame structure - Read cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 Media independent interface signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910 MII clock sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912 Reduced media-independent interface signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 RMII clock sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 Clock scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914 Address field format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 MAC frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 Tagged MAC frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 Transmission bit order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924 Transmission with no collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924 Transmission with collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 Frame transmission in MMI and RMII modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 Receive bit order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 Reception with no error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930 Reception with errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930 Reception with false carrier indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930 MAC core interrupt masking scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931 Wakeup frame filter register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 Networked time synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 System time update using the Fine correction method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 PTP trigger output to TIM2 ITR1 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943 PPS output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 Descriptor ring and chain structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

44/1422

List of figures Figure 348. Figure 349. Figure 350. Figure 351. Figure 352. Figure 353. Figure 354. Figure 355. Figure 356. Figure 357. Figure 358. Figure 359. Figure 360. Figure 361. Figure 362. Figure 363. Figure 364. Figure 365. Figure 366. Figure 367. Figure 368. Figure 369. Figure 370. Figure 371. Figure 372. Figure 373. Figure 374. Figure 375. Figure 376. Figure 377. Figure 378. Figure 379. Figure 380. Figure 381. Figure 382. Figure 383. Figure 384. Figure 385. Figure 386. Figure 387. Figure 388. Figure 389. Figure 390. Figure 391. Figure 392. Figure 393. Figure 394. Figure 395. Figure 396. Figure 397.

RM0090

TxDMA operation in Default mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949 TxDMA operation in OSF mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 Normal transmit descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 Enhanced transmit descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 Receive DMA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 Normal Rx DMA descriptor structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 Enhanced receive descriptor field format with IEEE1588 time stamp enabled. . . . . . . . . 968 Interrupt scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Ethernet MAC remote wakeup frame filter register (ETH_MACRWUFFR). . . . . . . . . . . . 981 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 OTG A-B device connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 USB peripheral-only connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 USB host-only connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 SOF connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036 Updating OTG_FS_HFIR dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038 Device-mode FIFO address mapping and AHB FIFO access mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 Host-mode FIFO address mapping and AHB FIFO access mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040 Interrupt hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044 CSR memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046 Transmit FIFO write task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 Receive FIFO read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117 Normal bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119 Bulk/control IN transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122 Normal interrupt OUT/IN transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124 Normal isochronous OUT/IN transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129 Receive FIFO packet read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135 Processing a SETUP packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137 Bulk OUT transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143 TRDT max timing case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152 A-device SRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153 B-device SRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154 A-device HNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155 B-device HNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157 USB OTG interface block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162 Updating OTG_HS_HFIR dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175 Interrupt hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177 CSR memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179 Transmit FIFO write task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 Receive FIFO read task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266 Normal bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions - DMA mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268 Normal bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions - Slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269 Bulk/control IN transactions - DMA mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 Bulk/control IN transactions - Slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273 Normal interrupt OUT/IN transactions - DMA mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275 Normal interrupt OUT/IN transactions - Slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276 Normal isochronous OUT/IN transactions - DMA mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 Normal isochronous OUT/IN transactions - Slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 Receive FIFO packet read in slave mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293 Processing a SETUP packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295 Slave mode bulk OUT transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

45/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 398. Figure 399. Figure 400. Figure 401. Figure 402. Figure 403. Figure 404. Figure 405. Figure 406. Figure 407. Figure 408. Figure 409. Figure 410. Figure 411. Figure 412. Figure 413. Figure 414. Figure 415. Figure 416. Figure 417. Figure 418. Figure 419. Figure 420. Figure 421. Figure 422. Figure 423. Figure 424. Figure 425. Figure 426. Figure 427. Figure 428.

List of figures TRDT max timing case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 A-device SRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 B-device SRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312 A-device HNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 B-device HNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 FSMC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318 FSMC memory banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320 Mode1 read accesses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327 Mode1 write accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 ModeA read accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330 ModeA write accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330 Mode2 and mode B read accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332 Mode2 write accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 ModeB write accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 Mode C read accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 Mode C write accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 Mode D read accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 Mode D write accesses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 Multiplexed read accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 Multiplexed write accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 Asynchronous wait during a read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 Asynchronous wait during a write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 Wait configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346 Synchronous multiplexed read mode - NOR, PSRAM (CRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347 Synchronous multiplexed write mode - PSRAM (CRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349 NAND/PC Card controller timing for common memory access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361 Access to non CE dont care NAND-Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362 Block diagram of STM32 MCU and Cortex-M4F-level debug support . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375 SWJ debug port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377 JTAG TAP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 TPIU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

46/1422

Documentation conventions

RM0090

Documentation conventions
The Cortex-M4 core with FPU will be referred to as Cortex-M4F throughout this document.

1.1

List of abbreviations for registers

The following abbreviations are used in register descriptions: read/write (rw) read-only (r) write-only (w) Software can read and write to these bits. Software can only read these bits. Software can only write to this bit. Reading the bit returns the reset value.

read/clear (rc_w1) Software can read as well as clear this bit by writing 1. Writing 0 has no effect on the bit value. read/clear (rc_w0) Software can read as well as clear this bit by writing 0. Writing 1 has no effect on the bit value. read/clear by read Software can read this bit. Reading this bit automatically clears it to 0. (rc_r) Writing 0 has no effect on the bit value. read/set (rs) read-only write trigger (rt_w) toggle (t) Reserved (Res.) Software can read as well as set this bit. Writing 0 has no effect on the bit value. Software can read this bit. Writing 0 or 1 triggers an event but has no effect on the bit value. Software can only toggle this bit by writing 1. Writing 0 has no effect. Reserved bit, must be kept at reset value.

47/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Documentation conventions

1.2

Glossary
This section gives a brief definition of acronyms and abbreviations used in this document:

The Cortex-M4 core with FPU will be referred to as Cortex-M4F throughout this document The CPU core integrates two debug ports: JTAG debug port (JTAG-DP) provides a 5-pin standard interface based on the Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) protocol. SWD debug port (SWD-DP) provides a 2-pin (clock and data) interface based on the Serial Wire Debug (SWD) protocol. For both the JTAG and SWD protocols, please refer to the Cortex-M4F Technical Reference Manual

Word: data/instruction of 32-bit length. Half word: data/instruction of 16-bit length. Byte: data of 8-bit length. Double word: data of 64-bit length. IAP (in-application programming): IAP is the ability to reprogram the Flash memory of a microcontroller while the user program is running. ICP (in-circuit programming): ICP is the ability to program the Flash memory of a microcontroller using the JTAG protocol, the SWD protocol or the bootloader while the device is mounted on the user application board. I-Code: this bus connects the Instruction bus of the CPU core to the Flash instruction interface. Prefetch is performed on this bus. D-Code: this bus connects the D-Code bus (literal load and debug access) of the CPU to the Flash data interface. Option bytes: product configuration bits stored in the Flash memory. OBL: option byte loader. AHB: advanced high-performance bus. CPU: refers to the Cortex-M4F core.

1.3

Peripheral availability
For peripheral availability and number across all STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx sales types, please refer to the STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx datasheets. For peripheral availability and number across all STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx sales types, please refer to the STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx datasheets.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

48/1422

Memory and bus architecture

RM0090

2
2.1

Memory and bus architecture

System architecture
The main system consists of 32-bit multilayer AHB bus matrix that interconnects:

Eight masters: Cortex-M4F core I-bus, D-bus and S-bus DMA1 memory bus DMA2 memory bus DMA2 peripheral bus Ethernet DMA bus USB OTG HS DMA bus Internal Flash memory ICode bus Internal Flash memory DCode bus Main internal SRAM1 (112 KB) Auxiliary internal SRAM2 (16 KB) Auxiliary internal SRAM3 (64 KB) available only on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices AHB1 peripherals including AHB to APB bridges and APB peripherals AHB2 peripherals FSMC

Seven slaves:

The bus matrix provides access from a master to a slave, enabling concurrent access and efficient operation even when several high-speed peripherals work simultaneously. This architecture is shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2. Note: The 64-Kbyte CCM (core coupled memory) data RAM is not part of the bus matrix (see Figure 1: System architecture for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx devices and Figure 2: System architecture for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices). It can be accessed only through the CPU.

49/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 1.

Memory and bus architecture System architecture for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx devices
ARM Cortex-M4 I-bus D-bus S-bus GP DMA1 DMA_PI DMA_MEM1 GP DMA2 DMA_MEM2 DMA_P2 MAC USB OTG Ethernet HS ETHERNET_M S6 USB_HS_M S7 ACCEL M0 ICODE Flash memory SRAM1 112 Kbyte SRAM2 16 Kbyte AHB1 peripherals AHB2 peripherals FSMC Static MemCtl M1 DCODE M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Bus matrix-S
ai18490c

64-Kbyte CCM data RAM

S0

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

APB1 APB2

Figure 2.

System architecture for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices

ARM Cortex-M4 I-bus D-bus S-bus GP DMA1 DMA_PI DMA_MEM1 GP DMA2 DMA_MEM2 DMA_P2 MAC USB OTG Ethernet HS ETHERNET_M S6 USB_HS_M S7 ACCEL M0 ICODE Flash memory SRAM1 112 Kbyte SRAM2 16 Kbyte SRAM3 64 Kbyte AHB2 peripherals AHB2 peripherals FSMC Static MemCtl APB1 APB2 M1 DCODE M2 M3 M7 M4 M5 M6 Bus matrix-S
MS30410V3

64-Kbyte CCM data RAM

S0

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

50/1422

Memory and bus architecture

RM0090

2.1.1

S0: I-bus
This bus connects the Instruction bus of the Cortex-M4F core to the BusMatrix. This bus is used by the core to fetch instructions. The target of this bus is a memory containing code (internal Flash memory/SRAM or external memories through the FSMC).

2.1.2

S1: D-bus
This bus connects the databus of the Cortex-M4F and the 64-Kbyte CCM data RAM to the BusMatrix. This bus is used by the core for literal load and debug access. The target of this bus is a memory containing code or data (internal Flash memory or external memories through the FSMC).

2.1.3

S2: S-bus
This bus connects the system bus of the Cortex-M4F core to a BusMatrix. This bus is used to access data located in a peripheral or in SRAM. Instructions may also be fetch on this bus (less efficient than ICode). The targets of this bus are the 112, 64, and 16 Kbytes internal SRAMs, the AHB1 peripherals including the APB peripherals, the AHB2 peripherals and the external memories through the FSMC.

2.1.4

S3, S4: DMA memory bus

This bus connects the DMA memory bus master interface to the BusMatrix. It is used by the DMA to perform transfer to/from memories. The targets of this bus are data memories: internal SRAMs (112, 64, and 16 Kbytes) and external memories through the FSMC.

2.1.5

S5: DMA peripheral bus

This bus connects the DMA peripheral master bus interface to the BusMatrix. This bus is used by the DMA to access AHB peripherals or to perform memory-to-memory transfers. The targets of this bus are the AHB and APB peripherals plus data memories: internal SRAM and external memories through the FSMC.

2.1.6

S6: Ethernet DMA bus

This bus connects the Ethernet DMA master interface to the BusMatrix. This bus is used by the Ethernet DMA to load/store data to a memory. The targets of this bus are data memories: internal SRAMs (112, 64, and 16 Kbytes) and external memories through the FSMC.

2.1.7

S7: USB OTG HS DMA bus

This bus connects the USB OTG HS DMA master interface to the BusMatrix. This bus is used by the USB OTG DMA to load/store data to a memory. The targets of this bus are data memories: internal SRAMs (112, 64, and 16 Kbytes) and external memories through the FSMC.

2.1.8

BusMatrix
The BusMatrix manages the access arbitration between masters. The arbitration uses a round-robin algorithm.

51/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Memory and bus architecture

2.1.9

AHB/APB bridges (APB)

The two AHB/APB bridges, APB1 and APB2, provide full synchronous connections between the AHB and the two APB buses, allowing flexible selection of the peripheral frequency. Refer to the device datasheets for more details on APB1 and APB2 maximum frequencies, and to Table 2 on page 52 for the address mapping of AHB and APB peripherals. After each device reset, all peripheral clocks are disabled (except for the SRAM and Flash memory interface). Before using a peripheral you have to enable its clock in the RCC_AHBxENR or RCC_APBxENR register.

Note:

When a 16- or an 8-bit access is performed on an APB register, the access is transformed into a 32-bit access: the bridge duplicates the 16- or 8-bit data to feed the 32-bit vector.

2.2

Memory organization
Program memory, data memory, registers and I/O ports are organized within the same linear 4 Gbyte address space. The bytes are coded in memory in little endian format. The lowest numbered byte in a word is considered the words least significant byte and the highest numbered byte, the words most significant. For the detailed mapping of peripheral registers, please refer to the related chapters. The addressable memory space is divided into 8 main blocks, each of 512 MB. All the memory areas that are not allocated to on-chip memories and peripherals are considered Reserved). Refer to the memory map figure in the product datasheet.

2.3

Memory map
See the datasheet corresponding to your device for a comprehensive diagram of the memory map. Table 2 gives the boundary addresses of the peripherals available in all STM32F4xx devices.

Table 2.

STM32F4xx register boundary addresses

Peripheral Bus Register map Section 32.6.9: FSMC register map on page 1373 Section 21.4.4: RNG register map on page 598 Section 22.4.9: HASH register map on page 622 AHB2 Section 20.6.13: CRYP register map on page 591 Section 13.8.12: DCMI register map on page 351 Section 30.16.6: OTG_FS register map on page 1106

Boundary address 0xA000 0000 - 0xA000 0FFF 0x5006 0800 - 0x5006 0BFF 0x5006 0400 - 0x5006 07FF 0x5006 0000 - 0x5006 03FF 0x5005 0000 - 0x5005 03FF 0x5000 0000 - 0x5003 FFFF

FSMC control register AHB3 RNG HASH CRYP DCMI USB OTG FS

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

52/1422

Memory and bus architecture Table 2. STM32F4xx register boundary addresses (continued)
Peripheral USB OTG HS Bus Register map

RM0090

Boundary address 0x4004 0000 - 0x4007 FFFF 0x4002 9000 - 0x4002 93FF 0x4002 8C00 - 0x4002 8FFF 0x4002 8800 - 0x4002 8BFF 0x4002 8400 - 0x4002 87FF 0x4002 8000 - 0x4002 83FF 0x4002 6400 - 0x4002 67FF 0x4002 6000 - 0x4002 63FF 0x4002 4000 - 0x4002 4FFF 0x4002 3C00 - 0x4002 3FFF 0x4002 3800 - 0x4002 3BFF 0x4002 3000 - 0x4002 33FF 0x4002 2000 - 0x4002 23FF 0x4002 1C00 - 0x4002 1FFF 0x4002 1800 - 0x4002 1BFF 0x4002 1400 - 0x4002 17FF 0x4002 1000 - 0x4002 13FF 0x4002 0C00 - 0x4002 0FFF 0x4002 0800 - 0x4002 0BFF 0x4002 0400 - 0x4002 07FF 0x4002 0000 - 0x4002 03FF 0x4001 5400 - 0x4001 57FF 0x4001 5000 - 0x4001 53FF 0x4001 4800 - 0x4001 4BFF 0x4001 4400 - 0x4001 47FF 0x4001 4000 - 0x4001 43FF 0x4001 3C00 - 0x4001 3FFF 0x4001 3800 - 0x4001 3BFF 0x4001 3400 - 0x4001 37FF

Section 31.12.6: OTG_HS register map on page 1248

ETHERNET MAC

Section 29.8.5: Ethernet register maps on page 1017

DMA2 DMA1 BKPSRAM Flash interface register RCC CRC GPIOI GPIOH GPIOG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA SPI6 SPI5 TIM11 TIM10 TIM9 EXTI SYSCFG SPI4 APB2 APB2 AHB1

Section 9.5.11: DMA register map on page 245

Section 3.8: Flash interface registers Section 6.3.32: RCC register map on page 181 Section 4.4.4: CRC register map on page 88

Section 7.4.11: GPIO register map on page 203

Section 27.5.10: SPI register map on page 845 Section 16.6.11: TIM10/11/13/14 register map on page 524 Section 16.5.14: TIM9/12 register map on page 514 Section 10.3.7: EXTI register map on page 262 Section 7.2.8: SYSCFG register maps on page 157

APB2 Section 27.5.10: SPI register map on page 845

53/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 2. STM32F4xx register boundary addresses (continued)

Peripheral SPI1 SDIO ADC1 - ADC2 - ADC3 USART6 USART1 TIM8 TIM1 UART8 UART7 DAC PWR CAN2 CAN1 I2C3 I2C2 I2C1 UART5 UART4 USART3 USART2 I2S3ext SPI3 / I2S3 SPI2 / I2S2 I2S2ext IWDG WWDG RTC & BKP Registers TIM14 TIM13 TIM12 TIM7 TIM6 TIM5 TIM4 TIM3 TIM2 APB1 APB2 Bus

Memory and bus architecture

Boundary address 0x4001 3000 - 0x4001 33FF 0x4001 2C00 - 0x4001 2FFF 0x4001 2000 - 0x4001 23FF 0x4001 1400 - 0x4001 17FF 0x4001 1000 - 0x4001 13FF 0x4001 0400 - 0x4001 07FF 0x4001 0000 - 0x4001 03FF 0x4000 7C00 - 0x4000 7FFF 0x4000 7800 - 0x4000 7BFF 0x4000 7400 - 0x4000 77FF 0x4000 7000 - 0x4000 73FF 0x4000 6800 - 0x4000 6BFF 0x4000 6400 - 0x4000 67FF 0x4000 5C00 - 0x4000 5FFF 0x4000 5800 - 0x4000 5BFF 0x4000 5400 - 0x4000 57FF 0x4000 5000 - 0x4000 53FF 0x4000 4C00 - 0x4000 4FFF 0x4000 4800 - 0x4000 4BFF 0x4000 4400 - 0x4000 47FF 0x4000 4000 - 0x4000 43FF 0x4000 3C00 - 0x4000 3FFF 0x4000 3800 - 0x4000 3BFF 0x4000 3400 - 0x4000 37FF 0x4000 3000 - 0x4000 33FF 0x4000 2C00 - 0x4000 2FFF 0x4000 2800 - 0x4000 2BFF 0x4000 2000 - 0x4000 23FF 0x4000 1C00 - 0x4000 1FFF 0x4000 1800 - 0x4000 1BFF 0x4000 1400 - 0x4000 17FF 0x4000 1000 - 0x4000 13FF 0x4000 0C00 - 0x4000 0FFF 0x4000 0800 - 0x4000 0BFF 0x4000 0400 - 0x4000 07FF 0x4000 0000 - 0x4000 03FF

Register map Section 27.5.10: SPI register map on page 845 Section 28.9.16: SDIO register map on page 901 Section 11.13.18: ADC register map on page 307 Section 26.6.8: USART register map on page 793 Section 14.4.21: TIM1&TIM8 register map on page 420

APB1 Section 26.6.8: USART register map on page 793 Section 12.5.15: DAC register map on page 329 Section 5.5: PWR register map on page 109 Section 24.9.5: bxCAN register map on page 705

Section 25.6.11: I2C register map on page 741

Section 26.6.8: USART register map on page 793

Section 27.5.10: SPI register map on page 845

Section 18.4.5: IWDG register map on page 540 Section 19.6.4: WWDG register map on page 547 Section 23.6.21: RTC register map on page 662 Section 16.6.11: TIM10/11/13/14 register map on page 524 Section 16.5.14: TIM9/12 register map on page 514 Section 17.4.9: TIM6&TIM7 register map on page 535

Section 15.4.21: TIMx register map on page 480

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

54/1422

Memory and bus architecture

RM0090

2.3.1

Embedded SRAM
The STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx feature 4 Kbytes of backup SRAM (see Section 5.1.2: Battery backup domain) plus 192 Kbytes of system SRAM. The STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx feature 4 Kbytes of backup SRAM (see Section 5.1.2: Battery backup domain) plus 256 Kbytes of system SRAM. The system SRAM can be accessed as bytes, half-words (16 bits) or full words (32 bits). Read and write operations are performed at CPU speed with 0 wait state. The system SRAM is split up into three blocks:

112 Kbyte and 16 Kbyte blocks mapped at address 0x2000 0000 and accessible by all AHB masters. A 64 Kbyte block mapped at address 0x2002 0000 and accessible by all AHB masters. (available on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx). AHB masters support concurrent SRAM accesses (from the Ethernet or the USB OTG HS): for instance, the Ethernet MAC can read/write from/to the 16 Kbyte SRAM while the CPU is reading/writing from/to the 112- or 64-Kbyte SRAMs. A 64 Kbyte block mapped at address 0x1000 0000 and accessible only by the CPU through the D-bus.

The CPU can access the system SRAM through the System Bus or through the I-Code/DCode buses when boot from SRAM is selected or when physical remap is selected (Section 8.2.1: SYSCFG memory remap register (SYSCFG_MEMRMP) in the SYSCFG controller). To get the max performance on SRAM execution, physical remap should be selected (boot or software selection).

2.3.2

Flash memory overview

The Flash memory interface manages CPU AHB I-Code and D-Code accesses to the Flash memory. It implements the erase and program Flash memory operations and the read and write protection mechanisms. It accelerates code execution with a system of instruction prefetch and cache lines. The Flash memory is organized as follows:

A main memory block divided into sectors. System memory from which the device boots in System memory boot mode 512 OTP (one-time programmable) bytes for user data. Option bytes to configure read and write protection, BOR level, watchdog software/hardware and reset when the device is in Standby or Stop mode.

Refer to Section 3: Embedded Flash memory interface for more details.

2.3.3

Bit banding
The Cortex-M4F memory map includes two bit-band regions. These regions map each word in an alias region of memory to a bit in a bit-band region of memory. Writing to a word in the alias region has the same effect as a read-modify-write operation on the targeted bit in the bit-band region. In the STM32F4xx devices both the peripheral registers and the SRAM are mapped to a bitband region, so that single bit-band write and read operations are allowed. The operations are only available for Cortex-M4F accesses, and not from other bus masters (e.g. DMA).

55/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Memory and bus architecture A mapping formula shows how to reference each word in the alias region to a corresponding bit in the bit-band region. The mapping formula is: bit_word_addr = bit_band_base + (byte_offset x 32) + (bit_number 4) where: bit_word_addr is the address of the word in the alias memory region that maps to the targeted bit bit_band_base is the starting address of the alias region byte_offset is the number of the byte in the bit-band region that contains the targeted bit bit_number is the bit position (0-7) of the targeted bit

Example
The following example shows how to map bit 2 of the byte located at SRAM address 0x20000300 to the alias region: 0x22006008 = 0x22000000 + (0x300*32) + (2*4) Writing to address 0x22006008 has the same effect as a read-modify-write operation on bit 2 of the byte at SRAM address 0x20000300. Reading address 0x22006008 returns the value (0x01 or 0x00) of bit 2 of the byte at SRAM address 0x20000300 (0x01: bit set; 0x00: bit reset). For more information on bit-banding, please refer to the Cortex-M4F programming manual (see Related documents on page 1).

2.4

Boot configuration
Due to its fixed memory map, the code area starts from address 0x0000 0000 (accessed through the ICode/DCode buses) while the data area (SRAM) starts from address 0x2000 0000 (accessed through the system bus). The Cortex-M4F CPU always fetches the reset vector on the ICode bus, which implies to have the boot space available only in the code area (typically, Flash memory). STM32F4xx microcontrollers implement a special mechanism to be able to boot from other memories (like the internal SRAM). In the STM32F4xx, three different boot modes can be selected through the BOOT[1:0] pins as shown in Table 3. Table 3. Boot modes
Boot mode BOOT1 x 0 1 BOOT0 0 1 1 Main Flash memory Main Flash memory is selected as the boot space System memory Embedded SRAM System memory is selected as the boot space Embedded SRAM is selected as the boot space Aliasing

Boot mode selection pins

The values on the BOOT pins are latched on the 4th rising edge of SYSCLK after a reset. It is up to the user to set the BOOT1 and BOOT0 pins after reset to select the required boot mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

56/1422

Memory and bus architecture

RM0090

BOOT0 is a dedicated pin while BOOT1 is shared with a GPIO pin. Once BOOT1 has been sampled, the corresponding GPIO pin is free and can be used for other purposes. The BOOT pins are also resampled when the device exits the Standby mode. Consequently, they must be kept in the required Boot mode configuration when the device is in the Standby mode. After this startup delay is over, the CPU fetches the top-of-stack value from address 0x0000 0000, then starts code execution from the boot memory starting from 0x0000 0004. Note: When the device boots from SRAM, in the application initialization code, you have to relocate the vector table in SRAM using the NVIC exception table and the offset register.

Embedded bootloader
The embedded bootloader mode is used to reprogram the Flash memory using one of the following serial interfaces:

USART1(PA9/PA10) USART3(PB10/11 and PC10/11) CAN2(PB5/13) USB OTG FS(PA11/12) in Device mode (DFU: device firmware upgrade).

The USART peripherals operate at the internal 16 MHz oscillator (HSI) frequency, while the CAN and USB OTG FS require an external clock (HSE) multiple of 1 MHz (ranging from 4 to 26 MHz). The embedded bootloader code is located in system memory. It is programmed by ST during production. For additional information, refer to application note AN2606.

Physical remap
Once the boot pins are selected, the application software can modify the memory accessible in the code area (in this way the code can be executed through the ICode bus in place of the System bus). This modification is performed by programming the Section 8.2.1: SYSCFG memory remap register (SYSCFG_MEMRMP) in the SYSCFG controller. The following memories can thus be remapped:

Main Flash memory System memory Embedded SRAM1 (112 KB) FSMC bank 1 (NOR/PSRAM 1 and 2)

Table 4.

Memory mapping vs. Boot mode/physical remap

Addresses Boot/Remap in Boot/Remap in Boot/Remap in main Flash memory embedded SRAM System memory SRAM3 (64 KB) SRAM2 (16 KB) SRAM1 (112 KB) System memory Reserved Flash memory SRAM3 (64 KB) SRAM2 (16 KB) SRAM1 (112 KB) System memory Reserved Flash memory SRAM3 (64 KB) SRAM2 (16 KB) SRAM1 (112 KB) System memory Reserved Flash memory Remap in FSMC SRAM3 (64 KB) SRAM2 (16 KB) SRAM1 (112 KB) System memory Reserved Flash memory

0x2002 0000 - 0x2002 FFFF(1) 0x2001 C000 - 0x2001 FFFF 0x2000 0000 - 0x2001 BFFF 0x1FFF 0000 - 0x1FFF 77FF 0x0810 0000 - 0x0FFF FFFF 0x0800 0000 - 0x080F FFFF

57/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 4.

Memory and bus architecture Memory mapping vs. Boot mode/physical remap (continued)
Addresses Boot/Remap in Boot/Remap in Boot/Remap in main Flash memory embedded SRAM System memory Reserved Reserved Reserved Remap in FSMC FSMC bank 1 NOR/PSRAM 2 (Aliased) FSMC bank 1 NOR/PSRAM 1 (Aliased)

0x0400 0000 - 0x07FF FFFF

0x0000 0000 - 0x03FF FFFF(2)(3)

Flash (1 MB) Aliased

SRAM1 (112 KB) Aliased

System memory (30 KB) Aliased

1. SRAM3 is available only on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx 2. When the FSMC is remapped at address 0x0000 0000, only the first two regions of bank 1 memory controller (bank 1 NOR/PSRAM 1 and NOR/PSRAM 2) can be remapped. In remap mode, the CPU can access the external memory via ICode bus instead of System bus which boosts up the performance. 3. Even when aliased in the boot memory space, the related memory is still accessible at its original memory space.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

58/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

3
3.1

Embedded Flash memory interface

Introduction
The Flash memory interface manages CPU AHB I-Code and D-Code accesses to the Flash memory. It implements the erase and program Flash memory operations and the read and write protection mechanisms. The Flash memory interface accelerates code execution with a system of instruction prefetch and cache lines.

3.2

Main features

Flash memory read operations Flash memory program/erase operations Read / write protections Prefetch on I-Code 64 cache lines of 128 bits on I-Code 8 cache lines of 128 bits on D-Code

Figure 3 shows the Flash memory interface connection inside the system architecture. Figure 3. Flash memory interface connection inside system architecture
Cortex-M4F I-Code bus Cortex core D-code bus I-Code D-Code S bus AHB 32-bit data bus
FLITF registers

AHB 32-bit instruction Flash interface bus

Flash memory bus 128 bits Flash memory

CCM data RAM DMA1 DMA2

AHB 32-bit system bus

AHB periph1 SRAM and External memories AHB periph2

USB HS Ethernet Access to instruction in Flash memory Access to data and literal pool in Flash memory FLITF register access

MS30468V2

59/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

3.3

Embedded Flash memory

The Flash memory has the following main features:

Capacity up to 1 Mbyte for STM32F40x and STM32F41x and up to 2 Mbytes for STM32F42x and STM32F43x 128 bits wide data read Byte, half-word, word and double word write Sector and mass erase Memory organization The Flash memory is organized as follows: A main memory block divided into 4 sectors of 16 Kbytes, 1 sector of 64 Kbytes, and 7 sectors of 128 Kbytes System memory from which the device boots in System memory boot mode 512 OTP (one-time programmable) bytes for user data The OTP area contains 16 additional bytes used to lock the corresponding OTP data block. Option bytes to configure read and write protection, BOR level, watchdog software/hardware and reset when the device is in Standby or Stop mode.

Low power modes (for details refer to the Power control (PWR) section of the reference manual) Flash module organization (STM32F40x and STM32F41x)
Name Sector 0 Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3 Sector 4 Main memory Sector 5 Sector 6 . . . Sector 11 System memory OTP area Option bytes Block base addresses 0x0800 0000 - 0x0800 3FFF 0x0800 4000 - 0x0800 7FFF 0x0800 8000 - 0x0800 BFFF 0x0800 C000 - 0x0800 FFFF 0x0801 0000 - 0x0801 FFFF 0x0802 0000 - 0x0803 FFFF 0x0804 0000 - 0x0805 FFFF . . . 0x080E 0000 - 0x080F FFFF 0x1FFF 0000 - 0x1FFF 77FF 0x1FFF 7800 - 0x1FFF 7A0F 0x1FFF C000 - 0x1FFF C00F Size 16 Kbytes 16 Kbytes 16 Kbytes 16 Kbytes 64 Kbytes 128 Kbytes 128 Kbytes . . . 128 Kbytes 30 Kbytes 528 bytes 16 bytes

Table 5.
Block

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

60/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Table 6.

Flash memory organization (STM32F42x and STM32F43x)

Name Sector 0 Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3 Sector 4 Sector 5 Sector 6 Sector 11 Block base addresses 0x0800 0000 - 0x0800 3FFF 0x0800 4000 - 0x0800 7FFF 0x0800 8000 - 0x0800 BFFF 0x0800 C000 - 0x0800 FFFF 0x0801 0000 - 0x0801 FFFF 0x0802 0000 - 0x0803 FFFF 0x0804 0000 - 0x0805 FFFF 0x080E 0000 - 0x080F FFFF 0x0810 0000 - 0x0810 3FFF 0x0810 4000 - 0x0810 7FFF 0x0810 8000 - 0x0810 BFFF 0x0810 C000 - 0x0810 FFFF 0x0811 0000 - 0x0811 FFFF 0x0812 0000 - 0x0813 FFFF 0x0814 0000 - 0x0815 FFFF Sector 23 System memory OTP Option bytes 0x1FFE C000 - 0x1FFE C007 16 bytes 0x081E 0000 - 0x081F FFFF 0x1FFF 0000 - 0x1FFF 77FF 0x1FFF 7800 - 0x1FFF 7A0F 0x1FFF C000 - 0x1FFF C00F Size 16 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte 128 Kbyte 128 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 16 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 128 Kbyte 128 Kbyte 128 Kbyte 30 Kbyte 528 bytes 16 bytes

Block

Main memory Sector 12 Sector 13 Sector 14 Sector 15 Sector 16 Sector 17 Sector 18

3.4
3.4.1

Read interface
Relation between CPU clock frequency and Flash memory read time
To correctly read data from Flash memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY) must be correctly programmed in the Flash access control register (FLASH_ACR) according to the frequency of the CPU clock (HCLK) and the supply voltage of the device. The prefetch buffer must be disabled when the supply voltage is below 2.1 V. The correspondence between wait states and CPU clock frequency is given in Table 7 .

61/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Note:

Embedded Flash memory interface On STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx devices: - when VOS = '0', the maximum value of fHCLK = 144 MHz. - when VOS = '1', the maximum value of fHCLK = 168 MHz. On STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices: - when VOS[1:0] = '0x01', the maximum value of fHCLK is 120 MHz. - when VOS[1:0] = '0x10', the maximum value of fHCLK is 144 MHz. - when VOS[1:0] = '0x11', the maximum value of fHCLK is 168 MHz

Table 7.

Number of wait states according to CPU clock (HCLK) frequency

HCLK (MHz)

Wait states (WS) (LATENCY) Voltage range 2.7 V - 3.6 V 0 WS (1 CPU cycle) 1 WS (2 CPU cycles) 2 WS (3 CPU cycles) 3 WS (4 CPU cycles) 4 WS (5 CPU cycles) 5 WS (6 CPU cycles) 6 WS (7 CPU cycles) 7 WS (8 CPU cycles) 0 < HCLK 30 30 < HCLK 60 60 < HCLK 90 90 < HCLK 120 120 < HCLK 150 150 < HCLK 168 Voltage range 2.4 V - 2.7 V 0 < HCLK 24 24 < HCLK 48 48 < HCLK 72 72 < HCLK 96 96 < HCLK 120 120 < HCLK 144 144 < HCLK 168 Voltage range 2.1 V - 2.4 V 0 < HCLK 22 22 < HCLK 44 44 < HCLK 66 66 < HCLK 88 88 < HCLK 110 110 < HCLK 132 132 < HCLK 154 154 < HCLK 168

Voltage range 1.8 V - 2.1 V Prefetch OFF 0 < HCLK 20 20 <HCLK 40 40 < HCLK 60 60 < HCLK 80 80 < HCLK 100 100 < HCLK 120 120 < HCLK 140 140 < HCLK 160

After reset, the CPU clock frequency is 16 MHz and 0 wait state (WS) is configured in the FLASH_ACR register. It is highly recommended to use the following software sequences to tune the number of wait states needed to access the Flash memory with the CPU frequency.

Increasing the CPU frequency

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Program the new number of wait states to the LATENCY bits in the FLASH_ACR register Check that the new number of wait states is taken into account to access the Flash memory by reading the FLASH_ACR register Modify the CPU clock source by writing the SW bits in the RCC_CFGR register If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by writing the HPRE bits in RCC_CFGR Check that the new CPU clock source or/and the new CPU clock prescaler value is/are taken into account by reading the clock source status (SWS bits) or/and the AHB prescaler value (HPRE bits), respectively, in the RCC_CFGR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

62/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Decreasing the CPU frequency

1. 2. 3. Modify the CPU clock source by writing the SW bits in the RCC_CFGR register If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by writing the HPRE bits in RCC_CFGR Check that the new CPU clock source or/and the new CPU clock prescaler value is/are taken into account by reading the clock source status (SWS bits) or/and the AHB prescaler value (HPRE bits), respectively, in the RCC_CFGR register Program the new number of wait states to the LATENCY bits in FLASH_ACR Check that the new number of wait states is used to access the Flash memory by reading the FLASH_ACR register

4. 5. Note:

A change in CPU clock configuration or wait state (WS) configuration may not be effective straight away. To make sure that the current CPU clock frequency is the one you have configured, you can check the AHB prescaler factor and clock source status values. To make sure that the number of WS you have programmed is effective, you can read the FLASH_ACR register.

3.4.2

Adaptive real-time memory accelerator (ART Accelerator)

The proprietary Adaptive real-time (ART) memory accelerator is optimized for STM32 industry-standard ARM Cortex-M4F processors. It balances the inherent performance advantage of the ARM Cortex-M4F over Flash memory technologies, which normally requires the processor to wait for the Flash memory at higher operating frequencies. To release the processor full performance, the accelerator implements an instruction prefetch queue and branch cache which increases program execution speed from the 128bit Flash memory. Based on CoreMark benchmark, the performance achieved thanks to the ART accelerator is equivalent to 0 wait state program execution from Flash memory at a CPU frequency up to 168 MHz.

Instruction prefetch
Each Flash memory read operation provides 128 bits from either four instructions of 32 bits or 8 instructions of 16 bits according to the program launched. So, in case of sequential code, at least four CPU cycles are needed to execute the previous read instruction line. Prefetch on the I-Code bus can be used to read the next sequential instruction line from the Flash memory while the current instruction line is being requested by the CPU. Prefetch is enabled by setting the PRFTEN bit in the FLASH_ACR register. This feature is useful if at least one wait state is needed to access the Flash memory. Figure 4 shows the execution of sequential 32-bit instructions with and without prefetch when 3 WSs are needed to access the Flash memory.

63/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 4.

Embedded Flash memory interface Sequential 32-bit instruction execution

@ 1

WAIT @ 2

F 1

D 1 F 2 @ 3

E 1 D 2 F 3 @ 4

E 2 D 3 F 4 @ 5 E 3 D 4 E 4 WAIT @ 6 F 5 D 5 F 6 @ 7

Without prefetch

E 5 D 6 F 7 @ 8

E 6 D 7 F 8 ins 7 fetch ins 8 fetch

ins 1 fetch

ins 2 fetch

ins 3 fetch

ins 4 fetch

ins 5 fetch

ins 6 fetch

Read ins 1, 2, 3, 4 Gives ins 1, 2, 3, 4

Read ins 5, 6, 7, 8 Gives ins 5, 6, 7, 8

@ 1

Wait data @ 2

F 1

D 1 F 2 @ 3

E 1 D 2 F 3 @ 4

With prefetch E 2 D 3 F 4 @ 5 E 3 D 4 F 5 @

E 4 D 5 F 6 @ 7 E 5 D 6 F 7 @ 8

E 6 D 7 F 8

Cortex-M4 pipeline @

AHB protocol ins 1 ins 2 ins 3 ins 4 ins 5 ins 6 ins 7 ins 8 fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch @ : address requested F: Fetch stage D: Decode stage E: Execute stage

Read ins 1, 2, 3, 4 Gives ins 1, 2, 3, 4 Read ins 5, 6, 7, 8

Gives ins 5, 6, 7, 8 Read ins 9, 10, ...

MS31831V1

When the code is not sequential (branch), the instruction may not be present in the currently used instruction line or in the prefetched instruction line. In this case (miss), the penalty in terms of number of cycles is at least equal to the number of wait states.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

64/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Instruction cache memory

To limit the time lost due to jumps, it is possible to retain 64 lines of 128 bits in an instruction cache memory. This feature can be enabled by setting the instruction cache enable (ICEN) bit in the FLASH_ACR register. Each time a miss occurs (requested data not present in the currently used instruction line, in the prefetched instruction line or in the instruction cache memory), the line read is copied into the instruction cache memory. If some data contained in the instruction cache memory are requested by the CPU, they are provided without inserting any delay. Once all the instruction cache memory lines have been filled, the LRU (least recently used) policy is used to determine the line to replace in the instruction memory cache. This feature is particularly useful in case of code containing loops.

Data management
Literal pools are fetched from Flash memory through the D-Code bus during the execution stage of the CPU pipeline. The CPU pipeline is consequently stalled until the requested literal pool is provided. To limit the time lost due to literal pools, accesses through the AHB databus D-Code have priority over accesses through the AHB instruction bus I-Code. If some literal pools are frequently used, the data cache memory can be enabled by setting the data cache enable (DCEN) bit in the FLASH_ACR register. This feature works like the instruction cache memory, but the retained data size is limited to 8 rows of 128 bits. Note: Data in user configuration sector are not cacheable.

3.5

Erase and program operations

For any Flash memory program operation (erase or program), the CPU clock frequency (HCLK) must be at least 1 MHz. The contents of the Flash memory are not guaranteed if a device reset occurs during a Flash memory operation. Any attempt to read the Flash memory on STM32F4xx while it is being written or erased, causes the bus to stall. Read operations are processed correctly once the program operation has completed. This means that code or data fetches cannot be performed while a write/erase operation is ongoing.

3.5.1

Unlocking the Flash control register

After reset, write is not allowed in the Flash control register (FLASH_CR) to protect the Flash memory against possible unwanted operations due, for example, to electric disturbances. The following sequence is used to unlock this register: 1. 2. Write KEY1 = 0x45670123 in the Flash key register (FLASH_KEYR) Write KEY2 = 0xCDEF89AB in the Flash key register (FLASH_KEYR)

Any wrong sequence will return a bus error and lock up the FLASH_CR register until the next reset. The FLASH_CR register can be locked again by software by setting the LOCK bit in the FLASH_CR register. Note: The FLASH_CR register is not accessible in write mode when the BSY bit in the FLASH_SR register is set. Any attempt to write to it with the BSY bit set will cause the AHB bus to stall until the BSY bit is cleared.

65/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

3.5.2

Program/erase parallelism
The Parallelism size is configured through the PSIZE field in the FLASH_CR register. It represents the number of bytes to be programmed each time a write operation occurs to the Flash memory. PSIZE is limited by the supply voltage and by whether the external VPP supply is used or not. It must therefore be correctly configured in the FLASH_CR register before any programming/erasing operation. A Flash memory erase operation can only be performed by sector, or for the whole Flash memory (mass erase). The erase time depends on PSIZE programmed value. For more details on the erase time, refer to the electrical characteristics section of the device datasheet. Table 8 provides the correct PSIZE values.

Table 8.

Program/erase parallelism
Voltage range 2.7 - 3.6 V with External VPP Voltage range 2.7 - 3.6 V x32 10 Voltage range 2.4 - 2.7 V Voltage range 2.1 - 2.4 V Voltage range 1.8 V - 2.1 V x8 00

Parallelism size PSIZE(1:0)

x64 11

x16 01

Note:

Any program or erase operation started with inconsistent program parallelism/voltage range settings may lead to unpredicted results. Even if a subsequent read operation indicates that the logical value was effectively written to the memory, this value may not be retained. To use VPP, an external high-voltage supply (between 8 and 9 V) must be applied to the VPP pad. The external supply must be able to sustain this voltage range even if the DC consumption exceeds 10 mA. It is advised to limit the use of VPP to initial programming on the factory line. The VPP supply must not be applied for more than an hour, otherwise the Flash memory might be damaged.

3.5.3

Erase
The Flash memory erase operation can be performed at sector level or on the whole Flash memory (Mass Erase). Mass Erase does not affect the OTP sector or the configuration sector.

Sector Erase
To erase a sector, follow the procedure below: 1. 2. Check that no Flash memory operation is ongoing by checking the BSY bit in the FLASH_SR register Set the SER bit and select the sector out of the 12 sectors (for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) and out of 24 (for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) in the main memory block) you wish to erase (SNB) in the FLASH_CR register Set the STRT bit in the FLASH_CR register Wait for the BSY bit to be cleared

3. 4.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

66/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Mass Erase
To perform Mass Erase, the following sequence is recommended: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: Check that no Flash memory operation is ongoing by checking the BSY bit in the FLASH_SR register Set the MER bit in the FLASH_CR register (on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx devices) Set both the MER and MER1 bits in the FLASH_CR register (on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices). Set the STRT bit in the FLASH_CR register Wait for the BSY bit to be cleared

If MERx and SER bits are both set in the FLASH_CR register, neither sector nor mass erase can be performed.

3.5.4

Programming
Standard programming
The Flash memory programming sequence is as follows: 1. 2. 3. Check that no main Flash memory operation is ongoing by checking the BSY bit in the FLASH_SR register. Set the PG bit in the FLASH_CR register Perform the data write operation(s) to the desired memory address (inside main memory block or OTP area): 4. Byte access in case of x8 parallelism Half-word access in case of x16 parallelism Word access in case of x32 parallelism Double word access in case of x64 parallelism

Wait for the BSY bit to be cleared.

Note:

Successive write operations are possible without the need of an erase operation when changing bits from 1 to 0. Writing 1 requires a Flash memory erase operation. If an erase and a program operation are requested simultaneously, the erase operation is performed first.

Programming errors
It is not allowed to program data to the Flash memory that would cross the 128-bit row boundary. In such a case, the write operation is not performed and a program alignment error flag (PGAERR) is set in the FLASH_SR register. The write access type (byte, half-word, word or double word) must correspond to the type of parallelism chosen (x8, x16, x32 or x64). If not, the write operation is not performed and a program parallelism error flag (PGPERR) is set in the FLASH_SR register. If the standard programming sequence is not respected (for example, if there is an attempt to write to a Flash memory address when the PG bit is not set), the operation is aborted and a program sequence error flag (PGSERR) is set in the FLASH_SR register.

67/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

Programming and caches

If a Flash memory write access concerns some data in the data cache, the Flash write access modifies the data in the Flash memory and the data in the cache. If an erase operation in Flash memory also concerns data in the data or instruction cache, you have to make sure that these data are rewritten before they are accessed during code execution. If this cannot be done safely, it is recommended to flush the caches by setting the DCRST and ICRST bits in the FLASH_CR register. Note: The I/D cache should be flushed only when it is disabled (I/DCEN = 0).

3.5.5

Interrupts
Setting the end of operation interrupt enable bit (EOPIE) in the FLASH_CR register enables interrupt generation when an erase or program operation ends, that is when the busy bit (BSY) in the FLASH_SR register is cleared (operation completed, correctly or not). In this case, the end of operation (EOP) bit in the FLASH_SR register is set. If an error occurs during a program, an erase, or a read operation request, one of the following error flags is set in the FLASH_SR register:

PGAERR, PGPERR, PGSERR (Program error flags) WRPERR (Protection error flag)

In this case, if the error interrupt enable bit (ERRIE) is set in the FLASH_SR register, an interrupt is generated and the operation error bit (OPERR) is set in the FLASH_SR register. Note: If several successive errors are detected (for example, in case of DMA transfer to the Flash memory), the error flags cannot be cleared until the end of the successive write requests. Table 9. Flash interrupt request
Event flag EOP WRPERR PGAERR, PGPERR, PGSERR Enable control bit EOPIE ERRIE ERRIE

Interrupt event End of operation Write protection error Programming error

3.6
3.6.1

Option bytes
Description of user option bytes
The option bytes are configured by the end user depending on the application requirements. Table 10 shows the organization of these bytes inside the user configuration sector. Table 10. Option byte organization
[63:16] Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved [15:0] ROP & user option bytes (RDP & USER) Write protection nWRP bits for sectors 0 to 11 Reserved Write protection nWRP bits for sectors 12 to 23

Address 0x1FFF C000 0x1FFF C008 0x1FFE C000 0x1FFE C008

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

68/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Table 11.

Description of the option bytes (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx)

Option bytes (word, address 0x1FFF C000)

RDP: Read protection option byte. The read protection is used to protect the software code stored in Flash memory. Bits 15:8 0xAA: Level 0, no protection 0xCC: Level 2, chip protection (debug and boot from RAM features disabled) Others: Level 1, read protection of memories (debug features limited)

USER: User option byte This byte is used to configure the following features: Select the watchdog event: Hardware or software Reset event when entering the Stop mode Reset event when entering the Standby mode Bit 7 nRST_STDBY 0: Reset generated when entering the Standby mode 1: No reset generated nRST_STOP 0: Reset generated when entering the Stop mode 1: No reset generated WDG_SW 0: Hardware independent watchdog 1: Software independent watchdog 0x1: Not used BOR_LEV: BOR reset Level These bits contain the supply level threshold that activates/releases the reset. They can be written to program a new BOR level value into Flash memory. 00: BOR Level 3 (VBOR3). reset threshold level from 2.70 to 3.60 V 01: BOR Level 2 (VBOR2). reset threshold level from 2.40 to 2.70 V 10: BOR Level 1 (VBOR1). reset threshold level from 2.10 to 2.40 V 11: BOR off (VBOR0), reset threshold level from 1.8 to 2.10 V 0x1: Not used Option bytes (word, address 0x1FFF C008) Bits 15:12 0xF: Not used

Bit 6

Bit 5 Bit 4

Bits 3:2

Bits 1:0

nWRP: Flash memory write protection option bytes Sectors 0 to 11 can be write protected. nWRPi 0: Write protection active on selected sector 1: Write protection not active on selected sector

Bits 11:0

69/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

Table 12.

Description of the option bytes (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)

Option bytes (word, address 0x1FFF C000)

RDP: Read protection option byte. The read protection is used to protect the software code stored in Flash memory. Bit 15:8 0xAA: Level 0, no protection 0xCC: Level 2, chip protection (debug and boot from RAM features disabled) Others: Level 1, read protection of memories (debug features limited)

USER: User option byte This byte is used to configure the following features: Select the watchdog event: Hardware or software Reset event when entering the Stop mode Reset event when entering the Standby mode Bit 7 nRST_STDBY 0: Reset generated when entering the Standby mode 1: No reset generated nRST_STOP 0: Reset generated when entering the Stop mode 1: No reset generated WDG_SW 0: Hardware watchdog 1: Software watchdog 0x1: Not used BOR_LEV: BOR reset Level These bits contain the supply level threshold that activates/releases the reset. They can be written to program a new BOR level value into Flash memory. 00: BOR Level 3 (VBOR3). reset threshold level from 2.70 to 3.60 V 01: BOR Level 2 (VBOR2). reset threshold level from 2.40 to 2.70 V 10: BOR Level 1 (VBOR1). reset threshold level from 2.10 to 2.40 V 11: BOR off (VBOR0), reset threshold level from 1.8 to 2.10 V 0x1: Not used Option bytes (word, address 0x1FFF C008) Bit 15:12 0xF: not used

Bit 6

Bit 5 Bit 4

Bits 3:2

Bits 1:0

nWRP: Flash memory write protection option bytes. Sectors 0 to 11 can be write protected. Bits 11:0 nWRPi: 0: Write protection active on selected sector 1: Write protection not active on selected sector Option bytes (word, address 0x1FFE C000) Bit 15:0 0xFF: not used

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

70/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface Table 12.

Bit 15:12

RM0090

Description of the option bytes (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)

Option bytes (word, address 0x1FFE C008) 0xF: not used

nWRP: Flash memory write protection option bytes. Sectors 12 to 23 can be write protected. Bits 11: 0 nWRPi: 0: Write protection active on sector i. 1: Write protection not active on sector i.

3.6.2

Programming user option bytes

To run any operation on this sector, the option lock bit (OPTLOCK) in the Flash option control register (FLASH_OPTCR) must be cleared. To be allowed to clear this bit, you have to perform the following sequence: 1. 2. Write OPTKEY1 = 0x0819 2A3B in the Flash option key register (FLASH_OPTKEYR) Write OPTKEY2 = 0x4C5D 6E7F in the Flash option key register (FLASH_OPTKEYR)

The user option bytes can be protected against unwanted erase/program operations by setting the OPTLOCK bit by software.

Modifying user option bytes on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

To modify the user option value, follow the sequence below: 1. Check that no Flash memory operation is ongoing by checking the BSY bit in the FLASH_SR register 2. 3. 4. Note: Write the desired option value in the FLASH_OPTCR register. Set the option start bit (OPTSTRT) in the FLASH_OPTCR register Wait for the BSY bit to be cleared.

The value of an option is automatically modified by first erasing the user configuration sector and then programming all the option bytes with the values contained in the FLASH_OPTCR register.

Modifying user option bytes on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

To modify the user option byte value, follow the sequence below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Note: Check that no Flash memory operation is ongoing by checking the BSY bit in the FLASH_SR register Write the option byte value in the FLASH_OPTCR and/or FLASH_OPTCR1 register. Set the option start bit (OPTSTRT) in the FLASH_OPTCR register Wait for the BSY bit to be cleared

The value of an option byte is automatically modified by first erasing the user configuration sector and then programming all the option bytes with the values contained in the FLASH_OPTCR and FLASH_OPTCR1 registers.

71/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

3.6.3

Read protection (RDP)

The user area in the Flash memory can be protected against read operations by an entrusted code. Three read protection levels are defined:

Level 0: no read protection When the read protection level is set to Level 0 by writing 0xAA into the read protection option byte (RDP), all read/write operations (if no write protection is set) from/to the Flash memory or the backup SRAM are possible in all boot configurations (Flash user boot, debug or boot from RAM).

Level 1: read protection enabled It is the default read protection level after option byte erase. The read protection Level 1 is activated by writing any value (except for 0xAA and 0xCC used to set Level 0 and Level 2, respectively) into the RDP option byte. When the read protection Level 1 is set: No access (read, erase, program) to Flash memory or backup SRAM can be performed while the debug feature is connected or while booting from RAM or system memory bootloader. A bus error is generated in case of read request. When booting from Flash memory, accesses (read, erase, program) to Flash memory and backup SRAM from user code are allowed.

When Level 1 is active, programming the protection option byte (RDP) to Level 0 causes the Flash memory and the backup SRAM to be mass-erased. As a result the user code area is cleared before the read protection is removed. The mass erase only erases the user code area. The other option bytes including write protections remain unchanged from before the mass-erase operation. The OTP area is not affected by mass erase and remains unchanged. Mass erase is performed only when Level 1 is active and Level 0 requested. When the protection level is increased (0->1, 1->2, 0->2) there is no mass erase.

Level 2: debug/chip read protection disabled The read protection Level 2 is activated by writing 0xCC to the RDP option byte. When the read protection Level 2 is set: All protections provided by Level 1 are active. Booting from RAM or system memory bootloader is no more allowed. JTAG, SWV (single-wire viewer), ETM, and boundary scan are disabled. User option bytes can no longer be changed. When booting from Flash memory, accesses (read, erase and program) to Flash memory and backup SRAM from user code are allowed.

Memory read protection Level 2 is an irreversible operation. When Level 2 is activated, the level of protection cannot be decreased to Level 0 or Level 1. Note: The JTAG port is permanently disabled when Level 2 is active (acting as a JTAG fuse). As a consequence, boundary scan cannot be performed. STMicroelectronics is not able to perform analysis on defective parts on which the Level 2 protection has been set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

72/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface Table 13. Access versus read protection level
Protection Level Debug features, Boot from RAM or from System memory bootloader Read Main Flash Memory and Backup SRAM Option Bytes Level 2 Level 1 OTP Level 2 NO NA YES NO NO NA YES NO Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 NO NO YES Write Erase NO(1)

RM0090

Booting from Flash memory Read Write YES YES YES Erase

Memory area

NA NA

1. The main Flash memory and backup SRAM are only erased when the RDP changes from level 1 to 0. The OTP area remains unchanged.

Figure 5 shows how to go from one RDP level to another. Figure 5. RDP levels
RDP /= AAh & /= CCh Others options modified

Write options including RDP = CCh

Level 1 RDP /= AAh RDP /= CCh default Write optionsincluding RDP /= CCh & /= AAh

Write options including RDP = AAh

L ev e l 2 RDP = CCh Write options including RDP = CCh

L ev e l 0 RDP = AA h

Options write (RDP level increase) includes - Options erase - New options program Options write (RDP level decrease) includes - Mass erase - Options erase - New options program

RDP = AAh Others option(s) modified Options write (RDP level identical) includes - Options erase - New options program
ai16045

3.6.4

Write protections
Up to 24 user sectors in Flash memory can be protected against unwanted write operations due to loss of program counter contexts. When the non-write protection nWRPi bit (0 i 11) in the FLASH_OPTCR or FLASH_OPTCR1 registers is low, the corresponding

73/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface sector cannot be erased or programmed. Consequently, a mass erase cannot be performed if one of the sectors is write-protected. If an erase/program operation to a write-protected part of the Flash memory is attempted (sector protected by write protection bit, OTP part locked or part of the Flash memory that can never be written like the ICP), the write protection error flag (WRPERR) is set in the FLASH_SR register.

Note:

When the memory read protection level is selected (RDP level = 1), it is not possible to program or erase Flash memory sector i if the CPU debug features are connected (JTAG or single wire) or boot code is being executed from RAM, even if nWRPi = 1.

Write protection error flag

If an erase/program operation to a write protected area of the Flash memory is performed, the Write Protection Error flag (WRPERR) is set in the FLASH_SR register. If an erase operation is requested, the WRPERR bit is set when:

Mass, bank, sector erase are configured (MER or MER/MER1 and SER = 1) A sector erase is requested and the Sector Number SNB field is not valid A mass erase is requested while at least one of the user sector is write protected by option bit (MER or MER/MER1 = 1 and nWRPi = 0 with 0 i 11 bits in the FLASH_OPTCRx register A sector erase is requested on a write protected sector. (SER = 1, SNB = i and nWRPi = 0 with 0 i 11 bits in the FLASH_OPTCRx register) The Flash memory is readout protected and an intrusion is detected. A write operation is performed on system memory or on the reserved part of the user specific sector. A write operation is performed to the user configuration sector A write operation is performed on a sector write protected by option bit. A write operation is requested on an OTP area which is already locked The Flash memory is read protected and an intrusion is detected.

If a program operation is requested, the WRPERR bit is set when:

3.7

One-time programmable bytes

Table 14 shows the organization of the one-time programmable (OTP) part of the OTP area. Table 14.
Block 0 OTP0 OTP1 1 OTP1 . . . OTP1 . . . OTP1 OTP1 0x1FFF 7830 . . . OTP0 OTP1 OTP0 OTP1 OTP0 OTP1 0x1FFF 7810 0x1FFF 7820

OTP area organization

[128:96] OTP0 [95:64] OTP0 [63:32] OTP0 [31:0] OTP0 Address byte 0 0x1FFF 7800

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

74/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface Table 14.

Block 15 OTP15 Lock block LOCKB15 ... LOCKB12 OTP15 LOCKB11 ... LOCKB8 OTP15 LOCKB7 ... LOCKB4 OTP15 LOCKB3 ... LOCKB0

RM0090

OTP area organization (continued)

[128:96] OTP15 [95:64] OTP15 [63:32] OTP15 [31:0] OTP15 Address byte 0 0x1FFF 79E0 0x1FFF 79F0 0x1FFF 7A00

The OTP area is divided into 16 OTP data blocks of 32 bytes and one lock OTP block of 16 bytes. The OTP data and lock blocks cannot be erased. The lock block contains 16 bytes LOCKBi (0 i 15) to lock the corresponding OTP data block (blocks 0 to 15). Each OTP data block can be programmed until the value 0x00 is programmed in the corresponding OTP lock byte. The lock bytes must only contain 0x00 and 0xFF values, otherwise the OTP bytes might not be taken into account correctly.

3.8
3.8.1

Flash interface registers

Flash access control register (FLASH_ACR)
The Flash access control register is used to enable/disable the acceleration features and control the Flash memory access time according to CPU frequency. Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14 Reserved

13

12

11

10 DCEN rw

9 ICEN rw

8 PRFTEN

5 Reserved

1 LATENCY

DCRST ICRST rw w

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:11 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 12 DCRST: Data cache reset 0: Data cache is not reset 1: Data cache is reset This bit can be written only when the D cache is disabled. Bit 11 ICRST: Instruction cache reset 0: Instruction cache is not reset 1: Instruction cache is reset This bit can be written only when the I cache is disabled. Bit 10 DCEN: Data cache enable 0: Data cache is disabled 1: Data cache is enabled Bit 9 ICEN: Instruction cache enable 0: Instruction cache is disabled 1: Instruction cache is enabled

75/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

Bit 8 PRFTEN: Prefetch enable 0: Prefetch is disabled 1: Prefetch is enabled Bits 7:3 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bits 2:0 LATENCY: Latency These bits represent the ratio of the CPU clock period to the Flash memory access time. 000: Zero wait state 001: One wait state 010: Two wait states 011: Three wait states 100: Four wait states 101: Five wait states 110: Six wait states 111: Seven wait states

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

76/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

3.8.2

Flash key register (FLASH_KEYR)

The Flash key register is used to allow access to the Flash control register and so, to allow program and erase operations. Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word access

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

KEY[31:16] w 15 w 14 w 13 w 12 w 11 w 10 w 9 w 8 w 7 KEY[15:0] w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w 6 w 5 w 4 w 3 w 2 w 1 w 0

Bits 31:0 FKEYR: FPEC key The following values must be programmed consecutively to unlock the FLASH_CR register and allow programming/erasing it: a) KEY1 = 0x45670123 b) KEY2 = 0xCDEF89AB

3.8.3

Flash option key register (FLASH_OPTKEYR)

The Flash option key register is used to allow program and erase operations in the user configuration sector. Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word access

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

OPTKEYR[31:16 w 15 w 14 w 13 w 12 w 11 w 10 w 9 w 8 w 7 w 6 w 5 w 4 w 3 w 2 w 1 w 0

OPTKEYR[15:0] w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w

Bits 31:0 OPTKEYR: Option byte key The following values must be programmed consecutively to unlock the FLASH_OPTCR register and allow programming it: a) OPTKEY1 = 0x08192A3B b) OPTKEY2 = 0x4C5D6E7F

77/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

3.8.4

Flash status register (FLASH_SR)

The Flash status register gives information on ongoing program and erase operations. Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16 BSY r

15

14

13

12

11

10

1 OPERR

0 EOP rc_w1

PGSERR PGPERR PGAERR WRPERR Reserved rc_w1 rc_w1 rc_w1 rc_w1 Reserved

rc_w1

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 16 BSY: Busy This bit indicates that a Flash memory operation is in progress. It is set at the beginning of a Flash memory operation and cleared when the operation finishes or an error occurs. 0: no Flash memory operation ongoing 1: Flash memory operation ongoing Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 7 PGSERR: Programming sequence error Set by hardware when a write access to the Flash memory is performed by the code while the control register has not been correctly configured. Cleared by writing 1. Bit 6 PGPERR: Programming parallelism error Set by hardware when the size of the access (byte, half-word, word, double word) during the program sequence does not correspond to the parallelism configuration PSIZE (x8, x16, x32, x64). Cleared by writing 1. Bit 5 PGAERR: Programming alignment error Set by hardware when the data to program cannot be contained in the same 128-bit Flash memory row. Cleared by writing 1. Bit 4 WRPERR: Write protection error Set by hardware when an address to be erased/programmed belongs to a write-protected part of the Flash memory. Cleared by writing 1.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

78/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 1 OPERR: Operation error Set by hardware when a flash operation (programming / erase /read) request is detected and can not be run because of parallelism, alignment, or write protection error. This bit is set only if error interrupts are enabled (ERRIE = 1). Bit 0 EOP: End of operation Set by hardware when one or more Flash memory operations (program/erase) has/have completed successfully. It is set only if the end of operation interrupts are enabled (EOPIE = 1). Cleared by writing a 1.

3.8.5

Flash control register (FLASH_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

The Flash control register is used to configure and start Flash memory operations. Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x8000 0000 Access: no wait state when no Flash memory operation is ongoing, word, half-word and byte access.

31 LOCK

30

29

28 Reserved

27

26

25 ERRIE rw

24 EOPIE

23

22

21

20 Reserved

19

18

17

16 STRT rs

rs 15 14 13 12 11 10

rw 8 7 Res. 6 5 4 3 2 MER rw rw 1 SER rw

0 PG rw

PSIZE[1:0] Reserved rw rw rw

SNB[3:0] rw rw

Bit 31 LOCK: Lock Write to 1 only. When it is set, this bit indicates that the FLASH_CR register is locked. It is cleared by hardware after detecting the unlock sequence. In the event of an unsuccessful unlock operation, this bit remains set until the next reset. Bits 31:26 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 25 ERRIE: Error interrupt enable This bit enables the interrupt generation when the OPERR bit in the FLASH_SR register is set to 1. 0: Error interrupt generation disabled 1: Error interrupt generation enabled Bit 24 EOPIE: End of operation interrupt enable This bit enables the interrupt generation when the EOP bit in the FLASH_SR register goes to 1. 0: Interrupt generation disabled 1: Interrupt generation enabled Bits 23:17 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 16 STRT: Start This bit triggers an erase operation when set. It is set only by software and cleared when the BSY bit is cleared.

79/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bits 9:8 PSIZE: Program size These bits select the program parallelism. 00 program x8 01 program x16 10 program x32 11 program x64 Bits 6:3 SNB: Sector number These bits select the sector to erase. 0000 sector 0 0001 sector 1 ... 1011 sector 11 Others not allowed Bit 2 MER: Mass Erase Erase activated for all user sectors. Bit 1 SER: Sector Erase Sector Erase activated. Bit 0 PG: Programming Flash programming activated.

3.8.6

Flash control register (FLASH_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

The Flash control register is used to configure and start Flash memory operations. Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x8000 0000 Access: no wait state when no Flash memory operation is ongoing, word, half-word and byte access.

31 LOCK

30

29

28 Reserved

27

26

25 ERRIE rw

24 EOPIE

23

22

21

20 Reserved

19

18

17

16 STRT rs

rs 15 MER1 Reserved rw 14 13 12 11 10

rw 8 7 6 5 SNB[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw 4 3 2 MER rw 1 SER rw

0 PG rw

PSIZE[1:0] rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

80/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Bit 31 LOCK: Lock Write to 1 only. When it is set, this bit indicates that the FLASH_CR register is locked. It is cleared by hardware after detecting the unlock sequence. In the event of an unsuccessful unlock operation, this bit remains set until the next reset. Bits 31:26 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 25 ERRIE: Error interrupt enable This bit enables the interrupt generation when the OPERR bit in the FLASH_SR register is set to 1. 0: Error interrupt generation disabled 1: Error interrupt generation enabled Bit 24 EOPIE: End of operation interrupt enable This bit enables the interrupt generation when the EOP bit in the FLASH_SR register goes to 1. 0: Interrupt generation disabled 1: Interrupt generation enabled Bits 23:17 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bit 16 STRT: Start This bit triggers an erase operation when set. It is set only by software and cleared when the BSY bit is cleared. Bit 15 MER1: Mass Erase of sectors 12 to 23 Erase activated of user sectors 12 to 23. Bits 14:10 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bits 9:8 PSIZE: Program size These bits select the program parallelism. 00 program x8 01 program x16 10 program x32 11 program x64 Bits 7:3 SNB: Sector number These bits select the sector to erase. 0000: sector 0 0001: sector 1 ... 01011: sector 11 01100: not allowed 01101: not allowed 01110: not allowed 01111: not allowed 10000: section 12 10001: section 13 ... 11011 sector 23 11100: not allowed 11101: not allowed 11110: not allowed 11111: not allowed

81/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

Bit 2 MER: Mass Erase of bank 1 sectors Erase activated of bank 1 sectors. Bit 1 SER: Sector Erase Sector Erase activated. Bit 0 PG: Programming Flash programming activated.

3.8.7

Flash option control register (FLASH_OPTCR)

The FLASH_OPTCR register is used to modify the user option bytes. Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0FFF AAED. The option bits are loaded with values from Flash memory at reset release. Access: no wait state when no Flash memory operation is ongoing, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

nWRP[11:0] Reserved rw 15 14 13 12 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 WDG_ SW rw rw 4 Reserv ed rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

RDP[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

nRST_ nRST_ STDBY STOP rw rw

BOR_LEV rw rw

OPTST OPTLO RT CK rs rs

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bits 27:16 nWRP: Not write protect These bits contain the value of the write-protection option bytes of sectors after reset. They can be written to program a new write protect value into Flash memory. 0: Write protection active on selected sector 1: Write protection not active on selected sector Bits 15:8 RDP: Read protect These bits contain the value of the read-protection option level after reset. They can be written to program a new read protection value into Flash memory. 0xAA: Level 0, read protection not active 0xCC: Level 2, chip read protection active Others: Level 1, read protection of memories active Bits 7:5 USER: User option bytes These bits contain the value of the user option byte after reset. They can be written to program a new user option byte value into Flash memory. Bit 7: nRST_STDBY Bit 6: nRST_STOP Bit 5: WDG_SW Note: When changing the WDG mode from hardware to software or from software to hardware, a system reset is required to make the change effective. Bit 4 Reserved, must be kept cleared.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

82/1422

Embedded Flash memory interface

RM0090

Bits 3:2 BOR_LEV: BOR reset Level These bits contain the supply level threshold that activates/releases the reset. They can be written to program a new BOR level. By default, BOR is off. When the supply voltage (VDD) drops below the selected BOR level, a device reset is generated. 00: BOR Level 3 (VBOR3), reset threshold level for 2.70 to 3.60 V voltage range 01: BOR Level 2 (VBOR2), reset threshold level for 2.40 to 2.70 V voltage range 10: BOR Level 1 (VBOR1), reset threshold level for 2.10 to 2.40 V voltage range 11: BOR off (VBOR0), reset threshold level for 1.80 to 2.10 V voltage range Note: For full details about BOR characteristics, refer to the Electrical characteristics section in the device datasheet. Bit 1 OPTSTRT: Option start This bit triggers a user option operation when set. It is set only by software and cleared when the BSY bit is cleared. Bit 0 OPTLOCK: Option lock Write to 1 only. When this bit is set, it indicates that the FLASH_OPTCR register is locked. This bit is cleared by hardware after detecting the unlock sequence. In the event of an unsuccessful unlock operation, this bit remains set until the next reset.

3.8.8

Flash option control register (FLASH_OPTCR1) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

This register is available only on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx. The FLASH_OPTCR1 register is used to modify the user option bytes for sectors 12 to 23. Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0FFF 0000. The option bits are loaded with values from Flash memory at reset release. Access: no wait state when no Flash memory operation is ongoing, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

nWRP[11:0] Reserved rw 15 14 13 12 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 Reserved rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept cleared. Bits 27:16 nWRP: Not write protect These bits contain the value of the write-protection option bytes for sectors 12 to 23 after reset. They can be written to program a new write protect value into Flash memory. 0: Write protection active 1: Write protection not active Bits 15:0 Reserved, must be kept cleared.

83/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Embedded Flash memory interface

3.8.9
Table 15.
Offset

Flash interface register map

Flash register map and reset values (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx)
Register
FLASH_ACR Reset value FLASH_KEY R Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 KEY[31:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRFTEN DCRST

ICRST

DCEN

ICEN

0x00

0x04

0x08

FLASH_OPT KEYR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0

WRPERR

PGSERR

PGPERR

PGAERR

Reserved

OPERR 0 SER 0 OPTSTRT 1 0 0 0 0 OPERR 0 SER 0

0x0C

FLASH_SR

Reserved

Reserved

Reset value EOPIE LOCK FLASH_CR Reset value

0 PSIZ E[1:0 ] 0 0 STRT

0 Reserved

0 MER

0x10

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

SNB[3:0] 0 nRST_STOP 0 WDG_SW 0 0

nRST_STDBY

0x14

FLASH_OPT CR

Reserved

nWRP[11:0]

RDP[7:0]

Reset value

Reserved

Table 16.
Offset

Flash register map and reset values (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)

Register
FLASH_ACR Reset value PRFTEN DCRST

ICRST

DCEN

ICEN

0x00

0x04

FLASH_KEYR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x08

FLASH_OPTKE YR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0

WRPERR

PGSERR

PGPERR

PGAERR

Reserved

0x0C

FLASH_SR

Reserved

Reserved

Reset value EOPIE LOCK

0 PSIZE[1:0] MER1 STRT

0 MER

0x10

FLASH_CR

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

SNB[4:0]

Reset value

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

84/1422

PG 0

EOP 0

BSY

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved LATENCY 0 0 0 KEY[31:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 KEY[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OPTKEYR[31:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OPTKEYR[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

OPTLOCK 1

BOR_LEV

PG 0

EOP 0

BSY

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved LATENCY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 KEY[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OPTKEYR[31:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OPTKEYR[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Embedded Flash memory interface Table 16.

Offset

RM0090

Flash register map and reset values (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) (continued)
Register
nRST_STDBY

nRST_STOP

Reserved

0x14

FLASH_OPTCR

nWRP[11:0]

RDP[7:0]

Reset value FLASH_ OPTCR1 Reset value Reserved

Reserved

0x18

nWRP[11:0] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Reserved

85/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

OPTLOCK 1

OPTSTRT

WDG_SW

BOR_LEV

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

CRC calculation unit

CRC calculation unit

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

4.1

CRC introduction
The CRC (cyclic redundancy check) calculation unit is used to get a CRC code from a 32-bit data word and a fixed generator polynomial. Among other applications, CRC-based techniques are used to verify data transmission or storage integrity. In the scope of the EN/IEC 60335-1 standard, they offer a means of verifying the Flash memory integrity. The CRC calculation unit helps compute a signature of the software during runtime, to be compared with a reference signature generated at linktime and stored at a given memory location.

4.2

CRC main features

Uses CRC-32 (Ethernet) polynomial: 0x4C11DB7 X32 + X26 + X23 + X22 + X16 + X12 + X11 + X10 +X8 + X7 + X5 + X4 + X2+ X +1 Single input/output 32-bit data register CRC computation done in 4 AHB clock cycles (HCLK) General-purpose 8-bit register (can be used for temporary storage)

The block diagram is shown in Figure 6. Figure 6. CRC calculation unit block diagram
AHB bus 32-bit (read access) Data register (output)

CRC computation (polynomial: 0x4C11DB7) 32-bit (write access) Data register (input)
ai14968

4.3

CRC functional description

The CRC calculation unit mainly consists of a single 32-bit data register, which:

is used as an input register to enter new data in the CRC calculator (when writing into the register) holds the result of the previous CRC calculation (when reading the register)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

86/1422

CRC calculation unit

RM0090

Each write operation into the data register creates a combination of the previous CRC value and the new one (CRC computation is done on the whole 32-bit data word, and not byte per byte). The write operation is stalled until the end of the CRC computation, thus allowing back-toback write accesses or consecutive write and read accesses. The CRC calculator can be reset to 0xFFFF FFFF with the RESET control bit in the CRC_CR register. This operation does not affect the contents of the CRC_IDR register.

4.4

CRC registers
The CRC calculation unit contains two data registers and a control register.The peripheral The CRC registers have to be accessed by words (32 bits).

4.4.1

Data register (CRC_DR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0xFFFF FFFF

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

DR [31:16] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

DR [15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:0 Data register bits Used as an input register when writing new data into the CRC calculator. Holds the previous CRC calculation result when it is read.

4.4.2

Independent data register (CRC_IDR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IDR[7:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

87/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

CRC calculation unit

Bits 7:0 General-purpose 8-bit data register bits Can be used as a temporary storage location for one byte. This register is not affected by CRC resets generated by the RESET bit in the CRC_CR register.

4.4.3

Control register (CRC_CR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Reserved w 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RESET

Bits 31:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 RESET bit Resets the CRC calculation unit and sets the data register to 0xFFFF FFFF. This bit can only be set, it is automatically cleared by hardware.

4.4.4

CRC register map

The following table provides the CRC register map and reset values. Table 17.
Offset
0x00 0x04 0x08

CRC calculation unit register map and reset values

Register 31-24 23-16 15-8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

CRC_DR Reset value CRC_IDR Reset value CRC_CR Reset value Reserved

Data register 0xFFFF FFFF Independent data register 0x00 Reserved RESET 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

88/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

Power controller (PWR)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

5.1

Power supplies
The device requires a 1.8-to-3.6 V operating voltage supply (VDD). An embedded linear voltage regulator is used to supply the internal 1.2 V digital power. The real-time clock (RTC), the RTC backup registers, and the backup SRAM (BKP SRAM) can be powered from the VBAT voltage when the main VDD supply is powered off.

Note:

Depending on the operating power supply range, some peripheral may be used with limited functionality and performance. For more details refer to section "General operating conditions" in STM32F4xx datasheets. Power supply overview
VBAT VBAT = 1.65 to 3.6V Power switch Backup circuitry (OSC32K,RTC, Wakeup logic Backup registers, backup RAM) Level shifter

Figure 7.

OUT GPIOs IN 2 2.2 F VDD 15 100 nF + 1 4.7 F VCAP_1 VCAP_2

IO Logic Kernel logic (CPU, digital & RAM)

VDD 1/2/...14/15 VSS 1/2/...14/15

Voltage regulator

BYPASS_REG PDR_ON VDD VREF 100 nF + 1 F 100 nF + 1 F VDDA VREF+ VREFVSSA ADC Analog: RCs, PLL,.. Reset controller

Flash memory

MS19911V2

1. VDDA and VSSA must be connected to VDD and VSS, respectively.

89/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR)

5.1.1

Independent A/D converter supply and reference voltage

To improve conversion accuracy, the ADC has an independent power supply which can be separately filtered and shielded from noise on the PCB.

The ADC voltage supply input is available on a separate VDDA pin. An isolated supply ground connection is provided on pin VSSA.

To ensure a better accuracy of low voltage inputs, the user can connect a separate external reference voltage ADC input on VREF. The voltage on VREF ranges from 1.8 V to VDDA.

5.1.2

Battery backup domain

Backup domain description
To retain the content of the RTC backup registers, backup SRAM, and supply the RTC when VDD is turned off, VBAT pin can be connected to an optional standby voltage supplied by a battery or by another source. To allow the RTC to operate even when the main digital supply (VDD) is turned off, the VBAT pin powers the following blocks:

The RTC The LSE oscillator The backup SRAM when the low power backup regulator is enabled PC13 to PC15 I/Os, plus PI8 I/O (when available)

The switch to the VBAT supply is controlled by the power-down reset embedded in the Reset block.

Warning:

During tRSTTEMPO (temporization at VDD startup) or after a PDR is detected, the power switch between VBAT and VDD remains connected to VBAT. During the startup phase, if VDD is established in less than tRSTTEMPO (Refer to the datasheet for the value of tRSTTEMPO) and VDD > VBAT + 0.6 V, a current may be injected into VBAT through an internal diode connected between VDD and the power switch (VBAT). If the power supply/battery connected to the VBAT pin cannot support this current injection, it is strongly recommended to connect an external low-drop diode between this power supply and the VBAT pin.

If no external battery is used in the application, it is recommended to connect the VBAT pin to VDD with a 100 nF external decoupling ceramic capacitor in parallel. When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected to VDD), the following functions are available:

PC14 and PC15 can be used as either GPIO or LSE pins PC13 can be used as a GPIO or as the RTC_AF1 pin (refer to Table 30: RTC_AF1 pin for more details about this pin configuration)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

90/1422

Power controller (PWR) Note:

RM0090

Due to the fact that the switch only sinks a limited amount of current (3 mA), the use of GPIOs PI8 and PC13 to PC15 are restricted: only one I/O at a time can be used as an output, the speed has to be limited to 2 MHz with a maximum load of 30 pF and these I/Os must not be used as a current source (e.g. to drive an LED). When the backup domain is supplied by VBAT (analog switch connected to VBAT because VDD is not present), the following functions are available:

PC14 and PC15 can be used as LSE pins only PC13 can be used as the RTC_AF1 pin (refer to Table 30: RTC_AF1 pin for more details about this pin configuration) PI8 can be used as RTC_AF2

Backup domain access

After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup register and backup SRAM) is protected against possible unwanted write accesses. To enable access to the backup domain, proceed as follows:

Access to the RTC and RTC backup registers Enable the power interface clock by setting the PWREN bits in the RCC_APB1ENR register (see Section 6.3.15 and Section 6.3.16 for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx, respectively) Set the DBP bit in the PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx to enable access to the backup domain Select the RTC clock source: see Section 6.2.8: RTC/AWU clock Enable the RTC clock by programming the RTCEN [15] bit in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR) Access to the backup SRAM Enable the power interface clock by setting the PWREN bits in the RCC_APB1ENR register (see Section 6.3.15 and Section 6.3.16 for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx, respectively) Set the DBP bit in the PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx to enable access to the backup domain Enable the backup SRAM clock by setting BKPSRAMEN bit in the RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB1ENR).

1.

2.

3. 4.

1.

2.

3.

RTC and RTC backup registers

The real-time clock (RTC) is an independent BCD timer/counter. The RTC provides a timeof-day clock/calendar, two programmable alarm interrupts, and a periodic programmable wakeup flag with interrupt capability. The RTC contains 20 backup data registers (80 bytes) which are reset when a tamper detection event occurs. For more details refer to Section 23: Real-time clock (RTC).

Backup SRAM
The backup domain includes 4 Kbytes of backup SRAM accessible only from the CPU, and address in 32-bit, 16-bit or 8-bit mode. Its content is retained even in Standby or VBAT mode when the low power backup regulator is enabled. It can be considered as an internal EEPROM when VBAT is always present.

91/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR) When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected to VDD), the backup SRAM is powered from VDD which replaces the VBAT power supply to save battery life. When the backup domain is supplied by VBAT (analog switch connected to VBAT because VDD is not present), the backup SRAM is powered by a dedicated low power regulator. This regulator can be ON or OFF depending whether the application needs the backup SRAM function in Standby and VBAT modes or not. The power-down of this regulator is controlled by a dedicated bit, the BRE control bit of the PWR_CSR register (see Section 5.4.3: PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR)). The backup SRAM is not mass erased by an tamper event. It is read protected to prevent confidential data, such as cryptographic private key, from being accessed. The backup SRAM can be erased only through the Flash interface when a protection level change from level 1 to level 0 is requested. Refer to the description of Read protection (RDP) in the Flash programming manual. Figure 8. Backup domain

Power switch Voltage regulator 3.3 -> 1.2 V 1.2 V domain

LP voltage regulator 3.3 -> 1.2 V

Backup SRAM interface

Backup SRAM 1.2 V RTC LSE 32.768 Hz

Backup domain

MS30430V1

5.1.3

Voltage regulator
An embedded linear voltage regulator supplies all the digital circuitries except for the backup domain and the Standby circuitry. The regulator output voltage is around 1.2 V. This voltage regulator requires two external capacitors to be connected to two dedicated pins, VCAP_1 and VCAP_2 available in all packages. Specific pins must be connected either to VSS or VDD to activate or deactivate the voltage regulator. These pins depend on the package.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

92/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

When activated by software, the voltage regulator is always enabled after Reset. It works in three different modes depending on the application modes.

In Run mode, the regulator supplies full power to the 1.2 V domain (core, memories and digital peripherals). In this mode, the regulator output voltage (around 1.2 V) can be scaled by software to different voltage values: For STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx Scale 1 or scale 2 can be configured on the fly through VOS (bit 15 of the PWR_CR register). For STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx Scale 1, scale 2, or scale 3 can be configured through VOS[1:0] bits of the PWR_CR register). The scale can be modified only when the PLL is OFF and the HSI or HSE clock source is selected as system clock source. The new value programmed is active only when the PLL is ON. Voltage scale 3 is automatically selected when PLL is OFF (see Section 5.4.2: PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx). The voltage scaling allows optimizing the power consumption when the device is clocked below the maximum system frequency.

In Stop mode the regulator supplies low power to the 1.2 V domain, preserving the content of registers and internal SRAM. For STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx The programmed voltage scale remains the same during Stop mode (see Section 5.4.1: PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx. For STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx Voltage scale 3 is automatically selected when the microcontroller enters Stop mode (see Section 5.4.2: PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx).

In Standby mode, the regulator is powered down. The content of the registers and SRAM are lost except for the Standby circuitry and the backup domain.

Note:

For more details, refer to the voltage regulator section in the STM32F4xx datasheets.

93/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR)

5.2
5.2.1

Power supply supervisor

Power-on reset (POR)/power-down reset (PDR)
The device has an integrated POR/PDR circuitry that allows proper operation starting from to 1.8 V. The device remains in Reset mode when VDD/VDDA is below a specified threshold, VPOR/PDR, without the need for an external reset circuit. For more details concerning the power on/power-down reset threshold, refer to the electrical characteristics of the datasheet. Figure 9. Power-on reset/power-down reset waveform
VDD/VDDA

PDR 40 mV hysteresis

PDR

Temporization tRSTTEMPO

Reset
MS30431V1

5.2.2

Brownout reset (BOR)

During power on, the Brownout reset (BOR) keeps the device under reset until the supply voltage reaches the specified VBOR threshold. VBOR is configured through device option bytes. By default, BOR is off. 4 programmable VBOR thresholds can be selected.

BOR off (VBOR0): reset threshold level for 1.8 to 2.10 V voltage range BOR Level 1 (VBOR1): reset threshold level for 2.10 to 2.40 V voltage range BOR Level 2 (VBOR2): reset threshold level for 2.40 to 2.70 V voltage range BOR Level 3 (VBOR3): reset threshold level for 2.70 to 3.60 V voltage range

When the supply voltage (VDD) drops below the selected VBOR threshold, a device reset is generated. BOR can be disabled by programming the device option bytes. To disable the BOR function, VDD must have been higher than VBOR0 to start the device option byte programming sequence. The power-down is then monitored by the PDR (see Section 5.2.1: Power-on reset (POR)/power-down reset (PDR))

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

94/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

The BOR threshold hysteresis is ~100 mV (between the rising and the falling edge of the supply voltage). Figure 10. BOR thresholds
VDD/VDDA

BOR threshold

100 mV hysteresis

Reset

MS30432V1

5.2.3

Programmable voltage detector (PVD)

You can use the PVD to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a threshold selected by the PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx. The PVD is enabled by setting the PVDE bit. A PVDO flag is available, in the PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR), to indicate if VDD is higher or lower than the PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI line16 and can generate an interrupt if enabled through the EXTI registers. The PVD output interrupt can be generated when VDD drops below the PVD threshold and/or when VDD rises above the PVD threshold depending on EXTI line16 rising/falling edge configuration. As an example the service routine could perform emergency shutdown tasks.

95/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 11. PVD thresholds

VDD

Power controller (PWR)

PVD threshold

100 mV hysteresis

PVD output

MS30433V2

5.3

Low-power modes
By default, the microcontroller is in Run mode after a system or a power-on reset. In Run mode the CPU is clocked by HCLK and the program code is executed. Several low-power modes are available to save power when the CPU does not need to be kept running, for example when waiting for an external event. It is up to the user to select the mode that gives the best compromise between low-power consumption, short startup time and available wakeup sources. The devices feature three low-power modes:

Sleep mode (Cortex-M4F core stopped, peripherals kept running) Stop mode (all clocks are stopped) Standby mode (1.2 V domain powered off)

In addition, the power consumption in Run mode can be reduce by one of the following means:

Slowing down the system clocks Gating the clocks to the APBx and AHBx peripherals when they are unused.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

96/1422

Power controller (PWR) Table 18. Low-power mode summary

Effect on 1.2 V domain clocks CPU CLK OFF no effect on other clocks or analog clock sources Effect on VDD domain clocks

RM0090

Mode name

Entry

Wakeup

Voltage regulator

Sleep (Sleep now or Sleep-on-exit)

WFI WFE

Any interrupt Wakeup event

None

ON

Stop

ON or in low- power mode (depends on PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for PDDS and LPDS HSI and Any EXTI line (configured STM32F405xx/07xx bits + All 1.2 V domain HSE in the EXTI registers, and SLEEPDEEP bit clocks OFF oscillators internal and external lines) STM32F415xx/17xx + WFI or WFE OFF and PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A or PDDS bit + Alarm B), RTC Wakeup SLEEPDEEP bit event, RTC tamper events, RTC time stamp event, + WFI or WFE external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset

Standby

HSI and HSE All 1.2 V domain clocks OFF oscillators OFF

OFF

5.3.1

Slowing down system clocks

In Run mode the speed of the system clocks (SYSCLK, HCLK, PCLK1, PCLK2) can be reduced by programming the prescaler registers. These prescalers can also be used to slow down peripherals before entering Sleep mode. For more details refer to Section 6.3.3: RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR).

5.3.2

Peripheral clock gating

In Run mode, the HCLKx and PCLKx for individual peripherals and memories can be stopped at any time to reduce power consumption. To further reduce power consumption in Sleep mode the peripheral clocks can be disabled prior to executing the WFI or WFE instructions. Peripheral clock gating is controlled by the AHB1 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB1ENR), AHB2 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB2ENR), AHB3 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB3ENR) (see Section 6.3.12: RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB1ENR), Section 6.3.13: RCC AHB2 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB2ENR)), Section 6.3.14: RCC AHB3 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB3ENR)).

97/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR) Disabling the peripherals clocks in Sleep mode can be performed automatically by resetting the corresponding bit in RCC_AHBxLPENR and RCC_APBxLPENR registers.

5.3.3

Sleep mode
Entering Sleep mode
The Sleep mode is entered by executing the WFI (Wait For Interrupt) or WFE (Wait for Event) instructions. Two options are available to select the Sleep mode entry mechanism, depending on the SLEEPONEXIT bit in the Cortex-M4F System Control register:

Sleep-now: if the SLEEPONEXIT bit is cleared, the MCU enters Sleep mode as soon as WFI or WFE instruction is executed. Sleep-on-exit: if the SLEEPONEXIT bit is set, the MCU enters Sleep mode as soon as it exits the lowest priority ISR.

Refer to Table 19 and Table 20 for details on how to enter Sleep mode.

Exiting Sleep mode

If the WFI instruction is used to enter Sleep mode, any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode. If the WFE instruction is used to enter Sleep mode, the MCU exits Sleep mode as soon as an event occurs. The wakeup event can be generated either by:

Enabling an interrupt in the peripheral control register but not in the NVIC, and enabling the SEVONPEND bit in the Cortex-M4F System Control register. When the MCU resumes from WFE, the peripheral interrupt pending bit and the peripheral NVIC IRQ channel pending bit (in the NVIC interrupt clear pending register) have to be cleared. Or configuring an external or internal EXTI line in event mode. When the CPU resumes from WFE, it is not necessary to clear the peripheral interrupt pending bit or the NVIC IRQ channel pending bit as the pending bit corresponding to the event line is not set.

This mode offers the lowest wakeup time as no time is wasted in interrupt entry/exit. Refer to Table 19 and Table 20 for more details on how to exit Sleep mode. Table 19. Sleep-now entry and exit
Description WFI (Wait for Interrupt) or WFE (Wait for Event) while: SLEEPDEEP = 0 and SLEEPONEXIT = 0 Refer to the Cortex-M4F System Control register. If WFI was used for entry: Interrupt: Refer to Table 45: Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and Table 46: Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx If WFE was used for entry Wakeup event: Refer to Section 10.2.3: Wakeup event management None

Sleep-now mode

Mode entry

Mode exit

Wakeup latency

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

98/1422

Power controller (PWR) Table 20. Sleep-on-exit entry and exit

Description WFI (wait for interrupt) while: SLEEPDEEP = 0 and SLEEPONEXIT = 1 Refer to the Cortex-M4F System Control register.

RM0090

Sleep-on-exit

Mode entry

Mode exit Wakeup latency

Interrupt: refer to Table 45: Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and Table 46: Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx None

5.3.4

Stop mode
The Stop mode is based on the Cortex-M4F deepsleep mode combined with peripheral clock gating. The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode. In Stop mode, all clocks in the 1.2 V domain are stopped, the PLLs, the HSI and the HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register contents are preserved. By setting the FPDS bit in the PWR_CR register, the Flash memory also enters power-down mode when the device enters Stop mode. When the Flash memory is in power-down mode, an additional startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode (see Table 21: Stop operating modes). Table 21. Stop operating modes
LPDS bit 0 FPDS bit 0 Wake-up latency HSI RC startup time HSI RC startup time + Flash wakeup time from Power Down mode HSI RC startup time + regulator wakeup time from LP mode HSI RC startup time + Flash wakeup time from Power Down mode + regulator wakeup time from LP mode

Stop mode STOP MR ( Main regulator)

STOP MR-FPD

STOP LP

STOP LP-FPD

Entering Stop mode

Refer to Table 22 for details on how to enter the Stop mode. To further reduce power consumption in Stop mode, the internal voltage regulator can be put in low power mode. This is configured by the LPDS bit of the PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx.

99/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR) If Flash memory programming is ongoing, the Stop mode entry is delayed until the memory access is finished. If an access to the APB domain is ongoing, The Stop mode entry is delayed until the APB access is finished. In Stop mode, the following features can be selected by programming individual control bits:

Independent watchdog (IWDG): the IWDG is started by writing to its Key register or by hardware option. Once started it cannot be stopped except by a Reset. See Section 18.3 in Section 18: Independent watchdog (IWDG). Real-time clock (RTC): this is configured by the RTCEN bit in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR) Internal RC oscillator (LSI RC): this is configured by the LSION bit in the RCC clock control & status register (RCC_CSR). External 32.768 kHz oscillator (LSE OSC): this is configured by the LSEON bit in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR).

The ADC or DAC can also consume power during the Stop mode, unless they are disabled before entering it. To disable them, the ADON bit in the ADC_CR2 register and the ENx bit in the DAC_CR register must both be written to 0.

Exiting Stop mode

Refer to Table 22 for more details on how to exit Stop mode. When exiting Stop mode by issuing an interrupt or a wakeup event, the HSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock. When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an additional startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode. By keeping the internal regulator ON during Stop mode, the consumption is higher although the startup time is reduced. Table 22. Stop mode entry and exit
Description WFI (Wait for Interrupt) or WFE (Wait for Event) while: Set SLEEPDEEP bit in Cortex-M4F System Control register Clear PDDS bit in Power Control register (PWR_CR) Select the voltage regulator mode by configuring LPDS bit in PWR_CR. Note: To enter the Stop mode, all EXTI Line pending bits (in Pending register (EXTI_PR)), the RTC Alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup, RTC tamper, and RTC time stamp flags, must be reset. Otherwise, the Stop mode entry procedure is ignored and program execution continues. If WFI was used for entry: All EXTI lines configured in Interrupt mode (the corresponding EXTI Interrupt vector must be enabled in the NVIC). Refer to Table 45: Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx on page 250 and Table 46: Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx. If WFE was used for entry: All EXTI Lines configured in event mode. Refer to Section 10.2.3: Wakeup event management on page 257 Table 21: Stop operating modes

Stop mode

Mode entry

Mode exit

Wakeup latency

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

100/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

5.3.5

Standby mode
The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based on the Cortex-M4F deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled. The 1.2 V domain is consequently powered off. The PLLs, the HSI oscillator and the HSE oscillator are also switched off. SRAM and register contents are lost except for registers in the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup register and backup SRAM), and Standby circuitry (see Figure 7).

Entering Standby mode

Refer to Table 23 for more details on how to enter Standby mode. In Standby mode, the following features can be selected by programming individual control bits:

Independent watchdog (IWDG): the IWDG is started by writing to its Key register or by hardware option. Once started it cannot be stopped except by a reset. See Section 18.3 in Section 18: Independent watchdog (IWDG). Real-time clock (RTC): this is configured by the RTCEN bit in the backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR) Internal RC oscillator (LSI RC): this is configured by the LSION bit in the Control/status register (RCC_CSR). External 32.768 kHz oscillator (LSE OSC): this is configured by the LSEON bit in the backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR)

Exiting Standby mode

The microcontroller exits Standby mode when an external Reset (NRST pin), an IWDG Reset, a rising edge on WKUP pin, an RTC alarm, a tamper event, or a time stamp event is detected. All registers are reset after wakeup from Standby except for PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR). After waking up from Standby mode, program execution restarts in the same way as after a Reset (boot pins sampling, vector reset is fetched, etc.). The SBF status flag in the PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR) indicates that the MCU was in Standby mode. Refer to Table 23 for more details on how to exit Standby mode. Table 23. Standby mode entry and exit
Description WFI (Wait for Interrupt) or WFE (Wait for Event) while: Set SLEEPDEEP in Cortex-M4F System Control register Set PDDS bit in Power Control register (PWR_CR) Clear WUF bit in Power Control/Status register (PWR_CSR) Clear the RTC flag corresponding to the chosen wakeup source (RTC Alarm A, RTC Alarm B, RTC wakeup, Tamper or Timestamp flags) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup, tamper event, time stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset. Reset phase.

Standby mode

Mode entry

Mode exit Wakeup latency

101/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR)

I/O states in Standby mode

In Standby mode, all I/O pins are high impedance except for:

Reset pad (still available) RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) if configured for tamper, time stamp, RTC Alarm out, or RTC clock calibration out WKUP pin (PA0), if enabled

Debug mode
By default, the debug connection is lost if the application puts the MCU in Stop or Standby mode while the debug features are used. This is due to the fact that the Cortex-M4F core is no longer clocked. However, by setting some configuration bits in the DBGMCU_CR register, the software can be debugged even when using the low-power modes extensively. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.1: Debug support for low-power modes.

5.3.6

Programming the RTC alternate functions to wake up the device from the Stop and Standby modes
The MCU can be woken up from a low-power mode by an RTC alternate function. The RTC alternate functions are the RTC alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup, RTC tamper event detection and RTC time stamp event detection. These RTC alternate functions can wake up the system from the Stop and Standby lowpower modes. The system can also wake up from low-power modes without depending on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode), by using the RTC alarm or the RTC wakeup events. The RTC provides a programmable time base for waking up from the Stop or Standby mode at regular intervals. For this purpose, two of the three alternate RTC clock sources can be selected by programming the RTCSEL[1:0] bits in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR):

Low-power 32.768 kHz external crystal oscillator (LSE OSC) This clock source provides a precise time base with a very low-power consumption (additional consumption of less than 1 A under typical conditions) Low-power internal RC oscillator (LSI RC) This clock source has the advantage of saving the cost of the 32.768 kHz crystal. This internal RC oscillator is designed to use minimum power.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

102/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

RTC alternate functions to wake up the device from the Stop mode

To wake up the device from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to: a) b) c) Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt or Event modes) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt in the RTC_CR register Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm

To wake up the device from the Stop mode with an RTC tamper or time stamp event, it is necessary to: a) b) c) Configure the EXTI Line 21 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt or Event modes) Enable the RTC time stamp Interrupt in the RTC_CR register or the RTC tamper interrupt in the RTC_TAFCR register Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event

To wake up the device from the Stop mode with an RTC wakeup event, it is necessary to: a) b) c) Configure the EXTI Line 22 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt or Event modes) Enable the RTC wakeup interrupt in the RTC_CR register Configure the RTC to generate the RTC Wakeup event

RTC alternate functions to wake up the device from the Standby mode

To wake up the device from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to: a) b) Enable the RTC alarm interrupt in the RTC_CR register Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm

To wake up the device from the Standby mode with an RTC tamper or time stamp event, it is necessary to: a) b) Enable the RTC time stamp interrupt in the RTC_CR register or the RTC tamper interrupt in the RTC_TAFCR register Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event

To wake up the device from the Standby mode with an RTC wakeup event, it is necessary to: a) b) Enable the RTC wakeup interrupt in the RTC_CR register Configure the RTC to generate the RTC wakeup event

103/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR)

Safe RTC alternate function wakeup flag clearing sequence

If the selected RTC alternate function is set before the PWR wakeup flag (WUTF) is cleared, it will not be detected on the next event as detection is made once on the rising edge. To avoid bouncing on the pins onto which the RTC alternate functions are mapped, and exit correctly from the Stop and Standby modes, it is recommended to follow the sequence below before entering the Standby mode:

When using RTC alarm to wake up the device from the low-power modes: a) b) c) d) e) Disable the RTC alarm interrupt (ALRAIE or ALRBIE bits in the RTC_CR register) Clear the RTC alarm (ALRAF/ALRBF) flag Clear the PWR Wakeup (WUF) flag Enable the RTC alarm interrupt Re-enter the low-power mode Disable the RTC Wakeup interrupt (WUTIE bit in the RTC_CR register) Clear the RTC Wakeup (WUTF) flag Clear the PWR Wakeup (WUF) flag Enable the RTC Wakeup interrupt Re-enter the low power mode Disable the RTC tamper interrupt (TAMPIE bit in the RTC_TAFCR register) Clear the Tamper (TAMP1F/TSF) flag Clear the PWR Wakeup (WUF) flag Enable the RTC tamper interrupt Re-enter the low-power mode Disable the RTC time stamp interrupt (TSIE bit in RTC_CR) Clear the RTC time stamp (TSF) flag Clear the PWR Wakeup (WUF) flag Enable the RTC TimeStamp interrupt Re-enter the low-power mode

When using RTC wakeup to wake up the device from the low-power modes: a) b) c) d) e)

When using RTC tamper to wake up the device from the low-power modes: a) b) c) d) e)

When using RTC time stamp to wake up the device from the low-power modes: a) b) c) d) e)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

104/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

5.4
5.4.1

Power control registers

PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 4000 (reset by wakeup from Standby mode)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 Res. rw 14 VOS Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rc_w1 rc_w1 rw rw 13 12 11 10 9 FPDS 8 DBP 7 6 PLS[2:0] 5 4 PVDE 3 CSBF 2 CWUF 1 PDDS 0 LPDS

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 VOS: Regulator voltage scaling output selection This bit controls the main internal voltage regulator output voltage to achieve a trade-off between performance and power consumption when the device does not operate at the maximum frequency. 0: Scale 2 mode 1: Scale 1 mode (default value at reset) Bits 13:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 FPDS: Flash power-down in Stop mode When set, the Flash memory enters power-down mode when the device enters Stop mode. This allows to achieve a lower consumption in stop mode but a longer restart time. 0: Flash memory not in power-down when the device is in Stop mode 1: Flash memory in power-down when the device is in Stop mode Bit 8 DBP: Disable backup domain write protection In reset state, the RCC_BDCR register, the RTC registers (including the backup registers), and the BRE bit of the PWR_CSR register, are protected against parasitic write access. This bit must be set to enable write access to these registers. 0: Access to RTC and RTC Backup registers and backup SRAM disabled 1: Access to RTC and RTC Backup registers and backup SRAM enabled Bits 7:5 PLS[2:0]: PVD level selection These bits are written by software to select the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector 000: 2.0 V 001: 2.1 V 010: 2.3 V 011: 2.5 V 100: 2.6 V 101: 2.7 V 110: 2.8 V 111: 2.9 V Note: Refer to the electrical characteristics of the datasheet for more details.

105/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR)

Bit 4 PVDE: Power voltage detector enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: PVD disabled 1: PVD enabled Bit 3 CSBF: Clear standby flag This bit is always read as 0. 0: No effect 1: Clear the SBF Standby Flag (write). Bit 2 CWUF: Clear wakeup flag This bit is always read as 0. 0: No effect 1: Clear the WUF Wakeup Flag after 2 System clock cycles Bit 1 PDDS: Power-down deepsleep This bit is set and cleared by software. It works together with the LPDS bit. 0: Enter Stop mode when the CPU enters deepsleep. The regulator status depends on the LPDS bit. 1: Enter Standby mode when the CPU enters deepsleep. Bit 0 LPDS: Low-power deepsleep This bit is set and cleared by software. It works together with the PDDS bit. 0: Voltage regulator on during Stop mode 1: Voltage regulator in low-power mode during Stop mode

5.4.2

PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 C000 (reset by wakeup from Standby mode)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 VOS rw rw 14 13 ADCDC1 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rc_w1 rc_w1 rw rw 12 11 10 9 FPDS 8 DBP 7 6 PLS[2:0] 5 4 PVDE 3 CSBF 2 CWUF 1 PDDS 0 LPDS

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

106/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits15:14 VOS[1:0]: Regulator voltage scaling output selection These bits control the main internal voltage regulator output voltage to achieve a trade-off between performance and power consumption when the device does not operate at the maximum frequency (refer to the STM32F42xx and STM32F43xx datasheets for more details). These bits can be modified only when the PLL is OFF. The new value programmed is active only when the PLL is ON. When the PLL is OFF, the voltage scale 3 is automatically selected. 00: Reserved (Scale 3 mode selected) 01: Scale 3 mode 10: Scale 2 mode 11: Scale 1 mode (reset value) Bit 13 ADCDC1: 0: No effect. 1: Refer to AN4073 for details on how to use this bit. Note: This bit can only be set when operating at supply voltage range 2.7 to 3.6V and when the Prefetch is OFF. Bits 12:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 FPDS: Flash power-down in Stop mode When set, the Flash memory enters power-down mode when the device enters Stop mode. This allows to achieve a lower consumption in stop mode but a longer restart time. 0: Flash memory not in power-down when the device is in Stop mode 1: Flash memory in power-down when the device is in Stop mode Bit 8 DBP: Disable backup domain write protection In reset state, the RCC_BDCR register, the RTC registers (including the backup registers), and the BRE bit of the PWR_CSR register, are protected against parasitic write access. This bit must be set to enable write access to these registers. 0: Access to RTC and RTC Backup registers and backup SRAM disabled 1: Access to RTC and RTC Backup registers and backup SRAM enabled Bits 7:5 PLS[2:0]: PVD level selection These bits are written by software to select the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector 000: 2.0 V 001: 2.1 V 010: 2.3 V 011: 2.5 V 100: 2.6 V 101: 2.7 V 110: 2.8 V 111: 2.9 V Note: Refer to the electrical characteristics of the datasheet for more details. Bit 4 PVDE: Power voltage detector enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: PVD disabled 1: PVD enabled

107/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Power controller (PWR)

Bit 3 CSBF: Clear standby flag This bit is always read as 0. 0: No effect 1: Clear the SBF Standby Flag (write). Bit 2 CWUF: Clear wakeup flag This bit is always read as 0. 0: No effect 1: Clear the WUF Wakeup Flag after 2 System clock cycles Bit 1 PDDS: Power-down deepsleep This bit is set and cleared by software. It works together with the LPDS bit. 0: Enter Stop mode when the CPU enters deepsleep. The regulator status depends on the LPDS bit. 1: Enter Standby mode when the CPU enters deepsleep. Bit 0 LPDS: Low-power deepsleep This bit is set and cleared by software. It works together with the PDDS bit. 0: Voltage regulator on during Stop mode 1: Voltage regulator in low-power mode during Stop mode

5.4.3

PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 (not reset by wakeup from Standby mode) Additional APB cycles are needed to read this register versus a standard APB read.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved Res. 15 Res 14 VOS RDY r 13 12 11 10 9 BRE Reserved rw rw 8 EWUP 7 6 5 4 3 BRR r 2 PVDO r 1 SBF r 0 WUF r

Reserved Res.

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 VOSRDY: Regulator voltage scaling output selection ready bit 0: Not ready 1: Ready Bits 13:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 BRE: Backup regulator enable When set, the Backup regulator (used to maintain backup SRAM content in Standby and VBAT modes) is enabled. If BRE is reset, the backup regulator is switched off. The backup SRAM can still be used but its content will be lost in the Standby and VBAT modes. Once set, the application must wait that the Backup Regulator Ready flag (BRR) is set to indicate that the data written into the RAM will be maintained in the Standby and VBAT modes. 0: Backup regulator disabled 1: Backup regulator enabled Note: This bit is not reset when the device wakes up from Standby mode, by a system reset, or by a power reset.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

108/1422

Power controller (PWR)

RM0090

Bit 8 EWUP: Enable WKUP pin This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: WKUP pin is used for general purpose I/O. An event on the WKUP pin does not wakeup the device from Standby mode. 1: WKUP pin is used for wakeup from Standby mode and forced in input pull down configuration (rising edge on WKUP pin wakes-up the system from Standby mode). Note: This bit is reset by a system reset. Bits 7:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 3 BRR: Backup regulator ready Set by hardware to indicate that the Backup Regulator is ready. 0: Backup Regulator not ready 1: Backup Regulator ready Note: This bit is not reset when the device wakes up from Standby mode or by a system reset or power reset. Bit 2 PVDO: PVD output This bit is set and cleared by hardware. It is valid only if PVD is enabled by the PVDE bit. 0: VDD is higher than the PVD threshold selected with the PLS[2:0] bits. 1: VDD is lower than the PVD threshold selected with the PLS[2:0] bits. Note: The PVD is stopped by Standby mode. For this reason, this bit is equal to 0 after Standby or reset until the PVDE bit is set. Bit 1 SBF: Standby flag This bit is set by hardware and cleared only by a POR/PDR (power-on reset/power-down reset) or by setting the CSBF bit in the PWR_CR register. 0: Device has not been in Standby mode 1: Device has been in Standby mode Bit 0 WUF: Wakeup flag This bit is set by hardware and cleared only by a POR/PDR (power-on reset/power-down reset) or by setting the CWUF bit in the PWR_CR register. 0: No wakeup event occurred 1: A wakeup event was received from the WKUP pin or from the RTC alarm (Alarm A or Alarm B), RTC Tamper event, RTC TimeStamp event or RTC Wakeup). Note: An additional wakeup event is detected if the WKUP pin is enabled (by setting the EWUP bit) when the WKUP pin level is already high.

5.5
Table 24.
Offset
0x000

PWR register map

The following table summarizes the PWR registers. PWR - register map and reset values for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
Register
PWR_CR Reset value PWR_CSR Reset value CWUF 0 PVDO PDDS 0 SBF 0 PVDE FPDS CSBF LPDS 0 WUF 0 VOS DBP 0 EWUP

VOSRDY

0x004

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

BRR 0

BRE

109/1422

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved PLS[2:0] 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 25.

Offset
0x000

Power controller (PWR) PWR - register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx
Register
PWR_CR Reset value PWR_CSR Reset value ADCDC1 VOS[1:0] CWUF 0 PVDO PDDS 0 SBF 0 PVDE FPDS CSBF LPDS 0 WUF 0

DBP 0 EWUP

VOSRDY

0x004

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

BRR 0

BRE

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 1 Reserved PLS[2:0] 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

110/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6
6.1

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Reset
There are three types of reset, defined as system Reset, power Reset and backup domain Reset.

6.1.1

System reset
A system reset sets all registers to their reset values except the reset flags in the clock controller CSR register and the registers in the Backup domain (see Figure 4). A system reset is generated when one of the following events occurs: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A low level on the NRST pin (external reset) Window watchdog end of count condition (WWDG reset) Independent watchdog end of count condition (IWDG reset) A software reset (SW reset) (see Software reset) Low-power management reset (see Low-power management reset)

Software reset
The reset source can be identified by checking the reset flags in the RCC clock control & status register (RCC_CSR). The SYSRESETREQ bit in Cortex-M4F Application Interrupt and Reset Control Register must be set to force a software reset on the device. Refer to the Cortex-M4F technical reference manual for more details.

111/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Low-power management reset

There are two ways of generating a low-power management reset: 1. Reset generated when entering the Standby mode: This type of reset is enabled by resetting the nRST_STDBY bit in the user option bytes. In this case, whenever a Standby mode entry sequence is successfully executed, the device is reset instead of entering the Standby mode. 2. Reset when entering the Stop mode: This type of reset is enabled by resetting the nRST_STOP bit in the user option bytes. In this case, whenever a Stop mode entry sequence is successfully executed, the device is reset instead of entering the Stop mode. For further information on the user option bytes, refer to the STM32F40x and STM32F41x Flash programming manual available from your ST sales office.

6.1.2

Power reset
A power reset is generated when one of the following events occurs: 1. 2. Power-on/power-down reset (POR/PDR reset) or brownout (BOR) reset When exiting the Standby mode

A power reset sets all registers to their reset values except the Backup domain (see Figure 4) These sources act on the NRST pin and it is always kept low during the delay phase. The RESET service routine vector is fixed at address 0x0000_0004 in the memory map. The system reset signal provided to the device is output on the NRST pin. The pulse generator guarantees a minimum reset pulse duration of 20 s for each internal reset source. In case of an external reset, the reset pulse is generated while the NRST pin is asserted low. Figure 12. Simplified diagram of the reset circuit
VDD/VDDA

RPU
External reset

Filter

System reset

NRST
Pulse generator (min 20 s)

WWDG reset IWDG reset Power reset Software reset Low-power management reset
ai16095c

The Backup domain has two specific resets that affect only the Backup domain (see Figure 4).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

112/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.1.3

Backup domain reset

The backup domain reset sets all RTC registers and the RCC_BDCR register to their reset values. The BKPSRAM is not affected by this reset. The only way of resetting the BKPSRAM is through the Flash interface by requesting a protection level change from 1 to 0. A backup domain reset is generated when one of the following events occurs: 1. 2. Software reset, triggered by setting the BDRST bit in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR). VDD or VBAT power on, if both supplies have previously been powered off.

6.2

Clocks
Three different clock sources can be used to drive the system clock (SYSCLK):

HSI oscillator clock HSE oscillator clock Main PLL (PLL) clock 32 kHz low-speed internal RC (LSI RC) which drives the independent watchdog and, optionally, the RTC used for Auto-wakeup from the Stop/Standby mode. 32.768 kHz low-speed external crystal (LSE crystal) which optionally drives the RTC clock (RTCCLK)

The devices have the two following secondary clock sources:

Each clock source can be switched on or off independently when it is not used, to optimize power consumption.

113/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 13. Clock tree

LSI RC 32 kHz LSI Watchdog enable

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

IWDGCLK

to independent watchdog

RTCSEL[1:0] OSC32_IN OSC32_OUT LSE OS C 32.768kHz LSE RTC enable RTCCLK to RTC

MCO2

SYSCLK
/1 to 5

LSE MCO1
/1 to 5

HSE_RTC Peripheral clock enable

/2 to 31

Ethernet PTP clock HCLK to AHB bus, core, memory and DMA to Cortex System timer FCLK Cortex free-running clock

16 MHz HSI RC

HSI SW HSI HSE PLLCLK

AHB PRESC / 1,2,..512

168 MHz max. Clock Enable /8

SYSCLK 168 MHz max

APBx PRESC / 1,2,4,8,16

Peripheral clock enable Peripheral clock enable

OSC _OUT OSC_IN

4-26 MHz HSE O SC

HSE

if (APBx presc = 1x1 else x2

APBx peripheral clocks APBx timer clocks

/M
VCO xN /P /Q

PLL48CK

Peripheral clock enable

48 MHz clocks

PLL

/R

VCO xN

/P /Q

I2SSRC PLLI2SCLK Ext. clock Peripheral clock enable I2S clocks

PLLI2S I2S_CKIN

/R

ETH_MII_TX_CLK_MII
PHY Ethernet 25 to 50 MHz /2,20

Peripheral clock enable

MACTXCLK

ETH_MII_RX_ CLK_MII OTG_HS_SCL

MII_RMII_SEL in SYSCFG_PMC to Ethernet MAC Peripheral clock enable MACRXCLK Peripheral clock enable MACRMIICLK

USB2.0 PHY 24 to 60 MHz

Peripheral clock enable

USBHS ULPI clock

ai16088c

1. For full details about the internal and external clock source characteristics, refer to the Electrical characteristics section in the device datasheet.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

114/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

The clock controller provides a high degree of flexibility to the application in the choice of the external crystal or the oscillator to run the core and peripherals at the highest frequency and, guarantee the appropriate frequency for peripherals that need a specific clock like Ethernet, USB OTG FS and HS, I2S and SDIO. Several prescalers are used to configure the AHB frequency, the high-speed APB (APB2) and the low-speed APB (APB1) domains. The maximum frequency of the AHB domain is 168 MHz. The maximum allowed frequency of the high-speed APB2 domain is 84 MHz. The maximum allowed frequency of the low-speed APB1 domain is 42 MHz All peripheral clocks are derived from the system clock (SYSCLK) except for:

The USB OTG FS clock (48 MHz), the random analog generator (RNG) clock ( 48 MHz) and the SDIO clock ( 48 MHz) which are coming from a specific output of PLL (PLL48CLK) The I2S clock To achieve high-quality audio performance, the I2S clock can be derived either from a specific PLL (PLLI2S) or from an external clock mapped on the I2S_CKIN pin. For more information about I2S clock frequency and precision, refer to Section 27.4.4: Clock generator.

The USB OTG HS (60 MHz) clock which is provided from the external PHY The Ethernet MAC clocks (TX, RX and RMII) which are provided from the external PHY. For further information on the Ethernet configuration, please refer to Section 29.4.4: MII/RMII selection in the Ethernet peripheral description. When the Ethernet is used, the AHB clock frequency must be at least 25 MHz.

The RCC feeds the external clock of the Cortex System Timer (SysTick) with the AHB clock (HCLK) divided by 8. The SysTick can work either with this clock or with the Cortex clock (HCLK), configurable in the SysTick control and status register. The timer clock frequencies for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx are automatically set by hardware. There are two cases: 1. 2. If the APB prescaler is 1, the timer clock frequencies are set to the same frequency as that of the APB domain to which the timers are connected. Otherwise, they are set to twice (2) the frequency of the APB domain to which the timers are connected.

The timer clock frequencies for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx are automatically set by hardware. There are two cases depending on the value of TIMPRE bit in RCC_CFGR register:

If TIMPRE bit in RCC_DKCFGR register is reset: If the APB prescaler is configured to a division factor of 1, the timer clock frequencies (TIMxCLK) are set to PCLKx. Otherwise, the timer clock frequencies are twice the frequency of the APB domain to which the timers are connected: TIMxCLK = 2xPCLKx.

If TIMPRE bit in RCC_DKCFGR register is set: If the APB prescaler is configured to a division factor of 1, 2, or 4, the timer clock frequencies (TIMxCLK) are set to HCLK. Otherwise, the timer clock frequencies is four times the frequency of the APB domain to which the timers are connected: TIMxCLK = 4xPCLKx.

FCLK acts as Cortex-M4F free-running clock. For more details, refer to the Cortex-M4F technical reference manual.

115/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.2.1

HSE clock
The high speed external clock signal (HSE) can be generated from two possible clock sources:

HSE external crystal/ceramic resonator HSE external user clock

The resonator and the load capacitors have to be placed as close as possible to the oscillator pins in order to minimize output distortion and startup stabilization time. The loading capacitance values must be adjusted according to the selected oscillator. Figure 14. HSE/ LSE clock sources
Hardware configuration

OSC_OUT
External clock

(HiZ) External source

OSC_IN OSC_OUT
Crystal/ceramic resonators
CL1 CL2

Load capacitors

External source (HSE bypass)

In this mode, an external clock source must be provided. You select this mode by setting the HSEBYP and HSEON bits in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR). The external clock signal (square, sinus or triangle) with ~50% duty cycle has to drive the OSC_IN pin while the OSC_OUT pin should be left hi-Z. See Figure 14.

External crystal/ceramic resonator (HSE crystal)

The HSE has the advantage of producing a very accurate rate on the main clock. The associated hardware configuration is shown in Figure 14. Refer to the electrical characteristics section of the datasheet for more details. The HSERDY flag in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR) indicates if the high-speed external oscillator is stable or not. At startup, the clock is not released until this bit is set by hardware. An interrupt can be generated if enabled in the RCC clock interrupt register (RCC_CIR). The HSE Crystal can be switched on and off using the HSEON bit in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

116/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.2.2

HSI clock
The HSI clock signal is generated from an internal 16 MHz RC oscillator and can be used directly as a system clock, or used as PLL input. The HSI RC oscillator has the advantage of providing a clock source at low cost (no external components). It also has a faster startup time than the HSE crystal oscillator however, even with calibration the frequency is less accurate than an external crystal oscillator or ceramic resonator.

Calibration
RC oscillator frequencies can vary from one chip to another due to manufacturing process variations, this is why each device is factory calibrated by ST for 1% accuracy at TA= 25 C. After reset, the factory calibration value is loaded in the HSICAL[7:0] bits in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR). If the application is subject to voltage or temperature variations this may affect the RC oscillator speed. You can trim the HSI frequency in the application using the HSITRIM[4:0] bits in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR). The HSIRDY flag in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR) indicates if the HSI RC is stable or not. At startup, the HSI RC output clock is not released until this bit is set by hardware. The HSI RC can be switched on and off using the HSION bit in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR). The HSI signal can also be used as a backup source (Auxiliary clock) if the HSE crystal oscillator fails. Refer to Section 6.2.7: Clock security system (CSS) on page 118.

6.2.3

PLL configuration
The STM32F4xx devices feature two PLLs:

A main PLL (PLL) clocked by the HSE or HSI oscillator and featuring two different output clocks: The first output is used to generate the high speed system clock (up to 168 MHz) The second output is used to generate the clock for the USB OTG FS (48 MHz), the random analog generator (48 MHz) and the SDIO ( 48 MHz).

A dedicated PLL (PLLI2S) used to generate an accurate clock to achieve high-quality audio performance on the I2S interface.

Since the main-PLL configuration parameters cannot be changed once PLL is enabled, it is recommended to configure PLL before enabling it (selection of the HSI or HSE oscillator as PLL clock source, and configuration of division factors M, N, P, and Q). The PLLI2S uses the same input clock as PLL (PLLM[5:0] and PLLSRC bits are common to both PLLs). However, the PLLI2S has dedicated enable/disable and division factors (N and R) configuration bits. Once the PLLI2S is enabled, the configuration parameters cannot be changed. The two PLLs are disabled by hardware when entering Stop and Standby modes, or when an HSE failure occurs when HSE or PLL (clocked by HSE) are used as system clock. RCC PLL configuration register (RCC_PLLCFGR) and RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR) can be used to configure PLL and PLLI2S, respectively.

117/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.2.4

LSE clock
The LSE crystal is a 32.768 kHz low-speed external (LSE) crystal or ceramic resonator. It has the advantage providing a low-power but highly accurate clock source to the real-time clock peripheral (RTC) for clock/calendar or other timing functions. The LSE crystal is switched on and off using the LSEON bit in RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR). The LSERDY flag in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR) indicates if the LSE crystal is stable or not. At startup, the LSE crystal output clock signal is not released until this bit is set by hardware. An interrupt can be generated if enabled in the RCC clock interrupt register (RCC_CIR).

External source (LSE bypass)

In this mode, an external clock source must be provided. It must have a frequency up to 1 MHz. You select this mode by setting the LSEBYP and LSEON bits in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR). The external clock signal (square, sinus or triangle) with ~50% duty cycle has to drive the OSC32_IN pin while the OSC32_OUT pin should be left Hi-Z. See Figure 14.

6.2.5

LSI clock
The LSI RC acts as an low-power clock source that can be kept running in Stop and Standby mode for the independent watchdog (IWDG) and Auto-wakeup unit (AWU). The clock frequency is around 32 kHz. For more details, refer to the electrical characteristics section of the datasheets. The LSI RC can be switched on and off using the LSION bit in the RCC clock control & status register (RCC_CSR). The LSIRDY flag in the RCC clock control & status register (RCC_CSR) indicates if the lowspeed internal oscillator is stable or not. At startup, the clock is not released until this bit is set by hardware. An interrupt can be generated if enabled in the RCC clock interrupt register (RCC_CIR).

6.2.6

System clock (SYSCLK) selection

After a system reset, the HSI oscillator is selected as the system clock. When a clock source is used directly or through PLL as the system clock, it is not possible to stop it. A switch from one clock source to another occurs only if the target clock source is ready (clock stable after startup delay or PLL locked). If a clock source that is not yet ready is selected, the switch occurs when the clock source is ready. Status bits in the RCC clock control register (RCC_CR) indicate which clock(s) is (are) ready and which clock is currently used as the system clock.

6.2.7

Clock security system (CSS)

The clock security system can be activated by software. In this case, the clock detector is enabled after the HSE oscillator startup delay, and disabled when this oscillator is stopped. If a failure is detected on the HSE clock, this oscillator is automatically disabled, a clock failure event is sent to the break inputs of advanced-control timers TIM1 and TIM8, and an interrupt is generated to inform the software about the failure (clock security system interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

118/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

CSSI), allowing the MCU to perform rescue operations. The CSSI is linked to the CortexM4F NMI (non-maskable interrupt) exception vector. Note: When the CSS is enabled, if the HSE clock happens to fail, the CSS generates an interrupt, which causes the automatic generation of an NMI. The NMI is executed indefinitely unless the CSS interrupt pending bit is cleared. As a consequence, the application has to clear the CSS interrupt in the NMI ISR by setting the CSSC bit in the Clock interrupt register (RCC_CIR). If the HSE oscillator is used directly or indirectly as the system clock (indirectly meaning that it is directly used as PLL input clock, and that PLL clock is the system clock) and a failure is detected, then the system clock switches to the HSI oscillator and the HSE oscillator is disabled. If the HSE oscillator clock was the clock source of PLL used as the system clock when the failure occurred, PLL is also disabled. In this case, if the PLLI2S was enabled, it is also disabled when the HSE fails.

6.2.8

RTC/AWU clock
Once the RTCCLK clock source has been selected, the only possible way of modifying the selection is to reset the power domain. The RTCCLK clock source can be either the HSE 1 MHz (HSE divided by a programmable prescaler), the LSE or the LSI clock. This is selected by programming the RTCSEL[1:0] bits in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR) and the RTCPRE[4:0] bits in RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR). This selection cannot be modified without resetting the Backup domain. If the LSE is selected as the RTC clock, the RTC will work normally if the backup or the system supply disappears. If the LSI is selected as the AWU clock, the AWU state is not guaranteed if the system supply disappears. If the HSE oscillator divided by a value between 2 and 31 is used as the RTC clock, the RTC state is not guaranteed if the backup or the system supply disappears. The LSE clock is in the Backup domain, whereas the HSE and LSI clocks are not. As a consequence:

If LSE is selected as the RTC clock: The RTC continues to work even if the VDD supply is switched off, provided the VBAT supply is maintained. The AWU state is not guaranteed if the VDD supply is powered off. Refer to Section 6.2.5: LSI clock on page 118 for more details on LSI calibration. The RTC state is not guaranteed if the VDD supply is powered off or if the internal voltage regulator is powered off (removing power from the 1.2 V domain).

If LSI is selected as the Auto-wakeup unit (AWU) clock:

If the HSE clock is used as the RTC clock:

Note:

To read the RTC calendar register when the APB1 clock frequency is less than seven times the RTC clock frequency (fAPB1 < 7xfRTCLCK), the software must read the calendar time and date registers twice. The data are correct if the second read access to RTC_TR gives the same result than the first one. Otherwise a third read access must be performed.

119/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.2.9

Watchdog clock
If the independent watchdog (IWDG) is started by either hardware option or software access, the LSI oscillator is forced ON and cannot be disabled. After the LSI oscillator temporization, the clock is provided to the IWDG.

6.2.10

Clock-out capability
Two microcontroller clock output (MCO) pins are available:

MCO1 You can output four different clock sources onto the MCO1 pin (PA8) using the configurable prescaler (from 1 to 5): HSI clock LSE clock HSE clock PLL clock

The desired clock source is selected using the MCO1PRE[2:0] and MCO1[1:0] bits in the RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR).

MCO2 You can output four different clock sources onto the MCO2 pin (PC9) using the configurable prescaler (from 1 to 5): HSE clock PLL clock System clock (SYSCLK) PLLI2S clock

The desired clock source is selected using the MCO2PRE[2:0] and MCO2 bits in the RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR). For the different MCO pins, the corresponding GPIO port has to be programmed in alternate function mode. The selected clock to output onto MCO must not exceed 100 MHz (the maximum I/O speed).

6.2.11

Internal/external clock measurement using TIM5/TIM11

It is possible to indirectly measure the frequencies of all on-board clock source generators by means of the input capture of TIM5 channel4 and TIM11 channel1 as shown in Figure 15 and Figure 15.

Internal/external clock measurement using TIM5 channel4

TIM5 has an input multiplexer which allows choosing whether the input capture is triggered by the I/O or by an internal clock. This selection is performed through the TI4_RMP [1:0] bits in the TIM5_OR register. The primary purpose of having the LSE connected to the channel4 input capture is to be able to precisely measure the HSI (this requires to have the HSI used as the system clock source). The number of HSI clock counts between consecutive edges of the LSE signal provides a measurement of the internal clock period. Taking advantage of the high precision of LSE crystals (typically a few tens of ppm) we can determine the internal clock frequency

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

120/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

with the same resolution, and trim the source to compensate for manufacturing-process and/or temperature- and voltage-related frequency deviations. The HSI oscillator has dedicated, user-accessible calibration bits for this purpose. The basic concept consists in providing a relative measurement (e.g. HSI/LSE ratio): the precision is therefore tightly linked to the ratio between the two clock sources. The greater the ratio, the better the measurement. It is also possible to measure the LSI frequency: this is useful for applications that do not have a crystal. The ultralow-power LSI oscillator has a large manufacturing process deviation: by measuring it versus the HSI clock source, it is possible to determine its frequency with the precision of the HSI. The measured value can be used to have more accurate RTC time base timeouts (when LSI is used as the RTC clock source) and/or an IWDG timeout with an acceptable accuracy. Use the following procedure to measure the LSI frequency: 1. 2. 3. 4. Enable the TIM5 timer and configure channel4 in Input capture mode. Set the TI4_RMP bits in the TIM5_OR register to 0x01 to connect the LSI clock internally to TIM5 channel4 input capture for calibration purposes. Measure the LSI clock frequency using the TIM5 capture/compare 4 event or interrupt. Use the measured LSI frequency to update the prescaler of the RTC depending on the desired time base and/or to compute the IWDG timeout.

Figure 15. Frequency measurement with TIM5 in Input capture mode

TIM5

TI4_RMP[1:0] GPIO RTC_WakeUp_IT LSE LSI TI4

ai17741V2

Internal/external clock measurement using TIM11 channel1

TIM11 has an input multiplexer which allows choosing whether the input capture is triggered by the I/O or by an internal clock. This selection is performed through TI1_RMP [1:0] bits in the TIM11_OR register. The HSE_RTC clock (HSE divided by a programmable prescaler) is connected to channel 1 input capture to have a rough indication of the external crystal frequency. This requires that the HSI is the system clock source. This can be useful for instance to ensure compliance with the IEC 60730/IEC 61335 standards which require to be able to determine harmonic or subharmonic frequencies (50/+100% deviations).

121/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC) Figure 16. Frequency measurement with TIM11 in Input capture mode
TIM11

TI1_RMP[1:0] GPIO TI1 HSE_RTC(1 MHz)

ai18433

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

122/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3

RCC registers
Refer to Section 1.1: List of abbreviations for registers for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions.

6.3.1

RCC clock control register (RCC_CR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 XX83 where X is undefined. Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19 CSS ON rw

18 HSE BYP rw 2 Res.

17 HSE RDY r 1

16 HSE ON rw 0

Reserved 15 14 13 12

PLLI2S PLLI2S PLLRDY PLLON RDY ON r 11 rw 10 r 9 rw 8 7

Reserved 6 5 HSITRIM[4:0] 4

HSICAL[7:0] r r r r r r r r rw rw

HSI RDY HSION rw rw r rw

rw

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 27 PLLI2SRDY: PLLI2S clock ready flag Set by hardware to indicate that the PLLI2S is locked. 0: PLLI2S unlocked 1: PLLI2S locked Bit 26 PLLI2SON: PLLI2S enable Set and cleared by software to enable PLLI2S. Cleared by hardware when entering Stop or Standby mode. 0: PLLI2S OFF 1: PLLI2S ON Bit 25 PLLRDY: Main PLL (PLL) clock ready flag Set by hardware to indicate that PLL is locked. 0: PLL unlocked 1: PLL locked Bit 24 PLLON: Main PLL (PLL) enable Set and cleared by software to enable PLL. Cleared by hardware when entering Stop or Standby mode. This bit cannot be reset if PLL clock is used as the system clock. 0: PLL OFF 1: PLL ON Bits 23:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 CSSON: Clock security system enable Set and cleared by software to enable the clock security system. When CSSON is set, the clock detector is enabled by hardware when the HSE oscillator is ready, and disabled by hardware if an oscillator failure is detected. 0: Clock security system OFF (Clock detector OFF) 1: Clock security system ON (Clock detector ON if HSE oscillator is stable, OFF if not)

123/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 18 HSEBYP: HSE clock bypass Set and cleared by software to bypass the oscillator with an external clock. The external clock must be enabled with the HSEON bit, to be used by the device. The HSEBYP bit can be written only if the HSE oscillator is disabled. 0: HSE oscillator not bypassed 1: HSE oscillator bypassed with an external clock Bit 17 HSERDY: HSE clock ready flag Set by hardware to indicate that the HSE oscillator is stable. After the HSEON bit is cleared, HSERDY goes low after 6 HSE oscillator clock cycles. 0: HSE oscillator not ready 1: HSE oscillator ready Bit 16 HSEON: HSE clock enable Set and cleared by software. Cleared by hardware to stop the HSE oscillator when entering Stop or Standby mode. This bit cannot be reset if the HSE oscillator is used directly or indirectly as the system clock. 0: HSE oscillator OFF 1: HSE oscillator ON Bits 15:8 HSICAL[7:0]: Internal high-speed clock calibration These bits are initialized automatically at startup. Bits 7:3 HSITRIM[4:0]: Internal high-speed clock trimming These bits provide an additional user-programmable trimming value that is added to the HSICAL[7:0] bits. It can be programmed to adjust to variations in voltage and temperature that influence the frequency of the internal HSI RC. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 HSIRDY: Internal high-speed clock ready flag Set by hardware to indicate that the HSI oscillator is stable. After the HSION bit is cleared, HSIRDY goes low after 6 HSI clock cycles. 0: HSI oscillator not ready 1: HSI oscillator ready Bit 0 HSION: Internal high-speed clock enable Set and cleared by software. Set by hardware to force the HSI oscillator ON when leaving the Stop or Standby mode or in case of a failure of the HSE oscillator used directly or indirectly as the system clock. This bit cannot be cleared if the HSI is used directly or indirectly as the system clock. 0: HSI oscillator OFF 1: HSI oscillator ON

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

124/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.2

RCC PLL configuration register (RCC_PLLCFGR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x2400 3010 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access. This register is used to configure the PLL clock outputs according to the formulas:

f(VCO clock) = f(PLL clock input) (PLLN / PLLM) f(PLL general clock output) = f(VCO clock) / PLLP f(USB OTG FS, SDIO, RNG clock output) = f(VCO clock) / PLLQ
29 28 27 26 25 PLLQ1 rw 9 24 PLLQ0 rw 8 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 PLLP1 Reserved rw 5 4 3 2 1 PLLM1 rw rw 0 PLLM0 rw 16 PLLP0

31

30

PLLQ3 PLLQ2 Reserved rw 15 Reserv ed 14 13 12 11 rw 10 PLLN rw rw rw rw rw

PLLSR Reserv C ed rw 7 6

PLLM5 PLLM4 PLLM3 PLLM2 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27:24 PLLQ: Main PLL (PLL) division factor for USB OTG FS, SDIO and random number generator clocks Set and cleared by software to control the frequency of USB OTG FS clock, the random number generator clock and the SDIO clock. These bits should be written only if PLL is disabled. Caution: The USB OTG FS requires a 48 MHz clock to work correctly. The SDIO and the random number generator need a frequency lower than or equal to 48 MHz to work correctly. USB OTG FS clock frequency = VCO frequency / PLLQ with 2 PLLQ 15 0000: PLLQ = 0, wrong configuration 0001: PLLQ = 1, wrong configuration 0010: PLLQ = 2 0011: PLLQ = 3 0100: PLLQ = 4 ... 1111: PLLQ = 15 Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 PLLSRC: Main PLL(PLL) and audio PLL (PLLI2S) entry clock source Set and cleared by software to select PLL and PLLI2S clock source. This bit can be written only when PLL and PLLI2S are disabled. 0: HSI clock selected as PLL and PLLI2S clock entry 1: HSE oscillator clock selected as PLL and PLLI2S clock entry Bits 21:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

125/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bits 17:16 PLLP: Main PLL (PLL) division factor for main system clock Set and cleared by software to control the frequency of the general PLL output clock. These bits can be written only if PLL is disabled. Caution: The software has to set these bits correctly not to exceed 168 MHz on this domain. PLL output clock frequency = VCO frequency / PLLP with PLLP = 2, 4, 6, or 8 00: PLLP = 2 01: PLLP = 4 10: PLLP = 6 11: PLLP = 8 Bits 14:6 PLLN: Main PLL (PLL) multiplication factor for VCO Set and cleared by software to control the multiplication factor of the VCO. These bits can be written only when PLL is disabled. Only half-word and word accesses are allowed to write these bits. Caution: The software has to set these bits correctly to ensure that the VCO output frequency is between 192 and 432 MHz. VCO output frequency = VCO input frequency PLLN with 192 PLLN 432 000000000: PLLN = 0, wrong configuration 000000001: PLLN = 1, wrong configuration ... 011000000: PLLN = 192 ... 110110000: PLLN = 432 110110001: PLLN = 433, wrong configuration ... 111111111: PLLN = 511, wrong configuration Bits 5:0 PLLM: Division factor for the main PLL (PLL) and audio PLL (PLLI2S) input clock Set and cleared by software to divide the PLL and PLLI2S input clock before the VCO. These bits can be written only when the PLL and PLLI2S are disabled. Caution: The software has to set these bits correctly to ensure that the VCO input frequency ranges from 1 to 2 MHz. It is recommended to select a frequency of 2 MHz to limit PLL jitter. VCO input frequency = PLL input clock frequency / PLLM with 2 PLLM 63 000000: PLLM = 0, wrong configuration 000001: PLLM = 1, wrong configuration 000010: PLLM = 2 000011: PLLM = 3 000100: PLLM = 4 ... 111110: PLLM = 62 111111: PLLM = 63

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

126/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.3

RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: 0 wait state 2, word, half-word and byte access 1 or 2 wait states inserted only if the access occurs during a clock source switch.

31 MCO2 rw 15

30

29

28

27

26

25 MCO1 PRE[2:0]

24

23 I2SSC R

22 MCO1 rw 6

21

20

19

18 RTCPRE[4:0]

17

16

MCO2 PRE[2:0] rw 14 13 rw 12 rw 11 PPRE1[2:0] rw 10

rw 9

rw 8

rw 7

rw 5 4

rw 3 SWS1

rw 2 SWS0 r

rw 1 SW1 rw

rw 0 SW0 rw

PPRE2[2:0] rw rw rw rw

HPRE[3:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw

rw

Bits 31:30 MCO2[1:0]: Microcontroller clock output 2 Set and cleared by software. Clock source selection may generate glitches on MCO2. It is highly recommended to configure these bits only after reset before enabling the external oscillators and the PLLs. 00: System clock (SYSCLK) selected 01: PLLI2S clock selected 10: HSE oscillator clock selected 11: PLL clock selected Bits 27:29 MCO2PRE: MCO2 prescaler Set and cleared by software to configure the prescaler of the MCO2. Modification of this prescaler may generate glitches on MCO2. It is highly recommended to change this prescaler only after reset before enabling the external oscillators and the PLLs. 0xx: no division 100: division by 2 101: division by 3 110: division by 4 111: division by 5 Bits 24:26 MCO1PRE: MCO1 prescaler Set and cleared by software to configure the prescaler of the MCO1. Modification of this prescaler may generate glitches on MCO1. It is highly recommended to change this prescaler only after reset before enabling the external oscillators and the PLL. 0xx: no division 100: division by 2 101: division by 3 110: division by 4 111: division by 5 Bit 23 I2SSRC: I2S clock selection Set and cleared by software. This bit allows to select the I2S clock source between the PLLI2S clock and the external clock. It is highly recommended to change this bit only after reset and before enabling the I2S module. 0: PLLI2S clock used as I2S clock source 1: External clock mapped on the I2S_CKIN pin used as I2S clock source

127/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bits 22:21 MCO1: Microcontroller clock output 1 Set and cleared by software. Clock source selection may generate glitches on MCO1. It is highly recommended to configure these bits only after reset before enabling the external oscillators and PLL. 00: HSI clock selected 01: LSE oscillator selected 10: HSE oscillator clock selected 11: PLL clock selected Bits 20:16 RTCPRE: HSE division factor for RTC clock Set and cleared by software to divide the HSE clock input clock to generate a 1 MHz clock for RTC. Caution: The software has to set these bits correctly to ensure that the clock supplied to the RTC is 1 MHz. These bits must be configured if needed before selecting the RTC clock source. 00000: no clock 00001: no clock 00010: HSE/2 00011: HSE/3 00100: HSE/4 ... 11110: HSE/30 11111: HSE/31 Bits 15:13 PPRE2: APB high-speed prescaler (APB2) Set and cleared by software to control APB high-speed clock division factor. Caution: The software has to set these bits correctly not to exceed 84 MHz on this domain. The clocks are divided with the new prescaler factor from 1 to 16 AHB cycles after PPRE2 write. 0xx: AHB clock not divided 100: AHB clock divided by 2 101: AHB clock divided by 4 110: AHB clock divided by 8 111: AHB clock divided by 16 Bits 12:10 PPRE1: APB Low speed prescaler (APB1) Set and cleared by software to control APB low-speed clock division factor. Caution: The software has to set these bits correctly not to exceed 42 MHz on this domain. The clocks are divided with the new prescaler factor from 1 to 16 AHB cycles after PPRE1 write. 0xx: AHB clock not divided 100: AHB clock divided by 2 101: AHB clock divided by 4 110: AHB clock divided by 8 111: AHB clock divided by 16 Bits 9:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

128/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bits 7:4 HPRE: AHB prescaler Set and cleared by software to control AHB clock division factor. Caution: The clocks are divided with the new prescaler factor from 1 to 16 AHB cycles after HPRE write. Caution: The AHB clock frequency must be at least 25 MHz when the Ethernet is used. 0xxx: system clock not divided 1000: system clock divided by 2 1001: system clock divided by 4 1010: system clock divided by 8 1011: system clock divided by 16 1100: system clock divided by 64 1101: system clock divided by 128 1110: system clock divided by 256 1111: system clock divided by 512 Bits 3:2 SWS: System clock switch status Set and cleared by hardware to indicate which clock source is used as the system clock. 00: HSI oscillator used as the system clock 01: HSE oscillator used as the system clock 10: PLL used as the system clock 11: not applicable Bits 1:0 SW: System clock switch Set and cleared by software to select the system clock source. Set by hardware to force the HSI selection when leaving the Stop or Standby mode or in case of failure of the HSE oscillator used directly or indirectly as the system clock. 00: HSI oscillator selected as system clock 01: HSE oscillator selected as system clock 10: PLL selected as system clock 11: not allowed

6.3.4

RCC clock interrupt register (RCC_CIR)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 CSSC

22 Reser ved 6

21 PLLI2S RDYC w 5 PLLI2S RDYF r

20 PLL RDYC w 4 PLL RDYF r

19 HSE RDYC w 3 HSE RDYF r

18 HSI RDYC w 2 HSI RDYF r

17 LSE RDYC w 1 LSE RDYF r

16 LSI RDYC w 0 LSI RDYF r

Reserved w 15 14 13 PLLI2S RDYIE Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw r 12 PLL RDYIE 11 HSE RDYIE 10 HSI RDYIE 9 LSE RDYIE 8 LSI RDYIE 7 CSSF

Reser ved

129/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 CSSC: Clock security system interrupt clear This bit is set by software to clear the CSSF flag. 0: No effect 1: Clear CSSF flag Bits 22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 PLLI2SRDYC: PLLI2S ready interrupt clear This bit is set by software to clear the PLLI2SRDYF flag. 0: No effect 1: PLLI2SRDYF cleared Bit 20 PLLRDYC: Main PLL(PLL) ready interrupt clear This bit is set by software to clear the PLLRDYF flag. 0: No effect 1: PLLRDYF cleared Bit 19 HSERDYC: HSE ready interrupt clear This bit is set by software to clear the HSERDYF flag. 0: No effect 1: HSERDYF cleared Bit 18 HSIRDYC: HSI ready interrupt clear This bit is set software to clear the HSIRDYF flag. 0: No effect 1: HSIRDYF cleared Bit 17 LSERDYC: LSE ready interrupt clear This bit is set by software to clear the LSERDYF flag. 0: No effect 1: LSERDYF cleared Bit 16 LSIRDYC: LSI ready interrupt clear This bit is set by software to clear the LSIRDYF flag. 0: No effect 1: LSIRDYF cleared Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13 PLLI2SRDYIE: PLLI2S ready interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by PLLI2S lock. 0: PLLI2S lock interrupt disabled 1: PLLI2S lock interrupt enabled Bit 12 PLLRDYIE: Main PLL (PLL) ready interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by PLL lock. 0: PLL lock interrupt disabled 1: PLL lock interrupt enabled Bit 11 HSERDYIE: HSE ready interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by the HSE oscillator stabilization. 0: HSE ready interrupt disabled 1: HSE ready interrupt enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

130/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 10 HSIRDYIE: HSI ready interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by the HSI oscillator stabilization. 0: HSI ready interrupt disabled 1: HSI ready interrupt enabled Bit 9 LSERDYIE: LSE ready interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by the LSE oscillator stabilization. 0: LSE ready interrupt disabled 1: LSE ready interrupt enabled Bit 8 LSIRDYIE: LSI ready interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by LSI oscillator stabilization. 0: LSI ready interrupt disabled 1: LSI ready interrupt enabled Bit 7 CSSF: Clock security system interrupt flag Set by hardware when a failure is detected in the HSE oscillator. Cleared by software setting the CSSC bit. 0: No clock security interrupt caused by HSE clock failure 1: Clock security interrupt caused by HSE clock failure Bits 6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 PLLI2SRDYF: PLLI2S ready interrupt flag Set by hardware when the PLLI2S locks and PLLI2SRDYDIE is set. Cleared by software setting the PLLRI2SDYC bit. 0: No clock ready interrupt caused by PLLI2S lock 1: Clock ready interrupt caused by PLLI2S lock Bit 4 PLLRDYF: Main PLL (PLL) ready interrupt flag Set by hardware when PLL locks and PLLRDYDIE is set. Cleared by software setting the PLLRDYC bit. 0: No clock ready interrupt caused by PLL lock 1: Clock ready interrupt caused by PLL lock Bit 3 HSERDYF: HSE ready interrupt flag Set by hardware when External High Speed clock becomes stable and HSERDYDIE is set. Cleared by software setting the HSERDYC bit. 0: No clock ready interrupt caused by the HSE oscillator 1: Clock ready interrupt caused by the HSE oscillator Bit 2 HSIRDYF: HSI ready interrupt flag Set by hardware when the Internal High Speed clock becomes stable and HSIRDYDIE is set. Cleared by software setting the HSIRDYC bit. 0: No clock ready interrupt caused by the HSI oscillator 1: Clock ready interrupt caused by the HSI oscillator Bit 1 LSERDYF: LSE ready interrupt flag Set by hardware when the External Low Speed clock becomes stable and LSERDYDIE is set. Cleared by software setting the LSERDYC bit. 0: No clock ready interrupt caused by the LSE oscillator 1: Clock ready interrupt caused by the LSE oscillator

131/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 0 LSIRDYF: LSI ready interrupt flag Set by hardware when the internal low speed clock becomes stable and LSIRDYDIE is set. Cleared by software setting the LSIRDYC bit. 0: No clock ready interrupt caused by the LSI oscillator 1: Clock ready interrupt caused by the LSI oscillator

6.3.5

RCC AHB1 peripheral reset register (RCC_AHB1RSTR)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29 OTGHS RST rw

28

27

26

25 ETHMAC RST rw

24

23

22 DMA2 RST rw

21 DMA1 RST rw 5

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

15

14

13

12 CRCRS T rw

11

10

8 GPIOI RST rw

0 GPIOA RST rw

Reserved

Reserved

GPIOH GPIOGG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB RST RST RST RST RST RST RST rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 29 OTGHSRST: USB OTG HS module reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the USB OTG HS module 1: resets the USB OTG HS module Bits 28:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 25 ETHMACRST: Ethernet MAC reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset Ethernet MAC 1: resets Ethernet MAC Bits 24:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 DMA2RST: DMA2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset DMA2 1: resets DMA2 Bit 21 DMA1RST: DMA1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset DMA1 1: resets DMA1 Bits 20:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 CRCRST: CRC reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset CRC 1: resets CRC Bits 11:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

132/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 8 GPIOIRST: IO port I reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port I 1: resets IO port I Bit 7 GPIOHRST: IO port H reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port H 1: resets IO port H Bits 6 GPIOGRST: IO port G reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port G 1: resets IO port G Bit 5 GPIOFRST: IO port F reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port F 1: resets IO port F Bit 4 GPIOERST: IO port E reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port E 1: resets IO port E Bit 3 GPIODRST: IO port D reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port D 1: resets IO port D Bit 2 GPIOCRST: IO port C reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port C 1: resets IO port C Bit 1 GPIOBRST: IO port B reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port B 1:resets IO port B Bit 0 GPIOARST: IO port A reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset IO port A 1: resets IO port A

133/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.3.6

RCC AHB2 peripheral reset register (RCC_AHB2RSTR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 OTGFS RST rw 6 RNG RST rw 5 HASH RST rw 4 CRYP RST rw 3 2 1 0 DCMI RST rw

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 OTGFSRST: USB OTG FS module reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the USB OTG FS module 1: resets the USB OTG FS module Bit 6 RNGRST: Random number generator module reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the random number generator module 1: resets the random number generator module Bit 5 HASHRST: Hash module reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the HASH module 1: resets the HASH module Bit 4 CRYPRST: Cryptographic module reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the cryptographic module 1: resets the cryptographic module Bit 3:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 DCMIRST: Camera interface reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the Camera interface 1: resets the Camera interface

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

134/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.7

RCC AHB3 peripheral reset register (RCC_AHB3RSTR)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Reserved rw 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FSMCRST

Bits 31:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 FSMCRST: Flexible static memory controller module reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the FSMC module 1: resets the FSMC module

6.3.8

RCC APB1 peripheral reset register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx(RCC_APB1RSTR)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29 DACRST

28 PWR RST rw 12

27 Reserved 11 WWDG RST rw

26 CAN2 RST

25 CAN1 RST rw

24 Reserved 8 TIM14 RST rw

23 I2C3 RST rw 7 TIM13 RST rw

22 I2C2 RST rw 6 TIM12 RST rw

21 I2C1 RST rw 5 TIM7 RST rw

20

19

18

17

16 Reserved 0 TIM2 RST rw

Reserved rw 15 SPI3 RST rw 14 SPI2 RST rw 13

UART5 UART4 UART3 UART2 RST RST RST RST rw 4 TIM6 RST rw rw 3 TIM5 RST rw rw 2 TIM4 RST rw rw 1 TIM3 RST rw

10

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 29 DACRST: DAC reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the DAC interface 1: resets the DAC interface Bit 28 PWRRST: Power interface reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the power interface 1: resets the power interface

135/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 CAN2RST: CAN2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset CAN2 1: resets CAN2 Bit 25 CAN1RST: CAN1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset CAN1 1: resets CAN1 Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 I2C3RST: I2C3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset I2C3 1: resets I2C3 Bit 22 I2C2RST: I2C2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset I2C2 1: resets I2C2 Bit 21 I2C1RST: I2C1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset I2C1 1: resets I2C1 Bit 20 UART5RST: UART5 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset UART5 1: resets UART5 Bit 19 UART4RST: USART4 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset UART4 1: resets UART4 Bit 18 USART3RST: USART3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART3 1: resets USART3 Bit 17 USART2RST: USART2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART2 1: resets USART2 Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 SPI3RST: SPI3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI3 1: resets SPI3

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

136/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 14 SPI2RST: SPI2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI2 1: resets SPI2 Bits 13:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 WWDGRST: Window watchdog reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the window watchdog 1: resets the window watchdog Bits 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 TIM14RST: TIM14 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM14 1: resets TIM14 Bit 7 TIM13RST: TIM13 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM13 1: resets TIM13 Bit 6 TIM12RST: TIM12 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM12 1: resets TIM12 Bit 5 TIM7RST: TIM7 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM7 1: resets TIM7 Bit 4 TIM6RST: TIM6 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM6 1: resets TIM6 Bit 3 TIM5RST: TIM5 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM5 1: resets TIM5 Bit 2 TIM4RST: TIM4 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM4 1: resets TIM4 Bit 1 TIM3RST: TIM3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM3 1: resets TIM3 Bit 0 TIM2RST: TIM2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM2 1: resets TIM2

137/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.3.9

RCC APB1 peripheral reset register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB1RSTR)
Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved 11 WWDG RST rw

26 CAN2 RST

25 CAN1 RST rw

24 Reserved 8 TIM14 RST rw

23 I2C3 RST rw 7 TIM13 RST rw

22 I2C2 RST rw 6 TIM12 RST rw

21 I2C1 RST rw 5 TIM7 RST rw

20

19

18

17

16 Reserved 0 TIM2 RST rw

UART8R UART7R PWR DACRST ST ST RST rw 15 SPI3 RST rw rw 14 SPI2 RST rw rw 13 rw 12

UART5 UART4 UART3 UART2 RST RST RST RST rw 4 TIM6 RST rw rw 3 TIM5 RST rw rw 2 TIM4 RST rw rw 1 TIM3 RST rw

10

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31 UART8RST: UART8 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset UART8 1: resets UART8 Bits 30 UART7RST: UART7 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset UART7 1: resets UART7 Bit 29 DACRST: DAC reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the DAC interface 1: resets the DAC interface Bit 28 PWRRST: Power interface reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the power interface 1: resets the power interface Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 CAN2RST: CAN2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset CAN2 1: resets CAN2 Bit 25 CAN1RST: CAN1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset CAN1 1: resets CAN1 Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 I2C3RST: I2C3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset I2C3 1: resets I2C3

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

138/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 22 I2C2RST: I2C2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset I2C2 1: resets I2C2 Bit 21 I2C1RST: I2C1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset I2C1 1: resets I2C1 Bit 20 UART5RST: UART5 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset UART5 1: resets UART5 Bit 19 UART4RST: USART4 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset UART4 1: resets UART4 Bit 18 USART3RST: USART3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART3 1: resets USART3 Bit 17 USART2RST: USART2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART2 1: resets USART2 Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 SPI3RST: SPI3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI3 1: resets SPI3 Bit 14 SPI2RST: SPI2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI2 1: resets SPI2 Bits 13:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 WWDGRST: Window watchdog reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the window watchdog 1: resets the window watchdog Bits 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 TIM14RST: TIM14 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM14 1: resets TIM14

139/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 7 TIM13RST: TIM13 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM13 1: resets TIM13 Bit 6 TIM12RST: TIM12 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM12 1: resets TIM12 Bit 5 TIM7RST: TIM7 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM7 1: resets TIM7 Bit 4 TIM6RST: TIM6 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM6 1: resets TIM6 Bit 3 TIM5RST: TIM5 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM5 1: resets TIM5 Bit 2 TIM4RST: TIM4 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM4 1: resets TIM4 Bit 1 TIM3RST: TIM3 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM3 1: resets TIM3 Bit 0 TIM2RST: TIM2 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM2 1: resets TIM2

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

140/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.10

RCC APB2 peripheral reset register (RCC_APB2RSTR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18 TIM11 RST rw

17 TIM10 RST rw 1 TIM8 RST rw

16 TIM9 RST rw 0 TIM1 RST rw

Reserved

15

14

13

12 SPI1 RST rw

11 SDIO RST rw

10

8 ADC RST rw

SYSCF Reser- G RST Reserved ved rw

Reserved

Reserved

USART6 USART1 RST RST rw rw

Reserved

Bits 31:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 TIM11RST: TIM11 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM11 1: resets TIM14 Bit 17 TIM10RST: TIM10 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM10 1: resets TIM10 Bit 16 TIM9RST: TIM9 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM9 1: resets TIM9 Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 SYSCFGRST: System configuration controller reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the System configuration controller 1: resets the System configuration controller Bit 13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 SPI1RST: SPI1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI1 1: resets SPI1 Bit 11 SDIORST: SDIO reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the SDIO module 1: resets the SDIO module Bits 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

141/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 8 ADCRST: ADC interface reset (common to all ADCs) Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the ADC interface 1: resets the ADC interface Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 USART6RST: USART6 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART6 1: resets USART6 Bit 4 USART1RST: USART1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART1 1: resets USART1

Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 TIM8RST: TIM8 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM8 1: resets TIM8 Bit 0 TIM1RST: TIM1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM1 1: resets TIM1

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

142/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.11

RCC APB2 peripheral reset register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB2RSTR)
Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21 SPI6 RST rw

20 SPI5 RST rw 4

19

18 TIM11 RST rw

17 TIM10 RST rw 1 TIM8 RST rw

16 TIM9 RST rw 0 TIM1 RST rw

Reserved

Res.

15

14

13 SPI4 RST rw

12 SPI1 RST rw

11 SDIO RST rw

10

8 ADC RST rw

SYSCFG ReserRST ved rw

Reserved

Reserved

USART6 USART1 RST RST rw rw

Reserved

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 SPI6RST: SPI6 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI6 1: resets SPI6 Bit 20 SPI5RST: SPI5 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI5 1: resets SPI5 Bit 19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 TIM11RST: TIM11 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM11 1: resets TIM14 Bit 17 TIM10RST: TIM10 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM10 1: resets TIM10 Bit 16 TIM9RST: TIM9 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM9 1: resets TIM9 Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 SYSCFGRST: System configuration controller reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the System configuration controller 1: resets the System configuration controller Bit 13 SPI4RST: SPI4 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI4 1: resets SPI4

143/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 12 SPI1RST: SPI1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset SPI1 1: resets SPI1 Bit 11 SDIORST: SDIO reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the SDIO module 1: resets the SDIO module Bits 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 ADCRST: ADC interface reset (common to all ADCs) Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset the ADC interface 1: resets the ADC interface Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 USART6RST: USART6 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART6 1: resets USART6 Bit 4 USART1RST: USART1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset USART1 1: resets USART1

Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 TIM8RST: TIM8 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM8 1: resets TIM8 Bit 0 TIM1RST: TIM1 reset Set and cleared by software. 0: does not reset TIM1 1: resets TIM1

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

144/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.12

RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB1ENR)

Address offset: 0x30 Reset value: 0x0010 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20 CCMDATA RAMEN

19 Res.

18 BKPSR AMEN rw

17

16

ETHMA OTGHS OTGHS ETHMA ETHMA ETHMA CPTPE Reser- ULPIEN EN CRXEN CTXEN CEN N ved rw 15 14 Reserved rw rw 13 rw 12 CRCEN Reserved rw 11 rw 10 rw 9

DMA2EN DMA1EN Reserved rw 8 7 6 rw 5

Reserved

GPIOIE GPIOH GPIOGE GPIOFE GPIOD GPIOC GPIOB GPIOA GPIOEEN N EN N N EN EN EN EN rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 30 OTGHSULPIEN: USB OTG HSULPI clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG HS ULPI clock disabled 1: USB OTG HS ULPI clock enabled Bit 29 OTGHSEN: USB OTG HS clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG HS clock disabled 1: USB OTG HS clock enabled Bit 28 ETHMACPTPEN: Ethernet PTP clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet PTP clock disabled 1: Ethernet PTP clock enabled Bit 27 ETHMACRXEN: Ethernet Reception clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet Reception clock disabled 1: Ethernet Reception clock enabled Bit 26 ETHMACTXEN: Ethernet Transmission clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet Transmission clock disabled 1: Ethernet Transmission clock enabled Bit 25 ETHMACEN: Ethernet MAC clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet MAC clock disabled 1: Ethernet MAC clock enabled Bits 24:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 DMA2EN: DMA2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: DMA2 clock disabled 1: DMA2 clock enabled

145/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 21 DMA1EN: DMA1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: DMA1 clock disabled 1: DMA1 clock enabled Bit 20 CCMDATARAMEN: CCM data RAM clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: CCM data RAM clock disabled 1: CCM data RAM clock enabled Bits 19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 BKPSRAMEN: Backup SRAM interface clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Backup SRAM interface clock disabled 1: Backup SRAM interface clock enabled Bits 17:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 CRCEN: CRC clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: CRC clock disabled 1: CRC clock enabled Bits 11:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 GPIOIEN: IO port I clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port I clock disabled 1: IO port I clock enabled Bit 7 GPIOHEN: IO port H clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port H clock disabled 1: IO port H clock enabled Bit 6 GPIOGEN: IO port G clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port G clock disabled 1: IO port G clock enabled Bit 5 GPIOFEN: IO port F clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port F clock disabled 1: IO port F clock enabled Bit 4 GPIOEEN: IO port E clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port E clock disabled 1: IO port E clock enabled Bit 3 GPIODEN: IO port D clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port D clock disabled 1: IO port D clock enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

146/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 2 GPIOCEN: IO port C clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port C clock disabled 1: IO port C clock enabled Bit 1 GPIOBEN: IO port B clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port B clock disabled 1: IO port B clock enabled Bit 0 GPIOAEN: IO port A clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port A clock disabled 1: IO port A clock enabled

6.3.13

RCC AHB2 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB2ENR)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 OTGFS EN rw 6 RNG EN rw 5 HASH EN rw 4 CRYP EN rw 3 2 Reserved 1 0 DCMI EN rw

Reserved

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 OTGFSEN: USB OTG FS clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG FS clock disabled 1: USB OTG FS clock enabled Bit 6 RNGEN: Random number generator clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Random number generator clock disabled 1: Random number generator clock enabled Bit 5 HASHEN: Hash modules clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Hash modules clock disabled 1: Hash modules clock enabled

147/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 4 CRYPEN: Cryptographic modules clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: cryptographic module clock disabled 1: cryptographic module clock enabled Bit 3:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 DCMIEN: Camera interface enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Camera interface clock disabled 1: Camera interface clock enabled

6.3.14

RCC AHB3 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_AHB3ENR)

Address offset: 0x38 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Reserved rw 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FSMCEN

Bits 31:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 FSMCEN: Flexible static memory controller module clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: FSMC module clock disabled 1: FSMC module clock enabled

6.3.15

RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx(RCC_APB1ENR)
Address offset: 0x40 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29 DAC EN rw

28 PWR EN rw 12

27 Reserved 11 WWDG EN rw

26 CAN2 EN rw 10

25 CAN1 EN rw 9

24 Reserved 8 TIM14 EN rw

23 I2C3 EN rw 7 TIM13 EN rw

22 I2C2 EN rw 6 TIM12 EN rw

21 I2C1 EN rw 5 TIM7 EN rw

20 UART5 EN rw 4 TIM6 EN rw

19

18

17

16

Reserved

UART4 USART3 USART2 ReserEN EN EN ved rw rw rw 3 TIM5 EN rw 2 TIM4 EN rw 1 TIM3 EN rw 0 TIM2 EN rw

15 SPI3 EN rw

14 SPI2 EN rw

13

Reserved

Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

148/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 29 DACEN: DAC interface clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: DAC interface clock disabled 1: DAC interface clock enable Bit 28 PWREN: Power interface clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Power interface clock disabled 1: Power interface clock enable Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 CAN2EN: CAN 2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 2 clock disabled 1: CAN 2 clock enabled Bit 25 CAN1EN: CAN 1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 1 clock disabled 1: CAN 1 clock enabled Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 I2C3EN: I2C3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C3 clock disabled 1: I2C3 clock enabled Bit 22 I2C2EN: I2C2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C2 clock disabled 1: I2C2 clock enabled Bit 21 I2C1EN: I2C1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C1 clock disabled 1: I2C1 clock enabled Bit 20 UART5EN: UART5 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: UART5 clock disabled 1: UART5 clock enabled Bit 19 UART4EN: UART4 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: UART4 clock disabled 1: UART4 clock enabled Bit 18 USART3EN: USART3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART3 clock disabled 1: USART3 clock enabled

149/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 17 USART2EN: USART2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART2 clock disabled 1: USART2 clock enabled Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 SPI3EN: SPI3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI3 clock disabled 1: SPI3 clock enabled Bit 14 SPI2EN: SPI2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI2 clock disabled 1: SPI2 clock enabled Bits 13:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 WWDGEN: Window watchdog clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Window watchdog clock disabled 1: Window watchdog clock enabled Bit 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 TIM14EN: TIM14 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM14 clock disabled 1: TIM14 clock enabled Bit 7 TIM13EN: TIM13 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM13 clock disabled 1: TIM13 clock enabled Bit 6 TIM12EN: TIM12 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM12 clock disabled 1: TIM12 clock enabled Bit 5 TIM7EN: TIM7 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM7 clock disabled 1: TIM7 clock enabled Bit 4 TIM6EN: TIM6 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM6 clock disabled 1: TIM6 clock enabled Bit 3 TIM5EN: TIM5 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM5 clock disabled 1: TIM5 clock enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

150/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 2 TIM4EN: TIM4 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM4 clock disabled 1: TIM4 clock enabled Bit 1 TIM3EN: TIM3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM3 clock disabled 1: TIM3 clock enabled Bit 0 TIM2EN: TIM2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM2 clock disabled 1: TIM2 clock enabled

6.3.16

RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx(RCC_APB1ENR)
Address offset: 0x40 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29 DAC EN rw 13

28 PWR EN rw 12

27 Reserved 11 WWDG EN rw

26 CAN2 EN rw 10

25 CAN1 EN rw 9

24 Reserved 8 TIM14 EN rw

23 I2C3 EN rw 7 TIM13 EN rw

22 I2C2 EN rw 6 TIM12 EN rw

21 I2C1 EN rw 5 TIM7 EN rw

20 UART5 EN rw 4 TIM6 EN rw

19

18

17

16

UART8 UART7 EN EN rw 15 SPI3 EN rw rw 14 SPI2 EN rw

UART4 USART3 USART2 ReserEN EN EN ved rw rw rw 3 TIM5 EN rw 2 TIM4 EN rw 1 TIM3 EN rw 0 TIM2 EN rw

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31 UART8EN: UART8 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: UART8 clock disabled 1: UART8 clock enabled Bits 30 UART7EN: UART7 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: UART7 clock disabled 1: UART7 clock enabled Bit 29 DACEN: DAC interface clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: DAC interface clock disabled 1: DAC interface clock enable Bit 28 PWREN: Power interface clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Power interface clock disabled 1: Power interface clock enable Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

151/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 26 CAN2EN: CAN 2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 2 clock disabled 1: CAN 2 clock enabled Bit 25 CAN1EN: CAN 1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 1 clock disabled 1: CAN 1 clock enabled Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 I2C3EN: I2C3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C3 clock disabled 1: I2C3 clock enabled Bit 22 I2C2EN: I2C2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C2 clock disabled 1: I2C2 clock enabled Bit 21 I2C1EN: I2C1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C1 clock disabled 1: I2C1 clock enabled Bit 20 UART5EN: UART5 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: UART5 clock disabled 1: UART5 clock enabled Bit 19 UART4EN: UART4 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: UART4 clock disabled 1: UART4 clock enabled Bit 18 USART3EN: USART3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART3 clock disabled 1: USART3 clock enabled Bit 17 USART2EN: USART2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART2 clock disabled 1: USART2 clock enabled Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 SPI3EN: SPI3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI3 clock disabled 1: SPI3 clock enabled Bit 14 SPI2EN: SPI2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI2 clock disabled 1: SPI2 clock enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

152/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bits 13:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 WWDGEN: Window watchdog clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Window watchdog clock disabled 1: Window watchdog clock enabled Bit 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 TIM14EN: TIM14 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM14 clock disabled 1: TIM14 clock enabled Bit 7 TIM13EN: TIM13 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM13 clock disabled 1: TIM13 clock enabled Bit 6 TIM12EN: TIM12 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM12 clock disabled 1: TIM12 clock enabled Bit 5 TIM7EN: TIM7 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM7 clock disabled 1: TIM7 clock enabled Bit 4 TIM6EN: TIM6 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM6 clock disabled 1: TIM6 clock enabled Bit 3 TIM5EN: TIM5 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM5 clock disabled 1: TIM5 clock enabled Bit 2 TIM4EN: TIM4 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM4 clock disabled 1: TIM4 clock enabled Bit 1 TIM3EN: TIM3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM3 clock disabled 1: TIM3 clock enabled Bit 0 TIM2EN: TIM2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM2 clock disabled 1: TIM2 clock enabled

153/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.3.17

RCC APB2 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_APB2ENR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
Address offset: 0x44 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18 TIM11 EN rw

17 TIM10 EN rw 1 TIM8 EN rw

16 TIM9 EN rw 0 TIM1 EN rw

Reserved

15

14

13

12 SPI1 EN rw

11 SDIO EN rw

10 ADC3 EN rw

9 ADC2 EN rw

8 ADC1 EN rw

SYSCF Reser- G EN Reserved ved rw

Reserved

USART6 USART1 EN EN rw rw

Reserved

Bits 31:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 TIM11EN: TIM11 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM11 clock disabled 1: TIM11 clock enabled Bit 17 TIM10EN: TIM10 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM10 clock disabled 1: TIM10 clock enabled Bit 16 TIM9EN: TIM9 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM9 clock disabled 1: TIM9 clock enabled Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 SYSCFGEN: System configuration controller clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: System configuration controller clock disabled 1: System configuration controller clock enabled Bit 13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 SPI1EN: SPI1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI1 clock disabled 1: SPI1 clock enabled Bit 11 SDIOEN: SDIO clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SDIO module clock disabled 1: SDIO module clock enabled Bit 10 ADC3EN: ADC3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC3 clock disabled 1: ADC3 clock disabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

154/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 9

ADC2EN: ADC2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC2 clock disabled 1: ADC2 clock disabled ADC1EN: ADC1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC1 clock disabled 1: ADC1 clock disabled

Bit 8

Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 USART6EN: USART6 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART6 clock disabled 1: USART6 clock enabled Bit 4 USART1EN: USART1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART1 clock disabled 1: USART1 clock enabled Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 TIM8EN: TIM8 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM8 clock disabled 1: TIM8 clock enabled Bit 0 TIM1EN: TIM1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM1 clock disabled 1: TIM1 clock enabled

155/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.3.18

RCC APB2 peripheral clock enable register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx(RCC_APB2ENR)
Address offset: 0x44 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18 TIM11 EN rw

17 TIM10 EN rw 1 TIM8 EN rw

16 TIM9 EN rw 0 TIM1 EN rw

SPI6EN SPI5EN Reserved rw 15 14 13 12 SPI1 EN rw 11 SDIO EN rw 10 ADC3 EN rw 9 ADC2 EN rw 8 ADC1 EN rw 7 6 5 rw 4 3 Res.

SYSCF Reser- G EN SPI4EN ved rw rw

Reserved

USART6 USART1 EN EN rw rw

Reserved

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 SPI6EN: SPI6 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI6 clock disabled 1: SPI6 clock enabled Bit 20 SPI5EN: SPI5 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI5 clock disabled 1: SPI5 clock enabled Bit 19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 TIM11EN: TIM11 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM11 clock disabled 1: TIM11 clock enabled Bit 17 TIM10EN: TIM10 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM10 clock disabled 1: TIM10 clock enabled Bit 16 TIM9EN: TIM9 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM9 clock disabled 1: TIM9 clock enabled Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 SYSCFGEN: System configuration controller clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: System configuration controller clock disabled 1: System configuration controller clock enabled Bit 13 SPI4EN: SPI4 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI4 clock disabled 1: SPI4 clock enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

156/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 12 SPI1EN: SPI1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI1 clock disabled 1: SPI1 clock enabled Bit 11 SDIOEN: SDIO clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: SDIO module clock disabled 1: SDIO module clock enabled Bit 10 ADC3EN: ADC3 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC3 clock disabled 1: ADC3 clock disabled Bit 9 ADC2EN: ADC2 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC2 clock disabled 1: ADC2 clock disabled ADC1EN: ADC1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC1 clock disabled 1: ADC1 clock disabled

Bit 8

Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 USART6EN: USART6 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART6 clock disabled 1: USART6 clock enabled Bit 4 USART1EN: USART1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: USART1 clock disabled 1: USART1 clock enabled Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 TIM8EN: TIM8 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM8 clock disabled 1: TIM8 clock enabled Bit 0 TIM1EN: TIM1 clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM1 clock disabled 1: TIM1 clock enabled

157/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.3.19

RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx (RCC_AHB1LPENR)
Address offset: 0x50 Reset value: 0x7E67 91FF Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22 DMA2 LPEN rw

21 DMA1 LPEN rw 5

20

19

18

17

16

OTGHS OTGHS ETHPTP ETHRX ETHTX ETHMAC Reser- ULPILPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN ved rw 15 FLITF LPEN rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 CRC LPEN rw rw 11 rw 10 rw 9

Reserved

Reserved

BKPSRA SRAM2 SRAM1 M LPEN LPEN LPEN rw rw 1 rw 0

2 GPIOC LPEN rw

Reserved

Reserved

GPIOI GPIOH GPIOGG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN rw rw rw rw rw rw

GPIOB GPIOA LPEN LPEN rw rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 30 OTGHSULPILPEN: USB OTG HS ULPI clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG HS ULPI clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USB OTG HS ULPI clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 29 OTGHSLPEN: USB OTG HS clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG HS clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USB OTG HS clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 28 ETHMACPTPLPEN: Ethernet PTP clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet PTP clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Ethernet PTP clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 27 ETHMACRXLPEN: Ethernet reception clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet reception clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Ethernet reception clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 26 ETHMACTXLPEN: Ethernet transmission clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet transmission clock disabled during sleep mode 1: Ethernet transmission clock enabled during sleep mode Bit 25 ETHMACLPEN: Ethernet MAC clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet MAC clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Ethernet MAC clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 24:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 DMA2LPEN: DMA2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: DMA2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: DMA2 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

158/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 21 DMA1LPEN: DMA1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: DMA1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: DMA1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 20:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 BKPSRAMLPEN: Backup SRAM interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Backup SRAM interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Backup SRAM interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 17 SRAM2LPEN: SRAM 2 interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SRAM 2 interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SRAM 2 interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 16 SRAM1LPEN: SRAM 1interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SRAM 1 interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SRAM 1 interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 15 FLITFLPEN: Flash interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Flash interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Flash interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 14:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 CRCLPEN: CRC clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: CRC clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: CRC clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 11:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 GPIOILPEN: IO port I clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port I clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port I clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 7 GPIOHLPEN: IO port H clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port H clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port H clock enabled during Sleep mode

Bits 6 GPIOGLPEN: IO port G clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port G clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port G clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 5 GPIOFLPEN: IO port F clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port F clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port F clock enabled during Sleep mode

159/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 4 GPIOELPEN: IO port E clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port E clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port E clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 3 GPIODLPEN: IO port D clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port D clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port D clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 2 GPIOCLPEN: IO port C clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port C clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port C clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 1 GPIOBLPEN: IO port B clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port B clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port B clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 0 GPIOALPEN: IO port A clock enable during sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port A clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port A clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

160/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.20

RCC AHB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_AHB1LPENR)
Address offset: 0x50 Reset value: 0x7E67 91FF Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22 DMA2 LPEN rw

21 DMA1 LPEN rw 5

20

19

18

17

16

OTGHS OTGHS ETHPTP ETHRX ETHTX ETHMAC Reser- ULPILPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN ved rw 15 FLITF LPEN rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 CRC LPEN rw rw 11 rw 10 rw 9

Reserved

Res.

BKPSRA SRAM2 SRAM1 SRAM3 M LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN rw rw 2 GPIOC LPEN rw rw 1 rw 0

Reserved

Reserved

GPIOI GPIOH GPIOGG GPIOF GPIOE GPIOD LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN LPEN rw rw rw rw rw rw

GPIOB GPIOA LPEN LPEN rw rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 30 OTGHSULPILPEN: USB OTG HS ULPI clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG HS ULPI clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USB OTG HS ULPI clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 29 OTGHSLPEN: USB OTG HS clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG HS clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USB OTG HS clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 28 ETHMACPTPLPEN: Ethernet PTP clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet PTP clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Ethernet PTP clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 27 ETHMACRXLPEN: Ethernet reception clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet reception clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Ethernet reception clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 26 ETHMACTXLPEN: Ethernet transmission clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet transmission clock disabled during sleep mode 1: Ethernet transmission clock enabled during sleep mode Bit 25 ETHMACLPEN: Ethernet MAC clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Ethernet MAC clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Ethernet MAC clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 24:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 DMA2LPEN: DMA2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: DMA2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: DMA2 clock enabled during Sleep mode

161/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 21 DMA1LPEN: DMA1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: DMA1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: DMA1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 SRAM3LPEN: SRAM3 interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SRAM3 interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SRAM3 interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 18 BKPSRAMLPEN: Backup SRAM interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Backup SRAM interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Backup SRAM interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 17 SRAM2LPEN: SRAM2 interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SRAM2 interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SRAM2 interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 16 SRAM1LPEN: SRAM1interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SRAM1 interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SRAM1 interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 15 FLITFLPEN: Flash interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Flash interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Flash interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 14:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 CRCLPEN: CRC clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: CRC clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: CRC clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 11:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 GPIOILPEN: IO port I clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port I clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port I clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 7 GPIOHLPEN: IO port H clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port H clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port H clock enabled during Sleep mode

Bits 6 GPIOGLPEN: IO port G clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port G clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port G clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

162/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 5 GPIOFLPEN: IO port F clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port F clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port F clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 4 GPIOELPEN: IO port E clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port E clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port E clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 3 GPIODLPEN: IO port D clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port D clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port D clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 2 GPIOCLPEN: IO port C clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port C clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port C clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 1 GPIOBLPEN: IO port B clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port B clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port B clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 0 GPIOALPEN: IO port A clock enable during sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: IO port A clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: IO port A clock enabled during Sleep mode

6.3.21

RCC AHB2 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register (RCC_AHB2LPENR)
Address offset: 0x54 Reset value: 0x0000 00F1 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 HASH LPEN rw 4 CRYP LPEN rw 3 2 1 0 DCMI LPEN rw

Reserved

OTGFS RNG LPEN LPEN rw rw

Reserved

163/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 OTGFSLPEN: USB OTG FS clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USB OTG FS clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USB OTG FS clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 6 RNGLPEN: Random number generator clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Random number generator clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Random number generator clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 5 HASHLPEN: Hash modules clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Hash modules clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Hash modules clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 4 CRYPLPEN: Cryptography modules clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: cryptography modules clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: cryptography modules clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 3:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 DCMILPEN: Camera interface enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Camera interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Camera interface clock enabled during Sleep mode

6.3.22

RCC AHB3 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register (RCC_AHB3LPENR)
Address offset: 0x58 Reset value: 0x0000 0001 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FSMC LPEN rw

Reserved

Bits 31:1Reserved, must be kept at reset value. FSMCLPEN: Flexible static memory controller module clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. Bit 0 0: FSMC module clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: FSMC module clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

164/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.23

RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx (RCC_APB1LPENR)
Address offset: 0x60 Reset value: 0x36FE C9FF Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29 DAC LPEN rw

28 PWR LPEN rw 12

27 RESER VED

26 CAN2 LPEN rw

25 CAN1 LPEN rw 9

24 Reserved 8 TIM14 LPEN rw

23 I2C3 LPEN rw 7 TIM13 LPEN rw

22 I2C2 LPEN rw 6 TIM12 LPEN rw

21 I2C1 LPEN rw 5 TIM7 LPEN rw

20 UART5 LPEN rw 4 TIM6 LPEN rw

19

18

17

16

Reserved

UART4 USART3 USART2 ReserLPEN LPEN LPEN ved rw rw rw 3 TIM5 LPEN rw 2 TIM4 LPEN rw 1 TIM3 LPEN rw 0 TIM2 LPEN rw

15 SPI3 LPEN rw

14 SPI2 LPEN rw

13

11 WWDG LPEN rw

10

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 29 DACLPEN: DAC interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: DAC interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: DAC interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 28 PWRLPEN: Power interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Power interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Power interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 CAN2LPEN: CAN 2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 2 clock disabled during sleep mode 1: CAN 2 clock enabled during sleep mode Bit 25 CAN1LPEN: CAN 1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: CAN 1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 I2C3LPEN: I2C3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: I2C3 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 22 I2C2LPEN: I2C2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: I2C2 clock enabled during Sleep mode

165/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 21 I2C1LPEN: I2C1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: I2C1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 20 UART5LPEN: UART5 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: UART5 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: UART5 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 19 UART4LPEN: UART4 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: UART4 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: UART4 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 18 USART3LPEN: USART3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART3 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Bit 17 USART2LPEN: USART2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART2 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 SPI3LPEN: SPI3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI3 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 14 SPI2LPEN: SPI2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI2 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 13:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 WWDGLPEN: Window watchdog clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Window watchdog clock disabled during sleep mode 1: Window watchdog clock enabled during sleep mode Bits 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 TIM14LPEN: TIM14 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM14 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM14 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 7 TIM13LPEN: TIM13 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM13 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM13 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

166/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 6 TIM12LPEN: TIM12 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM12 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM12 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 5 TIM7LPEN: TIM7 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM7 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM7 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 4 TIM6LPEN: TIM6 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM6 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM6 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 3 TIM5LPEN: TIM5 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM5 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM5 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 2 TIM4LPEN: TIM4 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM4 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM4 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 1 TIM3LPEN: TIM3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM3 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 0 TIM2LPEN: TIM2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM2 clock enabled during Sleep mode

167/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.3.24

RCC APB1 peripheral clock enable in low power mode register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB1LPENR)
Address offset: 0x60 Reset value: 0x36FE C9FF Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29 DAC LPEN rw 13

28 PWR LPEN rw 12

27 RESER VED

26 CAN2 LPEN rw

25 CAN1 LPEN rw 9

24 Reserved 8 TIM14 LPEN rw

23 I2C3 LPEN rw 7 TIM13 LPEN rw

22 I2C2 LPEN rw 6 TIM12 LPEN rw

21 I2C1 LPEN rw 5 TIM7 LPEN rw

20 UART5 LPEN rw 4 TIM6 LPEN rw

19

18

17

16

UART8 UART7 LPEN LPEN rw 15 SPI3 LPEN rw rw 14 SPI2 LPEN rw

UART4 USART3 USART2 ReserLPEN LPEN LPEN ved rw rw rw 3 TIM5 LPEN rw 2 TIM4 LPEN rw 1 TIM3 LPEN rw 0 TIM2 LPEN rw

11 WWDG LPEN rw

10

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31 UART8LPEN: UART8 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: UART8 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: UART8 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 30 UART7LPEN: UART7 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: UART7 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: UART7 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 29 DACLPEN: DAC interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: DAC interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: DAC interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 28 PWRLPEN: Power interface clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Power interface clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: Power interface clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 CAN2LPEN: CAN 2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 2 clock disabled during sleep mode 1: CAN 2 clock enabled during sleep mode Bit 25 CAN1LPEN: CAN 1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: CAN 1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: CAN 1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 I2C3LPEN: I2C3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: I2C3 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

168/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 22 I2C2LPEN: I2C2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: I2C2 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 21 I2C1LPEN: I2C1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: I2C1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: I2C1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 20 UART5LPEN: UART5 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: UART5 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: UART5 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 19 UART4LPEN: UART4 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: UART4 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: UART4 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 18 USART3LPEN: USART3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART3 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Bit 17 USART2LPEN: USART2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART2 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 SPI3LPEN: SPI3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI3 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 14 SPI2LPEN: SPI2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI2 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 13:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 WWDGLPEN: Window watchdog clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: Window watchdog clock disabled during sleep mode 1: Window watchdog clock enabled during sleep mode Bits 10:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 TIM14LPEN: TIM14 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM14 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM14 clock enabled during Sleep mode

169/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 7 TIM13LPEN: TIM13 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM13 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM13 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 6 TIM12LPEN: TIM12 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM12 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM12 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 5 TIM7LPEN: TIM7 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM7 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM7 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 4 TIM6LPEN: TIM6 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM6 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM6 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 3 TIM5LPEN: TIM5 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM5 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM5 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 2 TIM4LPEN: TIM4 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM4 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM4 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 1 TIM3LPEN: TIM3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM3 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 0 TIM2LPEN: TIM2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM2 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

170/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.25

RCC APB2 peripheral clock enabled in low power mode register for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx(RCC_APB2LPENR)
Address offset: 0x64 Reset value: 0x0007 5F33 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18 TIM11 LPEN rw

17 TIM10 LPEN rw 1 TIM8 LPEN rw

16 TIM9 LPEN rw 0 TIM1 LPEN rw

Reserved

15

14

13

12 SPI1 LPEN rw

11 SDIO LPEN rw

10 ADC3 LPEN rw

9 ADC2 LPEN rw

8 ADC1 LPEN rw

SYSC FG ReserReserLPEN ved ved rw

Reserved

USART6 USART1 LPEN LPEN rw rw

Reserved

Bits 31:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 TIM11LPEN: TIM11 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM11 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM11 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 17 TIM10LPEN: TIM10 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM10 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM10 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 16 TIM9LPEN: TIM9 clock enable during sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM9 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM9 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 SYSCFGLPEN: System configuration controller clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: System configuration controller clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: System configuration controller clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 SPI1LPEN: SPI1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 11 SDIOLPEN: SDIO clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SDIO module clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SDIO module clock enabled during Sleep mode

171/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 10 ADC3LPEN: ADC 3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC 3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: ADC 3 clock disabled during Sleep mode Bit 9 ADC2LPEN: ADC2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: ADC2 clock disabled during Sleep mode Bit 8 ADC1LPEN: ADC1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: ADC1 clock disabled during Sleep mode Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 USART6LPEN: USART6 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART6 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART6 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 4 USART1LPEN: USART1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 TIM8LPEN: TIM8 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM8 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM8 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 0 TIM1LPEN: TIM1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM1 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

172/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.26

RCC APB2 peripheral clock enabled in low power mode register for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (RCC_APB2LPENR)
Address offset: 0x64 Reset value: 0x0007 5F33 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21 SPI6 LPEN rw

20 SPI5 LPEN rw 4

19 Reserved 3

18 TIM11 LPEN rw 2

17 TIM10 LPEN rw 1 TIM8 LPEN rw

16 TIM9 LPEN rw 0 TIM1 LPEN rw

Reserved

15

14

13 SPI4 LPEN rw

12 SPI1 LPEN rw

11 SDIO LPEN rw

10 ADC3 LPEN rw

9 ADC2 LPEN rw

8 ADC1 LPEN rw

SYSC FG ReserLPEN ved rw

Reserved

USART6 USART1 LPEN LPEN rw rw

Reserved

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 SPI6LPEN: SPI6 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI6 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI6 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 20 SPI5LPEN: SPI5 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI5 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI5 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 TIM11LPEN: TIM11 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM11 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM11 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 17 TIM10LPEN: TIM10 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM10 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM10 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 16 TIM9LPEN: TIM9 clock enable during sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM9 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM9 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 SYSCFGLPEN: System configuration controller clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: System configuration controller clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: System configuration controller clock enabled during Sleep mode

173/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 13 SPI4LPEN: SPI4 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI4 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI4 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 12 SPI1LPEN: SPI1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SPI1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SPI1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 11 SDIOLPEN: SDIO clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: SDIO module clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: SDIO module clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 10 ADC3LPEN: ADC 3 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC 3 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: ADC 3 clock disabled during Sleep mode Bit 9 ADC2LPEN: ADC2 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC2 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: ADC2 clock disabled during Sleep mode Bit 8 ADC1LPEN: ADC1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: ADC1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: ADC1 clock disabled during Sleep mode Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 USART6LPEN: USART6 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART6 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART6 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 4 USART1LPEN: USART1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: USART1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: USART1 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 TIM8LPEN: TIM8 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM8 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM8 clock enabled during Sleep mode Bit 0 TIM1LPEN: TIM1 clock enable during Sleep mode Set and cleared by software. 0: TIM1 clock disabled during Sleep mode 1: TIM1 clock enabled during Sleep mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

174/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.27

RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR)

Address offset: 0x70 Reset value: 0x0000 0000, reset by Backup domain reset. Access: 0 wait state 3, word, half-word and byte access Wait states are inserted in case of successive accesses to this register. The LSEON, LSEBYP, RTCSEL and RTCEN bits in the RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR) are in the Backup domain. As a result, after Reset, these bits are write-protected and the DBP bit in the Power control register (PWR_CR) has to be set before these can be modified. Refer to Section 5.1.2 on page 67 for further information. These bits are only reset after a Backup domain Reset (see Section 6.1.3: Backup domain reset). Any internal or external Reset will not have any effect on these bits.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24 Reserved

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16 BDRST rw

15 RTCEN

14

13

12 Reserved

11

10

5 Reserved

RTCSEL[1:0] rw rw

LSEBYP LSERDY LSEON rw r rw

rw

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 16 BDRST: Backup domain software reset Set and cleared by software. 0: Reset not activated 1: Resets the entire Backup domain Note: The BKPSRAM is not affected by this reset, the only way of resetting the BKPSRAM is through the Flash interface when a protection level change from level 1 to level 0 is requested. Bit 15 RTCEN: RTC clock enable Set and cleared by software. 0: RTC clock disabled 1: RTC clock enabled Bits 14:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 9:8 RTCSEL[1:0]: RTC clock source selection Set by software to select the clock source for the RTC. Once the RTC clock source has been selected, it cannot be changed anymore unless the Backup domain is reset. The BDRST bit can be used to reset them. 00: No clock 01: LSE oscillator clock used as the RTC clock 10: LSI oscillator clock used as the RTC clock 11: HSE oscillator clock divided by a programmable prescaler (selection through the RTCPRE[4:0] bits in the RCC clock configuration register (RCC_CFGR)) used as the RTC clock Bits 7:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 LSEBYP: External low-speed oscillator bypass Set and cleared by software to bypass oscillator in debug mode. This bit can be written only when the LSE clock is disabled. 0: LSE oscillator not bypassed 1: LSE oscillator bypassed

175/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bit 1 LSERDY: External low-speed oscillator ready Set and cleared by hardware to indicate when the external 32 kHz oscillator is stable. After the LSEON bit is cleared, LSERDY goes low after 6 external low-speed oscillator clock cycles. 0: LSE clock not ready 1: LSE clock ready Bit 0 LSEON: External low-speed oscillator enable Set and cleared by software. 0: LSE clock OFF 1: LSE clock ON

6.3.28

RCC clock control & status register (RCC_CSR)

Address offset: 0x74 Reset value: 0x0E00 0000, reset by system reset, except reset flags by power reset only. Access: 0 wait state 3, word, half-word and byte access Wait states are inserted in case of successive accesses to this register.

31

30

29 IWDG RSTF rw 13

28 SFT RSTF rw 12

27 POR RSTF rw 11

26 PIN RSTF rw 10

25 BORRS TF rw 9

24 RMVF

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

LPWR WWDG RSTF RSTF rw 15 rw 14

Reserved rw 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSIRDY 0 LSION rw

Reserved r

Bit 31 LPWRRSTF: Low-power reset flag Set by hardware when a Low-power management reset occurs. Cleared by writing to the RMVF bit. 0: No Low-power management reset occurred 1: Low-power management reset occurred For further information on Low-power management reset, refer to Low-power management reset. Bit 30 WWDGRSTF: Window watchdog reset flag Set by hardware when a window watchdog reset occurs. Cleared by writing to the RMVF bit. 0: No window watchdog reset occurred 1: Window watchdog reset occurred Bit 29 IWDGRSTF: Independent watchdog reset flag Set by hardware when an independent watchdog reset from VDD domain occurs. Cleared by writing to the RMVF bit. 0: No watchdog reset occurred 1: Watchdog reset occurred Bit 28 SFTRSTF: Software reset flag Set by hardware when a software reset occurs. Cleared by writing to the RMVF bit. 0: No software reset occurred 1: Software reset occurred

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

176/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

Bit 27 PORRSTF: POR/PDR reset flag Set by hardware when a POR/PDR reset occurs. Cleared by writing to the RMVF bit. 0: No POR/PDR reset occurred 1: POR/PDR reset occurred Bit 26 PINRSTF: PIN reset flag Set by hardware when a reset from the NRST pin occurs. Cleared by writing to the RMVF bit. 0: No reset from NRST pin occurred 1: Reset from NRST pin occurred Bit 25 BORRSTF: BOR reset flag Cleared by software by writing the RMVF bit. Set by hardware when a POR/PDR or BOR reset occurs. 0: No POR/PDR or BOR reset occurred 1: POR/PDR or BOR reset occurred Bit 24 RMVF: Remove reset flag Set by software to clear the reset flags. 0: No effect 1: Clear the reset flags Bits 23:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 LSIRDY: Internal low-speed oscillator ready Set and cleared by hardware to indicate when the internal RC 40 kHz oscillator is stable. After the LSION bit is cleared, LSIRDY goes low after 3 LSI clock cycles. 0: LSI RC oscillator not ready 1: LSI RC oscillator ready Bit 0 LSION: Internal low-speed oscillator enable Set and cleared by software. 0: LSI RC oscillator OFF 1: LSI RC oscillator ON

177/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

6.3.29

RCC spread spectrum clock generation register (RCC_SSCGR)

Address offset: 0x80 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access. The spread spectrum clock generation is available only for the main PLL. The RCC_SSCGR register must be written either before the main PLL is enabled or after the main PLL disabled.

Note:

For full details about PLL spread spectrum clock generation (SSCG) characteristics, refer to the Electrical characteristics section in your device datasheet.
30 SPR EAD SEL rw 14 INCSTEP 13 12 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 SSCG EN rw 15

INCSTEP Reserved rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 8 rw 7 rw 6 MODPER rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

rw

rw

Bits 31 SSCGEN: Spread spectrum modulation enable Set and cleared by software. 0: Spread spectrum modulation DISABLE. (To write after clearing CR[24]=PLLON bit) 1: Spread spectrum modulation ENABLE. (To write before setting CR[24]=PLLON bit) Bit 30 SPREADSEL: Spread Select Set and cleared by software. To write before to set CR[24]=PLLON bit. 0: Center spread 1: Down spread Bit 29:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 27:13 INCSTEP: Incrementation step Set and cleared by software. To write before setting CR[24]=PLLON bit. Configuration input for modulation profile amplitude. Bit 12:0 MODPER: Modulation period Set and cleared by software. To write before setting CR[24]=PLLON bit. Configuration input for modulation profile period.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

178/1422

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RM0090

6.3.30

RCC PLLI2S configuration register (RCC_PLLI2SCFGR)

Address offset: 0x84 Reset value: 0x2000 3000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access. This register is used to configure the PLLI2S clock outputs according to the formulas:

f(VCO clock) = f(PLLI2S clock input) (PLLI2SN / PLLM) f(PLL I2S clock output) = f(VCO clock) / PLLI2SR
29 PLLI2S R1 rw 13 28 PLLI2S R0 rw 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 Reserv ed 15

30 PLLI2S R2 rw 14

Reserved

PLLI2SN PLLI2SN PLLI2SN PLLI2SN PLLI2SN PLLI2SN PLLI2SN PLLI2SN PLLI2SN Reserv 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ed rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Reserved

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:28 PLLI2SR: PLLI2S division factor for I2S clocks Set and cleared by software to control the I2S clock frequency. These bits should be written only if the PLLI2S is disabled. The factor must be chosen in accordance with the prescaler values inside the I2S peripherals, to reach 0.3% error when using standard crystals and 0% error with audio crystals. For more information about I2S clock frequency and precision, refer to Section 27.4.4: Clock generator in the I2S chapter. Caution: The I2Ss requires a frequency lower than or equal to 192 MHz to work correctly. I2S clock frequency = VCO frequency / PLLR with 2 PLLR 7 000: PLLR = 0, wrong configuration 001: PLLR = 1, wrong configuration 010: PLLR = 2 ... 111: PLLR = 7

179/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Bits 27:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 14:6 PLLI2SN: PLLI2S multiplication factor for VCO Set and cleared by software to control the multiplication factor of the VCO. These bits can be written only when the PLLI2S is disabled. Only half-word and word accesses are allowed to write these bits. Caution: The software has to set these bits correctly to ensure that the VCO output frequency is between 192 and 432 MHz. VCO output frequency = VCO input frequency PLLI2SN with 192 PLLI2SN 432 000000000: PLLI2SN = 0, wrong configuration 000000001: PLLI2SN = 1, wrong configuration ... 011000000: PLLI2SN = 192 011000001: PLLI2SN = 193 011000010: PLLI2SN = 194 ... 110110000: PLLI2SN = 432 110110000: PLLI2SN = 433, wrong configuration ... 111111111: PLLI2SN = 511, wrong configuration Bits 5:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

6.3.31

RCC Dedicated Clocks Configuration Register (RCC_DCKCFGR)

This register is available only on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices. Address offset: 0x8C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: no wait state, word, half-word and byte access.

31

30

29

28 Reserved

27

26

25

24 TIMPRE

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved rw 11 10 9 8 7 Reserved 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15

14

13

12

Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 24 TIMPRE: Timers clocks prescalers selection Set and reset by software to control the clock frequency of all the timers connected to APB1 and APB2 domain. 0: If the APB prescaler (PPRE1, PPRE2 in the RCC_CFGR register) is configured to a division factor of 1, TIMxCLK = PCLKx . Otherwise, the timer clock frequencies are set to twice to the frequency of the APB domain to which the timers are connected: TIMxCLK = 2xPCLKx. 1:If the APB prescaler ( PPRE1, PPRE2 in the RCC_CFGR register) is configured to a division factor of 1, 2 or 4, TIMxCLK = HCLK. Otherwise, the timer clock frequencies are set to four times to the frequency of the APB domain to which the timers are connected: TIMxCLK = 4xPCLKx. Bits 23: 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

180/1422

0x20

0x30

0x2C

0x38

0x34

0x28

0x24

0x18

0x14

0x10

0x08

0x04

0x00

6.3.32

Addr. offset

0x3C

0x1C

0x0C

181/1422
RCC_CR

Table 26.

Register name

RCC_PLLCF GR

RCC_CFGR

RCC_CIR

RCC_APB1R STR

RCC_APB2R STR

RCC_AHB1E NR

RCC_AHB3R STR

RCC_AHB2R STR

RCC_AHB1R STR

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

RCC_AHB3E NR Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved MCO2 0 MCO2PRE2 MCO2PRE1 MCO1PRE2 PLLQ 2 MCO1PRE1 PLLQ 1 MCO1PRE0 PLLQ 0 CSSC I2SSRC MCO1 1 MCO1 0 RTCPRE 4 RTCPRE 3 RTCPRE 2 RTCPRE 1 RTCPRE 0 LSIRDYC Reserved PLLI2SRDYIE CRCRST Reserved GPIOIRST OTGFSRST GPIOHRST RNGRST HSAHRST CRYPRST Reserved FSMCRST DCMIRST GPIOGRST GPIOFRST GPIOERST GPIODRST GPIOCRST GPIOBRST TIM2RST GPIOARST PLLRDYIE HSERDYIE HSIRDYIE LSERDYIE LSIRDYIE CSSF Reserved PLLI2SRDYF PLLRDYF HSERDYF HSIRDYF LSERDYF LSIRDYF PPRE2 2 PPRE2 1 PPRE2 0 PPRE1 2 PPRE1 1 PPRE1 0 Reserved HPRE 3 HPRE 2 HPRE 1 HPRE 0 SWS 1 SWS 0 SW 1 TIM3RST SW 0 Reserved Reserved PLLI2SRDYC PLLRDYC HSERDYC HSIRDYC LSERDYC Reserved Reserved PLLSRC Reserved Reserved MCO2PRE0 PLLQ 3 PLL I2SRDY PLL I2SON PLL RDY PLL ON Reserved Reserved DACRST PWRRST Reserved CAN2RST CAN1RST Reserved I2C3RST I2C2RST I2C1RST UART5RST UART4RST TIM11RST UART3RST UART2RST Reserved SPI3RST Reserved Reserved TIM10RST TIM9RST Reserved SYSCFGRST SPI2RST Reserved SPI1RST SDIORST Reserved ADCRST Reserved TIM12RST USART6RST TIM7RST USART1RST TIM6RST Reserved TIM8RST TIM1RST TIM5RST TIM4RST TIM13RST TIM14RST Reserved WWDGRST Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DMA1RST DMA2RST Reserved ETHMACRST Reserved Reserved OTGHSRST Reserved MCO2 1 CSSON HSEBYP PLLP 1 PLLP 0 PLLN 8 PLLN 7 PLLN 6 PLLN 5 PLLN 4 PLLN 3 PLLN 2 PLLN 1 PLLN 0 PLLM 5 PLLM 4 PLLM 3 PLLM 2 PLLM 1 PLLM 0 HSERDY HSEON Reserved HSICAL 7 HSICAL 6 HSICAL 5 HSICAL 4 HSICAL 3 HSICAL 2 HSICAL 1 HSICAL 0 HSITRIM 4 HSITRIM 3 HSITRIM 2 HSITRIM 1 HSITRIM 0 Reserved HSIRDY HSION

RCC_AHB2E NR

Reserved

Reserved

OTGHSULPIEN

OTGHSEN

ETHMACPTPEN

ETHMACRXEN

RCC register map

ETHMACTXEN

ETHMACEN

Reserved

DMA2EN

DMA1EN

CCMDATARAMEN

Reserved

Reserved

Table 26 gives the register map and reset values.

RCC register map and reset values for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

BKPSRAMEN

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

CRCEN

Reserved

GPIOIEN

OTGFSEN

GPIOHEN

RNGEN

GPIOGEN

HASHEN

GPIOFEN

CRYPEN

GPIOEEN

GPIODEN

Reserved

GPIOCEN

GPIOBEN

RM0090

FSMCEN DCMIEN

GPIOAEN

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x80

0x70

0x60

0x50

RM0090

Table 26.

Addr. offset

0x7C

0x6C

0x4C

0x5C

Reserved WWDGRSTF WDGRSTF SFTRSTF PORRSTF PADRSTF BORRSTF RMVF I2C3LPEN I2C2LPEN I2C1LPEN UART5LPEN UART4LPEN TIM11LPEN USART3LPEN TIM10LPEN USART2LPEN BDRST TIM9LPEN Reserved SPI3LPEN SPI2LPEN Reserved WWDGLPEN Reserved TIM14LPEN TIM13LPEN TIM12LPEN TIM7LPEN TIM6LPEN TIM5LPEN Reserved TIM8LPEN TIM1LPEN TIM4LPEN TIM3LPEN TIM2LPEN FSMCLPEN DCMILPEN Reserved OTGFSLPEN RNGLPEN HASHLPEN CRYPLPEN Reserved GPIOILPEN GPIOHLPEN GPIOGLPEN GPIOFLPEN GPIOELPEN GPIODLPEN GPIOCLPEN GPIOBLPEN GPIOALPEN SYSCFGLPEN Reserved SPI1LPEN SDIOLPEN ADC3LPEN RTCSEL 1 ADC2LPEN ADC1LPEN Reserved USART6LPEN USART1LPEN RTCSEL 0 RTCEN Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DMA2LPEN DMA1LPEN Reserved BKPSRAMLPEN SRAM2LPEN SRAM1LPEN FLITFLPEN Reserved CRCLPEN Reserved Reserved TIM11EN TIM10EN TIM9EN Reserved SYSCFGEN Reserved SPI1EN SDIOEN ADC3EN ADC2EN ADC1EN Reserved USART6EN USART1EN Reserved TIM8EN TIM1EN Reserved Reserved Reserved CAN1LPEN ETHMACLPEN Reserved CAN2LPEN ETHMACTXLPEN Reserved ETHMACRXLPEN PWRLPEN ETHMACPTPLPEN DACLPEN OTGHSLPEN Reserved OTGHSULPILPEN

0x84 0x74 0x68 0x64 0x58 0x54 0x48 0x44 0x40 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

0x78

Register name

RCC_APB1L PENR

RCC_APB2E NR

RCC_APB1E NR

RCC_AHB1L PENR

RCC_AHB3L PENR

RCC_AHB2L PENR

RCC_APB2L PENR

RCC_BDCR

RCC_CSR

Reserved

Reserved

SSCGEN

SPREADSEL

PLLI2SRx Reserved

Reserved

RCC_SSCGR

RCC_PLLI2S CFGR LPWRRSTF Reserved Reserved DACEN PWREN Reserved CAN2EN CAN1EN Reserved I2C3EN I2C2EN I2C1EN UART5EN UART4EN USART3EN USART2EN Reserved SPI3EN SPI2EN Reserved WWDGEN Reserved TIM14EN TIM13EN TIM12EN TIM7EN TIM6EN TIM5EN TIM4EN TIM3EN TIM2EN

Reserved

INCSTEP

RCC register map and reset values for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Reserved Reserved LSEBYP LSIRDY LSERDY LSEON LSION Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

PLLI2SNx

MODPER

Reserved

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

182/1422

0x20

0x2C

Addr. offset

0x3C

0x1C

0x0C

0x40 0x28 0x24 0x18 0x14 0x10 0x08 0x04 0x00

0x30

0x38

0x34

183/1422
RCC_CR

Table 27.

Register name

RCC_PLLCF GR

RCC_CFGR

RCC_CIR

Reserved Reserved UART8RST Reserved MCO2 0 MCO2PRE2 MCO2PRE1 Reserved Reserved OTGHSRST Reserved ETHMACRST Reserved CSSC Reserved PLLI2SRDYC PLLRDYC HSERDYC HSIRDYC LSERDYC LSIRDYC Reserved PLLI2SRDYIE CRCRST Reserved GPIOIRST OTGFSRST GPIOHRST RNGRST HSAHRST CRYPRST TIM5RST TIM4RST TIM3RST TIM1RST TIM2RST FSMCRST DCMIRST Reserved GPIOGRST GPIOFRST GPIOERST GPIODRST GPIOCRST GPIOBRST GPIOARST PLLRDYIE HSERDYIE HSIRDYIE LSERDYIE LSIRDYIE CSSF Reserved PLLI2SRDYF PLLRDYF HSERDYF HSIRDYF LSERDYF LSIRDYF Reserved DMA2RST DMA1RST Reserved UART7RST DACRST PWRRST Reserved CAN2RST CAN1RST Reserved I2C3RST I2C2RST SPI6RST SPI5RST Reserved UART4RST UART3RST UART2RST Reserved SPI3RST Reserved Reserved TIM11RST TIM10RST TIM9RST Reserved SYSCFGRST SPI2RST SP45RST CRCEN SDIORST Reserved Reserved ADCRST Reserved TIM13RST TIM12RST TIM14RST Reserved GPIOIEN GPIOHEN GPIOGEN GPIOFEN GPIOEEN GPIODEN GPIOCEN GPIOBEN GPIOAEN Reserved TIM8RST WWDGRST SPI1RST Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved UART5RST I2C1RST Reserved Reserved OTGHSULPIEN OTGHSEN ETHMACPTPEN ETHMACRXEN ETHMACTXEN ETHMACEN Reserved DMA2EN DMA1EN CCMDATARAMEN Reserved BKPSRAMEN MCO2 1 MCO2PRE0 PLLQ 3 PLL I2SRDY MCO1PRE2 PLLQ 2 MCO1PRE1 PLLQ 1 MCO1PRE0 PLLQ 0 I2SSRC MCO1 1 MCO1 0 RTCPRE 4 RTCPRE 3 RTCPRE 2 RTCPRE 1 RTCPRE 0 PPRE2 2 PPRE2 1 PPRE2 0 PPRE1 2 PPRE1 1 PPRE1 0 Reserved HPRE 3 HPRE 2 HPRE 1 HPRE 0 SWS 1 SWS 0 SW 1 SW 0 Reserved Reserved PLLSRC Reserved PLL I2SON PLL RDY PLL ON CSSON HSEBYP PLLP 1 PLLP 0 PLLN 8 PLLN 7 PLLN 6 PLLN 5 PLLN 4 PLLN 3 PLLN 2 PLLN 1 PLLN 0 PLLM 5 PLLM 4 PLLM 3 PLLM 2 PLLM 1 PLLM 0 HSERDY HSEON Reserved HSICAL 7 HSICAL 6 HSICAL 5 HSICAL 4 HSICAL 3 HSICAL 2 HSICAL 1 HSICAL 0 HSITRIM 4 HSITRIM 3 HSITRIM 2 HSITRIM 1 HSITRIM 0 Reserved HSIRDY HSION

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

RCC_APB1R STR

RCC_APB2R STR

RCC_AHB1E NR

RCC_AHB3R STR

RCC_AHB2R STR

RCC_AHB1R STR

RCC_AHB3E NR

RCC_AHB2E NR

SPI8EN

SPI7EN

DACEN

PWREN

Reserved

CAN2EN

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

CAN1EN

Reserved

I2C3EN

I2C2EN

I2C1EN

UART5EN

Reserved

UART4EN

USART3EN

USART2EN

RCC register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

USART6RST TIM7RST USART1RST TIM6RST

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

SPI3EN

SPI2EN

Reserved

WWDGEN

Reserved

TIM14EN

TIM13EN

TIM12EN

TIM7EN

TIM6EN

TIM5EN

TIM4EN

TIM3EN

RM0090

TIM2EN

RCC_APB1E NR

OTGFSEN

RNGEN

HASHEN

CRYPEN

Reserved

FSMCEN DCMIEN

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x7C

0x6C

0x4C

0x5C

0x88 0x70 0x60 0x50 0x78 0x74 0x68 0x64 0x58 0x54 0x48 0x44

0x80

0x84

RM0090

Table 27.

Addr. offset

TIMPRE RMVF I2C3LPEN I2C2LPEN SPI6LPEN SPI5LPEN Reserved UART4LPEN TIM11LPEN USART3LPEN TIM10LPEN USART2LPEN BDRST TIM9LPEN Reserved SPI3LPEN SPI2LPEN Reserved WWDGLPEN Reserved TIM14LPEN TIM13LPEN TIM12LPEN USART6LPEN USART1LPEN Reserved TIM8LPEN LSERDY LSEON TIM1LPEN TIM7LPEN TIM6LPEN TIM5LPEN TIM4LPEN TIM3LPEN TIM2LPEN FSMCLPEN DCMILPEN Reserved OTGFSLPEN RNGLPEN HASHLPEN CRYPLPEN SYSCFGLPEN SPI4LPEN SPI1LPEN SDIOLPEN ADC3LPEN RTCSEL 1 RTCSEL 0 ADC2LPEN ADC1LPEN Reserved RTCEN Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved UART5LPEN Reserved I2C1LPEN

0x8C

Register name

RCC_APB1L PENR

RCC_APB2E NR

RCC_AHB1L PENR

RCC_AHB3L PENR

RCC_AHB2L PENR

RCC_APB2L PENR

RCC_BDCR

RCC_CSR

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

RCC_PLLI2S CFGR

RCC_SSCGR

RCC_DCKCF GR LPWRRSTF WWDGRSTF WDGRSTF SFTRSTF PORRSTF PADRSTF BORRSTF Reserved Reserved CAN1LPEN CAN2LPEN ETHMACTXLPEN ETHMACLPEN Reserved DMA2LPEN DMA1LPEN Reserved SRAM3LPEN BKPSRAMLPEN SRAM2LPEN SRAM1LPEN FLITFLPEN Reserved CRCLPEN Reserved GPIOILPEN GPIOHLPEN GPIOGLPEN GPIOFLPEN GPIOELPEN GPIODLPEN GPIOCLPEN GPIOBLPEN GPIOALPEN Reserved Reserved SPI6EN SPI5EN Reserved TIM11EN TIM10EN TIM9EN Reserved SYSCFGEN SPI4EN SPI1EN SDIOEN ADC3EN ADC2EN ADC1EN Reserved USART6EN USART1EN Reserved TIM8EN TIM1EN Reserved Reserved ETHMACRXLPEN PWRLPEN ETHMACPTPLPEN Reserved DACLPEN OTGHSLPEN USART7LPEN OTGHSULPILPEN USART8LPEN Reserved

Reserved

SSCGEN

SPREADSEL

PLLI2SRx

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

INCSTEP

Reserved

RCC register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (continued)

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

Reserved Reserved LSEBYP LSIRDY LSION Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Reset and clock control for (RCC)

Reserved

PLLI2SNx

MODPER

Reserved

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

184/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

7.1

GPIO introduction
Each general-purpose I/O port has four 32-bit configuration registers (GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR and GPIOx_PUPDR), two 32-bit data registers (GPIOx_IDR and GPIOx_ODR), a 32-bit set/reset register (GPIOx_BSRR), a 32-bit locking register (GPIOx_LCKR) and two 32-bit alternate function selection register (GPIOx_AFRH and GPIOx_AFRL).

7.2

GPIO main features

Up to 16 I/Os under control Output states: push-pull or open drain + pull-up/down Output data from output data register (GPIOx_ODR) or peripheral (alternate function output) Speed selection for each I/O Input states: floating, pull-up/down, analog Input data to input data register (GPIOx_IDR) or peripheral (alternate function input) Bit set and reset register (GPIOx_BSRR) for bitwise write access to GPIOx_ODR Locking mechanism (GPIOx_LCKR) provided to freeze the I/O configuration Analog function Alternate function input/output selection registers (at most 16 AFs per I/O) Fast toggle capable of changing every two clock cycles Highly flexible pin multiplexing allows the use of I/O pins as GPIOs or as one of several peripheral functions

7.3

GPIO functional description

Subject to the specific hardware characteristics of each I/O port listed in the datasheet, each port bit of the general-purpose I/O (GPIO) ports can be individually configured by software in several modes:

Input floating Input pull-up Input-pull-down Analog Output open-drain with pull-up or pull-down capability Output push-pull with pull-up or pull-down capability Alternate function push-pull with pull-up or pull-down capability Alternate function open-drain with pull-up or pull-down capability

185/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) Each I/O port bit is freely programmable, however the I/O port registers have to be accessed as 32-bit words, half-words or bytes. The purpose of the GPIOx_BSRR register is to allow atomic read/modify accesses to any of the GPIO registers. In this way, there is no risk of an IRQ occurring between the read and the modify access. Figure 17 shows the basic structure of a 5 V tolerant I/O port bit. Table 32 gives the possible port bit configurations. Figure 17. Basic structure of a five-volt tolerant I/O port bit

To on-chip peripheral

Analog Alternate function input Input data register on/off VDD TTL Schmitt trigger Input driver Output driver VDD P-MOS Output control N-MOS VSS Alternate function output Push-pull, open-drain or disabled on/off on/off
VDD_FT (1)

Read Bit set/reset registers

Pull up

Protection diode I/O pin Protection diode VSS

Output data register

Write

Pull down

VSS

Read/write From on-chip peripheral

Analog
ai15939b

1. VDD_FT is a potential specific to five-volt tolerant I/Os and different from VDD.

Table 28.
MODER(i) [1:0]

Port bit configuration table(1)

OTYPER(i) 0 0 0 0 OSPEEDR(i) [B:A] 0 0 1 SPEED [B:A] 1 0 0 1 1 PUPDR(i) [1:0] 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 I/O configuration GP output GP output GP output Reserved GP output GP output GP output OD OD + PU OD + PD PP PP + PU PP + PD

01 1 1 1 1

Reserved (GP output OD)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

186/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) Table 28.

MODER(i) [1:0]

RM0090

Port bit configuration table(1) (continued)

OTYPER(i) 0 0 0 0 OSPEEDR(i) [B:A] PUPDR(i) [1:0] 0 0 1 SPEED [B:A] 1 0 0 1 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Reserved AF AF AF Reserved AF AF AF Reserved Input Input Input Floating PU PD OD OD + PU OD + PD I/O configuration PP PP + PU PP + PD

10 1 1 1 1 x x 00 x x x x 11 x x

Reserved (input floating) Input/output Analog

1. GP = general-purpose, PP = push-pull, PU = pull-up, PD = pull-down, OD = open-drain, AF = alternate function.

7.3.1

General-purpose I/O (GPIO)

During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not active and the I/O ports are configured in input floating mode. The debug pins are in AF pull-up/pull-down after reset:

PA15: JTDI in pull-up PA14: JTCK/SWCLK in pull-down PA13: JTMS/SWDAT in pull-up PB4: NJTRST in pull-up PB3: JTDO in floating state

When the pin is configured as output, the value written to the output data register (GPIOx_ODR) is output on the I/O pin. It is possible to use the output driver in push-pull mode or open-drain mode (only the N-MOS is activated when 0 is output). The input data register (GPIOx_IDR) captures the data present on the I/O pin at every AHB1 clock cycle. All GPIO pins have weak internal pull-up and pull-down resistors, which can be activated or not depending on the value in the GPIOx_PUPDR register.

187/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

7.3.2

I/O pin multiplexer and mapping

The microcontroller I/O pins are connected to onboard peripherals/modules through a multiplexer that allows only one peripherals alternate function (AF) connected to an I/O pin at a time. In this way, there can be no conflict between peripherals sharing the same I/O pin. Each I/O pin has a multiplexer with sixteen alternate function inputs (AF0 to AF15) that can be configured through the GPIOx_AFRL (for pin 0 to 7) and GPIOx_AFRH (for pin 8 to 15) registers:

After reset all I/Os are connected to the systems alternate function 0 (AF0) The peripherals alternate functions are mapped from AF1 to AF13 Cortex-M4F EVENTOUT is mapped on AF15

This structure is shown in Figure 18 below. In addition to this flexible I/O multiplexing architecture, each peripheral has alternate functions mapped onto different I/O pins to optimize the number of peripherals available in smaller packages. To use an I/O in a given configuration, proceed as follows: 1. System function Connect the I/O to AF0 and configure it depending on the function used: Note: JTAG/SWD, after each device reset these pins are assigned as dedicated pins immediately usable by the debugger host (not controlled by the GPIO controller) RTC_REFIN: this pin should be configured in Input floating mode MCO1 and MCO2: these pins have to be configured in alternate function mode.

You can disable some or all of the JTAG/SWD pins and so release the associated pins for GPIO usage. For more details please refer to Section 6.2.10: Clock-out capability.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

188/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) Table 29. Flexible SWJ-DP pin assignment

SWJ I/O pin assigned Available debug ports PA13 / JTMS/ SWDIO X X X PA14 / JTCK/ SWCLK X X X Released PA15 / JTDI X X PB3 / JTDO X X

RM0090

PB4/ NJTRST X

Full SWJ (JTAG-DP + SW-DP) - Reset state Full SWJ (JTAG-DP + SW-DP) but without NJTRST JTAG-DP Disabled and SW-DP Enabled JTAG-DP Disabled and SW-DP Disabled

2. 3.

GPIO Configure the desired I/O as output or input in the GPIOx_MODER register. Peripheral alternate function For the ADC and DAC, configure the desired I/O as analog in the GPIOx_MODER register. For other peripherals: Configure the desired I/O as an alternate function in the GPIOx_MODER register Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via the GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_PUPDR and GPIOx_OSPEEDER registers, respectively Connect the I/O to the desired AFx in the GPIOx_AFRL or GPIOx_AFRH register

4.

EVENTOUT Configure the I/O pin used to output the Cortex-M4F EVENTOUT signal by connecting it to AF15

Note:

EVENTOUT is not mapped onto the following I/O pins: PC13, PC14, PC15, PH0, PH1 and PI8. Please refer to the Alternate function mapping table in the datasheets for the detailed mapping of the system and peripherals alternate function I/O pins.

189/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) Figure 18. Selecting an alternate function on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
For pins 0 to 7, the GPIOx_AFRL[31:0] register selects the dedicated alternate function AF0 (system) AF1 (TIM1/TIM2) AF2 (TIM3..5) AF3 (TIM8..11) AF4 (I2C1..3) AF5 (SPI1/SPI2) AF6 (SPI3) AF7 (USART1..3) AF8 (USART4..6) AF9 (CAN1/CAN2, TIM12..14) AF10 (OTG_FS, OTG_HS) AF11 (ETH) AF12 (FSMC, SDIO, OTG_HS(1)) AF13 (DCMI) AF14 AF15 (EVENTOUT)

Pin x (x = 0..7)
1

AFRL[31:0] For pins 8 to 15, the GPIOx_AFRH[31:0] register selects the dedicated alternate function AF0 (system) AF1 (TIM1/TIM2) AF2 (TIM3..5) AF3 (TIM8..11) AF4 (I2C1..3) AF5 (SPI1/SPI2) AF6 (SPI3) AF7 (USART1..3) AF8 (USART4..6) AF9 (CAN1/CAN2, TIM12..14) AF10 (OTG_FS, OTG_HS) AF11 (ETH) AF12 (FSMC, SDIO, OTG_HS(1)) AF13 (DCMI) AF14 AF15 (EVENTOUT)

Pin x (x = 8..15)
1

AFRH[31:0]

ai17538

1. Configured in FS.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

190/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

RM0090

Figure 19. Selecting an alternate function on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

For pins 0 to 7, the GPIOx_AFRL[31:0] register selects the dedicated alternate function AF0 (system) AF1 (TIM1/TIM2) AF2 (TIM3..5) AF3 (TIM8..11) AF4 (I2C1..3) AF5 (SPI1/2/4/5/6) AF6 (SPI3) AF7 (USART1..3) AF8 (USART4..8) AF9 (CAN1/CAN2, TIM12..14) AF10 (OTG_FS, OTG_HS) AF11 (ETH) AF12 (FSMC, SDIO, OTG_HS(1)) AF13 (DCMI) AF14 AF15 (EVENTOUT)

Pin x (x = 0..7) 1

AFRL[31:0] For pins 8 to 15, the GPIOx_AFRH[31:0] register selects the dedicated alternate function AF0 (system) AF1 (TIM1/TIM2) AF2 (TIM3..5) AF3 (TIM8..11) AF4 (I2C1..3) AF5 (SPI1/2/4/5/6) AF6 (SPI3) AF7 (USART1..3) AF8 (USART4..8) AF9 (CAN1/CAN2, TIM12..14) AF10 (OTG_FS, OTG_HS) AF11 (ETH) AF12 (FSMC, SDIO, OTG_HS(1)) AF13 (DCMI) AF14 AF15 (EVENTOUT)

Pin x (x = 8..15) 1

AFRH[31:0]
1. Configured in FS.

MS30435V1

7.3.3

I/O port control registers

Each of the GPIOs has four 32-bit memory-mapped control registers (GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR, GPIOx_PUPDR) to configure up to 16 I/Os. The GPIOx_MODER register is used to select the I/O direction (input, output, AF, analog). The

191/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) GPIOx_OTYPER and GPIOx_OSPEEDR registers are used to select the output type (pushpull or open-drain) and speed (the I/O speed pins are directly connected to the corresponding GPIOx_OSPEEDR register bits whatever the I/O direction). The GPIOx_PUPDR register is used to select the pull-up/pull-down whatever the I/O direction.

7.3.4

I/O port data registers

Each GPIO has two 16-bit memory-mapped data registers: input and output data registers (GPIOx_IDR and GPIOx_ODR). GPIOx_ODR stores the data to be output, it is read/write accessible. The data input through the I/O are stored into the input data register (GPIOx_IDR), a read-only register. See Section 7.4.5: GPIO port input data register (GPIOx_IDR) (x = A..I) and Section 7.4.6: GPIO port output data register (GPIOx_ODR) (x = A..I) for the register descriptions.

7.3.5

I/O data bitwise handling

The bit set reset register (GPIOx_BSRR) is a 32-bit register which allows the application to set and reset each individual bit in the output data register (GPIOx_ODR). The bit set reset register has twice the size of GPIOx_ODR. To each bit in GPIOx_ODR, correspond two control bits in GPIOx_BSRR: BSRR(i) and BSRR(i+SIZE). When written to 1, bit BSRR(i) sets the corresponding ODR(i) bit. When written to 1, bit BSRR(i+SIZE) resets the ODR(i) corresponding bit. Writing any bit to 0 in GPIOx_BSRR does not have any effect on the corresponding bit in GPIOx_ODR. If there is an attempt to both set and reset a bit in GPIOx_BSRR, the set action takes priority. Using the GPIOx_BSRR register to change the values of individual bits in GPIOx_ODR is a one-shot effect that does not lock the GPIOx_ODR bits. The GPIOx_ODR bits can always be accessed directly. The GPIOx_BSRR register provides a way of performing atomic bitwise handling. There is no need for the software to disable interrupts when programming the GPIOx_ODR at bit level: it is possible to modify one or more bits in a single atomic AHB1 write access.

7.3.6

GPIO locking mechanism

It is possible to freeze the GPIO control registers by applying a specific write sequence to the GPIOx_LCKR register. The frozen registers are GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR, GPIOx_PUPDR, GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH. To write the GPIOx_LCKR register, a specific write / read sequence has to be applied. When the right LOCK sequence is applied to bit 16 in this register, the value of LCKR[15:0] is used to lock the configuration of the I/Os (during the write sequence the LCKR[15:0] value must be the same). When the LOCK sequence has been applied to a port bit, the value of the port bit can no longer be modified until the next reset. Each GPIOx_LCKR bit freezes the corresponding bit in the control registers (GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR, GPIOx_PUPDR, GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH). The LOCK sequence (refer to Section 7.4.8: GPIO port configuration lock register (GPIOx_LCKR) (x = A..I)) can only be performed using a word (32-bit long) access to the GPIOx_LCKR register due to the fact that GPIOx_LCKR bit 16 has to be set at the same time as the [15:0] bits.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

192/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

RM0090

For more details please refer to LCKR register description in Section 7.4.8: GPIO port configuration lock register (GPIOx_LCKR) (x = A..I).

7.3.7

I/O alternate function input/output

Two registers are provided to select one out of the sixteen alternate function inputs/outputs available for each I/O. With these registers, you can connect an alternate function to some other pin as required by your application. This means that a number of possible peripheral functions are multiplexed on each GPIO using the GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH alternate function registers. The application can thus select any one of the possible functions for each I/O. The AF selection signal being common to the alternate function input and alternate function output, a single channel is selected for the alternate function input/output of one I/O. To know which functions are multiplexed on each GPIO pin, refer to the datasheets.

Note:

The application is allowed to select one of the possible peripheral functions for each I/O at a time.

7.3.8

External interrupt/wakeup lines

All ports have external interrupt capability. To use external interrupt lines, the port must be configured in input mode, refer to Section 10.2: External interrupt/event controller (EXTI) and Section 10.2.3: Wakeup event management.

7.3.9

Input configuration
When the I/O port is programmed as Input:

the output buffer is disabled the Schmitt trigger input is activated the pull-up and pull-down resistors are activated depending on the value in the GPIOx_PUPDR register The data present on the I/O pin are sampled into the input data register every AHB1 clock cycle A read access to the input data register provides the I/O State

Figure 20 shows the input configuration of the I/O port bit.

193/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) Figure 20. Input floating/pull up/pull down configurations

Input data register

Read Bit set/reset registers

on VDD VDD on/off pull up on/off output driver pull down VSS VSS protection diode protection diode I/O pin

TTL Schmitt trigger input driver

Read/write

Output data register

Write

ai15940b

7.3.10

Output configuration
When the I/O port is programmed as output:

The output buffer is enabled: Open drain mode: A 0 in the Output register activates the N-MOS whereas a 1 in the Output register leaves the port in Hi-Z (the P-MOS is never activated) Push-pull mode: A 0 in the Output register activates the N-MOS whereas a 1 in the Output register activates the P-MOS

The Schmitt trigger input is activated The weak pull-up and pull-down resistors are activated or not depending on the value in the GPIOx_PUPDR register The data present on the I/O pin are sampled into the input data register every AHB1 clock cycle A read access to the input data register gets the I/O state A read access to the output data register gets the last written value

Figure 21 shows the output configuration of the I/O port bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

194/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) Figure 21. Output configuration

RM0090

Input data register

on

Read

Bit set/reset registers

TTL Schmitt trigger Input driver Output driver VDD

VDD on/off pull up on/off

VDD protection diode I/O pin

Write

Output data register

P-MOS
Output control

pull down VSS VSS

protection diode

Read/write

N-MOS Push-pull or VSS Open-drain

ai15941b

7.3.11

Alternate function configuration

When the I/O port is programmed as alternate function:

The output buffer can be configured as open-drain or push-pull The output buffer is driven by the signal coming from the peripheral (transmitter enable and data) The Schmitt trigger input is activated The weak pull-up and pull-down resistors are activated or not depending on the value in the GPIOx_PUPDR register The data present on the I/O pin are sampled into the input data register every AHB1 clock cycle A read access to the input data register gets the I/O state

Figure 22 shows the Alternate function configuration of the I/O port bit. Figure 22. Alternate function configuration
To on-chip peripheral Alternate function input Input data register on VDD VDD TTL Schmitt trigger Input driver Output data register Output driver VDD P-MOS Output control N-MOS VSS From on-chip peripheral Alternate function output
ai15942b

Read

Bit set/reset registers

on/off
Pull up

protection diode

Write

I/O pin
on/off
Pull down

protection diode VSS

VSS push-pull or open-drain

Read/write

195/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

7.3.12

Analog configuration
When the I/O port is programmed as analog configuration:

The output buffer is disabled The Schmitt trigger input is deactivated, providing zero consumption for every analog value of the I/O pin. The output of the Schmitt trigger is forced to a constant value (0). The weak pull-up and pull-down resistors are disabled Read access to the input data register gets the value 0

Note:

In the analog configuration, the I/O pins cannot be 5 Volt tolerant. Figure 23 shows the high-impedance, analog-input configuration of the I/O port bit. Figure 23. High impedance-analog configuration

To on-chip peripheral Read

Analog
Input data register

off 0 VDD

Bit set/reset registers

TTL Schmitt
trigger Input driver protection diode

Output data register

Write

I/O pin
protection diode VSS

Read/write

From on-chip peripheral

Analog
ai15943

7.3.13

Using the OSC32_IN/OSC32_OUT pins as GPIO PC14/PC15 port pins

The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as general-purpose PC14 and PC15 I/Os, respectively, when the LSE oscillator is off. The PC14 and PC15 I/Os are only configured as LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT when the LSE oscillator is ON. This is done by setting the LSEON bit in the RCC_BDCR register. The LSE has priority over the GPIO function.

Note:

The PC14/PC15 GPIO functionality is lost when the 1.2 V domain is powered off (by the device entering the standby mode) or when the backup domain is supplied by VBAT (VDD no more supplied). In this case the I/Os are set in analog input mode.

7.3.14

Using the OSC_IN/OSC_OUT pins as GPIO PH0/PH1 port pins

The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as general-purpose PH0/PH1 I/Os, respectively, when the HSE oscillator is OFF. (after reset, the HSE oscillator is off). The PH0/PH1 I/Os are only configured as OSC_IN/OSC_OUT HSE oscillator pins when the HSE oscillator is ON. This is done by setting the HSEON bit in the RCC_CR register. The HSE has priority over the GPIO function.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

196/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

RM0090

7.3.15

Selection of RTC_AF1 and RTC_AF2 alternate functions

The STM32F4xx feature two GPIO pins RTC_AF1 and RTC_AF2 that can be used for the detection of a tamper or time stamp event, or RTC_ALARM, or RTC_CALIB RTC outputs.

The RTC_AF1 (PC13) can be used for the following purposes:

RTC_ALARM output: this output can be RTC Alarm A, RTC Alarm B or RTC Wakeup depending on the OSEL[1:0] bits in the RTC_CR register

RTC_CALIB output: this feature is enabled by setting the COE[23] in the RTC_CR register RTC_TAMP1: tamper event detection RTC_TS: time stamp event detection RTC_TAMP1: tamper event detection RTC_TAMP2: tamper event detection RTC_TS: time stamp event detection

The RTC_AF2 (PI8) can be used for the following purposes:

The selection of the corresponding pin is performed through the RTC_TAFCR register as follows:

TAMP1INSEL is used to select which pin is used as the RTC_TAMP1 tamper input TSINSEL is used to select which pin is used as the RTC_TS time stamp input ALARMOUTTYPE is used to select whether the RTC_ALARM is output in push-pull or open-drain mode

The output mechanism follows the priority order listed in Table 30 and Table 31. Table 30. RTC_AF1 pin(1)

TSINSEL Pin Time TAMP1INSEL ALARMOUTTYPE RTC_ALARM RTC_CALIB Tamper TIMESTAMP configuration stamp TAMPER1 pin RTC_ALARM enabled enabled enabled pin and function enabled selection configuration selection Alarm out output OD Alarm out output PP Calibration out output PP TAMPER1 input floating TIMESTAMP and TAMPER1 input floating TIMESTAMP input floating Standard GPIO 1 1 0 0 Dont care Dont care 1 0 Dont care Dont care Dont care 1 Dont care Dont care Dont care 0 Dont care Dont care Dont care 0 Dont care Dont care Dont care Dont care 0 1 Dont care Dont care

Dont care

0 0

0 0

0 0

1 0

Dont care Dont care

0 Dont care

Dont care Dont care

1. OD: open drain; PP: push-pull.

197/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 31. RTC_AF2 pin

Tamper enabled 1 1 0 0 Time stamp enabled 0 1 1 0

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

Pin configuration and function

TSINSEL TAMP1INSEL ALARMOUTTYPE TIMESTAMP TAMPER1 RTC_ALARM pin pin selection configuration selection 1 1 Dont care Dont care Dont care 1 1 Dont care Dont care Dont care Dont care Dont care

TAMPER1 input floating TIMESTAMP and TAMPER1 input floating TIMESTAMP input floating Standard GPIO

7.4

GPIO registers
This section gives a detailed description of the GPIO registers. For a summary of register bits, register address offsets and reset values, refer to Table 32. The GPIO registers can be accessed by byte (8 bits), half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

7.4.1

GPIO port mode register (GPIOx_MODER) (x = A..I)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset values:

0xA800 0000 for port A 0x0000 0280 for port B 0x0000 0000 for other ports
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31

30

MODER15[1:0] rw 15 rw 14

MODER14[1:0] rw 13 rw 12

MODER13[1:0] rw 11 rw 10

MODER12[1:0] rw 9 rw 8

MODER11[1:0] rw 7 rw 6

MODER10[1:0] rw 5 rw 4

MODER9[1:0] rw 3 rw 2

MODER8[1:0] rw 1 rw 0

MODER7[1:0] rw rw

MODER6[1:0] rw rw

MODER5[1:0] rw rw

MODER4[1:0] rw rw

MODER3[1:0] rw rw

MODER2[1:0] rw rw

MODER1[1:0] rw rw

MODER0[1:0] rw rw

Bits 2y:2y+1 MODERy[1:0]: Port x configuration bits (y = 0..15) These bits are written by software to configure the I/O direction mode. 00: Input (reset state) 01: General purpose output mode 10: Alternate function mode 11: Analog mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

198/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

RM0090

7.4.2

GPIO port output type register (GPIOx_OTYPER) (x = A..I)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15 OT15 rw

14 OT14 rw

13 OT13 rw

12 OT12 rw

11 OT11 rw

10 OT10 rw

9 OT9 rw

8 OT8 rw

7 OT7 rw

6 OT6 rw

5 OT5 rw

4 OT4 rw

3 OT3 rw

2 OT2 rw

1 OT1 rw

0 OT0 rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 OTy[1:0]: Port x configuration bits (y = 0..15) These bits are written by software to configure the output type of the I/O port. 0: Output push-pull (reset state) 1: Output open-drain

7.4.3

GPIO port output speed register (GPIOx_OSPEEDR) (x = A..I/)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset values:

0x0000 00C0 for port B 0x0000 0000 for other ports

29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31

30

OSPEEDR15[1:0] OSPEEDR14[1:0] OSPEEDR13[1:0] OSPEEDR12[1:0] OSPEEDR11[1:0] OSPEEDR10[1:0] OSPEEDR9[1:0] OSPEEDR8[1:0] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

OSPEEDR7[1:0] OSPEEDR6[1:0] OSPEEDR5[1:0] OSPEEDR4[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

OSPEEDR3[1:0] rw rw

OSPEEDR2[1:0] OSPEEDR1[1:0] OSPEEDR0[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 2y:2y+1 OSPEEDRy[1:0]: Port x configuration bits (y = 0..15) These bits are written by software to configure the I/O output speed. 00: 2 MHz Low speed 01: 25 MHz Medium speed 10: 50 MHz Fast speed 11: 100 MHz High speed on 30 pF (80 MHz Output max speed on 15 pF)

7.4.4

GPIO port pull-up/pull-down register (GPIOx_PUPDR) (x = A..I/)

Address offset: 0x0C

199/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Reset values:

31 30 29

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

0x6400 0000 for port A 0x0000 0100 for port B 0x0000 0000 for other ports
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

PUPDR15[1:0] rw 15 rw 14

PUPDR14[1:0] rw 13 rw 12

PUPDR13[1:0] rw 11 rw 10

PUPDR12[1:0] rw 9 rw 8

PUPDR11[1:0] rw 7 rw 6

PUPDR10[1:0] rw 5 rw 4

PUPDR9[1:0] rw 3 rw 2

PUPDR8[1:0] rw 1 rw 0

PUPDR7[1:0] rw rw

PUPDR6[1:0] rw rw

PUPDR5[1:0] rw rw

PUPDR4[1:0] rw rw

PUPDR3[1:0] rw rw

PUPDR2[1:0] rw rw

PUPDR1[1:0] rw rw

PUPDR0[1:0] rw rw

Bits 2y:2y+1 PUPDRy[1:0]: Port x configuration bits (y = 0..15) These bits are written by software to configure the I/O pull-up or pull-down 00: No pull-up, pull-down 01: Pull-up 10: Pull-down 11: Reserved

7.4.5

GPIO port input data register (GPIOx_IDR) (x = A..I)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 XXXX (where X means undefined)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15 IDR15 r

14 IDR14 r

13 IDR13 r

12 IDR12 r

11 IDR11 r

10 IDR10 r

9 IDR9 r

8 IDR8 r

7 IDR7 r

6 IDR6 r

5 IDR5 r

4 IDR4 r

3 IDR3 r

2 IDR2 r

1 IDR1 r

0 IDR0 r

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 IDRy[15:0]: Port input data (y = 0..15) These bits are read-only and can be accessed in word mode only. They contain the input value of the corresponding I/O port.

7.4.6

GPIO port output data register (GPIOx_ODR) (x = A..I)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 ODR9 rw 8 ODR8 rw 7 ODR7 rw 6 ODR6 rw 5 ODR5 rw 4 ODR4 rw 3 ODR3 rw 2 ODR2 rw 1 ODR1 rw 0 ODR0 rw

ODR15 ODR14 ODR13 ODR12 ODR11 ODR10 rw rw rw rw rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

200/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

RM0090

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 ODRy[15:0]: Port output data (y = 0..15) These bits can be read and written by software. Note: For atomic bit set/reset, the ODR bits can be individually set and reset by writing to the GPIOx_BSRR register (x = A..I/).

7.4.7

GPIO port bit set/reset register (GPIOx_BSRR) (x = A..I)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31 BR15 w 15 BS15 w

30 BR14 w 14 BS14 w

29 BR13 w 13 BS13 w

28 BR12 w 12 BS12 w

27 BR11 w 11 BS11 w

26 BR10 w 10 BS10 w

25 BR9 w 9 BS9 w

24 BR8 w 8 BS8 w

23 BR7 w 7 BS7 w

22 BR6 w 6 BS6 w

21 BR5 w 5 BS5 w

20 BR4 w 4 BS4 w

19 BR3 w 3 BS3 w

18 BR2 w 2 BS2 w

17 BR1 w 1 BS1 w

16 BR0 w 0 BS0 w

Bits 31:16 BRy: Port x reset bit y (y = 0..15) These bits are write-only and can be accessed in word, half-word or byte mode. A read to these bits returns the value 0x0000. 0: No action on the corresponding ODRx bit 1: Resets the corresponding ODRx bit Note: If both BSx and BRx are set, BSx has priority. Bits 15:0 BSy: Port x set bit y (y= 0..15) These bits are write-only and can be accessed in word, half-word or byte mode. A read to these bits returns the value 0x0000. 0: No action on the corresponding ODRx bit 1: Sets the corresponding ODRx bit

7.4.8

GPIO port configuration lock register (GPIOx_LCKR) (x = A..I)

This register is used to lock the configuration of the port bits when a correct write sequence is applied to bit 16 (LCKK). The value of bits [15:0] is used to lock the configuration of the GPIO. During the write sequence, the value of LCKR[15:0] must not change. When the LOCK sequence has been applied on a port bit, the value of this port bit can no longer be modified until the next reset.

Note:

A specific write sequence is used to write to the GPIOx_LCKR register. Only word access (32-bit long) is allowed during this write sequence. Each lock bit freezes a specific configuration register (control and alternate function registers). Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Access: 32-bit word only, read/write register

201/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24 Reserved

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16 LCKK rw

15 LCK15 rw

14 LCK14 rw

13 LCK13 rw

12 LCK12 rw

11 LCK11 rw

10 LCK10 rw

9 LCK9 rw

8 LCK8 rw

7 LCK7 rw

6 LCK6 rw

5 LCK5 rw

4 LCK4 rw

3 LCK3 rw

2 LCK2 rw

1 LCK1 rw

0 LCK0 rw

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 16 LCKK[16]: Lock key This bit can be read any time. It can only be modified using the lock key write sequence. 0: Port configuration lock key not active 1: Port configuration lock key active. The GPIOx_LCKR register is locked until an MCU reset occurs. LOCK key write sequence: WR LCKR[16] = 1 + LCKR[15:0] WR LCKR[16] = 0 + LCKR[15:0] WR LCKR[16] = 1 + LCKR[15:0] RD LCKR RD LCKR[16] = 1 (this read operation is optional but it confirms that the lock is active) Note: During the LOCK key write sequence, the value of LCK[15:0] must not change. Any error in the lock sequence aborts the lock. After the first lock sequence on any bit of the port, any read access on the LCKK bit will return 1 until the next CPU reset. Bits 15:0 LCKy: Port x lock bit y (y= 0..15) These bits are read/write but can only be written when the LCKK bit is 0. 0: Port configuration not locked 1: Port configuration locked

7.4.9

GPIO alternate function low register (GPIOx_AFRL) (x = A..I)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

AFRL7[3:0] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11

AFRL6[3:0] rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7

AFRL5[3:0] rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3

AFRL4[3:0] rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

AFRL3[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

AFRL2[3:0] rw rw rw rw

AFRL1[3:0] rw rw rw rw

AFRL0[3:0] rw rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

202/1422

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

RM0090

Bits 31:0 AFRLy: Alternate function selection for port x bit y (y = 0..7) These bits are written by software to configure alternate function I/Os AFRLy selection: 0000: AF0 0001: AF1 0010: AF2 0011: AF3 0100: AF4 0101: AF5 0110: AF6 0111: AF7 1000: AF8 1001: AF9 1010: AF10 1011: AF11 1100: AF12 1101: AF13 1110: AF14 1111: AF15

7.4.10

GPIO alternate function high register (GPIOx_AFRH) (x = A..I)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

AFRH15[3:0] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11

AFRH14[3:0] rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7

AFRH13[3:0] rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3

AFRH12[3:0] rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

AFRH11[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

AFRH10[3:0] rw rw rw rw

AFRH9[3:0] rw rw rw rw

AFRH8[3:0] rw rw rw

Bits 31:0 AFRHy: Alternate function selection for port x bit y (y = 8..15) These bits are written by software to configure alternate function I/Os AFRHy selection: 0000: AF0 0001: AF1 0010: AF2 0011: AF3 0100: AF4 0101: AF5 0110: AF6 0111: AF7 1000: AF8 1001: AF9 1010: AF10 1011: AF11 1100: AF12 1101: AF13 1110: AF14 1111: AF15

7.4.11

GPIO register map

The following table gives the GPIO register map and the reset values.

Table 32.
Offset

GPIO register map and reset values

MODER15[1:0] MODER14[1:0] MODER13[1:0] MODER12[1:0] MODER11[1:0] MODER10[1:0] MODER9[1:0] MODER8[1:0] MODER7[1:0] MODER6[1:0] MODER5[1:0] MODER4[1:0] MODER3[1:0] MODER2[1:0] MODER1[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER0[1:0] 0

Register

0x00

GPIOA_MODER

Reset value

203/1422

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

0x00

RM0090

Table 32.

Offset

0x0C

0x0C

0x0C

0x18

0x14

0x10

0x08

0x08

0x04

0x00

Register

GPIOA_PUPDR

GPIOB_MODER

GPIOx_MODER (where x = C..I/)

GPIOx_OTYPER (where x = A..I/)

GPIOx_OSPEED ER (where x = A..I/ except B)

GPIOB_OSPEED ER

GPIOB_PUPDR

GPIOx_PUPDR (where x = C..I/)

GPIOx_BSRR (where x = A..I/) Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR15[1:0] 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 PUPDR14[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR13[1:0] 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR12[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved PUPDR11[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR10[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR9[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR8[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR7[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR6[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR5[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR4[1:0] 0 1 0 0 0 0 PUPDR3[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR2[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 PUPDR1[1:0] 0 0 0 0 PUPDR0[1:0] 0 0 PUPDR1[1:0] 0 0 PUPDR0[1:0] 0 PUPDR2[1:0] PUPDR3[1:0] PUPDR3[1:0] 1 0 PUPDR2[1:0] 0 0 PUPDR1[1:0] 0 0 PUPDR0[1:0] 0 PUPDR4[1:0] PUPDR4[1:0] 0 1 PUPDR5[1:0] PUPDR5[1:0] PUPDR6[1:0] PUPDR6[1:0] OSPEEDR6[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR5[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR4[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR3[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR2[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR1[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR0[1:0] 0 PUPDR7[1:0] PUPDR7[1:0] OSPEEDR7[1:0] 0 0 PUPDR8[1:0] PUPDR8[1:0] OSPEEDR8[1:0] PUPDR9[1:0] PUPDR9[1:0] OSPEEDR9[1:0] OSPEEDR9[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR8[1:0] 0 0 0 OSPEEDR7[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR6[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR5[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR4[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR3[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR2[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR1[1:0] 0 0 OSPEEDR0[1:0] 0 OT15 OT14 OT13 OT12 OT11 OT10 OT9 OT8 OT7 OT6 OT5 OT4 OT3 OT2 OT1 OT0 PUPDR10[1:0] PUPDR10[1:0] OSPEEDR10[1:0] OSPEEDR10[1:0] 0 0 PUPDR11[1:0] PUPDR11[1:0] OSPEEDR11[1:0] OSPEEDR11[1:0] PUPDR12[1:0] PUPDR12[1:0] OSPEEDR12[1:0] OSPEEDR12[1:0] PUPDR13[1:0] PUPDR13[1:0] OSPEEDR13[1:0] OSPEEDR13[1:0] PUPDR14[1:0] PUPDR14[1:0] OSPEEDR14[1:0] OSPEEDR14[1:0] MODER14[1:0] 0 0 MODER13[1:0] 0 0 MODER12[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER11[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER10[1:0] 0 0 MODER9[1:0] 0 0 MODER8[1:0] 0 0 MODER7[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER6[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER5[1:0] 0 0 0 1 MODER4[1:0] 0 0 0 1 MODER3[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER2[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER1[1:0] 0 0 0 0 MODER0[1:0] 0 0 PUPDR15[1:0] PUPDR15[1:0] OSPEEDR15[1:0] OSPEEDR15[1:0] MODER15[1:0] MODER15[1:0] MODER14[1:0] MODER13[1:0] MODER12[1:0] MODER11[1:0] MODER10[1:0] MODER9[1:0] MODER8[1:0] MODER7[1:0] MODER6[1:0] MODER5[1:0] MODER4[1:0] MODER3[1:0] MODER2[1:0] MODER1[1:0] MODER0[1:0]

GPIOx_ODR (where x = A..I/)

GPIOx_IDR (where x = A..I/)

Reset value

Reset value

Reset value

BR15

BR14

BR13

BR12

BR11

BR10

BR9

Reserved

Reserved

BR8

BR7

BR6

BR5

BR4

BR3

BR2

BR1

GPIO register map and reset values (continued)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

BR0

BS15

ODR15

IDR15

BS14

ODR14

IDR14

BS13

ODR13

IDR13

BS12

ODR12

IDR12

BS11

ODR11

IDR11

BS10

ODR10

IDR10

BS9

ODR9

IDR9

BS8

ODR8

IDR8

BS7

ODR7

IDR7

BS6

ODR6

IDR6

BS5

ODR5

IDR5

BS4

ODR4

IDR4

BS3

ODR3

IDR3

BS2

ODR2

IDR2

BS1

ODR1

IDR1

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO)

204/1422

BS0

ODR0

IDR0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) Table 32.

Offset
0x1C

RM0090

GPIO register map and reset values (continued)

LCK15 LCK14 LCK13 LCK12 LCK11 LCK10 LCKK LCK9 LCK8 LCK7 LCK6 LCK5 LCK4 LCK3 LCK2 0 LCK1 0 0 0 LCK0 0 0 0

Register
GPIOx_LCKR (where x = A..I/) Reset value

0x20

GPIOx_AFRL (where x = A..I/) Reset value GPIOx_AFRH (where x = A..I/) Reset value

0x24

AFRH15[3:0] AFRH14[3:0] AFRH13[3:0] AFRH12[3:0] AFRH11[3:0] AFRH10[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

205/1422

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 AFRL7[3:0] 0 0 0 0 AFRL6[3:0] 0 0 0 0 AFRL5[3:0] 0 0 0 0 AFRL4[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AFRL3[3:0] 0 0 0 0 AFRL2[3:0] 0 0 0 0 AFRL1[3:0] 0 0 0 0 AFRL0[3:0] 0 0 AFRH9[3:0] 0 0 0 0 AFRH8[3:0] 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

The system configuration controller is mainly used to remap the memory accessible in the code area, select the Ethernet PHY interface and manage the external interrupt line connection to the GPIOs. This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

8.1

I/O compensation cell

By default the I/O compensation cell is not used. However when the I/O output buffer speed is configured in 50 MHz or 100 MHz mode, it is recommended to use the compensation cell for slew rate control on I/O tf(IO)out)/tr(IO)out commutation to reduce the I/O noise on power supply. When the compensation cell is enabled, a READY flag is set to indicate that the compensation cell is ready and can be used. The I/O compensation cell can be used only when the supply voltage ranges from 2.4 to 3.6 V.

8.2
8.2.1

SYSCFG registers
SYSCFG memory remap register (SYSCFG_MEMRMP)
This register is used for specific configurations on memory remap:

Two bits are used to configure the type of memory accessible at address 0x0000 0000. These bits are used to select the physical remap by software and so, bypass the BOOT pins. After reset these bits take the value selected by the BOOT pins. When booting from main Flash memory with BOOT pins set to 10 [(BOOT1,BOOT0) = (1,0)] this register takes the value 0x00.

When the FSMC is remapped at address 0x0000 0000, only the first two regions of Bank 1 memory controller (Bank1 NOR/PSRAM 1 and NOR/PSRAM 2) can be remapped. In remap mode, the CPU can access the external memory via ICode bus instead of System bus which boosts up the performance. Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 000X (X is the memory mode selected by the BOOT pins
)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MEM_MODE Reserved rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

206/1422

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

RM0090

Bits 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 1:0 MEM_MODE: Memory mapping selection Set and cleared by software. This bit controls the memory internal mapping at address 0x0000 0000. After reset these bits take the value selected by the Boot pins (except for FSMC). 00: Main Flash memory mapped at 0x0000 0000 01: System Flash memory mapped at 0x0000 0000 10: FSMC Bank1 (NOR/PSRAM 1 and 2) mapped at 0x0000 0000 11: Embedded SRAM (112kB) mapped at 0x0000 0000

8.2.2

SYSCFG peripheral mode configuration register (SYSCFG_PMC) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 MII_RMII _SEL rw

22

21

20

19 Reserved

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Reserved

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 MII_RMII_SEL: Ethernet PHY interface selection Set and Cleared by software.These bits control the PHY interface for the Ethernet MAC. 0: MII interface is selected 1: RMII Why interface is selected Note: This configuration must be done while the MAC is under reset and before enabling the MAC clocks. Bits 22:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

8.2.3

SYSCFG peripheral mode configuration register (SYSCFG_PMC) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx
Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 MII_RMII _SEL rw

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Reserved 6 5 4 3

ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D C2 C2 C2 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

Reserved

207/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 MII_RMII_SEL: Ethernet PHY interface selection Set and Cleared by software.These bits control the PHY interface for the Ethernet MAC. 0: MII interface is selected 1: RMII Why interface is selected Note: This configuration must be done while the MAC is under reset and before enabling the MAC clocks. Bits 22:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 18:16 ADCxDC2: 0: No effect. 1: Refer to AN4073 on how to use this bit . Note: These bits can be set only if the following conditions are met: - ADC clock higher or equal to 30 MHz. - Only one ADCxDC2 bit must be selected if ADC conversions do not start at the same time and the sampling times differ. - These bits must not be set when the ADCDC1 bit is set in PWR_CR register. Bits 15:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

8.2.4

SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 1 (SYSCFG_EXTICR1)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EXTI3[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

EXTI2[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI1[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI0[3:0] rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 EXTIx[3:0]: EXTI x configuration (x = 0 to 3) These bits are written by software to select the source input for the EXTIx external interrupt. 0000: PA[x] pin 0001: PB[x] pin 0010: PC[x] pin 0011: PD[x] pin 0100: PE[x] pin 0101: PF[C] pin 0110: PG[x] pin 0111: PH[x] pin 1000: PI[x] pin

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

208/1422

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

RM0090

8.2.5

SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 2 (SYSCFG_EXTICR2)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EXTI7[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

EXTI6[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI5[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI4[3:0] rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 EXTIx[3:0]: EXTI x configuration (x = 4 to 7) These bits are written by software to select the source input for the EXTIx external interrupt. 0000: PA[x] pin 0001: PB[x] pin 0010: PC[x] pin 0011: PD[x] pin 0100: PE[x] pin 0101: PF[x] pin 0110: PG[x] pin 0111: PH[x] pin 1000: PI[x] pin

8.2.6

SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 3 (SYSCFG_EXTICR3)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EXTI11[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

EXTI10[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI9[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI8[3:0] rw rw rw

209/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 EXTIx[3:0]: EXTI x configuration (x = 8 to 11) These bits are written by software to select the source input for the EXTIx external interrupt. 0000: PA[x] pin 0001: PB[x] pin 0010: PC[x] pin 0011: PD[x] pin 0100: PE[x] pin 0101: PF[x] pin 0110: PG[x] pin 0111: PH[x] pin 1000: PI[x] pin

8.2.7

SYSCFG external interrupt configuration register 4 (SYSCFG_EXTICR4)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EXTI15[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

EXTI14[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI13[3:0] rw rw rw rw

EXTI12[3:0] rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 EXTIx[3:0]: EXTI x configuration (x = 12 to 15) These bits are written by software to select the source input for the EXTIx external interrupt. 0000: PA[x] pin 0001: PB[x] pin 0010: PC[x] pin 0011: PD[x] pin 0100: PE[x] pin 0101: PF[x] pin 0110: PG[x] pin 0111: PH[x] pin Note: PI[15:12] are not used.

8.2.8

Compensation cell control register (SYSCFG_CMPCR)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

210/1422

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

RM0090

15

14

13

12

11

10

8
READY

0 CMP_ PD rw

Reserved r

Reserved

Bits 31:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 READY: Compensation cell ready flag 0: I/O compensation cell not ready 1: O compensation cell ready Bits 7:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 CMP_PD: Compensation cell power-down 0: I/O compensation cell power-down mode 1: I/O compensation cell enabled

8.2.9

SYSCFG register maps

The following table gives the SYSCFG register map and the reset values.

Table 33.
Offset

SYSCFG register map and reset values STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

Register
MEM_MODE x MII_RMII_SEL x Reserved EXTI3[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EXTI7[3:0] EXTI11[3:0] EXTI15[3:0] EXTI2[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EXTI6[3:0] EXTI10[3:0] EXTI14[3:0] EXTI1[3:0] 0 0 0 0 READY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EXTI5[3:0] EXTI9[3:0] EXTI13[3:0] EXTI0[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMP_PD 0 EXTI4[3:0] EXTI8[3:0] EXTI12[3:0] Reserved 0

0x00

SYSCFG_MEMRM

Reset value

0x04

SYSCFG_PMC

Reset value 0x08 0x0C 0x10 0x14 SYSCFG_EXTICR1 Reset value SYSCFG_EXTICR2 Reset value SYSCFG_EXTICR3 Reset value SYSCFG_EXTICR4 Reset value SYSCFG_CMPCR Reset value

0x20

211/1422

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

System configuration controller (SYSCFG)

Table 34.
Offset

SYSCFG register map and reset values (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)

Register
MEM_MODE x MII_RMII_SEL ADC3DC2 ADC2DC2 ADC1DC2 x Reserved EXTI3[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EXTI7[3:0] EXTI11[3:0] EXTI15[3:0] EXTI2[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EXTI6[3:0] EXTI10[3:0] EXTI14[3:0] EXTI1[3:0] 0 0 0 0 READY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EXTI5[3:0] EXTI9[3:0] EXTI13[3:0] EXTI0[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMP_PD 0 EXTI4[3:0] EXTI8[3:0] EXTI12[3:0] Reserved 0

0x00

SYSCFG_MEMRM

Reset value

0x04

SYSCFG_PMC

Reset value 0x08 0x0C 0x10 0x14 SYSCFG_EXTICR1 Reset value SYSCFG_EXTICR2 Reset value SYSCFG_EXTICR3 Reset value SYSCFG_EXTICR4 Reset value SYSCFG_CMPCR Reset value

0x20

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

212/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

9.1

DMA introduction
Direct memory access (DMA) is used in order to provide high-speed data transfer between peripherals and memory and between memory and memory. Data can be quickly moved by DMA without any CPU action. This keeps CPU resources free for other operations. The DMA controller combines a powerful dual AHB master bus architecture with independent FIFO to optimize the bandwidth of the system, based on a complex bus matrix architecture. The two DMA controllers have 16 streams in total (8 for each controller), each dedicated to managing memory access requests from one or more peripherals. Each stream can have up to 8 channels (requests) in total. And each has an arbiter for handling the priority between DMA requests.

9.2

DMA main features

The main DMA features are:

Dual AHB master bus architecture, one dedicated to memory accesses and one dedicated to peripheral accesses AHB slave programming interface supporting only 32-bit accesses 8 streams for each DMA controller, up to 8 channels (requests) per stream Four separate 32 first-in, first-out memory buffers (FIFOs) per stream, that can be used in FIFO mode or direct mode: FIFO mode: with threshold level software selectable between 1/4, 1/2 or 3/4 of the FIFO size Direct mode Each DMA request immediately initiates a transfer from/to the memory. When it is configured in direct mode (FIFO disabled), to transfer data in memory-toperipheral mode, the DMA preloads only one data from the memory to the internal

213/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA) FIFO to ensure an immediate data transfer as soon as a DMA request is triggered by a peripheral.

Each stream can be configured by hardware to be: a regular channel that supports peripheral-to-memory, memory-to-peripheral and memory-to-memory transfers a double buffer channel that also supports double buffering on the memory side

Each of the 8 streams are connected to dedicated hardware DMA channels (requests) Priorities between DMA stream requests are software-programmable (4 levels consisting of very high, high, medium, low) or hardware in case of equality (request 0 has priority over request 1, etc.) Each stream also supports software trigger for memory-to-memory transfers (only available for the DMA2 controller) Each stream request can be selected among up to 8 possible channel requests. This selection is software-configurable and allows several peripherals to initiate DMA requests The number of data items to be transferred can be managed either by the DMA controller or by the peripheral: DMA flow controller: the number of data items to be transferred is softwareprogrammable from 1 to 65535 Peripheral flow controller: the number of data items to be transferred is unknown and controlled by the source or the destination peripheral that signals the end of the transfer by hardware

Independent source and destination transfer width (byte, half-word, word): when the data widths of the source and destination are not equal, the DMA automatically packs/unpacks the necessary transfers to optimize the bandwidth. This feature is only available in FIFO mode Incrementing or nonincrementing addressing for source and destination Supports incremental burst transfers of 4, 8 or 16 beats. The size of the burst is software-configurable, usually equal to half the FIFO size of the peripheral Each stream supports circular buffer management 5 event flags (DMA Half Transfer, DMA Transfer complete, DMA Transfer Error, DMA FIFO Error, Direct Mode Error) logically ORed together in a single interrupt request for each stream

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

214/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

9.3
9.3.1

DMA functional description

General description
Figure 24 shows the block diagram of a DMA. Figure 24. DMA block diagram
DMA controller

REQ_STR0_CH0 REQ_STR0_CH1 REQ_STR0_CH7 REQ_STR1_CH0 REQ_STR1_CH1 REQ_STR1_CH7 STREAM 7 STREAM 3 STREAM 2 STREAM 4 STREAM 1 STREAM 5 STREAM 6 STREAM 0

AHB master

Memory port

STREAM 3

STREAM 2

STREAM 0

STREAM 1

STREAM 5

AHB master

REQ_STR7_CH0 REQ_STR7_CH1 REQ_STR7_CH7

STREAM 4

STREAM 6

STREAM 7

REQ_STREAM0 REQ_STREAM1 REQ_STREAM2 REQ_STREAM3 REQ_STREAM4 REQ_STREAM5 REQ_STREAM6 REQ_STREAM7

FIFO

FIFO

FIFO

FIFO

FIFO

FIFO

FIFO

Arbiter

FIFO

Peripheral port

Channel selection

AHB slave programming interface

Programming port

ai15945

The DMA controller performs direct memory transfer: as an AHB master, it can take the control of the AHB bus matrix to initiate AHB transactions. It can carry out the following transactions:

peripheral-to-memory memory-to-peripheral memory-to-memory

The DMA controller provides two AHB master ports: the AHB memory port, intended to be connected to memories and the AHB peripheral port, intended to be connected to peripherals. However, to allow memory-to-memory transfers, the AHB peripheral port must also have access to the memories. The AHB slave port is used to program the DMA controller (it supports only 32-bit accesses). See Figure 25 and Figure 26 for the implementation of the system of two DMA controllers.

215/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 25. System implementation of the two DMA controllers (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx)
DCODE

DMA controller (DMA)

Bus matrix (AHB multilayer)

ICODE

Flash memory

112 KB SRAM 16 KB SRAM

AHB1 peripherals
AHB memory port

DMA controller 2
To AHB2 peripherals

Arbiter

AHB slave

AHB-APB bridge2 (dual AHB)

APB2

FIFO

APB2 peripherals

AHB periph port

AHB-APB bridge1 (dual AHB)

APB1

APB1 peripherals

DMA request MAPPING

AHB memory port

AHB2 peripherals

To AHB2 peripherals

AHB slave

Arbiter

FIFO

DMA controller 1

AHB periph port

External memory controller (FSMC)

MS19927V2

1. The DMA1 controller AHB peripheral port is not connected to the bus matrix like in the case of the DMA2 controller, thus only DMA2 streams are able to perform memory-to-memory transfers.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

216/1422

DMA controller (DMA) Figure 26. System implementation of the two DMA controllers (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)

RM0090

Bus Matrix (AHB multilayer)

DCODE

ICODE

Flash memory 112 KB SRAM 16 KB SRAM 64 KB SRAM AHB1 peripherals

To AHB2 peripherals

AHB memory port

DMA controller 2

Arbiter

AHB slave

AHB-APB bridge2 (dual AHB)

APB2

FIFO

APB2 peripherals

AHB periph port

AHB-APB bridge1 (dual AHB)

APB1

APB1 peripherals

DMA request MAPPING

AHB memory port

AHB2 peripherals

To AHB2 peripherals

AHB slave

Arbiter

FIFO

DMA controller 1

AHB periph port

External memory controller (FSMC)

MS30437V1

1. The DMA1 controller AHB peripheral port is not connected to the bus matrix like in the case of the DMA2 controller, thus only DMA2 streams are able to perform memory-to-memory transfers.

9.3.2

DMA transactions
A DMA transaction consists of a sequence of a given number of data transfers. The number of data items to be transferred and their width (8-bit, 16-bit or 32-bit) are softwareprogrammable. Each DMA transfer consists of three operations:

A loading from the peripheral data register or a location in memory, addressed through the DMA_SxPAR or DMA_SxM0AR register A storage of the data loaded to the peripheral data register or a location in memory addressed through the DMA_SxPAR or DMA_SxM0AR register A post-decrement of the DMA_SxNDTR register, which contains the number of transactions that still have to be performed

217/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA) After an event, the peripheral sends a request signal to the DMA controller. The DMA controller serves the request depending on the channel priorities. As soon as the DMA controller accesses the peripheral, an Acknowledge signal is sent to the peripheral by the DMA controller. The peripheral releases its request as soon as it gets the Acknowledge signal from the DMA controller. Once the request has been deasserted by the peripheral, the DMA controller releases the Acknowledge signal. If there are more requests, the peripheral can initiate the next transaction.

9.3.3

Channel selection
Each stream is associated with a DMA request that can be selected out of 8 possible channel requests. The selection is controlled by the CHSEL[2:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register. Figure 27. Channel selection
REQ_STRx_CH7 REQ_STRx_CH6 REQ_STRx_CH5 REQ_STRx_CH4 REQ_STRx_CH3 REQ_STRx_CH2 REQ_STRx_CH1 REQ_STRx_CH0 REQ_STREAMx

31 DMA_SxCR

29

27

0
ai15947

CHSEL[2:0]

The 8 requests from the peripherals (TIM, ADC, SPI, I2C, etc.) are independently connected to each channel and their connection depends on the product implementation. Table 35 and Table 36 give examples of DMA request mappings. Table 35.
Peripheral requests
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2

DMA1 request mapping

Stream 0
SPI3_RX I2C1_RX TIM4_CH1 I2S3_EXT_ RX UART5_RX UART8_TX(1) TIM2_UP TIM2_CH3 USART3_RX UART7_TX(1)

Stream 1

Stream 2
SPI3_RX TIM7_UP I2S3_EXT_ RX I2C3_RX UART4_RX TIM3_CH4 TIM3_UP

Stream 3
SPI2_RX

Stream 4
SPI2_TX TIM7_UP

Stream 5
SPI3_TX I2C1_RX I2S3_EXT_ TX TIM2_CH1

Stream 6

Stream 7
SPI3_TX

I2C1_TX TIM4_UP TIM2_CH2

I2C1_TX TIM4_CH3 TIM2_UP TIM2_CH4 UART5_TX TIM3_CH3

TIM4_CH2 I2S2_EXT_ RX USART3_TX UART7_RX(1)

I2S2_EXT_ TX I2C3_TX UART4_TX TIM3_CH1 TIM3_TRIG

Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5

TIM2_CH4 USART2_RX TIM3_CH2 USART2_TX UART8_RX(1)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

218/1422

DMA controller (DMA) Table 35.

Peripheral requests
Channel 6 Channel 7

RM0090

DMA1 request mapping (continued)

Stream 0
TIM5_CH3 TIM5_UP

Stream 1
TIM5_CH4 TIM5_TRIG TIM6_UP

Stream 2

Stream 3
TIM5_CH4 TIM5_TRIG I2C2_RX

Stream 4

Stream 5

Stream 6

Stream 7

TIM5_CH1 I2C2_RX

TIM5_CH2 USART3_TX DAC1

TIM5_UP DAC2 I2C2_TX

1. These requests are available on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx only.

Table 36.

DMA2 request mapping

Stream 1 Stream 2
TIM8_CH1 TIM8_CH2 TIM8_CH3 DCMI ADC3 SPI1_RX SPI4_RX(1) SPI4_TX(1) USART6_RX ADC3 SPI1_RX USART1_RX USART6_RX ADC2 ADC2 SPI5_RX(1) SPI1_TX SDIO SPI4_RX(1) SPI4_TX(1) TIM1_CH4 SPI5_TX(1)

Peripheral Stream 0 requests

Stream 3

Stream 4

Stream 5

Stream 6
TIM1_CH1

Stream 7

Channel 0

ADC1

ADC1

TIM1_CH2 TIM1_CH3 SPI6_TX

(1)

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5

SPI6_RX(1) CRYP_IN

DCMI HASH_IN

CRYP_OUT SPI1_TX USART1_RX

SDIO USART6_TX

USART1_TX USART6_TX

Channel 6

TIM1_TRIG

TIM1_CH1

TIM1_CH2

TIM1_CH1

TIM1_TRIG TIM1_COM

TIM1_UP

TIM1_CH3

Channel 7

TIM8_UP

TIM8_CH1

TIM8_CH2

TIM8_CH3

SPI5_RX(1)

SPI5_TX(1)

TIM8_CH4 TIM8_TRIG TIM8_COM

1. These requests are available on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx.

9.3.4

Arbiter
An arbiter manages the 8 DMA stream requests based on their priority for each of the two AHB master ports (memory and peripheral ports) and launches the peripheral/memory access sequences. Priorities are managed in two stages:

Software: each stream priority can be configured in the DMA_SxCR register. There are four levels: Very high priority High priority Medium priority Low priority

Hardware: If two requests have the same software priority level, the stream with the lower number takes priority over the stream with the higher number. For example, Stream 2 takes priority over Stream 4.

219/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

9.3.5

DMA streams
Each of the 8 DMA controller streams provides a unidirectional transfer link between a source and a destination. Each stream can be configured to perform:

Regular type transactions: memory-to-peripherals, peripherals-to-memory or memoryto-memory transfers Double-buffer type transactions: double buffer transfers using two memory pointers for the memory (while the DMA is reading/writing from/to a buffer, the application can write/read to/from the other buffer).

The amount of data to be transferred (up to 65535) is programmable and related to the source width of the peripheral that requests the DMA transfer connected to the peripheral AHB port. The register that contains the amount of data items to be transferred is decremented after each transaction.

9.3.6

Source, destination and transfer modes

Both source and destination transfers can address peripherals and memories in the entire 4 GB area, at addresses comprised between 0x0000 0000 and 0xFFFF FFFF. The direction is configured using the DIR[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register and offers three possibilities: memory-to-peripheral, peripheral-to-memory or memory-to-memory transfers. Table 37 describes the corresponding source and destination addresses. Table 37. Source and destination address
Direction Peripheral-to-memory Memory-to-peripheral Memory-to-memory reserved Source address DMA_SxPAR DMA_SxM0AR DMA_SxPAR Destination address DMA_SxM0AR DMA_SxPAR DMA_SxM0AR -

Bits DIR[1:0] of the DMA_SxCR register 00 01 10 11

When the data width (programmed in the PSIZE or MSIZE bits in the DMA_SxCR register) is a half-word or a word, respectively, the peripheral or memory address written into the DMA_SxPAR or DMA_SxM0AR/M1AR registers has to be aligned on a word or half-word address boundary, respectively.

Peripheral-to-memory mode
Figure 28 describes this mode. When this mode is enabled (by setting the bit EN in the DMA_SxCR register), each time a peripheral request occurs, the stream initiates a transfer from the source to fill the FIFO. When the threshold level of the FIFO is reached, the contents of the FIFO are drained and stored into the destination. The transfer stops once the DMA_SxNDTR register reaches zero, when the peripheral requests the end of transfers (in case of a peripheral flow controller) or when the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register is cleared by software.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

220/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

In direct mode (when the DMDIS value in the DMA_SxFCR register is 0), the threshold level of the FIFO is not used: after each single data transfer from the peripheral to the FIFO, the corresponding data are immediately drained and stored into the destination. The stream has access to the AHB source or destination port only if the arbitration of the corresponding stream is won. This arbitration is performed using the priority defined for each stream using the PL[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register. Figure 28. Peripheral-to-memory mode
DMA controller
DMA_SxM0AR DMA_SxM1AR(1)

AHB memory port

Memory bus

Memory destination
REQ_STREAMx

Arbiter

FIFO level

FIFO

AHB peripheral port

Peripheral bus

DMA_SxPAR

peripheral source

Peripheral DMA request

ai15948

1. For double-buffer mode.

Memory-to-peripheral mode
Figure 29 describes this mode. When this mode is enabled (by setting the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register), the stream immediately initiates transfers from the source to entirely fill the FIFO. Each time a peripheral request occurs, the contents of the FIFO are drained and stored into the destination. When the level of the FIFO is lower than or equal to the predefined threshold level, the FIFO is fully reloaded with data from the memory. The transfer stops once the DMA_SxNDTR register reaches zero, when the peripheral requests the end of transfers (in case of a peripheral flow controller) or when the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register is cleared by software. In direct mode (when the DMDIS value in the DMA_SxFCR register is '0'), the threshold level of the FIFO is not used. Once the stream is enabled, the DMA preloads the first data to transfer into an internal FIFO. As soon as the peripheral requests a data transfer, the DMA transfers the preloaded value into the configured destination. It then reloads again the empty internal FIFO with the next data to be transfer. The preloaded data size corresponds to the value of the PSIZE bitfield in the DMA_SxCR register. The stream has access to the AHB source or destination port only if the arbitration of the corresponding stream is won. This arbitration is performed using the priority defined for each stream using the PL[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register.

221/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 29. Memory-to-peripheral mode

DMA controller
DMA_SxM0AR DMA_SxM1AR(1)

DMA controller (DMA)

AHB memory port

Memory bus

Memory source Arbiter FIFO level FIFO

REQ_STREAMx

AHB peripheral port

Peripheral bus

DMA_SxPAR

Peripheral destination

Peripheral DMA request

ai15949

1. For double-buffer mode.

Memory-to-memory mode
The DMA channels can also work without being triggered by a request from a peripheral. This is the memory-to-memory mode, described in Figure 30. When the stream is enabled by setting the Enable bit (EN) in the DMA_SxCR register, the stream immediately starts to fill the FIFO up to the threshold level. When the threshold level is reached, the FIFO contents are drained and stored into the destination. The transfer stops once the DMA_SxNDTR register reaches zero or when the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register is cleared by software. The stream has access to the AHB source or destination port only if the arbitration of the corresponding stream is won. This arbitration is performed using the priority defined for each stream using the PL[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register. Note: When memory-to-memory mode is used, the Circular and direct modes are not allowed. Only the DMA2 controller is able to perform memory-to-memory transfers.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

222/1422

DMA controller (DMA) Figure 30. Memory-to-memory mode

RM0090

DMA controller

DMA_SxM0AR DMA_SxM1AR(1)

AHB memory port

Memory bus

Memory 2 destination Arbiter

Stream enable

FIFO level

FIFO

AHB peripheral port

Peripheral bus

DMA_SxPAR

Memory 1 source

ai15950

1. For double-buffer mode.

9.3.7

Pointer incrementation
Peripheral and memory pointers can optionally be automatically post-incremented or kept constant after each transfer depending on the PINC and MINC bits in the DMA_SxCR register. Disabling the Increment mode is useful when the peripheral source or destination data are accessed through a single register. If the Increment mode is enabled, the address of the next transfer will be the address of the previous one incremented by 1 (for bytes), 2 (for half-words) or 4 (for words) depending on the data width programmed in the PSIZE or MSIZE bits in the DMA_SxCR register. In order to optimize the packing operation, it is possible to fix the increment offset size for the peripheral address whatever the size of the data transferred on the AHB peripheral port. The PINCOS bit in the DMA_SxCR register is used to align the increment offset size with the data size on the peripheral AHB port, or on a 32-bit address (the address is then incremented by 4). The PINCOS bit has an impact on the AHB peripheral port only. If PINCOS bit is set, the address of the next transfer is the address of the previous one incremented by 4 (automatically aligned on a 32-bit address) whatever the PSIZE value. The AHB memory port, however, is not impacted by this operation. The PINC or the MINC bit needs to be set if the burst transaction is requested on the AHB peripheral port or the AHB memory port, respectively, to satisfy the AMBA protocol (burst is not allowed in the fixed address mode).

223/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

9.3.8

Circular mode
The Circular mode is available to handle circular buffers and continuous data flows (e.g. ADC scan mode). This feature can be enabled using the CIRC bit in the DMA_SxCR register. When the circular mode is activated, the number of data items to be transferred is automatically reloaded with the initial value programmed during the stream configuration phase, and the DMA requests continue to be served.

Note:

In the circular mode, it is mandatory to respect the following rule in case of a burst mode configured for memory: DMA_SxNDTR = Multiple of ((Mburst beat) (Msize)/(Psize)), where: (Mburst beat) = 4, 8 or 16 (depending on the MBURST bits in the DMA_SxCR register) ((Msize)/(Psize)) = 1, 2, 4, 1/2 or 1/4 (Msize and Psize represent the MSIZE and PSIZE bits in the DMA_SxCR register. They are byte dependent) DMA_SxNDTR = Number of data items to transfer on the AHB peripheral port

For example: Mburst beat = 8 (INCR8), MSIZE = 00 (byte) and PSIZE = 01 (half-word), in this case: DMA_SxNDTR must be a multiple of (8 1/2 = 4). If this formula is not respected, the DMA behavior and data integrity are not guaranteed. NDTR must also be a multiple of the Peripheral burst size multiplied by the peripheral data size, otherwise this could result in a bad DMA behavior.

9.3.9

Double buffer mode

This mode is available for all the DMA1 and DMA2 streams. The Double buffer mode is enabled by setting the DBM bit in the DMA_SxCR register. A double-buffer stream works as a regular (single buffer) stream with the difference that it has two memory pointers. When the Double buffer mode is enabled, the Circular mode is automatically enabled (CIRC bit in DMA_SxCR is dont care) and at each end of transaction, the memory pointers are swapped. In this mode, the DMA controller swaps from one memory target to another at each end of transaction. This allows the software to process one memory area while the second memory area is being filled/used by the DMA transfer. The double-buffer stream can work in both directions (the memory can be either the source or the destination) as described in Table 38: Source and destination address registers in Double buffer mode (DBM=1).

Note:

In Double buffer mode, it is possible to update the base address for the AHB memory port on-the-fly (DMA_SxM0AR or DMA_SxM1AR) when the stream is enabled, by respecting the following conditions:

When the CT bit is 0 in the DMA_SxCR register, the DMA_SxM1AR register can be written. Attempting to write to this register while CT = '1' sets an error flag (TEIF) and the stream is automatically disabled. When the CT bit is 1 in the DMA_SxCR register, the DMA_SxM0AR register can be written. Attempting to write to this register while CT = '0', sets an error flag (TEIF) and the stream is automatically disabled.

To avoid any error condition, it is advised to change the base address as soon as the TCIF flag is asserted because, at this point, the targeted memory must have changed from

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

224/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

memory 0 to 1 (or from 1 to 0) depending on the value of CT in the DMA_SxCR register in accordance with one of the two above conditions. For all the other modes (except the Double buffer mode), the memory address registers are write-protected as soon as the stream is enabled. Table 38. Source and destination address registers in Double buffer mode (DBM=1)
Direction Peripheral-to-memory Memory-to-peripheral Not allowed(1) Reserved Source address DMA_SxPAR DMA_SxM0AR / DMA_SxM1AR Destination address DMA_SxM0AR / DMA_SxM1AR DMA_SxPAR

Bits DIR[1:0] of the DMA_SxCR register 00 01 10 11

1. When the Double buffer mode is enabled, the Circular mode is automatically enabled. Since the memoryto-memory mode is not compatible with the Circular mode, when the Double buffer mode is enabled, it is not allowed to configure the memory-to-memory mode.

9.3.10

Programmable data width, packing/unpacking, endianess

The number of data items to be transferred has to be programmed into DMA_SxNDTR (number of data items to transfer bit, NDT) before enabling the stream (except when the flow controller is the peripheral, PFCTRL bit in DMA_SxCR is set). When using the internal FIFO, the data widths of the source and destination data are programmable through the PSIZE and MSIZE bits in the DMA_SxCR register (can be 8-, 16- or 32-bit). When PSIZE and MSIZE are not equal:

The data width of the number of data items to transfer, configured in the DMA_SxNDTR register is equal to the width of the peripheral bus (configured by the PSIZE bits in the DMA_SxCR register). For instance, in case of peripheral-to-memory, memory-toperipheral or memory-to-memory transfers and if the PSIZE[1:0] bits are configured for half-word, the number of bytes to be transferred is equal to 2 NDT. The DMA controller only copes with little-endian addressing for both source and destination. This is described in Table 39: Packing/unpacking & endian behavior (bit PINC = MINC = 1).

This packing/unpacking procedure may present a risk of data corruption when the operation is interrupted before the data are completely packed/unpacked. So, to ensure data coherence, the stream may be configured to generate burst transfers: in this case, each group of transfers belonging to a burst are indivisible (refer to Section 9.3.11: Single and burst transfers). In direct mode (DMDIS = 0 in the DMA_SxFCR register), the packing/unpacking of data is not possible. In this case, it is not allowed to have different source and destination transfer data widths: both are equal and defined by the PSIZE bits in the DMA_SxCR MSIZE bits are dont care).

225/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 39. Packing/unpacking & endian behavior (bit PINC = MINC = 1)

DMA controller (DMA)

Number AHB AHB of data Memory Memory port memory peripheral items to transfer address / byte port port width transfer number lane width (NDT)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 16 8 4 2 0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x1 / B1[7:0] 0x2 / B2[7:0] 0x3 / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x1 / B1[7:0] 0x2 / B2[7:0] 0x3 / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x1 / B1[7:0] 0x2 / B2[7:0] 0x3 / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x2 / B3|B2[15:0]

Peripheral port address / byte lane Peripher al transfer PINCOS = 1 PINCOS = 0 number
1 2 3 4 1 2 0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x4 / B1[7:0] 0x8 / B2[7:0] 0xC / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x4 / B3|B2[15:0] 0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x1 / B1[7:0] 0x2 / B2[7:0] 0x3 / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x2 / B3|B2[15:0]

16

0x0 / B3|B2|B1|B0[31:0] 0x0 / B3|B2|B1|B0[31:0]

32

1 2 3 4 1 2 1

0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x4 / B1[7:0] 0x8 / B2[7:0] 0xC / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x4 / B3|B2[15:0]

0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x1 / B1[7:0] 0x2 / B2[7:0] 0x3 / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x2 / B3|B2[15:0]

1 16 16 2 2 16 32 1 1 2 1 32 8 4

0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x2 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x2 / B3|B2[15:0]

0x0 / B3|B2|B1|B0[31:0] 0x0 / B3|B2|B1|B0[31:0]

0x0 / B3|B2|B1|B0[31:0] 1 2 3 4 0x0 /B3|B2|B1|B0[31:0] 1 2

0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x4 / B1[7:0] 0x8 / B2[7:0] 0xC / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x4 / B3|B2[15:0]

0x0 / B0[7:0] 0x1 / B1[7:0] 0x2 / B2[7:0] 0x3 / B3[7:0] 0x0 / B1|B0[15:0] 0x2 / B3|B2[15:0]

32 32

16 32

2 1

0x0 /B3|B2|B1|B0 [31:0] 1

0x0 /B3|B2|B1|B0 [31:0] 0x0 / B3|B2|B1|B0[31:0]

Note:

Peripheral port may be the source or the destination (it could also be the memory source in the case of memory-to-memory transfer). PSIZE, MSIZE and NDT[15:0] have to be configured so as to ensure that the last transfer will not be incomplete. This can occur when the data width of the peripheral port (PSIZE bits) is lower than the data width of the memory port (MSIZE bits). This constraint is summarized in Table 40. Table 40. Restriction on NDT versus PSIZE and MSIZE
MSIZE[1:0] of DMA_SxCR 01 (16-bit) 10 (32-bit) 10 (32-bit) NDT[15:0] of DMA_SxNDTR must be a multiple of 2 must be a multiple of 4 must be a multiple of 2

PSIZE[1:0] of DMA_SxCR 00 (8-bit) 00 (8-bit) 01 (16-bit)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

226/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

9.3.11

Single and burst transfers

The DMA controller can generate single transfers or incremental burst transfers of 4, 8 or 16 beats. The size of the burst is configured by software independently for the two AHB ports by using the MBURST[1:0] and PBURST[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register. The burst size indicates the number of beats in the burst, not the number of bytes transferred. To ensure data coherence, each group of transfers that form a burst are indivisible: AHB transfers are locked and the arbiter of the AHB bus matrix does not degrant the DMA master during the sequence of the burst transfer. Depending on the single or burst configuration, each DMA request initiates a different number of transfers on the AHB peripheral port:

When the AHB peripheral port is configured for single transfers, each DMA request generates a data transfer of a byte, half-word or word depending on the PSIZE[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register When the AHB peripheral port is configured for burst transfers, each DMA request generates 4,8 or 16 beats of byte, half word or word transfers depending on the PBURST[1:0] and PSIZE[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register.

The same as above has to be considered for the AHB memory port considering the MBURST and MSIZE bits. In direct mode, the stream can only generate single transfers and the MBURST[1:0] and PBURST[1:0] bits are forced by hardware. The address pointers (DMA_SxPAR or DMA_SxM0AR registers) must be chosen so as to ensure that all transfers within a burst block are aligned on the address boundary equal to the size of the transfer. The burst configuration has to be selected in order to respect the AHB protocol, where bursts must not cross the 1 KB address boundary because the minimum address space that can be allocated to a single slave is 1 KB. This means that the 1 KB address boundary should not be crossed by a burst block transfer, otherwise an AHB error would be generated, that is not reported by the DMA registers. Note: The Burst mode is allowed only when incremetation is enabled: When the PINC bit is at 0, the PBURST bits should also be cleared to 00 When the MINC bit is at 0, the MBURST bits should also be cleared to 00.

9.3.12

FIFO
FIFO structure
The FIFO is used to temporarily store data coming from the source before transmitting them to the destination. Each stream has an independent 4-word FIFO and the threshold level is softwareconfigurable between 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 or full. To enable the use of the FIFO threshold level, the direct mode must be disabled by setting the DMDIS bit in the DMA_SxFCR register.

227/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA) The structure of the FIFO differs depending on the source and destination data widths, and is described in Figure 31: FIFO structure. Figure 31. FIFO structure
4 words Empty 1/4 B15 B14 B13 W2 B 11 B10 B9 B8 W1 4 words Empty 1/4 B15 B 11 H5 B10 B9 H4 B8 1/2 B7 H3 B6 B5 H2 B4 4 words Empty 1/4 H7 byte lane 2 H7 H6 H5 H4 H3 H2 H1 H0 byte lane 1 byte lane 0 W3 H6 W2 H4 W1 H2 W0 H0 H5 1/2 H3 3/4 H1 Full H0 H1 3/4 B3 B2 B1 B0 H7, H6, H5, H4, H3, H2, H1, H0 Full 1/2 B7 B6 B5 B4 W0 3/4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Full

Source: byte
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

byte lane 3 byte lane 2 byte lane 1

Destination: word
W3, W2, W1, W0

byte lane 0 W3 B12

Source: byte
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

byte lane 3

Destination: half-word

byte lane 2 H7 B14 byte lane 1 B13

byte lane 0 H6 B12

Source: half-word

byte lane 3

Destination: word
W3, W2, W1, W0

4-words Empty 1/4 B15 B 11 H5 B10 B9 H4 B8 1/2 B7 H3 B6 B5 H2 B4 H0 H1 3/4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Full

Source: half-word
H7 H6 H5 H4 H3 H2 H1 H0

byte lane 3

Destination: byte

byte lane 2 H7 B14 byte lane 1 B13

byte lane 0 H6 B12

ai15951

FIFO threshold and burst configuration

Caution is required when choosing the FIFO threshold (bits FTH[1:0] of the DMA_SxFCR register) and the size of the memory burst (MBURST[1:0] of the DMA_SxCR register): The content pointed by the FIFO threshold must exactly match to an integer number of memory burst transfers. If this is not in the case, a FIFO error (flag FEIFx of the DMA_HISR or DMA_LISR register) will be generated when the stream is enabled, then the stream will be automatically disabled. The allowed and forbidden configurations are described in the Table 41: FIFO threshold configurations. Table 41.
MSIZE

FIFO threshold configurations

FIFO level MBURST = INCR4 1/4 1/2 1 burst of 4 beats 2 bursts of 4 beats 3 bursts of 4 beats 4 bursts of 4 beats MBURST = INCR8 forbidden 1 burst of 8 beats forbidden 2 bursts of 8 beats 1 burst of 16 beats forbidden MBURST = INCR16

Byte 3/4 Full

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

228/1422

DMA controller (DMA) Table 41.

MSIZE

RM0090 FIFO threshold configurations (continued)

FIFO level MBURST = INCR4 1/4 1/2 forbidden 1 burst of 4 beats forbidden 2 bursts of 4 beats 1 burst of 8 beats forbidden 1/4 1/2 forbidden forbidden 3/4 Full 1 burst of 4 beats forbidden MBURST = INCR8 MBURST = INCR16

Half-word 3/4 Full

Word

In all cases, the burst size multiplied by the data size must not exceed the FIFO size (data size can be: 1 (byte), 2 (half-word) or 4 (word)). Incomplete Burst transfer at the end of a DMA transfer may happen if one of the following conditions occurs:

For the AHB peripheral port configuration: the total number of data items (set in the DMA_SxNDTR register) is not a multiple of the burst size multiplied by the data size For the AHB memory port configuration: the number of remaining data items in the FIFO to be transferred to the memory is not a multiple of the burst size multiplied by the data size

In such cases, the remaining data to be transferred will be managed in single mode by the DMA, even if a burst transaction was requested during the DMA stream configuration. Note: When burst transfers are requested on the peripheral AHB port and the FIFO is used (DMDIS = 1 in the DMA_SxCR register), it is mandatory to respect the following rule to avoid permanent underrun or overrun conditions, depending on the DMA stream direction: If (PBURST PSIZE) = FIFO_SIZE (4 words), FIFO_Threshold = 3/4 is forbidden with PSIZE = 1, 2 or 4 and PBURST = 4, 8 or 16. This rule ensures that enough FIFO space at a time will be free to serve the request from the peripheral.

FIFO flush
The FIFO can be flushed when the stream is disabled by resetting the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register and when the stream is configured to manage peripheral-to-memory or memory-to-memory transfers: If some data are still present in the FIFO when the stream is disabled, the DMA controller continues transferring the remaining data to the destination (even though stream is effectively disabled). When this flush is completed, the transfer complete status bit (TCIFx) in the DMA_LISR or DMA_HISR register is set. The remaining data counter DMA_SxNDTR keeps the value in this case to indicate how many data items are currently available in the destination memory. Note that during the FIFO flush operation, if the number of remaining data items in the FIFO to be transferred to memory (in bytes) is less than the memory data width (for example 2 bytes in FIFO while MSIZE is configured to word), data will be sent with the data width set in the MSIZE bit in the DMA_SxCR register. This means that memory will be written with an

229/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA) undesired value. The software may read the DMA_SxNDTR register to determine the memory area that contains the good data (start address and last address). If the number of remaining data items in the FIFO is lower than a burst size (if the MBURST bits in DMA_SxCR register are set to configure the stream to manage burst on the AHB memory port), single transactions will be generated to complete the FIFO flush.

Direct mode
By default, the FIFO operates in direct mode (DMDIS bit in the DMA_SxFCR is reset) and the FIFO threshold level is not used. This mode is useful when the system requires an immediate and single transfer to or from the memory after each DMA request. When the DMA is configured in direct mode (FIFO disabled), to transfer data in memory-toperipheral mode, the DMA preloads one data from the memory to the internal FIFO to ensure an immediate data transfer as soon as a DMA request is triggered by a peripheral. To avoid saturating the FIFO, it is recommended to configure the corresponding stream with a high priority. This mode is restricted to transfers where:

The source and destination transfer widths are equal and both defined by the PSIZE[1:0] bits in DMA_SxCR (MSIZE[1:0] bits are dont care) Burst transfers are not possible (PBURST[1:0] and MBURST[1:0] bits in DMA_SxCR are dont care)

Direct mode must not be used when implementing memory-to-memory transfers.

9.3.13

DMA transfer completion

Different events can generate an end of transfer by setting the TCIFx bit in the DMA_LISR or DMA_HISR status register:

In DMA flow controller mode: The DMA_SxNDTR counter has reached zero in the memory-to-peripheral mode The stream is disabled before the end of transfer (by clearing the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register) and (when transfers are peripheral-to-memory or memoryto-memory) all the remaining data have been flushed from the FIFO into the memory The last external burst or single request has been generated from the peripheral and (when the DMA is operating in peripheral-to-memory mode) the remaining data have been transferred from the FIFO into the memory The stream is disabled by software, and (when the DMA is operating in peripheralto-memory mode) the remaining data have been transferred from the FIFO into the memory

In Peripheral flow controller mode:

Note:

The transfer completion is dependent on the remaining data in FIFO to be transferred into memory only in the case of peripheral-to-memory mode. This condition is not applicable in memory-to-peripheral mode. If the stream is configured in noncircular mode, after the end of the transfer (that is when the number of data to be transferred reaches zero), the DMA is stopped (EN bit in DMA_SxCR register is cleared by Hardware) and no DMA request is served unless the software reprograms the stream and re-enables it (by setting the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

230/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

9.3.14

DMA transfer suspension

At any time, a DMA transfer can be suspended to be restarted later on or to be definitively disabled before the end of the DMA transfer. There are two cases:

The stream disables the transfer with no later-on restart from the point where it was stopped. There is no particular action to do, except to clear the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register to disable the stream. The stream may take time to be disabled (ongoing transfer is completed first). The transfer complete interrupt flag (TCIF in the DMA_LISR or DMA_HISR register) is set in order to indicate the end of transfer. The value of the EN bit in DMA_SxCR is now 0 to confirm the stream interruption. The DMA_SxNDTR register contains the number of remaining data items at the moment when the stream was stopped so that the software can determine how many data items have been transferred before the stream was interrupted. The stream suspends the transfer before the number of remaining data items to be transferred in the DMA_SxNDTR register reaches 0. The aim is to restart the transfer later by re-enabling the stream. In order to restart from the point where the transfer was stopped, the software has to read the DMA_SxNDTR register after disabling the stream by writing the EN bit in DMA_SxCR register (and then checking that it is at 0) to know the number of data items already collected. Then: The peripheral and/or memory addresses have to be updated in order to adjust the address pointers The SxNDTR register has to be updated with the remaining number of data items to be transferred (the value read when the stream was disabled) The stream may then be re-enabled to restart the transfer from the point it was stopped

Note:

Note that a Transfer complete interrupt flag (TCIF in DMA_LISR or DMA_HISR) is set to indicate the end of transfer due to the stream interruption.

9.3.15

Flow controller
The entity that controls the number of data to be transferred is known as the flow controller. This flow controller is configured independently for each stream using the PFCTRL bit in the DMA_SxCR register. The flow controller can be:

The DMA controller: in this case, the number of data items to be transferred is programmed by software into the DMA_SxNDTR register before the DMA stream is enabled. The peripheral source or destination: this is the case when the number of data items to be transferred is unknown. The peripheral indicates by hardware to the DMA controller when the last data are being transferred. This feature is only supported for peripherals which are able to signal the end of the transfer, that is: SDIO

When the peripheral flow controller is used for a given stream, the value written into the DMA_SxNDTR has no effect on the DMA transfer. Actually, whatever the value written, it will

231/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA) be forced by hardware to 0xFFFF as soon as the stream is enabled, to respect the following schemes:

Anticipated stream interruption: EN bit in DMA_SxCR register is reset to 0 by the software to stop the stream before the last data hardware signal (single or burst) is sent by the peripheral. In such a case, the stream is switched off and the FIFO flush is triggered in the case of a peripheral-to-memory DMA transfer. The TCIFx flag of the corresponding stream is set in the status register to indicate the DMA completion. To know the number of data items transferred during the DMA transfer, read the DMA_SxNDTR register and apply the following formula: Number_of_data_transferred = 0xFFFF DMA_SxNDTR Normal stream interruption due to the reception of a last data hardware signal: the stream is automatically interrupted when the peripheral requests the last transfer (single or burst) and when this transfer is complete. the TCIFx flag of the corresponding stream is set in the status register to indicate the DMA transfer completion. To know the number of data items transferred, read the DMA_SxNDTR register and apply the same formula as above. The DMA_SxNDTR register reaches 0: the TCIFx flag of the corresponding stream is set in the status register to indicate the forced DMA transfer completion. The stream is automatically switched off even though the last data hardware signal (single or burst) has not been yet asserted. The already transferred data will not be lost. This means that a maximum of 65535 data items can be managed by the DMA in a single transaction, even in peripheral flow control mode.

Note:

When configured in memory-to-memory mode, the DMA is always the flow controller and the PFCTRL bit is forced to 0 by hardware. The Circular mode is forbidden in the peripheral flow controller mode.

9.3.16

Summary of the possible DMA configurations

Table 42 summarizes the different possible DMA configurations.

Table 42.

Possible DMA configurations

Source Destination Flow controller DMA Circular mode possible burst single Peripheral forbidden burst single DMA possible burst single Peripheral forbidden burst forbidden forbidden burst forbidden single DMA only forbidden forbidden possible forbidden forbidden possible possible forbidden possible forbidden Transfer type single Direct mode possible possible Double buffer mode

DMA transfer mode

Peripheral-tomemory

AHB AHB peripheral port memory port

Memory-toperipheral

AHB memory port

AHB peripheral port

Memory-tomemory

AHB AHB peripheral port memory port

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

232/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

9.3.17

Stream configuration procedure

The following sequence should be followed to configure a DMA stream x (where x is the stream number): 1. If the stream is enabled, disable it by resetting the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register, then read this bit in order to confirm that there is no ongoing stream operation. Writing this bit to 0 is not immediately effective since it is actually written to 0 once all the current transfers have finished. When the EN bit is read as 0, this means that the stream is ready to be configured. It is therefore necessary to wait for the EN bit to be cleared before starting any stream configuration. All the stream dedicated bits set in the status register (DMA_LISR and DMA_HISR) from the previous data block DMA transfer should be cleared before the stream can be re-enabled. Set the peripheral port register address in the DMA_SxPAR register. The data will be moved from/ to this address to/ from the peripheral port after the peripheral event. Set the memory address in the DMA_SxMA0R register (and in the DMA_SxMA1R register in the case of a double buffer mode). The data will be written to or read from this memory after the peripheral event. Configure the total number of data items to be transferred in the DMA_SxNDTR register. After each peripheral event or each beat of the burst, this value is decremented. Select the DMA channel (request) using CHSEL[2:0] in the DMA_SxCR register. If the peripheral is intended to be the flow controller and if it supports this feature, set the PFCTRL bit in the DMA_SxCR register. Configure the stream priority using the PL[1:0] bits in the DMA_SxCR register. Configure the FIFO usage (enable or disable, threshold in transmission and reception) Configure the data transfer direction, peripheral and memory incremented/fixed mode, single or burst transactions, peripheral and memory data widths, Circular mode, Double buffer mode and interrupts after half and/or full transfer, and/or errors in the DMA_SxCR register.

2. 3.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. Activate the stream by setting the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register. As soon as the stream is enabled, it can serve any DMA request from the peripheral connected to the stream. Once half the data have been transferred on the AHB destination port, the half-transfer flag (HTIF) is set and an interrupt is generated if the half-transfer interrupt enable bit (HTIE) is set. At the end of the transfer, the transfer complete flag (TCIF) is set and an interrupt is generated if the transfer complete interrupt enable bit (TCIE) is set.

Warning:

To switch off a peripheral connected to a DMA stream request, it is mandatory to, first, switch off the DMA stream to which the peripheral is connected, then to wait for EN bit = 0. Only then can the peripheral be safely disabled.

233/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

9.3.18

Error management
The DMA controller can detect the following errors:

Transfer error: the transfer error interrupt flag (TEIFx) is set when: A bus error occurs during a DMA read or a write access A write access is requested by software on a memory address register in Double buffer mode whereas the stream is enabled and the current target memory is the one impacted by the write into the memory address register (refer to Section 9.3.9: Double buffer mode) A FIFO underrun condition is detected A FIFO overrun condition is detected (no detection in memory-to-memory mode because requests and transfers are internally managed by the DMA) The stream is enabled while the FIFO threshold level is not compatible with the size of the memory burst (refer to Table 41: FIFO threshold configurations)

FIFO error: the FIFO error interrupt flag (FEIFx) is set if:

Direct mode error: the direct mode error interrupt flag (DMEIFx) can only be set in the peripheral-to-memory mode while operating in direct mode and when the MINC bit in the DMA_SxCR register is cleared. This flag is set when a DMA request occurs while the previous data have not yet been fully transferred into the memory (because the memory bus was not granted). In this case, the flag indicates that 2 data items were be transferred successively to the same destination address, which could be an issue if the destination is not able to manage this situation In the peripheral-to-memory mode, the FIFO can be saturated (overrun) if the memory bus is not granted for several peripheral requests In the memory-to-peripheral mode, an underrun condition may occur if the memory bus has not been granted before a peripheral request occurs

In direct mode, the FIFO error flag can also be set under the following conditions:

If the TEIFx or the FEIFx flag is set due to incompatibility between burst size and FIFO threshold level, the faulty stream is automatically disabled through a hardware clear of its EN bit in the corresponding stream configuration register (DMA_SxCR). If the DMEIFx or the FEIFx flag is set due to an overrun or underrun condition, the faulty stream is not automatically disabled and it is up to the software to disable or not the stream by resetting the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register. This is because there is no data loss when this kind of errors occur. When the stream's error interrupt flag (TEIF, FEIF, DMEIF) in the DMA_LISR or DMA_HISR register is set, an interrupt is generated if the corresponding interrupt enable bit (TEIE, FEIE, DMIE) in the DMA_SxCR or DMA_SxFCR register is set. Note: When a FIFO overrun or underrun condition occurs, the data are not lost because the peripheral request is not acknowledged by the stream until the overrun or underrun condition is cleared. If this acknowledge takes too much time, the peripheral itself may detect an overrun or underrun condition of its internal buffer and data might be lost.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

234/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

9.4

DMA interrupts
For each DMA stream, an interrupt can be produced on the following events:

Half-transfer reached Transfer complete Transfer error Fifo error (overrun, underrun or FIFO level error) Direct mode error

Separate interrupt enable control bits are available for flexibility as shown in Table 43. Table 43. DMA interrupt requests
Interrupt event Half-transfer Transfer complete Transfer error FIFO overrun/underrun Direct mode error Event flag HTIF TCIF TEIF FEIF DMEIF Enable control bit HTIE TCIE TEIE FEIE DMEIE

Note:

Before setting an Enable control bit to 1, the corresponding event flag should be cleared, otherwise an interrupt is immediately generated.

9.5

DMA registers
The DMA registers can be accessed by words (32 bits).

9.5.1

DMA low interrupt status register (DMA_LISR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27 TCIF3

26 HTIF3 r 10 HTIF1 r

25 TEIF3 r 9 TEIF1 r

24

23

22

21 TCIF2 r 5 TCIF0 r

20 HTIF2 r 4 HTIF0 r

19 TEIF2 r 3 TEIF0 r

18

17

16 FEIF2 r 0 FEIF0 r

Reserved r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12

r 11 TCIF1

DMEIF3 Reserv FEIF3 ed r r 8 7 6

DMEIF2 Reserv ed r 2 1

Reserved r r r r

DMEIF1 Reserv FEIF1 ed r r

DMEIF0 Reserv ed r

Bits 31:28, 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27, 21, 11, 5 TCIFx: Stream x transfer complete interrupt flag (x = 3..0) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_LIFCR register. 0: No transfer complete event on stream x 1: A transfer complete event occurred on stream x

235/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

Bits 26, 20, 10, 4 HTIFx: Stream x half transfer interrupt flag (x=3..0) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_LIFCR register. 0: No half transfer event on stream x 1: A half transfer event occurred on stream x Bits 25, 19, 9, 3 TEIFx: Stream x transfer error interrupt flag (x=3..0) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_LIFCR register. 0: No transfer error on stream x 1: A transfer error occurred on stream x Bits 24, 18, 8, 2 DMEIFx: Stream x direct mode error interrupt flag (x=3..0) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_LIFCR register. 0: No Direct Mode Error on stream x 1: A Direct Mode Error occurred on stream x Bits 23, 17, 7, 1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22, 16, 6, 0 FEIFx: Stream x FIFO error interrupt flag (x=3..0) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_LIFCR register. 0: No FIFO Error event on stream x 1: A FIFO Error event occurred on stream x

9.5.2

DMA high interrupt status register (DMA_HISR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27 TCIF7

26 HTIF7 r 10 HTIF5 r

25 TEIF7 r 9 TEIF5 r

24

23

22

21 TCIF6 r 5 TCIF4 r

20 HTIF6 r 4 HTIF4 r

19 TEIF6 r 3 TEIF4 r

18

17

16 FEIF6 r 0 FEIF4 r

Reserved r 15 14 13 12 11 TCIF5 Reserved r

DMEIF7 Reserv FEIF7 ed r r 8 7 6

DMEIF6 Reserv ed r 2 1

DMEIF5 Reserv FEIF5 ed r r

DMEIF4 Reserv ed r

Bits 31:28, 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27, 21, 11, 5 TCIFx: Stream x transfer complete interrupt flag (x=7..4) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_HIFCR register. 0: No transfer complete event on stream x 1: A transfer complete event occurred on stream x Bits 26, 20, 10, 4 HTIFx: Stream x half transfer interrupt flag (x=7..4) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_HIFCR register. 0: No half transfer event on stream x 1: A half transfer event occurred on stream x

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

236/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

Bits 25, 19, 9, 3 TEIFx: Stream x transfer error interrupt flag (x=7..4) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_HIFCR register. 0: No transfer error on stream x 1: A transfer error occurred on stream x Bits 24, 18, 8, 2 DMEIFx: Stream x direct mode error interrupt flag (x=7..4) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_HIFCR register. 0: No Direct mode error on stream x 1: A Direct mode error occurred on stream x Bits 23, 17, 7, 1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22, 16, 6, 0 FEIFx: Stream x FIFO error interrupt flag (x=7..4) This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by software writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the DMA_HIFCR register. 0: No FIFO error event on stream x 1: A FIFO error event occurred on stream x

9.5.3

DMA low interrupt flag clear register (DMA_LIFCR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22 CFEIF3 w

21 CTCIF2 w 5 CTCIF0 w

20 CHTIF2 w 4 CHTIF0 w

19

18

17 Reserved

16 CFEIF2 w

CTCIF3 CHTIF3 CTEIF3 CDMEIF3 Reserved w 15 14 13 12 11 w 10 w 9 w 8 7 Reserved w w w w

CTEIF2 CDMEIF2 w 3 w 2 1 Reserved

6 CFEIF1 w

0 CFEIF0 w

CTCIF1 CHTIF1 CTEIF1 CDMEIF1 Reserved

CTEIF0 CDMEIF0 w w

Bits 31:28, 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27, 21, 11, 5 CTCIFx: Stream x clear transfer complete interrupt flag (x = 3..0) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding TCIFx flag in the DMA_LISR register Bits 26, 20, 10, 4 CHTIFx: Stream x clear half transfer interrupt flag (x = 3..0) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding HTIFx flag in the DMA_LISR register Bits 25, 19, 9, 3 CTEIFx: Stream x clear transfer error interrupt flag (x = 3..0) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding TEIFx flag in the DMA_LISR register Bits 24, 18, 8, 2 CDMEIFx: Stream x clear direct mode error interrupt flag (x = 3..0) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding DMEIFx flag in the DMA_LISR register Bits 23, 17, 7, 1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22, 16, 6, 0 CFEIFx: Stream x clear FIFO error interrupt flag (x = 3..0) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding CFEIFx flag in the DMA_LISR register

9.5.4

DMA high interrupt flag clear register (DMA_HIFCR)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

237/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22 CFEIF7 w

21 CTCIF6 w 5 CTCIF4 w

20 CHTIF6 w 4 CHTIF4 w

19

18

17 Reserved

16 CFEIF6 w

CTCIF7 CHTIF7 CTEIF7 CDMEIF7 Reserved w 15 14 13 12 11 w 10 w 9 w 8 7 Reserved w w w w

CTEIF6 CDMEIF6 w 3 w 2 1 Reserved

6 CFEIF5 w

0 CFEIF4 w

CTCIF5 CHTIF5 CTEIF5 CDMEIF5 Reserved

CTEIF4 CDMEIF4 w w

Bits 31:28, 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27, 21, 11, 5 CTCIFx: Stream x clear transfer complete interrupt flag (x = 7..4) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding TCIFx flag in the DMA_HISR register Bits 26, 20, 10, 4 CHTIFx: Stream x clear half transfer interrupt flag (x = 7..4) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding HTIFx flag in the DMA_HISR register Bits 25, 19, 9, 3 CTEIFx: Stream x clear transfer error interrupt flag (x = 7..4) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding TEIFx flag in the DMA_HISR register Bits 24, 18, 8, 2 CDMEIFx: Stream x clear direct mode error interrupt flag (x = 7..4) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding DMEIFx flag in the DMA_HISR register Bits 23, 17, 7, 1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22, 16, 6, 0 CFEIFx: Stream x clear FIFO error interrupt flag (x = 7..4) Writing 1 to this bit clears the corresponding CFEIFx flag in the DMA_HISR register

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

238/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

9.5.5

DMA stream x configuration register (DMA_SxCR) (x = 0..7)

This register is used to configure the concerned stream. Address offset: 0x10 + 0x18 stream number Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26 CHSEL[3:0]

25

24

23

22

21

20 Reserv ed 4 TCIE rw

19 CT rw 3 HTIE rw

18 DBM or reserved rw or r 2 TEIE rw

17

16

MBURST [1:0] rw 9 PINC rw rw 8 CIRC rw rw 7

PBURST[1:0] rw 6 rw 5 PFCTRL rw

PL[1:0] rw 1 DMEIE rw rw 0 EN rw

Reserved rw 15 PINCOS rw 14 13 12 11 rw 10 MINC rw

MSIZE[1:0] rw rw

PSIZE[1:0] rw rw

DIR[1:0] rw rw

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27:25 CHSEL[2:0]: Channel selection These bits are set and cleared by software. 000: channel 0 selected 001: channel 1 selected 010: channel 2 selected 011: channel 3 selected 100: channel 4 selected 101: channel 5 selected 110: channel 6 selected 111: channel 7 selected These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 0 Bits 24:23 MBURST: Memory burst transfer configuration These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: single transfer 01: INCR4 (incremental burst of 4 beats) 10: INCR8 (incremental burst of 8 beats) 11: INCR16 (incremental burst of 16 beats) These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 0 In direct mode, these bits are forced to 0x0 by hardware as soon as bit EN= '1'. Bits 22:21 PBURST[1:0]: Peripheral burst transfer configuration These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: single transfer 01: INCR4 (incremental burst of 4 beats) 10: INCR8 (incremental burst of 8 beats) 11: INCR16 (incremental burst of 16 beats) These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 0 In direct mode, these bits are forced to 0x0 by hardware. Bits 20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 19 CT: Current target (only in double buffer mode) This bits is set and cleared by hardware. It can also be written by software. 0: The current target memory is Memory 0 (addressed by the DMA_SxM0AR pointer) 1: The current target memory is Memory 1 (addressed by the DMA_SxM1AR pointer) This bit can be written only if EN is 0 to indicate the target memory area of the first transfer. Once the stream is enabled, this bit operates as a status flag indicating which memory area is the current target.

239/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

Bits 18 DBM: Double buffer mode This bits is set and cleared by software. 0: No buffer switching at the end of transfer 1: Memory target switched at the end of the DMA transfer This bit is protected and can be written only if EN is 0. Bits 17:16 PL[1:0]: Priority level These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: Low 01: Medium 10: High 11: Very high These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 0. Bits 15 PINCOS: Peripheral increment offset size This bit is set and cleared by software 0: The offset size for the peripheral address calculation is linked to the PSIZE 1: The offset size for the peripheral address calculation is fixed to 4 (32-bit alignment). This bit has no meaning if bit PINC = '0'. This bit is protected and can be written only if EN = '0'. This bit is forced low by hardware when the stream is enabled (bit EN = '1') if the direct mode is selected or if PBURST are different from 00. Bits 14:13 MSIZE[1:0]: Memory data size These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: byte (8-bit) 01: half-word (16-bit) 10: word (32-bit) 11: reserved These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 0. In direct mode, MSIZE is forced by hardware to the same value as PSIZE as soon as bit EN = '1'. Bits 12:11 PSIZE[1:0]: Peripheral data size These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: Byte (8-bit) 01: Half-word (16-bit) 10: Word (32-bit) 11: reserved These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 0 Bits 10 MINC: Memory increment mode This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Memory address pointer is fixed 1: Memory address pointer is incremented after each data transfer (increment is done according to MSIZE) This bit is protected and can be written only if EN is 0. Bits 9 PINC: Peripheral increment mode This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Peripheral address pointer is fixed 1: Peripheral address pointer is incremented after each data transfer (increment is done according to PSIZE) This bit is protected and can be written only if EN is 0.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

240/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

Bits 8 CIRC: Circular mode This bit is set and cleared by software and can be cleared by hardware. 0: Circular mode disabled 1: Circular mode enabled When the peripheral is the flow controller (bit PFCTRL=1) and the stream is enabled (bit EN=1), then this bit is automatically forced by hardware to 0. It is automatically forced by hardware to 1 if the DBM bit is set, as soon as the stream is enabled (bit EN ='1'). Bits 7:6 DIR[1:0]: Data transfer direction These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: Peripheral-to-memory 01: Memory-to-peripheral 10: Memory-to-memory 11: reserved These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 0. Bits 5 PFCTRL: Peripheral flow controller This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: The DMA is the flow controller 1: The peripheral is the flow controller This bit is protected and can be written only if EN is 0. When the memory-to-memory mode is selected (bits DIR[1:0]=10), then this bit is automatically forced to 0 by hardware. Bits 4 TCIE: Transfer complete interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: TC interrupt disabled 1: TC interrupt enabled Bits 3 HTIE: Half transfer interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: HT interrupt disabled 1: HT interrupt enabled Bits 2 TEIE: Transfer error interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: TE interrupt disabled 1: TE interrupt enabled Bits 1 DMEIE: Direct mode error interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: DME interrupt disabled 1: DME interrupt enabled

241/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

Bits 0 EN: Stream enable / flag stream ready when read low This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Stream disabled 1: Stream enabled This bit may be cleared by hardware: on a DMA end of transfer (stream ready to be configured) if a transfer error occurs on the AHB master buses when the FIFO threshold on memory AHB port is not compatible with the size of the burst When this bit is read as 0, the software is allowed to program the Configuration and FIFO bits registers. It is forbidden to write these registers when the EN bit is read as 1. Note: Before setting EN bit to '1' to start a new transfer, the event flags corresponding to the stream in DMA_LISR or DMA_HISR register must be cleared.

9.5.6

DMA stream x number of data register (DMA_SxNDTR) (x = 0..7)

Address offset: 0x14 + 0x18 stream number Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

NDT[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 NDT[15:0]: Number of data items to transfer Number of data items to be transferred (0 up to 65535). This register can be written only when the stream is disabled. When the stream is enabled, this register is read-only, indicating the remaining data items to be transmitted. This register decrements after each DMA transfer. Once the transfer has completed, this register can either stay at zero (when the stream is in normal mode) or be reloaded automatically with the previously programmed value in the following cases: when the stream is configured in Circular mode. when the stream is enabled again by setting EN bit to '1' If the value of this register is zero, no transaction can be served even if the stream is enabled.

9.5.7

DMA stream x peripheral address register (DMA_SxPAR) (x = 0..7)

Address offset: 0x18 + 0x18 stream number Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

PAR[31:16] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

242/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

15

14

13

12

11

10

PAR[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:0 PAR[31:0]: Peripheral address Base address of the peripheral data register from/to which the data will be read/written. These bits are write-protected and can be written only when bit EN = '0' in the DMA_SxCR register.

9.5.8

DMA stream x memory 0 address register (DMA_SxM0AR) (x = 0..7)

Address offset: 0x1C + 0x18 stream number Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

M0A[31:16] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

M0A[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:0 M0A[31:0]: Memory 0 address Base address of Memory area 0 from/to which the data will be read/written. These bits are write-protected. They can be written only if: the stream is disabled (bit EN= '0' in the DMA_SxCR register) or the stream is enabled (EN=1 in DMA_SxCR register) and bit CT = '1' in the DMA_SxCR register (in Double buffer mode).

9.5.9

DMA stream x memory 1 address register (DMA_SxM1AR) (x = 0..7)

Address offset: 0x20 + 0x18 stream number Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

M1A[31:16] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

M1A[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:0 M1A[31:0]: Memory 1 address (used in case of Double buffer mode) Base address of Memory area 1 from/to which the data will be read/written. This register is used only for the Double buffer mode. These bits are write-protected. They can be written only if: the stream is disabled (bit EN= '0' in the DMA_SxCR register) or the stream is enabled (EN=1 in DMA_SxCR register) and bit CT = '0' in the DMA_SxCR register.

243/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

DMA controller (DMA)

9.5.10

DMA stream x FIFO control register (DMA_SxFCR) (x = 0..7)

Address offset: 0x24 + 0x24 stream number Reset value: 0x0000 0021

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 FEIE

6 Reser ved

4 FS[2:0]

2 DMDIS

FTH[1:0] rw rw

Reserved rw

rw

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7 FEIE: FIFO error interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: FE interrupt disabled 1: FE interrupt enabled Bits 6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 5:3 FS[2:0]: FIFO status These bits are read-only. 000: 0 < fifo_level < 1/4 001: 1/4 fifo_level < 1/2 010: 1/2 fifo_level < 3/4 011: 3/4 fifo_level < full 100: FIFO is empty 101: FIFO is full others: no meaning These bits are not relevant in the direct mode (DMDIS bit is zero). Bits 2 DMDIS: Direct mode disable This bit is set and cleared by software. It can be set by hardware. 0: Direct mode enabled 1: Direct mode disabled This bit is protected and can be written only if EN is 0. This bit is set by hardware if the memory-to-memory mode is selected (DIR bit in DMA_SxCR are 10) and the EN bit in the DMA_SxCR register is 1 because the direct mode is not allowed in the memory-to-memory configuration. Bits 1:0 FTH[1:0]: FIFO threshold selection These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: 1/4 full FIFO 01: 1/2 full FIFO 10: 3/4 full FIFO 11: full FIFO These bits are not used in the direct mode when the DMIS value is zero. These bits are protected and can be written only if EN is 1.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

244/1422

DMA controller (DMA)

RM0090

9.5.11

DMA register map

Table 44 summarizes the DMA registers.

Table 44.
Offset
0x0000

DMA register map and reset values

DMEIF3 DMEIF2 DMEIF1 DMEIF0 0 DMEIF4 TCIF3 HTIF3 TCIF1 TCIF2 HTIF2 HTIF1 TCIF0 HTIF0 TEIF3 FEIF3 TEIF2 FEIF2 TEIF1 FEIF1 TEIF0 FEIF0 0 FEIF4 0 CFEIF0 0 CFEIF4 0 EN 0 0 0 EN 0 0 0 0 0 1

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

DMA_LISR Reset value DMA_HISR Reset value DMA_LIFCR Reset value DMA_HIFCR Reset value

Reserved

Reserved

0 TCIF7

0 HTIF7

0 TEIF7

0 DMEIF7

0 FEIF7

0 TCIF6

0 HTIF6

0 TEIF6

0 DMEIF6

0 FEIF6

0 TCIF5

0 HTIF5

0 TEIF5

0 DMEIF5

0 FEIF5

0 TCIF4

0 HTIF4

0 TEIF4 0 CTEIF0 0 CTEIF4 0 HTIE 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0x0004

Reserved

Reserved

0 CTCIF3

0 CHTIF3

0 TEIF3

0 CDMEIF3

0 CFEIF3

0 CTCIF2

0 CHTIF2

0 CTEIF2

0 CDMEIF2

0 CFEIF2

0 CTCIF1

0 CHTIF1

0 CTEIF1

0 CDMEIF1

0 CFEIF1

0 CTCIF0

0 CHTIF0

0 CDMEIF0 0 CDMEIF4 0 TEIE 0 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0 TEIE 0 0 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0x0008

Reserved

Reserved

0 CTCIF7

0 CHTIF7

0 CTEIF7

0 CDMEIF7

0 CFEIF7

0 CTCIF6

0 CHTIF6

0 CTEIF6

0 CDMEIF6

0 CFEIF6

0 CTCIF5

0 CHTIF5

0 CTEIF5

0 CDMEIF5

0 CFEIF5

0 CTCIF4

0 CHTIF4

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0x000C

Reserved

Reserved

0 CHSEL[2:0]

0 PBURST[1:0]

0 MSIZE[1:0] PSIZE[1:0] PINCOS

0 PFCTRL

MBURST[1:0]

DIR[1:0]

Reserved

0x0010

DMA_S0CR

Reserved 0

Reset value 0x0014 DMA_S0NDTR Reset value DMA_S0PAR Reset value DMA_S0M0AR Reset value DMA_S0M1AR Reset value DMA_S0FCR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0018

0x001C

M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0020

M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0

0x0024

Reserved

FS[2:0] 1 PFCTRL 0 0

0 PBURST[1:0] MBURST[1:] MSIZE[1:0] PSIZE[1:0] PINCOS CHSEL [2:0] PL[1:0] MINC CIRC

DIR[1:0]

0x0028

DMA_S1CR

Reserved 0

Reset value 0x002C DMA_S1NDTR Reset value DMA_S1PAR Reset value 0 0 0 0

Reserved

NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0030

245/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

DMEIE 0 0

PINC

HTIE

TCIE

DBM

ACK

CT

DMEIE 0 0 0

PL[1:0]

MINC

CIRC

PINC

TCIE

DBM

CT

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FTH [1:0]

Register

RM0090 Table 44.

Offset
0x0034

DMA controller (DMA) DMA register map and reset values (continued)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0 0 Reserved FS[2:0] 1 PFCTRL 0 0 FTH [1:0] 0 DMEIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMEIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 MBURST[1:0] PBURST[1:0] MSIZE[1:0] PSIZE[1:0] PINCOS CHSEL [2:0] PL[1:0] 0 MINC CIRC PINC TCIE HTIE TEIE 0 DBM ACK DIR [1:0] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0 Reserved FS[2:0] 1 PFCTRL 0 0 FTH [1:0] 1 0 MBURST[1:0] PBURST[1:0] CHSEL[2:0] MSIZE[1:0] PSIZE[1:0] PINCOS PL[1:0] 0 DIR[1:0] MINC CIRC PINC TCIE HTIE DBM TEIE ACK Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0 Reserved FS[2:0] 1 0 0 FTH [1:0] 1 0 0

Register
DMA_S1M0AR Reset value DMA_S1M1AR Reset value DMA_S1FCR Reset value

0x0038

0x003C

0x0040

DMA_S2CR

Reset value 0x0044 DMA_S2NDTR Reset value DMA_S2PAR Reset value DMA_S2M0AR Reset value DMA_S2M1AR Reset value DMA_S2FCR Reset value

0x0048

0x004C

0x0050

0x0054

0x0058

DMA_S3CR

Reset value 0x005C DMA_S3NDTR Reset value DMA_S3PAR Reset value DMA_S3M0AR Reset value DMA_S3M1AR Reset value DMA_S3FCR Reset value

0x0060

0x0064

0x0068

0x006C

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

246/1422

EN 0

CT

EN 0

CT

DMA controller (DMA) Table 44.

Offset

RM0090

DMA register map and reset values (continued)

MBURST[1:0] PBURST[1:0] CHSEL[2:0]

MSIZE[1:0]

PSIZE[1:0]

PFCTRL

PINCOS

PL[1:0]

DMEIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMEIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMEIE 0 0 0 0 0 0

MINC

CIRC

PINC

HTIE

TCIE

DBM

TEIE 0

ACK

DIR [1:0]

0x0070

DMA_S4CR

Reserved 0

Reset value 0x0074 DMA_S4NDTR Reset value DMA_S4PAR Reset value DMA_S4M0AR Reset value DMA_S4M1AR Reset value DMA_S4FCR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0078

0x007C

M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0080

M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0

0x0084

Reserved

FS[2:0] 1 PFCTRL 0 0

FTH [1:0] 1

0 MBURST[1:0] PBURST[1:0] CHSEL[2:0] MSIZE[1:0] PSIZE[1:0] PINCOS PL[1:0]

DIR[1:0]

MINC

CIRC

PINC

HTIE

TCIE

DBM

TEIE

ACK

0x0088

DMA_S5CR

Reserved 0

Reset value 0x008C DMA_S5NDTR Reset value DMA_S5PAR Reset value DMA_S5M0AR Reset value DMA_S5M1AR Reset value DMA_S5FCR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0090

0x0094

M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0098

M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0

0x009C

Reserved

FS[2:0] 1 PFCTRL 0 0

FTH [1:0] 1

0 MBURST[1:0] PBURST[1:0] CHSEL[2:0] MSIZE[1:0] PSIZE[1:0] PINCOS PL[1:0]

DIR[1:0]

MINC

CIRC

PINC

HTIE

TCIE

DBM

TEIE

ACK

0x00A0

DMA_S6CR

Reserved 0

Reset value 0x00A4 DMA_S6NDTR Reset value DMA_S6PAR Reset value DMA_S6M0AR Reset value DMA_S6M1AR Reset value DMA_S6FCR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x00A8

0x00AC

M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x00B0

M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0

0x00B4

Reserved

FS[2:0] 1 0 0

FTH [1:0] 1

247/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

EN 0 0

CT

EN 0 0

CT

EN 0 0

CT

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Register

RM0090 Table 44.

Offset

DMA controller (DMA) DMA register map and reset values (continued)
MBURST[1:0] PBURST[1:0] CHSEL[2:0]

MSIZE[1:0]

PSIZE[1:0]

PFCTRL

PINCOS

DIR[1:0]

PL[1:0]

DMEIE 0 0 0 0 0 0

MINC

CIRC

PINC

HTIE

TCIE

DBM

TEIE 0

ACK

0x00B8

DMA_S7CR

Reserved 0

Reset value 0x00BC DMA_S7NDTR Reset value DMA_S7PAR Reset value DMA_S7M0AR Reset value DMA_S7M1AR Reset value DMA_S7FCR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

NDT[15:.] 0 PA[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x00C0

0x00C4

M0A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x00C8

M1A[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FEIE 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 DMDIS 0

0x00CC

Reserved

FS[2:0] 1 0 0

FTH [1:0] 1

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

248/1422

EN 0 0

CT

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Register

Interrupts and events

RM0090

10

Interrupts and events

This Section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

10.1
10.1.1

Nested vectored interrupt controller (NVIC)

NVIC features
The nested vector interrupt controller NVIC includes the following features:

82 maskable interrupt channels for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx, and up to 86 maskable interrupt channels for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (not including the 16 interrupt lines of Cortex-M4F) 16 programmable priority levels (4 bits of interrupt priority are used) low-latency exception and interrupt handling power management control implementation of system control registers

The NVIC and the processor core interface are closely coupled, which enables low latency interrupt processing and efficient processing of late arriving interrupts. All interrupts including the core exceptions are managed by the NVIC. For more information on exceptions and NVIC programming see Chapter 5: Exceptions & Chapter 8: Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller in the ARM Cortex-M4F Technical Reference Manual.

10.1.2

SysTick calibration value register

The SysTick calibration value is fixed to 18750, which gives a reference time base of 1 ms with the SysTick clock set to 18.75 MHz (HCLK/8, with HCLK set to 150 MHz).

10.1.3

Interrupt and exception vectors

See Table 45 and Table 46, for the vector table for the STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices.

10.2

External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)

The external interrupt/event controller consists of up to 23 edge detectors for generating event/interrupt requests. Each input line can be independently configured to select the type (interrupt or event) and the corresponding trigger event (rising or falling or both). Each line can also masked independently. A pending register maintains the status line of the interrupt requests.

249/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 45.

Position Priority

Interrupts and events Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

Type of priority fixed fixed fixed settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable Reset NMI HardFault MemManage BusFault UsageFault SVCall Debug Monitor PendSV SysTick WWDG PVD TAMP_STAMP RTC_WKUP FLASH RCC EXTI0 EXTI1 EXTI2 EXTI3 EXTI4 DMA1_Stream0 DMA1_Stream1 DMA1_Stream2 DMA1_Stream3 DMA1_Stream4 Acronym Reserved Reset Non maskable interrupt. The RCC Clock Security System (CSS) is linked to the NMI vector. All class of fault Memory management Pre-fetch fault, memory access fault Undefined instruction or illegal state Reserved System service call via SWI instruction Debug Monitor Reserved Pendable request for system service System tick timer Window Watchdog interrupt PVD through EXTI line detection interrupt Tamper and TimeStamp interrupts through the EXTI line RTC Wakeup interrupt through the EXTI line Flash global interrupt RCC global interrupt EXTI Line0 interrupt EXTI Line1 interrupt EXTI Line2 interrupt EXTI Line3 interrupt EXTI Line4 interrupt DMA1 Stream0 global interrupt DMA1 Stream1 global interrupt DMA1 Stream2 global interrupt DMA1 Stream3 global interrupt DMA1 Stream4 global interrupt Description Address 0x0000 0000 0x0000 0004 0x0000 0008 0x0000 000C 0x0000 0010 0x0000 0014 0x0000 0018 0x0000 001C - 0x0000 002B 0x0000 002C 0x0000 0030 0x0000 0034 0x0000 0038 0x0000 003C 0x0000 0040 0x0000 0044 0x0000 0048 0x0000 004C 0x0000 0050 0x0000 0054 0x0000 0058 0x0000 005C 0x0000 0060 0x0000 0064 0x0000 0068 0x0000 006C 0x0000 0070 0x0000 0074 0x0000 0078 0x0000 007C

-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

250/1422

Interrupts and events Table 45.

Position Priority

RM0090

Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx (continued)

Type of priority settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable Acronym DMA1_Stream5 DMA1_Stream6 ADC CAN1_TX CAN1_RX0 CAN1_RX1 CAN1_SCE EXTI9_5 TIM1_BRK_TIM9 TIM1_UP_TIM10 TIM1_TRG_COM_TIM11 TIM1_CC TIM2 TIM3 TIM4 I2C1_EV I2C1_ER I2C2_EV I2C2_ER SPI1 SPI2 USART1 USART2 USART3 EXTI15_10 RTC_Alarm OTG_FS WKUP TIM8_BRK_TIM12 Description DMA1 Stream5 global interrupt DMA1 Stream6 global interrupt ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3 global interrupts CAN1 TX interrupts CAN1 RX0 interrupts CAN1 RX1 interrupt CAN1 SCE interrupt EXTI Line[9:5] interrupts TIM1 Break interrupt and TIM9 global interrupt TIM1 Update interrupt and TIM10 global interrupt TIM1 Trigger and Commutation interrupts and TIM11 global interrupt TIM1 Capture Compare interrupt TIM2 global interrupt TIM3 global interrupt TIM4 global interrupt I
2C1

Address 0x0000 0080 0x0000 0084 0x0000 0088 0x0000 008C 0x0000 0090 0x0000 0094 0x0000 0098 0x0000 009C 0x0000 00A0 0x0000 00A4 0x0000 00A8 0x0000 00AC 0x0000 00B0 0x0000 00B4 0x0000 00B8 0x0000 00BC 0x0000 00C0 0x0000 00C4 0x0000 00C8 0x0000 00CC 0x0000 00D0 0x0000 00D4 0x0000 00D8 0x0000 00DC 0x0000 00E0 0x0000 00E4 0x0000 00E8 0x0000 00EC

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

event interrupt

I2C1 error interrupt I2C2

2

event interrupt

I C2 error interrupt SPI1 global interrupt SPI2 global interrupt USART1 global interrupt USART2 global interrupt USART3 global interrupt EXTI Line[15:10] interrupts RTC Alarms (A and B) through EXTI line interrupt USB On-The-Go FS Wakeup through EXTI line interrupt TIM8 Break interrupt and TIM12 global interrupt

251/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 45.

Position Priority

Interrupts and events Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx (continued)
Type of priority settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable Acronym Description TIM8 Update interrupt and TIM13 global interrupt TIM8 Trigger and Commutation interrupts and TIM14 global interrupt TIM8 Capture Compare interrupt DMA1 Stream7 global interrupt FSMC global interrupt SDIO global interrupt TIM5 global interrupt SPI3 global interrupt UART4 global interrupt UART5 global interrupt TIM6 global interrupt, DAC1 and DAC2 underrun error interrupts TIM7 global interrupt DMA2 Stream0 global interrupt DMA2 Stream1 global interrupt DMA2 Stream2 global interrupt DMA2 Stream3 global interrupt DMA2 Stream4 global interrupt Ethernet global interrupt Ethernet Wakeup through EXTI line interrupt CAN2 TX interrupts CAN2 RX0 interrupts CAN2 RX1 interrupt CAN2 SCE interrupt USB On The Go FS global interrupt DMA2 Stream5 global interrupt DMA2 Stream6 global interrupt DMA2 Stream7 global interrupt USART6 global interrupt I
2C3

Address

44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

TIM8_UP_TIM13 TIM8_TRG_COM_TIM14 TIM8_CC DMA1_Stream7 FSMC SDIO TIM5 SPI3 UART4 UART5 TIM6_DAC TIM7 DMA2_Stream0 DMA2_Stream1 DMA2_Stream2 DMA2_Stream3 DMA2_Stream4 ETH ETH_WKUP CAN2_TX CAN2_RX0 CAN2_RX1 CAN2_SCE OTG_FS DMA2_Stream5 DMA2_Stream6 DMA2_Stream7 USART6 I2C3_EV I2C3_ER

0x0000 00F0 0x0000 00F4 0x0000 00F8 0x0000 00FC 0x0000 0100 0x0000 0104 0x0000 0108 0x0000 010C 0x0000 0110 0x0000 0114 0x0000 0118 0x0000 011C 0x0000 0120 0x0000 0124 0x0000 0128 0x0000 012C 0x0000 0130 0x0000 0134 0x0000 0138 0x0000 013C 0x0000 0140 0x0000 0144 0x0000 0148 0x0000 014C 0x0000 0150 0x0000 0154 0x0000 0158 0x0000 015C 0x0000 0160 0x0000 0164

event interrupt

I2C3 error interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

252/1422

Interrupts and events Table 45.

Position Priority

RM0090

Vector table for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx (continued)

Type of priority settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable Acronym Description USB On The Go HS End Point 1 Out global interrupt USB On The Go HS End Point 1 In global interrupt USB On The Go HS Wakeup through EXTI interrupt USB On The Go HS global interrupt DCMI global interrupt CRYP crypto global interrupt Hash and Rng global interrupt FPU global interrupt Address

74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88

OTG_HS_EP1_OUT OTG_HS_EP1_IN OTG_HS_WKUP OTG_HS DCMI CRYP HASH_RNG FPU

0x0000 0168 0x0000 016C 0x0000 0170 0x0000 0174 0x0000 0178 0x0000 017C 0x0000 0180 0x0000 0184

Table 46.
Position Priority

Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Type of priority fixed fixed fixed fixed settable settable settable settable 5 6 settable settable settable settable settable SVCall Debug Monitor PendSV Systick WWDG PVD TAMP_STAMP Acronym Reset NMI HardFault MemManage BusFault UsageFault Reserved Reset Non maskable interrupt, Clock Security System All class of fault MPU mismatch Pre-fetch fault, memory access fault Undefined instruction or illegal state Reserved System Service call via SWI instruction Debug Monitor Reserved Pendable request for system service System tick timer Window Watchdog interrupt PVD through EXTI line detection interrupt Tamper and TimeStamp interrupts through the EXTI line Description Address 0x0000 0000 0x0000 0004 0x0000 0008 0x0000 000C 0x0000 0010 0x0000 0014 0x0000 0018 0x0000 001C 0x0000 002B 0x0000 002C 0x0000 0030 0x0000 0034 0x0000 0038 0x0000 003C 0x0000 0040 0x0000 0044 0x0000 0048

-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4

0 1 2

7 8 9

253/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 46.

Position Priority

Interrupts and events Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Type of priority Acronym Description Address

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable

RTC_WKUP FLASH RCC EXTI0 EXTI1 EXTI2 EXTI3 EXTI4 DMA1_Stream0 DMA1_Stream1 DMA1_Stream2 DMA1_Stream3 DMA1_Stream4 DMA1_Stream5 DMA1_Stream6 ADC CAN1_TX CAN1_RX0 CAN1_RX1 CAN1_SCE EXTI9_5 TIM1_BRK_TIM9 TIM1_UP_TIM10 TIM1_TRG_COM_TIM11 TIM1_CC TIM2 TIM3 TIM4 I2C1_EV I2C1_ER

RTC Wakeup interrupt through the EXTI line Flash global interrupt RCC global interrupt EXTI Line0 interrupt EXTI Line1 interrupt EXTI Line2 interrupt EXTI Line3 interrupt EXTI Line4 interrupt DMA1 Stream0 global interrupt DMA1 Stream1 global interrupt DMA1 Stream2 global interrupt DMA1 Stream3 global interrupt DMA1 Stream4 global interrupt DMA1 Stream5 global interrupt DMA1 Stream6 global interrupt ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3 global interrupts CAN1 TX interrupts CAN1 RX0 interrupts CAN1 RX1 interrupt CAN1 SCE interrupt EXTI Line[9:5] interrupts TIM1 Break interrupt and TIM9 global interrupt TIM1 Update interrupt and TIM10 global interrupt TIM1 Trigger and Commutation interrupts and TIM11 global interrupt TIM1 Capture Compare interrupt TIM2 global interrupt TIM3 global interrupt TIM4 global interrupt I C1 event interrupt I
2C1 2

0x0000 004C 0x0000 0050 0x0000 0054 0x0000 0058 0x0000 005C 0x0000 0060 0x0000 0064 0x0000 0068 0x0000 006C 0x0000 0070 0x0000 0074 0x0000 0078 0x0000 007C 0x0000 0080 0x0000 0084 0x0000 0088 0x0000 008C 0x0000 0090 0x0000 0094 0x0000 0098 0x0000 009C 0x0000 00A0 0x0000 00A4 0x0000 00A8 0x0000 00AC 0x0000 00B0 0x0000 00B4 0x0000 00B8 0x0000 00BC 0x0000 00C0

error interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

254/1422

Interrupts and events Table 46.

Position Priority

RM0090

Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Type of priority settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable Acronym I2C2_EV I2C2_ER SPI1 SPI2 USART1 USART2 USART3 EXTI15_10 RTC_Alarm OTG_FS WKUP TIM8_BRK_TIM12 TIM8_UP_TIM13 TIM8_TRG_COM_TIM14 TIM8_CC DMA1_Stream7 FSMC SDIO TIM5 SPI3 UART4 UART5 TIM6_DAC TIM7 DMA2_Stream0 DMA2_Stream1 DMA2_Stream2 DMA2_Stream3 DMA2_Stream4 ETH Description I2C2 event interrupt I2 C2 error interrupt Address 0x0000 00C4 0x0000 00C8 0x0000 00CC 0x0000 00D0 0x0000 00D4 0x0000 00D8 0x0000 00DC 0x0000 00E0 0x0000 00E4 0x0000 00E8 0x0000 00EC 0x0000 00F0 0x0000 00F4 0x0000 00F8 0x0000 00FC 0x0000 0100 0x0000 0104 0x0000 0108 0x0000 010C 0x0000 0110 0x0000 0114 0x0000 0118 0x0000 011C 0x0000 0120 0x0000 0124 0x0000 0128 0x0000 012C 0x0000 0130 0x0000 0134

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

SPI1 global interrupt SPI2 global interrupt USART1 global interrupt USART2 global interrupt USART3 global interrupt EXTI Line[15:10] interrupts RTC Alarms (A and B) through EXTI line interrupt USB On-The-Go FS Wakeup through EXTI line interrupt TIM8 Break interrupt and TIM12 global interrupt TIM8 Update interrupt and TIM13 global interrupt TIM8 Trigger and Commutation interrupts and TIM14 global interrupt TIM8 Capture Compare interrupt DMA1 Stream7 global interrupt FSMC global interrupt SDIO global interrupt TIM5 global interrupt SPI3 global interrupt UART4 global interrupt UART5 global interrupt TIM6 global interrupt, DAC1 and DAC2 underrun error interrupts TIM7 global interrupt DMA2 Stream0 global interrupt DMA2 Stream1 global interrupt DMA2 Stream2 global interrupt DMA2 Stream3 global interrupt DMA2 Stream4 global interrupt Ethernet global interrupt

255/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 46.

Position Priority

Interrupts and events Vector table for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Type of priority settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable settable Settable settable settable settable settable settable Acronym Description Ethernet Wakeup through EXTI line interrupt CAN2 TX interrupts CAN2 RX0 interrupts CAN2 RX1 interrupt CAN2 SCE interrupt USB On The Go FS global interrupt DMA2 Stream5 global interrupt DMA2 Stream6 global interrupt DMA2 Stream7 global interrupt USART6 global interrupt I
2C3

Address

62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93

ETH_WKUP CAN2_TX CAN2_RX0 CAN2_RX1 CAN2_SCE OTG_FS DMA2_Stream5 DMA2_Stream6 DMA2_Stream7 USART6 I2C3_EV I2C3_ER OTG_HS_EP1_OUT OTG_HS_EP1_IN OTG_HS_WKUP OTG_HS DCMI CRYP HASH_RNG FPU UART7 UART8 SPI4 SPI5 SPI6

0x0000 0138 0x0000 013C 0x0000 0140 0x0000 0144 0x0000 0148 0x0000 014C 0x0000 0150 0x0000 0154 0x0000 0158 0x0000 015C 0x0000 0160 0x0000 0164 0x0000 0168 0x0000 016C 0x0000 0170 0x0000 0174 0x0000 0178 0x0000 017C 0x0000 0180 0x0000 0184 0x0000 0188 0x0000 018C 0x0000 0190 0x0000 0194 0x0000 0198

event interrupt error interrupt

I2C3

USB On The Go HS End Point 1 Out global interrupt USB On The Go HS End Point 1 In global interrupt USB On The Go HS Wakeup through EXTI interrupt USB On The Go HS global interrupt DCMI global interrupt CRYP crypto global interrupt Hash and Rng global interrupt FPU global interrupt UART 7 global interrupt UART 8 global interrupt SPI 4 global interrupt SPI 5 global interrupt SPI 6 global interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

256/1422

Interrupts and events

RM0090

10.2.1

EXTI main features

The main features of the EXTI controller are the following:

independent trigger and mask on each interrupt/event line dedicated status bit for each interrupt line generation of up to 23 software event/interrupt requests detection of external signals with a pulse width lower than the APB2 clock period. Refer to the electrical characteristics section of the STM32F4xx datasheets for details on this parameter.

10.2.2

EXTI block diagram

Figure 32 shows the block diagram. Figure 32. External interrupt/event controller block diagram
AMBA APB bus PCLK2

Peripheral interface

23

23

23

23

23

Pending request register To NVIC interrupt controller 23

Interrupt mask register

Software interrupt event Register 23

Rising trigger selection regsiter 23

Falling trigger selection regsiter 23

23

23

Pulse generator

23 Event mask register

23

Edge detect circuit

Input line

ai15896b

10.2.3

Wakeup event management

The STM32F4xx are able to handle external or internal events in order to wake up the core (WFE). The wakeup event can be generated either by:

enabling an interrupt in the peripheral control register but not in the NVIC, and enabling the SEVONPEND bit in the Cortex-M4F System Control register. When the MCU

257/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Interrupts and events resumes from WFE, the peripheral interrupt pending bit and the peripheral NVIC IRQ channel pending bit (in the NVIC interrupt clear pending register) have to be cleared.

or configuring an external or internal EXTI line in event mode. When the CPU resumes from WFE, it is not necessary to clear the peripheral interrupt pending bit or the NVIC IRQ channel pending bit as the pending bit corresponding to the event line is not set.

To use an external line as a wakeup event, refer to Section 10.2.4: Functional description.

10.2.4

Functional description
To generate the interrupt, the interrupt line should be configured and enabled. This is done by programming the two trigger registers with the desired edge detection and by enabling the interrupt request by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit in the interrupt mask register. When the selected edge occurs on the external interrupt line, an interrupt request is generated. The pending bit corresponding to the interrupt line is also set. This request is reset by writing a 1 in the pending register. To generate the event, the event line should be configured and enabled. This is done by programming the two trigger registers with the desired edge detection and by enabling the event request by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit in the event mask register. When the selected edge occurs on the event line, an event pulse is generated. The pending bit corresponding to the event line is not set. An interrupt/event request can also be generated by software by writing a 1 in the software interrupt/event register.

Hardware interrupt selection

To configure the 23 lines as interrupt sources, use the following procedure:

Configure the mask bits of the 23 interrupt lines (EXTI_IMR) Configure the Trigger selection bits of the interrupt lines (EXTI_RTSR and EXTI_FTSR) Configure the enable and mask bits that control the NVIC IRQ channel mapped to the external interrupt controller (EXTI) so that an interrupt coming from one of the 23 lines can be correctly acknowledged.

Hardware event selection

To configure the 23 lines as event sources, use the following procedure:

Configure the mask bits of the 23 event lines (EXTI_EMR) Configure the Trigger selection bits of the event lines (EXTI_RTSR and EXTI_FTSR)

Software interrupt/event selection

The 23 lines can be configured as software interrupt/event lines. The following is the procedure to generate a software interrupt.

Configure the mask bits of the 23 interrupt/event lines (EXTI_IMR, EXTI_EMR) Set the required bit in the software interrupt register (EXTI_SWIER)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

258/1422

Interrupts and events

RM0090

10.2.5

External interrupt/event line mapping

Up to 140 GPIOs (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx), are connected to the 16 external interrupt/event lines in the following manner: Figure 33. External interrupt/event GPIO mapping
EXTI0[3:0] bits in the SYSCFG_EXTICR1 register PA0 PB0 PC0 PD0 PE0 PF0 PG0 PH0 PI0

EXTI0

EXTI1[3:0] bits in the SYSCFG_EXTICR1 register PA1 PB1 PC1 PD1 PE1 PF1 PG1 PH1 PI1
...

EXTI1

EXTI15[3:0] bits in the SYSCFG_EXTICR4 register PA15 PB15 PC15 PD15 PE15 PF15 PG15 PH15

EXTI15

ai15897

The seven other EXTI lines are connected as follows:

EXTI line 16 is connected to the PVD output EXTI line 17 is connected to the RTC Alarm event EXTI line 18 is connected to the USB OTG FS Wakeup event EXTI line 19 is connected to the Ethernet Wakeup event EXTI line 20 is connected to the USB OTG HS (configured in FS) Wakeup event EXTI line 21 is connected to the RTC Tamper and TimeStamp events EXTI line 22 is connected to the RTC Wakeup event

259/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Interrupts and events

10.3

EXTI registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions.

10.3.1

Interrupt mask register (EXTI_IMR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22 MR22 rw

21 MR21 rw 5 MR5 rw

20 MR20 rw 4 MR4 rw

19 MR19 rw 3 MR3 rw

18 MR18 rw 2 MR2 rw

17 MR17 rw 1 MR1 rw

16 MR16 rw 0 MR0 rw

15 MR15 rw

14 MR14 rw

13 MR13 rw

12 MR12 rw

11 MR11 rw

10 MR10 rw

9 MR9 rw

8 MR8 rw

7 MR7 rw

6 MR6 rw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:0 MRx: Interrupt mask on line x 0: Interrupt request from line x is masked 1: Interrupt request from line x is not masked

10.3.2

Event mask register (EXTI_EMR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22 MR22 rw

21 MR21 rw 5 MR5 rw

20 MR20 rw 4 MR4 rw

19 MR19 rw 3 MR3 rw

18 MR18 rw 2 MR2 rw

17 MR17 rw 1 MR1 rw

16 MR16 rw 0 MR0 rw

15 MR15 rw

14 MR14 rw

13 MR13 rw

12 MR12 rw

11 MR11 rw

10 MR10 rw

9 MR9 rw

8 MR8 rw

7 MR7 rw

6 MR6 rw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:0 MRx: Event mask on line x 0: Event request from line x is masked 1: Event request from line x is not masked

10.3.3

Rising trigger selection register (EXTI_RTSR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22 TR22 rw

21 TR21 rw

20 TR20 rw

19 TR19 rw

18 TR18 rw

17 TR17 rw

16 TR16 rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

260/1422

Interrupts and events

RM0090

15 TR15 rw

14 TR14 rw

13 TR13 rw

12 TR12 rw

11 TR11 rw

10 TR10 rw

9 TR9 rw

8 TR8 rw

7 TR7 rw

6 TR6 rw

5 TR5 rw

4 TR4 rw

3 TR3 rw

2 TR2 rw

1 TR1 rw

0 TR0 rw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:0 TRx: Rising trigger event configuration bit of line x 0: Rising trigger disabled (for Event and Interrupt) for input line 1: Rising trigger enabled (for Event and Interrupt) for input line

Note:

The external wakeup lines are edge triggered, no glitch must be generated on these lines. If a rising edge occurs on the external interrupt line while writing to the EXTI_RTSR register, the pending bit is be set. Rising and falling edge triggers can be set for the same interrupt line. In this configuration, both generate a trigger condition.

10.3.4

Falling trigger selection register (EXTI_FTSR)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22 TR22 rw

21 TR21 rw 5 TR5 rw

20 TR20 rw 4 TR4 rw

19 TR19 rw 3 TR3 rw

18 TR18 rw 2 TR2 rw

17 TR17 rw 1 TR1 rw

16 TR16 rw 0 TR0 rw

15 TR15 rw

14 TR14 rw

13 TR13 rw

12 TR12 rw

11 TR11 rw

10 TR10 rw

9 TR9 rw

8 TR8 rw

7 TR7 rw

6 TR6 rw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:0 TRx: Falling trigger event configuration bit of line x 0: Falling trigger disabled (for Event and Interrupt) for input line 1: Falling trigger enabled (for Event and Interrupt) for input line.

Note:

The external wakeup lines are edge triggered, no glitch must be generated on these lines. If a falling edge occurs on the external interrupt line while writing to the EXTI_FTSR register, the pending bit is not set. Rising and falling edge triggers can be set for the same interrupt line. In this configuration, both generate a trigger condition.

10.3.5

Software interrupt event register (EXTI_SWIER)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

261/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Interrupts and events

15

14

13

12

11

10

SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER SWIER 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:0 SWIERx: Software Interrupt on line x Writing a 1 to this bit when it is at 0 sets the corresponding pending bit in EXTI_PR. If the interrupt is enabled on this line on the EXTI_IMR and EXTI_EMR, an interrupt request is generated. This bit is cleared by clearing the corresponding bit in EXTI_PR (by writing a 1 to the bit).

10.3.6

Pending register (EXTI_PR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: undefined

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22 PR22 rc_w1

21 PR21 rc_w1 5 PR5 rc_w1

20 PR20 rc_w1 4 PR4 rc_w1

19 PR19 rc_w1 3 PR3 rc_w1

18 PR18 rc_w1 2 PR2 rc_w1

17 PR17 rc_w1 1 PR1 rc_w1

16 PR16 rc_w1 0 PR0 rc_w1

15 PR15 rc_w1

14 PR14 rc_w1

13 PR13 rc_w1

12 PR12 rc_w1

11 PR11 rc_w1

10 PR10 rc_w1

9 PR9 rc_w1

8 PR8 rc_w1

7 PR7 rc_w1

6 PR6 rc_w1

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:0 PRx: Pending bit 0: No trigger request occurred 1: selected trigger request occurred This bit is set when the selected edge event arrives on the external interrupt line. This bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the bit or by changing the sensitivity of the edge detector.

10.3.7

EXTI register map

Table 47 gives the EXTI register map and the reset values.

Table 47.
Offset

External interrupt/event controller register map and reset values

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MR[22:0] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MR[22:0] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TR[22:0] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Register
EXTI_IMR

0x00 Reset value EXTI_EMR 0x04 Reset value EXTI_RTSR 0x08 Reset value

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

262/1422

Interrupts and events Table 47.

Offset

RM0090

External interrupt/event controller register map and reset values

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TR[22:0] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SWIER[22:0] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR[22:0] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Register
EXTI_FTSR

0x0C Reset value EXTI_SWIER 0x10 Reset value EXTI_PR 0x14 Reset value

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

263/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

11

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

11.1

ADC introduction
The 12-bit ADC is a successive approximation analog-to-digital converter. It has up to 19 multiplexed channels allowing it to measure signals from 16 external sources, two internal sources, and the VBAT channel. The A/D conversion of the channels can be performed in single, continuous, scan or discontinuous mode. The result of the ADC is stored into a leftor right-aligned 16-bit data register. The analog watchdog feature allows the application to detect if the input voltage goes beyond the user-defined, higher or lower thresholds.

11.2

ADC main features

12-bit, 10-bit, 8-bit or 6-bit configurable resolution Interrupt generation at the end of conversion, end of injected conversion, and in case of analog watchdog or overrun events Single and continuous conversion modes Scan mode for automatic conversion of channel 0 to channel n Data alignment with in-built data coherency Channel-wise programmable sampling time External trigger option with configurable polarity for both regular and injected conversions Discontinuous mode Dual/Triple mode (on devices with 2 ADCs or more) Configurable DMA data storage in Dual/Triple ADC mode Configurable delay between conversions in Dual/Triple interleaved mode ADC conversion type (refer to the datasheets) ADC supply requirements: 2.4 V to 3.6 V at full speed and down to 1.8 V at slower speed ADC input range: VREF VIN VREF+ DMA request generation during regular channel conversion

Figure 34 shows the block diagram of the ADC. Note: VREF, if available (depending on package), must be tied to VSSA.

11.3

ADC functional description

Figure 34 shows a single ADC block diagram and Table 48 gives the ADC pin description.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

264/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Figure 34. Single ADC block diagram

Flags DMA overrun End of conversion End of injected conversion Analog watchdog event OVR EOC JEOC AWD Interrupt enable bits OVRIE EOCIE JEOCIE AWDIE

RM0090

ADC Interrupt to NVIC

Analog watchdog
Compare result Higher threshold (12 bits) Lower threshold (12 bits) Address/data bus
ai16046

V REF+ V REFV DDA V SSA

Injected data registers (4 x 16 bits) Regular data register (16 bits) Analog mux DMA request

ADCx_IN0 ADCx_IN1

GPIO ports

up to 4 up to 16

Injected channels Regular channels

ADCCLK

Analog to digital converter

ADCx_IN15 Temp. sensor V REFINT V BAT

From ADC prescaler JEXTSEL[3:0] bits TIM1_CH4 TIM1_TRGO TIM2_CH1 TIM2_TRGO TIM3_CH2 TIM3_CH4 TIM4_CH1 TIM4_CH2 TIM4_CH3 TIM4_TRGO TIM5_CH4 TIM5_TRGO TIM8_CH2 TIM8_CH3 TIM8_CH4 EXTI_15 EXTI_11 JEXTEN [1:0] bits EXTSEL[3:0] bits EXTEN [1:0] bits TIM1_CH1 TIM1_CH2 TIM1_CH3 TIM2_CH2 TIM2_CH3 TIM2_CH4 TIM2_TRGO TIM3_CH1 TIM3_TRGO TIM4_CH4 TIM5_CH1 TIM5_CH2 TIM5_CH3 TIM8_CH1 TIM8_TRGO

Start trigger (injected group)

Start trigger (regular group)

265/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 48.

Name VREF+

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) ADC pins

Signal type Input, analog reference positive Input, analog supply Input, analog reference negative Input, analog supply ground Analog input signals Remarks The higher/positive reference voltage for the ADC, 1.8 V VREF+ VDDA Analog power supply equal to VDD and 2.4 V VDDA VDD (3.6 V) for full speed 1.8 V VDDA VDD (3.6 V) for reduced speed The lower/negative reference voltage for the ADC, VREF = VSSA Ground for analog power supply equal to VSS 16 analog input channels

VDDA

VREF VSSA ADCx_IN[15:0]

11.3.1

ADC on-off control

The ADC is powered on by setting the ADON bit in the ADC_CR2 register. When the ADON bit is set for the first time, it wakes up the ADC from the Power-down mode. Conversion starts when either the SWSTART or the JSWSTART bit is set. You can stop conversion and put the ADC in power down mode by clearing the ADON bit. In this mode the ADC consumes almost no power (only a few A).

11.3.2

ADC clock
The ADC features two clock schemes:

Clock for the analog circuitry: ADCCLK, common to all ADCs This clock is generated from the APB2 clock divided by a programmable prescaler that allows the ADC to work at fPCLK2/2, /4, /6 or /8. Refer to the datasheets for the maximum value of ADCCLK.

Clock for the digital interface (used for registers read/write access) This clock is equal to the APB2 clock. The digital interface clock can be enabled/disabled individually for each ADC through the RCC APB2 peripheral clock enable register (RCC_APB2ENR).

11.3.3

Channel selection
There are 16 multiplexed channels. It is possible to organize the conversions in two groups: regular and injected. A group consists of a sequence of conversions that can be done on any channel and in any order. For instance, it is possible to implement the conversion sequence in the following order: ADC_IN3, ADC_IN8, ADC_IN2, ADC_IN2, ADC_IN0, ADC_IN2, ADC_IN2, ADC_IN15.

A regular group is composed of up to 16 conversions. The regular channels and their order in the conversion sequence must be selected in the ADC_SQRx registers. The total number of conversions in the regular group must be written in the L[3:0] bits in the ADC_SQR1 register. An injected group is composed of up to 4 conversions. The injected channels and their order in the conversion sequence must be selected in the ADC_JSQR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

266/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

The total number of conversions in the injected group must be written in the L[1:0] bits in the ADC_JSQR register. If the ADC_SQRx or ADC_JSQR registers are modified during a conversion, the current conversion is reset and a new start pulse is sent to the ADC to convert the newly chosen group.

Temperature sensor, VREFINT and VBAT internal channels

For the STM23F40x and STM32F41x devices, the temperature sensor is internally connected to channel ADC1_IN16. The internal reference voltage VREFINT is connected to ADC1_IN17. For the STM23F42x and STM32F43x devices, the temperature sensor is internally connected to ADC1_IN18 channel which is shared with VBAT. Only one conversion, temperature sensor or VBAT, must be selected at a time. When the temperature sensor and VBAT conversion are set simultaneously, only the VBAT conversion is performed. The internal reference voltage VREFINT is connected to ADC1_IN17.

The VBAT channel is connected to channel ADC1_IN18. It can also be converted as an injected or regular channel. Note: The temperature sensor, VREFINT and the VBAT channel are available only on the master ADC1 peripheral.

11.3.4

Single conversion mode

In Single conversion mode the ADC does one conversion. This mode is started with the CONT bit at 0 by either:

setting the SWSTART bit in the ADC_CR2 register (for a regular channel only) setting the JSWSTART bit (for an injected channel) external trigger (for a regular or injected channel) If a regular channel was converted: The converted data are stored into the 16-bit ADC_DR register The EOC (end of conversion) flag is set An interrupt is generated if the EOCIE bit is set The converted data are stored into the 16-bit ADC_JDR1 register The JEOC (end of conversion injected) flag is set An interrupt is generated if the JEOCIE bit is set

Once the conversion of the selected channel is complete:

If an injected channel was converted:

Then the ADC stops.

11.3.5

Continuous conversion mode

In continuous conversion mode, the ADC starts a new conversion as soon as it finishes one. This mode is started with the CONT bit at 1 either by external trigger or by setting the SWSTRT bit in the ADC_CR2 register (for regular channels only).

267/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 After each conversion:

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

If a regular group of channels was converted: The last converted data are stored into the 16-bit ADC_DR register The EOC (end of conversion) flag is set An interrupt is generated if the EOCIE bit is set

Note:

Injected channels cannot be converted continuously. The only exception is when an injected channel is configured to be converted automatically after regular channels in continuous mode (using JAUTO bit), refer to Auto-injection section).

11.3.6

Timing diagram
As shown in Figure 35, the ADC needs a stabilization time of tSTAB before it starts converting accurately. After the start of the ADC conversion and after 15 clock cycles, the EOC flag is set and the 16-bit ADC data register contains the result of the conversion.

Figure 35. Timing diagram

ADC_CLK

ADON

SWSTART/ JSWSTART Start 1st conversion Start next conversion

ADC tSTAB EOC

ADC conversion Conversion time (total conv. time)

Next ADC conversion

Software clears the EOC bit

ai16047b

11.3.7

Analog watchdog
The AWD analog watchdog status bit is set if the analog voltage converted by the ADC is below a lower threshold or above a higher threshold. These thresholds are programmed in the 12 least significant bits of the ADC_HTR and ADC_LTR 16-bit registers. An interrupt can be enabled by using the AWDIE bit in the ADC_CR1 register. The threshold value is independent of the alignment selected by the ALIGN bit in the ADC_CR2 register. The analog voltage is compared to the lower and higher thresholds before alignment. Table 49 shows how the ADC_CR1 register should be configured to enable the analog watchdog on one or more channels.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

268/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Figure 36. Analog watchdogs guarded area

Analog voltage Higher threshold Guarde d area Lower threshold LT R
ai16048

RM0090

HTR

Table 49.

Analog watchdog channel selection

ADC_CR1 register control bits (x = dont care) AWDSGL bit x 0 0 0 1 1 1 AWDEN bit 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 JAWDEN bit 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

Channels guarded by the analog watchdog None All injected channels All regular channels All regular and injected channels Single(1) injected channel

Single(1) regular channel Single

(1)

regular or injected channel

1. Selected by the AWDCH[4:0] bits

11.3.8

Scan mode
This mode is used to scan a group of analog channels. The Scan mode is selected by setting the SCAN bit in the ADC_CR1 register. Once this bit has been set, the ADC scans all the channels selected in the ADC_SQRx registers (for regular channels) or in the ADC_JSQR register (for injected channels). A single conversion is performed for each channel of the group. After each end of conversion, the next channel in the group is converted automatically. If the CONT bit is set, regular channel conversion does not stop at the last selected channel in the group but continues again from the first selected channel. If the DMA bit is set, the direct memory access (DMA) controller is used to transfer the data converted from the regular group of channels (stored in the ADC_DR register) to SRAM after each regular channel conversion. The EOC bit is set in the ADC_SR register:

At the end of each regular group sequence if the EOCS bit is cleared to 0 At the end of each regular channel conversion if the EOCS bit is set to 1

The data converted from an injected channel are always stored into the ADC_JDRx registers.

269/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

11.3.9

Injected channel management

Triggered injection
To use triggered injection, the JAUTO bit must be cleared in the ADC_CR1 register. 1. 2. Start the conversion of a group of regular channels either by external trigger or by setting the SWSTART bit in the ADC_CR2 register. If an external injected trigger occurs or if the JSWSTART bit is set during the conversion of a regular group of channels, the current conversion is reset and the injected channel sequence switches to Scan-once mode. Then, the regular conversion of the regular group of channels is resumed from the last interrupted regular conversion. If a regular event occurs during an injected conversion, the injected conversion is not interrupted but the regular sequence is executed at the end of the injected sequence. Figure 37 shows the corresponding timing diagram.

3.

Note:

When using triggered injection, one must ensure that the interval between trigger events is longer than the injection sequence. For instance, if the sequence length is 30 ADC clock cycles (that is two conversions with a sampling time of 3 clock periods), the minimum interval between triggers must be 31 ADC clock cycles.

Auto-injection
If the JAUTO bit is set, then the channels in the injected group are automatically converted after the regular group of channels. This can be used to convert a sequence of up to 20 conversions programmed in the ADC_SQRx and ADC_JSQR registers. In this mode, external trigger on injected channels must be disabled. If the CONT bit is also set in addition to the JAUTO bit, regular channels followed by injected channels are continuously converted. Note: It is not possible to use both the auto-injected and discontinuous modes simultaneously. Figure 37. Injected conversion latency
ADCCLK

Injection event

Reset ADC

SOC

max latency (1)

ai16049

1. The maximum latency value can be found in the electrical characteristics of the STM32F40x and

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

270/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

STM32F41x datasheets.

RM0090

11.3.10

Discontinuous mode
Regular group
This mode is enabled by setting the DISCEN bit in the ADC_CR1 register. It can be used to convert a short sequence of n conversions (n 8) that is part of the sequence of conversions selected in the ADC_SQRx registers. The value of n is specified by writing to the DISCNUM[2:0] bits in the ADC_CR1 register. When an external trigger occurs, it starts the next n conversions selected in the ADC_SQRx registers until all the conversions in the sequence are done. The total sequence length is defined by the L[3:0] bits in the ADC_SQR1 register. Example: n = 3, channels to be converted = 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 9, 10 1st trigger: sequence converted 0, 1, 2 2nd trigger: sequence converted 3, 6, 7 3rd trigger: sequence converted 9, 10 and an EOC event generated 4th trigger: sequence converted 0, 1, 2

Note:

When a regular group is converted in discontinuous mode, no rollover occurs. When all subgroups are converted, the next trigger starts the conversion of the first subgroup. In the example above, the 4th trigger reconverts the channels 0, 1 and 2 in the 1st subgroup.

Injected group
This mode is enabled by setting the JDISCEN bit in the ADC_CR1 register. It can be used to convert the sequence selected in the ADC_JSQR register, channel by channel, after an external trigger event. When an external trigger occurs, it starts the next channel conversions selected in the ADC_JSQR registers until all the conversions in the sequence are done. The total sequence length is defined by the JL[1:0] bits in the ADC_JSQR register. Example: n = 1, channels to be converted = 1, 2, 3 1st trigger: channel 1 converted 2nd trigger: channel 2 converted 3rd trigger: channel 3 converted and EOC and JEOC events generated 4th trigger: channel 1 Note: When all injected channels are converted, the next trigger starts the conversion of the first injected channel. In the example above, the 4th trigger reconverts the 1st injected channel 1. It is not possible to use both the auto-injected and discontinuous modes simultaneously. Discontinuous mode must not be set for regular and injected groups at the same time. Discontinuous mode must be enabled only for the conversion of one group.

271/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

11.4

Data alignment
The ALIGN bit in the ADC_CR2 register selects the alignment of the data stored after conversion. Data can be right- or left-aligned as shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39. The converted data value from the injected group of channels is decreased by the userdefined offset written in the ADC_JOFRx registers so the result can be a negative value. The SEXT bit represents the extended sign value. For channels in a regular group, no offset is subtracted so only twelve bits are significant. Figure 38. Right alignment of 12-bit data
Injected group
SEXT SEXT SEXT SEXT D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Regular group
0 0 0 0 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

ai16050

Figure 39. Left alignment of 12-bit data

Injected group
SEXT D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0

Regular group
D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0

ai16051

Special case: when left-aligned, the data are aligned on a half-word basis except when the resolution is set to 6-bit. in that case, the data are aligned on a byte basis as shown in Figure 40. Figure 40. Left alignment of 6-bit data
Injected group
SEXT SEXT SEXT SEXT SEXT SEXT SEXT SEXT SEXT D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0

Regular group
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0

ai16052

11.5

Channel-wise programmable sampling time

The ADC samples the input voltage for a number of ADCCLK cycles that can be modified using the SMP[2:0] bits in the ADC_SMPR1 and ADC_SMPR2 registers. Each channel can be sampled with a different sampling time.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

272/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) The total conversion time is calculated as follows: Tconv = Sampling time + 12 cycles Example: With ADCCLK = 30 MHz and sampling time = 3 cycles: Tconv = 3 + 12 = 15 cycles = 0.5 s with APB2 at 60 MHz

RM0090

11.6

Conversion on external trigger and trigger polarity

Conversion can be triggered by an external event (e.g. timer capture, EXTI line). If the EXTEN[1:0] control bits (for a regular conversion) or JEXTEN[1:0] bits (for an injected conversion) are different from 0b00, then external events are able to trigger a conversion with the selected polarity. Table 50 provides the correspondence between the EXTEN[1:0] and JEXTEN[1:0] values and the trigger polarity. Table 50. Configuring the trigger polarity
Source Trigger detection disabled Detection on the rising edge Detection on the falling edge Detection on both the rising and falling edges 00 01 10 11 EXTEN[1:0] / JEXTEN[1:0]

Note:

The polarity of the external trigger can be changed on the fly. The EXTSEL[3:0] and JEXTSEL[3:0] control bits are used to select which out of 16 possible events can trigger conversion for the regular and injected groups. Table 51 gives the possible external trigger for regular conversion.

273/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 51. External trigger for regular channels

Source TIM1_CH1 event TIM1_CH2 event TIM1_CH3 event TIM2_CH2 event TIM2_CH3 event TIM2_CH4 event TIM2_TRGO event TIM3_CH1 event TIM3_TRGO event TIM4_CH4 event TIM5_CH1 event TIM5_CH2 event TIM5_CH3 event TIM8_CH1 event TIM8_TRGO event EXTI line11 External pin Type

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

EXTSEL[3:0] 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110

Internal signal from on-chip timers

0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111

Table 52 gives the possible external trigger for injected conversion.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

274/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Table 52. External trigger for injected channels
Source TIM1_CH4 event TIM1_TRGO event TIM2_CH1 event TIM2_TRGO event TIM3_CH2 event TIM3_CH4 event TIM4_CH1 event TIM4_CH2 event TIM4_CH3 event TIM4_TRGO event TIM5_CH4 event TIM5_TRGO event TIM8_CH2 event TIM8_CH3 event TIM8_CH4 event EXTI line15 External pin Internal signal from on-chip timers Connection type 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 JEXTSEL[3:0]

RM0090

Software source trigger events can be generated by setting SWSTART (for regular conversion) or JSWSTART (for injected conversion) in ADC_CR2. A regular group conversion can be interrupted by an injected trigger. Note: The trigger selection can be changed on the fly. However, when the selection changes, there is a time frame of 1 APB clock cycle during which the trigger detection is disabled. This is to avoid spurious detection during transitions.

11.7

Fast conversion mode

It is possible to perform faster conversion by reducing the ADC resolution. The RES bits are used to select the number of bits available in the data register. The minimum conversion time for each resolution is then as follows:

12 bits: 3 + 12 = 15 ADCCLK cycles 10 bits: 3 + 10 = 13 ADCCLK cycles 8 bits: 3 + 8 = 11 ADCCLK cycles 6 bits: 3 + 6 = 9 ADCCLK cycles

275/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

11.8
11.8.1

Data management
Using the DMA
Since converted regular channel values are stored into a unique data register, it is useful to use DMA for conversion of more than one regular channel. This avoids the loss of the data already stored in the ADC_DR register. When the DMA mode is enabled (DMA bit set to 1 in the ADC_CR2 register), after each conversion of a regular channel, a DMA request is generated. This allows the transfer of the converted data from the ADC_DR register to the destination location selected by the software. Despite this, if data are lost (overrun), the OVR bit in the ADC_SR register is set and an interrupt is generated (if the OVRIE enable bit is set). DMA transfers are then disabled and DMA requests are no longer accepted. In this case, if a DMA request is made, the regular conversion in progress is aborted and further regular triggers are ignored. It is then necessary to clear the OVR flag and the DMAEN bit in the used DMA stream, and to reinitialize both the DMA and the ADC to have the wanted converted channel data transferred to the right memory location. Only then can the conversion be resumed and the data transfer, enabled again. Injected channel conversions are not impacted by overrun errors. When OVR = 1 in DMA mode, the DMA requests are blocked after the last valid data have been transferred, which means that all the data transferred to the RAM can be considered as valid. At the end of the last DMA transfer (number of transfers configured in the DMA controllers DMA_SxRTR register):

No new DMA request is issued to the DMA controller if the DDS bit is cleared to 0 in the ADC_CR2 register (this avoids generating an overrun error). However the DMA bit is not cleared by hardware. It must be written to 0, then to 1 to start a new transfer. Requests can continue to be generated if the DDS bit is set to 1. This allows configuring the DMA in double-buffer circular mode. Reinitialize the DMA (adjust destination address and NDTR counter) Clear the ADC OVR bit in ADC_SR register Trigger the ADC to start the conversion.

To recover the ADC from OVR state when the DMA is used, follow the steps below: 1. 2. 3.

11.8.2

Managing a sequence of conversions without using the DMA

If the conversions are slow enough, the conversion sequence can be handled by the software. In this case the EOCS bit must be set in the ADC_CR2 register for the EOC status bit to be set at the end of each conversion, and not only at the end of the sequence. When EOCS = 1, overrun detection is automatically enabled. Thus, each time a conversion is complete, EOC is set and the ADC_DR register can be read. The overrun management is the same as when the DMA is used. To recover the ADC from OVR state when the EOCS is set, follow the steps below: 1. 2. Clear the ADC OVR bit in ADC_SR register Trigger the ADC to start the conversion.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

276/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

11.8.3

Conversions without DMA and without overrun detection

It may be useful to let the ADC convert one or more channels without reading the data each time (if there is an analog watchdog for instance). For that, the DMA must be disabled (DMA = 0) and the EOC bit must be set at the end of a sequence only (EOCS = 0). In this configuration, overrun detection is disabled.

11.9

Multi ADC mode

In devices with two ADCs or more, the Dual (with two ADCs) and Triple (with three ADCs) ADC modes can be used (see Figure 41). In multi ADC mode, the start of conversion is triggered alternately or simultaneously by the ADC1 master to the ADC2 and ADC3 slaves, depending on the mode selected by the MULTI[4:0] bits in the ADC_CCR register.

Note:

In multi ADC mode, when configuring conversion trigger by an external event, the application must set trigger by the master only and disable trigger by slaves to prevent spurious triggers that would start unwanted slave conversions. The four possible modes below are implemented:

Injected simultaneous mode Regular simultaneous mode Interleaved mode Alternate trigger mode Injected simultaneous mode + Regular simultaneous mode Regular simultaneous mode + Alternate trigger mode

It is also possible to use the previous modes combined in the following ways:

Note:

In multi ADC mode, the converted data can be read on the multi-mode data register (ADC_CDR). The status bits can be read in the multi-mode status register (ADC_CSR).

277/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 41. Multi ADC block diagram(1)

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Regular data register (12bits) bits) (16 Injected data registers (4 x 16 bits)

Regular channels Injected channels

ADC3(2) (Slave)

Regular data register (12 bits) (16 bits) Injected data registers (4 x 16 bits)

Regular channels Injected channels

ADC2 (Slave)
Address/data bus
ai16053

internal triggers Common regular data register (32 bits)(3)

Dual/Triple mode control

Common part

Regular data register (16 bits) Injected data registers (4 x 16 bits)

ADCx_IN0 ADCx_IN1
GPIO Ports

Regular channels Injected channels

ADCx_IN15 Temp. sensor VREFINT VBAT EXTI_11

Start trigger mux (regular group)

ADC1 (Master)

EXTI_15
Start trigger mux (injected group)

1. Although external triggers are present on ADC2 and ADC3 they are not shown in this diagram. 2. In the Dual ADC mode, the ADC3 slave part is not present. 3. In Triple ADC mode, the ADC common data register (ADC_CDR) contains the ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3s regular converted data. All 32 register bits are used according to a selected storage order. In Dual ADC mode, the ADC common data register (ADC_CDR) contains both the ADC1 and ADC2s regular converted data. All 32 register bits are used.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

278/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

DMA requests in Multi ADC mode: In Multi ADC mode the DMA may be configured to transfer converted data in three different modes. In all cases, the DMA streams to use are those connected to the ADC: DMA mode 1: On each DMA request (one data item is available), a half-word representing an ADC-converted data item is transferred. In Dual ADC mode, ADC1 data are transferred on the first request, ADC2 data are transferred on the second request and so on. In Triple ADC mode, ADC1 data are transferred on the first request, ADC2 data are transferred on the second request and ADC3 data are transferred on the third request; the sequence is repeated. So the DMA first transfers ADC1 data followed by ADC2 data followed by ADC3 data and so on. DMA mode 1 is used in regular simultaneous triple mode. Example: Regular simultaneous triple mode: 3 consecutive DMA requests are generated (one for each converted data item) 1st request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC1_DR[15:0] 2nd request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC2_DR[15:0] 3rd request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC3_DR[15:0] 4th request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC1_DR[15:0] DMA mode 2: On each DMA request (two data items are available) two half-words representing two ADC-converted data items are transferred as a word. In Dual ADC mode, both ADC2 and ADC1 data are transferred on the first request (ADC2 data take the upper half-word and ADC1 data take the lower half-word) and so on. In Triple ADC mode, three DMA requests are generated. On the first request, both ADC2 and ADC1 data are transferred (ADC2 data take the upper half-word and ADC1 data take the lower half-word). On the second request, both ADC1 and ADC3 data are transferred (ADC1 data take the upper half-word and ADC3 data take the lower half-word).On the third request, both ADC3 and ADC2 data are transferred (ADC3 data take the upper half-word and ADC2 data take the lower half-word) and so on. DAM mode 2 is used in interleaved mode and in regular simultaneous mode (for Dual ADC mode only). Example: a) Interleaved dual mode: a DMA request is generated each time 2 data items are available: 1st request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC2_DR[15:0] | ADC1_DR[15:0] 2nd request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC2_DR[15:0] | ADC1_DR[15:0] b) Interleaved triple mode: a DMA request is generated each time 2 data items are available 1st request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC2_DR[15:0] | ADC1_DR[15:0] 2nd request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC1_DR[15:0] | ADC3_DR[15:0] 3rd request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC3_DR[15:0] | ADC2_DR[15:0] 4th request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC2_DR[15:0] | ADC1_DR[15:0]

279/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) DMA mode 3: This mode is similar to the DMA mode 2. The only differences are that the on each DMA request (two data items are available) two bytes representing two ADC converted data items are transferred as a half-word. The data transfer order is similar to that of the DMA mode 2. DMA mode 3 is used in interleaved mode in 6-bit and 8-bit resolutions. Example: a) Interleaved dual mode: a DMA request is generated each time 2 data items are available 1st request: ADC_CDR[15:0] = ADC2_DR[7:0] | ADC1_DR[7:0] 2nd request: ADC_CDR[15:0] = ADC2_DR[7:0] | ADC1_DR[7:0] b) Interleaved triple mode: a DMA request is generated each time 2 data items are available 1st request: ADC_CDR[15:0] = ADC2_DR[7:0] | ADC1_DR7:0] 2nd request: ADC_CDR[15:0] = ADC1_DR[7:0] | ADC3_DR[15:0] 3rd request: ADC_CDR[15:0] = ADC3_DR[7:0] | ADC2_DR[7:0] 4th request: ADC_CDR[15:0] = ADC2_DR[7:0] | ADC1_DR7:0] Overrun detection: If an overrun is detected on one of the concerned ADCs (ADC1 and ADC2 in dual and triple modes, ADC3 in triple mode only), the DMA requests are no longer issued to ensure that all the data transferred to the RAM are valid. It may happen that the EOC bit corresponding to one ADC remains set because the data register of this ADC contains valid data.

11.9.1

Injected simultaneous mode

This mode converts an injected group of channels. The external trigger source comes from the injected group multiplexer of ADC1 (selected by the JEXTSEL[3:0] bits in the ADC1_CR2 register). A simultaneous trigger is provided to ADC2 and ADC3.

Note:

Do not convert the same channel on the two/three ADCs (no overlapping sampling times for the two/three ADCs when converting the same channel). In simultaneous mode, one must convert sequences with the same length or ensure that the interval between triggers is longer than the longer of the 2 sequences (Dual ADC mode) /3 sequences (Triple ADC mode). Otherwise, the ADC with the shortest sequence may restart while the ADC with the longest sequence is completing the previous conversions. Regular conversions can be performed on one or all ADCs. In that case, they are independent of each other and are interrupted when an injected event occurs. They are resumed at the end of the injected conversion group.

Dual ADC mode

At the end of conversion event on ADC1 or ADC2:

The converted data are stored into the ADC_JDRx registers of each ADC interface. A JEOC interrupt is generated (if enabled on one of the two ADC interfaces) when the ADC1/ADC2s injected channels have all been converted.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

280/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Figure 42. Injected simultaneous mode on 4 channels: dual ADC mode
ADC1 ADC2 Trigger Sampling Conversion CH0 CH15 CH1 CH14 CH2 CH13 CH3 ... CH15 CH0

RM0090

CH12 ...

End of conversion on ADC1 and ADC2

ai16054

Triple ADC mode

At the end of conversion event on ADC1, ADC2 or ADC3:

The converted data are stored into the ADC_JDRx registers of each ADC interface. A JEOC interrupt is generated (if enabled on one of the three ADC interfaces) when the ADC1/ADC2/ADC3s injected channels have all been converted.

Figure 43. Injected simultaneous mode on 4 channels: triple ADC mode

ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 Trigger Sampling Conversion
ai16055

CH0 CH15 CH10

CH1 CH14 CH12

CH2 CH13 CH8

CH3

...

CH15 CH0 CH2

CH12 ... CH5 ...

End of conversion on ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3

11.9.2

Regular simultaneous mode

This mode is performed on a regular group of channels. The external trigger source comes from the regular group multiplexer of ADC1 (selected by the EXTSEL[3:0] bits in the ADC1_CR2 register). A simultaneous trigger is provided to ADC2 and ADC3.

Note:

Do not convert the same channel on the two/three ADCs (no overlapping sampling times for the two/three ADCs when converting the same channel). In regular simultaneous mode, one must convert sequences with the same length or ensure that the interval between triggers is longer than the long conversion time of the 2 sequences (Dual ADC mode) /3 sequences (Triple ADC mode). Otherwise, the ADC with the shortest sequence may restart while the ADC with the longest sequence is completing the previous conversions. Injected conversions must be disabled.

281/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Dual ADC mode

At the end of conversion event on ADC1 or ADC2:

A 32-bit DMA transfer request is generated (if DMA[1:0] bits in the ADC_CCR register are equal to 0b10). This request transfers the ADC2 converted data stored in the upper half-word of the ADC_CDR 32-bit register to the SRAM and then the ADC1 converted data stored in the lower half-word of ADC_CCR to the SRAM. An EOC interrupt is generated (if enabled on one of the two ADC interfaces) when the ADC1/ADC2s regular channels have all been converted.

Figure 44. Regular simultaneous mode on 16 channels: dual ADC mode

ADC1 ADC2 Trigger Sampling Conversion
ai16054

CH0 CH15

CH1 CH14

CH2 CH13

CH3

...

CH15 CH0 End of conversion on ADC1 and ADC2

CH12 ...

Triple ADC mode

At the end of conversion event on ADC1, ADC2 or ADC3:

Three 32-bit DMA transfer requests are generated (if DMA[1:0] bits in the ADC_CCR register are equal to 0b01). Three transfers then take place from the ADC_CDR 32-bit register to SRAM: first the ADC1 converted data, then the ADC2 converted data and finally the ADC3 converted data. The process is repeated for each new three conversions. An EOC interrupt is generated (if enabled on one of the three ADC interfaces) when the ADC1/ADC2/ADC3s regular channels are have all been converted.

Figure 45. Regular simultaneous mode on 16 channels: triple ADC mode

ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 Trigger Sampling Conversion
ai16055

CH0 CH15 CH10

CH1 CH14 CH12

CH2 CH13 CH8

CH3

...

CH15 CH0 CH2

CH12 ... CH5 ...

End of conversion on ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

282/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

11.9.3

Interleaved mode
This mode can be started only on a regular group (usually one channel). The external trigger source comes from the regular channel multiplexer of ADC1.

Dual ADC mode

After an external trigger occurs:

ADC1 starts immediately ADC2 starts after a delay of several ADC clock cycles

The minimum delay which separates 2 conversions in interleaved mode is configured in the DELAY bits in the ADC_CCR register. However, an ADC cannot start a conversion if the complementary ADC is still sampling its input (only one ADC can sample the input signal at a given time). In this case, the delay becomes the sampling time + 2 ADC clock cycles. For instance, if DELAY = 5 clock cycles and the sampling takes 15 clock cycles on both ADCs, then 17 clock cycles will separate conversions on ADC1 and ADC2). If the CONT bit is set on both ADC1 and ADC2, the selected regular channels of both ADCs are continuously converted. Note: If the conversion sequence is interrupted (for instance when DMA end of transfer occurs), the multi-ADC sequencer must be reset by configuring it in independent mode first (bits DUAL[4:0] = 00000) before reprogramming the interleaved mode. After an EOC interrupt is generated by ADC2 (if enabled through the EOCIE bit) a 32-bit DMA transfer request is generated (if the DMA[1:0] bits in ADC_CCR are equal to 0b10). This request first transfers the ADC2 converted data stored in the upper half-word of the ADC_CDR 32-bit register into SRAM, then the ADC1 converted data stored in the registers lower half-word into SRAM. Figure 46. Interleaved mode on 1 channel in continuous conversion mode: dual ADC mode
End of conversion on ADC1 ADC1 ADC2 Trigger CH0 CH0 ... ... CH0 CH0 Sampling Conversion

End of conversion on ADC2 8 ADCCLK cycles

ai16056

Triple ADC mode

After an external trigger occurs:

ADC1 starts immediately and ADC2 starts after a delay of several ADC clock cycles ADC3 starts after a delay of several ADC clock cycles referred to the ADC2 conversion

The minimum delay which separates 2 conversions in interleaved mode is configured in the DELAY bits in the ADC_CCR register. However, an ADC cannot start a conversion if the complementary ADC is still sampling its input (only one ADC can sample the input signal at

283/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) a given time). In this case, the delay becomes the sampling time + 2 ADC clock cycles. For instance, if DELAY = 5 clock cycles and the sampling takes 15 clock cycles on the three ADCs, then 17 clock cycles will separate the conversions on ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3). If the CONT bit is set on ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3, the selected regular channels of all ADCs are continuously converted.

Note:

If the conversion sequence is interrupted (for instance when DMA end of transfer occurs), the multi-ADC sequencer must be reset by configuring it in independent mode first (bits DUAL[4:0] = 00000) before reprogramming the interleaved mode. In this mode a DMA request is generated each time 2 data items are available, (if the DMA[1:0] bits in the ADC_CCR register are equal to 0b10). The request first transfers the first converted data stored in the lower half-word of the ADC_CDR 32-bit register to SRAM, then it transfers the second converted data stored in ADC_CDRs upper half-word to SRAM. The sequence is the following:

1st request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC2_DR[15:0] | ADC1_DR[15:0] 2nd request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC1_DR[15:0] | ADC3_DR[15:0] 3rd request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC3_DR[15:0] | ADC2_DR[15:0] 4th request: ADC_CDR[31:0] = ADC2_DR[15:0] | ADC1_DR[15:0], ...

Figure 47. Interleaved mode on 1 channel in continuous conversion mode: triple ADC mode
End of conversion on ADC1 DMA request every 2 conversions ADC1 ADC2 ADC3
CH0 CH0 CH0 CH0 CH0 CH0

... ...

CH0 CH0

...

CH0

Sampling Conversion

Trigger

End of conversion on ADC3 End of conversion on ADC2

6 ADCCLK cycles

ai16058

11.9.4

Alternate trigger mode

This mode can be started only on an injected group. The source of external trigger comes from the injected group multiplexer of ADC1.

Note:

Regular conversions can be enabled on one or all ADCs. In this case the regular conversions are independent of each other. A regular conversion is interrupted when the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

284/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

ADC has to perform an injected conversion. It is resumed when the injected conversion is finished. If the conversion sequence is interrupted (for instance when DMA end of transfer occurs), the multi-ADC sequencer must be reset by configuring it in independent mode first (bits DUAL[4:0] = 00000) before reprogramming the interleaved mode. The time interval between 2 trigger events must be greater than or equal to 1 ADC clock period. The minimum time interval between 2 trigger events that start conversions on the same ADC is the same as in the single ADC mode.

Dual ADC mode

When the 1st trigger occurs, all injected ADC1 channels in the group are converted When the 2nd trigger occurs, all injected ADC2 channels in the group are converted and so on

A JEOC interrupt, if enabled, is generated after all injected ADC1 channels in the group have been converted. A JEOC interrupt, if enabled, is generated after all injected ADC2 channels in the group have been converted. If another external trigger occurs after all injected channels in the group have been converted then the alternate trigger process restarts by converting the injected ADC1 channels in the group. Figure 48. Alternate trigger: injected group of each ADC
1st trigger EOC, JEOC on ADC1 3rd trigger EOC, JEOC on ADC1 (n)th trigger

ADC1 ADC2 EOC, JEOC on ADC2 4th trigger

...

EOC, JEOC on ADC2 (n+1)th trigger

Sampling Conversion
ai16059

2nd trigger

If the injected discontinuous mode is enabled for both ADC1 and ADC2:

When the 1st trigger occurs, the first injected ADC1 channel is converted. When the 2nd trigger occurs, the first injected ADC2 channel are converted and so on

A JEOC interrupt, if enabled, is generated after all injected ADC1 channels in the group have been converted. A JEOC interrupt, if enabled, is generated after all injected ADC2 channels in the group have been converted. If another external trigger occurs after all injected channels in the group have been converted then the alternate trigger process restarts.

285/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Figure 49. Alternate trigger: 4 injected channels (each ADC) in discontinuous mode
1st trigger 3rd trigger 5th trigger 7th trigger JEOC on ADC1 Sampling Conversion ADC1 ADC2 JEOC on ADC2 2nd trigger 4th trigger 6th trigger 8th trigger
ai16060

Triple ADC mode

When the 1st trigger occurs, all injected ADC1 channels in the group are converted. When the 2nd trigger occurs, all injected ADC2 channels in the group are converted. When the 3rd trigger occurs, all injected ADC3 channels in the group are converted. and so on

A JEOC interrupt, if enabled, is generated after all injected ADC1 channels in the group have been converted. A JEOC interrupt, if enabled, is generated after all injected ADC2 channels in the group have been converted. A JEOC interrupt, if enabled, is generated after all injected ADC3 channels in the group have been converted. If another external trigger occurs after all injected channels in the group have been converted then the alternate trigger process restarts by converting the injected ADC1 channels in the group. Figure 50. Alternate trigger: injected group of each ADC
1st trigger EOC, JEOC on ADC1 4th trigger EOC, JEOC on ADC1 (n)th trigger Sampling Conversion ...

ADC1 ADC2

2nd trigger 3rd trigger 5th trigger EOC, JEOC on ADC2 EOC, JEOC on ADC3
ai16061

(n+1)th trigger (n+2)th trigger

11.9.5

Combined regular/injected simultaneous mode

It is possible to interrupt the simultaneous conversion of a regular group to start the simultaneous conversion of an injected group.

Note:

In combined regular/injected simultaneous mode, one must convert sequences with the same length or ensure that the interval between triggers is longer than the long conversion time of the 2 sequences (Dual ADC mode) /3 sequences (Triple ADC mode). Otherwise, the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

286/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

ADC with the shortest sequence may restart while the ADC with the longest sequence is completing the previous conversions.

11.9.6

Combined regular simultaneous + alternate trigger mode

It is possible to interrupt the simultaneous conversion of a regular group to start the alternate trigger conversion of an injected group. Figure 51 shows the behavior of an alternate trigger interrupting a simultaneous regular conversion. The injected alternate conversion is immediately started after the injected event. If regular conversion is already running, in order to ensure synchronization after the injected conversion, the regular conversion of all (master/slave) ADCs is stopped and resumed synchronously at the end of the injected conversion.

Note:

In combined regular simultaneous + alternate trigger mode, one must convert sequences with the same length or ensure that the interval between triggers is longer than the long conversion time of the 2 sequences (Dual ADC mode) /3 sequences (Triple ADC mode). Otherwise, the ADC with the shortest sequence may restart while the ADC with the longest sequence is completing the previous conversions. If the conversion sequence is interrupted (for instance when DMA end of transfer occurs), the multi-ADC sequencer must be reset by configuring it in independent mode first (bits DUAL[4:0] = 00000) before reprogramming the interleaved mode.

Figure 51. Alternate + regular simultaneous

1st trigger

ADC1 reg ADC1 inj ADC2 reg ADC2 inj

CH0

CH1

CH2 CH0

CH2

CH3

CH3

CH4

CH3

CH5

CH6

CH6

CH7 CH0

CH7

CH8

synchro not lost 2nd trigger

ai16062

If a trigger occurs during an injected conversion that has interrupted a regular conversion, it is ignored. Figure 52 shows the behavior in this case (2nd trigger is ignored).

287/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Figure 52. Case of trigger occurring during injected conversion

1st trigger 3rd trigger

ADC1 reg ADC1 inj ADC2 reg ADC2 inj

CH0

CH1

CH2 CH0

CH2

CH3

CH3

CH4 CH0

CH3

CH5

CH6

CH6

CH7 CH0

CH7

CH8

2nd trigger

2nd trigger
ai16063

11.10

Temperature sensor
The temperature sensor can be used to measure the ambient temperature (TA) of the device.

On STM23F40x and STM32F41x devices,the temperature sensor is internally connected to ADC1_IN16 channel which is used to convert the sensor output voltage to a digital value. On STM23F42x and STM32F43x devices, the temperature sensor is internally connected to the same input channel, ADC1_IN18, as VBAT: ADC1_IN18 is used to convert the sensor output voltage or VBAT into a digital value. Only one conversion, temperature sensor or VBAT, must be selected at a time. When the temperature sensor and the VBAT conversion are set simultaneously, only the VBAT conversion is performed.

Figure 53 shows the block diagram of the temperature sensor. When not in use, the sensor can be put in power down mode. Note: The TSVREFE bit must be set to enable the conversion of both internal channels: the ADC1_IN16 or ADC1_IN18 (temperature sensor) and the ADC1_IN17 (VREFINT).

Main features

Supported temperature range: 40 to 125 C Precision: 1.5 C

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

288/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Figure 53. Temperature sensor and VREFINT channel block diagram
TSVREFE control bit

RM0090

Temperature sensor

V SENSE

ADC1_IN16/ ADC1_IN18(1) converted data ADC1 Address/data bus

MS31830V1

Internal power block

VREFINT ADC1_IN17

1. VSENSE is input to ADC1_IN16 for the STM23F40x and STM32F41x devices and to ADC1_IN18 for the STM23F42x and STM32F43x devices.

Reading the temperature

To use the sensor: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select ADC1_IN16 or ADC1_IN18 input channel. Select a sampling time greater than the minimum sampling time specified in the datasheet. Set the TSVREFE bit in the ADC_CCR register to wake up the temperature sensor from power down mode Start the ADC conversion by setting the SWSTART bit (or by external trigger) Read the resulting VSENSE data in the ADC data register Calculate the temperature using the following formula: Temperature (in C) = {(VSENSE V25) / Avg_Slope} + 25 Where: V25 = VSENSE value for 25 C Avg_Slope = average slope of the temperature vs. VSENSE curve (given in mV/C or V/C)

Refer to the datasheets electrical characteristics section for the actual values of V25 and Avg_Slope. Note: The sensor has a startup time after waking from power down mode before it can output VSENSE at the correct level. The ADC also has a startup time after power-on, so to minimize the delay, the ADON and TSVREFE bits should be set at the same time. The temperature sensor output voltage changes linearly with temperature. The offset of this linear function depends on each chip due to process variation (up to 45 C from one chip to another).

289/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) The internal temperature sensor is more suited for applications that detect temperature variations instead of absolute temperatures. If accurate temperature reading is required, an external temperature sensor should be used.

11.11

Battery charge monitoring

The VBATE bit in the ADC_CCR register is used to switch to the battery voltage. As the VBAT voltage could be higher than VDDA, to ensure the correct operation of the ADC, the VBAT pin is internally connected to a bridge divider. When the VBATE is set, the bridge is automatically enabled to connect:

VBAT/2 to the ADC1_IN18 input channel, on STM32F40xx and STM32F41xx devices VBAT/4 to the ADC1_IN18 input channel, on STM32F42xx and STM32F43xx devices

Note:

The VBAT and temperature sensor are connected to the same ADC internal channel (ADC1_IN18). Only one conversion, either temperature sensor or VBAT, must be selected at a time. When both conversion are enabled simultaneously, only the VBAT conversion is performed.

11.12

ADC interrupts
An interrupt can be produced on the end of conversion for regular and injected groups, when the analog watchdog status bit is set and when the overrun status bit is set. Separate interrupt enable bits are available for flexibility. Two other flags are present in the ADC_SR register, but there is no interrupt associated with them:

JSTRT (Start of conversion for channels of an injected group) STRT (Start of conversion for channels of a regular group) ADC interrupts
Interrupt event Event flag EOC JEOC AWD OVR Enable control bit EOCIE JEOCIE AWDIE OVRIE

Table 53.

End of conversion of a regular group End of conversion of an injected group Analog watchdog status bit is set Overrun

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

290/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

11.13

ADC registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers must be written at word level (32 bits). Read accesses can be done by bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

11.13.1

ADC status register (ADC_SR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

5 OVR

4 STRT rc_w0

3 JSTRT rc_w0

2 JEOC rc_w0

1 EOC rc_w0

0 AWD rc_w0

Reserved rc_w0

Bits 31:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 OVR: Overrun This bit is set by hardware when data are lost (either in single mode or in dual/triple mode). It is cleared by software. Overrun detection is enabled only when DMA = 1 or EOCS = 1. 0: No overrun occurred 1: Overrun has occurred Bit 4 STRT: Regular channel start flag This bit is set by hardware when regular channel conversion starts. It is cleared by software. 0: No regular channel conversion started 1: Regular channel conversion has started Bit 3 JSTRT: Injected channel start flag This bit is set by hardware when injected group conversion starts. It is cleared by software. 0: No injected group conversion started 1: Injected group conversion has started Bit 2 JEOC: Injected channel end of conversion This bit is set by hardware at the end of the conversion of all injected channels in the group. It is cleared by software. 0: Conversion is not complete 1: Conversion complete Bit 1 EOC: Regular channel end of conversion This bit is set by hardware at the end of the conversion of a regular group of channels. It is cleared by software or by reading the ADC_DR register. 0: Conversion not complete (EOCS=0), or sequence of conversions not complete (EOCS=1) 1: Conversion complete (EOCS=0), or sequence of conversions complete (EOCS=1) Bit 0 AWD: Analog watchdog flag This bit is set by hardware when the converted voltage crosses the values programmed in the ADC_LTR and ADC_HTR registers. It is cleared by software. 0: No analog watchdog event occurred 1: Analog watchdog event occurred

291/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

11.13.2

ADC control register 1 (ADC_CR1)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29 Reserved

28

27

26 OVRIE rw

25 RES rw 9 AWDSG L rw

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

AWDEN JAWDEN Reserved rw 8 rw 7 JEOCIE rw rw 6 AWDIE rw 5 EOCIE rw rw rw 4 3 2 AWDCH[4:0] rw rw rw 1 0

15

14

13

12 JDISCE N rw

11 DISC EN rw

10 JAUTO rw

DISCNUM[2:0] rw rw rw

SCAN rw

Bits 31:27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 OVRIE: Overrun interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the Overrun interrupt. 0: Overrun interrupt disabled 1: Overrun interrupt enabled. An interrupt is generated when the OVR bit is set. Bits 25:24 RES[1:0]: Resolution These bits are written by software to select the resolution of the conversion. 00: 12-bit (15 ADCCLK cycles) 01: 10-bit (13 ADCCLK cycles) 10: 8-bit (11 ADCCLK cycles) 11: 6-bit (9 ADCCLK cycles) Bit 23 AWDEN: Analog watchdog enable on regular channels This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Analog watchdog disabled on regular channels 1: Analog watchdog enabled on regular channels Bit 22 JAWDEN: Analog watchdog enable on injected channels This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Analog watchdog disabled on injected channels 1: Analog watchdog enabled on injected channels Bits 21:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:13 DISCNUM[2:0]: Discontinuous mode channel count These bits are written by software to define the number of regular channels to be converted in discontinuous mode, after receiving an external trigger. 000: 1 channel 001: 2 channels ... 111: 8 channels Bit 12 JDISCEN: Discontinuous mode on injected channels This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable discontinuous mode on the injected channels of a group. 0: Discontinuous mode on injected channels disabled 1: Discontinuous mode on injected channels enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

292/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

Bit 11 DISCEN: Discontinuous mode on regular channels This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable Discontinuous mode on regular channels. 0: Discontinuous mode on regular channels disabled 1: Discontinuous mode on regular channels enabled Bit 10 JAUTO: Automatic injected group conversion This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable automatic injected group conversion after regular group conversion. 0: Automatic injected group conversion disabled 1: Automatic injected group conversion enabled Bit 9 AWDSGL: Enable the watchdog on a single channel in scan mode This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the analog watchdog on the channel identified by the AWDCH[4:0] bits. 0: Analog watchdog enabled on all channels 1: Analog watchdog enabled on a single channel Bit 8 SCAN: Scan mode This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the Scan mode. In Scan mode, the inputs selected through the ADC_SQRx or ADC_JSQRx registers are converted. 0: Scan mode disabled 1: Scan mode enabled Note: An EOC interrupt is generated if the EOCIE bit is set: At the end of each regular group sequence if the EOCS bit is cleared to 0 At the end of each regular channel conversion if the EOCS bit is set to 1 Note: A JEOC interrupt is generated only on the end of conversion of the last channel if the JEOCIE bit is set. Bit 7 JEOCIE: Interrupt enable for injected channels This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the end of conversion interrupt for injected channels. 0: JEOC interrupt disabled 1: JEOC interrupt enabled. An interrupt is generated when the JEOC bit is set. Bit 6 AWDIE: Analog watchdog interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the analog watchdog interrupt. 0: Analog watchdog interrupt disabled 1: Analog watchdog interrupt enabled Bit 5 EOCIE: Interrupt enable for EOC This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the end of conversion interrupt. 0: EOC interrupt disabled 1: EOC interrupt enabled. An interrupt is generated when the EOC bit is set. Bits 4:0 AWDCH[4:0]: Analog watchdog channel select bits These bits are set and cleared by software. They select the input channel to be guarded by the analog watchdog. Note: 00000: ADC analog input Channel0 00001: ADC analog input Channel1 ... 01111: ADC analog input Channel15 10000: ADC analog input Channel16 10001: ADC analog input Channel17 10010: ADC analog input Channel18 Other values reserved

293/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

11.13.3

ADC control register 2 (ADC_CR2)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

SWST reserved ART rw 15 14

EXTEN rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 ALIGN

EXTSEL[3:0] rw 10 EOCS rw rw 9 DDS rw rw 8 DMA

JSWST ART reserved rw 7 6

JEXTEN rw 5 Reserved rw 4 rw 3

JEXTSEL[3:0] rw 2 rw 1 CONT rw rw 0 ADON rw

reserved rw rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 30 SWSTART: Start conversion of regular channels This bit is set by software to start conversion and cleared by hardware as soon as the conversion starts. 0: Reset state 1: Starts conversion of regular channels Note: This bit can be set only when ADON = 1 otherwise no conversion is launched. Bits 29:28 EXTEN: External trigger enable for regular channels These bits are set and cleared by software to select the external trigger polarity and enable the trigger of a regular group. 00: Trigger detection disabled 01: Trigger detection on the rising edge 10: Trigger detection on the falling edge 11: Trigger detection on both the rising and falling edges Bits 27:24 EXTSEL[3:0]: External event select for regular group These bits select the external event used to trigger the start of conversion of a regular group: 0000: Timer 1 CC1 event 0001: Timer 1 CC2 event 0010: Timer 1 CC3 event 0011: Timer 2 CC2 event 0100: Timer 2 CC3 event 0101: Timer 2 CC4 event 0110: Timer 2 TRGO event 0111: Timer 3 CC1 event 1000: Timer 3 TRGO event 1001: Timer 4 CC4 event 1010: Timer 5 CC1 event 1011: Timer 5 CC2 event 1100: Timer 5 CC3 event 1101: Timer 8 CC1 event 1110: Timer 8 TRGO event 1111: EXTI line11 Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

294/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

Bit 22 JSWSTART: Start conversion of injected channels This bit is set by software and cleared by hardware as soon as the conversion starts. 0: Reset state 1: Starts conversion of injected channels Note: This bit can be set only when ADON = 1 otherwise no conversion is launched. Bits 21:20 JEXTEN: External trigger enable for injected channels These bits are set and cleared by software to select the external trigger polarity and enable the trigger of an injected group. 00: Trigger detection disabled 01: Trigger detection on the rising edge 10: Trigger detection on the falling edge 11: Trigger detection on both the rising and falling edges Bits 19:16 JEXTSEL[3:0]: External event select for injected group These bits select the external event used to trigger the start of conversion of an injected group. 0000: Timer 1 CC4 event 0001: Timer 1 TRGO event 0010: Timer 2 CC1 event 0011: Timer 2 TRGO event 0100: Timer 3 CC2 event 0101: Timer 3 CC4 event 0110: Timer 4 CC1 event 0111: Timer 4 CC2 event 1000: Timer 4 CC3 event 1001: Timer 4 TRGO event 1010: Timer 5 CC4 event 1011: Timer 5 TRGO event 1100: Timer 8 CC2 event 1101: Timer 8 CC3 event 1110: Timer 8 CC4 event 1111: EXTI line15 Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 ALIGN: Data alignment This bit is set and cleared by software. Refer to Figure 38 and Figure 39. 0: Right alignment 1: Left alignment Bit 10 EOCS: End of conversion selection This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: The EOC bit is set at the end of each sequence of regular conversions. Overrun detection is enabled only if DMA=1. 1: The EOC bit is set at the end of each regular conversion. Overrun detection is enabled. Bit 9 DDS: DMA disable selection (for single ADC mode) This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: No new DMA request is issued after the last transfer (as configured in the DMA controller) 1: DMA requests are issued as long as data are converted and DMA=1 Bit 8 DMA: Direct memory access mode (for single ADC mode) This bit is set and cleared by software. Refer to the DMA controller chapter for more details. 0: DMA mode disabled 1: DMA mode enabled

295/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Bits 7:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 CONT: Continuous conversion This bit is set and cleared by software. If it is set, conversion takes place continuously until it is cleared. 0: Single conversion mode 1: Continuous conversion mode Bit 0 ADON: A/D Converter ON / OFF This bit is set and cleared by software. Note: 0: Disable ADC conversion and go to power down mode 1: Enable ADC

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

296/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

11.13.4

ADC sample time register 1 (ADC_SMPR1)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29 Reserved

28

27

26

25 SMP18[2:0]

24

23

22 SMP17[2:0]

21

20

19 SMP16[2:0]

18

17

16

SMP15[2:1] rw 2 rw 1 SMP10[2:0] rw 0

rw 15 SMP15_0 rw rw 14 13 SMP14[2:0] rw rw rw 12 11 10 SMP13[2:0] rw

rw 9

rw 8

rw 7 SMP12[2:0]

rw 6

rw 5

rw 4 SMP11[2:0]

rw 3

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31: 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 26:0 SMPx[2:0]: Channel x sampling time selection These bits are written by software to select the sampling time individually for each channel. During sampling cycles, the channel selection bits must remain unchanged. Note: 000: 3 cycles 001: 15 cycles 010: 28 cycles 011: 56 cycles 100: 84 cycles 101: 112 cycles 110: 144 cycles 111: 480 cycles

11.13.5

ADC sample time register 2 (ADC_SMPR2)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28 SMP9[2:0]

27

26

25 SMP8[2:0]

24

23

22 SMP7[2:0]

21

20

19 SMP6[2:0]

18

17

16

SMP5[2:1] rw 2 rw 1 SMP0[2:0] rw 0

Reserved rw 15 SMP 5_0 rw rw 14 13 SMP4[2:0] rw rw rw rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 SMP3[2:0] rw rw rw rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 SMP2[2:0] rw rw rw rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 SMP1[2:0] rw rw rw rw 3

rw

rw

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 29:0 SMPx[2:0]: Channel x sampling time selection These bits are written by software to select the sampling time individually for each channel. During sample cycles, the channel selection bits must remain unchanged. Note: 000: 3 cycles 001: 15 cycles 010: 28 cycles 011: 56 cycles 100: 84 cycles 101: 112 cycles 110: 144 cycles 111: 480 cycles

297/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

11.13.6

ADC injected channel data offset register x (ADC_JOFRx)(x=1..4)

Address offset: 0x14-0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

JOFFSETx[11:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:0 JOFFSETx[11:0]: Data offset for injected channel x These bits are written by software to define the offset to be subtracted from the raw converted data when converting injected channels. The conversion result can be read from in the ADC_JDRx registers.

11.13.7

ADC watchdog higher threshold register (ADC_HTR)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0FFF

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

5 HT[11:0]

Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:0 HT[11:0]: Analog watchdog higher threshold These bits are written by software to define the higher threshold for the analog watchdog.

11.13.8

ADC watchdog lower threshold register (ADC_LTR)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

5 LT[11:0]

Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:0 LT[11:0]: Analog watchdog lower threshold These bits are written by software to define the lower threshold for the analog watchdog.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

298/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

11.13.9

ADC regular sequence register 1 (ADC_SQR1)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22 L[3:0]

21

20

19

18

17

16

SQ16[4:1] rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 SQ13[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw 1 rw 0

Reserved rw 15 SQ16_0 rw rw rw 14 13 12 SQ15[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw 11 10 9 8 7 SQ14[4:0] rw 6

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 23:20 L[3:0]: Regular channel sequence length These bits are written by software to define the total number of conversions in the regular channel conversion sequence. 0000: 1 conversion 0001: 2 conversions ... 1111: 16 conversions Bits 19:15 SQ16[4:0]: 16th conversion in regular sequence These bits are written by software with the channel number (0..18) assigned as the 16th in the conversion sequence. Bits 14:10 SQ15[4:0]: 15th conversion in regular sequence Bits 9:5 SQ14[4:0]: 14th conversion in regular sequence Bits 4:0 SQ13[4:0]: 13th conversion in regular sequence

11.13.10 ADC regular sequence register 2 (ADC_SQR2)

Address offset: 0x30 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 SQ12[4:0] Reserved rw 15 SQ10_0 rw rw rw 14 13 rw 12 SQ9[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 SQ8[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 SQ7[4:0] rw rw rw rw 1 rw 0 26 25 24 23 22 SQ11[4:0] 21 20 19 18 17 16

SQ10[4:1]

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 29:26 SQ12[4:0]: 12th conversion in regular sequence These bits are written by software with the channel number (0..18) assigned as the 12th in the sequence to be converted. Bits 24:20 SQ11[4:0]: 11th conversion in regular sequence Bits 19:15 SQ10[4:0]: 10th conversion in regular sequence Bits 14:10 SQ9[4:0]: 9th conversion in regular sequence

299/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Bits 9:5 SQ8[4:0]: 8th conversion in regular sequence Bits 4:0 SQ7[4:0]: 7th conversion in regular sequence

11.13.11 ADC regular sequence register 3 (ADC_SQR3)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 SQ6[4:0] Reserved rw 15 SQ4_0 rw rw rw 14 13 rw 12 SQ3[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 SQ2[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 SQ1[4:0] rw rw rw rw 1 rw 0 26 25 24 23 22 SQ5[4:0] 21 20 19 18 17 16

SQ4[4:1]

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 29:25 SQ6[4:0]: 6th conversion in regular sequence These bits are written by software with the channel number (0..18) assigned as the 6th in the sequence to be converted. Bits 24:20 SQ5[4:0]: 5th conversion in regular sequence Bits 19:15 SQ4[4:0]: 4th conversion in regular sequence Bits 14:10 SQ3[4:0]: 3rd conversion in regular sequence Bits 9:5 SQ2[4:0]: 2nd conversion in regular sequence Bits 4:0 SQ1[4:0]: 1st conversion in regular sequence

11.13.12 ADC injected sequence register (ADC_JSQR)

Address offset: 0x38 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 JL[1:0] Reserved rw 15 JSQ4[0] rw rw rw 14 13 12 JSQ3[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw 11 10 9 8 7 JSQ2[4:0] rw rw rw rw rw 6 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 JSQ1[4:0] rw rw rw rw 1 rw 0 20 19 18 17 16

JSQ4[4:1]

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 21:20 JL[1:0]: Injected sequence length These bits are written by software to define the total number of conversions in the injected channel conversion sequence. 00: 1 conversion 01: 2 conversions 10: 3 conversions 11: 4 conversions

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

300/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

Bits 19:15 JSQ4[4:0]: 4th conversion in injected sequence (when JL[1:0]=3, see note below) These bits are written by software with the channel number (0..18) assigned as the 4th in the sequence to be converted. Bits 14:10 JSQ3[4:0]: 3rd conversion in injected sequence (when JL[1:0]=3, see note below) Bits 9:5 JSQ2[4:0]: 2nd conversion in injected sequence (when JL[1:0]=3, see note below) Bits 4:0 JSQ1[4:0]: 1st conversion in injected sequence (when JL[1:0]=3, see note below)

Note:

When JL[1:0]=3 (4 injected conversions in the sequencer), the ADC converts the channels in the following order: JSQ1[4:0], JSQ2[4:0], JSQ3[4:0], and JSQ4[4:0]. When JL=2 (3 injected conversions in the sequencer), the ADC converts the channels in the following order: JSQ2[4:0], JSQ3[4:0], and JSQ4[4:0]. When JL=1 (2 injected conversions in the sequencer), the ADC converts the channels in starting from JSQ3[4:0], and then JSQ4[4:0]. When JL=0 (1 injected conversion in the sequencer), the ADC converts only JSQ4[4:0] channel.

11.13.13 ADC injected data register x (ADC_JDRx) (x= 1..4)

Address offset: 0x3C - 0x48 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

JDATA[15:0] r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 JDATA[15:0]: Injected data These bits are read-only. They contain the conversion result from injected channel x. The data are left -or right-aligned as shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39.

11.13.14 ADC regular data register (ADC_DR)

Address offset: 0x4C Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DATA[15:0] r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

301/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 DATA[15:0]: Regular data These bits are read-only. They contain the conversion result from the regular channels. The data are left- or right-aligned as shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

302/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

11.13.15 ADC Common status register (ADC_CSR)

Address offset: 0x00 (this offset address is relative to ADC1 base address + 0x300) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register provides an image of the status bits of the different ADCs. Nevertheless it is read-only and does not allow to clear the different status bits. Instead each status bit must be cleared by writing it to 0 in the corresponding ADC_SR register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 OVR3 Reserved r 15 14 13 OVR2 Reserved r r r 12 STRT2 11 10 9 EOC2 8 AWD2 Reserved r r r r r r 7 6 5 OVR1 r 4 r 3 20 19 18 17 16 AWD3

STRT3 JSTRT3 JEOC 3 EOC3 ADC3 r 2 r 1

r 0 AWD1

JSTRT JEOC2 2 ADC2

STRT1 JSTRT1 JEOC 1 EOC1 ADC1 r r

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 OVR3: Overrun flag of ADC3 This bit is a copy of the OVR bit in the ADC3_SR register. Bit 20 STRT3: Regular channel Start flag of ADC3 This bit is a copy of the STRT bit in the ADC3_SR register. Bit 19 JSTRT3: Injected channel Start flag of ADC3 This bit is a copy of the JSTRT bit in the ADC3_SR register. Bit 18 JEOC3: Injected channel end of conversion of ADC3 This bit is a copy of the JEOC bit in the ADC3_SR register. Bit 17 EOC3: End of conversion of ADC3 This bit is a copy of the EOC bit in the ADC3_SR register. Bit 16 AWD3: Analog watchdog flag of ADC3 This bit is a copy of the AWD bit in the ADC3_SR register. Bits 15:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13 OVR2: Overrun flag of ADC2 This bit is a copy of the OVR bit in the ADC2_SR register. Bit 12 STRT2: Regular channel Start flag of ADC2 This bit is a copy of the STRT bit in the ADC2_SR register. Bit 11 JSTRT2: Injected channel Start flag of ADC2 This bit is a copy of the JSTRT bit in the ADC2_SR register. Bit 10 JEOC2: Injected channel end of conversion of ADC2 This bit is a copy of the JEOC bit in the ADC2_SR register. Bit 9 EOC2: End of conversion of ADC2 This bit is a copy of the EOC bit in the ADC2_SR register. Bit 8 AWD2: Analog watchdog flag of ADC2 This bit is a copy of the AWD bit in the ADC2_SR register.

303/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 OVR1: Overrun flag of ADC1 This bit is a copy of the OVR bit in the ADC1_SR register. Bit 4 STRT1: Regular channel Start flag of ADC1 This bit is a copy of the STRT bit in the ADC1_SR register. Bit 3 JSTRT1: Injected channel Start flag of ADC1 This bit is a copy of the JSTRT bit in the ADC1_SR register. Bit 2 JEOC1: Injected channel end of conversion of ADC1 This bit is a copy of the JEOC bit in the ADC1_SR register. Bit 1 EOC1: End of conversion of ADC1 This bit is a copy of the EOC bit in the ADC1_SR register. Bit 0 AWD1: Analog watchdog flag of ADC1 This bit is a copy of the AWD bit in the ADC1_SR register.

11.13.16 ADC common control register (ADC_CCR)

Address offset: 0x04 (this offset address is relative to ADC1 base address + 0x300) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

TSVREFE VBATE Reserved rw 15 14 13 DDS Res. rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 12 11 10 9 8 7 rw 6 Reserved rw rw rw 5 4 3 2 MULTI[4:0] Reserved

ADCPRE rw 1 rw 0

DMA[1:0]

DELAY[3:0]

rw

rw

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 TSVREFE: Temperature sensor and VREFINT enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the temperature sensor and the VREFINT channel. 0: Temperature sensor and VREFINT channel disabled 1: Temperature sensor and VREFINT channel enabled Note: On STM32F42x and STM32F43x devices, VBATE must be disabled when TSVREFE is set. If both bits are set, only the VBAT conversion is performed. Bit 22 VBATE: VBAT enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the VBAT channel. 0: VBAT channel disabled 1: VBAT channel enabled Bits 21:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

304/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

Bits 17:16 ADCPRE: ADC prescaler Set and cleared by software to select the frequency of the clock to the ADC. The clock is common for all the ADCs. Note: 00: PCLK2 divided by 2 01: PCLK2 divided by 4 10: PCLK2 divided by 6 11: PCLK2 divided by 8 Bits 15:14 DMA: Direct memory access mode for multi ADC mode This bit-field is set and cleared by software. Refer to the DMA controller section for more details. 00: DMA mode disabled 01: DMA mode 1 enabled (2 / 3 half-words one by one - 1 then 2 then 3) 10: DMA mode 2 enabled (2 / 3 half-words by pairs - 2&1 then 1&3 then 3&2) 11: DMA mode 3 enabled (2 / 3 bytes by pairs - 2&1 then 1&3 then 3&2) Bit 13 DDS: DMA disable selection (for multi-ADC mode) This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: No new DMA request is issued after the last transfer (as configured in the DMA controller). DMA bits are not cleared by hardware, however they must have been cleared and set to the wanted mode by software before new DMA requests can be generated. 1: DMA requests are issued as long as data are converted and DMA = 01, 10 or 11. Bit 12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

305/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

Bit 11:8 DELAY: Delay between 2 sampling phases Set and cleared by software. These bits are used in dual or triple interleaved modes. 0000: 5 * TADCCLK 0001: 6 * TADCCLK 0010: 7 * TADCCLK ... 1111: 20 * TADCCLK Bits 7:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 4:0 MULTI[4:0]: Multi ADC mode selection These bits are written by software to select the operating mode. All the ADCs independent: 00000: Independent mode 00001 to 01001: Dual mode, ADC1 and ADC2 working together, ADC3 is independent 00001: Combined regular simultaneous + injected simultaneous mode 00010: Combined regular simultaneous + alternate trigger mode 00011: Reserved 00101: Injected simultaneous mode only 00110: Regular simultaneous mode only 00111: interleaved mode only 01001: Alternate trigger mode only 10001 to 11001: Triple mode: ADC1, 2 and 3 working together 10001: Combined regular simultaneous + injected simultaneous mode 10010: Combined regular simultaneous + alternate trigger mode 10011: Reserved 10101: Injected simultaneous mode only 10110: Regular simultaneous mode only 10111: interleaved mode only 11001: Alternate trigger mode only All other combinations are reserved and must not be programmed Note: In multi mode, a change of channel configuration generates an abort that can cause a loss of synchronization. It is recommended to disable the multi ADC mode before any configuration change.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

306/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)

RM0090

11.13.17 ADC common regular data register for dual and triple modes (ADC_CDR)
Address offset: 0x08 (this offset address is relative to ADC1 base address + 0x300) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DATA2[15:0] r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

DATA1[15:0] r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:16 DATA2[15:0]: 2nd data item of a pair of regular conversions In dual mode, these bits contain the regular data of ADC2. Refer to Dual ADC mode. In triple mode, these bits contain alternatively the regular data of ADC2, ADC1 and ADC3. Refer to Triple ADC mode. Bits 15:0 DATA1[15:0]: 1st data item of a pair of regular conversions In dual mode, these bits contain the regular data of ADC1. Refer to Dual ADC mode In triple mode, these bits contain alternatively the regular data of ADC1, ADC3 and ADC2. Refer to Triple ADC mode.

11.13.18 ADC register map

The following table summarizes the ADC registers. Table 54. ADC global register map
Register ADC1 Reserved ADC2 Reserved ADC3 Reserved Common registers

Offset 0x000 - 0x04C 0x050 - 0x0FC 0x100 - 0x14C 0x118 - 0x1FC 0x200 - 0x24C 0x250 - 0x2FC 0x300 - 0x308

307/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 55.

Offset
0x00

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) ADC register map and reset values for each ADC
JSTRT JEOC 0 STRT AWD 0 0 ADON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EOC 0 0 CONT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OVR 0 AWD SGL JDISCEN JAWDEN RES[1:0] DISCEN AWDEN JEOCIE AWDIE JAUTO DISC NUM [2:0] 0 JEXTEN[1:0] JEXTSEL [3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EOCIE OVRIE SCAN

Register
ADC_SR Reset value ADC_CR1 Reset value

0x04

EXTEN[1:0]

0x08

ADC_CR2

Re se rv ed

EXTSEL [3:0]

Re se rv ed

JSWSTART

SWSTART

ALIGN

EOCS

Reserved

DMA

DDS

Reset value 0x0C 0x10 0x14 0x18 0x1C 0x20 0x24 0x28 0x2C ADC_SMPR1 Reset value ADC_SMPR2 Reset value ADC_JOFR1 Reset value ADC_JOFR2 Reset value ADC_JOFR3 Reset value ADC_JOFR4 Reset value ADC_HTR Reset value ADC_LTR Reset value ADC_SQR1 Reset value Reserved Reserved ADC_SQR2 0x30 Reset value ADC_SQR3 0x34 Reset value ADC_JSQR Reset value ADC_JDR1 Reset value ADC_JDR2 Reset value ADC_JDR3 Reset value ADC_JDR4 Reset value ADC_DR Reset value 0 0

0x38 0x3C 0x40 0x44 0x48 0x4C

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 0 Reserved Reserved AWDCH[4:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Sample time bits SMPx_x Sample time bits SMPx_x JOFFSET1[11:0] JOFFSET2[11:0] JOFFSET3[11:0] JOFFSET4[11:0] HT[11:0] LT[11:0] Regular channel sequence SQx_x bits Regular channel sequence SQx_x bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved L[3:0] 0 0 0 Regular channel sequence SQx_x bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved JL[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Injected channel sequence JSQx_x bits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 JDATA[15:0] JDATA[15:0] JDATA[15:0] JDATA[15:0] Regular DATA[15:0]

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

308/1422

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Table 56.

Offset

RM0090

ADC register map and reset values (common ADC registers)

JSTRT JSTRT JSTRT JEOC JEOC JEOC 0 STRT STRT STRT AWD AWD AWD 0 0 0 EOC EOC EOC 0 0 0 OVR OVR OVR

Register
ADC_CSR

0x00 Reset value

ADCPRE[1:0]

TSVREFE

DMA[1:0]

VBATE

DDS

0x04

ADC_CCR

Reset value 0x08 ADC_CDR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

309/1422

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reser ved 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reser ved 0 0 0 ADC3 ADC2 Re se DELAY [3:0] rv ed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADC1 Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 MULTI [4:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Regular DATA2[15:0] Regular DATA1[15:0]

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

12

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

12.1

DAC introduction
The DAC module is a 12-bit, voltage output digital-to-analog converter. The DAC can be configured in 8- or 12-bit mode and may be used in conjunction with the DMA controller. In 12-bit mode, the data could be left- or right-aligned. The DAC has two output channels, each with its own converter. In dual DAC channel mode, conversions could be done independently or simultaneously when both channels are grouped together for synchronous update operations. An input reference pin, VREF+ (shared with ADC) is available for better resolution.

12.2

DAC main features

Two DAC converters: one output channel each Left or right data alignment in 12-bit mode Synchronized update capability Noise-wave generation Triangular-wave generation Dual DAC channel for independent or simultaneous conversions DMA capability for each channel DMA underrun error detection External triggers for conversion Input voltage reference, VREF+

Figure 54 shows the block diagram of a DAC channel and Table 57 gives the pin description.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

310/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) Figure 54. DAC channel block diagram

RM0090

DAC control register TSELx[2:0] bits SWTR IGx TIM2_T RGO TIM4_T RGO TIM5_T RGO TIM6_T RGO TIM7_T RGO TIM8_T RGO

Trigger selectorx

DMAENx

EXTI_9

DM A req ue stx DHRx 12-bit Control logicx LFSRx trianglex TENx MAMPx[3:0] bits WAVENx[1:0] bits 12-bit

DORx 12-bit VDDA VSSA VR EF+ Digital-to-analog converterx DAC_ OU Tx

ai14708b

Table 57.
Name VREF+ VDDA VSSA DAC_OUTx

DAC pins
Signal type Input, analog reference positive Input, analog supply Input, analog supply ground Analog output signal Remarks The higher/positive reference voltage for the DAC, 1.8 V VREF+ VDDA Analog power supply Ground for analog power supply DAC channelx analog output

Note:

Once the DAC channelx is enabled, the corresponding GPIO pin (PA4 or PA5) is automatically connected to the analog converter output (DAC_OUTx). In order to avoid parasitic consumption, the PA4 or PA5 pin should first be configured to analog (AIN).

311/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

12.3
12.3.1

DAC functional description

DAC channel enable
Each DAC channel can be powered on by setting its corresponding ENx bit in the DAC_CR register. The DAC channel is then enabled after a startup time tWAKEUP.

Note:

The ENx bit enables the analog DAC Channelx macrocell only. The DAC Channelx digital interface is enabled even if the ENx bit is reset.

12.3.2

DAC output buffer enable

The DAC integrates two output buffers that can be used to reduce the output impedance, and to drive external loads directly without having to add an external operational amplifier. Each DAC channel output buffer can be enabled and disabled using the corresponding BOFFx bit in the DAC_CR register.

12.3.3

DAC data format

Depending on the selected configuration mode, the data have to be written into the specified register as described below:

Single DAC channelx, there are three possibilities: 8-bit right alignment: the software has to load data into the DAC_DHR8Rx [7:0] bits (stored into the DHRx[11:4] bits) 12-bit left alignment: the software has to load data into the DAC_DHR12Lx [15:4] bits (stored into the DHRx[11:0] bits) 12-bit right alignment: the software has to load data into the DAC_DHR12Rx [11:0] bits (stored into the DHRx[11:0] bits)

Depending on the loaded DAC_DHRyyyx register, the data written by the user is shifted and stored into the corresponding DHRx (data holding registerx, which are internal nonmemory-mapped registers). The DHRx register is then loaded into the DORx register either automatically, by software trigger or by an external event trigger. Figure 55. Data registers in single DAC channel mode
31 24 15 7 0 8-bit right aligned 12-bit left aligned 12-bit right aligned
ai14710

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

312/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

Dual DAC channels, there are three possibilities: 8-bit right alignment: data for DAC channel1 to be loaded into the DAC_DHR8RD [7:0] bits (stored into the DHR1[11:4] bits) and data for DAC channel2 to be loaded into the DAC_DHR8RD [15:8] bits (stored into the DHR2[11:4] bits) 12-bit left alignment: data for DAC channel1 to be loaded into the DAC_DHR12LD [15:4] bits (stored into the DHR1[11:0] bits) and data for DAC channel2 to be loaded into the DAC_DHR12LD [31:20] bits (stored into the DHR2[11:0] bits) 12-bit right alignment: data for DAC channel1 to be loaded into the DAC_DHR12RD [11:0] bits (stored into the DHR1[11:0] bits) and data for DAC channel2 to be loaded into the DAC_DHR12LD [27:16] bits (stored into the DHR2[11:0] bits)

Depending on the loaded DAC_DHRyyyD register, the data written by the user is shifted and stored into DHR1 and DHR2 (data holding registers, which are internal non-memorymapped registers). The DHR1 and DHR2 registers are then loaded into the DOR1 and DOR2 registers, respectively, either automatically, by software trigger or by an external event trigger. Figure 56. Data registers in dual DAC channel mode
31 24 15 7 0 8-bit right aligned 12-bit left aligned 12-bit right aligned
ai14709

12.3.4

DAC conversion
The DAC_DORx cannot be written directly and any data transfer to the DAC channelx must be performed by loading the DAC_DHRx register (write to DAC_DHR8Rx, DAC_DHR12Lx, DAC_DHR12Rx, DAC_DHR8RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR12LD). Data stored in the DAC_DHRx register are automatically transferred to the DAC_DORx register after one APB1 clock cycle, if no hardware trigger is selected (TENx bit in DAC_CR register is reset). However, when a hardware trigger is selected (TENx bit in DAC_CR register is set) and a trigger occurs, the transfer is performed three APB1 clock cycles later. When DAC_DORx is loaded with the DAC_DHRx contents, the analog output voltage becomes available after a time tSETTLING that depends on the power supply voltage and the analog output load. Figure 57. Timing diagram for conversion with trigger disabled TEN = 0
APB1_CLK

DHR

0x1AC

DOR

0x1AC tSETTLING

Output voltage available on DAC_OUT pin

ai14711b

313/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

12.3.5

DAC output voltage

Digital inputs are converted to output voltages on a linear conversion between 0 and VREF+. The analog output voltages on each DAC channel pin are determined by the following equation:
DOR DACoutput = V REF ------------4095

12.3.6

DAC trigger selection

If the TENx control bit is set, conversion can then be triggered by an external event (timer counter, external interrupt line). The TSELx[2:0] control bits determine which out of 8 possible events will trigger conversion as shown in Table 58. Table 58. External triggers
Source Timer 6 TRGO event Timer 8 TRGO event Timer 7 TRGO event Timer 5 TRGO event Timer 2 TRGO event Timer 4 TRGO event EXTI line9 SWTRIG External pin Software control bit Internal signal from on-chip timers Type TSEL[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

Each time a DAC interface detects a rising edge on the selected timer TRGO output, or on the selected external interrupt line 9, the last data stored into the DAC_DHRx register are transferred into the DAC_DORx register. The DAC_DORx register is updated three APB1 cycles after the trigger occurs. If the software trigger is selected, the conversion starts once the SWTRIG bit is set. SWTRIG is reset by hardware once the DAC_DORx register has been loaded with the DAC_DHRx register contents. Note: TSELx[2:0] bit cannot be changed when the ENx bit is set. When software trigger is selected, the transfer from the DAC_DHRx register to the DAC_DORx register takes only one APB1 clock cycle.

12.3.7

DMA request
Each DAC channel has a DMA capability. Two DMA channels are used to service DAC channel DMA requests. A DAC DMA request is generated when an external trigger (but not a software trigger) occurs while the DMAENx bit is set. The value of the DAC_DHRx register is then transferred into the DAC_DORx register. In dual mode, if both DMAENx bits are set, two DMA requests are generated. If only one DMA request is needed, you should set only the corresponding DMAENx bit. In this way, the application can manage both DAC channels in dual mode by using one DMA request and a unique DMA channel.
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 314/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

DMA underrun
The DAC DMA request is not queued so that if a second external trigger arrives before the acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request), then no new request is issued and the DMA channelx underrun flag DMAUDRx in the DAC_SR register is set, reporting the error condition. DMA data transfers are then disabled and no further DMA request is treated. The DAC channelx continues to convert old data. The software should clear the DMAUDRx flag by writing 1, clear the DMAEN bit of the used DMA stream and re-initialize both DMA and DAC channelx to restart the transfer correctly. The software should modify the DAC trigger conversion frequency or lighten the DMA workload to avoid a new DMA underrun. Finally, the DAC conversion could be resumed by enabling both DMA data transfer and conversion trigger. For each DAC channelx, an interrupt is also generated if its corresponding DMAUDRIEx bit in the DAC_CR register is enabled.

12.3.8

Noise generation
In order to generate a variable-amplitude pseudonoise, an LFSR (linear feedback shift register) is available. DAC noise generation is selected by setting WAVEx[1:0] to 01. The preloaded value in LFSR is 0xAAA. This register is updated three APB1 clock cycles after each trigger event, following a specific calculation algorithm. Figure 58. DAC LFSR register calculation algorithm

XOR X6 X
12

X4 5 4 3 2

X 1 0

X0

11

10

12 NOR

ai14713b

The LFSR value, that may be masked partially or totally by means of the MAMPx[3:0] bits in the DAC_CR register, is added up to the DAC_DHRx contents without overflow and this value is then stored into the DAC_DORx register. If LFSR is 0x0000, a 1 is injected into it (antilock-up mechanism). It is possible to reset LFSR wave generation by resetting the WAVEx[1:0] bits.

315/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) Figure 59. DAC conversion (SW trigger enabled) with LFSR wave generation

APB1_CLK

DHR

0x00

DOR

0xAAA

0xD55

SWTRIG
ai14714

Note:

The DAC trigger must be enabled for noise generation by setting the TENx bit in the DAC_CR register.

12.3.9

Triangle-wave generation
It is possible to add a small-amplitude triangular waveform on a DC or slowly varying signal. DAC triangle-wave generation is selected by setting WAVEx[1:0] to 10. The amplitude is configured through the MAMPx[3:0] bits in the DAC_CR register. An internal triangle counter is incremented three APB1 clock cycles after each trigger event. The value of this counter is then added to the DAC_DHRx register without overflow and the sum is stored into the DAC_DORx register. The triangle counter is incremented as long as it is less than the maximum amplitude defined by the MAMPx[3:0] bits. Once the configured amplitude is reached, the counter is decremented down to 0, then incremented again and so on. It is possible to reset triangle wave generation by resetting the WAVEx[1:0] bits. Figure 60. DAC triangle wave generation
MAMPx[3:0] max amplitude + DAC_DHRx base value

De

tio

cr

ta

em

en

ta en

cr

em

tio

In

DAC_DHRx base value 0

ai14715c

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

316/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

Figure 61. DAC conversion (SW trigger enabled) with triangle wave generation

APB1_CLK

DHR

0xABE

DOR

0xABE

0xABF

0xAC0

SWTRIG
ai14714

Note:

The DAC trigger must be enabled for noise generation by setting the TENx bit in the DAC_CR register. The MAMPx[3:0] bits must be configured before enabling the DAC, otherwise they cannot be changed.

12.4

Dual DAC channel conversion

To efficiently use the bus bandwidth in applications that require the two DAC channels at the same time, three dual registers are implemented: DHR8RD, DHR12RD and DHR12LD. A unique register access is then required to drive both DAC channels at the same time. Eleven possible conversion modes are possible using the two DAC channels and these dual registers. All the conversion modes can nevertheless be obtained using separate DHRx registers if needed. All modes are described in the paragraphs below.

12.4.1

Independent trigger without wave generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure different trigger sources by setting different values in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a DAC channel1 trigger arrives, the DHR1 register is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). When a DAC channel2 trigger arrives, the DHR2 register is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later).

317/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

12.4.2

Independent trigger with single LFSR generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure different trigger sources by setting different values in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 01 and the same LFSR mask value in the MAMPx[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DHR12RD, DHR12LD or DHR8RD)

When a DAC channel1 trigger arrives, the LFSR1 counter, with the same mask, is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). Then the LFSR1 counter is updated. When a DAC channel2 trigger arrives, the LFSR2 counter, with the same mask, is added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). Then the LFSR2 counter is updated.

12.4.3

Independent trigger with different LFSR generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure different trigger sources by setting different values in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 01 and set different LFSR masks values in the MAMP1[3:0] and MAMP2[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a DAC channel1 trigger arrives, the LFSR1 counter, with the mask configured by MAMP1[3:0], is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). Then the LFSR1 counter is updated. When a DAC channel2 trigger arrives, the LFSR2 counter, with the mask configured by MAMP2[3:0], is added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). Then the LFSR2 counter is updated.

12.4.4

Independent trigger with single triangle generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure different trigger sources by setting different values in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 1x and the same maximum amplitude value in the MAMPx[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a DAC channel1 trigger arrives, the DAC channel1 triangle counter, with the same triangle amplitude, is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

318/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The DAC channel1 triangle counter is then updated. When a DAC channel2 trigger arrives, the DAC channel2 triangle counter, with the same triangle amplitude, is added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The DAC channel2 triangle counter is then updated.

12.4.5

Independent trigger with different triangle generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure different trigger sources by setting different values in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 1x and set different maximum amplitude values in the MAMP1[3:0] and MAMP2[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a DAC channel1 trigger arrives, the DAC channel1 triangle counter, with a triangle amplitude configured by MAMP1[3:0], is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The DAC channel1 triangle counter is then updated. When a DAC channel2 trigger arrives, the DAC channel2 triangle counter, with a triangle amplitude configured by MAMP2[3:0], is added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The DAC channel2 triangle counter is then updated.

12.4.6

Simultaneous software start

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Load the dual DAC channel data to the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

In this configuration, one APB1 clock cycle later, the DHR1 and DHR2 registers are transferred into DAC_DOR1 and DAC_DOR2, respectively.

12.4.7

Simultaneous trigger without wave generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure the same trigger source for both DAC channels by setting the same value in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data to the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a trigger arrives, the DHR1 and DHR2 registers are transferred into DAC_DOR1 and DAC_DOR2, respectively (after three APB1 clock cycles).

319/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

12.4.8

Simultaneous trigger with single LFSR generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure the same trigger source for both DAC channels by setting the same value in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 01 and the same LFSR mask value in the MAMPx[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data to the desired DHR register (DHR12RD, DHR12LD or DHR8RD)

When a trigger arrives, the LFSR1 counter, with the same mask, is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The LFSR1 counter is then updated. At the same time, the LFSR2 counter, with the same mask, is added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The LFSR2 counter is then updated.

12.4.9

Simultaneous trigger with different LFSR generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure the same trigger source for both DAC channels by setting the same value in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 01 and set different LFSR mask values using the MAMP1[3:0] and MAMP2[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a trigger arrives, the LFSR1 counter, with the mask configured by MAMP1[3:0], is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The LFSR1 counter is then updated. At the same time, the LFSR2 counter, with the mask configured by MAMP2[3:0], is added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The LFSR2 counter is then updated.

12.4.10

Simultaneous trigger with single triangle generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure the same trigger source for both DAC channels by setting the same value in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 1x and the same maximum amplitude value using the MAMPx[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a trigger arrives, the DAC channel1 triangle counter, with the same triangle amplitude, is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The DAC channel1 triangle counter is then updated. At the same time, the DAC channel2 triangle counter, with the same triangle amplitude, is

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

320/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). The DAC channel2 triangle counter is then updated.

12.4.11

Simultaneous trigger with different triangle generation

To configure the DAC in this conversion mode, the following sequence is required:

Set the two DAC channel trigger enable bits TEN1 and TEN2 Configure the same trigger source for both DAC channels by setting the same value in the TSEL1[2:0] and TSEL2[2:0] bits Configure the two DAC channel WAVEx[1:0] bits as 1x and set different maximum amplitude values in the MAMP1[3:0] and MAMP2[3:0] bits Load the dual DAC channel data into the desired DHR register (DAC_DHR12RD, DAC_DHR12LD or DAC_DHR8RD)

When a trigger arrives, the DAC channel1 triangle counter, with a triangle amplitude configured by MAMP1[3:0], is added to the DHR1 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR1 (three APB1 clock cycles later). Then the DAC channel1 triangle counter is updated. At the same time, the DAC channel2 triangle counter, with a triangle amplitude configured by MAMP2[3:0], is added to the DHR2 register and the sum is transferred into DAC_DOR2 (three APB1 clock cycles later). Then the DAC channel2 triangle counter is updated.

12.5

DAC registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers have to be accessed by words (32 bits).

12.5.1

DAC control register (DAC_CR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29 DMAU DRIE2 rw

28 DMA EN2 rw 12 DMA EN1 rw

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20 TSEL2[2:0]

19

18 TEN2

17 BOFF2 rw 1 BOFF1 rw

16 EN2 rw 0 EN1 rw

MAMP2[3:0] rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8

WAVE2[1:0] rw 7 rw 6 rw 5

Reserved 15 14

rw 4 TSEL1[2:0]

rw 3

rw 2 TEN1

13 DMAU DRIE1 rw

MAMP1[3:0] rw rw rw rw

WAVE1[1:0] rw rw rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 29 DMAUDRIE2: DAC channel2 DMA underrun interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: DAC channel2 DMA underrun interrupt disabled 1: DAC channel2 DMA underrun interrupt enabled Bit 28 DMAEN2: DAC channel2 DMA enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: DAC channel2 DMA mode disabled 1: DAC channel2 DMA mode enabled

321/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

Bit 27:24 MAMP2[3:0]: DAC channel2 mask/amplitude selector These bits are written by software to select mask in wave generation mode or amplitude in triangle generation mode. 0000: Unmask bit0 of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 1 0001: Unmask bits[1:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 3 0010: Unmask bits[2:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 7 0011: Unmask bits[3:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 15 0100: Unmask bits[4:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 31 0101: Unmask bits[5:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 63 0110: Unmask bits[6:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 127 0111: Unmask bits[7:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 255 1000: Unmask bits[8:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 511 1001: Unmask bits[9:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 1023 1010: Unmask bits[10:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 2047 1011: Unmask bits[11:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 4095 Bit 23:22 WAVE2[1:0]: DAC channel2 noise/triangle wave generation enable These bits are set/reset by software. 00: wave generation disabled 01: Noise wave generation enabled 1x: Triangle wave generation enabled Note: Only used if bit TEN2 = 1 (DAC channel2 trigger enabled) Bits 21:19 TSEL2[2:0]: DAC channel2 trigger selection These bits select the external event used to trigger DAC channel2 000: Timer 6 TRGO event 001: Timer 8 TRGO event 010: Timer 7 TRGO event 011: Timer 5 TRGO event 100: Timer 2 TRGO event 101: Timer 4 TRGO event 110: External line9 111: Software trigger Note: Only used if bit TEN2 = 1 (DAC channel2 trigger enabled). Bit 18 TEN2: DAC channel2 trigger enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DAC channel2 trigger 0: DAC channel2 trigger disabled and data written into the DAC_DHRx register are transferred one APB1 clock cycle later to the DAC_DOR2 register 1: DAC channel2 trigger enabled and data from the DAC_DHRx register are transferred three APB1 clock cycles later to the DAC_DOR2 register Note: When software trigger is selected, the transfer from the DAC_DHRx register to the DAC_DOR2 register takes only one APB1 clock cycle. Bit 17 BOFF2: DAC channel2 output buffer disable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DAC channel2 output buffer. 0: DAC channel2 output buffer enabled 1: DAC channel2 output buffer disabled Bit 16 EN2: DAC channel2 enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DAC channel2. 0: DAC channel2 disabled 1: DAC channel2 enabled Bits 15:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

322/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

Bit 13 DMAUDRIE1: DAC channel1 DMA Underrun Interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: DAC channel1 DMA Underrun Interrupt disabled 1: DAC channel1 DMA Underrun Interrupt enabled Bit 12 DMAEN1: DAC channel1 DMA enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: DAC channel1 DMA mode disabled 1: DAC channel1 DMA mode enabled Bits 11:8 MAMP1[3:0]: DAC channel1 mask/amplitude selector These bits are written by software to select mask in wave generation mode or amplitude in triangle generation mode. 0000: Unmask bit0 of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 1 0001: Unmask bits[1:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 3 0010: Unmask bits[2:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 7 0011: Unmask bits[3:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 15 0100: Unmask bits[4:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 31 0101: Unmask bits[5:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 63 0110: Unmask bits[6:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 127 0111: Unmask bits[7:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 255 1000: Unmask bits[8:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 511 1001: Unmask bits[9:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 1023 1010: Unmask bits[10:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 2047 1011: Unmask bits[11:0] of LFSR/ triangle amplitude equal to 4095 Bits 7:6 WAVE1[1:0]: DAC channel1 noise/triangle wave generation enable These bits are set and cleared by software. 00: wave generation disabled 01: Noise wave generation enabled 1x: Triangle wave generation enabled Note: Only used if bit TEN1 = 1 (DAC channel1 trigger enabled). Bits 5:3 TSEL1[2:0]: DAC channel1 trigger selection These bits select the external event used to trigger DAC channel1. 000: Timer 6 TRGO event 001: Timer 8 TRGO event 010: Timer 7 TRGO event 011: Timer 5 TRGO event 100: Timer 2 TRGO event 101: Timer 4 TRGO event 110: External line9 111: Software trigger Note: Only used if bit TEN1 = 1 (DAC channel1 trigger enabled). Bit 2 TEN1: DAC channel1 trigger enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DAC channel1 trigger. 0: DAC channel1 trigger disabled and data written into the DAC_DHRx register are transferred one APB1 clock cycle later to the DAC_DOR1 register 1: DAC channel1 trigger enabled and data from the DAC_DHRx register are transferred three APB1 clock cycles later to the DAC_DOR1 register Note: When software trigger is selected, the transfer from the DAC_DHRx register to the DAC_DOR1 register takes only one APB1 clock cycle.

323/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

Bit 1 BOFF1: DAC channel1 output buffer disable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DAC channel1 output buffer. 0: DAC channel1 output buffer enabled 1: DAC channel1 output buffer disabled Bit 0 EN1: DAC channel1 enable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DAC channel1. 0: DAC channel1 disabled 1: DAC channel1 enabled

12.5.2

DAC software trigger register (DAC_SWTRIGR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

8 Reserved

SWTRIG2 SWTRIG1 w w

Bits 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 SWTRIG2: DAC channel2 software trigger This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the software trigger. 0: Software trigger disabled 1: Software trigger enabled Note: This bit is cleared by hardware (one APB1 clock cycle later) once the DAC_DHR2 register value has been loaded into the DAC_DOR2 register. Bit 0 SWTRIG1: DAC channel1 software trigger This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the software trigger. 0: Software trigger disabled 1: Software trigger enabled Note: This bit is cleared by hardware (one APB1 clock cycle later) once the DAC_DHR1 register value has been loaded into the DAC_DOR1 register.

12.5.3

DAC channel1 12-bit right-aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12R1)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC1DHR[11:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11:0 DACC1DHR[11:0]: DAC channel1 12-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 12-bit data for DAC channel1.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

324/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

12.5.4

DAC channel1 12-bit left aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12L1)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC1DHR[11:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15:4 DACC1DHR[11:0]: DAC channel1 12-bit left-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 12-bit data for DAC channel1. Bits 3:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

12.5.5

DAC channel1 8-bit right aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR8R1)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC1DHR[7:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:0 DACC1DHR[7:0]: DAC channel1 8-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 8-bit data for DAC channel1.

12.5.6

DAC channel2 12-bit right aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12R2)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC2DHR[11:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:0 DACC2DHR[11:0]: DAC channel2 12-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 12-bit data for DAC channel2.

325/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

12.5.7

DAC channel2 12-bit left aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12L2)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC2DHR[11:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:4 DACC2DHR[11:0]: DAC channel2 12-bit left-aligned data These bits are written by software which specify 12-bit data for DAC channel2. Bits 3:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

12.5.8

DAC channel2 8-bit right-aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR8R2)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC2DHR[7:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:0 DACC2DHR[7:0]: DAC channel2 8-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 8-bit data for DAC channel2.

12.5.9

Dual DAC 12-bit right-aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12RD)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

DACC2DHR[11:0] Reserved rw 15 14 13 12 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

DACC1DHR[11:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

326/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27:16 DACC2DHR[11:0]: DAC channel2 12-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 12-bit data for DAC channel2. Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:0 DACC1DHR[11:0]: DAC channel1 12-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 12-bit data for DAC channel1.

12.5.10

DUAL DAC 12-bit left aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR12LD)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

DACC2DHR[11:0] Reserved rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 3 2 1 0

DACC1DHR[11:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:20 DACC2DHR[11:0]: DAC channel2 12-bit left-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 12-bit data for DAC channel2. Bits 19:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:4 DACC1DHR[11:0]: DAC channel1 12-bit left-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 12-bit data for DAC channel1. Bits 3:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

12.5.11

DUAL DAC 8-bit right aligned data holding register (DAC_DHR8RD)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC2DHR[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

DACC1DHR[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:8 DACC2DHR[7:0]: DAC channel2 8-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 8-bit data for DAC channel2. Bits 7:0 DACC1DHR[7:0]: DAC channel1 8-bit right-aligned data These bits are written by software which specifies 8-bit data for DAC channel1.

327/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

12.5.12

DAC channel1 data output register (DAC_DOR1)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC1DOR[11:0] Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11:0 DACC1DOR[11:0]: DAC channel1 data output These bits are read-only, they contain data output for DAC channel1.

12.5.13

DAC channel2 data output register (DAC_DOR2)

Address offset: 0x30 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DACC2DOR[11:0] Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11:0 DACC2DOR[11:0]: DAC channel2 data output These bits are read-only, they contain data output for DAC channel2.

12.5.14

DAC status register (DAC_SR)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29 DMAUDR2

28

27

26

25

24

23

22 Reserved

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved rc_w1 15 14 13 DMAUDR1 Reserved rc_w1 12 11 10 9 8 7

6 Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

328/1422

Digital-to-analog converter (DAC)

RM0090

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 29 DMAUDR2: DAC channel2 DMA underrun flag This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software (by writing it to 1). 0: No DMA underrun error condition occurred for DAC channel2 1: DMA underrun error condition occurred for DAC channel2 (the currently selected trigger is driving DAC channel2 conversion at a frequency higher than the DMA service capability rate) Bits 28:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13 DMAUDR1: DAC channel1 DMA underrun flag This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software (by writing it to 1). 0: No DMA underrun error condition occurred for DAC channel1 1: DMA underrun error condition occurred for DAC channel1 (the currently selected trigger is driving DAC channel1 conversion at a frequency higher than the DMA service capability rate) Bits 12:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

12.5.15

DAC register map

Table 59 summarizes the DAC registers.

Table 59.

DAC register map

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DMAUDRIE2 DMAUDRIE1 Reserved Reserved DMAEN2 DMAEN1 BOFF2 EN2 MAMP2[3:0] MAMP1[3:0] SWTRIG2 DACC1DHR[11:0] DACC1DHR[11:0] Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DACC2DHR[11:0] DACC2DHR[11:0] Reserved Reserved Reserved DMAUDR2 DMAUDR1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DACC1DHR[7:0] DACC2DHR[11:0] DACC2DHR[11:0] Reserved DACC2DHR[7:0] DACC1DHR[11:0] DACC1DHR[11:0] DACC2DHR[7:0] DACC1DHR[7:0] DACC1DOR[11:0] DACC2DOR[11:0] Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

Address Register offset name

0x00

DAC_CR

0x04

DAC_SWT RIGR DAC_DHR1 2R1 DAC_DHR1 2L1 DAC_DHR8 R1 DAC_DHR1 2R2 DAC_DHR1 2L2 DAC_DHR8 R2 DAC_DHR1 2RD DAC_DHR1 2LD DAC_DHR8 RD DAC_DOR1 DAC_DOR2

0x08 0x0C 0x10 0x14 0x18 0x1C 0x20 0x24 0x28 0x2C 0x30

0x34

DAC_SR

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

329/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

SWTRIG1

EN1

WAVE TSEL2[2:0] 2[2:0]

WAVE TSEL1[2:0] 1[2:0]

BOFF1

TEN2

TEN1

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

13

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

13.1

DCMI introduction
The digital camera is a synchronous parallel interface able to receive a high-speed data flow from an external 8-, 10-, 12- or 14-bit CMOS camera module. It supports different data formats: YCbCr4:2:2/RGB565 progressive video and compressed data (JPEG). This interface is for use with black & white cameras, X24 and X5 cameras, and it is assumed that all pre-processing like resizing is performed in the camera module.

13.2

DCMI main features

8-, 10-, 12- or 14-bit parallel interface Embedded/external line and frame synchronization Continuous or snapshot mode Crop feature Supports the following data formats: 8/10/12/14- bit progressive video: either monochrome or raw bayer YCbCr 4:2:2 progressive video RGB 565 progressive video Compressed data: JPEG

13.3

DCMI pins
Table 60 shows the DCMI pins. Table 60. DCMI pins
Name D[0:13] HSYNC VSYNC PIXCLX Data inputs Horizontal synchronization input Vertical synchronization input Pixel clock input Signal type

13.4

DCMI clocks
The digital camera interface uses two clock domains PIXCLK and HCLK. The signals generated with PIXCLK are sampled on the rising edge of HCLK once they are stable. An enable signal is generated in the HCLK domain, to indicate that data coming from the camera are stable and can be sampled. The maximum PIXCLK period must be higher than 2.5 HCLK periods.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

330/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

13.5

DCMI functional overview

The digital camera interface is a synchronous parallel interface that can receive high-speed (up to 54 Mbytes/s) data flows. It consists of up to 14 data lines (D13-D0) and a pixel clock line (PIXCLK). The pixel clock has a programmable polarity, so that data can be captured on either the rising or the falling edge of the pixel clock. The data are packed into a 32-bit data register (DCMI_DR) and then transferred through a general-purpose DMA channel. The image buffer is managed by the DMA, not by the camera interface. The data received from the camera can be organized in lines/frames (raw YUB/RGB/Bayer modes) or can be a sequence of JPEG images. To enable JPEG image reception, the JPEG bit (bit 3 of DCMI_CR register) must be set. The data flow is synchronized either by hardware using the optional HSYNC (horizontal synchronization) and VSYNC (vertical synchronization) signals or by synchronization codes embedded in the data flow. Figure 62 shows the DCMI block diagram. Figure 62. DCMI block diagram

DMA interface

Control/Status register

AHB interface FIFO/ Data formatter DCMI_PIXCLK

Data extraction

Synchronizer

DCMI_D[0:13], DCMI_HSYNC, DCMI_VSYNC

ai15604

Figure 63. Top-level block diagram

DCMI_D[0:13] DCMI_PIXCLK DCMI_HSYNC DCMI_VSYNC DCMI Interrupt controller DCMI_IT External interface

HCLK

DMA_REQ

ai15603b

331/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

13.5.1

DMA interface
The DMA interface is active when the CAPTURE bit in the DCMI_CR register is set. A DMA request is generated each time the camera interface receives a complete 32-bit data block in its register.

13.5.2

DCMI physical interface

The interface is composed of 11/13/15/17 inputs. Only the Slave mode is supported. The camera interface can capture 8-bit, 10-bit, 12-bit or 14-bit data depending on the EDM[1:0] bits in the DCMI_CR register. If less than 14 bits are used, the unused input pins must be connected to ground. Table 61. DCMI signals
Signal name 8 bits 10 bits 12 bits 14 bits PIXCLK HSYNC VSYNC D[0..7] D[0..9] D[0..11] D[0..13] Signal description

Data

Pixel clock Horizontal synchronization / Data valid Vertical synchronization

The data are synchronous with PIXCLK and change on the rising/falling edge of the pixel clock depending on the polarity. The HSYNC signal indicates the start/end of a line. The VSYNC signal indicates the start/end of a frame Figure 64. DCMI signal waveforms
DCMI_PIXCLK

DCMI_DR[0:13]

DCMI_HSYNC

DCMI_VSYNC
ai15606b

1. The capture edge of DCMI_PIXCLK is the falling edge, the active state of DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC is 1. 1. DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC can change states at the same time.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

332/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

8-bit data
When EDM[1:0] in DCMI_CR are programmed to 00 the interface captures 8 LSBs at its input (D[0:7]) and stores them as 8-bit data. The D[13:8] inputs are ignored. In this case, to capture a 32-bit word, the camera interface takes four pixel clock cycles. The first captured data byte is placed in the LSB position in the 32-bit word and the 4th captured data byte is placed in the MSB position in the 32-bit word. Table 62 gives an example of the positioning of captured data bytes in two 32-bit words. Table 62. Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (8-bit width)
31:24 Dn+3[7:0] Dn+7[7:0] 23:16 Dn+2[7:0] Dn+6[7:0] 15:8 Dn+1[7:0] Dn+5[7:0] 7:0 Dn[7:0] Dn+4[7:0]

Byte address 0 4

10-bit data
When EDM[1:0] in DCMI_CR are programmed to 01, the camera interface captures 10-bit data at its input D[0..9] and stores them as the 10 least significant bits of a 16-bit word. The remaining most significant bits in the DCMI_DR register (bits 11 to 15) are cleared to zero. So, in this case, a 32-bit data word is made up every two pixel clock cycles. The first captured data are placed in the LSB position in the 32-bit word and the 2nd captured data are placed in the MSB position in the 32-bit word as shown in Table 63. Table 63. Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (10-bit width)
31:26 0 0 25:16 Dn+1[9:0] Dn+3[9:0] 15:10 0 0 9:0 Dn[9:0] Dn+2[9:0]

Byte address 0 4

12-bit data
When EDM[1:0] in DCMI_CR are programmed to 10, the camera interface captures the 12-bit data at its input D[0..11] and stores them as the 12 least significant bits of a 16-bit word. The remaining most significant bits are cleared to zero. So, in this case a 32-bit data word is made up every two pixel clock cycles. The first captured data are placed in the LSB position in the 32-bit word and the 2nd captured data are placed in the MSB position in the 32-bit word as shown in Table 64. Table 64. Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (12-bit width)
31:28 0 0 27:16 Dn+1[11:0] Dn+3[11:0] 15:12 0 0 11:0 Dn[11:0] Dn+2[11:0]

Byte address 0 4

14-bit data
When EDM[1:0] in DCMI_CR are programmed to 11, the camera interface captures the 14-bit data at its input D[0..13] and stores them as the 14 least significant bits of a 16-bit

333/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI) word. The remaining most significant bits are cleared to zero. So, in this case a 32-bit data word is made up every two pixel clock cycles. The first captured data are placed in the LSB position in the 32-bit word and the 2nd captured data are placed in the MSB position in the 32-bit word as shown in Table 65. Table 65. Positioning of captured data bytes in 32-bit words (14-bit width)
31:30 0 0 29:16 Dn+1[13:0] Dn+3[13:0] 15:14 0 0 13:0 Dn[13:0] Dn+2[13:0]

Byte address 0 4

13.5.3

Synchronization
The digital camera interface supports embedded or hardware (HSYNC & VSYNC) synchronization. When embedded synchronization is used, it is up to the digital camera module to make sure that the 0x00 and 0xFF values are used ONLY for synchronization (not in data). Embedded synchronization codes are supported only for the 8-bit parallel data interface width (that is, in the DCMI_CR register, the EDM[1:0] bits should be cleared to 00). For compressed data, the DCMI supports only the hardware synchronization mode. In this case, VSYNC is used as a start/end of the image, and HSYNC is used as a Data Valid signal. Figure 65 shows the corresponding timing diagram. Figure 65. Timing diagram
Padding data at the end of the JPEG stream JPEG packet size programmable

Beginning of JPEG stream

JPEG data End of JPEG stream HSYNC

VSYNC

Packet dispatching depends on the image content. This results in a variable blanking duration. JPEG packet data
ai15944

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

334/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

Hardware synchronization mode

In hardware synchronisation mode, the two synchronization signals (HSYNC/VSYNC) are used. Depending on the camera module/mode, data may be transmitted during horizontal/vertical synchronisation periods. The HSYNC/VSYNC signals act like blanking signals since all the data received during HSYNC/VSYNC active periods are ignored. In order to correctly transfer images into the DMA/RAM buffer, data transfer is synchronized with the VSYNC signal. When the hardware synchronisation mode is selected, and capture is enabled (CAPTURE bit set in DCMI_CR), data transfer is synchronized with the deactivation of the VSYNC signal (next start of frame). Transfer can then be continuous, with successive frames transferred by DMA to successive buffers or the same/circular buffer. To allow the DMA management of successive frames, a VSIF (Vertical synchronization interrupt flag) is activated at the end of each frame.

Embedded data synchronization mode

In this synchronisation mode, the data flow is synchronised using 32-bit codes embedded in the data flow. These codes use the 0x00/0xFF values that are not used in data anymore. There are 4 types of codes, all with a 0xFF0000XY format. The embedded synchronization codes are supported only in 8-bit parallel data width capture (in the DCMI_CR register, the EDM[1:0] bits should be programmed to 00). For other data widths, this mode generates unpredictable results and must not be used. Note: Camera modules can have 8 such codes (in interleaved mode). For this reason, the interleaved mode is not supported by the camera interface (otherwise, every other halfframe would be discarded).

Mode 2 Four embedded codes signal the following events Frame start (FS) Frame end (FE) Line start (LS) Line end (LE)

The XY values in the 0xFF0000XY format of the four codes are programmable (see Section 13.8.7: DCMI embedded synchronization code register (DCMI_ESCR)). A 0xFF value programmed as a frame end means that all the unused codes are interpreted as valid frame end codes. In this mode, once the camera interface has been enabled, the frame capture starts after the first occurrence of the frame end (FE) code followed by a frame start (FS) code.

Mode 1 An alternative coding is the camera mode 1. This mode is ITU656 compatible. The codes signal another set of events: SAV (active line) - line start EAV (active line) - line end SAV (blanking) - end of line during interframe blanking period EAV (blanking) - end of line during interframe blanking period

335/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI) This mode can be supported by programming the following codes:

FS 0xFF FE 0xFF LS SAV (active) LE EAV (active)

An embedded unmask code is also implemented for frame/line start and frame/line end codes. Using it, it is possible to compare only the selected unmasked bits with the programmed code. You can therefore select a bit to compare in the embedded code and detect a frame/line start or frame/line end. This means that there can be different codes for the frame/line start and frame/line end with the unmasked bit position remaining the same.

Example
FS = 0xA5 Unmask code for FS = 0x10 In this case the frame start code is embedded in the bit 4 of the frame start code.

13.5.4

Capture modes
This interface supports two types of capture: snapshot (single frame) and continuous grab.

Snapshot mode (single frame)

In this mode, a single frame is captured (CM = 1 in the DCMI_CR register). After the CAPTURE bit is set in DCMI_CR, the interface waits for the detection of a start of frame before sampling the data. The camera interface is automatically disabled (CAPTURE bit cleared in DCMI_CR) after receiving the first complete frame. An interrupt is generated (IT_FRAME) if it is enabled. In case of an overrun, the frame is lost and the CAPTURE bit is cleared. Figure 66. Frame capture waveforms in Snapshot mode

DCMI_HSYNC

DCMI_VSYNC

Frame 1 captured

Frame 2 not captured

ai15832

1. Here, the active state of DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC is 1. 2. DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC can change states at the same time.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

336/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

Continuous grab mode

In this mode (CM bit = 0 in DCMI_CR), once the CAPTURE bit has been set in DCMI_CR, the grabbing process starts on the next VSYNC or embedded frame start depending on the mode. The process continues until the CAPTURE bit is cleared in DCMI_CR. Once the CAPTURE bit has been cleared, the grabbing process continues until the end of the current frame. Figure 67. Frame capture waveforms in continuous grab mode

DCMI_HSYNC

DCMI_VSYNC

Frame 1 captured

Frame 2 captured
ai15833

1. Here, the active state of DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC is 1. 2. DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC can change states at the same time.

In continuous grab mode, you can configure the FCRC bits in DCMI_CR to grab all pictures, every second picture or one out of four pictures to decrease the frame capture rate. Note: In the hardware synchronization mode (ESS = 0 in DCMI_CR), the IT_VSYNC interrupt is generated (if enabled) even when CAPTURE = 0 in DCMI_CR so, to reduce the frame capture rate even further, the IT_VSYNC interrupt can be used to count the number of frames between 2 captures in conjunction with the Snapshot mode. This is not allowed by embedded data synchronization mode.

13.5.5

Crop feature
With the crop feature, the camera interface can select a rectangular window from the received image. The start (upper left corner) coordinates and size (horizontal dimension in number of pixel clocks and vertical dimension in number of lines) are specified using two 32bit registers (DCMI_CWSTRT and DCMI_CWSIZE). The size of the window is specified in number of pixel clocks (horizontal dimension) and in number of lines (vertical dimension). Figure 68. Coordinates and size of the window after cropping

VST bit in DCMI_CSTRT

VLINE bit in DCMI_CSIZE HOFFCNT bit in DCMI_CSTRT CAPCNT bit in DCMI_CSIZE

ai15834

337/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI) These registers specify the coordinates of the starting point of the capture window as a line number (in the frame, starting from 0) and a number of pixel clocks (on the line, starting from 0), and the size of the window as a line number and a number of pixel clocks. The CAPCNT value can only be a multiple of 4 (two least significant bits are forced to 0) to allow the correct transfer of data through the DMA. If the VSYNC signal goes active before the number of lines is specified in the DCMI_CWSIZE register, then the capture stops and an IT_FRAME interrupt is generated when enabled. Figure 69. Data capture waveforms
DCMI_HSYNC

DCMI_VSYNC
HOFFCNT CAPCNT

Data not captured in this phase Data captured in this phase

ai15833

1. Here, the active state of DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC is 1. 2. DCMI_HSYNC and DCMI_VSYNC can change states at the same time.

13.5.6

JPEG format
To allow JPEG image reception, it is necessary to set the JPEG bit in the DCMI_CR register. JPEG images are not stored as lines and frames, so the VSYNC signal is used to start the capture while HSYNC serves as a data enable signal. The number of bytes in a line may not be a multiple of 4, you should therefore be careful when handling this case since a DMA request is generated each time a complete 32-bit word has been constructed from the captured data. When an end of frame is detected and the 32-bit word to be transferred has not been completely received, the remaining data are padded with 0s and a DMA request is generated. The crop feature and embedded synchronization codes cannot be used in the JPEG format.

13.5.7

FIFO
A four-word FIFO is implemented to manage data rate transfers on the AHB. The DCMI features a simple FIFO controller with a read pointer incremented each time the camera interface reads from the AHB, and a write pointer incremented each time the camera interface writes to the FIFO. There is no overrun protection to prevent the data from being overwritten if the AHB interface does not sustain the data transfer rate. In case of overrun or errors in the synchronization signals, the FIFO is reset and the DCMI interface waits for a new start of frame.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

338/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

13.6
13.6.1

Data format description

Data formats
Three types of data are supported:

8-bit progressive video: either monochrome or raw Bayer format YCbCr 4:2:2 progressive video RGB565 progressive video. A pixel coded in 16 bits (5 bits for blue, 5 bits for red, 6 bits for green) takes two clock cycles to be transferred.

Compressed data: JPEG For B&W, YCbCr or RGB data, the maximum input size is 2048 2048 pixels. No limit in JPEG compressed mode. For monochrome, RGB & YCbCr, the frame buffer is stored in raster mode. 32-bit words are used. Only the little endian format is supported. Figure 70. Pixel raster scan order
Word0 Word1 Word2 Pixel raster scan order (increasing addresses) Pixel row 0

Pixel row n 1
ai15848

13.6.2

Monochrome format
Characteristics:

Raster format 8 bits per pixel

Table 66 shows how the data are stored. Table 66. Data storage in monochrome progressive video format
31:24 n+3 n+7 23:16 n+2 n+6 15:8 n+1 n+5 7:0 n n+4

Byte address 0 4

13.6.3

RGB format
Characteristics:

Raster format RGB Interleaved: one buffer: R, G & B interleaved: BRGBRGBRG, etc. Optimized for display output

339/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI) The RGB planar format is compatible with standard OS frame buffer display formats. Only 16 BPP (bits per pixel): RGB565 (2 pixels per 32-bit word) is supported. The 24 BPP (palletized format) and grayscale formats are not supported. Pixels are stored in a raster scan order, that is from top to bottom for pixel rows, and from left to right within a pixel row. Pixel components are R (red), G (green) and B (blue). All components have the same spatial resolution (4:4:4 format). A frame is stored in a single part, with the components interleaved on a pixel basis. Table 67 shows how the data are stored. Table 67. Data storage in RGB progressive video format
31:27 Red n + 1 Red n + 4 26:21 Green n + 1 Green n + 3 20:16 Blue n + 1 Blue n + 3 15:11 Red n Red n + 2 10:5 Green n Green n + 2 4:0 Blue n Blue n + 2

Byte address 0 4

13.6.4

YCbCr format
Characteristics:

Raster format YCbCr 4:2:2 Interleaved: one Buffer: Y, Cb & Cr interleaved: CbYCrYCbYCr, etc.

Pixel components are Y (luminance or luma), Cb and Cr (chrominance or chroma blue and red). Each component is encoded in 8 bits. Luma and chroma are stored together (interleaved) as shown in Table 68. Table 68. Data storage in YCbCr progressive video format
31:24 Yn+1 Yn+3 23:16 Cr n Cr n + 2 15:8 Yn Yn+2 7:0 Cb n Cb n + 2

Byte address 0 4

13.7

DCMI interrupts
Five interrupts are generated. All interrupts are maskable by software. The global interrupt (IT_DCMI) is the OR of all the individual interrupts. Table 69 gives the list of all interrupts. Table 69. DCMI interrupts
Interrupt event Indicates the end of line Indicates the end of frame capture indicates the overrun of data reception Indicates the synchronization frame Indicates the detection of an error in the embedded synchronization frame detection Logic OR of the previous interrupts

Interrupt name IT_LINE IT_FRAME IT_OVR IT_VSYNC IT_ERR IT_DCMI

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

340/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

13.8

DCMI register description

All DCMI registers have to be accessed as 32-bit words, otherwise a bus error occurs.

13.8.1

DCMI control register 1 (DCMI_CR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ENABLE Reserved

7 VSPOL

6 HSPOL

5 PCKPOL

4 ESS

3 JPEG

2 CROP

1 CM rw

0 CAPTURE rw

EDM

FCRC

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 ENABLE: DCMI enable 0: DCMI disabled 1: DCMI enabled Note: The DCMI configuration registers should be programmed correctly before enabling this Bit Bit 13: 12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. 11:10 EDM[1:0]: Extended data mode 00: Interface captures 8-bit data on every pixel clock 01: Interface captures 10-bit data on every pixel clock 10: Interface captures 12-bit data on every pixel clock 11: Interface captures 14-bit data on every pixel clock 9:8 FCRC[1:0]: Frame capture rate control These bits define the frequency of frame capture. They are meaningful only in Continuous grab mode. They are ignored in snapshot mode. 00: All frames are captured 01: Every alternate frame captured (50% bandwidth reduction) 10: One frame in 4 frames captured (75% bandwidth reduction) 11: reserved Bit 7 VSPOL: Vertical synchronization polarity This bit indicates the level on the VSYNC pin when the data are not valid on the parallel interface. 0: VSYNC active low 1: VSYNC active high Bit 6 HSPOL: Horizontal synchronization polarity This bit indicates the level on the HSYNC pin when the data are not valid on the parallel interface. 0: HSYNC active low 1: HSYNC active high Bit 5 PCKPOL: Pixel clock polarity This bit configures the capture edge of the pixel clock 0: Falling edge active. 1: Rising edge active.

341/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

Bit 4 ESS: Embedded synchronization select 0: Hardware synchronization data capture (frame/line start/stop) is synchronized with the HSYNC/VSYNC signals. 1: Embedded synchronization data capture is synchronized with synchronization codes embedded in the data flow. Note: Valid only for 8-bit parallel data. HSPOL/VSPOL are ignored when the ESS bit is set. This bit is disabled in JPEG mode. Bit 3 JPEG: JPEG format 0: Uncompressed video format 1: This bit is used for JPEG data transfers. The HSYNC signal is used as data enable. The crop and embedded synchronization features (ESS bit) cannot be used in this mode. Bits 2 CROP: Crop feature 0: The full image is captured. In this case the total number of bytes in an image frame should be a multiple of 4 1: Only the data inside the window specified by the crop register will be captured. If the size of the crop window exceeds the picture size, then only the picture size is captured. Bit 1 CM: Capture mode 0: Continuous grab mode - The received data are transferred into the destination memory through the DMA. The buffer location and mode (linear or circular buffer) is controlled through the system DMA. 1: Snapshot mode (single frame) - Once activated, the interface waits for the start of frame and then transfers a single frame through the DMA. At the end of the frame, the CAPTURE bit is automatically reset. Bit 0 CAPTURE: Capture enable 0: Capture disabled. 1: Capture enabled. The camera interface waits for the first start of frame, then a DMA request is generated to transfer the received data into the destination memory. In snapshot mode, the CAPTURE bit is automatically cleared at the end of the 1st frame received. In continuous grab mode, if the software clears this bit while a capture is ongoing, the bit will be effectively cleared after the frame end. Note: The DMA controller and all DCMI configuration registers should be programmed correctly before enabling this bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

342/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

13.8.2

DCMI status register (DCMI_SR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

2 FNE

1 VSYNC r

0 HSYNC r

Reserved

Bit 31:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 FNE: FIFO not empty This bit gives the status of the FIFO 1: FIFO contains valid data 0: FIFO empty Bit 1 VSYNC This bit gives the state of the VSYNC pin with the correct programmed polarity. When embedded synchronization codes are used, the meaning of this bit is the following: 0: active frame 1: synchronization between frames In case of embedded synchronization, this bit is meaningful only if the CAPTURE bit in DCMI_CR is set. Bit 0 HSYNC This bit gives the state of the HSYNC pin with the correct programmed polarity. When embedded synchronization codes are used, the meaning of this bit is the following: 0: active line 1: synchronization between lines In case of embedded synchronization, this bit is meaningful only if the CAPTURE bit in DCMI_CR is set.

343/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

13.8.3

DCMI raw interrupt status register (DCMI_RIS)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved

4 LINE_RIS

3 VSYNC_RIS

2 ERR_RIS

1 OVR_RIS r

0 FRAME_RIS r

DCMI_RIS gives the raw interrupt status and is accessible in read only. When read, this register returns the status of the corresponding interrupt before masking with the DCMI_IER register value.
Bit 31:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 LINE_RIS: Line raw interrupt status This bit gets set when the HSYNC signal changes from the inactive state to the active state. It goes high even if the line is not valid. In the case of embedded synchronization, this bit is set only if the CAPTURE bit in DCMI_CR is set. It is cleared by writing a 1 to the LINE_ISC bit in DCMI_ICR. Bit 3 VSYNC_RIS: VSYNC raw interrupt status This bit is set when the VSYNC signal changes from the inactive state to the active state. In the case of embedded synchronization, this bit is set only if the CAPTURE bit is set in DCMI_CR. It is cleared by writing a 1 to the VSYNC_ISC bit in DCMI_ICR. Bit 2 ERR_RIS: Synchronization error raw interrupt status 0: No synchronization error detected 1: Embedded synchronization characters are not received in the correct order. This bit is valid only in the embedded synchronization mode. It is cleared by writing a 1 to the ERR_ISC bit in DCMI_ICR. Note: This bit is available only in embedded synchronization mode. Bit 1 OVR_RIS: Overrun raw interrupt status 0: No data buffer overrun occurred 1: A data buffer overrun occurred and the data FIFO is corrupted. This bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the OVR_ISC bit in DCMI_ICR. Bit 0 FRAME_RIS: Capture complete raw interrupt status 0: No new capture 1: A frame has been captured. This bit is set when a frame or window has been captured. In case of a cropped window, this bit is set at the end of line of the last line in the crop. It is set even if the captured frame is empty (e.g. window cropped outside the frame). This bit is cleared by writing a 1 to the FRAME_ISC bit in DCMI_ICR.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

344/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

13.8.4

DCMI interrupt enable register (DCMI_IER)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

4 LINE_IE

3 VSYNC_IE

2 ERR_IE

1 OVR_IE rw

0 FRAME_IE rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

The DCMI_IER register is used to enable interrupts. When one of the DCMI_IER bits is set, the corresponding interrupt is enabled. This register is accessible in both read and write.
Bit 31:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 LINE_IE: Line interrupt enable 0: No interrupt generation when the line is received 1: An Interrupt is generated when a line has been completely received Bit 3 VSYNC_IE: VSYNC interrupt enable 0: No interrupt generation 1: An interrupt is generated on each VSYNC transition from the inactive to the active state The active state of the VSYNC signal is defined by the VSPOL bit. Bit 2 ERR_IE: Synchronization error interrupt enable 0: No interrupt generation 1: An interrupt is generated if the embedded synchronization codes are not received in the correct order. Note: This bit is available only in embedded synchronization mode. Bit 1 OVR_IE: Overrun interrupt enable 0: No interrupt generation 1: An interrupt is generated if the DMA was not able to transfer the last data before new data (32-bit) are received. Bit 0 FRAME_IE: Capture complete interrupt enable 0: No interrupt generation 1: An interrupt is generated at the end of each received frame/crop window (in crop mode).

345/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

13.8.5

DCMI masked interrupt status register (DCMI_MIS)

This DCMI_MIS register is a read-only register. When read, it returns the current masked status value (depending on the value in DCMI_IER) of the corresponding interrupt. A bit in this register is set if the corresponding enable bit in DCMI_IER is set and the corresponding bit in DCMI_RIS is set. Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

4 LINE_MIS

3 VSYNC_MIS

2 ERR_MIS

1 OVR_MIS r

0 FRAME_MIS r

Reserved

Bit 31:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 LINE_MIS: Line masked interrupt status This bit gives the status of the masked line interrupt 0: No interrupt generation when the line is received 1: An Interrupt is generated when a line has been completely received and the LINE_IE bit is set in DCMI_IER. Bit 3 VSYNC_MIS: VSYNC masked interrupt status This bit gives the status of the masked VSYNC interrupt 0: No interrupt is generated on VSYNC transitions 1: An interrupt is generated on each VSYNC transition from the inactive to the active state and the VSYNC_IE bit is set in DCMI_IER. The active state of the VSYNC signal is defined by the VSPOL bit. Bit 2 ERR_MIS: Synchronization error masked interrupt status This bit gives the status of the masked synchronization error interrupt 0: No interrupt is generated on a synchronization error 1: An interrupt is generated if the embedded synchronization codes are not received in the correct order and the ERR_IE bit in DCMI_IER is set. Note: This bit is available only in embedded synchronization mode. Bit 1 OVR_MIS: Overrun masked interrupt status This bit gives the status of the masked overflow interrupt 0: No interrupt is generated on overrun 1: An interrupt is generated if the DMA was not able to transfer the last data before new data (32-bit) are received and the OVR_IE bit is set in DCMI_IER. Bit 0 FRAME_MIS: Capture complete masked interrupt status This bit gives the status of the masked capture complete interrupt 0: No interrupt is generated after a complete capture 1: An interrupt is generated at the end of each received frame/crop window (in crop mode) and the FRAME_IE bit is set in DCMI_IER.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

346/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

13.8.6

DCMI interrupt clear register (DCMI_ICR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

4 LINE_ISC

3 VSYNC_ISC

2 ERR_ISC

1 OVR_ISC 1 rw

0 FRAME_ISC 0 rw

Reserved

w w w w w

The DCMI_ICR register is write-only. Writing a 1 into a bit of this register clears the corresponding bit in the DCMI_RIS and DCMI_MIS registers. Writing a 0 has no effect.
Bit 15:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 LINE_ISC: line interrupt status clear Writing a 1 into this bit clears LINE_RIS in the DCMI_RIS register Bit 3 VSYNC_ISC: Vertical synch interrupt status clear Writing a 1 into this bit clears the VSYNC_RIS bit in DCMI_RIS Bit 2 ERR_ISC: Synchronization error interrupt status clear Writing a 1 into this bit clears the ERR_RIS bit in DCMI_RIS Note: This bit is available only in embedded synchronization mode. Bit 1 OVR_ISC: Overrun interrupt status clear Writing a 1 into this bit clears the OVR_RIS bit in DCMI_RIS Bits 0 FRAME_ISC: Capture complete interrupt status clear Writing a 1 into this bit clears the FRAME_RIS bit in DCMI_RIS

13.8.7

DCMI embedded synchronization code register (DCMI_ESCR)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FEC rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw LEC rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw LSC rw rw rw

FSC rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

347/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

Bit 31:24 FEC: Frame end delimiter code This byte specifies the code of the frame end delimiter. The code consists of 4 bytes in the form of 0xFF, 0x00, 0x00, FEC. If FEC is programmed to 0xFF, all the unused codes (0xFF0000XY) are interpreted as frame end delimiters. Bit 23:16 LEC: Line end delimiter code This byte specifies the code of the line end delimiter. The code consists of 4 bytes in the form of 0xFF, 0x00, 0x00, LEC. Bit 15:8 LSC: Line start delimiter code This byte specifies the code of the line start delimiter. The code consists of 4 bytes in the form of 0xFF, 0x00, 0x00, LSC. Bit 7:0 FSC: Frame start delimiter code This byte specifies the code of the frame start delimiter. The code consists of 4 bytes in the form of 0xFF, 0x00, 0x00, FSC. If FSC is programmed to 0xFF, no frame start delimiter is detected. But, the 1st occurrence of LSC after an FEC code will be interpreted as a start of frame delimiter.

13.8.8

DCMI embedded synchronization unmask register (DCMI_ESUR)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FEU rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw LEU rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw LSU rw rw rw

FSU rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

348/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

Bit 31:24 FEU: Frame end delimiter unmask This byte specifies the mask to be applied to the code of the frame end delimiter. 0: The corresponding bit in the FEC byte in DCMI_ESCR is masked while comparing the frame end delimiter with the received data. 1: The corresponding bit in the FEC byte in DCMI_ESCR is compared while comparing the frame end delimiter with the received data Bit 23:16 LEU: Line end delimiter unmask This byte specifies the mask to be applied to the code of the line end delimiter. 0: The corresponding bit in the LEC byte in DCMI_ESCR is masked while comparing the line end delimiter with the received data 1: The corresponding bit in the LEC byte in DCMI_ESCR is compared while comparing the line end delimiter with the received data Bit 15:8 LSU: Line start delimiter unmask This byte specifies the mask to be applied to the code of the line start delimiter. 0: The corresponding bit in the LSC byte in DCMI_ESCR is masked while comparing the line start delimiter with the received data 1: The corresponding bit in the LSC byte in DCMI_ESCR is compared while comparing the line start delimiter with the received data Bit 7:0 FSU: Frame start delimiter unmask This byte specifies the mask to be applied to the code of the frame start delimiter. 0: The corresponding bit in the FSC byte in DCMI_ESCR is masked while comparing the frame start delimiter with the received data 1: The corresponding bit in the FSC byte in DCMI_ESCR is compared while comparing the frame start delimiter with the received data

349/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

13.8.9

DCMI crop window start (DCMI_CWSTRT)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 VST[12:0 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Reserv ed rw rw

HOFFCNT[13:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 28:16 VST[12:0]: Vertical start line count The image capture starts with this line number. Previous line data are ignored. 0x0000 => line 1 0x0001 => line 2 0x0002 => line 3 .... Bits 15:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13:0 HOFFCNT[13:0]: Horizontal offset count This value gives the number of pixel clocks to count before starting a capture.

13.8.10

DCMI crop window size (DCMI_CWSIZE)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved VLINE13:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw Reserved

CAPCNT[13:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 29:16 VLINE[13:0]: Vertical line count This value gives the number of lines to be captured from the starting point. 0x0000 => 1 line 0x0001 => 2 lines 0x0002 => 3 lines .... Bits 15:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13:0 CAPCNT[13:0]: Capture count This value gives the number of pixel clocks to be captured from the starting point on the same line. It value should corresponds to word-aligned data for different widths of parallel interfaces. 0x0000 => 1 pixel 0x0001 => 2 pixels 0x0002 => 3 pixels ....

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

350/1422

Digital camera interface (DCMI)

RM0090

13.8.11

DCMI data register (DCMI_DR)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000 0x0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Byte3 r r r r r r r r r r r Byte2 r r r r r r r r Byte1 r r r

Byte0 r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:24 Data byte 3 Bit 23:16 Data byte 2 Bits 15:8 Data byte 1 Bit 7:0 Data byte 0

The digital camera Interface packages all the received data in 32-bit format before requesting a DMA transfer. A 4-word deep FIFO is available to leave enough time for DMA transfers and avoid DMA overrun conditions.

13.8.12

DCMI register map

Table 70 summarizes the DCMI registers.

Table 70.
Offset

DCMI register map and reset values

CAPTURE 0 HSYNC 0 FRAME_RIS 0 FRAME_IE 0 FRAME_MIS 0 FRAME_ISC 0 PCKPOL ENABLE

HSPOL

VSPOL

Reserved

CROP 0 FNE 0 ERR_RIS 0 ERR_IE 0 ERR_MIS 0 ERR_ISC 0

JPEG 0

ESS

0x00

DCMI_CR

Reserved

EDM FCRC

Reset value DCMI_SR Reset value

0x04

Reserved

VSYNC_RIS

LINE_RIS

0x08

DCMI_RIS

Reserved

Reset value

0 LINE_IE

0 VSYNC_IE

0x0C

DCMI_IER

Reserved

Reset value

0 LINE_MIS

0 VSYNC_MIS

0x10

DCMI_MIS

Reserved

Reset value

0 LINE_ISC

0 VSYNC_ISC

0x14

DCMI_ICR

Reserved

Reset value

351/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

OVR_ISC 0

OVR_MIS 0

OVR_IE 0

OVR_RIS 0

VSYNC 0

CM 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Register

RM0090 Table 70.

Offset
0x18

Digital camera interface (DCMI) DCMI register map and reset values (continued)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FEC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LEC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FSC 0 0 0 0 0 FEU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LEU 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 LSU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FSU 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 VST[12:0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HOFFCNT[13:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VLINE13:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved CAPCNT[13:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Byte3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Byte2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Byte1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Byte0 0 0 0 0 0

Register
DCMI_ESCR Reset value DCMI_ESUR Reset value DCMI_CWSTRT Reset value DCMI_CWSIZE Reset value DCMI_DR Reset value

0x1C

0x20

0x24

0x28

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

352/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

14

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

14.1

TIM1&TIM8 introduction
The advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) consist of a 16-bit auto-reload counter driven by a programmable prescaler. It may be used for a variety of purposes, including measuring the pulse lengths of input signals (input capture) or generating output waveforms (output compare, PWM, complementary PWM with dead-time insertion). Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be modulated from a few microseconds to several milliseconds using the timer prescaler and the RCC clock controller prescalers. The advanced-control (TIM1&TIM8) and general-purpose (TIMx) timers are completely independent, and do not share any resources. They can be synchronized together as described in Section 14.3.20.

14.2

TIM1&TIM8 main features

TIM1&TIM8 timer features include:

16-bit up, down, up/down auto-reload counter. 16-bit programmable prescaler allowing dividing (also on the fly) the counter clock frequency either by any factor between 1 and 65536. Up to 4 independent channels for: Input Capture Output Compare PWM generation (Edge and Center-aligned Mode) One-pulse mode output

Complementary outputs with programmable dead-time Synchronization circuit to control the timer with external signals and to interconnect several timers together. Repetition counter to update the timer registers only after a given number of cycles of the counter. Break input to put the timers output signals in reset state or in a known state.

353/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Interrupt/DMA generation on the following events:

Update: counter overflow/underflow, counter initialization (by software or internal/external trigger) Trigger event (counter start, stop, initialization or count by internal/external trigger) Input capture Output compare Break input

Supports incremental (quadrature) encoder and hall-sensor circuitry for positioning purposes Trigger input for external clock or cycle-by-cycle current management

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

354/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 71. Advanced-control timer block diagram

Internal Clock (CK_INT)

RM0090

CK_TIM18 from RCC

ETRP

ETRF Polarity Selection & Edge Detector & Prescaler Input Filter

TIMx_ETR

ETR

Trigger Controller TRGO

ITR0 ITR1 ITR TRC

TGI TRGI Slave Mode Controller

to other timers to DAC/ADC

Reset, Enable, Up/Down, Count

ITR2
ITR3 TI1F_ED

TI1FP1 TI2FP2

Encoder Interface

REP Register U AutoReload Register Stop, Clear or Up/Down Repetition counter UI U

CK_PSC

Prescaler

PSC

CK_CNT
CC1I

+/-

COUNTER CC1I

CNT

DTG[7:0] registers

XOR

TI1

Input Filter & Edge detector

TI1FP1 TI1FP2 TRC

IC1
Prescaler

IC1PS U
CC2I

TIMx_CH1
DTG

Capture/Compare 1 Register

OC1REF

output OC1
control OC1N

TIMx_CH1N TIMx_CH2

TIMx_CH1

CC2I Capture/Compare 2 Register OC2REF DTG

TIMx_CH2

TI2

Input Filter & Edge detector

TI2FP1 TI2FP2 TRC

IC2
Prescaler

IC2PS U

output OC2
control OC2N

TIMx_CH2N TIMx_CH3

CC3I

CC3I Capture/Compare 3 Register OC3REF DTG

TIMx_CH3

TI3

Input Filter & Edge detector

TI3FP3 TI3FP4 TRC

IC3

Prescaler

IC3PS

output OC3
control OC3N

TIMx_CH3N

CC4I

CC4I

TIMx_CH4

TI4

Input Filter & Edge detector

TI4FP3 TI4FP4 TRC

IC4
Prescaler

IC4PS

U
Capture/Compare 4 Register

TIMx_CH4
OC4REF

output
control OC4

ETRF

TIMx_BKIN

BRK

Polarity Selection

BI

Clock failure event from clock controller CSS (Clock Security system

Notes:
Reg Preload registers transferred to active registers on U event according to control bit event interrupt & DMA output

355/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.3
14.3.1

TIM1&TIM8 functional description

Time-base unit
The main block of the programmable advanced-control timer is a 16-bit counter with its related auto-reload register. The counter can count up, down or both up and down. The counter clock can be divided by a prescaler. The counter, the auto-reload register and the prescaler register can be written or read by software. This is true even when the counter is running. The time-base unit includes:

Counter register (TIMx_CNT) Prescaler register (TIMx_PSC) Auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR) Repetition counter register (TIMx_RCR)

The auto-reload register is preloaded. Writing to or reading from the auto-reload register accesses the preload register. The content of the preload register are transferred into the shadow register permanently or at each update event (UEV), depending on the auto-reload preload enable bit (ARPE) in TIMx_CR1 register. The update event is sent when the counter reaches the overflow (or underflow when downcounting) and if the UDIS bit equals 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. It can also be generated by software. The generation of the update event is described in detailed for each configuration. The counter is clocked by the prescaler output CK_CNT, which is enabled only when the counter enable bit (CEN) in TIMx_CR1 register is set (refer also to the slave mode controller description to get more details on counter enabling). Note that the counter starts counting 1 clock cycle after setting the CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.

Prescaler description
The prescaler can divide the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536. It is based on a 16-bit counter controlled through a 16-bit register (in the TIMx_PSC register). It can be changed on the fly as this control register is buffered. The new prescaler ratio is taken into account at the next update event. Figure 72 and Figure 73 give some examples of the counter behavior when the prescaler ratio is changed on the fly:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

356/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Figure 72. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 1 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01 02 03

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Figure 73. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 3 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3

14.3.2

Counter modes
Upcounting mode
In upcounting mode, the counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register), then restarts from 0 and generates a counter overflow event. If the repetition counter is used, the update event (UEV) is generated after upcounting is repeated for the number of times programmed in the repetition counter register plus one (TIMx_RCR+1). Else the update event is generated at each counter overflow. Setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) also generates an update event. The UEV event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the

357/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) preload registers. Then no update event occurs until the UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter restarts from 0, as well as the counter of the prescaler (but the prescale rate does not change). In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event. When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The repetition counter is reloaded with the content of TIMx_RCR register, The auto-reload shadow register is updated with the preload value (TIMx_ARR), The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register).

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR=0x36. Figure 74. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Figure 75. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0034 0035 0036 0000 0001 0002 0003

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

358/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 76. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0035 0036 0000 0001

RM0090

Figure 77. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

CK_PSC

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 1F 20 00

Figure 78. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded)
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload register FF 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

359/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 79. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded)
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register F5 36 F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Auto-reload shadow register

F5

36

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

Downcounting mode
In downcounting mode, the counter counts from the auto-reload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register) down to 0, then restarts from the auto-reload value and generates a counter underflow event. If the repetition counter is used, the update event (UEV) is generated after downcounting is repeated for the number of times programmed in the repetition counter register plus one (TIMx_RCR+1). Else the update event is generated at each counter underflow. Setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) also generates an update event. The UEV update event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter restarts from the current auto-reload value, whereas the counter of the prescaler restarts from 0 (but the prescale rate doesnt change). In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event. When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The repetition counter is reloaded with the content of TIMx_RCR register The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register) The auto-reload active register is updated with the preload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register). Note that the auto-reload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the next period is the expected one

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

360/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR=0x36. Figure 80. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow (cnt_udf) Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 05 04 03 02 01 00 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 2F

Figure 81. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0002 0001 0000 0036 0035 0034 0033

Figure 82. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4

CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0001 0000 0036 0035

361/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 83. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N
CK_PSC

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 20 1F 00 36

Figure 84. Counter timing diagram, update event when repetition counter is not used
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload register FF 36 05 04 03 02 01 00 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 2F

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

Center-aligned mode (up/down counting)

In center-aligned mode, the counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register) 1, generates a counter overflow event, then counts from the autoreload value down to 1 and generates a counter underflow event. Then it restarts counting from 0. Center-aligned mode is active when the CMS bits in TIMx_CR1 register are not equal to '00'. The Output compare interrupt flag of channels configured in output is set when: the counter counts down (Center aligned mode 1, CMS = "01"), the counter counts up (Center aligned mode 2, CMS = "10") the counter counts up and down (Center aligned mode 3, CMS = "11"). In this mode, the DIR direction bit in the TIMx_CR1 register cannot be written. It is updated by hardware and gives the current direction of the counter. The update event can be generated at each counter overflow and at each counter underflow or by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) also generates an update event. In this case, the counter restarts counting from 0, as well as the counter of the prescaler.
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 362/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

The UEV update event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter continues counting up and down, based on the current auto-reload value. In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an UEV update event but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event. When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The repetition counter is reloaded with the content of TIMx_RCR register The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register) The auto-reload active register is updated with the preload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register). Note that if the update source is a counter overflow, the autoreload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the next period is the expected one (the counter is loaded with the new value).

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies. Figure 85. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1, TIMx_ARR = 0x6
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 04 03 02 01 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 05 04 03

1. Here, center-aligned mode 1 is used (for more details refer to Section 14.4: TIM1&TIM8 registers on page 394).

363/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 86. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0003 0002 0001 0000 0001 0002 0003

Figure 87. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4, TIMx_ARR=0x36

CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0034 0035 0036 0035

1.

Center-aligned mode 2 or 3 is used with an UIF on overflow.

Figure 88. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

CK_PSC

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 20 1F 01 00

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

364/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Figure 89. Counter timing diagram, update event with ARPE=1 (counter underflow)
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register FD 36 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR Auto-reload active register FD 36

Figure 90. Counter timing diagram, Update event with ARPE=1 (counter overflow)
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register FD 36 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 2F

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR Auto-reload active register FD 36

14.3.3

Repetition counter
Section 14.3.1: Time-base unit describes how the update event (UEV) is generated with respect to the counter overflows/underflows. It is actually generated only when the repetition counter has reached zero. This can be useful when generating PWM signals. This means that data are transferred from the preload registers to the shadow registers (TIMx_ARR auto-reload register, TIMx_PSC prescaler register, but also TIMx_CCRx capture/compare registers in compare mode) every N+1 counter overflows or underflows, where N is the value in the TIMx_RCR repetition counter register.

365/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 The repetition counter is decremented:

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

At each counter overflow in upcounting mode, At each counter underflow in downcounting mode, At each counter overflow and at each counter underflow in center-aligned mode. Although this limits the maximum number of repetition to 128 PWM cycles, it makes it possible to update the duty cycle twice per PWM period. When refreshing compare registers only once per PWM period in center-aligned mode, maximum resolution is 2xTck, due to the symmetry of the pattern.

The repetition counter is an auto-reload type; the repetition rate is maintained as defined by the TIMx_RCR register value (refer to Figure 91). When the update event is generated by software (by setting the UG bit in TIMx_EGR register) or by hardware through the slave mode controller, it occurs immediately whatever the value of the repetition counter is and the repetition counter is reloaded with the content of the TIMx_RCR register. In center-aligned mode, for odd values of RCR, the update event occurs either on the overflow or on the underflow depending on when the RCR register was written and when the counter was started. If the RCR was written before starting the counter, the UEV occurs on the overflow. If the RCR was written after starting the counter, the UEV occurs on the underflow. For example for RCR = 3, the UEV is generated on each 4th overflow or underflow event depending on when RCR was written. Figure 91. Update rate examples depending on mode and TIMx_RCR register settings
Center-aligned mode

Edge-aligned mode Upcounting Downcounting

Counter TIMx_CNT

TIMx_RCR = 0 UEV

TIMx_RCR = 1 UEV

TIMx_RCR = 2 UEV

TIMx_RCR = 3 UEV TIMx_RCR = 3 and re-synchronization

UEV (by SW) (by SW) (by SW)

UEV

Update Event: Preload registers transferred to active registers and update interrupt generated

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

366/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

14.3.4

Clock selection
The counter clock can be provided by the following clock sources:

Internal clock (CK_INT) External clock mode1: external input pin External clock mode2: external trigger input ETR Internal trigger inputs (ITRx): using one timer as prescaler for another timer, for example, you can configure Timer 1 to act as a prescaler for Timer 2. Refer to Using one timer as prescaler for another for more details.

Internal clock source (CK_INT)

If the slave mode controller is disabled (SMS=000), then the CEN, DIR (in the TIMx_CR1 register) and UG bits (in the TIMx_EGR register) are actual control bits and can be changed only by software (except UG which remains cleared automatically). As soon as the CEN bit is written to 1, the prescaler is clocked by the internal clock CK_INT. Figure 92 shows the behavior of the control circuit and the upcounter in normal mode, without prescaler. Figure 92. Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1
Internal clock CEN=CNT_EN UG CNT_INIT Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

External clock source mode 1

This mode is selected when SMS=111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. The counter can count at each rising or falling edge on a selected input. Figure 93. TI2 external clock connection example
TIMx_SMCR TS[2:0] TI2F TI1F TRGI ETRF or or

or ITRx 0xx TI1_ED 100 TI1FP1 101 TI2FP2 110 ETRF 111

encoder mode external clock mode 1 CK_PSC external clock mode 2

TI2F_Rising TI2 Filter Edge Detector TI2F_Falling

0 1

ICF[3:0]

CC2P

TIMx_CCMR1

TIMx_CCER

CK_INT internal clock mode (internal clock) ECE SMS[2:0] TIMx_SMCR

367/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) For example, to configure the upcounter to count in response to a rising edge on the TI2 input, use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Configure channel 2 to detect rising edges on the TI2 input by writing CC2S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Configure the input filter duration by writing the IC2F[3:0] bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (if no filter is needed, keep IC2F=0000). Select rising edge polarity by writing CC2P=0 and CC2NP=0 in the TIMx_CCER register. Configure the timer in external clock mode 1 by writing SMS=111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI2 as the trigger input source by writing TS=110 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

Note:

The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter counts once and the TIF flag is set. The delay between the rising edge on TI2 and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI2 input. Figure 94. Control circuit in external clock mode 1
TI2 CNT_EN Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF 34 35 36

Write TIF=0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

368/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

External clock source mode 2

This mode is selected by writing ECE=1 in the TIMx_SMCR register. The counter can count at each rising or falling edge on the external trigger input ETR. Figure 95 gives an overview of the external trigger input block. Figure 95. External trigger input block
or TI2F TI1F TRGI ETR pin ETR 0 1 ETP TIMx_SMCR ETRP fDTS filter downcounter ETRF CK_INT (internal clock) ETPS[1:0] TIMx_SMCR ETF[3:0] TIMx_SMCR ECE SMS[2:0] TIMx_SMCR or or encoder mode external clock mode 1 CK_PSC external clock mode 2 internal clock mode

divider /1, /2, /4, /8

For example, to configure the upcounter to count each 2 rising edges on ETR, use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. As no filter is needed in this example, write ETF[3:0]=0000 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Set the prescaler by writing ETPS[1:0]=01 in the TIMx_SMCR register Select rising edge detection on the ETR pin by writing ETP=0 in the TIMx_SMCR register Enable external clock mode 2 by writing ECE=1 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The counter counts once each 2 ETR rising edges. The delay between the rising edge on ETR and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on the ETRP signal. Figure 96. Control circuit in external clock mode 2
fCK_INT CNT_EN ETR ETRP ETRF Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register 34 35 36

369/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.3.5

Capture/compare channels
Each Capture/Compare channel is built around a capture/compare register (including a shadow register), a input stage for capture (with digital filter, multiplexing and prescaler) and an output stage (with comparator and output control). Figure 97 to Figure 100 give an overview of one Capture/Compare channel. The input stage samples the corresponding TIx input to generate a filtered signal TIxF. Then, an edge detector with polarity selection generates a signal (TIxFPx) which can be used as trigger input by the slave mode controller or as the capture command. It is prescaled before the capture register (ICxPS). Figure 97. Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage)
TI1F_ED to the slave mode controller TI1F_Rising Edge Detector TI1F_Falling

TI1 fDTS

filter downcounter

TI1F

0 1

TI1FP1 TI2FP1

01 10 IC1 divider /1, /2, /4, /8 IC1PS

ICF[3:0] TIMx_CCMR1

CC1P/CC1NP TIMx_CCER TI2F_rising (from channel 2) TI2F_falling (from channel 2) 0

TRC 11 (from slave mode controller) CC1S[1:0] ICPS[1:0] 1 TIMx_CCMR1 CC1E TIMx_CCER

The output stage generates an intermediate waveform which is then used for reference: OCxRef (active high). The polarity acts at the end of the chain. Figure 98. Capture/compare channel 1 main circuit
APB Bus

MCU-peripheral interface 8 high read CCR1H S read CCR1L R capture_transfer CC1S[1] CC1S[0] IC1PS CC1E Counter CC1G TIM1_EGR input mode compare_transfer read_in_progress (if 16-bit) 8 low write_in_progress S write CCR1H R output mode write CCR1L CC1S[1] CC1S[0] OC1PE OC1PE UEV TIM1_CCMR1 (from time base unit)

Capture/compare preload register

Capture/compare shadow register capture comparator CNT>CCR1 CNT=CCR1

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

370/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 99. Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1 to 3)
ETR To the master mode controller 0 OC1_DT CNT>CCR1 Output mode OC1REF CNT=CCR1 controller Dead-time generator OC1N_DT

RM0090

0 x0 01 11 1 CC1P TIM1_CCER 11 10 0 1 0x

Output enable circuit

OC1

Output enable circuit

OC1N

CC1NE CC1E TIM1_CCER OC1CE OC1M[2:0] TIM1_CCMR1 DTG[7:0] TIM1_BDTR CC1NE CC1E TIM1_CCER CC1NP MOE OSSI OSSR TIM1_BDTR TIM1_CCER

Figure 100. Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 4)

ETR To the master mode controller 0 1 CC4P TIM1_CCER

Output enable circuit

OC4

CNT > CCR4

Output mode OC4 REF CNT = CCR4 controller

CC4E TIM1_CCER OC2M[2:0] TIM1_CCMR2 MOE OSSI TIM1_BDTR OIS4 TIM1_CR2

The capture/compare block is made of one preload register and one shadow register. Write and read always access the preload register. In capture mode, captures are actually done in the shadow register, which is copied into the preload register. In compare mode, the content of the preload register is copied into the shadow register which is compared to the counter.

14.3.6

Input capture mode

In Input capture mode, the Capture/Compare Registers (TIMx_CCRx) are used to latch the value of the counter after a transition detected by the corresponding ICx signal. When a capture occurs, the corresponding CCXIF flag (TIMx_SR register) is set and an interrupt or a DMA request can be sent if they are enabled. If a capture occurs while the CCxIF flag was already high, then the over-capture flag CCxOF (TIMx_SR register) is set. CCxIF can be cleared by software by writing it to 0 or by reading the captured data stored in the TIMx_CCRx register. CCxOF is cleared when you write it to 0.

371/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) The following example shows how to capture the counter value in TIMx_CCR1 when TI1 input rises. To do this, use the following procedure:

Select the active input: TIMx_CCR1 must be linked to the TI1 input, so write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. As soon as CC1S becomes different from 00, the channel is configured in input and the TIMx_CCR1 register becomes read-only. Program the input filter duration you need with respect to the signal you connect to the timer (by programming ICxF bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register if the input is a TIx input). Lets imagine that, when toggling, the input signal is not stable during at must 5 internal clock cycles. We must program a filter duration longer than these 5 clock cycles. We can validate a transition on TI1 when 8 consecutive samples with the new level have been detected (sampled at fDTS frequency). Then write IC1F bits to 0011 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Select the edge of the active transition on the TI1 channel by writing CC1P and CC1NP bits to 0 in the TIMx_CCER register (rising edge in this case). Program the input prescaler. In our example, we wish the capture to be performed at each valid transition, so the prescaler is disabled (write IC1PS bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register). Enable capture from the counter into the capture register by setting the CC1E bit in the TIMx_CCER register. If needed, enable the related interrupt request by setting the CC1IE bit in the TIMx_DIER register, and/or the DMA request by setting the CC1DE bit in the TIMx_DIER register. The TIMx_CCR1 register gets the value of the counter on the active transition. CC1IF flag is set (interrupt flag). CC1OF is also set if at least two consecutive captures occurred whereas the flag was not cleared. An interrupt is generated depending on the CC1IE bit. A DMA request is generated depending on the CC1DE bit.

When an input capture occurs:

In order to handle the overcapture, it is recommended to read the data before the overcapture flag. This is to avoid missing an overcapture which could happen after reading the flag and before reading the data. Note: IC interrupt and/or DMA requests can be generated by software by setting the corresponding CCxG bit in the TIMx_EGR register.

14.3.7

PWM input mode

This mode is a particular case of input capture mode. The procedure is the same except:

Two ICx signals are mapped on the same TIx input. These 2 ICx signals are active on edges with opposite polarity. One of the two TIxFP signals is selected as trigger input and the slave mode controller is configured in reset mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

372/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

For example, you can measure the period (in TIMx_CCR1 register) and the duty cycle (in TIMx_CCR2 register) of the PWM applied on TI1 using the following procedure (depending on CK_INT frequency and prescaler value):

Select the active input for TIMx_CCR1: write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (TI1 selected). Select the active polarity for TI1FP1 (used both for capture in TIMx_CCR1 and counter clear): write the CC1P and CC1NP bits to 0 (active on rising edge). Select the active input for TIMx_CCR2: write the CC2S bits to 10 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (TI1 selected). Select the active polarity for TI1FP2 (used for capture in TIMx_CCR2): write the CC2P and CC2NP bits to 1 (active on falling edge). Select the valid trigger input: write the TS bits to 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register (TI1FP1 selected). Configure the slave mode controller in reset mode: write the SMS bits to 100 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the captures: write the CC1E and CC2E bits to 1 in the TIMx_CCER register.

Figure 101. PWM input mode timing

TI1

TIMx_CNT

0004

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0000

TIMx_CCR1

0004

TIMx_CCR2

0002

IC1 capture IC2 capture reset counter

IC2 capture pulse width measurement

IC1 capture period measurement

ai15413

14.3.8

Forced output mode

In output mode (CCxS bits = 00 in the TIMx_CCMRx register), each output compare signal (OCxREF and then OCx/OCxN) can be forced to active or inactive level directly by software, independently of any comparison between the output compare register and the counter. To force an output compare signal (OCXREF/OCx) to its active level, you just need to write 101 in the OCxM bits in the corresponding TIMx_CCMRx register. Thus OCXREF is forced high (OCxREF is always active high) and OCx get opposite value to CCxP polarity bit. For example: CCxP=0 (OCx active high) => OCx is forced to high level. The OCxREF signal can be forced low by writing the OCxM bits to 100 in the TIMx_CCMRx register.

373/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Anyway, the comparison between the TIMx_CCRx shadow register and the counter is still performed and allows the flag to be set. Interrupt and DMA requests can be sent accordingly. This is described in the output compare mode section below.

14.3.9

Output compare mode

This function is used to control an output waveform or indicating when a period of time has elapsed. When a match is found between the capture/compare register and the counter, the output compare function:

Assigns the corresponding output pin to a programmable value defined by the output compare mode (OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register) and the output polarity (CCxP bit in the TIMx_CCER register). The output pin can keep its level (OCXM=000), be set active (OCxM=001), be set inactive (OCxM=010) or can toggle (OCxM=011) on match. Sets a flag in the interrupt status register (CCxIF bit in the TIMx_SR register). Generates an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt mask is set (CCXIE bit in the TIMx_DIER register). Sends a DMA request if the corresponding enable bit is set (CCxDE bit in the TIMx_DIER register, CCDS bit in the TIMx_CR2 register for the DMA request selection).

The TIMx_CCRx registers can be programmed with or without preload registers using the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register. In output compare mode, the update event UEV has no effect on OCxREF and OCx output. The timing resolution is one count of the counter. Output compare mode can also be used to output a single pulse (in One Pulse mode). Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the counter clock (internal, external, prescaler). Write the desired data in the TIMx_ARR and TIMx_CCRx registers. Set the CCxIE bit if an interrupt request is to be generated. Select the output mode. For example: 5. Write OCxM = 011 to toggle OCx output pin when CNT matches CCRx Write OCxPE = 0 to disable preload register Write CCxP = 0 to select active high polarity Write CCxE = 1 to enable the output

Enable the counter by setting the CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The TIMx_CCRx register can be updated at any time by software to control the output waveform, provided that the preload register is not enabled (OCxPE=0, else TIMx_CCRx shadow register is updated only at the next update event UEV). An example is given in Figure 102.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

374/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 102. Output compare mode, toggle on OC1.
Write B201h in the CC1R register

RM0090

TIM1_CNT TIM1_CCR1 oc1ref=OC1

0039

003A 003A

003B

B200 B201

B201

Match detected on CCR1 Interrupt generated if enabled

14.3.10

PWM mode
Pulse Width Modulation mode allows you to generate a signal with a frequency determined by the value of the TIMx_ARR register and a duty cycle determined by the value of the TIMx_CCRx register. The PWM mode can be selected independently on each channel (one PWM per OCx output) by writing 110 (PWM mode 1) or 111 (PWM mode 2) in the OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register. You must enable the corresponding preload register by setting the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register, and eventually the auto-reload preload register (in upcounting or center-aligned modes) by setting the ARPE bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. As the preload registers are transferred to the shadow registers only when an update event occurs, before starting the counter, you have to initialize all the registers by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register. OCx polarity is software programmable using the CCxP bit in the TIMx_CCER register. It can be programmed as active high or active low. OCx output is enabled by a combination of the CCxE, CCxNE, MOE, OSSI and OSSR bits (TIMx_CCER and TIMx_BDTR registers). Refer to the TIMx_CCER register description for more details. In PWM mode (1 or 2), TIMx_CNT and TIMx_CCRx are always compared to determine whether TIMx_CCRx TIMx_CNT or TIMx_CNT TIMx_CCRx (depending on the direction of the counter). The timer is able to generate PWM in edge-aligned mode or center-aligned mode depending on the CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register.

375/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

PWM edge-aligned mode

Upcounting configuration Upcounting is active when the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is low. Refer to Section : Upcounting mode on page 357. In the following example, we consider PWM mode 1. The reference PWM signal OCxREF is high as long as TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCRx else it becomes low. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRx is greater than the auto-reload value (in TIMx_ARR) then OCxREF is held at 1. If the compare value is 0 then OCxRef is held at 0. Figure 103 shows some edge-aligned PWM waveforms in an example where TIMx_ARR=8.

Figure 103. Edge-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8)

Counter register OCXREF CCxIF 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1

CCRx=4

OCXREF CCRx=8 CCxIF

OCXREF CCRx>8 CCxIF OCXREF CCRx=0 CCxIF

Downcounting configuration Downcounting is active when DIR bit in TIMx_CR1 register is high. Refer to Section : Downcounting mode on page 360 In PWM mode 1, the reference signal OCxRef is low as long as TIMx_CNT > TIMx_CCRx else it becomes high. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRx is greater than the auto-reload value in TIMx_ARR, then OCxREF is held at 1. 0% PWM is not possible in this mode.

PWM center-aligned mode

Center-aligned mode is active when the CMS bits in TIMx_CR1 register are different from 00 (all the remaining configurations having the same effect on the OCxRef/OCx signals). The compare flag is set when the counter counts up, when it counts down or both when it counts up and down depending on the CMS bits configuration. The direction bit (DIR) in the TIMx_CR1 register is updated by hardware and must not be changed by software. Refer to Section : Center-aligned mode (up/down counting) on page 362. Figure 104 shows some center-aligned PWM waveforms in an example where:

TIMx_ARR=8, PWM mode is the PWM mode 1, The flag is set when the counter counts down corresponding to the center-aligned mode 1 selected for CMS=01 in TIMx_CR1 register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

376/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 104. Center-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8)

Counter register 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1

RM0090

OCxREF CCRx = 4 CCxIF CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11

OCxREF CCRx = 7

CCxIF OCxREF CCRx = 8 CCxIF '1'

CMS=10 or 11

CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11 '1'

OCxREF CCRx > 8 CCxIF

CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11 '0'

OCxREF CCRx = 0 CCxIF

CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11

ai14681b

Hints on using center-aligned mode:

When starting in center-aligned mode, the current up-down configuration is used. It means that the counter counts up or down depending on the value written in the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. Moreover, the DIR and CMS bits must not be changed at the same time by the software. Writing to the counter while running in center-aligned mode is not recommended as it can lead to unexpected results. In particular: The direction is not updated if you write a value in the counter that is greater than the auto-reload value (TIMx_CNT>TIMx_ARR). For example, if the counter was counting up, it continues to count up. The direction is updated if you write 0 or write the TIMx_ARR value in the counter but no Update Event UEV is generated.

The safest way to use center-aligned mode is to generate an update by software (setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register) just before starting the counter and not to write the counter while it is running.

377/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.3.11

Complementary outputs and dead-time insertion

The advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) can output two complementary signals and manage the switching-off and the switching-on instants of the outputs. This time is generally known as dead-time and you have to adjust it depending on the devices you have connected to the outputs and their characteristics (intrinsic delays of levelshifters, delays due to power switches...) You can select the polarity of the outputs (main output OCx or complementary OCxN) independently for each output. This is done by writing to the CCxP and CCxNP bits in the TIMx_CCER register. The complementary signals OCx and OCxN are activated by a combination of several control bits: the CCxE and CCxNE bits in the TIMx_CCER register and the MOE, OISx, OISxN, OSSI and OSSR bits in the TIMx_BDTR and TIMx_CR2 registers. Refer to Table 73: Output control bits for complementary OCx and OCxN channels with break feature on page 412 for more details. In particular, the dead-time is activated when switching to the IDLE state (MOE falling down to 0). Dead-time insertion is enabled by setting both CCxE and CCxNE bits, and the MOE bit if the break circuit is present. DTG[7:0] bits of the TIMx_BDTR register are used to control the dead-time generation for all channels. From a reference waveform OCxREF, it generates 2 outputs OCx and OCxN. If OCx and OCxN are active high:

The OCx output signal is the same as the reference signal except for the rising edge, which is delayed relative to the reference rising edge. The OCxN output signal is the opposite of the reference signal except for the rising edge, which is delayed relative to the reference falling edge.

If the delay is greater than the width of the active output (OCx or OCxN) then the corresponding pulse is not generated. The following figures show the relationships between the output signals of the dead-time generator and the reference signal OCxREF. (we suppose CCxP=0, CCxNP=0, MOE=1, CCxE=1 and CCxNE=1 in these examples) Figure 105. Complementary output with dead-time insertion.
OCxREF

OCx delay OCxN delay

Figure 106. Dead-time waveforms with delay greater than the negative pulse.
OCxREF

OCx delay OCxN

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

378/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 107. Dead-time waveforms with delay greater than the positive pulse.
OCxREF

RM0090

OCx

OCxN delay

The dead-time delay is the same for each of the channels and is programmable with the DTG bits in the TIMx_BDTR register. Refer to Section 14.4.18: TIM1&TIM8 break and deadtime register (TIMx_BDTR) on page 416 for delay calculation.

Re-directing OCxREF to OCx or OCxN

In output mode (forced, output compare or PWM), OCxREF can be re-directed to the OCx output or to OCxN output by configuring the CCxE and CCxNE bits in the TIMx_CCER register. This allows you to send a specific waveform (such as PWM or static active level) on one output while the complementary remains at its inactive level. Other alternative possibilities are to have both outputs at inactive level or both outputs active and complementary with dead-time. Note: When only OCxN is enabled (CCxE=0, CCxNE=1), it is not complemented and becomes active as soon as OCxREF is high. For example, if CCxNP=0 then OCxN=OCxRef. On the other hand, when both OCx and OCxN are enabled (CCxE=CCxNE=1) OCx becomes active when OCxREF is high whereas OCxN is complemented and becomes active when OCxREF is low.

14.3.12

Using the break function

When using the break function, the output enable signals and inactive levels are modified according to additional control bits (MOE, OSSI and OSSR bits in the TIMx_BDTR register, OISx and OISxN bits in the TIMx_CR2 register). In any case, the OCx and OCxN outputs cannot be set both to active level at a given time. Refer to Table 73: Output control bits for complementary OCx and OCxN channels with break feature on page 412 for more details. The break source can be either the break input pin or a clock failure event, generated by the Clock Security System (CSS), from the Reset Clock Controller. For further information on the Clock Security System, refer to Section 6.2.7: Clock security system (CSS). When exiting from reset, the break circuit is disabled and the MOE bit is low. You can enable the break function by setting the BKE bit in the TIMx_BDTR register. The break input polarity can be selected by configuring the BKP bit in the same register. BKE and BKP can be modified at the same time. When the BKE and BKP bits are written, a delay of 1 APB clock cycle is applied before the writing is effective. Consequently, it is necessary to wait 1 APB clock period to correctly read back the bit after the write operation. Because MOE falling edge can be asynchronous, a resynchronization circuit has been inserted between the actual signal (acting on the outputs) and the synchronous control bit (accessed in the TIMx_BDTR register). It results in some delays between the asynchronous and the synchronous signals. In particular, if you write MOE to 1 whereas it was low, you

379/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) must insert a delay (dummy instruction) before reading it correctly. This is because you write the asynchronous signal and read the synchronous signal. When a break occurs (selected level on the break input):

The MOE bit is cleared asynchronously, putting the outputs in inactive state, idle state or in reset state (selected by the OSSI bit). This feature functions even if the MCU oscillator is off. Each output channel is driven with the level programmed in the OISx bit in the TIMx_CR2 register as soon as MOE=0. If OSSI=0 then the timer releases the enable output else the enable output remains high. When complementary outputs are used: The outputs are first put in reset state inactive state (depending on the polarity). This is done asynchronously so that it works even if no clock is provided to the timer. If the timer clock is still present, then the dead-time generator is reactivated in order to drive the outputs with the level programmed in the OISx and OISxN bits after a dead-time. Even in this case, OCx and OCxN cannot be driven to their active level together. Note that because of the resynchronization on MOE, the dead-time duration is a bit longer than usual (around 2 ck_tim clock cycles). If OSSI=0 then the timer releases the enable outputs else the enable outputs remain or become high as soon as one of the CCxE or CCxNE bits is high.

The break status flag (BIF bit in the TIMx_SR register) is set. An interrupt can be generated if the BIE bit in the TIMx_DIER register is set. A DMA request can be sent if the BDE bit in the TIMx_DIER register is set. If the AOE bit in the TIMx_BDTR register is set, the MOE bit is automatically set again at the next update event UEV. This can be used to perform a regulation, for instance. Else, MOE remains low until you write it to 1 again. In this case, it can be used for security and you can connect the break input to an alarm from power drivers, thermal sensors or any security components.

Note:

The break inputs is acting on level. Thus, the MOE cannot be set while the break input is active (neither automatically nor by software). In the meantime, the status flag BIF cannot be cleared. The break can be generated by the BRK input which has a programmable polarity and an enable bit BKE in the TIMx_BDTR Register. There are two solutions to generate a break:

By using the BRK input which has a programmable polarity and an enable bit BKE in the TIMx_BDTR register By software through the BG bit of the TIMx_EGR register.

In addition to the break input and the output management, a write protection has been implemented inside the break circuit to safeguard the application. It allows you to freeze the configuration of several parameters (dead-time duration, OCx/OCxN polarities and state when disabled, OCxM configurations, break enable and polarity). You can choose from 3 levels of protection selected by the LOCK bits in the TIMx_BDTR register. Refer to Section 14.4.18: TIM1&TIM8 break and dead-time register (TIMx_BDTR) on page 416. The LOCK bits can be written only once after an MCU reset. Figure 108 shows an example of behavior of the outputs in response to a break.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

380/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 108. Output behavior in response to a break.

BREAK (MOE )

RM0090

OCxREF

OCx (OCxN not implemented, CCxP=0, OISx=1)

OCx (OCxN not implemented, CCxP=0, OISx=0)

OCx (OCxN not implemented, CCxP=1, OISx=1)

OCx (OCxN not implemented, CCxP=1, OISx=0)

OCx delay delay OCxN (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=0, CCxNE=1, CCxNP=0, OISxN=1) delay

OCx delay delay OCxN (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=1, CCxNE=1, CCxNP=1, OISxN=1) delay

OCx OCxN (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=0, CCxNE=0, CCxNP=0, OISxN=1) delay

OCx OCxN (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, OISx=1, CCxNE=0, CCxNP=0, OISxN=0) delay

OCx OCxN (CCxE=1, CCxP=0, CCxNE=0, CCxNP=0, OISx=OISxN=0 or OISx=OISxN=1)

381/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.3.13

Clearing the OCxREF signal on an external event

The OCxREF signal for a given channel can be driven Low by applying a High level to the ETRF input (OCxCE enable bit of the corresponding TIMx_CCMRx register set to 1). The OCxREF signal remains Low until the next update event, UEV, occurs. This function can only be used in output compare and PWM modes, and does not work in forced mode. For example, the ETR signal can be connected to the output of a comparator to be used for current handling. In this case, the ETR must be configured as follow: 1. 2. 3. The External Trigger Prescaler should be kept off: bits ETPS[1:0] of the TIMx_SMCR register set to 00. The external clock mode 2 must be disabled: bit ECE of the TIMx_SMCR register set to 0. The External Trigger Polarity (ETP) and the External Trigger Filter (ETF) can be configured according to the user needs.

Figure 109 shows the behavior of the OCxREF signal when the ETRF Input becomes High, for both values of the enable bit OCxCE. In this example, the timer TIMx is programmed in PWM mode. Figure 109. Clearing TIMx OCxREF

(CCRx) counter (CNT)

ETRF

OCxREF (OCxCE=0) OCxREF (OCxCE=1) ETRF becomes high ETRF still high

Note:

In case of a PWM with a 100% duty cycle (if CCRx>ARR), then OCxREF is enabled again at the next counter overflow.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

382/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

14.3.14

6-step PWM generation

When complementary outputs are used on a channel, preload bits are available on the OCxM, CCxE and CCxNE bits. The preload bits are transferred to the shadow bits at the COM commutation event. Thus you can program in advance the configuration for the next step and change the configuration of all the channels at the same time. COM can be generated by software by setting the COM bit in the TIMx_EGR register or by hardware (on TRGI rising edge). A flag is set when the COM event occurs (COMIF bit in the TIMx_SR register), which can generate an interrupt (if the COMIE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register) or a DMA request (if the COMDE bit is set in the TIMx_DIER register). Figure 110 describes the behavior of the OCx and OCxN outputs when a COM event occurs, in 3 different examples of programmed configurations. Figure 110. 6-step generation, COM example (OSSR=1)

counter (CNT)

(CCRx)

OCxREF
Write COM to 1

COM event
CCxE=1 write OCxM to 100 CCxNE=0 OCxM=100 (forced inactive)

CCxE=1 CCxNE=0 OCxM=100

Example 1

OCx OCxN
Write CCxNE to 1 and OCxM to 101 CCxE=1 CCxNE=0 OCxM=100 (forced inactive)

CCxE=0 CCxNE=1 OCxM=101

OCx Example 2 OCxN

write CCxNE to 0 CCxE=1 and OCxM to 100 CCxNE=0 OCxM=100 (forced inactive)

CCxE=1 CCxNE=0 OCxM=100

Example 3

OCx OCxN
ai14910

383/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.3.15

One-pulse mode
One-pulse mode (OPM) is a particular case of the previous modes. It allows the counter to be started in response to a stimulus and to generate a pulse with a programmable length after a programmable delay. Starting the counter can be controlled through the slave mode controller. Generating the waveform can be done in output compare mode or PWM mode. You select One-pulse mode by setting the OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This makes the counter stop automatically at the next update event UEV. A pulse can be correctly generated only if the compare value is different from the counter initial value. Before starting (when the timer is waiting for the trigger), the configuration must be:

In upcounting: CNT < CCRx ARR (in particular, 0 < CCRx) In downcounting: CNT > CCRx

Figure 111. Example of one pulse mode.

TI2 OC1REF OC1

Counter

TIM1_ARR TIM1_CCR1

0 tDELAY tPULSE

For example you may want to generate a positive pulse on OC1 with a length of tPULSE and after a delay of tDELAY as soon as a positive edge is detected on the TI2 input pin. Lets use TI2FP2 as trigger 1:

Map TI2FP2 to TI2 by writing CC2S=01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. TI2FP2 must detect a rising edge, write CC2P=0 and CC2NP=0 in the TIMx_CCER register. Configure TI2FP2 as trigger for the slave mode controller (TRGI) by writing TS=110 in the TIMx_SMCR register. TI2FP2 is used to start the counter by writing SMS to 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register (trigger mode).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

384/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

The OPM waveform is defined by writing the compare registers (taking into account the clock frequency and the counter prescaler).

The tDELAY is defined by the value written in the TIMx_CCR1 register. The tPULSE is defined by the difference between the auto-reload value and the compare value (TIMx_ARR - TIMx_CCR1). Lets say you want to build a waveform with a transition from 0 to 1 when a compare match occurs and a transition from 1 to 0 when the counter reaches the auto-reload value. To do this you enable PWM mode 2 by writing OC1M=111 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. You can optionally enable the preload registers by writing OC1PE=1 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register and ARPE in the TIMx_CR1 register. In this case you have to write the compare value in the TIMx_CCR1 register, the auto-reload value in the TIMx_ARR register, generate an update by setting the UG bit and wait for external trigger event on TI2. CC1P is written to 0 in this example.

In our example, the DIR and CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register should be low. You only want 1 pulse (Single mode), so you write '1 in the OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register to stop the counter at the next update event (when the counter rolls over from the auto-reload value back to 0). When OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is set to '0', so the Repetitive Mode is selected. Particular case: OCx fast enable: In One-pulse mode, the edge detection on TIx input set the CEN bit which enables the counter. Then the comparison between the counter and the compare value makes the output toggle. But several clock cycles are needed for these operations and it limits the minimum delay tDELAY min we can get. If you want to output a waveform with the minimum delay, you can set the OCxFE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register. Then OCxRef (and OCx) are forced in response to the stimulus, without taking in account the comparison. Its new level is the same as if a compare match had occurred. OCxFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode.

14.3.16

Encoder interface mode

To select Encoder Interface mode write SMS=001 in the TIMx_SMCR register if the counter is counting on TI2 edges only, SMS=010 if it is counting on TI1 edges only and SMS=011 if it is counting on both TI1 and TI2 edges. Select the TI1 and TI2 polarity by programming the CC1P and CC2P bits in the TIMx_CCER register. When needed, you can program the input filter as well. CC1NP and CC2NP must be kept low. The two inputs TI1 and TI2 are used to interface to an incremental encoder. Refer to Table 71. The counter is clocked by each valid transition on TI1FP1 or TI2FP2 (TI1 and TI2 after input filter and polarity selection, TI1FP1=TI1 if not filtered and not inverted, TI2FP2=TI2 if not filtered and not inverted) assuming that it is enabled (CEN bit in TIMx_CR1 register written to 1). The sequence of transitions of the two inputs is evaluated and generates count pulses as well as the direction signal. Depending on the sequence the counter counts up or down, the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is modified by hardware accordingly. The DIR bit is calculated at each transition on any input (TI1 or TI2), whatever the counter is counting on TI1 only, TI2 only or both TI1 and TI2. Encoder interface mode acts simply as an external clock with direction selection. This means that the counter just counts continuously between 0 and the auto-reload value in the TIMx_ARR register (0 to ARR or ARR down to 0 depending on the direction). So you must

385/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) configure TIMx_ARR before starting. in the same way, the capture, compare, prescaler, repetition counter, trigger output features continue to work as normal. Encoder mode and External clock mode 2 are not compatible and must not be selected together. In this mode, the counter is modified automatically following the speed and the direction of the incremental encoder and its content, therefore, always represents the encoders position. The count direction correspond to the rotation direction of the connected sensor. The table summarizes the possible combinations, assuming TI1 and TI2 dont switch at the same time. Table 71. Counting direction versus encoder signals
Level on opposite signal (TI1FP1 for TI2, TI2FP2 for TI1) High Low High Low High Low TI1FP1 signal TI2FP2 signal

Active edge

Rising Down Up No Count No Count Down Up

Falling Up Down No Count No Count Up Down

Rising No Count No Count Up Down Up Down

Falling No Count No Count Down Up Down Up

Counting on TI1 only Counting on TI2 only Counting on TI1 and TI2

An external incremental encoder can be connected directly to the MCU without external interface logic. However, comparators are normally be used to convert the encoders differential outputs to digital signals. This greatly increases noise immunity. The third encoder output which indicate the mechanical zero position, may be connected to an external interrupt input and trigger a counter reset. Figure 112 gives an example of counter operation, showing count signal generation and direction control. It also shows how input jitter is compensated where both edges are selected. This might occur if the sensor is positioned near to one of the switching points. For this example we assume that the configuration is the following:

CC1S=01 (TIMx_CCMR1 register, TI1FP1 mapped on TI1). CC2S=01 (TIMx_CCMR2 register, TI1FP2 mapped on TI2). CC1P=0, CC1NP=0, and IC1F = 0000 (TIMx_CCER register, TI1FP1 non-inverted, TI1FP1=TI1). CC2P=0, CC2NP=0, and IC2F = 0000 (TIMx_CCER register, TI1FP2 non-inverted, TI1FP2= TI2). SMS=011 (TIMx_SMCR register, both inputs are active on both rising and falling edges). CEN=1 (TIMx_CR1 register, Counter enabled).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

386/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Figure 112. Example of counter operation in encoder interface mode.
forward jitter backward jitter forward

RM0090

TI1 TI2

Counter

up

down

up

Figure 113 gives an example of counter behavior when TI1FP1 polarity is inverted (same configuration as above except CC1P=1). Figure 113. Example of encoder interface mode with TI1FP1 polarity inverted.
forward jitter backward jitter forward

TI1 TI2

Counter

down

up

down

The timer, when configured in Encoder Interface mode provides information on the sensors current position. You can obtain dynamic information (speed, acceleration, deceleration) by measuring the period between two encoder events using a second timer configured in capture mode. The output of the encoder which indicates the mechanical zero can be used for this purpose. Depending on the time between two events, the counter can also be read at regular times. You can do this by latching the counter value into a third input capture register if available (then the capture signal must be periodic and can be generated by another timer). when available, it is also possible to read its value through a DMA request generated by a real-time clock.

387/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.3.17

Timer input XOR function

The TI1S bit in the TIMx_CR2 register, allows the input filter of channel 1 to be connected to the output of a XOR gate, combining the three input pins TIMx_CH1, TIMx_CH2 and TIMx_CH3. The XOR output can be used with all the timer input functions such as trigger or input capture. An example of this feature used to interface Hall sensors is given in Section 14.3.18 below.

14.3.18

Interfacing with Hall sensors

This is done using the advanced-control timers (TIM1 or TIM8) to generate PWM signals to drive the motor and another timer TIMx (TIM2, TIM3, TIM4 or TIM5) referred to as interfacing timer in Figure 114. The interfacing timer captures the 3 timer input pins (TIMx_CH1, TIMx_CH2, and TIMx_CH3) connected through a XOR to the TI1 input channel (selected by setting the TI1S bit in the TIMx_CR2 register). The slave mode controller is configured in reset mode; the slave input is TI1F_ED. Thus, each time one of the 3 inputs toggles, the counter restarts counting from 0. This creates a time base triggered by any change on the Hall inputs. On the interfacing timer, capture/compare channel 1 is configured in capture mode, capture signal is TRC (see Figure 97: Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage) on page 370). The captured value, which corresponds to the time elapsed between 2 changes on the inputs, gives information about motor speed. The interfacing timer can be used in output mode to generate a pulse which changes the configuration of the channels of the advanced-control timer (TIM1 or TIM8) (by triggering a COM event). The TIM1 timer is used to generate PWM signals to drive the motor. To do this, the interfacing timer channel must be programmed so that a positive pulse is generated after a programmed delay (in output compare or PWM mode). This pulse is sent to the advancedcontrol timer (TIM1 or TIM8) through the TRGO output. Example: you want to change the PWM configuration of your advanced-control timer TIM1 after a programmed delay each time a change occurs on the Hall inputs connected to one of the TIMx timers.

Configure 3 timer inputs ORed to the TI1 input channel by writing the TI1S bit in the TIMx_CR2 register to 1, Program the time base: write the TIMx_ARR to the max value (the counter must be cleared by the TI1 change. Set the prescaler to get a maximum counter period longer than the time between 2 changes on the sensors, Program channel 1 in capture mode (TRC selected): write the CC1S bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register to 11. You can also program the digital filter if needed, Program channel 2 in PWM 2 mode with the desired delay: write the OC2M bits to 111 and the CC2S bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register, Select OC2REF as trigger output on TRGO: write the MMS bits in the TIMx_CR2 register to 101,

In the advanced-control timer TIM1, the right ITR input must be selected as trigger input, the timer is programmed to generate PWM signals, the capture/compare control signals are preloaded (CCPC=1 in the TIMx_CR2 register) and the COM event is controlled by the trigger input (CCUS=1 in the TIMx_CR2 register). The PWM control bits (CCxE, OCxM) are

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

388/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

written after a COM event for the next step (this can be done in an interrupt subroutine generated by the rising edge of OC2REF). Figure 114 describes this example. Figure 114. Example of hall sensor interface

TIH1 TIH2 TIH3

Interfacing timer

counter (CNT) (CCR2)

CCR1 TRGO=OC2REF

C7A3

C7A8

C794

C7A5

C7AB

C796

advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

COM OC1 OC1N OC2 OC2N OC3 OC3N

Write CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM for next step

ai17335

389/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.3.19

TIMx and external trigger synchronization

The TIMx timer can be synchronized with an external trigger in several modes: Reset mode, Gated mode and Trigger mode.

Slave mode: Reset mode

The counter and its prescaler can be reinitialized in response to an event on a trigger input. Moreover, if the URS bit from the TIMx_CR1 register is low, an update event UEV is generated. Then all the preloaded registers (TIMx_ARR, TIMx_CCRx) are updated. In the following example, the upcounter is cleared in response to a rising edge on TI1 input:

Configure the channel 1 to detect rising edges on TI1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC1F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC1P=0 and CC1NP=0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect rising edges only). Configure the timer in reset mode by writing SMS=100 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Start the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The counter starts counting on the internal clock, then behaves normally until TI1 rising edge. When TI1 rises, the counter is cleared and restarts from 0. In the meantime, the trigger flag is set (TIF bit in the TIMx_SR register) and an interrupt request, or a DMA request can be sent if enabled (depending on the TIE and TDE bits in TIMx_DIER register). The following figure shows this behavior when the auto-reload register TIMx_ARR=0x36. The delay between the rising edge on TI1 and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI1 input. Figure 115. Control circuit in reset mode
TI1 UG Counter clock = ck_cnt = ck_psc Counter register TIF 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

390/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Slave mode: Gated mode

The counter can be enabled depending on the level of a selected input. In the following example, the upcounter counts only when TI1 input is low:

Configure the channel 1 to detect low levels on TI1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC1F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S=01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC1P=1 and CC1NP=0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only). Configure the timer in gated mode by writing SMS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register (in gated mode, the counter doesnt start if CEN=0, whatever is the trigger input level).

The counter starts counting on the internal clock as long as TI1 is low and stops as soon as TI1 becomes high. The TIF flag in the TIMx_SR register is set both when the counter starts or stops. The delay between the rising edge on TI1 and the actual stop of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI1 input. Figure 116. Control circuit in gated mode
TI1 cnt_en Counter clock = ck_cnt = ck_psc Counter register TIF 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Write TIF=0

391/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Slave mode: Trigger mode

The counter can start in response to an event on a selected input. In the following example, the upcounter starts in response to a rising edge on TI2 input:

Configure the channel 2 to detect rising edges on TI2. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC2F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC2S bits are configured to select the input capture source only, CC2S=01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC2P=1 and CC2NP=0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only). Configure the timer in trigger mode by writing SMS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI2 as the input source by writing TS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register.

When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter starts counting on the internal clock and the TIF flag is set. The delay between the rising edge on TI2 and the actual start of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI2 input. Figure 117. Control circuit in trigger mode
TI2 cnt_en Counter clock = ck_cnt = ck_psc Counter register TIF 34 35 36 37 38

Slave mode: external clock mode 2 + trigger mode

The external clock mode 2 can be used in addition to another slave mode (except external clock mode 1 and encoder mode). In this case, the ETR signal is used as external clock input, and another input can be selected as trigger input (in reset mode, gated mode or trigger mode). It is recommended not to select ETR as TRGI through the TS bits of TIMx_SMCR register. In the following example, the upcounter is incremented at each rising edge of the ETR signal as soon as a rising edge of TI1 occurs: 1. Configure the external trigger input circuit by programming the TIMx_SMCR register as follows: ETF = 0000: no filter ETPS = 00: prescaler disabled ETP = 0: detection of rising edges on ETR and ECE=1 to enable the external clock mode 2.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

392/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) 2. Configure the channel 1 as follows, to detect rising edges on TI: 3. IC1F=0000: no filter. The capture prescaler is not used for triggering and does not need to be configured.

RM0090

CC1S=01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register to select only the input capture source CC1P=0 and CC1NP=0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect rising edge only).

Configure the timer in trigger mode by writing SMS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register.

A rising edge on TI1 enables the counter and sets the TIF flag. The counter then counts on ETR rising edges. The delay between the rising edge of the ETR signal and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on ETRP input. Figure 118. Control circuit in external clock mode 2 + trigger mode
TI1 CEN/CNT_EN ETR Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF 34 35 36

14.3.20

Timer synchronization
The TIM timers are linked together internally for timer synchronization or chaining. Refer to Section 15.3.15: Timer synchronization on page 453 for details.

14.3.21

Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters debug mode (Cortex-M4F core halted), the TIMx counter either continues to work normally or stops, depending on DBG_TIMx_STOP configuration bit in DBG module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C.

393/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.4

TIM1&TIM8 registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers must be written by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits). Read accesses can be done by bytes (8 bits), half-word (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

14.4.1

TIM1&TIM8 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 ARPE rw

4 DIR rw

3 OPM rw

2 URS rw

1 UDIS rw

0 CEN rw

CKD[1:0] Reserved rw rw

CMS[1:0] rw rw

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 9:8 CKD[1:0]: Clock division This bit-field indicates the division ratio between the timer clock (CK_INT) frequency and the dead-time and sampling clock (tDTS)used by the dead-time generators and the digital filters (ETR, TIx), 00: tDTS=tCK_INT 01: tDTS=2*tCK_INT 10: tDTS=4*tCK_INT 11: Reserved, do not program this value Bit 7 ARPE: Auto-reload preload enable 0: TIMx_ARR register is not buffered 1: TIMx_ARR register is buffered Bits 6:5 CMS[1:0]: Center-aligned mode selection 00: Edge-aligned mode. The counter counts up or down depending on the direction bit (DIR). 01: Center-aligned mode 1. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS=00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set only when the counter is counting down. 10: Center-aligned mode 2. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS=00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set only when the counter is counting up. 11: Center-aligned mode 3. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS=00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set both when the counter is counting up or down. Note: It is not allowed to switch from edge-aligned mode to center-aligned mode as long as the counter is enabled (CEN=1) Bit 4 DIR: Direction 0: Counter used as upcounter 1: Counter used as downcounter Note: This bit is read only when the timer is configured in Center-aligned mode or Encoder mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

394/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bit 3 OPM: One pulse mode 0: Counter is not stopped at update event 1: Counter stops counting at the next update event (clearing the bit CEN) Bit 2 URS: Update request source This bit is set and cleared by software to select the UEV event sources. 0: Any of the following events generate an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled. These events can be: Counter overflow/underflow Setting the UG bit Update generation through the slave mode controller 1: Only counter overflow/underflow generates an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled. Bit 1 UDIS: Update disable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable UEV event generation. 0: UEV enabled. The Update (UEV) event is generated by one of the following events: Counter overflow/underflow Setting the UG bit Update generation through the slave mode controller Buffered registers are then loaded with their preload values. 1: UEV disabled. The Update event is not generated, shadow registers keep their value (ARR, PSC, CCRx). However the counter and the prescaler are reinitialized if the UG bit is set or if a hardware reset is received from the slave mode controller. Bit 0 CEN: Counter enable 0: Counter disabled 1: Counter enabled Note: External clock, gated mode and encoder mode can work only if the CEN bit has been previously set by software. However trigger mode can set the CEN bit automatically by hardware.

14.4.2

TIM1&TIM8 control register 2 (TIMx_CR2)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000

15 Res.

14 OIS4 rw

13 OIS3N rw

12 OIS3 rw

11 OIS2N rw

10 OIS2 rw

9 OIS1N rw

8 OIS1 rw

7 TI1S rw

5 MMS[2:0]

3 CCDS

2 CCUS

1 Res.

0 CCPC rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 OIS4: Output Idle state 4 (OC4 output) refer to OIS1 bit Bit 13 OIS3N: Output Idle state 3 (OC3N output) refer to OIS1N bit Bit 12 OIS3: Output Idle state 3 (OC3 output) refer to OIS1 bit

395/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Bit 11 OIS2N: Output Idle state 2 (OC2N output) refer to OIS1N bit Bit 10 OIS2: Output Idle state 2 (OC2 output) refer to OIS1 bit Bit 9 OIS1N: Output Idle state 1 (OC1N output) 0: OC1N=0 after a dead-time when MOE=0 1: OC1N=1 after a dead-time when MOE=0 Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register). Bit 8 OIS1: Output Idle state 1 (OC1 output) 0: OC1=0 (after a dead-time if OC1N is implemented) when MOE=0 1: OC1=1 (after a dead-time if OC1N is implemented) when MOE=0 Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register). Bit 7 TI1S: TI1 selection 0: The TIMx_CH1 pin is connected to TI1 input 1: The TIMx_CH1, CH2 and CH3 pins are connected to the TI1 input (XOR combination) Bits 6:4 MMS[1:0]: Master mode selection These bits allow to select the information to be sent in master mode to slave timers for synchronization (TRGO). The combination is as follows: 000: Reset - the UG bit from the TIMx_EGR register is used as trigger output (TRGO). If the reset is generated by the trigger input (slave mode controller configured in reset mode) then the signal on TRGO is delayed compared to the actual reset. 001: Enable - the Counter Enable signal CNT_EN is used as trigger output (TRGO). It is useful to start several timers at the same time or to control a window in which a slave timer is enable. The Counter Enable signal is generated by a logic OR between CEN control bit and the trigger input when configured in gated mode. When the Counter Enable signal is controlled by the trigger input, there is a delay on TRGO, except if the master/slave mode is selected (see the MSM bit description in TIMx_SMCR register). 010: Update - The update event is selected as trigger output (TRGO). For instance a master timer can then be used as a prescaler for a slave timer. 011: Compare Pulse - The trigger output send a positive pulse when the CC1IF flag is to be set (even if it was already high), as soon as a capture or a compare match occurred. (TRGO). 100: Compare - OC1REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) 101: Compare - OC2REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) 110: Compare - OC3REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) 111: Compare - OC4REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) Bit 3 CCDS: Capture/compare DMA selection 0: CCx DMA request sent when CCx event occurs 1: CCx DMA requests sent when update event occurs

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

396/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bit 2 CCUS: Capture/compare control update selection 0: When capture/compare control bits are preloaded (CCPC=1), they are updated by setting the COMG bit only 1: When capture/compare control bits are preloaded (CCPC=1), they are updated by setting the COMG bit or when an rising edge occurs on TRGI Note: This bit acts only on channels that have a complementary output. Bit 1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 CCPC: Capture/compare preloaded control 0: CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM bits are not preloaded 1: CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM bits are preloaded, after having been written, they are updated only when a commutation event (COM) occurs (COMG bit set or rising edge detected on TRGI, depending on the CCUS bit). Note: This bit acts only on channels that have a complementary output.

397/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.4.3

TIM1&TIM8 slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000

15 ETP rw

14 ECE rw

13

12

11

10

7 MSM

5 TS[2:0]

3 Res.

1 SMS[2:0]

ETPS[1:0] rw rw rw

ETF[3:0] rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Res.

rw

rw

rw

Bit 15 ETP: External trigger polarity This bit selects whether ETR or ETR is used for trigger operations 0: ETR is non-inverted, active at high level or rising edge. 1: ETR is inverted, active at low level or falling edge. Bit 14 ECE: External clock enable This bit enables External clock mode 2. 0: External clock mode 2 disabled 1: External clock mode 2 enabled. The counter is clocked by any active edge on the ETRF signal. Note: 1: Setting the ECE bit has the same effect as selecting external clock mode 1 with TRGI connected to ETRF (SMS=111 and TS=111). 2: It is possible to simultaneously use external clock mode 2 with the following slave modes: reset mode, gated mode and trigger mode. Nevertheless, TRGI must not be connected to ETRF in this case (TS bits must not be 111). 3: If external clock mode 1 and external clock mode 2 are enabled at the same time, the external clock input is ETRF. Bits 13:12 ETPS[1:0]: External trigger prescaler External trigger signal ETRP frequency must be at most 1/4 of TIMxCLK frequency. A prescaler can be enabled to reduce ETRP frequency. It is useful when inputting fast external clocks. 00: Prescaler OFF 01: ETRP frequency divided by 2 10: ETRP frequency divided by 4 11: ETRP frequency divided by 8

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

398/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bits 11:8 ETF[3:0]: External trigger filter This bit-field then defines the frequency used to sample ETRP signal and the length of the digital filter applied to ETRP. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the output: 0000: No filter, sampling is done at fDTS 0001: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=2 0010: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=4 0011: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=8 0100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=6 0101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=8 0110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=6 0111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=8 1000: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=6 1001: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=8 1010: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=5 1011: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=6 1100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=8 1101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=5 1110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=6 1111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=8 Bit 7 MSM: Master/slave mode 0: No action 1: The effect of an event on the trigger input (TRGI) is delayed to allow a perfect synchronization between the current timer and its slaves (through TRGO). It is useful if we want to synchronize several timers on a single external event. Bits 6:4 TS[2:0]: Trigger selection This bit-field selects the trigger input to be used to synchronize the counter. 000: Internal Trigger 0 (ITR0) 001: Internal Trigger 1 (ITR1) 010: Internal Trigger 2 (ITR2) 011: Internal Trigger 3 (ITR3) 100: TI1 Edge Detector (TI1F_ED) 101: Filtered Timer Input 1 (TI1FP1) 110: Filtered Timer Input 2 (TI2FP2) 111: External Trigger input (ETRF) See Table 72: TIMx Internal trigger connection on page 400 for more details on ITRx meaning for each Timer. Note: These bits must be changed only when they are not used (e.g. when SMS=000) to avoid wrong edge detections at the transition. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

399/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Bits 2:0 SMS: Slave mode selection When external signals are selected the active edge of the trigger signal (TRGI) is linked to the polarity selected on the external input (see Input Control register and Control Register description. 000: Slave mode disabled - if CEN = 1 then the prescaler is clocked directly by the internal clock. 001: Encoder mode 1 - Counter counts up/down on TI2FP2 edge depending on TI1FP1 level. 010: Encoder mode 2 - Counter counts up/down on TI1FP1 edge depending on TI2FP2 level. 011: Encoder mode 3 - Counter counts up/down on both TI1FP1 and TI2FP2 edges depending on the level of the other input. 100: Reset Mode - Rising edge of the selected trigger input (TRGI) reinitializes the counter and generates an update of the registers. 101: Gated Mode - The counter clock is enabled when the trigger input (TRGI) is high. The counter stops (but is not reset) as soon as the trigger becomes low. Both start and stop of the counter are controlled. 110: Trigger Mode - The counter starts at a rising edge of the trigger TRGI (but it is not reset). Only the start of the counter is controlled. 111: External Clock Mode 1 - Rising edges of the selected trigger (TRGI) clock the counter. Note: The gated mode must not be used if TI1F_ED is selected as the trigger input (TS=100). Indeed, TI1F_ED outputs 1 pulse for each transition on TI1F, whereas the gated mode checks the level of the trigger signal.

Table 72.
Slave TIM TIM1 TIM8

TIMx Internal trigger connection

ITR0 (TS = 000) TIM5 TIM1 ITR1 (TS = 001) TIM2 TIM2 ITR2 (TS = 010) TIM3 TIM4 ITR3 (TS = 011) TIM4 TIM5

14.4.4

TIM1&TIM8 DMA/interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000

15 Res.

14 TDE rw

13

12

11

10

8 UDE rw

7 BIE rw

6 TIE rw

5 COMIE rw

4 CC4IE rw

3 CC3IE rw

2 CC2IE rw

1 CC1IE rw

0 UIE rw

COMDE CC4DE CC3DE CC2DE CC1DE rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 TDE: Trigger DMA request enable 0: Trigger DMA request disabled 1: Trigger DMA request enabled Bit 13 COMDE: COM DMA request enable 0: COM DMA request disabled 1: COM DMA request enabled Bit 12 CC4DE: Capture/Compare 4 DMA request enable 0: CC4 DMA request disabled 1: CC4 DMA request enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

400/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bit 11 CC3DE: Capture/Compare 3 DMA request enable 0: CC3 DMA request disabled 1: CC3 DMA request enabled Bit 10 CC2DE: Capture/Compare 2 DMA request enable 0: CC2 DMA request disabled 1: CC2 DMA request enabled Bit 9 CC1DE: Capture/Compare 1 DMA request enable 0: CC1 DMA request disabled 1: CC1 DMA request enabled Bit 8 UDE: Update DMA request enable 0: Update DMA request disabled 1: Update DMA request enabled Bit 7 BIE: Break interrupt enable 0: Break interrupt disabled 1: Break interrupt enabled Bit 6 TIE: Trigger interrupt enable 0: Trigger interrupt disabled 1: Trigger interrupt enabled Bit 5 COMIE: COM interrupt enable 0: COM interrupt disabled 1: COM interrupt enabled Bit 4 CC4IE: Capture/Compare 4 interrupt enable 0: CC4 interrupt disabled 1: CC4 interrupt enabled Bit 3 CC3IE: Capture/Compare 3 interrupt enable 0: CC3 interrupt disabled 1: CC3 interrupt enabled Bit 2 CC2IE: Capture/Compare 2 interrupt enable 0: CC2 interrupt disabled 1: CC2 interrupt enabled Bit 1 CC1IE: Capture/Compare 1 interrupt enable 0: CC1 interrupt disabled 1: CC1 interrupt enabled Bit 0 UIE: Update interrupt enable 0: Update interrupt disabled 1: Update interrupt enabled

401/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.4.5

TIM1&TIM8 status register (TIMx_SR)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14 Reserved

13

12

11

10

8 Res. Res.

7 BIF rc_w0

6 TIF rc_w0

5 COMIF rc_w0

4 CC4IF rc_w0

3 CC3IF rc_w0

2 CC2IF rc_w0

1 CC1IF rc_w0

0 UIF rc_w0

CC4OF CC3OF CC2OF CC1OF rc_w0 rc_w0 rc_w0 rc_w0

Bits 15:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 12 CC4OF: Capture/Compare 4 overcapture flag refer to CC1OF description Bit 11 CC3OF: Capture/Compare 3 overcapture flag refer to CC1OF description Bit 10 CC2OF: Capture/Compare 2 overcapture flag refer to CC1OF description Bit 9 CC1OF: Capture/Compare 1 overcapture flag This flag is set by hardware only when the corresponding channel is configured in input capture mode. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0. 0: No overcapture has been detected. 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register while CC1IF flag was already set Bit 8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 BIF: Break interrupt flag This flag is set by hardware as soon as the break input goes active. It can be cleared by software if the break input is not active. 0: No break event occurred. 1: An active level has been detected on the break input. Bit 6 TIF: Trigger interrupt flag This flag is set by hardware on trigger event (active edge detected on TRGI input when the slave mode controller is enabled in all modes but gated mode. It is set when the counter starts or stops when gated mode is selected. It is cleared by software. 0: No trigger event occurred. 1: Trigger interrupt pending. Bit 5 COMIF: COM interrupt flag This flag is set by hardware on COM event (when Capture/compare Control bits - CCxE, CCxNE, OCxM - have been updated). It is cleared by software. 0: No COM event occurred. 1: COM interrupt pending. Bit 4 CC4IF: Capture/Compare 4 interrupt flag refer to CC1IF description Bit 3 CC3IF: Capture/Compare 3 interrupt flag refer to CC1IF description

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

402/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bit 2 CC2IF: Capture/Compare 2 interrupt flag refer to CC1IF description Bit 1 CC1IF: Capture/Compare 1 interrupt flag If channel CC1 is configured as output: This flag is set by hardware when the counter matches the compare value, with some exception in center-aligned mode (refer to the CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register description). It is cleared by software. 0: No match. 1: The content of the counter TIMx_CNT matches the content of the TIMx_CCR1 register. When the contents of TIMx_CCR1 are greater than the contents of TIMx_ARR, the CC1IF bit goes high on the counter overflow (in upcounting and up/down-counting modes) or underflow (in downcounting mode) If channel CC1 is configured as input: This bit is set by hardware on a capture. It is cleared by software or by reading the TIMx_CCR1 register. 0: No input capture occurred 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register (An edge has been detected on IC1 which matches the selected polarity) Bit 0 UIF: Update interrupt flag This bit is set by hardware on an update event. It is cleared by software. 0: No update occurred. 1: Update interrupt pending. This bit is set by hardware when the registers are updated: At overflow or underflow regarding the repetition counter value (update if repetition counter = 0) and if the UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by software using the UG bit in TIMx_EGR register, if URS=0 and UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by a trigger event (refer to Section 14.4.3: TIM1&TIM8 slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR)), if URS=0 and UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

14.4.6

TIM1&TIM8 event generation register (TIMx_EGR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 BG

6 TG w

5 COMG w

4 CC4G w

3 CC3G w

2 CC2G w

1 CC1G w

0 UG w

Reserved w

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 BG: Break generation This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: A break event is generated. MOE bit is cleared and BIF flag is set. Related interrupt or DMA transfer can occur if enabled.

403/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Bit 6 TG: Trigger generation This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: The TIF flag is set in TIMx_SR register. Related interrupt or DMA transfer can occur if enabled. Bit 5 COMG: Capture/Compare control update generation This bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware 0: No action 1: When CCPC bit is set, it allows to update CCxE, CCxNE and OCxM bits Note: This bit acts only on channels having a complementary output. Bit 4 CC4G: Capture/Compare 4 generation refer to CC1G description Bit 3 CC3G: Capture/Compare 3 generation refer to CC1G description Bit 2 CC2G: Capture/Compare 2 generation refer to CC1G description Bit 1 CC1G: Capture/Compare 1 generation This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: A capture/compare event is generated on channel 1: If channel CC1 is configured as output: CC1IF flag is set, Corresponding interrupt or DMA request is sent if enabled. If channel CC1 is configured as input: The current value of the counter is captured in TIMx_CCR1 register. The CC1IF flag is set, the corresponding interrupt or DMA request is sent if enabled. The CC1OF flag is set if the CC1IF flag was already high. Bit 0 UG: Update generation This bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: Reinitialize the counter and generates an update of the registers. Note that the prescaler counter is cleared too (anyway the prescaler ratio is not affected). The counter is cleared if the center-aligned mode is selected or if DIR=0 (upcounting), else it takes the auto-reload value (TIMx_ARR) if DIR=1 (downcounting).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

404/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

14.4.7

TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 The channels can be used in input (capture mode) or in output (compare mode). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits of this register have a different function in input and in output mode. For a given bit, OCxx describes its function when the channel is configured in output, ICxx describes its function when the channel is configured in input. So you must take care that the same bit can have a different meaning for the input stage and for the output stage.

15 OC2 CE

14

13 OC2M[2:0]

12

11 OC2 PE

10 OC2 FE

7 OC1 CE

5 OC1M[2:0]

3 OC1 PE

2 OC1 FE

CC2S[1:0] rw rw

CC1S[1:0] rw rw

IC2F[3:0] rw rw rw rw

IC2PSC[1:0] rw rw rw

IC1F[3:0] rw rw rw

IC1PSC[1:0] rw rw

Output compare mode:

Bit 15 OC2CE: Output Compare 2 clear enable Bits 14:12 OC2M[2:0]: Output Compare 2 mode Bit 11 OC2PE: Output Compare 2 preload enable Bit 10 OC2FE: Output Compare 2 fast enable Bits 9:8 CC2S[1:0]: Capture/Compare 2 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC2 channel is configured as output 01: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI2 10: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI1 11: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through the TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bit 7 OC1CE: Output Compare 1 clear enable OC1CE: Output Compare 1 Clear Enable 0: OC1Ref is not affected by the ETRF Input 1: OC1Ref is cleared as soon as a High level is detected on ETRF input

405/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Bits 6:4 OC1M: Output Compare 1 mode These bits define the behavior of the output reference signal OC1REF from which OC1 and OC1N are derived. OC1REF is active high whereas OC1 and OC1N active level depends on CC1P and CC1NP bits. 000: Frozen - The comparison between the output compare register TIMx_CCR1 and the counter TIMx_CNT has no effect on the outputs.(this mode is used to generate a timing base). 001: Set channel 1 to active level on match. OC1REF signal is forced high when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 010: Set channel 1 to inactive level on match. OC1REF signal is forced low when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 011: Toggle - OC1REF toggles when TIMx_CNT=TIMx_CCR1. 100: Force inactive level - OC1REF is forced low. 101: Force active level - OC1REF is forced high. 110: PWM mode 1 - In upcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT<TIMx_CCR1 else inactive. In downcounting, channel 1 is inactive (OC1REF=0) as long as TIMx_CNT>TIMx_CCR1 else active (OC1REF=1). 111: PWM mode 2 - In upcounting, channel 1 is inactive as long as TIMx_CNT<TIMx_CCR1 else active. In downcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT>TIMx_CCR1 else inactive. Note: 1: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S=00 (the channel is configured in output). 2: In PWM mode 1 or 2, the OCREF level changes only when the result of the comparison changes or when the output compare mode switches from frozen mode to PWM mode.

3: On channels having a complementary output, this bit field is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the OC1M active bits take the new value from the preloaded bits only when a COM event is generated.
Bit 3 OC1PE: Output Compare 1 preload enable 0: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 disabled. TIMx_CCR1 can be written at anytime, the new value is taken in account immediately. 1: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 enabled. Read/Write operations access the preload register. TIMx_CCR1 preload value is loaded in the active register at each update event. Note: 1: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S=00 (the channel is configured in output). 2: The PWM mode can be used without validating the preload register only in one pulse mode (OPM bit set in TIMx_CR1 register). Else the behavior is not guaranteed. Bit 2 OC1FE: Output Compare 1 fast enable This bit is used to accelerate the effect of an event on the trigger in input on the CC output. 0: CC1 behaves normally depending on counter and CCR1 values even when the trigger is ON. The minimum delay to activate CC1 output when an edge occurs on the trigger input is 5 clock cycles. 1: An active edge on the trigger input acts like a compare match on CC1 output. Then, OC is set to the compare level independently from the result of the comparison. Delay to sample the trigger input and to activate CC1 output is reduced to 3 clock cycles. OCFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

406/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1 10: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI2 11: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

Input capture mode

Bits 15:12 IC2F: Input capture 2 filter Bits 11:10 IC2PSC[1:0]: Input capture 2 prescaler Bits 9:8 CC2S: Capture/Compare 2 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC2 channel is configured as output 01: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI2 10: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI1 11: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bits 7:4 IC1F[3:0]: Input capture 1 filter This bit-field defines the frequency used to sample TI1 input and the length of the digital filter applied to TI1. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the output: 0000: No filter, sampling is done at fDTS 0001: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=2 0010: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=4 0011: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=8 0100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=6 0101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=8 0110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=6 0111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=8 1000: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=6 1001: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=8 1010: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=5 1011: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=6 1100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=8 1101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=5 1110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=6 1111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=8 Bits 3:2 IC1PSC: Input capture 1 prescaler This bit-field defines the ratio of the prescaler acting on CC1 input (IC1). The prescaler is reset as soon as CC1E=0 (TIMx_CCER register). 00: no prescaler, capture is done each time an edge is detected on the capture input 01: capture is done once every 2 events 10: capture is done once every 4 events 11: capture is done once every 8 events

407/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 Selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1 10: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI2 11: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

14.4.8

TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare mode register 2 (TIMx_CCMR2)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000 Refer to the above CCMR1 register description.

15 OC4 CE

14

13 OC4M[2:0]

12

11 OC4 PE

10 OC4 FE

7 OC3 CE.

5 OC3M[2:0]

3 OC3 PE

2 OC3 FE

CC4S[1:0] rw rw

CC3S[1:0] rw rw

IC4F[3:0] rw rw rw rw

IC4PSC[1:0] rw rw rw

IC3F[3:0] rw rw rw

IC3PSC[1:0] rw rw

Output compare mode

Bit 15 OC4CE: Output compare 4 clear enable Bits 14:12 OC4M: Output compare 4 mode Bit 11 OC4PE: Output compare 4 preload enable Bit 10 OC4FE: Output compare 4 fast enable Bits 9:8 CC4S: Capture/Compare 4 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC4 channel is configured as output 01: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI4 10: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI3 11: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC4S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC4E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bit 7 OC3CE: Output compare 3 clear enable Bits 6:4 OC3M: Output compare 3 mode Bit 3 OC3PE: Output compare 3 preload enable Bit 2 OC3FE: Output compare 3 fast enable Bits 1:0 CC3S: Capture/Compare 3 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC3 channel is configured as output 01: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI3 10: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI4 11: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC3S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC3E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

408/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Input capture mode

Bits 15:12 IC4F: Input capture 4 filter Bits 11:10 IC4PSC: Input capture 4 prescaler Bits 9:8 CC4S: Capture/Compare 4 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC4 channel is configured as output 01: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI4 10: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI3 11: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC4S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC4E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bits 7:4 IC3F: Input capture 3 filter Bits 3:2 IC3PSC: Input capture 3 prescaler Bits 1:0 CC3S: Capture/compare 3 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC3 channel is configured as output 01: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI3 10: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI4 11: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC3S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC3E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

14.4.9

TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13 CC4P

12 CC4E rw

11

10

9 CC3P rw

8 CC3E rw

5 CC2P rw

4 CC2E rw

1 CC1P rw

0 CC1E rw

CC3NP CC3NE rw rw

CC2NP CC2NE rw rw

CC1NP CC1NE rw rw

Reserved rw

Bits 15:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13 CC4P: Capture/Compare 4 output polarity refer to CC1P description Bit 12 CC4E: Capture/Compare 4 output enable refer to CC1E description Bit 11 CC3NP: Capture/Compare 3 complementary output polarity refer to CC1NP description Bit 10 CC3NE: Capture/Compare 3 complementary output enable refer to CC1NE description Bit 9 CC3P: Capture/Compare 3 output polarity refer to CC1P description Bit 8 CC3E: Capture/Compare 3 output enable refer to CC1E description

409/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Bit 7 CC2NP: Capture/Compare 2 complementary output polarity refer to CC1NP description Bit 6 CC2NE: Capture/Compare 2 complementary output enable refer to CC1NE description Bit 5 CC2P: Capture/Compare 2 output polarity refer to CC1P description Bit 4 CC2E: Capture/Compare 2 output enable refer to CC1E description Bit 3 CC1NP: Capture/Compare 1 complementary output polarity CC1 channel configured as output: 0: OC1N active high. 1: OC1N active low. CC1 channel configured as input: This bit is used in conjunction with CC1P to define the polarity of TI1FP1 and TI2FP1. Refer to CC1P description. Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1NP active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated. Note: This bit is not writable as soon as LOCK level 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S=00 (the channel is configured in output). Bit 2 CC1NE: Capture/Compare 1 complementary output enable 0: Off - OC1N is not active. OC1N level is then function of MOE, OSSI, OSSR, OIS1, OIS1N and CC1E bits. 1: On - OC1N signal is output on the corresponding output pin depending on MOE, OSSI, OSSR, OIS1, OIS1N and CC1E bits. Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1NE active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

410/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bit 1 CC1P: Capture/Compare 1 output polarity CC1 channel configured as output: 0: OC1 active high 1: OC1 active low CC1 channel configured as input: CC1NP/CC1P bits select the active polarity of TI1FP1 and TI2FP1 for trigger or capture operations. 00: non-inverted/rising edge The circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 rising edge (capture or trigger operations in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger operation in gated mode or encoder mode). 01: inverted/falling edge The circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 falling edge (capture or trigger operations in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is inverted (trigger operation in gated mode or encoder mode). 10: reserved, do not use this configuration. 11: non-inverted/both edges The circuit is sensitive to both TIxFP1 rising and falling edges (capture or trigger operations in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger operation in gated mode). This configuration must not be used in encoder mode. Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1P active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated. Note: This bit is not writable as soon as LOCK level 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register). Bit 0 CC1E: Capture/Compare 1 output enable CC1 channel configured as output: 0: Off - OC1 is not active. OC1 level is then function of MOE, OSSI, OSSR, OIS1, OIS1N and CC1NE bits. 1: On - OC1 signal is output on the corresponding output pin depending on MOE, OSSI, OSSR, OIS1, OIS1N and CC1NE bits. CC1 channel configured as input: This bit determines if a capture of the counter value can actually be done into the input capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) or not. 0: Capture disabled. 1: Capture enabled. Note: On channels having a complementary output, this bit is preloaded. If the CCPC bit is set in the TIMx_CR2 register then the CC1E active bit takes the new value from the preloaded bit only when a Commutation event is generated.

411/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 73.

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Output control bits for complementary OCx and OCxN channels with break feature
Control bits Output states(1) CCxNE OCx output state bit 0 OCxN output state

MOE bit

OSSI bit

OSSR bit 0

CCxE bit 0

Output Disabled (not driven by Output Disabled (not driven by the the timer) timer) OCx=0, OCx_EN=0 OCxN=0, OCxN_EN=0 Output Disabled (not driven by OCxREF + Polarity OCxN=OCxREF the timer) xor CCxNP, OCxN_EN=1 OCx=0, OCx_EN=0 OCxREF + Polarity OCx=OCxREF xor CCxP, OCx_EN=1 Output Disabled (not driven by the timer) OCxN=0, OCxN_EN=0

0 1 X 1

Complementary to OCREF (not OCREF + Polarity + dead-time OCREF) + Polarity + dead-time OCx_EN=1 OCxN_EN=1 Output Disabled (not driven by Output Disabled (not driven by the timer) the timer) OCxN=CCxNP, OCxN_EN=0 OCx=CCxP, OCx_EN=0 Off-State (output enabled with inactive state) OCx=CCxP, OCx_EN=1 OCxREF + Polarity OCx=OCxREF xor CCxP, OCx_EN=1 OCxREF + Polarity OCxN=OCxREF xor CCxNP, OCxN_EN=1 Off-State (output enabled with inactive state) OCxN=CCxNP, OCxN_EN=1

Complementary to OCREF (not OCREF + Polarity + dead-time OCREF) + Polarity + dead-time OCx_EN=1 OCxN_EN=1 Output Disabled (not driven by Output Disabled (not driven by the the timer) timer) OCx=CCxP, OCx_EN=0 OCxN=CCxNP, OCxN_EN=0 Output Disabled (not driven by the timer) Asynchronously: OCx=CCxP, OCx_EN=0, OCxN=CCxNP, OCxN_EN=0 Then if the clock is present: OCx=OISx and OCxN=OISxN after a dead-time, assuming that OISx and OISxN do not correspond to OCX and OCxN both in active state. Output Disabled (not driven by Output Disabled (not driven by the the timer) timer) OCx=CCxP, OCx_EN=0 OCxN=CCxNP, OCxN_EN=0 Off-State (output enabled with inactive state) Asynchronously: OCx=CCxP, OCx_EN=1, OCxN=CCxNP, OCxN_EN=1 Then if the clock is present: OCx=OISx and OCxN=OISxN after a dead-time, assuming that OISx and OISxN do not correspond to OCX and OCxN both in active state

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 X

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

412/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

1. When both outputs of a channel are not used (CCxE = CCxNE = 0), the OISx, OISxN, CCxP and CCxNP bits must be kept cleared.

Note:

The state of the external I/O pins connected to the complementary OCx and OCxN channels depends on the OCx and OCxN channel state and the GPIO registers.

14.4.10

TIM1&TIM8 counter (TIMx_CNT)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CNT[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0

CNT[15:0]: Counter value

14.4.11

TIM1&TIM8 prescaler (TIMx_PSC)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

PSC[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 PSC[15:0]: Prescaler value The counter clock frequency (CK_CNT) is equal to fCK_PSC / (PSC[15:0] + 1). PSC contains the value to be loaded in the active prescaler register at each update event (including when the counter is cleared through UG bit of TIMx_EGR register or through trigger controller when configured in reset mode).

14.4.12

TIM1&TIM8 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

ARR[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 ARR[15:0]: Auto-reload value ARR is the value to be loaded in the actual auto-reload register. Refer to Section 14.3.1: Time-base unit on page 356 for more details about ARR update and behavior. The counter is blocked while the auto-reload value is null.

413/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.4.13

TIM1&TIM8 repetition counter register (TIMx_RCR)

Address offset: 0x30 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

REP[7:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:0 REP[7:0]: Repetition counter value These bits allow the user to set-up the update rate of the compare registers (i.e. periodic transfers from preload to active registers) when preload registers are enable, as well as the update interrupt generation rate, if this interrupt is enable. Each time the REP_CNT related downcounter reaches zero, an update event is generated and it restarts counting from REP value. As REP_CNT is reloaded with REP value only at the repetition update event U_RC, any write to the TIMx_RCR register is not taken in account until the next repetition update event. It means in PWM mode (REP+1) corresponds to: the number of PWM periods in edge-aligned mode the number of half PWM period in center-aligned mode.

14.4.14

TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CCR1[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CCR1[15:0]: Capture/Compare 1 value If channel CC1 is configured as output: CCR1 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 1 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (bit OC1PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 1 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on OC1 output. If channel CC1 is configured as input: CCR1 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 1 event (IC1).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

414/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

14.4.15

TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 2 (TIMx_CCR2)

Address offset: 0x38 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CCR2[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CCR2[15:0]: Capture/Compare 2 value If channel CC2 is configured as output: CCR2 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 2 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR2 register (bit OC2PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 2 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signalled on OC2 output. If channel CC2 is configured as input: CCR2 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 2 event (IC2).

14.4.16

TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 3 (TIMx_CCR3)

Address offset: 0x3C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CCR3[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CCR3[15:0]: Capture/Compare value If channel CC3 is configured as output: CCR3 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 3 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR3 register (bit OC3PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 3 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signalled on OC3 output. If channel CC3 is configured as input: CCR3 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 3 event (IC3).

415/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.4.17

TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare register 4 (TIMx_CCR4)

Address offset: 0x40 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CCR4[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CCR4[15:0]: Capture/Compare value If channel CC4 is configured as output: CCR4 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 4 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR4 register (bit OC4PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 4 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signalled on OC4 output. If channel CC4 is configured as input: CCR4 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 4 event (IC4).

14.4.18

TIM1&TIM8 break and dead-time register (TIMx_BDTR)

Address offset: 0x44 Reset value: 0x0000

15 MOE rw

14 AOE rw

13 BKP rw

12 BKE rw

11 OSSR rw

10 OSSI rw

LOCK[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

DTG[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw

Note:

As the bits AOE, BKP, BKE, OSSI, OSSR and DTG[7:0] can be write-locked depending on the LOCK configuration, it can be necessary to configure all of them during the first write access to the TIMx_BDTR register.
Bit 15 MOE: Main output enable This bit is cleared asynchronously by hardware as soon as the break input is active. It is set by software or automatically depending on the AOE bit. It is acting only on the channels which are configured in output. 0: OC and OCN outputs are disabled or forced to idle state. 1: OC and OCN outputs are enabled if their respective enable bits are set (CCxE, CCxNE in TIMx_CCER register). See OC/OCN enable description for more details (Section 14.4.9: TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER) on page 409). Bit 14 AOE: Automatic output enable 0: MOE can be set only by software 1: MOE can be set by software or automatically at the next update event (if the break input is not be active) Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

416/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

Bit 13 BKP: Break polarity 0: Break input BRK is active low 1: Break input BRK is active high Note: This bit can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register). Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective. Bit 12 BKE: Break enable 0: Break inputs (BRK and CSS clock failure event) disabled 1; Break inputs (BRK and CSS clock failure event) enabled Note: This bit cannot be modified when LOCK level 1 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register). Note: Any write operation to this bit takes a delay of 1 APB clock cycle to become effective. Bit 11 OSSR: Off-state selection for Run mode This bit is used when MOE=1 on channels having a complementary output which are configured as outputs. OSSR is not implemented if no complementary output is implemented in the timer. See OC/OCN enable description for more details (Section 14.4.9: TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER) on page 409). 0: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are disabled (OC/OCN enable output signal=0). 1: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are enabled with their inactive level as soon as CCxE=1 or CCxNE=1. Then, OC/OCN enable output signal=1 Note: This bit can not be modified as soon as the LOCK level 2 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register). Bit 10 OSSI: Off-state selection for Idle mode This bit is used when MOE=0 on channels configured as outputs. See OC/OCN enable description for more details (Section 14.4.9: TIM1&TIM8 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER) on page 409). 0: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are disabled (OC/OCN enable output signal=0). 1: When inactive, OC/OCN outputs are forced first with their idle level as soon as CCxE=1 or CCxNE=1. OC/OCN enable output signal=1) Note: This bit can not be modified as soon as the LOCK level 2 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register). Bits 9:8 LOCK[1:0]: Lock configuration These bits offer a write protection against software errors. 00: LOCK OFF - No bit is write protected. 01: LOCK Level 1 = DTG bits in TIMx_BDTR register, OISx and OISxN bits in TIMx_CR2 register and BKE/BKP/AOE bits in TIMx_BDTR register can no longer be written. 10: LOCK Level 2 = LOCK Level 1 + CC Polarity bits (CCxP/CCxNP bits in TIMx_CCER register, as long as the related channel is configured in output through the CCxS bits) as well as OSSR and OSSI bits can no longer be written. 11: LOCK Level 3 = LOCK Level 2 + CC Control bits (OCxM and OCxPE bits in TIMx_CCMRx registers, as long as the related channel is configured in output through the CCxS bits) can no longer be written. Note: The LOCK bits can be written only once after the reset. Once the TIMx_BDTR register has been written, their content is frozen until the next reset.

417/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

Bits 7:0 DTG[7:0]: Dead-time generator setup This bit-field defines the duration of the dead-time inserted between the complementary outputs. DT correspond to this duration. DTG[7:5]=0xx => DT=DTG[7:0]x tdtg with tdtg=tDTS. DTG[7:5]=10x => DT=(64+DTG[5:0])xtdtg with Tdtg=2xtDTS. DTG[7:5]=110 => DT=(32+DTG[4:0])xtdtg with Tdtg=8xtDTS. DTG[7:5]=111 => DT=(32+DTG[4:0])xtdtg with Tdtg=16xtDTS. Example if TDTS=125ns (8MHz), dead-time possible values are: 0 to 15875 ns by 125 ns steps, 16 us to 31750 ns by 250 ns steps, 32 us to 63us by 1 us steps, 64 us to 126 us by 2 us steps Note: This bit-field can not be modified as long as LOCK level 1, 2 or 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register).

14.4.19

TIM1&TIM8 DMA control register (TIMx_DCR)

Address offset: 0x48 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14 Reserved

13

12

11

10 DBL[4:0]

6 Reserved

2 DBA[4:0]

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 15:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 12:8 DBL[4:0]: DMA burst length This 5-bit vector defines the number of DMA transfers (the timer detects a burst transfer when a read or a write access to the TIMx_DMAR register address is performed). the TIMx_DMAR address) 00000: 1 transfer 00001: 2 transfers 00010: 3 transfers ... 10001: 18 transfers Bits 7:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 4:0 DBA[4:0]: DMA base address This 5-bits vector defines the base-address for DMA transfers (when read/write access are done through the TIMx_DMAR address). DBA is defined as an offset starting from the address of the TIMx_CR1 register. Example: 00000: TIMx_CR1, 00001: TIMx_CR2, 00010: TIMx_SMCR, ... Example: Let us consider the following transfer: DBL = 7 transfers and DBA = TIMx_CR1. In this case the transfer is done to/from 7 registers starting from the TIMx_CR1 address.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

418/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

RM0090

14.4.20

TIM1&TIM8 DMA address for full transfer (TIMx_DMAR)

Address offset: 0x4C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

DMAB[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 DMAB[15:0]: DMA register for burst accesses A read or write operation to the DMAR register accesses the register located at the address (TIMx_CR1 address) + (DBA + DMA index) x 4 where TIMx_CR1 address is the address of the control register 1, DBA is the DMA base address configured in TIMx_DCR register, DMA index is automatically controlled by the DMA transfer, and ranges from 0 to DBL (DBL configured in TIMx_DCR).

Example of how to use the DMA burst feature

In this example the timer DMA burst feature is used to update the contents of the CCRx registers (x = 2, 3, 4) with the DMA transferring half words into the CCRx registers. This is done in the following steps: 1. Configure the corresponding DMA channel as follows: 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: DMA channel peripheral address is the DMAR register address DMA channel memory address is the address of the buffer in the RAM containing the data to be transferred by DMA into CCRx registers. Number of data to transfer = 3 (See note below). Circular mode disabled.

Configure the DCR register by configuring the DBA and DBL bit fields as follows: DBL = 3 transfers, DBA = 0xE. Enable the TIMx update DMA request (set the UDE bit in the DIER register). Enable TIMx Enable the DMA channel

This example is for the case where every CCRx register to be updated once. If every CCRx register is to be updated twice for example, the number of data to transfer should be 6. Let's take the example of a buffer in the RAM containing data1, data2, data3, data4, data5 and data6. The data is transferred to the CCRx registers as follows: on the first update DMA request, data1 is transferred to CCR2, data2 is transferred to CCR3, data3 is transferred to CCR4 and on the second update DMA request, data4 is transferred to CCR2, data5 is transferred to CCR3 and data6 is transferred to CCR4.

419/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8)

14.4.21

TIM1&TIM8 register map

TIM1&TIM8 registers are mapped as 16-bit addressable registers as described in the table below:

Table 74.
Offset
0x00

TIM1&TIM8 register map and reset values

ARPE URS 0 CCUS CEN 0 CCPC 0 0 UIE 0 UIF 0 UG 0 CC1E 0 0 0 0 0 CKD [1:0] 0 OIS3N OIS2N OIS1N OIS4 OIS3 OIS2 Reserved 0 OIS1 CMS [1:0] 0 0 UDIS 0 Reserved 0 CC1IE 0 CC1IF 0 CC1G 0 CC1P 0 0 0 0 0 OPM 0 CCDS 0 CC3IE Reserved 0 CC3IF 0 CC3G 0 OC1PE OC3PE CC1NP 0 0 0 0 0 DIR 0 0

Register
TIMx_CR1 Reset value

0x04

TIMx_CR2 Reset value

TI1S 0 MSM

0x08

TIMx_SMCR Reset value

ECE

ETP

COMDE

CC4DE

CC3DE

CC2DE

CC1DE

COMIE

CC4IE

0x0C

TIMx_DIER Reset value

Reserved

0 Reserved

0 CC4OF

0 CC3OF

0 CC2OF

0 CC1OF

0 Reserved

0 BIF

0 TIF

0 COMIF

0 CC4IF

0x10

TIMx_SR Reset value

0 Reserved OC2CE

0 BG

0 TG

0 COM

0 CC4G

0x14

TIMx_EGR Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Output Compare mode Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Input Capture mode Reset value TIMx_CCMR2 Output Compare mode Reset value TIMx_CCMR2 Input Capture mode Reset value TIMx_CCER Reset value

0 OC1CE OC2PE OC2FE Reserved OC2M [2:0] 0 0 0 CC2S [1:0]

OC1M [2:0]

OC1FE OC3FE CC1NE 0 0 0 0 0

CC2G 0

CC2IF 0

CC2IE 0

UDE

TDE

BIE

TIE

0x18

Reserved

OC4M [2:0] 0 0 0

CC4S [1:0]

OC3CE

OC4PE

OC4FE

O24CE

0x1C

CC3NP

CC3NE

CC2NP

CC2NE

CC4P

CC4E

CC3P

CC3E

CC2P

0x20

Reserved

0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x24

TIMx_CNT Reset value

CNT[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x28

TIMx_PSC Reset value

PSC[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x2C

TIMx_ARR Reset value

ARR[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x30

TIMx_RCR Reset value

REP[7:0] 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

CC2E

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 MMS[2:0] 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ETPS [1:0] 0 0 0 ETF[3:0] 0 0 0 TS[2:0] 0 0 0 SMS[2:0] 0 0 0 0 CC1S [1:0] 0 Reserved 0 IC2F[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC2 CC2S PSC IC1F[3:0] [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OC3M [2:0] 0 0 0 0 IC1 CC1S PSC [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 CC3S [1:0] 0 Reserved 0 IC4F[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC4 CC4S PSC IC3F[3:0] [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC3 CC3S PSC [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 0

420/1422

Advanced-control timers (TIM1&TIM8) Table 74.

Offset
0x34

RM0090

TIM1&TIM8 register map and reset values (continued)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 MOE Reserved 0 AOE 0 BKP 0 BKE 0 OSSR 0 OSSI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCR1[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCR2[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCR3[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCR4[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LOCK [1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 DT[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DBL[4:0] 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 DBA[4:0] 0 0 0 0 DMAB[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Register
TIMx_CCR1 Reset value

0x38

TIMx_CCR2 Reset value

0x3C

TIMx_CCR3 Reset value

0x40

TIMx_CCR4 Reset value

0x44

TIMx_BDTR Reset value

0x48

TIMx_DCR Reset value

0x4C

TIMx_DMAR Reset value

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

421/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

15

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

15.1

TIM2 to TIM5 introduction

The general-purpose timers consist of a 16-bit or 32-bit auto-reload counter driven by a programmable prescaler. They may be used for a variety of purposes, including measuring the pulse lengths of input signals (input capture) or generating output waveforms (output compare and PWM). Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be modulated from a few microseconds to several milliseconds using the timer prescaler and the RCC clock controller prescalers. The timers are completely independent, and do not share any resources. They can be synchronized together as described in Section 15.3.15.

15.2

TIM2 to TIM5 main features

General-purpose TIMx timer features include:

16-bit (TIM3 and TIM4) or 32-bit (TIM2 and TIM5) up, down, up/down auto-reload counter. 16-bit programmable prescaler used to divide (also on the fly) the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536. Up to 4 independent channels for: Input capture Output compare PWM generation (Edge- and Center-aligned modes) One-pulse mode output

Synchronization circuit to control the timer with external signals and to interconnect several timers. Interrupt/DMA generation on the following events: Update: counter overflow/underflow, counter initialization (by software or internal/external trigger) Trigger event (counter start, stop, initialization or count by internal/external trigger) Input capture Output compare

Supports incremental (quadrature) encoder and hall-sensor circuitry for positioning purposes Trigger input for external clock or cycle-by-cycle current management

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

422/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 119. General-purpose timer block diagram
Internal Clock (CK_INT)

RM0090

TIMxCLK from RCC

ETRP

ETRF Polarity selection & edge detector & prescaler Input filter TRGO TGI TRC TRGI Trigger controller Slave mode controller

TIMx_ETR

ETR ITR0 ITR1 ITR2 ITR3

ITR

to other timers to DAC/ADC Reset, enable, up/down, count,

TI1F_ED

TI1FP1 TI2FP2

Encoder Interface

Autoreload register Stop, clear or up/down

UI U

CK_PSC

Prescaler CC1I XOR

PSC

CK_CNT

+/-

counter CC1I Capture/compare 1 register OC1REF

CNT

TI1
Input filter & edge detector

TI1FP1 TI1FP2 TRC

IC1
Prescaler

IC1PS U

output
control

OC1

TIMx_CH1

TIMx_CH1

CC2I

CC2I Capture/compare 2 register OC2REF

TIMx_CH2

TI2

Input filter & edge detector

TI2FP1 TI2FP2 TRC

IC2
Prescaler

IC2PS U

output
control

OC2

TIMx_CH2

CC3I

CC3I Capture/compare 3 register OC3REF

TIMx_CH3

TI3

Input filter & edge detector

TI3FP3 TI3FP4 TRC

IC3
Prescaler

IC3PS

output
control

OC3

TIMx_CH3

CC4I

CC4I Capture/compare 4 register OC4REF

TIMx_CH4

TI4

Input filter & edge detector

TI4FP3 TI4FP4 TRC

IC4
Prescaler

IC4PS

output
control

OC4

TIMx_CH4

ETRF

Notes:
Reg Preload registers transferred to active registers on U event according to control bit event interrupt & DMA output

15.3
15.3.1

TIM2 to TIM5 functional description

Time-base unit
The main block of the programmable timer is a 16-bit/32-bit counter with its related autoreload register. The counter can count up. The counter clock can be divided by a prescaler. The counter, the auto-reload register and the prescaler register can be written or read by software. This is true even when the counter is running. The time-base unit includes:

Counter Register (TIMx_CNT) Prescaler Register (TIMx_PSC): Auto-Reload Register (TIMx_ARR)

423/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) The auto-reload register is preloaded. Writing to or reading from the auto-reload register accesses the preload register. The content of the preload register are transferred into the shadow register permanently or at each update event (UEV), depending on the auto-reload preload enable bit (ARPE) in TIMx_CR1 register. The update event is sent when the counter reaches the overflow (or underflow when downcounting) and if the UDIS bit equals 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. It can also be generated by software. The generation of the update event is described in detail for each configuration. The counter is clocked by the prescaler output CK_CNT, which is enabled only when the counter enable bit (CEN) in TIMx_CR1 register is set (refer also to the slave mode controller description to get more details on counter enabling). Note that the actual counter enable signal CNT_EN is set 1 clock cycle after CEN.

Prescaler description
The prescaler can divide the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536. It is based on a 16-bit counter controlled through a 16-bit/32-bit register (in the TIMx_PSC register). It can be changed on the fly as this control register is buffered. The new prescaler ratio is taken into account at the next update event. Figure 120 and Figure 121 give some examples of the counter behavior when the prescaler ratio is changed on the fly: Figure 120. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 1 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01 02 03

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

424/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Figure 121. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 3 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3

15.3.2

Counter modes
Upcounting mode
In upcounting mode, the counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register), then restarts from 0 and generates a counter overflow event. An Update event can be generated at each counter overflow or by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller). The UEV event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until the UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter restarts from 0, as well as the counter of the prescaler (but the prescale rate does not change). In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event. When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register) The auto-reload shadow register is updated with the preload value (TIMx_ARR)

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR=0x36.

425/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 122. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Figure 123. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0034 0035 0036 0000 0001 0002 0003

Figure 124. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4

CK_INT CNT_EN TImer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0035 0036 0000 0001

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

426/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 125. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N
CK_INT

RM0090

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 1F 20 00

Figure 126. Counter timing diagram, Update event when ARPE=0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded)
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload register FF 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

427/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 127. Counter timing diagram, Update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded)
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register F5 36 F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Auto-reload shadow register

F5

36

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

Downcounting mode
In downcounting mode, the counter counts from the auto-reload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register) down to 0, then restarts from the auto-reload value and generates a counter underflow event. An Update event can be generate at each counter underflow or by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) The UEV update event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter restarts from the current auto-reload value, whereas the counter of the prescaler restarts from 0 (but the prescale rate doesnt change). In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event. When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register). The auto-reload active register is updated with the preload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register). Note that the auto-reload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the next period is the expected one.

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR=0x36.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

428/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 128. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow (cnt_udf) Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 05 04 03 02 01 00 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 2F

RM0090

Figure 129. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0002 0001 0000 0036 0035 0034 0033

Figure 130. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4

CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0001 0000 0036 0035

429/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 131. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N
CK_INT

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 20 1F 00 36

Figure 132. Counter timing diagram, Update event

CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload register FF 36 05 04 03 02 01 00 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 2F

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

Center-aligned mode (up/down counting)

In center-aligned mode, the counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register) 1, generates a counter overflow event, then counts from the autoreload value down to 1 and generates a counter underflow event. Then it restarts counting from 0. Center-aligned mode is active when the CMS bits in TIMx_CR1 register are not equal to '00'. The Output compare interrupt flag of channels configured in output is set when: the counter counts down (Center aligned mode 1, CMS = "01"), the counter counts up (Center aligned mode 2, CMS = "10") the counter counts up and down (Center aligned mode 3, CMS = "11"). In this mode, the direction bit (DIR from TIMx_CR1 register) cannot be written. It is updated by hardware and gives the current direction of the counter. The update event can be generated at each counter overflow and at each counter underflow or by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller) also generates an update event. In this case, the counter restarts counting from 0, as well as the counter of the prescaler.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

430/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

The UEV update event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until the UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter continues counting up and down, based on the current auto-reload value. In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt or DMA request is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupt when clearing the counter on the capture event. When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register). The auto-reload active register is updated with the preload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register). Note that if the update source is a counter overflow, the autoreload is updated before the counter is reloaded, so that the next period is the expected one (the counter is loaded with the new value).

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies. Figure 133. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1, TIMx_ARR=0x6
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 04 03 02 01 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 05 04 03

1.

Here, center-aligned mode 1 is used (for more details refer to Section 15.4.1: TIMx control register 1 (TIMx_CR1) on page 459).

431/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 134. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2
CK_INT CNT_EN TImer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0003 0002 0001 0000 0001 0002 0003

Figure 135. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4, TIMx_ARR=0x36

CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow (cnt_ovf) Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0034 0035 0036 0035

1.

Center-aligned mode 2 or 3 is used with an UIF on overflow.

Figure 136. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

CK_INT

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 20 1F 01 00

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

432/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Figure 137. Counter timing diagram, Update event with ARPE=1 (counter underflow)
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter underflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register FD 36 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR Auto-reload active register FD 36

Figure 138. Counter timing diagram, Update event with ARPE=1 (counter overflow)
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register FD 36 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 2F

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR Auto-reload active register FD 36

433/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

15.3.3

Clock selection
The counter clock can be provided by the following clock sources:

Internal clock (CK_INT) External clock mode1: external input pin (TIx) External clock mode2: external trigger input (ETR) available on TIM2, TIM3 and TIM4 only. Internal trigger inputs (ITRx): using one timer as prescaler for another timer, for example, you can configure Timer to act as a prescaler for Timer 2. Refer to : Using one timer as prescaler for another on page 453 for more details.

Internal clock source (CK_INT)

If the slave mode controller is disabled (SMS=000 in the TIMx_SMCR register), then the CEN, DIR (in the TIMx_CR1 register) and UG bits (in the TIMx_EGR register) are actual control bits and can be changed only by software (except UG which remains cleared automatically). As soon as the CEN bit is written to 1, the prescaler is clocked by the internal clock CK_INT. Figure 139 shows the behavior of the control circuit and the upcounter in normal mode, without prescaler. Figure 139. Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1
CK_INT CEN=CNT_EN UG CNT_INIT Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC COUNTER REGISTER 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

External clock source mode 1

This mode is selected when SMS=111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. The counter can count at each rising or falling edge on a selected input.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

434/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 140. TI2 external clock connection example
TIMx_SMCR TS[2:0] TI2F TI1F or or

RM0090

or ITRx 001 TI1F_ED 100

TI2 Filter Edge Detector TI2F_Rising 0 TI2F_Falling 1 CC2P

encoder mode external clock mode 1 external clock mode 2 internal clock mode CK_PSC

TI1FP1 101 TI2FP2 110 ETRF 111

TRGI ETRF CK_INT (internal clock)

ICF[3:0]

TIMx_CCMR1

TIMx_CCER

ECE SMS[2:0] TIMx_SMCR

For example, to configure the upcounter to count in response to a rising edge on the TI2 input, use the following procedure: 1. 2. Note: Configure channel 2 to detect rising edges on the TI2 input by writing CC2S= 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Configure the input filter duration by writing the IC2F[3:0] bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (if no filter is needed, keep IC2F=0000). Select rising edge polarity by writing CC2P=0 and CC2NP=0 in the TIMx_CCER register. Configure the timer in external clock mode 1 by writing SMS=111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI2 as the input source by writing TS=110 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. 3. 4. 5. 6.

When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter counts once and the TIF flag is set. The delay between the rising edge on TI2 and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI2 input. Figure 141. Control circuit in external clock mode 1
TI2 CNT_EN Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF 34 35 36

Write TIF=0

External clock source mode 2

This mode is selected by writing ECE=1 in the TIMx_SMCR register.

435/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) The counter can count at each rising or falling edge on the external trigger input ETR. Figure 142 gives an overview of the external trigger input block. Figure 142. External trigger input block
or TI2F TI1F TRGI ETR pin ETR 0 1 ETP TIMx_SMCR ETRP CK_INT filter downcounter ETRF CK_INT (internal clock) ETPS[1:0] TIMx_SMCR ETF[3:0] TIMx_SMCR ECE SMS[2:0] TIMx_SMCR or or encoder mode external clock mode 1 external clock mode 2 internal clock mode CK_PSC

divider /1, /2, /4, /8

For example, to configure the upcounter to count each 2 rising edges on ETR, use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. As no filter is needed in this example, write ETF[3:0]=0000 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Set the prescaler by writing ETPS[1:0]=01 in the TIMx_SMCR register Select rising edge detection on the ETR pin by writing ETP=0 in the TIMx_SMCR register Enable external clock mode 2 by writing ECE=1 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The counter counts once each 2 ETR rising edges. The delay between the rising edge on ETR and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on the ETRP signal. Figure 143. Control circuit in external clock mode 2
CK_INT CNT_EN ETR ETRP ETRF Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register 34 35 36

15.3.4

Capture/compare channels
Each Capture/Compare channel is built around a capture/compare register (including a shadow register), a input stage for capture (with digital filter, multiplexing and prescaler) and an output stage (with comparator and output control). The following figure gives an overview of one Capture/Compare channel.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

436/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

The input stage samples the corresponding TIx input to generate a filtered signal TIxF. Then, an edge detector with polarity selection generates a signal (TIxFPx) which can be used as trigger input by the slave mode controller or as the capture command. It is prescaled before the capture register (ICxPS). Figure 144. Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage)
TI1F_ED to the slave mode controller TI1F_Rising Edge Detector TI1FP1 TI1F_Falling TI2FP1 ICF[3:0] TIMx_CCMR1 CC1P/CC1NP TIMx_CCER TI2F_rising (from channel 2) TI2F_falling (from channel 2) 01 10 IC1 divider /1, /2, /4, /8 IC1PS

TI1 fDTS

filter downcounter

TI1F

TRC 11 (from slave mode controller) CC1S[1:0] ICPS[1:0] TIMx_CCMR1 CC1E TIMx_CCER

The output stage generates an intermediate waveform which is then used for reference: OCxRef (active high). The polarity acts at the end of the chain. Figure 145. Capture/compare channel 1 main circuit
APB Bus

MCU-peripheral interface 8 high read CCR1H S read CCR1L R capture_transfer CC1S[1] CC1S[0] IC1PS CC1E Counter CC1G TIMx_EGR input mode compare_transfer read_in_progress (if 16-bit) 8 low write_in_progress S write CCR1H R output mode write CCR1L CC1S[1] CC1S[0] OC1PE UEV TIMx_CCMR1 (from time base unit) OC1PE

Capture/Compare Preload Register

Capture/Compare Shadow Register capture comparator CNT>CCR1 CNT=CCR1

437/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 146. Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1)
OCREF_CLR ETRF 0 1 To the master mode controller OCCS TIMx_SMCR CNT > CCR1 Output mode oc1ref CNT = CCR1 controller 1 CC1P TIMx_CCER 0 Output Enable Circuit OC1 ocref_clr_int

CC1E OC1M[2:0] TIMx_CCMR1 TIMx_CCER

ai17187

The capture/compare block is made of one preload register and one shadow register. Write and read always access the preload register. In capture mode, captures are actually done in the shadow register, which is copied into the preload register. In compare mode, the content of the preload register is copied into the shadow register which is compared to the counter.

15.3.5

Input capture mode

In Input capture mode, the Capture/Compare Registers (TIMx_CCRx) are used to latch the value of the counter after a transition detected by the corresponding ICx signal. When a capture occurs, the corresponding CCXIF flag (TIMx_SR register) is set and an interrupt or a DMA request can be sent if they are enabled. If a capture occurs while the CCxIF flag was already high, then the over-capture flag CCxOF (TIMx_SR register) is set. CCxIF can be cleared by software by writing it to 0 or by reading the captured data stored in the TIMx_CCRx register. CCxOF is cleared when you write it to 0. The following example shows how to capture the counter value in TIMx_CCR1 when TI1 input rises. To do this, use the following procedure:

Select the active input: TIMx_CCR1 must be linked to the TI1 input, so write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. As soon as CC1S becomes different from 00, the channel is configured in input and the TIMx_CCR1 register becomes read-only. Program the input filter duration you need with respect to the signal you connect to the timer (by programming the ICxF bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register if the input is one of the TIx inputs). Lets imagine that, when toggling, the input signal is not stable during at must 5 internal clock cycles. We must program a filter duration longer than these 5 clock cycles. We can validate a transition on TI1 when 8 consecutive samples with the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

438/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

new level have been detected (sampled at fDTS frequency). Then write IC1F bits to 0011 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Select the edge of the active transition on the TI1 channel by writing the CC1P and CC1NP bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCER register (rising edge in this case). Program the input prescaler. In our example, we wish the capture to be performed at each valid transition, so the prescaler is disabled (write IC1PS bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register). Enable capture from the counter into the capture register by setting the CC1E bit in the TIMx_CCER register. If needed, enable the related interrupt request by setting the CC1IE bit in the TIMx_DIER register, and/or the DMA request by setting the CC1DE bit in the TIMx_DIER register. The TIMx_CCR1 register gets the value of the counter on the active transition. CC1IF flag is set (interrupt flag). CC1OF is also set if at least two consecutive captures occurred whereas the flag was not cleared. An interrupt is generated depending on the CC1IE bit. A DMA request is generated depending on the CC1DE bit.

When an input capture occurs:

In order to handle the overcapture, it is recommended to read the data before the overcapture flag. This is to avoid missing an overcapture which could happen after reading the flag and before reading the data. Note: IC interrupt and/or DMA requests can be generated by software by setting the corresponding CCxG bit in the TIMx_EGR register.

15.3.6

PWM input mode

This mode is a particular case of input capture mode. The procedure is the same except:

Two ICx signals are mapped on the same TIx input. These 2 ICx signals are active on edges with opposite polarity. One of the two TIxFP signals is selected as trigger input and the slave mode controller is configured in reset mode.

439/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) For example, you can measure the period (in TIMx_CCR1 register) and the duty cycle (in TIMx_CCR2 register) of the PWM applied on TI1 using the following procedure (depending on CK_INT frequency and prescaler value):

Select the active input for TIMx_CCR1: write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (TI1 selected). Select the active polarity for TI1FP1 (used both for capture in TIMx_CCR1 and counter clear): write the CC1P to 0 and the CC1NP bit to 0 (active on rising edge). Select the active input for TIMx_CCR2: write the CC2S bits to 10 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (TI1 selected). Select the active polarity for TI1FP2 (used for capture in TIMx_CCR2): write the CC2P bit to 1 and the CC2NP bit to 0(active on falling edge). Select the valid trigger input: write the TS bits to 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register (TI1FP1 selected). Configure the slave mode controller in reset mode: write the SMS bits to 100 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the captures: write the CC1E and CC2E bits to 1 in the TIMx_CCER register.

Figure 147. PWM input mode timing

TI1

TIMx_CNT

0004

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0000

TIMx_CCR1

0004

TIMx_CCR2

0002

IC1 capture IC2 capture reset counter

IC2 capture pulse width measurement

IC1 capture period measurement

ai15413

15.3.7

Forced output mode

In output mode (CCxS bits = 00 in the TIMx_CCMRx register), each output compare signal (OCxREF and then OCx) can be forced to active or inactive level directly by software, independently of any comparison between the output compare register and the counter. To force an output compare signal (ocxref/OCx) to its active level, you just need to write 101 in the OCxM bits in the corresponding TIMx_CCMRx register. Thus ocxref is forced high (OCxREF is always active high) and OCx get opposite value to CCxP polarity bit. e.g.: CCxP=0 (OCx active high) => OCx is forced to high level. ocxref signal can be forced low by writing the OCxM bits to 100 in the TIMx_CCMRx register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

440/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Anyway, the comparison between the TIMx_CCRx shadow register and the counter is still performed and allows the flag to be set. Interrupt and DMA requests can be sent accordingly. This is described in the Output Compare Mode section.

15.3.8

Output compare mode

This function is used to control an output waveform or indicating when a period of time has elapsed. When a match is found between the capture/compare register and the counter, the output compare function:

Assigns the corresponding output pin to a programmable value defined by the output compare mode (OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register) and the output polarity (CCxP bit in the TIMx_CCER register). The output pin can keep its level (OCXM=000), be set active (OCxM=001), be set inactive (OCxM=010) or can toggle (OCxM=011) on match. Sets a flag in the interrupt status register (CCxIF bit in the TIMx_SR register). Generates an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt mask is set (CCXIE bit in the TIMx_DIER register). Sends a DMA request if the corresponding enable bit is set (CCxDE bit in the TIMx_DIER register, CCDS bit in the TIMx_CR2 register for the DMA request selection).

The TIMx_CCRx registers can be programmed with or without preload registers using the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register. In output compare mode, the update event UEV has no effect on ocxref and OCx output. The timing resolution is one count of the counter. Output compare mode can also be used to output a single pulse (in One-pulse mode). Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the counter clock (internal, external, prescaler). Write the desired data in the TIMx_ARR and TIMx_CCRx registers. Set the CCxIE and/or CCxDE bits if an interrupt and/or a DMA request is to be generated. Select the output mode. For example, you must write OCxM=011, OCxPE=0, CCxP=0 and CCxE=1 to toggle OCx output pin when CNT matches CCRx, CCRx preload is not used, OCx is enabled and active high. Enable the counter by setting the CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.

5.

The TIMx_CCRx register can be updated at any time by software to control the output waveform, provided that the preload register is not enabled (OCxPE=0, else TIMx_CCRx shadow register is updated only at the next update event UEV). An example is given in Figure 148.

441/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 148. Output compare mode, toggle on OC1.
Write B201h in the CC1R register

TIMx_CNT TIMx_CCR1 OC1REF=OC1

0039

003A 003A

003B

B200 B201

B201

Match detected on CCR1 Interrupt generated if enabled

15.3.9

PWM mode
Pulse width modulation mode allows you to generate a signal with a frequency determined by the value of the TIMx_ARR register and a duty cycle determined by the value of the TIMx_CCRx register. The PWM mode can be selected independently on each channel (one PWM per OCx output) by writing 110 (PWM mode 1) or 111 (PWM mode 2) in the OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register. You must enable the corresponding preload register by setting the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register, and eventually the auto-reload preload register by setting the ARPE bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. As the preload registers are transferred to the shadow registers only when an update event occurs, before starting the counter, you have to initialize all the registers by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register. OCx polarity is software programmable using the CCxP bit in the TIMx_CCER register. It can be programmed as active high or active low. OCx output is enabled by the CCxE bit in the TIMx_CCER register. Refer to the TIMx_CCERx register description for more details. In PWM mode (1 or 2), TIMx_CNT and TIMx_CCRx are always compared to determine whether TIMx_CCRx TIMx_CNT or TIMx_CNT TIMx_CCRx (depending on the direction of the counter). However, to comply with the ETRF (OCREF can be cleared by an external event through the ETR signal until the next PWM period), the OCREF signal is asserted only:

When the result of the comparison changes, or When the output compare mode (OCxM bits in TIMx_CCMRx register) switches from the frozen configuration (no comparison, OCxM=000) to one of the PWM modes (OCxM=110 or 111).

This forces the PWM by software while the timer is running. The timer is able to generate PWM in edge-aligned mode or center-aligned mode depending on the CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

442/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

PWM edge-aligned mode

Upcounting configuration Upcounting is active when the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is low. Refer to Section : Upcounting mode on page 425. In the following example, we consider PWM mode 1. The reference PWM signal OCxREF is high as long as TIMx_CNT <TIMx_CCRx else it becomes low. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRx is greater than the auto-reload value (in TIMx_ARR) then OCxREF is held at 1. If the compare value is 0 then OCxREF is held at 0. Figure 149 shows some edge-aligned PWM waveforms in an example where TIMx_ARR=8. Figure 149. Edge-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8)
Counter register OCxREF CCxIF 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1

CCRx=4

OCxREF CCRx=8 CCxIF

OCxREF CCRx>8 CCxIF OCxREF CCRx=0 CCxIF

Downcounting configuration
Downcounting is active when DIR bit in TIMx_CR1 register is high. Refer to Section : Downcounting mode on page 428. In PWM mode 1, the reference signal ocxref is low as long as TIMx_CNT>TIMx_CCRx else it becomes high. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRx is greater than the auto-reload value in TIMx_ARR, then ocxref is held at 1. 0% PWM is not possible in this mode.

PWM center-aligned mode

Center-aligned mode is active when the CMS bits in TIMx_CR1 register are different from 00 (all the remaining configurations having the same effect on the ocxref/OCx signals). The compare flag is set when the counter counts up, when it counts down or both when it counts up and down depending on the CMS bits configuration. The direction bit (DIR) in the TIMx_CR1 register is updated by hardware and must not be changed by software. Refer to Section : Center-aligned mode (up/down counting) on page 430. Figure 150 shows some center-aligned PWM waveforms in an example where:

TIMx_ARR=8, PWM mode is the PWM mode 1, The flag is set when the counter counts down corresponding to the center-aligned mode 1 selected for CMS=01 in TIMx_CR1 register.

443/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 150. Center-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8)
Counter register 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1

OCxREF CCRx = 4 CCxIF CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11

OCxREF CCRx = 7

CCxIF OCxREF CCRx = 8 CCxIF '1'

CMS=10 or 11

CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11 '1'

OCxREF CCRx > 8 CCxIF

CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11 '0'

OCxREF CCRx = 0 CCxIF

CMS=01 CMS=10 CMS=11

ai14681b

Hints on using center-aligned mode:

When starting in center-aligned mode, the current up-down configuration is used. It means that the counter counts up or down depending on the value written in the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. Moreover, the DIR and CMS bits must not be changed at the same time by the software. Writing to the counter while running in center-aligned mode is not recommended as it can lead to unexpected results. In particular: The direction is not updated if you write a value in the counter that is greater than the auto-reload value (TIMx_CNT>TIMx_ARR). For example, if the counter was counting up, it continues to count up. The direction is updated if you write 0 or write the TIMx_ARR value in the counter but no Update Event UEV is generated. The safest way to use center-aligned mode is to generate an update by software (setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register) just before starting the counter and not to write the counter while it is running.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

444/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.3.10

One-pulse mode
One-pulse mode (OPM) is a particular case of the previous modes. It allows the counter to be started in response to a stimulus and to generate a pulse with a programmable length after a programmable delay. Starting the counter can be controlled through the slave mode controller. Generating the waveform can be done in output compare mode or PWM mode. You select One-pulse mode by setting the OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This makes the counter stop automatically at the next update event UEV. A pulse can be correctly generated only if the compare value is different from the counter initial value. Before starting (when the timer is waiting for the trigger), the configuration must be:

In upcounting: CNT<CCRx ARR (in particular, 0<CCRx), In downcounting: CNT>CCRx.

Figure 151. Example of one-pulse mode. For example you may want to generate a positive pulse on OC1 with a length of tPULSE and after a delay of tDELAY as soon as a positive edge is detected on the TI2 input pin. Lets use TI2FP2 as trigger 1:

Map TI2FP2 on TI2 by writing IC2S=01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. TI2FP2 must detect a rising edge, write CC2P=0 and CC2NP=0 in the TIMx_CCER register. Configure TI2FP2 as trigger for the slave mode controller (TRGI) by writing TS=110 in the TIMx_SMCR register. TI2FP2 is used to start the counter by writing SMS to 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register (trigger mode).

The OPM waveform is defined by writing the compare registers (taking into account the clock frequency and the counter prescaler).

The tDELAY is defined by the value written in the TIMx_CCR1 register. The tPULSE is defined by the difference between the auto-reload value and the compare value (TIMx_ARR - TIMx_CCR1). Lets say you want to build a waveform with a transition from 0 to 1 when a compare match occurs and a transition from 1 to 0 when the counter reaches the auto-reload value. To do this you enable PWM mode 2 by writing OC1M=111 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. You can optionally enable the preload registers by writing OC1PE=1 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register and ARPE in the TIMx_CR1 register. In this case you have to write the compare value in the TIMx_CCR1 register, the auto-reload value in the TIMx_ARR register, generate an update by setting the UG bit and wait for external trigger event on TI2. CC1P is written to 0 in this example.

In our example, the DIR and CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register should be low. You only want 1 pulse (Single mode), so you write '1 in the OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register to stop the counter at the next update event (when the counter rolls over from the auto-reload value back to 0). When OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is set to '0', so the Repetitive Mode is selected.

445/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

Particular case: OCx fast enable:

In One-pulse mode, the edge detection on TIx input set the CEN bit which enables the counter. Then the comparison between the counter and the compare value makes the output toggle. But several clock cycles are needed for these operations and it limits the minimum delay tDELAY min we can get. If you want to output a waveform with the minimum delay, you can set the OCxFE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register. Then OCxRef (and OCx) is forced in response to the stimulus, without taking in account the comparison. Its new level is the same as if a compare match had occurred. OCxFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode.

15.3.11

Clearing the OCxREF signal on an external event

The OCxREF signal for a given channel can be driven Low by applying a High level to the ETRF input (OCxCE enable bit of the corresponding TIMx_CCMRx register set to '1'). The OCxREF signal remains Low until the next update event, UEV, occurs. This function can only be used in output compare and PWM modes, and does not work in forced mode. For example, the ETR signal can be connected to the output of a comparator to be used for current handling. In this case, ETR must be configured as follows: 1. 2. 3. The external trigger prescaler should be kept off: bits ETPS[1:0] in the TIMx_SMCR register are cleared to 00. The external clock mode 2 must be disabled: bit ECE in the TIM1_SMCR register is cleared to 0. The external trigger polarity (ETP) and the external trigger filter (ETF) can be configured according to the applications needs.

Figure 152 shows the behavior of the OCxREF signal when the ETRF input becomes high, for both values of the OCxCE enable bit. In this example, the timer TIMx is programmed in PWM mode. Figure 152. Clearing TIMx OCxREF

(CCRx) counter (CNT)

ETRF

OCxREF (OCxCE=0) OCxREF (OCxCE=1) ETRF becomes high ETRF still high

1. In case of a PWM with a 100% duty cycle (if CCRx>ARR), OCxREF is enabled again at the next counter overflow.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

446/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.3.12

Encoder interface mode

To select Encoder Interface mode write SMS=001 in the TIMx_SMCR register if the counter is counting on TI2 edges only, SMS=010 if it is counting on TI1 edges only and SMS=011 if it is counting on both TI1 and TI2 edges. Select the TI1 and TI2 polarity by programming the CC1P and CC2P bits in the TIMx_CCER register. When needed, you can program the input filter as well. The two inputs TI1 and TI2 are used to interface to an incremental encoder. Refer to Table 75. The counter is clocked by each valid transition on TI1FP1 or TI2FP2 (TI1 and TI2 after input filter and polarity selection, TI1FP1=TI1 if not filtered and not inverted, TI2FP2=TI2 if not filtered and not inverted) assuming that it is enabled (CEN bit in TIMx_CR1 register written to 1). The sequence of transitions of the two inputs is evaluated and generates count pulses as well as the direction signal. Depending on the sequence the counter counts up or down, the DIR bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is modified by hardware accordingly. The DIR bit is calculated at each transition on any input (TI1 or TI2), whatever the counter is counting on TI1 only, TI2 only or both TI1 and TI2. Encoder interface mode acts simply as an external clock with direction selection. This means that the counter just counts continuously between 0 and the auto-reload value in the TIMx_ARR register (0 to ARR or ARR down to 0 depending on the direction). So you must configure TIMx_ARR before starting. In the same way, the capture, compare, prescaler, trigger output features continue to work as normal. In this mode, the counter is modified automatically following the speed and the direction of the incremental encoder and its content, therefore, always represents the encoders position. The count direction correspond to the rotation direction of the connected sensor. The table summarizes the possible combinations, assuming TI1 and TI2 dont switch at the same time. Table 75. Counting direction versus encoder signals
Level on opposite signal (TI1FP1 for TI2, TI2FP2 for TI1) High Low High Low High Low TI1FP1 signal Rising Down Up No Count No Count Down Up Falling Up Down No Count No Count Up Down TI2FP2 signal Rising No Count No Count Up Down Up Down Falling No Count No Count Down Up Down Up

Active edge

Counting on TI1 only Counting on TI2 only Counting on TI1 and TI2

An external incremental encoder can be connected directly to the MCU without external interface logic. However, comparators are normally be used to convert the encoders differential outputs to digital signals. This greatly increases noise immunity. The third encoder output which indicate the mechanical zero position, may be connected to an external interrupt input and trigger a counter reset. Figure 153 gives an example of counter operation, showing count signal generation and direction control. It also shows how input jitter is compensated where both edges are

447/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) selected. This might occur if the sensor is positioned near to one of the switching points. For this example we assume that the configuration is the following:

CC1S= 01 (TIMx_CCMR1 register, TI1FP1 mapped on TI1) CC2S= 01 (TIMx_CCMR2 register, TI2FP2 mapped on TI2) CC1P= 0, CC1NP = 0, IC1F =0000 (TIMx_CCER register, TI1FP1 noninverted, TI1FP1=TI1) CC2P= 0, CC2NP = 0, IC2F =0000 (TIMx_CCER register, TI2FP2 noninverted, TI2FP2=TI2) SMS= 011 (TIMx_SMCR register, both inputs are active on both rising and falling edges) CEN = 1 (TIMx_CR1 register, Counter is enabled)

Figure 153. Example of counter operation in encoder interface mode

forward jitter backward jitter forward

TI1 TI2

Counter

up

down

up

Figure 154 gives an example of counter behavior when TI1FP1 polarity is inverted (same configuration as above except CC1P=1). Figure 154. Example of encoder interface mode with TI1FP1 polarity inverted
forward jitter backward jitter forward

TI1 TI2

Counter

down

up

down

The timer, when configured in Encoder Interface mode provides information on the sensors current position. You can obtain dynamic information (speed, acceleration, deceleration) by measuring the period between two encoder events using a second timer configured in

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

448/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

capture mode. The output of the encoder which indicates the mechanical zero can be used for this purpose. Depending on the time between two events, the counter can also be read at regular times. You can do this by latching the counter value into a third input capture register if available (then the capture signal must be periodic and can be generated by another timer). when available, it is also possible to read its value through a DMA request generated by a Real-Time clock.

15.3.13

Timer input XOR function

The TI1S bit in the TIM_CR2 register, allows the input filter of channel 1 to be connected to the output of a XOR gate, combining the three input pins TIMx_CH1 to TIMx_CH3. The XOR output can be used with all the timer input functions such as trigger or input capture.

15.3.14

Timers and external trigger synchronization

The TIMx Timers can be synchronized with an external trigger in several modes: Reset mode, Gated mode and Trigger mode.

Slave mode: Reset mode

The counter and its prescaler can be reinitialized in response to an event on a trigger input. Moreover, if the URS bit from the TIMx_CR1 register is low, an update event UEV is generated. Then all the preloaded registers (TIMx_ARR, TIMx_CCRx) are updated. In the following example, the upcounter is cleared in response to a rising edge on TI1 input:

Configure the channel 1 to detect rising edges on TI1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC1F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC1P=0 and CC1NP=0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect rising edges only). Configure the timer in reset mode by writing SMS=100 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Start the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The counter starts counting on the internal clock, then behaves normally until TI1 rising edge. When TI1 rises, the counter is cleared and restarts from 0. In the meantime, the trigger flag is set (TIF bit in the TIMx_SR register) and an interrupt request, or a DMA request can be sent if enabled (depending on the TIE and TDE bits in TIMx_DIER register). The following figure shows this behavior when the auto-reload register TIMx_ARR=0x36. The delay between the rising edge on TI1 and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI1 input.

449/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 155. Control circuit in reset mode

TI1 UG Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03

Slave mode: Gated mode

The counter can be enabled depending on the level of a selected input. In the following example, the upcounter counts only when TI1 input is low:

Configure the channel 1 to detect low levels on TI1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC1F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S=01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC1P=1 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only). Configure the timer in gated mode by writing SMS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register (in gated mode, the counter doesnt start if CEN=0, whatever is the trigger input level).

The counter starts counting on the internal clock as long as TI1 is low and stops as soon as TI1 becomes high. The TIF flag in the TIMx_SR register is set both when the counter starts or stops. The delay between the rising edge on TI1 and the actual stop of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI1 input. Figure 156. Control circuit in gated mode

TI1 CNT_EN Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Write TIF=0

1. The configuration CCxP=CCxNP=1 (detection of both rising and falling edges) does not have any effect in gated mode because gated mode acts on a level and not on an edge.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

450/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Slave mode: Trigger mode

The counter can start in response to an event on a selected input. In the following example, the upcounter starts in response to a rising edge on TI2 input:

Configure the channel 2 to detect rising edges on TI2. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC2F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. CC2S bits are selecting the input capture source only, CC2S=01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register. Write CC2P=1 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only). Configure the timer in trigger mode by writing SMS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI2 as the input source by writing TS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register.

When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter starts counting on the internal clock and the TIF flag is set. The delay between the rising edge on TI2 and the actual start of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI2 input. Figure 157. Control circuit in trigger mode
TI2 CNT_EN Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF 34 35 36 37 38

Slave mode: External Clock mode 2 + trigger mode

The external clock mode 2 can be used in addition to another slave mode (except external clock mode 1 and encoder mode). In this case, the ETR signal is used as external clock input, and another input can be selected as trigger input when operating in reset mode, gated mode or trigger mode. It is recommended not to select ETR as TRGI through the TS bits of TIMx_SMCR register. In the following example, the upcounter is incremented at each rising edge of the ETR signal as soon as a rising edge of TI1 occurs:

451/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1.

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Configure the external trigger input circuit by programming the TIMx_SMCR register as follows: 2. ETF = 0000: no filter ETPS = 00: prescaler disabled ETP = 0: detection of rising edges on ETR and ECE=1 to enable the external clock mode 2. IC1F = 0000: no filter. The capture prescaler is not used for triggering and does not need to be configured. CC1S = 01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register to select only the input capture source CC1P = 0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect rising edge only).

Configure the channel 1 as follows, to detect rising edges on TI:

3.

Configure the timer in trigger mode by writing SMS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register.

A rising edge on TI1 enables the counter and sets the TIF flag. The counter then counts on ETR rising edges. The delay between the rising edge of the ETR signal and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on ETRP input. Figure 158. Control circuit in external clock mode 2 + trigger mode
TI1 CEN/CNT_EN ETR Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF 34 35 36

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

452/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.3.15

Timer synchronization
The TIMx timers are linked together internally for timer synchronization or chaining. When one Timer is configured in Master Mode, it can reset, start, stop or clock the counter of another Timer configured in Slave Mode. Figure 159: Master/Slave timer example presents an overview of the trigger selection and the master mode selection blocks.

Using one timer as prescaler for another

Figure 159. Master/Slave timer example
TIM1 Clock
UEV

TIM2 MMS Master mode TRGO1 ITR0 control Input trigger selection TS SMS Slave mode control Prescaler Counter CK_PSC

Prescaler

Counter

For example, you can configure Timer 1 to act as a prescaler for Timer 2. Refer to Figure 159. To do this:

Configure Timer 1 in master mode so that it outputs a periodic trigger signal on each update event UEV. If you write MMS=010 in the TIM1_CR2 register, a rising edge is output on TRGO1 each time an update event is generated. To connect the TRGO1 output of Timer 1 to Timer 2, Timer 2 must be configured in slave mode using ITR0 as internal trigger. You select this through the TS bits in the TIM2_SMCR register (writing TS=000). Then you put the slave mode controller in external clock mode 1 (write SMS=111 in the TIM2_SMCR register). This causes Timer 2 to be clocked by the rising edge of the periodic Timer 1 trigger signal (which correspond to the timer 1 counter overflow). Finally both timers must be enabled by setting their respective CEN bits (TIMx_CR1 register).

Note:

If OCx is selected on Timer 1 as trigger output (MMS=1xx), its rising edge is used to clock the counter of timer 2.

Using one timer to enable another timer

In this example, we control the enable of Timer 2 with the output compare 1 of Timer 1. Refer to Figure 159 for connections. Timer 2 counts on the divided internal clock only when

453/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) OC1REF of Timer 1 is high. Both counter clock frequencies are divided by 3 by the prescaler compared to CK_INT (fCK_CNT = fCK_INT/3).

Configure Timer 1 master mode to send its Output Compare 1 Reference (OC1REF) signal as trigger output (MMS=100 in the TIM1_CR2 register). Configure the Timer 1 OC1REF waveform (TIM1_CCMR1 register). Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1 (TS=000 in the TIM2_SMCR register). Configure Timer 2 in gated mode (SMS=101 in TIM2_SMCR register). Enable Timer 2 by writing 1 in the CEN bit (TIM2_CR1 register). Start Timer 1 by writing 1 in the CEN bit (TIM1_CR1 register).

Note:

The counter 2 clock is not synchronized with counter 1, this mode only affects the Timer 2 counter enable signal. Figure 160. Gating timer 2 with OC1REF of timer 1
CK_INT TIMER1-OC1REF TIMER1-CNT TIMER2-CNT TIMER 2-TIF

FC 3045

FD 3046

FE 3047

FF

00 3048

01

Write TIF=0

In the example in Figure 160, the Timer 2 counter and prescaler are not initialized before being started. So they start counting from their current value. It is possible to start from a given value by resetting both timers before starting Timer 1. You can then write any value you want in the timer counters. The timers can easily be reset by software using the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR registers. In the next example, we synchronize Timer 1 and Timer 2. Timer 1 is the master and starts from 0. Timer 2 is the slave and starts from 0xE7. The prescaler ratio is the same for both

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

454/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

timers. Timer 2 stops when Timer 1 is disabled by writing 0 to the CEN bit in the TIM1_CR1 register:

Configure Timer 1 master mode to send its Output Compare 1 Reference (OC1REF) signal as trigger output (MMS=100 in the TIM1_CR2 register). Configure the Timer 1 OC1REF waveform (TIM1_CCMR1 register). Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1 (TS=000 in the TIM2_SMCR register). Configure Timer 2 in gated mode (SMS=101 in TIM2_SMCR register). Reset Timer 1 by writing 1 in UG bit (TIM1_EGR register). Reset Timer 2 by writing 1 in UG bit (TIM2_EGR register). Initialize Timer 2 to 0xE7 by writing 0xE7 in the timer 2 counter (TIM2_CNTL). Enable Timer 2 by writing 1 in the CEN bit (TIM2_CR1 register). Start Timer 1 by writing 1 in the CEN bit (TIM1_CR1 register). Stop Timer 1 by writing 0 in the CEN bit (TIM1_CR1 register).

Figure 161. Gating timer 2 with Enable of timer 1

CK_INT TIMER1-CEN=CNT_EN TIMER1-CNT_INIT TIMER1-CNT TIMER2-CNT TIMER2-CNT_INIT TIMER2 write CNT TIMER 2-TIF Write TIF=0 75 AB 00 00 E7 01 E8 02 E9

Using one timer to start another timer

In this example, we set the enable of Timer 2 with the update event of Timer 1. Refer to Figure 159 for connections. Timer 2 starts counting from its current value (which can be nonzero) on the divided internal clock as soon as the update event is generated by Timer 1. When Timer 2 receives the trigger signal its CEN bit is automatically set and the counter counts until we write 0 to the CEN bit in the TIM2_CR1 register. Both counter clock frequencies are divided by 3 by the prescaler compared to CK_INT (fCK_CNT = fCK_INT/3).

Configure Timer 1 master mode to send its Update Event (UEV) as trigger output (MMS=010 in the TIM1_CR2 register). Configure the Timer 1 period (TIM1_ARR registers). Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1 (TS=000 in the TIM2_SMCR register). Configure Timer 2 in trigger mode (SMS=110 in TIM2_SMCR register). Start Timer 1 by writing 1 in the CEN bit (TIM1_CR1 register).

455/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 162. Triggering timer 2 with update of timer 1
CK_INT TIMER1-UEV TIMER1-CNT TIMER2-CNT TIMER2-CEN=CNT_EN

FD

FE 45

FF

00 46

01 47

02 48

TIMER 2-TIF Write TIF=0

As in the previous example, you can initialize both counters before starting counting. Figure 163 shows the behavior with the same configuration as in Figure 162 but in trigger mode instead of gated mode (SMS=110 in the TIM2_SMCR register). Figure 163. Triggering timer 2 with Enable of timer 1
CK_INT TIMER1-CEN=CNT_EN TIMER1-CNT_INIT TIMER1-CNT TIMER2-CNT TIMER2-CNT_INIT TIMER2 write CNT TIMER 2-TIF Write TIF=0 75 CD 00 00 E7 01 E8 E9 02 EA

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

456/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Using one timer as prescaler for another timer

For example, you can configure Timer 1 to act as a prescaler for Timer 2. Refer to Figure 159 for connections. To do this:

Configure Timer 1 master mode to send its Update Event (UEV) as trigger output (MMS=010 in the TIM1_CR2 register). then it outputs a periodic signal on each counter overflow. Configure the Timer 1 period (TIM1_ARR registers). Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1 (TS=000 in the TIM2_SMCR register). Configure Timer 2 in external clock mode 1 (SMS=111 in TIM2_SMCR register). Start Timer 2 by writing 1 in the CEN bit (TIM2_CR1 register). Start Timer 1 by writing 1 in the CEN bit (TIM1_CR1 register).

Starting 2 timers synchronously in response to an external trigger

In this example, we set the enable of timer 1 when its TI1 input rises, and the enable of Timer 2 with the enable of Timer 1. Refer to Figure 159 for connections. To ensure the counters are aligned, Timer 1 must be configured in Master/Slave mode (slave with respect to TI1, master with respect to Timer 2):

Configure Timer 1 master mode to send its Enable as trigger output (MMS=001 in the TIM1_CR2 register). Configure Timer 1 slave mode to get the input trigger from TI1 (TS=100 in the TIM1_SMCR register). Configure Timer 1 in trigger mode (SMS=110 in the TIM1_SMCR register). Configure the Timer 1 in Master/Slave mode by writing MSM=1 (TIM1_SMCR register). Configure Timer 2 to get the input trigger from Timer 1 (TS=000 in the TIM2_SMCR register). Configure Timer 2 in trigger mode (SMS=110 in the TIM2_SMCR register).

When a rising edge occurs on TI1 (Timer 1), both counters starts counting synchronously on the internal clock and both TIF flags are set. Note: In this example both timers are initialized before starting (by setting their respective UG bits). Both counters starts from 0, but you can easily insert an offset between them by writing any of the counter registers (TIMx_CNT). You can see that the master/slave mode insert a delay between CNT_EN and CK_PSC on timer 1.

457/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Figure 164. Triggering timer 1 and 2 with timer 1 TI1 input
CK_INT TIMER 1-TI1 TIMER1-CEN=CNT_EN TIMER 1-CK_PSC TIMER1-CNT TIMER1-TIF TIMER2-CEN=CNT_EN TIMER 2-CK_PSC TIMER2-CNT TIMER2-TIF 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

15.3.16

Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters debug mode (Cortex-M4F core - halted), the TIMx counter either continues to work normally or stops, depending on DBG_TIMx_STOP configuration bit in DBGMCU module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

458/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.4

TIM2 to TIM5 registers

Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The 32-bit peripheral registers have to be written by words (32 bits). All other peripheral registers have to be written by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits). Read accesses can be done by bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

15.4.1

TIMx control register 1 (TIMx_CR1)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 ARPE rw

6 CMS rw

4 DIR

3 OPM rw

2 URS rw

1 UDIS rw

0 CEN rw

CKD[1:0] Reserved rw rw

rw

rw

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 9:8 CKD: Clock division This bit-field indicates the division ratio between the timer clock (CK_INT) frequency and sampling clock used by the digital filters (ETR, TIx), 00: tDTS = tCK_INT 01: tDTS = 2 tCK_INT 10: tDTS = 4 tCK_INT 11: Reserved Bit 7 ARPE: Auto-reload preload enable 0: TIMx_ARR register is not buffered 1: TIMx_ARR register is buffered Bits 6:5 CMS: Center-aligned mode selection 00: Edge-aligned mode. The counter counts up or down depending on the direction bit (DIR). 01: Center-aligned mode 1. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS=00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set only when the counter is counting down. 10: Center-aligned mode 2. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS=00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set only when the counter is counting up. 11: Center-aligned mode 3. The counter counts up and down alternatively. Output compare interrupt flags of channels configured in output (CCxS=00 in TIMx_CCMRx register) are set both when the counter is counting up or down. Note: It is not allowed to switch from edge-aligned mode to center-aligned mode as long as the counter is enabled (CEN=1) Bit 4 DIR: Direction 0: Counter used as upcounter 1: Counter used as downcounter Note: This bit is read only when the timer is configured in Center-aligned mode or Encoder mode. Bit 3 OPM: One-pulse mode 0: Counter is not stopped at update event 1: Counter stops counting at the next update event (clearing the bit CEN)

459/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

Bit 2 URS: Update request source This bit is set and cleared by software to select the UEV event sources. 0: Any of the following events generate an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled. These events can be: Counter overflow/underflow Setting the UG bit Update generation through the slave mode controller 1: Only counter overflow/underflow generates an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled. Bit 1 UDIS: Update disable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable UEV event generation. 0: UEV enabled. The Update (UEV) event is generated by one of the following events: Counter overflow/underflow Setting the UG bit Update generation through the slave mode controller Buffered registers are then loaded with their preload values. 1: UEV disabled. The Update event is not generated, shadow registers keep their value (ARR, PSC, CCRx). However the counter and the prescaler are reinitialized if the UG bit is set or if a hardware reset is received from the slave mode controller. Bit 0 CEN: Counter enable 0: Counter disabled 1: Counter enabled Note: External clock, gated mode and encoder mode can work only if the CEN bit has been previously set by software. However trigger mode can set the CEN bit automatically by hardware. CEN is cleared automatically in one-pulse mode, when an update event occurs.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

460/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.4.2

TIMx control register 2 (TIMx_CR2)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 TI1S

5 MMS[2:0]

3 CCDS

1 Reserved

Reserved rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 TI1S: TI1 selection 0: The TIMx_CH1 pin is connected to TI1 input 1: The TIMx_CH1, CH2 and CH3 pins are connected to the TI1 input (XOR combination) Bits 6:4 MMS: Master mode selection These bits allow to select the information to be sent in master mode to slave timers for synchronization (TRGO). The combination is as follows: 000: Reset - the UG bit from the TIMx_EGR register is used as trigger output (TRGO). If the reset is generated by the trigger input (slave mode controller configured in reset mode) then the signal on TRGO is delayed compared to the actual reset. 001: Enable - the Counter enable signal, CNT_EN, is used as trigger output (TRGO). It is useful to start several timers at the same time or to control a window in which a slave timer is enabled. The Counter Enable signal is generated by a logic OR between CEN control bit and the trigger input when configured in gated mode. When the Counter Enable signal is controlled by the trigger input, there is a delay on TRGO, except if the master/slave mode is selected (see the MSM bit description in TIMx_SMCR register). 010: Update - The update event is selected as trigger output (TRGO). For instance a master timer can then be used as a prescaler for a slave timer. 011: Compare Pulse - The trigger output send a positive pulse when the CC1IF flag is to be set (even if it was already high), as soon as a capture or a compare match occurred. (TRGO) 100: Compare - OC1REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) 101: Compare - OC2REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) 110: Compare - OC3REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) 111: Compare - OC4REF signal is used as trigger output (TRGO) Bit 3 CCDS: Capture/compare DMA selection 0: CCx DMA request sent when CCx event occurs 1: CCx DMA requests sent when update event occurs Bits 2:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

461/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

15.4.3

TIMx slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000

15 ETP rw

14 ECE rw

13

12

11

10

7 MSM

5 TS[2:0]

3 Res.

1 SMS[2:0]

ETPS[1:0] rw rw rw

ETF[3:0] rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 15 ETP: External trigger polarity This bit selects whether ETR or ETR is used for trigger operations 0: ETR is noninverted, active at high level or rising edge 1: ETR is inverted, active at low level or falling edge Bit 14 ECE: External clock enable This bit enables External clock mode 2. 0: External clock mode 2 disabled 1: External clock mode 2 enabled. The counter is clocked by any active edge on the ETRF signal. 1: Setting the ECE bit has the same effect as selecting external clock mode 1 with TRGI connected to ETRF (SMS=111 and TS=111). 2: It is possible to simultaneously use external clock mode 2 with the following slave modes: reset mode, gated mode and trigger mode. Nevertheless, TRGI must not be connected to ETRF in this case (TS bits must not be 111). 3: If external clock mode 1 and external clock mode 2 are enabled at the same time, the external clock input is ETRF. Bits 13:12 ETPS: External trigger prescaler External trigger signal ETRP frequency must be at most 1/4 of CK_INT frequency. A prescaler can be enabled to reduce ETRP frequency. It is useful when inputting fast external clocks. 00: Prescaler OFF 01: ETRP frequency divided by 2 10: ETRP frequency divided by 4 11: ETRP frequency divided by 8 Bits 11:8 ETF[3:0]: External trigger filter This bit-field then defines the frequency used to sample ETRP signal and the length of the digital filter applied to ETRP. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the output: 0000: No filter, sampling is done at fDTS 0001: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=2 0010: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=4 0011: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=8 0100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=6 0101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=8 0110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=6 0111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=8 1000: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=6 1001: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=8 1010: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=5 1011: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=6 1100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=8 1101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=5 1110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=6 1111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=8

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

462/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Bit 7 MSM: Master/Slave mode 0: No action 1: The effect of an event on the trigger input (TRGI) is delayed to allow a perfect synchronization between the current timer and its slaves (through TRGO). It is useful if we want to synchronize several timers on a single external event. Bits 6:4 TS: Trigger selection This bit-field selects the trigger input to be used to synchronize the counter. 000: Internal Trigger 0 (ITR0) 001: Internal Trigger 1 (ITR1). 010: Internal Trigger 2 (ITR2). 011: Internal Trigger 3 (ITR3). 100: TI1 Edge Detector (TI1F_ED) 101: Filtered Timer Input 1 (TI1FP1) 110: Filtered Timer Input 2 (TI2FP2) 111: External Trigger input (ETRF) See Table 76: TIMx internal trigger connection on page 463 for more details on ITRx meaning for each Timer. Note: These bits must be changed only when they are not used (e.g. when SMS=000) to avoid wrong edge detections at the transition. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 2:0 SMS: Slave mode selection When external signals are selected the active edge of the trigger signal (TRGI) is linked to the polarity selected on the external input (see Input Control register and Control Register description. 000: Slave mode disabled - if CEN = 1 then the prescaler is clocked directly by the internal clock. 001: Encoder mode 1 - Counter counts up/down on TI2FP2 edge depending on TI1FP1 level. 010: Encoder mode 2 - Counter counts up/down on TI1FP1 edge depending on TI2FP2 level. 011: Encoder mode 3 - Counter counts up/down on both TI1FP1 and TI2FP2 edges depending on the level of the other input. 100: Reset Mode - Rising edge of the selected trigger input (TRGI) reinitializes the counter and generates an update of the registers. 101: Gated Mode - The counter clock is enabled when the trigger input (TRGI) is high. The counter stops (but is not reset) as soon as the trigger becomes low. Both start and stop of the counter are controlled. 110: Trigger Mode - The counter starts at a rising edge of the trigger TRGI (but it is not reset). Only the start of the counter is controlled. 111: External Clock Mode 1 - Rising edges of the selected trigger (TRGI) clock the counter. Note: The gated mode must not be used if TI1F_ED is selected as the trigger input (TS=100). Indeed, TI1F_ED outputs 1 pulse for each transition on TI1F, whereas the gated mode checks the level of the trigger signal.

Table 76.
Slave TIM TIM2 TIM3

TIMx internal trigger connection

ITR0 (TS = 000) TIM1 TIM1 ITR1 (TS = 001) TIM8 TIM2 ITR2 (TS = 010) TIM3 TIM5 ITR3 (TS = 011) TIM4 TIM4

463/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 76.

Slave TIM TIM4 TIM5

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) TIMx internal trigger connection

ITR0 (TS = 000) TIM1 TIM2 ITR1 (TS = 001) TIM2 TIM3 ITR2 (TS = 010) TIM3 TIM4 ITR3 (TS = 011) TIM8 TIM8

15.4.4

TIMx DMA/Interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000

15 Res.

14 TDE

13 Res

12

11

10

8 UDE

7 Res.

6 TIE

5 Res

4 CC4IE rw

3 CC3IE rw

2 CC2IE rw

1 CC1IE rw

0 UIE rw

CC4DE CC3DE CC2DE CC1DE rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 15

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 14 TDE: Trigger DMA request enable 0: Trigger DMA request disabled. 1: Trigger DMA request enabled. Bit 13 Reserved, always read as 0

Bit 12 CC4DE: Capture/Compare 4 DMA request enable 0: CC4 DMA request disabled. 1: CC4 DMA request enabled. Bit 11 CC3DE: Capture/Compare 3 DMA request enable 0: CC3 DMA request disabled. 1: CC3 DMA request enabled. Bit 10 CC2DE: Capture/Compare 2 DMA request enable 0: CC2 DMA request disabled. 1: CC2 DMA request enabled. Bit 9 CC1DE: Capture/Compare 1 DMA request enable 0: CC1 DMA request disabled. 1: CC1 DMA request enabled. Bit 8 UDE: Update DMA request enable 0: Update DMA request disabled. 1: Update DMA request enabled. Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 TIE: Trigger interrupt enable 0: Trigger interrupt disabled. 1: Trigger interrupt enabled. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 4 CC4IE: Capture/Compare 4 interrupt enable 0: CC4 interrupt disabled. 1: CC4 interrupt enabled. Bit 3 CC3IE: Capture/Compare 3 interrupt enable 0: CC3 interrupt disabled 1: CC3 interrupt enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

464/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Bit 2 CC2IE: Capture/Compare 2 interrupt enable 0: CC2 interrupt disabled 1: CC2 interrupt enabled Bit 1 CC1IE: Capture/Compare 1 interrupt enable 0: CC1 interrupt disabled 1: CC1 interrupt enabled Bit 0 UIE: Update interrupt enable 0: Update interrupt disabled 1: Update interrupt enabled

15.4.5

TIMx status register (TIMx_SR)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14 Reserved

13

12

11

10

6 TIF

5 Res

4 CC4IF rc_w0

3 CC3IF rc_w0

2 CC2IF rc_w0

1 CC1IF rc_w0

0 UIF rc_w0

CC4OF CC3OF CC2OF CC1OF Reserved rc_w0 rc_w0 rc_w0 rc_w0

rc_w0

Bit 15:13

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 12 CC4OF: Capture/Compare 4 overcapture flag refer to CC1OF description Bit 11 CC3OF: Capture/Compare 3 overcapture flag refer to CC1OF description Bit 10 CC2OF: Capture/compare 2 overcapture flag refer to CC1OF description Bit 9 CC1OF: Capture/Compare 1 overcapture flag This flag is set by hardware only when the corresponding channel is configured in input capture mode. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0. 0: No overcapture has been detected 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register while CC1IF flag was already set Bits 8:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 TIF: Trigger interrupt flag This flag is set by hardware on trigger event (active edge detected on TRGI input when the slave mode controller is enabled in all modes but gated mode. It is set when the counter starts or stops when gated mode is selected. It is cleared by software. 0: No trigger event occurred 1: Trigger interrupt pending Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 4 CC4IF: Capture/Compare 4 interrupt flag refer to CC1IF description Bit 3 CC3IF: Capture/Compare 3 interrupt flag refer to CC1IF description Bit 2 CC2IF: Capture/Compare 2 interrupt flag refer to CC1IF description

465/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

Bit 1 CC1IF: Capture/compare 1 interrupt flag If channel CC1 is configured as output: This flag is set by hardware when the counter matches the compare value, with some exception in center-aligned mode (refer to the CMS bits in the TIMx_CR1 register description). It is cleared by software. 0: No match 1: The content of the counter TIMx_CNT matches the content of the TIMx_CCR1 register. When the contents of TIMx_CCR1 are greater than the contents of TIMx_ARR, the CC1IF bit goes high on the counter overflow (in upcounting and up/down-counting modes) or underflow (in downcounting mode) If channel CC1 is configured as input: This bit is set by hardware on a capture. It is cleared by software or by reading the TIMx_CCR1 register. 0: No input capture occurred 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register (An edge has been detected on IC1 which matches the selected polarity) Bit 0 UIF: Update interrupt flag This bit is set by hardware on an update event. It is cleared by software. 0: No update occurred. 1: Update interrupt pending. This bit is set by hardware when the registers are updated: At overflow or underflow (for TIM2 to TIM5) and if UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by software using the UG bit in TIMx_EGR register, if URS=0 and UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by a trigger event (refer to the synchro control register description), if URS=0 and UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

466/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.4.6

TIMx event generation register (TIMx_EGR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11 Reserved

10

6 TG

5 Res.

4 CC4G w

3 CC3G w

2 CC2G w

1 CC1G w

0 UG w

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 TG: Trigger generation This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: The TIF flag is set in TIMx_SR register. Related interrupt or DMA transfer can occur if enabled. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 CC4G: Capture/compare 4 generation refer to CC1G description Bit 3 CC3G: Capture/compare 3 generation refer to CC1G description Bit 2 CC2G: Capture/compare 2 generation refer to CC1G description Bit 1 CC1G: Capture/compare 1 generation This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: A capture/compare event is generated on channel 1: If channel CC1 is configured as output: CC1IF flag is set, Corresponding interrupt or DMA request is sent if enabled. If channel CC1 is configured as input: The current value of the counter is captured in TIMx_CCR1 register. The CC1IF flag is set, the corresponding interrupt or DMA request is sent if enabled. The CC1OF flag is set if the CC1IF flag was already high. Bit 0 UG: Update generation This bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: Re-initialize the counter and generates an update of the registers. Note that the prescaler counter is cleared too (anyway the prescaler ratio is not affected). The counter is cleared if the center-aligned mode is selected or if DIR=0 (upcounting), else it takes the auto-reload value (TIMx_ARR) if DIR=1 (downcounting).

467/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

15.4.7

TIMx capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 The channels can be used in input (capture mode) or in output (compare mode). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits of this register have a different function in input and in output mode. For a given bit, OCxx describes its function when the channel is configured in output, ICxx describes its function when the channel is configured in input. So you must take care that the same bit can have a different meaning for the input stage and for the output stage.

15 OC2CE

14

13 OC2M[2:0]

12

11

10

7 OC1CE

5 OC1M[2:0]

OC2PE OC2FE CC2S[1:0] IC2PSC[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

OC1PE OC1FE CC1S[1:0] IC1PSC[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

IC2F[3:0] rw rw rw

IC1F[3:0] rw rw rw

Output compare mode

Bit 15 OC2CE: Output compare 2 clear enable Bits 14:12 OC2M[2:0]: Output compare 2 mode Bit 11 OC2PE: Output compare 2 preload enable Bit 10 OC2FE: Output compare 2 fast enable Bits 9:8 CC2S[1:0]: Capture/Compare 2 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC2 channel is configured as output 01: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI2 10: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI1 11: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through the TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bit 7 OC1CE: Output compare 1 clear enable OC1CE: Output Compare 1 Clear Enable 0: OC1Ref is not affected by the ETRF input 1: OC1Ref is cleared as soon as a High level is detected on ETRF input

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

468/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Bits 6:4 OC1M: Output compare 1 mode These bits define the behavior of the output reference signal OC1REF from which OC1 and OC1N are derived. OC1REF is active high whereas OC1 and OC1N active level depends on CC1P and CC1NP bits. 000: Frozen - The comparison between the output compare register TIMx_CCR1 and the counter TIMx_CNT has no effect on the outputs.(this mode is used to generate a timing base). 001: Set channel 1 to active level on match. OC1REF signal is forced high when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 010: Set channel 1 to inactive level on match. OC1REF signal is forced low when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 011: Toggle - OC1REF toggles when TIMx_CNT=TIMx_CCR1. 100: Force inactive level - OC1REF is forced low. 101: Force active level - OC1REF is forced high. 110: PWM mode 1 - In upcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT<TIMx_CCR1 else inactive. In downcounting, channel 1 is inactive (OC1REF=0) as long as TIMx_CNT>TIMx_CCR1 else active (OC1REF=1). 111: PWM mode 2 - In upcounting, channel 1 is inactive as long as TIMx_CNT<TIMx_CCR1 else active. In downcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT>TIMx_CCR1 else inactive. Note: In PWM mode 1 or 2, the OCREF level changes only when the result of the comparison changes or when the output compare mode switches from frozen mode to PWM mode. Bit 3 OC1PE: Output compare 1 preload enable 0: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 disabled. TIMx_CCR1 can be written at anytime, the new value is taken in account immediately. 1: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 enabled. Read/Write operations access the preload register. TIMx_CCR1 preload value is loaded in the active register at each update event. Note: 1: These bits can not be modified as long as LOCK level 3 has been programmed (LOCK bits in TIMx_BDTR register) and CC1S=00 (the channel is configured in output). 2: The PWM mode can be used without validating the preload register only in onepulse mode (OPM bit set in TIMx_CR1 register). Else the behavior is not guaranteed. Bit 2 OC1FE: Output compare 1 fast enable This bit is used to accelerate the effect of an event on the trigger in input on the CC output. 0: CC1 behaves normally depending on counter and CCR1 values even when the trigger is ON. The minimum delay to activate CC1 output when an edge occurs on the trigger input is 5 clock cycles. 1: An active edge on the trigger input acts like a compare match on CC1 output. Then, OC is set to the compare level independently from the result of the comparison. Delay to sample the trigger input and to activate CC1 output is reduced to 3 clock cycles. OCFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode. Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output. 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1. 10: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI2. 11: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

469/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

Input capture mode

Bits 15:12 IC2F: Input capture 2 filter Bits 11:10 IC2PSC[1:0]: Input capture 2 prescaler Bits 9:8 CC2S: Capture/compare 2 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC2 channel is configured as output. 01: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI2. 10: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI1. 11: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bits 7:4 IC1F: Input capture 1 filter This bit-field defines the frequency used to sample TI1 input and the length of the digital filter applied to TI1. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the output: 1000: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=6 0000: No filter, sampling is done at fDTS 1001: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=8 0001: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=2 0010: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=4 1010: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=5 1011: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=6 0011: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=8 1100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=8 0100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=6 0101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=8 1101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=5 1110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=6 0110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=6 1111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=8 0111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=8 Note: In current silicon revision, fDTS is replaced in the formula by CK_INT when ICxF[3:0]= 1, 2 or 3. Bits 3:2 IC1PSC: Input capture 1 prescaler This bit-field defines the ratio of the prescaler acting on CC1 input (IC1). The prescaler is reset as soon as CC1E=0 (TIMx_CCER register). 00: no prescaler, capture is done each time an edge is detected on the capture input 01: capture is done once every 2 events 10: capture is done once every 4 events 11: capture is done once every 8 events Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1 10: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI2 11: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

470/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.4.8

TIMx capture/compare mode register 2 (TIMx_CCMR2)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000 Refer to the above CCMR1 register description.

15 OC4CE

14

13 OC4M[2:0]

12

11

10

7 OC3CE

5 OC3M[2:0]

OC4PE OC4FE CC4S[1:0] IC4PSC[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

OC3PE OC3FE CC3S[1:0] IC3PSC[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

IC4F[3:0] rw rw rw

IC3F[3:0] rw rw rw

Output compare mode

Bit 15 OC4CE: Output compare 4 clear enable Bits 14:12 OC4M: Output compare 4 mode Bit 11 OC4PE: Output compare 4 preload enable Bit 10 OC4FE: Output compare 4 fast enable Bits 9:8 CC4S: Capture/Compare 4 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC4 channel is configured as output 01: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI4 10: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI3 11: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC4S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC4E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bit 7 OC3CE: Output compare 3 clear enable Bits 6:4 OC3M: Output compare 3 mode Bit 3 OC3PE: Output compare 3 preload enable Bit 2 OC3FE: Output compare 3 fast enable Bits 1:0 CC3S: Capture/Compare 3 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC3 channel is configured as output 01: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI3 10: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI4 11: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC3S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC3E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

471/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

Input capture mode

Bits 15:12 IC4F: Input capture 4 filter Bits 11:10 IC4PSC: Input capture 4 prescaler Bits 9:8 CC4S: Capture/Compare 4 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC4 channel is configured as output 01: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI4 10: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TI3 11: CC4 channel is configured as input, IC4 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC4S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC4E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bits 7:4 IC3F: Input capture 3 filter Bits 3:2 IC3PSC: Input capture 3 prescaler Bits 1:0 CC3S: Capture/Compare 3 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC3 channel is configured as output 01: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI3 10: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TI4 11: CC3 channel is configured as input, IC3 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: CC3S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC3E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

15.4.9

TIMx capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000

15 CC4NP

14 Res.

13 CC4P rw

12 CC4E rw

11 CC3NP

10 Res.

9 CC3P rw

8 CC3E rw

7 CC2NP

6 Res.

5 CC2P rw

4 CC2E rw

3 CC1NP

2 Res.

1 CC1P rw

0 CC1E rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 15 CC4NP: Capture/Compare 4 output Polarity. Refer to CC1NP description Bit 14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 13 CC4P: Capture/Compare 4 output Polarity. refer to CC1P description Bit 12 CC4E: Capture/Compare 4 output enable. refer to CC1E description Bit 11 CC3NP: Capture/Compare 3 output Polarity. refer to CC1NP description Bit 10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 9 CC3P: Capture/Compare 3 output Polarity. refer to CC1P description Bit 8 CC3E: Capture/Compare 3 output enable. refer to CC1E description

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

472/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

Bit 7 CC2NP: Capture/Compare 2 output Polarity. refer to CC1NP description Bit 6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 5 CC2P: Capture/Compare 2 output Polarity. refer to CC1P description Bit 4 CC2E: Capture/Compare 2 output enable. refer to CC1E description Bit 3 CC1NP: Capture/Compare 1 output Polarity. CC1 channel configured as output: CC1NP must be kept cleared in this case. CC1 channel configured as input: This bit is used in conjunction with CC1P to define TI1FP1/TI2FP1 polarity. refer to CC1P description. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 1 CC1P: Capture/Compare 1 output Polarity. CC1 channel configured as output: 0: OC1 active high 1: OC1 active low CC1 channel configured as input: CC1NP/CC1P bits select TI1FP1 and TI2FP1 polarity for trigger or capture operations. 00: noninverted/rising edge Circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 rising edge (capture, trigger in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger in gated mode, encoder mode). 01: inverted/falling edge Circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 falling edge (capture, trigger in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is inverted (trigger in gated mode, encoder mode). 10: reserved, do not use this configuration. 11: noninverted/both edges Circuit is sensitive to both TIxFP1 rising and falling edges (capture, trigger in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger in gated mode). This configuration must not be used for encoder mode. Bit 0 CC1E: Capture/Compare 1 output enable. CC1 channel configured as output: 0: Off - OC1 is not active 1: On - OC1 signal is output on the corresponding output pin CC1 channel configured as input: This bit determines if a capture of the counter value can actually be done into the input capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) or not. 0: Capture disabled 1: Capture enabled

Table 77.
CCxE bit 0 1

Output control bit for standard OCx channels

OCx output state Output Disabled (OCx=0, OCx_EN=0) OCx=OCxREF + Polarity, OCx_EN=1

473/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Note:

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) The state of the external IO pins connected to the standard OCx channels depends on the OCx channel state and the GPIO registers.

15.4.10

TIMx counter (TIMx_CNT)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CNT[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CNT[15:0]: Counter value

15.4.11

TIMx prescaler (TIMx_PSC)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

PSC[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 PSC[15:0]: Prescaler value The counter clock frequency CK_CNT is equal to fCK_PSC / (PSC[15:0] + 1). PSC contains the value to be loaded in the active prescaler register at each update event.

15.4.12

TIMx auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

ARR[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0

ARR[15:0]: Auto-reloadvalue ARR is the value to be loaded in the actual auto-reload register. Refer to the Section 15.3.1: Time-base unit on page 423 for more details about ARR update and behavior. The counter is blocked while the auto-reload value is null.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

474/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.4.13

TIMx capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

CCR1[31:16] (depending on timers) rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

CCR1[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 CCR1[31:16]: High Capture/Compare 1 value (on TIM2 and TIM5). Bits 15:0 CCR1[15:0]: Low Capture/Compare 1 value If channel CC1 is configured as output: CCR1 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 1 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (bit OC1PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 1 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on OC1 output. If channel CC1is configured as input: CCR1 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 1 event (IC1).

15.4.14

TIMx capture/compare register 2 (TIMx_CCR2)

Address offset: 0x38 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

CCR2[31:16] (depending on timers) rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

CCR2[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 CCR2[31:16]: High Capture/Compare 2 value (on TIM2 and TIM5). Bits 15:0 CCR2[15:0]: Low Capture/Compare 2 value If channel CC2 is configured as output: CCR2 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 2 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR register (bit OC2PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 2 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signalled on OC2 output. If channel CC2 is configured as input: CCR2 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 2 event (IC2).

475/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

15.4.15

TIMx capture/compare register 3 (TIMx_CCR3)

Address offset: 0x3C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

CCR3[31:16] (depending on timers) rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

CCR3[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 CCR3[31:16]: High Capture/Compare 3 value (on TIM2 and TIM5). Bits 15:0 CCR3[15:0]: Low Capture/Compare value If channel CC3 is configured as output: CCR3 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 3 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR register (bit OC3PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 3 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signalled on OC3 output. If channel CC3is configured as input: CCR3 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 3 event (IC3).

15.4.16

TIMx capture/compare register 4 (TIMx_CCR4)

Address offset: 0x40 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

CCR4[31:16] (depending on timers) rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

CCR4[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 CCR4[31:16]: High Capture/Compare 4 value (on TIM2 and TIM5). Bits 15:0 CCR4[15:0]: Low Capture/Compare value 1. if CC4 channel is configured as output (CC4S bits): CCR4 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 4 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR register (bit OC4PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 4 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signalled on OC4 output. 2. if CC4 channel is configured as input (CC4S bits in TIMx_CCMR4 register): CCR4 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 4 event (IC4).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

476/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.4.17

TIMx DMA control register (TIMx_DCR)

Address offset: 0x48 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14 Reserved

13

12

11

10 DBL[4:0]

6 Reserved

2 DBA[4:0]

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 15:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 12:8 DBL[4:0]: DMA burst length This 5-bit vector defines the number of DMA transfers (the timer recognizes a burst transfer when a read or a write access is done to the TIMx_DMAR address). 00000: 1 transfer, 00001: 2 transfers, 00010: 3 transfers, ... 10001: 18 transfers. Bits 7:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 4:0 DBA[4:0]: DMA base address This 5-bit vector defines the base-address for DMA transfers (when read/write access are done through the TIMx_DMAR address). DBA is defined as an offset starting from the address of the TIMx_CR1 register. Example: 00000: TIMx_CR1, 00001: TIMx_CR2, 00010: TIMx_SMCR, ... Example: Let us consider the following transfer: DBL = 7 transfers & DBA = TIMx_CR1. In this case the transfer is done to/from 7 registers starting from the TIMx_CR1 address.

15.4.18

TIMx DMA address for full transfer (TIMx_DMAR)

Address offset: 0x4C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

DMAB[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 DMAB[15:0]: DMA register for burst accesses A read or write operation to the DMAR register accesses the register located at the address (TIMx_CR1 address) + (DBA + DMA index) x 4 where TIMx_CR1 address is the address of the control register 1, DBA is the DMA base address configured in TIMx_DCR register, DMA index is automatically controlled by the DMA transfer, and ranges from 0 to DBL (DBL configured in TIMx_DCR).

477/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

Example of how to use the DMA burst feature

In this example the timer DMA burst feature is used to update the contents of the CCRx registers (x = 2, 3, 4) with the DMA transferring half words into the CCRx registers. This is done in the following steps: 1. Configure the corresponding DMA channel as follows: 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: DMA channel peripheral address is the DMAR register address DMA channel memory address is the address of the buffer in the RAM containing the data to be transferred by DMA into CCRx registers. Number of data to transfer = 3 (See note below). Circular mode disabled.

Configure the DCR register by configuring the DBA and DBL bit fields as follows: DBL = 3 transfers, DBA = 0xE. Enable the TIMx update DMA request (set the UDE bit in the DIER register). Enable TIMx Enable the DMA channel

This example is for the case where every CCRx register to be updated once. If every CCRx register is to be updated twice for example, the number of data to transfer should be 6. Let's take the example of a buffer in the RAM containing data1, data2, data3, data4, data5 and data6. The data is transferred to the CCRx registers as follows: on the first update DMA request, data1 is transferred to CCR2, data2 is transferred to CCR3, data3 is transferred to CCR4 and on the second update DMA request, data4 is transferred to CCR2, data5 is transferred to CCR3 and data6 is transferred to CCR4.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

478/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

15.4.19

TIM2 option register (TIM2_OR)

Address offset: 0x50 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

ITR1_RMP Reserved rw rw Reserved

Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:10 ITR1_RMP: Internal trigger 1 remap Set and cleared by software. 00: TIM8_TRGOUT 01: PTP trigger output is connected to TIM2_ITR1 10: OTG FS SOF is connected to the TIM2_ITR1 input 11: OTG HS SOF is connected to the TIM2_ITR1 input Bits 9:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

479/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

15.4.20

TIM5 option register (TIM5_OR)

Address offset: 0x50 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

TI4_RMP Reserved rw rw Reserved

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:6 TI4_RMP: Timer Input 4 remap Set and cleared by software. 00: TIM5 Channel4 is connected to the GPIO: Refer to the Alternate function mapping table in the datasheets. 01: the LSI internal clock is connected to the TIM5_CH4 input for calibration purposes 10: the LSE internal clock is connected to the TIM5_CH4 input for calibration purposes 11: the RTC wakeup interrupt is connected to TIM5_CH4 input for calibration purposes. Wakeup interrupt should be enabled. Bits 5:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

15.4.21

TIMx register map

TIMx registers are mapped as described in the table below:

Table 78.
Offset
0x00

TIM2 to TIM5 register map and reset values

ARPE CEN 0 0 UIE 0 UIF 0 UG 0 URS 0 0 CC2IE 0 CC2IF 0 CC2G 0 OC1FE CKD [1:0] 0 Reserved 0 CMS [1:0] 0 0 UDIS 0 0 CC1IE 0 CC1IF 0 CC1G 0 OPM 0 CCDS 0 CC3IE Reserved 0 CC3IF 0 CC3G 0 OC1PE SMS[2:0] DIR 0 0 0 CC4IE 0 CC4IF 0 CC4G 0

Register
TIMx_CR1 Reset value

0x04

TIMx_CR2 Reset value

TI1S

0x08

TIMx_SMCR Reset value

ECE

ETP

Reserved

ETPS [1:0] 0 COMDE 0 CC4DE 0 CC3DE

ETF[3:0] 0 CC2DE 0 CC1DE 0 UDE

MSM

Reserved

0x0C

TIMx_DIER Reset value

Reserved

0 Reserved

0 CC4OF

0 CC3OF

0 CC2OF

0 CC1OF

0 TIF

0x10

TIMx_SR Reset value

0 Reserved OC2CE

0 TG

0x14

TIMx_EGR Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Output Compare mode Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Input Capture mode Reset value

0 Reserved OC2M [2:0] 0 0 0 CC2S [1:0] OC1CE OC2PE OC2FE

OC1M [2:0]

Reserved Reserved Reserved

TDE

Reserved

TIE

0x18

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 MMS[2:0] 0 0 Reserved 0 TS[2:0] 0 0 0 0 0 CC1S [1:0] 0 Reserved 0 IC2F[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC2 CC2S PSC IC1F[3:0] [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC1 CC1S PSC [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

480/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5) Table 78.

Offset

RM0090

TIM2 to TIM5 register map and reset values (continued)

OC3CE OC4PE OC3PE CC1NP OC4FE OC4M [2:0] 0 0 0 CC4S [1:0] OC3M [2:0] OC3FE Reserved O24CE

Register
TIMx_CCMR2 Output Compare mode Reset value TIMx_CCMR2 Input Capture mode Reset value TIMx_CCER Reset value

0x1C

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

CC3NP

CC4NP

CC2NP

CC4P

CC4E

CC3P

CC3E

CC2P

CC2E

CC1P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x20

Reserved

0 CNT[31:16] (TIM2 and TIM5 only, reserved on the other timers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x24

TIMx_CNT Reset value

CNT[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x28

TIMx_PSC Reset value

Reserved 0 ARR[31:16] (TIM2 and TIM5 only, reserved on the other timers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PSC[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x2C

TIMx_ARR Reset value

ARR[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x30

Reserved CCR1[31:16] (TIM2 and TIM5 only, reserved on the other timers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x34

TIMx_CCR1 Reset value

CCR1[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x38

TIMx_CCR2 Reset value 0

CCR2[31:16] (TIM2 and TIM5 only, reserved on the other timers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CCR2[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x3C

TIMx_CCR3 Reset value 0

CCR3[31:16] (TIM2 and TIM5 only, reserved on the other timers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CCR3[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x40

TIMx_CCR4 Reset value 0

CCR4[31:16] (TIM2 and TIM5 only, reserved on the other timers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CCR4[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x44

Reserved

0x48

TIMx_DCR Reset value

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0

DBL[4:0] 0 0 0 0

Reserved 0

DBA[4:0] 0 0 0

0x4C

TIMx_DMAR Reset value

DMAB[15:0] 0 0 0 ITR1_ RMP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x50

TIM2_OR Reset value

Reserved

Reserved IT4_R MP 0 0

0x50

TIM5_OR Reset value

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

481/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

CC1E 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved CC3S [1:0] 0 Reserved 0 IC4F[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC4 CC4S PSC IC3F[3:0] [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC3 CC3S PSC [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family unless otherwise specified.

16.1

TIM9 to TIM14 introduction

The TIM9 to TIM14 general-purpose timers consist of a 16-bit auto-reload counter driven by a programmable prescaler. They may be used for a variety of purposes, including measuring the pulse lengths of input signals (input capture) or generating output waveforms (output compare, PWM). Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be modulated from a few microseconds to several milliseconds using the timer prescaler and the RCC clock controller prescalers. The TIM9 to TIM14 timers are completely independent, and do not share any resources. They can be synchronized together as described in Section 16.4.12.

16.2
16.2.1

TIM9 to TIM14 main features

TIM9/TIM12 main features
The features of the TIM9 to TIM14 general-purpose timers include:

16-bit auto-reload upcounter (in medium density devices) 16-bit programmable prescaler used to divide the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536 (can be changed on the fly) Up to 2 independent channels for: Input capture Output compare PWM generation (edge-aligned mode) One-pulse mode output

Synchronization circuit to control the timer with external signals and to interconnect several timers together Interrupt generation on the following events: Update: counter overflow, counter initialization (by software or internal trigger) Trigger event (counter start, stop, initialization or count by internal trigger) Input capture Output compare

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

482/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 165. General-purpose timer block diagram (TIM9 and TIM12)
Internal clock (CK_INT)

RM0090

ITR0 ITR1 ITR2 ITR3 TI1F_ED ITR TRC TGI TRGI

Trigger controller

Slave mode controller

Reset, Enable, Count

TI1FP1 TI2FP2

Auto-reload register Stop, Clear

UI U

CK_PSC

Prescaler

PSC

CK_CNT
CC1I

+/-

COUNTER CC1I

CNT

TI1
TIMx_CH1
Input filter & Edge detector

TI1FP1 TI1FP2 TRC

IC1
Prescaler

IC1PS U

Capture/Compare 1 register

OC1REF

output
control

OC1

TIMx_CH1

CC2I

CC2I Capture/Compare 2 register OC2REF

TIMx_CH2

TI2

Input filter & Edge detector

TI2FP1 TI2FP2 TRC

IC2
Prescaler

IC2PS U

output
control

OC2

TIMx_CH2

Notes:
Reg Preload registers transferred to active registers on U event according to control bit event interrupt

ai17190

16.3

TIM10/TIM11 and TIM13/TIM14 main features

The features of general-purpose timers TIM10/TIM11 and TIM13/TIM14 include:

16-bit auto-reload upcounter 16-bit programmable prescaler used to divide the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536 (can be changed on the fly) independent channel for: Input capture Output compare PWM generation (edge-aligned mode) One-pulse mode output Update: counter overflow, counter initialization (by software) Input capture Output compare

Interrupt generation on the following events:

483/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 166. General-purpose timer block diagram (TIM10/11/13/14)

Internal clock (CK_INT) Trigger Controller Enable counter

Autoreload register
Stop, Clear U

UI

CK_PSC

PSC prescaler

CK_CNT CC1I

+/-

CNT counter
CC1I

TI1 TIMx_CH1

Input filter & edge detector

TI1FP1 IC1

Prescaler

IC1PS

Capture/Compare 1 register

OC1REF

output OC1 control

TIMx_CH1

Notes: Reg Preload registers transferred to active registers on U event according to control bit event interrupt & DMA output

ai17725c

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

484/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.4
16.4.1

TIM9 to TIM14 functional description

Time-base unit
The main block of the timer is a 16-bit counter with its related auto-reload register. The counters counts up. The counter clock can be divided by a prescaler. The counter, the auto-reload register and the prescaler register can be written or read by software. This is true even when the counter is running. The time-base unit includes:

Counter register (TIMx_CNT) Prescaler register (TIMx_PSC) Auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR)

The auto-reload register is preloaded. Writing to or reading from the auto-reload register accesses the preload register. The content of the preload register are transferred into the shadow register permanently or at each update event (UEV), depending on the auto-reload preload enable bit (ARPE) in TIMx_CR1 register. The update event is sent when the counter reaches the overflow and if the UDIS bit equals 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. It can also be generated by software. The generation of the update event is described in details for each configuration. The counter is clocked by the prescaler output CK_CNT, which is enabled only when the counter enable bit (CEN) in TIMx_CR1 register is set (refer also to the slave mode controller description to get more details on counter enabling). Note that the counter starts counting 1 clock cycle after setting the CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.

Prescaler description
The prescaler can divide the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536. It is based on a 16-bit counter controlled through a 16-bit register (in the TIMx_PSC register). It can be changed on the fly as this control register is buffered. The new prescaler ratio is taken into account at the next update event. Figure 167 and Figure 168 give some examples of the counter behavior when the prescaler ratio is changed on the fly.

485/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 167. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 1 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01 02 03

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Figure 168. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 3 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3

16.4.2

Counter modes
Upcounting mode
In upcounting mode, the counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (content of the TIMx_ARR register), then restarts from 0 and generates a counter overflow event. Setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller on TIM9 and TIM12) also generates an update event. The UEV event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This is to avoid updating the shadow registers while writing new values in the preload registers. Then no update event occurs until the UDIS bit has been written to 0. However, the counter restarts from 0, as well as the counter of the prescaler (but the prescale rate does not change). In addition, if the URS bit (update request selection) in TIMx_CR1 register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV but without
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 486/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

setting the UIF flag (thus no interrupt is sent). This is to avoid generating both update and capture interrupts when clearing the counter on the capture event. When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The auto-reload shadow register is updated with the preload value (TIMx_ARR), The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (content of the TIMx_PSC register).

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR=0x36. Figure 169. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Figure 170. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0034 0035 0036 0000 0001 0002 0003

487/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 171. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0035 0036 0000 0001

Figure 172. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

CK_PSC

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 1F 20 00

Figure 173. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded)
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload register FF 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

488/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 174. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded)
CK_PSC CEN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register F5 36 F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

RM0090

Auto-reload shadow register

F5

36

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

16.4.3

Clock selection
The counter clock can be provided by the following clock sources:

Internal clock (CK_INT) External clock mode1 (for TIM9 and TIM12): external input pin (TIx) Internal trigger inputs (ITRx) (for TIM9 and TIM12): connecting the trigger output from another timer. Refer to Section : Using one timer as prescaler for another for more details.

Internal clock source (CK_INT)

The internal clock source is the default clock source for TIM10/TIM11 and TIM13/TIM14. For TIM9 and TIM12, the internal clock source is selected when the slave mode controller is disabled (SMS=000). The CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register and the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register are then used as control bits and can be changed only by software (except for UG which remains cleared). As soon as the CEN bit is programmed to 1, the prescaler is clocked by the internal clock CK_INT. Figure 175 shows the behavior of the control circuit and the upcounter in normal mode, without prescaler.

489/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 175. Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1
Internal clock CEN=CNT_EN UG CNT_INIT Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

External clock source mode 1(TIM9 and TIM12)

This mode is selected when SMS=111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. The counter can count at each rising or falling edge on a selected input. Figure 176. TI2 external clock connection example
TIMx_SMCR TS[2:0] TI2F TI1F TRGI or or external clock mode 1 CK_PSC

or ITRx TI1_ED
TI2 TI2F_Rising 0 Edge Detector TI2F_Falling 1 CC2P

0xx 100

Filter

TI1FP1 101 TI2FP2 110

ICF[3:0]

CK_INT internal clock mode (internal clock)

TIMx_CCMR1

TIMx_CCER SMS[2:0] TIMx_SMCR

For example, to configure the upcounter to count in response to a rising edge on the TI2 input, use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Note: Configure channel 2 to detect rising edges on the TI2 input by writing CC2S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Configure the input filter duration by writing the IC2F[3:0] bits in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (if no filter is needed, keep IC2F=0000). Select the rising edge polarity by writing CC2P=0 and CC2NP=0 in the TIMx_CCER register. Configure the timer in external clock mode 1 by writing SMS=111 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI2 as the trigger input source by writing TS=110 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter counts once and the TIF flag is set. The delay between the rising edge on TI2 and the actual clock of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI2 input.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

490/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 177. Control circuit in external clock mode 1
TI2 CNT_EN Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register TIF 34 35 36

RM0090

Write TIF=0

16.4.4

Capture/compare channels
Each Capture/Compare channel is built around a capture/compare register (including a shadow register), a input stage for capture (with digital filter, multiplexing and prescaler) and an output stage (with comparator and output control). Figure 178 to Figure 180 give an overview of one capture/compare channel. The input stage samples the corresponding TIx input to generate a filtered signal TIxF. Then, an edge detector with polarity selection generates a signal (TIxFPx) which can be used as trigger input by the slave mode controller or as the capture command. It is prescaled before the capture register (ICxPS). Figure 178. Capture/compare channel (example: channel 1 input stage)
TI1F_ED to the slave mode controller TI1F_Rising Edge Detector TI1F_Falling

TI1 fDTS

filter downcounter

TI1F

0 1

TI1FP1 TI2FP1

01 10 IC1 divider /1, /2, /4, /8 IC1PS

ICF[3:0] TIMx_CCMR1

CC1P/CC1NP TIMx_CCER TI2F_rising (from channel 2) TI2F_falling (from channel 2) 0

TRC 11 (from slave mode controller) CC1S[1:0] ICPS[1:0] 1 TIMx_CCMR1 CC1E TIMx_CCER

The output stage generates an intermediate waveform which is then used for reference: OCxRef (active high). The polarity acts at the end of the chain.

491/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 179. Capture/compare channel 1 main circuit
APB Bus

MCU-peripheral interface 8 high read CCR1H S read CCR1L R capture_transfer CC1S[1] CC1S[0] IC1PS CC1E Counter CC1G TIM1_EGR input mode compare_transfer read_in_progress (if 16-bit) 8 low write_in_progress S write CCR1H R output mode write CCR1L CC1S[1] CC1S[0] OC1PE OC1PE UEV TIM1_CCMR1 (from time base unit)

Capture/compare preload register

Capture/compare shadow register capture comparator CNT>CCR1 CNT=CCR1

Figure 180. Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1)

To the master mode controller 0 1 CC1P TIMx_CCER Output enable circuit OC1

CNT > CCR1 Output mode OC1_REF CNT = CCR1 controller

CC1E TIMx_CCER OC1M[2:0] TIMx_CCMR1

ai17720

The capture/compare block is made of one preload register and one shadow register. Write and read always access the preload register. In capture mode, captures are actually done in the shadow register, which is copied into the preload register. In compare mode, the content of the preload register is copied into the shadow register which is compared to the counter.

16.4.5

Input capture mode

In Input capture mode, the Capture/Compare Registers (TIMx_CCRx) are used to latch the value of the counter after a transition detected by the corresponding ICx signal. When a capture occurs, the corresponding CCXIF flag (TIMx_SR register) is set and an interrupt or a DMA request can be sent if they are enabled. If a capture occurs while the CCxIF flag was already high, then the over-capture flag CCxOF (TIMx_SR register) is set. CCxIF can be
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 492/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) cleared by software by writing it to 0 or by reading the captured data stored in the TIMx_CCRx register. CCxOF is cleared when you write it to 0.

RM0090

The following example shows how to capture the counter value in TIMx_CCR1 when TI1 input rises. To do this, use the following procedure: 1. Select the active input: TIMx_CCR1 must be linked to the TI1 input, so write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. As soon as CC1S becomes different from 00, the channel is configured in input mode and the TIMx_CCR1 register becomes readonly. Program the input filter duration you need with respect to the signal you connect to the timer (by programming the ICxF bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register if the input is one of the TIx inputs). Lets imagine that, when toggling, the input signal is not stable during at must 5 internal clock cycles. We must program a filter duration longer than these 5 clock cycles. We can validate a transition on TI1 when 8 consecutive samples with the new level have been detected (sampled at fDTS frequency). Then write IC1F bits to 0011 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Select the edge of the active transition on the TI1 channel by programming CC1P and CC1NP bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCER register (rising edge in this case). Program the input prescaler. In our example, we wish the capture to be performed at each valid transition, so the prescaler is disabled (write IC1PS bits to 00 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register). Enable capture from the counter into the capture register by setting the CC1E bit in the TIMx_CCER register. If needed, enable the related interrupt request by setting the CC1IE bit in the TIMx_DIER register. The TIMx_CCR1 register gets the value of the counter on the active transition. CC1IF flag is set (interrupt flag). CC1OF is also set if at least two consecutive captures occurred whereas the flag was not cleared. An interrupt is generated depending on the CC1IE bit.

2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

When an input capture occurs:

In order to handle the overcapture, it is recommended to read the data before the overcapture flag. This is to avoid missing an overcapture which could happen after reading the flag and before reading the data. Note: IC interrupt requests can be generated by software by setting the corresponding CCxG bit in the TIMx_EGR register.

16.4.6

PWM input mode (only for TIM9/12)

This mode is a particular case of input capture mode. The procedure is the same except:

Two ICx signals are mapped on the same TIx input. These 2 ICx signals are active on edges with opposite polarity. One of the two TIxFP signals is selected as trigger input and the slave mode controller is configured in reset mode.

For example, you can measure the period (in TIMx_CCR1 register) and the duty cycle (in TIMx_CCR2 register) of the PWM applied on TI1 using the following procedure (depending on CK_INT frequency and prescaler value):

493/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Select the active input for TIMx_CCR1: write the CC1S bits to 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (TI1 selected). Select the active polarity for TI1FP1 (used both for capture in TIMx_CCR1 and counter clear): program the CC1P and CC1NP bits to 00 (active on rising edge). Select the active input for TIMx_CCR2: write the CC2S bits to 10 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (TI1 selected). Select the active polarity for TI1FP2 (used for capture in TIMx_CCR2): program the CC2P and CC2NP bits to 11 (active on falling edge). Select the valid trigger input: write the TS bits to 101 in the TIMx_SMCR register (TI1FP1 selected). Configure the slave mode controller in reset mode: write the SMS bits to 100 in the TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the captures: write the CC1E and CC2E bits to 1 in the TIMx_CCER register.

Figure 181. PWM input mode timing

TI1

TIMx_CNT

0004

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0000

TIMx_CCR1

0004

TIMx_CCR2

0002

IC1 capture IC2 capture reset counter

IC2 capture pulse width measurement

IC1 capture period measurement

ai15413

1. The PWM input mode can be used only with the TIMx_CH1/TIMx_CH2 signals due to the fact that only TI1FP1 and TI2FP2 are connected to the slave mode controller.

16.4.7

Forced output mode

In output mode (CCxS bits = 00 in the TIMx_CCMRx register), each output compare signal (OCxREF and then OCx) can be forced to active or inactive level directly by software, independently of any comparison between the output compare register and the counter. To force an output compare signal (OCXREF/OCx) to its active level, you just need to write 101 in the OCxM bits in the corresponding TIMx_CCMRx register. Thus OCXREF is forced high (OCxREF is always active high) and OCx get opposite value to CCxP polarity bit. For example: CCxP=0 (OCx active high) => OCx is forced to high level. The OCxREF signal can be forced low by writing the OCxM bits to 100 in the TIMx_CCMRx register. Anyway, the comparison between the TIMx_CCRx shadow register and the counter is still performed and allows the flag to be set. Interrupt requests can be sent accordingly. This is described in the output compare mode section below.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

494/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.4.8

Output compare mode

This function is used to control an output waveform or indicating when a period of time has elapsed. When a match is found between the capture/compare register and the counter, the output compare function: 1. Assigns the corresponding output pin to a programmable value defined by the output compare mode (OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register) and the output polarity (CCxP bit in the TIMx_CCER register). The output pin can keep its level (OCXM=000), be set active (OCxM=001), be set inactive (OCxM=010) or can toggle (OCxM=011) on match. Sets a flag in the interrupt status register (CCxIF bit in the TIMx_SR register). Generates an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt mask is set (CCXIE bit in the TIMx_DIER register).

2. 3.

The TIMx_CCRx registers can be programmed with or without preload registers using the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register. In output compare mode, the update event UEV has no effect on OCxREF and OCx output. The timing resolution is one count of the counter. Output compare mode can also be used to output a single pulse (in One-pulse mode). Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the counter clock (internal, external, prescaler). Write the desired data in the TIMx_ARR and TIMx_CCRx registers. Set the CCxIE bit if an interrupt request is to be generated. Select the output mode. For example: 5. Write OCxM = 011 to toggle OCx output pin when CNT matches CCRx Write OCxPE = 0 to disable preload register Write CCxP = 0 to select active high polarity Write CCxE = 1 to enable the output

Enable the counter by setting the CEN bit in the TIMx_CR1 register.

The TIMx_CCRx register can be updated at any time by software to control the output waveform, provided that the preload register is not enabled (OCxPE=0, else TIMx_CCRx shadow register is updated only at the next update event UEV). An example is given in Figure 182.

495/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 182. Output compare mode, toggle on OC1.
Write B201h in the CC1R register

TIM1_CNT TIM1_CCR1 oc1ref=OC1

0039

003A 003A

003B

B200 B201

B201

Match detected on CCR1 Interrupt generated if enabled

16.4.9

PWM mode
Pulse Width Modulation mode allows you to generate a signal with a frequency determined by the value of the TIMx_ARR register and a duty cycle determined by the value of the TIMx_CCRx register. The PWM mode can be selected independently on each channel (one PWM per OCx output) by writing 110 (PWM mode 1) or 111 (PWM mode 2) in the OCxM bits in the TIMx_CCMRx register. You must enable the corresponding preload register by setting the OCxPE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register, and eventually the auto-reload preload register (in upcounting or center-aligned modes) by setting the ARPE bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. As the preload registers are transferred to the shadow registers only when an update event occurs, before starting the counter, you have to initialize all the registers by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register. The OCx polarity is software programmable using the CCxP bit in the TIMx_CCER register. It can be programmed as active high or active low. The OCx output is enabled by the CCxE bit in the TIMx_CCER register. Refer to the TIMx_CCERx register description for more details. In PWM mode (1 or 2), TIMx_CNT and TIMx_CCRx are always compared to determine whether TIMx_CNT TIMx_CCRx. The timer is able to generate PWM in edge-aligned mode only since the counter is upcounting.

PWM edge-aligned mode

In the following example, we consider PWM mode 1. The reference PWM signal OCxREF is high as long as TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCRx else it becomes low. If the compare value in TIMx_CCRx is greater than the auto-reload value (in TIMx_ARR) then OCxREF is held at 1. If the compare value is 0 then OCxRef is held at 0. Figure 183 shows some edgealigned PWM waveforms in an example where TIMx_ARR=8.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

496/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Figure 183. Edge-aligned PWM waveforms (ARR=8)
Counter register OCXREF CCxIF 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1

RM0090

CCRx=4

OCXREF CCRx=8 CCxIF

OCXREF CCRx>8 CCxIF OCXREF CCRx=0 CCxIF

16.4.10

One-pulse mode
One-pulse mode (OPM) is a particular case of the previous modes. It allows the counter to be started in response to a stimulus and to generate a pulse with a programmable length after a programmable delay. Starting the counter can be controlled through the slave mode controller. Generating the waveform can be done in output compare mode or PWM mode. You select One-pulse mode by setting the OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This makes the counter stop automatically at the next update event UEV. A pulse can be correctly generated only if the compare value is different from the counter initial value. Before starting (when the timer is waiting for the trigger), the configuration must be as follows: CNT < CCRx ARR (in particular, 0 < CCRx) Figure 184. Example of one pulse mode.
TI2 OC1REF OC1

Counter

TIM1_ARR TIM1_CCR1

0 tDELAY tPULSE

497/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) For example you may want to generate a positive pulse on OC1 with a length of tPULSE and after a delay of tDELAY as soon as a positive edge is detected on the TI2 input pin. Use TI2FP2 as trigger 1: 1. 2. 3. 4. Map TI2FP2 to TI2 by writing CC2S=01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. TI2FP2 must detect a rising edge, write CC2P=0 and CC2NP = 0 in the TIMx_CCER register. Configure TI2FP2 as trigger for the slave mode controller (TRGI) by writing TS=110 in the TIMx_SMCR register. TI2FP2 is used to start the counter by writing SMS to 110 in the TIMx_SMCR register (trigger mode).

The OPM waveform is defined by writing the compare registers (taking into account the clock frequency and the counter prescaler).

The tDELAY is defined by the value written in the TIMx_CCR1 register. The tPULSE is defined by the difference between the auto-reload value and the compare value (TIMx_ARR - TIMx_CCR1). Lets say you want to build a waveform with a transition from 0 to 1 when a compare match occurs and a transition from 1 to 0 when the counter reaches the auto-reload value. To do this you enable PWM mode 2 by writing OC1M=111 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. You can optionally enable the preload registers by writing OC1PE=1 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register and ARPE in the TIMx_CR1 register. In this case you have to write the compare value in the TIMx_CCR1 register, the auto-reload value in the TIMx_ARR register, generate an update by setting the UG bit and wait for external trigger event on TI2. CC1P is written to 0 in this example.

You only want 1 pulse (Single mode), so you write '1 in the OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register to stop the counter at the next update event (when the counter rolls over from the auto-reload value back to 0). When OPM bit in the TIMx_CR1 register is set to '0', so the Repetitive Mode is selected. Particular case: OCx fast enable In One-pulse mode, the edge detection on TIx input set the CEN bit which enables the counter. Then the comparison between the counter and the compare value makes the output toggle. But several clock cycles are needed for these operations and it limits the minimum delay tDELAY min we can get. If you want to output a waveform with the minimum delay, you can set the OCxFE bit in the TIMx_CCMRx register. Then OCxRef (and OCx) are forced in response to the stimulus, without taking in account the comparison. Its new level is the same as if a compare match had occurred. OCxFE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode.

16.4.11

TIM9/12 external trigger synchronization

The TIM9/12 timers can be synchronized with an external trigger in several modes: Reset mode, Gated mode and Trigger mode.

Slave mode: Reset mode

The counter and its prescaler can be reinitialized in response to an event on a trigger input. Moreover, if the URS bit from the TIMx_CR1 register is low, an update event UEV is generated. Then all the preloaded registers (TIMx_ARR, TIMx_CCRx) are updated. In the following example, the upcounter is cleared in response to a rising edge on TI1 input:
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 498/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) 1.

RM0090

Configure the channel 1 to detect rising edges on TI1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC1F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S = 01 in the TIMx_CCMR1 register. Program CC1P and CC1NP to 00 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect rising edges only). Configure the timer in reset mode by writing SMS=100 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Start the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

2. 3.

The counter starts counting on the internal clock, then behaves normally until TI1 rising edge. When TI1 rises, the counter is cleared and restarts from 0. In the meantime, the trigger flag is set (TIF bit in the TIMx_SR register) and an interrupt request can be sent if enabled (depending on the TIE bit in TIMx_DIER register). The following figure shows this behavior when the auto-reload register TIMx_ARR=0x36. The delay between the rising edge on TI1 and the actual reset of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI1 input. Figure 185. Control circuit in reset mode
TI1 UG Counter clock = ck_cnt = ck_psc Counter register TIF 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03

Slave mode: Gated mode

The counter can be enabled depending on the level of a selected input. In the following example, the upcounter counts only when TI1 input is low: 1. Configure the channel 1 to detect low levels on TI1. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC1F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC1S bits select the input capture source only, CC1S=01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register. Program CC1P=1 and CC1NP= 0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only). Configure the timer in gated mode by writing SMS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI1 as the input source by writing TS=101 in TIMx_SMCR register. Enable the counter by writing CEN=1 in the TIMx_CR1 register (in gated mode, the counter doesnt start if CEN=0, whatever is the trigger input level).

2. 3.

The counter starts counting on the internal clock as long as TI1 is low and stops as soon as TI1 becomes high. The TIF flag in the TIMx_SR register is set both when the counter starts or stops. The delay between the rising edge on TI1 and the actual stop of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI1 input.

499/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 186. Control circuit in gated mode

TI1 cnt_en Counter clock = ck_cnt = ck_psc Counter register TIF 30 31 32 33

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

34

35 36 37 38

Write TIF=0

Slave mode: Trigger mode

The counter can start in response to an event on a selected input. In the following example, the upcounter starts in response to a rising edge on TI2 input: 1. Configure the channel 2 to detect rising edges on TI2. Configure the input filter duration (in this example, we dont need any filter, so we keep IC2F=0000). The capture prescaler is not used for triggering, so you dont need to configure it. The CC2S bits are configured to select the input capture source only, CC2S=01 in TIMx_CCMR1 register. Program CC2P=1 and CC2NP=0 in TIMx_CCER register to validate the polarity (and detect low level only). Configure the timer in trigger mode by writing SMS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register. Select TI2 as the input source by writing TS=110 in TIMx_SMCR register.

2.

When a rising edge occurs on TI2, the counter starts counting on the internal clock and the TIF flag is set. The delay between the rising edge on TI2 and the actual start of the counter is due to the resynchronization circuit on TI2 input. Figure 187. Control circuit in trigger mode
TI2 cnt_en Counter clock = ck_cnt = ck_psc Counter register TIF 34 35 36 37 38

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

500/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.4.12

Timer synchronization (TIM9/12)

The TIM timers are linked together internally for timer synchronization or chaining. Refer to Section 15.3.15: Timer synchronization on page 453 for details.

16.4.13

Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters debug mode (Cortex-M4F core halted), the TIMx counter either continues to work normally or stops, depending on DBG_TIMx_STOP configuration bit in DBG module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C.

501/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.5

TIM9 and TIM12 registers

Refer to Section 1.1 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers have to be written by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits). Read accesses can be done by bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

16.5.1

TIM9/12 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 ARPE

5 Reserved

3 OPM rw

2 URS rw

1 UDIS rw

0 CEN rw

CKD[1:0] Reserved rw rw

rw

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 9:8 CKD: Clock division This bit-field indicates the division ratio between the timer clock (CK_INT) frequency and sampling clock used by the digital filters (TIx), 00: tDTS = tCK_INT 01: tDTS = 2 tCK_INT 10: tDTS = 4 tCK_INT 11: Reserved Bit 7 ARPE: Auto-reload preload enable 0: TIMx_ARR register is not buffered. 1: TIMx_ARR register is buffered. Bits 6:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 3 OPM: One-pulse mode 0: Counter is not stopped on the update event 1: Counter stops counting on the next update event (clearing the CEN bit). Bit 2 URS: Update request source This bit is set and cleared by software to select the UEV event sources. 0: Any of the following events generates an update interrupt if enabled: Counter overflow Setting the UG bit 1: Only counter overflow generates an update interrupt if enabled. Bit 1 UDIS: Update disable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable update event (UEV) generation. 0: UEV enabled. An UEV is generated by one of the following events: Counter overflow Setting the UG bit Buffered registers are then loaded with their preload values. 1: UEV disabled. No UEV is generated, shadow registers keep their value (ARR, PSC, CCRx). The counter and the prescaler are reinitialized if the UG bit is set. Bit 0 CEN: Counter enable 0: Counter disabled 1: Counter enabled CEN is cleared automatically in one-pulse mode, when an update event occurs.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

502/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.5.2

TIM9/12 control register 2 (TIMx_CR2)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11 Reserved

10

5 MMS[2:0]

Reserved rw rw rw

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:4 MMS: Master mode selection These bits are used to select the information to be sent in Master mode to slave timers for synchronization (TRGO). The combination is as follows: 000: Reset - the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register is used as the trigger output (TRGO). If the reset is generated by the trigger input (slave mode controller configured in reset mode) then the signal on TRGO is delayed compared to the actual reset. 001: Enable - the Counter enable signal, CNT_EN, is used as the trigger output (TRGO). It is useful to start several timers at the same time or to control a window in which a slave timer is enabled. The Counter Enable signal is generated by a logic OR between the CEN control bit and the trigger input when configured in Gated mode. When the Counter Enable signal is controlled by the trigger input, there is a delay on TRGO, except if the master/slave mode is selected (see the MSM bit description in the TIMx_SMCR register). 010: Update - The update event is selected as the trigger output (TRGO). For instance a master timer can be used as a prescaler for a slave timer. 011: Compare pulse - The trigger output sends a positive pulse when the CC1IF flag is to be set (even if it was already high), as soon as a capture or a compare match occurs. (TRGO). 100: Compare - OC1REF signal is used as the trigger output (TRGO). 101: Compare - OC2REF signal is used as the trigger output (TRGO). 110: Reserved 111: Reserved Bits 3:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

503/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.5.3

TIM9/12 slave mode control register (TIMx_SMCR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 MSM

5 TS[2:0]

3 Res.

1 SMS[2:0]

Reserved rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 MSM: Master/Slave mode 0: No action 1: The effect of an event on the trigger input (TRGI) is delayed to allow a perfect synchronization between the current timer and its slaves (through TRGO). It is useful in order to synchronize several timers on a single external event. Bits 6:4 TS: Trigger selection This bitfield selects the trigger input to be used to synchronize the counter. 000: Internal Trigger 0 (ITR0) 001: Internal Trigger 1 (ITR1) 010: Internal Trigger 2 (ITR2) 011: Internal Trigger 3 (ITR3) 100: TI1 Edge Detector (TI1F_ED) 101: Filtered Timer Input 1 (TI1FP1) 110: Filtered Timer Input 2 (TI2FP2) 111: Reserved. See Table 79: TIMx internal trigger connection on page 505 for more details on the meaning of ITRx for each timer. Note: These bits must be changed only when they are not used (e.g. when SMS=000) to avoid wrong edge detections at the transition. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 2:0 SMS: Slave mode selection When external signals are selected, the active edge of the trigger signal (TRGI) is linked to the polarity selected on the external input (see Input control register and Control register descriptions. 000: Slave mode disabled - if CEN = 1 then the prescaler is clocked directly by the internal clock 001: Reserved 010: Reserved 011: Reserved 100: Reset mode - Rising edge of the selected trigger input (TRGI) reinitializes the counter and generates an update of the registers 101: Gated mode - The counter clock is enabled when the trigger input (TRGI) is high. The counter stops (but is not reset) as soon as the trigger becomes low. Counter starts and stops are both controlled 110: Trigger mode - The counter starts on a rising edge of the trigger TRGI (but it is not reset). Only the start of the counter is controlled 111: External clock mode 1 - Rising edges of the selected trigger (TRGI) clock the counter Note: The Gated mode must not be used if TI1F_ED is selected as the trigger input (TS=100). Indeed, TI1F_ED outputs 1 pulse for each transition on TI1F, whereas the Gated mode checks the level of the trigger signal.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

504/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Table 79.

Slave TIM TIM2 TIM3 TIM4 TIM5 TIM9 TIM12

RM0090

TIMx internal trigger connection

ITR0 (TS = 000) TIM1 TIM1 TIM1 TIM2 TIM2 TIM4 ITR1 (TS = 001) TIM8 TIM2 TIM2 TIM3 TIM3 TIM5 ITR2 (TS = 010) TIM3 TIM5 TIM3 TIM4 TIM10 TIM13 ITR3 (TS = 011) TIM4 TIM4 TIM8 TIM8 TIM11 TIM14

505/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.5.4

TIM9/12 Interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11 Reserved

10

6 TIE

4 Res

2 CC2IE rw

1 CC1IE rw

0 UIE rw

rw

Bit 15:7

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 TIE: Trigger interrupt enable 0: Trigger interrupt disabled. 1: Trigger interrupt enabled. Bit 5:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 2 CC2IE: Capture/Compare 2 interrupt enable 0: CC2 interrupt disabled. 1: CC2 interrupt enabled. Bit 1 CC1IE: Capture/Compare 1 interrupt enable 0: CC1 interrupt disabled. 1: CC1 interrupt enabled. Bit 0 UIE: Update interrupt enable 0: Update interrupt disabled. 1: Update interrupt enabled.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

506/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.5.5

TIM9/12 status register (TIMx_SR)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13 Reserved

12

11

10

6 TIF

4 Reserved

2 CC2IF rc_w0

1 CC1IF rc_w0

0 UIF rc_w0

CC2OF CC1OF Reserved rc_w0 rc_w0

rc_w0

Bit 15:11

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 10 CC2OF: Capture/compare 2 overcapture flag refer to CC1OF description Bit 9 CC1OF: Capture/Compare 1 overcapture flag This flag is set by hardware only when the corresponding channel is configured in input capture mode. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0. 0: No overcapture has been detected. 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register while CC1IF flag was already set Bits 8:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 TIF: Trigger interrupt flag This flag is set by hardware on trigger event (active edge detected on TRGI input when the slave mode controller is enabled in all modes but gated mode. It is set when the counter starts or stops when gated mode is selected. It is cleared by software. 0: No trigger event occurred. 1: Trigger interrupt pending. Bit 5:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 2 CC2IF: Capture/Compare 2 interrupt flag refer to CC1IF description Bit 1 CC1IF: Capture/compare 1 interrupt flag If channel CC1 is configured as output: This flag is set by hardware when the counter matches the compare value. It is cleared by software. 0: No match. 1: The content of the counter TIMx_CNT matches the content of the TIMx_CCR1 register. When the contents of TIMx_CCR1 are greater than the contents of TIMx_ARR, the CC1IF bit goes high on the counter overflow. If channel CC1 is configured as input: This bit is set by hardware on a capture. It is cleared by software or by reading the TIMx_CCR1 register. 0: No input capture occurred. 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register (an edge has been detected on IC1 which matches the selected polarity).

507/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

Bit 0 UIF: Update interrupt flag This bit is set by hardware on an update event. It is cleared by software. 0: No update occurred. 1: Update interrupt pending. This bit is set by hardware when the registers are updated: At overflow and if UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by software using the UG bit in TIMx_EGR register, if URS=0 and UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by a trigger event (refer to the synchro control register description), if URS=0 and UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

16.5.6

TIM9/12 event generation register (TIMx_EGR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11 Reserved

10

6 TG

4 Reserved

2 CC2G w

1 CC1G w

0 UG w

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 TG: Trigger generation This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: The TIF flag is set in the TIMx_SR register. Related interrupt can occur if enabled Bits 5:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 CC2G: Capture/compare 2 generation refer to CC1G description Bit 1 CC1G: Capture/compare 1 generation This bit is set by software to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: A capture/compare event is generated on channel 1: If channel CC1 is configured as output: the CC1IF flag is set, the corresponding interrupt is sent if enabled. If channel CC1 is configured as input: The current counter value is captured in the TIMx_CCR1 register. The CC1IF flag is set, the corresponding interrupt is sent if enabled. The CC1OF flag is set if the CC1IF flag was already high. Bit 0 UG: Update generation This bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: Re-initializes the counter and generates an update of the registers. The prescaler counter is also cleared and the prescaler ratio is not affected. The counter is cleared.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

508/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.5.7

TIM9/12 capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 The channels can be used in input (capture mode) or in output (compare mode). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits in this register have different functions in input and output modes. For a given bit, OCxx describes its function when the channel is configured in output mode, ICxx describes its function when the channel is configured in input mode. So you must take care that the same bit can have different meanings for the input stage and the output stage.

15 Res.

14

13 OC2M[2:0]

12

11

10

7 Res.

5 OC1M[2:0]

OC2PE OC2FE CC2S[1:0] IC2PSC[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

OC1PE OC1FE CC1S[1:0] IC1PSC[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

IC2F[3:0] rw rw rw

IC1F[3:0] rw rw rw

Output compare mode

Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 14:12 OC2M[2:0]: Output compare 2 mode Bit 11 OC2PE: Output compare 2 preload enable Bit 10 OC2FE: Output compare 2 fast enable Bits 9:8 CC2S[1:0]: Capture/Compare 2 selection This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC2 channel is configured as output 01: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI2 10: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI1 11: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TRC. This mode works only if an internal trigger input is selected through the TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register Note: The CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

509/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

Bits 6:4 OC1M: Output compare 1 mode These bits define the behavior of the output reference signal OC1REF from which OC1 and OC1N are derived. OC1REF is active high whereas the active levels of OC1 and OC1N depend on the CC1P and CC1NP bits, respectively. 000: Frozen - The comparison between the output compare register TIMx_CCR1 and the counter TIMx_CNT has no effect on the outputs.(this mode is used to generate a timing base). 001: Set channel 1 to active level on match. The OC1REF signal is forced high when the TIMx_CNT counter matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 010: Set channel 1 to inactive level on match. The OC1REF signal is forced low when the TIMx_CNT counter matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 011: Toggle - OC1REF toggles when TIMx_CNT=TIMx_CCR1 100: Force inactive level - OC1REF is forced low 101: Force active level - OC1REF is forced high 110: PWM mode 1 - In upcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT<TIMx_CCR1 else it is inactive. In downcounting, channel 1 is inactive (OC1REF=0) as long as TIMx_CNT>TIMx_CCR1, else it is active (OC1REF=1) 111: PWM mode 2 - In upcounting, channel 1 is inactive as long as TIMx_CNT<TIMx_CCR1 else it is active. In downcounting, channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT>TIMx_CCR1 else it is inactive. Note: In PWM mode 1 or 2, the OCREF level changes only when the result of the comparison changes or when the output compare mode switches from frozen mode to PWM mode. Bit 3 OC1PE: Output compare 1 preload enable 0: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 disabled. TIMx_CCR1 can be written at anytime, the new value is taken into account immediately 1: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 enabled. Read/Write operations access the preload register. TIMx_CCR1 preload value is loaded into the active register at each update event Note: The PWM mode can be used without validating the preload register only in one-pulse mode (OPM bit set in the TIMx_CR1 register). Else the behavior is not guaranteed. Bit 2 OC1FE: Output compare 1 fast enable This bit is used to accelerate the effect of an event on the trigger in input on the CC output. 0: CC1 behaves normally depending on the counter and CCR1 values even when the trigger is ON. The minimum delay to activate the CC1 output when an edge occurs on the trigger input is 5 clock cycles 1: An active edge on the trigger input acts like a compare match on the CC1 output. Then, OC is set to the compare level independently of the result of the comparison. Delay to sample the trigger input and to activate CC1 output is reduced to 3 clock cycles. OC1FE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode. Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 selection This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1 10: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI2 11: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TRC. This mode works only if an internal trigger input is selected through the TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: The CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

510/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

Input capture mode

Bits 15:12 IC2F: Input capture 2 filter Bits 11:10 IC2PSC[1:0]: Input capture 2 prescaler Bits 9:8 CC2S: Capture/compare 2 selection This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC2 channel is configured as output 01: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI2 10: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TI1 11: CC2 channel is configured as input, IC2 is mapped on TRC. This mode works only if an internal trigger input is selected through the TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: The CC2S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC2E = 0 in TIMx_CCER). Bits 7:4 IC1F: Input capture 1 filter This bitfield defines the frequency used to sample the TI1 input and the length of the digital filter applied to TI1. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the output: 1000: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=6 0000: No filter, sampling is done at fDTS 1001: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=8 0001: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=2 0010: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=4 1010: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=5 1011: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=6 0011: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=8 1100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=8 0100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=6 0101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=8 1101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=5 1110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=6 0110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=6 1111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=8 0111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=8 Note: In the current silicon revision, fDTS is replaced in the formula by CK_INT when ICxF[3:0]= 1, 2 or 3. Bits 3:2 IC1PSC: Input capture 1 prescaler This bitfield defines the ratio of the prescaler acting on the CC1 input (IC1). The prescaler is reset as soon as CC1E=0 (TIMx_CCER register). 00: no prescaler, capture is done each time an edge is detected on the capture input 01: capture is done once every 2 events 10: capture is done once every 4 events 11: capture is done once every 8 events Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 selection This bitfield defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1 10: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI2 11: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TRC. This mode is working only if an internal trigger input is selected through TS bit (TIMx_SMCR register) Note: The CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

511/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.5.8

TIM9/12 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 CC2NP

6 Res.

5 CC2P rw

4 CC2E rw

3 CC1NP

2 Res.

1 CC1P rw

0 CC1E rw

Reserved rw

rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 CC2NP: Capture/Compare 2 output Polarity refer to CC1NP description Bits 6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 CC2P: Capture/Compare 2 output Polarity refer to CC1P description Bit 4 CC2E: Capture/Compare 2 output enable refer to CC1E description Bit 3 CC1NP: Capture/Compare 1 complementary output Polarity CC1 channel configured as output: CC1NP must be kept cleared CC1 channel configured as input: CC1NP is used in conjunction with CC1P to define TI1FP1/TI2FP1 polarity (refer to CC1P description). Bits 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 CC1P: Capture/Compare 1 output Polarity. CC1 channel configured as output: 0: OC1 active high. 1: OC1 active low. CC1 channel configured as input: CC1NP/CC1P bits select TI1FP1 and TI2FP1 polarity for trigger or capture operations. 00: noninverted/rising edge Circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 rising edge (capture, trigger in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger in gated mode, encoder mode). 01: inverted/falling edge Circuit is sensitive to TIxFP1 falling edge (capture, trigger in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is inverted (trigger in gated mode, encoder mode). 10: reserved, do not use this configuration. Note: 11: noninverted/both edges Circuit is sensitive to both TIxFP1 rising and falling edges (capture, trigger in reset, external clock or trigger mode), TIxFP1 is not inverted (trigger in gated mode). This configuration must not be used for encoder mode. Bit 0 CC1E: Capture/Compare 1 output enable. CC1 channel configured as output: 0: Off - OC1 is not active. 1: On - OC1 signal is output on the corresponding output pin. CC1 channel configured as input: This bit determines if a capture of the counter value can actually be done into the input capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) or not. 0: Capture disabled. 1: Capture enabled.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

512/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Table 80.

CCxE bit 0 1

RM0090

Output control bit for standard OCx channels

OCx output state Output disabled (OCx=0, OCx_EN=0) OCx=OCxREF + Polarity, OCx_EN=1

Note:

The states of the external I/O pins connected to the standard OCx channels depend on the state of the OCx channel and on the GPIO registers.

16.5.9

TIM9/12 counter (TIMx_CNT)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CNT[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CNT[15:0]: Counter value

16.5.10

TIM9/12 prescaler (TIMx_PSC)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

PSC[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 PSC[15:0]: Prescaler value The counter clock frequency CK_CNT is equal to fCK_PSC / (PSC[15:0] + 1). PSC contains the value to be loaded into the active prescaler register at each update event.

16.5.11

TIM9/12 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

ARR[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 ARR[15:0]: Auto-reload value ARR is the value to be loaded into the actual auto-reload register. Refer to the Section 16.4.1: Time-base unit on page 485 for more details about ARR update and behavior. The counter is blocked while the auto-reload value is null.

513/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.5.12

TIM9/12 capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CCR1[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CCR1[15:0]: Capture/Compare 1 value If channel CC1 is configured as output: CCR1 is the value to be loaded into the actual capture/compare 1 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (OC1PE bit). Else the preload value is copied into the active capture/compare 1 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the TIMx_CNT counter and signaled on the OC1 output. If channel CC1is configured as input: CCR1 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 1 event (IC1).

16.5.13

TIM9/12 capture/compare register 2 (TIMx_CCR2)

Address offset: 0x38 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CCR2[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CCR2[15:0]: Capture/Compare 2 value If channel CC2 is configured as output: CCR2 is the value to be loaded into the actual capture/compare 2 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR2 register (OC2PE bit). Else the preload value is copied into the active capture/compare 2 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the TIMx_CNT counter and signalled on the OC2 output. If channel CC2 is configured as input: CCR2 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 2 event (IC2).

16.5.14

TIM9/12 register map

TIM9/12 registers are mapped as 16-bit addressable registers as described below:

Table 81.
Offset
0x00

TIM9/12 register map and reset values

ARPE URS 0 CEN 0 CKD [1:0] 0 Reserved 0 UDIS 0 OPM 0 MMS[2:0] 0 0 0

Register
TIMx_CR1 Reset value

0x04

TIMx_CR2 Reset value

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

514/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Table 81.

Offset
0x08

RM0090

TIM9/12 register map and reset values (continued)

Reserved MSM

Register
TIMx_SMCR Reset value

CC2IE

CC1IE 0 CC1IF 0 CC1G 0 CC1P 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x0C

TIMx_DIER Reset value

Reserved CC2OF CC1OF Reserved

Reserved

0 Reserved TIF Reserved

0 CC2IF

0x10

TIMx_SR Reset value

0 Reserved OC2PE OC2FE

0 TG Reserved OC1PE

0 CC2G

0x14

TIMx_EGR Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Output Compare mode Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Input Capture mode Reset value

0 Reserved OC2M [2:0] 0 Reserved 0 Reserved CC2NP Reserved CC1NP 0 0 CC2S [1:0] Reserved OC1M [2:0]

0 OC1FE

CC1S [1:0]

0x18

IC2F[3:0] 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IC2 CC2S PSC IC1F[3:0] [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 IC1 CC1S PSC [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0

0x1C TIMx_CCER Reset value 0x24 TIMx_CNT Reset value 0x28 TIMx_PSC Reset value 0x2C TIMx_ARR Reset value 0x30 Reserved Reserved Reserved

Reserved

CC2P

CC2E

0x20

Reserved

CNT[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PSC[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ARR[15:0] 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x34

TIMx_CCR1 Reset value

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CCR1[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x38

TIMx_CCR2 Reset value

CCR2[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x3C to 0x4C

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

515/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

CC1E 0

UG 0

UIF 0

UIE 0

TIE

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved TS[2:0] 0 0 0 SMS[2:0] 0 0 0 0

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.6

TIM10/11/13/14 registers
The peripheral registers have to be written by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits). Read accesses can be done by bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

16.6.1

TIM10/11/13/14 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 ARPE

2 URS

1 UDIS rw

0 CEN rw

CKD[1:0] Reserved rw rw

Reserved rw rw

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 9:8 CKD: Clock division This bit-field indicates the division ratio between the timer clock (CK_INT) frequency and sampling clock used by the digital filters (ETR, TIx), 00: tDTS = tCK_INT 01: tDTS = 2 tCK_INT 10: tDTS = 4 tCK_INT 11: Reserved Bit 7 ARPE: Auto-reload preload enable 0: TIMx_ARR register is not buffered 1: TIMx_ARR register is buffered Bits 6:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 URS: Update request source This bit is set and cleared by software to select the update interrupt (UEV) sources. 0: Any of the following events generate an UEV if enabled: Counter overflow Setting the UG bit 1: Only counter overflow generates an UEV if enabled. Bit 1 UDIS: Update disable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable update interrupt (UEV) event generation. 0: UEV enabled. An UEV is generated by one of the following events: Counter overflow Setting the UG bit. Buffered registers are then loaded with their preload values. 1: UEV disabled. No UEV is generated, shadow registers keep their value (ARR, PSC, CCRx). The counter and the prescaler are reinitialized if the UG bit is set. Bit 0 CEN: Counter enable 0: Counter disabled 1: Counter enabled

10/11/13/14 16.6.2 TIM10/11/13/14 status register (TIMx_SR)

Address offset: 0x10

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

516/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Reset value: 0x0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 CC1OF Reserved rc_w0 Reserved 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

RM0090

0 UIF rc_w0

CC1IF rc_w0

Bit 15:10

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 9 CC1OF: Capture/Compare 1 overcapture flag This flag is set by hardware only when the corresponding channel is configured in input capture mode. It is cleared by software by writing it to 0. 0: No overcapture has been detected. 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register while CC1IF flag was already set Bits 8:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 1 CC1IF: Capture/compare 1 interrupt flag If channel CC1 is configured as output: This flag is set by hardware when the counter matches the compare value. It is cleared by software. 0: No match. 1: The content of the counter TIMx_CNT matches the content of the TIMx_CCR1 register. When the contents of TIMx_CCR1 are greater than the contents of TIMx_ARR, the CC1IF bit goes high on the counter overflow. If channel CC1 is configured as input: This bit is set by hardware on a capture. It is cleared by software or by reading the TIMx_CCR1 register. 0: No input capture occurred. 1: The counter value has been captured in TIMx_CCR1 register (an edge has been detected on IC1 which matches the selected polarity). Bit 0 UIF: Update interrupt flag This bit is set by hardware on an update event. It is cleared by software. 0: No update occurred. 1: Update interrupt pending. This bit is set by hardware when the registers are updated: At overflow and if UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by software using the UG bit in TIMx_EGR register, if URS=0 and UDIS=0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

16.6.3

TIM10/11/13/14 event generation register (TIMx_EGR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

1 CC1G

0 UG w

Reserved w

Bits 15:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

517/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

Bit 1 CC1G: Capture/compare 1 generation This bit is set by software in order to generate an event, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: A capture/compare event is generated on channel 1: If channel CC1 is configured as output: CC1IF flag is set, Corresponding interrupt or is sent if enabled. If channel CC1 is configured as input: The current value of the counter is captured in TIMx_CCR1 register. The CC1IF flag is set, the corresponding interrupt is sent if enabled. The CC1OF flag is set if the CC1IF flag was already high. Bit 0 UG: Update generation This bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action 1: Re-initialize the counter and generates an update of the registers. Note that the prescaler counter is cleared too (anyway the prescaler ratio is not affected). The counter is cleared.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

518/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.6.4

TIM10/11/13/14 capture/compare mode register 1 (TIMx_CCMR1)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 The channels can be used in input (capture mode) or in output (compare mode). The direction of a channel is defined by configuring the corresponding CCxS bits. All the other bits of this register have a different function in input and in output mode. For a given bit, OCxx describes its function when the channel is configured in output, ICxx describes its function when the channel is configured in input. So you must take care that the same bit can have a different meaning for the input stage and for the output stage.

15

14

13

12

11 Reserved

10

5 OC1M[2:0]

OC1PE OC1FE CC1S[1:0] IC1PSC[1:0] rw rw rw rw rw

IC1F[3:0] Reserved rw rw rw

Output compare mode

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 6:4 OC1M: Output compare 1 mode These bits define the behavior of the output reference signal OC1REF from which OC1 is derived. OC1REF is active high whereas OC1 active level depends on CC1P bit. 000: Frozen. The comparison between the output compare register TIMx_CCR1 and the counter TIMx_CNT has no effect on the outputs. 001: Set channel 1 to active level on match. OC1REF signal is forced high when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 010: Set channel 1 to inactive level on match. OC1REF signal is forced low when the counter TIMx_CNT matches the capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). 011: Toggle - OC1REF toggles when TIMx_CNT = TIMx_CCR1. 100: Force inactive level - OC1REF is forced low. 101: Force active level - OC1REF is forced high. 110: PWM mode 1 - Channel 1 is active as long as TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR1 else inactive. 111: PWM mode 2 - Channel 1 is inactive as long as TIMx_CNT < TIMx_CCR1 else active. Note: In PWM mode 1 or 2, the OCREF level changes when the result of the comparison changes or when the output compare mode switches from frozen to PWM mode. Bit 3 OC1PE: Output compare 1 preload enable 0: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 disabled. TIMx_CCR1 can be written at anytime, the new value is taken in account immediately. 1: Preload register on TIMx_CCR1 enabled. Read/Write operations access the preload register. TIMx_CCR1 preload value is loaded in the active register at each update event. Note: The PWM mode can be used without validating the preload register only in one pulse mode (OPM bit set in TIMx_CR1 register). Else the behavior is not guaranteed.

519/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

Bit 2 OC1FE: Output compare 1 fast enable This bit is used to accelerate the effect of an event on the trigger in input on the CC output. 0: CC1 behaves normally depending on counter and CCR1 values even when the trigger is ON. The minimum delay to activate CC1 output when an edge occurs on the trigger input is 5 clock cycles. 1: An active edge on the trigger input acts like a compare match on CC1 output. OC is then set to the compare level independently of the result of the comparison. Delay to sample the trigger input and to activate CC1 output is reduced to 3 clock cycles. OC1FE acts only if the channel is configured in PWM1 or PWM2 mode. Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output. 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1. 10: 11: Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

Input capture mode

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 7:4 IC1F: Input capture 1 filter This bit-field defines the frequency used to sample TI1 input and the length of the digital filter applied to TI1. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the output: 0000: No filter, sampling is done at fDTS1000: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=6 0001: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=21001: fSAMPLING=fDTS/8, N=8 0010: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=41010: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=5 0011: fSAMPLING=fCK_INT, N=81011: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=6 0100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=61100: fSAMPLING=fDTS/16, N=8 0101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/2, N=81101: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=5 0110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=61110: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=6 0111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/4, N=81111: fSAMPLING=fDTS/32, N=8 Note: In current silicon revision, fDTS is replaced in the formula by CK_INT when ICxF[3:0]= 1, 2 or 3. Bits 3:2 IC1PSC: Input capture 1 prescaler This bit-field defines the ratio of the prescaler acting on CC1 input (IC1). The prescaler is reset as soon as CC1E=0 (TIMx_CCER register). 00: no prescaler, capture is done each time an edge is detected on the capture input 01: capture is done once every 2 events 10: capture is done once every 4 events 11: capture is done once every 8 events Bits 1:0 CC1S: Capture/Compare 1 selection This bit-field defines the direction of the channel (input/output) as well as the used input. 00: CC1 channel is configured as output 01: CC1 channel is configured as input, IC1 is mapped on TI1 10: Reserved 11: Reserved Note: CC1S bits are writable only when the channel is OFF (CC1E = 0 in TIMx_CCER).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

520/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.6.5

TIM10/11/13/14 capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

3 CC1NP

2 Res.

1 CC1P rw

0 CC1E rw

Reserved rw

Bits 15:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 3 CC1NP: Capture/Compare 1 complementary output Polarity. CC1 channel configured as output: CC1NP must be kept cleared. CC1 channel configured as input: CC1NP bit is used in conjunction with CC1P to define TI1FP1 polarity (refer to CC1P description). Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 CC1P: Capture/Compare 1 output Polarity. CC1 channel configured as output: 0: OC1 active high 1: OC1 active low CC1 channel configured as input: The CC1P bit selects TI1FP1 and TI2FP1 polarity for trigger or capture operations. 00: noninverted/rising edge Circuit is sensitive to TI1FP1 rising edge (capture mode), TI1FP1 is not inverted. 01: inverted/falling edge Circuit is sensitive to TI1FP1 falling edge (capture mode), TI1FP1 is inverted. 10: reserved, do not use this configuration. 11: noninverted/both edges Circuit is sensitive to both TI1FP1 rising and falling edges (capture mode), TI1FP1 is not inverted. Bit 0 CC1E: Capture/Compare 1 output enable. CC1 channel configured as output: 0: Off - OC1 is not active 1: On - OC1 signal is output on the corresponding output pin CC1 channel configured as input: This bit determines if a capture of the counter value can actually be done into the input capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1) or not. 0: Capture disabled 1: Capture enabled

Table 82.
CCxE bit 0 1

Output control bit for standard OCx channels

OCx output state Output Disabled (OCx=0, OCx_EN=0) OCx=OCxREF + Polarity, OCx_EN=1

Note:

The state of the external I/O pins connected to the standard OCx channels depends on the OCx channel state and the GPIO registers.

521/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.6.6

TIM10/11/13/14 counter (TIMx_CNT)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CNT[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CNT[15:0]: Counter value

16.6.7

TIM10/11/13/14 prescaler (TIMx_PSC)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

PSC[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 PSC[15:0]: Prescaler value The counter clock frequency CK_CNT is equal to fCK_PSC / (PSC[15:0] + 1). PSC contains the value to be loaded in the active prescaler register at each update event.

16.6.8

TIM10/11/13/14 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

ARR[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 ARR[15:0]: Auto-reload value ARR is the value to be loaded in the actual auto-reload register. Refer to Section 16.4.1: Time-base unit on page 485 for more details about ARR update and behavior. The counter is blocked while the auto-reload value is null.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

522/1422

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

RM0090

16.6.9

TIM10/11/13/14 capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CCR1[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CCR1[15:0]: Capture/Compare 1 value If channel CC1 is configured as output: CCR1 is the value to be loaded in the actual capture/compare 1 register (preload value). It is loaded permanently if the preload feature is not selected in the TIMx_CCMR1 register (bit OC1PE). Else the preload value is copied in the active capture/compare 1 register when an update event occurs. The active capture/compare register contains the value to be compared to the counter TIMx_CNT and signaled on OC1 output. If channel CC1is configured as input: CCR1 is the counter value transferred by the last input capture 1 event (IC1).

16.6.10

TIM11 option register 1 (TIM11_OR)

Address offset: 0x50 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

TI1_RMP[1:0] Reserved rw

Bits 15:2 Bits 1:0

Reserved, must be kept at reset value. TI1_RMP[1:0]: TIM11 Input 1 remapping capability Set and cleared by software. 00,01,11: TIM11 Channel1 is connected to the GPIO (refer to the Alternate function mapping table in the datasheets). 10: HSE_RTC clock (HSE divided by programmable prescaler) is connected to the TIM11_CH1 input for measurement purposes

523/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

General-purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14)

16.6.11

TIM10/11/13/14 register map

TIMx registers are mapped as 16-bit addressable registers as described in the tables below:

Table 83.
Offset
0x00

TIM10/11/13/14 register map and reset values

ARPE URS 0 CEN 0 CC1E 0 0 0 0 0 0 UG 0 UIF 0 UIE 0 CKD [1:0] 0 Reserved CC1IE 0 CC1OF Reserved Reserved CC1IF 0 CC1G 0 OC1PE OC1FE Reserved 0 0 0 0 Reserved OC1M [2:0] 0 Reserved 0 Reserved CC1NP 0 0 IC1F[3:0] 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CNT[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PSC[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ARR[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCR1[15:0] 0 Reserved TI1_RMP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CC1P 0 0 Reserved 0 UDIS 0

Register
TIMx_CR1 Reset value

0x08

TIMx_SMCR Reset value

0x0C

TIMx_DIER Reset value

0x10

TIMx_SR Reset value

0x14

TIMx_EGR Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Output compare mode Reset value TIMx_CCMR1 Input capture mode Reset value

0x18

0x1C 0x20 TIMx_CCER Reset value 0x24 TIMx_CNT Reset value 0x28 TIMx_PSC Reset value 0x2C TIMx_ARR Reset value 0x30

0x34

TIMx_CCR1 Reset value

0x38 to 0x4C

0x50

TIMx_OR Reset value

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved CC1S [1:0] 0 0 0 0 IC1 CC1S PSC [1:0] [1:0] 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

524/1422

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

RM0090

17

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

17.1

TIM6&TIM7 introduction
The basic timers TIM6 and TIM7 consist of a 16-bit auto-reload counter driven by a programmable prescaler. They may be used as generic timers for time-base generation but they are also specifically used to drive the digital-to-analog converter (DAC). In fact, the timers are internally connected to the DAC and are able to drive it through their trigger outputs. The timers are completely independent, and do not share any resources.

17.2

TIM6&TIM7 main features

Basic timer (TIM6&TIM7) features include:

16-bit auto-reload upcounter 16-bit programmable prescaler used to divide (also on the fly) the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536 Synchronization circuit to trigger the DAC Interrupt/DMA generation on the update event: counter overflow

Figure 188. Basic timer block diagram

TIMxCLK from RCC

Internal clock (CK_INT)

Trigger TRGO controller

to DAC

Controller

Reset, Enable, Count,

Auto-reload Register U

UI

Stop, Clear or up CK_PSC CK_CNT PSC Prescaler CNT COUNTER

Flag

Preload registers transferred to active registers on U event according to control bit event interrupt & DMA output
ai14749b

525/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

17.3
17.3.1

TIM6&TIM7 functional description

Time-base unit
The main block of the programmable timer is a 16-bit upcounter with its related auto-reload register. The counter clock can be divided by a prescaler. The counter, the auto-reload register and the prescaler register can be written or read by software. This is true even when the counter is running. The time-base unit includes:

Counter Register (TIMx_CNT) Prescaler Register (TIMx_PSC) Auto-Reload Register (TIMx_ARR)

The auto-reload register is preloaded. The preload register is accessed each time an attempt is made to write or read the auto-reload register. The contents of the preload register are transferred into the shadow register permanently or at each update event UEV, depending on the auto-reload preload enable bit (ARPE) in the TIMx_CR1 register. The update event is sent when the counter reaches the overflow value and if the UDIS bit equals 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. It can also be generated by software. The generation of the update event is described in detail for each configuration. The counter is clocked by the prescaler output CK_CNT, which is enabled only when the counter enable bit (CEN) in the TIMx_CR1 register is set. Note that the actual counter enable signal CNT_EN is set 1 clock cycle after CEN.

Prescaler description
The prescaler can divide the counter clock frequency by any factor between 1 and 65536. It is based on a 16-bit counter controlled through a 16-bit register (in the TIMx_PSC register). It can be changed on the fly as the TIMx_PSC control register is buffered. The new prescaler ratio is taken into account at the next update event. Figure 189 and Figure 190 give some examples of the counter behavior when the prescaler ratio is changed on the fly.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

526/1422

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

RM0090

Figure 189. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 2

CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 1 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01 02 03

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Figure 190. Counter timing diagram with prescaler division change from 1 to 4

CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Update event (UEV) Prescaler control register 0 3 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC 00 01

Write a new value in TIMx_PSC Prescaler buffer Prescaler counter 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3

17.3.2

Counting mode
The counter counts from 0 to the auto-reload value (contents of the TIMx_ARR register), then restarts from 0 and generates a counter overflow event. An update event can be generate at each counter overflow or by setting the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register (by software or by using the slave mode controller). The UEV event can be disabled by software by setting the UDIS bit in the TIMx_CR1 register. This avoids updating the shadow registers while writing new values into the preload registers. In this way, no update event occurs until the UDIS bit has been written to 0, however, the counter and the prescaler counter both restart from 0 (but the prescale rate does not change). In addition, if the URS (update request selection) bit in the TIMx_CR1

527/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7) register is set, setting the UG bit generates an update event UEV, but the UIF flag is not set (so no interrupt or DMA request is sent). When an update event occurs, all the registers are updated and the update flag (UIF bit in the TIMx_SR register) is set (depending on the URS bit):

The buffer of the prescaler is reloaded with the preload value (contents of the TIMx_PSC register) The auto-reload shadow register is updated with the preload value (TIMx_ARR)

The following figures show some examples of the counter behavior for different clock frequencies when TIMx_ARR = 0x36. Figure 191. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 1
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Figure 192. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 2

CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0034 0035 0036 0000 0001 0002 0003

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

528/1422

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7) Figure 193. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by 4
CK_INT CNT_EN TImer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 0035 0036 0000 0001

RM0090

Figure 194. Counter timing diagram, internal clock divided by N

CK_INT

Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) 1F 20 00

Figure 195. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE = 0 (TIMx_ARR not preloaded)
CK_INT CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload register FF 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

529/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7) Figure 196. Counter timing diagram, update event when ARPE=1 (TIMx_ARR preloaded)
CK_PSC CNT_EN Timer clock = CK_CNT Counter register Counter overflow Update event (UEV) Update interrupt flag (UIF) Auto-reload preload register F5 36 F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Auto-reload shadow register

F5

36

Write a new value in TIMx_ARR

17.3.3

Clock source
The counter clock is provided by the Internal clock (CK_INT) source. The CEN (in the TIMx_CR1 register) and UG bits (in the TIMx_EGR register) are actual control bits and can be changed only by software (except for UG that remains cleared automatically). As soon as the CEN bit is written to 1, the prescaler is clocked by the internal clock CK_INT. Figure 197 shows the behavior of the control circuit and the upcounter in normal mode, without prescaler. Figure 197. Control circuit in normal mode, internal clock divided by 1
CK_INT CEN=CNT_EN UG CNT_INIT Counter clock = CK_CNT = CK_PSC Counter register 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

17.3.4

Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters the debug mode (Cortex-M4F core - halted), the TIMx counter either continues to work normally or stops, depending on the DBG_TIMx_STOP configuration bit in the DBG module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

530/1422

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

RM0090

17.4

TIM6&TIM7 registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers have to be written by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits). Read accesses can be done by bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

17.4.1

TIM6&TIM7 control register 1 (TIMx_CR1)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 ARPE

5 Reserved

3 OPM rw

2 URS rw

1 UDIS rw

0 CEN rw

Reserved rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 ARPE: Auto-reload preload enable 0: TIMx_ARR register is not buffered. 1: TIMx_ARR register is buffered. Bits 6:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 3 OPM: One-pulse mode 0: Counter is not stopped at update event 1: Counter stops counting at the next update event (clearing the CEN bit). Bit 2 URS: Update request source This bit is set and cleared by software to select the UEV event sources. 0: Any of the following events generates an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled. These events can be: Counter overflow/underflow Setting the UG bit Update generation through the slave mode controller 1: Only counter overflow/underflow generates an update interrupt or DMA request if enabled. Bit 1 UDIS: Update disable This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable UEV event generation. 0: UEV enabled. The Update (UEV) event is generated by one of the following events: Counter overflow/underflow Setting the UG bit Update generation through the slave mode controller Buffered registers are then loaded with their preload values. 1: UEV disabled. The Update event is not generated, shadow registers keep their value (ARR, PSC). However the counter and the prescaler are reinitialized if the UG bit is set or if a hardware reset is received from the slave mode controller. Bit 0 CEN: Counter enable 0: Counter disabled 1: Counter enabled Note: Gated mode can work only if the CEN bit has been previously set by software. However trigger mode can set the CEN bit automatically by hardware. CEN is cleared automatically in one-pulse mode, when an update event occurs.

531/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

17.4.2

TIM6&TIM7 control register 2 (TIMx_CR2)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11 Reserved

10

5 MMS[2:0]

Reserved rw rw rw

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:4 MMS: Master mode selection These bits are used to select the information to be sent in master mode to slave timers for synchronization (TRGO). The combination is as follows: 000: Reset - the UG bit from the TIMx_EGR register is used as a trigger output (TRGO). If reset is generated by the trigger input (slave mode controller configured in reset mode) then the signal on TRGO is delayed compared to the actual reset. 001: Enable - the Counter enable signal, CNT_EN, is used as a trigger output (TRGO). It is useful to start several timers at the same time or to control a window in which a slave timer is enabled. The Counter Enable signal is generated by a logic OR between CEN control bit and the trigger input when configured in gated mode. When the Counter Enable signal is controlled by the trigger input, there is a delay on TRGO, except if the master/slave mode is selected (see the MSM bit description in the TIMx_SMCR register). 010: Update - The update event is selected as a trigger output (TRGO). For instance a master timer can then be used as a prescaler for a slave timer. Bits 3:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

17.4.3

TIM6&TIM7 DMA/Interrupt enable register (TIMx_DIER)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12 Reserved

11

10

8 UDE

4 Reserved

0 UIE rw

rw

Bit 15:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 UDE: Update DMA request enable 0: Update DMA request disabled. 1: Update DMA request enabled. Bit 7:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 UIE: Update interrupt enable 0: Update interrupt disabled. 1: Update interrupt enabled.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

532/1422

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

RM0090

17.4.4

TIM6&TIM7 status register (TIMx_SR)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

8 Reserved

0 UIF rc_w0

Bits 15:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 UIF: Update interrupt flag This bit is set by hardware on an update event. It is cleared by software. 0: No update occurred. 1: Update interrupt pending. This bit is set by hardware when the registers are updated: At overflow or underflow and if UDIS = 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register. When CNT is reinitialized by software using the UG bit in the TIMx_EGR register, if URS = 0 and UDIS = 0 in the TIMx_CR1 register.

17.4.5

TIM6&TIM7 event generation register (TIMx_EGR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

8 Reserved

0 UG w

Bits 15:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 UG: Update generation This bit can be set by software, it is automatically cleared by hardware. 0: No action. 1: Re-initializes the timer counter and generates an update of the registers. Note that the prescaler counter is cleared too (but the prescaler ratio is not affected).

17.4.6

TIM6&TIM7 counter (TIMx_CNT)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

CNT[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0

CNT[15:0]: Counter value

533/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

17.4.7

TIM6&TIM7 prescaler (TIMx_PSC)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

PSC[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 PSC[15:0]: Prescaler value The counter clock frequency CK_CNT is equal to fCK_PSC / (PSC[15:0] + 1). PSC contains the value to be loaded into the active prescaler register at each update event.

17.4.8

TIM6&TIM7 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

ARR[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 ARR[15:0]: Auto-reload value ARR is the value to be loaded into the actual auto-reload register. Refer to Section 17.3.1: Time-base unit on page 526 for more details about ARR update and behavior. The counter is blocked while the auto-reload value is null.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

534/1422

Basic timers (TIM6&TIM7)

RM0090

17.4.9

TIM6&TIM7 register map

TIMx registers are mapped as 16-bit addressable registers as described in the table below:

Table 84.
Offset
0x00

TIM6&TIM7 register map and reset values

Reserved ARPE UDIS 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UG 0 Reserved CNT[15:0] 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PSC[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ARR[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UIF 0 Reserved UIE 0 OPM URS 0 CEN 0

Register
TIMx_CR1 Reset value

0x04

TIMx_CR2 Reset value

0x08

0x0C

TIMx_DIER Reset value

Reserved

0 Reserved

0x10

TIMx_SR Reset value

0x14

TIMx_EGR Reset value

0x18

0x1C

Reserved

0x20

Reserved

0x24

TIMx_CNT Reset value

Reserved

0x28

TIMx_PSC Reset value

0x2C

TIMx_ARR Reset value

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

535/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Reserved

UDE

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 Reserved 0 MMS[2:0] 0 Reserved 0 0

RM0090

Independent watchdog (IWDG)

18

Independent watchdog (IWDG)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

18.1

IWDG introduction
The devices have two embedded watchdog peripherals which offer a combination of high safety level, timing accuracy and flexibility of use. Both watchdog peripherals (Independent and Window) serve to detect and resolve malfunctions due to software failure, and to trigger system reset or an interrupt (window watchdog only) when the counter reaches a given timeout value. The independent watchdog (IWDG) is clocked by its own dedicated low-speed clock (LSI) and thus stays active even if the main clock fails. The window watchdog (WWDG) clock is prescaled from the APB1 clock and has a configurable time-window that can be programmed to detect abnormally late or early application behavior. The IWDG is best suited to applications which require the watchdog to run as a totally independent process outside the main application, but have lower timing accuracy constraints. The WWDG is best suited to applications which require the watchdog to react within an accurate timing window. For further information on the window watchdog, refer to Section 19 on page 541.

18.2

IWDG main features

Free-running downcounter clocked from an independent RC oscillator (can operate in Standby and Stop modes) Reset (if watchdog activated) when the downcounter value of 0x000 is reached

18.3

IWDG functional description

Figure 198 shows the functional blocks of the independent watchdog module. When the independent watchdog is started by writing the value 0xCCCC in the Key register (IWDG_KR), the counter starts counting down from the reset value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000) a reset signal is generated (IWDG reset). Whenever the key value 0xAAAA is written in the IWDG_KR register, the IWDG_RLR value is reloaded in the counter and the watchdog reset is prevented.

18.3.1

Hardware watchdog
If the Hardware watchdog feature is enabled through the device option bits, the watchdog is automatically enabled at power-on, and will generate a reset unless the Key register is written by the software before the counter reaches end of count.

18.3.2

Register access protection

Write access to the IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers is protected. To modify them, you must first write the code 0x5555 in the IWDG_KR register. A write access to this register

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

536/1422

Independent watchdog (IWDG)

RM0090

with a different value will break the sequence and register access will be protected again. This implies that it is the case of the reload operation (writing 0xAAAA). A status register is available to indicate that an update of the prescaler or the down-counter reload value is on going.

18.3.3

Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters debug mode (Cortex-M4F core halted), the IWDG counter either continues to work normally or stops, depending on DBG_IWDG_STOP configuration bit in DBG module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C. Figure 198. Independent watchdog block diagram
CORE Prescaler register IWDG_PR Status register IWDG_SR Reload register IWDG_RLR 12-bit reload value IWDG reset Key register IWDG_KR

LSI

8-bit prescaler VDD voltage domain

12-bit downcounter

MS19944V1

Note:

The watchdog function is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional in Stop and Standby modes. Table 85. Min/max IWDG timeout period at 32 kHz (LSI) (1)
PR[2:0] bits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Min timeout (ms) RL[11:0]= 0x000 0.125 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 Max timeout (ms) RL[11:0]= 0xFFF 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768

Prescaler divider /4 /8 /16 /32 /64 /128 /256

1. These timings are given for a 32 kHz clock but the microcontrollers internal RC frequency can vary from 30 to 60 kHz. Moreover, given an exact RC oscillator frequency, the exact timings still depend on the phasing of the APB interface clock versus the LSI clock so that there is always a full RC period of uncertainty.

18.4

IWDG registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers can be accessed by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

537/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Independent watchdog (IWDG)

18.4.1

Key register (IWDG_KR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 (reset by Standby mode)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved w w w w w w

KEY[15:0] w w w w w w w w w w

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 KEY[15:0]: Key value (write only, read 0000h) These bits must be written by software at regular intervals with the key value AAAAh, otherwise the watchdog generates a reset when the counter reaches 0. Writing the key value 5555h to enable access to the IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers (see Section 18.3.2) Writing the key value CCCCh starts the watchdog (except if the hardware watchdog option is selected)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

538/1422

Independent watchdog (IWDG)

RM0090

18.4.2

Prescaler register (IWDG_PR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved

1 PR[2:0]

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 2:0 PR[2:0]: Prescaler divider These bits are write access protected seeSection 18.3.2. They are written by software to select the prescaler divider feeding the counter clock. PVU bit of IWDG_SR must be reset in order to be able to change the prescaler divider. 000: divider /4 001: divider /8 010: divider /16 011: divider /32 100: divider /64 101: divider /128 110: divider /256 111: divider /256 Note: Reading this register returns the prescaler value from the VDD voltage domain. This value may not be up to date/valid if a write operation to this register is ongoing. For this reason the value read from this register is valid only when the PVU bit in the IWDG_SR register is reset.

18.4.3

Reload register (IWDG_RLR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0FFF (reset by Standby mode)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw

RL[11:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits11:0 RL[11:0]: Watchdog counter reload value These bits are write access protected see Section 18.3.2. They are written by software to define the value to be loaded in the watchdog counter each time the value AAAAh is written in the IWDG_KR register. The watchdog counter counts down from this value. The timeout period is a function of this value and the clock prescaler. Refer to Table 85. The RVU bit in the IWDG_SR register must be reset in order to be able to change the reload value. Note: Reading this register returns the reload value from the VDD voltage domain. This value may not be up to date/valid if a write operation to this register is ongoing on this register. For this reason the value read from this register is valid only when the RVU bit in the IWDG_SR register is reset.

539/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Independent watchdog (IWDG)

18.4.4

Status register (IWDG_SR)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 (not reset by Standby mode)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved

RVU PVU r r

Bits 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 RVU: Watchdog counter reload value update This bit is set by hardware to indicate that an update of the reload value is ongoing. It is reset by hardware when the reload value update operation is completed in the VDD voltage domain (takes up to 5 RC 40 kHz cycles). Reload value can be updated only when RVU bit is reset. Bit 0 PVU: Watchdog prescaler value update This bit is set by hardware to indicate that an update of the prescaler value is ongoing. It is reset by hardware when the prescaler update operation is completed in the VDD voltage domain (takes up to 5 RC 40 kHz cycles). Prescaler value can be updated only when PVU bit is reset.

Note:

If several reload values or prescaler values are used by application, it is mandatory to wait until RVU bit is reset before changing the reload value and to wait until PVU bit is reset before changing the prescaler value. However, after updating the prescaler and/or the reload value it is not necessary to wait until RVU or PVU is reset before continuing code execution (even in case of low-power mode entry, the write operation is taken into account and will complete)

18.4.5

IWDG register map

The following table gives the IWDG register map and reset values.

Table 86.
Offset
0x00

IWDG register map and reset values

IWDG_KR Reset value IWDG_PR Reset value IWDG_RLR Reset value IWDG_SR Reset value Reserved

0x04

0x08

RVU 0

0x0C

Reserved

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

540/1422

PVU 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved KEY[15:0] 0 Reserved RL[11:0] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR[2:0] 0 0 0

Register

Window watchdog (WWDG)

RM0090

19

Window watchdog (WWDG)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

19.1

WWDG introduction
The window watchdog is used to detect the occurrence of a software fault, usually generated by external interference or by unforeseen logical conditions, which causes the application program to abandon its normal sequence. The watchdog circuit generates an MCU reset on expiry of a programmed time period, unless the program refreshes the contents of the downcounter before the T6 bit becomes cleared. An MCU reset is also generated if the 7-bit downcounter value (in the control register) is refreshed before the downcounter has reached the window register value. This implies that the counter must be refreshed in a limited window.

19.2

WWDG main features

Programmable free-running downcounter Conditional reset Reset (if watchdog activated) when the downcounter value becomes less than 0x40 Reset (if watchdog activated) if the downcounter is reloaded outside the window (see Figure 200)

Early wakeup interrupt (EWI): triggered (if enabled and the watchdog activated) when the downcounter is equal to 0x40.

19.3

WWDG functional description

If the watchdog is activated (the WDGA bit is set in the WWDG_CR register) and when the 7-bit downcounter (T[6:0] bits) rolls over from 0x40 to 0x3F (T6 becomes cleared), it initiates a reset. If the software reloads the counter while the counter is greater than the value stored in the window register, then a reset is generated.

541/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 199. Watchdog block diagram

RESET

Window watchdog (WWDG)

Watchdog configuration register (WWDG_CFR)

-

W6

W5

W4

W3

W2

W1

W0

comparator = 1 when T6:0 > W6:0 Write WWDG_CR

CMP

Watchdog control register (WWDG_CR) WDGA T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 T0

6-bit downcounter (CNT)

PCLK1 (from RCC clock controller)

WDG prescaler (WDGTB)

The application program must write in the WWDG_CR register at regular intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset. This operation must occur only when the counter value is lower than the window register value. The value to be stored in the WWDG_CR register must be between 0xFF and 0xC0:

Enabling the watchdog

The watchdog is always disabled after a reset. It is enabled by setting the WDGA bit in the WWDG_CR register, then it cannot be disabled again except by a reset.

Controlling the downcounter

This downcounter is free-running: It counts down even if the watchdog is disabled. When the watchdog is enabled, the T6 bit must be set to prevent generating an immediate reset. The T[5:0] bits contain the number of increments which represents the time delay before the watchdog produces a reset. The timing varies between a minimum and a maximum value due to the unknown status of the prescaler when writing to the WWDG_CR register (see Figure 200).The Configuration register (WWDG_CFR) contains the high limit of the window: To prevent a reset, the downcounter must be reloaded when its value is lower than the window register value and greater than 0x3F. Figure 200 describes the window watchdog process. Note: The T6 bit can be used to generate a software reset (the WDGA bit is set and the T6 bit is cleared).

Advanced watchdog interrupt feature

The Early Wakeup Interrupt (EWI) can be used if specific safety operations or data logging must be performed before the actual reset is generated. The EWI interrupt is enabled by setting the EWI bit in the WWDG_CFR register. When the downcounter reaches the value 0x40, an EWI interrupt is generated and the corresponding interrupt service routine (ISR) can be used to trigger specific actions (such as communications or data logging), before resetting the device. In some applications, the EWI interrupt can be used to manage a software system check and/or system recovery/graceful degradation, without generating a WWDG reset. In this

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

542/1422

Window watchdog (WWDG)

RM0090

case, the corresponding interrupt service routine (ISR) should reload the WWDG counter to avoid the WWDG reset, then trigger the required actions. The EWI interrupt is cleared by writing '0' to the EWIF bit in the WWDG_SR register. Note: When the EWI interrupt cannot be served, e.g. due to a system lock in a higher priority task, the WWDG reset will eventually be generated.

19.4

How to program the watchdog timeout

You can use the formula in Figure 200 to calculate the WWDG timeout.

Warning:

When writing to the WWDG_CR register, always write 1 in the T6 bit to avoid generating an immediate reset.

Figure 200. Window watchdog timing diagram

T[6:0] CNT downcounter

W[6:0]

0x3F

Refresh not allowed

Refresh allowed

Time

T6 bit

RESET
ai17101b

The formula to calculate the timeout value is given by: WDGTB t WWDG = t PCLK1 4096 2 ( t [ 5:0 ] + 1 ) where: tWWDG: WWDG timeout tPCLK1: APB1 clock period measured in ms

( ms )

Refer to the table below for the minimum and maximum values of the TWWDG.

543/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 87.

Prescaler 1 2 4 8

Window watchdog (WWDG) Timeout values at 30 MHz (fPCLK1)

WDGTB 0 1 2 3 Min timeout (s) T[5:0] = 0x00 136.53 273.07 546.13 1092.27 Max timeout (ms) T[5:0] = 0x3F 8.74 17.48 34.95 69.91

19.5

Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters debug mode (Cortex-M4F core halted), the WWDG counter either continues to work normally or stops, depending on DBG_WWDG_STOP configuration bit in DBG module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

544/1422

Window watchdog (WWDG)

RM0090

19.6

WWDG registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers can be accessed by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

19.6.1

Control register (WWDG_CR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 007F

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

7 WDGA

3 T[6:0] rw

Reserved rs

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 WDGA: Activation bit This bit is set by software and only cleared by hardware after a reset. When WDGA = 1, the watchdog can generate a reset. 0: Watchdog disabled 1: Watchdog enabled Bits 6:0 T[6:0]: 7-bit counter (MSB to LSB) These bits contain the value of the watchdog counter. It is decremented every (4096 x 2WDGTB) PCLK1 cycles. A reset is produced when it rolls over from 0x40 to 0x3F (T6 becomes cleared).

545/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Window watchdog (WWDG)

19.6.2

Configuration register (WWDG_CFR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 007F

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9 EWI

3 W[6:0] rw

WDGTB[1:0]

Reserved rs rw

Bit 31:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 EWI: Early wakeup interrupt When set, an interrupt occurs whenever the counter reaches the value 0x40. This interrupt is only cleared by hardware after a reset. Bits 8:7 WDGTB[1:0]: Timer base The time base of the prescaler can be modified as follows: 00: CK Counter Clock (PCLK1 div 4096) div 1 01: CK Counter Clock (PCLK1 div 4096) div 2 10: CK Counter Clock (PCLK1 div 4096) div 4 11: CK Counter Clock (PCLK1 div 4096) div 8 Bits 6:0 W[6:0]: 7-bit window value These bits contain the window value to be compared to the downcounter.

19.6.3

Status register (WWDG_SR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

8 Reserved

0 EWIF rc_w0

Bit 31:1Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 EWIF: Early wakeup interrupt flag This bit is set by hardware when the counter has reached the value 0x40. It must be cleared by software by writing 0. A write of 1 has no effect. This bit is also set if the interrupt is not enabled.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

546/1422

Window watchdog (WWDG)

RM0090

19.6.4

WWDG register map

The following table gives the WWDG register map and reset values.

Table 88.
Offset
0x00

WWDG register map and reset values

Register
WWDG_CR Reset value WDGTB1 WDGA

0x04

WWDG_CFR Reset value

WDGTB0

EWI

0x08

WWDG_SR Reset value

Reserved

Refer to Table 2 on page 52for the register boundary addresses.

547/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

EWIF 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved T[6:0] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Reserved W[6:0] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

20

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

20.1

CRYP introduction
The cryptographic processor can be used to both encipher and decipher data using the DES, Triple-DES or AES (128, 192, or 256) algorithms. It is a fully compliant implementation of the following standards:

The data encryption standard (DES) and Triple-DES (TDES) as defined by Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS PUB 46-3, 1999 October 25). It follows the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X9.52 standard. The advanced encryption standard (AES) as defined by Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS PUB 197, 2001 November 26)

The CRYP processor performs data encryption and decryption using DES and TDES algorithms in Electronic codebook (ECB) or Cipher block chaining (CBC) mode. The CRYP peripheral is a 32-bit AHB2 peripheral. It supports DMA transfer for incoming and processed data, and has input and output FIFOs (each 8 words deep).

20.2

CRYP main features

Suitable for AES, DES and TDES enciphering and deciphering operations AES Supports the ECB, CBC, CTR, CCM and GCM chaining algorithms (CCM and GCM are available on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx only) Supports 128-, 192- and 256-bit keys 4 32-bit initialization vectors (IV) used in the CBC, CTR, CCM and GCM modes

Table 89.

Number of cycles required to process each 128-bit block (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx)
ECB 14 16 18 CBC 14 16 18 CTR 14 16 18

Algorithm / Key size 128b 192b 256b

Table 90.

Number of cycles required to process each 128-bit block (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)
GCM ECB 14 CBC 14 CTR Init 14 24 Header Payload 10 14 Tag 14 Init 12 Header Payload 14 25 Tag 14 CCM

Algorithm / Key size 128b

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

548/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Table 90.

192b 256b

RM0090

Number of cycles required to process each 128-bit block (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)
16 18 16 18 16 18 28 32 10 10 16 18 16 18 14 16 16 18 29 33 16 18

DES/TDES Direct implementation of simple DES algorithms (a single key, K1, is used) Supports the ECB and CBC chaining algorithms Supports 64-, 128- and 192-bit keys (including parity) 2 32-bit initialization vectors (IV) used in the CBC mode 16 HCLK cycles to process one 64-bit block in DES 48 HCLK cycles to process one 64-bit block in TDES IN and OUT FIFO (each with an 8-word depth, a 32-bit width, corresponding to 4 DES blocks or 2 AES blocks) Automatic data flow control with support of direct memory access (DMA) (using 2 channels, one for incoming data the other for processed data) Data swapping logic to support 1-, 8-, 16- or 32-bit data

Common to DES/TDES and AES

549/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

20.3

CRYP functional description

The cryptographic processor implements a Triple-DES (TDES, that also supports DES) core and an AES cryptographic core. Section 20.3.1 and Section 20.3.2 provide details on these cores. Since the TDES and the AES algorithms use block ciphers, incomplete input data blocks have to be padded prior to encryption (extra bits should be appended to the trailing end of the data string). After decryption, the padding has to be discarded. The hardware does not manage the padding operation, the software has to handle it. Figure 201 shows the block diagram of the cryptographic processor. Figure 201. Block diagram (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx)
32-bit AHB2 bus Status CRYP_SR DMA control register CRYP_DMACR Interrupt registers CRYP_IMSCR CRYP_RIS CRYP_MISR Control register CRYP_CR Initialization vectors CRYP_IV0...IV1 Key CRYP_K0. ..K3 k255...k0 swappi ng swappin g 8 32-bit IN FIFO 8 32-bit OUT FIFO CRYP_DIN CRYP_DOUT

IV0...IV127 DES/TDES/AES Processor core

ai16068b

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

550/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Figure 202. Block diagram (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx)
32-bit AHB2 bus

RM0090

Status CRYP_SR DMA control register CRYP_DMACR Interrupt registers CRYP_IMSCR CRYP_RIS CRYP_MISR Control register CRYP_CR Initialization vectors CRYP_IV0...IV1 Key CRYP_K0. ..K3 k255...k0 swappi ng swappin g 8 32-bit IN FIFO 8 32-bit OUT FIFO CRYP_DIN CRYP_DOUT

IV0...IV127 DES/TDES/AES Processor core

Context swapping CRYP_CSGCMCCM0..7

CRYP_CSGCM0..7

MS30441V1

20.3.1

DES/TDES cryptographic core

The DES/Triple-DES cryptographic core consists of three components:

The DES algorithm (DEA) Multiple keys (1 for the DES algorithm, 1 to 3 for the TDES algorithm) The initialization vector (used in the CBC mode)

The basic processing involved in the TDES is as follows: an input block is read in the DEA and encrypted using the first key, K1 (K0 is not used in TDES mode). The output is then decrypted using the second key, K2, and encrypted using the third key, K3. The key depends on the algorithm which is used:

DES mode: Key = [K1] TDES mode: Key = [K3 K2 K1]

where Kx=[KxR KxL], R = right, L = left According to the mode implemented, the resultant output block is used to calculate the ciphertext. Note that the outputs of the intermediate DEA stages is never revealed outside the cryptographic boundary.

551/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 The TDES allows three different keying options:

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

Three independent keys The first option specifies that all the keys are independent, that is, K1, K2 and K3 are independent. FIPS PUB 46-3 1999 (and ANSI X9.52 1998) refers to this option as the Keying Option 1 and, to the TDES as 3-key TDES.

Two independent keys The second option specifies that K1 and K2 are independent and K3 is equal to K1, that is, K1 and K2 are independent, K3 = K1. FIPS PUB 46-3 1999 (and ANSI X9.52 1998) refers to this second option as the Keying Option 2 and, to the TDES as 2-key TDES.

Three equal keys The third option specifies that K1, K2 and K3 are equal, that is, K1 = K2 = K3. FIPS PUB 46-3 1999 (and ANSI X9.52 1998) refers to the third option as the Keying Option 3. This 1-key TDES is equivalent to single DES.

FIPS PUB 46-3 1999 (and ANSI X9.52-1998) provides a thorough explanation of the processing involved in the four operation modes supplied by the TDEA (TDES algorithm): TDES-ECB encryption, TDES-ECB decryption, TDES-CBC encryption and TDES-CBC decryption. This reference manual only gives a brief explanation of each mode.

DES and TDES Electronic codebook (DES/TDES-ECB) mode

DES/TDES-ECB mode encryption Figure 203 illustrates the encryption in DES and TDES Electronic codebook (DES/TDES-ECB) mode. A 64-bit plaintext data block (P) is used after bit/byte/halfword swapping (refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type on page 567) as the input block (I). The input block is processed through the DEA in the encrypt state using K1. The output of this process is fed back directly to the input of the DEA where the DES is performed in the decrypt state using K2. The output of this process is fed back directly to the input of the DEA where the DES is performed in the encrypt state using K3. The resultant 64bit output block (O) is used, after bit/byte/half-word swapping, as ciphertext (C) and it is pushed into the OUT FIFO.

DES/TDES-ECB mode decryption Figure 204 illustrates the DES/TDES-ECB decryption. A 64-bit ciphertext block (C) is used, after bit/byte/half-word swapping, as the input block (I). The keying sequence is reversed compared to that used in the encryption process. The input block is processed through the DEA in the decrypt state using K3. The output of this process is fed back directly to the input of the DEA where the DES is performed in the encrypt state using K2. The new result is directly fed to the input of the DEA where the DES is performed in the decrypt state using K1. The resultant 64-bit output block (O), after bit/byte/half-word swapping, produces the plaintext (P).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

552/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Figure 203. DES/TDES-ECB mode encryption

IN FIFO plaintext P P, 64 bits DATATYPE swapping

RM0090

64
K1 DEA, encrypt

64
K2 DEA, decrypt

64
K3 DEA, encrypt O, 64 bits DATATYPE swapping C, 64 bits OUT FIFO ciphertext C
ai16069b

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; P: plain text.

Figure 204. DES/TDES-ECB mode decryption

IN FIFO ciphertext C C, 64 bits DATATYPE swapping I, 64 bits DEA, decrypt

64
K3

64
K2 DEA, encrypt

64
K1 DEA, decrypt O, 64 bits DATATYPE swapping P, 64 bits OUT FIFO plaintext P
MS19021V1

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; P: plain text.

553/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

DES and TDES Cipher block chaining (DES/TDES-CBC) mode

DES/TDES-CBC mode encryption Figure 205 illustrates the DES and Triple-DES Cipher block chaining (DES/TDES-CBC) mode encryption. This mode begins by dividing a plaintext message into 64-bit data blocks. In TCBC encryption, the first input block (I1), obtained after bit/byte/half-word swapping (refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type on page 567), is formed by exclusiveORing the first plaintext data block (P1) with a 64-bit initialization vector IV (I1 = IV P1). The input block is processed through the DEA in the encrypt state using K1. The output of this process is fed back directly to the input of the DEA, which performs the DES in the decrypt state using K2. The output of this process is fed directly to the input of the DEA, which performs the DES in the encrypt state using K3. The resultant 64-bit output block (O1) is used directly as the ciphertext (C1), that is, C1 = O1. This first ciphertext block is then exclusive-ORed with the second plaintext data block to produce the second input block, (I2) = (C1 P2). Note that I2 and P2 now refer to the second block. The second input block is processed through the TDEA to produce the second ciphertext block. This encryption process continues to chain successive cipher and plaintext blocks together until the last plaintext block in the message is encrypted. If the message does not consist of an integral number of data blocks, then the final partial data block should be encrypted in a manner specified for the application.

DES/TDES-CBC mode decryption In DES/TDES-CBC decryption (see Figure 206), the first ciphertext block (C1) is used directly as the input block (I1). The keying sequence is reversed compared to that used for the encrypt process. The input block is processed through the DEA in the decrypt state using K3. The output of this process is fed directly to the input of the DEA where the DES is processed in the encrypt state using K2. This resulting value is directly fed to the input of the DEA where the DES is processed in the decrypt state using K1. The resulting output block is exclusive-ORed with the IV (which must be the same as that used during encryption) to produce the first plaintext block (P1 = O1 IV). The second ciphertext block is then used as the next input block and is processed through the TDEA. The resulting output block is exclusive-ORed with the first ciphertext block to produce the second plaintext data block (P2 = O2 C1). (Note that P2 and O2 refer to the second block of data.) The TCBC decryption process continues in this manner until the last complete ciphertext block has been decrypted. Ciphertext representing a partial data block must be decrypted in a manner specified for the application.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

554/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Figure 205. DES/TDES-CBC mode encryption

RM0090

IN FIFO plaintext P P, 64 bits

AHB2 data write (before CRYP is enabled)

DATATYPE

swapping

64
IV0(L/R)

Ps, 64 bits

+
I, 64 bits DEA, encrypt

64
K1
O is written back into IV at the same time as it is pushed into the OUT FIFO

64
K2 DEA, decrypt

64
K3 DEA, encrypt O, 64 bits DATATYPE swapping C, 64 bits OUT FIFO ciphertext C
ai16070b

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; Ps: plain text before swapping (when decoding) or after swapping (when encoding); P: plain text; IV: initialization vectors.

555/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 206. DES/TDES-CBC mode decryption

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

IN FIFO ciphertext C C, 64 bits DATATYPE swapping I, 64 bits

64
I is written back into IV at the same time as P is pushed into the OUT FIFO

K3

DEA, decrypt

64
K2 DEA, encrypt

64
K1
AHB2 data write (before CRYP is enabled)

DEA, decrypt

64
IV0(L/R) DATATYPE

O, 64 bits

+
Ps, 64 bits swapping P, 64 bits OUT FIFO plaintext P
MS19022V1

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; Ps: plain text before swapping (when decoding) or after swapping (when encoding); P: plain text; IV: initialization vectors.

20.3.2

AES cryptographic core

The AES cryptographic core consists of three components:

The AES algorithm (AEA: advanced encryption algorithm) Multiple keys Initialization vector(s) or Nonce

The AES utilizes keys of 3 possible lengths: 128, 192 or 256 bits and, depending on the operation mode used, zero or one 128-bit initialization vector (IV). The basic processing involved in the AES is as follows: an input block of 128 bits is read from the input FIFO and sent to the AEA to be encrypted using the key (K0...3). The key format depends on the key size:

If Key size = 128: Key = [K3 K2] If Key size = 192: Key = [K3 K2 K1] If Key size = 256: Key = [K3 K2 K1 K0]

where Kx=[KxR KxL],R=right, L=left According to the mode implemented, the resultant output block is used to calculate the ciphertext. FIPS PUB 197 (November 26, 2001) provides a thorough explanation of the processing involved in the four operation modes supplied by the AES core: AES-ECB encryption, AES-

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

556/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

ECB decryption, AES-CBC encryption and AES-CBC decryption.This reference manual only gives a brief explanation of each mode.

AES Electronic codebook (AES-ECB) mode

AES-ECB mode encryption Figure 207 illustrates the AES Electronic codebook (AES-ECB) mode encryption. In AES-ECB encryption, a 128- bit plaintext data block (P) is used after bit/byte/halfword swapping (refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type on page 567) as the input block (I). The input block is processed through the AEA in the encrypt state using the 128, 192 or 256-bit key. The resultant 128-bit output block (O) is used after bit/byte/half-word swapping as ciphertext (C). It is then pushed into the OUT FIFO.

AES-ECB mode decryption Figure 208 illustrates the AES Electronic codebook (AES-ECB) mode encryption. To perform an AES decryption in the ECB mode, the secret key has to be prepared (it is necessary to execute the complete key schedule for encryption) by collecting the last round key, and using it as the first round key for the decryption of the ciphertext. This preparation function is computed by the AES core. Refer to Section 20.3.6: Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption for more details on how to prepare the key. In AES-ECB decryption, a 128-bit ciphertext block (C) is used after bit/byte/half-word swapping as the input block (I). The keying sequence is reversed compared to that of the encryption process. The resultant 128-bit output block (O), after bit/byte or halfword swapping, produces the plaintext (P).

Figure 207. AES-ECB mode encryption

IN FIFO plaintext P
P, 128 bits DATATYPE

swapping
128/192 or 256
I, 128 bits

K 0...3(1)

AEA, encrypt

DATATYPE

swapping
C, 128 bits

OUT FIFO ciphertext C

ai16071b

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; P: plain text. 2. If Key size = 128: Key = [K3 K2]. If Key size = 192: Key = [K3 K2 K1] If Key size = 256: Key = [K3 K2 K1 K0].

557/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 208. AES-ECB mode decryption

IN FIFO

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

ciphertext C
C, 128 bits DATATYPE

swapping
128/192 or 256
I, 128 bits

K 0...3(1)

AEA, decrypt
O, 128 bits

DATATYPE

swapping
P, 128 bits

OUT FIFO plaintext P

MS19023V1

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; P: plain text. 2. If Key size = 128 => Key = [K3 K2]. If Key size = 192 => Key = [K3 K2 K1] If Key size = 256 => Key = [K3 K2 K1 K0].

AES Cipher block chaining (AES-CBC) mode

AES-CBC mode encryption The AES Cipher block chaining (AES-CBC) mode decryption is shown on Figure 209. In AES-CBC encryption, the first input block (I1) obtained after bit/byte/half-word swapping (refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type on page 567) is formed by exclusiveORing the first plaintext data block (P1) with a 128-bit initialization vector IV (I1 = IV P1). The input block is processed through the AEA in the encrypt state using the 128-, 192- or 256-bit key (K0...K3). The resultant 128-bit output block (O1) is used directly as ciphertext (C1), that is, C1 = O1. This first ciphertext block is then exclusive-ORed with the second plaintext data block to produce the second input block, (I2) = (C1 P2). Note that I2 and P2 now refer to the second block. The second input block is processed through the AEA to produce the second ciphertext block. This encryption process continues to chain successive cipher and plaintext blocks together until the last plaintext block in the message is encrypted. If the message does not consist of an integral number of data blocks, then the final partial data block should be encrypted in a manner specified for the application. In the CBC mode, like in the ECB mode, the secret key must be prepared to perform an AES decryption. Refer to Section 20.3.6: Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption on page 572 for more details on how to prepare the key.

AES-CBC mode decryption In AES-CBC decryption (see Figure 210), the first 128-bit ciphertext block (C1) is used directly as the input block (I1). The input block is processed through the AEA in the decrypt state using the 128-, 192- or 256-bit key. The resulting output block is exclusive-ORed with the 128-bit initialization vector IV (which must be the same as that used during encryption) to produce the first plaintext block (P1 = O1 IV). The second ciphertext block is then used as the next input block and is processed through the AEA. The resulting output block is exclusive-ORed with the first ciphertext block to produce the second plaintext data block (P2 = O2 C1). (Note that P2 and O2 refer to the second

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

558/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

block of data.) The AES-CBC decryption process continues in this manner until the last complete ciphertext block has been decrypted. Ciphertext representing a partial data block must be decrypted in a manner specified for the application. Figure 209. AES-CBC mode encryption
IN FIFO plaintext P
P, 128 bits DATATYPE AHB2 data write (before CRYP is enabled)

swapping
128

Ps, 128 bits

IV=[IV1 IV0](2)
128, 192 or 256

+
I, 128 bits

K 0...3(3)
O is written back into IV at the same time as it is pushed into the OUT FIFO

AEA, encrypt

O, 128 bits
DATATYPE

swapping C, 128 bits OUT FIFO ciphertext C

ai16072b

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; Ps: plain text before swapping (when decoding) or after swapping (when encoding); P: plain text; IV: Initialization vectors. 2. IVx=[IVxR IVxL], R=right, L=left. 3. If Key size = 128 => Key = [K3 K2]. If Key size = 192 => Key = [K3 K2 K1] If Key size = 256 => Key = [K3 K2 K1 K0].

559/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 210. AES-CBC mode decryption

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

IN FIFO ciphertext C
C, 128 bits DATATYPE

swapping
128, 192 or 256

I, 128 bits

K 0...3(3)
I is written back into IV at the same time as P is pushed into the OUT FIFO AHB2 data write (before CRYP is enabled)

AEA, decrypt

128

O, 128 bits

IV=[IV1 IV0](2)
DATATYPE

+
Ps, 128 bits P, 128 bits

swapping OUT FIFO plaintext P

MS19024V1

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input block; O: output block; Ps: plain text before swapping (when decoding) or after swapping (when encoding); P: plain text; IV: Initialization vectors. 2. IVx=[IVxR IVxL], R=right, L=left. 3. If Key size = 128 => Key = [K3 K2]. If Key size = 192 => Key = [K3 K2 K1] If Key size = 256 => Key = [K3 K2 K1 K0].

AES counter mode (AES-CTR) mode

The AES counter mode uses the AES block as a key stream generator. The generated keys are then XORed with the plaintext to obtain the cipher. For this reason, it makes no sense to speak of different CTR encryption/decryption, since the two operations are exactly the same. In fact, given:

Plaintext: P[0], P[1], ..., P[n] (128 bits each) A key K to be used (the size does not matter) An initial counter block (call it ICB but it has the same functionality as the IV of CBC)

The cipher is computed as follows: C[i] = enck(iv[i]) xor P[i], where: iv[0] = ICB and iv[i+1] = func(iv[i]), where func is an update function applied to the previous iv block; func is basically an increment of one of the fields composing the iv block. Given that the ICB for decryption is the same as the one for encryption, the key stream generated during decryption is the same as the one generated during encryption. Then, the ciphertext is XORed with the key stream in order to retrieve the original plaintext. The decryption operation therefore acts exactly in the same way as the encryption operation.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

560/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

Figure 211 and Figure 212 illustrate AES-CTR encryption and decryption, respectively. Figure 211. AES-CTR mode encryption
IN FIFO plaintext P
P, 128 bits AHB2 data write (before CRYP is enabled) DATATYPE

swapping IV0...1(L/R)
Ps, 128 bits

+1

I, 128 bits

K0...3

128, 192 or 256

AEA, encrypt

(I + 1) is written back into IV at same time than C is pushed in OUT FIFO

O, 128 bits

+
Cs, 128 bit

DATATYPE

swapping
C, 128 bits

OUT FIFO ciphertext C

ai16073b

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input Block; o: output block; Ps: plain text before swapping (when decoding) or after swapping (when encoding); Cs: cipher text after swapping (when decoding) or before swapping (when encoding); P: plain text; IV: Initialization vectors.

561/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 212. AES-CTR mode decryption

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

IN FIFO ciphertext P
C, 128 bits AHB2 data write (before CRYP is enabled) DATATYPE

swapping IV0...1(L/R)
Cs, 128 bits

+1
128, 192 or 256

I, 128 bits

K0...3

AEA, encrypt

(I + 1) is written back into IV at same time than P is pushed in OUT FIFO

O, 128 bits

+
Ps, 128 bits

DATATYPE

swapping
P, 128 bits

OUT FIFO plaintext C

MS19025V1

1. K: key; C: cipher text; I: input Block; o: output block; Ps: plain text before swapping (when decoding) or after swapping (when encoding); Cs: cipher text after swapping (when decoding) or before swapping (when encoding); P: plain text; IV: Initialization vectors.

Figure 213 shows the structure of the IV block as defined by the standard [2]. It is composed of three distinct fields. Figure 213. Initial counter block structure for the Counter mode
Nonce 32 bits

Initialization vector (IV)

64 bits

Counter

32 bits
ai16074

Nonce is a 32-bit, single-use value. A new nonce should be assigned to each different communication. The initialization vector (IV) is a 64-bit value and the standard specifies that the encryptor must choose IV so as to ensure that a given value is used only once for a given key The counter is a 32-bit big-endian integer that is incremented each time a block has been encrypted. The initial value of the counter should be set to 1.

The block increments the least significant 32 bits, while it leaves the other (most significant) 96 bits unchanged.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

562/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

AES Galois/counter mode (GCM)

The AES Galois/counter mode (GCM) allows encrypting and authenticating the plaintext, and generating the correspondent ciphertext and tag (also known as message authentication code or message integrity check). This algorithm is based on AES counter mode to ensure confidentiality. It uses a multiplier over a fixed finite field to generate the tag. An initialization vector is required at the beginning of the algorithm. The message to be processed is split into 2 parts:

The header (also knows as additional authentication data): data which is authenticated but no protected (such as information for routing the packet) The payload (also knows as plaintext or ciphertext): the message itself which is authenticated and encrypted.

Note:

The header must precede the payload and the two parts cannot be mixed together. The GCM standard requires to pass, at the end of the message, a specific 128-bit block composed of the size of the header (64 bits) and the size of the payload (64 bits). During the computation, the header blocks must be distinguished from the payload blocks.

563/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) In GCM mode, four steps are required to perform an encryption/decryption: 1. GCM init phase During this first step, the HASH key is calculated and saved internally to be used for processing all the blocks. It is recommended to follow the sequence below: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) 2. Make sure that the cryptographic processor is disabled by clearing the CRYPEN bit in the CRYP_CR register. Select the GCM chaining mode by programming ALGOMODE bits to 01000 in CRYP_CR. Configure GCM_CCMPH bits to 00 in CRYP_CR to start the GCM Init phase. Initialize the key registers (128,192 and 256 bits) in CRYP_KEYRx as well as the initialization vector (IV). Set CRYPEN bit to 1 to start the calculation of the HASH key. Wait for the CRYPEN bit to be cleared to 0 before moving on to the next phase. Set the CRYPEN bit to 1.

GCM header phase This step must be performed after the GCM Init phase: h) i) Set the GCM_CCMPH bits to 01 in CRYP_CR to indicate that the header phase has started. Write the header data. Three methods can be used: Program the data by blocks of 32 bits into the CRYP_DIN register, and use the IFNF flag to determine if the input FIFO can receive data. The size of the header must be a multiple of 128 bits (4 words). Program the data into the CRYP_DIN register by blocks of 8 words, and use the IFEM flag to determine if the input FIFO can receive data (IFEM=1). The size of the header must be a multiple of 128 bits (4 words). Use the DMA. Once all header data have been supplied, wait until the BUSY bit is cleared in the CRYP_SR register.

j) 3.

GCM payload phase (encryption/decryption) This step must be performed after the GCM header phase: k) l) Configure GCM_CCMPH to 10 in the CRYP_CR register. Select the algorithm direction (encryption or decryption) by using the ALGODIR bit in CRYP_CR.

m) Program the payload message into the CRYP_DIN register, and use the IFNF flag to determine if the input FIFO can receive data. Alternatively, the data could be programmed into the CRYP_DIN register by blocks of 8 words and the IFEM flag used to determine if the input FIFO can receive data (IFEM=1). In parallel, the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

564/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

OFNE/OFFU flag of the CRYP_DOUT register can be monitored to check if the output FIFO is not empty. n) 4. Repeat the previous step until all payload blocks have been encrypted or decrypted. Alternatively, DMA could be used.

GCM final phase This step generates the authentication tag: o) p) Configure GCM_CCMPH[1:0] to 11 in CRYP_CR. Write the input into the CRYP_DIN register 4 times. The input must contain the number of bits in the header (64 bits) concatenated with the number of bits in the payload (64 bits). Wait till the OFNE flag (FIFO output not empty) is set to 1 in the CRYP_SR register. Read the CRYP_DOUT register 4 times: the output corresponds to the authentication tag. Disable the cryptographic processor (CRYPEN bit in CRYP_CR = 0)

q) r) s) Note:

When a decryption is performed, it is not required to compute the key at the beginning. At the end of the decryption, the generated tag should be compared with the expected tag passed with the message. In addition, the ALGODIR bit (algorithm direction) must be set to 1. No need to disable/enable CRYP processor when moving from header phase to tag phase.

AES Galois message authentication code (GMAC)

The cryptographic processor also supports GMAC to authenticate the plaintext. It uses the GCM algorithm and a multiplier over a fixed finite field to generate the corresponding tag. An initialization vector is required at the beginning of the algorithm. Actually, the GMAC algorithm corresponds to the GCM algorithm applied on a message composed of the header only. As a consequence, the payload phase is not required.

AES combined cipher machine (CCM)

The CCM algorithm allows encrypting and authenticating the plaintext, as well as generating the corresponding ciphertext and tag (also known as message authentication code or message integrity check). This algorithm is based on AES counter mode to ensure confidentiality. It uses the AES CBC mode to generate a 128-bit tag. The CCM standard (RFC 3610 Counter with CBC-MAC (CCM) dated September 2003) defines particular encoding rules for the first authentication block (called B0 in the standard). In particular, the first block includes flags, a nonce and the payload length expressed in bytes. The CCM standard specifies another format, called A or counter, for encryption/decryption. The counter is incremented during the payload phase and its 32 LSB bits are initialized to 1 during the tag generation (called A0 packet in the CCM standard). Note: The hardware does not perform the formatting operation of the B0 packet. It should be handled by the software. As for the GCM algorithm, the message to be processed is split into 2 parts:

The header (also knows as additional authentication data): data which is authenticated but no protected (such as information for routing the packet) The payload (also knows as plaintext or ciphertext): the message itself which is authenticated and encrypted.

565/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Note:

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) The header part must precede the payload and the two parts cannot be mixed together. In CCM mode, 4 steps are required to perform and encryption or decryption: 1. CCM init phase In this first step, the B0 packet of the CCM message (1st packet) is programmed into the CRYP_DIN register. During this phase, the CRYP_DOUT register does not contain any output data. The following sequence must be followed: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) 2. Make sure that the cryptographic processor is disabled by clearing the CRYPEN bit in the CRYP_CR register. Select the CCM chaining mode by programming the ALGOMODE bits to 01001 in the CRYP_CR register. Configure the GCM_CCMPH bits to 00 in CRYP_CR to start the CCM Init phase. Initialize the key registers (128,192 and 256 bits) in CRYP_KEYRx as well as the initialization vector (IV). Set the CRYPEN bit to 1 in CRYP_CR. Program the B0 packet into the input data register. Wait for the CRYPEN bit to be cleared before moving on to the next phase. Set CRYPEN to 1.

CCM header phase This step must be performed after the CCM Init phase. The sequence is identical for encryption and decryption. During this phase, the CRYP_DOUT register does not contain any output data. This phase can be skipped if there is no additional authenticated data. The following sequence must be followed: i) j) Set the GCM_CCMPH bit to 01 in CRYP_CR to indicate that the header phase has started. Three methods can be used: Program the header data by blocks of 32 bits into the CRYP_DIN register, and use the IFNF flag to determine if the input FIFO can receive data. The size of the header must be a multiple of 128 bits (4 words). Program the header data into the CRYP_DIN register by blocks of 8 words, and use the IFEM flag to determine if the input FIFO can receive data (IFEM=1). The size of the header must be a multiple of 128 bits (4 words). Use the DMA.

Note:

The first block B1 must be formatted with the header length. This task should be handled by software. k) Once all header data have been supplied, wait until the BUSY flag is cleared.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

566/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) 3. CCM payload phase (encryption/decryption)

RM0090

This step must be performed after the CCM header phase. During this phase, the encrypted/decrypted payload is stored in the CRYP_DOUT register. The following sequence must be followed: l) Configure GCM_CCMPH bits to 10 in CRYP_CR. m) Select the algorithm direction (encryption or decryption) by using the ALGODIR bit in CRYP_CR. n) Program the payload message into the CRYP_DIN register, and use the IFNF flag to determine if the input FIFO can receive data. Alternatively, the data could be programmed into the CRYP_DIN register by blocks of 8 words and the IFEM flag used to determine if the input FIFO can receive data (IFEM=1). In parallel, the OFNE/OFFU flag of the CRYP_DOUT register can be monitored to check if the output FIFO is not empty. Repeat the previous step until all payload blocks have been encrypted or decrypted. Alternatively, DMA could be used.

o) 4.

CCM final phase This step generates the authentication tag. During this phase, the authentication tag of the message is generated and stored in the CRYP_DOUT register. p) q) r) s) t) Configure GCM_CCMPH[1:0] bits to 11 in CRYP_CR. Load the A0 initialized counter, and program the 128-bit A0 value by writing 4 times 32 bits into the CRYP_DIN register. Wait till the OFNE flag (FIFO output not empty) is set to 1 in the CRYP_SR register. Read the CRYP_DOUT register 4 times: the output corresponds to the encrypted authentication tag. Disable the cryptographic processor (CRYPEN bit in CRYP_CR = 0)

Note:

The hardware does not perform the formatting of the original B0 and B1 packets and the tag comparison between encryption and decryption. They have to be handled by software. The cryptographic processor does not need to be disabled/enabled when moving from the header phase to the tag phase.

AES cipher message authentication code (CMAC)

The CMAC algorithm allows authenticating the plaintext, and generating the corresponding tag. The CMAC sequence is identical to the CCM one, except that the payload phase is skipped.

20.3.3

Data type
Data enter the CRYP processor 32 bits (word) at a time as they are written into the CRYP_DIN register. The principle of the DES is that streams of data are processed 64 bits by 64 bits and, for each 64-bit block, the bits are numbered from M1 to M64, with M1 the leftmost bit and M64 the right-most bit of the block. The same principle is used for the AES, but with a 128-bit block size. The system memory organization is little-endian: whatever the data type (bit, byte, 16-bit half-word, 32-bit word) used, the least-significant data occupy the lowest address locations. A bit, byte, or half-word swapping operation (depending on the kind of data to be encrypted) therefore has to be performed on the data read from the IN FIFO before they enter the CRYP processor. The same swapping operation should be performed on the CRYP data

567/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) before they are written into the OUT FIFO. For example, the operation would be byte swapping for an ASCII text stream. The kind of data to be processed is configured with the DATATYPE bitfield in the CRYP control register (CRYP_CR).

Table 91.

Data types
Swapping performed System memory data (plaintext or cypher) Example: TDES block value 0xABCD77206973FE01 is represented in system memory as:

DATATYPE in CRYP_CR

00b

No swapping

TDES block size = 64bit = 2x 32 bit

system memory

0xABCD7720 6973FE01

0xABCD7720 0x6973FE01

@ @+4

Example: TDES block value 0xABCD77206973FE01 is represented in system memory as: 01b Half-word (16-bit) swapping
system memory TDES block size = 64bit = 2x 32 bit

0xABCD 7720 6973 FE01

0x7720 ABCD 0xFE01 6973

@ @+4

Example: TDES block value 0xABCD77206973FE01 is represented in system memory as: 10b Byte (8-bit) swapping
system memory TDES block size = 64bit = 2x 32 bit

0xAB CD 77 20 69 73 FE 01

0x 20 77 CD AB 0x 01 FE 73 69

@ @+4

TDES block value 0x4E6F772069732074 is represented in system memory as:

TDES Bloc size = 64bit = 2x 32 bit system memory

11b

Bit swapping

0x4E 6F 77 20 69 73 20 74

0x04 EE F6 72 0x2E 04 CE 96

@ @+4

0100 1110 0110 1111 0110 1001 0111 0011

0111 0111 0010 0000 0010 0000 0111 0100

0000 0100 1110 1110 1111 0110 0111 0010 @ 0010 1110 0000 0100 1100 1110 1001 0110 @+4

Figure 214 shows how the 64-bit data block M1...64 is constructed from two consecutive 32bit words popped off the IN FIFO by the CRYP processor, according to the DATATYPE value. The same schematic can easily be extended to form the 128-bit block for the AES cryptographic algorithm (for the AES, the block length is four 32-bit words, but swapping only takes place at word level, so it is identical to the one described here for the TDES). Note: The same swapping is performed between the IN FIFO and the CRYP data block, and between the CRYP data block and the OUT FIFO.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

568/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Figure 214. 64-bit block construction according to DATATYPE
bit swapping operation bit 31 IN FIFO bit 31 bit 30 bit 30 bit 2 bit 2 bit 1 bit 1 bit 0 bit 0 DATATYPE = 11b

RM0090

second word written into the CRYP_DIN register first word written into the CRYP_DIN register

bit string

M1

M2

M30

M31

M32

M33

M34

M62

M63

M64

byte swapping operation Byte 1,3 Byte 1,2 Byte 1,1 Byte 1,0 bits 7...0 bits 7...0 bits 7...0 bits 7...0 Byte 0,3 Byte 0,2 Byte 0,1 Byte 0,0 bits 7...0 bits 7...0 bits 7...0 bits 7...0

DATATYPE = 10b second word written into the CRYP_DIN register first word written into the CRYP_DIN register (bit ordering within byte is unchanged)

IN FIFO

bit string

Byte 0,0 Byte 0,1 Byte 0,2 Byte 0,3 Byte 1,0 Byte 1,1 Byte 1,2 Byte 1,3 M1...8 M9...16 M33...40 M41...48 M49...56 M57...64 M17...24 M25...32 DATATYPE = 01b Half-word 1,0 bits 15...0 Half-word 0,0 bits 15...0 second word written into the CRYP_DIN register first word written into the CRYP_DIN register

hald-word swapping operation Half-word 1,1 bits 15...0 Half-word 0,1 bits 15...0

IN FIFO

bit string

Half-word 0,0 M1...16

Half-word 0,1 M17...32

Half-word 1,0 M33...48

Half-word 1,1 M49...64 DATATYPE = 00b

No swapping operation Word 1 bits 31...0 Word 0 bits 31...0

second word written into the CRYP_DIN register first word written into the CRYP_DIN register

IN FIFO

bit string

Word 0 M1...32

Word 1 M33...64
ai16075

20.3.4

Initialization vectors - CRYP_IV0...1(L/R)

Initialization vectors are considered as two 64-bit data items. They therefore do not have the same data format and representation in system memory as plaintext or cypher data, and they are not affected by the DATATYPE value. Initialization vectors are defined by two consecutive 32-bit words, CRYP_IVL (left part, noted as bits IV1...32) and CRYP_IVR (right part, noted as bits IV33...64).

569/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) During the DES or TDES CBC encryption, the CRYP_IV0(L/R) bits are XORed with the 64bit data block popped off the IN FIFO after swapping (according to the DATATYPE value), that is, with the M1...64 bits of the data block. When the output of the DEA3 block is available, it is copied back into the CRYP_IV0(L/R) vector, and this new content is XORed with the next 64-bit data block popped off the IN FIFO, and so on. During the DES or TDES CBC decryption, the CRYP_IV0(L/R) bits are XORed with the 64bit data block (that is, with the M1...64 bits) delivered by the TDEA1 block before swapping (according to the DATATYPE value), and pushed into the OUT FIFO. When the XORed result is swapped and pushed into the OUT FIFO, the CRYP_IV0(L/R) value is replaced by the output of the IN FIFO, then the IN FIFO is popped, and a new 64-bit data block can be processed. During the AES CBC encryption, the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) bits are XORed with the 128-bit data block popped off the IN FIFO after swapping (according to the DATATYPE value). When the output of the AES core is available, it is copied back into the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) vector, and this new content is XORed with the next 128-bit data block popped off the IN FIFO, and so on. During the AES CBC decryption, the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) bits are XORed with the 128-bit data block delivered by the AES core before swapping (according to the DATATYPE value) and pushed into the OUT FIFO. When the XORed result is swapped and pushed into the OUT FIFO, the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) value is replaced by the output of the IN FIFO, then the IN FIFO is popped, and a new 128-bit data block can be processed. During the AES CTR encryption or decryption, the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) bits are encrypted by the AES core. Then the result of the encryption is XORed with the 128-bit data block popped off the IN FIFO after swapping (according to the DATATYPE value). When the XORed result is swapped and pushed into the OUT FIFO, the counter part of the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) value (32 LSB) is incremented. Any write operation to the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) registers when bit BUSY = 1b in the CRYP_SR register is disregarded (CRYP_IV0...1(L/R) register content not modified). Thus, you must check that bit BUSY = 0b before modifying initialization vectors.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

570/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Figure 215. Initialization vectors use in the TDES-CBC encryption TDES-CBC en cryption ex ample, DATATYPE = 11b
bit 31 bit 30 bit 31 bit 30 bit 2 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

RM0090

second word written into the CRYP_DIN register first word written into the CRYP_DIN register

bit 1 bit 0

bit string

M1 M2

M30 M31 M32 M33 M34

M62 M63 M64

31

30

CRYP_IVL
2 1

31

30

CRYP_IVR
2

IV1 IV2

IV30 IV31 IV32 IV33 IV34

IV62 IV63 IV64

I1

I2

I30

I31

I32 I33

I34

I62

I63 I64

DEA Encrypt, DEA Decrypt, DEA Encrypt,

K1 K2 K3

CRYP_IVL
31 30 2 1 0 31 IV1 IV2

CRYP_IVR
30 2 1 0 CRYP result is copied back to the CRYP_IVL/R registers after cyphering IV62 IV63 IV64

IV30 IV31 IV32 IV33 IV34

OUT FIFO First word from the OUT FIFO contains the left part of the cyphertext block (O1...32) Second word from OUT FIFO contains the right part of cyphertext block (O33...64)
ai16076

20.3.5

CRYP busy state

When there is enough data in the input FIFO (at least 2 words for the DES or TDES algorithm mode, 4 words for the AES algorithm mode) and enough free-space in the output FIFO (at least 2 (DES/TDES) or 4 (AES) word locations), and when the bit CRYPEN = 1 in the CRYP_CR register, then the cryptographic processor automatically starts an encryption or decryption process (according to the value of the ALGODIR bit in the CRYP_CR register). This process takes 48 AHB2 clock cycles for the Triple-DES algorithm, 16 AHB2 clock cycles for the simple DES algorithm, and 14, 16 or 18 AHB2 clock cycles for the AES with key lengths of 128, 192 or 256 bits, respectively. During the whole process, the BUSY bit in the CRYP_SR register is set to 1. At the end of the process, two (DES/TDES) or four (AES) words are written by the CRYP Core into the output FIFO, and the BUSY bit is cleared. In the CBC, CTR mode, the initialization vectors CRYP_IVx(L/R)R (x = 0..3) are updated as well.

571/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) A write operation to the key registers (CRYP_Kx(L/R)R, x = 0..3), the initialization registers (CRYP_IVx(L/R)R, x = 0..3), or to bits [9:2] in the CRYP_CR register are ignored when the cryptographic processor is busy (bit BUSY = 1b in the CRYP_SR register), and the registers are not modified. It is thus not possible to modify the configuration of the cryptographic processor while it is processing a block of data. It is however possible to clear the CRYPEN bit while BUSY = 1, in which case the ongoing DES, TDES or AES processing is completed and the two/four word results are written into the output FIFO, and then, only then, the BUSY bit is cleared.

Note:

When a block is being processed in the DES or TDES mode, if the output FIFO becomes full and if the input FIFO contains at least one new block, then the new block is popped off the input FIFO and the BUSY bit remains high until there is enough space to store this new block into the output FIFO.

20.3.6

Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption

Initialization
1. Initialize the peripheral (the order of operations is not important except for the key preparation for AES-ECB or AES-CBC decryption. The key size and the key value must be entered before preparing the key and the algorithm must be configured once the key has been prepared): a) b) c) d) Configure the key size (128-, 192- or 256-bit, in the AES only) with the KEYSIZE bits in the CRYP_CR register Write the symmetric key into the CRYP_KxL/R registers (2 to 8 registers to be written depending on the algorithm) Configure the data type (1-, 8-, 16- or 32-bit), with the DATATYPE bits in the CRYP_CR register In case of decryption in AES-ECB or AES-CBC, you must prepare the key: configure the key preparation mode by setting the ALGOMODE bits to 111 in the CRYP_CR register. Then write the CRYPEN bit to 1: the BUSY bit is set. Wait until BUSY returns to 0 (CRYPEN is automatically cleared as well): the key is prepared for decryption Configure the algorithm and chaining (the DES/TDES in ECB/CBC, the AES in ECB/CBC/CTR/GCM/CCM) with the ALGOMODE bits in the CRYP_CR register Configure the direction (encryption/decryption), with the ALGODIR bit in the CRYP_CR register Write the initialization vectors into the CRYP_IVxL/R register (in CBC or CTR modes only)

e) f) g) 2.

Flush the IN and OUT FIFOs by writing the FFLUSH bit to 1 in the CRYP_CR register

Processing when the DMA is used to transfer the data from/to the memory
1. Configure the DMA controller to transfer the input data from the memory. The transfer length is the length of the message. As message padding is not managed by the peripheral, the message length must be an entire number of blocks. The data are transferred in burst mode. The burst length is 4 words in the AES and 2 or 4 words in the DES/TDES. The DMA should be configured to set an interrupt on transfer completion of the output data to indicate that the processing is finished. Enable the cryptographic processor by writing the CRYPEN bit to 1. Enable the DMA requests by setting the DIEN and DOEN bits in the CRYP_DMACR register.

2.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

572/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) 3.

RM0090

All the transfers and processing are managed by the DMA and the cryptographic processor. The DMA interrupt indicates that the processing is complete. Both FIFOs are normally empty and BUSY = 0.

Processing when the data are transferred by the CPU during interrupts
1. 2. 3. Enable the interrupts by setting the INIM and OUTIM bits in the CRYP_IMSCR register. Enable the cryptographic processor by setting the CRYPEN bit in the CRYP_CR register. In the interrupt managing the input data: load the input message into the IN FIFO. You can load 2 or 4 words at a time, or load data until the FIFO is full. When the last word of the message has been entered into the FIFO, disable the interrupt by clearing the INIM bit. In the interrupt managing the output data: read the output message from the OUT FIFO. You can read 1 block (2 or 4 words) at a time or read data until the FIFO is empty. When the last word has been read, INIM=0, BUSY=0 and both FIFOs are empty (IFEM=1 and OFNE=0). You can disable the interrupt by clearing the OUTIM bit and, the peripheral by clearing the CRYPEN bit.

4.

Processing without using the DMA nor interrupts

1. 2. 3. Enable the cryptographic processor by setting the CRYPEN bit in the CRYP_CR register. Write the first blocks in the input FIFO (2 to 8 words). Repeat the following sequence until the complete message has been processed: a) b) 4. Wait for OFNE=1, then read the OUT-FIFO (1 block or until the FIFO is empty) Wait for IFNF=1, then write the IN FIFO (1 block or until the FIFO is full)

At the end of the processing, BUSY=0 and both FIFOs are empty (IFEM=1 and OFNE=0). You can disable the peripheral by clearing the CRYPEN bit.

20.3.7

Context swapping
If a context switching is needed because a new task launched by the OS requires this resource, the following tasks have to be performed for full context restoration (example when the DMA is used):

Case of the AES and DES

1. Context saving a) b) c) d) Stop DMA transfers on the IN FIFO by clearing the DIEN bit in the CRYP_DMACR register. Wait until both the IN and OUT FIFOs are empty (IFEM=1 and OFNE=0 in the CRYP_SR register) and the BUSY bit is cleared. Stop DMA transfers on the OUT FIFO by writing the DOEN bit to 0 in the CRYP_DMACR register and clear the CRYPEN bit. Save the current configuration (bits [9:2] and bits 19 in the CRYP_CR register) and, if not in ECB mode, the initialization vectors. The key value must already be available in the memory. When needed, save the DMA status (pointers for IN and OUT messages, number of remaining bytes, etc.).

573/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Additional bits should be saved when GCM/GMAC or CCM/CMAC algorithms are used: bits [17:16] in the CRYP_CR register context swap registers: CRYP_CSGCMCCM0..7 for GCM/GMAC or CCM/CMAC algorithm CRYP_CSGCM0..7 for GCM/GMAC algorithm. 2. 3. Configure and execute the other processing. Context restoration a) Configure the processor as in Section 20.3.6: Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption on page 572, Initialization with the saved configuration. For the AES-ECB or AES-CBC decryption, the key must be prepared again. If needed, reconfigure the DMA controller to transfer the rest of the message. Enable the processor by setting the CRYPEN bit and, the DMA requests by setting the DIEN and DOEN bits.

b) c)

Case of the TDES

Context swapping can be done in the TDES in the same way as in the AES. But as the input FIFO can contain up to 4 unprocessed blocks and as the processing duration per block is higher, it can be faster in certain cases to interrupt the processing without waiting for the IN FIFO to be empty. 1. Context saving a) b) c) d) e) Stop DMA transfers on the IN FIFO by clearing the DIEN bit in the CRYP_DMACR register. Disable the processor by clearing the CRYPEN bit (the processing will stop at the end of the current block). Wait until the OUT FIFO is empty (OFNE=0 in the CRYP_SR register) and the BUSY bit is cleared. Stop DMA transfers on the OUT FIFO by writing the DOEN bit to 0 in the CRYP_DMACR register. Save the current configuration (bits [9:2] and bits 19 in the CRYP_CR register) and, if not in ECB mode, the initialization vectors. The key value must already be available in the memory. When needed, save the DMA status (pointers for IN and OUT messages, number of remaining bytes, etc.). Read back the data loaded in the IN FIFO that have not been processed and save them in the memory until the FIFO is empty.

Note:

In GCM/GMAC or CCM/CMAC mode, bits [17:16] of the CRYP_CR register should also be saved. 2. 3. Configure and execute the other processing. Context restoration a) Configure the processor as in Section 20.3.6: Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption on page 572, Initialization with the saved configuration. For the AES-ECB or AES-CBC decryption, the key must be prepared again. Write the data that were saved during context saving into the IN FIFO. If needed, reconfigure the DMA controller to transfer the rest of the message. Enable the processor by setting the CRYPEN bit and, the DMA requests by setting the DIEN and DOEN bits.

b) c) d)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

574/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

20.4

CRYP interrupts
There are two individual maskable interrupt sources generated by the CRYP. These two sources are combined into a single interrupt signal, which is the only interrupt signal from the CRYP that drives the NVIC (nested vectored interrupt controller). This combined interrupt, which is an OR function of the individual masked sources, is asserted if any of the individual interrupts listed below is asserted and enabled. You can enable or disable the interrupt sources individually by changing the mask bits in the CRYP_IMSCR register. Setting the appropriate mask bit to 1 enables the interrupt. The status of the individual interrupt sources can be read either from the CRYP_RISR register, for raw interrupt status, or from the CRYP_MISR register, for the masked interrupt status.

Output FIFO service interrupt - OUTMIS

The output FIFO service interrupt is asserted when there is one or more (32-bit word) data items in the output FIFO. This interrupt is cleared by reading data from the output FIFO until there is no valid (32-bit) word left (that is, the interrupt follows the state of the OFNE (output FIFO not empty) flag). The output FIFO service interrupt OUTMIS is NOT enabled with the CRYP enable bit. Consequently, disabling the CRYP will not force the OUTMIS signal low if the output FIFO is not empty.

Input FIFO service interrupt - INMIS

The input FIFO service interrupt is asserted when there are less than four words in the input FIFO. It is cleared by performing write operations to the input FIFO until it holds four or more words. The input FIFO service interrupt INMIS is enabled with the CRYP enable bit. Consequently, when CRYP is disabled, the INMIS signal is low even if the input FIFO is empty. Figure 216. CRYP interrupt mapping diagram
CRYPEN INRIS INIM OUTRIS OUTIM INMIS Global Interrupt OUTMIS OUT FIFO Interrupt - OUTMIS
ai16077

IN FIFO Interrupt - INMIS

20.5

CRYP DMA interface

The cryptographic processor provides an interface to connect to the DMA controller. The DMA operation is controlled through the CRYP DMA control register, CRYP_DMACR. The burst and single transfer request signals are not mutually exclusive. They can both be asserted at the same time. For example, when there are 6 words available in the OUT FIFO, the burst transfer request and the single transfer request are asserted. After a burst transfer of 4 words, the single transfer request only is asserted to transfer the last 2 available words. This is useful for situations where the number of words left to be received in the stream is less than a burst.

575/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Each request signal remains asserted until the relevant DMA clear signal is asserted. After the request clear signal is deasserted, a request signal can become active again, depending on the above described conditions. All request signals are deasserted if the CRYP peripheral is disabled or the DMA enable bit is cleared (DIEN bit for the IN FIFO and DOEN bit for the OUT FIFO in the CRYP_DMACR register).

Note:

The DMA controller must be configured to perform burst of 4 words or less. Otherwise some data could be lost. In order to let the DMA controller empty the OUT FIFO before filling up the IN FIFO, the OUTDMA channel should have a higher priority than the INDMA channel.

20.6

CRYP registers
The cryptographic core is associated with several control and status registers, eight key registers and four initialization vectors registers.

20.6.1

CRYP control register (CRYP_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 ALGODIR rw 1 Res. 0 Res.

CRYPEN FFLUSH Reserved rw w

KEYSIZE rw rw

DATATYPE rw rw

ALGOMODE[2:0] rw rw rw

Bit 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 17:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 15 CRYPEN: Cryptographic processor enable 0: CRYP processor is disabled 1: CRYP processor is enabled Note: The CRYPEN bit is automatically cleared by hardware when the key preparation process ends (ALGOMODE=111b) or GCM_CCM init Phase Bit 14 FFLUSH: FIFO flush When CRYPEN = 0, writing this bit to 1 flushes the IN and OUT FIFOs (that is read and write pointers of the FIFOs are reset. Writing this bit to 0 has no effect. When CRYPEN = 1, writing this bit to 0 or 1 has no effect. Reading this bit always returns 0. Bits 13:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

576/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

Bits 9:8 KEYSIZE[1:0]: Key size selection (AES mode only) This bitfield defines the bit-length of the key used for the AES cryptographic core. This bitfield is dont care in the DES or TDES modes. 00: 128 bit key length 01: 192 bit key length 10: 256 bit key length 11: Reserved, do not use this value Bits 7:6 DATATYPE[1:0]: Data type selection This bitfield defines the format of data entered in the CRYP_DIN register (refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type). 00: 32-bit data. No swapping of each word. First word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) forms bits 1...32 of the data block, the second word forms bits 33...64. 01: 16-bit data, or half-word. Each word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) is considered as 2 half-words, which are swapped with each other. 10: 8-bit data, or bytes. Each word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) is considered as 4 bytes, which are swapped with each other. 11: bit data, or bit-string. Each word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) is considered as 32 bits (1st bit of the string at position 0), which are swapped with each other.

577/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

Bits 5:3 ALGOMODE[2:0]: Algorithm mode 000: TDES-ECB (triple-DES Electronic codebook): no feedback between blocks of data. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0(L/R)) are not used, three key vectors (K1, K2, and K3) are used (K0 is not used). 001: TDES-CBC (triple-DES Cipher block chaining): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R) must be initialized, three key vectors (K1, K2, and K3) are used (K0 is not used). 010: DES-ECB (simple DES Electronic codebook): no feedback between blocks of data. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R) are not used, only one key vector (K1) is used (K0, K2, K3 are not used). 011: DES-CBC (simple DES Cipher block chaining): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R) must be initialized. Only one key vector (K1) is used (K0, K2, K3 are not used). 100: AES-ECB (AES Electronic codebook): no feedback between blocks of data. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R...1L/R) are not used. All four key vectors (K0...K3) are used. 101: AES-CBC (AES Cipher block chaining): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R...1L/R) must be initialized. All four key vectors (K0...K3) are used. 110: AES-CTR (AES counter mode): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R...1L/R) must be initialized. All four key vectors (K0...K3) are used. CTR decryption does not differ from CTR encryption, since the core always encrypts the current counter block to produce the key stream that will be XORed with the plaintext or cipher in input. Thus, ALGODIR is dont care when ALGOMODE = 110b, and the key must NOT be unrolled (prepared) for decryption. 111: AES key preparation for decryption mode. Writing this value when CRYPEN = 1 immediately starts an AES round for key preparation. The secret key must have previously been loaded into the K0...K3 registers. The BUSY bit in the CRYP_SR register is set during the key preparation. After key processing, the resulting key is copied back into the K0...K3 registers, and the BUSY bit is cleared. Bit 2 ALGODIR: Algorithm direction 0: Encrypt 1: Decrypt Bit 1:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value

Note:

Writing to the KEYSIZE, DATATYPE, ALGOMODE and ALGODIR bits while BUSY=1 has no effect. These bits can only be configured when BUSY=0. The FFLUSH bit has to be set only when BUSY=0. If not, the FIFO is flushed, but the block being processed may be pushed into the output FIFO just after the flush operation, resulting in a nonempty FIFO condition.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

578/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

20.6.2

CRYP control register (CRYP_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19 ALGO MODE [3] rw

18

17

16

GCM_CCMPH Res. rw 2 ALGODIR Reserved rw 1 rw 0

Reserved

15

14

13

12

11

10

CRYPEN FFLUSH Reserved rw w

KEYSIZE rw rw

DATATYPE rw rw

ALGOMODE[2:0] rw rw rw

Bit 31:20 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 18 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 17:16 GCM_CCMPH[1:0]: no effect if GCM or CCM algorithm is not set 00: GCM_CCM init Phase 01: GCM_CCM header phase 10: GCM_CCM payload phase 11: GCM_CCM final phase Bit 15 CRYPEN: Cryptographic processor enable 0: CRYP processor is disabled 1: CRYP processor is enabled Note: The CRYPEN bit is automatically cleared by hardware when the key preparation process ends (ALGOMODE=111b) or GCM_CCM init Phase Bit 14 FFLUSH: FIFO flush When CRYPEN = 0, writing this bit to 1 flushes the IN and OUT FIFOs (that is read and write pointers of the FIFOs are reset. Writing this bit to 0 has no effect. When CRYPEN = 1, writing this bit to 0 or 1 has no effect. Reading this bit always returns 0. Bits 13:10 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bits 9:8 KEYSIZE[1:0]: Key size selection (AES mode only) This bitfield defines the bit-length of the key used for the AES cryptographic core. This bitfield is dont care in the DES or TDES modes. 00: 128 bit key length 01: 192 bit key length 10: 256 bit key length 11: Reserved, do not use this value

579/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

Bits 7:6 DATATYPE[1:0]: Data type selection This bitfield defines the format of data entered in the CRYP_DIN register (refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type). 00: 32-bit data. No swapping of each word. First word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) forms bits 1...32 of the data block, the second word forms bits 33...64. 01: 16-bit data, or half-word. Each word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) is considered as 2 half-words, which are swapped with each other. 10: 8-bit data, or bytes. Each word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) is considered as 4 bytes, which are swapped with each other. 11: bit data, or bit-string. Each word pushed into the IN FIFO (or popped off the OUT FIFO) is considered as 32 bits (1st bit of the string at position 0), which are swapped with each other. Bits 19 and 5:3 ALGOMODE[3:0]: Algorithm mode 0000: TDES-ECB (triple-DES Electronic codebook): no feedback between blocks of data. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0(L/R)) are not used, three key vectors (K1, K2, and K3) are used (K0 is not used). 0001: TDES-CBC (triple-DES Cipher block chaining): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R) must be initialized, three key vectors (K1, K2, and K3) are used (K0 is not used). 0010: DES-ECB (simple DES Electronic codebook): no feedback between blocks of data. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R) are not used, only one key vector (K1) is used (K0, K2, K3 are not used). 0011: DES-CBC (simple DES Cipher block chaining): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R) must be initialized. Only one key vector (K1) is used (K0, K2, K3 are not used). 0100: AES-ECB (AES Electronic codebook): no feedback between blocks of data. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R...1L/R) are not used. All four key vectors (K0...K3) are used. 0101: AES-CBC (AES Cipher block chaining): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R...1L/R) must be initialized. All four key vectors (K0...K3) are used. 0110: AES-CTR (AES Counter mode): output block is XORed with the subsequent input block before its entry into the algorithm. Initialization vectors (CRYP_IV0L/R...1L/R) must be initialized. All four key vectors (K0...K3) are used. CTR decryption does not differ from CTR encryption, since the core always encrypts the current counter block to produce the key stream that will be XORed with the plaintext or cipher in input. Thus, ALGODIR is dont care when ALGOMODE = 110b, and the key must NOT be unrolled (prepared) for decryption. 0111: AES key preparation for decryption mode. Writing this value when CRYPEN = 1 immediately starts an AES round for key preparation. The secret key must have previously been loaded into the K0...K3 registers. The BUSY bit in the CRYP_SR register is set during the key preparation. After key processing, the resulting key is copied back into the K0...K3 registers, and the BUSY bit is cleared. 1000: Galois Counter Mode (GCM). This algorithm mode is also used for the GMAC algorithm. 1001: Counter with CBC-MAC (CCM). This algorithm mode is also used for the CMAC algorithm.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

580/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

Bit 2 ALGODIR: Algorithm direction 0: Encrypt 1: Decrypt Bit 1:0 Reserved, must be kept to 0.

Note:

Writing to the KEYSIZE, DATATYPE, ALGOMODE and ALGODIR bits while BUSY=1 has no effect. These bits can only be configured when BUSY=0. The FFLUSH bit has to be set only when BUSY=0. If not, the FIFO is flushed, but the block being processed may be pushed into the output FIFO just after the flush operation, resulting in a nonempty FIFO condition.

20.6.3

CRYP status register (CRYP_SR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0003

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 BUSY 3 OFFU 2 OFNE 1 IFNF 0 IFEM

Bit 31:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 4 BUSY: Busy bit 0: The CRYP Core is not processing any data. The reason is either that: the CRYP core is disabled (CRYPEN=0 in the CRYP_CR register) and the last processing has completed, or The CRYP core is waiting for enough data in the input FIFO or enough free space in the output FIFO (that is in each case at least 2 words in the DES, 4 words in the AES). 1: The CRYP core is currently processing a block of data or a key preparation (for AES decryption). Bit 3 OFFU: Output FIFO full 0: Output FIFO is not full 1: Output FIFO is full Bits 2 OFNE: Output FIFO not empty 0: Output FIFO is empty 1: Output FIFO is not empty Bit 1 IFNF: Input FIFO not full 0: Input FIFO is full 1: Input FIFO is not full Bits 0 IFEM: Input FIFO empty 0: Input FIFO is not empty 1: Input FIFO is empty

581/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

20.6.4

CRYP data input register (CRYP_DIN)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The CRYP_DIN register is the data input register. It is 32-bit wide. It is used to enter up to four 64-bit (TDES) or two 128-bit (AES) plaintext (when encrypting) or ciphertext (when decrypting) blocks into the input FIFO, one 32-bit word at a time. The first word written into the FIFO is the MSB of the input block. The LSB of the input block is written at the end. Disregarding the data swapping, this gives:

In the DES/TDES modes: a block is a sequence of bits numbered from bit 1 (leftmost bit) to bit 64 (rightmost bit). Bit 1 corresponds to the MSB (bit 31) of the first word entered into the FIFO, bit 64 corresponds to the LSB (bit 0) of the second word entered into the FIFO. In the AES mode: a block is a sequence of bits numbered from 0 (leftmost bit) to 127 (rightmost bit). Bit 0 corresponds to the MSB (bit 31) of the first word written into the FIFO, bit 127 corresponds to the LSB (bit 0) of the 4th word written into the FIFO.

To fit different data sizes, the data written in the CRYP_DIN register can be swapped before being processed by configuring the DATATYPE bits in the CRYP_CR register. Refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type on page 567 for more details. When CRYP_DIN register is written to, the data are pushed into the input FIFO. When at least two 32-bit words in the DES/TDES mode (or four 32-bit words in the AES mode) have been pushed into the input FIFO, and when at least 2 words are free in the output FIFO, the CRYP engine starts an encrypting or decrypting process. This process takes two 32-bit words in the DES/TDES mode (or four 32-bit words in the AES mode) from the input FIFO and delivers two 32-bit words (or 4, respectively) to the output FIFO per process round. When CRYP_DIN register is read:

If CRYPEN = 0, the FIFO is popped, and then the data present in the Input FIFO are returned, from the oldest one (first reading) to the newest one (last reading). The IFEM flag must be checked before each read operation to make sure that the FIFO is not empty. if CRYPEN = 1, an undefined value is returned.

After the CRYP_DIN register has been read once or several times, the FIFO must be flushed by setting the FFLUSH bit prior to processing new data.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DATAIN rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 DATAIN rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

Bit 31:0 DATAIN: Data input Read = returns Input FIFO content if CRYPEN = 0, else returns an undefined value. Write = Input FIFO is written.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

582/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

20.6.5

CRYP data output register (CRYP_DOUT)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The CRYP_DOUT register is the data output register. It is read-only and 32-bit wide. It is used to retrieve up to four 64-bit (TDES mode) or two 128-bit (AES mode) ciphertext (when encrypting) or plaintext (when decrypting) blocks from the output FIFO, one 32-bit word at a time. Like for the input data, the MSB of the output block is the first word read from the output FIFO. The LSB of the output block is read at the end. Disregarding data swapping, this gives:

In the DES/TDES modes: Bit 1 (leftmost bit) corresponds to the MSB (bit 31) of the first word read from the FIFO, bit 64 (rightmost bit) corresponds to the LSB (bit 0) of the second word read from the FIFO. In the AES mode: Bit 0 (leftmost bit) corresponds to the MSB (bit 31) of the first word read from the FIFO, bit 127 (rightmost bit) corresponds to the LSB (bit 0) of the 4th word read from the FIFO.

To fit different data sizes, the data can be swapped after processing by configuring the DATATYPE bits in the CRYP_CR register. Refer to Section 20.3.3: Data type on page 567 for more details. When CRYP_DOUT register is read, the last data entered into the output FIFO (pointed to by the read pointer) is returned.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DATAOUT r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

DATAOUT r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bit 31:0 DATAOUT: Data output Read = returns output FIFO content. Write = No effect.

583/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

20.6.6

CRYP DMA control register (CRYP_DMACR)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DOEN Reserved rw rw 0 DIEN

Bit 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 1 DOEN: DMA output enable 0: DMA for outgoing data transfer is disabled 1: DMA for outgoing data transfer is enabled Bit 0 DIEN: DMA input enable 0: DMA for incoming data transfer is disabled 1: DMA for incoming data transfer is enabled

20.6.7

CRYP interrupt mask set/clear register (CRYP_IMSCR)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The CRYP_IMSCR register is the interrupt mask set or clear register. It is a read/write register. On a read operation, this register gives the current value of the mask on the relevant interrupt. Writing 1 to the particular bit sets the mask, enabling the interrupt to be read. Writing 0 to this bit clears the corresponding mask. All the bits are cleared to 0 when the peripheral is reset.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OUTIM Reserved rw rw 0 INIM

Bit 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 1 OUTIM: Output FIFO service interrupt mask 0: Output FIFO service interrupt is masked 1: Output FIFO service interrupt is not masked Bit 0 INIM: Input FIFO service interrupt mask 0: Input FIFO service interrupt is masked 1: Input FIFO service interrupt is not masked

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

584/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

20.6.8

CRYP raw interrupt status register (CRYP_RISR)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 0001 The CRYP_RISR register is the raw interrupt status register. It is a read-only register. On a read, this register gives the current raw status of the corresponding interrupt prior to masking. A write has no effect.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OUTRIS Reserved r r 0 INRIS

Bit 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 1 OUTRIS: Output FIFO service raw interrupt status Gives the raw interrupt state prior to masking of the output FIFO service interrupt. 0: Raw interrupt not pending 1: Raw interrupt pending Bit 0 INRIS: Input FIFO service raw interrupt status Gives the raw interrupt state prior to masking of the Input FIFO service interrupt. 0: Raw interrupt not pending 1: Raw interrupt pending

20.6.9

CRYP masked interrupt status register (CRYP_MISR)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The CRYP_MISR register is the masked interrupt status register. It is a read-only register. On a read, this register gives the current masked status of the corresponding interrupt prior to masking. A write has no effect.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OUTMIS Reserved r r 0 INMIS

Bit 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 1 OUTMIS: Output FIFO service masked interrupt status Gives the interrupt state after masking of the output FIFO service interrupt. 0: Interrupt not pending 1: Interrupt pending

585/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

Bit 0 INMIS: Input FIFO service masked interrupt status Gives the interrupt state after masking of the input FIFO service interrupt. 0: Interrupt not pending 1: Interrupt pending when CRYPEN = 1

20.6.10

CRYP key registers (CRYP_K0...3(L/R)R)

Address offset: 0x20 to 0x3C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 These registers contain the cryptographic keys. In the TDES mode, keys are 64-bit binary values (number from left to right, that is the leftmost bit is bit 1), named K1, K2 and K3 (K0 is not used), each key consists of 56 information bits and 8 parity bits. The parity bits are reserved for error detection purposes and are not used by the current block. Thus, bits 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56 and 64 of each 64bit key value Kx[1:64] are not used. In the AES mode, the key is considered as a single 128-, 192- or 256-bit long bit sequence, k0k1k2...k127/191/255 (k0 being the leftmost bit). The AES key is entered into the registers as follows:

for AES-128: k0..k127 corresponds to b127..b0 (b255..b128 are not used), for AES-192: k0..k191 corresponds to b191..b0 (b255..b192 are not used), for AES-256: k0..k255 corresponds to b255..b0.

In any case b0 is the rightmost bit.

CRYP_K0LR (address offset: 0x20)

31 b255 w 15 b239 w 30 b254 w 14 b238 w 29 b253 w 13 b237 w 28 b252 w 12 b236 w 27 b251 w 11 b235 w 26 b250 w 10 b234 w 25 b249 w 9 b233 w 24 b248 w 8 b232 w 23 b247 w 7 b231 w 22 b246 w 6 b230 w 21 b245 w 5 b229 w 20 b244 w 4 b228 w 19 b243 w 3 b227 w 18 b242 w 2 b226 w 17 b241 w 1 b225 w 16 b240 w 0 b224 w

CRYP_K0RR (address offset: 0x24)

31 b223 w 15 b207 w 30 b222 w 14 b206 w 29 b221 w 13 b205 w 28 b220 w 12 b204 w 27 b219 w 11 b203 w 26 b218 w 10 b202 w 25 b217 w 9 b201 w 24 b216 w 8 b200 w 23 b215 w 7 b199 w 22 b214 w 6 b198 w 21 b213 w 5 b197 w 20 b212 w 4 b196 w 19 b211 w 3 b195 w 18 b210 w 2 b194 w 17 b209 w 1 b193 w 16 b208 w 0 b192 w

CRYP_K1LR (address offset: 0x28)

31 k1.1 b191 w 30 k1.2 b190 w 29 k1.3 b189 w 28 k1.4 b188 w 27 k1.5 b187 w 26 k1.6 b186 w 25 k1.7 b185 w 24 k1.8 b184 w 23 k1.9 b183 w 22 k1.10 b182 w 21 k1.11 b181 w 20 k1.12 b180 w 19 k1.13 b179 w 18 k1.14 b178 w 17 k1.15 b177 w 16 k1.16 b176 w

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

586/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

15 k1.17 b175 w

14 k1.18 b174 w

13 k1.19 b173 w

12 k1.20 b172 w

11 k1.21 b171 w

10 k1.22 b170 w

9 k1.23 b169 w

8 k1.24 b168 w

7 k1.25 b167 w

6 k1.26 b166 w

5 k1.27 b165 w

4 k1.28 b164 w

3 k1.29 b163 w

2 k1.30 b162 w

1 k1.31 b161 w

0 k1.32 b160 w

CRYP_K1RR (address offset: 0x2C)

31 k1.33 b159 w 15 k1.49 b143 w 30 k1.34 b158 w 14 k1.50 b142 w 29 k1.35 b157 w 13 k1.51 b141 w 28 k1.36 b156 w 12 k1.52 b140 w 27 k1.37 b155 w 11 k1.53 b139 w 26 k1.38 b154 w 10 k1.54 b138 w 25 k1.39 b153 w 9 k1.55 b137 w 24 k1.40 b152 w 8 k1.56 b136 w 23 k1.41 b151 w 7 k1.57 b135 w 22 k1.42 b150 w 6 k1.58 b134 w 21 k1.43 b149 w 5 k1.59 b133 w 20 k1.44 b148 w 4 k1.60 b132 w 19 k1.45 b147 w 3 k1.61 b131 w 18 k1.46 b146 w 2 k1.62 b130 w 17 k1.47 b145 w 1 k1.63 b129 w 16 k1.48 b144 w 0 k1.64 b128 w

CRYP_K2LR (address offset: 0x30)

31 k2.1 b127 w 15 k2.17 b111 w 30 k2.2 b126 w 14 k2.18 b110 w 29 k2.3 b125 w 13 k2.19 b109 w 28 k2.4 b124 w 12 k2.20 b108 w 27 k2.5 b123 w 11 k2.21 b107 w 26 k2.6 b122 w 10 k2.22 b106 w 25 k2.7 b121 w 9 k2.23 b105 w 24 k2.8 b120 w 8 k2.24 b104 w 23 k2.9 b119 w 7 k2.25 b103 w 22 k2.10 b118 w 6 k2.26 b102 w 21 k2.11 b117 w 5 k2.27 b101 w 20 k2.12 b116 w 4 k2.28 b100 w 19 k2.13 b115 w 3 k2.29 b99 w 18 k2.14 b114 w 2 k2.30 b98 w 17 k2.15 b113 w 1 k2.31 b97 w 16 k2.16 b112 w 0 k2.32 b96 w

CRYP_K2RR (address offset: 0x34)

31 k2.33 b95 w 15 k2.49 b79 w 30 k2.34 b94 w 14 k2.50 b78 w 29 k2.35 b93 w 13 k2.51 b77 w 28 k2.36 b92 w 12 k2.52 b76 w 27 k2.37 b91 w 11 k2.53 b75 w 26 k2.38 b90 w 10 k2.54 b74 w 25 k2.39 b89 w 9 k2.55 b73 w 24 k2.40 b88 w 8 k2.56 b72 w 23 k2.41 b87 w 7 k2.57 b71 w 22 k2.42 b86 w 6 k2.58 b70 w 21 k2.43 b85 w 5 k2.59 b69 w 20 k2.44 b84 w 4 k2.60 b68 w 19 k2.45 b83 w 3 k2.61 b67 w 18 k2.46 b82 w 2 k2.62 b66 w 17 k2.47 b81 w 1 k2.63 b65 w 16 k2.48 b80 w 0 k2.64 b64 w

CRYP_K3LR (address offset: 0x38)

31 k3.1 b63 w 15 k3.17 b47 w 30 k3.2 b62 w 14 k3.18 b46 w 29 k3.3 b61 w 13 k3.19 b45 w 28 k3.4 b60 w 12 k3.20 b44 w 27 k3.5 b59 w 11 k3.21 b43 w 26 k3.6 b58 w 10 k3.22 b42 w 25 k3.7 b57 w 9 k3.23 b41 w 24 k3.8 b56 w 8 k3.24 b40 w 23 k3.9 b55 w 7 k3.25 b39 w 22 k3.10 b54 w 6 k3.26 b38 w 21 k3.11 b53 w 5 k3.27 b37 w 20 k3.12 b52 w 4 k3.28 b36 w 19 k3.13 b51 w 3 k3.29 b35 w 18 k3.14 b50 w 2 k3.30 b34 w 17 k3.15 b49 w 1 k3.31 b33 w 16 k3.16 b48 w 0 k3.32 b32 w

587/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

CRYP_K3RR (address offset: 0x3C)

31 k3.33 b31 w 15 k3.49 b15 w 30 k3.34 b30 w 14 k3.50 b14 w 29 k3.35 b29 w 13 k3.51 b13 w 28 k3.36 b28 w 12 k3.52 b12 w 27 k3.37 b27 w 11 k3.53 b11 w 26 k3.38 b26 w 10 k3.54 b10 w 25 k3.39 b25 w 9 k3.55 b9 w 24 k3.40 b24 w 8 k3.56 b8 w 23 k3.41 b23 w 7 k3.57 b7 w 22 k3.42 b22 w 6 k3.58 b6 w 21 k3.43 b21 w 5 k3.59 b5 w 20 k3.44 b20 w 4 k3.60 b4 w 19 k3.45 b19 w 3 k3.61 b3 w 18 k3.46 b18 w 2 k3.62 b2 w 17 k3.47 b17 w 1 k3.63 b1 w 16 k3.48 b16 w 0 k3.64 b0 w

Note:

Write accesses to these registers are disregarded when the cryptographic processor is busy (bit BUSY = 1 in the CRYP_SR register).

20.6.11

CRYP initialization vector registers (CRYP_IV0...1(L/R)R)

Address offset: 0x40 to 0x4C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The CRYP_IV0...1(L/R)R are the left-word and right-word registers for the initialization vector (64 bits for DES/TDES and 128 bits for AES) and are used in the CBC (Cipher block chaining) and Counter (CTR) modes. After each computation round of the TDES or AES Core, the CRYP_IV0...1(L/R)R registers are updated as described in Section : DES and TDES Cipher block chaining (DES/TDES-CBC) mode on page 554, Section : AES Cipher block chaining (AES-CBC) mode on page 558 and Section : AES counter mode (AES-CTR) mode on page 560. IV0 is the leftmost bit whereas IV63 (DES, TDES) or IV127 (AES) are the rightmost bits of the initialization vector. IV1(L/R)R is used only in the AES.

CRYP_IV0LR (address offset: 0x40)

31 IV0 rw 15 IV16 rw 30 IV1 rw 14 IV17 rw 29 IV2 rw 13 IV18 rw 28 IV3 rw 12 IV19 rw 27 IV4 rw 11 IV20 rw 26 IV5 rw 10 IV21 rw 25 IV6 rw 9 IV22 rw 24 IV7 rw 8 IV23 rw 23 IV8 rw 7 IV24 rw 22 IV9 rw 6 IV25 rw 21 IV10 rw 5 IV26 rw 20 IV11 rw 4 IV27 rw 19 IV12 rw 3 IV28 rw 18 IV13 rw 2 IV29 rw 17 IV14 rw 1 IV30 rw 16 IV15 rw 0 IV31 rw

CRYP_IV0RR (address offset: 0x44)

31 IV32 rw 15 IV48 rw 30 IV33 rw 14 IV49 rw 29 IV34 rw 13 IV50 rw 28 IV35 rw 12 IV51 rw 27 IV36 rw 11 IV52 rw 26 IV37 rw 10 IV53 rw 25 IV38 rw 9 IV54 rw 24 IV39 rw 8 IV55 rw 23 IV40 rw 7 IV56 rw 22 IV41 rw 6 IV57 rw 21 IV42 rw 5 IV58 rw 20 IV43 rw 4 IV59 rw 19 IV44 rw 3 IV60 rw 18 IV45 rw 2 IV61 rw 17 IV46 rw 1 IV62 rw 16 IV47 rw 0 IV63 rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

588/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

CRYP_IV1LR (address offset: 0x48)

31 IV64 rw 15 IV80 rw 30 IV65 rw 14 IV81 rw 29 IV66 rw 13 IV82 rw 28 IV67 rw 12 IV83 rw 27 IV68 rw 11 IV84 rw 26 IV69 rw 10 IV85 rw 25 IV70 rw 9 IV86 rw 24 IV71 rw 8 IV87 rw 23 IV72 rw 7 IV88 rw 22 IV73 rw 6 IV89 rw 21 IV74 rw 5 IV90 rw 20 IV75 rw 4 IV91 rw 19 IV76 rw 3 IV92 rw 18 IV77 rw 2 IV93 rw 17 IV78 rw 1 IV94 rw 16 IV79 rw 0 IV95 rw

CRYP_IV1RR (address offset: 0x4C)

31 IV96 rw 15 IV112 rw 30 IV97 rw 14 IV113 rw 29 IV98 rw 13 IV114 rw 28 IV99 rw 12 IV115 rw 27 IV100 rw 11 IV116 rw 26 IV101 rw 10 IV117 rw 25 IV102 rw 9 IV118 rw 24 IV103 rw 8 IV119 rw 23 IV104 rw 7 IV120 rw 22 IV105 rw 6 IV121 rw 21 IV106 rw 5 IV122 rw 20 IV107 rw 4 IV123 rw 19 IV108 rw 3 IV124 rw 18 IV109 rw 2 IV125 rw 17 IV110 rw 1 IV126 rw 16 IV111 rw 0 IV127 rw

Note:

In DES/3DES modes, only CRYP_IV0(L/R) is used. Write access to these registers are disregarded when the cryptographic processor is busy (bit BUSY = 1 in the CRYP_SR register).

589/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

20.6.12

CRYP context swap registers (CRYP_CSGCMCCM0..7R and CRYP_CSGCM0..7R) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx
Address offset:

CRYP_CSGCMCCM0..7: 0x050 to 0x06C: used for GCM/GMAC or CCM/CMAC alogrithm only CRYP_CSGCM0..7: 0x070 to 0x08C: used for GCM/GMAC algorithm only

Reset value: 0x0000 0000 These registers contain the complete internal register states of the CRYP processor when the GCM/GMAC or CCM/CMAC algorithm is selected. They are useful when a context swap has to be performed because a high-priority task needs the cryptographic processor while it is already in use by another task. When such an event occurs, the CRYP_CSGCMCCM0..7R and CRYP_CSGCM0..7R (in GCM/GMAC mode) or CRYP_CSGCMCCM0..7R (in CCM/CMAC mode) registers have to be read and the values retrieved have to be saved in the system memory space. The cryptographic processor can then be used by the preemptive task, and when the cryptographic computation is complete, the saved context can be read from memory and written back into the corresponding context swap registers. Note: These registers are used only when GCM/GMAC or CCM/CMAC algorithm mode is selected.

CRYP_CSGCMCCMxR: where x=[7:0]

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 CRYP_CSGCMCCMxR rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

CRYP_CSGCMCCMxR rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

CRYP_CSGCMxR: where x=[7:0]

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 CRYP_CSGCMxR rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

CRYP_CSGCMxR rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

590/1422

Cryptographic processor (CRYP)

RM0090

20.6.13
Table 92.
Offset

CRYP register map

CRYP register map and reset values for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
Register size
ALOMODE[2:0]

Register name reset value

DATATYPE

Reserved

Reserved

Reset value 0x04 CRYP_SR Reset value CRYP_DIN Reset value CRYP_DOUT Reset value CRYP_DMACR Reset value 0x14 CRYP_IMSCR Reset value CRYP_RISR Reset value CRYP_MISR Reset value CRYP_K0LR Reset value CRYP_K0RR Reset value Reserved Reserved

0 BUSY

0 OFFU

0 OFNE 0 0 0 IFEM 1 0 0 DIEN 0 INIM 0 INRIS 1 IN%IS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IFNF 1 0 0 DOEN 0 OUTIM 0 OUTRIS 0 OUTMIS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 DATAIN 0 DATAOUT 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0

0x08 0x0C

0x10

0x18

Reserved

0x1C

Reserved

0x20 0x24

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0 ... ...

0 0

CRYP_K0LR 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_K0RR 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0x38 0x3C 0x40 0x44 0x48 0x4C

CRYP_K3LR Reset value CRYP_K3RR Reset value CRYP_IV0LR Reset value CRYP_IV0RR Reset value CRYP_IV1LR Reset value CRYP_IV1RR Reset value

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

CRYP_K3LR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_K3RR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV0LR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV0RR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV1LR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV1RR 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

591/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Res.

0x00 0x00

CRYP_CR

ALGODIR

KEYSIZE

CRYPEN

FFLUSH

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090 Table 93.

Offset

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) CRYP register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx
Register size
ALOMODE[2:0] ALGOMODE[3] GCM_CCMPH

Register name reset value

DATATYPE

Reserved

Reserved

Reset value 0x04 CRYP_SR Reset value CRYP_DIN Reset value CRYP_DOUT Reset value CRYP_DMACR Reset value 0x14 CRYP_IMSCR Reset value CRYP_RISR Reset value CRYP_MISR Reset value CRYP_K0LR Reset value CRYP_K0RR Reset value

0 Reserved

0 BUSY

0 OFFU

0 OFNE 0 0 0 IFEM 1 0 0 DIEN 0 INIM 0 INRIS 1 IN%IS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IFNF 1 0 0 DOEN 0 OUTMIS 0 OUTRIS 0 OUTIM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 DATAIN 0 DATAOUT 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0

0x08 0x0C

0x10

Reserved

0x18

Reserved

0x1C

Reserved

0x20 0x24

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0 ... ...

0 0

CRYP_K0LR 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_K0RR 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0x38 0x3C 0x40 0x44 0x48 0x4C

0x50

0x54

0x58

0x5C

CRYP_K3LR Reset value CRYP_K3RR Reset value CRYP_IV0LR Reset value CRYP_IV0RR Reset value CRYP_IV1LR Reset value CRYP_IV1RR Reset value CRYP_CSGCMCC MR Reset value CRYP_CSGCMCC M1R Reset value CRYP_CSGCMCC M2R Reset value CRYP_CSGCMCC M3R Reset value

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

CRYP_K3LR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_K3RR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV0LR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV0RR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV1LR 0 0 0 0 CRYP_IV1RR 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

CRYP_CSGCMCCM0R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CRYP_CSGCMCCM1R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CRYP_CSGCMCCM2R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CRYP_CSGCMCCM3R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

592/1422

Res..

Res.

0x00 0x00

CRYP_CR

ALGODIR

KEYSIZE

CRYPEN

FFLUSH

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Cryptographic processor (CRYP) Table 93.

Offset
0x60

RM0090

CRYP register map and reset values for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (continued)
Register size 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CRYP_CSGCMCCM4R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCMCCM5R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCMCCM6R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCMCCM7R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM0R 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM1R 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM2R 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM3R 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM4R 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM5R 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM6R 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRYP_CSGCM7R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Register name reset value

CRYP_CSGCMCC M4R Reset value CRYP_CSGCMCC M5R Reset value CRYP_CSGCMCC M6R Reset value CRYP_CSGCMCC M7R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM0R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM1R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM2R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM3R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM4R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM5R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM6R Reset value CRYP_CSGCM7R Reset value

0x64

0x68

0x6C

0x70 0x74 0x78 0x7C 0x80 0x84

0x88 0x8C

RRefer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

593/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Random number generator (RNG)

21

Random number generator (RNG)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

21.1

RNG introduction
The RNG processor is a random number generator, based on a continuous analog noise, that provides a random 32-bit value to the host when read. The RNG passed the FIPS PUB 140-2 (2001 October 10) tests with a success ratio of 99%.

21.2

RNG main features

It delivers 32-bit random numbers, produced by an analog generator 40 periods of the PLL48CLK clock signal between two consecutive random numbers Monitoring of the RNG entropy to flag abnormal behavior (generation of stable values, or of a stable sequence of values) It can be disabled to reduce power-consumption

21.3

RNG functional description

Figure 217 shows the RNG block diagram. Figure 217. Block diagram
32-bit AHB bus data register Control register RNG _CR RNG_DR

RNG_CLK Status register RNG _SR Clock checker & fault detector

LFSR feed a Linear Feedback Shift Register

Analog seed
ai16080

The random number generator implements an analog circuit. This circuit generates seeds that feed a linear feedback shift register (RNG_LFSR) in order to produce 32-bit random numbers. The analog circuit is made of several ring oscillators whose outputs are XORed to generate the seeds. The RNG_LFSR is clocked by a dedicated clock (PLL48CLK) at a constant frequency, so that the quality of the random number is independent of the HCLK frequency.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

594/1422

Random number generator (RNG)

RM0090

The contents of the RNG_LFSR are transferred into the data register (RNG_DR) when a significant number of seeds have been introduced into the RNG_LFSR. In parallel, the analog seed and the dedicated PLL48CLK clock are monitored. Status bits (in the RNG_SR register) indicate when an abnormal sequence occurs on the seed or when the frequency of the PLL48CLK clock is too low. An interrupt can be generated when an error is detected.

21.3.1

Operation
To run the RNG, follow the steps below: 1. 2. 3. Enable the interrupt if needed (to do so, set the IE bit in the RNG_CR register). An interrupt is generated when a random number is ready or when an error occurs. Enable the random number generation by setting the RNGEN bit in the RNG_CR register. This activates the analog part, the RNG_LFSR and the error detector. At each interrupt, check that no error occurred (the SEIS and CEIS bits should be 0 in the RNG_SR register) and that a random number is ready (the DRDY bit is 1 in the RNG_SR register). The contents of the RNG_DR register can then be read.

As required by the FIPS PUB (Federal Information Processing Standard Publication) 140-2, the first random number generated after setting the RNGEN bit should not be used, but saved for comparison with the next generated random number. Each subsequent generated random number has to be compared with the previously generated number. The test fails if any two compared numbers are equal (continuous random number generator test).

21.3.2

Error management
If the CEIS bit is read as 1 (clock error)
In the case of a clock, the RNG is no more able to generate random numbers because the PLL48CLK clock is not correct. Check that the clock controller is correctly configured to provide the RNG clock and clear the CEIS bit. The RNG can work when the CECS bit is 0. The clock error has no impact on the previously generated random numbers, and the RNG_DR register contents can be used.

If the SEIS bit is read as 1 (seed error)

In the case of a seed error, the generation of random numbers is interrupted for as long as the SECS bit is 1. If a number is available in the RNG_DR register, it must not be used because it may not have enough entropy. What you should do is clear the SEIS bit, then clear and set the RNGEN bit to reinitialize and restart the RNG.

21.4

RNG registers
The RNG is associated with a control register, a data register and a status register. They have to be accessed by words (32 bits).

595/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Random number generator (RNG)

21.4.1

RNG control register (RNG_CR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 IE Reserved rw rw 2 RNGEN Reserved 1 0

Bits 31:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 3 IE: Interrupt enable 0: RNG Interrupt is disabled 1: RNG Interrupt is enabled. An interrupt is pending as soon as DRDY=1 or SEIS=1 or CEIS=1 in the RNG_SR register. Bit 2 RNGEN: Random number generator enable 0: Random number generator is disabled 1: random Number Generator is enabled. Bits 1:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value

21.4.2

RNG status register (RNG_SR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 Reserved rc_w0 rc_w0 10 9 8 7 6 SEIS 5 CEIS Reserved r r r 4 3 2 SECS 1 CECS 0 DRDY

Bits 31:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 6 SEIS: Seed error interrupt status This bit is set at the same time as SECS, it is cleared by writing it to 0. 0: No faulty sequence detected 1: One of the following faulty sequences has been detected: More than 64 consecutive bits at the same value (0 or 1) More than 32 consecutive alternances of 0 and 1 (0101010101...01) An interrupt is pending if IE = 1 in the RNG_CR register. Bit 5 CEIS: Clock error interrupt status This bit is set at the same time as CECS, it is cleared by writing it to 0. 0: The PLL48CLK clock was correctly detected 1: The PLL48CLK was not correctly detected (fPLL48CLK< fHCLK/16) An interrupt is pending if IE = 1 in the RNG_CR register. Bits 4:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

596/1422

Random number generator (RNG)

RM0090

Bit 2 SECS: Seed error current status 0: No faulty sequence has currently been detected. If the SEIS bit is set, this means that a faulty sequence was detected and the situation has been recovered. 1: One of the following faulty sequences has been detected: More than 64 consecutive bits at the same value (0 or 1) More than 32 consecutive alternances of 0 and 1 (0101010101...01) Bit 1 CECS: Clock error current status 0: The PLL48CLK clock has been correctly detected. If the CEIS bit is set, this means that a clock error was detected and the situation has been recovered 1: The PLL48CLK was not correctly detected (fPLL48CLK< fHCLK/16). Bit 0 DRDY: Data ready 0: The RNG_DR register is not yet valid, no random data is available 1: The RNG_DR register contains valid random data Note: An interrupt is pending if IE = 1 in the RNG_CR register. Once the RNG_DR register has been read, this bit returns to 0 until a new valid value is computed.

21.4.3

RNG data register (RNG_DR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The RNG_DR register is a read-only register that delivers a 32-bit random value when read. After being read, this register delivers a new random value after a maximum time of 40 periods of the PLL48CLK clock. The software must check that the DRDY bit is set before reading the RNDATA value.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

RNDATA r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

RNDATA r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:0 RNDATA: Random data 32-bit random data.

597/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Random number generator (RNG)

21.4.4

RNG register map

Table 94 gives the RNG register map and reset values.

Table 94.
Offset

RNG register map and reset map

Register size
Reserved CECS DRDY

Register name reset value

RNG_CR 0x0000000 RNG_SR 0x0000000 RNG_DR 0x0000000

Reserved

IE CEIS SEIS

0x00

Reserved

0x04

Reserved

0x08

RNDATA[31:0]

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

598/1422

SECS

RNGEN

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

22

Hash processor (HASH)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

22.1

HASH introduction
The hash processor is a fully compliant implementation of the secure hash algorithm (SHA-1, SHA-224, SHA-256), the MD5 (message-digest algorithm 5) hash algorithm and the HMAC (keyed-hash message authentication code) algorithm suitable for a variety of applications. It computes a message digest (160 bits for the SHA-1 algorithm, 256 bits for the SHA-256 algorithm and 224 bits for the SHA-224 algorithm,128 bits for the MD5 algorithm) for messages of up to (264 1) bits, while HMAC algorithms provide a way of authenticating messages by means of hash functions. HMAC algorithms consist in calling the SHA-1, SHA-224, SHA-256 or MD5 hash function twice.

22.2

HASH main features

Suitable for data authentication applications, compliant with: FIPS PUB 180-2 (Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 180-2) Secure Hash Standard specifications (SHA-1, SHA-224 and SHA-256) IETF RFC 1321 (Internet Engineering Task Force Request For Comments number 1321) specifications (MD5)

Fast computation of SHA-1, SHA-224 and SHA-256, and MD5 (SHA-224 and SHA-256 are available on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx only) AHB slave peripheral 32-bit data words for input data, supporting word, half-word, byte and bit bit-string representations, with little-endian data representation only. Automatic swapping to comply with the big-endian SHA1, SHA-224 and SHA-256 computation standard with little-endian input bit-string representation Automatic padding to complete the input bit string to fit modulo 512 (16 32 bits) message digest computing 5 32-bit words (H0 to H5) on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and 8 32-bit words (H0 to H7) on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx for output message digest, reload able to continue interrupted message digest computation. Corresponding 32-bit words of the digest from consecutive message blocks are added to each other to form the digest of the whole message Automatic data flow control with support for direct memory access (DMA)

Note:

Padding, as defined in the SHA-1, SHA-224 and SHA-256 algorithm, consists in adding a bit at bx1 followed by N bits at bx0 to get a total length congruent to 448 modulo 512. After this, the message is completed with a 64-bit integer which is the binary representation of the original message length. For this hash processor, the quanta for entering the message is a 32-bit word, so an additional information must be provided at the end of the message entry, which is the number of valid bits in the last 32-bit word entered.

599/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

22.3

HASH functional description

Figure 1 shows the block diagram of the hash processor. Figure 218. Block diagram for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx
32-bit AHB2 bus IN buffer Data register HASH_DIN write into HASH_DIN or write DCAL bit to 1 or 1 complete block transferred by the DMA 16 32-bit IN FIFO

Control and status registers Interrupt registers HASH_IMR HASH_SR Control register HASH_CR Start register HASH_ST R

swa ppin g IN FIFO full or DCAL written to 1

Context swapping HASH_CSR0..50 Message digest HASH_H0...H4

context

digest

SHA -1 / MD5 Hash / HMAC processor core

ai16081

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

600/1422

Hash processor (HASH) Figure 219. Block diagram for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx
32-bit AHB2 bus IN buffer Data register HASH_DIN

RM0090

Control and status registers Interrupt registers HASH_IMR HASH_SR Control register HASH_CR Start register HASH_ST R

write into HASH_DIN or write DCAL bit to 1 or 1 complete block transferred by the DMA 16 32-bit IN FIFO

swa ppin g IN FIFO full or DCAL written to 1

Context swapping HASH_CSR0..53 Message digest HASH_H0...H7

context SHA-1, SHA-224, SHA-256 and MD5 Hash / HMAC processor core

digest

MS30442V1

The FIPS PUB 180-2 standard and the IETF RFC 1321 publication specify the SHA-1, SHA224 and SHA-256 and MD5 secure hash algorithms, respectively, for computing a condensed representation of a message or data file. When a message of any length below 264 bits is provided on input, the SHA-1, SHA-224 and SHA-256 and MD5 produce respective a 160-bit, 224 bit, 256 bit and 128-bit output string, respectively, called a message digest. The message digest can then be processed with a digital signature algorithm in order to generate or verify the signature for the message. Signing the message digest rather than the message often improves the efficiency of the process because the message digest is usually much smaller in size than the message. The verifier of a digital signature has to use the same hash algorithm as the one used by the creator of the digital signature. The SHA-1, SHA-224 and SHA-256 and MD5 are qualified as secure because it is computationally infeasible to find a message that corresponds to a given message digest, or to find two different messages that produce the same message digest. Any change to a message in transit will, with very high probability, result in a different message digest, and the signature will fail to verify. For more detail on the SHA-1 or SHA-224 and SHA-256 algorithm, please refer to the FIPS PUB 180-2 (Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 180-2), 2002 august 1. The current implementation of this standard works with little-endian input data convention. For example, the C string abc must be represented in memory as the 24-bit hexadecimal value 0x434241. A message or data file to be processed by the hash processor should be considered a bit string. The length of the message is the number of bits in the message (the empty message

601/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH) has length 0). You can consider that 32 bits of this bit string forms a 32-bit word. Note that the FIPS PUB 180-1 standard uses the convention that bit strings grow from left to right, and bits can be grouped as bytes (8 bits) or words (32 bits) (but some implementations also use half-words (16 bits), and implicitly, uses the big-endian byte (half-word) ordering. This convention is mainly important for padding (see Section 1.3.4: Message padding on page 12).

22.3.1

Duration of the processing

The computation of an intermediate block of a message takes:

66 HCLK clock cycles in SHA-1 50 HCLK clock cycles in SHA-224 50 HCLK clock cycles in SHA-256 50 HCLK clock cycles in MD5

to which you must add the time needed to load the 16 words of the block into the processor (at least 16 clock cycles for a 512-bit block). The time needed to process the last block of a message (or of a key in HMAC) can be longer. This time depends on the length of the last block and the size of the key (in HMAC mode). Compared to the processing of an intermediate block, it can be increased by a factor of:

1 to 2.5 for a hash message around 2.5 for an HMAC input-key 1 to 2.5 for an HMAC message around 2.5 for an HMAC output key in case of a short key 3.5 to 5 for an HMAC output key in case of a long key

22.3.2

Data type
Data are entered into the hash processor 32 bits (word) at a time, by writing them into the HASH_DIN register. But the original bit-string can be organized in bytes, half-words or words, or even be represented as bits. As the system memory organization is little-endian and SHA1, SHA-224 and SHA-256 computation is big-endian, depending on the way the original bit string is grouped, a bit, byte, or half-word swapping operation is performed automatically by the hash processor. The kind of data to be processed is configured with the DATATYPE bitfield in the HASH control register (HASH_CR).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

602/1422

Hash processor (HASH) Figure 220. Bit, byte and half-word swapping

RM0090

A-In case of binary data hash, all bits should be swapped as below
Bit swapping operation
HASH_DIN bit 31 bit 30
bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

DATATYPE =bx 11 Bits entred with little-Endian format padding is performed on this side of the bit string.

bit string organization in Hash processor: Big-Endian

bit 0

bit 1

bit 29 bit 30

bit 31

bit-string grows in this direction as defined by FIPSPUB 180-2 std.

B-In case of byte data hash, all bytes should be swapped as below
Byte swapping operation
HASH_DIN
Byte 3 bits 7...0 Byte 2 bits 7...0 Byte 1 bits 7...0 Byte 0 bits 7...0

DATATYPE =bx 10 Bytes entred with little-Endian format

Byte 0 Byte 1 Bit string organization in Hash processor: Big-Endian bits 7...0 bits 7...0

Byte 2 bits 7...0

Byte 3 bits 7...0

bit-string grows in this direction as defined by FIPSPUB 180-2 std.

C-In case of half-word hash, all half-word should be swapped as below

Half-word swapping operation
HASH_DIN
Half-word 1 bits 15...0 Half-word 0 bits 15...0

DATATYPE =bx 01 half word entred with little-Endian format

Bit string organization in Hash processor: Big-Endian

Half-word 0 bits 15...0

Half-word 1 bits 15...0

bit-string grows in this direction as defined by FIPS PUB 180-2 std.

ai16082

603/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH) The least significant bit of the message has to be at position 0 (right) in the first word entered into the hash processor, the 32nd bit of the bit string has to be at position 0 in the second word entered into the hash processor and so on.

22.3.3

Message digest computing

The HASH sequentially processes blocks of 512 bits when computing the message digest. Thus, each time 16 32-bit words (= 512 bits) have been written by the DMA or the CPU, into the hash processor, the HASH automatically starts computing the message digest. This operation is known as a partial digest computation. The message to be processed is entered into the peripheral by 32-bit words written into the HASH_DIN register. The current contents of the HASH_DIN register are transferred to the input FIFO (IN FIFO) each time the register is written with new data. HASH_DIN and the input FIFO form a FIFO of a 17-word length (named the IN buffer). The processing of a block can start only once the last value of the block has entered the IN FIFO. The peripheral must get the information as to whether the HASH_DIN register contains the last bits of the message or not. Two cases may occur:

When the DMA is not used: In case of a partial digest computation, this is done by writing an additional word into the HASH_DIN register (actually the first word of the next block). Then the software must wait until the processor is ready again (when DINIS=1) before writing new data into HASH_DIN. In case of a final digest computation (last block entered), this is done by writing the DCAL bit to 1.

When the DMA is used: The contents of the HASH_DIN register are interpreted automatically with the information sent by the DMA controller. In case of a single DMA transfer: Multiple DMA transfer (MDMAT) bit should be cleared on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx. When the last block has been transferred to the HASH_DIN register via DMA channel, DCAL bit will be set to automatically to 1 in the HASH_STR register in order to launch the final digest calculation. In case of a multiple DMA transfer (available only on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx): Multiple DMA transfer (MDMAT) bit should be set to 1 by software so DCAL bit does not get set automatically by HW, in this case the final digest calculation for hash and for each phases for HMAC (for more details about HMAC phases please refer to HMAC operation section) will not be launched a the end of the DMA transfer request, allowing the processor to receive a new DMA transfer. During the last DMA transfer, Multiple DMA transfer (MDMAT) bit should be cleared by software in order to set automatically DCAL bit at the end of the last bloc and lunch the final digest. The contents of the HASH_DIN register are interpreted automatically with the information sent by the DMA controller.

This process data entering + partial digest computation continues until the last bits of the original message are written to the HASH_DIN register. As the length (number of bits) of a message can be any integer value, the last word written into the HASH processor may have a valid number of bits between 1 and 32. This number of valid bits in the last word, NBLW, has to be written into the HASH_STR register, so that message padding is correctly performed before the final message digest computation.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

604/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

Once this is done, writing into HASH_STR with bit DCAL = 1 starts the processing of the last entered block of message by the hash processor. This processing consists in:

Automatically performing the message padding operation: the purpose of this operation is to make the total length of a padded message a multiple of 512. The HASH sequentially processes blocks of 512 bits when computing the message digest Computing the final message digest

When the DMA is enabled, it provides the information to the hash processor when it is transferring the last data word. Then the padding and digest computation are performed automatically as if DCAL had been written to 1.

22.3.4

Message padding
Message padding consists in appending a 1 followed by m 0s followed by a 64-bit integer to the end of the original message to produce a padded message block of length 512. The 1 is added to the last word written into the HASH_DIN register at the bit position defined by the NBLW bitfield, and the remaining upper bits are cleared (0s). Example: let us assume that the original message is the ASCII binary-coded form of abc, of length L = 24: byte 0 byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 01100001 01100010 01100011 UUUUUUUU <-- 1st word written to HASH_DIN --> NBLW has to be loaded with the value 24: a 1 is appended at bit location 24 in the bit string (starting counting from left to right in the above bit string), which corresponds to bit 31 in the HASH_DIN register (little-endian convention): 01100001 01100010 01100011 1UUUUUUU Since L = 24, the number of bits in the above bit string is 25, and 423 0s are appended, making now 448. This gives (in hexadecimal, big-endian format): 61626380 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

The L value, in two-word representation (that is 00000000 00000018) is appended. Hence the final padded message in hexadecimal: 61626380 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000028

If the HASH is programmed to use the little-endian byte input format, the above message has to be entered by doing the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 0xUU636261 is written into the HASH_DIN register (where U means dont care) 0x18 is written into the HASH_STR register (the number of valid bits in the last word written into the HASH_DIN register is 24, as the original message length is 24 bits) 0x10 is written into the HASH_STR register to start the message padding and digest computation. When NBLW 0x00, the message padding puts a 1 into the HASH_DIN register at the bit position defined by the NBLW value, and inserts 0s at bit locations [31:(NBLW+1)]. When NBLW == 0x00, the message padding inserts one new word

605/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH) with value 0x0000 0001. Then an all zero word (0x0000 0000) is added and the message length in a two-word representation, to get a block of 16 x 32-bit words. 4. The HASH computing is performed, and the message digest is then available in the HASH_Hx registers (x = 0...4) for the SHA-1 algorithm. For example: H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 = = = = = 0xA9993E36 0x4706816A 0xBA3E2571 0x7850C26C 0x9CD0D89D

22.3.5

Hash operation
The hash function (SHA-1, SHA-224, SHA-256 and MD5) is selected when the INIT bit is written to 1 in the HASH_CR register while the MODE bit is at 0 in HASH_CR. The algorithm (SHA-1, SHA-224,SHA-256 or MD5) is selected at the same time (that is when the INIT bit is set) using the ALGO bits. The message can then be sent by writing it word by word into the HASH_DIN register. When a block of 512 bits that is 16 words has been written, a partial digest computation starts upon writing the first data of the next block. The hash processor remains busy for 66 cycles for the SHA-1 algorithm, or 50 cycles for the MD5 algorithm, SHA-224 algorithm and SHA256 algorithm. The process can then be repeated until the last word of the message. If DMA transfers are used, refer to the Procedure where the data are loaded by DMA section. Otherwise, if the message length is not an exact multiple of 512 bits, then the HASH_STR register has to be written to launch the computation of the final digest. Once computed, the digest can be read from the HASH_H0...HASH_H4 registers (for the MD5 algorithm, HASH_H4 is not relevant) on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx, and from the HASH_H0...HASH_H7 registers on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx where: HASH_H4..HASH_H7 are not relevant when the MD5 algorithm is selected, HASH_H5.. HASH_H7 are not relevant when the SHA-1algorithm is selected, HASH_H7 is not relevant when the SHA-224 algorithm is selected.

22.3.6

HMAC operation
The HMAC algorithm is used for message authentication, by irreversibly binding the message being processed to a key chosen by the user. For HMAC specifications, refer to HMAC: keyed-hashing for message authentication, H. Krawczyk, M. Bellare, R. Canetti, February 1997. Basically, the algorithm consists of two nested hash operations: HMAC(message) = Hash[((key | pad) XOR 0x5C) | Hash(((key | pad) XOR 0x36) | message)] where:

pad is a sequence of zeroes needed to extend the key to the length of the underlying hash function data block (that is 512 bits for both the SHA-1, SHA224, SHA-256 and MD5 hash algorithms) | represents the concatenation operator

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

606/1422

Hash processor (HASH) To compute the HMAC, four different phases are required: 1.

RM0090

The block is initialized by writing the INIT bit to 1 with the MODE bit at 1 and the ALGO bits set to the value corresponding to the desired algorithm. The LKEY bit must also be set during this phase if the key being used is longer than 64 bytes (in this case, the HMAC specifications specify that the hash of the key should be used in place of the real key). The key (to be used for the inner hash function) is then given to the core. This operation follows the same mechanism as the one used to send the message in the hash operation (that is, by writing into HASH_DIN and, finally, into HASH_STR). Once the last word has been entered and computation has started, the hash processor elaborates the key. It is then ready to accept the message text using the same mechanism as the one used to send the message in the hash operation. After the first hash round, the hash processor returns ready to indicate that it is ready to receive the key to be used for the outer hash function (normally, this key is the same as the one used for the inner hash function). When the last word of the key is entered and computation starts, the HMAC result is made available in the HASH_H0...HASH_H4 registers on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx and on HASH_H0...HASH_H7 registers on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx.

2.

3.

4.

Note:

The computation latency of the HMAC primitive depends on the lengths of the keys and message. You could the HMAC as two nested underlying hash functions with the same key length (long or short).

22.3.7

Context swapping
It is possible to interrupt a hash/HMAC process to perform another processing with a higher priority, and to complete the interrupted process later on, when the higher-priority task is complete. To do so, the context of the interrupted task must be saved from the hash registers to memory, and then be restored from memory to the hash registers. The procedures where the data flow is controlled by software or by DMA are described below.

607/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

Procedure where the data are loaded by software

The context can be saved only when no block is currently being processed. That is, you must wait for DINIS = 1 (the last block has been processed and the input FIFO is empty) or NBW 0 (the FIFO is not full and no processing is ongoing).

Context saving: Store the contents of the following registers into memory: HASH_IMR HASH_STR HASH_CR HASH_CSR0 to HASH_CSR50 on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx, and HASH_CSR0 to HASH_CSR53 on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx.

Context restoring: The context can be restored when the high-priority task is complete. Please follow the order of the sequence below. a) b) c) Write the following registers with the values saved in memory: HASH_IMR, HASH_STR and HASH_CR Initialize the hash processor by setting the INIT bit in the HASH_CR register Write the HASH_CSR0 to HASH_CSR50 (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx), and HASH_CSR0 to HASH_CSR53 (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) registers with the values saved in memory

You can now restart the processing from the point where it has been interrupted.

Procedure where the data are loaded by DMA

In this case it is not possible to predict if a DMA transfer is in progress or if the process is ongoing. Thus, you must stop the DMA transfers, then wait until the HASH is ready in order to interrupt the processing of a message.

Interrupting a processing: Clear the DMAE bit to disable the DMA interface Wait until the current DMA transfer is complete (wait for DMAES = 0 in the HASH_SR register). Note that the block may or not have been totally transferred to the HASH. Disable the corresponding channel in the DMA controller Wait until the hash processor is ready (no block is being processed), that is wait for DINIS = 1

The context saving and context restoring phases are the same as above (see Procedure where the data are loaded by software).

Reconfigure the DMA controller so that it transfers the end of the message. You can now restart the processing from the point where it was interrupted by setting the DMAE bit. Note: 1 If context swapping does not involve HMAC operations, the HASH_CSR38 to HASH_CSR50 (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) and HASH_CSR38 to HASH_CSR53 (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) registers do not have to be saved and restored. If context swapping occurs between two blocks (the last block was completely processed and the next block has not yet been pushed into the IN FIFO, NBW = 000 in the HASH_CR

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

608/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

register), the HASH_CSR22 to HASH_CSR37 registers do not have to be saved and restored.

22.3.8

HASH interrupt
There are two individual maskable interrupt sources generated by the HASH processor. They are connected to the same interrupt vector. You can enable or disable the interrupt sources individually by changing the mask bits in the HASH_IMR register. Setting the appropriate mask bit to 1 enables the interrupt. The status of the individual interrupt sources can be read from the HASH_SR register. Figure 221. HASH interrupt mapping diagram
DCIS DCIM HASH interrupt to NVIC DINIS DINIM
ai16086

22.4

HASH registers
The HASH core is associated with several control and status registers and five message digest registers. All these registers are accessible through word accesses only, else an AHB error is generated.

22.4.1

HASH control register (HASH_CR) for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24 Reserved

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16 LKEY rw

15

14 Reserved

13

12 DINNE r

11

10 NBW

3 DMAE rw

2 INIT

ALGO[0] MODE r r rw rw

DATATYPE rw rw

Reserved r r w

609/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

Bits 31:17 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 16 LKEY: Long key selection This bit selects between short key ( 64 bytes) or long key (> 64 bytes) in HMAC mode 0: Short key ( 64 bytes) 1: Long key (> 64 bytes) Note: This selection is only taken into account when the INIT bit is set and MODE = 1. Changing this bit during a computation has no effect. Bits 15:13 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 12 DINNE: DIN not empty This bit is set when the HASH_DIN register holds valid data (that is after being written at least once). It is cleared when either the INIT bit (initialization) or the DCAL bit (completion of the previous message processing) is written to 1. 0: No data are present in the data input buffer 1: The input buffer contains at least one word of data Bits 11:8 NBW: Number of words already pushed This bitfield reflects the number of words in the message that have already been pushed into the IN FIFO. NBW increments (+1) when a write access is performed to the HASH_DIN register while DINNE = 1. It goes to 0000 when the INIT bit is written to 1 or when a digest calculation starts (DCAL written to 1 or DMA end of transfer). If the DMA is not used: 0000 and DINNE=0: no word has been pushed into the DIN buffer (the buffer is empty, both the HASH_DIN register and the IN FIFO are empty) 0000 and DINNE=1: 1 word has been pushed into the DIN buffer (The HASH_DIN register contains 1 word, the IN FIFO is empty) 0001: 2 words have been pushed into the DIN buffer (the HASH_DIN register and the IN FIFO contain 1 word each) ... 1111: 16 words have been pushed into the DIN buffer If the DMA is used, NBW is the exact number of words that have been pushed into the IN FIFO. Bit 7 ALGO[1:0]: Algorithm selection These bits selects the SHA-1 or the MD5 algorithm: 0: SHA-1 algorithm selected 1: MD5 algorithm selected Note: This selection is only taken into account when the INIT bit is set. Changing this bit during a computation has no effect. Bit 6 MODE: Mode selection This bit selects the HASH or HMAC mode for the selected algorithm: 0: Hash mode selected 1: HMAC mode selected. LKEY must be set if the key being used is longer than 64 bytes. Note: This selection is only taken into account when the INIT bit is set. Changing this bit during a computation has no effect.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

610/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

Bits 5:4 DATATYPE: Data type selection Defines the format of the data entered into the HASH_DIN register: 00: 32-bit data. The data written into HASH_DIN are directly used by the HASH processing, without reordering. 01: 16-bit data, or half-word. The data written into HASH_DIN are considered as 2 half-words, and are swapped before being used by the HASH processing. 10: 8-bit data, or bytes. The data written into HASH_DIN are considered as 4 bytes, and are swapped before being used by the HASH processing. 11: bit data, or bit-string. The data written into HASH_DIN are considered as 32 bits (1st bit of the sting at position 0), and are swapped before being used by the HASH processing (1st bit of the string at position 31). Bit 3 DMAE: DMA enable 0: DMA transfers disabled 1: DMA transfers enabled. A DMA request is sent as soon as the HASH core is ready to receive data. Note: 1: This bit is cleared by hardware when the DMA asserts the DMA terminal count signal (while transferring the last data of the message). This bit is not cleared when the INIT bit is written to 1. 2: If this bit is written to 0 while a DMA transfer has already been requested to the DMA, DMAE is cleared but the current transfer is not aborted. Instead, the DMA interface remains internally enabled until the transfer is complete or INIT is written to 1. Bit 2 INIT: Initialize message digest calculation Writing this bit to 1 resets the hash processor core, so that the HASH is ready to compute the message digest of a new message. Writing this bit to 0 has no effect. Reading this bit always return 0. Bit 1:0 Reserved, must be kept cleared.

611/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

22.4.2

HASH control register (HASH_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25 Reserved

24

23

22

21

20

19

18 ALGO[1] rw

17 Reserved

16 LKEY rw 0

15

14

13

12

11

10 NBW

3 DMAE rw

2 INIT

MDMAT DINNE Reserved rw r r r

ALGO[0] MODE r r rw rw

DATATYPE rw rw

Reserved w

Bits 31:19 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 17 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 16 LKEY: Long key selection This bit selects between short key ( 64 bytes) or long key (> 64 bytes) in HMAC mode 0: Short key ( 64 bytes) 1: Long key (> 64 bytes) Note: This selection is only taken into account when the INIT bit is set and MODE = 1. Changing this bit during a computation has no effect. Bits 15:14 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 13 MDMAT: Multiple DMA Transfers This bit is set when hashing large files when multiple DMA transfers are needed. 0: DCAL is automatically set at the end of a DMA transfer. 1: DCAL is not automatically set at the end of a DMA transfer. Bit 12 DINNE: DIN not empty This bit is set when the HASH_DIN register holds valid data (that is after being written at least once). It is cleared when either the INIT bit (initialization) or the DCAL bit (completion of the previous message processing) is written to 1. 0: No data are present in the data input buffer 1: The input buffer contains at least one word of data

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

612/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

Bits 11:8 NBW: Number of words already pushed This bitfield reflects the number of words in the message that have already been pushed into the IN FIFO. NBW increments (+1) when a write access is performed to the HASH_DIN register while DINNE = 1. It goes to 0000 when the INIT bit is written to 1 or when a digest calculation starts (DCAL written to 1 or DMA end of transfer). If the DMA is not used: 0000 and DINNE=0: no word has been pushed into the DIN buffer (the buffer is empty, both the HASH_DIN register and the IN FIFO are empty) 0000 and DINNE=1: 1 word has been pushed into the DIN buffer (The HASH_DIN register contains 1 word, the IN FIFO is empty) 0001: 2 words have been pushed into the DIN buffer (the HASH_DIN register and the IN FIFO contain 1 word each) ... 1111: 16 words have been pushed into the DIN buffer If the DMA is used, NBW is the exact number of words that have been pushed into the IN FIFO. Bit 18 and bit 7 ALGO[1:0]: Algorithm selection These bits selects the SHA-1, SHA-224, SHA256 or the MD5 algorithm: 00: SHA-1 algorithm selected 01: MD5 algorithm selected 10: SHA224 algorithm selected 11: SHA256 algorithm selected Note: This selection is only taken into account when the INIT bit is set. Changing this bit during a computation has no effect. Bit 6 MODE: Mode selection This bit selects the HASH or HMAC mode for the selected algorithm: 0: Hash mode selected 1: HMAC mode selected. LKEY must be set if the key being used is longer than 64 bytes. Note: This selection is only taken into account when the INIT bit is set. Changing this bit during a computation has no effect. Bits 5:4 DATATYPE: Data type selection Defines the format of the data entered into the HASH_DIN register: 00: 32-bit data. The data written into HASH_DIN are directly used by the HASH processing, without reordering. 01: 16-bit data, or half-word. The data written into HASH_DIN are considered as 2 half-words, and are swapped before being used by the HASH processing. 10: 8-bit data, or bytes. The data written into HASH_DIN are considered as 4 bytes, and are swapped before being used by the HASH processing. 11: bit data, or bit-string. The data written into HASH_DIN are considered as 32 bits (1st bit of the sting at position 0), and are swapped before being used by the HASH processing (1st bit of the string at position 31).

613/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

Bit 3 DMAE: DMA enable 0: DMA transfers disabled 1: DMA transfers enabled. A DMA request is sent as soon as the HASH core is ready to receive data. Note: 1: This bit is cleared by hardware when the DMA asserts the DMA terminal count signal (while transferring the last data of the message). This bit is not cleared when the INIT bit is written to 1. 2: If this bit is written to 0 while a DMA transfer has already been requested to the DMA, DMAE is cleared but the current transfer is not aborted. Instead, the DMA interface remains internally enabled until the transfer is complete or INIT is written to 1. Bit 2 INIT: Initialize message digest calculation Writing this bit to 1 resets the hash processor core, so that the HASH is ready to compute the message digest of a new message. Writing this bit to 0 has no effect. Reading this bit always return 0. Bit 1:0 Reserved, must be kept cleared.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

614/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

22.4.3

HASH data input register (HASH_DIN)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 HASH_DIN is the data input register. It is 32-bit wide. It is used to enter the message by blocks of 512 bits. When the HASH_DIN register is written to, the value presented on the AHB databus is pushed into the HASH core and the register takes the new value presented on the AHB databus. The DATATYPE bits must previously have been configured in the HASH_CR register to get a correct message representation. When a block of 16 words has been written to the HASH_DIN register, an intermediate digest calculation is launched:

by writing new data into the HASH_DIN register (the first word of the next block) if the DMA is not used (intermediate digest calculation) automatically if the DMA is used

When the last block has been written to the HASH_DIN register, the final digest calculation (including padding) is launched:

by writing the DCAL bit to 1 in the HASH_STR register (final digest calculation) automatically if the DMA is used and MDMAT bit is set to 0.

When a digest calculation (intermediate or final) is in progress, any new write access to the HASH_DIN register is extended (by wait-state insertion on the AHB bus) until the HASH calculation completes. When the HASH_DIN register is read, the last word written in this location is accessed (zero after reset).
.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

DATAIN rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 DATAIN rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

Bit 31:0 DATAIN: Data input Read = returns the current register content. Write = the current register content is pushed into the IN FIFO, and the register takes the new value presented on the AHB databus.

615/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

22.4.4

HASH start register (HASH_STR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The HASH_STR register has two functions:

It is used to define the number of valid bits in the last word of the message entered in the hash processor (that is the number of valid least significant bits in the last data written into the HASH_DIN register) It is used to start the processing of the last block in the message by writing the DCAL bit to 1
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31

30

Reserved 15 14 13 12 Reserved w 11 10 9 8 DCAL Reserved rw rw rw rw rw 7 6 5 4 3 2 NBLW 1 0

Bits 31:9 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 8 DCAL: Digest calculation Writing this bit to 1 starts the message padding, using the previously written value of NBLW, and starts the calculation of the final message digest with all data words written to the IN FIFO since the INIT bit was last written to 1. Reading this bit returns 0. Note Bits 7:5 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bits 4:0 NBLW: Number of valid bits in the last word of the message in the bit string organization of hash processor When these bits are written and DCAL is at 0, they take the value on the AHB databus: 0x00: All 32 bits of the last data written in the bit string organization of hash processor (after data swapping) are valid. 0x01: Only bit [31] of the last data written in the bit string organization of hash processor (after data swapping) are valid 0x02: Only bits [31:30] of the last data written in the bit string organization of hash processor (after data swapping) are valid 0x03: Only bits [31:29] of the last data written in the bit string organization of hash processor (after data swapping) are valid ... 0x1F: Only bits [0] of the last data written in the bit string organization of hash processor (after data swapping) are valid When these bits are written and DCAL is at 1, the bitfield is not changed. Reading them returns the last value written to NBLW. Note: These bits must be configured before setting the DCAL bit, else they are not taken into account. Especially, it is not possible to configure NBLW and set DCAL at the same time.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

616/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

22.4.5

HASH digest registers (HASH_HR0..4/5/6/7)

Address offset: 0x0C to 0x1C (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx), plus 0x310 to 0x32C (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 These registers contain the message digest result named as: 1. H0, H1, H2, H3 and H4, respectively, in the SHA1 algorithm description Note that in this case, the HASH_H5 to HASH_H7 register is not used, and is read as zero. 2. A, B, C and D, respectively, in the MD5 algorithm description Note that in this case, the HASH_H4 to HASH_H7 register is not used, and is read as zero. 3. 4. H0 to H6, respectively, in the SHA224 algorithm description, Note that in this case, the HASH_H7 register is not used, and is read as zero. H0 to H7, respectively, in the SHA256 algorithm description, If a read access to one of these registers occurs while the HASH core is calculating an intermediate digest or a final message digest (that is when the DCAL bit has been written to 1), then the read is stalled until the completion of the HASH calculation.

Note:

H0, H1, H2, H3 and H4 mapping are duplicated in two region.

HASH_HR0
Address offset: 0x0C and 0x310
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H0 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H0 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

HASH_HR1
Address offset: 0x10 and 0x314
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H1 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H1 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

617/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

HASH_HR2
Address offset: 0x14 and 0x318
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H2 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H2 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

HASH_HR3
Address offset: 0x18 and 0x31C
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H3 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H3 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

HASH_HR4
Address offset: 0x1C and 0x320
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H4 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H4 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

HASH_HR5
Address offset: 0x324
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H5 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H5 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

618/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

HASH_HR6
Address offset: 0x328
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H6 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H6 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

HASH_HR7
Address offset: 0x32C
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 H7 r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 H7 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Note:

When starting a digest computation for a new bit stream (by writing the INIT bit to 1), these registers assume their reset values.

22.4.6

HASH interrupt enable register (HASH_IMR)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DCIE Reserved rw rw 0 DINIE

Bits 31:2 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 1 DCIE: Digest calculation completion interrupt enable 0: Digest calculation completion interrupt disabled 1: Digest calculation completion interrupt enabled. Bit 0 DINIE: Data input interrupt enable 0: Data input interrupt disabled 1: Data input interrupt enabled

619/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

22.4.7

HASH status register (HASH_SR)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0001

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 BUSY Reserved r r rc_w0 rc_w0 2 DMAS 1 DCIS 0 DINIS

Bits 31:4 Reserved, forced by hardware to 0. Bit 3 BUSY: Busy bit 0: No block is currently being processed 1: The hash core is processing a block of data Bit 2 DMAS: DMA Status This bit provides information on the DMA interface activity. It is set with DMAE and cleared when DMAE=0 and no DMA transfer is ongoing. No interrupt is associated with this bit. 0: DMA interface is disabled (DMAE=0) and no transfer is ongoing 1: DMA interface is enabled (DMAE=1) or a transfer is ongoing Bit 1 DCIS: Digest calculation completion interrupt status This bit is set by hardware when a digest becomes ready (the whole message has been processed). It is cleared by writing it to 0 or by writing the INIT bit to 1 in the HASH_CR register. 0: No digest available in the HASH_Hx registers 1: Digest calculation complete, a digest is available in the HASH_Hx registers. An interrupt is generated if the DCIE bit is set in the HASH_IMR register. Bit 0 DINIS: Data input interrupt status This bit is set by hardware when the input buffer is ready to get a new block (16 locations are free). It is cleared by writing it to 0 or by writing the HASH_DIN register. 0: Less than 16 locations are free in the input buffer 1: A new block can be entered into the input buffer. An interrupt is generated if the DINIE bit is set in the HASH_IMR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

620/1422

Hash processor (HASH)

RM0090

22.4.8

HASH context swap registers (HASH_CSRx)

Address offset: 0x0F8 to 0x1C0

For HASH_CSR0 register: Reset value is 0x0000 0002. For others registers: Reset value is 0x0000 0000 , except for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices where the HASH_CSR2 register reset value is 0x2000 0000

Additional registers are available from 0x1C1 to 0x1CC on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Reset value: 0x0000 0000.

These registers contain the complete internal register states of the hash processor, and are useful when a context swap has to be done because a high-priority task has to use the hash processor while it is already in use by another task. When such an event occurs, the HASH_CSRx registers have to be read and the read values have to be saved somewhere in the system memory space. Then the hash processor can be used by the preemptive task, and when hash computation is finished, the saved context can be read from memory and written back into these HASH_CSRx registers.

HASH_CSRx
Address offset: 0x0F8 to 0x1C0 on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx Address offset: 0x0F8 to 0x1CC on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 CSx rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 CSx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

621/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Hash processor (HASH)

22.4.9

HASH register map

Table 9 gives the summary HASH register map and reset values.

Table 95.
Offset

HASH register map and reset values on STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx

Register size 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 LKEY 16 15 Reserved 14 13 DINNE 12 11 10 9 8 ALGO[0] 7 MODE 6 DATATYPE 5 4 DMAE 3 INIT 2 1 Reserved 0
NBW Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DATAIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DCAL 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 NBLW 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reset value HASH_HR0 H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DCIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BUSY 0 DMAS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DCIS 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CSR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ... ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DINIE 0 DINIS 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reset value HASH_CSR0 CSR50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved HASH_HR0 H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Register name reset value

HASH_CR

0x00 Reset value HASH_DIN 0x04 Reset value HASH_STR 0x08

0x0C Reset value HASH_HR1 0x10 Reset value HASH_HR2 0x14 Reset value HASH_HR3 0x18 Reset value HASH_HR4 0x1C Reset value HASH_IMR 0x20 Reset value HASH_SR 0x24

0xF8 Reset value

HASH_CSR50 0x1C0 Reset value

0x310 Reset value HASH_HR1 0x314 Reset value HASH_HR2 0x318 Reset value HASH_HR3 0x31C Reset value HASH_HR4 0x320 Reset value

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

622/1422

Hash processor (HASH) Table 96.

Offset

RM0090

HASH register map and reset values on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx

Register size 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 ALGO[1] 18 Reserved 17 LKEY 16 Reserved 15 14 MDMAT 13 DINNE 12 11 10 9 8 ALGO[0] 7 MODE 6 DATATYPE 5 4 DMAE 3 INIT 2 1 Reserved 0
NBW Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DATAIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DCAL 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 NBLW 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reset value HASH_HR0 H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DCIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BUSY 0 DMAS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DCIS 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CSR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ... ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DINIE 0 DINIS 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reset value HASH_CSR0 CSR53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved HASH_HR0 H0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Register name reset value

HASH_CR

0x00 Reset value HASH_DIN 0x04 Reset value HASH_STR 0x08

0x0C Reset value HASH_HR1 0x10 Reset value HASH_HR2 0x14 Reset value HASH_HR3 0x18 Reset value HASH_HR4 0x1C Reset value HASH_IMR 0x20 Reset value HASH_SR 0x24

0xF8 Reset value

HASH_CSR53 0x1CC Reset value

0x310 Reset value HASH_HR1 0x314 Reset value HASH_HR2 0x318 Reset value HASH_HR3 0x31C Reset value HASH_HR4 0x320 Reset value HASH_HR5 0x324 Reset value HASH_HR6 0x328 Reset value

623/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 96.

Offset
0x32C Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Hash processor (HASH) HASH register map and reset values on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx (continued)
Register size 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
H7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Register name reset value

HASH_HR7

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

624/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23

Real-time clock (RTC)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

23.1

Introduction
The real-time clock (RTC) is an independent BCD timer/counter. The RTC provides a timeof-day clock/calendar, two programmable alarm interrupts, and a periodic programmable wakeup flag with interrupt capability. The RTC also includes an automatic wakeup unit to manage low power modes. Two 32-bit registers contain the seconds, minutes, hours (12- or 24-hour format), day (day of week), date (day of month), month, and year, expressed in binary coded decimal format (BCD). The sub-seconds value is also available in binary format. Compensations for 28-, 29- (leap year), 30-, and 31-day months are performed automatically. Daylight saving time compensation can also be performed. Additional 32-bit registers contain the programmable alarm subseconds, seconds, minutes, hours, day, and date. A digital calibration feature is available to compensate for any deviation in crystal oscillator accuracy. After power-on reset, all RTC registers are protected against possible parasitic write accesses. As long as the supply voltage remains in the operating range, the RTC never stops, regardless of the device status (Run mode, low power mode or under reset).

625/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.2

RTC main features

The RTC unit main features are the following (see Figure 222: RTC block diagram):

Calendar with subseconds , seconds, minutes, hours (12 or 24 format), day (day of week), date (day of month), month, and year. Daylight saving compensation programmable by software. Two programmable alarms with interrupt function. The alarms can be triggered by any combination of the calendar fields. Automatic wakeup unit generating a periodic flag that triggers an automatic wakeup interrupt. Reference clock detection: a more precise second source clock (50 or 60 Hz) can be used to enhance the calendar precision. Accurate synchronization with an external clock using the subsecond shift feature. Maskable interrupts/events: Alarm A Alarm B Wakeup interrupt Timestamp Tamper detection Digital calibration circuit (periodic counter correction) 5 ppm accuracy 0.95 ppm accuracy, obtained in a calibration window of several seconds Timestamp function for event saving (1 event) Tamper detection: 2 tamper events with configurable filter and internal pull-up. 20 backup registers (80 bytes). The backup registers are reset when a tamper detection event occurs. Alternate function output (RTC_OUT) which selects one of the following two outputs: RTC_CALIB: 512 Hz or 1 Hz clock output (with an LSE frequency of 32.768 kHz). This output is enabled by setting the COE[23] bit in the RTC_CR register. It is routed to the device RTC_AF1 function. RTC_ALARM (Alarm A, Alarm B or wakeup). This output is selected by configuring the OSEL[1:0] bits in the RTC_CR register. It is routed to the device RTC_AF1 function.

RTC alternate function inputs: RTC_TS: timestamp event detection. It is routed to the device RTC_AF1 and RTC_AF2 functions. RTC_TAMP1: TAMPER1 event detection. It is routed to the device RTC_AF1 and RTC_AF2 functions. RTC_TAMP2: TAMPER2 event detection. RTC_REFIN: reference clock input (usually the mains, 50 or 60 Hz).

Refer to Section 7.3.15: Selection of RTC_AF1 and RTC_AF2 alternate functions.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

626/1422

Real-time clock (RTC) Figure 222. RTC block diagram

RM0090

RTC_TS
512 Hz 1 Hz ck_apre (default 256 Hz) Alarm A (RTC_ALRMAR RTC_ALRMASSR registers) Calendar Shadow registers (RTC_TR, RTC_DR) Time stamp registe rs TSF

RTC_CALIB Output control

RTC_OUT RTC_AF1

RTCCLK

RTC_PRER Asyn ch. 7-bit prescaler (default = 128)

Coarse Calibration RTC_CALIBR

RTC_PRER Syn chronous 15-bit prescaler (default = 256) Shadow register ck spre (default 1 Hz)

ALRAF

RTC_ALARM

LSE (32.768 Hz) HSE_RTC (4 MHz max) LSI

WUCKSEL[1:0] Prescaler / 2, 4, 8, 16

Smooth calibration RTC_CALR

(RTC_SSR)

Alarm B (RTC_ALRMBR RTC_ALRMBSSR registers) RTC_WUTR 16-bit wakeup auto-reload timer

ALRBF

RTC_AF2

WUTF

RTC_TAMP1 RTC_TAMP2

Backup and RTC tamper control registers

TAMPE

TSE

MS19902V3

1. On STM32F4xx devices, the RTC_AF1 and RTC_AF2 alternate functions are connected to PC13 and PI8, respectively.

23.3
23.3.1

RTC functional description

Clock and prescalers
The RTC clock source (RTCCLK) is selected through the clock controller among the LSE clock, the LSI oscillator clock, and the HSE clock. For more information on the RTC clock source configuration, refer to Section 6: Reset and clock control for (RCC). A programmable prescaler stage generates a 1 Hz clock which is used to update the calendar. To minimize power consumption, the prescaler is split into 2 programmable prescalers (see Figure 222: RTC block diagram):

A 7-bit asynchronous prescaler configured through the PREDIV_A bits of the RTC_PRER register. A 15-bit synchronous prescaler configured through the PREDIV_S bits of the RTC_PRER register.

Note:

When both prescalers are used, it is recommended to configure the asynchronous prescaler to a high value to minimize consumption.

627/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC) The asynchronous prescaler division factor is set to 128, and the synchronous division factor to 256, to obtain an internal clock frequency of 1 Hz (ck_spre) with an LSE frequency of 32.768 kHz. The minimum division factor is 1 and the maximum division factor is 222. This corresponds to a maximum input frequency of around 4 MHz. fck_apre is given by the following formula:
f RTCCLK f CK_APRE = -------------------------------------PREDIV_A + 1

The ck_apre clock is used to clock the binary RTC_SSR subseconds downcounter. When it reaches 0, RTC_SSR is reloaded with the content of PREDIV_S. fck_spre is given by the following formula:
f RTCCLK f CK_SPRE = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------( PREDIV_S + 1 ) ( PREDIV_A + 1 )

The ck_spre clock can be used either to update the calendar or as timebase for the 16-bit wakeup auto-reload timer. To obtain short timeout periods, the 16-bit wakeup auto-reload timer can also run with the RTCCLK divided by the programmable 4-bit asynchronous prescaler (see Section 23.3.4: Periodic auto-wakeup for details).

23.3.2

Real-time clock and calendar

The RTC calendar time and date registers are accessed through shadow registers which are synchronized with PCLK1 (APB1 clock). They can also be accessed directly in order to avoid waiting for the synchronization duration. RTC_SSR for the subseconds

RTC_TR for the time RTC_DR for the date

Every two RTCCLK periods, the current calendar value is copied into the shadow registers, and the RSF bit of RTC_ISR register is set (see Section 23.6.4). The copy is not performed in Stop and Standby mode. When exiting these modes, the shadow registers are updated after up to 2 RTCCLK periods. When the application reads the calendar registers, it accesses the content of the shadow registers. it is possible to make a direct access to the calendar registers by setting the BYPSHAD control bit in the RTC_CR register. By default, this bit is cleared, and the user accesses the shadow registers. When reading the RTC_SSR, RTC_TR or RTC_DR registers in BYPSHAD=0 mode, the frequency of the APB clock (fAPB) must be at least 7 times the frequency of the RTC clock (fRTCCLK). The shadow registers are reset by system reset.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

628/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23.3.3

Programmable alarms
The RTC unit provides two programmable alarms, Alarm A and Alarm B. The programmable alarm functions are enabled through the ALRAIE and ALRBIE bits in the RTC_CR register. The ALRAF and ALRBF flags are set to 1 if the calendar subseconds , seconds, minutes, hours, date or day match the values programmed in the alarm registers RTC_ALRMASSR/RTC_ALRMAR and RTC_ALRMBSSR/RTC_ALRMBR, respectively. Each calendar field can be independently selected through the MSKx bits of the RTC_ALRMAR and RTC_ALRMBR registers, and through the MASKSSx bits of the RTC_ALRMASSR and RTC_ALRMBSSR registers. The alarm interrupts are enabled through the ALRAIE and ALRBIE bits in the RTC_CR register. Alarm A and Alarm B (if enabled by bits OSEL[0:1] in RTC_CR register) can be routed to the RTC_ALARM output. RTC_ALARM polarity can be configured through bit POL the RTC_CR register.

Caution:

If the seconds field is selected (MSK0 bit reset in RTC_ALRMAR or RTC_ALRMBR), the synchronous prescaler division factor set in the RTC_PRER register must be at least 3 to ensure correct behavior.

23.3.4

Periodic auto-wakeup
The periodic wakeup flag is generated by a 16-bit programmable auto-reload down-counter. The wakeup timer range can be extended to 17 bits. The wakeup function is enabled through the WUTE bit in the RTC_CR register. The wakeup timer clock input can be: RTC clock (RTCCLK) divided by 2, 4, 8, or 16. When RTCCLK is LSE(32.768kHz), this allows to configure the wakeup interrupt period from 122 s to 32 s, with a resolution down to 61s. ck_spre (usually 1 Hz internal clock) When ck_spre frequency is 1Hz, this allows to achieve a wakeup time from 1 s to around 36 hours with one-second resolution. This large programmable time range is divided in 2 parts: from 1s to 18 hours when WUCKSEL [2:1] = 10 and from around 18h to 36h when WUCKSEL[2:1] = 11. In this last case 216 is added to the 16-bit counter current value.When the initialization sequence is complete (see Programming the wakeup timer on page 631), the timer starts counting down.When the wakeup function is enabled, the down-counting remains active in low power modes. In addition, when it reaches 0, the WUTF flag is set in the RTC_ISR register, and the wakeup counter is automatically reloaded with its reload value (RTC_WUTR register value). The WUTF flag must then be cleared by software. When the periodic wakeup interrupt is enabled by setting the WUTIE bit in the RTC_CR2 register, it can exit the device from low power modes. The periodic wakeup flag can be routed to the RTC_ALARM output provided it has been enabled through bits OSEL[0:1] of RTC_CR register. RTC_ALARM polarity can be configured through the POL bit in the RTC_CR register. System reset, as well as low power modes (Sleep, Stop and Standby) have no influence on the wakeup timer.

629/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.3.5

RTC initialization and configuration

RTC register access
The RTC registers are 32-bit registers. The APB interface introduces 2 wait-states in RTC register accesses except on read accesses to calendar shadow registers when BYPSHAD=0.

RTC register write protection

After system reset, the RTC registers are protected against parasitic write access with the DBP bit of the PWR power control register (PWR_CR). The DBP bit must be set to enable RTC registers write access. After power-on reset, all the RTC registers are write-protected. Writing to the RTC registers is enabled by writing a key into the Write Protection register, RTC_WPR. The following steps are required to unlock the write protection on all the RTC registers except for RTC_ISR[13:8], RTC_TAFCR, and RTC_BKPxR. 1. 2. Write 0xCA into the RTC_WPR register. Write 0x53 into the RTC_WPR register.

Writing a wrong key reactivates the write protection. The protection mechanism is not affected by system reset.

Calendar initialization and configuration

To program the initial time and date calendar values, including the time format and the prescaler configuration, the following sequence is required: 1. 2. 3. Set INIT bit to 1 in the RTC_ISR register to enter initialization mode. In this mode, the calendar counter is stopped and its value can be updated. Poll INITF bit of in the RTC_ISR register. The initialization phase mode is entered when INITF is set to 1. It takes around 2 RTCCLK clock cycles (due to clock synchronization). To generate a 1 Hz clock for the calendar counter, program first the synchronous prescaler factor in RTC_PRER register, and then program the asynchronous prescaler factor. Even if only one of the two fields needs to be changed, 2 separate write accesses must be performed to the RTC_PRER register. Load the initial time and date values in the shadow registers (RTC_TR and RTC_DR), and configure the time format (12 or 24 hours) through the FMT bit in the RTC_CR register. Exit the initialization mode by clearing the INIT bit. The actual calendar counter value is then automatically loaded and the counting restarts after 4 RTCCLK clock cycles.

4.

5.

When the initialization sequence is complete, the calendar starts counting. Note: After a system reset, the application can read the INITS flag in the RTC_ISR register to check if the calendar has been initialized or not. If this flag equals 0, the calendar has not been initialized since the year field is set at its power-on reset default value (0x00). To read the calendar after initialization, the software must first check that the RSF flag is set in the RTC_ISR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

630/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

Daylight saving time

The daylight saving time management is performed through bits SUB1H, ADD1H, and BKP of the RTC_CR register. Using SUB1H or ADD1H, the software can subtract or add one hour to the calendar in one single operation without going through the initialization procedure. In addition, the software can use the BKP bit to memorize this operation.

Programming the alarm

A similar procedure must be followed to program or update the programmable alarm (Alarm A or Alarm B): 1. 2. Clear ALRAE or ALRBIE in RTC_CR to disable Alarm A or Alarm B. Poll ALRAWF or ALRBWF in RTC_ISR until it is set to make sure the access to alarm registers is allowed. This takes around 2 RTCCLK clock cycles (due to clock synchronization). Program the Alarm A or Alarm B registers (RTC_ALRMASSR/RTC_ALRMAR or RTC_ALRMBSSR/RTC_ALRMBR). Set ALRAE or ALRBIE in the RTC_CR register to enable Alarm A or Alarm B again.

3. 4. Note:

Each change of the RTC_CR register is taken into account after around 2 RTCCLK clock cycles due to clock synchronization.

Programming the wakeup timer

The following sequence is required to configure or change the wakeup timer auto-reload value (WUT[15:0] in RTC_WUTR): 1. 2. Clear WUTE in RTC_CR to disable the wakeup timer. Poll WUTWF until it is set in RTC_ISR to make sure the access to wakeup auto-reload counter and to WUCKSEL[2:0] bits is allowed. It takes around 2 RTCCLK clock cycles (due to clock synchronization). Program the wakeup auto-reload value WUT[15:0], and the wakeup clock selection (WUCKSEL[2:0] bits in RTC_CR).Set WUTE in RTC_CR to enable the timer again. The wakeup timer restarts down-counting.

3.

23.3.6

Reading the calendar

When BYPSHAD control bit is cleared in the RTC_CR register To read the RTC calendar registers (RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR) properly, the APB1 clock frequency (fPCLK1) must be equal to or greater than seven times the fRTCCLK RTC clock frequency. This ensures a secure behavior of the synchronization mechanism. If the APB1 clock frequency is less than seven times the RTC clock frequency, the software must read the calendar time and date registers twice. If the second read of the RTC_TR gives the same result as the first read, this ensures that the data is correct. Otherwise a third read access must be done. In any case the APB1 clock frequency must never be lower than the RTC clock frequency. The RSF bit is set in RTC_ISR register each time the calendar registers are copied into the RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers. The copy is performed every two RTCCLK cycles. To ensure consistency between the 3 values, reading either RTC_SSR or

631/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC) RTC_TR locks the values in the higher-order calendar shadow registers until RTC_DR is read. In case the software makes read accesses to the calendar in a time interval smaller than 2 RTCCLK periods: RSF must be cleared by software after the first calendar read, and then the software must wait until RSF is set before reading again the RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR registers. After waking up from low power mode (Stop or Standby), RSF must be cleared by software. The software must then wait until it is set again before reading the RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR registers. The RSF bit must be cleared after wakeup and not before entering low power mode.

Note:

After a system reset, the software must wait until RSF is set before reading the RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR registers. Indeed, a system reset resets the shadow registers to their default values. After an initialization (refer to Calendar initialization and configuration on page 630): the software must wait until RSF is set before reading the RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR registers. After synchronization (refer to Section 23.3.8: RTC synchronization): the software must wait until RSF is set before reading the RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR registers.

When the BYPSHAD control bit is set in the RTC_CR register (bypass shadow registers)
Reading the calendar registers gives the values from the calendar counters directly, thus eliminating the need to wait for the RSF bit to be set. This is especially useful after exiting from low power modes (STOP or Standby), since the shadow registers are not updated during these modes. When the BYPSHAD bit is set to 1, the results of the different registers might not be coherent with each other if an RTCCLK edge occurs between two read accesses to the registers. Additionally, the value of one of the registers may be incorrect if an RTCCLK edge occurs during the read operation. The software must read all the registers twice, and then compare the results to confirm that the data is coherent and correct. Alternatively, the software can just compare the two results of the least-significant calendar register. Note: While BYPSHAD=1, instructions which read the calendar registers require one extra APB cycle to complete.

23.3.7

Resetting the RTC

The calendar shadow registers (RTC_SSR, RTC_TR and RTC_DR) and some bits of the RTC status register (RTC_ISR) are reset to their default values by all available system reset sources. On the contrary, the following registers are reset to their default values by a power-on reset and are not affected by a system reset: the RTC current calendar registers, the RTC control register (RTC_CR), the prescaler register (RTC_PRER), the RTC calibration registers (RTC_CALIBR or RTC_CALR), the RTC shift register (RTC_SHIFTR), the RTC timestamp registers (RTC_TSSSR, RTC_TSTR and RTC_TSDR), the RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register (RTC_TAFCR), the RTC backup registers (RTC_BKPxR), the wakeup timer register (RTC_WUTR), the Alarm A and Alarm B registers (RTC_ALRMASSR/RTC_ALRMAR and RTC_ALRMBSSR/RTC_ALRMBR).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

632/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

In addition, the RTC keeps on running under system reset if the reset source is different from the power-on reset one. When a power-on reset occurs, the RTC is stopped and all the RTC registers are set to their reset values.

23.3.8

RTC synchronization
The RTC can be synchronized to a remote clock with a high degree of precision. After reading the sub-second field (RTC_SSR or RTC_TSSSR), a calculation can be made of the precise offset between the times being maintained by the remote clock and the RTC. The RTC can then be adjusted to eliminate this offset by shifting its clock by a fraction of a second using RTC_SHIFTR. RTC_SSR contains the value of the synchronous prescalers counter. This allows one to calculate the exact time being maintained by the RTC down to a resolution of 1 / (PREDIV_S + 1) seconds. As a consequence, the resolution can be improved by increasing the synchronous prescaler value (PREDIV_S[14:0]. The maximum resolution allowed (30.52 s with a 32768 Hz clock) is obtained with PREDIV_S set to 0x7FFF. However, increasing PREDIV_S means that PREDIV_A must be decreased in order to maintain the synchronous prescalers output at 1 Hz. In this way, the frequency of the asynchronous prescalers output increases, which may increase the RTC dynamic consumption. The RTC can be finely adjusted using the RTC shift control register (RTC_SHIFTR). Writing to RTC_SHIFTR can shift (either delay or advance) the clock by up to a second with a resolution of 1 / (PREDIV_S + 1) seconds. The shift operation consists of adding the SUBFS[14:0] value to the synchronous prescaler counter SS[15:0]: this will delay the clock. If at the same time the ADD1S bit is set, this results in adding one second and at the same time subtracting a fraction of second, so this will advance the clock.

Caution:

Before initiating a shift operation, the user must check that SS[15] = 0 in order to ensure that no overflow will occur. As soon as a shift operation is initiated by a write to the RTC_SHIFTR register, the SHPF flag is set by hardware to indicate that a shift operation is pending. This bit is cleared by hardware as soon as the shift operation has completed.

Caution:

This synchronization feature is not compatible with the reference clock detection feature: firmware must not write to RTC_SHIFTR when REFCKON=1.

23.3.9

RTC reference clock detection

The RTC calendar update can be synchronized to a reference clock RTC_REFIN, usually the mains (50 or 60 Hz). The RTC_REFIN reference clock should have a higher precision than the 32.768 kHz LSE clock. When the RTC_REFIN detection is enabled (REFCKON bit of RTC_CR set to 1), the calendar is still clocked by the LSE, and RTC_REFIN is used to compensate for the imprecision of the calendar update frequency (1 Hz). Each 1 Hz clock edge is compared to the nearest reference clock edge (if one is found within a given time window). In most cases, the two clock edges are properly aligned. When the 1 Hz clock becomes misaligned due to the imprecision of the LSE clock, the RTC shifts the 1 Hz clock a bit so that future 1 Hz clock edges are aligned. Thanks to this mechanism, the calendar becomes as precise as the reference clock. The RTC detects if the reference clock source is present by using the 256 Hz clock (ck_apre) generated from the 32.768 kHz quartz. The detection is performed during a time

633/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC) window around each of the calendar updates (every 1 s). The window equals 7 ck_apre periods when detecting the first reference clock edge. A smaller window of 3 ck_apre periods is used for subsequent calendar updates. Each time the reference clock is detected in the window, the asynchronous prescaler which outputs the ck_apre clock is forced to reload. This has no effect when the reference clock and the 1 Hz clock are aligned because the prescaler is being reloaded at the same moment. When the clocks are not aligned, the reload shifts future 1 Hz clock edges a little for them to be aligned with the reference clock. If the reference clock halts (no reference clock edge occurred during the 3 ck_apre window), the calendar is updated continuously based solely on the LSE clock. The RTC then waits for the reference clock using a large 7 ck_apre period detection window centered on the ck_spre edge. When the reference clock detection is enabled, PREDIV_A and PREDIV_S must be set to their default values:

PREDIV_A = 0x007F PREVID_S = 0x00FF

Note: Caution:

The reference clock detection is not available in Standby mode. The reference clock detection feature cannot be used in conjunction with the coarse digital calibration: RTC_CALIBR must be kept at 0x0000 0000 when REFCKON=1.

23.3.10

RTC coarse digital calibration

Two digital calibration methods are available: coarse and smooth calibration. To perform coarse calibration refer to Section 23.6.7: RTC calibration register (RTC_CALIBR). The two calibration methods are not intended to be used together, the application must select one of the two methods. Coarse calibration is provided for compatibly reasons. To perform smooth calibration refer to Section 23.3.11: RTC smooth digital calibration and the Section 23.6.16: RTC calibration register (RTC_CALR) The coarse digital calibration can be used to compensate crystal inaccuracy by adding (positive calibration) or masking (negative calibration) clock cycles at the output of the asynchronous prescaler (ck_apre). Positive and negative calibration are selected by setting the DCS bit in RTC_CALIBR register to 0 and 1, respectively. When positive calibration is enabled (DCS = 0), 2 ck_apre cycles are added every minute (around 15360 ck_apre cycles) for 2xDC minutes. This causes the calendar to be updated sooner, thereby adjusting the effective RTC frequency to be a bit higher. When negative calibration is enabled (DCS = 1), 1 ck_apre cycle is removed every minute (around 15360 ck_apre cycles) for 2xDC minutes. This causes the calendar to be updated later, thereby adjusting the effective RTC frequency to be a bit lower. DC is configured through bits DC[4:0] of RTC_CALIBR register. This number ranges from 0 to 31 corresponding to a time interval (2xDC) ranging from 0 to 62. The coarse digital calibration can be configured only in initialization mode, and starts when the INIT bit is cleared. The full calibration cycle lasts 64 minutes. The first 2xDC minutes of the 64 -minute cycle are modified as just described.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

634/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

Negative calibration can be performed with a resolution of about 2 ppm while positive calibration can be performed with a resolution of about 4 ppm. The maximum calibration ranges from 63 ppm to 126 ppm. The calibration can be performed either on the LSE or on the HSE clock. Caution: Digital calibration may not work correctly if PREDIV_A < 6.

Case of RTCCLK=32.768 kHz and PREDIV_A+1=128

The following description assumes that ck_apre frequency is 256 Hz obtained with an LSE clock nominal frequency of 32.768 kHz, and PREDIV_A set to 127 (default value). The ck_spre clock frequency is only modified during the first 2xDC minutes of the 64-minute cycle. For example, when DC equals 1, only the first 2 minutes are modified. This means that the first 2xDC minutes of each 64-minute cycle have, once per minute, one second either shortened by 256 or lengthened by 128 RTCCLK cycles, given that each ck_apre cycle represents 128 RTCCLK cycles (with PREDIV_A+1=128). Therefore each calibration step has the effect of adding 512 or subtracting 256 oscillator cycles for every 125829120 RTCCLK cycles (64min x 60 s/min x 32768 cycles/s). This is equivalent to +4.069 ppm or-2.035 ppm per calibration step. As a result, the calibration resolution is +10.5 or 5.27 seconds per month, and the total calibration ranges from +5.45 to 2.72 minutes per month. In order to measure the clock deviation, a 512 Hz clock is output for calibration.Refer to Section 23.3.14: Calibration clock output.

23.3.11

RTC smooth digital calibration

RTC frequency can be digitally calibrated with a resolution of about 0.954 ppm with a range from -487.1 ppm to +488.5 ppm. The correction of the frequency is performed using series of small adjustments (adding and/or subtracting individual RTCCLK pulses). These adjustments are fairly well distributed so that the RTC is well calibrated even when observed over short durations of time. The smooth digital calibration is performed during a cycle of about 220 RTCCLK pulses, or 32 seconds when the input frequency is 32768 Hz. The smooth calibration register (RTC_CALR) specifies the number of RTCCLK clock cycles to be masked during the 32-second cycle: Setting the bit CALM[0] to 1 causes exactly one pulse to be masked during the 32second cycle.

Setting CALM[1] to 1 causes two additional cycles to be masked Setting SMC[2] to 1 causes four additional cycles to be masked and so on up to SMC[8] set to 1 which causes 256 clocks to be masked.

While CALM allows the RTC frequency to be reduced by up to 487.1 ppm with fine resolution, the bit CALP can be used to increase the frequency by 488.5 ppm. Setting CALP to 1 effectively inserts an extra RTCCLK pulse every 211 RTCCLK cycles, which means that 512 clocks are added during every 32-second cycle. Using CALM together with CALP, an offset ranging from -511 to +512 RTCCLK cycles can be added during the 32-second cycle, which translates to a calibration range of -487.1 ppm to +488.5 ppm with a resolution of about 0.954 ppm.

635/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC) The formula to calculate the effective calibrated frequency (FCAL) given the input frequency (FRTCCLK) is as follows: FCAL = FRTCCLK x [ 1 + (CALP x 512 - CALM) / (220 + CALM - CALP x 512) ]

Calibration when PREDIV_A<3

The CALP bit can not be set to 1 when the asynchronous prescaler value (PREDIV_A bits in RTC_PRER register) is less than 3. If CALP was already set to 1 and PREDIV_A bits are set to a value less than 3, CALP is ignored and the calibration operates as if CALP was equal to 0. To perform a calibration with PREDIV_A less than 3, the synchronous prescaler value (PREDIV_S) should be reduced so that each second is accelerated by 8 RTCCLK clock cycles, which is equivalent to adding 256 clock cycles every 32 seconds. As a result, between 255 and 256 clock pulses (corresponding to a calibration range from 243.3 to 244.1 ppm) can effectively be added during each 32-second cycle using only the CALM bits. With a nominal RTCCLK frequency of 32768 Hz, when PREDIV_A equals 1 (division factor of 2), PREDIV_S should be set to 16379 rather than 16383 (4 less). The only other interesting case is when PREDIV_A equals 0, PREDIV_S should be set to 32759 rather than 32767 (8 less). If PREDIV_S is reduced in this way, the formula given the effective frequency of the calibrated input clock is as follows: FCAL = FRTCCLK x [ 1 + (256 - CALM) / (220 + CALM - 256) ] In this case, CALM[7:0] equals 0x100 (the midpoint of the CALM range) is the correct setting if RTCCLK is exactly 32768.00 Hz.

Verifying the RTC calibration

RTC precision is performed by measuring the precise frequency of RTCCLK and calculating the correct CALM value and CALP values. An optional 1 Hz output is provided to allow applications to measure and verify the RTC precision. Measuring the precise frequency of the RTC over a limited interval can result in a measurement error of up to 2 RTCCLK clock cycles over the measurement period, depending on how the digital calibration cycle is aligned with the measurement period. However, this measurement error can be eliminated if the measurement period is the same length as the calibration cycle period. In this case, the only error observed is the error due to the resolution of the digital calibration.

By default, the calibration cycle period is 32 seconds. Using this mode and measuring the accuracy of the 1 Hz output over exactly 32 seconds guarantees that the measure is within 0.477 ppm (0.5 RTCCLK cycles over 32 seconds, due to the limitation of the calibration resolution).

CALW16 bit of the RTC_CALR register can be set to 1 to force a 16- second calibration cycle period. In this case, the RTC precision can be measured during 16 seconds with a maximum error of 0.954 ppm (0.5 RTCCLK cycles over 16 seconds). However, since the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

636/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

calibration resolution is reduced, the long term RTC precision is also reduced to 0.954 ppm: CALM[0] bit is stuck at 0 when CALW16 is set to 1.

CALW8 bit of the RTC_CALR register can be set to 1 to force a 8- second calibration cycle period. In this case, the RTC precision can be measured during 8 seconds with a maximum error of 1.907 ppm (0.5 RTCCLK cycles over 8s). The long term RTC precision is also reduced to 1.907 ppm: CALM[1:0] bits are stuck at 00 when CALW8 is set to 1.

Re-calibration on-the-fly
The calibration register (RTC_CALR) can be updated on-the-fly while RTC_ISR/INITF=0, by using the follow process: 1. 2. 3. Poll the RTC_ISR/RECALPF (re-calibration pending flag). If it is set to 0, write a new value to RTC_CALR, if necessary. RECALPF is then automatically set to 1 Within three ck_apre cycles after the write operation to RTC_CALR, the new calibration settings take effect.

23.3.12

Timestamp function
Timestamp is enabled by setting the TSE bit of RTC_CR register to 1. The calendar is saved in the timestamp registers (RTC_TSSSR, RTC_TSTR, RTC_TSDR) when a timestamp event is detected on the pin to which the TIMESTAMP alternate function is mapped. When a timestamp event occurs, the timestamp flag bit (TSF) in RTC_ISR register is set. By setting the TSIE bit in the RTC_CR register, an interrupt is generated when a timestamp event occurs. If a new timestamp event is detected while the timestamp flag (TSF) is already set, the timestamp overflow flag (TSOVF) flag is set and the timestamp registers (RTC_TSTR and RTC_TSDR) maintain the results of the previous event.

Note:

TSF is set 2 ck_apre cycles after the timestamp event occurs due to synchronization process. There is no delay in the setting of TSOVF. This means that if two timestamp events are close together, TSOVF can be seen as '1' while TSF is still '0'. As a consequence, it is recommended to poll TSOVF only after TSF has been set.

Caution:

If a timestamp event occurs immediately after the TSF bit is supposed to be cleared, then both TSF and TSOVF bits are set. To avoid masking a timestamp event occurring at the same moment, the application must not write 0 into TSF bit unless it has already read it to 1. Optionally, a tamper event can cause a timestamp to be recorded. See the description of the TAMPTS control bit in Section 23.6.17: RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register (RTC_TAFCR). If the timestamp event is on the same pin as a tamper event configured in filtered mode (TAMPFLT set to a non-zero value), the timestamp on tamper detection event mode must be selected by setting TAMPTS='1' in RTC_TAFCR register.

TIMESTAMP alternate function

The TIMESTAMP alternate function (RTC_TS) can be mapped either to RTC_AF1 or to RTC_AF2 depending on the value of the TSINSEL bit in the RTC_TAFCR register (see

637/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC) Section 23.6.17: RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register (RTC_TAFCR)). Mapping the timestamp event on RTC_AF2 is not allowed if RTC_AF1 is used as TAMPER in filtered mode (TAMPFLT set to a non-zero value).

23.3.13

Tamper detection
Two tamper detection inputs are available. They can be configured either for edge detection, or for level detection with filtering.

RTC backup registers

The backup registers (RTC_BKPxR) are twenty 32-bit registers for storing 80 bytes of user application data. They are implemented in the backup domain that remains powered-on by VBAT when the VDD power is switched off. They are not reset by system reset, power-on reset, or when the device wakes up from Standby mode. The backup registers are reset when a tamper detection event occurs (see Section 23.6.20: RTC backup registers (RTC_BKPxR) and Tamper detection initialization on page 638.

Tamper detection initialization

Each tamper detection input is associated with a flag TAMP1F/TAMP2F in the RTC_ISR2 register. Each input can be enabled by setting the corresponding TAMP1E/TAMP2E bits to 1 in the RTC_TAFCR register. A tamper detection event resets all backup registers (RTC_BKPxR). By setting the TAMPIE bit in the RTC_TAFCR register, an interrupt is generated when a tamper detection event occurs.

Timestamp on tamper event

With TAMPTS set to 1 , any tamper event causes a timestamp to occur. In this case, either the TSF bit or the TSOVF bit are set in RTC_ISR, in the same manner as if a normal timestamp event occurs. The affected tamper flag register (TAMP1F, TAMP2F) is set at the same time that TSF or TSOVF is set.

Edge detection on tamper inputs

If the TAMPFLT bits are 00, the TAMPER pins generate tamper detection events (RTC_TAMP[2:1]) when either a rising edge is observed or an falling edge is observed depending on the corresponding TAMPxTRG bit. The internal pull-up resistors on the TAMPER inputs are deactivated when edge detection is selected. Caution: To avoid losing tamper detection events, the signal used for edge detection is logically ANDed with TAMPxE in order to detect a tamper detection event in case it occurs before the TAMPERx pin is enabled.

When TAMPxTRG = 0: if the TAMPERx alternate function is already high before tamper detection is enabled (TAMPxE bit set to 1), a tamper event is detected as soon as TAMPERx is enabled, even if there was no rising edge on TAMPERx after TAMPxE was set. When TAMPxTRG = 1: if the TAMPERx alternate function is already low before tamper detection is enabled, a tamper event is detected as soon as TAMPERx is enabled (even if there was no falling edge on TAMPERx after TAMPxE was set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

638/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

After a tamper event has been detected and cleared, the TAMPERx alternate function should be disabled and then re-enabled (TAMPxE set to 1) before re-programming the backup registers (RTC_BKPxR). This prevents the application from writing to the backup registers while the TAMPERx value still indicates a tamper detection. This is equivalent to a level detection on the TAMPERx alternate function. Note: Tamper detection is still active when VDD power is switched off. To avoid unwanted resetting of the backup registers, the pin to which the TAMPER alternate function is mapped should be externally tied to the correct level.

Level detection with filtering on tamper inputs

Level detection with filtering is performed by setting TAMPFLT to a non-zero value. A tamper detection event is generated when either 2, 4, or 8 (depending on TAMPFLT) consecutive samples are observed at the level designated by the TAMPxTRG bits (TAMP1TRG/TAMP2TRG). The TAMPER inputs are pre-charged through the I/O internal pull-up resistance before its state is sampled, unless disabled by setting TAMPPUDIS to 1,The duration of the precharge is determined by the TAMPPRCH bits, allowing for larger capacitances on the tamper inputs. The trade-off between tamper detection latency and power consumption through the pull-up can be optimized by using TAMPFREQ to determine the frequency of the sampling for level detection. Note: Refer to the datasheets for the electrical characteristics of the pull-up resistors.

TAMPER alternate function detection

The TAMPER1 alternate function (RTC_TAMP1) can be mapped either to RTC_AF1(PC13) or RTC_AF2 (PI8) depending on the value of TAMP1INSEL bit in RTC_TAFCR register (see Section 23.6.17: RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register (RTC_TAFCR)). TAMPE bit must be cleared when TAMP1INSEL is modified to avoid unwanted setting of TAMPF. The TAMPER 2 alternate function corresponds to RTC_TAMP2 pin.

23.3.14

Calibration clock output

When the COE bit is set to 1 in the RTC_CR register, a reference clock is provided on the RTC_CALIB device output. If the COSEL bit in the RTC_CR register is reset and PREDIV_A = 0x7F, the RTC_CALIB frequency is fRTCCLK/64. This corresponds to a calibration output at 512 Hz for an RTCCLK frequency at 32.768 kHz. The RTC_CALIB output is not impacted by the calibration value programmed in RTC_CALIBR register. The RTC_CALIB duty cycle is irregular: there is a light jitter on falling edges. It is therefore recommended to use rising edges. If COSEL is set and PREDIV_S+1 is a non-zero multiple of 256 (i.e: PREDIV_S[7:0] = 0xFF), the RTC_CALIB frequency is fRTCCLK/(256 * (PREDIV_A+1)). This corresponds to a calibration output at 1 Hz for prescaler default values (PREDIV_A = Ox7F, PREDIV_S = 0xFF), with an RTCCLK frequency at 32.768 kHz.

Calibration alternate function output

When the COE bit in the RTC_CR register is set to 1, the calibration alternate function (RTC_CALIB) is enabled on RTC_AF1.

639/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.3.15

Alarm output
Three functions can be selected on Alarm output: ALRAF, ALRBF and WUTF. These functions reflect the contents of the corresponding flags in the RTC_ISR register. The OSEL[1:0] control bits in the RTC_CR register are used to activate the alarm alternate function output (RTC_ALARM) in RTC_AF1, and to select the function which is output on RTC_ALARM. The polarity of the output is determined by the POL control bit in RTC_CR so that the opposite of the selected flag bit is output when POL is set to 1.

Alarm alternate function output

RTC_ALARM can be configured in output open drain or output push-pull using the control bit ALARMOUTTYPE in the RTC_TAFCR register. Note: Once RTC_ALARM is enabled, it has priority over RTC_CALIB (COE bit is don't care on RTC_AF1). When RTC_CALIB or RTC_ALARM is selected, RTC_AF1 is automatically configured in output alternate function.

23.4

RTC and low power modes

Table 97.
Mode Sleep

Effect of low power modes on RTC

Description No effect RTC interrupts cause the device to exit the Sleep mode. The RTC remains active when the RTC clock source is LSE or LSI. RTC alarm, RTC tamper event, RTC time stamp event, and RTC Wakeup cause the device to exit the Stop mode.

Stop

The RTC remains active when the RTC clock source is LSE or LSI. RTC alarm, RTC Standby tamper event, RTC time stamp event, and RTC Wakeup cause the device to exit the Standby mode.

23.5

RTC interrupts
All RTC interrupts are connected to the EXTI controller. To enable the RTC Alarm interrupt, the following sequence is required: 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Configure and enable the EXTI Line 17 in interrupt mode and select the rising edge sensitivity. Configure and enable the RTC_Alarm IRQ channel in the NVIC. Configure the RTC to generate RTC alarms (Alarm A or Alarm B). Configure and enable the EXTI Line 22 in interrupt mode and select the rising edge sensitivity. Configure and enable the RTC_WKUP IRQ channel in the NVIC. Configure the RTC to generate the RTC wakeup timer event.

To enable the RTC Wakeup interrupt, the following sequence is required:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

640/1422

Real-time clock (RTC) To enable the RTC Tamper interrupt, the following sequence is required: 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.

RM0090

Configure and enable the EXTI Line 21 in interrupt mode and select the rising edge sensitivity. Configure and Enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC. Configure the RTC to detect the RTC tamper event. Configure and enable the EXTI Line 21 in interrupt mode and select the rising edge sensitivity. Configure and Enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC. Configure the RTC to detect the RTC timestamp event. Interrupt control bits
Interrupt event Event flag ALRAF ALRBF WUTF TSF TAMP1F TAMP2F Enable control bit ALRAIE ALRBIE WUTIE TSIE TAMPIE TAMPIE Exit the Sleep mode yes yes yes yes yes yes Exit the Stop mode yes(1) yes(1) yes(1) yes(1) yes(1) yes(1) Exit the Standby mode yes(1) yes(1) yes(1) yes(1) yes(1) yes(1)

To enable the RTC TimeStamp interrupt, the following sequence is required:

Table 98.

Alarm A Alarm B Wakeup TimeStamp Tamper1 detection Tamper2 detection(2)

1. Wakeup from STOP and Standby modes is possible only when the RTC clock source is LSE or LSI. 2. If RTC_TAMPER2 pin is present. Refer to device datasheet pinout.

641/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6

RTC registers
Refer to Section 1.1 of the reference manual for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers can be accessed by words (32 bits).

23.6.1

RTC time register (RTC_TR)

The RTC_TR is the calendar time shadow register. This register must be written in initialization mode only. Refer to Calendar initialization and configuration on page 630 and Reading the calendar on page 631. Address offset: 0x00 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: 0x0000 0000 when BYPSHAD = 0. Not affected when BYPSHAD = 1

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22 PM rw

21

20

19

18

17

16

HT[1:0] rw 5 ST[2:0] rw 4 rw 3

HU[3:0] rw 2 SU[3:0] rw 1 rw 0

15 Reserv ed

14

13 MNT[2:0]

12

11

10

7 Reserv ed

MNU[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31-24 Reserved Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 PM: AM/PM notation 0: AM or 24-hour format 1: PM Bits 21:20 HT[1:0]: Hour tens in BCD format Bit 16:16 HU[3:0]: Hour units in BCD format Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 14:12 MNT[2:0]: Minute tens in BCD format Bit 11:8 MNU[3:0]: Minute units in BCD format Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:4 ST[2:0]: Second tens in BCD format Bit 3:0 SU[3:0]: Second units in BCD format

Note:

This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

642/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23.6.2

RTC date register (RTC_DR)

The RTC_DR is the calendar date shadow register. This register must be written in initialization mode only. Refer to Calendar initialization and configuration on page 630 and Reading the calendar on page 631. Address offset: 0x04 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 2101 System reset: 0x0000 2101 when BYPSHAD = 0. Not affected when BYPSHAD = 1.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

YT[3:0] Reserved rw 15 14 WDU[2:0] rw rw rw 13 12 MT rw rw 11 10 MU[3:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 rw 6 rw 5 DT[1:0] rw 4 rw 3

YU[3:0] rw 2 DU[3:0] rw rw rw rw 1 rw 0

Bits 31-24 Reserved Bits 23:20 YT[3:0]: Year tens in BCD format Bits 19:16 YU[3:0]: Year units in BCD format Bits 15:13 WDU[2:0]: Week day units 000: forbidden 001: Monday ... 111: Sunday Bit 12 MT: Month tens in BCD format Bits 11:8 MU: Month units in BCD format Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 5:4 DT[1:0]: Date tens in BCD format Bits 3:0 DU[3:0]: Date units in BCD format

Note:

This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

643/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6.3

RTC control register (RTC_CR)

Address offset: 0x08 Power-on value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 COE

22

21

20 POL rw 4

19 COSEL rw 3

18 BKP rw 2

17

16

OSEL[1:0] rw 6 FMT rw rw 5

SUB1H ADD1H w 1 w 0

Reserved rw 15 TSIE rw 14 13 12 11 TSE rw 10 WUTE rw 9 ALRBI E rw 8 ALRAE rw 7 DCE rw

WUTIE ALRBIE ALRAIE rw rw rw

BYPS REFCKON TSEDGE HAD rw rw rw rw

WUCKSEL[2:0] rw rw

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 COE: Calibration output enable This bit enables the RTC_CALIB output 0: Calibration output disabled 1: Calibration output enabled Bits 22:21 OSEL[1:0]: Output selection These bits are used to select the flag to be routed to RTC_ALARM output 00: Output disabled 01: Alarm A output enabled 10:Alarm B output enabled 11: Wakeup output enabled Bit 20 POL: Output polarity This bit is used to configure the polarity of RTC_ALARM output 0: The pin is high when ALRAF/ALRBF/WUTF is asserted (depending on OSEL[1:0]) 1: The pin is low when ALRAF/ALRBF/WUTF is asserted (depending on OSEL[1:0]). Bit 19 COSEL: Calibration output selection When COE=1, this bit selects which signal is output on RTC_CALIB. 0: Calibration output is 512 Hz 1: Calibration output is 1 Hz These frequencies are valid for RTCCLK at 32.768 kHz and prescalers at their default values (PREDIV_A=127 and PREDIV_S=255). Refer to Section 23.3.14: Calibration clock output Bit 18 BKP: Backup This bit can be written by the user to memorize whether the daylight saving time change has been performed or not. Bit 17 SUB1H: Subtract 1 hour (winter time change) When this bit is set outside initialization mode, 1 hour is subtracted to the calendar time if the current hour is not 0. This bit is always read as 0. Setting this bit has no effect when current hour is 0. 0: No effect 1: Subtracts 1 hour to the current time. This can be used for winter time change.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

644/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

Bit 16 ADD1H: Add 1 hour (summer time change) When this bit is set outside initialization mode, 1 hour is added to the calendar time. This bit is always read as 0. 0: No effect 1: Adds 1 hour to the current time. This can be used for summer time change Bit 15 TSIE: Timestamp interrupt enable 0: Timestamp Interrupt disable 1: Timestamp Interrupt enable Bit 14 WUTIE: Wakeup timer interrupt enable 0: Wakeup timer interrupt disabled 1: Wakeup timer interrupt enabled Bit 13 ALRBIE: Alarm B interrupt enable 0: Alarm B Interrupt disable 1: Alarm B Interrupt enable Bit 12 ALRAIE: Alarm A interrupt enable 0: Alarm A interrupt disabled 1: Alarm A interrupt enabled Bit 11 TSE: Time stamp enable 0: Time stamp disable 1: Time stamp enable Bit 10 WUTE: Wakeup timer enable 0: Wakeup timer disabled 1: Wakeup timer enabled Bit 9 ALRBIE: Alarm B enable 0: Alarm B disabled 1: Alarm B enabled Bit 8 ALRAE: Alarm A enable 0: Alarm A disabled 1: Alarm A enabled Bit 7 DCE: Coarse digital calibration enable 0: Digital calibration disabled 1: Digital calibration enabled PREDIV_A must be 6 or greater Bit 6 FMT: Hour format 0: 24 hour/day format 1: AM/PM hour format Bit 5 BYPSHAD: Bypass the shadow registers 0: Calendar values (when reading from RTC_SSR, RTC_TR, and RTC_DR) are taken from the shadow registers, which are updated once every two RTCCLK cycles. 1: Calendar values (when reading from RTC_SSR, RTC_TR, and RTC_DR) are taken directly from the calendar counters. Note: If the frequency of the APB1 clock is less than seven times the frequency of RTCCLK, BYPSHAD must be set to 1. Bit 4 REFCKON: Reference clock detection enable (50 or 60 Hz) 0: Reference clock detection disabled 1: Reference clock detection enabled Note: PREDIV_S must be 0x00FF.

645/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

Bit 3 TSEDGE: Timestamp event active edge 0: TIMESTAMP rising edge generates a timestamp event 1: TIMESTAMP falling edge generates a timestamp event TSE must be reset when TSEDGE is changed to avoid unwanted TSF setting Bits 2:0 WUCKSEL[2:0]: Wakeup clock selection 000: RTC/16 clock is selected 001: RTC/8 clock is selected 010: RTC/4 clock is selected 011: RTC/2 clock is selected 10x: ck_spre (usually 1 Hz) clock is selected 11x: ck_spre (usually 1 Hz) clock is selected and 216 is added to the WUT counter value (see note below)

Note:

WUT = Wakeup unit counter value. WUT = (0x0000 to 0xFFFF) + 0x10000 added when WUCKSEL[2:1 = 11]. Bits 7, 6 and 4 of this register can be written in initialization mode only (RTC_ISR/INITF = 1). Bits 2 to 0 of this register can be written only when RTC_CR WUTE bit = 0 and RTC_ISR WUTWF bit = 1. It is recommended not to change the hour during the calendar hour increment as it could mask the incrementation of the calendar hour. ADD1H and SUB1H changes are effective in the next second. This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

23.6.4

RTC initialization and status register (RTC_ISR)

Address offset: 0x0C Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0007 System reset value: Not affected except INIT, INITF and RSF which are cleared to 0.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16 RECAL PF

Reserved 15 Res. 14 TAMP 2F rc_w0 13 TAMP 1F rc_w0 12 TSOVF rc_w0 11 TSF rc_w0 10 WUTF rc_w0 9 8 7 INIT rw 6 INITF r 5 RSF rc_w0 4 INITS r 3 SHPF rc_w0 2 WUT WF r 1 ALRB WF r

r 0 ALRA WF r

ALRBF ALRAF rc_w0 rc_w0

Bits 31:17 Reserved Bit 16 RECALPF: Recalibration pending Flag The RECALPF status flag is automatically set to 1 when software writes to the RTC_CALR register, indicating that the RTC_CALR register is blocked. When the new calibration settings are taken into account, this bit returns to 0. Refer to Section : Re-calibration on-thefly. Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

646/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

Bit 14 TAMP2F: TAMPER2 detection flag This flag is set by hardware when a tamper detection event is detected on tamper input 2. It is cleared by software writing 0. Bit 13 TAMP1F: Tamper detection flag This flag is set by hardware when a tamper detection event is detected. It is cleared by software writing 0. Bit 12 TSOVF: Timestamp overflow flag This flag is set by hardware when a timestamp event occurs while TSF is already set. This flag is cleared by software by writing 0. It is recommended to check and then clear TSOVF only after clearing the TSF bit. Otherwise, an overflow might not be noticed if a timestamp event occurs immediately before the TSF bit is cleared. Bit 11 TSF: Timestamp flag This flag is set by hardware when a timestamp event occurs. This flag is cleared by software by writing 0. Bit 10 WUTF: Wakeup timer flag This flag is set by hardware when the wakeup auto-reload counter reaches 0. This flag is cleared by software by writing 0. This flag must be cleared by software at least 1.5 RTCCLK periods before WUTF is set to 1 again. Bit 9 ALRBF: Alarm B flag This flag is set by hardware when the time/date registers (RTC_TR and RTC_DR) match the Alarm B register (RTC_ALRMBR). This flag is cleared by software by writing 0. Bit 8 ALRAF: Alarm A flag This flag is set by hardware when the time/date registers (RTC_TR and RTC_DR) match the Alarm A register (RTC_ALRMAR). This flag is cleared by software by writing 0. Bit 7 INIT: Initialization mode 0: Free running mode 1: Initialization mode used to program time and date register (RTC_TR and RTC_DR), and prescaler register (RTC_PRER). Counters are stopped and start counting from the new value when INIT is reset. Bit 6 INITF: Initialization flag When this bit is set to 1, the RTC is in initialization state, and the time, date and prescaler registers can be updated. 0: Calendar registers update is not allowed 1: Calendar registers update is allowed. Bit 5 RSF: Registers synchronization flag This bit is set by hardware each time the calendar registers are copied into the shadow registers (RTC_SSRx, RTC_TRx and RTC_DRx). This bit is cleared by hardware in initialization mode, while a shift operation is pending (SHPF=1), or when in bypass shadow register mode (BYPSHAD=1). This bit can also be cleared by software. 0: Calendar shadow registers not yet synchronized 1: Calendar shadow registers synchronized

647/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

Bit 4 INITS: Initialization status flag This bit is set by hardware when the calendar year field is different from 0 (power-on reset state). 0: Calendar has not been initialized 1: Calendar has been initialized Bit 3 SHPF: Shift operation pending 0: No shift operation is pending 1: A shift operation is pending This flag is set by hardware as soon as a shift operation is initiated by a write to the RTC_SHIFTR. It is cleared by hardware when the corresponding shift operation has been executed. Writing to SHPF has no effect. Bit 2 WUTWF: Wakeup timer write flag This bit is set by hardware when the wakeup timer values can be changed, after the WUTE bit has been set to 0 in RTC_CR. 0: Wakeup timer configuration update not allowed 1: Wakeup timer configuration update allowed Bit 1 ALRBWF: Alarm B write flag This bit is set by hardware when Alarm B values can be changed, after the ALRBIE bit has been set to 0 in RTC_CR. It is cleared by hardware in initialization mode. 0: Alarm B update not allowed 1: Alarm B update allowed. Bit 0 ALRAWF: Alarm A write flag This bit is set by hardware when Alarm A values can be changed, after the ALRAE bit has been set to 0 in RTC_CR. It is cleared by hardware in initialization mode. 0: Alarm A update not allowed 1: Alarm A update allowed

Note:

The ALRAF, ALRBF, WUTF and TSF bits are cleared 2 APB clock cycles after programming them to 0. This register is write protected (except for RTC_ISR[13:8] bits). The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

23.6.5

RTC prescaler register (RTC_PRER)

Address offset: 0x10 Power-on reset value: 0x007F 00FF System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19 PREDIV_A[6:0]

18

17

16

rw 15 Res. rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 PREDIV_S[14:0] 6

rw 5

rw 4

rw 3

rw 2

rw 1

rw 0

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

648/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

Bits 31:24 Reserved Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:16 PREDIV_A[6:0]: Asynchronous prescaler factor This is the asynchronous division factor: ck_apre frequency = RTCCLK frequency/(PREDIV_A+1) Note: PREDIV_A [6:0]= 000000 is a prohibited value. Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 14:0 PREDIV_S[14:0]: Synchronous prescaler factor This is the synchronous division factor: ck_spre frequency = ck_apre frequency/(PREDIV_S+1)

Note:

This register must be written in initialization mode only. The initialization must be performed in two separate write accesses. Refer to Calendar initialization and configuration on page 630 This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

23.6.6

RTC wakeup timer register (RTC_WUTR)

Address offset: 0x14 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 FFFF System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

WUT[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved Bits 15:0 WUT[15:0]: Wakeup auto-reload value bits When the wakeup timer is enabled (WUTE set to 1), the WUTF flag is set every (WUT[15:0] + 1) ck_wut cycles. The ck_wut period is selected through WUCKSEL[2:0] bits of the RTC_CR register When WUCKSEL[2] = 1, the wakeup timer becomes 17-bits and WUCKSEL[1] effectively becomes WUT[16] the most-significant bit to be reloaded into the timer. Note: The first assertion of WUTF occurs (WUT+1) ck_wut cycles after WUTE is set. Setting WUT[15:0] to 0x0000 with WUCKSEL[2:0] =011 (RTCCLK/2) is forbidden.

Note:

This register can be written only when WUTWF is set to 1 in RTC_ISR. This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

649/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6.7

RTC calibration register (RTC_CALIBR)

Address offset: 0x18 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 DCS Reserved rw Reserved rw rw rw rw rw 6 5 4 3 2 DC[4:0] 1 0

Bits 31:8 Reserved Bit 7 DCS: Digital calibration sign 0: Positive calibration: calendar update frequency is increased 1: Negative calibration: calendar update frequency is decreased Bits 6:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 4:0 DC[4:0]: Digital calibration DCS = 0 (positive calibration) 00000: + 0 ppm 00001: + 4 ppm (rounded value) 00010: + 8 ppm (rounded value) .. 11111: + 126 ppm (rounded value) DCS = 1 (negative calibration) 00000: 0 ppm 00001: 2 ppm (rounded value) 00010: 4 ppm (rounded value) .. 11111: 63 ppm (rounded value) Refer to Case of RTCCLK=32.768 kHz and PREDIV_A+1=128 on page 635 for the exact step value.

Note:

This register can be written in initialization mode only (RTC_ISR/INITF = 1). This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

650/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23.6.8

RTC alarm A register (RTC_ALRMAR)

Address offset: 0x1C Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31 MSK4 rw 15 MSK2 rw

30 WDSEL rw 14

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 MSK3

22 PM rw 6

21

20

19

18

17

16

DT[1:0] rw 13 MNT[2:0] rw 12 rw 11

DU[3:0] rw 10 rw 9 rw 8

HT[1:0] rw 5 ST[2:0] rw 4 rw 3

HU[3:0] rw 2 SU[3:0] rw 1 rw 0

rw 7 MSK1

MNU[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 MSK4: Alarm A date mask 0: Alarm A set if the date/day match 1: Date/day dont care in Alarm A comparison Bit 30 WDSEL: Week day selection 0: DU[3:0] represents the date units 1: DU[3:0] represents the week day. DT[1:0] is dont care. Bits 29:28 DT[1:0]: Date tens in BCD format. Bits 27:24 DU[3:0]: Date units or day in BCD format. Bit 23 MSK3: Alarm A hours mask 0: Alarm A set if the hours match 1: Hours dont care in Alarm A comparison Bit 22 PM: AM/PM notation 0: AM or 24-hour format 1: PM Bits 21:20 HT[1:0]: Hour tens in BCD format. Bits 19:16 HU[3:0]: Hour units in BCD format. Bit 15 MSK2: Alarm A minutes mask 0: Alarm A set if the minutes match 1: Minutes dont care in Alarm A comparison Bits 14:12 MNT[2:0]: Minute tens in BCD format. Bits 11:8 MNU[3:0]: Minute units in BCD format. Bit 7 MSK1: Alarm A seconds mask 0: Alarm A set if the seconds match 1: Seconds dont care in Alarm A comparison Bits 6:4 ST[2:0]: Second tens in BCD format. Bits 3:0 SU[3:0]: Second units in BCD format.

Note:

This register can be written only when ALRAWF is set to 1 in RTC_ISR, or in initialization mode. This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

651/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6.9

RTC alarm B register (RTC_ALRMBR)

Address offset: 0x20 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31 MSK4 rw 15 MSK2 rw

30 WDSEL rw 14

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 MSK3

22 PM rw 6

21

20

19

18

17

16

DT[1:0] rw 13 MNT[2:0] rw 12 rw 11

DU[3:0] rw 10 rw 9 rw 8

HT[1:0] rw 5 ST[2:0] rw 4 3 rw 2

HU[3:0] rw 1 SU[3:0] rw rw 0

rw 7 MSK1

MNU[3:0] rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 MSK4: Alarm B date mask 0: Alarm B set if the date and day match 1: Date and day dont care in Alarm B comparison Bit 30 WDSEL: Week day selection 0: DU[3:0] represents the date units 1: DU[3:0] represents the week day. DT[1:0] is dont care. Bits 29:28 DT[1:0]: Date tens in BCD format Bits 27:24 DU[3:0]: Date units or day in BCD format Bit 23 MSK3: Alarm B hours mask 0: Alarm B set if the hours match 1: Hours dont care in Alarm B comparison Bit 22 PM: AM/PM notation 0: AM or 24-hour format 1: PM Bits 21:20 HT[1:0]: Hour tens in BCD format Bits 19:16 HU[3:0]: Hour units in BCD format Bit 15 MSK2: Alarm B minutes mask 0: Alarm B set if the minutes match 1: Minutes dont care in Alarm B comparison Bits 14:12 MNT[2:0]: Minute tens in BCD format Bits 11:8 MNU[3:0]: Minute units in BCD format Bit 7 MSK1: Alarm B seconds mask 0: Alarm B set if the seconds match 1: Seconds dont care in Alarm B comparison Bits 6:4 ST[2:0]: Second tens in BCD format Bits 3:0 SU[3:0]: Second units in BCD format

Note:

This register can be written only when ALRBWF is set to 1 in RTC_ISR, or in initialization mode. This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

652/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23.6.10

RTC write protection register (RTC_WPR)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 KEY Reserved w w w w w w w w 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:0 KEY: Write protection key This byte is written by software. Reading this byte always returns 0x00. Refer to RTC register write protection for a description of how to unlock RTC register write protection.

23.6.11

RTC sub second register (RTC_SSR)

Address offset: 0x28 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: 0x0000 0000 when BYPSHAD = 0. Not affected when BYPSHAD = 1.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 3 r 2 r 1 r r 0

SS[15:0] r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits31:16 Reserved Bits 15:0 SS: Sub second value SS[15:0] is the value in the synchronous prescalers counter. The fraction of a second is given by the formula below: Second fraction = ( PREDIV_S - SS ) / ( PREDIV_S + 1 ) Note: SS can be larger than PREDIV_S only after a shift operation. In that case, the correct time/date is one second less than as indicated by RTC_TR/RTC_DR.

653/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6.12

RTC shift control register (RTC_SHIFTR)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31 ADD1S w 15 Res. r

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 Reserved

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

r 14

r 13

r 12

r 11

r 10

r 9

r 8

r 7 SUBFS[14:0]

r 6

r 5

r 4 3

r 2

r 1

r 0

Bit 31 ADD1S: Add one second 0: No effect 1: Add one second to the clock/calendar This bit is write only and is always read as zero. Writing to this bit has no effect when a shift operation is pending (when SHPF=1, in RTC_ISR). This function is intended to be used with SUBFS (see description below) in order to effectively add a fraction of a second to the clock in an atomic operation. Bits 31:15 Reserved Bits 14:0 SUBFS: Subtract a fraction of a second These bits are write only and is always read as zero. Writing to this bit has no effect when a shift operation is pending (when SHPF=1, in RTC_ISR). The value which is written to SUBFS is added to the synchronous prescalers counter. Since this counter counts down, this operation effectively subtracts from (delays) the clock by: Delay (seconds) = SUBFS / ( PREDIV_S + 1 ) A fraction of a second can effectively be added to the clock (advancing the clock) when the ADD1S function is used in conjunction with SUBFS, effectively advancing the clock by: Advance (seconds) = ( 1 - ( SUBFS / ( PREDIV_S + 1 ) ) ) . Note: Writing to SUBFS causes RSF to be cleared. Software can then wait until RSF=1 to be sure that the shadow registers have been updated with the shifted time. Refer to Section 23.3.8: RTC synchronization.

Note:

This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

654/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23.6.13

RTC time stamp time register (RTC_TSTR)

Address offset: 0x30 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27 Reserved

26

25

24

23

22 PM r

21

20

19

18

17

16

HT[1:0] r 5 ST[2:0] r 4 3 r 2 r

HU[3:0] r 1 SU[3:0] r 0

15 Reserved

14

13 MNT[2:0]

12

11

10

7 Reserved

MNU[3:0] r r r r r

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 PM: AM/PM notation 0: AM or 24-hour format 1: PM Bits 21:20 HT[1:0]: Hour tens in BCD format. Bits 19:16 HU[3:0]: Hour units in BCD format. Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 14:12 MNT[2:0]: Minute tens in BCD format. Bits 11:8 MNU[3:0]: Minute units in BCD format. Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:4 ST[2:0]: Second tens in BCD format. Bits 3:0 SU[3:0]: Second units in BCD format.

Note:

The content of this register is valid only when TSF is set to 1 in RTC_ISR. It is cleared when TSF bit is reset.

655/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6.14

RTC time stamp date register (RTC_TSDR)

Address offset: 0x34 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 WDU[1:0] r r r 13 12 MT r r r 11 10 MU[3:0] Reserved r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 DT[1:0] 4 3 2 DU[3:0] 1 0

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:13 WDU[1:0]: Week day units Bit 12 MT: Month tens in BCD format Bits 11:8 MU[3:0]: Month units in BCD format Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 5:4 DT[1:0]: Date tens in BCD format Bit 3:0 DU[3:0]: Date units in BCD format

Note:

The content of this register is valid only when TSF is set to 1 in RTC_ISR. It is cleared when TSF bit is reset.

23.6.15

RTC timestamp sub second register (RTC_TSSSR)

Address offset: 0x38 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 3 r 2 r 1 r r 0

SS[15:0] r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:16 Reserved Bits 15:0 SS: Sub second value SS[15:0] is the value of the synchronous prescalers counter when the timestamp event occurred.

Note:

The content of this register is valid only when RTC_ISR/TSF is set. It is cleared when the RTC_ISR/TSF bit is reset.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

656/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23.6.16

RTC calibration register (RTC_CALR)

Address offset: 0x3C Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved r 15 CALP rw r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 CALM[8:0] r rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 3 r 2 r 1 r r 0

CALW8 CALW16 rw rw r

Reserved r r

Bit 31:16 Reserved Bit 15 CALP: Increase frequency of RTC by 488.5 ppm 0: No RTCCLK pulses are added. 1: One RTCCLK pulse is effectively inserted every 211 pulses (frequency increased by 488.5 ppm). This feature is intended to be used in conjunction with CALM, which lowers the frequency of the calendar with a fine resolution. if the input frequency is 32768 Hz, the number of RTCCLK pulses added during a 32-second window is calculated as follows: (512 * CALP) CALM. Refer to Section 23.3.11: RTC smooth digital calibration. Bit 14 CALW8: Use an 8-second calibration cycle period When CALW8 is set to 1, the 8-second calibration cycle period is selected. CALM[1:0] are stuck at 00 when CALW8=1. Refer to Section 23.3.11: RTC smooth digital calibration. Bit 13 CALW16: Use a 16-second calibration cycle period When CALW16 is set to 1, the 16-second calibration cycle period is selected. This bit must not be set to 1 if CALW8=1. Note: CALM[0] is stuck at 0 when CALW16=1. Refer to Section 23.3.11: RTC smooth digital calibration. Bits 12:9 Reserved Bits 8:0 CALM[8:0]: Calibration minus The frequency of the calendar is reduced by masking CALM out of 220 RTCCLK pulses (32 seconds if the input frequency is 32768 Hz). This decreases the frequency of the calendar with a resolution of 0.9537 ppm. To increase the frequency of the calendar, this feature should be used in conjunction with CALP. See Section 23.3.11: RTC smooth digital calibration on page 635.

Note:

This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630

657/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6.17

RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register (RTC_TAFCR)

Address offset: 0x40 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25 Reserved

24

23

22

21

20

19

18 ALARMOUT TYPE rw

17 TSIN SEL rw 1

16 TAMP1 INSEL rw 0

15 TAMPPUDIS rw

14

13

12

11

10

7 TAMPT S rw

2 TAMPIE rw

TAMPPRCH[1:0] rw rw

TAMPFLT[1:0] rw rw

TAMPFREQ[2:0] rw rw rw

Reserved

TAMP2 TAMP2 -TRG E rw rw

TAMP1 TAMP1 TRG E rw rw

Bit 31:19 Reserved. Always read as 0. Bit 18 ALARMOUTTYPE: RTC_ALARM output type 0: RTC_ALARM is an open-drain output 1: RTC_ALARM is a push-pull output Bit 17 TSINSEL: TIMESTAMP mapping 0: RTC_AF1 used as TIMESTAMP 1: RTC_AF2 used as TIMESTAMP Bit 16 TAMP1INSEL: TAMPER1 mapping 0: RTC_AF1 used as TAMPER1 1: RTC_AF2 used as TAMPER1 Note: TAMP1E must be reset when TAMP1INSEL is changed to avoid unwanted setting of TAMP1F. Bit 15 TAMPPUDIS: TAMPER pull-up disable This bit determines if each of the tamper pins are pre-charged before each sample. 0: Precharge tamper pins before sampling (enable internal pull-up) 1: Disable precharge of tamper pins Note: Bits 14:13 TAMPPRCH[1:0]: Tamper precharge duration These bit determines the duration of time during which the pull-up/is activated before each sample. TAMPPRCH is valid for each of the tamper inputs. 0x0: 1 RTCCLK cycle 0x1: 2 RTCCLK cycles 0x2: 4 RTCCLK cycles 0x3: 8 RTCCLK cycles

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

658/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

Bits 12:11 TAMPFLT[1:0]: Tamper filter count These bits determines the number of consecutive samples at the specified level (TAMP*TRG) necessary to activate a Tamper event. TAMPFLT is valid for each of the tamper inputs. 0x0: Tamper is activated on edge of tamper input transitions to the active level (no internal pull-up on tamper input). 0x1: Tamper is activated after 2 consecutive samples at the active level. 0x2: Tamper is activated after 4 consecutive samples at the active level. 0x3: Tamper is activated after 8 consecutive samples at the active level. Bits 10:8 TAMPFREQ[2:0]: Tamper sampling frequency Determines the frequency at which each of the tamper inputs are sampled. 0x0: RTCCLK / 32768 (1 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) 0x1: RTCCLK / 16384 (2 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) 0x2: RTCCLK / 8192 (4 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) 0x3: RTCCLK / 4096 (8 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) 0x4: RTCCLK / 2048 (16 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) 0x5: RTCCLK / 1024 (32 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) 0x6: RTCCLK / 512 (64 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) 0x7: RTCCLK / 256 (128 Hz when RTCCLK = 32768 Hz) Bit 7 TAMPTS: Activate timestamp on tamper detection event 0: Tamper detection event does not cause a timestamp to be saved 1: Save timestamp on tamper detection event TAMPTS is valid even if TSE=0 in the RTC_CR register. Bit 6:5 Reserved. Always read as 0. Bit 4 TAMP2TRG: Active level for tamper 2 if TAMPFLT != 00 : 0: TAMPER2 staying low triggers a tamper detection event. 1: TAMPER2 staying high triggers a tamper detection event. if TAMPFLT = 00: 0: TAMPER2 rising edge triggers a tamper detection event. 1: TAMPER2 falling edge triggers a tamper detection event. Bit 3 TAMP2E: Tamper 2 detection enable 0: Tamper 2 detection disabled 1: Tamper 2 detection enabled Bit 2 TAMPIE: Tamper interrupt enable 0: Tamper interrupt disabled 1: Tamper interrupt enabled Bit 1 TAMP1TRG: Active level for tamper 1 if TAMPFLT != 00 0: TAMPER1 staying low triggers a tamper detection event. 1: TAMPER1 staying high triggers a tamper detection event. if TAMPFLT = 00: 0: TAMPER1 rising edge triggers a tamper detection event. 1: TAMPER1 falling edge triggers a tamper detection event. Caution: When TAMPFLT = 0, TAMP1E must be reset when TAMP1TRG is changed to avoid spuriously setting TAMP1F.

659/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

Bit 0 TAMP1E: Tamper 1 detection enable 0: Tamper 1 detection disabled 1: Tamper 1 detection enabled

23.6.18

RTC alarm A sub second register (RTC_ALRMASSR)

Address offset: 0x44 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved r 15 Reserved r rw rw rw rw r 14 r 13 r 12 rw 11

MASKSS[3:0] rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 r 7 SS[14:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw r 6 r 5

Reserved r 4 3 r 2 r 1 r r 0

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31:28 Reserved Bit 27:24 MASKSS[3:0]: Mask the most-significant bits starting at this bit 0: No comparison on sub seconds for Alarm A. The alarm is set when the seconds unit is incremented (assuming that the rest of the fields match). 1: SS[14:1] are dont care in Alarm A comparison. Only SS[0] is compared. 2: SS[14:2] are dont care in Alarm A comparison. Only SS[1:0] are compared. 3: SS[14:3] are dont care in Alarm A comparison. Only SS[2:0] are compared. ... 12: SS[14:12] are dont care in Alarm A comparison. SS[11:0] are compared. 13: SS[14:13] are dont care in Alarm A comparison. SS[12:0] are compared. 14: SS[14] is dont care in Alarm A comparison. SS[13:0] are compared. 15: All 15 SS bits are compared and must match to activate alarm. The overflow bits of the synchronous counter (bits 15) is never compared. This bit can be different from 0 only after a shift operation. Bit 23:15 Reserved Bit 14:0 SS[14:0]: Sub seconds value This value is compared with the contents of the synchronous prescalers counter to determine if Alarm A is to be activated. Only bits 0 up MASKSS-1 are compared.

Note:

This register can be written only when ALRAE is reset in RTC_CR register, or in initialization mode. This register is write protected. The write access procedure is described in RTC register write protection on page 630

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

660/1422

Real-time clock (RTC)

RM0090

23.6.19

RTC alarm B sub second register (RTC_ALRMBSSR)

Address offset: 0x48 Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved r 15 Reserved r rw rw rw rw r 14 r 13 r 12 rw 11

MASKSS[3:0] rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 r 7 SS[14:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw r 6 r 5

Reserved r 4 3 r 2 r 1 r r 0

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31:28 Reserved Bit 27:24 MASKSS[3:0]: Mask the most-significant bits starting at this bit 0x0: No comparison on sub seconds for Alarm B. The alarm is set when the seconds unit is incremented (assuming that the rest of the fields match). 0x1: SS[14:1] are dont care in Alarm B comparison. Only SS[0] is compared. 0x2: SS[14:2] are dont care in Alarm B comparison. Only SS[1:0] are compared. 0x3: SS[14:3] are dont care in Alarm B comparison. Only SS[2:0] are compared. ... 0xC: SS[14:12] are dont care in Alarm B comparison. SS[11:0] are compared. 0xD: SS[14:13] are dont care in Alarm B comparison. SS[12:0] are compared. 0xE: SS[14] is dont care in Alarm B comparison. SS[13:0] are compared. 0xF: All 15 SS bits are compared and must match to activate alarm. The overflow bits of the synchronous counter (bits 15) is never compared. This bit can be different from 0 only after a shift operation. Bit 23:15 Reserved Bit 14:0 SS[14:0]: Sub seconds value This value is compared with the contents of the synchronous prescalers counter to determine if Alarm B is to be activated. Only bits 0 up to MASKSS-1 are compared.

Note:

This register can be written only when ALRBIE is reset in RTC_CR register, or in initialization mode. This register is write protected.The write access procedure is described in Section : RTC register write protection

661/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Real-time clock (RTC)

23.6.20

RTC backup registers (RTC_BKPxR)

Address offset: 0x50 to 0x9C Power-on reset value: 0x0000 0000 System reset: not affected

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

BKP[31:16] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

BKP[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw w rw rw

Bits 31:0 BKP[31:0] The application can write or read data to and from these registers. They are powered-on by VBAT when VDD is switched off, so that they are not reset by System reset, and their contents remain valid when the device operates in low-power mode. This register is reset on a tamper detection event, as long as TAMPxF=1.

23.6.21
Table 99.
Offset
0x00

RTC register map

RTC register map and reset values
Reserved HT [1:0] 0 0 0 Reserved PM

Register
RTC_TR Reset value

Reserved

MT

0x04

RTC_DR Reset value

REFCKON

BYPSHAD

TSIE

COE

DCE

0x08

RTC_CR Reset value RTC_ISR Reset value

Reserved

0 TAMP2F

0 TAMP1F

0 TSOVF

0 TSF

0 WUTF

0 ALRBF

0 ALRAF

0 INIT

FMT

OSEL [1:0]

TSEDGE

ALRBIE

ALRAIE

ALRBIE

ADD1H

COSEL

SUB1H

ALRAE

WUTIE

WUTE

POL

BKP

TSE

ALRBWF 0 1 1 0 0

0x0C

Reserved

0 Reserved 1 Reserved 1 Reserved WDSEL 1 PREDIV_A[6:0] 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reserved

0x10

RTC_PRER Reset value

PREDIV_S[14:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0x14

RTC_WUTR Reset value

WUT[15:0] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DCS 1 Reserved 1 1 1 1 1

0x18

RTC_CALIBR Reset value MSK4 MSK3

DC[4:0] 0 0 0 0

0 MSK2 DT [1:0] 0 0 0 DU[3:0] 0 0 0 HT [1:0] 0 0 0 HU[3:0] 0 0 0 MNT[2:0] 0 0 0 0 MNU[3:0] 0 0 0 MSK1 PM

0x1C

RTC_ALRMAR Reset value

ST[2:0] 0 0 0 0

SU[3:0] 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

662/1422

ALRAWF 1

WUTWF

SHPF

INITS

INITF

RSF

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved HU[3:0] 0 0 0 MNT[2:0] 0 0 0 0 MNU[3:0] 0 0 0 ST[2:0] 0 0 0 0 SU[3:0] 0 0 0 0 Reserved YT[3:0] YU[3:0] WDU[2:0] 0 0 1 MU[3:0] 0 0 0 1 DT [1:0] 0 0 0 DU[3:0] 0 0 1 0 WCKSEL [2:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Real-time clock (RTC) Table 99.

Offset
0x20

RM0090

RTC register map and reset values (continued)

WDSEL MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 DT [1:0] 0 0 0 HT [1:0] 0 0 0 MSK2

Register
RTC_ALRMBR Reset value

PM

0x24

RTC_WPR Reset value

0x28

RTC_SSR Reset value

0x2C

RTC_SHIFTR Reset value RTC_TSTR Reset value

ADD1S

Reserved

MNT[2:0]

HT[1:0]

0x30

Reserved

HU[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0

MNU[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

PM

0x38

RTC_TSSSR Reset value RTC_ CALR Reset value

CALW16

CALW8

Reserved

CALP

0x3C

ALARMOUTTYPE

TAMPPRCH[1:0]

TAMPFREQ[2:0]

TAMPFLT[1:0]

TAMP1INSEL TAMPPUDIS

TAMP1ETRG 0 0 0 0 0

TAMP2TRG

TSINSEL

TAMPTS

TAMP2E

0x40

RTC_TAFCR

Reserved

Reset value 0x44 RTC_ ALRMASSR Reset value 0x48 RTC_ ALRMBSSR Reset value RTC_BKP0R 0x50 to 0x9C Reset value to RTC_BKP19R Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved MASKSS[3:0] 0 0 0 0

0 Reserved

Reserved

SS[14:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MASKSS[3:0] 0 0 0 0

Reserved 0 BKP[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SS[14:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BKP[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

663/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

TAMP1E 0 0

TAMPIE

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DU[3:0] 0 0 0 HU[3:0] 0 0 0 MNT[2:0] 0 0 0 0 MNU[3:0] 0 0 0 ST[2:0] 0 0 0 0 SU[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SS[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 KEY[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 SUBFS[14:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ST[2:0] 0 0 0 0 SU[3:0] 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SS[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved CALM[8:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

24

Controller area network (bxCAN)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

24.1

bxCAN introduction
The Basic Extended CAN peripheral, named bxCAN, interfaces the CAN network. It supports the CAN protocols version 2.0A and B. It has been designed to manage a high number of incoming messages efficiently with a minimum CPU load. It also meets the priority requirements for transmit messages. For safety-critical applications, the CAN controller provides all hardware functions for supporting the CAN Time Triggered Communication option.

24.2

bxCAN main features

Supports CAN protocol version 2.0 A, B Active Bit rates up to 1 Mbit/s Supports the Time Triggered Communication option Three transmit mailboxes Configurable transmit priority Time Stamp on SOF transmission Two receive FIFOs with three stages Scalable filter banks: 28 filter banks shared between CAN1 and CAN2 Identifier list feature Configurable FIFO overrun Time Stamp on SOF reception Disable automatic retransmission mode 16-bit free running timer Time Stamp sent in last two data bytes Maskable interrupts Software-efficient mailbox mapping at a unique address space

Transmission

Reception

Time-triggered communication option

Management

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

664/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN) Dual CAN

RM0090

CAN1: Master bxCAN for managing the communication between a Slave bxCAN and the 512-byte SRAM memory CAN2: Slave bxCAN, with no direct access to the SRAM memory. The two bxCAN cells share the 512-byte SRAM memory (see Figure 224: Dual CAN block diagram) CAN1: Master bxCAN for managing the communication between a Slave bxCAN and the 512-byte SRAM memory CAN2: Slave bxCAN, with no direct access to the SRAM memory. The two bxCAN cells share the 512-byte SRAM memory (see Figure 224 on page 667)

Dual CAN

24.3

bxCAN general description

In todays CAN applications, the number of nodes in a network is increasing and often several networks are linked together via gateways. Typically the number of messages in the system (and thus to be handled by each node) has significantly increased. In addition to the application messages, Network Management and Diagnostic messages have been introduced.

An enhanced filtering mechanism is required to handle each type of message.

Furthermore, application tasks require more CPU time, therefore real-time constraints caused by message reception have to be reduced.

A receive FIFO scheme allows the CPU to be dedicated to application tasks for a long time period without losing messages.

The standard HLP (Higher Layer Protocol) based on standard CAN drivers requires an efficient interface to the CAN controller. Figure 223. CAN network topology CAN node 1 CAN node 2
MCU Application

CAN Controller CAN Rx CAN Transceiver CAN High CAN Low CAN Tx

CAN Bus

24.3.1

CAN 2.0B active core

The bxCAN module handles the transmission and the reception of CAN messages fully autonomously. Standard identifiers (11-bit) and extended identifiers (29-bit) are fully supported by hardware.

665/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

CAN node n

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

24.3.2

Control, status and configuration registers

The application uses these registers to:

Configure CAN parameters, e.g. baud rate Request transmissions Handle receptions Manage interrupts Get diagnostic information

24.3.3

Tx mailboxes
Three transmit mailboxes are provided to the software for setting up messages. The transmission Scheduler decides which mailbox has to be transmitted first.

24.3.4

Acceptance filters
The bxCAN provides 28 scalable/configurable identifier filter banks for selecting the incoming messages the software needs and discarding the others. The bxCAN provides 28 scalable/configurable identifier filter banks for selecting the incoming messages the software needs and discarding the others. In other devices there are 14 scalable/configurable identifier filter banks.

Receive FIFO
Two receive FIFOs are used by hardware to store the incoming messages. Three complete messages can be stored in each FIFO. The FIFOs are managed completely by hardware.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

666/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN) Figure 224. Dual CAN block diagram
CAN 1 (Master) with 512 bytes SRAM
Master Tx Mailboxes 2 Mailbox 0 1
Mailbox 0

RM0090

Master Re ceive FIFO 0

2 1

Master R eceive FIFO 1

2 Mailbox 0 1

Master Control Master Status Tx Status Rx FIFO 0 Status Control/Status/Configuration Rx FIFO 1 Status Interrupt Enabl e Error Status Bit Timing Filter Master Filter Mode Filter Sc ale
Transmission Scheduler Transmission Scheduler

Acceptance Filters

CAN 2.0B Active Core

Memory Access Controller

Filter

..

.. 26

27

Master Filters (0 to 27)

Slave Filters (0 to 27)

Filter FIFOAss ign

Filter Activation

Slave Tx Mailboxes 2 Mailbox 0 1

Slave R eceive FIFO 0

2 Mailbox 0 1

Slave Re ceive FIFO 1

2 Mailbox 0 1

CAN 2 (Sl ave)

Control/Status/Configuration

Master Control Master Status Tx Status Rx FIFO 0 Status Rx FIFO 1 Status Interrupt Enable Error Status Bit Timing
Note: CAN 2 start filter bank number n is conf i gurable by writing to the CAN 2SB[ 5:0] bits in the CAN _ FMRregister.

CAN 2.0B Active Core

ai16094b

24.4

bxCAN operating modes

bxCAN has three main operating modes: initialization, normal and Sleep. After a hardware reset, bxCAN is in Sleep mode to reduce power consumption and an internal pullup is active on CANTX. The software requests bxCAN to enter initialization or Sleep mode by setting the INRQ or SLEEP bits in the CAN_MCR register. Once the mode has been entered, bxCAN confirms it by setting the INAK or SLAK bits in the CAN_MSR register and the internal pull-up is disabled. When neither INAK nor SLAK are set, bxCAN is in normal

667/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN) mode. Before entering normal mode bxCAN always has to synchronize on the CAN bus. To synchronize, bxCAN waits until the CAN bus is idle, this means 11 consecutive recessive bits have been monitored on CANRX.

24.4.1

Initialization mode
The software initialization can be done while the hardware is in Initialization mode. To enter this mode the software sets the INRQ bit in the CAN_MCR register and waits until the hardware has confirmed the request by setting the INAK bit in the CAN_MSR register. To leave Initialization mode, the software clears the INQR bit. bxCAN has left Initialization mode once the INAK bit has been cleared by hardware. While in Initialization Mode, all message transfers to and from the CAN bus are stopped and the status of the CAN bus output CANTX is recessive (high). Entering Initialization Mode does not change any of the configuration registers. To initialize the CAN Controller, software has to set up the Bit Timing (CAN_BTR) and CAN options (CAN_MCR) registers. To initialize the registers associated with the CAN filter banks (mode, scale, FIFO assignment, activation and filter values), software has to set the FINIT bit (CAN_FMR). Filter initialization also can be done outside the initialization mode.

Note:

When FINIT=1, CAN reception is deactivated. The filter values also can be modified by deactivating the associated filter activation bits (in the CAN_FA1R register). If a filter bank is not used, it is recommended to leave it non active (leave the corresponding FACT bit cleared).

24.4.2

Normal mode
Once the initialization is complete, the software must request the hardware to enter Normal mode to be able to synchronize on the CAN bus and start reception and transmission. The request to enter Normal mode is issued by clearing the INRQ bit in the CAN_MCR register. The bxCAN enters Normal mode and is ready to take part in bus activities when it has synchronized with the data transfer on the CAN bus. This is done by waiting for the occurrence of a sequence of 11 consecutive recessive bits (Bus Idle state). The switch to Normal mode is confirmed by the hardware by clearing the INAK bit in the CAN_MSR register. The initialization of the filter values is independent from Initialization Mode but must be done while the filter is not active (corresponding FACTx bit cleared). The filter scale and mode configuration must be configured before entering Normal Mode.

24.4.3

Sleep mode (low power)

To reduce power consumption, bxCAN has a low-power mode called Sleep mode. This mode is entered on software request by setting the SLEEP bit in the CAN_MCR register. In this mode, the bxCAN clock is stopped, however software can still access the bxCAN mailboxes. If software requests entry to initialization mode by setting the INRQ bit while bxCAN is in Sleep mode, it must also clear the SLEEP bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

668/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

bxCAN can be woken up (exit Sleep mode) either by software clearing the SLEEP bit or on detection of CAN bus activity. On CAN bus activity detection, hardware automatically performs the wakeup sequence by clearing the SLEEP bit if the AWUM bit in the CAN_MCR register is set. If the AWUM bit is cleared, software has to clear the SLEEP bit when a wakeup interrupt occurs, in order to exit from Sleep mode. Note: If the wakeup interrupt is enabled (WKUIE bit set in CAN_IER register) a wakeup interrupt will be generated on detection of CAN bus activity, even if the bxCAN automatically performs the wakeup sequence. After the SLEEP bit has been cleared, Sleep mode is exited once bxCAN has synchronized with the CAN bus, refer to Figure 225: bxCAN operating modes. The Sleep mode is exited once the SLAK bit has been cleared by hardware. Figure 225. bxCAN operating modes
Reset

Sleep
Q NR .I
CK
SLAK= 1 INAK = 0

E SL

EP

.S

C YN

SL EE P

SL

E SL

EP

.A

EE

.I NR Q

.I

.A

NR

CK

.A

CK

Normal
SLAK= 0 INAK = 0

INRQ . ACK

Initialization
SLAK= 0 INAK = 1

INRQ . SYNC . SLEEP

ai15902

1. ACK = The wait state during which hardware confirms a request by setting the INAK or SLAK bits in the CAN_MSR register 2. SYNC = The state during which bxCAN waits until the CAN bus is idle, meaning 11 consecutive recessive bits have been monitored on CANRX

24.5

Test mode
Test mode can be selected by the SILM and LBKM bits in the CAN_BTR register. These bits must be configured while bxCAN is in Initialization mode. Once test mode has been selected, the INRQ bit in the CAN_MCR register must be reset to enter Normal mode.

24.5.1

Silent mode
The bxCAN can be put in Silent mode by setting the SILM bit in the CAN_BTR register. In Silent mode, the bxCAN is able to receive valid data frames and valid remote frames, but it sends only recessive bits on the CAN bus and it cannot start a transmission. If the bxCAN has to send a dominant bit (ACK bit, overload flag, active error flag), the bit is rerouted internally so that the CAN Core monitors this dominant bit, although the CAN bus may

669/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN) remain in recessive state. Silent mode can be used to analyze the traffic on a CAN bus without affecting it by the transmission of dominant bits (Acknowledge Bits, Error Frames). Figure 226. bxCAN in silent mode
bxCAN Tx Rx

=1

CANTX CANRX

24.5.2

Loop back mode

The bxCAN can be set in Loop Back Mode by setting the LBKM bit in the CAN_BTR register. In Loop Back Mode, the bxCAN treats its own transmitted messages as received messages and stores them (if they pass acceptance filtering) in a Receive mailbox. Figure 227. bxCAN in loop back mode
bxCAN Tx Rx

CANTX CANRX

This mode is provided for self-test functions. To be independent of external events, the CAN Core ignores acknowledge errors (no dominant bit sampled in the acknowledge slot of a data / remote frame) in Loop Back Mode. In this mode, the bxCAN performs an internal feedback from its Tx output to its Rx input. The actual value of the CANRX input pin is disregarded by the bxCAN. The transmitted messages can be monitored on the CANTX pin.

24.5.3

Loop back combined with silent mode

It is also possible to combine Loop Back mode and Silent mode by setting the LBKM and SILM bits in the CAN_BTR register. This mode can be used for a Hot Selftest, meaning the bxCAN can be tested like in Loop Back mode but without affecting a running CAN system connected to the CANTX and CANRX pins. In this mode, the CANRX pin is disconnected from the bxCAN and the CANTX pin is held recessive.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

670/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN) Figure 228. bxCAN in combined mode

bxCAN Tx Rx

RM0090

=1

CANTX CANRX

24.6

Debug mode
When the microcontroller enters the debug mode (Cortex-M4F core halted), the bxCAN continues to work normally or stops, depending on:

the DBG_CAN1_STOP bit for CAN1 or the DBG_CAN2_STOP bit for CAN2 in the DBG module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C. the DBF bit in CAN_MCR. For more details, refer to Section 24.9.2: CAN control and status registers.

24.7
24.7.1

bxCAN functional description

Transmission handling
In order to transmit a message, the application must select one empty transmit mailbox, set up the identifier, the data length code (DLC) and the data before requesting the transmission by setting the corresponding TXRQ bit in the CAN_TIxR register. Once the mailbox has left empty state, the software no longer has write access to the mailbox registers. Immediately after the TXRQ bit has been set, the mailbox enters pending state and waits to become the highest priority mailbox, see Transmit Priority. As soon as the mailbox has the highest priority it will be scheduled for transmission. The transmission of the message of the scheduled mailbox will start (enter transmit state) when the CAN bus becomes idle. Once the mailbox has been successfully transmitted, it will become empty again. The hardware indicates a successful transmission by setting the RQCP and TXOK bits in the CAN_TSR register. If the transmission fails, the cause is indicated by the ALST bit in the CAN_TSR register in case of an Arbitration Lost, and/or the TERR bit, in case of transmission error detection.

Transmit priority
By identifier When more than one transmit mailbox is pending, the transmission order is given by the identifier of the message stored in the mailbox. The message with the lowest identifier value has the highest priority according to the arbitration of the CAN protocol. If the identifier values are equal, the lower mailbox number will be scheduled first.

671/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 By transmit request order

Controller area network (bxCAN)

The transmit mailboxes can be configured as a transmit FIFO by setting the TXFP bit in the CAN_MCR register. In this mode the priority order is given by the transmit request order. This mode is very useful for segmented transmission.

Abort
A transmission request can be aborted by the user setting the ABRQ bit in the CAN_TSR register. In pending or scheduled state, the mailbox is aborted immediately. An abort request while the mailbox is in transmit state can have two results. If the mailbox is transmitted successfully the mailbox becomes empty with the TXOK bit set in the CAN_TSR register. If the transmission fails, the mailbox becomes scheduled, the transmission is aborted and becomes empty with TXOK cleared. In all cases the mailbox will become empty again at least at the end of the current transmission.

Nonautomatic retransmission mode

This mode has been implemented in order to fulfil the requirement of the Time Triggered Communication option of the CAN standard. To configure the hardware in this mode the NART bit in the CAN_MCR register must be set. In this mode, each transmission is started only once. If the first attempt fails, due to an arbitration loss or an error, the hardware will not automatically restart the message transmission. At the end of the first transmission attempt, the hardware considers the request as completed and sets the RQCP bit in the CAN_TSR register. The result of the transmission is indicated in the CAN_TSR register by the TXOK, ALST and TERR bits. Figure 229. Transmit mailbox states
EMPTY
RQCP=X TXOK=X TME = 1

TXRQ=1

PENDING ABRQ=1
RQCP=0 TXOK=0 TME = 0

Mailbox has highest priority

EMPTY
RQCP=1 TXOK=0 TME = 1

Mailbox does not have highest priority

ABRQ=1

SCHEDULED
RQCP=0 TXOK=0 TME = 0

CAN Bus = IDLE

TRANSMIT
RQCP=0 TXOK=0 TME = 0

Transmit failed * NART

Transmit failed * NART

EMPTY
RQCP=1 TXOK=1 TME = 1

Transmit succeeded

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

672/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

24.7.2

Time triggered communication mode

In this mode, the internal counter of the CAN hardware is activated and used to generate the Time Stamp value stored in the CAN_RDTxR/CAN_TDTxR registers, respectively (for Rx and Tx mailboxes). The internal counter is incremented each CAN bit time (refer to Section 24.7.7: Bit timing). The internal counter is captured on the sample point of the Start Of Frame bit in both reception and transmission.

24.7.3

Reception handling
For the reception of CAN messages, three mailboxes organized as a FIFO are provided. In order to save CPU load, simplify the software and guarantee data consistency, the FIFO is managed completely by hardware. The application accesses the messages stored in the FIFO through the FIFO output mailbox.

Valid message
A received message is considered as valid when it has been received correctly according to the CAN protocol (no error until the last but one bit of the EOF field) and It passed through the identifier filtering successfully, see Section 24.7.4: Identifier filtering. Figure 230. Receive FIFO states
EMPTY
FMP=0x00 FOVR=0

Valid Message
Received

Release Mailbox

PENDING_1
FMP=0x01 FOVR=0

Release Mailbox RFOM=1

FMP=0x10 FOVR=0

Valid Message
Received

PENDING_2

Release Mailbox RFOM=1

FMP=0x11 FOVR=0

Valid Message
Received

PENDING_3

Valid Message
Received

Release Mailbox RFOM=1

OVERRUN
FMP=0x11 FOVR=1

Valid Message
Received

673/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

FIFO management
Starting from the empty state, the first valid message received is stored in the FIFO which becomes pending_1. The hardware signals the event setting the FMP[1:0] bits in the CAN_RFR register to the value 01b. The message is available in the FIFO output mailbox. The software reads out the mailbox content and releases it by setting the RFOM bit in the CAN_RFR register. The FIFO becomes empty again. If a new valid message has been received in the meantime, the FIFO stays in pending_1 state and the new message is available in the output mailbox. If the application does not release the mailbox, the next valid message will be stored in the FIFO which enters pending_2 state (FMP[1:0] = 10b). The storage process is repeated for the next valid message putting the FIFO into pending_3 state (FMP[1:0] = 11b). At this point, the software must release the output mailbox by setting the RFOM bit, so that a mailbox is free to store the next valid message. Otherwise the next valid message received will cause a loss of message. Refer also to Section 24.7.5: Message storage

Overrun
Once the FIFO is in pending_3 state (i.e. the three mailboxes are full) the next valid message reception will lead to an overrun and a message will be lost. The hardware signals the overrun condition by setting the FOVR bit in the CAN_RFR register. Which message is lost depends on the configuration of the FIFO:

If the FIFO lock function is disabled (RFLM bit in the CAN_MCR register cleared) the last message stored in the FIFO will be overwritten by the new incoming message. In this case the latest messages will be always available to the application. If the FIFO lock function is enabled (RFLM bit in the CAN_MCR register set) the most recent message will be discarded and the software will have the three oldest messages in the FIFO available.

Reception related interrupts

Once a message has been stored in the FIFO, the FMP[1:0] bits are updated and an interrupt request is generated if the FMPIE bit in the CAN_IER register is set. When the FIFO becomes full (i.e. a third message is stored) the FULL bit in the CAN_RFR register is set and an interrupt is generated if the FFIE bit in the CAN_IER register is set. On overrun condition, the FOVR bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the FOVIE bit in the CAN_IER register is set.

24.7.4

Identifier filtering
In the CAN protocol the identifier of a message is not associated with the address of a node but related to the content of the message. Consequently a transmitter broadcasts its message to all receivers. On message reception a receiver node decides - depending on the identifier value - whether the software needs the message or not. If the message is needed, it is copied into the SRAM. If not, the message must be discarded without intervention by the software. To fulfill this requirement, the bxCAN Controller provides 28 configurable and scalable filter banks (27-0) to the application. In other devices the bxCAN Controller provides 14 configurable and scalable filter banks (13-0) to the application in order to receive only the messages the software needs. This hardware filtering saves CPU resources which would be
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 674/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

otherwise needed to perform filtering by software. Each filter bank x consists of two 32-bit registers, CAN_FxR0 and CAN_FxR1.

Scalable width
To optimize and adapt the filters to the application needs, each filter bank can be scaled independently. Depending on the filter scale a filter bank provides:

One 32-bit filter for the STDID[10:0], EXTID[17:0], IDE and RTR bits. Two 16-bit filters for the STDID[10:0], RTR, IDE and EXTID[17:15] bits.

Refer to Figure 231. Furthermore, the filters can be configured in mask mode or in identifier list mode.

Mask mode
In mask mode the identifier registers are associated with mask registers specifying which bits of the identifier are handled as must match or as dont care.

Identifier list mode

In identifier list mode, the mask registers are used as identifier registers. Thus instead of defining an identifier and a mask, two identifiers are specified, doubling the number of single identifiers. All bits of the incoming identifier must match the bits specified in the filter registers.

Filter bank scale and mode configuration

The filter banks are configured by means of the corresponding CAN_FMR register. To configure a filter bank it must be deactivated by clearing the FACT bit in the CAN_FAR register. The filter scale is configured by means of the corresponding FSCx bit in the CAN_FS1R register, refer to Figure 231. The identifier list or identifier mask mode for the corresponding Mask/Identifier registers is configured by means of the FBMx bits in the CAN_FMR register. To filter a group of identifiers, configure the Mask/Identifier registers in mask mode. To select single identifiers, configure the Mask/Identifier registers in identifier list mode. Filters not used by the application should be left deactivated. Each filter within a filter bank is numbered (called the Filter Number) from 0 to a maximum dependent on the mode and the scale of each of the filter banks. Concerning the filter configuration, refer to Figure 231.

675/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN) Figure 231. Filter bank scale configuration - register organization
One 32-Bit Filter - Identifier Mask ID Mask Mapping
CAN_FxR1[31:24] CAN_FxR2[31:24]
STID[10:3]

Filter Num.
CAN_FxR1[15:8] CAN_FxR2[15:8]
EXID[12:5]

FBMx = 0

CAN_FxR1[23:16] CAN_FxR2[23:16]
STID[2:0] EXID[17:13]

CAN_FxR1[7:0] CAN_FxR2[7:0]
EXID[4:0] IDE RTR 0

FSCx = 1

FBMx = 1

Two 32-Bit Filters - Identifier List ID ID Mapping

CAN_FxR1[31:24] CAN_FxR2[31:24]
STID[10:3]

CAN_FxR1[23:16] CAN_FxR2[23:16]
STID[2:0] EXID[17:13]

CAN_FxR1[15:8] CAN_FxR2[15:8]
EXID[12:5]

CAN_FxR1[7:0] CAN_FxR2[7:0]
EXID[4:0] IDE RTR 0

n n+1

Two 16-Bit Filters - Identifier Mask FBMx = 0 ID Mask ID Mask Mapping

CAN_FxR1[15:8] CAN_FxR1[31:24] CAN_FxR2[15:8] CAN_FxR2[31:24]
STID[10:3]

CAN_FxR1[7:0] CAN_FxR1[23:16] CAN_FxR2[7:0] CAN_FxR2[23:16]

STID[2:0] RTR IDE EXID[17:15]

n n+1

FSCx = 0

Four 16-Bit Filters - Identifier List FBMx = 1 ID ID ID ID Mapping

CAN_FxR1[15:8] CAN_FxR1[31:24] CAN_FxR2[15:8] CAN_FxR2[31:24]
STID[10:3]

CAN_FxR1[7:0] CAN_FxR1[23:16] CAN_FxR2[7:0] CAN_FxR2[23:16]

STID[2:0] RTR IDE EXID[17:15]

n n+1 n+2 n+3

Filter Bank Mode2

Filter Bank Scale Config. Bits1

x = filter bank number ID=Identifier

1 2

These bits are located in the CAN_FS1R register These bits are located in the CAN_FM1R register

Filter match index

Once a message has been received in the FIFO it is available to the application. Typically, application data is copied into SRAM locations. To copy the data to the right location the application has to identify the data by means of the identifier. To avoid this, and to ease the access to the SRAM locations, the CAN controller provides a Filter Match Index. This index is stored in the mailbox together with the message according to the filter priority rules. Thus each received message has its associated filter match index. The Filter Match index can be used in two ways:

Compare the Filter Match index with a list of expected values. Use the Filter Match Index as an index on an array to access the data destination location.

For nonmasked filters, the software no longer has to compare the identifier. If the filter is masked the software reduces the comparison to the masked bits only. The index value of the filter number does not take into account the activation state of the filter banks. In addition, two independent numbering schemes are used, one for each FIFO. Refer to Figure 232 for an example.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

676/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN) Figure 232. Example of filter numbering Filter Bank 0 FIFO0 ID List (32-bit) Filter Num.
0 1

RM0090

Filter Bank 2

FIFO1 ID Mask (16-bit)

Filter Num.
0 1 2 3

ID Mask (32-bit)

ID List (32-bit) Deactivated ID Mask (16-bit) ID Mask (16-bit) Deactivated ID List (16-bit) ID List (32-bit)

3 5 6 9

ID List (16-bit) Deactivated ID List (32-bit) ID Mask (16-bit) ID List (32-bit)

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

7 8 10 11

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

13

ID Mask (32-bit)

13

12

ID Mask (32-bit)

14

ID=Identifier

Filter priority rules

Depending on the filter combination it may occur that an identifier passes successfully through several filters. In this case the filter match value stored in the receive mailbox is chosen according to the following priority rules:

A 32-bit filter takes priority over a 16-bit filter. For filters of equal scale, priority is given to the Identifier List mode over the Identifier Mask mode For filters of equal scale and mode, priority is given by the filter number (the lower the number, the higher the priority).

677/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 233. Filtering mechanism - example

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Example of 3 filter banks in 32-bit Unidentified List mode and the remaining in 32-bit Identifier Mask mode
Message Received Identifier
Filter bank Num 0

Ctrl

Data

Receive FIFO Identifier Identifier Identifier 0 1 4 Identifier #4 Match Message Stored

2 3

Identifier List

Identifier

Identifier & Mask

Identifier Mask

FMI

Identifier 3 Mask No Match Found

Filter number stored in the Filter Match Index field within the CAN_RDTxR register

Message Discarded

The example above shows the filtering principle of the bxCAN. On reception of a message, the identifier is compared first with the filters configured in identifier list mode. If there is a match, the message is stored in the associated FIFO and the index of the matching filter is stored in the Filter Match Index. As shown in the example, the identifier matches with Identifier #2 thus the message content and FMI 2 is stored in the FIFO. If there is no match, the incoming identifier is then compared with the filters configured in mask mode. If the identifier does not match any of the identifiers configured in the filters, the message is discarded by hardware without disturbing the software.

24.7.5

Message storage
The interface between the software and the hardware for the CAN messages is implemented by means of mailboxes. A mailbox contains all information related to a message; identifier, data, control, status and time stamp information.

Transmit mailbox
The software sets up the message to be transmitted in an empty transmit mailbox. The status of the transmission is indicated by hardware in the CAN_TSR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

678/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN) Table 100. Transmit mailbox mapping

Offset to transmit mailbox base address 0 4 8 12 Register name CAN_TIxR CAN_TDTxR CAN_TDLxR CAN_TDHxR

RM0090

Receive mailbox
When a message has been received, it is available to the software in the FIFO output mailbox. Once the software has handled the message (e.g. read it) the software must release the FIFO output mailbox by means of the RFOM bit in the CAN_RFR register to make the next incoming message available. The filter match index is stored in the MFMI field of the CAN_RDTxR register. The 16-bit time stamp value is stored in the TIME[15:0] field of CAN_RDTxR. Table 101. Receive mailbox mapping
Offset to receive mailbox base address (bytes) 0 4 8 12 Register name CAN_RIxR CAN_RDTxR CAN_RDLxR CAN_RDHxR

Figure 234. CAN error state diagram

When TEC or REC > 127

ERROR ACTIVE

ERROR PASSIVE

When TEC and REC < 128,

When 128 * 11 recessive bits occur:

When TEC > 255

BUS OFF
ai15903

679/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

24.7.6

Error management
The error management as described in the CAN protocol is handled entirely by hardware using a Transmit Error Counter (TEC value, in CAN_ESR register) and a Receive Error Counter (REC value, in the CAN_ESR register), which get incremented or decremented according to the error condition. For detailed information about TEC and REC management, please refer to the CAN standard. Both of them may be read by software to determine the stability of the network. Furthermore, the CAN hardware provides detailed information on the current error status in CAN_ESR register. By means of the CAN_IER register (ERRIE bit, etc.), the software can configure the interrupt generation on error detection in a very flexible way.

Bus-Off recovery
The Bus-Off state is reached when TEC is greater than 255, this state is indicated by BOFF bit in CAN_ESR register. In Bus-Off state, the bxCAN is no longer able to transmit and receive messages. Depending on the ABOM bit in the CAN_MCR register bxCAN will recover from Bus-Off (become error active again) either automatically or on software request. But in both cases the bxCAN has to wait at least for the recovery sequence specified in the CAN standard (128 occurrences of 11 consecutive recessive bits monitored on CANRX). If ABOM is set, the bxCAN will start the recovering sequence automatically after it has entered Bus-Off state. If ABOM is cleared, the software must initiate the recovering sequence by requesting bxCAN to enter and to leave initialization mode. Note: In initialization mode, bxCAN does not monitor the CANRX signal, therefore it cannot complete the recovery sequence. To recover, bxCAN must be in normal mode.

24.7.7

Bit timing
The bit timing logic monitors the serial bus-line and performs sampling and adjustment of the sample point by synchronizing on the start-bit edge and resynchronizing on the following edges. Its operation may be explained simply by splitting nominal bit time into three segments as follows:

Synchronization segment (SYNC_SEG): a bit change is expected to occur within this time segment. It has a fixed length of one time quantum (1 x tCAN). Bit segment 1 (BS1): defines the location of the sample point. It includes the PROP_SEG and PHASE_SEG1 of the CAN standard. Its duration is programmable between 1 and 16 time quanta but may be automatically lengthened to compensate for positive phase drifts due to differences in the frequency of the various nodes of the network. Bit segment 2 (BS2): defines the location of the transmit point. It represents the PHASE_SEG2 of the CAN standard. Its duration is programmable between 1 and 8 time quanta but may also be automatically shortened to compensate for negative phase drifts.

The resynchronization Jump Width (SJW) defines an upper bound to the amount of lengthening or shortening of the bit segments. It is programmable between 1 and 4 time quanta.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

680/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

A valid edge is defined as the first transition in a bit time from dominant to recessive bus level provided the controller itself does not send a recessive bit. If a valid edge is detected in BS1 instead of SYNC_SEG, BS1 is extended by up to SJW so that the sample point is delayed. Conversely, if a valid edge is detected in BS2 instead of SYNC_SEG, BS2 is shortened by up to SJW so that the transmit point is moved earlier. As a safeguard against programming errors, the configuration of the Bit Timing Register (CAN_BTR) is only possible while the device is in Standby mode. Note: For a detailed description of the CAN bit timing and resynchronization mechanism, please refer to the ISO 11898 standard. Figure 235. Bit timing
NOMINAL BIT TIME SYNC_SEG BIT SEGMENT 1 (BS1) BIT SEGMENT 2 (BS2)

1 x tq

tBS1

tBS2

1 BaudRate = ---------------------------------------------NominalBitTime NominalBitTime = 1 t q + t BS1 + t BS2 with: tBS1 = tq x (TS1[3:0] + 1), tBS2 = tq x (TS2[2:0] + 1), tq = (BRP[9:0] + 1) x tPCLK where tq refers to the Time quantum tPCLK = time period of the APB clock,

SAMPLE POINT

TRANSMIT POINT

BRP[9:0], TS1[3:0] and TS2[2:0] are defined in the CAN_BTR Register.

681/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 236. CAN frames

Inter-Frame Space Arbitration Field 32 ID SOF RTR IDE r0 Data Frame (Standard identifier) Ctrl Field 6 DLC 44 + 8 * N Data Field 8*N

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Inter-Frame Space or Overload Frame Ack Field 2

CRC Field 16 CRC

7 EOF

ACK Data Frame (Extended Identifier) 64 + 8 * N Inter-Frame Space or Overload Frame Data Field 8*N 32 6 DLC CRC Field Ack Field 2 16 7 CRC ACK Inter-Frame Space or Overload Frame Ack Field 2 16 CRC ACK 7 EOF Notes: 0 <= N <= 8 SOF = Start Of Frame ID = Identifier RTR = Remote Transmission Request Data Frame or Remote Frame IDE = Identifier Extension Bit r0 = Reserved Bit DLC = Data Length Code CRC = Cyclic Redundancy Code Error flag: 6 dominant bits if node is error active else 6 recessive bits. Suspend transmission: applies to error passive nodes only. EOF = End of Frame ACK = Acknowledge bit Ctrl = Control EOF DLC Inter-Frame Space or Overload Frame Inter-Frame Space or Error Frame RTR r1 r0

Inter-Frame Space

Arbitration Field

Arbitration Field Ctrl Field

32 ID SOF SRR IDE Arbitration Field 32 ID SOF RTR IDE r0 Error Frame Error Flag 6 6

Inter-Frame Space

Remote Frame 44 Ctrl Field CRC Field

Data Frame or Remote Frame

Flag Echo Error Delimiter 6 8

Any Frame

Inter-Frame Space Suspend Intermission Transmission Bus Idle 3 8

End Of Frame or Error Delimiter or Overload Delimiter

Overload Frame Overload Delimiter 8

Overload Overload Flag Echo 6 6

ai15154

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

682/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

24.8

bxCAN interrupts
Four interrupt vectors are dedicated to bxCAN. Each interrupt source can be independently enabled or disabled by means of the CAN Interrupt Enable Register (CAN_IER). Figure 237. Event flags and interrupt generation
CAN_IER
RQCP0 RQCP1 RQCP2 TMEIE TRANSMIT INTERRUPT

CAN_TSR

& & & & & & & +

FIFO 1 INTERRUPT

FMPIE0 FMP0 FFIE0

FIFO 0 INTERRUPT

CAN_RF0R

FULL0 FOVIE0 FOVR0

FMPIE1 FMP1 FFIE1

CAN_RF1R

FULL1 FOVIE1 FOVR1

ERRIE EWGIE EWGF EPVIE

& & & & + +

ERRI

CAN_ESR

EPVF BOFIE BOFF LECIE 1LEC6

&
CAN_MSR
STATUS CHANGE ERROR INTERRUPT

WKUIE WKUI

& &

CAN_MSR
SLAKI

SLKIE

The transmit interrupt can be generated by the following events: Transmit mailbox 0 becomes empty, RQCP0 bit in the CAN_TSR register set. Transmit mailbox 1 becomes empty, RQCP1 bit in the CAN_TSR register set. Transmit mailbox 2 becomes empty, RQCP2 bit in the CAN_TSR register set. Reception of a new message, FMP0 bits in the CAN_RF0R register are not 00. FIFO0 full condition, FULL0 bit in the CAN_RF0R register set. FIFO0 overrun condition, FOVR0 bit in the CAN_RF0R register set. Reception of a new message, FMP1 bits in the CAN_RF1R register are not 00. FIFO1 full condition, FULL1 bit in the CAN_RF1R register set.
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

The FIFO 0 interrupt can be generated by the following events:

The FIFO 1 interrupt can be generated by the following events:

683/1422

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN) FIFO1 overrun condition, FOVR1 bit in the CAN_RF1R register set. Error condition, for more details on error conditions please refer to the CAN Error Status register (CAN_ESR). Wakeup condition, SOF monitored on the CAN Rx signal. Entry into Sleep mode.

The error and status change interrupt can be generated by the following events:

24.9

CAN registers
The peripheral registers have to be accessed by words (32 bits).

24.9.1

Register access protection

Erroneous access to certain configuration registers can cause the hardware to temporarily disturb the whole CAN network. Therefore the CAN_BTR register can be modified by software only while the CAN hardware is in initialization mode. Although the transmission of incorrect data will not cause problems at the CAN network level, it can severely disturb the application. A transmit mailbox can be only modified by software while it is in empty state, refer to Figure 229: Transmit mailbox states. The filter values can be modified either deactivating the associated filter banks or by setting the FINIT bit. Moreover, the modification of the filter configuration (scale, mode and FIFO assignment) in CAN_FMxR, CAN_FSxR and CAN_FFAR registers can only be done when the filter initialization mode is set (FINIT=1) in the CAN_FMR register.

24.9.2

CAN control and status registers

Refer to Section 1.1 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions.

CAN master control register (CAN_MCR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0001 0002
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 Reserved rw 15 RESET Reserved rs rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 TTCM 6 ABOM 5 AWUM 4 NART 3 RFLM 2 TXFP 1 SLEEP 0 INRQ 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 DBF

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 16 DBF: Debug freeze 0: CAN working during debug 1: CAN reception/transmission frozen during debug. Reception FIFOs can still be accessed/controlled normally.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

684/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

Bit 15 RESET: bxCAN software master reset 0: Normal operation. 1: Force a master reset of the bxCAN -> Sleep mode activated after reset (FMP bits and CAN_MCR register are initialized to the reset values). This bit is automatically reset to 0. Bits 14:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 TTCM: Time triggered communication mode 0: Time Triggered Communication mode disabled. 1: Time Triggered Communication mode enabled Note: For more information on Time Triggered Communication mode, please refer to Section 24.7.2: Time triggered communication mode. Bit 6 ABOM: Automatic bus-off management This bit controls the behavior of the CAN hardware on leaving the Bus-Off state. 0: The Bus-Off state is left on software request, once 128 occurrences of 11 recessive bits have been monitored and the software has first set and cleared the INRQ bit of the CAN_MCR register. 1: The Bus-Off state is left automatically by hardware once 128 occurrences of 11 recessive bits have been monitored. For detailed information on the Bus-Off state please refer to Section 24.7.6: Error management. Bit 5 AWUM: Automatic wakeup mode This bit controls the behavior of the CAN hardware on message reception during Sleep mode. 0: The Sleep mode is left on software request by clearing the SLEEP bit of the CAN_MCR register. 1: The Sleep mode is left automatically by hardware on CAN message detection. The SLEEP bit of the CAN_MCR register and the SLAK bit of the CAN_MSR register are cleared by hardware. Bit 4 NART: No automatic retransmission 0: The CAN hardware will automatically retransmit the message until it has been successfully transmitted according to the CAN standard. 1: A message will be transmitted only once, independently of the transmission result (successful, error or arbitration lost). Bit 3 RFLM: Receive FIFO locked mode 0: Receive FIFO not locked on overrun. Once a receive FIFO is full the next incoming message will overwrite the previous one. 1: Receive FIFO locked against overrun. Once a receive FIFO is full the next incoming message will be discarded. Bit 2 TXFP: Transmit FIFO priority This bit controls the transmission order when several mailboxes are pending at the same time. 0: Priority driven by the identifier of the message 1: Priority driven by the request order (chronologically) Bit 1 SLEEP: Sleep mode request This bit is set by software to request the CAN hardware to enter the Sleep mode. Sleep mode will be entered as soon as the current CAN activity (transmission or reception of a CAN frame) has been completed. This bit is cleared by software to exit Sleep mode. This bit is cleared by hardware when the AWUM bit is set and a SOF bit is detected on the CAN Rx signal. This bit is set after reset - CAN starts in Sleep mode.

685/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Bit 0 INRQ: Initialization request The software clears this bit to switch the hardware into normal mode. Once 11 consecutive recessive bits have been monitored on the Rx signal the CAN hardware is synchronized and ready for transmission and reception. Hardware signals this event by clearing the INAK bit in the CAN_MSR register. Software sets this bit to request the CAN hardware to enter initialization mode. Once software has set the INRQ bit, the CAN hardware waits until the current CAN activity (transmission or reception) is completed before entering the initialization mode. Hardware signals this event by setting the INAK bit in the CAN_MSR register.

CAN master status register (CAN_MSR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0C02
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 RX Reserved. r r r r 10 SAMP 9 RXM 8 TXM Reserved rc_w1 rc_w1 rc_w1 r r 7 6 5 4 SLAKI 3 WKUI 2 ERRI 1 SLAK 0 INAK

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 RX: CAN Rx signal Monitors the actual value of the CAN_RX Pin. Bit 10 SAMP: Last sample point The value of RX on the last sample point (current received bit value). Bit 9 RXM: Receive mode The CAN hardware is currently receiver. Bit 8 TXM: Transmit mode The CAN hardware is currently transmitter. Bits 7:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 SLAKI: Sleep acknowledge interrupt When SLKIE=1, this bit is set by hardware to signal that the bxCAN has entered Sleep Mode. When set, this bit generates a status change interrupt if the SLKIE bit in the CAN_IER register is set. This bit is cleared by software or by hardware, when SLAK is cleared. Note: When SLKIE=0, no polling on SLAKI is possible. In this case the SLAK bit can be polled. Bit 3 WKUI: Wakeup interrupt This bit is set by hardware to signal that a SOF bit has been detected while the CAN hardware was in Sleep mode. Setting this bit generates a status change interrupt if the WKUIE bit in the CAN_IER register is set. This bit is cleared by software.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

686/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

Bit 2 ERRI: Error interrupt This bit is set by hardware when a bit of the CAN_ESR has been set on error detection and the corresponding interrupt in the CAN_IER is enabled. Setting this bit generates a status change interrupt if the ERRIE bit in the CAN_IER register is set. This bit is cleared by software. Bit 1 SLAK: Sleep acknowledge This bit is set by hardware and indicates to the software that the CAN hardware is now in Sleep mode. This bit acknowledges the Sleep mode request from the software (set SLEEP bit in CAN_MCR register). This bit is cleared by hardware when the CAN hardware has left Sleep mode (to be synchronized on the CAN bus). To be synchronized the hardware has to monitor a sequence of 11 consecutive recessive bits on the CAN RX signal. Note: The process of leaving Sleep mode is triggered when the SLEEP bit in the CAN_MCR register is cleared. Please refer to the AWUM bit of the CAN_MCR register description for detailed information for clearing SLEEP bit Bit 0 INAK: Initialization acknowledge This bit is set by hardware and indicates to the software that the CAN hardware is now in initialization mode. This bit acknowledges the initialization request from the software (set INRQ bit in CAN_MCR register). This bit is cleared by hardware when the CAN hardware has left the initialization mode (to be synchronized on the CAN bus). To be synchronized the hardware has to monitor a sequence of 11 consecutive recessive bits on the CAN RX signal.

CAN transmit status register (CAN_TSR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x1C00 0000
31 LOW2 r 15 ABRQ 1 rs 30 LOW1 r 14 29 LOW0 r 13 Reserved Res. 28 TME2 r 12 27 TME1 r 11 TERR 1 rc_w1 26 TME0 r 10 ALST1 rc_w1 25 24 23 ABRQ 2 rs 7 ABRQ 0 rs 6 5 4 22 21 20 19 TERR 2 rc_w1 3 TERR 0 rc_w1 18 ALST2 rc_w1 2 ALST0 rc_w1 17 TXOK 2 rc_w1 1 TXOK 0 rc_w1 16 RQCP 2 rc_w1 0 RQCP 0 rc_w1

CODE[1:0] r 9 TXOK 1 rc_w1 r 8 RQCP 1 rc_w1

Reserved

Reserved

Bit 31 LOW2: Lowest priority flag for mailbox 2 This bit is set by hardware when more than one mailbox are pending for transmission and mailbox 2 has the lowest priority. Bit 30 LOW1: Lowest priority flag for mailbox 1 This bit is set by hardware when more than one mailbox are pending for transmission and mailbox 1 has the lowest priority. Bit 29 LOW0: Lowest priority flag for mailbox 0 This bit is set by hardware when more than one mailbox are pending for transmission and mailbox 0 has the lowest priority. Note: The LOW[2:0] bits are set to zero when only one mailbox is pending.

687/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Bit 28 TME2: Transmit mailbox 2 empty This bit is set by hardware when no transmit request is pending for mailbox 2. Bit 27 TME1: Transmit mailbox 1 empty This bit is set by hardware when no transmit request is pending for mailbox 1. Bit 26 TME0: Transmit mailbox 0 empty This bit is set by hardware when no transmit request is pending for mailbox 0. Bits 25:24 CODE[1:0]: Mailbox code In case at least one transmit mailbox is free, the code value is equal to the number of the next transmit mailbox free. In case all transmit mailboxes are pending, the code value is equal to the number of the transmit mailbox with the lowest priority. Bit 23 ABRQ2: Abort request for mailbox 2 Set by software to abort the transmission request for the corresponding mailbox. Cleared by hardware when the mailbox becomes empty. Setting this bit has no effect when the mailbox is not pending for transmission. Bits 22:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 TERR2: Transmission error of mailbox 2 This bit is set when the previous TX failed due to an error. Bit 18 ALST2: Arbitration lost for mailbox 2 This bit is set when the previous TX failed due to an arbitration lost. Bit 17 TXOK2: Transmission OK of mailbox 2 The hardware updates this bit after each transmission attempt. 0: The previous transmission failed 1: The previous transmission was successful This bit is set by hardware when the transmission request on mailbox 2 has been completed successfully. Please refer to Figure 229. Bit 16 RQCP2: Request completed mailbox2 Set by hardware when the last request (transmit or abort) has been performed. Cleared by software writing a 1 or by hardware on transmission request (TXRQ2 set in CAN_TMID2R register). Clearing this bit clears all the status bits (TXOK2, ALST2 and TERR2) for Mailbox 2. Bit 15 ABRQ1: Abort request for mailbox 1 Set by software to abort the transmission request for the corresponding mailbox. Cleared by hardware when the mailbox becomes empty. Setting this bit has no effect when the mailbox is not pending for transmission. Bits 14:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 TERR1: Transmission error of mailbox1 This bit is set when the previous TX failed due to an error. Bit 10 ALST1: Arbitration lost for mailbox1 This bit is set when the previous TX failed due to an arbitration lost. Bit 9 TXOK1: Transmission OK of mailbox1 The hardware updates this bit after each transmission attempt. 0: The previous transmission failed 1: The previous transmission was successful This bit is set by hardware when the transmission request on mailbox 1 has been completed successfully. Please refer to Figure 229

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

688/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

Bit 8 RQCP1: Request completed mailbox1 Set by hardware when the last request (transmit or abort) has been performed. Cleared by software writing a 1 or by hardware on transmission request (TXRQ1 set in CAN_TI1R register). Clearing this bit clears all the status bits (TXOK1, ALST1 and TERR1) for Mailbox 1. Bit 7 ABRQ0: Abort request for mailbox0 Set by software to abort the transmission request for the corresponding mailbox. Cleared by hardware when the mailbox becomes empty. Setting this bit has no effect when the mailbox is not pending for transmission. Bits 6:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 3 TERR0: Transmission error of mailbox0 This bit is set when the previous TX failed due to an error. Bit 2 ALST0: Arbitration lost for mailbox0 This bit is set when the previous TX failed due to an arbitration lost. Bit 1 TXOK0: Transmission OK of mailbox0 The hardware updates this bit after each transmission attempt. 0: The previous transmission failed 1: The previous transmission was successful This bit is set by hardware when the transmission request on mailbox 1 has been completed successfully. Please refer to Figure 229 Bit 0 RQCP0: Request completed mailbox0 Set by hardware when the last request (transmit or abort) has been performed. Cleared by software writing a 1 or by hardware on transmission request (TXRQ0 set in CAN_TI0R register). Clearing this bit clears all the status bits (TXOK0, ALST0 and TERR0) for Mailbox 0.

CAN receive FIFO 0 register (CAN_RF0R)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 FULL0 Res. rs rc_w1 rc_w1 r r 2 1 0

RFOM0 FOVR0 Reserved

FMP0[1:0]

Bit 31:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 RFOM0: Release FIFO 0 output mailbox Set by software to release the output mailbox of the FIFO. The output mailbox can only be released when at least one message is pending in the FIFO. Setting this bit when the FIFO is empty has no effect. If at least two messages are pending in the FIFO, the software has to release the output mailbox to access the next message. Cleared by hardware when the output mailbox has been released.

689/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Bit 4 FOVR0: FIFO 0 overrun This bit is set by hardware when a new message has been received and passed the filter while the FIFO was full. This bit is cleared by software. Bit 3 FULL0: FIFO 0 full Set by hardware when three messages are stored in the FIFO. This bit is cleared by software. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 1:0 FMP0[1:0]: FIFO 0 message pending These bits indicate how many messages are pending in the receive FIFO. FMP is increased each time the hardware stores a new message in to the FIFO. FMP is decreased each time the software releases the output mailbox by setting the RFOM0 bit.

CAN receive FIFO 1 register (CAN_RF1R)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 FULL1 Res. rs rc_w1 rc_w1 r r 2 1 0

RFOM1 FOVR1 Reserved

FMP1[1:0]

Bits 31:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 RFOM1: Release FIFO 1 output mailbox Set by software to release the output mailbox of the FIFO. The output mailbox can only be released when at least one message is pending in the FIFO. Setting this bit when the FIFO is empty has no effect. If at least two messages are pending in the FIFO, the software has to release the output mailbox to access the next message. Cleared by hardware when the output mailbox has been released. Bit 4 FOVR1: FIFO 1 overrun This bit is set by hardware when a new message has been received and passed the filter while the FIFO was full. This bit is cleared by software. Bit 3 FULL1: FIFO 1 full Set by hardware when three messages are stored in the FIFO. This bit is cleared by software. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 1:0 FMP1[1:0]: FIFO 1 message pending These bits indicate how many messages are pending in the receive FIFO1. FMP1 is increased each time the hardware stores a new message in to the FIFO1. FMP is decreased each time the software releases the output mailbox by setting the RFOM1 bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

690/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

CAN interrupt enable register (CAN_IER)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 SLKIE Reserved rw 15 ERRIE Reserved rw 14 13 12 11 LEC IE rw 10 BOF IE rw 9 EPV IE rw 8 EWG IE rw 7 6 FOV IE1 rw 5 FF IE1 rw 4 FMP IE1 rw 3 FOV IE0 rw 2 FF IE0 rw 1 FMP IE0 rw rw 0 TME IE rw 16 WKUIE

Res.

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 17 SLKIE: Sleep interrupt enable 0: No interrupt when SLAKI bit is set. 1: Interrupt generated when SLAKI bit is set. Bit 16 WKUIE: Wakeup interrupt enable 0: No interrupt when WKUI is set. 1: Interrupt generated when WKUI bit is set. Bit 15 ERRIE: Error interrupt enable 0: No interrupt will be generated when an error condition is pending in the CAN_ESR. 1: An interrupt will be generation when an error condition is pending in the CAN_ESR. Bits 14:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 LECIE: Last error code interrupt enable 0: ERRI bit will not be set when the error code in LEC[2:0] is set by hardware on error detection. 1: ERRI bit will be set when the error code in LEC[2:0] is set by hardware on error detection. Bit 10 BOFIE: Bus-off interrupt enable 0: ERRI bit will not be set when BOFF is set. 1: ERRI bit will be set when BOFF is set. Bit 9 EPVIE: Error passive interrupt enable 0: ERRI bit will not be set when EPVF is set. 1: ERRI bit will be set when EPVF is set. Bit 8 EWGIE: Error warning interrupt enable 0: ERRI bit will not be set when EWGF is set. 1: ERRI bit will be set when EWGF is set. Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 FOVIE1: FIFO overrun interrupt enable 0: No interrupt when FOVR is set. 1: Interrupt generation when FOVR is set. Bit 5 FFIE1: FIFO full interrupt enable 0: No interrupt when FULL bit is set. 1: Interrupt generated when FULL bit is set.

691/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Bit 4 FMPIE1: FIFO message pending interrupt enable 0: No interrupt generated when state of FMP[1:0] bits are not 00b. 1: Interrupt generated when state of FMP[1:0] bits are not 00b. Bit 3 FOVIE0: FIFO overrun interrupt enable 0: No interrupt when FOVR bit is set. 1: Interrupt generated when FOVR bit is set. Bit 2 FFIE0: FIFO full interrupt enable 0: No interrupt when FULL bit is set. 1: Interrupt generated when FULL bit is set. Bit 1 FMPIE0: FIFO message pending interrupt enable 0: No interrupt generated when state of FMP[1:0] bits are not 00b. 1: Interrupt generated when state of FMP[1:0] bits are not 00b. Bit 0 TMEIE: Transmit mailbox empty interrupt enable 0: No interrupt when RQCPx bit is set. 1: Interrupt generated when RQCPx bit is set. Note: Refer to Section 24.8: bxCAN interrupts.

CAN error status register (CAN_ESR)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

REC[7:0] r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 Reserved rw rw r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 LEC[2:0]

TEC[7:0] r 4 r 3 Res. rw r r r r 2 BOFF r 1 EPVF r 0 EWGF

Bits 31:24 REC[7:0]: Receive error counter The implementing part of the fault confinement mechanism of the CAN protocol. In case of an error during reception, this counter is incremented by 1 or by 8 depending on the error condition as defined by the CAN standard. After every successful reception the counter is decremented by 1 or reset to 120 if its value was higher than 128. When the counter value exceeds 127, the CAN controller enters the error passive state. Bits 23:16 TEC[7:0]: Least significant byte of the 9-bit transmit error counter The implementing part of the fault confinement mechanism of the CAN protocol. Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

692/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

Bits 6:4 LEC[2:0]: Last error code This field is set by hardware and holds a code which indicates the error condition of the last error detected on the CAN bus. If a message has been transferred (reception or transmission) without error, this field will be cleared to 0. The LEC[2:0] bits can be set to value 0b111 by software. They are updated by hardware to indicate the current communication status. 000: No Error 001: Stuff Error 010: Form Error 011: Acknowledgment Error 100: Bit recessive Error 101: Bit dominant Error 110: CRC Error 111: Set by software Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 BOFF: Bus-off flag This bit is set by hardware when it enters the bus-off state. The bus-off state is entered on TEC overflow, greater than 255, refer to Section 24.7.6 on page 680. Bit 1 EPVF: Error passive flag This bit is set by hardware when the Error Passive limit has been reached (Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter>127). Bit 0 EWGF: Error warning flag This bit is set by hardware when the warning limit has been reached (Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter96).

CAN bit timing register (CAN_BTR)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0123 0000 This register can only be accessed by the software when the CAN hardware is in initialization mode.
31 SILM rw 15 30 LBKM Reserved rw 14 13 12 11 10 rw 9 rw 8 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 Res. 22 21 TS2[2:0] 20 19 18 17 16

SJW[1:0]

TS1[3:0]

BRP[9:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 31 SILM: Silent mode (debug) 0: Normal operation 1: Silent Mode Bit 30 LBKM: Loop back mode (debug) 0: Loop Back Mode disabled 1: Loop Back Mode enabled Bits 29:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

693/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Bits 25:24 SJW[1:0]: Resynchronization jump width These bits define the maximum number of time quanta the CAN hardware is allowed to lengthen or shorten a bit to perform the resynchronization. tRJW = tCAN x (SJW[1:0] + 1) Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 22:20 TS2[2:0]: Time segment 2 These bits define the number of time quanta in Time Segment 2. tBS2 = tCAN x (TS2[2:0] + 1) Bits 19:16 TS1[3:0]: Time segment 1 These bits define the number of time quanta in Time Segment 1 tBS1 = tCAN x (TS1[3:0] + 1) For more information on bit timing, please refer to Section 24.7.7: Bit timing on page 680. Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 9:0 BRP[9:0]: Baud rate prescaler These bits define the length of a time quanta. tq = (BRP[9:0]+1) x tPCLK

24.9.3

CAN mailbox registers

This chapter describes the registers of the transmit and receive mailboxes. Refer to Section 24.7.5: Message storage on page 678 for detailed register mapping. Transmit and receive mailboxes have the same registers except:

The FMI field in the CAN_RDTxR register. A receive mailbox is always write protected. A transmit mailbox is write-enabled only while empty, corresponding TME bit in the CAN_TSR register set.

There are 3 TX Mailboxes and 2 RX Mailboxes. Each RX Mailbox allows access to a 3 level depth FIFO, the access being offered only to the oldest received message in the FIFO. Each mailbox consist of 4 registers.

CAN_RI0R CAN_RDT0R CAN_RL0R CAN_RH0R

CAN_RI1R CAN_RDT1R CAN_RL1R CAN_RH1R

CAN_TI0R CAN_TDT0R CAN_TDL0R CAN_TDH0R

CAN_TI1R CAN_TDT1R CAN_TDL1R CAN_TDH1R

CAN_TI2R CAN_TDT2R CAN_TDL2R CAN_TDH2R

FIFO0

FIFO1

Three Tx Mailboxes

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

694/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

CAN TX mailbox identifier register (CAN_TIxR) (x=0..2)

Address offsets: 0x180, 0x190, 0x1A0 Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX (except bit 0, TXRQ = 0) All TX registers are write protected when the mailbox is pending transmission (TMEx reset). This register also implements the TX request control (bit 0) - reset value 0.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 EXID[17:13] rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 IDE rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 1 RTR rw rw 0 TXRQ rw 17 16

STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 EXID[12:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:21 STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18]: Standard identifier or extended identifier The standard identifier or the MSBs of the extended identifier (depending on the IDE bit value). Bit 20:3 EXID[17:0]: Extended identifier The LSBs of the extended identifier. Bit 2 IDE: Identifier extension This bit defines the identifier type of message in the mailbox. 0: Standard identifier. 1: Extended identifier. Bit 1 RTR: Remote transmission request 0: Data frame 1: Remote frame Bit 0 TXRQ: Transmit mailbox request Set by software to request the transmission for the corresponding mailbox. Cleared by hardware when the mailbox becomes empty.

695/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

CAN mailbox data length control and time stamp register (CAN_TDTxR) (x=0..2)
All bits of this register are write protected when the mailbox is not in empty state. Address offsets: 0x184, 0x194, 0x1A4 Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

TIME[15:0] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 Reserved rw rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 TGT Reserved rw rw rw rw rw 7 rw 6 rw 5 rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

DLC[3:0]

Bits 31:16 TIME[15:0]: Message time stamp This field contains the 16-bit timer value captured at the SOF transmission. Bits 15:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 TGT: Transmit global time This bit is active only when the hardware is in the Time Trigger Communication mode, TTCM bit of the CAN_MCR register is set. 0: Time stamp TIME[15:0] is not sent. 1: Time stamp TIME[15:0] value is sent in the last two data bytes of the 8-byte message: TIME[7:0] in data byte 7 and TIME[15:8] in data byte 6, replacing the data written in CAN_TDHxR[31:16] register (DATA6[7:0] and DATA7[7:0]). DLC must be programmed as 8 in order these two bytes to be sent over the CAN bus. Bits 7:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 3:0 DLC[3:0]: Data length code This field defines the number of data bytes a data frame contains or a remote frame request. A message can contain from 0 to 8 data bytes, depending on the value in the DLC field.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

696/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

CAN mailbox data low register (CAN_TDLxR) (x=0..2)

All bits of this register are write protected when the mailbox is not in empty state. Address offsets: 0x188, 0x198, 0x1A8 Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DATA3[7:0] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5

DATA2[7:0] rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

DATA1[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

DATA0[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:24 DATA3[7:0]: Data byte 3 Data byte 3 of the message. Bits 23:16 DATA2[7:0]: Data byte 2 Data byte 2 of the message. Bits 15:8 DATA1[7:0]: Data byte 1

Data byte 1 of the message.

Bits 7:0 DATA0[7:0]: Data byte 0 Data byte 0 of the message. A message can contain from 0 to 8 data bytes and starts with byte 0.

CAN mailbox data high register (CAN_TDHxR) (x=0..2)

All bits of this register are write protected when the mailbox is not in empty state. Address offsets: 0x18C, 0x19C, 0x1AC Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DATA7[7:0] rw 15 rw 14 rw 13 rw 12 rw 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 rw 7 rw 6 rw 5

DATA6[7:0] rw 4 rw 3 rw 2 rw 1 rw 0

DATA5[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

DATA4[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw

697/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Bits 31:24 DATA7[7:0]: Data byte 7 Data byte 7 of the message. Note: If TGT of this message and TTCM are active, DATA7 and DATA6 will be replaced by the TIME stamp value. Bits 23:16 DATA6[7:0]: Data byte 6 Data byte 6 of the message. Bits 15:8 DATA5[7:0]: Data byte 5

Data byte 5 of the message.

Bits 7:0 DATA4[7:0]: Data byte 4 Data byte 4 of the message.

CAN receive FIFO mailbox identifier register (CAN_RIxR) (x=0..1)

Address offsets: 0x1B0, 0x1C0 Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX All RX registers are write protected.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 EXID[17:13] r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 IDE r r r r r r r r 1 RTR Res. r r r r r r r r r 0 17 16

STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18] r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 EXID[12:0]

Bits 31:21 STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18]: Standard identifier or extended identifier The standard identifier or the MSBs of the extended identifier (depending on the IDE bit value). Bits 20:3 EXID[17:0]: Extended identifier The LSBs of the extended identifier. Bit 2 IDE: Identifier extension This bit defines the identifier type of message in the mailbox. 0: Standard identifier. 1: Extended identifier. Bit 1 RTR: Remote transmission request 0: Data frame 1: Remote frame Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

698/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

CAN receive FIFO mailbox data length control and time stamp register (CAN_RDTxR) (x=0..1)
Address offsets: 0x1B4, 0x1C4 Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX All RX registers are write protected.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

TIME[15:0] r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

FMI[7:0] Reserved r r r r r r r r r

DLC[3:0] r r r

Bits 31:16 TIME[15:0]: Message time stamp This field contains the 16-bit timer value captured at the SOF detection. Bits 15:8 FMI[7:0]: Filter match index This register contains the index of the filter the message stored in the mailbox passed through. For more details on identifier filtering please refer to Section 24.7.4: Identifier filtering on page 674 - Filter Match Index paragraph. Bits 7:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 3:0 DLC[3:0]: Data length code This field defines the number of data bytes a data frame contains (0 to 8). It is 0 in the case of a remote frame request.

699/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

CAN receive FIFO mailbox data low register (CAN_RDLxR) (x=0..1)

All bits of this register are write protected when the mailbox is not in empty state. Address offsets: 0x1B8, 0x1C8 Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX All RX registers are write protected.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DATA3[7:0] r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5

DATA2[7:0] r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

DATA1[7:0] r r r r r r r r r r r

DATA0[7:0] r r r r r

Bits 31:24 DATA3[7:0]: Data Byte 3 Data byte 3 of the message. Bits 23:16 DATA2[7:0]: Data Byte 2 Data byte 2 of the message. Bits 15:8 DATA1[7:0]: Data Byte 1

Data byte 1 of the message.

Bits 7:0 DATA0[7:0]: Data Byte 0 Data byte 0 of the message. A message can contain from 0 to 8 data bytes and starts with byte 0.

CAN receive FIFO mailbox data high register (CAN_RDHxR) (x=0..1)

Address offsets: 0x1BC, 0x1CC Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX All RX registers are write protected.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DATA7[7:0] r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5

DATA6[7:0] r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

DATA5[7:0] r r r r r r r r r r r

DATA4[7:0] r r r r r

Bits 31:24 DATA7[7:0]: Data Byte 7 Data byte 3 of the message. Bits 23:16 DATA6[7:0]: Data Byte 6 Data byte 2 of the message.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

700/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

Bits 15:8 DATA5[7:0]: Data Byte 5

Data byte 1 of the message.

Bits 7:0 DATA4[7:0]: Data Byte 4 Data byte 0 of the message.

24.9.4

CAN filter registers

CAN filter master register (CAN_FMR)
Address offset: 0x200 Reset value: 0x2A1C 0E01 All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 3 2 1 0 FINIT

CAN2SB[5:0] Reserved

Bits 31:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 13:8 CAN2SB[5:0]: CAN2 start bank These bits are set and cleared by software. They define the start bank for the CAN2 interface (Slave) in the range 0 to 27. Note: When CAN2SB[5:0] = 28d, all the filters to CAN1 can be used. When CAN2SB[5:0] is set to 0, no filters are assigned to CAN1. Bits 7:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 FINIT: Filter init mode Initialization mode for filter banks 0: Active filters mode. 1: Initialization mode for the filters.

701/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

CAN filter mode register (CAN_FM1R)

Address offset: 0x204 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register can be written only when the filter initialization mode is set (FINIT=1) in the CAN_FMR register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

FBM27 FBM26 FBM25 FBM24 FBM23 FBM22 FBM21 FBM20 FBM19 FBM18 FBM17 FBM16 Reserved rw 15 14 13 12 11 rw 10 rw 9 FBM9 rw rw 8 FBM8 rw rw 7 FBM7 rw rw 6 FBM6 rw rw 5 FBM5 rw rw 4 FBM4 rw rw 3 FBM3 rw rw 2 FBM2 rw rw 1 FBM1 rw rw 0 FBM0 rw

FBM15 FBM14 FBM13 FBM12 FBM11 FBM10 rw rw rw rw rw rw

Note:

Please refer to Figure 231: Filter bank scale configuration - register organization on page 676
Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 27:0 FBMx: Filter mode Mode of the registers of Filter x. 0: Two 32-bit registers of filter bank x are in Identifier Mask mode. 1: Two 32-bit registers of filter bank x are in Identifier List mode.

CAN filter scale register (CAN_FS1R)

Address offset: 0x20C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register can be written only when the filter initialization mode is set (FINIT=1) in the CAN_FMR register.
31 30 29 28 27 FSC27 Reserved rw 15 FSC15 rw 14 FSC14 rw 13 FSC13 rw 12 FSC12 rw 11 FSC11 rw rw 10 FSC10 rw rw 9 FSC9 rw rw 8 FSC8 rw rw 7 FSC7 rw rw 6 FSC6 rw rw 5 FSC5 rw rw 4 FSC4 rw rw 3 FSC3 rw rw 2 FSC2 rw rw 1 FSC1 rw rw 0 FSC0 rw 26 FSC26 25 FSC25 24 FSC24 23 FSC23 22 FSC22 21 FSC21 20 FSC20 19 FSC19 18 FSC18 17 FSC17 16 FSC16

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27:0 FSCx: Filter scale configuration These bits define the scale configuration of Filters 13-0. 0: Dual 16-bit scale configuration 1: Single 32-bit scale configuration

Note:

Please refer to Figure 231: Filter bank scale configuration - register organization on page 676.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

702/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

CAN filter FIFO assignment register (CAN_FFA1R)

Address offset: 0x214 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register can be written only when the filter initialization mode is set (FINIT=1) in the CAN_FMR register.
31 30 29 28 27 FFA27 Reserved rw 15 FFA15 rw 14 FFA14 rw 13 FFA13 rw 12 FFA12 rw 11 FFA11 rw rw 10 FFA10 rw rw 9 FFA9 rw rw 8 FFA8 rw rw 7 FFA7 rw rw 6 FFA6 rw rw 5 FFA5 rw rw 4 FFA4 rw rw 3 FFA3 rw rw 2 FFA2 rw rw 1 FFA1 rw rw 0 FFA0 rw 26 FFA26 25 FFA25 24 FFA24 23 FFA23 22 FFA22 21 FFA21 20 FFA20 19 FFA19 18 FFA18 17 FFA17 16 FFA16

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27:0 FFAx: Filter FIFO assignment for filter x The message passing through this filter will be stored in the specified FIFO. 0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0 1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1

CAN filter activation register (CAN_FA1R)

Address offset: 0x21C Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

FACT27 FACT26 FACT25 FACT24 FACT23 FACT22 FACT21 FACT20 FACT19 FACT18 FACT17 FACT16 Reserved rw 15 14 13 12 11 rw 10 rw 9 rw 8 FACT8 rw rw 7 FACT7 rw rw 6 FACT6 rw rw 5 FACT5 rw rw 4 FACT4 rw rw 3 FACT3 rw rw 2 FACT2 rw rw 1 FACT1 rw rw 0 FACT0 rw

FACT15 FACT14 FACT13 FACT12 FACT11 FACT10 FACT9 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 27:0 FACTx: Filter active The software sets this bit to activate Filter x. To modify the Filter x registers (CAN_FxR[0:7]), the FACTx bit must be cleared or the FINIT bit of the CAN_FMR register must be set. 0: Filter x is not active 1: Filter x is active

703/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Filter bank i register x (CAN_FiRx) (i=0..27, x=1, 2)

Address offsets: 0x240..0x31C Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX There are 28 filter banks, i=0 .. 27. Each filter bank i is composed of two 32-bit registers, CAN_FiR[2:1]. This register can only be modified when the FACTx bit of the CAN_FAxR register is cleared or when the FINIT bit of the CAN_FMR register is set.
31 FB31 rw 15 FB15 rw 30 FB30 rw 14 FB14 rw 29 FB29 rw 13 FB13 rw 28 FB28 rw 12 FB12 rw 27 FB27 rw 11 FB11 rw 26 FB26 rw 10 FB10 rw 25 FB25 rw 9 FB9 rw 24 FB24 rw 8 FB8 rw 23 FB23 rw 7 FB7 rw 22 FB22 rw 6 FB6 rw 21 FB21 rw 5 FB5 rw 20 FB20 rw 4 FB4 rw 19 FB19 rw 3 FB3 rw 18 FB18 rw 2 FB2 rw 17 FB17 rw 1 FB1 rw 16 FB16 rw 0 FB0 rw

In all configurations:
Bits 31:0 FB[31:0]: Filter bits Identifier Each bit of the register specifies the level of the corresponding bit of the expected identifier. 0: Dominant bit is expected 1: Recessive bit is expected Mask Each bit of the register specifies whether the bit of the associated identifier register must match with the corresponding bit of the expected identifier or not. 0: Dont care, the bit is not used for the comparison 1: Must match, the bit of the incoming identifier must have the same level has specified in the corresponding identifier register of the filter.

Note:

Depending on the scale and mode configuration of the filter the function of each register can differ. For the filter mapping, functions description and mask registers association, refer to Section 24.7.4: Identifier filtering on page 674. A Mask/Identifier register in mask mode has the same bit mapping as in identifier list mode. For the register mapping/addresses of the filter banks please refer to the Table 102 on page 705.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

704/1422

Controller area network (bxCAN)

RM0090

24.9.5

bxCAN register map

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses. The registers from offset 0x200 to 31C are present only in CAN1.

Table 102. bxCAN register map and reset values

Offset
0x000

Register
CAN_MCR Reset value

RESET

SLEEP 1 SLAK 1 TXOK0 0 0 0 FMPIE0 0 EPVF 0 0 RTR x x x x RTR x

AWUM

ABOM

TTCM

RFLM

NART

TXFP 0 ERRI

Reserved

Reserved

1 Reserved CODE[1:0]

0 SAMP RXM TXM RX

0 SLAKI

0 WKUI

0x004

CAN_MSR Reset value

Reserved

1 RQCP2 ABRQ2 ABRQ1 TXOK2 TERR2 TERR1 ALST2 LOW[2:0] TME[2:0] 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 ALST1

0 TXOK1

0 RQCP1 ABRQ0

0 TERR0

0 ALST0

0x008

CAN_TSR Reset value CAN_RF0R Reset value CAN_RF1R Reset value

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0 RFOM0 FOVR0

0 FULL0

0 Reserved

0x00C

Reserved

0 RFOM1

0 FOVR1

0 FULL1

FMP0[1:0] 0 FMP1[1:0] 0 TMEIE 0 EWGF 0 0 TXRQ 0 TXRQ 0 x x x

0x010

Reserved

0 FOVIE1 EWGIE WKUIE ERRIE Reserved BOFIE EPVIE LECIE SLKIE FFIE1 Reserved Reserved

0 FMPIE1

0 FOVIE0

0x014

CAN_IER Reset value CAN_ESR Reset value CAN_BTR Reset value 0 SILM 0 LBKM 0 REC[7:0] 0 0 0

0 TEC[7:0] 0 SJW[1:0] 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 LEC[2:0]

0 Reserved

0x018

Reserved 0 0

0x01C

Reserved 0

TS2[2:0] 0 1 0 0

TS1[3:0] 0 1 1

Reserved 0 0 0 0

BRP[9:0] 0 0 0 0

0x0200x17F

Reserved

0x180

CAN_TI0R Reset value x x

STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EXID[17:0] x x x x x x TGT x x x x x

0x184

CAN_TDT0R Reset value x x x x x x

TIME[15:0] x x x x x x x x x x

Reserved

Reserved x

DLC[3:0] x

x DATA1[7:0]

0x188

CAN_TDL0R Reset value x x

DATA3[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA2[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA0[7:0] x x x x x x x x

0x18C

CAN_TDH0R Reset value x x

DATA7[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA6[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA5[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA4[7:0] x x x x IDE

0x190

CAN_TI1R Reset value x x

STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EXID[17:0] x x x x x x x x x x x

705/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

IDE

BOFF

FFIE0

Reserved

RQCP0 0

INAK 0

INRQ 0

DBF

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090 Table 102. bxCAN register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0x194

Controller area network (bxCAN)

Register
CAN_TDT1R Reset value

TIME[15:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

TGT

0x198

CAN_TDL1R Reset value x x

0x19C

CAN_TDH1R Reset value x x

0x1A0

CAN_TI2R Reset value x x

STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EXID[17:0] x x x x x x TGT x x x x x

0x1A4

CAN_TDT2R Reset value x x x x x x

TIME[15:0] x x x x x x x x x x

Reserved

Reserved x

DLC[3:0] x x x

x DATA1[7:0]

0x1A8

CAN_TDL2R Reset value x x

DATA3[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA2[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA0[7:0] x x x x x x x x x x

0x1AC

CAN_TDH2R Reset value CAN_RI0R x x

DATA7[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA6[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA5[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA4[7:0] x x x x IDE x RTR x x x x RTR x x x x x Reserved x x x Reserved x x x

STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

EXID[17:0] x x x x x x x x x x x

0x1B0 Reset value CAN_RDT0R Reset value 0x1B8 CAN_RDL0R Reset value 0x1BC CAN_RDH0R Reset value CAN_RI1R 0x1C0 Reset value CAN_RDT1R Reset value 0x1C8 CAN_RDL1R Reset value 0x1CC CAN_RDH1R Reset value 0x1D00x1FF x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

0x1B4

TIME[15:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FMI[7:0] x x x x x

Reserved x

DLC[3:0] x

DATA3[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA2[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA1[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA0[7:0] x x x x

DATA7[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA6[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA5[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA4[7:0] x x x x IDE

STID[10:0]/EXID[28:18]

EXID[17:0]

0x1C4

TIME[15:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FMI[7:0] x x x x x

Reserved x

DLC[3:0] x

DATA3[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA2[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA1[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA0[7:0] x x x x

DATA7[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA6[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA5[7:0] x x x x x x x x

DATA4[7:0] x x x x

Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

706/1422

TXRQ 0

RTR

IDE

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved x DLC[3:0] x x x x DATA1[7:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x DATA3[7:0] x x x x x x x x DATA2[7:0] x x x x DATA0[7:0] x x x x x x DATA7[7:0] x x x x x x x x DATA6[7:0] x x x x x x x x DATA5[7:0] x x x x x x x x DATA4[7:0] x x x x x x

Controller area network (bxCAN) Table 102. bxCAN register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0x200

RM0090

Register
CAN_FMR Reset value

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CAN2SB[5:0] 0 1 1 1 0

Reserved

0x204

CAN_FM1R Reset value

FBM[27:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x208

Reserved

0x20C

CAN_FS1R Reset value

Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FSC[27:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x210

Reserved

0x214

CAN_FFA1R Reset value

Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FFA[27:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x218

Reserved

0x21C

CAN_FA1R Reset value

Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

FACT[27:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x220

Reserved

0x2240x23F CAN_F0R1 Reset value 0x244 CAN_F0R2 Reset value 0x248 CAN_F1R1 Reset value 0x24C . . . . 0x318 CAN_F1R2 Reset value . . . . CAN_F27R1 Reset value 0x31C CAN_F27R2 Reset value x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Reserved

0x240

FB[31:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FB[31:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FB[31:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FB[31:0] x x x x . . . . FB[31:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FB[31:0] x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

707/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

FINIT 1

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

25

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

25.1

I2C introduction
I2C (inter-integrated circuit) bus Interface serves as an interface between the microcontroller and the serial I2C bus. It provides multimaster capability, and controls all I2C bus-specific sequencing, protocol, arbitration and timing. It supports standard and fast speed modes. It is also SMBus 2.0 compatible. It may be used for a variety of purposes, including CRC generation and verification, SMBus (system management bus) and PMBus (power management bus). Depending on specific device implementation DMA capability can be available for reduced CPU overload.

25.2

I2C main features

Parallel-bus/I2C protocol converter Multimaster capability: the same interface can act as Master or Slave I2C Master features: Clock generation Start and Stop generation Slave features: Programmable I2C Address detection Dual Addressing Capability to acknowledge 2 slave addresses Stop bit detection

I2C

Generation and detection of 7-bit/10-bit addressing and General Call Supports different communication speeds: Standard Speed (up to 100 kHz) Fast Speed (up to 400 kHz)

Programmable digital noise filter for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx Status flags: Transmitter/Receiver mode flag End-of-Byte transmission flag I2C busy flag Arbitration lost condition for master mode Acknowledgement failure after address/ data transmission Detection of misplaced start or stop condition Overrun/Underrun if clock stretching is disabled 1 Interrupt for successful address/ data communication

Error flags:

2 Interrupt vectors:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

708/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

1 Interrupt for error condition

Optional clock stretching 1-byte buffer with DMA capability Configurable PEC (packet error checking) generation or verification: PEC value can be transmitted as last byte in Tx mode PEC error checking for last received byte 25 ms clock low timeout delay 10 ms master cumulative clock low extend time 25 ms slave cumulative clock low extend time Hardware PEC generation/verification with ACK control Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) supported

SMBus 2.0 Compatibility:

PMBus Compatibility

Note:

Some of the above features may not be available in certain products. The user should refer to the product data sheet, to identify the specific features supported by the I2C interface implementation.

25.3

I2C functional description

In addition to receiving and transmitting data, this interface converts it from serial to parallel format and vice versa. The interrupts are enabled or disabled by software. The interface is connected to the I2C bus by a data pin (SDA) and by a clock pin (SCL). It can be connected with a standard (up to 100 kHz) or fast (up to 400 kHz) I2C bus.

25.3.1

Mode selection
The interface can operate in one of the four following modes:

Slave transmitter Slave receiver Master transmitter Master receiver

By default, it operates in slave mode. The interface automatically switches from slave to master, after it generates a START condition and from master to slave, if an arbitration loss or a Stop generation occurs, allowing multimaster capability.

Communication flow
In Master mode, the I2C interface initiates a data transfer and generates the clock signal. A serial data transfer always begins with a start condition and ends with a stop condition. Both start and stop conditions are generated in master mode by software. In Slave mode, the interface is capable of recognizing its own addresses (7 or 10-bit), and the General Call address. The General Call address detection may be enabled or disabled by software. Data and addresses are transferred as 8-bit bytes, MSB first. The first byte(s) following the start condition contain the address (one in 7-bit mode, two in 10-bit mode). The address is always transmitted in Master mode.

709/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface A 9th clock pulse follows the 8 clock cycles of a byte transfer, during which the receiver must send an acknowledge bit to the transmitter. Refer to Figure 238. Figure 238. I2C bus protocol
SDA MSB SCL 1 2 8 9 ACK

Start condition

Stop condition

Acknowledge may be enabled or disabled by software. The I2C interface addresses (dual addressing 7-bit/ 10-bit and/or general call address) can be selected by software. The block diagram of the I2C interface is shown in Figure 239. Figure 239. I2C block diagram for STM32F40x/41x

Data register

SDA

Data control

Data shift register

Comparator

PEC calculation

Own address register Dual address register SCL Clock control PEC register

Clock control Register (CCR) Control registers (CR1&CR2) Status registers (SR1&SR2) SMBA Interrupts DMA requests & ACK Control logic

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

710/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface Figure 240. I2C block diagram for STM32F42x/43x

RM0090

Data register

SDA

Noise filter

Data control

Data shift register

Comparator

PEC calculation

Own address register Dual address register SCL Noise filter Clock control PEC register

Clock control Register (CCR) Control registers (CR1&CR2) Status registers (SR1&SR2) SMBA Interrupts DMA requests & ACK
MS30035V1

Control logic

1. SMBA is an optional signal in SMBus mode. This signal is not applicable if SMBus is disabled.

25.3.2

I2C slave mode

By default the I2C interface operates in Slave mode. To switch from default Slave mode to Master mode a Start condition generation is needed. The peripheral input clock must be programmed in the I2C_CR2 register in order to generate correct timings. The peripheral input clock frequency must be at least:

2 MHz in Standard mode 4 MHz in Fast mode

As soon as a start condition is detected, the address is received from the SDA line and sent to the shift register. Then it is compared with the address of the interface (OAR1) and with OAR2 (if ENDUAL=1) or the General Call address (if ENGC = 1). Note: In 10-bit addressing mode, the comparison includes the header sequence (11110xx0), where xx denotes the two most significant bits of the address.

711/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface Header or address not matched: the interface ignores it and waits for another Start condition. Header matched (10-bit mode only): the interface generates an acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set and waits for the 8-bit slave address. Address matched: the interface generates in sequence:

An acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set The ADDR bit is set by hardware and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN bit is set. If ENDUAL=1, the software has to read the DUALF bit to check which slave address has been acknowledged.

In 10-bit mode, after receiving the address sequence the slave is always in Receiver mode. It will enter Transmitter mode on receiving a repeated Start condition followed by the header sequence with matching address bits and the least significant bit set (11110xx1). The TRA bit indicates whether the slave is in Receiver or Transmitter mode.

Slave transmitter
Following the address reception and after clearing ADDR, the slave sends bytes from the DR register to the SDA line via the internal shift register. The slave stretches SCL low until ADDR is cleared and DR filled with the data to be sent (see Figure 241 Transfer sequencing EV1 EV3). When the acknowledge pulse is received:

The TxE bit is set by hardware with an interrupt if the ITEVFEN and the ITBUFEN bits are set.

If TxE is set and some data were not written in the I2C_DR register before the end of the next data transmission, the BTF bit is set and the interface waits until BTF is cleared by a read to I2C_SR1 followed by a write to the I2C_DR register, stretching SCL low.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

712/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface Figure 241. Transfer sequence diagram for slave transmitter
7-bit slave transmitter
S Address A Data1 EV1 EV3-1 EV3 A Data2 EV3 A EV3 ..... DataN NA P EV3-2

RM0090

10-bit slave transmitter

S Header A Address A EV1 Sr Header A EV1 EV3_1 Data1 EV3 A EV3 .... DataN NA P EV3-2

Legend: S= Start, Sr = Repeated Start, P= Stop, A= Acknowledge, NA= Non-acknowledge, EVx= Event (with interrupt if ITEVFEN=1) EV1: ADDR=1, cleared by reading SR1 followed by reading SR2 EV3-1: TxE=1, shift register empty, data register empty, write Data1 in DR. EV3: TxE=1, shift register not empty, data register empty, cleared by writing DR EV3-2: AF=1; AF is cleared by writing 0 in AF bit of SR1 register.
ai18209

1. The EV1 and EV3_1 events stretch SCL low until the end of the corresponding software sequence. 2. The EV3 event stretches SCL low if the software sequence is not completed before the end of the next byte transmission

Slave receiver
Following the address reception and after clearing ADDR, the slave receives bytes from the SDA line into the DR register via the internal shift register. After each byte the interface generates in sequence:

An acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set The RxNE bit is set by hardware and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN and ITBUFEN bit is set.

If RxNE is set and the data in the DR register is not read before the end of the next data reception, the BTF bit is set and the interface waits until BTF is cleared by a read from the I2C_DR register, stretching SCL low (see Figure 242 Transfer sequencing).

713/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface Figure 242. Transfer sequence diagram for slave receiver
7-bit slave receiver
S Address A EV1 Data1 A Data2 EV2 A EV2 ..... DataN A P EV2 EV4

10-bit slav e receiver

S Header A Address A EV1 Data1 A EV2 ..... DataN A P EV2 EV4

Legend: S= Start, Sr = Repeated Start, P= Stop, A= Acknowledge, EVx= Event (with interrupt if ITEVFEN=1) EV1: ADDR=1, cleared by reading SR1 followed by reading SR2 EV2: RxNE=1 cleared by reading DR register. EV4: STOPF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing to the CR1 register
ai18208

1. The EV1 event stretches SCL low until the end of the corresponding software sequence. 2. The EV2 event stretches SCL low if the software sequence is not completed before the end of the next byte reception. 3. After checking the SR1 register content, the user should perform the complete clearing sequence for each flag found set. Thus, for ADDR and STOPF flags, the following sequence is required inside the I2C interrupt routine: READ SR1 if (ADDR == 1) {READ SR1; READ SR2} if (STOPF == 1) {READ SR1; WRITE CR1} The purpose is to make sure that both ADDR and STOPF flags are cleared if both are found set.

Closing slave communication

After the last data byte is transferred a Stop Condition is generated by the master. The interface detects this condition and sets:

The STOPF bit and generates an interrupt if the ITEVFEN bit is set.

The STOPF bit is cleared by a read of the SR1 register followed by a write to the CR1 register (see Figure 242: Transfer sequence diagram for slave receiver EV4).

25.3.3

I2C master mode

In Master mode, the I2C interface initiates a data transfer and generates the clock signal. A serial data transfer always begins with a Start condition and ends with a Stop condition. Master mode is selected as soon as the Start condition is generated on the bus with a START bit. The following is the required sequence in master mode.

Program the peripheral input clock in I2C_CR2 Register in order to generate correct timings Configure the clock control registers Configure the rise time register Program the I2C_CR1 register to enable the peripheral Set the START bit in the I2C_CR1 register to generate a Start condition 2 MHz in Standard mode 4 MHz in Fast mode

The peripheral input clock frequency must be at least:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

714/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

Start condition
Setting the START bit causes the interface to generate a Start condition and to switch to Master mode (M/SL bit set) when the BUSY bit is cleared. Note: In master mode, setting the START bit causes the interface to generate a ReStart condition at the end of the current byte transfer. Once the Start condition is sent:

The SB bit is set by hardware and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN bit is set.

Then the master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a write in the DR register with the Slave address (see Figure 243 and Figure 244 Transfer sequencing EV5).

Slave address transmission

Then the slave address is sent to the SDA line via the internal shift register.

In 10-bit addressing mode, sending the header sequence causes the following event: The ADD10 bit is set by hardware and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN bit is set.

Then the master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a write in the DR register with the second address byte (see Figure 243 and Figure 244 Transfer sequencing). The ADDR bit is set by hardware and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN bit is set.

Then the master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a read of the SR2 register (see Figure 243 and Figure 244 Transfer sequencing).

In 7-bit addressing mode, one address byte is sent. As soon as the address byte is sent, The ADDR bit is set by hardware and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN bit is set.

Then the master waits for a read of the SR1 register followed by a read of the SR2 register (see Figure 243 and Figure 244 Transfer sequencing). The master can decide to enter Transmitter or Receiver mode depending on the LSB of the slave address sent.

In 7-bit addressing mode, To enter Transmitter mode, a master sends the slave address with LSB reset. To enter Receiver mode, a master sends the slave address with LSB set. To enter Transmitter mode, a master sends the header (11110xx0) and then the slave address, (where xx denotes the two most significant bits of the address). To enter Receiver mode, a master sends the header (11110xx0) and then the slave address. Then it should send a repeated Start condition followed by the header (11110xx1), (where xx denotes the two most significant bits of the address).

In 10-bit addressing mode,

The TRA bit indicates whether the master is in Receiver or Transmitter mode.

715/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

Master transmitter
Following the address transmission and after clearing ADDR, the master sends bytes from the DR register to the SDA line via the internal shift register. The master waits until the first data byte is written into I2C_DR (see Figure 243 Transfer sequencing EV8_1). When the acknowledge pulse is received, the TxE bit is set by hardware and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN and ITBUFEN bits are set. If TxE is set and a data byte was not written in the DR register before the end of the last data transmission, BTF is set and the interface waits until BTF is cleared by a write to I2C_DR, stretching SCL low. Closing the communication After the last byte is written to the DR register, the STOP bit is set by software to generate a Stop condition (see Figure 243 Transfer sequencing EV8_2). The interface automatically goes back to slave mode (M/SL bit cleared). Note: Stop condition should be programmed during EV8_2 event, when either TxE or BTF is set.

Figure 243. Transfer sequence diagram for master transmitter

7-bit master transmitter
S EV5 Address A EV6 EV8_1 Data1 EV8 A EV8 Data2 A EV8 ..... DataN A EV8_2 P

10-bit master transmitter

S EV5 Header A EV9 Address A EV6 EV8_1 Data1 EV8 A EV8 ..... DataN A EV8_2 P

Legend: S= Start, Sr = Repeated Start, P= Stop, A= Acknowledge, EVx= Event (with interrupt if ITEVFEN = 1) EV5: SB=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register with Address. EV6: ADDR=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by reading SR2. EV8_1: TxE=1, shift register empty, data register empty, write Data1 in DR. EV8: TxE=1, shift register not empty,.data register empty, cleared by writing DR register EV8_2: TxE=1, BTF = 1, Program Stop request. TxE and BTF are cleared by hardware by the Stop condition EV9: ADD10=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register.
ai18210

1. The EV5, EV6, EV9, EV8_1 and EV8_2 events stretch SCL low until the end of the corresponding software sequence. 2. The EV8 event stretches SCL low if the software sequence is not complete before the end of the next byte transmission.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

716/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

Master receiver
Following the address transmission and after clearing ADDR, the I2C interface enters Master Receiver mode. In this mode the interface receives bytes from the SDA line into the DR register via the internal shift register. After each byte the interface generates in sequence: 1. 2. An acknowledge pulse if the ACK bit is set The RxNE bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the ITEVFEN and ITBUFEN bits are set (see Figure 244 Transfer sequencing EV7).

If the RxNE bit is set and the data in the DR register is not read before the end of the last data reception, the BTF bit is set by hardware and the interface waits until BTF is cleared by a read in the DR register, stretching SCL low. Closing the communication The master sends a NACK for the last byte received from the slave. After receiving this NACK, the slave releases the control of the SCL and SDA lines. Then the master can send a Stop/Restart condition. 1. To generate the nonacknowledge pulse after the last received data byte, the ACK bit must be cleared just after reading the second last data byte (after second last RxNE event). In order to generate the Stop/Restart condition, software must set the STOP/START bit after reading the second last data byte (after the second last RxNE event). In case a single byte has to be received, the Acknowledge disable is made during EV6 (before ADDR flag is cleared) and the STOP condition generation is made after EV6.

2. 3.

After the Stop condition generation, the interface goes automatically back to slave mode (M/SL bit cleared).

717/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 244. Transfer sequence diagram for master receiver

7-bit master receiver
S EV5 Address A EV6 Data1 A(1) Data2 EV7 A EV7 .....

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

DataN EV7_1

NA

P EV7

10-bit master receiver

S EV5 Header A EV9 Address A EV6

Sr EV5

Header

A EV6

Data1

A(1)

Data2 EV7

A ..... EV7

DataN EV7_1

NA

P EV7

Legend: S= Start, Sr = repeated Start, P = Stop, A= Ackowledge, NA = Non-acknowledge, EVx= Event (with interrupt if ITEVFEN=1) EV5: SB=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register. EV6: ADDR=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by reading SR2. In 10-bit master receiver mode, this sequence should be followed by writing CR2 with SART = 1. In case of the reception of 1 byte, the Acknowledge disable must be performed suring EV6 event, i.e. before clearing ADDR flag. EV7: RxNE = 1 cleared by reading DR register. EV7_1: RxNE = 1 cleared by reading DR register, programming ACK = 0 and STOP request. EV9: ADD10 = 1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writng DR register.

ai17540c

1. If a single byte is received, it is NA. 2. The EV5, EV6 and EV9 events stretch SCL low until the end of the corresponding software sequence. 3. The EV7 event stretches SCL low if the software sequence is not completed before the end of the next byte reception. 4. The EV7_1 software sequence must be completed before the ACK pulse of the current byte transfer.

The procedures described below are recommended if the EV7-1 software sequence is not completed before the ACK pulse of the current byte transfer. These procedures must be followed to make sure:

The ACK bit is set low on time before the end of the last data reception The STOP bit is set high after the last data reception without reception of supplementary data. Wait until ADDR = 1 (SCL stretched low until the ADDR flag is cleared) Set ACK low, set POS high Clear ADDR flag Wait until BTF = 1 (Data 1 in DR, Data2 in shift register, SCL stretched low until a data 1 is read) Set STOP high Read data 1 and 2

For 2-byte reception:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

718/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface For N >2 -byte reception, from N-2 data reception

RM0090

Wait until BTF = 1 (data N-2 in DR, data N-1 in shift register, SCL stretched low until data N-2 is read) Set ACK low Read data N-2 Wait until BTF = 1 (data N-1 in DR, data N in shift register, SCL stretched low until a data N-1 is read) Set STOP high Read data N-1 and N

25.3.4

Error conditions
The following are the error conditions which may cause communication to fail.

Bus error (BERR)

This error occurs when the I2C interface detects an external Stop or Start condition during an address or a data transfer. In this case:

the BERR bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the ITERREN bit is set in Slave mode: data are discarded and the lines are released by hardware: in case of a misplaced Start, the slave considers it is a restart and waits for an address, or a Stop condition in case of a misplaced Stop, the slave behaves like for a Stop condition and the lines are released by hardware

In Master mode: the lines are not released and the state of the current transmission is not affected. It is up to the software to abort or not the current transmission

Acknowledge failure (AF)

This error occurs when the interface detects a nonacknowledge bit. In this case:

the AF bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the ITERREN bit is set a transmitter which receives a NACK must reset the communication: If Slave: lines are released by hardware If Master: a Stop or repeated Start condition must be generated by software

Arbitration lost (ARLO)

This error occurs when the I2C interface detects an arbitration lost condition. In this case,

the ARLO bit is set by hardware (and an interrupt is generated if the ITERREN bit is set) the I2C Interface goes automatically back to slave mode (the M/SL bit is cleared). When the I2C loses the arbitration, it is not able to acknowledge its slave address in the same transfer, but it can acknowledge it after a repeated Start from the winning master. lines are released by hardware

719/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

Overrun/underrun error (OVR)

An overrun error can occur in slave mode when clock stretching is disabled and the I2C interface is receiving data. The interface has received a byte (RxNE=1) and the data in DR has not been read, before the next byte is received by the interface. In this case,

The last received byte is lost. In case of Overrun error, software should clear the RxNE bit and the transmitter should re-transmit the last received byte.

Underrun error can occur in slave mode when clock stretching is disabled and the I2C interface is transmitting data. The interface has not updated the DR with the next byte (TxE=1), before the clock comes for the next byte. In this case,

The same byte in the DR register will be sent again The user should make sure that data received on the receiver side during an underrun error are discarded and that the next bytes are written within the clock low time specified in the I2C bus standard.

For the first byte to be transmitted, the DR must be written after ADDR is cleared and before the first SCL rising edge. If not possible, the receiver must discard the first data.

25.3.5

Programmable noise filter

The programmable noise filter is available on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices only. In Fast mode, the I2C standard requires that spikes are suppressed to a length of 50 ns on SDA and SCL lines. An analog noise filter is implemented in the SDA and SCL I/Os. This filter is enabled by default and can be disabled by setting the ANOFF bit in the I2C_FLTR register. A digital noise filter can be enabled by configuring the DNF[3:0] bits to a non-zero value. This suppresses the spikes on SDA and SCL inputs with a length of up to DNF[3:0] * TPCLK1. Enabling the digital noise filter increases the SDA hold time by (DNF[3:0] +1)* TPCLK. To be compliant with the maximum hold time of the I2C-bus specification version 2.1 (Thd:dat), the DNF bits must be programmed using the constraints shown in Table 103, and assuming that the analog filter is disabled.

Note:

DNF[3:0] must only be configured when the I2C is disabled (PE = 0). If the analog filter is also enabled, the digital filter is added to the analog filter. Table 103. Maximum DNF[3:0] value to be compliant with Thd:dat(max)
Maximum DNF value PCLK1 frequency Standard mode 2 <= FPCLK1 <= 5 5 < FPCLK1 <= 10 10 < FPCLK1 <= 20 20 < FPCLK1 <= 30 2 12 15 15 Fast mode 0 0 1 7

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

720/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface Table 103. Maximum DNF[3:0] value to be compliant with Thd:dat(max)
Maximum DNF value PCLK1 frequency Standard mode 30 < FPCLK1 <= 40 40 < FPCLK1 <= 50 15 15 Fast mode 13 15

RM0090

Note:

For each frequency range, the constraint is given based on the worst case which is the minimum frequency of the range. Greater DNF values can be used if the system can support maximum hold time violation.

25.3.6

SDA/SCL line control

If clock stretching is enabled: Transmitter mode: If TxE=1 and BTF=1: the interface holds the clock line low before transmission to wait for the microcontroller to write the byte in the Data Register (both buffer and shift register are empty). Receiver mode: If RxNE=1 and BTF=1: the interface holds the clock line low after reception to wait for the microcontroller to read the byte in the Data Register (both buffer and shift register are full). Overrun Error in case of RxNE=1 and no read of DR has been done before the next byte is received. The last received byte is lost. Underrun Error in case TxE=1 and no write into DR has been done before the next byte must be transmitted. The same byte will be sent again. Write Collision not managed.

If clock stretching is disabled in Slave mode:

25.3.7

SMBus
Introduction
The System Management Bus (SMBus) is a two-wire interface through which various devices can communicate with each other and with the rest of the system. It is based on I2C principles of operation. SMBus provides a control bus for system and power management related tasks. A system may use SMBus to pass messages to and from devices instead of toggling individual control lines. The System Management Bus Specification refers to three types of devices. A slave is a device that is receiving or responding to a command. A master is a device that issues commands, generates the clocks, and terminates the transfer. A host is a specialized master that provides the main interface to the system's CPU. A host must be a master-slave and must support the SMBus host notify protocol. Only one host is allowed in a system.

Similarities between SMBus and I2C

2 wire bus protocol (1 Clk, 1 Data) + SMBus Alert line optional Master-slave communication, Master provides clock Multi master capability SMBus data format similar to I2C 7-bit addressing format (Figure 238).

721/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

Differences between SMBus and I2C

The following table describes the differences between SMBus and I2C. Table 104. SMBus vs. I2C
SMBus Max. speed 100 kHz Min. clock speed 10 kHz 35 ms clock low timeout Logic levels are fixed Different address types (reserved, dynamic etc.) Max. speed 400 kHz No minimum clock speed No timeout Logic levels are VDD dependent 7-bit, 10-bit and general call slave address types I2C

Different bus protocols (quick command, process No bus protocols call etc.)

SMBus application usage

With System Management Bus, a device can provide manufacturer information, tell the system what its model/part number is, save its state for a suspend event, report different types of errors, accept control parameters, and return its status. SMBus provides a control bus for system and power management related tasks.

Device identification
Any device that exists on the System Management Bus as a slave has a unique address called the Slave Address. For the list of reserved slave addresses, refer to the SMBus specification version. 2.0 (http://smbus.org/specs/).

Bus protocols
The SMBus specification supports up to 9 bus protocols. For more details of these protocols and SMBus address types, refer to SMBus specification version. 2.0 (http://smbus.org/specs/). These protocols should be implemented by the user software.

Address resolution protocol (ARP)

SMBus slave address conflicts can be resolved by dynamically assigning a new unique address to each slave device. The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) has the following attributes:

Address assignment uses the standard SMBus physical layer arbitration mechanism Assigned addresses remain constant while device power is applied; address retention through device power loss is also allowed No additional SMBus packet overhead is incurred after address assignment. (i.e. subsequent accesses to assigned slave addresses have the same overhead as accesses to fixed address devices.) Any SMBus master can enumerate the bus

Unique device identifier (UDID)

In order to provide a mechanism to isolate each device for the purpose of address assignment, each device must implement a unique device identifier (UDID).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

722/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

For the details on 128 bit UDID and more information on ARP, refer to SMBus specification version 2.0 (http://smbus.org/specs/).

SMBus alert mode

SMBus Alert is an optional signal with an interrupt line for devices that want to trade their ability to master for a pin. SMBA is a wired-AND signal just as the SCL and SDA signals are. SMBA is used in conjunction with the SMBus General Call Address. Messages invoked with the SMBus are 2 bytes long. A slave-only device can signal the host through SMBA that it wants to talk by setting ALERT bit in I2C_CR1 register. The host processes the interrupt and simultaneously accesses all SMBA devices through the Alert Response Address (known as ARA having a value 0001 100X). Only the device(s) which pulled SMBA low will acknowledge the Alert Response Address. This status is identified using SMBALERT Status flag in I2C_SR1 register. The host performs a modified Receive Byte operation. The 7 bit device address provided by the slave transmit device is placed in the 7 most significant bits of the byte. The eighth bit can be a zero or one. If more than one device pulls SMBA low, the highest priority (lowest address) device will win communication rights via standard arbitration during the slave address transfer. After acknowledging the slave address the device must disengage its SMBA pull-down. If the host still sees SMBA low when the message transfer is complete, it knows to read the ARA again. A host which does not implement the SMBA signal may periodically access the ARA. For more details on SMBus Alert mode, refer to SMBus specification version 2.0 (http://smbus.org/specs/).

Timeout error
There are differences in the timing specifications between I2C and SMBus. SMBus defines a clock low timeout, TIMEOUT of 35 ms. Also SMBus specifies TLOW: SEXT as the cumulative clock low extend time for a slave device. SMBus specifies TLOW: MEXT as the cumulative clock low extend time for a master device. For more details on these timeouts, refer to SMBus specification version 2.0 (http://smbus.org/specs/). The status flag Timeout or Tlow Error in I2C_SR1 shows the status of this feature.

How to use the interface in SMBus mode

To switch from I2C mode to SMBus mode, the following sequence should be performed.

Set the SMBus bit in the I2C_CR1 register Configure the SMBTYPE and ENARP bits in the I2C_CR1 register as required for the application

If you want to configure the device as a master, follow the Start condition generation procedure in Section 25.3.3: I2C master mode. Otherwise, follow the sequence in Section 25.3.2: I2C slave mode. The application has to control the various SMBus protocols by software.

SMB Device Default Address acknowledged if ENARP=1 and SMBTYPE=0 SMB Host Header acknowledged if ENARP=1 and SMBTYPE=1 SMB Alert Response Address acknowledged if SMBALERT=1

723/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

25.3.8

DMA requests
DMA requests (when enabled) are generated only for data transfer. DMA requests are generated by Data Register becoming empty in transmission and Data Register becoming full in reception. The DMA must be initialized and enabled before the I2C data transfer. The DMAEN bit must be set in the I2C_CR2 register before the ADDR event. In master mode or in slave mode when clock stretching is enabled, the DMAEN bit can also be set during the ADDR event, before clearing the ADDR flag. The DMA request must be served before the end of the current byte transfer. When the number of data transfers which has been programmed for the corresponding DMA channel is reached, the DMA controller sends an End of Transfer EOT signal to the I2C interface and generates a Transfer Complete interrupt if enabled:

Master transmitter: In the interrupt routine after the EOT interrupt, disable DMA requests then wait for a BTF event before programming the Stop condition. Master receiver When the number of bytes to be received is equal to or greater than two, the DMA controller sends a hardware signal, EOT_1, corresponding to the last but one data byte (number_of_bytes 1). If, in the I2C_CR2 register, the LAST bit is set, I2C automatically sends a NACK after the next byte following EOT_1. The user can generate a Stop condition in the DMA Transfer Complete interrupt routine if enabled. When a single byte must be received: the NACK must be programmed during EV6 event, i.e. program ACK=0 when ADDR=1, before clearing ADDR flag. Then the user can program the STOP condition either after clearing ADDR flag, or in the DMA Transfer Complete interrupt routine.

Transmission using DMA

DMA mode can be enabled for transmission by setting the DMAEN bit in the I2C_CR2 register. Data will be loaded from a Memory area configured using the DMA peripheral (refer to the DMA specification) to the I2C_DR register whenever the TxE bit is set. To map a DMA channel for I2C transmission, perform the following sequence. Here x is the channel number. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Set the I2C_DR register address in the DMA_CPARx register. The data will be moved to this address from the memory after each TxE event. Set the memory address in the DMA_CMARx register. The data will be loaded into I2C_DR from this memory after each TxE event. Configure the total number of bytes to be transferred in the DMA_CNDTRx register. After each TxE event, this value will be decremented. Configure the channel priority using the PL[0:1] bits in the DMA_CCRx register Set the DIR bit and, in the DMA_CCRx register, configure interrupts after half transfer or full transfer depending on application requirements. Activate the channel by setting the EN bit in the DMA_CCRx register.

When the number of data transfers which has been programmed in the DMA Controller registers is reached, the DMA controller sends an End of Transfer EOT/ EOT_1 signal to the I2C interface and the DMA generates an interrupt, if enabled, on the DMA channel interrupt vector. Note: Do not enable the ITBUFEN bit in the I2C_CR2 register if DMA is used for transmission.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

724/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

Reception using DMA

DMA mode can be enabled for reception by setting the DMAEN bit in the I2C_CR2 register. Data will be loaded from the I2C_DR register to a Memory area configured using the DMA peripheral (refer to the DMA specification) whenever a data byte is received. To map a DMA channel for I2C reception, perform the following sequence. Here x is the channel number. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Set the I2C_DR register address in DMA_CPARx register. The data will be moved from this address to the memory after each RxNE event. Set the memory address in the DMA_CMARx register. The data will be loaded from the I2C_DR register to this memory area after each RxNE event. Configure the total number of bytes to be transferred in the DMA_CNDTRx register. After each RxNE event, this value will be decremented. Configure the channel priority using the PL[0:1] bits in the DMA_CCRx register Reset the DIR bit and configure interrupts in the DMA_CCRx register after half transfer or full transfer depending on application requirements. Activate the channel by setting the EN bit in the DMA_CCRx register.

When the number of data transfers which has been programmed in the DMA Controller registers is reached, the DMA controller sends an End of Transfer EOT/ EOT_1 signal to the I2C interface and DMA generates an interrupt, if enabled, on the DMA channel interrupt vector. Note: Do not enable the ITBUFEN bit in the I2C_CR2 register if DMA is used for reception.

25.3.9

Packet error checking

A PEC calculator has been implemented to improve the reliability of communication. The PEC is calculated by using the C(x) = x8 + x2 + x + 1 CRC-8 polynomial serially on each bit.

PEC calculation is enabled by setting the ENPEC bit in the I2C_CR1 register. PEC is a CRC-8 calculated on all message bytes including addresses and R/W bits. In transmission: set the PEC transfer bit in the I2C_CR1 register after the TxE event corresponding to the last byte. The PEC will be transferred after the last transmitted byte. In reception: set the PEC bit in the I2C_CR1 register after the RxNE event corresponding to the last byte so that the receiver sends a NACK if the next received byte is not equal to the internally calculated PEC. In case of MasterReceiver, a NACK must follow the PEC whatever the check result. The PEC must be set before the ACK of the CRC reception in slave mode. It must be set when the ACK is set low in master mode.

A PECERR error flag/interrupt is also available in the I2C_SR1 register. If DMA and PEC calculation are both enabled: In transmission: when the I2C interface receives an EOT signal from the DMA controller, it automatically sends a PEC after the last byte. In reception: when the I2C interface receives an EOT_1 signal from the DMA controller, it will automatically consider the next byte as a PEC and will check it. A DMA request is generated after PEC reception.

To allow intermediate PEC transfers, a control bit is available in the I2C_CR2 register (LAST bit) to determine if it is really the last DMA transfer or not. If it is the last DMA request for a master receiver, a NACK is automatically sent after the last received byte. PEC calculation is corrupted by an arbitration loss.

725/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

25.4

I2C interrupts
The table below gives the list of I2C interrupt requests. Table 105. I2C Interrupt requests
T

Interrupt event Start bit sent (Master) Address sent (Master) or Address matched (Slave) 10-bit header sent (Master) Stop received (Slave) Data byte transfer finished Receive buffer not empty Transmit buffer empty Bus error Arbitration loss (Master) Acknowledge failure Overrun/Underrun PEC error Timeout/Tlow error SMBus Alert

Event flag SB ADDR ADD10 STOPF BTF RxNE

Enable control bit

ITEVFEN

ITEVFEN and ITBUFEN TxE BERR ARLO AF OVR PECERR TIMEOUT SMBALERT ITERREN

Note:

SB, ADDR, ADD10, STOPF, BTF, RxNE and TxE are logically ORed on the same interrupt channel. BERR, ARLO, AF, OVR, PECERR, TIMEOUT and SMBALERT are logically ORed on the same interrupt channel.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

726/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface Figure 245. I2C interrupt mapping diagram
ITEVFEN SB ADDR ADD10 STOPF

RM0090

it_event
BTF TxE

ITBUFEN

RxNE ITERREN

BERR ARLO AF OVR PECERR TIMEOUT SMBALERT

it_error

727/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

25.5

I2C debug mode

When the microcontroller enters the debug mode (Cortex-M4F core halted), the SMBUS timeout either continues to work normally or stops, depending on the DBG_I2Cx_SMBUS_TIMEOUT configuration bits in the DBG module. For more details, refer to Section 33.16.2: Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C on page 1396.

25.6

I2C registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers can be accessed by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

25.6.1

I2C Control register 1 (I2C_CR1)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000

15 SWRST

14

13 ALERT

12 PEC rw

11 POS rw

10 ACK rw

9 STOP rw

3 SMB TYPE rw

1 SMBUS

0 PE rw

Res. rw rw

NO START STRETCH rw rw

ENGC ENPEC ENARP rw rw rw

Res. rw

Bit 15 SWRST: Software reset When set, the I2C is under reset state. Before resetting this bit, make sure the I2C lines are released and the bus is free. 0: I2C Peripheral not under reset 1: I2C Peripheral under reset state Note: This bit can be used to reinitialize the peripheral after an error or a locked state. As an example, if the BUSY bit is set and remains locked due to a glitch on the bus, the SWRST bit can be used to exit from this state. Bit 14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 13 ALERT: SMBus alert This bit is set and cleared by software, and cleared by hardware when PE=0. 0: Releases SMBA pin high. Alert Response Address Header followed by NACK. 1: Drives SMBA pin low. Alert Response Address Header followed by ACK. Bit 12 PEC: Packet error checking This bit is set and cleared by software, and cleared by hardware when PEC is transferred or by a START or Stop condition or when PE=0. 0: No PEC transfer 1: PEC transfer (in Tx or Rx mode) Note: PEC calculation is corrupted by an arbitration loss.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

728/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

Bit 11 POS: Acknowledge/PEC Position (for data reception) This bit is set and cleared by software and cleared by hardware when PE=0. 0: ACK bit controls the (N)ACK of the current byte being received in the shift register. The PEC bit indicates that current byte in shift register is a PEC. 1: ACK bit controls the (N)ACK of the next byte which will be received in the shift register. The PEC bit indicates that the next byte in the shift register is a PEC Note: The POS bit must be used only in 2-byte reception configuration in master mode. It must be configured before data reception starts, as described in the 2-byte reception procedure recommended in Section : Master receiver on page 717. Bit 10 ACK: Acknowledge enable This bit is set and cleared by software and cleared by hardware when PE=0. 0: No acknowledge returned 1: Acknowledge returned after a byte is received (matched address or data) Bit 9 STOP: Stop generation The bit is set and cleared by software, cleared by hardware when a Stop condition is detected, set by hardware when a timeout error is detected. In Master Mode: 0: No Stop generation. 1: Stop generation after the current byte transfer or after the current Start condition is sent. In Slave mode: 0: No Stop generation. 1: Release the SCL and SDA lines after the current byte transfer. Bit 8 START: Start generation This bit is set and cleared by software and cleared by hardware when start is sent or PE=0. In Master Mode: 0: No Start generation 1: Repeated start generation In Slave mode: 0: No Start generation 1: Start generation when the bus is free Bit 7 NOSTRETCH: Clock stretching disable (Slave mode) This bit is used to disable clock stretching in slave mode when ADDR or BTF flag is set, until it is reset by software. 0: Clock stretching enabled 1: Clock stretching disabled Bit 6 ENGC: General call enable 0: General call disabled. Address 00h is NACKed. 1: General call enabled. Address 00h is ACKed. Bit 5 ENPEC: PEC enable 0: PEC calculation disabled 1: PEC calculation enabled Bit 4 ENARP: ARP enable 0: ARP disable 1: ARP enable SMBus Device default address recognized if SMBTYPE=0 SMBus Host address recognized if SMBTYPE=1

729/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

Bit 3 SMBTYPE: SMBus type 0: SMBus Device 1: SMBus Host Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 1 SMBUS: SMBus mode 0: I2C mode 1: SMBus mode Bit 0 PE: Peripheral enable 0: Peripheral disable 1: Peripheral enable Note: If this bit is reset while a communication is on going, the peripheral is disabled at the end of the current communication, when back to IDLE state. All bit resets due to PE=0 occur at the end of the communication. In master mode, this bit must not be reset before the end of the communication.

Note:

When the STOP, START or PEC bit is set, the software must not perform any write access to I2C_CR1 before this bit is cleared by hardware. Otherwise there is a risk of setting a second STOP, START or PEC request.

25.6.2

I2C Control register 2 (I2C_CR2)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12 LAST

11 DMA EN rw

10 ITBUF EN rw

9 ITEVT EN rw

8 ITERR EN rw

FREQ[5:0] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw

Reserved rw

Bits 15:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 12 LAST: DMA last transfer 0: Next DMA EOT is not the last transfer 1: Next DMA EOT is the last transfer Note: This bit is used in master receiver mode to permit the generation of a NACK on the last received data. Bit 11 DMAEN: DMA requests enable 0: DMA requests disabled 1: DMA request enabled when TxE=1 or RxNE =1 Bit 10 ITBUFEN: Buffer interrupt enable 0: TxE = 1 or RxNE = 1 does not generate any interrupt. 1:TxE = 1 or RxNE = 1 generates Event Interrupt (whatever the state of DMAEN)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

730/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

Bit 9 ITEVTEN: Event interrupt enable 0: Event interrupt disabled 1: Event interrupt enabled This interrupt is generated when: SB = 1 (Master) ADDR = 1 (Master/Slave) ADD10= 1 (Master) STOPF = 1 (Slave) BTF = 1 with no TxE or RxNE event TxE event to 1 if ITBUFEN = 1 RxNE event to 1if ITBUFEN = 1 Bit 8 ITERREN: Error interrupt enable 0: Error interrupt disabled 1: Error interrupt enabled This interrupt is generated when: BERR = 1 ARLO = 1 AF = 1 OVR = 1 PECERR = 1 TIMEOUT = 1 SMBALERT = 1 Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 5:0 FREQ[5:0]: Peripheral clock frequency The peripheral clock frequency must be configured using the input APB clock frequency (I2C peripheral connected to APB). The minimum allowed frequency is 2 MHz, the maximum frequency is limited by the maximum APB frequency (42 MHz)and an intrinsic limitation of 46 MHz. 0b000000: Not allowed 0b000001: Not allowed 0b000010: 2 MHz ... 0b101010: 42MHz Higher than 0b101010: Not allowed

731/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

25.6.3

I2C Own address register 1 (I2C_OAR1)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000

15 ADD MODE rw

14

13

12

11

10

4 ADD[7:1]

0 ADD0

ADD[9:8] Reserved rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 15 ADDMODE Addressing mode (slave mode) 0: 7-bit slave address (10-bit address not acknowledged) 1: 10-bit slave address (7-bit address not acknowledged) Bit 14 Bits 13:10 Should always be kept at 1 by software. Reserved, must be kept at reset value

Bits 9:8 ADD[9:8]: Interface address 7-bit addressing mode: dont care 10-bit addressing mode: bits9:8 of address Bits 7:1 ADD[7:1]: Interface address bits 7:1 of address Bit 0 ADD0: Interface address 7-bit addressing mode: dont care 10-bit addressing mode: bit 0 of address

25.6.4

I2C Own address register 2 (I2C_OAR2)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

4 ADD2[7:1]

0 ENDUAL

Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 7:1 ADD2[7:1]: Interface address bits 7:1 of address in dual addressing mode Bit 0 ENDUAL: Dual addressing mode enable 0: Only OAR1 is recognized in 7-bit addressing mode 1: Both OAR1 and OAR2 are recognized in 7-bit addressing mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

732/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

25.6.5

I2C Data register (I2C_DR)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

3 DR[7:0]

Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 7:0 DR[7:0] 8-bit data register Byte received or to be transmitted to the bus. Transmitter mode: Byte transmission starts automatically when a byte is written in the DR register. A continuous transmit stream can be maintained if the next data to be transmitted is put in DR once the transmission is started (TxE=1) Receiver mode: Received byte is copied into DR (RxNE=1). A continuous transmit stream can be maintained if DR is read before the next data byte is received (RxNE=1). Note: In slave mode, the address is not copied into DR. Note: Write collision is not managed (DR can be written if TxE=0). Note: If an ARLO event occurs on ACK pulse, the received byte is not copied into DR and so cannot be read.

25.6.6

I2C Status register 1 (I2C_SR1)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

15 SMB ALERT rc_w0

14 TIME OUT rc_w0

13 Res.

12 PEC ERR rc_w0

11 OVR rc_w0

10 AF rc_w0

9 ARLO rc_w0

8 BERR rc_w0

7 TxE r

6 RxNE

5 Res.

2 BTF r

1 ADDR r

0 SB r

STOPF ADD10 r r

Bit 15 SMBALERT: SMBus alert In SMBus host mode: 0: no SMBALERT 1: SMBALERT event occurred on pin In SMBus slave mode: 0: no SMBALERT response address header 1: SMBALERT response address header to SMBALERT LOW received Cleared by software writing 0, or by hardware when PE=0. Bit 14 TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow error 0: No timeout error 1: SCL remained LOW for 25 ms (Timeout) or Master cumulative clock low extend time more than 10 ms (Tlow:mext) or Slave cumulative clock low extend time more than 25 ms (Tlow:sext) When set in slave mode: slave resets the communication and lines are released by hardware When set in master mode: Stop condition sent by hardware Cleared by software writing 0, or by hardware when PE=0. Note: This functionality is available only in SMBus mode.

733/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

Bit 13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 12 PECERR: PEC Error in reception 0: no PEC error: receiver returns ACK after PEC reception (if ACK=1) 1: PEC error: receiver returns NACK after PEC reception (whatever ACK) Cleared by software writing 0, or by hardware when PE=0. Note: When the received CRC is wrong, PECERR is not set in slave mode if the PEC control bit is not set before the end of the CRC reception. Nevertheless, reading the PEC value determines whether the received CRC is right or wrong. Bit 11 OVR: Overrun/Underrun 0: No overrun/underrun 1: Overrun or underrun Set by hardware in slave mode when NOSTRETCH=1 and: In reception when a new byte is received (including ACK pulse) and the DR register has not been read yet. New received byte is lost. In transmission when a new byte should be sent and the DR register has not been written yet. The same byte is sent twice. Cleared by software writing 0, or by hardware when PE=0. Note: If the DR write occurs very close to SCL rising edge, the sent data is unspecified and a hold timing error occurs Bit 10 AF: Acknowledge failure 0: No acknowledge failure 1: Acknowledge failure Set by hardware when no acknowledge is returned. Cleared by software writing 0, or by hardware when PE=0. Bit 9 ARLO: Arbitration lost (master mode) 0: No Arbitration Lost detected 1: Arbitration Lost detected Set by hardware when the interface loses the arbitration of the bus to another master Cleared by software writing 0, or by hardware when PE=0. After an ARLO event the interface switches back automatically to Slave mode (M/SL=0). Note: In SMBUS, the arbitration on the data in slave mode occurs only during the data phase, or the acknowledge transmission (not on the address acknowledge). Bit 8 BERR: Bus error 0: No misplaced Start or Stop condition 1: Misplaced Start or Stop condition Set by hardware when the interface detects an SDA rising or falling edge while SCL is high, occurring in a non-valid position during a byte transfer. Cleared by software writing 0, or by hardware when PE=0. Bit 7 TxE: Data register empty (transmitters) 0: Data register not empty 1: Data register empty Set when DR is empty in transmission. TxE is not set during address phase. Cleared by software writing to the DR register or by hardware after a start or a stop condition or when PE=0. TxE is not set if either a NACK is received, or if next byte to be transmitted is PEC (PEC=1) Note: TxE is not cleared by writing the first data being transmitted, or by writing data when BTF is set, as in both cases the data register is still empty.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

734/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

Bit 6 RxNE: Data register not empty (receivers) 0: Data register empty 1: Data register not empty Set when data register is not empty in receiver mode. RxNE is not set during address phase. Cleared by software reading or writing the DR register or by hardware when PE=0. RxNE is not set in case of ARLO event. Note: RxNE is not cleared by reading data when BTF is set, as the data register is still full. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 4 STOPF: Stop detection (slave mode) 0: No Stop condition detected 1: Stop condition detected Set by hardware when a Stop condition is detected on the bus by the slave after an acknowledge (if ACK=1). Cleared by software reading the SR1 register followed by a write in the CR1 register, or by hardware when PE=0 Note: The STOPF bit is not set after a NACK reception. It is recommended to perform the complete clearing sequence (READ SR1 then WRITE CR1) after the STOPF is set. Refer to Figure 242: Transfer sequence diagram for slave receiver on page 714. Bit 3 ADD10: 10-bit header sent (Master mode) 0: No ADD10 event occurred. 1: Master has sent first address byte (header). Set by hardware when the master has sent the first byte in 10-bit address mode. Cleared by software reading the SR1 register followed by a write in the DR register of the second address byte, or by hardware when PE=0. Note: ADD10 bit is not set after a NACK reception Bit 2 BTF: Byte transfer finished 0: Data byte transfer not done 1: Data byte transfer succeeded Set by hardware when NOSTRETCH=0 and: In reception when a new byte is received (including ACK pulse) and DR has not been read yet (RxNE=1). In transmission when a new byte should be sent and DR has not been written yet (TxE=1). Cleared by software by either a read or write in the DR register or by hardware after a start or a stop condition in transmission or when PE=0. Note: The BTF bit is not set after a NACK reception The BTF bit is not set if next byte to be transmitted is the PEC (TRA=1 in I2C_SR2 register and PEC=1 in I2C_CR1 register)

735/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

Bit 1 ADDR: Address sent (master mode)/matched (slave mode) This bit is cleared by software reading SR1 register followed reading SR2, or by hardware when PE=0. Address matched (Slave) 0: Address mismatched or not received. 1: Received address matched. Set by hardware as soon as the received slave address matched with the OAR registers content or a general call or a SMBus Device Default Address or SMBus Host or SMBus Alert is recognized. (when enabled depending on configuration). Note: In slave mode, it is recommended to perform the complete clearing sequence (READ SR1 then READ SR2) after ADDR is set. Refer to Figure 242: Transfer sequence diagram for slave receiver on page 714. Address sent (Master) 0: No end of address transmission 1: End of address transmission For 10-bit addressing, the bit is set after the ACK of the 2nd byte. For 7-bit addressing, the bit is set after the ACK of the byte. Note: ADDR is not set after a NACK reception Bit 0 SB: Start bit (Master mode) 0: No Start condition 1: Start condition generated. Set when a Start condition generated. Cleared by software by reading the SR1 register followed by writing the DR register, or by hardware when PE=0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

736/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

25.6.7

I2C Status register 2 (I2C_SR2)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000

Note:

Reading I2C_SR2 after reading I2C_SR1 clears the ADDR flag, even if the ADDR flag was set after reading I2C_SR1. Consequently, I2C_SR2 must be read only when ADDR is found set in I2C_SR1 or when the STOPF bit is cleared.
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 DUALF r r r r 6 SMB HOST r 5 SMBDE FAULT r 4 GEN CALL r 3 Res. r r r 2 TRA 1 BUSY 0 MSL

15

PEC[7:0] r r r r r

Bits 15:8 PEC[7:0] Packet error checking register This register contains the internal PEC when ENPEC=1. Bit 7 DUALF: Dual flag (Slave mode) 0: Received address matched with OAR1 1: Received address matched with OAR2 Cleared by hardware after a Stop condition or repeated Start condition, or when PE=0. Bit 6 SMBHOST: SMBus host header (Slave mode) 0: No SMBus Host address 1: SMBus Host address received when SMBTYPE=1 and ENARP=1. Cleared by hardware after a Stop condition or repeated Start condition, or when PE=0. Bit 5 SMBDEFAULT: SMBus device default address (Slave mode) 0: No SMBus Device Default address 1: SMBus Device Default address received when ENARP=1 Cleared by hardware after a Stop condition or repeated Start condition, or when PE=0. Bit 4 GENCALL: General call address (Slave mode) 0: No General Call 1: General Call Address received when ENGC=1 Cleared by hardware after a Stop condition or repeated Start condition, or when PE=0. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 2 TRA: Transmitter/receiver 0: Data bytes received 1: Data bytes transmitted This bit is set depending on the R/W bit of the address byte, at the end of total address phase. It is also cleared by hardware after detection of Stop condition (STOPF=1), repeated Start condition, loss of bus arbitration (ARLO=1), or when PE=0. Bit 1 BUSY: Bus busy 0: No communication on the bus 1: Communication ongoing on the bus Set by hardware on detection of SDA or SCL low cleared by hardware on detection of a Stop condition. It indicates a communication in progress on the bus. This information is still updated when the interface is disabled (PE=0).

737/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

Bit 0 MSL: Master/slave 0: Slave Mode 1: Master Mode Set by hardware as soon as the interface is in Master mode (SB=1). Cleared by hardware after detecting a Stop condition on the bus or a loss of arbitration (ARLO=1), or by hardware when PE=0.

Note:

Reading I2C_SR2 after reading I2C_SR1 clears the ADDR flag, even if the ADDR flag was set after reading I2C_SR1. Consequently, I2C_SR2 must be read only when ADDR is found set in I2C_SR1 or when the STOPF bit is cleared.

25.6.8

I2C Clock control register (I2C_CCR)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000

Note:

fPCLK1 must be at least 2 MHz to achieve standard mode IC frequencies. It must be at least 4 MHz to achieve fast mode IC frequencies. It must be a multiple of 10MHz to reach the 400 kHz maximum IC fast mode clock. The CCR register must be configured only when the I2C is disabled (PE = 0).

15 F/S rw

14 DUTY

13

12

11

10

5 CCR[11:0]

Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 15 F/S: I2C master mode selection 0: Standard Mode I2C 1: Fast Mode I2C Bit 14 DUTY: Fast mode duty cycle 0: Fast Mode tlow/thigh = 2 1: Fast Mode tlow/thigh = 16/9 (see CCR) Bits 13:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

738/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

Bits 11:0 CCR[11:0]: Clock control register in Fast/Standard mode (Master mode) Controls the SCL clock in master mode. Standard mode or SMBus: Thigh = CCR * TPCLK1 Tlow = CCR * TPCLK1 Fast mode: If DUTY = 0: Thigh = CCR * TPCLK1 Tlow = 2 * CCR * TPCLK1 If DUTY = 1: (to reach 400 kHz) Thigh = 9 * CCR * TPCLK1 Tlow = 16 * CCR * TPCLK1 For instance: in standard mode, to generate a 100 kHz SCL frequency: If FREQR = 08, TPCLK1 = 125 ns so CCR must be programmed with 0x28 (0x28 <=> 40d x 125 ns = 5000 ns.) Note: 1. The minimum allowed value is 0x04, except in FAST DUTY mode where the minimum allowed value is 0x01 . These timings are without filters. . The CCR register must be configured only when the I2C is disabled (PE = 0).

25.6.9

I2C TRISE register (I2C_TRISE)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0x0002

15

14

13

12

11

10

2 TRISE[5:0]

Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 5:0 TRISE[5:0]: Maximum rise time in Fast/Standard mode (Master mode) These bits must be programmed with the maximum SCL rise time given in the I2C bus specification, incremented by 1. For instance: in standard mode, the maximum allowed SCL rise time is 1000 ns. If, in the I2C_CR2 register, the value of FREQ[5:0] bits is equal to 0x08 and TPCLK1 = 125 ns therefore the TRISE[5:0] bits must be programmed with 09h. (1000 ns / 125 ns = 8 + 1) The filter value can also be added to TRISE[5:0]. If the result is not an integer, TRISE[5:0] must be programmed with the integer part, in order to respect the tHIGH parameter. Note: TRISE[5:0] must be configured only when the I2C is disabled (PE = 0).

739/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

25.6.10

I2C FLTR register (I2C_FLTR)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 The I2C_FLTR is available on STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx only.

15

14

13

12

11

10 Reserved

4 ANOFF rw

1 DNF[3:0]

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 15:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 4 ANOFF: Analog noise filter OFF 0: Analog noise filter enable 1: Analog noise filter disable Note: ANOFF must be configured only when the I2C is disabled (PE = 0). Bits 3:0 DNF[3:0]: Digital noise filter These bits are used to configure the digital noise filter on SDA and SCL inputs. The digital filter will suppress the spikes with a length of up to DNF[3:0] * TPCLK1. 0000: Digital noise filter disable 0001: Digital noise filter enabled and filtering capability up to 1* TPCLK1. ... 1111: Digital noise filter enabled and filtering capability up to 15* TPCLK1. Note: DNF[3:0] must be configured only when the I2C is disabled (PE = 0). If the analog filter is also enabled, the digital filter is added to the analog filter.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

740/1422

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) interface

RM0090

25.6.11

I2C register map

The table below provides the I2C register map and reset values.

Table 106. I2C register map and reset values

Offset Register 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
NOSTRETCH SMBTYPE

SWRST

Reserved

Reserved

SMBUS 0 0 0 0 0 ADDR 0 BUSY 0 0 1 0

ENPEC

ENARP

ALERT

START

ENGC

STOP

POS

PEC

ACK

0x00

I2C_CR1

Reserved

Reset value I2C_CR2 Reset value

0 LAST

0 DMAEN

0 ITBUFEN

0 ITEVTEN

0 ITERREN

0 Reserved

0x04

Reserved

FREQ[5:0] 0 0 0 0 0 ADD0 0 0 ENDUAL 0 0 0 BTF 0 SB 0 MSL 0 0 0 0 0 TRA 0 0 0 0 DNF[3:0] 0

0 ADDMODE

0x08

I2C_OAR1 Reset value I2C_OAR2 Reset value

Reserved

Reserved

ADD[9:8] 0 0 0 0

ADD[7:1] 0 0 0

0x0C

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 SMBALERT TIMEOUT PECERR Reserved BERR ARLO OVR TxE 0 RxNE 0

ADD2[7:1] 0 0 0

0x10

I2C_DR Reset value

DR[7:0] 0 Reserved 0 STOPF 0 ADD10

0x14

I2C_SR1

Reserved

Reset value

AF

0 DUALF

0 SMBDEFAULT SMBHOST

0 GENCALL

0 Reserved

0x18

I2C_SR2

Reserved

PEC[7:0]

Reset value 0x1C I2C_CCR Reset value 0x20 I2C_TRISE Reset value 0x24 I2C_FLTR Reset value Reserved Reserved Reserved

0 F/S

0 DUTY

0 Reserved

CCR[11:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TRISE[5:0] 0 0 ANOFF 0

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses table.

741/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

PE 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

26

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

26.1

USART introduction
The universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) offers a flexible means of full-duplex data exchange with external equipment requiring an industry standard NRZ asynchronous serial data format. The USART offers a very wide range of baud rates using a fractional baud rate generator. It supports synchronous one-way communication and half-duplex single wire communication. It also supports the LIN (local interconnection network), Smartcard Protocol and IrDA (infrared data association) SIR ENDEC specifications, and modem operations (CTS/RTS). It allows multiprocessor communication. High speed data communication is possible by using the DMA for multibuffer configuration.

26.2

USART main features

Full duplex, asynchronous communications NRZ standard format (Mark/Space) Configurable oversampling method by 16 or by 8 to give flexibility between speed and clock tolerance Fractional baud rate generator systems Common programmable transmit and receive baud rate (refer to the datasheets for the value of the baud rate at the maximum APB frequency.

Programmable data word length (8 or 9 bits) Configurable stop bits - support for 1 or 2 stop bits LIN Master Synchronous Break send capability and LIN slave break detection capability 13-bit break generation and 10/11 bit break detection when USART is hardware configured for LIN

Transmitter clock output for synchronous transmission IrDA SIR encoder decoder Support for 3/16 bit duration for normal mode The Smartcard interface supports the asynchronous protocol Smartcards as defined in the ISO 7816-3 standards 0.5, 1.5 stop bits for Smartcard operation Smartcard emulation capability

Single-wire half-duplex communication Configurable multibuffer communication using DMA (direct memory access) Buffering of received/transmitted bytes in reserved SRAM using centralized DMA Separate enable bits for transmitter and receiver

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

742/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Transfer detection flags: Receive buffer full Transmit buffer empty End of transmission flags Transmits parity bit Checks parity of received data byte Overrun error Noise detection Frame error Parity error CTS changes LIN break detection Transmit data register empty Transmission complete Receive data register full Idle line received Overrun error Framing error Noise error Parity error

Parity control:

Four error detection flags:

Ten interrupt sources with flags:

Multiprocessor communication - enter into mute mode if address match does not occur Wake up from mute mode (by idle line detection or address mark detection) Two receiver wakeup modes: Address bit (MSB, 9th bit), Idle line

26.3

USART functional description

The interface is externally connected to another device by three pins (see Figure 246). Any USART bidirectional communication requires a minimum of two pins: Receive Data In (RX) and Transmit Data Out (TX): RX: Receive Data Input is the serial data input. Oversampling techniques are used for data recovery by discriminating between valid incoming data and noise. TX: Transmit Data Output. When the transmitter is disabled, the output pin returns to its I/O port configuration. When the transmitter is enabled and nothing is to be transmitted, the TX pin is at high level. In single-wire and smartcard modes, this I/O is used to transmit and receive the data (at USART level, data are then received on SW_RX).

743/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Through these pins, serial data is transmitted and received in normal USART mode as frames comprising:

An Idle Line prior to transmission or reception A start bit A data word (8 or 9 bits) least significant bit first 0.5,1, 1.5, 2 Stop bits indicating that the frame is complete This interface uses a fractional baud rate generator - with a 12-bit mantissa and 4-bit fraction A status register (USART_SR) Data Register (USART_DR) A baud rate register (USART_BRR) - 12-bit mantissa and 4-bit fraction. A Guardtime Register (USART_GTPR) in case of Smartcard mode.

Refer to Section 26.6: USART registers on page 782 for the definitions of each bit. The following pin is required to interface in synchronous mode:

SCLK: Transmitter clock output. This pin outputs the transmitter data clock for synchronous transmission corresponding to SPI master mode (no clock pulses on start bit and stop bit, and a software option to send a clock pulse on the last data bit). In parallel data can be received synchronously on RX. This can be used to control peripherals that have shift registers (e.g. LCD drivers). The clock phase and polarity are software programmable. In smartcard mode, SCLK can provide the clock to the smartcard. nCTS: Clear To Send blocks the data transmission at the end of the current transfer when high nRTS: Request to send indicates that the USART is ready to receive a data (when low).

The following pins are required in Hardware flow control mode:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

744/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Figure 246. USART block diagram
PWDATA Write (CPU or DMA) Transmit data register (TDR) TX RX SW_RX IrDA SIR ENDEC block Transmit Shift Register Receive Shift Register Read (CPU or DMA) Receive data register (RDR)
(Data register) DR

RM0090

PRDATA

GTPR
GT PSC

SCLK control

SCLK

CR3
DMAT DMAR SCEN NACK HD IRLP IREN

CR2
LINE STOP[1:0] CKEN CPOL CPHA LBCL

CR2
USART Address UE

CR1
M
WAKE PCE PS PEIE

nRTS nCTS

Hardware flow controller

Transmit control Wakeup unit Receiver clock

Receiver control

CR1
IDLE TE TXEIE TCIE RXNE IE IE RE RWU SBK CTS LBD

SR
TXE TC RXNE IDLE ORE NF FE PE

USART interrupt control

CR1
OVER8

USART_BRR
TE
Transmitter rate control

Transmitter clock

/ [8 x (2 - OVER8)]
SAMPLING DIVIDER

/USARTDIV
DIV_Mantissa DIV_Fraction 4 0

fPCLKx(x=1,2)

15

RE

Receiver rate control Conventional baud rate generator

USARTDIV = DIV_Mantissa + (DIV_Fraction / 8 (2 OVER8))

ai16099

745/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

26.3.1

USART character description

Word length may be selected as being either 8 or 9 bits by programming the M bit in the USART_CR1 register (see Figure 247). The TX pin is in low state during the start bit. It is in high state during the stop bit. An Idle character is interpreted as an entire frame of 1s followed by the start bit of the next frame which contains data (The number of 1 s will include the number of stop bits). A Break character is interpreted on receiving 0s for a frame period. At the end of the break frame the transmitter inserts either 1 or 2 stop bits (logic 1 bit) to acknowledge the start bit. Transmission and reception are driven by a common baud rate generator, the clock for each is generated when the enable bit is set respectively for the transmitter and receiver. The details of each block is given below. Figure 247. Word length programming
9-bit word length (M bit is set), 1 stop bit Data frame
Start bit Clock Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Possible parity bit Bit8 ** Start bit Stop bit Start bit

Next data frame

Next Stop Start bit bit

Idle frame Break frame

** LBCL bit controls last data clock pulse

8-bit word length (M bit is reset), 1 stop bit

Data frame
Start Bit Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Possible Parity Bit Bit7 Stop bit

Next data frame

Next start bit

Clock

**** **

Idle frame Break frame

Start bit Start bit

Stop bit

** LBCL bit controls last data clock pulse

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

746/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.3.2

Transmitter
The transmitter can send data words of either 8 or 9 bits depending on the M bit status. When the transmit enable bit (TE) is set, the data in the transmit shift register is output on the TX pin and the corresponding clock pulses are output on the SCLK pin.

Character transmission
During an USART transmission, data shifts out least significant bit first on the TX pin. In this mode, the USART_DR register consists of a buffer (TDR) between the internal bus and the transmit shift register (see Figure 246). Every character is preceded by a start bit which is a logic level low for one bit period. The character is terminated by a configurable number of stop bits. The following stop bits are supported by USART: 0.5, 1, 1.5 and 2 stop bits. Note: The TE bit should not be reset during transmission of data. Resetting the TE bit during the transmission will corrupt the data on the TX pin as the baud rate counters will get frozen. The current data being transmitted will be lost. An idle frame will be sent after the TE bit is enabled.

Configurable stop bits

The number of stop bits to be transmitted with every character can be programmed in Control register 2, bits 13,12.

1 stop bit: This is the default value of number of stop bits. 2 Stop bits: This will be supported by normal USART, single-wire and modem modes. 0.5 stop bit: To be used when receiving data in Smartcard mode. 1.5 stop bits: To be used when transmitting and receiving data in Smartcard mode.

An idle frame transmission will include the stop bits. A break transmission will be 10 low bits followed by the configured number of stop bits (when m = 0) and 11 low bits followed by the configured number of stop bits (when m = 1). It is not possible to transmit long breaks (break of length greater than 10/11 low bits).

747/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Figure 248. Configurable stop bits
8-bit Word length (M bit is reset)
Data frame
Start Bit Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Possible parity bit Bit7 Stop bit

Next data frame

Next start bit

CLOCK

**** ** ** LBCL bit controls last data clock pulse

a) 1 Stop Bit

Data frame
Start Bit Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6

Possible Parity Bit Bit7

Next data frame

Next start bit

b) 1 1/2 stop Bits

1 1/2 stop bits

Data frame
Start Bit Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6

Possible parity bit Bit7 Possible Parity Bit Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 2 Stop Bits

Next data frame

Next Start Bit

c) 2 Stop Bits
Start Bit

Next data frame

Next start bit 1/2 stop bit

Data frame
Bit1 Bit2

Bit0

d) 1/2 Stop Bit

Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Enable the USART by writing the UE bit in USART_CR1 register to 1. Program the M bit in USART_CR1 to define the word length. Program the number of stop bits in USART_CR2. Select DMA enable (DMAT) in USART_CR3 if Multi buffer Communication is to take place. Configure the DMA register as explained in multibuffer communication. Select the desired baud rate using the USART_BRR register. Set the TE bit in USART_CR1 to send an idle frame as first transmission. Write the data to send in the USART_DR register (this clears the TXE bit). Repeat this for each data to be transmitted in case of single buffer. After writing the last data into the USART_DR register, wait until TC=1. This indicates that the transmission of the last frame is complete. This is required for instance when the USART is disabled or enters the Halt mode to avoid corrupting the last transmission.

Single byte communication

Clearing the TXE bit is always performed by a write to the data register. The TXE bit is set by hardware and it indicates:

The data has been moved from TDR to the shift register and the data transmission has started. The TDR register is empty. The next data can be written in the USART_DR register without overwriting the previous data.

This flag generates an interrupt if the TXEIE bit is set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

748/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

When a transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the USART_DR register stores the data in the TDR register and which is copied in the shift register at the end of the current transmission. When no transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the USART_DR register places the data directly in the shift register, the data transmission starts, and the TXE bit is immediately set. If a frame is transmitted (after the stop bit) and the TXE bit is set, the TC bit goes high. An interrupt is generated if the TCIE bit is set in the USART_CR1 register. After writing the last data into the USART_DR register, it is mandatory to wait for TC=1 before disabling the USART or causing the microcontroller to enter the low power mode (see Figure 249: TC/TXE behavior when transmitting). The TC bit is cleared by the following software sequence: 1. 2. Note: A read from the USART_SR register A write to the USART_DR register

The TC bit can also be cleared by writing a 0 to it. This clearing sequence is recommended only for Multibuffer communication.

Figure 249. TC/TXE behavior when transmitting

Idle preamble Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3

TX line
set by hardware cleared by software set by hardware cleared by software

TXE flag

set by hardware

USART_DR

F1

F2

F3

TC flag
software enables the USART

set by hardware software waits until TXE=1 and writes F2 into DR TC is not set because TXE=0 TC is not set because TXE=0 TC is set because TXE=1

software waits until TXE=1 and writes F1 into DR

software waits until TXE=1 and writes F3 into DR

software waits until TC=1

ai17121b

Break characters
Setting the SBK bit transmits a break character. The break frame length depends on the M bit (see Figure 247). If the SBK bit is set to 1 a break character is sent on the TX line after completing the current character transmission. This bit is reset by hardware when the break character is completed (during the stop bit of the break character). The USART inserts a logic 1 bit at the end of the last break frame to guarantee the recognition of the start bit of the next frame. Note: If the software resets the SBK bit before the commencement of break transmission, the break character will not be transmitted. For two consecutive breaks, the SBK bit should be set after the stop bit of the previous break.

Idle characters
Setting the TE bit drives the USART to send an idle frame before the first data frame.

749/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

26.3.3

Receiver
The USART can receive data words of either 8 or 9 bits depending on the M bit in the USART_CR1 register.

Start bit detection

The start bit detection sequence is the same when oversampling by 16 or by 8. In the USART, the start bit is detected when a specific sequence of samples is recognized. This sequence is: 1 1 1 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 0 0 0. Figure 250. Start bit detection when oversampling by 16 or 8
RX state Idle Start bit

RX line Ideal sample clock Real sample clock

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

sampled values X X X X X X X X 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 6/16 7/16 One-bit time Conditions to validate 1 1 1 0 the start bit Falling edge detection X 0 X 0 X 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X 7/16

At least 2 bits out of 3 at 0

At least 2 bits out of 3 at 0

ai15471

Note:

If the sequence is not complete, the start bit detection aborts and the receiver returns to the idle state (no flag is set) where it waits for a falling edge. The start bit is confirmed (RXNE flag set, interrupt generated if RXNEIE=1) if the 3 sampled bits are at 0 (first sampling on the 3rd, 5th and 7th bits finds the 3 bits at 0 and second sampling on the 8th, 9th and 10th bits also finds the 3 bits at 0). The start bit is validated (RXNE flag set, interrupt generated if RXNEIE=1) but the NE noise flag is set if, for both samplings, at least 2 out of the 3 sampled bits are at 0 (sampling on the 3rd, 5th and 7th bits and sampling on the 8th, 9th and 10th bits). If this condition is not met, the start detection aborts and the receiver returns to the idle state (no flag is set). If, for one of the samplings (sampling on the 3rd, 5th and 7th bits or sampling on the 8th, 9th and 10th bits), 2 out of the 3 bits are found at 0, the start bit is validated but the NE noise flag bit is set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

750/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Character reception
During an USART reception, data shifts in least significant bit first through the RX pin. In this mode, the USART_DR register consists of a buffer (RDR) between the internal bus and the received shift register. Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enable the USART by writing the UE bit in USART_CR1 register to 1. Program the M bit in USART_CR1 to define the word length. Program the number of stop bits in USART_CR2. Select DMA enable (DMAR) in USART_CR3 if multibuffer communication is to take place. Configure the DMA register as explained in multibuffer communication. STEP 3 Select the desired baud rate using the baud rate register USART_BRR Set the RE bit USART_CR1. This enables the receiver which begins searching for a start bit. The RXNE bit is set. It indicates that the content of the shift register is transferred to the RDR. In other words, data has been received and can be read (as well as its associated error flags). An interrupt is generated if the RXNEIE bit is set. The error flags can be set if a frame error, noise or an overrun error has been detected during reception. In multibuffer, RXNE is set after every byte received and is cleared by the DMA read to the Data Register. In single buffer mode, clearing the RXNE bit is performed by a software read to the USART_DR register. The RXNE flag can also be cleared by writing a zero to it. The RXNE bit must be cleared before the end of the reception of the next character to avoid an overrun error.

When a character is received

Note:

The RE bit should not be reset while receiving data. If the RE bit is disabled during reception, the reception of the current byte will be aborted.

Break character
When a break character is received, the USART handles it as a framing error.

Idle character
When an idle frame is detected, there is the same procedure as a data received character plus an interrupt if the IDLEIE bit is set.

Overrun error
An overrun error occurs when a character is received when RXNE has not been reset. Data can not be transferred from the shift register to the RDR register until the RXNE bit is cleared. The RXNE flag is set after every byte received. An overrun error occurs if RXNE flag is set when the next data is received or the previous DMA request has not been serviced. When an overrun error occurs:

The ORE bit is set.

751/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) The RDR content will not be lost. The previous data is available when a read to USART_DR is performed. The shift register will be overwritten. After that point, any data received during overrun is lost. An interrupt is generated if either the RXNEIE bit is set or both the EIE and DMAR bits are set. The ORE bit is reset by a read to the USART_SR register followed by a USART_DR register read operation.

Note:

The ORE bit, when set, indicates that at least 1 data has been lost. There are two possibilities:

if RXNE=1, then the last valid data is stored in the receive register RDR and can be read, if RXNE=0, then it means that the last valid data has already been read and thus there is nothing to be read in the RDR. This case can occur when the last valid data is read in the RDR at the same time as the new (and lost) data is received. It may also occur when the new data is received during the reading sequence (between the USART_SR register read access and the USART_DR read access).

Selecting the proper oversampling method

The receiver implements different user-configurable oversampling techniques (except in synchronous mode) for data recovery by discriminating between valid incoming data and noise. The oversampling method can be selected by programming the OVER8 bit in the USART_CR1 register and can be either 16 or 8 times the baud rate clock (Figure 251 and Figure 252). Depending on the application:

select oversampling by 8 (OVER8=1) to achieve higher speed (up to fPCLK/8). In this case the maximum receiver tolerance to clock deviation is reduced (refer to Section 26.3.5: USART receiver tolerance to clock deviation on page 764) select oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) to increase the tolerance of the receiver to clock deviations. In this case, the maximum speed is limited to maximum fPCLK/16

Programming the ONEBIT bit in the USART_CR3 register selects the method used to evaluate the logic level. There are two options:

the majority vote of the three samples in the center of the received bit. In this case, when the 3 samples used for the majority vote are not equal, the NF bit is set a single sample in the center of the received bit Depending on the application: select the three samples majority vote method (ONEBIT=0) when operating in a noisy environment and reject the data when a noise is detected (refer to Figure 107) because this indicates that a glitch occurred during the sampling. select the single sample method (ONEBIT=1) when the line is noise-free to increase the receivers tolerance to clock deviations (see Section 26.3.5: USART receiver tolerance to clock deviation on page 764). In this case the NF bit will never be set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

752/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) When noise is detected in a frame:

RM0090

The NF bit is set at the rising edge of the RXNE bit. The invalid data is transferred from the Shift register to the USART_DR register. No interrupt is generated in case of single byte communication. However this bit rises at the same time as the RXNE bit which itself generates an interrupt. In case of multibuffer communication an interrupt will be issued if the EIE bit is set in the USART_CR3 register.

The NF bit is reset by a USART_SR register read operation followed by a USART_DR register read operation. Note: Oversampling by 8 is not available in the Smartcard, IrDA and LIN modes. In those modes, the OVER8 bit is forced to 0 by hardware. Figure 251. Data sampling when oversampling by 16
RX LINE sampled values Sample clock 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 6/16 7/16 One bit time 7/16 14 15 16

Figure 252. Data sampling when oversampling by 8

RX LINE sampled values Sample clock(x8) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2/8 3/8 One bit time 3/8 8

Table 107. Noise detection from sampled data

Sampled value 000 001 010 011 100 101 NE status 0 1 1 1 1 1 Received bit value 0 0 0 1 0 1

753/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Table 107. Noise detection from sampled data (continued)
Sampled value 110 111 NE status 1 0 Received bit value 1 1

Framing error
A framing error is detected when: The stop bit is not recognized on reception at the expected time, following either a desynchronization or excessive noise. When the framing error is detected:

The FE bit is set by hardware The invalid data is transferred from the Shift register to the USART_DR register. No interrupt is generated in case of single byte communication. However this bit rises at the same time as the RXNE bit which itself generates an interrupt. In case of multibuffer communication an interrupt will be issued if the EIE bit is set in the USART_CR3 register.

The FE bit is reset by a USART_SR register read operation followed by a USART_DR register read operation.

Configurable stop bits during reception

The number of stop bits to be received can be configured through the control bits of Control Register 2 - it can be either 1 or 2 in normal mode and 0.5 or 1.5 in Smartcard mode. 1. 0.5 stop bit (reception in Smartcard mode): No sampling is done for 0.5 stop bit. As a consequence, no framing error and no break frame can be detected when 0.5 stop bit is selected. 1 stop bit: Sampling for 1 stop Bit is done on the 8th, 9th and 10th samples. 1.5 stop bits (Smartcard mode): When transmitting in smartcard mode, the device must check that the data is correctly sent. Thus the receiver block must be enabled (RE =1 in the USART_CR1 register) and the stop bit is checked to test if the smartcard has detected a parity error. In the event of a parity error, the smartcard forces the data signal low during the sampling - NACK signal-, which is flagged as a framing error. Then, the FE flag is set with the RXNE at the end of the 1.5 stop bit. Sampling for 1.5 stop bits is done on the 16th, 17th and 18th samples (1 baud clock period after the beginning of the stop bit). The 1.5 stop bit can be decomposed into 2 parts: one 0.5 baud clock period during which nothing happens, followed by 1 normal stop bit period during which sampling occurs halfway through. Refer to Section 26.3.11: Smartcard on page 773 for more details. 2 stop bits: Sampling for 2 stop bits is done on the 8th, 9th and 10th samples of the first stop bit. If a framing error is detected during the first stop bit the framing error flag will be set. The second stop bit is not checked for framing error. The RXNE flag will be set at the end of the first stop bit.

2. 3.

4.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

754/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.3.4

Fractional baud rate generation

The baud rate for the receiver and transmitter (Rx and Tx) are both set to the same value as programmed in the Mantissa and Fraction values of USARTDIV. Equation 1: Baud rate for standard USART (SPI mode included)
f CK Tx/Rx baud = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------8 ( 2 OVER8 ) USARTDIV

Equation 2: Baud rate in Smartcard, LIN and IrDA modes

f CK Tx/Rx baud = --------------------------------------------16 USARTDIV

USARTDIV is an unsigned fixed point number that is coded on the USART_BRR register.

When OVER8=0, the fractional part is coded on 4 bits and programmed by the DIV_fraction[3:0] bits in the USART_BRR register When OVER8=1, the fractional part is coded on 3 bits and programmed by the DIV_fraction[2:0] bits in the USART_BRR register, and bit DIV_fraction[3] must be kept cleared.

Note:

The baud counters are updated to the new value in the baud registers after a write operation to USART_BRR. Hence the baud rate register value should not be changed during communication.

How to derive USARTDIV from USART_BRR register values when OVER8=0

Example 1: If DIV_Mantissa = 0d27 and DIV_Fraction = 0d12 (USART_BRR = 0x1BC), then Mantissa (USARTDIV) = 0d27 Fraction (USARTDIV) = 12/16 = 0d0.75 Therefore USARTDIV = 0d27.75

Example 2: To program USARTDIV = 0d25.62 This leads to: DIV_Fraction = 16*0d0.62 = 0d9.92 The nearest real number is 0d10 = 0xA DIV_Mantissa = mantissa (0d25.620) = 0d25 = 0x19 Then, USART_BRR = 0x19A hence USARTDIV = 0d25.625

Example 3: To program USARTDIV = 0d50.99 This leads to: DIV_Fraction = 16*0d0.99 = 0d15.84

755/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) The nearest real number is 0d16 = 0x10 => overflow of DIV_frac[3:0] => carry must be added up to the mantissa DIV_Mantissa = mantissa (0d50.990 + carry) = 0d51 = 0x33 Then, USART_BRR = 0x330 hence USARTDIV = 0d51.000

How to derive USARTDIV from USART_BRR register values when OVER8=1

Example 1: If DIV_Mantissa = 0x27 and DIV_Fraction[2:0]= 0d6 (USART_BRR = 0x1B6), then Mantissa (USARTDIV) = 0d27 Fraction (USARTDIV) = 6/8 = 0d0.75 Therefore USARTDIV = 0d27.75 Example 2: To program USARTDIV = 0d25.62 This leads to: DIV_Fraction = 8*0d0.62 = 0d4.96 The nearest real number is 0d5 = 0x5 DIV_Mantissa = mantissa (0d25.620) = 0d25 = 0x19 Then, USART_BRR = 0x195 => USARTDIV = 0d25.625 Example 3: To program USARTDIV = 0d50.99 This leads to: DIV_Fraction = 8*0d0.99 = 0d7.92 The nearest real number is 0d8 = 0x8 => overflow of the DIV_frac[2:0] => carry must be added up to the mantissa DIV_Mantissa = mantissa (0d50.990 + carry) = 0d51 = 0x33 Then, USART_BRR = 0x0330 => USARTDIV = 0d51.000 Table 108. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 12 MHz, oversampling by 16(1)
Oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) Baud rate7 fPCLK = 8 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired) B.rate / rate register Desired B.rate 416.6875 208.3125 52.0625 26.0625 0 0.01 0.04 0.08 fPCLK = 12 MHz Value programmed in the baud rate register 625 312.5 78.125 39.0625

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

% Error

1 2 3 4

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.604 KBps 19.185 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps

0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

756/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Table 108. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 12 MHz, oversampling by 16(1) (continued)
Oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) Baud rate7 fPCLK = 8 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired) B.rate / rate register Desired B.rate 13 8.6875 4.3125 2.1875 1.0625 NA NA NA 0.16 0.08 0.64 0.79 2.12 NA NA NA fPCLK = 12 MHz Value programmed in the baud rate register 19.5625 13 6.5 3.25 1.625 NA NA NA

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

% Error

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

38.4 KBps 57.6 KBps

38.462 KBps 57.554 KBps

38.339 KBps 57.692 KBps 115.385 KBps 230.769 KBps 461.538 KBps NA NA NA

0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 NA NA NA

115.2 KBps 115.942 KBps 230.4 KBps 228.571 KBps 460.8 KBps 470.588 KBps 921.6 KBps 2 MBps 3 MBps NA NA NA

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data.

Table 109. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK =12 MHz, oversampling by 8(1)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8 = 1) Baud rate fPCLK = 8 MHz % Error = Value (Calculated programmed Desired) in the baud B.rate / rate register Desired B.rate 833.375 416.625 104.125 52.125 26 17.375 8.625 4.375 2.125 1.125 0 0.01 0.04 0.08 0.16 0.08 0.64 0.79 2.12 3.55 fPCLK = 12 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 1250 625 156.25 78.125 39.125 26 13 6.5 3.25 1.625 0 0 0 0 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.4 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps 230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps 921.6 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.604 KBps 19.185 KBps 38.462 KBps 57.554 KBps 115.942 KBps 228.571 KBps 470.588 KBps 888.889 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.339 KBps 57.692 KBps 115.385 KBps 230.769 KBps 461.538 KBps 923.077 KBps

757/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Table 109. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK =12 MHz, oversampling by 8(1) (continued)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8 = 1) Baud rate fPCLK = 8 MHz % Error = Value (Calculated programmed Desired) in the baud B.rate / rate register Desired B.rate NA NA NA NA fPCLK = 12 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register NA NA NA NA

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

11 12

2 MBps 3 MBps

NA NA

NA NA

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data.

Table 110. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 16 MHz or fPCLK = 24 MHz, oversampling by 16(1) Oversampling by 16 (OVER8 = 0) Baud rate
fPCLK = 16 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired) B.rate / rate register Desired B.rate 833.3125 416.6875 104.1875 52.0625 26.0625 17.375 8.6875 4.3125 2.1875 1.0625 NA NA 0 0 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.64 0.79 2.12 NA NA fPCLK = 24 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 1250 625 156.25 78.125 39.0625 26.0625 13 6.5 3.25 1.625 NA NA 0 0 0 0 0 0.08 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 NA NA

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.4 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps 230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps 921.6 KBps 2 MBps 3 MBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.598 KBps 19.208 KBps 38.369 KBps 57.554 KBps 115.108 KBps 231.884 KBps 457.143 KBps 941.176 KBps NA NA

1.2 2.4 9.6 19.2 38.4 57.554 115.385 230.769 461.538 923.077 NA NA

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

758/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Table 111. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 16 MHz or fPCLK = 24 MHz, oversampling by 8(1)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8=1) Baud rate fPCLK = 16 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired) B.rate / rate register Desired B.rate 1666.625 833.375 208.375 104.125 52.125 34.75 17.375 8.625 4.375 2.125 1 NA 0 0 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.64 0.79 2.12 0 NA fPCLK = 24 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 2500 1250 312.5 156.25 78.125 52.125 26 13 6.5 3.25 1.5 1 0 0 0 0 0 0.08 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0 0

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.4 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps 230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps 921.6 KBps 2 MBps 3 MBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.598 KBps 19.208 KBps 38.369 KBps 57.554 KBps 115.108 KBps 231.884 KBps 457.143 KBps 941.176 KBps 2000 KBps NA

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.4 KBps 57.554 KBps 115.385 KBps 230.769 KBps 461.538 KBps 923.077 KBps 2000 KBps 3000 KBps

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data.

Table 112. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 16 MHz, oversampling by 16(1)
Oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) Baud rate fPCLK = 8 MHz Value programmed in the baud rate register 208.3125 52.0625 26.0625 8.6875 % Error = (Calculated Desired)B.Rate /Desired B.Rate 0.00% 0.04% 0.08% 0.08% 0.64% 0.79% 2.12% NA fPCLK = 16 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 416.6875 104.1875 52.0625 17.3750 8.6875 4.3125 2.1875 1.1250 0.00% 0.02% 0.04% 0.08% 0.08% 0.64% 0.79% 0.79%

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps 230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps 896 KBps

2.400 KBps 9.604 KBps 19.185 KBps 57.554 KBps

2.400 KBps 9.598 KBps 19.208 KBps 57.554 KBps 115.108 KBps 231.884 KBps 457.143 KBps 888.889 KBps

115.942 KBps 4.3125 228.571 KBps 2.1875 470.588 KBps 1.0625 NA NA

759/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Table 112. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 16 MHz, oversampling by 16(1) (continued)
Oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) Baud rate fPCLK = 8 MHz Value programmed in the baud rate register NA NA NA NA NA NA NA % Error = (Calculated Desired)B.Rate /Desired B.Rate NA NA NA NA NA NA NA fPCLK = 16 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 1.0625 NA NA NA NA NA NA 2.12% NA NA NA NA NA NA

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

921.6 KBps 1.792 MBps

NA NA

941.176 KBps NA NA NA NA NA NA

1.8432 MBps NA 3.584 MBps NA

3.6864 MBps NA 7.168 MBps NA

7.3728 MBps NA

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data.

Table 113. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 8 MHz or fPCLK = 16 MHz, oversampling by 8(1)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8=1) Baud rate fPCLK = 8 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 416.625 104.125 52.125 17.375 0.01% 0.04% 0.08% 0.08% 0.64% 0.79% 2.12% 0.79% 3.55% NA NA NA NA NA NA fPCLK = 16 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 833.375 208.375 104.125 34.750 0.00% 0.02% 0.04% 0.08% 0.08% 0.64% 0.79% 0.79% 2.12% 0.79% 3.55% NA NA NA NA

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps 230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps 896 KBps 921.6 KBps 1.792 MBps

2.400 KBps 9.604 KBps 19.185 KBps 57.557 KBps

2.400 KBps 9.598 KBps 19.208 KBps 57.554 KBps

115.942 KBps 8.625 228.571 KBps 4.375 470.588 KBps 2.125 888.889 KBps 1.125 888.889 KBps 1.125 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

115.108 KBps 17.375 231.884 KBps 8.625 457.143 KBps 4.375 888.889 KBps 2.250 941.176 KBps 2.125 1.7777 MBps 1.7777 MBps NA NA NA NA 1.125 1.125 NA NA NA NA

1.8432 MBps NA 3.584 MBps NA

3.6864 MBps NA 7.168 MBps NA

7.3728 MBps NA

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

760/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data.

Table 114. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 30 MHz or fPCLK = 60 MHz, oversampling by 16(1)(2)
Oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) Baud rate fPCLK = 30 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 781.2500 195.3125 97.6875 32.5625 0.00% 0.00% 0.03% 0.03% 0.16% 0.16% 0.16% 1.46% 1.36% 1.52% 1.73% NA NA NA NA fPCLK = 60 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 1562.5000 390.6250 195.3125 65.1250 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.03% 0.03% 0.16% 0.16% 0.05% 0.16% 1.36% 1.52% 1.52% 1.73% NA NA

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 57.6 KBps

2.400 KBps 9.600 KBps 19.194 KBps 57.582KBps

2.400 KBps 9.600 KBps 19.200 KBps 57.582 KBps

115.2 KBps 115.385 KBps 16.2500 230.4 KBps 230.769 KBps 8.1250 460.8 KBps 461.538 KBps 4.0625 896 KBps 909.091 KBps 2.0625

115.163 KBps 32.5625 230.769KBps 16.2500

461.538 KBps 8.1250 895.522 KBps 4.1875 923.077 KBps 4.0625 1.8182 MBps 1.8182 MBps 3.2594 MBps 3.7500 MBps NA NA 2.0625 2.0625 1.0625 1.0000 NA NA

921.6 KBps 909.091 KBps 2.0625 1.792 MBps 1.1764 MBps 1.8432 MBps 1.8750 MBps 3.584 MBps NA 3.6864 MBps NA 7.168 MBps NA 7.3728 MBps NA 1.0625 1.0000 NA NA NA NA

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data. 2. Only USART1 and USART6 are clocked with PCLK2. Other USARTs are clocked with PCLK1. Refer to the device datasheets for the maximum values for PCLK1 and PCLK2.

Table 115. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 30 MHz or fPCLK = 60 MHz, oversampling by 8(1) (2)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8=1) Baud rate fPCLK = 30 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 1562.5000 390.6250 0.00% 0.00% fPCLK =60 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 3125.0000 781.2500 0.00% 0.00%

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1. 2.

2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps

2.400 KBps 9.600 KBps

2.400 KBps 9.600 KBps

761/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Table 115. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 30 MHz or fPCLK = 60 MHz, oversampling by 8(1) (2) (continued)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8=1) Baud rate fPCLK = 30 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 195.3750 65.1250 32.5000 16.2500 8.1250 4.1250 4.1250 2.1250 2.0000 1.0000 1.0000 NA NA 0.03% 0.16% 0.16% 0.16% 0.16% 1.46% 1.36% 1.52% 1.73% 4.63% 1.73% NA NA fPCLK =60 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 390.6250 130.2500 0.00% 0.03% 0.03% 0.16% 0.16% 0.05% 0.16% 1.46% 1.36% 1.52% 1.73% 4.63% 1.73%

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

19.2 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps 230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps 896 KBps 921.6 KBps 1.792 MBps 1.8432 MBps 3.584 MBps 3.6864 MBps 7.168 MBps 7.3728 MBps

19.194 KBps 57.582 KBps 115.385 KBps 230.769 KBps 461.538 KBps 909.091 KBps 909.091 KBps 1.7647 MBps 1.8750 MBps 3.7500 MBps 3.7500 MBps NA NA

19.200 KBps 57.582 KBps

115.163 KBps 65.1250 230.769 KBps 32.5000 461.538 KBps 16.2500 895.522 KBps 8.3750 923.077 KBps 8.1250 1.8182 MBps 1.8182 MBps 3.5294 MBps 3.7500 MBps 7.5000 MBps 7.5000 MBps 4.1250 4.1250 2.1250 2.0000 1.0000 1.0000

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data. 2. Only USART1 and USART6 are clocked with PCLK2. Other USARTs are clocked with PCLK1. Refer to the device datasheets for the maximum values for PCLK1 and PCLK2.

Table 116. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 Hz, oversampling by 16(1)(2)
Oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) Baud rate fPCLK = 42 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 2187.5 1093.75 273.4375 136.75 68.375 45.5625 22.8125 0 0 0 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.11 fPCLK = 84 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 4375 2187.5 546.875 273.4375 136.75 91.125 45.5625 0 0 0 0 0.02 0.02 0.02

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.4 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.195 KBps 38.391 KBps 57.613 KBps 115.068 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.391 KBps 57.613 KBps 115.226 KBps

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

762/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Table 116. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 Hz, oversampling by 16(1)(2) (continued)
Oversampling by 16 (OVER8=0) Baud rate fPCLK = 42 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 11.375 5.6875 2.875 1.4375 1.4375 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.16 0.16 0.93 1.9 0.93 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A fPCLK = 84 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 22.8125 11.375 5.6875 2.9375 2.875 1.4375 1.4375 N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.11 0.16 0.93 0.27 0.93 1.9 0.93 N.A N.A N.A N.A

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 20

230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps 921.6 KBps 1.792 MBps 1.8432 MBps 3.584 MBps 3.6864 MBps 7.168 MBps 7.3728 MBps 9 MBps 10.5 MBps

230.769 KBps 461.538 KBps 913.043 KBps 1.826 MBps 1.826 MBps N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A

230.137 KBps 461.538 KBps 923.076 KBps 1.787 MBps 1.826 MBps 3.652 MBps 3.652 MBps N.A N.A N.A N.A

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data. 2. Only USART1 and USART6 are clocked with PCLK2. Other USARTs are clocked with PCLK1. Refer to the device datasheets for the maximum values for PCLK1 and PCLK2.

Table 117. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 MHz, oversampling by 8(1)(2)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8=1) Baud rate fPCLK = 42 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 4375 2187.5 546.875 273.5 136.75 91.125 45.625 22.75 11.375 0 0 0 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.11 0.11 0.16 fPCLK = 84 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 8750 4375 1093.75 546.875 273.5 182.25 91.125 45.625 22.75 0 0 0 0 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.11 0.16

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.4 KBps 57.6 KBps 115.2 KBps 230.4 KBps 460.8 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.195 KBps 38.391 KBps 57.613 KBps 115.068 KBps 230.769 KBps 461.538 KBps

1.2 KBps 2.4 KBps 9.6 KBps 19.2 KBps 38.391 KBps 57.613 KBps 115.226 KBps 230.137 KBps 461.538 KBps

763/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Table 117. Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 MHz, oversampling by 8(1)(2) (continued)
Oversampling by 8 (OVER8=1) Baud rate fPCLK = 42 MHz Value % Error = programmed (Calculated in the baud Desired)B.Rate rate register /Desired B.Rate 5.75 2.875 2.875 1.5 1.375 N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.93 1.9 0.93 2.34 3.57 N.A N.A N.A N.A fPCLK = 84 MHz Value programmed % Error in the baud rate register 11.375 5.875 5.75 2.875 2.875 1.5 1.375 1.125 1 0.93 0.27 0.93 1.9 0.93 2.34 3.57 3.7 0

S.No

Desired

Actual

Actual

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 18. 20.

921.6 KBps 1.792 MBps 1.8432 MBps 3.584 MBps 3.6864 MBps 7.168 MBps 7.3728 MBps 9 MBps 10.5 MBps

913.043 KBps 1.826 MBps 1.826 MBps 3.5 MBps 3.82 MBps N.A N.A N.A N.A

923.076 KBps 1.787Mbps 1.826 MBps 3.652 MBps 3.652 MBps 7 MBps 7.636 MBps 9.333 MBps 10.5 MBps

1. The lower the CPU clock the lower the accuracy for a particular baud rate. The upper limit of the achievable baud rate can be fixed with these data. 2. Only USART1 and USART6 are clocked with PCLK2. Other USARTs are clocked with PCLK1. Refer to the device datasheets for the maximum values for PCLK1 and PCLK2.

26.3.5

USART receiver tolerance to clock deviation

The USART asynchronous receiver works correctly only if the total clock system deviation is smaller than the USART receivers tolerance. The causes which contribute to the total deviation are:

DTRA: Deviation due to the transmitter error (which also includes the deviation of the transmitters local oscillator) DQUANT: Error due to the baud rate quantization of the receiver DREC: Deviation of the receivers local oscillator DTCL: Deviation due to the transmission line (generally due to the transceivers which can introduce an asymmetry between the low-to-high transition timing and the high-tolow transition timing)

DTRA + DQUANT + DREC + DTCL < USART receivers tolerance The USART receivers tolerance to properly receive data is equal to the maximum tolerated deviation and depends on the following choices:

10- or 11-bit character length defined by the M bit in the USART_CR1 register oversampling by 8 or 16 defined by the OVER8 bit in the USART_CR1 register use of fractional baud rate or not use of 1 bit or 3 bits to sample the data, depending on the value of the ONEBIT bit in the USART_CR3 register

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

764/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Table 118. USART receivers tolerance when DIV fraction is 0
OVER8 bit = 0 M bit ONEBIT=0 0 1 3.75% 3.41% ONEBIT=1 4.375% 3.97% ONEBIT=0 2.50% 2.27% OVER8 bit = 1

RM0090

ONEBIT=1 3.75% 3.41%

Table 119. USART receivers tolerance when DIV_Fraction is different from 0

OVER8 bit = 0 M bit ONEBIT=0 0 1 3.33% 3.03% ONEBIT=1 3.88% 3.53% ONEBIT=0 2% 1.82% ONEBIT=1 3% 2.73% OVER8 bit = 1

Note:

The figures specified in Table 118 and Table 119 may slightly differ in the special case when the received frames contain some Idle frames of exactly 10-bit times when M=0 (11-bit times when M=1).

26.3.6

Multiprocessor communication
There is a possibility of performing multiprocessor communication with the USART (several USARTs connected in a network). For instance one of the USARTs can be the master, its TX output is connected to the RX input of the other USART. The others are slaves, their respective TX outputs are logically ANDed together and connected to the RX input of the master. In multiprocessor configurations it is often desirable that only the intended message recipient should actively receive the full message contents, thus reducing redundant USART service overhead for all non addressed receivers. The non addressed devices may be placed in mute mode by means of the muting function. In mute mode:

None of the reception status bits can be set. All the receive interrupts are inhibited. The RWU bit in USART_CR1 register is set to 1. RWU can be controlled automatically by hardware or written by the software under certain conditions.

The USART can enter or exit from mute mode using one of two methods, depending on the WAKE bit in the USART_CR1 register:

Idle Line detection if the WAKE bit is reset, Address Mark detection if the WAKE bit is set.

Idle line detection (WAKE=0)

The USART enters mute mode when the RWU bit is written to 1. It wakes up when an Idle frame is detected. Then the RWU bit is cleared by hardware but the IDLE bit is not set in the USART_SR register. RWU can also be written to 0 by software. An example of mute mode behavior using Idle line detection is given in Figure 253.

765/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Figure 253. Mute mode using Idle line detection
RXNE RXNE

RX

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3

Data 4

IDLE

Data 5

Data 6

RWU

Mute Mode

Normal Mode

RWU written to 1

Idle frame detected

Address mark detection (WAKE=1)

In this mode, bytes are recognized as addresses if their MSB is a 1 else they are considered as data. In an address byte, the address of the targeted receiver is put on the 4 LSB. This 4-bit word is compared by the receiver with its own address which is programmed in the ADD bits in the USART_CR2 register. The USART enters mute mode when an address character is received which does not match its programmed address. In this case, the RWU bit is set by hardware. The RXNE flag is not set for this address byte and no interrupt nor DMA request is issued as the USART would have entered mute mode. It exits from mute mode when an address character is received which matches the programmed address. Then the RWU bit is cleared and subsequent bytes are received normally. The RXNE bit is set for the address character since the RWU bit has been cleared. The RWU bit can be written to as 0 or 1 when the receiver buffer contains no data (RXNE=0 in the USART_SR register). Otherwise the write attempt is ignored. An example of mute mode behavior using address mark detection is given in Figure 254. Figure 254. Mute mode using address mark detection
In this example, the current address of the receiver is 1 (programmed in the USART_CR2 register) RXNE RXNE RXNE

RX

IDLE

Addr=0

Data 1 Data 2

IDLE

Addr=1 Data 3

Data 4 Addr=2

Data 5

RWU

Mute Mode

Normal Mode

Mute Mode

nonmatching address RWU written to 1 (RXNE was cleared)

Matching address

nonmatching address

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

766/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.3.7

Parity control
Parity control (generation of parity bit in transmission and parity checking in reception) can be enabled by setting the PCE bit in the USART_CR1 register. Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit, the possible USART frame formats are as listed in Table 120. Table 120. Frame formats
M bit 0 0 1 1 PCE bit 0 1 0 1 USART frame(1) | SB | 8 bit data | STB | | SB | 7-bit data | PB | STB | | SB | 9-bit data | STB | | SB | 8-bit data PB | STB |

1. Legends: SB: start bit, STB: stop bit, PB: parity bit.

Even parity
The parity bit is calculated to obtain an even number of 1s inside the frame made of the 7 or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is equal to 0 or 1) and the parity bit. E.g.: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be 0 if even parity is selected (PS bit in USART_CR1 = 0).

Odd parity
The parity bit is calculated to obtain an odd number of 1s inside the frame made of the 7 or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is equal to 0 or 1) and the parity bit. E.g.: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be 1 if odd parity is selected (PS bit in USART_CR1 = 1).

Parity checking in reception

If the parity check fails, the PE flag is set in the USART_SR register and an interrupt is generated if PEIE is set in the USART_CR1 register. The PE flag is cleared by a software sequence (a read from the status register followed by a read or write access to the USART_DR data register). Note: In case of wakeup by an address mark: the MSB bit of the data is taken into account to identify an address but not the parity bit. And the receiver does not check the parity of the address data (PE is not set in case of a parity error).

Parity generation in transmission

If the PCE bit is set in USART_CR1, then the MSB bit of the data written in the data register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit (even number of 1s if even parity is selected (PS=0) or an odd number of 1s if odd parity is selected (PS=1)). Note: The software routine that manages the transmission can activate the software sequence which clears the PE flag (a read from the status register followed by a read or write access to the data register). When operating in half-duplex mode, depending on the software, this can cause the PE flag to be unexpectedly cleared.

767/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

26.3.8

LIN (local interconnection network) mode

The LIN mode is selected by setting the LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register. In LIN mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:

CLKEN in the USART_CR2 register, STOP[1:0], SCEN, HDSEL and IREN in the USART_CR3 register.

LIN transmission
The same procedure explained in Section 26.3.2 has to be applied for LIN Master transmission than for normal USART transmission with the following differences:

Clear the M bit to configure 8-bit word length. Set the LINEN bit to enter LIN mode. In this case, setting the SBK bit sends 13 0 bits as a break character. Then a bit of value 1 is sent to allow the next start detection.

LIN reception
A break detection circuit is implemented on the USART interface. The detection is totally independent from the normal USART receiver. A break can be detected whenever it occurs, during Idle state or during a frame. When the receiver is enabled (RE=1 in USART_CR1), the circuit looks at the RX input for a start signal. The method for detecting start bits is the same when searching break characters or data. After a start bit has been detected, the circuit samples the next bits exactly like for the data (on the 8th, 9th and 10th samples). If 10 (when the LBDL = 0 in USART_CR2) or 11 (when LBDL=1 in USART_CR2) consecutive bits are detected as 0, and are followed by a delimiter character, the LBD flag is set in USART_SR. If the LBDIE bit=1, an interrupt is generated. Before validating the break, the delimiter is checked for as it signifies that the RX line has returned to a high level. If a 1 is sampled before the 10 or 11 have occurred, the break detection circuit cancels the current detection and searches for a start bit again. If the LIN mode is disabled (LINEN=0), the receiver continues working as normal USART, without taking into account the break detection. If the LIN mode is enabled (LINEN=1), as soon as a framing error occurs (i.e. stop bit detected at 0, which will be the case for any break frame), the receiver stops until the break detection circuit receives either a 1, if the break word was not complete, or a delimiter character if a break has been detected. The behavior of the break detector state machine and the break flag is shown on the Figure 255: Break detection in LIN mode (11-bit break length - LBDL bit is set) on page 769. Examples of break frames are given on Figure 256: Break detection in LIN mode vs. Framing error detection on page 770.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

768/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Figure 255. Break detection in LIN mode (11-bit break length - LBDL bit is set)
Case 1: break signal not long enough => break discarded, LBD is not set RX line Capture Strobe Break State machine Idle Read Samples
Bit0 0 Bit1 0 Bit2 0 Bit3 0 Bit4 0 Bit5 0 Bit6 0 Bit7 0 Bit8 0 Bit9 0 Bit10 1 Idle

RM0090

Break Frame

Case 2: break signal just long enough => break detected, LBD is set RX line Capture Strobe
delimiter is immediate

Break Frame

Break State machine Idle Read Samples LBD

Bit0 0

Bit1 0

Bit2 0

Bit3 0

Bit4 0

Bit5 0

Bit6 0

Bit7 0

Bit8 0

Bit9 B10 0 0

Idle

Case 3: break signal long enough => break detected, LBD is set RX line Capture Strobe Break State machine Idle Read Samples LBD
Bit0 0 Bit1 0 Bit2 0 Bit3 0 Bit4 0 Bit5 0 Bit6 0 Bit7 0 Bit8 0 Bit9 0 Bit10 0 wait delimiter Idle

Break Frame

769/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Figure 256. Break detection in LIN mode vs. Framing error detection
In these examples, we suppose that LBDL=1 (11-bit break length), M=0 (8-bit data) Case 1: break occurring after an Idle RX line
data 1 IDLE BREAK 1 data time data2 (0x55) 1 data time data 3 (header)

RXNE / FE LBD

Case 1: break occurring while a data is being received RX line

data 1 data 2 1 data time BREAK data2 (0x55) 1 data time data 3 (header)

RXNE / FE LBD

26.3.9

USART synchronous mode

The synchronous mode is selected by writing the CLKEN bit in the USART_CR2 register to 1. In synchronous mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:

LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register, SCEN, HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.

The USART allows the user to control a bidirectional synchronous serial communications in master mode. The SCLK pin is the output of the USART transmitter clock. No clock pulses are sent to the SCLK pin during start bit and stop bit. Depending on the state of the LBCL bit in the USART_CR2 register clock pulses will or will not be generated during the last valid data bit (address mark). The CPOL bit in the USART_CR2 register allows the user to select the clock polarity, and the CPHA bit in the USART_CR2 register allows the user to select the phase of the external clock (see Figure 257, Figure 258 & Figure 259). During the Idle state, preamble and send break, the external SCLK clock is not activated. In synchronous mode the USART transmitter works exactly like in asynchronous mode. But as SCLK is synchronized with TX (according to CPOL and CPHA), the data on TX is synchronous. In this mode the USART receiver works in a different manner compared to the asynchronous mode. If RE=1, the data is sampled on SCLK (rising or falling edge, depending on CPOL and CPHA), without any oversampling. A setup and a hold time must be respected (which depends on the baud rate: 1/16 bit time). Note: The SCLK pin works in conjunction with the TX pin. Thus, the clock is provided only if the transmitter is enabled (TE=1) and a data is being transmitted (the data register USART_DR

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

770/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

has been written). This means that it is not possible to receive a synchronous data without transmitting data. The LBCL, CPOL and CPHA bits have to be selected when both the transmitter and the receiver are disabled (TE=RE=0) to ensure that the clock pulses function correctly. These bits should not be changed while the transmitter or the receiver is enabled. It is advised that TE and RE are set in the same instruction in order to minimize the setup and the hold time of the receiver. The USART supports master mode only: it cannot receive or send data related to an input clock (SCLK is always an output). Figure 257. USART example of synchronous transmission
RX TX USART

Data out Data in Synchronous device (e.g. slave SPI)

SCLK

Clock

Figure 258. USART data clock timing diagram (M=0)

Idle or preceding Start transmission Clock (CPOL=0, CPHA=0) Clock (CPOL=0, CPHA=1)
Idle or next

M=0 (8 data bits)

Stop

transmission

* *

Clock (CPOL=1, CPHA=0)

* *
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Clock (CPOL=1, CPHA=1)

Data on TX (from master) Data on RX (from slave) Capture Strobe

Start

LSB
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

MSB Stop
7

LSB

MSB

*
* LBCL bit controls last data clock pulse

771/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Figure 259. USART data clock timing diagram (M=1)
Idle or preceding Start transmission Clock (CPOL=0, CPHA=0) Clock (CPOL=0, CPHA=1) M=1 (9 data bits) Stop Idle or next transmission

* *

Clock (CPOL=1, CPHA=0)

* *
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Clock (CPOL=1, CPHA=1)

Data on TX (from master) Data on RX (from slave) Capture Strobe

Start

LSB
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

MSB Stop
8

LSB

MSB

*
* LBCL bit controls last data clock pulse

Figure 260. RX data setup/hold time

SCLK (capture strobe on SCLK rising edge in this example) Data on RX (from slave)

valid DATA bit

tSETUP tSETUP = tHOLD 1/16 bit time

tHOLD

Note:

The function of SCLK is different in Smartcard mode. Refer to the Smartcard mode chapter for more details.

26.3.10

Single-wire half-duplex communication

The single-wire half-duplex mode is selected by setting the HDSEL bit in the USART_CR3 register. In this mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:

LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register, SCEN and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.

The USART can be configured to follow a single-wire half-duplex protocol where the TX and RX lines are internally connected. The selection between half- and full-duplex communication is made with a control bit HALF DUPLEX SEL (HDSEL in USART_CR3). As soon as HDSEL is written to 1:

the TX and RX lines are internally connected the RX pin is no longer used the TX pin is always released when no data is transmitted. Thus, it acts as a standard I/O in idle or in reception. It means that the I/O must be configured so that TX is configured as floating input (or output high open-drain) when not driven by the USART.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

772/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Apart from this, the communications are similar to what is done in normal USART mode. The conflicts on the line must be managed by the software (by the use of a centralized arbiter, for instance). In particular, the transmission is never blocked by hardware and continue to occur as soon as a data is written in the data register while the TE bit is set.

26.3.11

Smartcard
The Smartcard mode is selected by setting the SCEN bit in the USART_CR3 register. In smartcard mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:

LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register, HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.

Moreover, the CLKEN bit may be set in order to provide a clock to the smartcard. The Smartcard interface is designed to support asynchronous protocol Smartcards as defined in the ISO 7816-3 standard. The USART should be configured as:

8 bits plus parity: where M=1 and PCE=1 in the USART_CR1 register 1.5 stop bits when transmitting and receiving: where STOP=11 in the USART_CR2 register.

Note:

It is also possible to choose 0.5 stop bit for receiving but it is recommended to use 1.5 stop bits for both transmitting and receiving to avoid switching between the two configurations. Figure 261 shows examples of what can be seen on the data line with and without parity error. Figure 261. ISO 7816-3 asynchronous protocol Without Parity error
S Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P Guard time

With Parity error

S Start bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P

Guard time

Line pulled low by receiver during stop in case of parity error

When connected to a Smartcard, the TX output of the USART drives a bidirectional line that is also driven by the Smartcard. The TX pin must be configured as open-drain. Smartcard is a single wire half duplex communication protocol.

Transmission of data from the transmit shift register is guaranteed to be delayed by a minimum of 1/2 baud clock. In normal operation a full transmit shift register will start shifting on the next baud clock edge. In Smartcard mode this transmission is further delayed by a guaranteed 1/2 baud clock. If a parity error is detected during reception of a frame programmed with a 0.5 or 1.5 stop bit period, the transmit line is pulled low for a baud clock period after the completion of the receive frame. This is to indicate to the Smartcard that the data transmitted to USART has not been correctly received. This NACK signal (pulling transmit line low for 1 baud clock) will cause a framing error on the transmitter side
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

773/1422

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) (configured with 1.5 stop bits). The application can handle re-sending of data according to the protocol. A parity error is NACKed by the receiver if the NACK control bit is set, otherwise a NACK is not transmitted.

The assertion of the TC flag can be delayed by programming the Guard Time register. In normal operation, TC is asserted when the transmit shift register is empty and no further transmit requests are outstanding. In Smartcard mode an empty transmit shift register triggers the guard time counter to count up to the programmed value in the Guard Time register. TC is forced low during this time. When the guard time counter reaches the programmed value TC is asserted high. The de-assertion of TC flag is unaffected by Smartcard mode. If a framing error is detected on the transmitter end (due to a NACK from the receiver), the NACK will not be detected as a start bit by the receive block of the transmitter. According to the ISO protocol, the duration of the received NACK can be 1 or 2 baud clock periods. On the receiver side, if a parity error is detected and a NACK is transmitted the receiver will not detect the NACK as a start bit.

Note:

A break character is not significant in Smartcard mode. A 0x00 data with a framing error will be treated as data and not as a break. No Idle frame is transmitted when toggling the TE bit. The Idle frame (as defined for the other configurations) is not defined by the ISO protocol. Figure 262 details how the NACK signal is sampled by the USART. In this example the USART is transmitting a data and is configured with 1.5 stop bits. The receiver part of the USART is enabled in order to check the integrity of the data and the NACK signal. Figure 262. Parity error detection using the 1.5 stop bits
Bit 7 Parity Bit 1.5 Stop Bit

1 bit time

1.5 bit time

sampling at 8th, 9th, 10th 0.5 bit time

sampling at 16th, 17th, 18th 1 bit time

sampling at 8th, 9th, 10th

sampling at 8th, 9th, 10th

The USART can provide a clock to the smartcard through the SCLK output. In smartcard mode, SCLK is not associated to the communication but is simply derived from the internal peripheral input clock through a 5-bit prescaler. The division ratio is configured in the prescaler register USART_GTPR. SCLK frequency can be programmed from fCK/2 to fCK/62, where fCK is the peripheral input clock.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

774/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.3.12

IrDA SIR ENDEC block

The IrDA mode is selected by setting the IREN bit in the USART_CR3 register. In IrDA mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:

LINEN, STOP and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register, SCEN and HDSEL bits in the USART_CR3 register.

The IrDA SIR physical layer specifies use of a Return to Zero, Inverted (RZI) modulation scheme that represents logic 0 as an infrared light pulse (see Figure 263). The SIR Transmit encoder modulates the Non Return to Zero (NRZ) transmit bit stream output from USART. The output pulse stream is transmitted to an external output driver and infrared LED. USART supports only bit rates up to 115.2Kbps for the SIR ENDEC. In normal mode the transmitted pulse width is specified as 3/16 of a bit period. The SIR receive decoder demodulates the return-to-zero bit stream from the infrared detector and outputs the received NRZ serial bit stream to USART. The decoder input is normally HIGH (marking state) in the Idle state. The transmit encoder output has the opposite polarity to the decoder input. A start bit is detected when the decoder input is low.

IrDA is a half duplex communication protocol. If the Transmitter is busy (i.e. the USART is sending data to the IrDA encoder), any data on the IrDA receive line will be ignored by the IrDA decoder and if the Receiver is busy (USART is receiving decoded data from the USART), data on the TX from the USART to IrDA will not be encoded by IrDA. While receiving data, transmission should be avoided as the data to be transmitted could be corrupted. A 0 is transmitted as a high pulse and a 1 is transmitted as a 0. The width of the pulse is specified as 3/16th of the selected bit period in normal mode (see Figure 264). The SIR decoder converts the IrDA compliant receive signal into a bit stream for USART. The SIR receive logic interprets a high state as a logic one and low pulses as logic zeros. The transmit encoder output has the opposite polarity to the decoder input. The SIR output is in low state when Idle. The IrDA specification requires the acceptance of pulses greater than 1.41 us. The acceptable pulse width is programmable. Glitch detection logic on the receiver end filters out pulses of width less than 2 PSC periods (PSC is the prescaler value programmed in the IrDA low-power Baud Register, USART_GTPR). Pulses of width less than 1 PSC period are always rejected, but those of width greater than one and less than two periods may be accepted or rejected, those greater than 2 periods will be accepted as a pulse. The IrDA encoder/decoder doesnt work when PSC=0. The receiver can communicate with a low-power transmitter. In IrDA mode, the STOP bits in the USART_CR2 register must be configured to 1 stop bit.

775/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

IrDA low-power mode

Transmitter : In low-power mode the pulse width is not maintained at 3/16 of the bit period. Instead, the width of the pulse is 3 times the low-power baud rate which can be a minimum of 1.42 MHz. Generally this value is 1.8432 MHz (1.42 MHz < PSC< 2.12 MHz). A low-power mode programmable divisor divides the system clock to achieve this value. Receiver : Receiving in low-power mode is similar to receiving in normal mode. For glitch detection the USART should discard pulses of duration shorter than 1/PSC. A valid low is accepted only if its duration is greater than 2 periods of the IrDA low-power Baud clock (PSC value in USART_GTPR). Note: A pulse of width less than two and greater than one PSC period(s) may or may not be rejected. The receiver set up time should be managed by software. The IrDA physical layer specification specifies a minimum of 10 ms delay between transmission and reception (IrDA is a half duplex protocol). Figure 263. IrDA SIR ENDEC- block diagram

TX
OR USART_TX

SIR USART SIREN

Transmit Encoder IrDA_OUT

SIR RX
Receive Decoder IrDA_IN

USART_RX

Figure 264. IrDA data modulation (3/16) -Normal mode

Start bit 0 bit period IrDA_OUT 3/16 IrDA_IN RX 0 stop bit 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

TX

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

776/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.3.13

Continuous communication using DMA

The USART is capable of continuous communication using the DMA. The DMA requests for Rx buffer and Tx buffer are generated independently.

Note:

You should refer to product specs for availability of the DMA controller. If DMA is not available in the product, you should use the USART as explained in Section 26.3.2 or 26.3.3. In the USART_SR register, you can clear the TXE/ RXNE flags to achieve continuous communication.

Transmission using DMA

DMA mode can be enabled for transmission by setting DMAT bit in the USART_CR3 register. Data is loaded from a SRAM area configured using the DMA peripheral (refer to the DMA specification) to the USART_DR register whenever the TXE bit is set. To map a DMA channel for USART transmission, use the following procedure (x denotes the channel number): 1. Write the USART_DR register address in the DMA control register to configure it as the destination of the transfer. The data will be moved to this address from memory after each TXE event. Write the memory address in the DMA control register to configure it as the source of the transfer. The data will be loaded into the USART_DR register from this memory area after each TXE event. Configure the total number of bytes to be transferred to the DMA control register. Configure the channel priority in the DMA register Configure DMA interrupt generation after half/ full transfer as required by the application. Clear the TC bit in the SR register by writing 0 to it. Activate the channel in the DMA register.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

When the number of data transfers programmed in the DMA Controller is reached, the DMA controller generates an interrupt on the DMA channel interrupt vector. In transmission mode, once the DMA has written all the data to be transmitted (the TCIF flag is set in the DMA_ISR register), the TC flag can be monitored to make sure that the USART communication is complete. This is required to avoid corrupting the last transmission before disabling the USART or entering the Stop mode. The software must wait until TC=1. The TC flag remains cleared during all data transfers and it is set by hardware at the last frames end of transmission.

777/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Figure 265. Transmission using DMA

Idle preamble Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3

TX line
set by hardware cleared by DMA read set by hardware cleared by DMA read

TXE flag

set by hardware

DMA request

ignored by the DMA because DMA transfer is complete

USART_DR

F1

F2

F3

TC flag DMA writes USART_DR flag DMA TCIF (Transfer complete)

set by hardware clear by software

set by hardware

software configures DMA writes F1 the DMA to send 3 into data and enables the USART_DR USART

DMA writes F2 DMA writes F3 into into USART_DR USART_DR.

The DMA transfer is complete (TCIF=1 in DMA_ISR)

software waits until TC=1

ai17192b

Reception using DMA

DMA mode can be enabled for reception by setting the DMAR bit in USART_CR3 register. Data is loaded from the USART_DR register to a SRAM area configured using the DMA peripheral (refer to the DMA specification) whenever a data byte is received. To map a DMA channel for USART reception, use the following procedure: 1. Write the USART_DR register address in the DMA control register to configure it as the source of the transfer. The data will be moved from this address to the memory after each RXNE event. Write the memory address in the DMA control register to configure it as the destination of the transfer. The data will be loaded from USART_DR to this memory area after each RXNE event. Configure the total number of bytes to be transferred in the DMA control register. Configure the channel priority in the DMA control register Configure interrupt generation after half/ full transfer as required by the application. Activate the channel in the DMA control register.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

When the number of data transfers programmed in the DMA Controller is reached, the DMA controller generates an interrupt on the DMA channel interrupt vector. The DMAR bit should be cleared by software in the USART_CR3 register during the interrupt subroutine. Note: If DMA is used for reception, do not enable the RXNEIE bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

778/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) Figure 266. Reception using DMA
Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3

RM0090

TX line
set by hardware cleared by DMA read

RXNE flag

DMA request USART_DR

F1

F2

F3

DMA reads USART_DR

cleared by software

DMA TCIF flag (Transfer complete)

set by hardware

software configures the DMA to receive 3 data blocks and enables the USART

DMA reads F1 from USART_DR

DMA reads F2 from USART_DR

DMA reads F3 from USART_DR

The DMA transfer is complete (TCIF=1 in DMA_ISR)

ai17193b

Error flagging and interrupt generation in multibuffer communication

In case of multibuffer communication if any error occurs during the transaction the error flag will be asserted after the current byte. An interrupt will be generated if the interrupt enable flag is set. For framing error, overrun error and noise flag which are asserted with RXNE in case of single byte reception, there will be separate error flag interrupt enable bit (EIE bit in the USART_CR3 register), which if set will issue an interrupt after the current byte with either of these errors.

26.3.14

Hardware flow control

It is possible to control the serial data flow between 2 devices by using the nCTS input and the nRTS output. The Figure 267 shows how to connect 2 devices in this mode: Figure 267. Hardware flow control between 2 USARTs
USART 1 TX TX circuit nCTS RX RX circuit nRTS RX nRTS TX nCTS TX circuit RX circuit USART 2

RTS and CTS flow control can be enabled independently by writing respectively RTSE and CTSE bits to 1 (in the USART_CR3 register).

779/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RTS flow control

If the RTS flow control is enabled (RTSE=1), then nRTS is asserted (tied low) as long as the USART receiver is ready to receive a new data. When the receive register is full, nRTS is deasserted, indicating that the transmission is expected to stop at the end of the current frame. Figure 268 shows an example of communication with RTS flow control enabled. Figure 268. RTS flow control
Start Bit StopIdle Start Bit Bit Stop Bit

RX

Data 1

Data 2

nRTS

RXNE

Data 1 read Data 2 can now be transmitted

RXNE

CTS flow control

If the CTS flow control is enabled (CTSE=1), then the transmitter checks the nCTS input before transmitting the next frame. If nCTS is asserted (tied low), then the next data is transmitted (assuming that a data is to be transmitted, in other words, if TXE=0), else the transmission does not occur. When nCTS is deasserted during a transmission, the current transmission is completed before the transmitter stops. When CTSE=1, the CTSIF status bit is automatically set by hardware as soon as the nCTS input toggles. It indicates when the receiver becomes ready or not ready for communication. An interrupt is generated if the CTSIE bit in the USART_CR3 register is set. The figure below shows an example of communication with CTS flow control enabled. Figure 269. CTS flow control
CTS CTS

nCTS Transmit data register TDR Data 2 Start Stop Bit Bit empty Data 3 Stop Bit Idle Start Bit empty

TX

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3

Writing data 3 in TDR

Transmission of Data 3 is delayed until nCTS = 0

Note:

Special behavior of break frames: when the CTS flow is enabled, the transmitter does not check the nCTS input state to send a break.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

780/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.4

USART interrupts
Table 121. USART interrupt requests
Interrupt event Transmit Data Register Empty CTS flag Transmission Complete Received Data Ready to be Read Overrun Error Detected Idle Line Detected Parity Error Break Flag Noise Flag, Overrun error and Framing Error in multibuffer communication Event flag TXE CTS TC RXNE RXNEIE ORE IDLE PE LBD IDLEIE PEIE LBDIE Enable control bit TXEIE CTSIE TCIE

NF or ORE or FE EIE

The USART interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Figure 270).

During transmission: Transmission Complete, Clear to Send or Transmit Data Register empty interrupt. While receiving: Idle Line detection, Overrun error, Receive Data register not empty, Parity error, LIN break detection, Noise Flag (only in multi buffer communication) and Framing Error (only in multi buffer communication).

These events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set. Figure 270. USART interrupt mapping diagram
TC TCIE TXE TXEIE CTS CTSIE IDLE IDLEIE RXNEIE ORE RXNEIE RXNE PE PEIE LBD LBDIE FE NE ORE

USART interrupt

EIE DMAR

781/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

26.5

USART mode configuration

Table 122. USART mode configuration(1)
USART modes Asynchronous mode Hardware flow control Multibuffer communication (DMA) Multiprocessor communication Synchronous Smartcard Half-duplex (single-wire mode) IrDA LIN
1. X = supported; NA = not applicable.

USART1 USART2 USART3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

UART4 X NA X X NA NA X X X

UART5 X NA X X NA NA X X X

USART6 X X X X X X X X X

26.6

USART registers
Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers can be accessed by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

26.6.1

Status register (USART_SR)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x00C0 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 CTS Reserved rc_w0 rc_w0 r rc_w0 rc_w0 r r r r r 8 LBD 7 TXE 6 TC 5 RXNE 4 IDLE 3 ORE 2 NF 1 FE 0 PE

Bits 31:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 9 CTS: CTS flag This bit is set by hardware when the nCTS input toggles, if the CTSE bit is set. It is cleared by software (by writing it to 0). An interrupt is generated if CTSIE=1 in the USART_CR3 register. 0: No change occurred on the nCTS status line 1: A change occurred on the nCTS status line Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 8 LBD: LIN break detection flag This bit is set by hardware when the LIN break is detected. It is cleared by software (by writing it to 0). An interrupt is generated if LBDIE = 1 in the USART_CR2 register. 0: LIN Break not detected 1: LIN break detected Note: An interrupt is generated when LBD=1 if LBDIE=1

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

782/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Bit 7 TXE: Transmit data register empty This bit is set by hardware when the content of the TDR register has been transferred into the shift register. An interrupt is generated if the TXEIE bit =1 in the USART_CR1 register. It is cleared by a write to the USART_DR register. 0: Data is not transferred to the shift register 1: Data is transferred to the shift register) Note: This bit is used during single buffer transmission. Bit 6 TC: Transmission complete This bit is set by hardware if the transmission of a frame containing data is complete and if TXE is set. An interrupt is generated if TCIE=1 in the USART_CR1 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (a read from the USART_SR register followed by a write to the USART_DR register). The TC bit can also be cleared by writing a '0' to it. This clearing sequence is recommended only for multibuffer communication. 0: Transmission is not complete 1: Transmission is complete Bit 5 RXNE: Read data register not empty This bit is set by hardware when the content of the RDR shift register has been transferred to the USART_DR register. An interrupt is generated if RXNEIE=1 in the USART_CR1 register. It is cleared by a read to the USART_DR register. The RXNE flag can also be cleared by writing a zero to it. This clearing sequence is recommended only for multibuffer communication. 0: Data is not received 1: Received data is ready to be read. Bit 4 IDLE: IDLE line detected This bit is set by hardware when an Idle Line is detected. An interrupt is generated if the IDLEIE=1 in the USART_CR1 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an read to the USART_SR register followed by a read to the USART_DR register). 0: No Idle Line is detected 1: Idle Line is detected Note: The IDLE bit will not be set again until the RXNE bit has been set itself (i.e. a new idle line occurs). Bit 3 ORE: Overrun error This bit is set by hardware when the word currently being received in the shift register is ready to be transferred into the RDR register while RXNE=1. An interrupt is generated if RXNEIE=1 in the USART_CR1 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an read to the USART_SR register followed by a read to the USART_DR register). 0: No Overrun error 1: Overrun error is detected Note: When this bit is set, the RDR register content will not be lost but the shift register will be overwritten. An interrupt is generated on ORE flag in case of Multi Buffer communication if the EIE bit is set.

783/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Bit 2 NF: Noise detected flag This bit is set by hardware when noise is detected on a received frame. It is cleared by a software sequence (an read to the USART_SR register followed by a read to the USART_DR register). 0: No noise is detected 1: Noise is detected Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it appears at the same time as the RXNE bit which itself generates an interrupting interrupt is generated on NF flag in case of Multi Buffer communication if the EIE bit is set. Note: When the line is noise-free, the NF flag can be disabled by programming the ONEBIT bit to 1 to increase the USART tolerance to deviations (Refer to Section 26.3.5: USART receiver tolerance to clock deviation on page 764). Bit 1 FE: Framing error This bit is set by hardware when a de-synchronization, excessive noise or a break character is detected. It is cleared by a software sequence (an read to the USART_SR register followed by a read to the USART_DR register). 0: No Framing error is detected 1: Framing error or break character is detected Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it appears at the same time as the RXNE bit which itself generates an interrupt. If the word currently being transferred causes both frame error and overrun error, it will be transferred and only the ORE bit will be set. An interrupt is generated on FE flag in case of Multi Buffer communication if the EIE bit is set. Bit 0 PE: Parity error This bit is set by hardware when a parity error occurs in receiver mode. It is cleared by a software sequence (a read from the status register followed by a read or write access to the USART_DR data register). The software must wait for the RXNE flag to be set before clearing the PE bit. An interrupt is generated if PEIE = 1 in the USART_CR1 register. 0: No parity error 1: Parity error

26.6.2

Data register (USART_DR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX
Bits 31:9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 8:0 DR[8:0]: Data value Contains the Received or Transmitted data character, depending on whether it is read from or written to. The Data register performs a double function (read and write) since it is composed of two registers, one for transmission (TDR) and one for reception (RDR) The TDR register provides the parallel interface between the internal bus and the output shift register (see Figure 1). The RDR register provides the parallel interface between the input shift register and the internal bus. When transmitting with the parity enabled (PCE bit set to 1 in the USART_CR1 register), the value written in the MSB (bit 7 or bit 8 depending on the data length) has no effect because it is replaced by the parity. When receiving with the parity enabled, the value read in the MSB bit is the received parity bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

784/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.6.3
Note:

Baud rate register (USART_BRR)

The baud counters stop counting if the TE or RE bits are disabled respectively. Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DIV_Mantissa[11:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

DIV_Fraction[3:0] rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 15:4 DIV_Mantissa[11:0]: mantissa of USARTDIV These 12 bits define the mantissa of the USART Divider (USARTDIV) Bits 3:0 DIV_Fraction[3:0]: fraction of USARTDIV These 4 bits define the fraction of the USART Divider (USARTDIV). When OVER8=1, the DIV_Fraction3 bit is not considered and must be kept cleared.

26.6.4

Control register 1 (USART_CR1)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 OVER8 rw 14 Reserved Res. 13 UE rw 12 M rw 11 WAKE rw 10 PCE rw 9 PS rw 8 PEIE rw 7 TXEIE rw 6 TCIE rw 5 4 3 TE rw 2 RE rw 1 RWU rw 0 SBK rw

RXNEIE IDLEIE rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 15 OVER8: Oversampling mode 0: oversampling by 16 1: oversampling by 8 Note: Oversampling by 8 is not available in the Smartcard, IrDA and LIN modes: when SCEN=1,IREN=1 or LINEN=1 then OVER8 is forced to 0 by hardware. Bit 14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 13 UE: USART enable When this bit is cleared the USART prescalers and outputs are stopped and the end of the current byte transfer in order to reduce power consumption. This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: USART prescaler and outputs disabled 1: USART enabled Bit 12 M: Word length This bit determines the word length. It is set or cleared by software. 0: 1 Start bit, 8 Data bits, n Stop bit 1: 1 Start bit, 9 Data bits, n Stop bit Note: The M bit must not be modified during a data transfer (both transmission and reception)

785/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Bit 11 WAKE: Wakeup method This bit determines the USART wakeup method, it is set or cleared by software. 0: Idle Line 1: Address Mark Bit 10 PCE: Parity control enable This bit selects the hardware parity control (generation and detection). When the parity control is enabled, the computed parity is inserted at the MSB position (9th bit if M=1; 8th bit if M=0) and parity is checked on the received data. This bit is set and cleared by software. Once it is set, PCE is active after the current byte (in reception and in transmission). 0: Parity control disabled 1: Parity control enabled Bit 9 PS: Parity selection This bit selects the odd or even parity when the parity generation/detection is enabled (PCE bit set). It is set and cleared by software. The parity will be selected after the current byte. 0: Even parity 1: Odd parity Bit 8 PEIE: PE interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An USART interrupt is generated whenever PE=1 in the USART_SR register Bit 7 TXEIE: TXE interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An USART interrupt is generated whenever TXE=1 in the USART_SR register Bit 6 TCIE: Transmission complete interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An USART interrupt is generated whenever TC=1 in the USART_SR register Bit 5 RXNEIE: RXNE interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An USART interrupt is generated whenever ORE=1 or RXNE=1 in the USART_SR register Bit 4 IDLEIE: IDLE interrupt enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An USART interrupt is generated whenever IDLE=1 in the USART_SR register Bit 3 TE: Transmitter enable This bit enables the transmitter. It is set and cleared by software. 0: Transmitter is disabled 1: Transmitter is enabled Note: 1: During transmission, a 0 pulse on the TE bit (0 followed by 1) sends a preamble (idle line) after the current word, except in smartcard mode. 2: When TE is set there is a 1 bit-time delay before the transmission starts.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

786/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Bit 2 RE: Receiver enable This bit enables the receiver. It is set and cleared by software. 0: Receiver is disabled 1: Receiver is enabled and begins searching for a start bit Bit 1 RWU: Receiver wakeup This bit determines if the USART is in mute mode or not. It is set and cleared by software and can be cleared by hardware when a wakeup sequence is recognized. 0: Receiver in active mode 1: Receiver in mute mode Note: 1: Before selecting Mute mode (by setting the RWU bit) the USART must first receive a data byte, otherwise it cannot function in Mute mode with wakeup by Idle line detection. 2: In Address Mark Detection wakeup configuration (WAKE bit=1) the RWU bit cannot be modified by software while the RXNE bit is set. Bit 0 SBK: Send break This bit set is used to send break characters. It can be set and cleared by software. It should be set by software, and will be reset by hardware during the stop bit of break. 0: No break character is transmitted 1: Break character will be transmitted

787/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

26.6.5

Control register 2 (USART_CR2)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 Res. rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 14 LINEN 13 12 11 CLKEN 10 CPOL 9 CPHA 8 LBCL 7 Res. 6 LBDIE 5 LBDL 4 Res. 3 2 1 0

STOP[1:0]

ADD[3:0]

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 14 LINEN: LIN mode enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: LIN mode disabled 1: LIN mode enabled The LIN mode enables the capability to send LIN Synch Breaks (13 low bits) using the SBK bit in the USART_CR1 register, and to detect LIN Sync breaks. Bits 13:12 STOP: STOP bits These bits are used for programming the stop bits. 00: 1 Stop bit 01: 0.5 Stop bit 10: 2 Stop bits 11: 1.5 Stop bit Note: The 0.5 Stop bit and 1.5 Stop bit are not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 11 CLKEN: Clock enable This bit allows the user to enable the SCLK pin. 0: SCLK pin disabled 1: SCLK pin enabled This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 10 CPOL: Clock polarity This bit allows the user to select the polarity of the clock output on the SCLK pin in synchronous mode. It works in conjunction with the CPHA bit to produce the desired clock/data relationship 0: Steady low value on SCLK pin outside transmission window. 1: Steady high value on SCLK pin outside transmission window. This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 9 CPHA: Clock phase This bit allows the user to select the phase of the clock output on the SCLK pin in synchronous mode. It works in conjunction with the CPOL bit to produce the desired clock/data relationship (see figures 258 to 259) 0: The first clock transition is the first data capture edge 1: The second clock transition is the first data capture edge Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

788/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Bit 8 LBCL: Last bit clock pulse This bit allows the user to select whether the clock pulse associated with the last data bit transmitted (MSB) has to be output on the SCLK pin in synchronous mode. 0: The clock pulse of the last data bit is not output to the SCLK pin 1: The clock pulse of the last data bit is output to the SCLK pin Note: 1: The last bit is the 8th or 9th data bit transmitted depending on the 8 or 9 bit format selected by the M bit in the USART_CR1 register. 2: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 6 LBDIE: LIN break detection interrupt enable Break interrupt mask (break detection using break delimiter). 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An interrupt is generated whenever LBD=1 in the USART_SR register Bit 5 LBDL: lin break detection length This bit is for selection between 11 bit or 10 bit break detection. 0: 10-bit break detection 1: 11-bit break detection Bit 4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 3:0 ADD[3:0]: Address of the USART node This bit-field gives the address of the USART node. This is used in multiprocessor communication during mute mode, for wake up with address mark detection.

Note:

These 3 bits (CPOL, CPHA, LBCL) should not be written while the transmitter is enabled.

26.6.6

Control register 3 (USART_CR3)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 ONEBIT Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 10 CTSIE 9 CTSE 8 RTSE 7 DMAT 6 DMAR 5 SCEN 4 NACK 3 HDSEL 2 IRLP 1 IREN 0 EIE

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 11 ONEBIT: One sample bit method enable This bit allows the user to select the sample method. When the one sample bit method is selected the noise detection flag (NF) is disabled. 0: Three sample bit method 1: One sample bit method Bit 10 CTSIE: CTS interrupt enable 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An interrupt is generated whenever CTS=1 in the USART_SR register Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5.

789/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

Bit 9 CTSE: CTS enable 0: CTS hardware flow control disabled 1: CTS mode enabled, data is only transmitted when the nCTS input is asserted (tied to 0). If the nCTS input is deasserted while a data is being transmitted, then the transmission is completed before stopping. If a data is written into the data register while nCTS is asserted, the transmission is postponed until nCTS is asserted. Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 8 RTSE: RTS enable 0: RTS hardware flow control disabled 1: RTS interrupt enabled, data is only requested when there is space in the receive buffer. The transmission of data is expected to cease after the current character has been transmitted. The nRTS output is asserted (tied to 0) when a data can be received. Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 7 DMAT: DMA enable transmitter This bit is set/reset by software 1: DMA mode is enabled for transmission. 0: DMA mode is disabled for transmission. Bit 6 DMAR: DMA enable receiver This bit is set/reset by software 1: DMA mode is enabled for reception 0: DMA mode is disabled for reception Bit 5 SCEN: Smartcard mode enable This bit is used for enabling Smartcard mode. 0: Smartcard Mode disabled 1: Smartcard Mode enabled Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 4 NACK: Smartcard NACK enable 0: NACK transmission in case of parity error is disabled 1: NACK transmission during parity error is enabled Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bit 3 HDSEL: Half-duplex selection Selection of Single-wire Half-duplex mode 0: Half duplex mode is not selected 1: Half duplex mode is selected

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

790/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

Bit 2 IRLP: IrDA low-power This bit is used for selecting between normal and low-power IrDA modes 0: Normal mode 1: Low-power mode Bit 1 IREN: IrDA mode enable This bit is set and cleared by software. 0: IrDA disabled 1: IrDA enabled Bit 0 EIE: Error interrupt enable Error Interrupt Enable Bit is required to enable interrupt generation in case of a framing error, overrun error or noise flag (FE=1 or ORE=1 or NF=1 in the USART_SR register) in case of Multi Buffer Communication (DMAR=1 in the USART_CR3 register). 0: Interrupt is inhibited 1: An interrupt is generated whenever DMAR=1 in the USART_CR3 register and FE=1 or ORE=1 or NF=1 in the USART_SR register.

791/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

26.6.7

Guard time and prescaler register (USART_GTPR)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

GT[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

PSC[7:0] rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 15:8 GT[7:0]: Guard time value This bit-field gives the Guard time value in terms of number of baud clocks. This is used in Smartcard mode. The Transmission Complete flag is set after this guard time value. Note: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5. Bits 7:0 PSC[7:0]: Prescaler value In IrDA Low-power mode: PSC[7:0] = IrDA Low-Power Baud Rate Used for programming the prescaler for dividing the system clock to achieve the low-power frequency: The source clock is divided by the value given in the register (8 significant bits): 00000000: Reserved - do not program this value 00000001: divides the source clock by 1 00000010: divides the source clock by 2 ... In normal IrDA mode: PSC must be set to 00000001. In smartcard mode: PSC[4:0]: Prescaler value Used for programming the prescaler for dividing the system clock to provide the smartcard clock. The value given in the register (5 significant bits) is multiplied by 2 to give the division factor of the source clock frequency: 00000: Reserved - do not program this value 00001: divides the source clock by 2 00010: divides the source clock by 4 00011: divides the source clock by 6 ... Note: 1: Bits [7:5] have no effect if Smartcard mode is used. 2: This bit is not available for UART4 & UART5.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

792/1422

Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART)

RM0090

26.6.8

USART register map

The table below gives the USART register map and reset values.

Table 123. USART register map and reset values

Offset
0x00

Register
USART_SR Reset value

RXNE

IDLE

ORE

CTS

LBD

TXE

TC

NF 0

Reserved

0 Reserved

0x04

USART_DR Reset value

DR[8:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x08

USART_BRR Reset value

Reserved 0 OVER8 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 UE

DIV_Mantissa[15:4] 0 M 0 WAKE 0 PCE 0 PS 0 PEIE 0 TXEIE 0 TCIE 0 RXNEIE 0 IDLEIE

DIV_Fraction [3:0] 0 TE 0 RE 0 RWU 0 0 IREN 0 0 0 SBK 0 0 EIE 0 0

0x0C

USART_CR1 Reset value

0 Reserved

0 CLKEN

0 CPOL

0 CPHA

0 LBCL

0 Reserved

0 LBDIE

0 LBDL

0 Reserved

LINEN

0x10

USART_CR2 Reset value

STOP [1:0] 0 0

ADD[3:0] 0 HDSEL 0 IRLP

0 Reserved

0 ONEBIT

0 CTSIE

0 CTSE

0 RTSE

0 DMAR

0 SCEN

0x14

USART_CR3 Reset value

0 Reserved 0 0 0 GT[7:0] 0 0

NACK

DMAT

0x18

USART_GTPR Reset value

PSC[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

793/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

PE 0

FE

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

27

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

27.1

SPI introduction
The SPI interface provides two main functions, supporting either the SPI protocol or the I2S audio protocol. By default, it is the SPI function that is selected. It is possible to switch the interface from SPI to I2S by software. The serial peripheral interface (SPI) allows half/ full-duplex, synchronous, serial communication with external devices. The interface can be configured as the master and in this case it provides the communication clock (SCK) to the external slave device. The interface is also capable of operating in multimaster configuration. It may be used for a variety of purposes, including simplex synchronous transfers on two lines with a possible bidirectional data line or reliable communication using CRC checking. The I2S is also a synchronous serial communication interface. It can address four different audio standards including the I2S Philips standard, the MSB- and LSB-justified standards, and the PCM standard. It can operate as a slave or a master device in full-duplex mode (using 4 pins) or in half-duplex mode (using 3 pins). Master clock can be provided by the interface to an external slave component when the I2S is configured as the communication master.

Warning:

Since some SPI1 and SPI3/I2S3 pins may be mapped onto some pins used by the JTAG interface (SPI1_NSS onto JTDI, SPI3_NSS/I2S3_WS onto JTDI and SPI3_SCK/I2S3_CK onto JTDO), you may either: map SPI/I2S onto other pins disable the JTAG and use the SWD interface prior to configuring the pins listed as SPI I/Os (when debugging the application) or disable both JTAG/SWD interfaces (for standalone applications). For more information on the configuration of the JTAG/SWD interface pins, please refer to Section 7.3.2: I/O pin multiplexer and mapping.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

794/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.2
27.2.1

SPI and I2S main features

SPI features

Full-duplex synchronous transfers on three lines Simplex synchronous transfers on two lines with or without a bidirectional data line 8- or 16-bit transfer frame format selection Master or slave operation Multimaster mode capability 8 master mode baud rate prescalers (fPCLK/2 max.) Slave mode frequency (fPCLK/2 max) Faster communication for both master and slave NSS management by hardware or software for both master and slave: dynamic change of master/slave operations Programmable clock polarity and phase Programmable data order with MSB-first or LSB-first shifting Dedicated transmission and reception flags with interrupt capability SPI bus busy status flag SPI TI mode Hardware CRC feature for reliable communication: CRC value can be transmitted as last byte in Tx mode Automatic CRC error checking for last received byte

Master mode fault, overrun and CRC error flags with interrupt capability 1-byte transmission and reception buffer with DMA capability: Tx and Rx requests

795/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

27.2.2

I2S features

Full duplex communication Half-duplex communication (only transmitter or receiver) Master or slave operations 8-bit programmable linear prescaler to reach accurate audio sample frequencies (from 8 kHz to 192 kHz) Data format may be 16-bit, 24-bit or 32-bit Packet frame is fixed to 16-bit (16-bit data frame) or 32-bit (16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit data frame) by audio channel Programmable clock polarity (steady state) Underrun flag in slave transmission mode, overrun flag in reception mode (master and slave), and Frame Error flag in reception and transmission mode (slave only) 16-bit register for transmission and reception with one data register for both channel sides Supported I2S protocols: I2S Phillps standard MSB-justified standard (left-justified) LSB-justified standard (right-justified) PCM standard (with short and long frame synchronization on 16-bit channel frame or 16-bit data frame extended to 32-bit channel frame)

Data direction is always MSB first DMA capability for transmission and reception (16-bit wide) Master clock may be output to drive an external audio component. Ratio is fixed at 256 FS (where FS is the audio sampling frequency) Both I2S (I2S2 and I2S3) have a dedicated PLL (PLLI2S) to generate an even more accurate clock. I2S (I2S2 and I2S3) clock can be derived from an external clock mapped on the I2S_CKIN pin.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

796/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.3
27.3.1

SPI functional description

General description
The block diagram of the SPI is shown in Figure 271.

Figure 271. SPI block diagram

Address and data bus

Read Rx buffer MOSI Shift register MISO Tx buffer Write Communication control SCK Baud rate generator BR[2:0]
LSB FIRST SPE BR2 BR1 BR0 MSTR CPOL CPHA

SPI_CR2
TXE IE RXNE ERR IE IE 0 0 TXDM RXDM SSOE AEN AEN

LSB first

SPI_SR
BSY OVR MOD CRC ERR F 0 0 TXE RXNE

0 1

SPI_CR1 Master control logic

BIDI BIDI MODE OE CRC CRC RX EN Next DFF ONLY SSM SSI

NSS
ai14744

Usually, the SPI is connected to external devices through 4 pins:

MISO: Master In / Slave Out data. This pin can be used to transmit data in slave mode and receive data in master mode. MOSI: Master Out / Slave In data. This pin can be used to transmit data in master mode and receive data in slave mode. SCK: Serial Clock output for SPI masters and input for SPI slaves. NSS: Slave select. This is an optional pin to select a slave device. This pin acts as a chip select to let the SPI master communicate with slaves individually and to avoid contention on the data lines. Slave NSS inputs can be driven by standard IO ports on the master device. The NSS pin may also be used as an output if enabled (SSOE bit) and driven low if the SPI is in master configuration. In this manner, all NSS pins from devices connected to the Master NSS pin see a low level and become slaves when they are configured in NSS hardware mode. When configured in master mode with NSS configured as an input (MSTR=1 and SSOE=0) and if NSS is pulled low, the SPI

797/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) enters the master mode fault state: the MSTR bit is automatically cleared and the device is configured in slave mode (refer to Section 27.3.10: Error flags on page 818). A basic example of interconnections between a single master and a single slave is illustrated in Figure 272. Figure 272. Single master/ single slave application
Master MSBit LSBit MISO MOSI MISO MOSI MSBit Slave LSBit

8-bit shift register

8-bit shift register

SPI clock generator

SCK NSS(1) VDD

SCK NSS(1) Not used if NSS is managed by software

ai14745

1. Here, the NSS pin is configured as an input.

The MOSI pins are connected together and the MISO pins are connected together. In this way data is transferred serially between master and slave (most significant bit first). The communication is always initiated by the master. When the master device transmits data to a slave device via the MOSI pin, the slave device responds via the MISO pin. This implies full-duplex communication with both data out and data in synchronized with the same clock signal (which is provided by the master device via the SCK pin).

Slave select (NSS) pin management

Hardware or software slave select management can be set using the SSM bit in the SPI_CR1 register.

Software NSS management (SSM = 1) The slave select information is driven internally by the value of the SSI bit in the SPI_CR1 register. The external NSS pin remains free for other application uses.

Hardware NSS management (SSM = 0) Two configurations are possible depending on the NSS output configuration (SSOE bit in register SPI_CR1). NSS output enabled (SSM = 0, SSOE = 1) This configuration is used only when the device operates in master mode. The NSS signal is driven low when the master starts the communication and is kept low until the SPI is disabled. NSS output disabled (SSM = 0, SSOE = 0) This configuration allows multimaster capability for devices operating in master mode. For devices set as slave, the NSS pin acts as a classical NSS input: the slave is selected when NSS is low and deselected when NSS high.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

798/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Clock phase and clock polarity

Four possible timing relationships may be chosen by software, using the CPOL and CPHA bits in the SPI_CR1 register. The CPOL (clock polarity) bit controls the steady state value of the clock when no data is being transferred. This bit affects both master and slave modes. If CPOL is reset, the SCK pin has a low-level idle state. If CPOL is set, the SCK pin has a high-level idle state. If the CPHA (clock phase) bit is set, the second edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if the CPOL bit is reset, rising edge if the CPOL bit is set) is the MSBit capture strobe. Data are latched on the occurrence of the second clock transition. If the CPHA bit is reset, the first edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if CPOL bit is set, rising edge if CPOL bit is reset) is the MSBit capture strobe. Data are latched on the occurrence of the first clock transition. The combination of the CPOL (clock polarity) and CPHA (clock phase) bits selects the data capture clock edge. Figure 273, shows an SPI transfer with the four combinations of the CPHA and CPOL bits. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave timing diagram where the SCK pin, the MISO pin, the MOSI pin are directly connected between the master and the slave device. Note: Prior to changing the CPOL/CPHA bits the SPI must be disabled by resetting the SPE bit. Master and slave must be programmed with the same timing mode. The idle state of SCK must correspond to the polarity selected in the SPI_CR1 register (by pulling up SCK if CPOL=1 or pulling down SCK if CPOL=0). The Data Frame Format (8- or 16-bit) is selected through the DFF bit in SPI_CR1 register, and determines the data length during transmission/reception.

799/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 273. Data clock timing diagram

CPHA =1
CPOL = 1

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

CPOL = 0

MISO

MSBit

LSBit

8 or 16 bits depending on the Data frame format bit (see DFF in SPI_CR1) MOSI MSBit LSBit

NSS (to slave)

Capture strobe

CPHA =0
CPOL = 1

CPOL = 0

MISO

MSBit

LSBit

8 or 16 bits depending on the Data frame format bit (see DFF in SPI_CR1) MOSI MSBit LSBit

NSS (to slave)

Capture strobe

ai17154b

1. These timings are shown with the LSBFIRST bit reset in the SPI_CR1 register.

Data frame format

Data can be shifted out either MSB-first or LSB-first depending on the value of the LSBFIRST bit in the SPI_CR1 Register. Each data frame is 8 or 16 bits long depending on the size of the data programmed using the DFF bit in the SPI_CR1 register. The selected data frame format is applicable for transmission and/or reception.

27.3.2

Configuring the SPI in slave mode

In the slave configuration, the serial clock is received on the SCK pin from the master device. The value set in the BR[2:0] bits in the SPI_CR1 register, does not affect the data transfer rate.

Note:

It is recommended to enable the SPI slave before the master sends the clock. If not, undesired data transmission might occur. The data register of the slave needs to be ready before the first edge of the communication clock or before the end of the ongoing communication. It is mandatory to have the polarity of the communication clock set to the steady state value before the slave and the master are enabled. Follow the procedure below to configure the SPI in slave mode:
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 800/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Procedure
1. 2. Set the DFF bit to define 8- or 16-bit data frame format Select the CPOL and CPHA bits to define one of the four relationships between the data transfer and the serial clock (see Figure 273). For correct data transfer, the CPOL and CPHA bits must be configured in the same way in the slave device and the master device. This step is not required when the TI mode is selected through the FRF bit in the SPI_CR2 register. The frame format (MSB-first or LSB-first depending on the value of the LSBFIRST bit in the SPI_CR1 register) must be the same as the master device. This step is not required when TI mode is selected. In Hardware mode (refer to Slave select (NSS) pin management on page 798), the NSS pin must be connected to a low level signal during the complete byte transmit sequence. In NSS software mode, set the SSM bit and clear the SSI bit in the SPI_CR1 register. This step is not required when TI mode is selected. Set the FRF bit in the SPI_CR2 register to select the TI mode protocol for serial communications. Clear the MSTR bit and set the SPE bit (both in the SPI_CR1 register) to assign the pins to alternate functions.

3.

4.

5. 6.

In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data input and the MISO pin is a data output.

Transmit sequence
The data byte is parallel-loaded into the Tx buffer during a write cycle. The transmit sequence begins when the slave device receives the clock signal and the most significant bit of the data on its MOSI pin. The remaining bits (the 7 bits in 8-bit data frame format, and the 15 bits in 16-bit data frame format) are loaded into the shift-register. The TXE flag in the SPI_SR register is set on the transfer of data from the Tx Buffer to the shift register and an interrupt is generated if the TXEIE bit in the SPI_CR2 register is set.

Receive sequence
For the receiver, when data transfer is complete:

The Data in shift register is transferred to Rx Buffer and the RXNE flag (SPI_SR register) is set An Interrupt is generated if the RXNEIE bit is set in the SPI_CR2 register.

After the last sampling clock edge the RXNE bit is set, a copy of the data byte received in the shift register is moved to the Rx buffer. When the SPI_DR register is read, the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value. Clearing of the RXNE bit is performed by reading the SPI_DR register.

SPI TI protocol in slave mode

In slave mode, the SPI interface is compatible with the TI protocol. The FRF bit of the SPI_CR2 register can be used to configure the slave SPI serial communications to be compliant with this protocol. The clock polarity and phase are forced to conform to the TI protocol requirements whatever the values set in the SPI_CR1 register. NSS management is also specific to the TI protocol which makes the configuration of NSS management through the SPI_CR1 and SPI_CR2 registers (such as SSM, SSI, SSOE) transparent for the user.

801/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) In Slave mode (Figure 274: TI mode - Slave mode, single transfer and Figure 275: TI mode Slave mode, continuous transfer), the SPI baud rate prescaler is used to control the moment when the MISO pin state changes to HiZ. Any baud rate can be used thus allowing to determine this moment with optimal flexibility. However, the baud rate is generally set to the external master clock baud rate. The time for the MISO signal to become HiZ (trelease) depends on internal resynchronizations and on the baud rate value set in through BR[2:0] of SPI_CR1 register. It is given by the formula:

t baud_rate t baud_rate --------------------- + 4 t pclk < t release < --------------------- + 6 t pclk 2 2

Note: This feature is not available for Motorola SPI communications (FRF bit set to 0). To detect TI frame errors in Slave transmitter only mode by using the Error interrupt (ERRIE = 1), the SPI must be configured in 2-line unidirectional mode by setting BIDIMODE and BIDIOE to 1 in the SPI_CR1 register. When BIDIMODE is set to 0, OVR is set to 1 because the data register is never read and error interrupt are always generated, while when BIDIMODE is set to 1, data are not received and OVR is never set. Figure 274. TI mode - Slave mode, single transfer
NSS input SCK input MOSI input MISO output DONTCARE MSBIN

trigger edge

sampling trigger edge edge

sampling edge

trigger edge

sampling edge

Release

LSBIN

DONTCARE

1 or 0

MSBOUT

LSBOUT

ai18434

Figure 275. TI mode - Slave mode, continuous transfer

NSS input
trigger sampling trigger sampling trigger sampling

SCK input MOSI input MISO output DONTCARE MSBIN LSBIN MSBIN LSBIN DONTCARE

1 or 0

MSBOUT

LSBOUT

MSBOUT

LSBOUT

FRAME 1

FRAME 2

ai18435

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

802/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.3.3

Configuring the SPI in master mode

In the master configuration, the serial clock is generated on the SCK pin.

Procedure
1. 2. Select the BR[2:0] bits to define the serial clock baud rate (see SPI_CR1 register). Select the CPOL and CPHA bits to define one of the four relationships between the data transfer and the serial clock (see Figure 273). This step is not required when the TI mode is selected. Set the DFF bit to define 8- or 16-bit data frame format Configure the LSBFIRST bit in the SPI_CR1 register to define the frame format. This step is not required when the TI mode is selected. If the NSS pin is required in input mode, in hardware mode, connect the NSS pin to a high-level signal during the complete byte transmit sequence. In NSS software mode, set the SSM and SSI bits in the SPI_CR1 register. If the NSS pin is required in output mode, the SSOE bit only should be set. This step is not required when the TI mode is selected. Set the FRF bit in SPI_CR2 to select the TI protocol for serial communications. The MSTR and SPE bits must be set (they remain set only if the NSS pin is connected to a high-level signal).

3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data output and the MISO pin is a data input.

Transmit sequence
The transmit sequence begins when a byte is written in the Tx Buffer. The data byte is parallel-loaded into the shift register (from the internal bus) during the first bit transmission and then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin MSB first or LSB first depending on the LSBFIRST bit in the SPI_CR1 register. The TXE flag is set on the transfer of data from the Tx Buffer to the shift register and an interrupt is generated if the TXEIE bit in the SPI_CR2 register is set.

Receive sequence
For the receiver, when data transfer is complete:

The data in the shift register is transferred to the RX Buffer and the RXNE flag is set An interrupt is generated if the RXNEIE bit is set in the SPI_CR2 register

At the last sampling clock edge the RXNE bit is set, a copy of the data byte received in the shift register is moved to the Rx buffer. When the SPI_DR register is read, the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value. Clearing the RXNE bit is performed by reading the SPI_DR register. A continuous transmit stream can be maintained if the next data to be transmitted is put in the Tx buffer once the transmission is started. Note that TXE flag should be 1 before any attempt to write the Tx buffer is made. Note: When a master is communicating with SPI slaves which need to be de-selected between transmissions, the NSS pin must be configured as GPIO or another GPIO must be used and toggled by software.

803/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

SPI TI protocol in master mode

In master mode, the SPI interface is compatible with the TI protocol. The FRF bit of the SPI_CR2 register can be used to configure the master SPI serial communications to be compliant with this protocol. The clock polarity and phase are forced to conform to the TI protocol requirements whatever the values set in the SPI_CR1 register. NSS management is also specific to the TI protocol which makes the configuration of NSS management through the SPI_CR1 and SPI_CR2 registers (SSM, SSI, SSOE) transparent for the user. Figure 276: TI mode - master mode, single transfer and Figure 277: TI mode - master mode, continuous transfer) show the SPI master communication waveforms when the TI mode is selected in master mode. Figure 276. TI mode - master mode, single transfer
NSS output SCK output MOSI input MISO output DONTCARE MSBIN LSBIN DONTCARE

trigger edge

sampling trigger edge edge

sampling edge

trigger edge

sampling edge

1 or 0

MSBOUT

LSBOUT

ai18436

Figure 277. TI mode - master mode, continuous transfer

NSS output
trigger sampling trigger sampling trigger sampling

SCK output MOSI output DONTCARE MSBOUT LSBOUT MSBOUT LSBOUT

MISO intput

1 or 0

MSBIN

LSBIN

MSBIN

LSBIN

DONTCARE

FRAME 1

FRAME 2

ai18437

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

804/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.3.4

Configuring the SPI for half-duplex communication

The SPI is capable of operating in half-duplex mode in 2 configurations.

1 clock and 1 bidirectional data wire 1 clock and 1 data wire (receive-only or transmit-only)

1 clock and 1 bidirectional data wire (BIDIMODE=1)

This mode is enabled by setting the BIDIMODE bit in the SPI_CR1 register. In this mode SCK is used for the clock and MOSI in master or MISO in slave mode is used for data communication. The transfer direction (Input/Output) is selected by the BIDIOE bit in the SPI_CR1 register. When this bit is 1, the data line is output otherwise it is input.

1 clock and 1 unidirectional data wire (BIDIMODE=0)

In this mode, the application can use the SPI either in transmit-only mode or in receive-only mode.

Transmit-only mode is similar to full-duplex mode (BIDIMODE=0, RXONLY=0): the data are transmitted on the transmit pin (MOSI in master mode or MISO in slave mode) and the receive pin (MISO in master mode or MOSI in slave mode) can be used as a general-purpose IO. In this case, the application just needs to ignore the Rx buffer (if the data register is read, it does not contain the received value). In receive-only mode, the application can disable the SPI output function by setting the RXONLY bit in the SPI_CR2 register. In this case, it frees the transmit IO pin (MOSI in master mode or MISO in slave mode), so it can be used for other purposes. In master mode, the communication starts immediately and stops when the SPE bit is cleared and the current reception stops. There is no need to read the BSY flag in this mode. It is always set when an SPI communication is ongoing. In slave mode, the SPI continues to receive as long as the NSS is pulled down (or the SSI bit is cleared in NSS software mode) and the SCK is running.

To start the communication in receive-only mode, configure and enable the SPI:

27.3.5

Data transmission and reception procedures

Rx and Tx buffers
In reception, data are received and then stored into an internal Rx buffer while In transmission, data are first stored into an internal Tx buffer before being transmitted. A read access of the SPI_DR register returns the Rx buffered value whereas a write access to the SPI_DR stores the written data into the Tx buffer.

805/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Start sequence in master mode

In full-duplex (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) The sequence begins when data are written into the SPI_DR register (Tx buffer). The data are then parallel loaded from the Tx buffer into the 8-bit shift register during the first bit transmission and then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin. At the same time, the received data on the MISO pin is shifted in serially to the 8bit shift register and then parallel loaded into the SPI_DR register (Rx buffer).

In unidirectional receive-only mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=1) The sequence begins as soon as SPE=1 Only the receiver is activated and the received data on the MISO pin are shifted in serially to the 8-bit shift register and then parallel loaded into the SPI_DR register (Rx buffer). In bidirectional mode, when transmitting (BIDIMODE=1 and BIDIOE=1) The sequence begins when data are written into the SPI_DR register (Tx buffer). The data are then parallel loaded from the Tx buffer into the 8-bit shift register during the first bit transmission and then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin. No data are received. In bidirectional mode, when receiving (BIDIMODE=1 and BIDIOE=0) The sequence begins as soon as SPE=1 and BIDIOE=0. The received data on the MOSI pin are shifted in serially to the 8-bit shift register and then parallel loaded into the SPI_DR register (Rx buffer). The transmitter is not activated and no data are shifted out serially to the MOSI pin.

Start sequence in slave mode

In full-duplex mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) The sequence begins when the slave device receives the clock signal and the first bit of the data on its MOSI pin. The 7 remaining bits are loaded into the shift register. At the same time, the data are parallel loaded from the Tx buffer into the 8-bit shift register during the first bit transmission, and then shifted out serially to the MISO pin. The software must have written the data to be sent before the SPI master device initiates the transfer. In unidirectional receive-only mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=1) The sequence begins when the slave device receives the clock signal and the first bit of the data on its MOSI pin. The 7 remaining bits are loaded into the shift register. The transmitter is not activated and no data are shifted out serially to the MISO pin. In bidirectional mode, when transmitting (BIDIMODE=1 and BIDIOE=1) The sequence begins when the slave device receives the clock signal and the first bit in the Tx buffer is transmitted on the MISO pin. The data are then parallel loaded from the Tx buffer into the 8-bit shift register during the first bit transmission and then shifted out serially to the MISO pin. The software must have written the data to be sent before the SPI master device initiates the transfer. No data are received.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

806/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

In bidirectional mode, when receiving (BIDIMODE=1 and BIDIOE=0) The sequence begins when the slave device receives the clock signal and the first bit of the data on its MISO pin. The received data on the MISO pin are shifted in serially to the 8-bit shift register and then parallel loaded into the SPI_DR register (Rx buffer). The transmitter is not activated and no data are shifted out serially to the MISO pin.

Handling data transmission and reception

The TXE flag (Tx buffer empty) is set when the data are transferred from the Tx buffer to the shift register. It indicates that the internal Tx buffer is ready to be loaded with the next data. An interrupt can be generated if the TXEIE bit in the SPI_CR2 register is set. Clearing the TXE bit is performed by writing to the SPI_DR register. Note: The software must ensure that the TXE flag is set to 1 before attempting to write to the Tx buffer. Otherwise, it overwrites the data previously written to the Tx buffer. The RXNE flag (Rx buffer not empty) is set on the last sampling clock edge, when the data are transferred from the shift register to the Rx buffer. It indicates that data are ready to be read from the SPI_DR register. An interrupt can be generated if the RXNEIE bit in the SPI_CR2 register is set. Clearing the RXNE bit is performed by reading the SPI_DR register. For some configurations, the BSY flag can be used during the last data transfer to wait until the completion of the transfer.

Full-duplex transmit and receive procedure in master or slave mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0)
The software has to follow this procedure to transmit and receive data (see Figure 278 and Figure 279): 1. 2. 3. Enable the SPI by setting the SPE bit to 1. Write the first data item to be transmitted into the SPI_DR register (this clears the TXE flag). Wait until TXE=1 and write the second data item to be transmitted. Then wait until RXNE=1 and read the SPI_DR to get the first received data item (this clears the RXNE bit). Repeat this operation for each data item to be transmitted/received until the n1 received data. Wait until RXNE=1 and read the last received data. Wait until TXE=1 and then wait until BSY=0 before disabling the SPI.

4. 5.

This procedure can also be implemented using dedicated interrupt subroutines launched at each rising edges of the RXNE or TXE flag.

807/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Figure 278. TXE/RXNE/BSY behavior in Master / full-duplex mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers
Example in Master mode with CPOL=1, CPHA=1 SCK
DATA1 = 0xF1 DATA2 = 0xF2 DATA3 = 0xF3

MISO/MOSI (out)

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 set by hardware cleared by software set by hardware cleared by software

TXE flag Tx buffer (write SPI_DR) BSY flag MISO/MOSI (in) RXNE flag Rx buffer (read SPI_DR)
0xF1

set by hardware

0xF2

0xF3

set by hardware DATA1 = 0xA1 DATA 2 = 0xA2 DATA 3 = 0xA3

reset by hardware

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 set by hardware cleared by software

0xA1

0xA2

0xA3

software software waits writes 0xF1 until TXE=1 and into SPI_DR writes 0xF2 into SPI_DR

software waits software waits until RXNE=1 until TXE=1 and and reads 0xA1 writes 0xF3 into from SPI_DR SPI_DR

software waits until RXNE=1 and reads 0xA2 from SPI_ DR

software waits until RXNE=1 and reads 0xA3 from SPI_DR

ai17343

Figure 279. TXE/RXNE/BSY behavior in Slave / full-duplex mode (BIDIMODE=0, RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers
Example in Slave mode with CPOL=1, CPHA=1 SCK
DATA 1 = 0xF1 DATA 2 = 0xF2 DATA 3 = 0xF3

MISO/MOSI (out)

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 set by hardware cleared by software set by hardware cleared by software

TXE flag Tx buffer (write to SPI_DR) BSY flag MISO/MOSI (in)

0xF1

set by hardware

0xF2

0xF3

set by cleared by software DATA 1 = 0xA1 DATA 2 = 0xA2 DATA 3 = 0xA3

reset by hardware

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7

RXNE flag Rx buffer (read from SPI_DR)

set by hardware

cleared by software

0xA1

0xA2

0xA3

software software waits writes 0xF1 until TXE=1 and into SPI_DR writes 0xF2 into SPI_DR

software waits software waits software waits until RXNE=1 until TXE=1 and until RXNE=1 and reads 0xA1 writes 0xF3 into and reads 0xA2 from SPI_DR SPI_DR from SPI_ DR

software waits until RXNE=1 and reads 0xA3 from SPI_DR

ai17344

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

808/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Transmit-only procedure (BIDIMODE=0 RXONLY=0)

In this mode, the procedure can be reduced as described below and the BSY bit can be used to wait until the completion of the transmission (see Figure 280 and Figure 281). 1. 2. 3. 4. Enable the SPI by setting the SPE bit to 1. Write the first data item to send into the SPI_DR register (this clears the TXE bit). Wait until TXE=1 and write the next data item to be transmitted. Repeat this step for each data item to be transmitted. After writing the last data item into the SPI_DR register, wait until TXE=1, then wait until BSY=0, this indicates that the transmission of the last data is complete.

This procedure can be also implemented using dedicated interrupt subroutines launched at each rising edge of the TXE flag. Note: During discontinuous communications, there is a 2 APB clock period delay between the write operation to SPI_DR and the BSY bit setting. As a consequence, in transmit-only mode, it is mandatory to wait first until TXE is set and then until BSY is cleared after writing the last data. After transmitting two data items in transmit-only mode, the OVR flag is set in the SPI_SR register since the received data are never read. Figure 280. TXE/BSY behavior in Master transmit-only mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers
Example in Master mode with CPOL=1, CPHA=1 SCK
DATA 1 = 0xF1 DATA 2 = 0xF2 DATA 3 = 0xF3

MISO/MOSI (out)

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 set by hardware cleared by software set by hardware cleared by software

TXE flag Tx buffer (write to SPI_DR) BSY flag

software writes 0xF1 into SPI_DR 0xF1

set by hardware

0xF2

0xF3

set by hardware software waits software waits until TXE=1 and until TXE=1 and writes 0xF2 into writes 0xF3 into SPI_DR SPI_DR

reset by hardware

software waits until TXE=1

software waits until BSY=0

ai17345

809/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Figure 281. TXE/BSY in Slave transmit-only mode (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of continuous transfers
Example in slave mode with CPOL=1, CPHA=1 SCK
DATA 1 = 0xF1 DATA 2 = 0xF2 DATA 3 = 0xF3

MISO/MOSI (out)

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 set by hardware cleared by software set by hardware cleared by software

TXE flag Tx buffer (write to SPI_DR) BSY flag

software writes 0xF1 into SPI_DR

set by hardware

0xF1

0xF2

0xF3

set by hardware software waits until TXE=1 and writes 0xF2 into SPI_DR software waits until TXE=1 and writes 0xF3 into SPI_DR

reset by hardware

software waits until TXE=1

software waits until BSY=0

ai17346

Bidirectional transmit procedure (BIDIMODE=1 and BIDIOE=1)

In this mode, the procedure is similar to the procedure in Transmit-only mode except that the BIDIMODE and BIDIOE bits both have to be set in the SPI_CR2 register before enabling the SPI.

Unidirectional receive-only procedure (BIDIMODE=0 and RXONLY=1)

In this mode, the procedure can be reduced as described below (see Figure 282): 1. 2. Set the RXONLY bit in the SPI_CR2 register. Enable the SPI by setting the SPE bit to 1: a) b) 3. In master mode, this immediately activates the generation of the SCK clock, and data are serially received until the SPI is disabled (SPE=0). In slave mode, data are received when the SPI master device drives NSS low and generates the SCK clock.

Wait until RXNE=1 and read the SPI_DR register to get the received data (this clears the RXNE bit). Repeat this operation for each data item to be received.

This procedure can also be implemented using dedicated interrupt subroutines launched at each rising edge of the RXNE flag. Note: If it is required to disable the SPI after the last transfer, follow the recommendation described in Section 27.3.8: Disabling the SPI on page 815.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

810/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Figure 282. RXNE behavior in receive-only mode (BIDIRMODE=0 and RXONLY=1) in the case of continuous transfers
Example with CPOL=1, CPHA=1, RXONLY=1 SCK
DATA 1 = 0xA1 DATA 2 = 0xA2 DATA 3 = 0xA3

MISO/MOSI (in)

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 set by hardware cleared by software

RXNE flag Rx buffer (read from SPI_DR)

0xA1

0xA2

0xA3

software waits until RXNE=1 and reads 0xA1 from SPI_DR

software waits until RXNE=1 and reads 0xA2 from SPI_DR

software waits until RXNE=1 and reads 0xA3 from SPI_DR

ai17347

Bidirectional receive procedure (BIDIMODE=1 and BIDIOE=0)

In this mode, the procedure is similar to the Receive-only mode procedure except that the BIDIMODE bit has to be set and the BIDIOE bit cleared in the SPI_CR2 register before enabling the SPI.

Continuous and discontinuous transfers

When transmitting data in master mode, if the software is fast enough to detect each rising edge of TXE (or TXE interrupt) and to immediately write to the SPI_DR register before the ongoing data transfer is complete, the communication is said to be continuous. In this case, there is no discontinuity in the generation of the SPI clock between each data item and the BSY bit is never cleared between each data transfer. On the contrary, if the software is not fast enough, this can lead to some discontinuities in the communication. In this case, the BSY bit is cleared between each data transmission (see Figure 283). In Master receive-only mode (RXONLY=1), the communication is always continuous and the BSY flag is always read at 1. In slave mode, the continuity of the communication is decided by the SPI master device. In any case, even if the communication is continuous, the BSY flag goes low between each transfer for a minimum duration of one SPI clock cycle (see Figure 281).

811/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Figure 283. TXE/BSY behavior when transmitting (BIDIRMODE=0 and RXONLY=0) in the case of discontinuous transfers
Example with CPOL=1, CPHA=1 SCK
DATA 1 = 0xF1 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 DATA 2 = 0xF2 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 DATA 3 = 0xF3 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7

MOSI (out)

TXE flag Tx buffer (write to SPI_DR) BSY flag

0xF1 0xF2 0xF3

software writes 0xF1 into SPI_DR

software waits until TXE=1 but is late to write 0xF2 into SPI_DR

software waits until TXE=1 but is late to write 0xF3 into SPI_DR

software waits until TXE=1

software waits until BSY=0

ai17348

27.3.6

CRC calculation
A CRC calculator has been implemented for communication reliability. Separate CRC calculators are implemented for transmitted data and received data. The CRC is calculated using a programmable polynomial serially on each bit. It is calculated on the sampling clock edge defined by the CPHA and CPOL bits in the SPI_CR1 register.

Note:

This SPI offers two kinds of CRC calculation standard which depend directly on the data frame format selected for the transmission and/or reception: 8-bit data (CR8) and 16-bit data (CRC16). CRC calculation is enabled by setting the CRCEN bit in the SPI_CR1 register. This action resets the CRC registers (SPI_RXCRCR and SPI_TXCRCR). In full duplex or transmitter only mode, when the transfers are managed by the software (CPU mode), it is necessary to write the bit CRCNEXT immediately after the last data to be transferred is written to the SPI_DR. At the end of this last data transfer, the SPI_TXCRCR value is transmitted. In receive only mode and when the transfers are managed by software (CPU mode), it is necessary to write the CRCNEXT bit after the second last data has been received. The CRC is received just after the last data reception and the CRC check is then performed. At the end of data and CRC transfers, the CRCERR flag in the SPI_SR register is set if corruption occurs during the transfer. If data are present in the TX buffer, the CRC value is transmitted only after the transmission of the data byte. During CRC transmission, the CRC calculator is switched off and the register value remains unchanged.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

812/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) SPI communication using the CRC is possible through the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Program the CPOL, CPHA, LSBFirst, BR, SSM, SSI and MSTR values. Program the polynomial in the SPI_CRCPR register.

RM0090

Enable the CRC calculation by setting the CRCEN bit in the SPI_CR1 register. This also clears the SPI_RXCRCR and SPI_TXCRCR registers. Enable the SPI by setting the SPE bit in the SPI_CR1 register. Start the communication and sustain the communication until all but one byte or halfword have been transmitted or received. In full duplex or transmitter-only mode, when the transfers are managed by software, when writing the last byte or half word to the Tx buffer, set the CRCNEXT bit in the SPI_CR1 register to indicate that the CRC will be transmitted after the transmission of the last byte. In receiver only mode, set the bit CRCNEXT just after the reception of the second to last data to prepare the SPI to enter in CRC Phase at the end of the reception of the last data. CRC calculation is frozen during the CRC transfer.

6.

After the transfer of the last byte or half word, the SPI enters the CRC transfer and check phase. In full duplex mode or receiver-only mode, the received CRC is compared to the SPI_RXCRCR value. If the value does not match, the CRCERR flag in SPI_SR is set and an interrupt can be generated when the ERRIE bit in the SPI_CR2 register is set.

Note:

When the SPI is in slave mode, be careful to enable CRC calculation only when the clock is stable, that is, when the clock is in the steady state. If not, a wrong CRC calculation may be done. In fact, the CRC is sensitive to the SCK slave input clock as soon as CRCEN is set, and this, whatever the value of the SPE bit. With high bitrate frequencies, be careful when transmitting the CRC. As the number of used CPU cycles has to be as low as possible in the CRC transfer phase, it is forbidden to call software functions in the CRC transmission sequence to avoid errors in the last data and CRC reception. In fact, CRCNEXT bit has to be written before the end of the transmission/reception of the last data. For high bit rate frequencies, it is advised to use the DMA mode to avoid the degradation of the SPI speed performance due to CPU accesses impacting the SPI bandwidth. When the devices are configured as slaves and the NSS hardware mode is used, the NSS pin needs to be kept low between the data phase and the CRC phase. When the SPI is configured in slave mode with the CRC feature enabled, CRC calculation takes place even if a high level is applied on the NSS pin. This may happen for example in case of a multislave environment where the communication master addresses slaves alternately. Between a slave deselection (high level on NSS) and a new slave selection (low level on NSS), the CRC value should be cleared on both master and slave sides in order to resynchronize the master and slave for their respective CRC calculation. To clear the CRC, follow the procedure below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable SPI (SPE = 0) Clear the CRCEN bit Set the CRCEN bit Enable the SPI (SPE = 1)

813/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

27.3.7

Status flags
Three status flags are provided for the application to completely monitor the state of the SPI bus.

Tx buffer empty flag (TXE)

When it is set, this flag indicates that the Tx buffer is empty and the next data to be transmitted can be loaded into the buffer. The TXE flag is cleared when writing to the SPI_DR register.

Rx buffer not empty (RXNE)

When set, this flag indicates that there are valid received data in the Rx buffer. It is cleared when SPI_DR is read.

BUSY flag
This BSY flag is set and cleared by hardware (writing to this flag has no effect). The BSY flag indicates the state of the communication layer of the SPI. When BSY is set, it indicates that the SPI is busy communicating. There is one exception in master mode / bidirectional receive mode (MSTR=1 and BDM=1 and BDOE=0) where the BSY flag is kept low during reception. The BSY flag is useful to detect the end of a transfer if the software wants to disable the SPI and enter Halt mode (or disable the peripheral clock). This avoids corrupting the last transfer. For this, the procedure described below must be strictly respected. The BSY flag is also useful to avoid write collisions in a multimaster system. The BSY flag is set when a transfer starts, with the exception of master mode / bidirectional receive mode (MSTR=1 and BDM=1 and BDOE=0). It is cleared:

when a transfer is finished (except in master mode if the communication is continuous) when the SPI is disabled when a master mode fault occurs (MODF=1)

When communication is not continuous, the BSY flag is low between each communication. When communication is continuous:

in master mode, the BSY flag is kept high during all the transfers in slave mode, the BSY flag goes low for one SPI clock cycle between each transfer

Note:

Do not use the BSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception. It is better to use the TXE and RXNE flags instead.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

814/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.3.8

Disabling the SPI

When a transfer is terminated, the application can stop the communication by disabling the SPI peripheral. This is done by clearing the SPE bit. For some configurations, disabling the SPI and entering the Halt mode while a transfer is ongoing can cause the current transfer to be corrupted and/or the BSY flag might become unreliable. To avoid any of those effects, it is recommended to respect the following procedure when disabling the SPI:

In master or slave full-duplex mode (BIDIMODE=0, RXONLY=0)

1. 2. 3. 4. Wait until RXNE=1 to receive the last data Wait until TXE=1 Then wait until BSY=0 Disable the SPI (SPE=0) and, eventually, enter the Halt mode (or disable the peripheral clock)

In master or slave unidirectional transmit-only mode (BIDIMODE=0, RXONLY=0) or bidirectional transmit mode (BIDIMODE=1, BIDIOE=1)
After the last data is written into the SPI_DR register: 1. 2. 3. Wait until TXE=1 Then wait until BSY=0 Disable the SPI (SPE=0) and, eventually, enter the Halt mode (or disable the peripheral clock)

In master unidirectional receive-only mode (MSTR=1, BIDIMODE=0, RXONLY=1) or bidirectional receive mode (MSTR=1, BIDIMODE=1, BIDIOE=0)
This case must be managed in a particular way to ensure that the SPI does not initiate a new transfer. The sequence below is valid only for SPI Motorola configuration (FRF bit set to 0): 1. 2. 3. Wait for the second to last occurrence of RXNE=1 (n1) Then wait for one SPI clock cycle (using a software loop) before disabling the SPI (SPE=0) Then wait for the last RXNE=1 before entering the Halt mode (or disabling the peripheral clock)

When the SPI is configured in TI mode (Bit FRF set to 1), the following procedure has to be respected to avoid generating an undesired pulse on NSS when the SPI is disabled: 1. 2. Wait for the second to last occurrence of RXNE = 1 (n-1). Disable the SPI (SPE = 0) in the following window frame using a software loop: Note: After at least one SPI clock cycle, Before the beginning of the LSB data transfer.

In master bidirectional receive mode (MSTR=1 and BDM=1 and BDOE=0), the BSY flag is kept low during transfers.

815/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

In slave receive-only mode (MSTR=0, BIDIMODE=0, RXONLY=1) or bidirectional receive mode (MSTR=0, BIDIMODE=1, BIDOE=0)
1. 2. You can disable the SPI (write SPE=1) at any time: the current transfer will complete before the SPI is effectively disabled Then, if you want to enter the Halt mode, you must first wait until BSY = 0 before entering the Halt mode (or disabling the peripheral clock).

27.3.9

SPI communication using DMA (direct memory addressing)

To operate at its maximum speed, the SPI needs to be fed with the data for transmission and the data received on the Rx buffer should be read to avoid overrun. To facilitate the transfers, the SPI features a DMA capability implementing a simple request/acknowledge protocol. A DMA access is requested when the enable bit in the SPI_CR2 register is enabled. Separate requests must be issued to the Tx and Rx buffers (see Figure 284 and Figure 285):

In transmission, a DMA request is issued each time TXE is set to 1. The DMA then writes to the SPI_DR register (this clears the TXE flag). In reception, a DMA request is issued each time RXNE is set to 1. The DMA then reads the SPI_DR register (this clears the RXNE flag).

When the SPI is used only to transmit data, it is possible to enable only the SPI Tx DMA channel. In this case, the OVR flag is set because the data received are not read. When the SPI is used only to receive data, it is possible to enable only the SPI Rx DMA channel. In transmission mode, when the DMA has written all the data to be transmitted (flag TCIF is set in the DMA_ISR register), the BSY flag can be monitored to ensure that the SPI communication is complete. This is required to avoid corrupting the last transmission before disabling the SPI or entering the Stop mode. The software must first wait until TXE=1 and then until BSY=0. Note: During discontinuous communications, there is a 2 APB clock period delay between the write operation to SPI_DR and the BSY bit setting. As a consequence, it is mandatory to wait first until TXE=1 and then until BSY=0 after writing the last data.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

816/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) Figure 284. Transmission using DMA

Example with CPOL=1, CPHA=1 SCK
DATA 2 = 0xF2 DATA 1 = 0xF1 DATA 3 = 0xF3 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 set by hardware set by hardware cleared by DMA write clear by DMA write

RM0090

MISO/MOSI (out)

TXE flag

set by hardware

BSY flag

set by hardware

reset by hardware

DMA request Tx buffer (write to SPI_DR) DMA writes to SPI_DR DMA TCIF flag (DMA transfer complete)
software configures the DMA SPI Tx channel to send 3 data items and enables the SPI DMA writes DATA1 into SPI_DR DMA writes DATA2 into SPI_DR set by hardware clear by software 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3

ignored by the DMA because DMA transfer is complete

DMA writes DMA transfer is DATA3 into complete (TCIF=1 in SPI_DR DMA_ISR)

software waits until TXE=1

software waits until BSY=0

ai17349

Figure 285. Reception using DMA

Example with CPOL=1, CPHA=1 SCK
DATA 1 = 0xA1 DATA 2 = 0xA2 DATA 3 = 0xA3

MISO/MOSI (in)

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7

RXNE flag

set by hardware

clear by DMA read

DMA request Rx buffer (read from SPI_DR)

0xA1

0xA2

0xA3

DMA read from SPI_DR

set by hardware clear by software

flag DMA TCIF (DMA transfer complete)

software configures the DMA SPI Rx channel to receive 3 data items and enables the SPI DMA reads DATA1 from SPI_DR DMA reads DATA2 from SPI_DR

DMA reads DATA3 from SPI_DR

The DMA transfer is complete (TCIF=1 in DMA_ISR)

ai17350

817/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

DMA capability with CRC

When SPI communication is enabled with CRC communication and DMA mode, the transmission and reception of the CRC at the end of communication are automatic that is without using the bit CRCNEXT. After the CRC reception, the CRC must be read in the SPI_DR register to clear the RXNE flag. At the end of data and CRC transfers, the CRCERR flag in SPI_SR is set if corruption occurs during the transfer.

27.3.10

Error flags
Master mode fault (MODF)
Master mode fault occurs when the master device has its NSS pin pulled low (in NSS hardware mode) or SSI bit low (in NSS software mode), this automatically sets the MODF bit. Master mode fault affects the SPI peripheral in the following ways:

The MODF bit is set and an SPI interrupt is generated if the ERRIE bit is set. The SPE bit is cleared. This blocks all output from the device and disables the SPI interface. The MSTR bit is cleared, thus forcing the device into slave mode. Make a read or write access to the SPI_SR register while the MODF bit is set. Then write to the SPI_CR1 register.

Use the following software sequence to clear the MODF bit: 1. 2.

To avoid any multiple slave conflicts in a system comprising several MCUs, the NSS pin must be pulled high during the MODF bit clearing sequence. The SPE and MSTR bits can be restored to their original state after this clearing sequence. As a security, hardware does not allow the setting of the SPE and MSTR bits while the MODF bit is set. In a slave device the MODF bit cannot be set. However, in a multimaster configuration, the device can be in slave mode with this MODF bit set. In this case, the MODF bit indicates that there might have been a multimaster conflict for system control. An interrupt routine can be used to recover cleanly from this state by performing a reset or returning to a default state.

Overrun condition
An overrun condition occurs when the master device has sent data bytes and the slave device has not cleared the RXNE bit resulting from the previous data byte transmitted. When an overrun condition occurs:

the OVR bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the ERRIE bit is set.

In this case, the receiver buffer contents will not be updated with the newly received data from the master device. A read from the SPI_DR register returns this byte. All other subsequently transmitted bytes are lost. Clearing the OVR bit is done by a read from the SPI_DR register followed by a read access to the SPI_SR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

818/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

CRC error
This flag is used to verify the validity of the value received when the CRCEN bit in the SPI_CR1 register is set. The CRCERR flag in the SPI_SR register is set if the value received in the shift register does not match the receiver SPI_RXCRCR value.

TI mode frame format error

A TI mode frame format error is detected when an NSS pulse occurs during an ongoing communication when the SPI is acting in slave mode and configured to conform to the TI mode protocol. When this error occurs, the FRE flag is set in the SPI_SR register. The SPI is not disabled when an error occurs, the NSS pulse is ignored, and the SPI waits for the next NSS pulse before starting a new transfer. The data may be corrupted since the error detection may result in the lost of two data bytes. The FRE flag is cleared when SPI_SR register is read. If the bit ERRIE is set, an interrupt is generated on the NSS error detection. In this case, the SPI should be disabled because data consistency is no more guaranteed and communications should be reinitiated by the master when the slave SPI is re-enabled. Figure 286. TI mode frame format error detection

NSS output SCK output MOSI input

trigger

sampling trigger sampling trigger

sampling trigger

sampling trigger sampling trigger

sampling trigger

sampling

DONTCARE

MSBIN

LSBIN

DONTCARE

MSBIN

LSBIN

MISO output

1 or 0

MSBOUT

LSBOUT

MSBOUT

LSBOUT

TIFRFE

ai18438

27.3.11

SPI interrupts
Table 124. SPI interrupt requests
Interrupt event Transmit buffer empty flag Receive buffer not empty flag Master Mode fault event Overrun error CRC error flag TI frame format error Event flag TXE RXNE MODF OVR CRCERR FRE ERRIE ERRIE Enable Control bit TXEIE RXNEIE

819/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

27.4
27.4.1

I2S functional description

I2S general description
The block diagram of the I2S is shown in Figure 287.

Figure 287. I2S block diagram

Address and data bus

Tx buffer
CH BSY OVR MODF CRC UDR TxE RxNE FRE SIDE ERR

16-bit MOSI/ SD MISO/ I2S2ext_SD/ I2S3ext_SD(1) Shift register 16-bit Rx buffer LSB first Communication control

NSS/WS

I2SCFG [1:0]

I2SSTD [1:0]

CK DATLEN CH LEN POL [1:0] I2S MOD I2SE

Master control logic

Bidi Bidi CRC CRC DFF mode OE EN Next Rx SSM SSI only

SPI baud rate generator CK

LSB SPE BR2 BR1 BR0 MSTR CPOL CPHA First

I2S clock generator I2S_ CK I2SMOD MCK

MCKOE ODD

I2SDIV[7:0]

I2SxCLK
MS19909V1

(by setting the I2SMOD bit in the SPI_I2SCFGR register). This interface uses almost the same pins, flags and interrupts as the SPI.
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 820/1422

1. I2S2ext_SD and I2S3ext_SD are the extended SD pins that control the I2S full duplex mode. The SPI could function as an audio I2S interface when the I2S capability is enabled

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

The I2S shares three common pins with the SPI: SD: Serial Data (mapped on the MOSI pin) to transmit or receive the two timemultiplexed data channels (in half-duplex mode only). WS: Word Select (mapped on the NSS pin) is the data control signal output in master mode and input in slave mode. CK: Serial Clock (mapped on the SCK pin) is the serial clock output in master mode and serial clock input in slave mode. I2S2ext_SD and I2S3ext_SD: additional pins (mapped on the MISO pin) to control the I2S full duplex mode. An additional pin could be used when a master clock output is needed for some external audio devices: MCK: Master Clock (mapped separately) is used, when the I2S is configured in master mode (and when the MCKOE bit in the SPI_I2SPR register is set), to output this additional clock generated at a preconfigured frequency rate equal to 256 FS, where FS is the audio sampling frequency. The I2S uses its own clock generator to produce the communication clock when it is set in master mode. This clock generator is also the source of the master clock output. Two additional registers are available in I2S mode. One is linked to the clock generator configuration SPI_I2SPR and the other one is a generic I2S configuration register SPI_I2SCFGR (audio standard, slave/master mode, data format, packet frame, clock polarity, etc.). The SPI_CR1 register and all CRC registers are not used in the I2S mode. Likewise, the SSOE bit in the SPI_CR2 register and the MODF and CRCERR bits in the SPI_SR are not used. The I2S uses the same SPI register for data transfer (SPI_DR) in 16-bit wide mode.

27.4.2

I2S full duplex

To support I2S full duplex mode, two extra I2S instances called extended I2Ss (I2S2_ext, I2S3_ext) are available in addition to I2S2 and I2S3 (see Figure 288). The first I2S fullduplex interface is consequently based on I2S2 and I2S2_ext, and the second one on I2S3 and I2S3_ext.

Note:

I2S2_ext an I2S3_ext are used only in full-duplex mode. Figure 288. I2S full duplex block diagram

I2Sx_SCK

SPI/I2Sx

SPIx_MOSI/I2Sx_SD(in/out)

I2S_ WS

I2Sx_ext

I2Sx_extSD(in/out)
MS19910V1

1. Where x can be 2 or 3.

821/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 I2Sx can operate in master mode. As a result:

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Only I2Sx can output SCK and WS in half duplex mode Only I2Sx can deliver SCK and WS to I2S2_ext and I2S3_ext in full duplex mode.

The extended I2Ss (I2Sx_ext) can be used only in full duplex mode. The I2Sx_ext operate always in slave mode. Both I2Sx and I2Sx_ext can be configured as transmitters or receivers.

27.4.3

Supported audio protocols

The four-line bus has to handle only audio data generally time-multiplexed on two channels: the right channel and the left channel. However there is only one 16-bit register for the transmission and the reception. So, it is up to the software to write into the data register the adequate value corresponding to the considered channel side, or to read the data from the data register and to identify the corresponding channel by checking the CHSIDE bit in the SPI_SR register. Channel Left is always sent first followed by the channel right (CHSIDE has no meaning for the PCM protocol). Four data and packet frames are available. Data may be sent with a format of: 16-bit data packed in 16-bit frame 16-bit data packed in 32-bit frame 24-bit data packed in 32-bit frame 32-bit data packed in 32-bit frame When using 16-bit data extended on 32-bit packet, the first 16 bits (MSB) are the significant bits, the 16-bit LSB is forced to 0 without any need for software action or DMA request (only one read/write operation). The 24-bit and 32-bit data frames need two CPU read or write operations to/from the SPI_DR or two DMA operations if the DMA is preferred for the application. For 24-bit data frame specifically, the 8 nonsignificant bits are extended to 32 bits with 0-bits (by hardware). For all data formats and communication standards, the most significant bit is always sent first (MSB first). The I2S interface supports four audio standards, configurable using the I2SSTD[1:0] and PCMSYNC bits in the SPI_I2SCFGR register.

I2S Philips standard

For this standard, the WS signal is used to indicate which channel is being transmitted. It is activated one CK clock cycle before the first bit (MSB) is available.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

822/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Figure 289. I2S Philips protocol waveforms (16/32-bit full accuracy, CPOL = 0)
CK

WS Transmission Reception

SD MSB

May be 16-bit, 32-bit LSB MSB Channel left Channel right

Data are latched on the falling edge of CK (for the transmitter) and are read on the rising edge (for the receiver). The WS signal is also latched on the falling edge of CK. Figure 290. I2S Philips standard waveforms (24-bit frame with CPOL = 0)
CK

WS Transmission SD
MSB

Reception 8-bit remaining 0 forced

LSB

24-bit data

Channel left 32-bit Channel right

This mode needs two write or read operations to/from the SPI_DR.

In transmission mode: if 0x8EAA33 has to be sent (24-bit):

Figure 291. Transmitting 0x8EAA33

First write to Data register 0x8EAA

Second write to Data register 0x33XX Only the 8 MSBs are sent to complete the 24 bits 8 LSB bits have no meaning and could be anything

823/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) In reception mode: if data 0x8EAA33 is received: Figure 292. Receiving 0x8EAA33
First read from Data register 0x8EAA Second read from Data register 0x3300 Only the 8MSB are right The 8 LSB will always be 00

Figure 293. I2S Philips standard (16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame with CPOL = 0)
CK

WS Transmission Reception 16-bit data SD 0 forced

MSB LSB

16-bit remaining

Channel left 32-bit Channel right

When 16-bit data frame extended to 32-bit channel frame is selected during the I2S configuration phase, only one access to SPI_DR is required. The 16 remaining bits are forced by hardware to 0x0000 to extend the data to 32-bit format. If the data to transmit or the received data are 0x76A3 (0x76A30000 extended to 32-bit), the operation shown in Figure 294 is required. Figure 294. Example
Only one access to SPI_DR 0X76A3

For transmission, each time an MSB is written to SPI_DR, the TXE flag is set and its interrupt, if allowed, is generated to load SPI_DR with the new value to send. This takes place even if 0x0000 have not yet been sent because it is done by hardware. For reception, the RXNE flag is set and its interrupt, if allowed, is generated when the first 16 MSB half-word is received. In this way, more time is provided between two write or read operations, which prevents underrun or overrun conditions (depending on the direction of the data transfer).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

824/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

MSB justified standard

For this standard, the WS signal is generated at the same time as the first data bit, which is the MSBit. Figure 295. MSB Justified 16-bit or 32-bit full-accuracy length with CPOL = 0
CK

WS Transmission SD MSB Channel left Channel right Reception

May be 16-bit, 32-bit LSB MSB

Data are latched on the falling edge of CK (for transmitter) and are read on the rising edge (for the receiver). Figure 296. MSB Justified 24-bit frame length with CPOL = 0
CK

WS Transmission SD
MSB

Reception 8-bit remaining 0 forced

LSB

24-bit data

Channel left 32-bit Channel right

Figure 297. MSB Justified 16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame with CPOL = 0
CK

WS Transmission SD
MSB

Reception 16-bit remaining 0 forced

LSB

16-bit data

Channel left 32-bit Channel right

825/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

LSB justified standard

This standard is similar to the MSB justified standard (no difference for the 16-bit and 32-bit full-accuracy frame formats). Figure 298. LSB justified 16-bit or 32-bit full-accuracy with CPOL = 0
CK

WS Transmission SD MSB Channel left Channel right Reception

May be 16-bit, 32-bit LSB MSB

Figure 299. LSB Justified 24-bit frame length with CPOL = 0

CK

WS Transmission SD 8-bit data 0 forced

MSB LSB

Reception

24-bit remaining

Channel left 32-bit Channel right

In transmission mode: If data 0x3478AE have to be transmitted, two write operations to the SPI_DR register are required from software or by DMA. The operations are shown below.

Figure 300. Operations required to transmit 0x3478AE

First write to Data register conditioned by TXE = 1 0xXX34 Only the 8 LSB bits of the half-word are significant. Whatever the 8 MSBs a field of 0x00 is forced instead Second write to Data register conditioned by TXE = 1 0x78AE

In reception mode: If data 0x3478AE are received, two successive read operations from SPI_DR are required on each RXNE event.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

826/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) Figure 301. Operations required to receive 0x3478AE
First read from Data register conditioned by RXNE = 1 0x0034 Only the 8 LSB bits of the half-word are significant. Whatever the 8 MSBs, a field of 0x00 is forced instead Second read from Data register conditioned by RXNE = 1 0x78AE

RM0090

Figure 302. LSB justified 16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame with CPOL = 0
CK

WS Transmission SD 16-bit data 0 forced

MSB LSB

Reception

16-bit remaining

Channel left 32-bit Channel right

When 16-bit data frame extended to 32-bit channel frame is selected during the I2S configuration phase, Only one access to SPI_DR is required. The 16 remaining bits are forced by hardware to 0x0000 to extend the data to 32-bit format. In this case it corresponds to the half-word MSB. If the data to transmit or the received data are 0x76A3 (0x0000 76A3 extended to 32-bit), the operation shown in Figure 303 is required. Figure 303. Example of LSB justified 16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame
Only one access to SPI_DR 0X76A3

In transmission mode, when TXE is asserted, the application has to write the data to be transmitted (in this case 0x76A3). The 0x000 field is transmitted first (extension on 32-bit). TXE is asserted again as soon as the effective data (0x76A3) is sent on SD. In reception mode, RXNE is asserted as soon as the significant half-word is received (and not the 0x0000 field). In this way, more time is provided between two write or read operations to prevent underrun or overrun conditions.

PCM standard
For the PCM standard, there is no need to use channel-side information. The two PCM modes (short and long frame) are available and configurable using the PCMSYNC bit in SPI_I2SCFGR.

827/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 304. PCM standard waveforms (16-bit)

CK

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

WS short frame WS long frame SD MSB fixed to 13-bit

16-bit LSB MSB

For long frame synchronization, the WS signal assertion time is fixed 13 bits in master mode. For short frame synchronization, the WS synchronization signal is only one cycle long. Figure 305. PCM standard waveforms (16-bit extended to 32-bit packet frame)
CK

WS short frame fixed to 13-bit WS long frame SD MSB 16-bit LSB

Note:

For both modes (master and slave) and for both synchronizations (short and long), the number of bits between two consecutive pieces of data (and so two synchronization signals) needs to be specified (DATLEN and CHLEN bits in the SPI_I2SCFGR register) even in slave mode.

27.4.4

Clock generator
The I2S bitrate determines the dataflow on the I2S data line and the I2S clock signal frequency. I2S bitrate = number of bits per channel number of channels sampling audio frequency For a 16-bit audio, left and right channel, the I2S bitrate is calculated as follows: I2S bitrate = 16 2 FS

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

828/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) It will be: I2S bitrate = 32 x 2 x FS if the packet length is 32-bit wide. Figure 306. Audio sampling frequency definition

RM0090

16-bit or 32-bit Left channel

16-bit or 32-bit Right channel

32-bits or 64-bits FS sampling point FS: Audio sampling frequency sampling point

When the master mode is configured, a specific action needs to be taken to properly program the linear divider in order to communicate with the desired audio frequency. Figure 307. I2S clock generator architecture

MCK

0 I2SxCLK 8-bit Linear Divider + reshaping stage Divider by 4 Div2 0 1

MCKOE

CK

MCKOE ODD

I2SDIV[7:0]

I2SMOD

CHLEN

1. Where x could be 2 or 3.

Figure 306 presents the communication clock architecture. To achieve high-quality audio performance, the I2SxCLK clock source can be either the PLLI2S output (through R division factor) or an external clock (mapped to I2S_CKIN pin). The audio sampling frequency can be 192 kHz, 96 kHz, or 48 kHz. In order to reach the desired frequency, the linear divider needs to be programmed according to the formulas below: When the master clock is generated (MCKOE in the SPI_I2SPR register is set): FS = I2SxCLK / [(16*2)*((2*I2SDIV)+ODD)*8)] when the channel frame is 16-bit wide FS = I2SxCLK / [(32*2)*((2*I2SDIV)+ODD)*4)] when the channel frame is 32-bit wide When the master clock is disabled (MCKOE bit cleared): FS = I2SxCLK / [(16*2)*((2*I2SDIV)+ODD))] when the channel frame is 16-bit wide FS = I2SxCLK / [(32*2)*((2*I2SDIV)+ODD))] when the channel frame is 32-bit wide Table 125 provides example precision values for different clock configurations. Note: Other configurations are possible that allow optimum clock precision.

829/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Table 125. Audio frequency precision (for PLLM VCO = 1 MHz or 2 MHz)(1)
Master clock Target fS (Hz) 8000 32-bit 16-bit 16000 32-bit 16-bit 32000 32-bit 16-bit 48000 32-bit Disabled 16-bit 96000 32-bit 16-bit 22050 32-bit 16-bit 44100 32-bit 16-bit 192000 32-bit 8000 16000 32000 Enabled 48000 96000 22050 44100 don't care don't care don't care don't care don't care don't care don't care 258 256 213 213 258 344 429 271 3 5 2 2 3 2 4 2 3 12 13 6 3 3 9 6 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 191964.2813 8000 16000.60059 32001.20117 47991.07031 95982.14063 22049.75391 44108.07422 0.0186% 0.0000% 0.0038% 0.0038% 0.0186% 0.0186% 0.0011% 0.0183% 429 424 4 3 19 11 0 1 44099.50781 192028.9844 0.0011% 0.0151% 302 302 2 2 53 53 1 1 22050.23438 44100.46875 0.0011% 0.0011% 424 290 3 3 11 68 1 1 96014.49219 22049.87695 0.0151% 0.0006% 384 5 12 1 96000 0.0000% 384 5 12 1 48000 0.0000% 256 192 5 5 12 12 1 1 32000 48000 0.0000% 0.0000% 256 256 2 2 62 62 1 1 16000 32000 0.0000% 0.0000% 192 192 3 3 62 62 1 1 8000 16000 0.0000% 0.0000% Data format 16-bit PLLI2SN 192 PLLI2SR 2 I2SDIV 187 I2SODD 1 Real fS (Hz) 8000 Error 0.0000%

1. This table gives only example values for different clock configurations. Other configurations allowing optimum clock precision are possible.

27.4.5

I2S master mode

The I2S can be configured as follows:

In master mode for transmission or reception (half-duplex mode using I2Sx) In master mode transmission and reception (full duplex mode using I2Sx and I2Sx_ext).

This means that the serial clock is generated on the CK pin as well as the Word Select signal WS. Master clock (MCK) may be output or not, thanks to the MCKOE bit in the SPI_I2SPR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

830/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Procedure
1. Select the I2SDIV[7:0] bits in the SPI_I2SPR register to define the serial clock baud rate to reach the proper audio sample frequency. The ODD bit in the SPI_I2SPR register also has to be defined. Select the CKPOL bit to define the steady level for the communication clock. Set the MCKOE bit in the SPI_I2SPR register if the master clock MCK needs to be provided to the external DAC/ADC audio component (the I2SDIV and ODD values should be computed depending on the state of the MCK output, for more details refer to Section 27.4.4: Clock generator). Set the I2SMOD bit in SPI_I2SCFGR to activate the I2S functionalities and choose the I2S standard through the I2SSTD[1:0] and PCMSYNC bits, the data length through the DATLEN[1:0] bits and the number of bits per channel by configuring the CHLEN bit. Select also the I2S master mode and direction (Transmitter or Receiver) through the I2SCFG[1:0] bits in the SPI_I2SCFGR register. If needed, select all the potential interruption sources and the DMA capabilities by writing the SPI_CR2 register. The I2SE bit in SPI_I2SCFGR register must be set.

2.

3.

4. 5.

WS and CK are configured in output mode. MCK is also an output, if the MCKOE bit in SPI_I2SPR is set.

Transmission sequence
The transmission sequence begins when a half-word is written into the Tx buffer. Assumedly, the first data written into the Tx buffer correspond to the channel Left data. When data are transferred from the Tx buffer to the shift register, TXE is set and data corresponding to the channel Right have to be written into the Tx buffer. The CHSIDE flag indicates which channel is to be transmitted. It has a meaning when the TXE flag is set because the CHSIDE flag is updated when TXE goes high. A full frame has to be considered as a Left channel data transmission followed by a Right channel data transmission. It is not possible to have a partial frame where only the left channel is sent. The data half-word is parallel loaded into the 16-bit shift register during the first bit transmission, and then shifted out, serially, to the MOSI/SD pin, MSB first. The TXE flag is set after each transfer from the Tx buffer to the shift register and an interrupt is generated if the TXEIE bit in the SPI_CR2 register is set. For more details about the write operations depending on the I2S standard mode selected, refer to Section 27.4.3: Supported audio protocols). To ensure a continuous audio data transmission, it is mandatory to write the SPI_DR with the next data to transmit before the end of the current transmission. To switch off the I2S, by clearing I2SE, it is mandatory to wait for TXE = 1 and BSY = 0.

Reception sequence
The operating mode is the same as for the transmission mode except for the point 3 (refer to the procedure described in Section 27.4.5: I2S master mode), where the configuration should set the master reception mode through the I2SCFG[1:0] bits. Whatever the data or channel length, the audio data are received by 16-bit packets. This means that each time the Rx buffer is full, the RXNE flag is set and an interrupt is generated
831/1422 Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) if the RXNEIE bit is set in SPI_CR2 register. Depending on the data and channel length configuration, the audio value received for a right or left channel may result from one or two receptions into the Rx buffer. Clearing the RXNE bit is performed by reading the SPI_DR register. CHSIDE is updated after each reception. It is sensitive to the WS signal generated by the I2S cell. For more details about the read operations depending on the I2S standard mode selected, refer to Section 27.4.3: Supported audio protocols. If data are received while the previously received data have not been read yet, an overrun is generated and the OVR flag is set. If the ERRIE bit is set in the SPI_CR2 register, an interrupt is generated to indicate the error. To switch off the I2S, specific actions are required to ensure that the I2S completes the transfer cycle properly without initiating a new data transfer. The sequence depends on the configuration of the data and channel lengths, and on the audio protocol mode selected. In the case of:

16-bit data length extended on 32-bit channel length (DATLEN = 00 and CHLEN = 1) using the LSB justified mode (I2SSTD = 10) a) b) c) Wait for the second to last RXNE = 1 (n 1) Then wait 17 I2S clock cycles (using a software loop) Disable the I2S (I2SE = 0)

16-bit data length extended on 32-bit channel length (DATLEN = 00 and CHLEN = 1) in MSB justified, I2S or PCM modes (I2SSTD = 00, I2SSTD = 01 or I2SSTD = 11, respectively) a) b) c) Wait for the last RXNE Then wait 1 I2S clock cycle (using a software loop) Disable the I2S (I2SE = 0)

For all other combinations of DATLEN and CHLEN, whatever the audio mode selected through the I2SSTD bits, carry out the following sequence to switch off the I2S: a) b) c) Wait for the second to last RXNE = 1 (n 1) Then wait one I2S clock cycle (using a software loop) Disable the I2S (I2SE = 0)

Note:

The BSY flag is kept low during transfers.

27.4.6

I2S slave mode

The I2S can be configured as follows:

In slave mode for transmission or reception (half-duplex mode using I2Sx) In slave mode transmission and reception (full duplex mode using I2Sx and I2Sx_ext).

The operating mode is following mainly the same rules as described for the I2S master configuration. In slave mode, there is no clock to be generated by the I2S interface. The clock and WS signals are input from the external master connected to the I2S interface. There is then no need, for the user, to configure the clock. The configuration steps to follow are listed below:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

832/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) 1.

RM0090

Set the I2SMOD bit in the SPI_I2SCFGR register to reach the I2S functionalities and choose the I2S standard through the I2SSTD[1:0] bits, the data length through the DATLEN[1:0] bits and the number of bits per channel for the frame configuring the CHLEN bit. Select also the mode (transmission or reception) for the slave through the I2SCFG[1:0] bits in SPI_I2SCFGR register. If needed, select all the potential interrupt sources and the DMA capabilities by writing the SPI_CR2 register. The I2SE bit in SPI_I2SCFGR register must be set.

2. 3.

Transmission sequence
The transmission sequence begins when the external master device sends the clock and when the NSS_WS signal requests the transfer of data. The slave has to be enabled before the external master starts the communication. The I2S data register has to be loaded before the master initiates the communication. For the I2S, MSB justified and LSB justified modes, the first data item to be written into the data register corresponds to the data for the left channel. When the communication starts, the data are transferred from the Tx buffer to the shift register. The TXE flag is then set in order to request the right channel data to be written into the I2S data register. The CHSIDE flag indicates which channel is to be transmitted. Compared to the master transmission mode, in slave mode, CHSIDE is sensitive to the WS signal coming from the external master. This means that the slave needs to be ready to transmit the first data before the clock is generated by the master. WS assertion corresponds to left channel transmitted first. Note: The I2SE has to be written at least two PCLK cycles before the first clock of the master comes on the CK line. The data half-word is parallel-loaded into the 16-bit shift register (from the internal bus) during the first bit transmission, and then shifted out serially to the MOSI/SD pin MSB first. The TXE flag is set after each transfer from the Tx buffer to the shift register and an interrupt is generated if the TXEIE bit in the SPI_CR2 register is set. Note that the TXE flag should be checked to be at 1 before attempting to write the Tx buffer. For more details about the write operations depending on the I2S standard mode selected, refer to Section 27.4.3: Supported audio protocols. To secure a continuous audio data transmission, it is mandatory to write the SPI_DR register with the next data to transmit before the end of the current transmission. An underrun flag is set and an interrupt may be generated if the data are not written into the SPI_DR register before the first clock edge of the next data communication. This indicates to the software that the transferred data are wrong. If the ERRIE bit is set into the SPI_CR2 register, an interrupt is generated when the UDR flag in the SPI_SR register goes high. In this case, it is mandatory to switch off the I2S and to restart a data transfer starting from the left channel. To switch off the I2S, by clearing the I2SE bit, it is mandatory to wait for TXE = 1 and BSY = 0.

Reception sequence
The operating mode is the same as for the transmission mode except for the point 1 (refer to the procedure described in Section 27.4.6: I2S slave mode), where the configuration should set the master reception mode using the I2SCFG[1:0] bits in the SPI_I2SCFGR register.

833/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) Whatever the data length or the channel length, the audio data are received by 16-bit packets. This means that each time the RX buffer is full, the RXNE flag in the SPI_SR register is set and an interrupt is generated if the RXNEIE bit is set in the SPI_CR2 register. Depending on the data length and channel length configuration, the audio value received for a right or left channel may result from one or two receptions into the RX buffer. The CHSIDE flag is updated each time data are received to be read from SPI_DR. It is sensitive to the external WS line managed by the external master component. Clearing the RXNE bit is performed by reading the SPI_DR register. For more details about the read operations depending the I2S standard mode selected, refer to Section 27.4.3: Supported audio protocols. If data are received while the precedent received data have not yet been read, an overrun is generated and the OVR flag is set. If the bit ERRIE is set in the SPI_CR2 register, an interrupt is generated to indicate the error. To switch off the I2S in reception mode, I2SE has to be cleared immediately after receiving the last RXNE = 1.

Note:

The external master components should have the capability of sending/receiving data in 16bit or 32-bit packets via an audio channel.

27.4.7

Status flags
Three status flags are provided for the application to fully monitor the state of the I2S bus.

Busy flag (BSY)

The BSY flag is set and cleared by hardware (writing to this flag has no effect). It indicates the state of the communication layer of the I2S. When BSY is set, it indicates that the I2S is busy communicating. There is one exception in master receive mode (I2SCFG = 11) where the BSY flag is kept low during reception. The BSY flag is useful to detect the end of a transfer if the software needs to disable the I2S. This avoids corrupting the last transfer. For this, the procedure described below must be strictly respected. The BSY flag is set when a transfer starts, except when the I2S is in master receiver mode. The BSY flag is cleared:

when a transfer completes (except in master transmit mode, in which the communication is supposed to be continuous) when the I2S is disabled In master transmit mode, the BSY flag is kept high during all the transfers In slave mode, the BSY flag goes low for one I2S clock cycle between each transfer

When communication is continuous:

Note:

Do not use the BSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception. It is better to use the TXE and RXNE flags instead.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

834/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Tx buffer empty flag (TXE)

When set, this flag indicates that the Tx buffer is empty and the next data to be transmitted can then be loaded into it. The TXE flag is reset when the Tx buffer already contains data to be transmitted. It is also reset when the I2S is disabled (I2SE bit is reset).

RX buffer not empty (RXNE)

When set, this flag indicates that there are valid received data in the RX Buffer. It is reset when SPI_DR register is read.

Channel Side flag (CHSIDE)

In transmission mode, this flag is refreshed when TXE goes high. It indicates the channel side to which the data to transfer on SD has to belong. In case of an underrun error event in slave transmission mode, this flag is not reliable and I2S needs to be switched off and switched on before resuming the communication. In reception mode, this flag is refreshed when data are received into SPI_DR. It indicates from which channel side data have been received. Note that in case of error (like OVR) this flag becomes meaningless and the I2S should be reset by disabling and then enabling it (with configuration if it needs changing). This flag has no meaning in the PCM standard (for both Short and Long frame modes). When the OVR or UDR flag in the SPI_SR is set and the ERRIE bit in SPI_CR2 is also set, an interrupt is generated. This interrupt can be cleared by reading the SPI_SR status register (once the interrupt source has been cleared).

27.4.8

Error flags
There are three error flags for the I2S cell.

Underrun flag (UDR)

In slave transmission mode this flag is set when the first clock for data transmission appears while the software has not yet loaded any value into SPI_DR. It is available when the I2SMOD bit in SPI_I2SCFGR is set. An interrupt may be generated if the ERRIE bit in SPI_CR2 is set. The UDR bit is cleared by a read operation on the SPI_SR register.

Overrun flag (OVR)

This flag is set when data are received and the previous data have not yet been read from SPI_DR. As a result, the incoming data are lost. An interrupt may be generated if the ERRIE bit is set in SPI_CR2. In this case, the receive buffer contents are not updated with the newly received data from the transmitter device. A read operation to the SPI_DR register returns the previous correctly received data. All other subsequently transmitted half-words are lost. Clearing the OVR bit is done by a read operation on the SPI_DR register followed by a read access to the SPI_SR register.

Frame error flag (FRE)

This flag can be set by hardware only if the I2S is configured in Slave mode. It is set if the external master is changing the WS line at a moment when the slave is not expected this
835/1422 Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI) change. If the synchronization is lost, to recover from this state and resynchronize the external master device with the I2S slave device, follow the steps below: 1. 2. Disable the I2S Re-enable it when the correct level is detected on the WS line (WS line is high in I2S mode, or low for MSB- or LSB-justified or PCM modes).

Desynchronization between the master and slave device may be due to noisy environment on the SCK communication clock or on the WS frame synchronization line. An error interrupt can be generated if the ERRIE bit is set. The desynchronization flag (FRE) is cleared by software when the status register is read.

27.4.9

I2S interrupts
Table 126 provides the list of I2S interrupts. Table 126. I2S interrupt requests
Interrupt event Transmit buffer empty flag Receive buffer not empty flag Overrun error Underrun error Frame error flag Event flag TXE RXNE OVR ERRIE UDR FRE ERRIE Enable Control bit TXEIE RXNEIE

27.4.10

DMA features
DMA is working in exactly the same way as for the SPI mode. There is no difference on the I2S. Only the CRC feature is not available in I2S mode since there is no data transfer protection system.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

836/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.5

SPI and I2S registers

Refer to Section 1.1 on page 47 for a list of abbreviations used in register descriptions. The peripheral registers can be accessed by half-words (16 bits) or words (32 bits).

27.5.1

SPI control register 1 (SPI_CR1) (not used in I2S mode)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000

15 BIDI MODE rw

14 BIDI OE rw

13 CRC EN rw

12 CRC NEXT rw

11 DFF rw

10 RX ONLY rw

9 SSM rw

8 SSI rw

7 LSB FIRST rw

6 SPE rw

4 BR [2:0]

2 MSTR

1 CPOL rw

0 CPHA rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 15 BIDIMODE: Bidirectional data mode enable 0: 2-line unidirectional data mode selected 1: 1-line bidirectional data mode selected Note: Not used in I2S mode Bit 14 BIDIOE: Output enable in bidirectional mode This bit combined with the BIDImode bit selects the direction of transfer in bidirectional mode 0: Output disabled (receive-only mode) 1: Output enabled (transmit-only mode) Note: In master mode, the MOSI pin is used and in slave mode, the MISO pin is used. Not used in I2S mode Bit 13 CRCEN: Hardware CRC calculation enable 0: CRC calculation disabled 1: CRC calculation enabled Note: This bit should be written only when SPI is disabled (SPE = 0) for correct operation Not used in I2S mode Bit 12 CRCNEXT: CRC transfer next 0: Data phase (no CRC phase) 1: Next transfer is CRC (CRC phase) Note: When the SPI is configured in full duplex or transmitter only modes, CRCNEXT must be written as soon as the last data is written to the SPI_DR register. When the SPI is configured in receiver only mode, CRCNEXT must be set after the second last data reception. This bit should be kept cleared when the transfers are managed by DMA. Not used in I2S mode Bit 11 DFF: Data frame format 0: 8-bit data frame format is selected for transmission/reception 1: 16-bit data frame format is selected for transmission/reception Note: This bit should be written only when SPI is disabled (SPE = 0) for correct operation Not used in I2S mode

837/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Bit 10 RXONLY: Receive only This bit combined with the BIDImode bit selects the direction of transfer in 2-line unidirectional mode. This bit is also useful in a multislave system in which this particular slave is not accessed, the output from the accessed slave is not corrupted. 0: Full duplex (Transmit and receive) 1: Output disabled (Receive-only mode) Note: Not used in I2S mode Bit 9 SSM: Software slave management When the SSM bit is set, the NSS pin input is replaced with the value from the SSI bit. 0: Software slave management disabled 1: Software slave management enabled Note: Not used in I2S mode and SPI TI mode Bit 8 SSI: Internal slave select This bit has an effect only when the SSM bit is set. The value of this bit is forced onto the NSS pin and the IO value of the NSS pin is ignored. Note: Not used in I2S mode and SPI TI mode Bit 7 LSBFIRST: Frame format 0: MSB transmitted first 1: LSB transmitted first Note: This bit should not be changed when communication is ongoing. Not used in I2S mode and SPI TI mode Bit 6 SPE: SPI enable 0: Peripheral disabled 1: Peripheral enabled Note: 1- Not used in I2S mode. Note: 2- When disabling the SPI, follow the procedure described in Section 27.3.8: Disabling the
SPI.

Bits 5:3 BR[2:0]: Baud rate control 000: fPCLK/2100: fPCLK/32 001: fPCLK/4101: fPCLK/64 010: fPCLK/8110: fPCLK/128 011: fPCLK/16111: fPCLK/256 Note: These bits should not be changed when communication is ongoing. Not used in I2S mode Bit 2 MSTR: Master selection 0: Slave configuration 1: Master configuration Note: This bit should not be changed when communication is ongoing. Not used in I2S mode Bit1 CPOL: Clock polarity 0: CK to 0 when idle 1: CK to 1 when idle Note: This bit should not be changed when communication is ongoing. Not used in I2S mode and SPI TI mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

838/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Bit 0 CPHA: Clock phase 0: The first clock transition is the first data capture edge 1: The second clock transition is the first data capture edge Note: This bit should not be changed when communication is ongoing. Note: Not used in I2S mode and SPI TI mode

27.5.2

SPI control register 2 (SPI_CR2)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

4 FRF

3 Res.

2 SSOE rw

TXEIE RXNEIE ERRIE Reserved rw rw rw

TXDMAEN RXDMAEN rw rw

rw

Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 TXEIE: Tx buffer empty interrupt enable 0: TXE interrupt masked 1: TXE interrupt not masked. Used to generate an interrupt request when the TXE flag is set. Bit 6 RXNEIE: RX buffer not empty interrupt enable 0: RXNE interrupt masked 1: RXNE interrupt not masked. Used to generate an interrupt request when the RXNE flag is set. Bit 5 ERRIE: Error interrupt enable This bit controls the generation of an interrupt when an error condition occurs (CRCERR, OVR, MODF in SPI mode and UDR, OVR and FRE). 0: Error interrupt is masked 1: Error interrupt is enabled Bit 4 FRF: Frame format 0: SPI Motorola mode 1 SPI TI mode Note: Not used in I2S mode Bit 3 Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware. Bit 2 SSOE: SS output enable 0: SS output is disabled in master mode and the cell can work in multimaster configuration 1: SS output is enabled in master mode and when the cell is enabled. The cell cannot work in a multimaster environment. Note: Not used in I2S mode and SPI TI mode Bit 1 TXDMAEN: Tx buffer DMA enable When this bit is set, the DMA request is made whenever the TXE flag is set. 0: Tx buffer DMA disabled 1: Tx buffer DMA enabled Bit 0 RXDMAEN: Rx buffer DMA enable When this bit is set, the DMA request is made whenever the RXNE flag is set. 0: Rx buffer DMA disabled 1: Rx buffer DMA enabled

839/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

27.5.3

SPI status register (SPI_SR)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0002

15

14

13

12 Reserved

11

10

8 FRE r

7 BSY r

6 OVR r

5 MODF r

4 CRC ERR rc_w0

3 UDR r

2 CHSID E r

1 TXE r

0 RXNE r

Bits 15:9 Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware. Bit 8 FRE: Frame format error 0: No frame format error 1: A frame format error occurred This flag is set by hardware and cleared by software when the SPIx_SR register is read. Note: This flag is used when the SPI operates in TI slave mode or I2S slave mode (refer to Section 27.3.10). Bit 7 BSY: Busy flag 0: SPI (or I2S) not busy 1: SPI (or I2S) is busy in communication or Tx buffer is not empty This flag is set and cleared by hardware. Note: BSY flag must be used with caution: refer to Section 27.3.7: Status flags and Section 27.3.8: Disabling the SPI. Bit 6 OVR: Overrun flag 0: No overrun occurred 1: Overrun occurred This flag is set by hardware and reset by a software sequence. Refer to Section 27.4.8 on page 835 for the software sequence. Bit 5 MODF: Mode fault 0: No mode fault occurred 1: Mode fault occurred This flag is set by hardware and reset by a software sequence. Refer to Section 27.3.10 on page 818 for the software sequence. Note: Not used in I2S mode Bit 4 CRCERR: CRC error flag 0: CRC value received matches the SPI_RXCRCR value 1: CRC value received does not match the SPI_RXCRCR value This flag is set by hardware and cleared by software writing 0. Note: Not used in I2S mode Bit 3 UDR: Underrun flag 0: No underrun occurred 1: Underrun occurred This flag is set by hardware and reset by a software sequence. Refer to Section 27.4.8 on page 835 for the software sequence. Note: Not used in SPI mode Bit 2 CHSIDE: Channel side 0: Channel Left has to be transmitted or has been received 1: Channel Right has to be transmitted or has been received Note: Not used for SPI mode. No meaning in PCM mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

840/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

Bit 1 TXE: Transmit buffer empty 0: Tx buffer not empty 1: Tx buffer empty Bit 0 RXNE: Receive buffer not empty 0: Rx buffer empty 1: Rx buffer not empty

27.5.4

SPI data register (SPI_DR)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

DR[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 DR[15:0]: Data register Data received or to be transmitted. The data register is split into 2 buffers - one for writing (Transmit Buffer) and another one for reading (Receive buffer). A write to the data register will write into the Tx buffer and a read from the data register will return the value held in the Rx buffer. Notes for the SPI mode: Depending on the data frame format selection bit (DFF in SPI_CR1 register), the data sent or received is either 8-bit or 16-bit. This selection has to be made before enabling the SPI to ensure correct operation. For an 8-bit data frame, the buffers are 8-bit and only the LSB of the register (SPI_DR[7:0]) is used for transmission/reception. When in reception mode, the MSB of the register (SPI_DR[15:8]) is forced to 0. For a 16-bit data frame, the buffers are 16-bit and the entire register, SPI_DR[15:0] is used for transmission/reception.

27.5.5

SPI CRC polynomial register (SPI_CRCPR) (not used in I2S mode)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0007

15

14

13

12

11

10

CRCPOLY[15:0] rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 15:0 CRCPOLY[15:0]: CRC polynomial register This register contains the polynomial for the CRC calculation. The CRC polynomial (0007h) is the reset value of this register. Another polynomial can be configured as required. Note: Not used for the I2S mode.

841/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

27.5.6

SPI RX CRC register (SPI_RXCRCR) (not used in I2S mode)

Address offset: 0x14 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

RXCRC[15:0] r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 15:0 RXCRC[15:0]: Rx CRC register When CRC calculation is enabled, the RxCRC[15:0] bits contain the computed CRC value of the subsequently received bytes. This register is reset when the CRCEN bit in SPI_CR1 register is written to 1. The CRC is calculated serially using the polynomial programmed in the SPI_CRCPR register. Only the 8 LSB bits are considered when the data frame format is set to be 8-bit data (DFF bit of SPI_CR1 is cleared). CRC calculation is done based on any CRC8 standard. The entire 16-bits of this register are considered when a 16-bit data frame format is selected (DFF bit of the SPI_CR1 register is set). CRC calculation is done based on any CRC16 standard. Note: A read to this register when the BSY Flag is set could return an incorrect value. Not used for I2S mode.

27.5.7

SPI TX CRC register (SPI_TXCRCR) (not used in I2S mode)

Address offset: 0x18 Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11

10

TXCRC[15:0] r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 15:0 TXCRC[15:0]: Tx CRC register When CRC calculation is enabled, the TxCRC[7:0] bits contain the computed CRC value of the subsequently transmitted bytes. This register is reset when the CRCEN bit of SPI_CR1 is written to 1. The CRC is calculated serially using the polynomial programmed in the SPI_CRCPR register. Only the 8 LSB bits are considered when the data frame format is set to be 8-bit data (DFF bit of SPI_CR1 is cleared). CRC calculation is done based on any CRC8 standard. The entire 16-bits of this register are considered when a 16-bit data frame format is selected (DFF bit of the SPI_CR1 register is set). CRC calculation is done based on any CRC16 standard. Note: A read to this register when the BSY flag is set could return an incorrect value. Not used for I2S mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

842/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.5.8

SPI_I2S configuration register (SPI_I2SCFGR)

Address offset: 0x1C Reset value: 0x0000

15

14

13

12

11 I2SMOD

10 I2SE rw

7 PCMSY NC rw

3 CKPOL rw

0 CHLEN rw

I2SCFG rw rw

I2SSTD Reserved rw rw

DATLEN rw rw

Reserved rw

Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 I2SMOD: I2S mode selection 0: SPI mode is selected 1: I2S mode is selected Note: This bit should be configured when the SPI or I2S is disabled Bit 10 I2SE: I2S Enable 0: I2S peripheral is disabled 1: I2S peripheral is enabled Note: Not used in SPI mode Bit 9:8 I2SCFG: I2S configuration mode 00: Slave - transmit 01: Slave - receive 10: Master - transmit 11: Master - receive Note: This bit should be configured when the I2S is disabled. Not used in SPI mode Bit 7 PCMSYNC: PCM frame synchronization 0: Short frame synchronization 1: Long frame synchronization Note: This bit has a meaning only if I2SSTD = 11 (PCM standard is used) Not used in SPI mode Bit 6 Reserved: forced at 0 by hardware Bit 5:4 I2SSTD: I2S standard selection 00: I2S Philips standard. 01: MSB justified standard (left justified) 10: LSB justified standard (right justified) 11: PCM standard For more details on I2S standards, refer to Section 27.4.3 on page 822. Not used in SPI mode. Note: For correct operation, these bits should be configured when the I2S is disabled. Bit 3 CKPOL: Steady state clock polarity 0: I2S clock steady state is low level 1: I2S clock steady state is high level Note: For correct operation, this bit should be configured when the I2S is disabled. Not used in SPI mode

843/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

Bit 2:1 DATLEN: Data length to be transferred 00: 16-bit data length 01: 24-bit data length 10: 32-bit data length 11: Not allowed Note: For correct operation, these bits should be configured when the I2S is disabled. Not used in SPI mode. Bit 0 CHLEN: Channel length (number of bits per audio channel) 0: 16-bit wide 1: 32-bit wide The bit write operation has a meaning only if DATLEN = 00 otherwise the channel length is fixed to 32-bit by hardware whatever the value filled in. Not used in SPI mode. Note: For correct operation, this bit should be configured when the I2S is disabled.

27.5.9

SPI_I2S prescaler register (SPI_I2SPR)

Address offset: 0x20 Reset value: 0000 0010 (0x0002)

15

14

13

12

11

10

9 MCKOE

8 ODD rw

4 I2SDIV rw

Reserved rw

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 MCKOE: Master clock output enable 0: Master clock output is disabled 1: Master clock output is enabled Note: This bit should be configured when the I2S is disabled. It is used only when the I2S is in master mode. Not used in SPI mode. Bit 8 ODD: Odd factor for the prescaler 0: real divider value is = I2SDIV *2 1: real divider value is = (I2SDIV * 2)+1 Refer to Section 27.4.4 on page 828. Not used in SPI mode. Note: This bit should be configured when the I2S is disabled. It is used only when the I2S is in master mode. Bit 7:0 I2SDIV: I2S Linear prescaler I2SDIV [7:0] = 0 or I2SDIV [7:0] = 1 are forbidden values. Refer to Section 27.4.4 on page 828. Not used in SPI mode. Note: These bits should be configured when the I2S is disabled. It is used only when the I2S is in master mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

844/1422

Serial peripheral interface (SPI)

RM0090

27.5.10

SPI register map

The table provides shows the SPI register map and reset values. Table 127. SPI register map and reset values
Offset Register
SPI_CR1 Reset value SPI_CR2 Reset value FRE SPI_SR Reset value SPI_DR Reset value SPI_CRCPR Reset value SPI_RXCRCR Reset value SPI_TXCRCR Reset value SPI_I2SCFGR Reset value 0x20 SPI_I2SPR Reset value Reserved BIDIMODE CRCNEXT LSBFIRST RXONLY CRCEN BIDIOE

MSTR 0 SSOE

0x00

Reserved

BR [2:0] 0 ERRIE 0 FRF 0 Reserved

0 TXEIE

0 RXNEIE

0 TXDMAEN 0 TXE 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

0x04

Reserved

0 BSY

0 OVR

0 MODF

0 CRCERR

0 CHSIDE

0x08

Reserved

0x0C 0x10 0x14 0x18

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 I2SMOD

0 0 0 0 DR[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRCPOLY[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 RxCRC[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 TxCRC[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 PCMSYNC I2SCFG I2SSTD Reserved I2SE

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 CKPOL

0 0 1 0 0 DATLEN 0 0

0x1C

Reserved

0 MCKOE

0 ODD

I2SDIV 0 0 0 0 0 0

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

845/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

CHLEN 0

RXNE 0 0 1 0 0

UDR

RXDMAEN 0

CPHA 0

CPOL

SSM

SPE

DFF

SSI

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

28

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

28.1

SDIO main features

The SD/SDIO MMC card host interface (SDIO) provides an interface between the APB2 peripheral bus and MultiMediaCards (MMCs), SD memory cards, SDIO cards and CE-ATA devices. The MultiMediaCard system specifications are available through the MultiMediaCard Association website at www.mmca.org, published by the MMCA technical committee. SD memory card and SD I/O card system specifications are available through the SD card Association website at www.sdcard.org. CE-ATA system specifications are available through the CE-ATA workgroup website at www.ce-ata.org. The SDIO features include the following:

Full compliance with MultiMediaCard System Specification Version 4.2. Card support for three different databus modes: 1-bit (default), 4-bit and 8-bit Full compatibility with previous versions of MultiMediaCards (forward compatibility) Full compliance with SD Memory Card Specifications Version 2.0 Full compliance with SD I/O Card Specification Version 2.0: card support for two different databus modes: 1-bit (default) and 4-bit Full support of the CE-ATA features (full compliance with CE-ATA digital protocol Rev1.1) Data transfer up to 48 MHz for the 8 bit mode Data and command output enable signals to control external bidirectional drivers.

Note:

The SDIO does not have an SPI-compatible communication mode. The SD memory card protocol is a superset of the MultiMediaCard protocol as defined in the MultiMediaCard system specification V2.11. Several commands required for SD memory devices are not supported by either SD I/O-only cards or the I/O portion of combo cards. Some of these commands have no use in SD I/O devices, such as erase commands, and thus are not supported in the SDIO. In addition, several commands are different between SD memory cards and SD I/O cards and thus are not supported in the SDIO. For details refer to SD I/O card Specification Version 1.0. CE-ATA is supported over the MMC electrical interface using a protocol that utilizes the existing MMC access primitives. The interface electrical and signaling definition is as defined in the MMC reference. The MultiMediaCard/SD bus connects cards to the controller. The current version of the SDIO supports only one SD/SDIO/MMC4.2 card at any one time and a stack of MMC4.1 or previous.

28.2

SDIO bus topology

Communication over the bus is based on command and data transfers.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

846/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

The basic transaction on the MultiMediaCard/SD/SD I/O bus is the command/response transaction. These types of bus transaction transfer their information directly within the command or response structure. In addition, some operations have a data token. Data transfers to/from SD/SDIO memory cards are done in data blocks. Data transfers to/from MMC are done data blocks or streams. Data transfers to/from the CE-ATA Devices are done in data blocks. Figure 308. SDIO no response and no data operations
From host to card(s) From host to card From card to host

SDIO_CMD

Command

Command

Response

SDIO_D

Operation (no response)

Operation (no data)

ai14734

Figure 309. SDIO (multiple) block read operation

From host to card From card to host data from card to host SDIO_CMD Command Response Stop command stops data transfer Command Response

SDIO_D

Data block crc Block read operation

Data block crc

Data block crc

Multiple block read operation

Data stop operation

ai14735

847/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Figure 310. SDIO (multiple) block write operation
From host to card From card to host Data from host to card SDIO_CMD Command Response Stop command stops data transfer Command Response

SDIO_D Optional cards Busy. Needed for CE-ATA

Busy

Data block crc

Busy

Data block crc

Busy

Block write operation Multiple block write operation

Data stop operation

ai14737

Note:

The SDIO will not send any data as long as the Busy signal is asserted (SDIO_D0 pulled low). Figure 311. SDIO sequential read operation
From host to card(s) From card to host Data from card to host SDIO_CMD Command Response

Stop command stops data transfer Command Response

SDIO_D

Data stream Data stop operation ai14738

Data transfer operation

Figure 312. SDIO sequential write operation

From host to card(s)

From card to host Data from host to card

Stop command stops data transfer Command Response

SDIO_CMD

Command

Response

SDIO_D

Data stream Data stop operation

Data transfer operation

ai14739

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

848/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.3

SDIO functional description

The SDIO consists of two parts:

The SDIO adapter block provides all functions specific to the MMC/SD/SD I/O card such as the clock generation unit, command and data transfer. The APB2 interface accesses the SDIO adapter registers, and generates interrupt and DMA request signals.

Figure 313. SDIO block diagram

SDIO Interrupts and DMA request APB2 interface APB2 bus SDIO adapter SDIO_CK SDIO_CMD SDIO_D[7:0]

PCLK2

SDIOCLK
ai15898

By default SDIO_D0 is used for data transfer. After initialization, the host can change the databus width. If a MultiMediaCard is connected to the bus, SDIO_D0, SDIO_D[3:0] or SDIO_D[7:0] can be used for data transfer. MMC V3.31 or previous, supports only 1 bit of data so only SDIO_D0 can be used. If an SD or SD I/O card is connected to the bus, data transfer can be configured by the host to use SDIO_D0 or SDIO_D[3:0]. All data lines are operating in push-pull mode. SDIO_CMD has two operational modes:

Open-drain for initialization (only for MMCV3.31 or previous) Push-pull for command transfer (SD/SD I/O card MMC4.2 use push-pull drivers also for initialization)

SDIO_CK is the clock to the card: one bit is transferred on both command and data lines with each clock cycle. The clock frequency can vary between 0 MHz and 20 MHz (for a MultiMediaCard V3.31), between 0 and 48 MHz for a MultiMediaCard V4.0/4.2, or between 0 and 25 MHz (for an SD/SD I/O card). The SDIO uses two clock signals:

SDIO adapter clock (SDIOCLK = 48 MHz) APB2 bus clock (PCLK2)

PCLK2 and SDIO_CK clock frequencies must respect the following condition:
Frequenc ( PCLK2 ) 3 8 Frequency ( SDIO_CK )

The signals shown in Table 128 are used on the MultiMediaCard/SD/SD I/O card bus.

849/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 128. SDIO I/O definitions

Pin SDIO_CK SDIO_CMD SDIO_D[7:0] Direction Output Bidirectional Bidirectional

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Description MultiMediaCard/SD/SDIO card clock. This pin is the clock from host to card. MultiMediaCard/SD/SDIO card command. This pin is the bidirectional command/response signal. MultiMediaCard/SD/SDIO card data. These pins are the bidirectional databus.

28.3.1

SDIO adapter
Figure 314 shows a simplified block diagram of an SDIO adapter. Figure 314. SDIO adapter
SDIO adapter

Control unit

SDIO_CK

SDIO_CMD

Adapter registers To APB2 interface FIFO

Data path

SDIO_D[7:0]

PCLK2

SDIOCLK

ai15899

The SDIO adapter is a multimedia/secure digital memory card bus master that provides an interface to a multimedia card stack or to a secure digital memory card. It consists of five subunits:

Adapter register block Control unit Command path Data path Data FIFO

Note:

The adapter registers and FIFO use the APB2 bus clock domain (PCLK2). The control unit, command path and data path use the SDIO adapter clock domain (SDIOCLK).

Adapter register block

The adapter register block contains all system registers. This block also generates the signals that clear the static flags in the multimedia card. The clear signals are generated when 1 is written into the corresponding bit location in the SDIO Clear register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

850/1422

Card bus

Command path

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

Control unit
The control unit contains the power management functions and the clock divider for the memory card clock. There are three power phases:

power-off power-up power-on

Figure 315. Control unit

Control unit Power management

Adapter registers

Clock management

SDIO_CK

To command and data path

ai14804

The control unit is illustrated in Figure 315. It consists of a power management subunit and a clock management subunit. The power management subunit disables the card bus output signals during the power-off and power-up phases. The clock management subunit generates and controls the SDIO_CK signal. The SDIO_CK output can use either the clock divide or the clock bypass mode. The clock output is inactive:

after reset during the power-off or power-up phases if the power saving mode is enabled and the card bus is in the Idle state (eight clock periods after both the command and data path subunits enter the Idle phase)

851/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Command path
The command path unit sends commands to and receives responses from the cards. Figure 316. SDIO adapter command path

To control unit

Status flag

Control logic

Command timer

Adapter registers SDIO_CMDin CMD Argument CRC CMD To APB2 interface Response registers Shift register SDIO_CMDout

ai15900

Command path state machine (CPSM) When the command register is written to and the enable bit is set, command transfer starts. When the command has been sent, the command path state machine (CPSM) sets the status flags and enters the Idle state if a response is not required. If a response is required, it waits for the response (see Figure 317 on page 853). When the response is received, the received CRC code and the internally generated code are compared, and the appropriate status flags are set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

852/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Figure 317. Command path state machine (CPSM)
On reset
CE-ATA Command Completion signal received or CPSM disabled or Command CRC failed

RM0090

Wait_CPL

CPSM Enabled and pending command CPSM disabled

Idle

Response received or disabled or command CRC failed

Response Received in CE-ATA mode and no interrupt and wait for CE-ATA Command Completion signal enabled

Pend
Enabled and command start Last Data CPSM Disabled or command timeout

CPSM disabled or no response

Receive

Send

Response started

Wait for response

Wait

Response Received in CE-ATA mode and no interrupt and wait for CE-ATA Command Completion signal disabled

ai14806b

When the Wait state is entered, the command timer starts running. If the timeout is reached before the CPSM moves to the Receive state, the timeout flag is set and the Idle state is entered. Note: The command timeout has a fixed value of 64 SDIO_CK clock periods. If the interrupt bit is set in the command register, the timer is disabled and the CPSM waits for an interrupt request from one of the cards. If a pending bit is set in the command register, the CPSM enters the Pend state, and waits for a CmdPend signal from the data path subunit. When CmdPend is detected, the CPSM moves to the Send state. This enables the data counter to trigger the stop command transmission. Note: The CPSM remains in the Idle state for at least eight SDIO_CK periods to meet the NCC and NRC timing constraints. NCC is the minimum delay between two host commands, and NRC is the minimum delay between the host command and the card response.

853/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 318. SDIO command transfer

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

at least 8 SDIO_CK cycles

SDIO_CK State SDIO_CMD Idle Hi-Z

Command Send Controller drives Wait Hi-Z

Response Receive Card drives Idle Hi-Z

Command Send Controller drives

ai14707

Command format Command: a command is a token that starts an operation. Command are sent from the host either to a single card (addressed command) or to all connected cards (broadcast command are available for MMC V3.31 or previous). Commands are transferred serially on the CMD line. All commands have a fixed length of 48 bits. The general format for a command token for MultiMediaCards, SD-Memory cards and SDIO-Cards is shown in Table 129. CE-ATA commands are an extension of MMC commands V4.2, and so have the same format. The command path operates in a half-duplex mode, so that commands and responses can either be sent or received. If the CPSM is not in the Send state, the SDIO_CMD output is in the Hi-Z state, as shown in Figure 318 on page 854. Data on SDIO_CMD are synchronous with the rising edge of SDIO_CK. Table shows the command format.

Table 129. Command format

Bit position 47 46 [45:40] [39:8] [7:1] 0 1 1 6 32 7 1 Width 0 1 1 Value Start bit Transmission bit Command index Argument CRC7 End bit Description

Response: a response is a token that is sent from an addressed card (or synchronously from all connected cards for MMC V3.31 or previous), to the host as an answer to a previously received command. Responses are transferred serially on the CMD line.

The SDIO supports two response types. Both use CRC error checking:

48 bit short response 136 bit long response

Note:

If the response does not contain a CRC (CMD1 response), the device driver must ignore the CRC failed status.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

854/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Table 130. Short response format
Bit position 47 46 [45:40] [39:8] [7:1] 0 1 1 6 32 7 1 Width 0 0 1 Value Start bit Transmission bit Command index Argument CRC7(or 1111111) End bit Description

RM0090

Table 131. Long response format

Bit position 135 134 [133:128] [127:1] 0 1 1 6 127 1 Width 0 0 111111 1 Value Start bit Transmission bit Reserved CID or CSD (including internal CRC7) End bit Description

The command register contains the command index (six bits sent to a card) and the command type. These determine whether the command requires a response, and whether the response is 48 or 136 bits long (see Section 28.9.4 on page 890). The command path implements the status flags shown in Table 132: Table 132. Command path status flags
Flag CMDREND CCRCFAIL CMDSENT CTIMEOUT CMDACT Description Set if response CRC is OK. Set if response CRC fails. Set when command (that does not require response) is sent Response timeout. Command transfer in progress.

The CRC generator calculates the CRC checksum for all bits before the CRC code. This includes the start bit, transmitter bit, command index, and command argument (or card status). The CRC checksum is calculated for the first 120 bits of CID or CSD for the long response format. Note that the start bit, transmitter bit and the six reserved bits are not used in the CRC calculation. The CRC checksum is a 7-bit value: CRC[6:0] = Remainder [(M(x) * x7) / G(x)] G(x) = x7 + x3 + 1 M(x) = (start bit) * x39 + ... + (last bit before CRC) * x0, or M(x) = (start bit) * x119 + ... + (last bit before CRC) * x0

855/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Data path
The data path subunit transfers data to and from cards. Figure 319 shows a block diagram of the data path. Figure 319. Data path
Data path

To control unit

Status flag

Control logic

Data timer

Data FIFO SDIO_Din[7:0] Transmit CRC Shift register Receive SDIO_Dout[7:0]

ai14808

The card databus width can be programmed using the clock control register. If the 4-bit wide bus mode is enabled, data is transferred at four bits per clock cycle over all four data signals (SDIO_D[3:0]). If the 8-bit wide bus mode is enabled, data is transferred at eight bits per clock cycle over all eight data signals (SDIO_D[7:0]). If the wide bus mode is not enabled, only one bit per clock cycle is transferred over SDIO_D0. Depending on the transfer direction (send or receive), the data path state machine (DPSM) moves to the Wait_S or Wait_R state when it is enabled:

Send: the DPSM moves to the Wait_S state. If there is data in the transmit FIFO, the DPSM moves to the Send state, and the data path subunit starts sending data to a card. Receive: the DPSM moves to the Wait_R state and waits for a start bit. When it receives a start bit, the DPSM moves to the Receive state, and the data path subunit starts receiving data from a card.

Data path state machine (DPSM) The DPSM operates at SDIO_CK frequency. Data on the card bus signals is synchronous to the rising edge of SDIO_CK. The DPSM has six states, as shown in Figure 320: Data path state machine (DPSM).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

856/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Figure 320. Data path state machine (DPSM)
On reset
DPSM disabled DPSM enabled and Read Wait Started and SD I/O mode enabled Disabled or FIFO underrun or end of data or CRC fail Disabled or CRC fail or timeout

RM0090

Read Wait

Idle
Enable and not send Disabled or end of data ReadWait Stop Disabled or Rx FIFO empty or timeout or start bit error Not busy Enable and send Data received and Read Wait Started and SD I/O mode enabled

Busy

Wait_R
End of packet

Wait_S
Disabled or CRC fail Data ready Start bit

End of packet or end of data or FIFO overrun

Send

Receive
ai14809b

Idle: the data path is inactive, and the SDIO_D[7:0] outputs are in Hi-Z. When the data control register is written and the enable bit is set, the DPSM loads the data counter with a new value and, depending on the data direction bit, moves to either the Wait_S or the Wait_R state. Wait_R: if the data counter equals zero, the DPSM moves to the Idle state when the receive FIFO is empty. If the data counter is not zero, the DPSM waits for a start bit on SDIO_D. The DPSM moves to the Receive state if it receives a start bit before a timeout, and loads the data block counter. If it reaches a timeout before it detects a start bit, or a start bit error occurs, it moves to the Idle state and sets the timeout status flag. Receive: serial data received from a card is packed in bytes and written to the data FIFO. Depending on the transfer mode bit in the data control register, the data transfer mode can be either block or stream: In block mode, when the data block counter reaches zero, the DPSM waits until it receives the CRC code. If the received code matches the internally generated CRC code, the DPSM moves to the Wait_R state. If not, the CRC fail status flag is set and the DPSM moves to the Idle state. In stream mode, the DPSM receives data while the data counter is not zero. When the counter is zero, the remaining data in the shift register is written to the data FIFO, and the DPSM moves to the Wait_R state.

If a FIFO overrun error occurs, the DPSM sets the FIFO error flag and moves to the Idle state:

Wait_S: the DPSM moves to the Idle state if the data counter is zero. If not, it waits until the data FIFO empty flag is deasserted, and moves to the Send state.

857/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Note:

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) The DPSM remains in the Wait_S state for at least two clock periods to meet the NWR timing requirements, where NWR is the number of clock cycles between the reception of the card response and the start of the data transfer from the host.

Send: the DPSM starts sending data to a card. Depending on the transfer mode bit in the data control register, the data transfer mode can be either block or stream: In block mode, when the data block counter reaches zero, the DPSM sends an internally generated CRC code and end bit, and moves to the Busy state. In stream mode, the DPSM sends data to a card while the enable bit is high and the data counter is not zero. It then moves to the Idle state.

If a FIFO underrun error occurs, the DPSM sets the FIFO error flag and moves to the Idle state.

Busy: the DPSM waits for the CRC status flag: If it does not receive a positive CRC status, it moves to the Idle state and sets the CRC fail status flag. If it receives a positive CRC status, it moves to the Wait_S state if SDIO_D0 is not low (the card is not busy).

If a timeout occurs while the DPSM is in the Busy state, it sets the data timeout flag and moves to the Idle state. The data timer is enabled when the DPSM is in the Wait_R or Busy state, and generates the data timeout error:

When transmitting data, the timeout occurs if the DPSM stays in the Busy state for longer than the programmed timeout period When receiving data, the timeout occurs if the end of the data is not true, and if the DPSM stays in the Wait_R state for longer than the programmed timeout period.

Data: data can be transferred from the card to the host or vice versa. Data is transferred via the data lines. They are stored in a FIFO of 32 words, each word is 32 bits wide.

Table 133. Data token format

Description Block Data Stream Data 0 0 Start bit Data yes no CRC16 1 1 End bit

Data FIFO
The data FIFO (first-in-first-out) subunit is a data buffer with a transmit and receive unit. The FIFO contains a 32-bit wide, 32-word deep data buffer, and transmit and receive logic. Because the data FIFO operates in the APB2 clock domain (PCLK2), all signals from the subunits in the SDIO clock domain (SDIOCLK) are resynchronized.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

858/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

Depending on the TXACT and RXACT flags, the FIFO can be disabled, transmit enabled, or receive enabled. TXACT and RXACT are driven by the data path subunit and are mutually exclusive:

The transmit FIFO refers to the transmit logic and data buffer when TXACT is asserted The receive FIFO refers to the receive logic and data buffer when RXACT is asserted

Transmit FIFO: Data can be written to the transmit FIFO through the APB2 interface when the SDIO is enabled for transmission. The transmit FIFO is accessible via 32 sequential addresses. The transmit FIFO contains a data output register that holds the data word pointed to by the read pointer. When the data path subunit has loaded its shift register, it increments the read pointer and drives new data out. If the transmit FIFO is disabled, all status flags are deasserted. The data path subunit asserts TXACT when it transmits data.

Table 134. Transmit FIFO status flags

Flag TXFIFOF TXFIFOE TXFIFOHE TXDAVL TXUNDERR Description Set to high when all 32 transmit FIFO words contain valid data. Set to high when the transmit FIFO does not contain valid data. Set to high when 8 or more transmit FIFO words are empty. This flag can be used as a DMA request. Set to high when the transmit FIFO contains valid data. This flag is the inverse of the TXFIFOE flag. Set to high when an underrun error occurs. This flag is cleared by writing to the SDIO Clear register.

Receive FIFO When the data path subunit receives a word of data, it drives the data on the write databus. The write pointer is incremented after the write operation completes. On the read side, the contents of the FIFO word pointed to by the current value of the read pointer is driven onto the read databus. If the receive FIFO is disabled, all status flags are deasserted, and the read and write pointers are reset. The data path subunit asserts RXACT when it receives data. Table 135 lists the receive FIFO status flags. The receive FIFO is accessible via 32 sequential addresses.

859/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 135. Receive FIFO status flags

Flag RXFIFOF RXFIFOE RXFIFOHF RXDAVL RXOVERR

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Description Set to high when all 32 receive FIFO words contain valid data Set to high when the receive FIFO does not contain valid data. Set to high when 8 or more receive FIFO words contain valid data. This flag can be used as a DMA request. Set to high when the receive FIFO is not empty. This flag is the inverse of the RXFIFOE flag. Set to high when an overrun error occurs. This flag is cleared by writing to the SDIO Clear register.

28.3.2

SDIO APB2 interface

The APB2 interface generates the interrupt and DMA requests, and accesses the SDIO adapter registers and the data FIFO. It consists of a data path, register decoder, and interrupt/DMA logic.

SDIO interrupts
The interrupt logic generates an interrupt request signal that is asserted when at least one of the selected status flags is high. A mask register is provided to allow selection of the conditions that will generate an interrupt. A status flag generates the interrupt request if a corresponding mask flag is set.

SDIO/DMA interface - procedure for data transfers between the SDIO and memory
In the example shown, the transfer is from the SDIO host controller to an MMC (512 bytes using CMD24 (WRITE_BLOCK). The SDIO FIFO is filled by data stored in a memory using the DMA controller. 1. 2. 3. 4. Do the card identification process Increase the SDIO_CK frequency Select the card by sending CMD7 Configure the DMA2 as follows: a) b) Enable DMA2 controller and clear any pending interrupts. Program the DMA2_Stream3 or DMA2_Stream6 Channel4 source address register with the memory locations base address and DMA2_Stream3 or DMA2_Stream6 Channel4 destination address register with the SDIO_FIFO register address. Program DMA2_Stream3 or DMA2_Stream6 Channel4 control register (memory increment, not peripheral increment, peripheral and source width is word size). Program DMA2_Stream3 or DMA2_Stream6 Channel4 to select the peripheral as flow controller (set PFCTRL bit in DMA_S3CR or DMA_S6CR configuration register). Configure the incremental burst transfer to 4 beats (at least from peripheral side) in DMA2_Stream3 or DMA2_Stream6 Channel4. Enable DMA2_Stream3 or DMA2_Stream6 Channel4

c) d)

e) f)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

860/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) 5. Send CMD24 (WRITE_BLOCK) as follows: a) b) c)

RM0090

Program the SDIO data length register (SDIO data timer register should be already programmed before the card identification process). Program the SDIO argument register with the address location of the card where data is to be transferred. Program the SDIO command register: CmdIndex with 24 (WRITE_BLOCK); WaitResp with 1 (SDIO card host waits for a response); CPSMEN with 1 (SDIO card host enabled to send a command). Other fields are at their reset value. Wait for SDIO_STA[6] = CMDREND interrupt, then program the SDIO data control register: DTEN with 1 (SDIO card host enabled to send data); DTDIR with 0 (from controller to card); DTMODE with 0 (block data transfer); DMAEN with 1 (DMA enabled); DBLOCKSIZE with 0x9 (512 bytes). Other fields are dont care. Wait for SDIO_STA[10] = DBCKEND.

d)

e) 6.

Check that no channels are still enabled by polling the DMA Enabled Channel Status register.

28.4
28.4.1

Card functional description

Card identification mode
While in card identification mode the host resets all cards, validates the operation voltage range, identifies cards and sets a relative card address (RCA) for each card on the bus. All data communications in the card identification mode use the command line (CMD) only.

28.4.2

Card reset
The GO_IDLE_STATE command (CMD0) is the software reset command and it puts the MultiMediaCard and SD memory in the Idle state. The IO_RW_DIRECT command (CMD52) resets the SD I/O card. After power-up or CMD0, all cards output bus drivers are in the highimpedance state and the cards are initialized with a default relative card address (RCA=0x0001) and with a default driver stage register setting (lowest speed, highest driving current capability).

28.4.3

Operating voltage range validation

All cards can communicate with the SDIO card host using any operating voltage within the specification range. The supported minimum and maximum VDD values are defined in the operation conditions register (OCR) on the card. Cards that store the card identification number (CID) and card specific data (CSD) in the payload memory are able to communicate this information only under data-transfer VDD conditions. When the SDIO card host module and the card have incompatible VDD ranges, the card is not able to complete the identification cycle and cannot send CSD data. For this purpose, the special commands, SEND_OP_COND (CMD1), SD_APP_OP_COND (ACMD41 for SD Memory), and IO_SEND_OP_COND (CMD5 for SD I/O), are designed to provide a mechanism to identify and reject cards that do not match the VDD range desired by the SDIO card host. The SDIO card host sends the required VDD voltage window as the operand of these commands. Cards that cannot perform data transfer in the specified range disconnect from the bus and go to the inactive state.

861/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) By using these commands without including the voltage range as the operand, the SDIO card host can query each card and determine the common voltage range before placing outof-range cards in the inactive state. This query is used when the SDIO card host is able to select a common voltage range or when the user requires notification that cards are not usable.

28.4.4

Card identification process

The card identification process differs for MultiMediaCards and SD cards. For MultiMediaCard cards, the identification process starts at clock rate Fod. The SDIO_CMD line output drivers are open-drain and allow parallel card operation during this process. The registration process is accomplished as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The bus is activated. The SDIO card host broadcasts SEND_OP_COND (CMD1) to receive operation conditions. The response is the wired AND operation of the operation condition registers from all cards. Incompatible cards are placed in the inactive state. The SDIO card host broadcasts ALL_SEND_CID (CMD2) to all active cards. The active cards simultaneously send their CID numbers serially. Cards with outgoing CID bits that do not match the bits on the command line stop transmitting and must wait for the next identification cycle. One card successfully transmits a full CID to the SDIO card host and enters the Identification state. The SDIO card host issues SET_RELATIVE_ADDR (CMD3) to that card. This new address is called the relative card address (RCA); it is shorter than the CID and addresses the card. The assigned card changes to the Standby state, it does not react to further identification cycles, and its output switches from open-drain to push-pull. The SDIO card host repeats steps 5 through 7 until it receives a timeout condition.

7.

8.

For the SD card, the identification process starts at clock rate Fod, and the SDIO_CMD line output drives are push-pull drivers instead of open-drain. The registration process is accomplished as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The bus is activated. The SDIO card host broadcasts SD_APP_OP_COND (ACMD41). The cards respond with the contents of their operation condition registers. The incompatible cards are placed in the inactive state. The SDIO card host broadcasts ALL_SEND_CID (CMD2) to all active cards. The cards send back their unique card identification numbers (CIDs) and enter the Identification state. The SDIO card host issues SET_RELATIVE_ADDR (CMD3) to an active card with an address. This new address is called the relative card address (RCA); it is shorter than the CID and addresses the card. The assigned card changes to the Standby state. The SDIO card host can reissue this command to change the RCA. The RCA of the card is the last assigned value. The SDIO card host repeats steps 5 through 7 with all active cards.

8.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

862/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) For the SD I/O card, the registration process is accomplished as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The bus is activated. The SDIO card host sends IO_SEND_OP_COND (CMD5). The cards respond with the contents of their operation condition registers. The incompatible cards are set to the inactive state.

RM0090

The SDIO card host issues SET_RELATIVE_ADDR (CMD3) to an active card with an address. This new address is called the relative card address (RCA); it is shorter than the CID and addresses the card. The assigned card changes to the Standby state. The SDIO card host can reissue this command to change the RCA. The RCA of the card is the last assigned value.

28.4.5

Block write
During block write (CMD24 - 27) one or more blocks of data are transferred from the host to the card with a CRC appended to the end of each block by the host. A card supporting block write is always able to accept a block of data defined by WRITE_BL_LEN. If the CRC fails, the card indicates the failure on the SDIO_D line and the transferred data are discarded and not written, and all further transmitted blocks (in multiple block write mode) are ignored. If the host uses partial blocks whose accumulated length is not block aligned and, block misalignment is not allowed (CSD parameter WRITE_BLK_MISALIGN is not set), the card will detect the block misalignment error before the beginning of the first misaligned block. (ADDRESS_ERROR error bit is set in the status register). The write operation will also be aborted if the host tries to write over a write-protected area. In this case, however, the card will set the WP_VIOLATION bit. Programming of the CID and CSD registers does not require a previous block length setting. The transferred data is also CRC protected. If a part of the CSD or CID register is stored in ROM, then this unchangeable part must match the corresponding part of the receive buffer. If this match fails, then the card reports an error and does not change any register contents. Some cards may require long and unpredictable times to write a block of data. After receiving a block of data and completing the CRC check, the card begins writing and holds the SDIO_D line low if its write buffer is full and unable to accept new data from a new WRITE_BLOCK command. The host may poll the status of the card with a SEND_STATUS command (CMD13) at any time, and the card will respond with its status. The READY_FOR_DATA status bit indicates whether the card can accept new data or whether the write process is still in progress. The host may deselect the card by issuing CMD7 (to select a different card), which will place the card in the Disconnect state and release the SDIO_D line(s) without interrupting the write operation. When selecting the card again, it will reactivate busy indication by pulling SDIO_D to low if programming is still in progress and the write buffer is unavailable.

28.4.6

Block read
In Block read mode the basic unit of data transfer is a block whose maximum size is defined in the CSD (READ_BL_LEN). If READ_BL_PARTIAL is set, smaller blocks whose start and end addresses are entirely contained within one physical block (as defined by READ_BL_LEN) may also be transmitted. A CRC is appended to the end of each block, ensuring data transfer integrity. CMD17 (READ_SINGLE_BLOCK) initiates a block read and after completing the transfer, the card returns to the Transfer state. CMD18 (READ_MULTIPLE_BLOCK) starts a transfer of several consecutive blocks.

863/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) The host can abort reading at any time, within a multiple block operation, regardless of its type. Transaction abort is done by sending the stop transmission command. If the card detects an error (for example, out of range, address misalignment or internal error) during a multiple block read operation (both types) it stops the data transmission and remains in the data state. The host must than abort the operation by sending the stop transmission command. The read error is reported in the response to the stop transmission command. If the host sends a stop transmission command after the card transmits the last block of a multiple block operation with a predefined number of blocks, it is responded to as an illegal command, since the card is no longer in the data state. If the host uses partial blocks whose accumulated length is not block-aligned and block misalignment is not allowed, the card detects a block misalignment error condition at the beginning of the first misaligned block (ADDRESS_ERROR error bit is set in the status register).

28.4.7

Stream access, stream write and stream read (MultiMediaCard only)

In stream mode, data is transferred in bytes and no CRC is appended at the end of each block.

Stream write (MultiMediaCard only)

WRITE_DAT_UNTIL_STOP (CMD20) starts the data transfer from the SDIO card host to the card, beginning at the specified address and continuing until the SDIO card host issues a stop command. When partial blocks are allowed (CSD parameter WRITE_BL_PARTIAL is set), the data stream can start and stop at any address within the card address space, otherwise it can only start and stop at block boundaries. Because the amount of data to be transferred is not determined in advance, a CRC cannot be used. When the end of the memory range is reached while sending data and no stop command is sent by the SD card host, any additional transferred data are discarded. The maximum clock frequency for a stream write operation is given by the following equation fields of the card-specific data register:
8 2 writebllen ) ( NSAC )) Maximumspeed = MIN (TRANSPEED,( -----------------------------------------------------------------------TAAC R2WFACTOR

Maximumspeed = maximum write frequency TRANSPEED = maximum data transfer rate writebllen = maximum write data block length NSAC = data read access time 2 in CLK cycles TAAC = data read access time 1 R2WFACTOR = write speed factor

If the host attempts to use a higher frequency, the card may not be able to process the data and stop programming, set the OVERRUN error bit in the status register, and while ignoring all further data transfer, wait (in the receive data state) for a stop command. The write operation is also aborted if the host tries to write over a write-protected area. In this case, however, the card sets the WP_VIOLATION bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

864/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

Stream read (MultiMediaCard only)

READ_DAT_UNTIL_STOP (CMD11) controls a stream-oriented data transfer. This command instructs the card to send its data, starting at a specified address, until the SDIO card host sends STOP_TRANSMISSION (CMD12). The stop command has an execution delay due to the serial command transmission and the data transfer stops after the end bit of the stop command. When the end of the memory range is reached while sending data and no stop command is sent by the SDIO card host, any subsequent data sent are considered undefined. The maximum clock frequency for a stream read operation is given by the following equation and uses fields of the card specific data register.
8 2 readbllen ) ( NSAC )) Maximumspeed = MIN (TRANSPEED,( ----------------------------------------------------------------------TAAC R2WFACTOR

Maximumspeed = maximum read frequency TRANSPEED = maximum data transfer rate readbllen = maximum read data block length writebllen = maximum write data block length NSAC = data read access time 2 in CLK cycles TAAC = data read access time 1 R2WFACTOR = write speed factor

If the host attempts to use a higher frequency, the card is not able to sustain data transfer. If this happens, the card sets the UNDERRUN error bit in the status register, aborts the transmission and waits in the data state for a stop command.

28.4.8

Erase: group erase and sector erase

The erasable unit of the MultiMediaCard is the erase group. The erase group is measured in write blocks, which are the basic writable units of the card. The size of the erase group is a card-specific parameter and defined in the CSD. The host can erase a contiguous range of Erase Groups. Starting the erase process is a three-step sequence. First the host defines the start address of the range using the ERASE_GROUP_START (CMD35) command, next it defines the last address of the range using the ERASE_GROUP_END (CMD36) command and, finally, it starts the erase process by issuing the ERASE (CMD38) command. The address field in the erase commands is an Erase Group address in byte units. The card ignores all LSBs below the Erase Group size, effectively rounding the address down to the Erase Group boundary. If an erase command is received out of sequence, the card sets the ERASE_SEQ_ERROR bit in the status register and resets the whole sequence. If an out-of-sequence (neither of the erase commands, except SEND_STATUS) command received, the card sets the ERASE_RESET status bit in the status register, resets the erase sequence and executes the last command. If the erase range includes write protected blocks, they are left intact and only unprotected blocks are erased. The WP_ERASE_SKIP status bit in the status register is set. The card indicates that an erase is in progress by holding SDIO_D low. The actual erase time may be quite long, and the host may issue CMD7 to deselect the card.

865/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

28.4.9

Wide bus selection or deselection

Wide bus (4-bit bus width) operation mode is selected or deselected using SET_BUS_WIDTH (ACMD6). The default bus width after power-up or GO_IDLE_STATE (CMD0) is 1 bit. SET_BUS_WIDTH (ACMD6) is only valid in a transfer state, which means that the bus width can be changed only after a card is selected by SELECT/DESELECT_CARD (CMD7).

28.4.10

Protection management
Three write protection methods for the cards are supported in the SDIO card host module: 1. 2. 3. internal card write protection (card responsibility) mechanical write protection switch (SDIO card host module responsibility only) password-protected card lock operation

Internal card write protection

Card data can be protected against write and erase. By setting the permanent or temporary write-protect bits in the CSD, the entire card can be permanently write-protected by the manufacturer or content provider. For cards that support write protection of groups of sectors by setting the WP_GRP_ENABLE bit in the CSD, portions of the data can be protected, and the write protection can be changed by the application. The write protection is in units of WP_GRP_SIZE sectors as specified in the CSD. The SET_WRITE_PROT and CLR_WRITE_PROT commands control the protection of the addressed group. The SEND_WRITE_PROT command is similar to a single block read command. The card sends a data block containing 32 write protection bits (representing 32 write protect groups starting at the specified address) followed by 16 CRC bits. The address field in the write protect commands is a group address in byte units. The card ignores all LSBs below the group size.

Mechanical write protect switch

A mechanical sliding tab on the side of the card allows the user to set or clear the write protection on a card. When the sliding tab is positioned with the window open, the card is write-protected, and when the window is closed, the card contents can be changed. A matched switch on the socket side indicates to the SDIO card host module that the card is write-protected. The SDIO card host module is responsible for protecting the card. The position of the write protect switch is unknown to the internal circuitry of the card.

Password protect
The password protection feature enables the SDIO card host module to lock and unlock a card with a password. The password is stored in the 128-bit PWD register and its size is set in the 8-bit PWD_LEN register. These registers are nonvolatile so that a power cycle does not erase them. Locked cards respond to and execute certain commands. This means that the SDIO card host module is allowed to reset, initialize, select, and query for status, however it is not allowed to access data on the card. When the password is set (as indicated by a nonzero value of PWD_LEN), the card is locked automatically after power-up. As with the CSD and CID register write commands, the lock/unlock commands are available in the transfer state only. In this state, the command does not include an address argument and the card must be selected before using it. The card lock/unlock commands have the structure and bus transaction types of a regular single-block write command. The transferred data block includes all of the required information for the command (the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

866/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

password setting mode, the PWD itself, and card lock/unlock). The command data block size is defined by the SDIO card host module before it sends the card lock/unlock command, and has the structure shown in Table 149. The bit settings are as follows:

ERASE: setting it forces an erase operation. All other bits must be zero, and only the command byte is sent LOCK_UNLOCK: setting it locks the card. LOCK_UNLOCK can be set simultaneously with SET_PWD, however not with CLR_PWD CLR_PWD: setting it clears the password data SET_PWD: setting it saves the password data to memory PWD_LEN: it defines the length of the password in bytes PWD: the password (new or currently used, depending on the command)

The following sections list the command sequences to set/reset a password, lock/unlock the card, and force an erase.

Setting the password

1. 2. Select a card (SELECT/DESELECT_CARD, CMD7), if none is already selected. Define the block length (SET_BLOCKLEN, CMD16) to send, given by the 8-bit card lock/unlock mode, the 8-bit PWD_LEN, and the number of bytes of the new password. When a password replacement is done, the block size must take into account that both the old and the new passwords are sent with the command. Send LOCK/UNLOCK (CMD42) with the appropriate data block size on the data line including the 16-bit CRC. The data block indicates the mode (SET_PWD = 1), the length (PWD_LEN), and the password (PWD) itself. When a password replacement is done, the length value (PWD_LEN) includes the length of both passwords, the old and the new one, and the PWD field includes the old password (currently used) followed by the new password. When the password is matched, the new password and its size are saved into the PWD and PWD_LEN fields, respectively. When the old password sent does not correspond (in size and/or content) to the expected password, the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register, and the password is not changed.

3.

4.

The password length field (PWD_LEN) indicates whether a password is currently set. When this field is nonzero, there is a password set and the card locks itself after power-up. It is possible to lock the card immediately in the current power session by setting the LOCK_UNLOCK bit (while setting the password) or sending an additional command for card locking.

Resetting the password

1. 2. Select a card (SELECT/DESELECT_CARD, CMD7), if none is already selected. Define the block length (SET_BLOCKLEN, CMD16) to send, given by the 8-bit card lock/unlock mode, the 8-bit PWD_LEN, and the number of bytes in the currently used password. Send LOCK/UNLOCK (CMD42) with the appropriate data block size on the data line including the 16-bit CRC. The data block indicates the mode (CLR_PWD = 1), the length (PWD_LEN) and the password (PWD) itself. The LOCK_UNLOCK bit is ignored. When the password is matched, the PWD field is cleared and PWD_LEN is set to 0. When the password sent does not correspond (in size and/or content) to the expected

3.

4.

867/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) password, the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register, and the password is not changed.

Locking a card
1. 2. Select a card (SELECT/DESELECT_CARD, CMD7), if none is already selected. Define the block length (SET_BLOCKLEN, CMD16) to send, given by the 8-bit card lock/unlock mode (byte 0 in Table 149), the 8-bit PWD_LEN, and the number of bytes of the current password. Send LOCK/UNLOCK (CMD42) with the appropriate data block size on the data line including the 16-bit CRC. The data block indicates the mode (LOCK_UNLOCK = 1), the length (PWD_LEN), and the password (PWD) itself. When the password is matched, the card is locked and the CARD_IS_LOCKED status bit is set in the card status register. When the password sent does not correspond (in size and/or content) to the expected password, the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register, and the lock fails.

3.

4.

It is possible to set the password and to lock the card in the same sequence. In this case, the SDIO card host module performs all the required steps for setting the password (see Setting the password on page 867), however it is necessary to set the LOCK_UNLOCK bit in Step 3 when the new password command is sent. When the password is previously set (PWD_LEN is not 0), the card is locked automatically after power on reset. An attempt to lock a locked card or to lock a card that does not have a password fails and the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register.

Unlocking the card

1. 2. Select a card (SELECT/DESELECT_CARD, CMD7), if none is already selected. Define the block length (SET_BLOCKLEN, CMD16) to send, given by the 8-bit cardlock/unlock mode (byte 0 in Table 149), the 8-bit PWD_LEN, and the number of bytes of the current password. Send LOCK/UNLOCK (CMD42) with the appropriate data block size on the data line including the 16-bit CRC. The data block indicates the mode (LOCK_UNLOCK = 0), the length (PWD_LEN), and the password (PWD) itself. When the password is matched, the card is unlocked and the CARD_IS_LOCKED status bit is cleared in the card status register. When the password sent is not correct in size and/or content and does not correspond to the expected password, the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register, and the card remains locked.

3.

4.

The unlocking function is only valid for the current power session. When the PWD field is not clear, the card is locked automatically on the next power-up. An attempt to unlock an unlocked card fails and the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register.

Forcing erase
If the user has forgotten the password (PWD content), it is possible to access the card after clearing all the data on the card. This forced erase operation erases all card data and all password data.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

868/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) 1. 2. 3. Select a card (SELECT/DESELECT_CARD, CMD7), if none is already selected. Set the block length (SET_BLOCKLEN, CMD16) to 1 byte. Only the 8-bit card lock/unlock byte (byte 0 in Table 149) is sent.

RM0090

Send LOCK/UNLOCK (CMD42) with the appropriate data byte on the data line including the 16-bit CRC. The data block indicates the mode (ERASE = 1). All other bits must be zero. When the ERASE bit is the only bit set in the data field, all card contents are erased, including the PWD and PWD_LEN fields, and the card is no longer locked. When any other bits are set, the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register and the card retains all of its data, and remains locked.

4.

An attempt to use a force erase on an unlocked card fails and the LOCK_UNLOCK_FAILED error bit is set in the card status register.

28.4.11

Card status register

The response format R1 contains a 32-bit field named card status. This field is intended to transmit the card status information (which may be stored in a local status register) to the host. If not specified otherwise, the status entries are always related to the previously issued command. Table 136 defines the different entries of the status. The type and clear condition fields in the table are abbreviated as follows: Type:

E: error bit S: status bit R: detected and set for the actual command response X: detected and set during command execution. The SDIO card host must poll the card by issuing the status command to read these bits. A: according to the card current state B: always related to the previous command. Reception of a valid command clears it (with a delay of one command) C: clear by read

Clear condition:

869/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 136. Card status

Bits Identifier Type Value

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Description

Clear condition

31

ADDRESS_ OUT_OF_RANGE

ERX

0= no error 1= error

The command address argument was out of the allowed range for this card. A multiple block or stream read/write C operation is (although started in a valid address) attempting to read or write beyond the card capacity. The commands address argument (in accordance with the currently set block length) positions the first data block misaligned to the card physical blocks. A multiple block read/write operation (although started with a valid address/block-length combination) is attempting to read or write a data block which is not aligned with the physical blocks of the card.

30

ADDRESS_MISALIGN

0= no error 1= error

29

BLOCK_LEN_ERROR

0= no error 1= error

Either the argument of a SET_BLOCKLEN command exceeds the maximum value allowed for the card, or the previously defined block length is C illegal for the current command (e.g. the host issues a write command, the current block length is smaller than the maximum allowed value for the card and it is not allowed to write partial blocks) An error in the sequence of erase commands occurred. An invalid selection of erase groups for erase occurred. Attempt to program a write-protected block. When set, signals that the card is locked by the host Set when a sequence or password error has been detected in lock/unlock card command C C

28 27 26

ERASE_SEQ_ERROR ERASE_PARAM WP_VIOLATION EX EX

0= no error 1= error 0= no error 1= error 0= no error 1= error 0 = card unlocked 1 = card locked 0= no error 1= error 0= no error 1= error 0= no error 1= error 0= success 1= failure 0= no error 1= error

C A

25

CARD_IS_LOCKED

SR

24

LOCK_UNLOCK_ FAILED COM_CRC_ERROR ILLEGAL_COMMAND CARD_ECC_FAILED

EX

23 22 21

ER ER EX

The CRC check of the previous command B failed. Command not legal for the card state Card internal ECC was applied but failed to correct the data. (Undefined by the standard) A card error occurred, which is not related to the host command. B C

20

CC_ERROR

ER

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

870/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Table 136. Card status (continued)
Bits Identifier Type Value Description (Undefined by the standard) A generic card error related to the (and detected during) execution of the last host command (e.g. read or write failures).

RM0090

Clear condition

19

ERROR

EX

0= no error 1= error

18 17

Reserved Reserved Can be either of the following errors: The CID register has already been written and cannot be overwritten The read-only section of the CSD does C not match the card contents An attempt to reverse the copy (set as original) or permanent WP (unprotected) bits was made C

16

CID/CSD_OVERWRITE

EX

0= no error 1= error

15 14

WP_ERASE_SKIP

EX

0= not protected Set when only partial address space 1= protected was erased due to existing write 0= enabled 1= disabled

CARD_ECC_DISABLED S X

The command has been executed without A using the internal ECC. An erase sequence was cleared before executing because an out of erase sequence command was received (commands other than CMD35, CMD36, CMD38 or CMD13)

13

ERASE_RESET

0= cleared 1= set

12:9

CURRENT_STATE

SR

0 = Idle 1 = Ready 2 = Ident 3 = Stby 4 = Tran 5 = Data 6 = Rcv 7 = Prg 8 = Dis 9 = Btst 10-15 = reserved 0= not ready 1 = ready 0= no error 1= switch error

The state of the card when receiving the command. If the command execution causes a state change, it will be visible to B the host in the response on the next command. The four bits are interpreted as a binary number between 0 and 15.

READY_FOR_DATA

SR

Corresponds to buffer empty signalling on the bus If set, the card did not switch to the expected mode as requested by the SWITCH command B

7 6 5 4

SWITCH_ERROR Reserved APP_CMD Reserved for SD I/O Card

EX

SR

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

The card will expect ACMD, or an indication that the command has been interpreted as ACMD

871/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 136. Card status (continued)

Bits 3 2 1 Reserved for manufacturer test mode 0 Identifier AKE_SEQ_ERROR Type ER Value 0= no error 1= error

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Description Error in the sequence of the authentication process

Clear condition C

Reserved for application specific commands

28.4.12

SD status register
The SD status contains status bits that are related to the SD memory card proprietary features and may be used for future application-specific usage. The size of the SD Status is one data block of 512 bits. The contents of this register are transmitted to the SDIO card host if ACMD13 is sent (CMD55 followed with CMD13). ACMD13 can be sent to a card in transfer state only (card is selected). Table 137 defines the different entries of the SD status register. The type and clear condition fields in the table are abbreviated as follows: Type:

E: error bit S: status bit R: detected and set for the actual command response X: detected and set during command execution. The SDIO card Host must poll the card by issuing the status command to read these bits A: according to the card current state B: always related to the previous command. Reception of a valid command clears it (with a delay of one command) C: clear by read

Clear condition:

Table 137. SD status

Bits Identifier Type Value 00= 1 (default) 01= reserved 10= 4 bit width 11= reserved 0= Not in the mode 1= In Secured Mode Description Shows the currently defined databus width that was defined by SET_BUS_WIDTH command Card is in Secured Mode of operation (refer to the SD Security Specification). Clear condition

511: 510 DAT_BUS_WIDTH S R

509

SECURED_MODE S R

508: 496 Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

872/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Table 137. SD status (continued)

Bits Identifier Type Value Description

RM0090

Clear condition

495: 480 SD_CARD_TYPE

SR

00xxh= SD Memory Cards as defined in Physical Spec Ver1.012.00 (x= dont care). The following cards are currently defined: 0000= Regular SD RD/WR Card. 0001= SD ROM Card Size of protected area (See below) Speed Class of the card (See below)

In the future, the 8 LSBs will be used to define different variations of an SD memory card (each bit will define different SD types). The 8 A MSBs will be used to define SD Cards that do not comply with current SD physical layer specification. (See below) (See below) A A

479: 448

SIZE_OF_PROTE CT ED_AREA

SR SR

447: 440 SPEED_CLASS

439: 432

PERFORMANCE_ SR MOVE AU_SIZE Reserved ERASE_SIZE SR SR

Performance of move indicated by 1 [MB/s] step. (See below) (See below) Size of AU (See below) (See below)

431:428 427:424 423:408

Number of AUs to be erased at a time Timeout value for erasing areas specified by UNIT_OF_ERASE_AU Fixed offset value added to erase time.

(See below)

407:402

ERASE_TIMEOUT S R

(See below)

401:400 399:312 311:0

ERASE_OFFSET Reserved

SR

(See below)

Reserved for Manufacturer

SIZE_OF_PROTECTED_AREA
Setting this field differs between standard- and high-capacity cards. In the case of a standard-capacity card, the capacity of protected area is calculated as follows: Protected area = SIZE_OF_PROTECTED_AREA_* MULT * BLOCK_LEN. SIZE_OF_PROTECTED_AREA is specified by the unit in MULT*BLOCK_LEN. In the case of a high-capacity card, the capacity of protected area is specified in this field: Protected area = SIZE_OF_PROTECTED_AREA SIZE_OF_PROTECTED_AREA is specified by the unit in bytes.

SPEED_CLASS
This 8-bit field indicates the speed class and the value can be calculated by PW/2 (where PW is the write performance).

873/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 138. Speed class code field

SPEED_CLASS 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h FFh Class 0 Class 2 Class 4 Class 6 Reserved

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Value definition

PERFORMANCE_MOVE
This 8-bit field indicates Pm (performance move) and the value can be set by 1 [MB/sec] steps. If the card does not move used RUs (recording units), Pm should be considered as infinity. Setting the field to FFh means infinity. Table 139. Performance move field
PERFORMANCE_MOVE 00h 01h 02h --------FEh FFh Not defined 1 [MB/sec] 02h 2 [MB/sec] --------254 [MB/sec] Infinity Value definition

AU_SIZE
This 4-bit field indicates the AU size and the value can be selected in the power of 2 base from 16 KB. Table 140. AU_SIZE field
AU_SIZE 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h Not defined 16 KB 32 KB 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB 1 MB 2 MB Value definition

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

874/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Table 140. AU_SIZE field (continued)
AU_SIZE 09h Ah Fh 4 MB Reserved Value definition

RM0090

The maximum AU size, which depends on the card capacity, is defined in Table 141. The card can be set to any AU size between RU size and maximum AU size. Table 141. Maximum AU size
Capacity Maximum AU Size 16 MB-64 MB 512 KB 128 MB-256 MB 1 MB 512 MB 2 MB 1 GB-32 GB 4 MB

ERASE_SIZE
This 16-bit field indicates NERASE. When NERASE numbers of AUs are erased, the timeout value is specified by ERASE_TIMEOUT (Refer to ERASE_TIMEOUT). The host should determine the proper number of AUs to be erased in one operation so that the host can show the progress of the erase operation. If this field is set to 0, the erase timeout calculation is not supported. Table 142. Erase size field
ERASE_SIZE 0000h 0001h 0002h 0003h --------FFFFh Value definition Erase timeout calculation is not supported. 1 AU 2 AU 3 AU --------65535 AU

ERASE_TIMEOUT
This 6-bit field indicates TERASE and the value indicates the erase timeout from offset when multiple AUs are being erased as specified by ERASE_SIZE. The range of ERASE_TIMEOUT can be defined as up to 63 seconds and the card manufacturer can choose any combination of ERASE_SIZE and ERASE_TIMEOUT depending on the implementation. Determining ERASE_TIMEOUT determines the ERASE_SIZE. Table 143. Erase timeout field
ERASE_TIMEOUT 00 01 02 03 Value definition Erase timeout calculation is not supported. 1 [sec] 2 [sec] 3 [sec]

875/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Table 143. Erase timeout field (continued)
ERASE_TIMEOUT --------63 --------63 [sec] Value definition

ERASE_OFFSET
This 2-bit field indicates TOFFSET and one of four values can be selected. This field is meaningless if the ERASE_SIZE and ERASE_TIMEOUT fields are set to 0. Table 144. Erase offset field
ERASE_OFFSET 0h 1h 2h 3h 0 [sec] 1 [sec] 2 [sec] 3 [sec] Value definition

28.4.13

SD I/O mode
SD I/O interrupts
To allow the SD I/O card to interrupt the MultiMediaCard/SD module, an interrupt function is available on a pin on the SD interface. Pin 8, used as SDIO_D1 when operating in the 4-bit SD mode, signals the cards interrupt to the MultiMediaCard/SD module. The use of the interrupt is optional for each card or function within a card. The SD I/O interrupt is levelsensitive, which means that the interrupt line must be held active (low) until it is either recognized and acted upon by the MultiMediaCard/SD module or deasserted due to the end of the interrupt period. After the MultiMediaCard/SD module has serviced the interrupt, the interrupt status bit is cleared via an I/O write to the appropriate bit in the SD I/O cards internal registers. The interrupt output of all SD I/O cards is active low and the application must provide external pull-up resistors on all data lines (SDIO_D[3:0]). The MultiMediaCard/SD module samples the level of pin 8 (SDIO_D/IRQ) into the interrupt detector only during the interrupt period. At all other times, the MultiMediaCard/SD module ignores this value. The interrupt period is applicable for both memory and I/O operations. The definition of the interrupt period for operations with single blocks is different from the definition for multipleblock data transfers.

SD I/O suspend and resume

Within a multifunction SD I/O or a card with both I/O and memory functions, there are multiple devices (I/O and memory) that share access to the MMC/SD bus. To share access to the MMC/SD module among multiple devices, SD I/O and combo cards optionally implement the concept of suspend/resume. When a card supports suspend/resume, the MMC/SD module can temporarily halt a data transfer operation to one function or memory (suspend) to free the bus for a higher-priority transfer to a different function or memory. After this higher-priority transfer is complete, the original transfer is resumed (restarted) where it left off. Support of suspend/resume is optional on a per-card basis. To perform the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

876/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

suspend/resume operation on the MMC/SD bus, the MMC/SD module performs the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Determines the function currently using the SDIO_D [3:0] line(s) Requests the lower-priority or slower transaction to suspend Waits for the transaction suspension to complete Begins the higher-priority transaction Waits for the completion of the higher priority transaction Restores the suspended transaction

SD I/O ReadWait
The optional ReadWait (RW) operation is defined only for the SD 1-bit and 4-bit modes. The ReadWait operation allows the MMC/SD module to signal a card that it is reading multiple registers (IO_RW_EXTENDED, CMD53) to temporarily stall the data transfer while allowing the MMC/SD module to send commands to any function within the SD I/O device. To determine when a card supports the ReadWait protocol, the MMC/SD module must test capability bits in the internal card registers. The timing for ReadWait is based on the interrupt period.

28.4.14

Commands and responses

Application-specific and general commands
The SD card host module system is designed to provide a standard interface for a variety of applications types. In this environment, there is a need for specific customer/application features. To implement these features, two types of generic commands are defined in the standard: application-specific commands (ACMD) and general commands (GEN_CMD). When the card receives the APP_CMD (CMD55) command, the card expects the next command to be an application-specific command. ACMDs have the same structure as regular MultiMediaCard commands and can have the same CMD number. The card recognizes it as ACMD because it appears after APP_CMD (CMD55). When the command immediately following the APP_CMD (CMD55) is not a defined application-specific command, the standard command is used. For example, when the card has a definition for SD_STATUS (ACMD13), and receives CMD13 immediately following APP_CMD (CMD55), this is interpreted as SD_STATUS (ACMD13). However, when the card receives CMD7 immediately following APP_CMD (CMD55) and the card does not have a definition for ACMD7, this is interpreted as the standard (SELECT/DESELECT_CARD) CMD7. To use one of the manufacturer-specific ACMDs the SD card Host must perform the following steps: 1. Send APP_CMD (CMD55) The card responds to the MultiMediaCard/SD module, indicating that the APP_CMD bit is set and an ACMD is now expected. Send the required ACMD The card responds to the MultiMediaCard/SD module, indicating that the APP_CMD bit is set and that the accepted command is interpreted as an ACMD. When a nonACMD is sent, it is handled by the card as a normal MultiMediaCard command and the APP_CMD bit in the card status register stays clear.

2.

When an invalid command is sent (neither ACMD nor CMD) it is handled as a standard MultiMediaCard illegal command error.

877/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) The bus transaction for a GEN_CMD is the same as the single-block read or write commands (WRITE_BLOCK, CMD24 or READ_SINGLE_BLOCK,CMD17). In this case, the argument denotes the direction of the data transfer rather than the address, and the data block has vendor-specific format and meaning. The card must be selected (in transfer state) before sending GEN_CMD (CMD56). The data block size is defined by SET_BLOCKLEN (CMD16). The response to GEN_CMD (CMD56) is in R1b format.

Command types
Both application-specific and general commands are divided into the four following types:

broadcast command (BC): sent to all cards; no responses returned. broadcast command with response (BCR): sent to all cards; responses received from all cards simultaneously. addressed (point-to-point) command (AC): sent to the card that is selected; does not include a data transfer on the SDIO_D line(s). addressed (point-to-point) data transfer command (ADTC): sent to the card that is selected; includes a data transfer on the SDIO_D line(s).

Command formats
See Table 129 on page 854 for command formats.

Commands for the MultiMediaCard/SD module

Table 145. Block-oriented write commands
CMD index Type Argument Response format Abbreviation Description Defines the number of blocks which are going to be transferred in the multiple-block read or write command that follows. Writes a block of the size selected by the SET_BLOCKLEN command.

CMD23 ac

[31:16] set to 0 [15:0] number R1 of blocks [31:0] data address [31:0] data address R1

SET_BLOCK_COUNT

CMD24 adtc

WRITE_BLOCK

CMD25 adtc

R1

Continuously writes blocks of data until a STOP_TRANSMISSION WRITE_MULTIPLE_BLOCK follows or the requested number of blocks has been received. Programming of the card identification register. This command must be issued only once per card. The card contains hardware to prevent this operation after the first programming. Normally this command is reserved for manufacturer. Programming of the programmable bits of the CSD.

CMD26 adtc

[31:0] stuff bits R1

PROGRAM_CID

CMD27 adtc

[31:0] stuff bits R1

PROGRAM_CSD

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

878/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Table 146. Block-oriented write protection commands
CMD index Type Argument Response format Abbreviation Description

RM0090

CMD28 ac

[31:0] data address

R1b

SET_WRITE_PROT

If the card has write protection features, this command sets the write protection bit of the addressed group. The properties of write protection are coded in the cardspecific data (WP_GRP_SIZE). If the card provides write protection features, this command clears the write protection bit of the addressed group. If the card provides write protection features, this command asks the card to send the status of the write protection bits.

CMD29 ac

[31:0] data address [31:0] write protect data address

R1b

CLR_WRITE_PROT

CMD30 adtc

R1

SEND_WRITE_PROT

CMD31 Reserved

Table 147. Erase commands

CMD index Type Argument Response format Abbreviation Description

CMD32 Reserved. These command indexes cannot be used in order to maintain backward compatibility with older ... versions of the MultiMediaCard. CMD34 CMD35 ac [31:0] data address R1 Sets the address of the first erase ERASE_GROUP_START group within a range to be selected for erase. ERASE_GROUP_END Sets the address of the last erase group within a continuous range to be selected for erase.

CMD36 ac

[31:0] data address R1

CMD37

Reserved. This command index cannot be used in order to maintain backward compatibility with older versions of the MultiMediaCards [31:0] stuff bits R1 ERASE Erases all previously selected write blocks.

CMD38 ac

Table 148. I/O mode commands

CMD index Type Argument Response format Abbreviation Description Used to write and read 8-bit (register) data fields. The command addresses a card and a register and provides the data for writing if the write flag is set. The R4 response contains data read from the addressed register. This command accesses application-dependent registers that are not defined in the MultiMediaCard standard.

CMD39 ac

[31:16] RCA [15:15] register write flag [14:8] register address [7:0] register data

R4

FAST_IO

879/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 148. I/O mode commands (continued)

CMD index Type Argument [31:0] stuff bits Response format R5

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Abbreviation

Description

CMD40 bcr

GO_IRQ_STATE Places the system in the interrupt mode.

CMD41 Reserved

Table 149. Lock card

CMD index Type Argument Response format R1b Abbreviation Description Sets/resets the password or locks/unlocks the card. The size of the data block is set by the SET_BLOCK_LEN command.

CMD42 adtc

[31:0] stuff bits

LOCK_UNLOCK

CMD43 ... Reserved CMD54

Table 150. Application-specific commands

CMD index CMD55 Type Argument [31:16] RCA [15:0] stuff bits Response format R1 Abbreviation Description Indicates to the card that the next command bits is an application specific command rather than a standard command Used either to transfer a data block to the card or to get a data block from the card for general purpose/application-specific commands. The size of the data block shall be set by the SET_BLOCK_LEN command.

ac

APP_CMD

CMD56

adtc

[31:1] stuff bits [0]: RD/WR

CMD57 ... CMD59 CMD60 ... CMD63

Reserved.

Reserved for manufacturer.

28.5

Response formats
All responses are sent via the MCCMD command line SDIO_CMD. The response transmission always starts with the left bit of the bit string corresponding to the response code word. The code length depends on the response type. A response always starts with a start bit (always 0), followed by the bit indicating the direction of transmission (card = 0). A value denoted by x in the tables below indicates a variable entry. All responses, except for the R3 response type, are protected by a CRC. Every command code word is terminated by the end bit (always 1). There are five types of responses. Their formats are defined as follows:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

880/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.5.1

R1 (normal response command)

Code length = 48 bits. The 45:40 bits indicate the index of the command to be responded to, this value being interpreted as a binary-coded number (between 0 and 63). The status of the card is coded in 32 bits. Table 151. R1 response
Bit position 47 46 [45:40] [39:8] [7:1] 0 1 1 6 32 7 1 Width (bits 0 0 X X X 1 Value Start bit Transmission bit Command index Card status CRC7 End bit Description

28.5.2

R1b
It is identical to R1 with an optional busy signal transmitted on the data line. The card may become busy after receiving these commands based on its state prior to the command reception.

28.5.3

R2 (CID, CSD register)

Code length = 136 bits. The contents of the CID register are sent as a response to the CMD2 and CMD10 commands. The contents of the CSD register are sent as a response to CMD9. Only the bits [127...1] of the CID and CSD are transferred, the reserved bit [0] of these registers is replaced by the end bit of the response. The card indicates that an erase is in progress by holding MCDAT low. The actual erase time may be quite long, and the host may issue CMD7 to deselect the card. Table 152. R2 response
Bit position 135 134 [133:128] [127:1] 0 1 1 6 127 1 Width (bits 0 0 111111 X 1 Value Start bit Transmission bit Command index Card status End bit Description

881/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

28.5.4

R3 (OCR register)
Code length: 48 bits. The contents of the OCR register are sent as a response to CMD1. The level coding is as follows: restricted voltage windows = low, card busy = low. Table 153. R3 response
Bit position 47 46 [45:40] [39:8] [7:1] 0 1 1 6 32 7 1 Width (bits 0 0 111111 X 1111111 1 Value Start bit Transmission bit Reserved OCR register Reserved End bit Description

28.5.5

R4 (Fast I/O)
Code length: 48 bits. The argument field contains the RCA of the addressed card, the register address to be read out or written to, and its content. Table 154. R4 response
Bit position 47 46 [45:40] [31:16] [39:8] Argument field [15:8] [7:0] [7:1] 0 1 1 6 16 8 8 7 1 Width (bits 0 0 100111 X X X X 1 Value Description Start bit Transmission bit CMD39 RCA register address read register contents CRC7 End bit

28.5.6

R4b
For SD I/O only: an SDIO card receiving the CMD5 will respond with a unique SDIO response R4. The format is: Table 155. R4b response
Bit position 47 46 [45:40] 1 1 6 Width (bits 0 0 x Value Description Start bit Transmission bit Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

882/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) Table 155. R4b response (continued)
Bit position 39 [38:36] [39:8] Argument field 35 [34:32] [31:8] [7:1] 0 16 3 1 3 24 7 1 Width (bits X X X X X X 1 Value

RM0090

Description Card is ready Number of I/O functions Present memory Stuff bits I/O ORC Reserved End bit

Once an SD I/O card has received a CMD5, the I/O portion of that card is enabled to respond normally to all further commands. This I/O enable of the function within the I/O card will remain set until a reset, power cycle or CMD52 with write to I/O reset is received by the card. Note that an SD memory-only card may respond to a CMD5. The proper response for a memory-only card would be Present memory = 1 and Number of I/O functions = 0. A memory-only card built to meet the SD Memory Card specification version 1.0 would detect the CMD5 as an illegal command and not respond. The I/O aware host will send CMD5. If the card responds with response R4, the host determines the cards configuration based on the data contained within the R4 response.

28.5.7

R5 (interrupt request)
Only for MultiMediaCard. Code length: 48 bits. If the response is generated by the host, the RCA field in the argument will be 0x0. Table 156. R5 response
Bit position 47 46 [45:40] [31:16] [39:8] Argument field [15:0] [7:1] 0 16 7 1 X X 1 Not defined. May be used for IRQ data CRC7 End bit 1 1 6 16 Width (bits 0 0 101000 X Value Description Start bit Transmission bit CMD40 RCA [31:16] of winning card or of the host

883/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

28.5.8

R6
Only for SD I/O. The normal response to CMD3 by a memory device. It is shown in Table 157. Table 157. R6 response
Bit position 47 46 [45:40] [39:8] Argument field [7:1] 0 [31:16] [15:0] Width (bits) 1 1 6 16 16 7 1 0 0 101000 X X X 1 Value Start bit Transmission bit CMD40 RCA [31:16] of winning card or of the host Not defined. May be used for IRQ data CRC7 End bit Description

The card [23:8] status bits are changed when CMD3 is sent to an I/O-only card. In this case, the 16 bits of response are the SD I/O-only values:

Bit [15] COM_CRC_ERROR Bit [14] ILLEGAL_COMMAND Bit [13] ERROR Bits [12:0] Reserved

28.6

SDIO I/O card-specific operations

The following features are SD I/O-specific operations:

SDIO read wait operation by SDIO_D2 signalling SDIO read wait operation by stopping the clock SDIO suspend/resume operation (write and read suspend) SDIO interrupts

The SDIO supports these operations only if the SDIO_DCTRL[11] bit is set, except for read suspend that does not need specific hardware implementation.

28.6.1

SDIO I/O read wait operation by SDIO_D2 signalling

It is possible to start the readwait interval before the first block is received: when the data path is enabled (SDIO_DCTRL[0] bit set), the SDIO-specific operation is enabled (SDIO_DCTRL[11] bit set), read wait starts (SDI0_DCTRL[10] =0 and SDI_DCTRL[8] =1) and data direction is from card to SDIO (SDIO_DCTRL[1] = 1), the DPSM directly moves from Idle to Readwait. In Readwait the DPSM drives SDIO_D2 to 0 after 2 SDIO_CK clock cycles. In this state, when you set the RWSTOP bit (SDIO_DCTRL[9]), the DPSM remains in Wait for two more SDIO_CK clock cycles to drive SDIO_D2 to 1 for one clock cycle (in accordance with SDIO specification). The DPSM then starts waiting again until it receives data from the card. The DPSM will not start a readwait interval while receiving a block even if read wait start is set: the readwait interval will start after the CRC is received. The RWSTOP bit has to be cleared to start a new read wait operation. During the readwait interval, the SDIO can detect SDIO interrupts on SDIO_D1.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

884/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.6.2

SDIO read wait operation by stopping SDIO_CK

If the SDIO card does not support the previous read wait method, the SDIO can perform a read wait by stopping SDIO_CK (SDIO_DCTRL is set just like in the method presented in Section 28.6.1, but SDIO_DCTRL[10] =1): DSPM stops the clock two SDIO_CK cycles after the end bit of the current received block and starts the clock again after the read wait start bit is set. As SDIO_CK is stopped, any command can be issued to the card. During a read/wait interval, the SDIO can detect SDIO interrupts on SDIO_D1.

28.6.3

SDIO suspend/resume operation

While sending data to the card, the SDIO can suspend the write operation. the SDIO_CMD[11] bit is set and indicates to the CPSM that the current command is a suspend command. The CPSM analyzes the response and when the ACK is received from the card (suspend accepted), it acknowledges the DPSM that goes Idle after receiving the CRC token of the current block. The hardware does not save the number of the remaining block to be sent to complete the suspended operation (resume). The write operation can be suspended by software, just by disabling the DPSM (SDIO_DCTRL[0] =0) when the ACK of the suspend command is received from the card. The DPSM enters then the Idle state. To suspend a read: the DPSM waits in the Wait_r state as the function to be suspended sends a complete packet just before stopping the data transaction. The application continues reading RxFIFO until the FIF0 is empty, and the DPSM goes Idle automatically.

28.6.4

SDIO interrupts
SDIO interrupts are detected on the SDIO_D1 line once the SDIO_DCTRL[11] bit is set.

28.7

CE-ATA specific operations

The following features are CE-ATA specific operations:

sending the command completion signal disable to the CE-ATA device receiving the command completion signal from the CE-ATA device signaling the completion of the CE-ATA command to the CPU, using the status bit and/or interrupt.

The SDIO supports these operations only for the CE-ATA CMD61 command, that is, if SDIO_CMD[14] is set.

28.7.1

Command completion signal disable

Command completion signal disable is sent 8 bit cycles after the reception of a short response if the enable CMD completion bit, SDIO_CMD[12], is not set and the not interrupt Enable bit, SDIO_CMD[13], is set. The CPSM enters the Pend state, loading the command shift register with the disable sequence 00001 and, the command counter with 43. Eight cycles after, a trigger moves

885/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO) the CPSM to the Send state. When the command counter reaches 48, the CPSM becomes Idle as no response is awaited.

28.7.2

Command completion signal enable

If the enable CMD completion bit SDIO_CMD[12] is set and the not interrupt Enable bit SDIO_CMD[13] is set, the CPSM waits for the command completion signal in the Waitcpl state. When 0 is received on the CMD line, the CPSM enters the Idle state. No new command can be sent for 7 bit cycles. Then, for the last 5 cycles (out of the 7) the CMD line is driven to 1 in push-pull mode.

28.7.3

CE-ATA interrupt
The command completion is signaled to the CPU by the status bit SDIO_STA[23]. This static bit can be cleared with the clear bit SDIO_ICR[23]. The SDIO_STA[23] status bit can generate an interrupt on each interrupt line, depending on the mask bit SDIO_MASKx[23].

28.7.4

Aborting CMD61
If the command completion disable signal has not been sent and CMD61 needs to be aborted, the command state machine must be disabled. It then becomes Idle, and the CMD12 command can be sent. No command completion disable signal is sent during the operation.

28.8

HW flow control
The HW flow control functionality is used to avoid FIFO underrun (TX mode) and overrun (RX mode) errors. The behavior is to stop SDIO_CK and freeze SDIO state machines. The data transfer is stalled while the FIFO is unable to transmit or receive data. Only state machines clocked by SDIOCLK are frozen, the APB2 interface is still alive. The FIFO can thus be filled or emptied even if flow control is activated. To enable HW flow control, the SDIO_CLKCR[14] register bit must be set to 1. After reset Flow Control is disabled.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

886/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.9

SDIO registers
The device communicates to the system via 32-bit-wide control registers accessible via APB2. The peripheral registers have to be accessed by words (32 bits).

28.9.1

SDIO power control register (SDIO_POWER)

Address offset: 0x00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved

PWRC TRL rw rw

Bits 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 1:0 PWRCTRL: Power supply control bits. These bits are used to define the current functional state of the card clock: 00: Power-off: the clock to card is stopped. 01: Reserved 10: Reserved power-up 11: Power-on: the card is clocked.

Note: Note:

At least seven HCLK clock periods are needed between two write accesses to this register. After a data write, data cannot be written to this register for three SDIOCLK (48 MHz) clock periods plus two PCLK2 clock periods.

28.9.2

SDI clock control register (SDIO_CLKCR)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_CLKCR register controls the SDIO_CK output clock.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 NEGEDGE HWFC_EN BYPASS WID BUS rw rw

9 PWRSAV

8 CLKEN

CLKDIV

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

887/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 14 HWFC_EN: HW Flow Control enable 0b: HW Flow Control is disabled 1b: HW Flow Control is enabled When HW Flow Control is enabled, the meaning of the TXFIFOE and RXFIFOF interrupt signals, please see SDIO Status register definition in Section 28.9.11. Bit 13 NEGEDGE:SDIO_CK dephasing selection bit 0b: SDIO_CK generated on the rising edge of the master clock SDIOCLK 1b: SDIO_CK generated on the falling edge of the master clock SDIOCLK Bits 12:11 WIDBUS: Wide bus mode enable bit 00: Default bus mode: SDIO_D0 used 01: 4-wide bus mode: SDIO_D[3:0] used 10: 8-wide bus mode: SDIO_D[7:0] used Bit 10 BYPASS: Clock divider bypass enable bit 0: Disable bypass: SDIOCLK is divided according to the CLKDIV value before driving the SDIO_CK output signal. 1: Enable bypass: SDIOCLK directly drives the SDIO_CK output signal. Bit 9 PWRSAV: Power saving configuration bit For power saving, the SDIO_CK clock output can be disabled when the bus is idle by setting PWRSAV: 0: SDIO_CK clock is always enabled 1: SDIO_CK is only enabled when the bus is active Bit 8 CLKEN: Clock enable bit 0: SDIO_CK is disabled 1: SDIO_CK is enabled Bits 7:0 CLKDIV: Clock divide factor This field defines the divide factor between the input clock (SDIOCLK) and the output clock (SDIO_CK): SDIO_CK frequency = SDIOCLK / [CLKDIV + 2].

Note:

While the SD/SDIO card or MultiMediaCard is in identification mode, the SDIO_CK frequency must be less than 400 kHz. The clock frequency can be changed to the maximum card bus frequency when relative card addresses are assigned to all cards. After a data write, data cannot be written to this register for three SDIOCLK (48 MHz) clock periods plus two PCLK2 clock periods. SDIO_CK can also be stopped during the read wait interval for SD I/O cards: in this case the SDIO_CLKCR register does not control SDIO_CK.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

888/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.9.3

SDIO argument register (SDIO_ARG)

Address offset: 0x08 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_ARG register contains a 32-bit command argument, which is sent to a card as part of a command message.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CMDARG rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:0 CMDARG: Command argument Command argument sent to a card as part of a command message. If a command contains an argument, it must be loaded into this register before writing a command to the command register.

889/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

28.9.4

SDIO command register (SDIO_CMD)

Address offset: 0x0C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_CMD register contains the command index and command type bits. The command index is sent to a card as part of a command message. The command type bits control the command path state machine (CPSM).

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 SDIOSuspend ENCMDcompl CE-ATACMD CPSMEN

9 WAITPEND

8 WAITINT

7 WAITRESP

3 CMDINDEX

Reserved

rw

rw

nIEN

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 14 ATACMD: CE-ATA command If ATACMD is set, the CPSM transfers CMD61. Bit 13 nIEN: not Interrupt Enable if this bit is 0, interrupts in the CE-ATA device are enabled. Bit 12 ENCMDcompl: Enable CMD completion If this bit is set, the command completion signal is enabled. Bit 11 SDIOSuspend: SD I/O suspend command If this bit is set, the command to be sent is a suspend command (to be used only with SDIO card). Bit 10 CPSMEN: Command path state machine (CPSM) Enable bit If this bit is set, the CPSM is enabled. Bit 9 WAITPEND: CPSM Waits for ends of data transfer (CmdPend internal signal). If this bit is set, the CPSM waits for the end of data transfer before it starts sending a command. Bit 8 WAITINT: CPSM waits for interrupt request If this bit is set, the CPSM disables command timeout and waits for an interrupt request. Bits 7:6 WAITRESP: Wait for response bits They are used to configure whether the CPSM is to wait for a response, and if yes, which kind of response. 00: No response, expect CMDSENT flag 01: Short response, expect CMDREND or CCRCFAIL flag 10: No response, expect CMDSENT flag 11: Long response, expect CMDREND or CCRCFAIL flag Bit 5:0 CMDINDEX: Command index The command index is sent to the card as part of a command message.

Note:

After a data write, data cannot be written to this register for three SDIOCLK (48 MHz) clock periods plus two PCLK2 clock periods. MultiMediaCards can send two kinds of response: short responses, 48 bits long, or long responses,136 bits long. SD card and SD I/O card can send only short responses, the
Doc ID 018909 Rev 4 890/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

argument can vary according to the type of response: the software will distinguish the type of response according to the sent command. CE-ATA devices send only short responses.

28.9.5

SDIO command response register (SDIO_RESPCMD)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_RESPCMD register contains the command index field of the last command response received. If the command response transmission does not contain the command index field (long or OCR response), the RESPCMD field is unknown, although it must contain 111111b (the value of the reserved field from the response).

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved

RESPCMD r r r r r r

Bits 31:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 5:0 RESPCMD: Response command index Read-only bit field. Contains the command index of the last command response received.

28.9.6

SDIO response 1..4 register (SDIO_RESPx)

Address offset: (0x10 + (4 x)); x = 1..4 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_RESP1/2/3/4 registers contain the status of a card, which is part of the received response.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CARDSTATUSx r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:0 CARDSTATUSx: see Table 158.

The Card Status size is 32 or 127 bits, depending on the response type. Table 158. Response type and SDIO_RESPx registers
Register SDIO_RESP1 SDIO_RESP2 SDIO_RESP3 SDIO_RESP4 Short response Card Status[31:0] Unused Unused Unused Long response Card Status [127:96] Card Status [95:64] Card Status [63:32] Card Status [31:1]0b

The most significant bit of the card status is received first. The SDIO_RESP3 register LSB is always 0b.

891/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

28.9.7

SDIO data timer register (SDIO_DTIMER)

Address offset: 0x24 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_DTIMER register contains the data timeout period, in card bus clock periods. A counter loads the value from the SDIO_DTIMER register, and starts decrementing when the data path state machine (DPSM) enters the Wait_R or Busy state. If the timer reaches 0 while the DPSM is in either of these states, the timeout status flag is set.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DATATIME rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:0 DATATIME: Data timeout period Data timeout period expressed in card bus clock periods.

Note:

A data transfer must be written to the data timer register and the data length register before being written to the data control register.

28.9.8

SDIO data length register (SDIO_DLEN)

Address offset: 0x28 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_DLEN register contains the number of data bytes to be transferred. The value is loaded into the data counter when data transfer starts.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DATALENGTH Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 24:0 DATALENGTH: Data length value Number of data bytes to be transferred.

Note:

For a block data transfer, the value in the data length register must be a multiple of the block size (see SDIO_DCTRL). A data transfer must be written to the data timer register and the data length register before being written to the data control register. For an SDIO multibyte transfer the value in the data length register must be between 1 and 512.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

892/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.9.9

SDIO data control register (SDIO_DCTRL)

Address offset: 0x2C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_DCTRL register control the data path state machine (DPSM).

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RWMOD SDIOEN

9 RWSTOP

8 RWSTART

3 DMAEN

2 DTMODE

1 DTDIR rw

0 DTEN rw

DBLOCKSIZE

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 11 SDIOEN: SD I/O enable functions If this bit is set, the DPSM performs an SD I/O-card-specific operation. Bit 10 RWMOD: Read wait mode 0: Read Wait control stopping SDIO_D2 1: Read Wait control using SDIO_CK Bit 9 RWSTOP: Read wait stop 0: Read wait in progress if RWSTART bit is set 1: Enable for read wait stop if RWSTART bit is set Bit 8 RWSTART: Read wait start If this bit is set, read wait operation starts. Bits 7:4 DBLOCKSIZE: Data block size Define the data block length when the block data transfer mode is selected: 0000: (0 decimal) lock length = 20 = 1 byte 0001: (1 decimal) lock length = 21 = 2 bytes 0010: (2 decimal) lock length = 22 = 4 bytes 0011: (3 decimal) lock length = 23 = 8 bytes 0100: (4 decimal) lock length = 24 = 16 bytes 0101: (5 decimal) lock length = 25 = 32 bytes 0110: (6 decimal) lock length = 26 = 64 bytes 0111: (7 decimal) lock length = 27 = 128 bytes 1000: (8 decimal) lock length = 28 = 256 bytes 1001: (9 decimal) lock length = 29 = 512 bytes 1010: (10 decimal) lock length = 210 = 1024 bytes 1011: (11 decimal) lock length = 211 = 2048 bytes 1100: (12 decimal) lock length = 212 = 4096 bytes 1101: (13 decimal) lock length = 213 = 8192 bytes 1110: (14 decimal) lock length = 214 = 16384 bytes 1111: (15 decimal) reserved Bit 3 DMAEN: DMA enable bit 0: DMA disabled. 1: DMA enabled.

893/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Bit 2 DTMODE: Data transfer mode selection 1: Stream or SDIO multibyte data transfer. 0: Block data transfer 1: Stream or SDIO multibyte data transfer Bit 1 DTDIR: Data transfer direction selection 0: From controller to card. 1: From card to controller. Bit 0 DTEN: Data transfer enabled bit Data transfer starts if 1b is written to the DTEN bit. Depending on the direction bit, DTDIR, the DPSM moves to the Wait_S, Wait_R state or Readwait if RW Start is set immediately at the beginning of the transfer. It is not necessary to clear the enable bit after the end of a data transfer but the SDIO_DCTRL must be updated to enable a new data transfer

Note:

After a data write, data cannot be written to this register for three SDIOCLK (48 MHz) clock periods plus two PCLK2 clock periods. The meaning of the DTMODE bit changes according to the value of the SDIOEN bit. When SDIOEN=0 and DTMODE=1, the MultiMediaCard stream mode is enabled, and when SDIOEN=1 and DTMODE=1, the peripheral enables an SDIO multibyte transfer.

28.9.10

SDIO data counter register (SDIO_DCOUNT)

Address offset: 0x30 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_DCOUNT register loads the value from the data length register (see SDIO_DLEN) when the DPSM moves from the Idle state to the Wait_R or Wait_S state. As data is transferred, the counter decrements the value until it reaches 0. The DPSM then moves to the Idle state and the data status end flag, DATAEND, is set.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DATACOUNT Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 24:0 DATACOUNT: Data count value When this bit is read, the number of remaining data bytes to be transferred is returned. Write has no effect.

Note:

This register should be read only when the data transfer is complete.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

894/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.9.11

SDIO status register (SDIO_STA)

Address offset: 0x34 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_STA register is a read-only register. It contains two types of flag:

Static flags (bits [23:22,10:0]): these bits remain asserted until they are cleared by writing to the SDIO Interrupt Clear register (see SDIO_ICR) Dynamic flags (bits [21:11]): these bits change state depending on the state of the underlying logic (for example, FIFO full and empty flags are asserted and deasserted as data while written to the FIFO)
9 STBITERR 8 DATAEND 7 CMDSENT 6 CMDREND 5 RXOVERR 4 TXUNDERR 3 DTIMEOUT 2 CTIMEOUT 1 DCRCFAIL r 0 CCRCFAIL r

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CEATAEND RXFIFOHF TXFIFOHE DBCKEND r RXFIFOE Reserved RXFIFOF TXFIFOE CMDACT r TXFIFOF RXDAVL TXDAVL RXACT r SDIOIT TXACT r

Res.

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 23 CEATAEND: CE-ATA command completion signal received for CMD61 Bit 22 SDIOIT: SDIO interrupt received Bit 21 RXDAVL: Data available in receive FIFO Bit 20 TXDAVL: Data available in transmit FIFO Bit 19 RXFIFOE: Receive FIFO empty Bit 18 TXFIFOE: Transmit FIFO empty When HW Flow Control is enabled, TXFIFOE signals becomes activated when the FIFO contains 2 words. Bit 17 RXFIFOF: Receive FIFO full When HW Flow Control is enabled, RXFIFOF signals becomes activated 2 words before the FIFO is full. Bit 16 TXFIFOF: Transmit FIFO full Bit 15 RXFIFOHF: Receive FIFO half full: there are at least 8 words in the FIFO Bit 14 TXFIFOHE: Transmit FIFO half empty: at least 8 words can be written into the FIFO Bit 13 RXACT: Data receive in progress Bit 12 TXACT: Data transmit in progress Bit 11 CMDACT: Command transfer in progress Bit 10 DBCKEND: Data block sent/received (CRC check passed) Bit 9 STBITERR: Start bit not detected on all data signals in wide bus mode Bit 8 DATAEND: Data end (data counter, SDIDCOUNT, is zero) Bit 7 CMDSENT: Command sent (no response required) Bit 6 CMDREND: Command response received (CRC check passed) Bit 5 RXOVERR: Received FIFO overrun error

895/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Bit 4 TXUNDERR: Transmit FIFO underrun error Bit 3 DTIMEOUT: Data timeout Bit 2 CTIMEOUT: Command response timeout The Command TimeOut period has a fixed value of 64 SDIO_CK clock periods. Bit 1 DCRCFAIL: Data block sent/received (CRC check failed) Bit 0 CCRCFAIL: Command response received (CRC check failed)

28.9.12

SDIO interrupt clear register (SDIO_ICR)

Address offset: 0x38 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_ICR register is a write-only register. Writing a bit with 1b clears the corresponding bit in the SDIO_STA Status register.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CEATAENDC DBCKENDC SDIOITC

9 STBITERRC

8 DATAENDC

7 CMDSENTC

6 CMDRENDC

5 RXOVERRC

4 TXUNDERRC

3 DTIMEOUTC

2 CTIMEOUTC

1 DCRCFAILC rw

0 CCRCFAILC rw

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 23 CEATAENDC: CEATAEND flag clear bit Set by software to clear the CEATAEND flag. 0: CEATAEND not cleared 1: CEATAEND cleared Bit 22 SDIOITC: SDIOIT flag clear bit Set by software to clear the SDIOIT flag. 0: SDIOIT not cleared 1: SDIOIT cleared Bits 21:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 10 DBCKENDC: DBCKEND flag clear bit Set by software to clear the DBCKEND flag. 0: DBCKEND not cleared 1: DBCKEND cleared Bit 9 STBITERRC: STBITERR flag clear bit Set by software to clear the STBITERR flag. 0: STBITERR not cleared 1: STBITERR cleared Bit 8 DATAENDC: DATAEND flag clear bit Set by software to clear the DATAEND flag. 0: DATAEND not cleared 1: DATAEND cleared

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

896/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

Bit 7 CMDSENTC: CMDSENT flag clear bit Set by software to clear the CMDSENT flag. 0: CMDSENT not cleared 1: CMDSENT cleared Bit 6 CMDRENDC: CMDREND flag clear bit Set by software to clear the CMDREND flag. 0: CMDREND not cleared 1: CMDREND cleared Bit 5 RXOVERRC: RXOVERR flag clear bit Set by software to clear the RXOVERR flag. 0: RXOVERR not cleared 1: RXOVERR cleared Bit 4 TXUNDERRC: TXUNDERR flag clear bit Set by software to clear TXUNDERR flag. 0: TXUNDERR not cleared 1: TXUNDERR cleared Bit 3 DTIMEOUTC: DTIMEOUT flag clear bit Set by software to clear the DTIMEOUT flag. 0: DTIMEOUT not cleared 1: DTIMEOUT cleared Bit 2 CTIMEOUTC: CTIMEOUT flag clear bit Set by software to clear the CTIMEOUT flag. 0: CTIMEOUT not cleared 1: CTIMEOUT cleared Bit 1 DCRCFAILC: DCRCFAIL flag clear bit Set by software to clear the DCRCFAIL flag. 0: DCRCFAIL not cleared 1: DCRCFAIL cleared Bit 0 CCRCFAILC: CCRCFAIL flag clear bit Set by software to clear the CCRCFAIL flag. 0: CCRCFAIL not cleared 1: CCRCFAIL cleared

897/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

28.9.13

SDIO mask register (SDIO_MASK)

Address offset: 0x3C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The interrupt mask register determines which status flags generate an interrupt request by setting the corresponding bit to 1b.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CEATAENDIE RXFIFOHFIE TXFIFOHEIE DBCKENDIE RXFIFOEIE RXFIFOFIE TXFIFOEIE CMDACTIE TXFIFOFIE RXDAVLIE TXDAVLIE RXACTIE SDIOITIE TXACTIE

9 STBITERRIE

8 DATAENDIE

7 CMDSENTIE

6 CMDRENDIE

5 RXOVERRIE

4 TXUNDERRIE

3 DTIMEOUTIE

2 CTIMEOUTIE

1 DCRCFAILIE rw

0 CCRCFAILIE rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bit 23 CEATAENDIE: CE-ATA command completion signal received interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable the interrupt generated when receiving the CE-ATA command completion signal. 0: CE-ATA command completion signal received interrupt disabled 1: CE-ATA command completion signal received interrupt enabled Bit 22 SDIOITIE: SDIO mode interrupt received interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable the interrupt generated when receiving the SDIO mode interrupt. 0: SDIO Mode Interrupt Received interrupt disabled 1: SDIO Mode Interrupt Received interrupt enabled Bit 21 RXDAVLIE: Data available in Rx FIFO interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable the interrupt generated by the presence of data available in Rx FIFO. 0: Data available in Rx FIFO interrupt disabled 1: Data available in Rx FIFO interrupt enabled Bit 20 TXDAVLIE: Data available in Tx FIFO interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable the interrupt generated by the presence of data available in Tx FIFO. 0: Data available in Tx FIFO interrupt disabled 1: Data available in Tx FIFO interrupt enabled Bit 19 RXFIFOEIE: Rx FIFO empty interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Rx FIFO empty. 0: Rx FIFO empty interrupt disabled 1: Rx FIFO empty interrupt enabled Bit 18 TXFIFOEIE: Tx FIFO empty interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Tx FIFO empty. 0: Tx FIFO empty interrupt disabled 1: Tx FIFO empty interrupt enabled Bit 17 RXFIFOFIE: Rx FIFO full interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Rx FIFO full. 0: Rx FIFO full interrupt disabled 1: Rx FIFO full interrupt enabled

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

898/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

Bit 16 TXFIFOFIE: Tx FIFO full interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Tx FIFO full. 0: Tx FIFO full interrupt disabled 1: Tx FIFO full interrupt enabled Bit 15 RXFIFOHFIE: Rx FIFO half full interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Rx FIFO half full. 0: Rx FIFO half full interrupt disabled 1: Rx FIFO half full interrupt enabled Bit 14 TXFIFOHEIE: Tx FIFO half empty interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Tx FIFO half empty. 0: Tx FIFO half empty interrupt disabled 1: Tx FIFO half empty interrupt enabled Bit 13 RXACTIE: Data receive acting interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by data being received (data receive acting). 0: Data receive acting interrupt disabled 1: Data receive acting interrupt enabled Bit 12 TXACTIE: Data transmit acting interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by data being transferred (data transmit acting). 0: Data transmit acting interrupt disabled 1: Data transmit acting interrupt enabled Bit 11 CMDACTIE: Command acting interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by a command being transferred (command acting). 0: Command acting interrupt disabled 1: Command acting interrupt enabled Bit 10 DBCKENDIE: Data block end interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by data block end. 0: Data block end interrupt disabled 1: Data block end interrupt enabled Bit 9 STBITERRIE: Start bit error interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by start bit error. 0: Start bit error interrupt disabled 1: Start bit error interrupt enabled Bit 8 DATAENDIE: Data end interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by data end. 0: Data end interrupt disabled 1: Data end interrupt enabled Bit 7 CMDSENTIE: Command sent interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by sending command. 0: Command sent interrupt disabled 1: Command sent interrupt enabled

899/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

Bit 6 CMDRENDIE: Command response received interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by receiving command response. 0: Command response received interrupt disabled 1: command Response Received interrupt enabled Bit 5 RXOVERRIE: Rx FIFO overrun error interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Rx FIFO overrun error. 0: Rx FIFO overrun error interrupt disabled 1: Rx FIFO overrun error interrupt enabled Bit 4 TXUNDERRIE: Tx FIFO underrun error interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by Tx FIFO underrun error. 0: Tx FIFO underrun error interrupt disabled 1: Tx FIFO underrun error interrupt enabled Bit 3 DTIMEOUTIE: Data timeout interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by data timeout. 0: Data timeout interrupt disabled 1: Data timeout interrupt enabled Bit 2 CTIMEOUTIE: Command timeout interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by command timeout. 0: Command timeout interrupt disabled 1: Command timeout interrupt enabled Bit 1 DCRCFAILIE: Data CRC fail interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by data CRC failure. 0: Data CRC fail interrupt disabled 1: Data CRC fail interrupt enabled Bit 0 CCRCFAILIE: Command CRC fail interrupt enable Set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupt caused by command CRC failure. 0: Command CRC fail interrupt disabled 1: Command CRC fail interrupt enabled

28.9.14

SDIO FIFO counter register (SDIO_FIFOCNT)

Address offset: 0x48 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The SDIO_FIFOCNT register contains the remaining number of words to be written to or read from the FIFO. The FIFO counter loads the value from the data length register (see SDIO_DLEN) when the data transfer enable bit, DTEN, is set in the data control register (SDIO_DCTRL register) and the DPSM is at the Idle state. If the data length is not wordaligned (multiple of 4), the remaining 1 to 3 bytes are regarded as a word.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FIFOCOUNT Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value Bits 23:0 FIFOCOUNT: Remaining number of words to be written to or read from the FIFO.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

900/1422

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

RM0090

28.9.15

SDIO data FIFO register (SDIO_FIFO)

Address offset: 0x80 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The receive and transmit FIFOs can be read or written as 32-bit wide registers. The FIFOs contain 32 entries on 32 sequential addresses. This allows the CPU to use its load and store multiple operands to read from/write to the FIFO.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FIF0Data rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

bits 31:0 FIFOData: Receive and transmit FIFO data The FIFO data occupies 32 entries of 32-bit words, from address: SDIO base + 0x080 to SDIO base + 0xFC.

28.9.16

SDIO register map

The following table summarizes the SDIO registers.

Table 159. SDIO register map

Offset
0x00

Register
SDIO_POWER

NEGEDGE

HWFC_EN

Reserved

PWRSAV

WIDBUS

BYPASS

0x04

SDIO_CLKCR

0x08

SDIO_ARG Reserved

CMDARG SDIOSuspend ENCMDcompl CE-ATACMD CMDINDEX RESPCMD DBLOCKSIZE DTMODE CTIMEOUT DMAEN DTDIR DCRCFAIL WAITPEND WAITRESP CPSMEN WAITINT

0x0C

SDIO_CMD

0x10 0x14 0x18 0x1C 0x20 0x24 0x28

SDIO_RESPCM D SDIO_RESP1 SDIO_RESP2 SDIO_RESP3 SDIO_RESP4 SDIO_DTIMER SDIO_DLEN Reserved Reserved

Reserved CARDSTATUS1 CARDSTATUS2 CARDSTATUS3 CARDSTATUS4 DATATIME DATALENGTH RWSTART RWSTOP RWMOD SDIOEN

nIEN

CLKDIV

CLKEN

0x2C

SDIO_DCTRL

0x30

SDIO_DCOUNT

Reserved CEATAEND RXFIFOHF TXFIFOHE RXFIFOE RXFIFOF Reserved TXFIFOE TXFIFOF RXDAVL TXDAVL SDIOIT

DATACOUNT TXUNDERR DTIMEOUT CMDREND CMDSENT STBITERR CCRCFAIL RXOVERR DBCKEND DATAEND CMDACT RXACT TXACT

0x34

SDIO_STA

901/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

DTEN

PWRCTRL

Reserved

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

Offset

0x3C

0x48

0x38

Table 159. SDIO register map (continued)

0x80

Register

SDIO_ICR

SDIO_MASK

SDIO_FIFOCNT Reserved Reserved Reserved CEATAENDIE CEATAENDC SDIOITIE RXDAVLIE TXDAVLIE RXFIFOEIE TXFIFOEIE RXFIFOFIE TXFIFOFIE RXFIFOHFIE TXFIFOHEIE RXACTIE TXACTIE CMDACTIE DBCKENDIE DATAENDIE DBCKENDC STBITERRIE STBITERRC DATAENDC CMDSENTIE CMDSENTC CMDRENDIE CMDRENDC RXOVERRIE RXOVERRC TXUNDERRIE TXUNDERRC DTIMEOUTIE DTIMEOUTC CTIMEOUTIE CTIMEOUTC DCRCFAILIE DCRCFAILC CCRCFAILIE CCRCFAILC FIFOCOUNT SDIOITC Reserved

SDIO_FIFO

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)

FIF0Data

902/1422

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

29

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

29.1

Ethernet introduction
Portions Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Synopsys, Inc. All rights reserved. Used with permission. The Ethernet peripheral enables the STM32F4xx to transmit and receive data over Ethernet in compliance with the IEEE 802.3-2002 standard. The Ethernet provides a configurable, flexible peripheral to meet the needs of various applications and customers. It supports two industry standard interfaces to the external physical layer (PHY): the default media independent interface (MII) defined in the IEEE 802.3 specifications and the reduced media independent interface (RMII). It can be used in number of applications such as switches, network interface cards, etc. The Ethernet is compliant with the following standards:

IEEE 802.3-2002 for Ethernet MAC IEEE 1588-2008 standard for precision networked clock synchronization AMBA 2.0 for AHB Master/Slave ports RMII specification from RMII consortium

29.2

Ethernet main features

The Ethernet (ETH) peripheral includes the following features, listed by category:

903/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

29.2.1

MAC core features

Supports 10/100 Mbit/s data transfer rates with external PHY interfaces IEEE 802.3-compliant MII interface to communicate with an external Fast Ethernet PHY Supports both full-duplex and half-duplex operations Supports CSMA/CD Protocol for half-duplex operation Supports IEEE 802.3x flow control for full-duplex operation Optional forwarding of received pause control frames to the user application in fullduplex operation Back-pressure support for half-duplex operation Automatic transmission of zero-quanta pause frame on deassertion of flow control input in full-duplex operation

Preamble and start-of-frame data (SFD) insertion in Transmit, and deletion in Receive paths Automatic CRC and pad generation controllable on a per-frame basis Options for automatic pad/CRC stripping on receive frames Programmable frame length to support Standard frames with sizes up to 16 KB Programmable interframe gap (40-96 bit times in steps of 8) Supports a variety of flexible address filtering modes: Up to four 48-bit perfect (DA) address filters with masks for each byte Up to three 48-bit SA address comparison check with masks for each byte 64-bit Hash filter (optional) for multicast and unicast (DA) addresses Option to pass all multicast addressed frames Promiscuous mode support to pass all frames without any filtering for network monitoring Passes all incoming packets (as per filter) with a status report

Separate 32-bit status returned for transmission and reception packets Supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag detection for reception frames Separate transmission, reception, and control interfaces to the Application Supports mandatory network statistics with RMON/MIB counters (RFC2819/RFC2665) MDIO interface for PHY device configuration and management Detection of LAN wakeup frames and AMD Magic Packet frames Receive feature for checksum off-load for received IPv4 and TCP packets encapsulated by the Ethernet frame Enhanced receive feature for checking IPv4 header checksum and TCP, UDP, or ICMP checksum encapsulated in IPv4 or IPv6 datagrams Support Ethernet frame time stamping as described in IEEE 1588-2008. Sixty-four-bit time stamps are given in each frames transmit or receive status Two sets of FIFOs: a 2-KB Transmit FIFO with programmable threshold capability, and a 2-KB Receive FIFO with a configurable threshold (default of 64 bytes) Receive Status vectors inserted into the Receive FIFO after the EOF transfer enables multiple-frame storage in the Receive FIFO without requiring another FIFO to store those frames Receive Status

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

904/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Option to filter all error frames on reception and not forward them to the application in Store-and-Forward mode Option to forward under-sized good frames Supports statistics by generating pulses for frames dropped or corrupted (due to overflow) in the Receive FIFO Supports Store and Forward mechanism for transmission to the MAC core Automatic generation of PAUSE frame control or back pressure signal to the MAC core based on Receive FIFO-fill (threshold configurable) level Handles automatic retransmission of Collision frames for transmission Discards frames on late collision, excessive collisions, excessive deferral and underrun conditions Software control to flush Tx FIFO Calculates and inserts IPv4 header checksum and TCP, UDP, or ICMP checksum in frames transmitted in Store-and-Forward mode Supports internal loopback on the MII for debugging

29.2.2

DMA features

Supports all AHB burst types in the AHB Slave Interface Software can select the type of AHB burst (fixed or indefinite burst) in the AHB Master interface. Option to select address-aligned bursts from AHB master port Optimization for packet-oriented DMA transfers with frame delimiters Byte-aligned addressing for data buffer support Dual-buffer (ring) or linked-list (chained) descriptor chaining Descriptor architecture, allowing large blocks of data transfer with minimum CPU intervention; each descriptor can transfer up to 8 KB of data Comprehensive status reporting for normal operation and transfers with errors Individual programmable burst size for Transmit and Receive DMA Engines for optimal host bus utilization Programmable interrupt options for different operational conditions Per-frame Transmit/Receive complete interrupt control Round-robin or fixed-priority arbitration between Receive and Transmit engines Start/Stop modes Current Tx/Rx Buffer pointer as status registers Current Tx/Rx Descriptor pointer as status registers

29.2.3

PTP features

Received and transmitted frames time stamping Coarse and fine correction methods Trigger interrupt when system time becomes greater than target time Pulse per second output (product alternate function output)

905/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

29.3

Ethernet pins
Table 160 shows the MAC signals and the corresponding MII/RMII signal mapping. All MAC signals are mapped onto AF11, some signals are mapped onto different I/O pins, and should be configured in Alternate function mode (for more details, refer to Section 7.3.2: I/O pin multiplexer and mapping).

Table 160. Alternate function mapping

AF11 Port ETH PA0-WKUP PA1 PA2 PA3 PA7 PB0 PB1 PB5 PB8 PB10 PB11 PB12 PB13 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PE2 PG8 PG11 PG13 PG14 PH2 PH3 PH6 PH7 PI10 ETH_MII_CRS ETH_MII _RX_CLK / ETH_RMII _REF_CLK ETH _MDIO ETH _MII_COL ETH_MII _RX_DV / ETH_RMII _CRS_DV ETH _MII_RXD2 ETH _MII_RXD3 ETH _PPS_OUT ETH _MII_TXD3 ETH_ MII_RX_ER ETH _MII_TX_EN / ETH _RMII_TX_EN ETH _MII_TXD0 / ETH _RMII_TXD0 ETH _MII_TXD1 / ETH _RMII_TXD1 ETH _MDC ETH _MII_TXD2 ETH _MII_TX_CLK ETH_MII_RXD0 / ETH_RMII_RXD0 ETH _MII_RXD1/ ETH _RMII_RXD1 ETH_MII_TXD3 ETH_PPS_OUT ETH _MII_TX_EN / ETH _RMII_TX_EN ETH _MII_TXD0 / ETH _RMII_TXD0 ETH _MII_TXD1 / ETH _RMII_TXD1 ETH _MII_CRS ETH _MII_COL ETH _MII_RXD2 ETH _MII_RXD3 ETH _MII_RX_ER

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

906/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

29.4

Ethernet functional description: SMI, MII and RMII

The Ethernet peripheral consists of a MAC 802.3 (media access control) with a dedicated DMA controller. It supports both default media-independent interface (MII) and reduced media-independent interface (RMII) through one selection bit (refer to SYSCFG_PMC register). The DMA controller interfaces with the Core and memories through the AHB Master and Slave interfaces. The AHB Master Interface controls data transfers while the AHB Slave interface accesses Control and Status Registers (CSR) space. The Transmit FIFO (Tx FIFO) buffers data read from system memory by the DMA before transmission by the MAC Core. Similarly, the Receive FIFO (Rx FIFO) stores the Ethernet frames received from the line until they are transferred to system memory by the DMA. The Ethernet peripheral also includes an SMI to communicate with external PHY. A set of configuration registers permit the user to select the desired mode and features for the MAC and the DMA controller.

Note:

The AHB clock frequency must be at least 25 MHz when the Ethernet is used. Figure 321. ETH block diagram
AHB Slave interface RMII Interface Select MAC control registers

DMA control & status registers

Operation mode register

Media access control MAC 802.3

MII

External PHY

Bus matrix

2 Kbyte RX FIFO Ethernet DMA 2 Kbyte TX FIFO

Checksum PTP offload IEEE1588 PMT MMC

MDC MDIO

ai15620c

1. For AHB connections please refer to Figure 1: System architecture for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx devices and Figure 2: System architecture for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices.

29.4.1

Station management interface: SMI

The station management interface (SMI) allows the application to access any PHY registers through a 2-wire clock and data lines. The interface supports accessing up to 32 PHYs. The application can select one of the 32 PHYs and one of the 32 registers within any PHY and send control data or receive status information. Only one register in one PHY can be addressed at any given time. Both the MDC clock line and the MDIO data line are implemented as alternate function I/O in the microcontroller:

MDC: a periodic clock that provides the timing reference for the data transfer at the maximum frequency of 2.5 MHz. The minimum high and low times for MDC must be

907/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller 160 ns each, and the minimum period for MDC must be 400 ns. In idle state the SMI management interface drives the MDC clock signal low.

MDIO: data input/output bitstream to transfer status information to/from the PHY device synchronously with the MDC clock signal

Figure 322. SMI interface signals

802.3 MAC

STM32

MDC MDIO

External PHY
ai15621

SMI frame format

The frame structure related to a read or write operation is shown in Table 13, the order of bit transmission must be from left to right. Table 161. Management frame format
Management frame fields Preamble (32 bits) Read Write 1... 1 1... 1 Start 01 01 Operation 10 01 PADDR ppppp ppppp RADDR rrrrr rrrrr TA Z0 10 Data (16 bits) ddddddddddddddd ddddddddddddddd Idle Z Z

The management frame consists of eight fields:

Preamble: each transaction (read or write) can be initiated with the preamble field that corresponds to 32 contiguous logic one bits on the MDIO line with 32 corresponding cycles on MDC. This field is used to establish synchronization with the PHY device. Start: the start of frame is defined by a <01> pattern to verify transitions on the line from the default logic one state to zero and back to one. Operation: defines the type of transaction (read or write) in progress. PADDR: the PHY address is 5 bits, allowing 32 unique PHY addresses. The MSB bit of the address is the first transmitted and received. RADDR: the register address is 5 bits, allowing 32 individual registers to be addressed within the selected PHY device. The MSB bit of the address is the first transmitted and received. TA: the turn-around field defines a 2-bit pattern between the RADDR and DATA fields to avoid contention during a read transaction. For a read transaction the MAC controller drives high-impedance on the MDIO line for the 2 bits of TA. The PHY device must drive a high-impedance state on the first bit of TA, a zero bit on the second one. For a write transaction, the MAC controller drives a <10> pattern during the TA field. The PHY device must drive a high-impedance state for the 2 bits of TA. Data: the data field is 16-bit. The first bit transmitted and received must be bit 15 of the ETH_MIID register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

908/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Idle: the MDIO line is driven in high-impedance state. All three-state drivers must be disabled and the PHYs pull-up resistor keeps the line at logic one.

SMI write operation

When the application sets the MII Write and Busy bits (in Ethernet MAC MII address register (ETH_MACMIIAR)), the SMI initiates a write operation into the PHY registers by transferring the PHY address, the register address in PHY, and the write data (in Ethernet MAC MII data register (ETH_MACMIIDR). The application should not change the MII Address register contents or the MII Data register while the transaction is ongoing. Write operations to the MII Address register or the MII Data Register during this period are ignored (the Busy bit is high), and the transaction is completed without any error. After the Write operation has completed, the SMI indicates this by resetting the Busy bit. Figure 323 shows the frame format for the write operation. Figure 323. MDIO timing and frame structure - Write cycle

MDC

MDIO

32 1's

0 1

0 1

A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R4 R3

R2 R1 R0

D15 D14

D1 D0

Start OP Preamble of code frame

PHY address

Register address Turn around

data

Data to PHY

ai15626

SMI read operation

When the user sets the MII Busy bit in the Ethernet MAC MII address register (ETH_MACMIIAR) with the MII Write bit at 0, the SMI initiates a read operation in the PHY registers by transferring the PHY address and the register address in PHY. The application should not change the MII Address register contents or the MII Data register while the transaction is ongoing. Write operations to the MII Address register or MII Data Register during this period are ignored (the Busy bit is high) and the transaction is completed without any error. After the read operation has completed, the SMI resets the Busy bit and then updates the MII Data register with the data read from the PHY. Figure 324 shows the frame format for the read operation. Figure 324. MDIO timing and frame structure - Read cycle

MDC

MDIO

32 1's

0 1 1

A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R4 R3

R2 R1 R0

D15 D14

D1 D0

Start OP Preamble of code frame

PHY address

Register address Turn around

data

Data to PHY

Data from PHY

ai15627

909/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

SMI clock selection

The MAC initiates the Management Write/Read operation. The SMI clock is a divided clock whose source is the application clock (AHB clock). The divide factor depends on the clock range setting in the MII Address register. Table 162 shows how to set the clock ranges. Table 162. Clock range
Selection 000 001 010 011 100, 101, 110, 111 HCLK clock 60-100 MHz 100-168 MHz 20-35 MHz 35-60 MHz Reserved MDC clock AHB clock / 42 AHB clock / 62 AHB clock / 16 AHB clock / 26 -

29.4.2

Media-independent interface: MII

The media-independent interface (MII) defines the interconnection between the MAC sublayer and the PHY for data transfer at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. Figure 325. Media independent interface signals
TX_CLK TXD[3:0] TX_EN

STM32
802.3 MAC

RX_CLK RXD[3:0] RX_ER RX_DV CRS COL MDC MDIO

External PHY

ai15622b

MII_TX_CLK: continuous clock that provides the timing reference for the TX data transfer. The nominal frequency is: 2.5 MHz at 10 Mbit/s speed; 25 MHz at 100 Mbit/s speed. MII_RX_CLK: continuous clock that provides the timing reference for the RX data transfer. The nominal frequency is: 2.5 MHz at 10 Mbit/s speed; 25 MHz at 100 Mbit/s speed. MII_TX_EN: transmission enable indicates that the MAC is presenting nibbles on the MII for transmission. It must be asserted synchronously (MII_TX_CLK) with the first nibble of the preamble and must remain asserted while all nibbles to be transmitted are presented to the MII. MII_TXD[3:0]: transmit data is a bundle of 4 data signals driven synchronously by the MAC sublayer and qualified (valid data) on the assertion of the MII_TX_EN signal.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

910/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

MII_TXD[0] is the least significant bit, MII_TXD[3] is the most significant bit. While MII_TX_EN is deasserted the transmit data must have no effect upon the PHY.

MII_CRS: carrier sense is asserted by the PHY when either the transmit or receive medium is non idle. It shall be deasserted by the PHY when both the transmit and receive media are idle. The PHY must ensure that the MII_CS signal remains asserted throughout the duration of a collision condition. This signal is not required to transition synchronously with respect to the TX and RX clocks. In full duplex mode the state of this signal is dont care for the MAC sublayer. MII_COL: collision detection must be asserted by the PHY upon detection of a collision on the medium and must remain asserted while the collision condition persists. This signal is not required to transition synchronously with respect to the TX and RX clocks. In full duplex mode the state of this signal is dont care for the MAC sublayer. MII_RXD[3:0]: reception data is a bundle of 4 data signals driven synchronously by the PHY and qualified (valid data) on the assertion of the MII_RX_DV signal. MII_RXD[0] is the least significant bit, MII_RXD[3] is the most significant bit. While MII_RX_EN is deasserted and MII_RX_ER is asserted, a specific MII_RXD[3:0] value is used to transfer specific information from the PHY (see Table 164). MII_RX_DV: receive data valid indicates that the PHY is presenting recovered and decoded nibbles on the MII for reception. It must be asserted synchronously (MII_RX_CLK) with the first recovered nibble of the frame and must remain asserted through the final recovered nibble. It must be deasserted prior to the first clock cycle that follows the final nibble. In order to receive the frame correctly, the MII_RX_DV signal must encompass the frame, starting no later than the SFD field. MII_RX_ER: receive error must be asserted for one or more clock periods (MII_RX_CLK) to indicate to the MAC sublayer that an error was detected somewhere in the frame. This error condition must be qualified by MII_RX_DV assertion as described in Table 164.

Table 163. TX interface signal encoding

MII_TX_EN 0 1 MII_TXD[3:0] 0000 through 1111 0000 through 1111 Normal inter-frame Normal data transmission Description

Table 164. RX interface signal encoding

MII_RX_DV 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 MII_RX_ERR 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 MII_RXD[3:0] 0000 through 1111 0000 0001 through 1101 1110 1111 0000 through 1111 0000 through 1111 Description Normal inter-frame Normal inter-frame Reserved False carrier indication Reserved Normal data reception Data reception with errors

911/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

MII clock sources

To generate both TX_CLK and RX_CLK clock signals, the external PHY must be clocked with an external 25 MHz as shown in Figure 326. Instead of using an external 25 MHz quartz to provide this clock, the STM32F4xxmicrocontroller can output this signal on its MCO pin. In this case, the PLL multiplier has to be configured so as to get the desired frequency on the MCO pin, from the 25 MHz external quartz. Figure 326. MII clock sources

STM32
802.3 MAC
TX _CLK RX _CLK

25 MHz HSE
MCO

External PHY

25 MHz

For 10/100 Mbit/s 25 MHz

ai15623

29.4.3

Reduced media-independent interface: RMII

The reduced media-independent interface (RMII) specification reduces the pin count between the microcontroller Ethernet peripheral and the external Ethernet in 10/100 Mbit/s. According to the IEEE 802.3u standard, an MII contains 16 pins for data and control. The RMII specification is dedicated to reduce the pin count to 7 pins (a 62.5% decrease in pin count). The RMII is instantiated between the MAC and the PHY. This helps translation of the MACs MII into the RMII. The RMII block has the following characteristics:

It supports 10-Mbit/s and 100-Mbit/s operating rates The clock reference must be doubled to 50 MHz The same clock reference must be sourced externally to both MAC and external Ethernet PHY It provides independent 2-bit wide (dibit) transmit and receive data paths

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

912/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 327. Reduced media-independent interface signals

RM0090

STM32
802.3 MAC

TXD[ 1:0] TX_EN RXD[1:0] CRS_ DV MDC MDIO REF _CLK Clock source
ai15624

External PHY

RMII clock sources

Either clock the PHY from an external 50 MHz clock or use a PHY with an embedded PLL to generate the 50 MHz frequency. Figure 328. RMII clock sources

STM32
802.3 MAC

External PHY

25 MHz PLL

REF_CLK

50 MHz

For 10/100 Mbit/s

MS19930V1

29.4.4

MII/RMII selection
The mode, MII or RMII, is selected using the configuration bit 23, MII_RMII_SEL, in the SYSCFG_PMC register. The application has to set the MII/RMII mode while the Ethernet controller is under reset or before enabling the clocks.

MII/RMII internal clock scheme

The clock scheme required to support both the MII and RMII, as well as 10 and 100 Mbit/s operations is described in Figure 329.

913/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 329. Clock scheme
MAC MII_TX_CLK as AF (25 MHz or 2.5 MHz) GPIO and AF controller 25 MHz or 2.5 MHz 0 1 25 MHz or 2.5 MHz MACTXCLK TX

MII_RX_CLK as AF (25 MHz or 2.5 MHz) RMII_REF_CK as AF (50 MHz)

50 MHz Sync. divider /2 for 100 Mb/s /20 for 10 Mb/s GPIO and AF controller 25 MHz or 2.5 MHz

0 MII 1 RMII(1) 0 1 25 MHz or 2.5 MHz MACRXCLK RX AHB

RMII HCLK HCLK must be greater than 25 MHz

ai15650

1. The MII/RMII selection is controlled through bit 23, MII_RMII_SEL, in the SYSCFG_PMC register.

To save a pin, the two input clock signals, RMII_REF_CK and MII_RX_CLK, are multiplexed on the same GPIO pin.

29.5

Ethernet functional description: MAC 802.3

The IEEE 802.3 International Standard for local area networks (LANs) employs the CSMA/CD (carrier sense multiple access with collision detection) as the access method. The Ethernet peripheral consists of a MAC 802.3 (media access control) controller with media independent interface (MII) and a dedicated DMA controller. The MAC block implements the LAN CSMA/CD sublayer for the following families of systems: 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s of data rates for baseband and broadband systems. Halfand full-duplex operation modes are supported. The collision detection access method is applied only to the half-duplex operation mode. The MAC control frame sublayer is supported. The MAC sublayer performs the following functions associated with a data link control procedure:

Data encapsulation (transmit and receive) Framing (frame boundary delimitation, frame synchronization) Addressing (handling of source and destination addresses) Error detection Medium allocation (collision avoidance) Contention resolution (collision handling)

Media access management

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

914/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Basically there are two operating modes of the MAC sublayer:

RM0090

Half-duplex mode: the stations contend for the use of the physical medium, using the CSMA/CD algorithms. Full duplex mode: simultaneous transmission and reception without contention resolution (CSMA/CD algorithm are unnecessary) when all the following conditions are met: physical medium capability to support simultaneous transmission and reception exactly 2 stations connected to the LAN both stations configured for full-duplex operation

29.5.1

MAC 802.3 frame format

The MAC block implements the MAC sublayer and the optional MAC control sublayer (10/100 Mbit/s) as specified by the IEEE 802.3-2002 standard. Two frame formats are specified for data communication systems using the CSMA/CD MAC:

Basic MAC frame format Tagged MAC frame format (extension of the basic MAC frame format)

Figure 331 and Figure 332 describe the frame structure (untagged and tagged) that includes the following fields:

Preamble: 7-byte field used for synchronization purposes (PLS circuitry) Hexadecimal value: 55-55-55-55-55-55-55 Bit pattern: 01010101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01010101 01010101 (right-to-left bit transmission)

Start frame delimiter (SFD): 1-byte field used to indicate the start of a frame. Hexadecimal value: D5 Bit pattern: 11010101 (right-to-left bit transmission) Destination and Source Address fields: 6-byte fields to indicate the destination and source station addresses as follows (see Figure 330): Each address is 48 bits in length The first LSB bit (I/G) in the destination address field is used to indicate an individual (I/G = 0) or a group address (I/G = 1). A group address could identify none, one or more, or all the stations connected to the LAN. In the source address the first bit is reserved and reset to 0. The second bit (U/L) distinguishes between locally (U/L = 1) or globally (U/L = 0) administered addresses. For broadcast addresses this bit is also 1. Each byte of each address field must be transmitted least significant bit first.

The address designation is based on the following types: Individual address: this is the physical address associated with a particular station on the network. Group address. A multidestination address associated with one or more stations on a given network. There are two kinds of multicast address: Multicast-group address: an address associated with a group of logically related stations. Broadcast address: a distinguished, predefined multicast address (all 1s in the destination address field) that always denotes all the stations on a given LAN.

915/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 330. Address field format
I/G = 0 Individual address I/G = 1 Group address U/L = 0 Globally administered address U/L = 1 Locally administered address
ai15628

MSB

46-bit address

U/L I/G LSB

Bit transmission order (right to left)

QTag Prefix: 4-byte field inserted between the Source address field and the MAC Client Length/Type field. This field is an extension of the basic frame (untagged) to obtain the tagged MAC frame. The untagged MAC frames do not include this field. The extensions for tagging are as follows: 2-byte constant Length/Type field value consistent with the Type interpretation (greater than 0x0600) equal to the value of the 802.1Q Tag Protocol Type (0x8100 hexadecimal). This constant field is used to distinguish tagged and untagged MAC frames. 2-byte field containing the Tag control information field subdivided as follows: a 3bit user priority, a canonical format indicator (CFI) bit and a 12-bit VLAN Identifier. The length of the tagged MAC frame is extended by 4 bytes by the QTag Prefix.

MAC client length/type: 2-byte field with different meaning (mutually exclusive), depending on its value: If the value is less than or equal to maxValidFrame (0d1500) then this field indicates the number of MAC client data bytes contained in the subsequent data field of the 802.3 frame (length interpretation). If the value is greater than or equal to MinTypeValue (0d1536 decimal, 0x0600) then this field indicates the nature of the MAC client protocol (Type interpretation) related to the Ethernet frame.

Regardless of the interpretation of the length/type field, if the length of the data field is less than the minimum required for proper operation of the protocol, a PAD field is added after the data field but prior to the FCS (frame check sequence) field. The length/type field is transmitted and received with the higher-order byte first. For length/type field values in the range between maxValidLength and minTypeValue (boundaries excluded), the behavior of the MAC sublayer is not specified: they may or may not be passed by the MAC sublayer.

Data and PAD fields: n-byte data field. Full data transparency is provided, it means that any arbitrary sequence of byte values may appear in the data field. The size of the PAD, if any, is determined by the size of the data field. Max and min length of the data and PAD field are: Maximum length = 1500 bytes Minimum length for untagged MAC frames = 46 bytes Minimum length for tagged MAC frames = 42 bytes

When the data field length is less than the minimum required, the PAD field is added to match the minimum length (42 bytes for tagged frames, 46 bytes for untagged frames).

Frame check sequence: 4-byte field that contains the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) value. The CRC computation is based on the following fields: source address,

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

916/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

destination address, QTag prefix, length/type, LLC data and PAD (that is, all fields except the preamble, SFD). The generating polynomial is the following:
G( x) = x
32

+x

26

+x

23

+x

22

+x

16

+x

12

+x

11

+x

10

+x +x +x +x +x +x+1

The CRC value of a frame is computed as follows:

The first 2 bits of the frame are complemented The n-bits of the frame are the coefficients of a polynomial M(x) of degree (n 1). The first bit of the destination address corresponds to the xn 1 term and the last bit of the data field corresponds to the x0 term M(x) is multiplied by x32 and divided by G(x), producing a remainder R(x) of degree 31 The coefficients of R(x) are considered as a 32-bit sequence The bit sequence is complemented and the result is the CRC The 32-bits of the CRC value are placed in the frame check sequence. The x32 term is the first transmitted, the x0 term is the last one

Figure 331. MAC frame format

7 bytes 1 byte 6 bytes 6 bytes 2 bytes 46-1500 bytes 4 bytes Preamble SFD Destination address Source address MAC client length/type MAC client data PAD Frame check sequence Bytes within frame transmitted top to bottom

MSB Bit transmission order (right to left)

LSB

ai15629

917/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 332. Tagged MAC frame format
7 bytes 1 byte 6 bytes 6 bytes QTag Prefix 4 bytes 2 bytes 42-1500 bytes 4 bytes Preamble SFD Destination address Source address Length/type = 802.1QTagType Tag control information MAC client length/type MAC client data Pad Frame check sequence User priority CFI VLAN identifier (VID, 12 bits) MSB 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSB 1 0 bytes within frame transmitted top to bottom

MSB Bit transmission order (r ight to left)

LSB

ai15630

Each byte of the MAC frame, except the FCS field, is transmitted low-order bit first. An invalid MAC frame is defined by one of the following conditions:

The frame length is inconsistent with the expected value as specified by the length/type field. If the length/type field contains a type value, then the frame length is assumed to be consistent with this field (no invalid frame) The frame length is not an integer number of bytes (extra bits) The CRC value computed on the incoming frame does not match the included FCS

29.5.2

MAC frame transmission

The DMA controls all transactions for the transmit path. Ethernet frames read from the system memory are pushed into the FIFO by the DMA. The frames are then popped out and transferred to the MAC core. When the end-of-frame is transferred, the status of the transmission is taken from the MAC core and transferred back to the DMA. The Transmit FIFO has a depth of 2 Kbyte. FIFO-fill level is indicated to the DMA so that it can initiate a data fetch in required bursts from the system memory, using the AHB interface. The data from the AHB Master interface is pushed into the FIFO. When the SOF is detected, the MAC accepts the data and begins transmitting to the MII. The time required to transmit the frame data to the MII after the application initiates transmission is variable, depending on delay factors like IFG delay, time to transmit preamble/SFD, and any back-off delays for Half-duplex mode. After the EOF is transferred to the MAC core, the core completes normal transmission and then gives the status of transmission back to the DMA. If a normal collision (in Half-duplex mode) occurs during transmission, the MAC core makes the transmit status valid, then accepts and drops all further data until the next SOF is received. The same frame should be retransmitted from SOF on observing a Retry request (in the Status) from the MAC. The MAC issues an underflow status if the data are not provided continuously during the transmission. During the normal transfer of a frame, if the MAC receives an SOF without getting an EOF for the previous frame, then the SOF is ignored and the new frame is considered as the continuation of the previous frame.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

918/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller There are two modes of operation for popping data towards the MAC core:

RM0090

In Threshold mode, as soon as the number of bytes in the FIFO crosses the configured threshold level (or when the end-of-frame is written before the threshold is crossed), the data is ready to be popped out and forwarded to the MAC core. The threshold level is configured using the TTC bits of ETH_DMABMR. In Store-and-forward mode, only after a complete frame is stored in the FIFO, the frame is popped towards the MAC core. If the Tx FIFO size is smaller than the Ethernet frame to be transmitted, then the frame is popped towards the MAC core when the Tx FIFO becomes almost full.

The application can flush the Transmit FIFO of all contents by setting the FTF (ETH_DMAOMR register [20]) bit. This bit is self-clearing and initializes the FIFO pointers to the default state. If the FTF bit is set during a frame transfer to the MAC core, then transfer is stopped as the FIFO is considered to be empty. Hence an underflow event occurs at the MAC transmitter and the corresponding Status word is forwarded to the DMA.

Automatic CRC and pad generation

When the number of bytes received from the application falls below 60 (DA+SA+LT+Data), zeros are appended to the transmitting frame to make the data length exactly 46 bytes to meet the minimum data field requirement of IEEE 802.3. The MAC can be programmed not to append any padding. The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for the frame check sequence (FCS) field is calculated and appended to the data being transmitted. When the MAC is programmed to not append the CRC value to the end of Ethernet frames, the computed CRC is not transmitted. An exception to this rule is that when the MAC is programmed to append pads for frames (DA+SA+LT+Data) less than 60 bytes, CRC will be appended at the end of the padded frames. The CRC generator calculates the 32-bit CRC for the FCS field of the Ethernet frame. The encoding is defined by the following polynomial.
G( x) = x
32

+x

26

+x

23

+x

22

+x

16

+x

12

+x

11

+x

10

+x +x +x +x +x +x+1

Transmit protocol
The MAC controls the operation of Ethernet frame transmission. It performs the following functions to meet the IEEE 802.3/802.3z specifications. It:

generates the preamble and SFD generates the jam pattern in Half-duplex mode controls the Jabber timeout controls the flow for Half-duplex mode (back pressure) generates the transmit frame status contains time stamp snapshot logic in accordance with IEEE 1588

When a new frame transmission is requested, the MAC sends out the preamble and SFD, followed by the data. The preamble is defined as 7 bytes of 0b10101010 pattern, and the SFD is defined as 1 byte of 0b10101011 pattern. The collision window is defined as 1 slot time (512 bit times for 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet). The jam pattern generation is applicable only to Half-duplex mode, not to Full-duplex mode. In MII mode, if a collision occurs at any time from the beginning of the frame to the end of the CRC field, the MAC sends a 32-bit jam pattern of 0x5555 5555 on the MII to inform all

919/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller other stations that a collision has occurred. If the collision is seen during the preamble transmission phase, the MAC completes the transmission of the preamble and SFD and then sends the jam pattern. A jabber timer is maintained to cut off the transmission of Ethernet frames if more than 2048 (default) bytes have to be transferred. The MAC uses the deferral mechanism for flow control (back pressure) in Half-duplex mode. When the application requests to stop receiving frames, the MAC sends a JAM pattern of 32 bytes whenever it senses the reception of a frame, provided that transmit flow control is enabled. This results in a collision and the remote station backs off. The application requests flow control by setting the BPA bit (bit 0) in the ETH_MACFCR register. If the application requests a frame to be transmitted, then it is scheduled and transmitted even when back pressure is activated. Note that if back pressure is kept activated for a long time (and more than 16 consecutive collision events occur) then the remote stations abort their transmissions due to excessive collisions. If IEEE 1588 time stamping is enabled for the transmit frame, this block takes a snapshot of the system time when the SFD is put onto the transmit MII bus.

Transmit scheduler
The MAC is responsible for scheduling the frame transmission on the MII. It maintains the interframe gap between two transmitted frames and follows the truncated binary exponential backoff algorithm for Half-duplex mode. The MAC enables transmission after satisfying the IFG and backoff delays. It maintains an idle period of the configured interframe gap (IFG bits in the ETH_MACCR register) between any two transmitted frames. If frames to be transmitted arrive sooner than the configured IFG time, the MII waits for the enable signal from the MAC before starting the transmission on it. The MAC starts its IFG counter as soon as the carrier signal of the MII goes inactive. At the end of the programmed IFG value, the MAC enables transmission in Full-duplex mode. In Half-duplex mode and when IFG is configured for 96 bit times, the MAC follows the rule of deference specified in Section 4.2.3.2.1 of the IEEE 802.3 specification. The MAC resets its IFG counter if a carrier is detected during the first two-thirds (64-bit times for all IFG values) of the IFG interval. If the carrier is detected during the final one third of the IFG interval, the MAC continues the IFG count and enables the transmitter after the IFG interval. The MAC implements the truncated binary exponential backoff algorithm when it operates in Half-duplex mode.

Transmit flow control

When the Transmit Flow Control Enable bit (TFE bit in ETH_MACFCR) is set, the MAC generates Pause frames and transmits them as necessary, in Full-duplex mode. The Pause frame is appended with the calculated CRC, and is sent. Pause frame generation can be initiated in two ways. A pause frame is sent either when the application sets the FCB bit in the ETH_MACFCR register or when the receive FIFO is full (packet buffer).

If the application has requested flow control by setting the FCB bit in ETH_MACFCR, the MAC generates and transmits a single Pause frame. The value of the pause time in the generated frame contains the programmed pause time value in ETH_MACFCR. To extend the pause or end the pause prior to the time specified in the previously transmitted Pause frame, the application must request another Pause frame transmission after programming the Pause Time value (PT in ETH_MACFCR register) with the appropriate value. If the application has requested flow control when the receive FIFO is full, the MAC generates and transmits a Pause frame. The value of the pause time in the generated frame is the programmed pause time value in ETH_MACFCR. If the receive FIFO

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

920/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

remains full at a configurable number of slot-times (PLT bits in ETH_MACFCR) before this Pause time runs out, a second Pause frame is transmitted. The process is repeated as long as the receive FIFO remains full. If this condition is no more satisfied prior to the sampling time, the MAC transmits a Pause frame with zero pause time to indicate to the remote end that the receive buffer is ready to receive new data frames. Single-packet transmit operation The general sequence of events for a transmit operation is as follows: 1. If the system has data to be transferred, the DMA controller fetches them from the memory through the AHB Master interface and starts forwarding them to the FIFO. It continues to receive the data until the end of frame is transferred. When the threshold level is crossed or a full packet of data is received into the FIFO, the frame data are popped and driven to the MAC core. The DMA continues to transfer data from the FIFO until a complete packet has been transferred to the MAC. Upon completion of the frame, the DMA controller is notified by the status coming from the MAC. Because the DMA must update the descriptor status before releasing it to the Host, there can be at the most two frames inside a transmit FIFO. The second frame is fetched by the DMA and put into the FIFO only if the OSF (operate on second frame) bit is set. If this bit is not set, the next frame is fetched from the memory only after the MAC has completely processed the frame and the DMA has released the descriptors. If the OSF bit is set, the DMA starts fetching the second frame immediately after completing the transfer of the first frame to the FIFO. It does not wait for the status to be updated. In the meantime, the second frame is received into the FIFO while the first frame is being transmitted. As soon as the first frame has been transferred and the status is received from the MAC, it is pushed to the DMA. If the DMA has already completed sending the second packet to the FIFO, the second transmission must wait for the status of the first packet before proceeding to the next frame.

2.

Transmit operationTwo packets in the buffer 1.

2.

Retransmission during collision

While a frame is being transferred to the MAC, a collision event may occur on the MAC line interface in Half-duplex mode. The MAC would then indicate a retry attempt by giving the status even before the end of frame is received. Then the retransmission is enabled and the frame is popped out again from the FIFO. After more than 96 bytes have been popped towards the MAC core, the FIFO controller frees up that space and makes it available to the DMA to push in more data. This means that the retransmission is not possible after this threshold is crossed or when the MAC core indicates a late collision event.

Transmit FIFO flush operation

The MAC provides a control to the software to flush the Transmit FIFO through the use of Bit 20 in the Operation mode register. The Flush operation is immediate and the Tx FIFO and the corresponding pointers are cleared to the initial state even if the Tx FIFO is in the middle of transferring a frame to the MAC Core. This results in an underflow event in the MAC transmitter, and the frame transmission is aborted. The status of such a frame is marked with both underflow and frame flush events (TDES0 bits 13 and 1). No data are coming to the FIFO from the application (DMA) during the Flush operation. Transfer transmit status words are transferred to the application for the number of frames that is flushed (including partial frames). Frames that are completely flushed have the Frame flush status bit (TDES0 13) set. The Flush operation is completed when the application (DMA) has accepted all of

921/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller the Status words for the frames that were flushed. The Transmit FIFO Flush control register bit is then cleared. At this point, new frames from the application (DMA) are accepted. All data presented for transmission after a Flush operation are discarded unless they start with an SOF marker.

Transmit status word

At the end of the Ethernet frame transfer to the MAC core and after the core has completed the transmission of the frame, the transmit status is given to the application. The detailed description of the Transmit Status is the same as for bits [23:0] in TDES0. If IEEE 1588 time stamping is enabled, a specific frames 64-bit time stamp is returned, along with the transmit status.

Transmit checksum offload

Communication protocols such as TCP and UDP implement checksum fields, which helps determine the integrity of data transmitted over a network. Because the most widespread use of Ethernet is to encapsulate TCP and UDP over IP datagrams, the Ethernet controller has a transmit checksum offload feature that supports checksum calculation and insertion in the transmit path, and error detection in the receive path. This section explains the operation of the checksum offload feature for transmitted frames. Note: The checksum for TCP, UDP or ICMP is calculated over a complete frame, then inserted into its corresponding header field. Due to this requirement, this function is enabled only when the Transmit FIFO is configured for Store-and-forward mode (that is, when the TSF bit is set in the ETH_ETH_DMAOMR register). If the core is configured for Threshold (cut-through) mode, the Transmit checksum offload is bypassed. You must make sure the Transmit FIFO is deep enough to store a complete frame before that frame is transferred to the MAC Core transmitter. If the FIFO depth is less than the input Ethernet frame size, the payload (TCP/UDP/ICMP) checksum insertion function is bypassed and only the frames IPv4 Header checksum is modified, even in Store-and-forward mode. The transmit checksum offload supports two types of checksum calculation and insertion. This checksum can be controlled for each frame by setting the CIC bits (Bits 28:27 in TDES1, described in TDES1: Transmit descriptor Word1 on page 955). See IETF specifications RFC 791, RFC 793, RFC 768, RFC 792, RFC 2460 and RFC 4443 for IPv4, TCP, UDP, ICMP, IPv6 and ICMPv6 packet header specifications, respectively.

IP header checksum In IPv4 datagrams, the integrity of the header fields is indicated by the 16-bit header checksum field (the eleventh and twelfth bytes of the IPv4 datagram). The checksum offload detects an IPv4 datagram when the Ethernet frames Type field has the value 0x0800 and the IP datagrams Version field has the value 0x4. The input frames checksum field is ignored during calculation and replaced by the calculated value. IPv6 headers do not have a checksum field; thus, the checksum offload does not modify IPv6 header fields. The result of this IP header checksum calculation is indicated by the IP Header Error status bit in the Transmit status (Bit 16). This status bit is set whenever the values of the Ethernet Type field and the IP headers Version field are not consistent, or when the Ethernet frame does not have enough data, as indicated by the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

922/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

IP header Length field. In other words, this bit is set when an IP header error is asserted under the following circumstances: a) b) For IPv4 datagrams: The received Ethernet type is 0x0800, but the IP headers Version field does not equal 0x4 The IPv4 Header Length field indicates a value less than 0x5 (20 bytes) The total frame length is less than the value given in the IPv4 Header Length field For IPv6 datagrams: The Ethernet type is 0x86DD but the IP header Version field does not equal 0x6 The frame ends before the IPv6 header (40 bytes) or extension header (as given in the corresponding Header Length field in an extension header) has been completely received. Even when the checksum offload detects such an IP header error, it inserts an IPv4 header checksum if the Ethernet Type field indicates an IPv4 payload.

TCP/UDP/ICMP checksum The TCP/UDP/ICMP checksum processes the IPv4 or IPv6 header (including extension headers) and determines whether the encapsulated payload is TCP, UDP or ICMP. Note that: a) b) For non-TCP, -UDP, or -ICMP/ICMPv6 payloads, this checksum is bypassed and nothing further is modified in the frame. Fragmented IP frames (IPv4 or IPv6), IP frames with security features (such as an authentication header or encapsulated security payload), and IPv6 frames with routing headers are bypassed and not processed by the checksum.

The checksum is calculated for the TCP, UDP, or ICMP payload and inserted into its corresponding field in the header. It can work in the following two modes: In the first mode, the TCP, UDP, or ICMPv6 pseudo-header is not included in the checksum calculation and is assumed to be present in the input frames checksum field. The checksum field is included in the checksum calculation, and then replaced by the final calculated checksum. In the second mode, the checksum field is ignored, the TCP, UDP, or ICMPv6 pseudo-header data are included into the checksum calculation, and the checksum field is overwritten with the final calculated value.

Note that: for ICMP-over-IPv4 packets, the checksum field in the ICMP packet must always be 0x0000 in both modes, because pseudo-headers are not defined for such packets. If it does not equal 0x0000, an incorrect checksum may be inserted into the packet. The result of this operation is indicated by the payload checksum error status bit in the Transmit Status vector (bit 12). The payload checksum error status bit is set when either of the following is detected: the frame has been forwarded to the MAC transmitter in Store-and-forward mode without the end of frame being written to the FIFO the packet ends before the number of bytes indicated by the payload length field in the IP header is received.

When the packet is longer than the indicated payload length, the bytes are ignored as stuff bytes, and no error is reported. When the first type of error is detected, the TCP,

923/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller UDP or ICMP header is not modified. For the second error type, still, the calculated checksum is inserted into the corresponding header field.

MII/RMII transmit bit order

Each nibble from the MII is transmitted on the RMII a dibit at a time with the order of dibit transmission shown in Figure 333. Lower order bits (D1 and D0) are transmitted first followed by higher order bits (D2 and D3). Figure 333. Transmission bit order
RMII_TXD[1:0]

LSB D0

MSB D1 Bibit stream

LSB

D0

D1 MII_TXD[3:0] D2

MSB

D3 Nibble stream
ai15632

MII/RMII transmit timing diagrams

Figure 334. Transmission with no collision
MII_TX_CLK

MII_TX_EN

MII_TXD[3:0]

PR

EA

MB

LE

MII_CS

MII_COL

Low
ai15631

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

924/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 335. Transmission with collision
MII_TX_CLK

RM0090

MII_TX_EN

MII_TXD[3:0]

PR

EAM

BLE

SFD

DA

DA

JAM

JAM

JAM

JAM

MII_CS

MII_COL

ai15651

Figure 336 shows a frame transmission in MII and RMII. Figure 336. Frame transmission in MMI and RMII modes
MII_RX_CLK

MII_TX_EN

MII_TXD[3:0]

RMII_REF_CLK

RMII_TX_EN

RMII_TXD[1:0]

ai15652

29.5.3

MAC frame reception

The MAC received frames are pushes into the Rx FIFO. The status (fill level) of this FIFO is indicated to the DMA once it crosses the configured receive threshold (RTC in the ETH_DMAOMR register) so that the DMA can initiate pre-configured burst transfers towards the AHB interface. In the default Cut-through mode, when 64 bytes (configured with the RTC bits in the ETH_DMAOMR register) or a full packet of data are received into the FIFO, the data are popped out and the DMA is notified of its availability. Once the DMA has initiated the transfer to the AHB interface, the data transfer continues from the FIFO until a complete packet has

925/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller been transferred. Upon completion of the EOF frame transfer, the status word is popped out and sent to the DMA controller. In Rx FIFO Store-and-forward mode (configured by the RSF bit in the ETH_DMAOMR register), a frame is read out only after being written completely into the Receive FIFO. In this mode, all error frames are dropped (if the core is configured to do so) such that only valid frames are read out and forwarded to the application. In Cut-through mode, some error frames are not dropped, because the error status is received at the end of the frame, by which time the start of that frame has already been read out of the FIFO. A receive operation is initiated when the MAC detects an SFD on the MII. The core strips the preamble and SFD before proceeding to process the frame. The header fields are checked for the filtering and the FCS field used to verify the CRC for the frame. The frame is dropped in the core if it fails the address filter.

Receive protocol
The received frame preamble and SFD are stripped. Once the SFD has been detected, the MAC starts sending the Ethernet frame data to the receive FIFO, beginning with the first byte following the SFD (destination address). If IEEE 1588 time stamping is enabled, a snapshot of the system time is taken when any frame's SFD is detected on the MII. Unless the MAC filters out and drops the frame, this time stamp is passed on to the application. If the received frame length/type field is less than 0x600 and if the MAC is programmed for the auto CRC/pad stripping option, the MAC sends the data of the frame to RxFIFO up to the count specified in the length/type field, then starts dropping bytes (including the FCS field). If the Length/Type field is greater than or equal to 0x600, the MAC sends all received Ethernet frame data to Rx FIFO, regardless of the value on the programmed auto-CRC strip option. The MAC watchdog timer is enabled by default, that is, frames above 2048 bytes (DA + SA + LT + Data + pad + FCS) are cut off. This feature can be disabled by programming the watchdog disable (WD) bit in the MAC configuration register. However, even if the watchdog timer is disabled, frames greater than 16 KB in size are cut off and a watchdog timeout status is given.

Receive CRC: automatic CRC and pad stripping

The MAC checks for any CRC error in the receiving frame. It calculates the 32-bit CRC for the received frame that includes the Destination address field through the FCS field. The encoding is defined by the following polynomial.
G( x) = x
32

+x

26

+x

23

+x

22

+x

16

+x

12

+x

11

+x

10

+x +x +x +x +x +x+1

Regardless of the auto-pad/CRC strip, the MAC receives the entire frame to compute the CRC check for the received frame.

Receive checksum offload

Both IPv4 and IPv6 frames in the received Ethernet frames are detected and processed for data integrity. You can enable the receive checksum offload by setting the IPCO bit in the ETH_MACCR register. The MAC receiver identifies IPv4 or IPv6 frames by checking for value 0x0800 or 0x86DD, respectively, in the received Ethernet frame Type field. This identification applies to VLAN-tagged frames as well. The receive checksum offload calculates IPv4 header checksums and checks that they match the received IPv4 header checksums. The IP Header Error bit is set for any mismatch between the indicated payload

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

926/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

type (Ethernet Type field) and the IP header version, or when the received frame does not have enough bytes, as indicated by the IPv4 headers Length field (or when fewer than 20 bytes are available in an IPv4 or IPv6 header). The receive checksum offload also identifies a TCP, UDP or ICMP payload in the received IP datagrams (IPv4 or IPv6) and calculates the checksum of such payloads properly, as defined in the TCP, UDP or ICMP specifications. It includes the TCP/UDP/ICMPv6 pseudo-header bytes for checksum calculation and checks whether the received checksum field matches the calculated value. The result of this operation is given as a Payload Checksum Error bit in the receive status word. This status bit is also set if the length of the TCP, UDP or ICMP payload does not match the expected payload length given in the IP header. As mentioned in TCP/UDP/ICMP checksum on page 923, the receive checksum offload bypasses the payload of fragmented IP datagrams, IP datagrams with security features, IPv6 routing headers, and payloads other than TCP, UDP or ICMP. This information (whether the checksum is bypassed or not) is given in the receive status, as described in the RDES0: Receive descriptor Word0 section. In this configuration, the core does not append any payload checksum bytes to the received Ethernet frames. As mentioned in RDES0: Receive descriptor Word0 on page 961, the meaning of certain register bits changes as shown in Table 165. Table 165. Frame statuses
Bit 18: Bit 27: Header Bit 28: Payload Ethernet frame checksum error checksum error 0 1 0 0 0 0 Frame status The frame is an IEEE 802.3 frame (Length field value is less than 0x0600). IPv4/IPv6 Type frame in which no checksum error is detected. IPv4/IPv6 Type frame in which a payload checksum error (as described for PCE) is detected IPv4/IPv6 Type frame in which IP header checksum error (as described for IPCO HCE) is detected. IPv4/IPv6 Type frame in which both PCE and IPCO HCE are detected. IPv4/IPv6 Type frame in which there is no IP HCE and the payload check is bypassed due to unsupported payload. Type frame which is neither IPv4 or IPv6 (checksum offload bypasses the checksum check completely) Reserved

0 0

1 1

1 0

Receive frame controller

If the RA bit is reset in the MAC CSR frame filter register, the MAC performs frame filtering based on the destination/source address (the application still needs to perform another level of filtering if it decides not to receive any bad frames like runt, CRC error frames, etc.). On detecting a filter-fail, the frame is dropped and not transferred to the application. When the filtering parameters are changed dynamically, and in case of (DA-SA) filter-fail, the rest of
927/1422 Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller the frame is dropped and the Rx Status Word is immediately updated (with zero frame length, CRC error and Runt Error bits set), indicating the filter fail. In Ethernet power down mode, all received frames are dropped, and are not forwarded to the application.

Receive flow control

The MAC detects the receiving Pause frame and pauses the frame transmission for the delay specified within the received Pause frame (only in Full-duplex mode). The Pause frame detection function can be enabled or disabled with the RFCE bit in ETH_MACFCR. Once receive flow control has been enabled, the received frame destination address begins to be monitored for any match with the multicast address of the control frame (0x0180 C200 0001). If a match is detected (the destination address of the received frame matches the reserved control frame destination address), the MAC then decides whether or not to transfer the received control frame to the application, based on the level of the PCF bit in ETH_MACFFR. The MAC also decodes the type, opcode, and Pause Timer fields of the receiving control frame. If the byte count of the status indicates 64 bytes, and if there is no CRC error, the MAC transmitter pauses the transmission of any data frame for the duration of the decoded Pause time value, multiplied by the slot time (64 byte times for both 10/100 Mbit/s modes). Meanwhile, if another Pause frame is detected with a zero Pause time value, the MAC resets the Pause time and manages this new pause request. If the received control frame matches neither the type field (0x8808), the opcode (0x00001), nor the byte length (64 bytes), or if there is a CRC error, the MAC does not generate a Pause. In the case of a pause frame with a multicast destination address, the MAC filters the frame based on the address match. For a pause frame with a unicast destination address, the MAC filtering depends on whether the DA matched the contents of the MAC address 0 register and whether the UPDF bit in ETH_MACFCR is set (detecting a pause frame even with a unicast destination address). The PCF register bits (bits [7:6] in ETH_MACFFR) control filtering for control frames in addition to address filtering.

Receive operation multiframe handling

Since the status is available immediately following the data, the FIFO is capable of storing any number of frames into it, as long as it is not full.

Error handling
If the Rx FIFO is full before it receives the EOF data from the MAC, an overflow is declared and the whole frame is dropped, and the overflow counter in the (ETH_DMAMFBOCR register) is incremented. The status indicates a partial frame due to overflow. The Rx FIFO can filter error and undersized frames, if enabled (using the FEF and FUGF bits in ETH_DMAOMR). If the Receive FIFO is configured to operate in Store-and-forward mode, all error frames can be filtered and dropped. In Cut-through mode, if a frame's status and length are available when that frame's SOF is read from the Rx FIFO, then the complete erroneous frame can be dropped. The DMA can flush the error frame being read from the FIFO, by enabling the receive frame flash bit. The data transfer to the application (DMA) is then stopped and the rest of the frame is internally read and dropped. The next frame transfer can then be started, if available.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

928/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Receive status word

At the end of the Ethernet frame reception, the MAC outputs the receive status to the application (DMA). The detailed description of the receive status is the same as for bits[31:0] in RDES0, given in RDES0: Receive descriptor Word0 on page 961.

Frame length interface

In case of switch applications, data transmission and reception between the application and MAC happen as complete frame transfers. The application layer should be aware of the length of the frames received from the ingress port in order to transfer the frame to the egress port. The MAC core provides the frame length of each received frame inside the status at the end of each frame reception. Note: A frame length value of 0 is given for partial frames written into the Rx FIFO due to overflow.

MII/RMII receive bit order

Each nibble is transmitted to the MII from the dibit received from the RMII in the nibble transmission order shown in Figure 337. The lower-order bits (D0 and D1) are received first, followed by the higher-order bits (D2 and D3). Figure 337. Receive bit order
RMII_RXD[1:0]

LSB D0

MSB D1 Di-bit stream

LSB

D0

D1 MII_RXD[3:0] D2

MSB

D3 Nibble stream
ai15633

929/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 338. Reception with no error
MII_RX_CLK

MII_RX_DV

MII_RXD[3:0]

PREAMBLE

SFD

FCS

MII_RX_ERR
ai15634

Figure 339. Reception with errors

MII_RX_CLK

MII_RX_DV

MII_RXD[3:0]

PREAMBLE

SFD

DA

DA

XX

XX

XX

MII_RX_ERR
ai15635

Figure 340. Reception with false carrier indication

MII_RX_CLK

MII_RX_DV

MII_RXD[3:0]

XX

XX

XX

XX

0E

XX

XX

XX

XX

MII_RX_ERR
ai15636

29.5.4

MAC interrupts
Interrupts can be generated from the MAC core as a result of various events. The ETH_MACSR register describes the events that can cause an interrupt from the MAC core. You can prevent each event from asserting the interrupt by setting the corresponding mask bits in the Interrupt Mask register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

930/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

The interrupt register bits only indicate the block from which the event is reported. You have to read the corresponding status registers and other registers to clear the interrupt. For example, bit 3 of the Interrupt register, set high, indicates that the Magic packet or Wake-onLAN frame is received in Power-down mode. You must read the ETH_MACPMTCSR Register to clear this interrupt event. Figure 341. MAC core interrupt masking scheme
TSTS AND TSTIM OR PMTS PMTIM AND PMTI Interrupt

TSTI

ai15637

29.5.5

MAC filtering
Address filtering
Address filtering checks the destination and source addresses on all received frames and the address filtering status is reported accordingly. Address checking is based on different parameters (Frame filter register) chosen by the application. The filtered frame can also be identified: multicast or broadcast frame. Address filtering uses the station's physical (MAC) address and the Multicast Hash table for address checking purposes.

Unicast destination address filter

The MAC supports up to 4 MAC addresses for unicast perfect filtering. If perfect filtering is selected (HU bit in the Frame filter register is reset), the MAC compares all 48 bits of the received unicast address with the programmed MAC address for any match. Default MacAddr0 is always enabled, other addresses MacAddr1MacAddr3 are selected with an individual enable bit. Each byte of these other addresses (MacAddr1MacAddr3) can be masked during comparison with the corresponding received DA byte by setting the corresponding Mask Byte Control bit in the register. This helps group address filtering for the DA. In Hash filtering mode (when HU bit is set), the MAC performs imperfect filtering for unicast addresses using a 64-bit Hash table. For hash filtering, the MAC uses the 6 upper CRC (see note 1 below) bits of the received destination address to index the content of the Hash table. A value of 000000 selects bit 0 in the selected register, and a value of 111111 selects bit 63 in the Hash Table register. If the corresponding bit (indicated by the 6-bit CRC) is set to 1, the unicast frame is said to have passed the Hash filter; otherwise, the frame has failed the Hash filter. Note: This CRC is a 32-bit value coded by the following polynomial (for more details refer to Section 29.5.3: MAC frame reception):
G(x) = x
32

+x

26

+x

23

+x

22

+x

16

+x

12

+x

11

+x

10

+x +x +x +x +x +x+1

931/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Multicast destination address filter

The MAC can be programmed to pass all multicast frames by setting the PAM bit in the Frame filter register. If the PAM bit is reset, the MAC performs the filtering for multicast addresses based on the HM bit in the Frame filter register. In Perfect filtering mode, the multicast address is compared with the programmed MAC destination address registers (1 3). Group address filtering is also supported. In Hash filtering mode, the MAC performs imperfect filtering using a 64-bit Hash table. For hash filtering, the MAC uses the 6 upper CRC (see note 1 below) bits of the received multicast address to index the content of the Hash table. A value of 000000 selects bit 0 in the selected register and a value of 111111 selects bit 63 in the Hash Table register. If the corresponding bit is set to 1, then the multicast frame is said to have passed the Hash filter; otherwise, the frame has failed the Hash filter. Note: This CRC is a 32-bit value coded by the following polynomial (for more details refer to Section 29.5.3: MAC frame reception):
G(x) = x
32

+x

26

+x

23

+x

22

+x

16

+x

12

+x

11

+x

10

+x +x +x +x +x +x+1

Hash or perfect address filter

The DA filter can be configured to pass a frame when its DA matches either the Hash filter or the Perfect filter by setting the HPF bit in the Frame filter register and setting the corresponding HU or HM bits. This configuration applies to both unicast and multicast frames. If the HPF bit is reset, only one of the filters (Hash or Perfect) is applied to the received frame.

Broadcast address filter

The MAC does not filter any broadcast frames in the default mode. However, if the MAC is programmed to reject all broadcast frames by setting the BFD bit in the Frame filter register, any broadcast frames are dropped.

Unicast source address filter

The MAC can also perform perfect filtering based on the source address field of the received frames. By default, the MAC compares the SA field with the values programmed in the SA registers. The MAC address registers [1:3] can be configured to contain SA instead of DA for comparison, by setting bit 30 in the corresponding register. Group filtering with SA is also supported. The frames that fail the SA filter are dropped by the MAC if the SAF bit in the Frame filter register is set. Otherwise, the result of the SA filter is given as a status bit in the Receive Status word (see RDES0: Receive descriptor Word0). When the SAF bit is set, the result of the SA and DA filters is ANDed to decide whether the frame needs to be forwarded. This means that either of the filter fail result will drop the frame. Both filters have to pass the frame for the frame to be forwarded to the application.

Inverse filtering operation

For both destination and source address filtering, there is an option to invert the filter-match result at the final output. These are controlled by the DAIF and SAIF bits in the Frame filter register, respectively. The DAIF bit is applicable for both Unicast and Multicast DA frames. The result of the unicast/multicast destination address filter is inverted in this mode. Similarly, when the SAIF bit is set, the result of the unicast SA filter is inverted. Table 166

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

932/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

and Table 167 summarize destination and source address filtering based on the type of frame received. Table 166. Destination address filtering
Frame type PM 1 Broadcast 0 0 1 0 0 Unicast 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 0 HPF X X X X X X 0 0 1 1 X X X 0 HU X X X X 0 0 1 1 1 1 X X X X DAIF X X X X 0 1 0 1 0 1 X X 0 0 HM X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 PAM X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 DB X 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X Pass Pass Fail Pass all frames Pass on perfect/group filter match Fail on perfect/Group filter match Pass on hash filter match Fail on hash filter match Pass on hash or perfect/Group filter match Fail on hash or perfect/Group filter match Pass all frames Pass all frames Pass on Perfect/Group filter match and drop PAUSE control frames if PCF = 0x Pass on hash filter match and drop PAUSE control frames if PCF = 0x Pass on hash or perfect/Group filter match and drop PAUSE control frames if PCF = 0x Fail on perfect/Group filter match and drop PAUSE control frames if PCF = 0x Fail on hash filter match and drop PAUSE control frames if PCF = 0x Fail on hash or perfect/Group filter match and drop PAUSE control frames if PCF = 0x DA filter operation

Multicast

0 0

X 0

X X

1 1

0 1

0 0

X X

933/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Table 167. Source address filtering
Frame type PM 1 0 Unicast 0 0 0 SAIF X 0 1 0 1 SAF X 0 0 1 1 Pass all frames Pass status on perfect/Group filter match but do not drop frames that fail Fail status on perfect/group filter match but do not drop frame Pass on perfect/group filter match and drop frames that fail Fail on perfect/group filter match and drop frames that fail SA filter operation

29.5.6

MAC loopback mode

The MAC supports loopback of transmitted frames onto its receiver. By default, the MAC loopback function is disabled, but this feature can be enabled by programming the Loopback bit in the MAC ETH_MACCR register.

29.5.7

MAC management counters: MMC

The MAC management counters (MMC) maintain a set of registers for gathering statistics on the received and transmitted frames. These include a control register for controlling the behavior of the registers, two 32-bit registers containing generated interrupts (receive and transmit), and two 32-bit registers containing masks for the Interrupt register (receive and transmit). These registers are accessible from the application. Each register is 32 bits wide. Section 29.8: Ethernet register descriptions describes the various counters and lists the addresses of each of the statistics counters. This address is used for read/write accesses to the desired transmit/receive counter. The Receive MMC counters are updated for frames that pass address filtering. Dropped frames statistics are not updated unless the dropped frames are runt frames of less than 6 bytes (DA bytes are not received fully).

Good transmitted and received frames

Transmitted frames are considered good if transmitted successfully. In other words, a transmitted frame is good if the frame transmission is not aborted due to any of the following errors: + Jabber Timeout + No Carrier/Loss of Carrier + Late Collision + Frame Underflow + Excessive Deferral + Excessive Collision

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

934/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Received frames are considered good if none of the following errors exists: + CRC error + Runt Frame (shorter than 64 bytes) + Alignment error (in 10/ 100 Mbit/s only) + Length error (non-Type frames only) + Out of Range (non-Type frames only, longer than maximum size) + MII_RXER Input error The maximum frame size depends on the frame type, as follows: + Untagged frame maxsize = 1518 + VLAN Frame maxsize = 1522

RM0090

29.5.8

Power management: PMT

This section describes the power management (PMT) mechanisms supported by the MAC. PMT supports the reception of network (remote) wakeup frames and Magic Packet frames. PMT generates interrupts for wakeup frames and Magic Packets received by the MAC. The PMT block is enabled with remote wakeup frame enable and Magic Packet enable. These enable bits (WFE and MPE) are in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register and are programmed by the application. When the power down mode is enabled in the PMT, then all received frames are dropped by the MAC and they are not forwarded to the application. The MAC comes out of the power down mode only when either a Magic Packet or a Remote wakeup frame is received and the corresponding detection is enabled.

Remote wakeup frame filter register

There are eight wakeup frame filter registers. To write on each of them, load the wakeup frame filter register value by value. The wanted values of the wakeup frame filter are loaded by sequentially loading eight times the wakeup frame filter register. The read operation is identical to the write operation. To read the eight values, you have to read eight times the wakeup frame filter register to reach the last register. Each read/write points the wakeup frame filter register to the next filter register.

935/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 342. Wakeup frame filter register
Wakeup frame filter reg0 Wakeup frame filter reg1 Wakeup frame filter reg2 Wakeup frame filter reg3 Wakeup frame filter reg4 Wakeup frame filter reg5 Wakeup frame filter reg6 Wakeup frame filter reg7
RSVD

Filter 0 Byte Mask Filter 1 Byte Mask Filter 2 Byte Mask Filter 3 Byte Mask
Filter 3 Command
RSVD

Filter 2 Command

RSVD

Filter 1 Command

RSVD

Filter 0 Command

Filter 3 Offset

Filter 2 Offset

Filter 1 Offset

Filter 0 Offset

Filter 1 CRC - 16 Filter 3 CRC - 16

Filter 0 CRC - 16 Filter 2 CRC - 16

ai15647

Filter i Byte Mask This register defines which bytes of the frame are examined by filter i (0, 1, 2, and 3) in order to determine whether or not the frame is a wakeup frame. The MSB (thirty-first bit) must be zero. Bit j [30:0] is the Byte Mask. If bit j (byte number) of the Byte Mask is set, then Filter i Offset + j of the incoming frame is processed by the CRC block; otherwise Filter i Offset + j is ignored.

Filter i Command This 4-bit command controls the filter i operation. Bit 3 specifies the address type, defining the patterns destination address type. When the bit is set, the pattern applies to only multicast frames. When the bit is reset, the pattern applies only to unicast frames. Bit 2 and bit 1 are reserved. Bit 0 is the enable bit for filter i; if bit 0 is not set, filter i is disabled.

Filter i Offset This register defines the offset (within the frame) from which the frames are examined by filter i. This 8-bit pattern offset is the offset for the filter i first byte to be examined. The minimum allowed is 12, which refers to the 13th byte of the frame (offset value 0 refers to the first byte of the frame).

Filter i CRC-16 This register contains the CRC_16 value calculated from the pattern, as well as the byte mask programmed to the wakeup filter register block.

Remote wakeup frame detection

When the MAC is in sleep mode and the remote wakeup bit is enabled in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register, normal operation is resumed after receiving a remote wakeup frame. The application writes all eight wakeup filter registers, by performing a sequential write to the wakeup frame filter register address. The application enables remote wakeup by writing a 1 to bit 2 in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register. PMT supports four programmable filters that provide different receive frame patterns. If the incoming frame passes the address filtering of Filter Command, and if Filter CRC-16 matches the incoming examined pattern, then the wakeup frame is received. Filter_offset (minimum value 12, which refers to the 13th byte of the frame) determines the offset from which the frame is to be examined. Filter Byte Mask determines which bytes of the frame must be examined. The thirty-first bit of Byte Mask must be set to zero. The wakeup frame is checked only for length error, FCS error, dribble bit error, MII error, collision, and to ensure that it is not a runt frame. Even if the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

936/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

wakeup frame is more than 512 bytes long, if the frame has a valid CRC value, it is considered valid. Wakeup frame detection is updated in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register for every remote wakeup frame received. If enabled, a PMT interrupt is generated to indicate the reception of a remote wakeup frame.

Magic packet detection

The Magic Packet frame is based on a method that uses Advanced Micro Devices Magic Packet technology to power up the sleeping device on the network. The MAC receives a specific packet of information, called a Magic Packet, addressed to the node on the network. Only Magic Packets that are addressed to the device or a broadcast address are checked to determine whether they meet the wakeup requirements. Magic Packets that pass address filtering (unicast or broadcast) are checked to determine whether they meet the remote Wake-on-LAN data format of 6 bytes of all ones followed by a MAC address appearing 16 times. The application enables Magic Packet wakeup by writing a 1 to bit 1 in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register. The PMT block constantly monitors each frame addressed to the node for a specific Magic Packet pattern. Each received frame is checked for a 0xFFFF FFFF FFFF pattern following the destination and source address field. The PMT block then checks the frame for 16 repetitions of the MAC address without any breaks or interruptions. In case of a break in the 16 repetitions of the address, the 0xFFFF FFFF FFFF pattern is scanned for again in the incoming frame. The 16 repetitions can be anywhere in the frame, but must be preceded by the synchronization stream (0xFFFF FFFF FFFF). The device also accepts a multicast frame, as long as the 16 duplications of the MAC address are detected. If the MAC address of a node is 0x0011 2233 4455, then the MAC scans for the data sequence: Destination address source address .. FFFF FFFF FFFF 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 0011 2233 4455 CRC Magic Packet detection is updated in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register for received Magic Packet. If enabled, a PMT interrupt is generated to indicate the reception of a Magic Packet.

System consideration during power-down

The Ethernet PMT block is able to detect frames while the system is in the Stop mode, provided that the EXTI line 19 is enabled. The MAC receiver state machine should remain enabled during the power-down mode. This means that the RE bit has to remain set in the ETH_MACCR register because it is involved in magic packet/ wake-on-LAN frame detection. The transmit state machine should however be turned off during the power-down mode by clearing the TE bit in the ETH_MACCR register. Moreover, the Ethernet DMA should be disabled during the power-down mode, because it is not necessary to copy the magic packet/wake-on-LAN frame into the SRAM. To disable the Ethernet DMA, clear the ST bit and the SR bit (for the transmit DMA and the receive DMA, respectively) in the ETH_DMAOMR register. The recommended power-down and wakeup sequences are as follows:

937/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1.

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Disable the transmit DMA and wait for any previous frame transmissions to complete. These transmissions can be detected when the transmit interrupt ETH_DMASR register[0] is received. Disable the MAC transmitter and MAC receiver by clearing the RE and TE bits in the ETH_MACCR configuration register. Wait for the receive DMA to have emptied all the frames in the Rx FIFO. Disable the receive DMA. Configure and enable the EXTI line 19 to generate either an event or an interrupt. If you configure the EXTI line 19 to generate an interrupt, you also have to correctly configure the ETH_WKUP_IRQ Handler function, which should clear the pending bit of the EXTI line 19. Enable Magic packet/Wake-on-LAN frame detection by setting the MFE/ WFE bit in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register. Enable the MAC power-down mode, by setting the PD bit in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register. Enable the MAC Receiver by setting the RE bit in the ETH_MACCR register.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9.

10. Enter the systems Stop mode (for more details refer to Section 5.3.4: Stop mode): 11. On receiving a valid wakeup frame, the Ethernet peripheral exits the power-down mode. 12. Read the ETH_MACPMTCSR to clear the power management event flag, enable the MAC transmitter state machine, and the receive and transmit DMA. 13. Configure the system clock: enable the HSE and set the clocks.

29.5.9

Precision time protocol (IEEE1588 PTP)

The IEEE 1588 standard defines a protocol that allows precise clock synchronization in measurement and control systems implemented with technologies such as network communication, local computing and distributed objects. The protocol applies to systems that communicate by local area networks supporting multicast messaging, including (but not limited to) Ethernet. This protocol is used to synchronize heterogeneous systems that include clocks of varying inherent precision, resolution and stability. The protocol supports system-wide synchronization accuracy in the submicrosecond range with minimum network and local clock computing resources. The message-based protocol, known as the precision time protocol (PTP), is transported over UDP/IP. The system or network is classified into Master and Slave nodes for distributing the timing/clock information. The protocols technique for synchronizing a slave node to a master node by exchanging PTP messages is described in Figure 343.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

938/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 343. Networked time synchronization
Master clock time t1 Sync message Slave clock time

RM0090

Data at slave clock t2 t2

t2m

Follow_up message containing value of t1

t1, t2 t3m Delay_Req message t3 t1, t2, t3

t4 Delay_Resp message containing value of t4

time

t1, t2, t3, t4

ai15669

1.

The master broadcasts PTP Sync messages to all its nodes. The Sync message contains the masters reference time information. The time at which this message leaves the masters system is t1. For Ethernet ports, this time has to be captured at the MII. A slave receives the Sync message and also captures the exact time, t2, using its timing reference. The master then sends the slave a Follow_up message, which contains the t1 information for later use. The slave sends the master a Delay_Req message, noting the exact time, t3, at which this frame leaves the MII. The master receives this message and captures the exact time, t4, at which it enters its system. The master sends the t4 information to the slave in the Delay_Resp message. The slave uses the four values of t1, t2, t3, and t4 to synchronize its local timing reference to the masters timing reference.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Most of the protocol implementation occurs in the software, above the UDP layer. As described above, however, hardware support is required to capture the exact time when specific PTP packets enter or leave the Ethernet port at the MII. This timing information has to be captured and returned to the software for a proper, high-accuracy implementation of PTP.

Reference timing source

To get a snapshot of the time, the core requires a reference time in 64-bit format (split into two 32-bit channels, with the upper 32 bits providing time in seconds, and the lower 32 bits indicating time in nanoseconds) as defined in the IEEE 1588 specification. The PTP reference clock input is used to internally generate the reference time (also called the System Time) and to capture time stamps. The frequency of this reference clock must

939/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller be greater than or equal to the resolution of time stamp counter. The synchronization accuracy target between the master node and the slaves is around 100 ns. The generation, update and modification of the System Time are described in the Section : System Time correction methods. The accuracy depends on the PTP reference clock input period, the characteristics of the oscillator (drift) and the frequency of the synchronization procedure. Due to the synchronization from the Tx and Rx clock input domain to the PTP reference clock domain, the uncertainty on the time stamp latched value is 1 reference clock period. If we add the uncertainty due to resolution, we will add half the period for time stamping.

Transmission of frames with the PTP feature

When a frames SFD is output on the MII, a time stamp is captured. Frames for which time stamp capture is required are controllable on a per-frame basis. In other words, each transmitted frame can be marked to indicate whether a time stamp must be captured or not for that frame. The transmitted frames are not processed to identify PTP frames. Frame control is exercised through the control bits in the transmit descriptor. Captured time stamps are returned to the application in the same way as the status is provided for frames. The time stamp is sent back along with the Transmit status of the frame, inside the corresponding transmit descriptor, thus connecting the time stamp automatically to the specific PTP frame. The 64-bit time stamp information is written back to the TDES2 and TDES3 fields, with TDES2 holding the time stamps 32 least significant bits.

Reception of frames with the PTP feature

When the IEEE 1588 time stamping feature is enabled, the Ethernet MAC captures the time stamp of all frames received on the MII. The MAC provides the time stamp as soon as the frame reception is complete. Captured time stamps are returned to the application in the same way as the frame status is provided. The time stamp is sent back along with the Receive status of the frame, inside the corresponding receive descriptor. The 64-bit time stamp information is written back to the RDES2 and RDES3 fields, with RDES2 holding the time stamps 32 least significant bits.

System Time correction methods

The 64-bit PTP time is updated using the PTP input reference clock, HCLK. This PTP time is used as a source to take snapshots (time stamps) of the Ethernet frames being transmitted or received at the MII. The System Time counter can be initialized or corrected using either the Coarse or the Fine correction method. In the Coarse correction method, the initial value or the offset value is written to the Time stamp update register (refer to Section 29.8.3: IEEE 1588 time stamp registers on page 996). For initialization, the System Time counter is written with the value in the Time stamp update registers, whereas for system time correction, the offset value (Time stamp update register) is added to or subtracted from the system time. In the Fine correction method, the slave clock (reference clock) frequency drift with respect to the master clock (as defined in IEEE 1588) is corrected over a period of time, unlike in the Coarse correction method where it is corrected in a single clock cycle. The longer correction time helps maintain linear time and does not introduce drastic changes (or a large jitter) in the reference time between PTP Sync message intervals. In this method, an accumulator sums up the contents of the Addend register as shown in Figure 344. The arithmetic carry that the accumulator generates is used as a pulse to increment the system time counter.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

940/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

The accumulator and the addend are 32-bit registers. Here, the accumulator acts as a highprecision frequency multiplier or divider. Figure 344 shows this algorithm. Figure 344. System time update using the Fine correction method
Addend register

Addend update

+
Accumulator register

Constant value

Increment Subsecond register

Subsecond register

Increment Second register

Second register

ai15670

The system time update logic requires a 50 MHz clock frequency to achieve 20 ns accuracy. The frequency division is the ratio of the reference clock frequency to the required clock frequency. Hence, if the reference clock (HCLK) is, let us say, 66 MHz, the ratio is calculated as 66 MHz/50 MHz = 1.32. Hence, the default addend value to be set in the register is 232/1.32, which is equal to 0xC1F0 7C1F. If the reference clock drifts lower, to 65 MHz for example, the ratio is 65/50 or 1.3 and the value to set in the addend register is 232/1.30 equal to 0xC4EC 4EC4. If the clock drifts higher, to 67 MHz for example, the addend register must be set to 0xBF0 B7672. When the clock drift is zero, the default addend value of 0xC1F0 7C1F (232/1.32) should be programmed. In Figure 344, the constant value used to increment the subsecond register is 0d43. This makes an accuracy of 20 ns in the system time (in other words, it is incremented by 20 ns steps). The software has to calculate the drift in frequency based on the Sync messages, and to update the Addend register accordingly. Initially, the slave clock is set with FreqCompensationValue0 in the Addend register. This value is as follows: FreqCompensationValue0 = 232 / FreqDivisionRatio If MasterToSlaveDelay is initially assumed to be the same for consecutive Sync messages, the algorithm described below must be applied. After a few Sync cycles, frequency lock occurs. The slave clock can then determine a precise MasterToSlaveDelay value and resynchronize with the master using the new value.

941/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller The algorithm is as follows:

At time MasterSyncTime (n) the master sends the slave clock a Sync message. The slave receives this message when its local clock is SlaveClockTime (n) and computes MasterClockTime (n) as: MasterClockTime (n) = MasterSyncTime (n) + MasterToSlaveDelay (n) The master clock count for current Sync cycle, MasterClockCount (n) is given by: MasterClockCount (n) = MasterClockTime (n) MasterClockTime (n 1) (assuming that MasterToSlaveDelay is the same for Sync cycles n and n 1)

The slave clock count for current Sync cycle, SlaveClockCount (n) is given by: SlaveClockCount (n) = SlaveClockTime (n) SlaveClockTime (n 1) The difference between master and slave clock counts for current Sync cycle, ClockDiffCount (n) is given by: ClockDiffCount (n) = MasterClockCount (n) SlaveClockCount (n) The frequency-scaling factor for slave clock, FreqScaleFactor (n) is given by: FreqScaleFactor (n) = (MasterClockCount (n) + ClockDiffCount (n)) / SlaveClockCount (n)

The frequency compensation value for Addend register, FreqCompensationValue (n) is given by: FreqCompensationValue (n) = FreqScaleFactor (n) FreqCompensationValue (n 1)

In theory, this algorithm achieves lock in one Sync cycle; however, it may take several cycles, due to changing network propagation delays and operating conditions. This algorithm is self-correcting: if for any reason the slave clock is initially set to a value from the master that is incorrect, the algorithm corrects it at the cost of more Sync cycles.

Programming steps for system time generation initialization

The time stamping feature can be enabled by setting bit 0 in the Time stamp control register (ETH__PTPTSCR). However, it is essential to initialize the time stamp counter after this bit is set to start time stamp operation. The proper sequence is the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Mask the Time stamp trigger interrupt by setting bit 9 in the MACIMR register. Program Time stamp register bit 0 to enable time stamping. Program the Subsecond increment register based on the PTP clock frequency. If you are using the Fine correction method, program the Time stamp addend register and set Time stamp control register bit 5 (addend register update). Poll the Time stamp control register until bit 5 is cleared. To select the Fine correction method (if required), program Time stamp control register bit 1. Program the Time stamp high update and Time stamp low update registers with the appropriate time value. Set Time stamp control register bit 2 (Time stamp init). The Time stamp counter starts operation as soon as it is initialized with the value written in the Time stamp update register.

10. Enable the MAC receiver and transmitter for proper time stamping. Note: If time stamp operation is disabled by clearing bit 0 in the ETH_PTPTSCR register, the above steps must be repeated to restart the time stamp operation.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

942/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Programming steps for system time update in the Coarse correction method
To synchronize or update the system time in one process (coarse correction method), perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. Write the offset (positive or negative) in the Time stamp update high and low registers. Set bit 3 (TSSTU) in the Time stamp control register. The value in the Time stamp update registers is added to or subtracted from the system time when the TSSTU bit is cleared.

Programming steps for system time update in the Fine correction method
To synchronize or update the system time to reduce system-time jitter (fine correction method), perform the following steps: 1. With the help of the algorithm explained in Section : System Time correction methods, calculate the rate by which you want to speed up or slow down the system time increments. Update the time stamp. Wait the time you want the new value of the Addend register to be active. You can do this by activating the Time stamp trigger interrupt after the system time reaches the target value. Program the required target time in the Target time high and low registers. Unmask the Time stamp interrupt by clearing bit 9 in the ETH_MACIMR register. Set Time stamp control register bit 4 (TSARU). When this trigger causes an interrupt, read the ETH_MACSR register. Reprogram the Time stamp addend register with the old value and set ETH_TPTSCR bit 5 again.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7.

PTP trigger internal connection with TIM2

The MAC provides a trigger interrupt when the system time becomes greater than the target time. Using an interrupt introduces a known latency plus an uncertainty in the command execution time. In order to avoid this uncertainty, a PTP trigger output signal is set high when the system time is greater than the target time. It is internally connected to the TIM2 input trigger. With this signal, the input capture feature, the output compare feature and the waveforms of the timer can be used, triggered by the synchronized PTP system time. No uncertainty is introduced since the clock of the timer (PCLK1: TIM2 APB1 clock) and PTP reference clock (HCLK) are synchronous. This PTP trigger signal is connected to the TIM2 ITR1 input selectable by software. The connection is enabled through bits 11 and 10 in the TIM2 option register (TIM2_OR). Figure 345 shows the connection. Figure 345. PTP trigger output to TIM2 ITR1 connection
PTP trigger Ethernet MAC ITR1 TIM2
ai15671

943/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

PTP pulse-per-second output signal

This PTP pulse output is used to check the synchronization between all nodes in the network. To be able to test the difference between the local slave clock and the master reference clock, both clocks were given a pulse-per-second (PPS) output signal that may be connected to an oscilloscope if necessary. The deviation between the two signals can therefore be measured. The pulse width of the PPS output is 125 ms. The PPS output is enabled through bits 11 and 10 in the TIM2 option register (TIM2_OR). The default frequency of the PPS output is 1 Hz. PPSFREQ[3:0] (in ETH_PTPPPSCR) can be used to set the frequency of the PPS output to 2PPSFREQ Hz. When set to 1 Hz, the PPS pulse width is 125 ms with binary rollover (TSSSR=0, bit 9 in ETH_PTPTSCR) and 100 ms with digital rollover (TSSSR=1). When set to 2 Hz and higher, the duty cycle of the PPS output is 50% with binary rollover. With digital rollover (TSSSR=1), it is recommended not to use the PPS output with a frequency other than 1 Hz as it would have irregular waveforms (though its average frequency would always be correct during any one-second window). Figure 346. PPS output
PPS output Ethernet MAC
ai15672

29.6

Ethernet functional description: DMA controller operation

The DMA has independent transmit and receive engines, and a CSR space. The transmit engine transfers data from system memory into the Tx FIFO while the receive engine transfers data from the Rx FIFO into system memory. The controller utilizes descriptors to efficiently move data from source to destination with minimum CPU intervention. The DMA is designed for packet-oriented data transfers such as frames in Ethernet. The controller can be programmed to interrupt the CPU in cases such as frame transmit and receive transfer completion, and other normal/error conditions. The DMA and the STM32F4xx communicate through two data structures:

Control and status registers (CSR) Descriptor lists and data buffers.

Control and status registers are described in detail in Section 29.8 on page 972. Descriptors are described in detail in Section on page 952. The DMA transfers the received data frames to the receive buffer in the STM32F4xx memory, and transmits data frames from the transmit buffer in the STM32F4xx memory. Descriptors that reside in the STM32F4xx memory act as pointers to these buffers. There are two descriptor lists: one for reception, and one for transmission. The base address of each list is written into DMA Registers 3 and 4, respectively. A descriptor list is forwardlinked (either implicitly or explicitly). The last descriptor may point back to the first entry to create a ring structure. Explicit chaining of descriptors is accomplished by configuring the second address chained in both the receive and transmit descriptors (RDES1[14] and TDES0[20]). The descriptor lists reside in the Hosts physical memory space. Each descriptor can point to a maximum of two buffers. This enables the use of two physically

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

944/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

addressed buffers, instead of two contiguous buffers in memory. A data buffer resides in the Hosts physical memory space, and consists of an entire frame or part of a frame, but cannot exceed a single frame. Buffers contain only data. The buffer status is maintained in the descriptor. Data chaining refers to frames that span multiple data buffers. However, a single descriptor cannot span multiple frames. The DMA skips to the next frame buffer when the end of frame is detected. Data chaining can be enabled or disabled. The descriptor ring and chain structure is shown in Figure 347. Figure 347. Descriptor ring and chain structure
Ring structure Buffer 1 Descriptor 0 Buffer 2 Buffer 1 Descriptor 1 Buffer 2 Buffer 1 Descriptor 2 Buffer 2 Descriptor 2 Buffer 1 Descriptor n Buffer 2 Next descriptor
ai15638

Chain structure Descriptor 0 Buffer 1

Descriptor 1

Buffer 1

Buffer 1

29.6.1

Initialization of a transfer using DMA

Initialization for the MAC is as follows: 1. 2. 3. Write to ETH_DMABMR to set STM32F4xx bus access parameters. Write to the ETH_DMAIER register to mask unnecessary interrupt causes. The software driver creates the transmit and receive descriptor lists. Then it writes to both the ETH_DMARDLAR and ETH_DMATDLAR registers, providing the DMA with the start address of each list. Write to MAC Registers 1, 2, and 3 to choose the desired filtering options. Write to the MAC ETH_MACCR register to configure and enable the transmit and receive operating modes. The PS and DM bits are set based on the auto-negotiation result (read from the PHY). Write to the ETH_DMAOMR register to set bits 13 and 1 and start transmission and reception. The transmit and receive engines enter the running state and attempt to acquire descriptors from the respective descriptor lists. The receive and transmit engines then begin processing receive and transmit operations. The transmit and receive processes are independent of each other and can be started or stopped separately.

4. 5.

6. 7.

29.6.2

Host bus burst access

The DMA attempts to execute fixed-length burst transfers on the AHB master interface if configured to do so (FB bit in ETH_DMABMR). The maximum burst length is indicated and limited by the PBL field (ETH_DMABMR [13:8]). The receive and transmit descriptors are

945/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller always accessed in the maximum possible burst size (limited by PBL) for the 16 bytes to be read. The Transmit DMA initiates a data transfer only when there is sufficient space in the Transmit FIFO to accommodate the configured burst or the number of bytes until the end of frame (when it is less than the configured burst length). The DMA indicates the start address and the number of transfers required to the AHB Master Interface. When the AHB Interface is configured for fixed-length burst, then it transfers data using the best combination of INCR4, INCR8, INCR16 and SINGLE transactions. Otherwise (no fixed-length burst), it transfers data using INCR (undefined length) and SINGLE transactions. The Receive DMA initiates a data transfer only when sufficient data for the configured burst is available in Receive FIFO or when the end of frame (when it is less than the configured burst length) is detected in the Receive FIFO. The DMA indicates the start address and the number of transfers required to the AHB master interface. When the AHB interface is configured for fixed-length burst, then it transfers data using the best combination of INCR4, INCR8, INCR16 and SINGLE transactions. If the end of frame is reached before the fixedburst ends on the AHB interface, then dummy transfers are performed in order to complete the fixed-length burst. Otherwise (FB bit in ETH_DMABMR is reset), it transfers data using INCR (undefined length) and SINGLE transactions. When the AHB interface is configured for address-aligned beats, both DMA engines ensure that the first burst transfer the AHB initiates is less than or equal to the size of the configured PBL. Thus, all subsequent beats start at an address that is aligned to the configured PBL. The DMA can only align the address for beats up to size 16 (for PBL > 16), because the AHB interface does not support more than INCR16.

29.6.3

Host data buffer alignment

The transmit and receive data buffers do not have any restrictions on start address alignment. In our system with 32-bit memory, the start address for the buffers can be aligned to any of the four bytes. However, the DMA always initiates transfers with address aligned to the bus width with dummy data for the byte lanes not required. This typically happens during the transfer of the beginning or end of an Ethernet frame.

Example of buffer read: If the Transmit buffer address is 0x0000 0FF2, and 15 bytes need to be transferred, then the DMA will read five full words from address 0x0000 0FF0, but when transferring data to the Transmit FIFO, the extra bytes (the first two bytes) will be dropped or ignored. Similarly, the last 3 bytes of the last transfer will also be ignored. The DMA always ensures it transfers a full 32-bit data items to the Transmit FIFO, unless it is the end of frame.

Example of buffer write: If the Receive buffer address is 0x0000 0FF2, and 16 bytes of a received frame need to be transferred, then the DMA will write five full 32-bit data items from address 0x0000 0FF0. But the first 2 bytes of the first transfer and the last 2 bytes of the third transfer will have dummy data.

29.6.4

Buffer size calculations

The DMA does not update the size fields in the transmit and receive descriptors. The DMA updates only the status fields (xDES0) of the descriptors. The driver has to calculate the sizes. The transmit DMA transfers the exact number of bytes (indicated by buffer size field in TDES1) towards the MAC core. If a descriptor is marked as first (FS bit in TDES0 is set),

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

946/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

then the DMA marks the first transfer from the buffer as the start of frame. If a descriptor is marked as last (LS bit in TDES0), then the DMA marks the last transfer from that data buffer as the end of frame. The receive DMA transfers data to a buffer until the buffer is full or the end of frame is received. If a descriptor is not marked as last (LS bit in RDES0), then the buffer(s) that correspond to the descriptor are full and the amount of valid data in a buffer is accurately indicated by the buffer size field minus the data buffer pointer offset when the descriptors FS bit is set. The offset is zero when the data buffer pointer is aligned to the databus width. If a descriptor is marked as last, then the buffer may not be full (as indicated by the buffer size in RDES1). To compute the amount of valid data in this final buffer, the driver must read the frame length (FL bits in RDES0[29:16]) and subtract the sum of the buffer sizes of the preceding buffers in this frame. The receive DMA always transfers the start of next frame with a new descriptor. Note: Even when the start address of a receive buffer is not aligned to the system databus width the system should allocate a receive buffer of a size aligned to the system bus width. For example, if the system allocates a 1024 byte (1 KB) receive buffer starting from address 0x1000, the software can program the buffer start address in the receive descriptor to have a 0x1002 offset. The receive DMA writes the frame to this buffer with dummy data in the first two locations (0x1000 and 0x1001). The actual frame is written from location 0x1002. Thus, the actual useful space in this buffer is 1022 bytes, even though the buffer size is programmed as 1024 bytes, due to the start address offset.

29.6.5

DMA arbiter
The arbiter inside the DMA takes care of the arbitration between transmit and receive channel accesses to the AHB master interface. Two types of arbitrations are possible: round-robin, and fixed-priority. When round-robin arbitration is selected (DA bit in ETH_DMABMR is reset), the arbiter allocates the databus in the ratio set by the PM bits in ETH_DMABMR, when both transmit and receive DMAs request access simultaneously. When the DA bit is set, the receive DMA always gets priority over the transmit DMA for data access.

29.6.6

Error response to DMA

For any data transfer initiated by a DMA channel, if the slave replies with an error response, that DMA stops all operations and updates the error bits and the fatal bus error bit in the Status register (ETH_DMASR register). That DMA controller can resume operation only after soft- or hard-resetting the peripheral and re-initializing the DMA.

29.6.7

Tx DMA configuration
TxDMA operation: default (non-OSF) mode
The transmit DMA engine in default mode proceeds as follows: 1. 2. 3. The user sets up the transmit descriptor (TDES0-TDES3) and sets the OWN bit (TDES0[31]) after setting up the corresponding data buffer(s) with Ethernet frame data. Once the ST bit (ETH_DMAOMR register[13]) is set, the DMA enters the Run state. While in the Run state, the DMA polls the transmit descriptor list for frames requiring transmission. After polling starts, it continues in either sequential descriptor ring order or chained order. If the DMA detects a descriptor flagged as owned by the CPU, or if an error condition occurs, transmission is suspended and both the Transmit Buffer

947/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Unavailable (ETH_DMASR register[2]) and Normal Interrupt Summary (ETH_DMASR register[16]) bits are set. The transmit engine proceeds to Step 9. 4. 5. 6. If the acquired descriptor is flagged as owned by DMA (TDES0[31] is set), the DMA decodes the transmit data buffer address from the acquired descriptor. The DMA fetches the transmit data from the STM32F4xx memory and transfers the data. If an Ethernet frame is stored over data buffers in multiple descriptors, the DMA closes the intermediate descriptor and fetches the next descriptor. Steps 3, 4, and 5 are repeated until the end of Ethernet frame data is transferred. When frame transmission is complete, if IEEE 1588 time stamping was enabled for the frame (as indicated in the transmit status) the time stamp value is written to the transmit descriptor (TDES2 and TDES3) that contains the end-of-frame buffer. The status information is then written to this transmit descriptor (TDES0). Because the OWN bit is cleared during this step, the CPU now owns this descriptor. If time stamping was not enabled for this frame, the DMA does not alter the contents of TDES2 and TDES3. Transmit Interrupt (ETH_DMASR register [0]) is set after completing the transmission of a frame that has Interrupt on Completion (TDES1[31]) set in its last descriptor. The DMA engine then returns to Step 3. In the Suspend state, the DMA tries to re-acquire the descriptor (and thereby returns to Step 3) when it receives a transmit poll demand, and the Underflow Interrupt Status bit is cleared.

7.

8.

9.

Figure 348 shows the TxDMA transmission flow in default mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

948/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 348. TxDMA operation in Default mode
Start TxDMA
Start

RM0090

Stop TxDMA

(Re-)fetch next descriptor

Poll demand

(AHB) error?
No

Yes

TxDMA suspended

No

Own bit set?

Yes

Transfer data from buffer(s)

(AHB) error?
No

Yes

No

Frame xfer complete?

Yes

Close intermediate descriptor

Wait for Tx status

Time stamp present?

No

Yes

Write time stamp to TDES2 and TDES3

Write status word to TDES0

No

(AHB) error?

Yes

No

(AHB) error?

Yes

ai15639

TxDMA operation: OSF mode

While in the Run state, the transmit process can simultaneously acquire two frames without closing the Status descriptor of the first (if the OSF bit is set in ETH_DMAOMR register[2]). As the transmit process finishes transferring the first frame, it immediately polls the transmit descriptor list for the second frame. If the second frame is valid, the transmit process transfers this frame before writing the first frames status information. In OSF mode, the Run-state transmit DMA operates according to the following sequence:

949/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1. 2. 3.

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller The DMA operates as described in steps 16 of the TxDMA (default mode). Without closing the previous frames last descriptor, the DMA fetches the next descriptor. If the DMA owns the acquired descriptor, the DMA decodes the transmit buffer address in this descriptor. If the DMA does not own the descriptor, the DMA goes into Suspend mode and skips to Step 7. The DMA fetches the Transmit frame from the STM32F4xx memory and transfers the frame until the end of frame data are transferred, closing the intermediate descriptors if this frame is split across multiple descriptors. The DMA waits for the transmission status and time stamp of the previous frame. When the status is available, the DMA writes the time stamp to TDES2 and TDES3, if such time stamp was captured (as indicated by a status bit). The DMA then writes the status, with a cleared OWN bit, to the corresponding TDES0, thus closing the descriptor. If time stamping was not enabled for the previous frame, the DMA does not alter the contents of TDES2 and TDES3. If enabled, the Transmit interrupt is set, the DMA fetches the next descriptor, then proceeds to Step 3 (when Status is normal). If the previous transmission status shows an underflow error, the DMA goes into Suspend mode (Step 7). In Suspend mode, if a pending status and time stamp are received by the DMA, it writes the time stamp (if enabled for the current frame) to TDES2 and TDES3, then writes the status to the corresponding TDES0. It then sets relevant interrupts and returns to Suspend mode. The DMA can exit Suspend mode and enter the Run state (go to Step 1 or Step 2 depending on pending status) only after receiving a Transmit Poll demand (ETH_DMATPDR register).

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Figure 349 shows the basic flowchart in OSF mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

950/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 349. TxDMA operation in OSF mode

RM0090

Start TxDMA

Start

Stop TxDMA

(Re-)fetch next descriptor

Poll demand

(AHB) error?
No

Yes

TxDMA suspended

No

Own bit set?

Yes

Previous frame status available

Transfer data from buffer(s)

Time stamp present?

Yes No

(AHB) error?
No

Yes No

Write time stamp to TDES2 & TDES3 for previous frame

Frame xfer complete?

No

Yes

Second frame?
Yes

Close intermediate descriptor

Wait for previous frames Tx status

(AHB) error?
No

Yes

Time stamp present?

No

Yes

Write time stamp to TDES2 & TDES3 for previous frame

Write status word to prev. frames TDES0

Write status word to prev. frames TDES0

No

(AHB) error?

Yes

No

(AHB) error?
Yes

No

(AHB) error?
Yes

ai15640

Transmit frame processing

The transmit DMA expects that the data buffers contain complete Ethernet frames, excluding preamble, pad bytes, and FCS fields. The DA, SA, and Type/Len fields contain valid data. If the transmit descriptor indicates that the MAC core must disable CRC or pad insertion, the buffer must have complete Ethernet frames (excluding preamble), including the CRC bytes. Frames can be data-chained and span over several buffers. Frames have to be delimited by the first descriptor (TDES0[28]) and the last descriptor (TDES0[29]). As the transmission starts, TDES0[28] has to be set in the first descriptor. When this occurs, the frame data are transferred from the memory buffer to the Transmit FIFO. Concurrently, if the last descriptor (TDES0[29]) of the current frame is cleared, the transmit process attempts to acquire the next descriptor. The transmit process expects TDES0[28] to be cleared in this descriptor. If TDES0[29] is cleared, it indicates an intermediary buffer. If TDES0[29] is set, it

951/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller indicates the last buffer of the frame. After the last buffer of the frame has been transmitted, the DMA writes back the final status information to the transmit descriptor 0 (TDES0) word of the descriptor that has the last segment set in transmit descriptor 0 (TDES0[29]). At this time, if Interrupt on Completion (TDES0[30]) is set, Transmit Interrupt (in ETH_DMASR register [0]) is set, the next descriptor is fetched, and the process repeats. Actual frame transmission begins after the Transmit FIFO has reached either a programmable transmit threshold (ETH_DMAOMR register[16:14]), or a full frame is contained in the FIFO. There is also an option for the Store and forward mode (ETH_DMAOMR register[21]). Descriptors are released (OWN bit TDES0[31] is cleared) when the DMA finishes transferring the frame.

Transmit polling suspended

Transmit polling can be suspended by either of the following conditions:

The DMA detects a descriptor owned by the CPU (TDES0[31]=0) and the Transmit buffer unavailable flag is set (ETH_DMASR register[2]). To resume, the driver must give descriptor ownership to the DMA and then issue a Poll Demand command. A frame transmission is aborted when a transmit error due to underflow is detected. The appropriate Transmit Descriptor 0 (TDES0) bit is set. If the second condition occurs, both the Abnormal Interrupt Summary (in ETH_DMASR register [15]) and Transmit Underflow bits (in ETH_DMASR register[5]) are set, and the information is written to Transmit Descriptor 0, causing the suspension. If the DMA goes into Suspend state due to the first condition, then both the Normal Interrupt Summary (ETH_DMASR register [16]) and Transmit Buffer Unavailable (ETH_DMASR register[2]) bits are set. In both cases, the position in the transmit list is retained. The retained position is that of the descriptor following the last descriptor closed by the DMA. The driver must explicitly issue a Transmit Poll Demand command after rectifying the suspension cause.

Normal Tx DMA descriptors

The normal transmit descriptor structure consists of four 32-bit words as shown in Figure 350. The bit descriptions of TDES0, TDES1, TDES2 and TDES3 are given below. Note that enhanced descriptors must be used if time stamping is activated (ETH_PTPTSCR bit 0, TSE=1) or if IPv4 checksum offload is activated (ETH_MACCR bit 10, IPCO=1). Figure 350. Normal transmit descriptor
31 O W N Ctrl [30:26] T T Res. S 24 E Ctrl [23:20] T Reserved T [19:18] S S Reserved [15:13] Status [16:0] Buffer 1 byte count [12:0] 0

TDES 0 TDES 1 TDES 2

Reserved [31:29]

Buffer 2 byte count [28:16]

Buffer 1 address [31:0] / Time stamp low [31:0]

TDES 3

Buffer 2 address [31:0] or Next descriptor address [31:0] / Time stamp high [31:0]
ai15642b

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

952/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

TDES0: Transmit descriptor Word0 The application software has to program the control bits [30:26]+[23:20] plus the OWN bit [31] during descriptor initialization. When the DMA updates the descriptor (or writes it back), it resets all the control bits plus the OWN bit, and reports only the status bits.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 O W N rw IC LS FS DC DP rw rw rw rw rw

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CIC rw TE TC R H

TT SE Res rw

Res.

TT IH IP LC LC ES JT FF NC EC VF SS E E A O rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

CC

ED UF DB rw rw

rw rw rw

rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 31 OWN: Own bit When set, this bit indicates that the descriptor is owned by the DMA. When this bit is reset, it indicates that the descriptor is owned by the CPU. The DMA clears this bit either when it completes the frame transmission or when the buffers allocated in the descriptor are read completely. The ownership bit of the frames first descriptor must be set after all subsequent descriptors belonging to the same frame have been set. Bit 30 IC: Interrupt on completion When set, this bit sets the Transmit Interrupt (Register 5[0]) after the present frame has been transmitted. Bit 29 LS: Last segment When set, this bit indicates that the buffer contains the last segment of the frame. Bit 28 FS: First segment When set, this bit indicates that the buffer contains the first segment of a frame. Bit 27 DC: Disable CRC When this bit is set, the MAC does not append a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) to the end of the transmitted frame. This is valid only when the first segment (TDES0[28]) is set. Bit 26 DP: Disable pad When set, the MAC does not automatically add padding to a frame shorter than 64 bytes. When this bit is reset, the DMA automatically adds padding and CRC to a frame shorter than 64 bytes, and the CRC field is added despite the state of the DC (TDES0[27]) bit. This is valid only when the first segment (TDES0[28]) is set. Bit 25 TTSE: Transmit time stamp enable When TTSE is set and when TSE is set (ETH_PTPTSCR bit 0), IEEE1588 hardware time stamping is activated for the transmit frame described by the descriptor. This field is only valid when the First segment control bit (TDES0[28]) is set. Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 23:22 CIC: Checksum insertion control These bits control the checksum calculation and insertion. Bit encoding is as shown below: 00: Checksum Insertion disabled 01: Only IP header checksum calculation and insertion are enabled 10: IP header checksum and payload checksum calculation and insertion are enabled, but pseudo-header checksum is not calculated in hardware 11: IP Header checksum and payload checksum calculation and insertion are enabled, and pseudo-header checksum is calculated in hardware. Bit 21 TER: Transmit end of ring When set, this bit indicates that the descriptor list reached its final descriptor. The DMA returns to the base address of the list, creating a descriptor ring.

953/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bit 20 TCH: Second address chained When set, this bit indicates that the second address in the descriptor is the next descriptor address rather than the second buffer address. When TDES0[20] is set, TBS2 (TDES1[28:16]) is a dont care value. TDES0[21] takes precedence over TDES0[20]. Bits 19:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 17 TTSS: Transmit time stamp status This field is used as a status bit to indicate that a time stamp was captured for the described transmit frame. When this bit is set, TDES2 and TDES3 have a time stamp value captured for the transmit frame. This field is only valid when the descriptors Last segment control bit (TDES0[29]) is set. Note that when enhanced descriptors are enabled (EDFE=1 in ETH_DMABMR), TTSS=1 indicates that TDES6 and TDES7 have the time stamp value. Bit 16 IHE: IP header error When set, this bit indicates that the MAC transmitter detected an error in the IP datagram header. The transmitter checks the header length in the IPv4 packet against the number of header bytes received from the application and indicates an error status if there is a mismatch. For IPv6 frames, a header error is reported if the main header length is not 40 bytes. Furthermore, the Ethernet length/type field value for an IPv4 or IPv6 frame must match the IP header version received with the packet. For IPv4 frames, an error status is also indicated if the Header Length field has a value less than 0x5. Bit 15 ES: Error summary Indicates the logical OR of the following bits: TDES0[14]: Jabber timeout TDES0[13]: Frame flush TDES0[11]: Loss of carrier TDES0[10]: No carrier TDES0[9]: Late collision TDES0[8]: Excessive collision TDES0[2]:Excessive deferral TDES0[1]: Underflow error TDES0[16]: IP header error TDES0[12]: IP payload error Bit 14 JT: Jabber timeout When set, this bit indicates the MAC transmitter has experienced a jabber timeout. This bit is only set when the MAC configuration registers JD bit is not set. Bit 13 FF: Frame flushed When set, this bit indicates that the DMA/MTL flushed the frame due to a software Flush command given by the CPU. Bit 12 IPE: IP payload error When set, this bit indicates that MAC transmitter detected an error in the TCP, UDP, or ICMP IP datagram payload. The transmitter checks the payload length received in the IPv4 or IPv6 header against the actual number of TCP, UDP or ICMP packet bytes received from the application and issues an error status in case of a mismatch. Bit 11 LCA: Loss of carrier When set, this bit indicates that a loss of carrier occurred during frame transmission (that is, the MII_CRS signal was inactive for one or more transmit clock periods during frame transmission). This is valid only for the frames transmitted without collision when the MAC operates in Half-duplex mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

954/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bit 10 NC: No carrier When set, this bit indicates that the Carrier Sense signal form the PHY was not asserted during transmission. Bit 9 LCO: Late collision When set, this bit indicates that frame transmission was aborted due to a collision occurring after the collision window (64 byte times, including preamble, in MII mode). This bit is not valid if the Underflow Error bit is set. Bit 8 EC: Excessive collision When set, this bit indicates that the transmission was aborted after 16 successive collisions while attempting to transmit the current frame. If the RD (Disable retry) bit in the MAC Configuration register is set, this bit is set after the first collision, and the transmission of the frame is aborted. Bit 7 VF: VLAN frame When set, this bit indicates that the transmitted frame was a VLAN-type frame. Bits 6:3 CC: Collision count This 4-bit counter value indicates the number of collisions occurring before the frame was transmitted. The count is not valid when the Excessive collisions bit (TDES0[8]) is set. Bit 2 ED: Excessive deferral When set, this bit indicates that the transmission has ended because of excessive deferral of over 24 288 bit times if the Deferral check (DC) bit in the MAC Control register is set high. Bit 1 UF: Underflow error When set, this bit indicates that the MAC aborted the frame because data arrived late from the RAM memory. Underflow error indicates that the DMA encountered an empty transmit buffer while transmitting the frame. The transmission process enters the Suspended state and sets both Transmit underflow (Register 5[5]) and Transmit interrupt (Register 5[0]). Bit 0 DB: Deferred bit When set, this bit indicates that the MAC defers before transmission because of the presence of the carrier. This bit is valid only in Half-duplex mode.

TDES1: Transmit descriptor Word1

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TBS2 Reserved 9 8 7 6 TBS1 rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 5 4 3 2 1 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 Reserved rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw

31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. 28:16 TBS2: Transmit buffer 2 size These bits indicate the second data buffer size in bytes. This field is not valid if TDES0[20] is set. 15:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. 12:0 TBS1: Transmit buffer 1 size These bits indicate the first data buffer byte size, in bytes. If this field is 0, the DMA ignores this buffer and uses Buffer 2 or the next descriptor, depending on the value of TCH (TDES0[20]).

955/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller TDES2: Transmit descriptor Word2 TDES2 contains the address pointer to the first buffer of the descriptor or it contains time stamp data.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TBAP1/TBAP/TTSL rw

Bits 31:0 TBAP1: Transmit buffer 1 address pointer / Transmit frame time stamp low These bits have two different functions: they indicate to the DMA the location of data in memory, and after all data are transferred, the DMA can then use these bits to pass back time stamp data. TBAP: When the software makes this descriptor available to the DMA (at the moment that the OWN bit is set to 1 in TDES0), these bits indicate the physical address of Buffer 1. There is no limitation on the buffer address alignment. See Host data buffer alignment on page 946 for further details on buffer address alignment. TTSL: Before it clears the OWN bit in TDES0, the DMA updates this field with the 32 least significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding transmit frame (overwriting the value for TBAP1). This field has the time stamp only if time stamping is activated for this frame (see TTSE, TDES0 bit 25) and if the Last segment control bit (LS) in the descriptor is set.

TDES3: Transmit descriptor Word3 TDES3 contains the address pointer either to the second buffer of the descriptor or the next descriptor, or it contains time stamp data.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TBAP2/TBAP2/TTSH rw

Bits 31:0 TBAP2: Transmit buffer 2 address pointer (Next descriptor address) / Transmit frame time stamp high These bits have two different functions: they indicate to the DMA the location of data in memory, and after all data are transferred, the DMA can then use these bits to pass back time stamp data. TBAP2: When the software makes this descriptor available to the DMA (at the moment when the OWN bit is set to 1 in TDES0), these bits indicate the physical address of Buffer 2 when a descriptor ring structure is used. If the Second address chained (TDES1 [24]) bit is set, this address contains the pointer to the physical memory where the next descriptor is present. The buffer address pointer must be aligned to the bus width only when TDES1 [24] is set. (LSBs are ignored internally.) TTSH: Before it clears the OWN bit in TDES0, the DMA updates this field with the 32 most significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding transmit frame (overwriting the value for TBAP2). This field has the time stamp only if time stamping is activated for this frame (see TDES0 bit 25, TTSE) and if the Last segment control bit (LS) in the descriptor is set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

956/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Enhanced Tx DMA descriptors

Enhanced descriptors (enabled with EDFE=1, ETHDMABMR bit 7), must be used if time stamping is activated (TSE=1, ETH_PTPTSCR bit 0) or if IPv4 checksum offload is activated (IPCO=1, ETH_MACCR bit 10). Enhanced descriptors comprise eight 32-bit words, twice the size of normal descriptors. TDES0, TDES1, TDES2 and TDES3 have the same definitions as for normal transmit descriptors (refer to Normal Tx DMA descriptors). TDES6 and TDES7 hold the time stamp. TDES4, TDES5, TDES6 and TDES7 are defined below. When the Enhanced descriptor mode is selected, the software needs to allocate 32-bytes (8 DWORDS) of memory for every descriptor. When time stamping or IPv4 checksum offload are not being used, the enhanced descriptor format may be disabled and the software can use normal descriptors with the default size of 16 bytes. Figure 351. Enhanced transmit descriptor
31 O W N Ctrl [30:26] T T Res. S 24 E Ctrl [23:20] T Reserved T [19:18] S S Reserved [15:13] Status [16:0] Buffer 1 byte count [12:0] 0

TDES 0 TDES 1 TDES 2

Reserved [31:29]

Buffer 2 byte count [28:16]

Buffer 1 address [31:0]

TDES 3 TDES 4 TDES 5 TDES 6

Buffer 2 address [31:0] or Next descriptor address [31:0] Reserved Reserved

Time stamp low [31:0] Time stamp high [31:0]

TDES 7

ai17105b

TDES4: Transmit descriptor Word4 Reserved TDES5: Transmit descriptor Word5 Reserved TDES6: Transmit descriptor Word6
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TTSL rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

Bits 31:0 TTSL: Transmit frame time stamp low This field is updated by DMA with the 32 least significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding transmit frame. This field has the time stamp only if the Last segment control bit (LS) in the descriptor is set.

957/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller TDES7: Transmit descriptor Word7
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TTSH rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

Bits 31:0 TTSH: Transmit frame time stamp high This field is updated by DMA with the 32 most significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding transmit frame. This field has the time stamp only if the Last segment control bit (LS) in the descriptor is set.

29.6.8

Rx DMA configuration
The Receive DMA engines reception sequence is illustrated in Figure 352 and described below: 1. 2. The CPU sets up Receive descriptors (RDES0-RDES3) and sets the OWN bit (RDES0[31]). Once the SR (ETH_DMAOMR register[1]) bit is set, the DMA enters the Run state. While in the Run state, the DMA polls the receive descriptor list, attempting to acquire free descriptors. If the fetched descriptor is not free (is owned by the CPU), the DMA enters the Suspend state and jumps to Step 9. The DMA decodes the receive data buffer address from the acquired descriptors. Incoming frames are processed and placed in the acquired descriptors data buffers. When the buffer is full or the frame transfer is complete, the Receive engine fetches the next descriptor. If the current frame transfer is complete, the DMA proceeds to step 7. If the DMA does not own the next fetched descriptor and the frame transfer is not complete (EOF is not yet transferred), the DMA sets the Descriptor error bit in RDES0 (unless flushing is disabled). The DMA closes the current descriptor (clears the OWN bit) and marks it as intermediate by clearing the Last segment (LS) bit in the RDES1 value (marks it as last descriptor if flushing is not disabled), then proceeds to step 8. If the DMA owns the next descriptor but the current frame transfer is not complete, the DMA closes the current descriptor as intermediate and returns to step 4. If IEEE 1588 time stamping is enabled, the DMA writes the time stamp (if available) to the current descriptors RDES2 and RDES3. It then takes the received frames status and writes the status word to the current descriptors RDES0, with the OWN bit cleared and the Last segment bit set. The Receive engine checks the latest descriptors OWN bit. If the CPU owns the descriptor (OWN bit is at 0) the Receive buffer unavailable bit (in ETH_DMASR register[7]) is set and the DMA Receive engine enters the Suspended state (step 9). If the DMA owns the descriptor, the engine returns to step 4 and awaits the next frame. Before the Receive engine enters the Suspend state, partial frames are flushed from the Receive FIFO (you can control flushing using bit 24 in the ETH_DMAOMR register).

3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

8.

9.

10. The Receive DMA exits the Suspend state when a Receive Poll demand is given or the start of next frame is available from the Receive FIFO. The engine proceeds to step 2 and re-fetches the next descriptor. The DMA does not acknowledge accepting the status until it has completed the time stamp write-back and is ready to perform status write-back to the descriptor. If software has enabled time stamping through CSR, when a valid time stamp value is not available for the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

958/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

frame (for example, because the receive FIFO was full before the time stamp could be written to it), the DMA writes all ones to RDES2 and RDES3. Otherwise (that is, if time stamping is not enabled), RDES2 and RDES3 remain unchanged. Figure 352. Receive DMA operation
Start RxDMA Start Stop RxDMA

Poll demand / new frame available

(Re-)Fetch next descriptor

RxDMA suspended Yes Frame transfer complete? No Yes Flush disabled ? No Flush the remaining frame No

(AHB) error? No Own bit set? Yes Frame data available ? Yes Write data to buffer(s) (AHB) error? No Fetch next descriptor No

Yes

Wait for frame data

Yes

(AHB) error? No Flush disabled ? No Yes Own bit set for next desc? Yes Frame transfer complete?

Yes

No

No

Yes Time stamp present? No Close RDES0 as last descriptor No (AHB) error? Yes Write time stamp to RDES2 & RDES3

Set descriptor error

Close RDES0 as intermediate descriptor

Yes

(AHB) error? Yes

No

ai15643

959/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Receive descriptor acquisition

The receive engine always attempts to acquire an extra descriptor in anticipation of an incoming frame. Descriptor acquisition is attempted if any of the following conditions is/are satisfied:

The receive Start/Stop bit (ETH_DMAOMR register[1]) has been set immediately after the DMA has been placed in the Run state. The data buffer of the current descriptor is full before the end of the frame currently being transferred The controller has completed frame reception, but the current receive descriptor has not yet been closed. The receive process has been suspended because of a CPU-owned buffer (RDES0[31] = 0) and a new frame is received. A Receive poll demand has been issued.

Receive frame processing

The MAC transfers the received frames to the STM32F4xx memory only when the frame passes the address filter and the frame size is greater than or equal to the configurable threshold bytes set for the Receive FIFO, or when the complete frame is written to the FIFO in Store-and-forward mode. If the frame fails the address filtering, it is dropped in the MAC block itself (unless Receive All ETH_MACFFR [31] bit is set). Frames that are shorter than 64 bytes, because of collision or premature termination, can be purged from the Receive FIFO. After 64 (configurable threshold) bytes have been received, the DMA block begins transferring the frame data to the receive buffer pointed to by the current descriptor. The DMA sets the first descriptor (RDES0[9]) after the DMA AHB Interface becomes ready to receive a data transfer (if DMA is not fetching transmit data from the memory), to delimit the frame. The descriptors are released when the OWN (RDES0[31]) bit is reset to 0, either as the data buffer fills up or as the last segment of the frame is transferred to the receive buffer. If the frame is contained in a single descriptor, both the last descriptor (RDES0[8]) and first descriptor (RDES0[9]) bits are set. The DMA fetches the next descriptor, sets the last descriptor (RDES0[8]) bit, and releases the RDES0 status bits in the previous frame descriptor. Then the DMA sets the receive interrupt bit (ETH_DMASR register [6]). The same process repeats unless the DMA encounters a descriptor flagged as being owned by the CPU. If this occurs, the receive process sets the receive buffer unavailable bit (ETH_DMASR register[7]) and then enters the Suspend state. The position in the receive list is retained.

Receive process suspended

If a new receive frame arrives while the receive process is in Suspend state, the DMA refetches the current descriptor in the STM32F4xx memory. If the descriptor is now owned by the DMA, the receive process re-enters the Run state and starts frame reception. If the descriptor is still owned by the host, by default, the DMA discards the current frame at the top of the Rx FIFO and increments the missed frame counter. If more than one frame is stored in the Rx FIFO, the process repeats. The discarding or flushing of the frame at the top of the Rx FIFO can be avoided by setting the DMA Operation mode register bit 24 (DFRF). In such conditions, the receive process sets the receive buffer unavailable status bit and returns to the Suspend state.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

960/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Normal Rx DMA descriptors

The normal receive descriptor structure consists of four 32-bit words (16 bytes). These are shown in Figure 353. The bit descriptions of RDES0, RDES1, RDES2 and RDES3 are given below. Note that enhanced descriptors must be used if time stamping is activated (TSE=1, ETH_PTPTSCR bit 0) or if IPv4 checksum offload is activated (IPCO=1, ETH_MACCR bit 10). Figure 353. Normal Rx DMA descriptor structure
31 O RDES 0 W N RDES 1 CT Reserved RL [30:29] RDES 2 Buffer 2 byte count [28:16] Status [30:0] CTRL Res. [15:14] Buffer 1 byte count [12:0] 0

Buffer 1 address [31:0]

RDES 3

Buffer 2 address [31:0] or Next descriptor address [31:0]

ai15644

RDES0: Receive descriptor Word0 RDES0 contains the received frame status, the frame length and the descriptor ownership information.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 OWN AFM

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 VLAN SAF

7 IPHCE/TSV

6 LCO

4 RWT

0 PCE/ESA

OE

DE

RE

DE

FL

rw

Bit 31 OWN: Own bit When set, this bit indicates that the descriptor is owned by the DMA of the MAC Subsystem. When this bit is reset, it indicates that the descriptor is owned by the Host. The DMA clears this bit either when it completes the frame reception or when the buffers that are associated with this descriptor are full. Bit 30 AFM: Destination address filter fail When set, this bit indicates a frame that failed the DA filter in the MAC Core. Bits 29:16 FL: Frame length These bits indicate the byte length of the received frame that was transferred to host memory (including CRC). This field is valid only when last descriptor (RDES0[8]) is set and descriptor error (RDES0[14]) is reset. This field is valid when last descriptor (RDES0[8]) is set. When the last descriptor and error summary bits are not set, this field indicates the accumulated number of bytes that have been transferred for the current frame.

961/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

CE

ES

FS

FT

LE

LS

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bit 15 ES: Error summary Indicates the logical OR of the following bits: RDES0[1]: CRC error RDES0[3]: Receive error RDES0[4]: Watchdog timeout RDES0[6]: Late collision RDES0[7]: Giant frame (This is not applicable when RDES0[7] indicates an IPV4 header checksum error.) RDES0[11]: Overflow error RDES0[14]: Descriptor error. This field is valid only when the last descriptor (RDES0[8]) is set. Bit 14 DE: Descriptor error When set, this bit indicates a frame truncation caused by a frame that does not fit within the current descriptor buffers, and that the DMA does not own the next descriptor. The frame is truncated. This field is valid only when the last descriptor (RDES0[8]) is set. Bit 13 SAF: Source address filter fail When set, this bit indicates that the SA field of frame failed the SA filter in the MAC Core. Bit 12 LE: Length error When set, this bit indicates that the actual length of the received frame does not match the value in the Length/ Type field. This bit is valid only when the Frame type (RDES0[5]) bit is reset. Bit 11 OE: Overflow error When set, this bit indicates that the received frame was damaged due to buffer overflow. Bit 10 VLAN: VLAN tag When set, this bit indicates that the frame pointed to by this descriptor is a VLAN frame tagged by the MAC core. Bit 9 FS: First descriptor When set, this bit indicates that this descriptor contains the first buffer of the frame. If the size of the first buffer is 0, the second buffer contains the beginning of the frame. If the size of the second buffer is also 0, the next descriptor contains the beginning of the frame. Bit 8 LS: Last descriptor When set, this bit indicates that the buffers pointed to by this descriptor are the last buffers of the frame. Bit 7 IPHCE/TSV: IPv header checksum error / time stamp valid If IPHCE is set, it indicates an error in the IPv4 or IPv6 header. This error can be due to inconsistent Ethernet Type field and IP header Version field values, a header checksum mismatch in IPv4, or an Ethernet frame lacking the expected number of IP header bytes. This bit can take on special meaning as specified in Table 168. If enhanced descriptor format is enabled (EDFE=1, bit 7 of ETH_DMABMR), this bit takes on the TSV function (otherwise it is IPHCE). When TSV is set, it indicates that a snapshot of the timestamp is written in descriptor words 6 (RDES6) and 7 (RDES7). TSV is valid only when the Last descriptor bit (RDES0[8]) is set. Bit 6 LCO: Late collision When set, this bit indicates that a late collision has occurred while receiving the frame in Halfduplex mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

962/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bit 5 FT: Frame type When set, this bit indicates that the Receive frame is an Ethernet-type frame (the LT field is greater than or equal to 0x0600). When this bit is reset, it indicates that the received frame is an IEEE802.3 frame. This bit is not valid for Runt frames less than 14 bytes. When the normal descriptor format is used (ETH_DMABMR EDFE=0), FT can take on special meaning as specified in Table 168. Bit 4 RWT: Receive watchdog timeout When set, this bit indicates that the Receive watchdog timer has expired while receiving the current frame and the current frame is truncated after the watchdog timeout. Bit 3 RE: Receive error When set, this bit indicates that the RX_ERR signal is asserted while RX_DV is asserted during frame reception. Bit 2 DE: Dribble bit error When set, this bit indicates that the received frame has a non-integer multiple of bytes (odd nibbles). This bit is valid only in MII mode. Bit 1 CE: CRC error When set, this bit indicates that a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error occurred on the received frame. This field is valid only when the last descriptor (RDES0[8]) is set. Bit 0 PCE/ESA: Payload checksum error / extended status available When set, it indicates that the TCP, UDP or ICMP checksum the core calculated does not match the received encapsulated TCP, UDP or ICMP segments Checksum field. This bit is also set when the received number of payload bytes does not match the value indicated in the Length field of the encapsulated IPv4 or IPv6 datagram in the received Ethernet frame. This bit can take on special meaning as specified in Table 168. If the enhanced descriptor format is enabled (EDFE=1, bit 7 in ETH_DMABMR), this bit takes on the ESA function (otherwise it is PCE). When ESA is set, it indicates that the extended status is available in descriptor word 4 (RDES4). ESA is valid only when the last descriptor bit (RDES0[8]) is set.

Bits 5, 7, and 0 reflect the conditions discussed in Table 168. Table 168. Receive descriptor 0 - encoding for bits 7, 5 and 0 (normal descriptor format only, EDFE=0)
Bit 5: frame type 0 1 1 1 1 0 Bit 7: IPC Bit 0: payload checksum checksum error error 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 Frame status IEEE 802.3 Type frame (Length field value is less than 0x0600.) IPv4/IPv6 Type frame, no checksum error detected IPv4/IPv6 Type frame with a payload checksum error (as described for PCE) detected IPv4/IPv6 Type frame with an IP header checksum error (as described for IPC CE) detected IPv4/IPv6 Type frame with both IP header and payload checksum errors detected IPv4/IPv6 Type frame with no IP header checksum error and the payload check bypassed, due to an unsupported payload

963/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Table 168. Receive descriptor 0 - encoding for bits 7, 5 and 0 (normal descriptor format only, EDFE=0) (continued)
Bit 5: frame type 0 0 Bit 7: IPC Bit 0: payload checksum checksum error error 1 1 1 0 Frame status A Type frame that is neither IPv4 or IPv6 (the checksum offload engine bypasses checksum completely.) Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

964/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

RDES1: Receive descriptor Word1

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RBS2 Reserved RCH RER 9 8 7 6 RBS rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 5 4 3 2 1 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 DIC rw RBS2 rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 DIC: Disable interrupt on completion When set, this bit prevents setting the Status registers RS bit (CSR5[6]) for the received frame ending in the buffer indicated by this descriptor. This, in turn, disables the assertion of the interrupt to Host due to RS for that frame. Bits 30:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 28:16 RBS2: Receive buffer 2 size These bits indicate the second data buffer size, in bytes. The buffer size must be a multiple of 4, 8, or 16, depending on the bus widths (32, 64 or 128, respectively), even if the value of RDES3 (buffer2 address pointer) is not aligned to bus width. If the buffer size is not an appropriate multiple of 4, 8 or 16, the resulting behavior is undefined. This field is not valid if RDES1 [14] is set. Bit 15 RER: Receive end of ring When set, this bit indicates that the descriptor list reached its final descriptor. The DMA returns to the base address of the list, creating a descriptor ring. Bit 14 RCH: Second address chained When set, this bit indicates that the second address in the descriptor is the next descriptor address rather than the second buffer address. When this bit is set, RBS2 (RDES1[28:16]) is a dont care value. RDES1[15] takes precedence over RDES1[14]. Bit 13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 12:0 RBS1: Receive buffer 1 size Indicates the first data buffer size in bytes. The buffer size must be a multiple of 4, 8 or 16, depending upon the bus widths (32, 64 or 128), even if the value of RDES2 (buffer1 address pointer) is not aligned. When the buffer size is not a multiple of 4, 8 or 16, the resulting behavior is undefined. If this field is 0, the DMA ignores this buffer and uses Buffer 2 or next descriptor depending on the value of RCH (bit 14).

965/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller RDES2: Receive descriptor Word2 RDES2 contains the address pointer to the first data buffer in the descriptor, or it contains time stamp data.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RBP1 / RTSL

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:0 RBAP1 / RTSL: Receive buffer 1 address pointer / Receive frame time stamp low These bits take on two different functions: the application uses them to indicate to the DMA where to store the data in memory, and then after transferring all the data the DMA may use these bits to pass back time stamp data. RBAP1: When the software makes this descriptor available to the DMA (at the moment that the OWN bit is set to 1 in RDES0), these bits indicate the physical address of Buffer 1. There are no limitations on the buffer address alignment except for the following condition: the DMA uses the configured value for its address generation when the RDES2 value is used to store the start of frame. Note that the DMA performs a write operation with the RDES2[3/2/1:0] bits as 0 during the transfer of the start of frame but the frame data is shifted as per the actual Buffer address pointer. The DMA ignores RDES2[3/2/1:0] (corresponding to bus width of 128/64/32) if the address pointer is to a buffer where the middle or last part of the frame is stored. RTSL: Before it clears the OWN bit in RDES0, the DMA updates this field with the 32 least significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding receive frame (overwriting the value for RBAP1). This field has the time stamp only if time stamping is activated for this frame and if the Last segment control bit (LS) in the descriptor is set.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

966/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

RDES3: Receive descriptor Word3 RDES3 contains the address pointer either to the second data buffer in the descriptor or to the next descriptor, or it contains time stamp data.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RBP2 / RTSH

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:0 RBAP2 / RTSH: Receive buffer 2 address pointer (next descriptor address) / Receive frame time stamp high These bits take on two different functions: the application uses them to indicate to the DMA the location of where to store the data in memory, and then after transferring all the data the DMA may use these bits to pass back time stamp data. RBAP1: When the software makes this descriptor available to the DMA (at the moment that the OWN bit is set to 1 in RDES0), these bits indicate the physical address of buffer 2 when a descriptor ring structure is used. If the second address chained (RDES1 [24]) bit is set, this address contains the pointer to the physical memory where the next descriptor is present. If RDES1 [24] is set, the buffer (next descriptor) address pointer must be bus width-aligned (RDES3[3, 2, or 1:0] = 0, corresponding to a bus width of 128, 64 or 32. LSBs are ignored internally.) However, when RDES1 [24] is reset, there are no limitations on the RDES3 value, except for the following condition: the DMA uses the configured value for its buffer address generation when the RDES3 value is used to store the start of frame. The DMA ignores RDES3[3, 2, or 1:0] (corresponding to a bus width of 128, 64 or 32) if the address pointer is to a buffer where the middle or last part of the frame is stored. RTSH: Before it clears the OWN bit in RDES0, the DMA updates this field with the 32 most significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding receive frame (overwriting the value for RBAP2). This field has the time stamp only if time stamping is activated and if the Last segment control bit (LS) in the descriptor is set.

Enhanced Rx DMA descriptors format with IEEE1588 time stamp

Enhanced descriptors (enabled with EDFE=1, ETHDMABMR bit 7), must be used if time stamping is activated (TSE=1, ETH_PTPTSCR bit 0) or if IPv4 checksum offload is activated (IPCO=1, ETH_MACCR bit 10). Enhanced descriptors comprise eight 32-bit words, twice the size of normal descriptors. RDES0, RDES1, RDES2 and RDES3 have the same definitions as for normal receive descriptors (refer to Normal Rx DMA descriptors). RDES4 contains extended status while RDES6 and RDES7 hold the time stamp. RDES4, RDES5, RDES6 and RDES7 are defined below. When the Enhanced descriptor mode is selected, the software needs to allocate 32 bytes (8 DWORDS) of memory for every descriptor. When time stamping or IPv4 checksum offload are not being used, the enhanced descriptor format may be disabled and the software can use normal descriptors with the default size of 16 bytes.

967/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Figure 354. Enhanced receive descriptor field format with IEEE1588 time stamp enabled
31 O RDES 0 W N RDES 1 CT Reserved RL [30:29] RDES 2 Buffer 2 byte count [28:16] Status [30:0] CTRL Res. [15:14] Buffer 1 byte count [12:0] 0

Buffer 1 address [31:0]

RDES 3 RDES 4 RDES 5 RDES 6

Buffer 2 address [31:0] or Next descriptor address [31:0] Extended Status [31:0]

Reserved Time stamp low [31:0]

RDES 7

Time stamp high [31:0]

ai17104

RDES4: Receive descriptor Word4

The extended status, shown below, is valid only when there is status related to IPv4 checksum or time stamp available as indicated by bit 0 in RDES0.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PV Reserved rw PFT 9 8 7 IPV6PR 6 IPV4PR 5 IPCB 4 IPPE 3 IPHE 2 1 IPPT rw rw 0

PMT rw rw rw rw

rw

rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13 PV: PTP version When set, indicates that the received PTP message uses the IEEE 1588 version 2 format. When cleared, it uses version 1 format. This is valid only if the message type is non-zero. Bit 12 PFT: PTP frame type When set, this bit indicates that the PTP message is sent directly over Ethernet. When this bit is cleared and the message type is non-zero, it indicates that the PTP message is sent over UDP-IPv4 or UDP-IPv6. The information on IPv4 or IPv6 can be obtained from bits 6 and 7.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

968/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bits 11:8 PMT: PTP message type These bits are encoded to give the type of the message received. 0000: No PTP message received 0001: SYNC (all clock types) 0010: Follow_Up (all clock types) 0011: Delay_Req (all clock types) 0100: Delay_Resp (all clock types) 0101: Pdelay_Req (in peer-to-peer transparent clock) or Announce (in ordinary or boundary clock) 0110: Pdelay_Resp (in peer-to-peer transparent clock) or Management (in ordinary or boundary clock) 0111: Pdelay_Resp_Follow_Up (in peer-to-peer transparent clock) or Signaling (for ordinary or boundary clock) 1xxx - Reserved Bit 7 IPV6PR: IPv6 packet received When set, this bit indicates that the received packet is an IPv6 packet. Bit 6 IPV4PR: IPv4 packet received When set, this bit indicates that the received packet is an IPv4 packet. Bit 5 IPCB: IP checksum bypassed When set, this bit indicates that the checksum offload engine is bypassed. Bit 4 IPPE: IP payload error When set, this bit indicates that the 16-bit IP payload checksum (that is, the TCP, UDP, or ICMP checksum) that the core calculated does not match the corresponding checksum field in the received segment. It is also set when the TCP, UDP, or ICMP segment length does not match the payload length value in the IP Header field. Bit 3 IPHE: IP header error When set, this bit indicates either that the 16-bit IPv4 header checksum calculated by the core does not match the received checksum bytes, or that the IP datagram version is not consistent with the Ethernet Type value. Bits 2:0 IPPT: IP payload type

if IPv4 checksum offload is activated (IPCO=1, ETH_MACCR bit 10), these bits
indicate the type of payload encapsulated in the IP datagram. These bits are 00 if there is an IP header error or fragmented IP . 000: Unknown or did not process IP payload 001: UDP 010: TCP 011: ICMP 1xx: Reserved

RDES5: Receive descriptor Word5 Reserved.

969/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller RDES6: Receive descriptor Word6 The table below describes the fields that have different meaning for RDES6 when the receive descriptor is closed and time stamping is enabled.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RTSL

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw
.

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:0 RTSL: Receive frame time stamp low The DMA updates this field with the 32 least significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding receive frame. The DMA updates this field only for the last descriptor of the receive frame indicated by last descriptor status bit (RDES0[8]). When this field and the RTSH field in RDES7 show all ones, the time stamp must be treated as corrupt.

RDES7: Receive descriptor Word7 The table below describes the fields that have a different meaning for RDES7 when the receive descriptor is closed and time stamping is enabled.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25

24

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RTSH

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw
.

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:0 RTSH: Receive frame time stamp high The DMA updates this field with the 32 most significant bits of the time stamp captured for the corresponding receive frame. The DMA updates this field only for the last descriptor of the receive frame indicated by last descriptor status bit (RDES0[8]). When this field and RDES7s RTSL field show all ones, the time stamp must be treated as corrupt.

29.6.9

DMA interrupts
Interrupts can be generated as a result of various events. The ETH_DMASR register contains all the bits that might cause an interrupt. The ETH_DMAIER register contains an enable bit for each of the events that can cause an interrupt. There are two groups of interrupts, Normal and Abnormal, as described in the ETH_DMASR register. Interrupts are cleared by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit position. When all the enabled interrupts within a group are cleared, the corresponding summary bit is cleared. If the MAC core is the cause for assertion of the interrupt, then any of the TSTS or PMTS bits in the ETH_DMASR register is set high. Interrupts are not queued and if the interrupt event occurs before the driver has responded to it, no additional interrupts are generated. For example, the Receive Interrupt bit (ETH_DMASR register [6]) indicates that one or more frames were transferred to the STM32F4xx buffer. The driver must scan all descriptors, from the last recorded position to the first one owned by the DMA. An interrupt is generated only once for simultaneous, multiple events. The driver must scan the ETH_DMASR register for the cause of the interrupt. The interrupt is not generated again unless a new interrupting event occurs, after the driver has cleared the appropriate bit in the ETH_DMASR register. For example, the controller generates a Receive interrupt (ETH_DMASR register[6]) and the driver begins reading the ETH_DMASR register. Next,

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

970/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

receive buffer unavailable (ETH_DMASR register[7]) occurs. The driver clears the Receive interrupt. Even then, a new interrupt is generated, due to the active or pending Receive buffer unavailable interrupt. Figure 355. Interrupt scheme
TS TBUS TBUIE AND RS RIE AND ERS ERIE AND OR FBES TPSS TPSSIE TUS TUIE RWTS RWTIE AND ETS ETIE AND
AI15646

TIE

AND

MMCI PMTI TSTI OR NIS AND NISE Interrupt

FBEIE AND ROS ROIE AND RBU RBUIE

AND TJTS TJTIE AND AND AISE AIS AND

OR AND RPSS RPSSIE AND

29.7

Ethernet interrupts
The Ethernet controller has two interrupt vectors: one dedicated to normal Ethernet operations and the other, used only for the Ethernet wakeup event (with wakeup frame or Magic Packet detection) when it is mapped on EXTI lIne19. The first Ethernet vector is reserved for interrupts generated by the MAC and the DMA as listed in the MAC interrupts and DMA interrupts sections. The second vector is reserved for interrupts generated by the PMT on wakeup events. The mapping of a wakeup event on EXTI line19 causes the STM32F4xx to exit the low power mode, and generates an interrupt. When an Ethernet wakeup event mapped on EXTI Line19 occurs and the MAC PMT interrupt is enabled and the EXTI Line19 interrupt, with detection on rising edge, is also enabled, both interrupts are generated. A watchdog timer (see ETH_DMARSWTR register) is given for flexible control of the RS bit (ETH_DMASR register). When this watchdog timer is programmed with a non-zero value, it gets activated as soon as the RxDMA completes a transfer of a received frame to system memory without asserting the Receive Status because it is not enabled in the corresponding Receive descriptor (RDES1[31]). When this timer runs out as per the programmed value, the RS bit is set and the interrupt is asserted if the corresponding RIE is enabled in the

971/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller ETH_DMAIER register. This timer is disabled before it runs out, when a frame is transferred to memory and the RS is set because it is enabled for that descriptor.

Note:

Reading the PMT control and status register automatically clears the Wakeup Frame Received and Magic Packet Received PMT interrupt flags. However, since the registers for these flags are in the CLK_RX domain, there may be a significant delay before this update is visible by the firmware. The delay is especially long when the RX clock is slow (in 10 Mbit mode) and when the AHB bus is high-frequency. Since interrupt requests from the PMT to the CPU are based on the same registers in the CLK_RX domain, the CPU may spuriously call the interrupt routine a second time even after reading PMT_CSR. Thus, it may be necessary that the firmware polls the Wakeup Frame Received and Magic Packet Received bits and exits the interrupt service routine only when they are found to be at 0.

29.8

Ethernet register descriptions

The peripheral registers can be accessed by bytes (8-bit), half-words (16-bit) or words (32bits).

29.8.1

MAC register description

Ethernet MAC configuration register (ETH_MACCR)
Address offset: 0x0000 Reset value: 0x0000 8000 The MAC configuration register is the operation mode register of the MAC. It establishes receive and transmit operating modes.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CSTF IPCO Reserved Reserved Reserved ROD CSD FES WD DM LM JD IFG rw

9 RD

8 Reserved

7 APCS

6 BL

4 DC

3 TE

2 RE

1 Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:246 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 25 CSTF: CRC stripping for Type frames When set, the last 4 bytes (FCS) of all frames of Ether type (type field greater than 0x0600) will be stripped and dropped before forwarding the frame to the application. Bits 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 23 WD: Watchdog disable When this bit is set, the MAC disables the watchdog timer on the receiver, and can receive frames of up to 16 384 bytes. When this bit is reset, the MAC allows no more than 2 048 bytes of the frame being received and cuts off any bytes received after that. Bit 22 JD: Jabber disable When this bit is set, the MAC disables the jabber timer on the transmitter, and can transfer frames of up to 16 384 bytes. When this bit is reset, the MAC cuts off the transmitter if the application sends out more than 2 048 bytes of data during transmission.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

972/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bits 21:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 19:17 IFG: Interframe gap These bits control the minimum interframe gap between frames during transmission. 000: 96 bit times 001: 88 bit times 010: 80 bit times . 111: 40 bit times Note: In Half-duplex mode, the minimum IFG can be configured for 64 bit times (IFG = 100) only. Lower values are not considered. Bit 16 CSD: Carrier sense disable When set high, this bit makes the MAC transmitter ignore the MII CRS signal during frame transmission in Half-duplex mode. No error is generated due to Loss of Carrier or No Carrier during such transmission. When this bit is low, the MAC transmitter generates such errors due to Carrier Sense and even aborts the transmissions. Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 FES: Fast Ethernet speed Indicates the speed in Fast Ethernet (MII) mode: 0: 10 Mbit/s 1: 100 Mbit/s Bit 13 ROD: Receive own disable When this bit is set, the MAC disables the reception of frames in Half-duplex mode. When this bit is reset, the MAC receives all packets that are given by the PHY while transmitting. This bit is not applicable if the MAC is operating in Full-duplex mode. Bit 12 LM: Loopback mode When this bit is set, the MAC operates in loopback mode at the MII. The MII receive clock input (RX_CLK) is required for the loopback to work properly, as the transmit clock is not looped-back internally. Bit 11 DM: Duplex mode When this bit is set, the MAC operates in a Full-duplex mode where it can transmit and receive simultaneously. Bit 10 IPCO: IPv4 checksum offload When set, this bit enables IPv4 checksum checking for received frame payloads' TCP/UDP/ICMP headers. When this bit is reset, the checksum offload function in the receiver is disabled and the corresponding PCE and IP HCE status bits (see Table 165 on page 927) are always cleared. Bit 9 RD: Retry disable When this bit is set, the MAC attempts only 1 transmission. When a collision occurs on the MII, the MAC ignores the current frame transmission and reports a Frame Abort with excessive collision error in the transmit frame status. When this bit is reset, the MAC attempts retries based on the settings of BL. Note: This bit is applicable only in the Half-duplex mode. Bit 8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

973/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bit 7 APCS: Automatic pad/CRC stripping When this bit is set, the MAC strips the Pad/FCS field on incoming frames only if the lengths field value is less than or equal to 1 500 bytes. All received frames with length field greater than or equal to 1 501 bytes are passed on to the application without stripping the Pad/FCS field. When this bit is reset, the MAC passes all incoming frames unmodified. Bits 6:5 BL: Back-off limit The Back-off limit determines the random integer number (r) of slot time delays (4 096 bit times for 1000 Mbit/s and 512 bit times for 10/100 Mbit/s) the MAC waits before rescheduling a transmission attempt during retries after a collision. Note: This bit is applicable only to Half-duplex mode. 00: k = min (n, 10) 01: k = min (n, 8) 10: k = min (n, 4) 11: k = min (n, 1), where n = retransmission attempt. The random integer r takes the value in the range 0 r < 2k Bit 4 DC: Deferral check When this bit is set, the deferral check function is enabled in the MAC. The MAC issues a Frame Abort status, along with the excessive deferral error bit set in the transmit frame status when the transmit state machine is deferred for more than 24 288 bit times in 10/100Mbit/s mode. Deferral begins when the transmitter is ready to transmit, but is prevented because of an active CRS (carrier sense) signal on the MII. Defer time is not cumulative. If the transmitter defers for 10 000 bit times, then transmits, collides, backs off, and then has to defer again after completion of back-off, the deferral timer resets to 0 and restarts. When this bit is reset, the deferral check function is disabled and the MAC defers until the CRS signal goes inactive. This bit is applicable only in Half-duplex mode. Bit 3 TE: Transmitter enable When this bit is set, the transmit state machine of the MAC is enabled for transmission on the MII. When this bit is reset, the MAC transmit state machine is disabled after the completion of the transmission of the current frame, and does not transmit any further frames. Bit 2 RE: Receiver enable When this bit is set, the receiver state machine of the MAC is enabled for receiving frames from the MII. When this bit is reset, the MAC receive state machine is disabled after the completion of the reception of the current frame, and will not receive any further frames from the MII. Bits 1:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

974/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet MAC frame filter register (ETH_MACFFR)

Address offset: 0x0004 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The MAC frame filter register contains the filter controls for receiving frames. Some of the controls from this register go to the address check block of the MAC, which performs the first level of address filtering. The second level of filtering is performed on the incoming frame, based on other controls such as pass bad frames and pass control frames.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HPF RA Reserved rw 9 SAF 8 SAIF 7 PCF 6 5 BFD 4 PAM 3 DAIF 2 HM 1 HU rw 0 PM rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 RA: Receive all When this bit is set, the MAC receiver passes all received frames on to the application, irrespective of whether they have passed the address filter. The result of the SA/DA filtering is updated (pass or fail) in the corresponding bits in the receive status word. When this bit is reset, the MAC receiver passes on to the application only those frames that have passed the SA/DA address filter. Bits 30:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 10 HPF: Hash or perfect filter When this bit is set and if the HM or HU bit is set, the address filter passes frames that match either the perfect filtering or the hash filtering. When this bit is cleared and if the HU or HM bit is set, only frames that match the Hash filter are passed. Bit 9 SAF: Source address filter The MAC core compares the SA field of the received frames with the values programmed in the enabled SA registers. If the comparison matches, then the SAMatch bit in the RxStatus word is set high. When this bit is set high and the SA filter fails, the MAC drops the frame. When this bit is reset, the MAC core forwards the received frame to the application. It also forwards the updated SA Match bit in RxStatus depending on the SA address comparison. Bit 8 SAIF: Source address inverse filtering When this bit is set, the address check block operates in inverse filtering mode for the SA address comparison. The frames whose SA matches the SA registers are marked as failing the SA address filter. When this bit is reset, frames whose SA does not match the SA registers are marked as failing the SA address filter.

975/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 7:6 PCF: Pass control frames These bits control the forwarding of all control frames (including unicast and multicast PAUSE frames). Note that the processing of PAUSE control frames depends only on RFCE in Flow Control Register[2]. 00: MAC prevents all control frames from reaching the application 01: MAC forwards all control frames to application except Pause control frames 10: MAC forwards all control frames to application even if they fail the address filter 11: MAC forwards control frames that pass the address filter. These bits control the forwarding of all control frames (including unicast and multicast PAUSE frames). Note that the processing of PAUSE control frames depends only on RFCE in Flow Control Register[2]. 00 or 01: MAC prevents all control frames from reaching the application 10: MAC forwards all control frames to application even if they fail the address filter 11: MAC forwards control frames that pass the address filter. Bit 5 BFD: Broadcast frames disable When this bit is set, the address filters filter all incoming broadcast frames. When this bit is reset, the address filters pass all received broadcast frames. Bit 4 PAM: Pass all multicast When set, this bit indicates that all received frames with a multicast destination address (first bit in the destination address field is '1') are passed. When reset, filtering of multicast frame depends on the HM bit. Bit 3 DAIF: Destination address inverse filtering When this bit is set, the address check block operates in inverse filtering mode for the DA address comparison for both unicast and multicast frames. When reset, normal filtering of frames is performed. Bit 2 HM: Hash multicast When set, MAC performs destination address filtering of received multicast frames according to the hash table. When reset, the MAC performs a perfect destination address filtering for multicast frames, that is, it compares the DA field with the values programmed in DA registers. Bit 1 HU: Hash unicast When set, MAC performs destination address filtering of unicast frames according to the hash table. When reset, the MAC performs a perfect destination address filtering for unicast frames, that is, it compares the DA field with the values programmed in DA registers. Bit 0 PM: Promiscuous mode When this bit is set, the address filters pass all incoming frames regardless of their destination or source address. The SA/DA filter fails status bits in the receive status word are always cleared when PM is set.

Ethernet MAC hash table high register (ETH_MACHTHR)

Address offset: 0x0008 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The 64-bit Hash table is used for group address filtering. For hash filtering, the contents of the destination address in the incoming frame are passed through the CRC logic, and the upper 6 bits in the CRC register are used to index the contents of the Hash table. This CRC

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

976/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

is a 32-bit value coded by the following polynomial (for more details refer to Section 29.5.3: MAC frame reception):
G( x) = x
32

+x

26

+x

23

+x

22

+x

16

+x

12

+x

11

+x

10

+x +x +x +x +x +x+1

The most significant bit determines the register to be used (hash table high/hash table low), and the other 5 bits determine which bit within the register. A hash value of 0b0 0000 selects bit 0 in the selected register, and a value of 0b1 1111 selects bit 31 in the selected register. For example, if the DA of the incoming frame is received as 0x1F52 419C B6AF (0x1F is the first byte received on the MII interface), then the internally calculated 6-bit Hash value is 0x2C and the HTH register bit[12] is checked for filtering. If the DA of the incoming frame is received as 0xA00A 9800 0045, then the calculated 6-bit Hash value is 0x07 and the HTL register bit[7] is checked for filtering. If the corresponding bit value in the register is 1, the frame is accepted. Otherwise, it is rejected. If the PAM (pass all multicast) bit is set in the ETH_MACFFR register, then all multicast frames are accepted regardless of the multicast hash values. The Hash table high register contains the higher 32 bits of the multicast Hash table.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HTH rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 HTH: Hash table high This field contains the upper 32 bits of Hash table.

Ethernet MAC hash table low register (ETH_MACHTLR)

Address offset: 0x000C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Hash table low register contains the lower 32 bits of the multi-cast Hash table.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HTL rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 HTL: Hash table low This field contains the lower 32 bits of the Hash table.

Ethernet MAC MII address register (ETH_MACMIIAR)

Address offset: 0x0010 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The MII address register controls the management cycles to the external PHY through the management interface.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PA Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 MR 7 6 5 Reserved 4 3 CR rw rw rw 2 1 0

MW MB rw rc_ w1

977/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:11 PA: PHY address This field tells which of the 32 possible PHY devices are being accessed. Bits 10:6 MR: MII register These bits select the desired MII register in the selected PHY device. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 4:2 CR: Clock range The CR clock range selection determines the HCLK frequency and is used to decide the frequency of the MDC clock: Selection HCLK MDC Clock 000 60-100 MHz HCLK/42 001 100-150 MHz HCLK/62 010 20-35 MHz HCLK/16 011 35-60 MHz HCLK/26 100 150-168 MHz HCLK/102 101, 110, 111 Reserved Bit 1 MW: MII write When set, this bit tells the PHY that this will be a Write operation using the MII Data register. If this bit is not set, this will be a Read operation, placing the data in the MII Data register. Bit 0 MB: MII busy This bit should read a logic 0 before writing to ETH_MACMIIAR and ETH_MACMIIDR. This bit must also be reset to 0 during a Write to ETH_MACMIIAR. During a PHY register access, this bit is set to 0b1 by the application to indicate that a read or write access is in progress. ETH_MACMIIDR (MII Data) should be kept valid until this bit is cleared by the MAC during a PHY Write operation. The ETH_MACMIIDR is invalid until this bit is cleared by the MAC during a PHY Read operation. The ETH_MACMIIAR (MII Address) should not be written to until this bit is cleared.

Ethernet MAC MII data register (ETH_MACMIIDR)

Address offset: 0x0014 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The MAC MII Data register stores write data to be written to the PHY register located at the address specified in ETH_MACMIIAR. ETH_MACMIIDR also stores read data from the PHY register located at the address specified by ETH_MACMIIAR.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MD

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 MD: MII data This contains the 16-bit data value read from the PHY after a Management Read operation, or the 16-bit data value to be written to the PHY before a Management Write operation.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

978/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet MAC flow control register (ETH_MACFCR)

Address offset: 0x0018 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Flow control register controls the generation and reception of the control (Pause Command) frames by the MAC. A write to a register with the Busy bit set to '1' causes the MAC to generate a pause control frame. The fields of the control frame are selected as specified in the 802.3x specification, and the Pause Time value from this register is used in the Pause Time field of the control frame. The Busy bit remains set until the control frame is transferred onto the cable. The Host must make sure that the Busy bit is cleared before writing to the register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PT Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 ZQPD 6 Reserved 5 4 3 UPFD 2 RFCE 1 TFCE rw 0 FCB/ BPA rc_w1 /rw

PLT

rw

rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 PT: Pause time This field holds the value to be used in the Pause Time field in the transmit control frame. If the Pause Time bits is configured to be double-synchronized to the MII clock domain, then consecutive write operations to this register should be performed only after at least 4 clock cycles in the destination clock domain. Bits 15:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 ZQPD: Zero-quanta pause disable When set, this bit disables the automatic generation of Zero-quanta pause control frames on the deassertion of the flow-control signal from the FIFO layer. When this bit is reset, normal operation with automatic Zero-quanta pause control frame generation is enabled. Bit 6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 5:4 PLT: Pause low threshold This field configures the threshold of the Pause timer at which the Pause frame is automatically retransmitted. The threshold values should always be less than the Pause Time configured in bits[31:16]. For example, if PT = 100H (256 slot-times), and PLT = 01, then a second PAUSE frame is automatically transmitted if initiated at 228 (256 28) slottimes after the first PAUSE frame is transmitted. Selection Threshold 00 Pause time minus 4 slot times 01 Pause time minus 28 slot times 10 Pause time minus 144 slot times 11 Pause time minus 256 slot times Slot time is defined as time taken to transmit 512 bits (64 bytes) on the MII interface. Bit 3 UPFD: Unicast pause frame detect When this bit is set, the MAC detects the Pause frames with the stations unicast address specified in the ETH_MACA0HR and ETH_MACA0LR registers, in addition to detecting Pause frames with the unique multicast address. When this bit is reset, the MAC detects only a Pause frame with the unique multicast address specified in the 802.3x standard.

979/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bit 2 RFCE: Receive flow control enable When this bit is set, the MAC decodes the received Pause frame and disables its transmitter for a specified (Pause Time) time. When this bit is reset, the decode function of the Pause frame is disabled. Bit 1 TFCE: Transmit flow control enable In Full-duplex mode, when this bit is set, the MAC enables the flow control operation to transmit Pause frames. When this bit is reset, the flow control operation in the MAC is disabled, and the MAC does not transmit any Pause frames. In Half-duplex mode, when this bit is set, the MAC enables the back-pressure operation. When this bit is reset, the back pressure feature is disabled. Bit 0 FCB/BPA: Flow control busy/back pressure activate This bit initiates a Pause Control frame in Full-duplex mode and activates the back pressure function in Half-duplex mode if TFCE bit is set. In Full-duplex mode, this bit should be read as 0 before writing to the Flow control register. To initiate a Pause control frame, the Application must set this bit to 1. During a transfer of the Control frame, this bit continues to be set to signify that a frame transmission is in progress. After completion of the Pause control frame transmission, the MAC resets this bit to 0. The Flow control register should not be written to until this bit is cleared. In Half-duplex mode, when this bit is set (and TFCE is set), back pressure is asserted by the MAC core. During back pressure, when the MAC receives a new frame, the transmitter starts sending a JAM pattern resulting in a collision. When the MAC is configured to Fullduplex mode, the BPA is automatically disabled.

Ethernet MAC VLAN tag register (ETH_MACVLANTR)

Address offset: 0x001C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The VLAN tag register contains the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tag to identify the VLAN frames. The MAC compares the 13th and 14th bytes of the receiving frame (Length/Type) with 0x8100, and the following 2 bytes are compared with the VLAN tag; if a match occurs, the received VLAN bit in the receive frame status is set. The legal length of the frame is increased from 1518 bytes to 1522 bytes.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 VLANTC 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

VLANTI rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Reserved

rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

980/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 16 VLANTC: 12-bit VLAN tag comparison When this bit is set, a 12-bit VLAN identifier, rather than the complete 16-bit VLAN tag, is used for comparison and filtering. Bits[11:0] of the VLAN tag are compared with the corresponding field in the received VLAN-tagged frame. When this bit is reset, all 16 bits of the received VLAN frames fifteenth and sixteenth bytes are used for comparison. Bits 15:0 VLANTI: VLAN tag identifier (for receive frames) This contains the 802.1Q VLAN tag to identify VLAN frames, and is compared to the fifteenth and sixteenth bytes of the frames being received for VLAN frames. Bits[15:13] are the user priority, Bit[12] is the canonical format indicator (CFI) and bits[11:0] are the VLAN tags VLAN identifier (VID) field. When the VLANTC bit is set, only the VID (bits[11:0]) is used for comparison. If VLANTI (VLANTI[11:0] if VLANTC is set) is all zeros, the MAC does not check the fifteenth and sixteenth bytes for VLAN tag comparison, and declares all frames with a Type field value of 0x8100 as VLAN frames.

Ethernet MAC remote wakeup frame filter register (ETH_MACRWUFFR)

Address offset: 0x0028 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This is the address through which the remote wakeup frame filter registers are written/read by the application. The Wakeup frame filter register is actually a pointer to eight (not transparent) such wakeup frame filter registers. Eight sequential write operations to this address with the offset (0x0028) will write all wakeup frame filter registers. Eight sequential read operations from this address with the offset (0x0028) will read all wakeup frame filter registers. This register contains the higher 16 bits of the 7th MAC address. Refer to Remote wakeup frame filter register section for additional information. Figure 356. Ethernet MAC remote wakeup frame filter register (ETH_MACRWUFFR)
Wakeup frame filter reg0 Wakeup frame filter reg1 Wakeup frame filter reg2 Wakeup frame filter reg3 Wakeup frame filter reg4 Wakeup frame filter reg5 Wakeup frame filter reg6 Wakeup frame filter reg7
RSVD

Filter 0 Byte Mask Filter 1 Byte Mask Filter 2 Byte Mask Filter 3 Byte Mask
Filter 3 Command
RSVD

Filter 2 Command

RSVD

Filter 1 Command

RSVD

Filter 0 Command

Filter 3 Offset

Filter 2 Offset

Filter 1 Offset

Filter 0 Offset

Filter 1 CRC - 16 Filter 3 CRC - 16

Filter 0 CRC - 16 Filter 2 CRC - 16

ai15648

981/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Ethernet MAC PMT control and status register (ETH_MACPMTCSR)

Address offset: 0x002C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The ETH_MACPMTCSR programs the request wakeup events and monitors the wakeup events.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 WFFRPR Reserved Res. 9 GU 8 Reserved 7 6 WFR 5 MPR 4 Reserved 3 2 WFE 1 MPE rw 0 PD rs

rs

rw

rc_r rc_r

rw

Bit 31 WFFRPR: Wakeup frame filter register pointer reset When set, it resets the Remote wakeup frame filter register pointer to 0b000. It is automatically cleared after 1 clock cycle. Bits 30:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 GU: Global unicast When set, it enables any unicast packet filtered by the MAC (DAF) address recognition to be a wakeup frame. Bits 8:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 WFR: Wakeup frame received When set, this bit indicates the power management event was generated due to reception of a wakeup frame. This bit is cleared by a read into this register. Bit 5 MPR: Magic packet received When set, this bit indicates the power management event was generated by the reception of a Magic Packet. This bit is cleared by a read into this register. Bits 4:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 WFE: Wakeup frame enable When set, this bit enables the generation of a power management event due to wakeup frame reception. Bit 1 MPE: Magic Packet enable When set, this bit enables the generation of a power management event due to Magic Packet reception. Bit 0 PD: Power down When this bit is set, all received frames will be dropped. This bit is cleared automatically when a magic packet or wakeup frame is received, and Power-down mode is disabled. Frames received after this bit is cleared are forwarded to the application. This bit must only be set when either the Magic Packet Enable or Wakeup Frame Enable bit is set high.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

982/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet MAC debug register (ETH_MACDBGR)

Address offset: 0x0034 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This debug register gives the status of all the main modules of the transmit and receive data paths and the FIFOs. An all-zero status indicates that the MAC core is in Idle state (and FIFOs are empty) and no activity is going on in the data paths.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MMTEA MTFCS TFWA TFNE TFRS Reserved Reserved MTP TFF 9 RFFL 8 7 Reserved 6 RFRCS 5 4 RFWRA 3 Reserved 2 MSFRWCS ro ro 1 0 MMRPEA ro

Reserved ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

ro

Bits 31:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 25 TFF: Tx FIFO full When high, it indicates that the Tx FIFO is full and hence no more frames will be accepted for transmission. Bit 24 TFNE: Tx FIFO not empty When high, it indicates that the TxFIFO is not empty and has some data left for transmission. Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 TFWA: Tx FIFO write active When high, it indicates that the TxFIFO write controller is active and transferring data to the TxFIFO. Bits 21:20 TFRS: Tx FIFO read status This indicates the state of the TxFIFO read controller: 00: Idle state 01: Read state (transferring data to the MAC transmitter) 10: Waiting for TxStatus from MAC transmitter 11: Writing the received TxStatus or flushing the TxFIFO Bit 19 MTP: MAC transmitter in pause When high, it indicates that the MAC transmitter is in Pause condition (in full-duplex mode only) and hence will not schedule any frame for transmission Bits 18:17 MTFCS: MAC transmit frame controller status This indicates the state of the MAC transmit frame controller: 00: Idle 01: Waiting for Status of previous frame or IFG/backoff period to be over 10: Generating and transmitting a Pause control frame (in full duplex mode) 11: Transferring input frame for transmission Bit 16 MMTEA: MAC MII transmit engine active When high, it indicates that the MAC MII transmit engine is actively transmitting data and that it is not in the Idle state. Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

983/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 9:8 RFFL: Rx FIFO fill level This gives the status of the Rx FIFO fill-level: 00: RxFIFO empty 01: RxFIFO fill-level below flow-control de-activate threshold 10: RxFIFO fill-level above flow-control activate threshold 11: RxFIFO full Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:5 RFRCS: Rx FIFO read controller status It gives the state of the Rx FIFO read controller: 00: IDLE state 01: Reading frame data 10: Reading frame status (or time-stamp) 11: Flushing the frame data and status Bit 4 RFWRA: Rx FIFO write controller active When high, it indicates that the Rx FIFO write controller is active and transferring a received frame to the FIFO. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 2:1 MSFRWCS: MAC small FIFO read / write controllers status When high, these bits indicate the respective active state of the small FIFO read and write controllers of the MAC receive frame controller module. Bit 0 MMRPEA: MAC MII receive protocol engine active When high, it indicates that the MAC MII receive protocol engine is actively receiving data and is not in the Idle state.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

984/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet MAC interrupt status register (ETH_MACSR)

Address offset: 0x0038 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The ETH_MACSR register contents identify the events in the MAC that can generate an interrupt.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 TSTS Reserved rc_r Reserved r r r r 8 7 6 5 4 MMCS 3 PMTS Reserved 2 1 0

MMCTS MMCRS

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 TSTS: Time stamp trigger status This bit is set high when the system time value equals or exceeds the value specified in the Target time high and low registers. This bit is cleared when this register is read. Bits 8:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 MMCTS: MMC transmit status This bit is set high whenever an interrupt is generated in the ETH_MMCTIR Register. This bit is cleared when all the bits in this interrupt register (ETH_MMCTIR) are cleared. Bit 5 MMCRS: MMC receive status This bit is set high whenever an interrupt is generated in the ETH_MMCRIR register. This bit is cleared when all the bits in this interrupt register (ETH_MMCRIR) are cleared. Bit 4 MMCS: MMC status This bit is set high whenever any of bits 6:5 is set high. It is cleared only when both bits are low. Bit 3 PMTS: PMT status This bit is set whenever a Magic packet or Wake-on-LAN frame is received in Power-down mode (See bits 5 and 6 in the ETH_MACPMTCSR register Ethernet MAC PMT control and status register (ETH_MACPMTCSR) on page 982). This bit is cleared when both bits[6:5], of this last register, are cleared due to a read operation to the ETH_MACPMTCSR register. Bits 2:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

985/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Ethernet MAC interrupt mask register (ETH_MACIMR)

Address offset: 0x003C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The ETH_MACIMR register bits make it possible to mask the interrupt signal due to the corresponding event in the ETH_MACSR register.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 TSTIM Reserved rw Reserved rw 8 7 6 5 4 3 PMTIM Reserved 2 1 0

Bits 15:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 TSTIM: Time stamp trigger interrupt mask When set, this bit disables the time stamp interrupt generation. Bits 8:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 3 PMTIM: PMT interrupt mask When set, this bit disables the assertion of the interrupt signal due to the setting of the PMT Status bit in ETH_MACSR. Bits 2:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Ethernet MAC address 0 high register (ETH_MACA0HR)

Address offset: 0x0040 Reset value: 0x0010 FFFF The MAC address 0 high register holds the upper 16 bits of the 6-byte first MAC address of the station. Note that the first DA byte that is received on the MII interface corresponds to the LS Byte (bits [7:0]) of the MAC address low register. For example, if 0x1122 3344 5566 is received (0x11 is the first byte) on the MII as the destination address, then the MAC address 0 register [47:0] is compared with 0x6655 4433 2211.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MO Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MACA0H

Bit 31 MO: Always 1. Bits 30:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 MACA0H: MAC address0 high [47:32] This field contains the upper 16 bits (47:32) of the 6-byte MAC address0. This is used by the MAC for filtering for received frames and for inserting the MAC address in the transmit flow control (Pause) frames.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

986/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet MAC address 0 low register (ETH_MACA0LR)

Address offset: 0x0044 Reset value: 0xFFFF FFFF The MAC address 0 low register holds the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte first MAC address of the station.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MACA0L rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 MACA0L: MAC address0 low [31:0] This field contains the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte MAC address0. This is used by the MAC for filtering for received frames and for inserting the MAC address in the transmit flow control (Pause) frames.

Ethernet MAC address 1 high register (ETH_MACA1HR)

Address offset: 0x0048 Reset value: 0x0000 FFFF The MAC address 1 high register holds the upper 16 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address of the station.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 AE SA rw rw rw rw MBC Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MACA1H

Bit 31 AE: Address enable When this bit is set, the address filters use the MAC address1 for perfect filtering. When this bit is cleared, the address filters ignore the address for filtering. Bit 30 SA: Source address When this bit is set, the MAC address1[47:0] is used for comparison with the SA fields of the received frame. When this bit is cleared, the MAC address1[47:0] is used for comparison with the DA fields of the received frame. Bits 29:24 MBC: Mask byte control These bits are mask control bits for comparison of each of the MAC address1 bytes. When they are set high, the MAC core does not compare the corresponding byte of received DA/SA with the contents of the MAC address1 registers. Each bit controls the masking of the bytes as follows: Bit 29: ETH_MACA1HR [15:8] Bit 28: ETH_MACA1HR [7:0] Bit 27: ETH_MACA1LR [31:24] Bit 24: ETH_MACA1LR [7:0] Bits 23:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

987/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 15:0 MACA1H: MAC address1 high [47:32] This field contains the upper 16 bits (47:32) of the 6-byte second MAC address.

Ethernet MAC address1 low register (ETH_MACA1LR)

Address offset: 0x004C Reset value: 0xFFFF FFFF The MAC address 1 low register holds the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address of the station.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MACA1L rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 MACA1L: MAC address1 low [31:0] This field contains the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte MAC address1. The content of this field is undefined until loaded by the application after the initialization process.

Ethernet MAC address 2 high register (ETH_MACA2HR)

Address offset: 0x0050 Reset value: 0x0000 FFFF The MAC address 2 high register holds the upper 16 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address of the station.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 AE SA rw rw rw rw MBC Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MACA2H

Bit 31 AE: Address enable When this bit is set, the address filters use the MAC address2 for perfect filtering. When reset, the address filters ignore the address for filtering. Bit 30 SA: Source address When this bit is set, the MAC address 2 [47:0] is used for comparison with the SA fields of the received frame. When this bit is reset, the MAC address 2 [47:0] is used for comparison with the DA fields of the received frame. Bits 29:24 MBC: Mask byte control These bits are mask control bits for comparison of each of the MAC address2 bytes. When set high, the MAC core does not compare the corresponding byte of received DA/SA with the contents of the MAC address 2 registers. Each bit controls the masking of the bytes as follows: Bit 29: ETH_MACA2HR [15:8] Bit 28: ETH_MACA2HR [7:0] Bit 27: ETH_MACA2LR [31:24] Bit 24: ETH_MACA2LR [7:0]

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

988/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bits 23:16Reserved, must be kept at reset value. MACA2H: MAC address2 high [47:32] Bits 15:0 This field contains the upper 16 bits (47:32) of the 6-byte MAC address2.

Ethernet MAC address 2 low register (ETH_MACA2LR)

Address offset: 0x0054 Reset value: 0xFFFF FFFF The MAC address 2 low register holds the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address of the station.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MACA2L rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 MACA2L: MAC address2 low [31:0] This field contains the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address2. The content of this field is undefined until loaded by the application after the initialization process.

Ethernet MAC address 3 high register (ETH_MACA3HR)

Address offset: 0x0058 Reset value: 0x0000 FFFF The MAC address 3 high register holds the upper 16 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address of the station.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 AE SA rw rw rw rw MBC Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MACA3H

Bit 31 AE: Address enable When this bit is set, the address filters use the MAC address3 for perfect filtering. When this bit is cleared, the address filters ignore the address for filtering. Bit 30 SA: Source address When this bit is set, the MAC address 3 [47:0] is used for comparison with the SA fields of the received frame. When this bit is cleared, the MAC address 3[47:0] is used for comparison with the DA fields of the received frame.

989/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 29:24 MBC: Mask byte control These bits are mask control bits for comparison of each of the MAC address3 bytes. When these bits are set high, the MAC core does not compare the corresponding byte of received DA/SA with the contents of the MAC address 3 registers. Each bit controls the masking of the bytes as follows: Bit 29: ETH_MACA3HR [15:8] Bit 28: ETH_MACA3HR [7:0] Bit 27: ETH_MACA3LR [31:24] Bit 24: ETH_MACA3LR [7:0] Bits 23:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 MACA3H: MAC address3 high [47:32] This field contains the upper 16 bits (47:32) of the 6-byte MAC address3.

Ethernet MAC address 3 low register (ETH_MACA3LR)

Address offset: 0x005C Reset value: 0xFFFF FFFF The MAC address 3 low register holds the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address of the station.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MACA3L rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 MACA3L: MAC address3 low [31:0] This field contains the lower 32 bits of the 6-byte second MAC address3. The content of this field is undefined until loaded by the application after the initialization process.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

990/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

29.8.2

MMC register description

Ethernet MMC control register (ETH_MMCCR)
Address offset: 0x0100 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Ethernet MMC Control register establishes the operating mode of the management counters.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

5 MCFHP

4 MCP

3 MCF

2 ROR

1 CSR rw

0 CR rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 MCFHP: MMC counter Full-Half preset When MCFHP is low and bit4 is set, all MMC counters get preset to almost-half value. All frame-counters get preset to 0x7FFF_FFF0 (half - 16) When MCFHP is high and bit4 is set, all MMC counters get preset to almost-full value. All frame-counters get preset to 0xFFFF_FFF0 (full - 16) Bit 4 MCP: MMC counter preset When set, all counters will be initialized or preset to almost full or almost half as per Bit5 above. This bit will be cleared automatically after 1 clock cycle. This bit along with bit5 is useful for debugging and testing the assertion of interrupts due to MMC counter becoming half-full or full. Bit 3 MCF: MMC counter freeze When set, this bit freezes all the MMC counters to their current value. (None of the MMC counters are updated due to any transmitted or received frame until this bit is cleared to 0. If any MMC counter is read with the Reset on Read bit set, then that counter is also cleared in this mode.) Bit 2 ROR: Reset on read When this bit is set, the MMC counters is reset to zero after read (self-clearing after reset). The counters are cleared when the least significant byte lane (bits [7:0]) is read. Bit 1 CSR: Counter stop rollover When this bit is set, the counter does not roll over to zero after it reaches the maximum value. Bit 0 CR: Counter reset When it is set, all counters are reset. This bit is cleared automatically after 1 clock cycle.

Ethernet MMC receive interrupt register (ETH_MMCRIR)

Address offset: 0x0104 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Ethernet MMC receive interrupt register maintains the interrupts generated when receive statistic counters reach half their maximum values. (MSB of the counter is set.) It is a 32-bit wide register. An interrupt bit is cleared when the respective MMC counter that

991/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller caused the interrupt is read. The least significant byte lane (bits [7:0]) of the respective counter must be read in order to clear the interrupt bit.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18

17 RGUFS

16 15 14 13 12 11 10

6 RFAES

5 RFCES

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rc_r

rc_r rc_r

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 17 RGUFS: Received Good Unicast Frames Status This bit is set when the received, good unicast frames, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 16:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 RFAES: Received frames alignment error status This bit is set when the received frames, with alignment error, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bit 5 RFCES: Received frames CRC error status This bit is set when the received frames, with CRC error, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 4:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Ethernet MMC transmit interrupt register (ETH_MMCTIR)

Address offset: 0x0108 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Ethernet MMC transmit Interrupt register maintains the interrupts generated when transmit statistic counters reach half their maximum values. (MSB of the counter is set.) It is a 32-bit wide register. An interrupt bit is cleared when the respective MMC counter that caused the interrupt is read. The least significant byte lane (bits [7:0]) of the respective counter must be read in order to clear the interrupt bit.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 TGFS 20 19 18 17 16 15 TGFMSCS 14 TGFSCS 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rc_r

rc_r rc_r

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 TGFS: Transmitted good frames status This bit is set when the transmitted, good frames, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 20:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

992/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bit 15 TGFMSCS: Transmitted good frames more single collision status This bit is set when the transmitted, good frames after more than a single collision, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bit 14 TGFSCS: Transmitted good frames single collision status This bit is set when the transmitted, good frames after a single collision, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 13:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Ethernet MMC receive interrupt mask register (ETH_MMCRIMR)

Address offset: 0x010C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Ethernet MMC receive interrupt mask register maintains the masks for interrupts generated when the receive statistic counters reach half their maximum value. (MSB of the counter is set.) It is a 32-bit wide register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 RGUFM 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 RFAEM 5 RFCEM 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 17 RGUFM: Received good unicast frames mask Setting this bit masks the interrupt when the received, good unicast frames, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 16:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 RFAEM: Received frames alignment error mask Setting this bit masks the interrupt when the received frames, with alignment error, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bit 5 RFCEM: Received frame CRC error mask Setting this bit masks the interrupt when the received frames, with CRC error, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 4:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

993/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Ethernet MMC transmit interrupt mask register (ETH_MMCTIMR)

Address offset: 0x0110 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Ethernet MMC transmit interrupt mask register maintains the masks for interrupts generated when the transmit statistic counters reach half their maximum value. (MSB of the counter is set). It is a 32-bit wide register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 TGFM 20 19 18 17 16 15 TGFMSCM 14 TGFSCM 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 TGFM: Transmitted good frames mask Setting this bit masks the interrupt when the transmitted, good frames, counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 20:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 TGFMSCM: Transmitted good frames more single collision mask Setting this bit masks the interrupt when the transmitted good frames after more than a single collision counter reaches half the maximum value. Bit 14 TGFSCM: Transmitted good frames single collision mask Setting this bit masks the interrupt when the transmitted good frames after a single collision counter reaches half the maximum value. Bits 13:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Ethernet MMC transmitted good frames after a single collision counter register (ETH_MMCTGFSCCR)
Address offset: 0x014C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the number of successfully transmitted frames after a single collision in Half-duplex mode.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TGFSCC r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TGFSCC: Transmitted good frames single collision counter Transmitted good frames after a single collision counter.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

994/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet MMC transmitted good frames after more than a single collision counter register (ETH_MMCTGFMSCCR)
Address offset: 0x0150 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the number of successfully transmitted frames after more than a single collision in Half-duplex mode.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TGFMSCC r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TGFMSCC: Transmitted good frames more single collision counter Transmitted good frames after more than a single collision counter

Ethernet MMC transmitted good frames counter register (ETH_MMCTGFCR)

Address offset: 0x0168 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the number of good frames transmitted.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TGFC r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TGFC: Transmitted good frames counter

Ethernet MMC received frames with CRC error counter register (ETH_MMCRFCECR)
Address offset: 0x0194 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the number of frames received with CRC error.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RFCEC r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 RFCEC: Received frames CRC error counter Received frames with CRC error counter

995/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Ethernet MMC received frames with alignment error counter register (ETH_MMCRFAECR)
Address offset: 0x0198 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the number of frames received with alignment (dribble) error.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RFAEC r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 RFAEC: Received frames alignment error counter Received frames with alignment error counter

MMC received good unicast frames counter register (ETH_MMCRGUFCR)

Address offset: 0x01C4 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the number of good unicast frames received.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RGUFC r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 RGUFC: Received good unicast frames counter

29.8.3

IEEE 1588 time stamp registers

This section describes the registers required to support precision network clock synchronization functions under the IEEE 1588 standard.

Ethernet PTP time stamp control register (ETH_PTPTSCR)

Address offset: 0x0700 Reset value: 0x0000 00002000 This register controls the time stamp generation and update logic.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TSSPTPOEFE TSPTPPSV2E TSSIPV4FE TSSIPV6FE TSPFFMAE TSSMRME TSSEME TSCNT 9 TSSSR 8 TSSARFE 7 6 5 TTSARU 4 3 TSSTU 2 1 TSFCU rw 0

Reserved

TSSTI

TSITE

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

996/1422

TSE

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bits 31:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 18 TSPFFMAE: Time stamp PTP frame filtering MAC address enable When set, this bit uses the MAC address (except for MAC address 0) to filter the PTP frames when PTP is sent directly over Ethernet. Bits 17:16 TSCNT: Time stamp clock node type The following are the available types of clock node: 00: Ordinary clock 01: Boundary clock 10: End-to-end transparent clock 11: Peer-to-peer transparent clock Bit 15 TSSMRME: Time stamp snapshot for message relevant to master enable When this bit is set, the snapshot is taken for messages relevant to the master node only. When this bit is cleared the snapshot is taken for messages relevant to the slave node only. This is valid only for the ordinary clock and boundary clock nodes. Bit 14 TSSEME: Time stamp snapshot for event message enable When this bit is set, the time stamp snapshot is taken for event messages only (SYNC, Delay_Req, Pdelay_Req or Pdelay_Resp). When this bit is cleared the snapshot is taken for all other messages except for Announce, Management and Signaling. Bit 13 TSSIPV4FE: Time stamp snapshot for IPv4 frames enable When this bit is set, the time stamp snapshot is taken for IPv4 frames. Bit 12 TSSIPV6FE: Time stamp snapshot for IPv6 frames enable When this bit is set, the time stamp snapshot is taken for IPv6 frames. Bit 11 TSSPTPOEFE: Time stamp snapshot for PTP over ethernet frames enable When this bit is set, the time stamp snapshot is taken for frames which have PTP messages in Ethernet frames (PTP over Ethernet) also. By default snapshots are taken for UDPIPEthernet PTP packets. Bit 10 TSPTPPSV2E: Time stamp PTP packet snooping for version2 format enable When this bit is set, the PTP packets are snooped using the version 2 format. When the bit is cleared, the PTP packets are snooped using the version 1 format. Note: IEEE 1588 Version 1 and Version 2 formats as indicated in IEEE standard 1588-2008 (Revision of IEEE STD. 1588-2002). Bit 9 TSSSR: Time stamp subsecond rollover: digital or binary rollover control When this bit is set, the Time stamp low register rolls over when the subsecond counter reaches the value 0x3B9A C9FF (999 999 999 in decimal), and increments the Time Stamp (high) seconds. When this bit is cleared, the rollover value of the subsecond register reaches 0x7FFF FFFF. The subsecond increment has to be programmed correctly depending on the PTPs reference clock frequency and this bit value. Bit 8 TSSARFE: Time stamp snapshot for all received frames enable When this bit is set, the time stamp snapshot is enabled for all frames received by the core. Bits 7:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 TSARU: Time stamp addend register update When this bit is set, the Time stamp addend registers contents are updated to the PTP block for fine correction. This bit is cleared when the update is complete. This register bit must be read as zero before you can set it.

997/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bit 4 TSITE: Time stamp interrupt trigger enable When this bit is set, a time stamp interrupt is generated when the system time becomes greater than the value written in the Target time register. When the Time stamp trigger interrupt is generated, this bit is cleared. Bit 3 TSSTU: Time stamp system time update When this bit is set, the system time is updated (added to or subtracted from) with the value specified in the Time stamp high update and Time stamp low update registers. Both the TSSTU and TSSTI bits must be read as zero before you can set this bit. Once the update is completed in hardware, this bit is cleared. Bit 2 TSSTI: Time stamp system time initialize When this bit is set, the system time is initialized (overwritten) with the value specified in the Time stamp high update and Time stamp low update registers. This bit must be read as zero before you can set it. When initialization is complete, this bit is cleared. Bit 1 TSFCU: Time stamp fine or coarse update When set, this bit indicates that the system time stamp is to be updated using the Fine Update method. When cleared, it indicates the system time stamp is to be updated using the Coarse method. Bit 0 TSE: Time stamp enable When this bit is set, time stamping is enabled for transmit and receive frames. When this bit is cleared, the time stamp function is suspended and time stamps are not added for transmit and receive frames. Because the maintained system time is suspended, you must always initialize the time stamp feature (system time) after setting this bit high.

The table below indicates the messages for which a snapshot is taken depending on the clock, enable master and enable snapshot for event message register settings. Table 169. Time stamp snapshot dependency on registers bits
TSCNT (bits 17:16) 00 or 01 00 or 01 00 or 01 10 10 11 11 TSSMRME (bit 15)(1) X(2) 1 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A TSSEME (bit 14) 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Messages for which snapshots are taken SYNC, Follow_Up, Delay_Req, Delay_Resp Delay_Req SYNC SYNC, Follow_Up, Delay_Req, Delay_Resp SYNC, Follow_Up SYNC, Follow_Up, Delay_Req, Delay_Resp, Pdelay_Req, Pdelay_Resp SYNC, Pdelay_Req, Pdelay_Resp

1. N/A = not applicable. 2. X = dont care.

Ethernet PTP subsecond increment register (ETH_PTPSSIR)

Address offset: 0x0704 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the 8-bit value by which the subsecond register is incremented. In Coarse update mode (TSFCU bit in ETH_PTPTSCR), the value in this register is added to

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

998/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

the system time every clock cycle of HCLK. In Fine update mode, the value in this register is added to the system time whenever the accumulator gets an overflow.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

STSSI

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:0 STSSI: System time subsecond increment The value programmed in this register is added to the contents of the subsecond value of the system time in every update. For example, to achieve 20 ns accuracy, the value is: 20 / 0.467 = ~ 43 (or 0x2A).

Ethernet PTP time stamp high register (ETH_PTPTSHR)

Address offset: 0x0708 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the most significant (higher) 32 time bits. This read-only register contains the seconds system time value. The Time stamp high register, along with Time stamp low register, indicates the current value of the system time maintained by the MAC. Though it is updated on a continuous basis.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 STS r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 STS: System time second The value in this field indicates the current value in seconds of the System Time maintained by the core.

Ethernet PTP time stamp low register (ETH_PTPTSLR)

Address offset: 0x070C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the least significant (lower) 32 time bits. This read-only register contains the subsecond system time value.
31 STPNS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 STSS r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

999/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bit 31 STPNS: System time positive or negative sign This bit indicates a positive or negative time value. When set, the bit indicates that time representation is negative. When cleared, it indicates that time representation is positive. Because the system time should always be positive, this bit is normally zero. Bits 30:0 STSS: System time subseconds The value in this field has the subsecond time representation, with 0.46 ns accuracy.

Ethernet PTP time stamp high update register (ETH_PTPTSHUR)

Address offset: 0x0710 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the most significant (higher) 32 bits of the time to be written to, added to, or subtracted from the System Time value. The Time stamp high update register, along with the Time stamp update low register, initializes or updates the system time maintained by the MAC. You have to write both of these registers before setting the TSSTI or TSSTU bits in the Time stamp control register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TSUS rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TSUS: Time stamp update second The value in this field indicates the time, in seconds, to be initialized or added to the system time.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1000/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet PTP time stamp low update register (ETH_PTPTSLUR)

Address offset: 0x0714 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the least significant (lower) 32 bits of the time to be written to, added to, or subtracted from the System Time value.
31 TSUPNS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TSUSS rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

rw

Bit 31 TSUPNS: Time stamp update positive or negative sign This bit indicates positive or negative time value. When set, the bit indicates that time representation is negative. When cleared, it indicates that time representation is positive. When TSSTI is set (system time initialization) this bit should be zero. If this bit is set when TSSTU is set, the value in the Time stamp update registers is subtracted from the system time. Otherwise it is added to the system time. Bits 30:0 TSUSS: Time stamp update subseconds The value in this field indicates the subsecond time to be initialized or added to the system time. This value has an accuracy of 0.46 ns (in other words, a value of 0x0000_0001 is 0.46 ns).

Ethernet PTP time stamp addend register (ETH_PTPTSAR)

Address offset: 0x0718 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is used by the software to readjust the clock frequency linearly to match the master clock frequency. This register value is used only when the system time is configured for Fine update mode (TSFCU bit in ETH_PTPTSCR). This register content is added to a 32-bit accumulator in every clock cycle and the system time is updated whenever the accumulator overflows.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TSA rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TSA: Time stamp addend This register indicates the 32-bit time value to be added to the Accumulator register to achieve time synchronization.

1001/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Ethernet PTP target time high register (ETH_PTPTTHR)

Address offset: 0x071C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the higher 32 bits of time to be compared with the system time for interrupt event generation. The Target time high register, along with Target time low register, is used to schedule an interrupt event (TSARU bit in ETH_PTPTSCR) when the system time exceeds the value programmed in these registers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TTSH rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TTSH: Target time stamp high This register stores the time in seconds. When the time stamp value matches or exceeds both Target time stamp registers, the MAC, if enabled, generates an interrupt.

Ethernet PTP target time low register (ETH_PTPTTLR)

Address offset: 0x0720 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the lower 32 bits of time to be compared with the system time for interrupt event generation.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TTSL rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TTSL: Target time stamp low This register stores the time in (signed) nanoseconds. When the value of the time stamp matches or exceeds both Target time stamp registers, the MAC, if enabled, generates an interrupt.

Ethernet PTP time stamp status register (ETH_PTPTSSR)

Address offset: 0x0728 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register contains the time stamp status register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TSTTR ro 0 TSSO ro

Reserved

Bits 31:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1002/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bit 1 TSTTR: Time stamp target time reached When set, this bit indicates that the value of the system time is greater than or equal to the value specified in the Target time high and low registers Bit 0 TSSO: Time stamp second overflow When set, this bit indicates that the second value of the time stamp has overflowed beyond 0xFFFF FFFF.

Ethernet PTP PPS control register (ETH_PTPPPSCR)

Address offset: 0x072C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register controls the frequency of the PPS output.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TSTTR ro 9 8 7 EDFE 6 5 4 DSL rw rw rw rw rw 3 2 1 DA rw PM rw rw rw rw PBL rw rw rw rw 0 TSSO ro 0 SR rs

Reserved

Bits 31:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 3:0 PPSFREQ: PPS frequency selection The PPS output frequency is set to 2PPSFREQ Hz. 0000: 1 Hz with a pulse width of 125 ms for binary rollover and, of 100 ms for digital rollover 0001: 2 Hz with 50% duty cycle for binary rollover (digital rollover not recommended) 0010: 4 Hz with 50% duty cycle for binary rollover (digital rollover not recommended) 0011: 8 Hz with 50% duty cycle for binary rollover (digital rollover not recommended) 0100: 16 Hz with 50% duty cycle for binary rollover (digital rollover not recommended) ... 1111: 32768 Hz with 50% duty cycle for binary rollover (digital rollover not recommended) Note: If digital rollover is used (TSSSR=1, bit 9 in ETH_PTPTSCR), it is recommended not to use the PPS output with a frequency other than 1 Hz. Otherwise, with digital rollover, the PPS output has irregular waveforms at higher frequencies (though its average frequency will always be correct during any one-second window).

29.8.4

DMA register description

This section defines the bits for each DMA register. Non-32 bit accesses are allowed as long as the address is word-aligned.

Ethernet DMA bus mode register (ETH_DMABMR)

Address offset: 0x1000 Reset value: 0x0000 2101 The bus mode register establishes the bus operating modes for the DMA.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FPM USP AAB MB RDP rw rw rw rw rw rw Reserved FB rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

1003/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 31:27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 MB: Mixed burst When this bit is set high and the FB bit is low, the AHB master interface starts all bursts of a length greater than 16 with INCR (undefined burst). When this bit is cleared, it reverts to fixed burst transfers (INCRx and SINGLE) for burst lengths of 16 and below. Bit 25 AAB: Address-aligned beats When this bit is set high and the FB bit equals 1, the AHB interface generates all bursts aligned to the start address LS bits. If the FB bit equals 0, the first burst (accessing the data buffers start address) is not aligned, but subsequent bursts are aligned to the address. Bit 24 FPM: 4xPBL mode When set high, this bit multiplies the PBL value programmed (bits [22:17] and bits [13:8]) four times. Thus the DMA transfers data in a maximum of 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128 beats depending on the PBL value. Bit 23 USP: Use separate PBL When set high, it configures the RxDMA to use the value configured in bits [22:17] as PBL while the PBL value in bits [13:8] is applicable to TxDMA operations only. When this bit is cleared, the PBL value in bits [13:8] is applicable for both DMA engines. Bits 22:17 RDP: Rx DMA PBL These bits indicate the maximum number of beats to be transferred in one RxDMA transaction. This is the maximum value that is used in a single block read/write operation. The RxDMA always attempts to burst as specified in RDP each time it starts a burst transfer on the host bus. RDP can be programmed with permissible values of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32. Any other value results in undefined behavior. These bits are valid and applicable only when USP is set high. Bit 16 FB: Fixed burst This bit controls whether the AHB Master interface performs fixed burst transfers or not. When set, the AHB uses only SINGLE, INCR4, INCR8 or INCR16 during start of normal burst transfers. When reset, the AHB uses SINGLE and INCR burst transfer operations. Bits 15:14 PM: Rx Tx priority ratio RxDMA requests are given priority over TxDMA requests in the following ratio: 00: 1:1 01: 2:1 10: 3:1 11: 4:1 This is valid only when the DA bit is cleared. Bits 13:8 PBL: Programmable burst length These bits indicate the maximum number of beats to be transferred in one DMA transaction. This is the maximum value that is used in a single block read/write operation. The DMA always attempts to burst as specified in PBL each time it starts a burst transfer on the host bus. PBL can be programmed with permissible values of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32. Any other value results in undefined behavior. When USP is set, this PBL value is applicable for TxDMA transactions only. The PBL values have the following limitations: The maximum number of beats (PBL) possible is limited by the size of the Tx FIFO and Rx FIFO. The FIFO has a constraint that the maximum beat supported is half the depth of the FIFO. If the PBL is common for both transmit and receive DMA, the minimum Rx FIFO and Tx FIFO depths must be considered. Do not program out-of-range PBL values, because the system may not behave properly.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1004/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bit 7 EDFE: Enhanced descriptor format enable When this bit is set, the enhanced descriptor format is enabled and the descriptor size is increased to 32 bytes (8 DWORDS). This is required when time stamping is activated (TSE=1, ETH_PTPTSCR bit 0) or if IPv4 checksum offload is activated (IPCO=1, ETH_MACCR bit 10). Bits 6:2 DSL: Descriptor skip length This bit specifies the number of words to skip between two unchained descriptors. The address skipping starts from the end of current descriptor to the start of next descriptor. When DSL value equals zero, the descriptor table is taken as contiguous by the DMA, in Ring mode. Bit 1 DA: DMA Arbitration 0: Round-robin with Rx:Tx priority given in bits [15:14] 1: Rx has priority over Tx Bit 0 SR: Software reset When this bit is set, the MAC DMA controller resets all MAC Subsystem internal registers and logic. It is cleared automatically after the reset operation has completed in all of the core clock domains. Read a 0 value in this bit before re-programming any register of the core.

Ethernet DMA transmit poll demand register (ETH_DMATPDR)

Address offset: 0x1004 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is used by the application to instruct the DMA to poll the transmit descriptor list. The transmit poll demand register enables the Transmit DMA to check whether or not the current descriptor is owned by DMA. The Transmit Poll Demand command is given to wake up the TxDMA if it is in Suspend mode. The TxDMA can go into Suspend mode due to an underflow error in a transmitted frame or due to the unavailability of descriptors owned by transmit DMA. You can issue this command anytime and the TxDMA resets it once it starts re-fetching the current descriptor from host memory.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TPD rw_wt 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 TPD: Transmit poll demand When these bits are written with any value, the DMA reads the current descriptor pointed to by the ETH_DMACHTDR register. If that descriptor is not available (owned by Host), transmission returns to the Suspend state and ETH_DMASR register bit 2 is asserted. If the descriptor is available, transmission resumes.

EHERNET DMA receive poll demand register (ETH_DMARPDR)

Address offset: 0x1008 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is used by the application to instruct the DMA to poll the receive descriptor list. The Receive poll demand register enables the receive DMA to check for new descriptors. This command is given to wake up the RxDMA from Suspend state. The RxDMA can go into Suspend state only due to the unavailability of descriptors owned by it.

1005/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RPD rw_wt

Bits 31:0 RPD: Receive poll demand When these bits are written with any value, the DMA reads the current descriptor pointed to by the ETH_DMACHRDR register. If that descriptor is not available (owned by Host), reception returns to the Suspended state and ETH_DMASR register bit 7 is not asserted. If the descriptor is available, the Receive DMA returns to active state.

Ethernet DMA receive descriptor list address register (ETH_DMARDLAR)

Address offset: 0x100C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Receive descriptor list address register points to the start of the receive descriptor list. The descriptor lists reside in the STM32F4xx's physical memory space and must be wordaligned. The DMA internally converts it to bus-width aligned address by making the corresponding LS bits low. Writing to the ETH_DMARDLAR register is permitted only when reception is stopped. When stopped, the ETH_DMARDLAR register must be written to before the receive Start command is given.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 SRL rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 SRL: Start of receive list This field contains the base address of the first descriptor in the receive descriptor list. The LSB bits [1/2/3:0] for 32/64/128-bit bus width) are internally ignored and taken as all-zero by the DMA. Hence these LSB bits are read only.

Ethernet DMA transmit descriptor list address register (ETH_DMATDLAR)

Address offset: 0x1010 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Transmit descriptor list address register points to the start of the transmit descriptor list. The descriptor lists reside in the STM32F4xx's physical memory space and must be wordaligned. The DMA internally converts it to bus-width-aligned address by taking the corresponding LSB to low. Writing to the ETH_DMATDLAR register is permitted only when transmission has stopped. Once transmission has stopped, the ETH_DMATDLAR register can be written before the transmission Start command is given.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 STL rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1006/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bits 31:0 STL: Start of transmit list This field contains the base address of the first descriptor in the transmit descriptor list. The LSB bits [1/2/3:0] for 32/64/128-bit bus width) are internally ignored and taken as allzero by the DMA. Hence these LSB bits are read-only.

Ethernet DMA status register (ETH_DMASR)

Address offset: 0x1014 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Status register contains all the status bits that the DMA reports to the application. The ETH_DMASR register is usually read by the software driver during an interrupt service routine or polling. Most of the fields in this register cause the host to be interrupted. The ETH_DMASR register bits are not cleared when read. Writing 1 to (unreserved) bits in ETH_DMASR register[16:0] clears them and writing 0 has no effect. Each field (bits [16:0]) can be masked by masking the appropriate bit in the ETH_DMAIER register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MMCS PMTS FBES TSTS RPS ERS EBS TPS ETS NIS AIS Reserved Reserved Reserved 9 RWTS 8 RPSS 7 RBUS 6 RS 5 TUS 4 ROS 3 TJTS 2 TBUS 1 TPSS 0 TS

rc- rc- rc- rcw1 w1 w1 w1

rc- rc- rc- rc- rc- rc- rc- rc- rc- rc- rcw1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 29 TSTS: Time stamp trigger status This bit indicates an interrupt event in the MAC core's Time stamp generator block. The software must read the MAC cores status register, clearing its source (bit 9), to reset this bit to 0. When this bit is high an interrupt is generated if enabled. Bit 28 PMTS: PMT status This bit indicates an event in the MAC cores PMT. The software must read the corresponding registers in the MAC core to get the exact cause of interrupt and clear its source to reset this bit to 0. The interrupt is generated when this bit is high if enabled. Bit 27 MMCS: MMC status This bit reflects an event in the MMC of the MAC core. The software must read the corresponding registers in the MAC core to get the exact cause of interrupt and clear the source of interrupt to make this bit as 0. The interrupt is generated when this bit is high if enabled. Bit 26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 25:23 EBS: Error bits status These bits indicate the type of error that caused a bus error (error response on the AHB interface). Valid only with the fatal bus error bit (ETH_DMASR register [13]) set. This field does not generate an interrupt. Bit 23 1 Error during data transfer by TxDMA 0 Error during data transfer by RxDMA Bit 24 1 Error during read transfer 0 Error during write transfer Bit 25 1 Error during descriptor access 0 Error during data buffer access

1007/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 22:20 TPS: Transmit process state These bits indicate the Transmit DMA FSM state. This field does not generate an interrupt. 000: Stopped; Reset or Stop Transmit Command issued 001: Running; Fetching transmit transfer descriptor 010: Running; Waiting for status 011: Running; Reading Data from host memory buffer and queuing it to transmit buffer (Tx FIFO) 100, 101: Reserved for future use 110: Suspended; Transmit descriptor unavailable or transmit buffer underflow 111: Running; Closing transmit descriptor Bits 19:17 RPS: Receive process state These bits indicate the Receive DMA FSM state. This field does not generate an interrupt. 000: Stopped: Reset or Stop Receive Command issued 001: Running: Fetching receive transfer descriptor 010: Reserved for future use 011: Running: Waiting for receive packet 100: Suspended: Receive descriptor unavailable 101: Running: Closing receive descriptor 110: Reserved for future use 111: Running: Transferring the receive packet data from receive buffer to host memory Bit 16 NIS: Normal interrupt summary The normal interrupt summary bit value is the logical OR of the following when the corresponding interrupt bits are enabled in the ETH_DMAIER register: ETH_DMASR [0]: Transmit interrupt ETH_DMASR [2]: Transmit buffer unavailable ETH_DMASR [6]: Receive interrupt ETH_DMASR [14]: Early receive interrupt Only unmasked bits affect the normal interrupt summary bit. This is a sticky bit and it must be cleared (by writing a 1 to this bit) each time a corresponding bit that causes NIS to be set is cleared. Bit 15 AIS: Abnormal interrupt summary The abnormal interrupt summary bit value is the logical OR of the following when the corresponding interrupt bits are enabled in the ETH_DMAIER register: ETH_DMASR [1]:Transmit process stopped ETH_DMASR [3]:Transmit jabber timeout ETH_DMASR [4]: Receive FIFO overflow ETH_DMASR [5]: Transmit underflow ETH_DMASR [7]: Receive buffer unavailable ETH_DMASR [8]: Receive process stopped ETH_DMASR [9]: Receive watchdog timeout ETH_DMASR [10]: Early transmit interrupt ETH_DMASR [13]: Fatal bus error Only unmasked bits affect the abnormal interrupt summary bit. This is a sticky bit and it must be cleared each time a corresponding bit that causes AIS to be set is cleared. Bit 14 ERS: Early receive status This bit indicates that the DMA had filled the first data buffer of the packet. Receive Interrupt ETH_DMASR [6] automatically clears this bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1008/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bit 13 FBES: Fatal bus error status This bit indicates that a bus error occurred, as detailed in [25:23]. When this bit is set, the corresponding DMA engine disables all its bus accesses. Bits 12:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 10 ETS: Early transmit status This bit indicates that the frame to be transmitted was fully transferred to the Transmit FIFO. Bit 9 RWTS: Receive watchdog timeout status This bit is asserted when a frame with a length greater than 2 048 bytes is received.

Bit 8 RPSS: Receive process stopped status This bit is asserted when the receive process enters the Stopped state. Bit 7 RBUS: Receive buffer unavailable status This bit indicates that the next descriptor in the receive list is owned by the host and cannot be acquired by the DMA. Receive process is suspended. To resume processing receive descriptors, the host should change the ownership of the descriptor and issue a Receive Poll Demand command. If no Receive Poll Demand is issued, receive process resumes when the next recognized incoming frame is received. ETH_DMASR [7] is set only when the previous receive descriptor was owned by the DMA. Bit 6 RS: Receive status This bit indicates the completion of the frame reception. Specific frame status information has been posted in the descriptor. Reception remains in the Running state. Bit 5 TUS: Transmit underflow status This bit indicates that the transmit buffer had an underflow during frame transmission. Transmission is suspended and an underflow error TDES0[1] is set. Bit 4 ROS: Receive overflow status This bit indicates that the receive buffer had an overflow during frame reception. If the partial frame is transferred to the application, the overflow status is set in RDES0[11]. Bit 3 TJTS: Transmit jabber timeout status This bit indicates that the transmit jabber timer expired, meaning that the transmitter had been excessively active. The transmission process is aborted and placed in the Stopped state. This causes the transmit jabber timeout TDES0[14] flag to be asserted. Bit 2 TBUS: Transmit buffer unavailable status This bit indicates that the next descriptor in the transmit list is owned by the host and cannot be acquired by the DMA. Transmission is suspended. Bits [22:20] explain the transmit process state transitions. To resume processing transmit descriptors, the host should change the ownership of the bit of the descriptor and then issue a Transmit Poll Demand command. Bit 1 TPSS: Transmit process stopped status This bit is set when the transmission is stopped. Bit 0 TS: Transmit status This bit indicates that frame transmission is finished and TDES1[31] is set in the first descriptor.

Ethernet DMA operation mode register (ETH_DMAOMR)

Address offset: 0x1018 Reset value: 0x0000 0000

1009/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller The operation mode register establishes the Transmit and Receive operating modes and commands. The ETH_DMAOMR register should be the last CSR to be written as part of DMA initialization.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DTCEFD DFRF Reserved RSF TTC TSF FTF ST

7 FEF

6 FUGF

5 Reserved

4 RTC

2 OSF

1 SR rw

0 Reserved

Reserved

Reserved rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 DTCEFD: Dropping of TCP/IP checksum error frames disable When this bit is set, the core does not drop frames that only have errors detected by the receive checksum offload engine. Such frames do not have any errors (including FCS error) in the Ethernet frame received by the MAC but have errors in the encapsulated payload only. When this bit is cleared, all error frames are dropped if the FEF bit is reset. Bit 25 RSF: Receive store and forward When this bit is set, a frame is read from the Rx FIFO after the complete frame has been written to it, ignoring RTC bits. When this bit is cleared, the Rx FIFO operates in Cut-through mode, subject to the threshold specified by the RTC bits. Bit 24 DFRF: Disable flushing of received frames When this bit is set, the RxDMA does not flush any frames due to the unavailability of receive descriptors/buffers as it does normally when this bit is cleared. (See Receive process suspended on page 960) Bits 23:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 TSF: Transmit store and forward When this bit is set, transmission starts when a full frame resides in the Transmit FIFO. When this bit is set, the TTC values specified by the ETH_DMAOMR register bits [16:14] are ignored. When this bit is cleared, the TTC values specified by the ETH_DMAOMR register bits [16:14] are taken into account. This bit should be changed only when transmission is stopped. Bit 20 FTF: Flush transmit FIFO When this bit is set, the transmit FIFO controller logic is reset to its default values and thus all data in the Tx FIFO are lost/flushed. This bit is cleared internally when the flushing operation is complete. The Operation mode register should not be written to until this bit is cleared. Bits 19:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1010/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Bits 16:14 TTC: Transmit threshold control These three bits control the threshold level of the Transmit FIFO. Transmission starts when the frame size within the Transmit FIFO is larger than the threshold. In addition, full frames with a length less than the threshold are also transmitted. These bits are used only when the TSF bit (Bit 21) is cleared. 000: 64 001: 128 010: 192 011: 256 100: 40 101: 32 110: 24 111: 16 Bit 13 ST: Start/stop transmission When this bit is set, transmission is placed in the Running state, and the DMA checks the transmit list at the current position for a frame to be transmitted. Descriptor acquisition is attempted either from the current position in the list, which is the transmit list base address set by the ETH_DMATDLAR register, or from the position retained when transmission was stopped previously. If the current descriptor is not owned by the DMA, transmission enters the Suspended state and the transmit buffer unavailable bit (ETH_DMASR [2]) is set. The Start Transmission command is effective only when transmission is stopped. If the command is issued before setting the DMA ETH_DMATDLAR register, the DMA behavior is unpredictable. When this bit is cleared, the transmission process is placed in the Stopped state after completing the transmission of the current frame. The next descriptor position in the transmit list is saved, and becomes the current position when transmission is restarted. The Stop Transmission command is effective only when the transmission of the current frame is complete or when the transmission is in the Suspended state. Bits 12:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 FEF: Forward error frames When this bit is set, all frames except runt error frames are forwarded to the DMA. When this bit is cleared, the Rx FIFO drops frames with error status (CRC error, collision error, giant frame, watchdog timeout, overflow). However, if the frames start byte (write) pointer is already transferred to the read controller side (in Threshold mode), then the frames are not dropped. The Rx FIFO drops the error frames if that frame's start byte is not transferred (output) on the ARI bus. Bit 6 FUGF: Forward undersized good frames When this bit is set, the Rx FIFO forwards undersized frames (frames with no error and length less than 64 bytes) including pad-bytes and CRC). When this bit is cleared, the Rx FIFO drops all frames of less than 64 bytes, unless such a frame has already been transferred due to lower value of receive threshold (e.g., RTC = 01). Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1011/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bits 4:3 RTC: Receive threshold control These two bits control the threshold level of the Receive FIFO. Transfer (request) to DMA starts when the frame size within the Receive FIFO is larger than the threshold. In addition, full frames with a length less than the threshold are transferred automatically. Note: Note that value of 11 is not applicable if the configured Receive FIFO size is 128 bytes. Note: These bits are valid only when the RSF bit is zero, and are ignored when the RSF bit is set to 1. 00: 64 01: 32 10: 96 11: 128 Bit 2 OSF: Operate on second frame When this bit is set, this bit instructs the DMA to process a second frame of Transmit data even before status for first frame is obtained. Bit 1 SR: Start/stop receive When this bit is set, the receive process is placed in the Running state. The DMA attempts to acquire the descriptor from the receive list and processes incoming frames. Descriptor acquisition is attempted from the current position in the list, which is the address set by the DMA ETH_DMARDLAR register or the position retained when the receive process was previously stopped. If no descriptor is owned by the DMA, reception is suspended and the receive buffer unavailable bit (ETH_DMASR [7]) is set. The Start Receive command is effective only when reception has stopped. If the command was issued before setting the DMA ETH_DMARDLAR register, the DMA behavior is unpredictable. When this bit is cleared, RxDMA operation is stopped after the transfer of the current frame. The next descriptor position in the receive list is saved and becomes the current position when the receive process is restarted. The Stop Receive command is effective only when the Receive process is in either the Running (waiting for receive packet) or the Suspended state. Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1012/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet DMA interrupt enable register (ETH_DMAIER)

Address offset: 0x101C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Interrupt enable register enables the interrupts reported by ETH_DMASR. Setting a bit to 1 enables a corresponding interrupt. After a hardware or software reset, all interrupts are disabled.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FBEIE Reserved ERIE NISE AISE ETIE 9 RWTIE 8 RPSIE 7 RBUIE 6 RIE 5 TUIE 4 ROIE 3 TJTIE 2 TBUIE 1 TPSIE rw 0 TIE rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 16 NISE: Normal interrupt summary enable When this bit is set, a normal interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, a normal interrupt is disabled. This bit enables the following bits: ETH_DMASR [0]: Transmit Interrupt ETH_DMASR [2]: Transmit buffer unavailable ETH_DMASR [6]: Receive interrupt ETH_DMASR [14]: Early receive interrupt Bit 15 AISE: Abnormal interrupt summary enable When this bit is set, an abnormal interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, an abnormal interrupt is disabled. This bit enables the following bits: ETH_DMASR [1]: Transmit process stopped ETH_DMASR [3]: Transmit jabber timeout ETH_DMASR [4]: Receive overflow ETH_DMASR [5]: Transmit underflow ETH_DMASR [7]: Receive buffer unavailable ETH_DMASR [8]: Receive process stopped ETH_DMASR [9]: Receive watchdog timeout ETH_DMASR [10]: Early transmit interrupt ETH_DMASR [13]: Fatal bus error Bit 14 ERIE: Early receive interrupt enable When this bit is set with the normal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[16]), the early receive interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the early receive interrupt is disabled. Bit 13 FBEIE: Fatal bus error interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the fatal bus error interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the fatal bus error enable interrupt is disabled. Bits 12:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 10 ETIE: Early transmit interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register [15]), the early transmit interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the early transmit interrupt is disabled.

1013/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Bit 9 RWTIE: receive watchdog timeout interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the receive watchdog timeout interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the receive watchdog timeout interrupt is disabled. Bit 8 RPSIE: Receive process stopped interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the receive stopped interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the receive stopped interrupt is disabled. Bit 7 RBUIE: Receive buffer unavailable interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the receive buffer unavailable interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the receive buffer unavailable interrupt is disabled. Bit 6 RIE: Receive interrupt enable When this bit is set with the normal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[16]), the receive interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the receive interrupt is disabled. Bit 5 TUIE: Underflow interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the transmit underflow interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the underflow interrupt is disabled. Bit 4 ROIE: Overflow interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the receive overflow interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the overflow interrupt is disabled.

Bit 3 TJTIE: Transmit jabber timeout interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the transmit jabber timeout interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the transmit jabber timeout interrupt is disabled. Bit 2 TBUIE: Transmit buffer unavailable interrupt enable When this bit is set with the normal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[16]), the transmit buffer unavailable interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the transmit buffer unavailable interrupt is disabled. Bit 1 TPSIE: Transmit process stopped interrupt enable When this bit is set with the abnormal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[15]), the transmission stopped interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the transmission stopped interrupt is disabled. Bit 0 TIE: Transmit interrupt enable When this bit is set with the normal interrupt summary enable bit (ETH_DMAIER register[16]), the transmit interrupt is enabled. When this bit is cleared, the transmit interrupt is disabled.

The Ethernet interrupt is generated only when the TSTS or PMTS bits of the DMA Status register is asserted with their corresponding interrupt are unmasked, or when the NIS/AIS Status bit is asserted and the corresponding Interrupt Enable bits (NISE/AISE) are enabled.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1014/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet DMA missed frame and buffer overflow counter register (ETH_DMAMFBOCR)
Address offset: 0x1020 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The DMA maintains two counters to track the number of missed frames during reception. This register reports the current value of the counter. The counter is used for diagnostic purposes. Bits [15:0] indicate missed frames due to the STM32F4xx buffer being unavailable (no receive descriptor was available). Bits [27:17] indicate missed frames due to Rx FIFO overflow conditions and runt frames (good frames of less than 64 bytes).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OMFC OFOC MFA 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MFC

Reserved

rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 28 OFOC: Overflow bit for FIFO overflow counter Bits 27:17 MFA: Missed frames by the application Indicates the number of frames missed by the application Bit 16 OMFC: Overflow bit for missed frame counter Bits 15:0 MFC: Missed frames by the controller Indicates the number of frames missed by the Controller due to the host receive buffer being unavailable. This counter is incremented each time the DMA discards an incoming frame.

Ethernet DMA receive status watchdog timer register (ETH_DMARSWTR)

Address offset: 0x1024 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register, when written with a non-zero value, enables the watchdog timer for the receive status (RS, ETH_DMASR[6]).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RSWTC

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:0 RSWTC: Receive status (RS) watchdog timer count Indicates the number of HCLK clock cycles multiplied by 256 for which the watchdog timer is set. The watchdog timer gets triggered with the programmed value after the RxDMA completes the transfer of a frame for which the RS status bit is not set due to the setting of RDES1[31] in the corresponding descriptor. When the watchdog timer runs out, the RS bit is set and the timer is stopped. The watchdog timer is reset when the RS bit is set high due to automatic setting of RS as per RDES1[31] of any received frame.

1015/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Ethernet DMA current host transmit descriptor register (ETH_DMACHTDR)

Address offset: 0x1048 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Current host transmit descriptor register points to the start address of the current transmit descriptor read by the DMA.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HTDAP r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 HTDAP: Host transmit descriptor address pointer Cleared on reset. Pointer updated by DMA during operation.

Ethernet DMA current host receive descriptor register (ETH_DMACHRDR)

Address offset: 0x104C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Current host receive descriptor register points to the start address of the current receive descriptor read by the DMA.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HRDAP r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 HRDAP: Host receive descriptor address pointer Cleared on Reset. Pointer updated by DMA during operation.

Ethernet DMA current host transmit buffer address register (ETH_DMACHTBAR)

Address offset: 0x1050 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The Current host transmit buffer address register points to the current transmit buffer address being read by the DMA.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HTBAP r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 HTBAP: Host transmit buffer address pointer Cleared on reset. Pointer updated by DMA during operation.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1016/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

RM0090

Ethernet DMA current host receive buffer address register (ETH_DMACHRBAR)

Address offset: 0x1054 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The current host receive buffer address register points to the current receive buffer address being read by the DMA.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HRBAP r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 HRBAP: Host receive buffer address pointer Cleared on reset. Pointer updated by DMA during operation.

29.8.5

Ethernet register maps

Table 170 gives the ETH register map and reset values.

Table 170. Ethernet register map and reset values

Offset Register
0x00 ETH_MACCR Reset value ETH_MACFF R Reset value ETH_MACHT HR Reset value ETH_MACHT LR Reset value ETH_MACMII AR Reset value ETH_MACMII DR Reset value ETH_MACFC R Reset value ETH_MACVL ANTR Reset value ETH_MACRW UFFR Reset value WFFRPR ETH_MACPM TCSR Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CSTF eserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 TFCE 0 0 MPE 0 PD 0 FCB/BPA 0 0 PM 0 0 0 M B 0 0 HU APCS IPCO ROD CSD FES

WD

DM

RD

DC 0 0 PAM

Reserved

IFG 0 0 0

0 RA 0

0 HPF

0 SAF

0 PCF

0 DAIF 0 0 0 0 0 UPFD 0 0 Reserved

BFD

0x04

Reserved HTH[31:0]

0x08

0x0C

HTL[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PA 0 Reserved 0 PT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VLANTC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CR 0 0 ZQPD 0 Reserved 0 0 PLT 0 0 0 VLANTI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WFR MPR 0 0 0 M W 0 0 0

0x10

Reserved

0x14

MD 0 0 RFCE 0 WFE 0

0x18

Reserved

0x1C

Reserved

0x28

Frame filter reg0\Frame filter reg1\Frame filter reg2\Frame filter reg3\Frame filter reg4\...\Frame filter reg7 0 Reserved GU

0x2C

Reserved

1017/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

HM 0 0

RE 0

LM

TE

JD

BL

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Table 170. Ethernet register map and reset values (continued)

Offset Register
ETH_MACDB GR Reset value 0x38 ETH_MACSR Reset value 0x3C ETH_MACIM R Reset value ETH_MACA0 HR Reset value ETH_MACA0 LR Reset value ETH_MACA1 HR Reset value ETH_MACA1 LR Reset value ETH_MACA2 HR Reset value ETH_MACA2 LR Reset value ETH_MACA3 HR Reset value ETH_MACA3 LR Reset value ETH_MMCCR Reset value RGUFS 0x104 ETH_MMCRI R Reset value ETH_MMCTI R Reset value 0x10C ETH_MMCRI MR Reset value ETH_MMCTI MR TGFM Reserved TGFS Reserved Reserved TGFMSCS RFAES Reserved MO MSFRWCS 0 PMTS 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROR 1 CSR 0 0 0 0 0 0 MMRPEA 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CR 0 0 0 TFNEGU RFWRA 0 MMCRS 0 MMCS MMTEA MTFCS RFRCS

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0x34

Reserved 0 Reserved

0 Reserved

0 MMCTS

TSTS

Reserved 0 PMTIM 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MCF 0 0 0

TFWA

TFRS

RFFL

MTP

TFF

TSTIM

0x40

0x44

0x48

AE SA 0 0 0 0

0x4C

0x50

AE SA 0 0 0 0

0x54

0x58

AE SA 0 0 0 0

0x5C

MCFHP

0x100

Reserved

0 RFCES

MCP

0x108

Reserved

Reserved

TGFSCS

RGUFM

Reserved TGFMSCM

RFCEM

RFAEM

0x110

Reserved

Reserved

TGFSCM

Reset value ETH_MMCTG FSCCR 0x14C Reset value 0 ETH_MMCTG FMSCCR 0x150 Reset value 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MACA0H 1 1 1 1 1 1 MACA0L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MBC[6:0] 0 0 0 0 Reserved 1 MACA1L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MACA1H 1 1 1 1 1 MBC 0 0 0 0 Reserved 1 MACA2L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MACA2H 1 1 1 1 1 MBC 0 0 0 0 Reserved 1 MACA3L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MACA3H 1 1 1 1 1 0 Reserved 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 TGFSCC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TGFMSCC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1018/1422

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller Table 170. Ethernet register map and reset values (continued)
Offset Register
ETH_MMCTG FCR Reset value ETH_MMCRF CECR 0x194 Reset value ETH_MMCRF AECR 0x198 Reset value ETH_MMCR GUFCR 0x1C4 Reset value 0x168

RM0090

TSSPTPOEFE

TSPTPPSV2E

TSSIPV4FE

TSSIPV6FE

TSPFFMAE

TSSMRME

TSSARFE

TSSEME

TTSARU

TSSSR

TSCNT

Reserved

0x700

Reserved

0x704

0x708

Reset value ETH_PTPSSI R Reset value ETH_PTPTS HR Reset value 0 STPNS

0 Reserved

STSSI 0 STS[31:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 STSS

ETH_PTPTSL R 0x70C Reset value ETH_PTPTS HUR Reset value ETH_PTPTSL UR

0x710

TSUS 0 TSUPNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x714

TSUSS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reset value ETH_PTPTS AR 0x718 Reset value ETH_PTPTT HR 0x71C Reset value ETH_PTPTTL R 0x720 Reset value 0x728 ETH_PTPTS SR Reset value

TSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TTSH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TTSL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TSTTR 0 EDFE FPM USP AAB MB Reserved RDP 0 0 0 0 0 1 PM 0 0 0 0 PBL 0 0 0 1 DSL 0 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TJTS 0 TBUS 0 TPSS 0 0 0 FB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AIS 0 ERS 0 FBES 0 Reserved 0 0 ETS 0 RWTS 0 RPSS 0 RBUS 0 RS 0 TUS 0 ROS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TSSO 0 SR 1 0 0 0 0 TS 0

Reserved

ETH_DMABM R 0x1000 Reset value ETH_DMATP DR Reset value ETH_DMARP DR Reset value ETH_DMARD LAR Reset value ETH_DMATD LAR Reset value ETH_DMASR Reset value

0x1004

TPD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x1008

RPD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x100C

SRL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x1010

STL 0 Reserved 0 0 TSTS 0 PMTS 0 MMCS 0 Reserved 0 0 EBS 0 0 0 TPS 0 0 0 RPS 0 0 NIS

0x1014

1019/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

TSE 0 0 0

ETH_PTPTS CR

TSFCU

TSSTU

TSSTI

TSITE

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TGFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RFCEC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RFAEC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RGUFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RM0090

Ethernet (ETH): media access control (MAC) with DMA controller

Table 170. Ethernet register map and reset values (continued)

Offset Register
0x1018 ETH_DMAOM R Reset value 0x101C ETH_DMAIE R Reset value ETH_DMAMF BOCR Reserved 0x1020 Reset value ETH_DMARS WTR Reset value ETH_DMACH TDR Reset value ETH_DMACH RDR Reset value ETH_DMACH TBAR Reset value ETH_DMACH RBAR Reset value OFOC MFA DTCEFD Reserved Reserved Reserved TIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FUGF DFRF

OSF 0 0 TBUIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RTC

RSF

TTC

TSF

FEF

FTF

Reserved

Reserved 0 NISE

Reserved

0 AISE

0 ERIE

0 RWTIE Reserved RPSIE FBEIE ETIE

0 RBUIE

0 RIE

0 ROIE

Reserved

0 OMFC

MFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x1024

Reserved 0 HTDAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RSWTC 0 0

0x1048

0x104C

HRDAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x1050

HTBAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x1054

HRBAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1020/1422

TPSIE 0 0

TJTIE

TUIE

SR 0

ST

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

30

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

30.1

OTG_FS introduction
Portions Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Synopsys, Inc. All rights reserved. Used with permission. This section presents the architecture and the programming model of the OTG_FS controller. The following acronyms are used throughout the section: FS LS MAC OTG PFC PHY USB UTMI full-speed Low-speed Media access controller On-the-go Packet FIFO controller Physical layer Universal serial bus USB 2.0 transceiver macrocell interface (UTMI)

References are made to the following documents:

USB On-The-Go Supplement, Revision 1.3 Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0 Specification

The OTG_FS is a dual-role device (DRD) controller that supports both device and host functions and is fully compliant with the On-The-Go Supplement to the USB 2.0 Specification. It can also be configured as a host-only or device-only controller, fully compliant with the USB 2.0 Specification. In host mode, the OTG_FS supports full-speed (FS, 12 Mbits/s) and low-speed (LS, 1.5 Mbits/s) transfers whereas in device mode, it only supports full-speed (FS, 12 Mbits/s) transfers. The OTG_FS supports both HNP and SRP. The only external device required is a charge pump for VBUS in host mode.

1021/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

30.2

OTG_FS main features

The main features can be divided into three categories: general, host-mode and devicemode features.

30.2.1

General features
The OTG_FS interface general features are the following:

It is USB-IF certified to the Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev 2.0 It includes full support (PHY) for the optional On-The-Go (OTG) protocol detailed in the On-The-Go Supplement Rev 1.3 specification Integrated support for A-B Device Identification (ID line) Integrated support for host Negotiation Protocol (HNP) and Session Request Protocol (SRP) It allows host to turn VBUS off to conserve battery power in OTG applications It supports OTG monitoring of VBUS levels with internal comparators It supports dynamic host-peripheral switch of role SRP capable USB FS Peripheral (B-device) SRP capable USB FS/LS host (A-device) USB On-The-Go Full-Speed Dual Role device SOF pulse PAD connectivity SOF pulse internal connection to timer2 (TIM2) Configurable framing period Configurable end of frame interrupt

It is software-configurable to operate as:

It supports FS SOF and LS Keep-alives with

It includes power saving features such as system stop during USB Suspend, switch-off of clock domains internal to the digital core, PHY and DFIFO power management It features a dedicated RAM of 1.25 Kbytes with advanced FIFO control: Configurable partitioning of RAM space into different FIFOs for flexible and efficient use of RAM Each FIFO can hold multiple packets Dynamic memory allocation Configurable FIFO sizes that are not powers of 2 to allow the use of contiguous memory locations

It guarantees max USB bandwidth for up to one frame (1ms) without system intervention

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1022/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

30.2.2

Host-mode features
The OTG_FS interface main features and requirements in host-mode are the following:

External charge pump for VBUS voltage generation. Up to 8 host channels (pipes): each channel is dynamically reconfigurable to allocate any type of USB transfer. Built-in hardware scheduler holding: Up to 8 interrupt plus isochronous transfer requests in the periodic hardware queue Up to 8 control plus bulk transfer requests in the non-periodic hardware queue

Management of a shared RX FIFO, a periodic TX FIFO and a nonperiodic TX FIFO for efficient usage of the USB data RAM.

30.2.3

Peripheral-mode features
The OTG_FS interface main features in peripheral-mode are the following:

1 bidirectional control endpoint0 3 IN endpoints (EPs) configurable to support Bulk, Interrupt or Isochronous transfers 3 OUT endpoints configurable to support Bulk, Interrupt or Isochronous transfers Management of a shared Rx FIFO and a Tx-OUT FIFO for efficient usage of the USB data RAM Management of up to 4 dedicated Tx-IN FIFOs (one for each active IN EP) to put less load on the application Support for the soft disconnect feature.

1023/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

30.3

OTG_FS functional description

Figure 357. Block diagram

Cortex-M4F AHB Peripheral

USB Interrupt

Power& Clock CTRL

USB duspend USB Clock at 48 MHz

USB2.0 OTG FS Core

System clock domain USB clock domain

UTMIFS

OTG FS PHY

DP DM ID VBUS Universal serial bus

1.25 Kbytes USB data FIFOs

MS19928V1

30.3.1

OTG full-speed core

The USB OTG FS receives the 48 MHz 0.25% clock from the reset and clock controller (RCC), via an external quartz. The USB clock is used for driving the 48 MHz domain at fullspeed (12 Mbit/s) and must be enabled prior to configuring the OTG FS core. The CPU reads and writes from/to the OTG FS core registers through the AHB peripheral bus. It is informed of USB events through the single USB OTG interrupt line described in Section 30.15: OTG_FS interrupts. The CPU submits data over the USB by writing 32-bit words to dedicated OTG_FS locations (push registers). The data are then automatically stored into Tx-data FIFOs configured within the USB data RAM. There is one Tx-FIFO push register for each in-endpoint (peripheral mode) or out-channel (host mode). The CPU receives the data from the USB by reading 32-bit words from dedicated OTG_FS addresses (pop registers). The data are then automatically retrieved from a shared Rx-FIFO configured within the 1.25 KB USB data RAM. There is one Rx-FIFO pop register for each out-endpoint or in-channel. The USB protocol layer is driven by the serial interface engine (SIE) and serialized over the USB by the full-/low-speed transceiver module within the on-chip physical layer (PHY).

RAM bus

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1024/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

30.3.2

Full-speed OTG PHY

The embedded full-speed OTG PHY is controlled by the OTG FS core and conveys USB control & data signals through the full-speed subset of the UTMI+ Bus (UTMIFS). It provides the physical support to USB connectivity. The full-speed OTG PHY includes the following components:

FS/LS transceiver module used by both host and device. It directly drives transmission and reception on the single-ended USB lines. integrated ID pull-up resistor used to sample the ID line for A/B device identification. DP/DM integrated pull-up and pull-down resistors controlled by the OTG_FS core depending on the current role of the device. As a peripheral, it enables the DP pull-up resistor to signal full-speed peripheral connections as soon as VBUS is sensed to be at a valid level (B-session valid). In host mode, pull-down resistors are enabled on both DP/DM. Pull-up and pull-down resistors are dynamically switched when the devices role is changed via the host negotiation protocol (HNP). Pull-up/pull-down resistor ECN circuit. The DP pull-up consists of 2 resistors controlled separately from the OTG_FS as per the resistor Engineering Change Notice applied to USB Rev2.0. The dynamic trimming of the DP pull-up strength allows for better noise rejection and Tx/Rx signal quality. VBUS sensing comparators with hysteresis used to detect VBUS Valid, A-B Session Valid and session-end voltage thresholds. They are used to drive the session request protocol (SRP), detect valid startup and end-of-session conditions, and constantly monitor the VBUS supply during USB operations. VBUS pulsing method circuit used to charge/discharge VBUS through resistors during the SRP (weak drive).

Caution:

To guarantee a correct operation for the USB OTG FS peripheral, the AHB frequency should be higher than 14.2 MHz.

1025/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

30.4

OTG dual role device (DRD)

Figure 358. OTG A-B device connection
VDD 5 V to VDD
voltage regulator (1)

VDD
EN

GPIO GPIO+IRQ
Overcurrent

STMPS2141STR Current-limited power distribution (2) switch

5 V Pwr

PA9 PA11 OSC_IN PA12 PA10

VBUS DM DP ID VSS

OSC_OUT

USBmicro-AB connector

STM32F4xx STM32F4xx

MS19904V2

1. External voltage regulator only needed when building a VBUS powered device 2. STMPS2141STR needed only if the application has to support a VBUS powered device. A basic power switch can be used if 5 V are available on the application board. 3. VDD range is between 2 V and 3.6 V.

30.4.1

ID line detection
The host or peripheral (the default) role is assumed depending on the ID input pin. The ID line status is determined on plugging in the USB, depending on which side of the USB cable is connected to the micro-AB receptacle.

If the B-side of the USB cable is connected with a floating ID wire, the integrated pull-up resistor detects a high ID level and the default Peripheral role is confirmed. In this configuration the OTG_FS complies with the standard FSM described by section 6.8.2: On-The-Go B-device of the On-The-Go Specification Rev1.3 supplement to the USB2.0. If the A-side of the USB cable is connected with a grounded ID, the OTG_FS issues an ID line status change interrupt (CIDSCHG bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) for host software initialization, and automatically switches to the host role. In this configuration the OTG_FS complies with the standard FSM described by section 6.8.1: On-The-Go Adevice of the On-The-Go Specification Rev1.3 supplement to the USB2.0.

30.4.2

HNP dual role device

The HNP capable bit in the Global USB configuration register (HNPCAP bit in OTG_FS_ GUSBCFG) enables the OTG_FS core to dynamically change its role from A-host to Aperipheral and vice-versa, or from B-Peripheral to B-host and vice-versa according to the host negotiation protocol (HNP). The current device status can be read by the combined values of the Connector ID Status bit in the Global OTG control and status register (CIDSTS bit in OTG_FS_GOTGCTL) and the current mode of operation bit in the global interrupt and status register (CMOD bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1026/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

The HNP program model is described in detail in Section 30.17: OTG_FS programming model.

30.4.3

SRP dual role device

The SRP capable bit in the global USB configuration register (SRPCAP bit in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG) enables the OTG_FS core to switch off the generation of VBUS for the A-device to save power. Note that the A-device is always in charge of driving VBUS regardless of the host or peripheral role of the OTG_FS. the SRP A/B-device program model is described in detail in Section 30.17: OTG_FS programming model.

30.5

USB peripheral
This section gives the functional description of the OTG_FS in the USB peripheral mode. The OTG_FS works as an USB peripheral in the following circumstances:

OTG B-Peripheral OTG B-device default state if B-side of USB cable is plugged in OTG A-device state after the HNP switches the OTG_FS to its peripheral role If the ID line is present, functional and connected to the B-side of the USB cable, and the HNP-capable bit in the Global USB Configuration register (HNPCAP bit in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG) is cleared (see On-The-Go Rev1.3 par. 6.8.3). The force device mode bit in the Global USB configuration register (FDMOD in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG) is set to 1, forcing the OTG_FS core to work as a USB peripheral-only (see On-The-Go Rev1.3 par. 6.8.3). In this case, the ID line is ignored even if present on the USB connector. OTG A-Peripheral B-device

Peripheral only (see Figure 359: USB peripheral-only connection)

Note:

To build a bus-powered device implementation in case of the B-device or peripheral-only configuration, an external regulator has to be added that generates the VDD chip-supply from VBUS. The VBUS pin can be freed by disabling the VBUS sensing option. This is done by setting the NOVBUSSENS bit in the OTG_FS_GCCFG register. In this case the VBUS is considered internally to be always at VBUS valid level (5 V).

1027/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 359. USB peripheral-only connection

VDD

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

5V to VDD
Volatge regulator (1)

STM32F4xx STM32F4xx PA9

DM

OSC_IN

PA11
DP

PA12
VSS

OSC_OUT

USB Std-B connector

MS19905V2

VBUS

1. Use a regulator to build a bus-powered device. 2. VDD range between 2 V and 3.6 V.

30.5.1

SRP-capable peripheral
The SRP capable bit in the Global USB configuration register (SRPCAP bit in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG) enables the OTG_FS to support the session request protocol (SRP). In this way, it allows the remote A-device to save power by switching off VBUS while the USB session is suspended. The SRP peripheral mode program model is described in detail in the B-device session request protocol section.

30.5.2

Peripheral states
Powered state
The VBUS input detects the B-Session valid voltage by which the USB peripheral is allowed to enter the powered state (see USB2.0 par9.1). The OTG_FS then automatically connects the DP pull-up resistor to signal full-speed device connection to the host and generates the session request interrupt (SRQINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) to notify the powered state. The VBUS input also ensures that valid VBUS levels are supplied by the host during USB operations. If a drop in VBUS below B-session valid happens to be detected (for instance because of a power disturbance or if the host port has been switched off), the OTG_FS automatically disconnects and the session end detected (SEDET bit in OTG_FS_GOTGINT) interrupt is generated to notify that the OTG_FS has exited the powered state. In the powered state, the OTG_FS expects to receive some reset signaling from the host. No other USB operation is possible. When a reset signaling is received the reset detected interrupt (USBRST in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is generated. When the reset signaling is complete, the enumeration done interrupt (ENUMDNE bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is generated and the OTG_FS enters the Default state.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1028/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Soft disconnect
The powered state can be exited by software with the soft disconnect feature. The DP pullup resistor is removed by setting the soft disconnect bit in the device control register (SDIS bit in OTG_FS_DCTL), causing a device disconnect detection interrupt on the host side even though the USB cable was not really removed from the host port.

Default state
In the Default state the OTG_FS expects to receive a SET_ADDRESS command from the host. No other USB operation is possible. When a valid SET_ADDRESS command is decoded on the USB, the application writes the corresponding number into the device address field in the device configuration register (DAD bit in OTG_FS_DCFG). The OTG_FS then enters the address state and is ready to answer host transactions at the configured USB address.

Suspended state
The OTG_FS peripheral constantly monitors the USB activity. After counting 3 ms of USB idleness, the early suspend interrupt (ESUSP bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is issued, and confirmed 3 ms later, if appropriate, by the suspend interrupt (USBSUSP bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). The device suspend bit is then automatically set in the device status register (SUSPSTS bit in OTG_FS_DSTS) and the OTG_FS enters the suspended state. The suspended state may optionally be exited by the device itself. In this case the application sets the remote wakeup signaling bit in the device control register (RWUSIG bit in OTG_FS_DCTL) and clears it after 1 to 15 ms. When a resume signaling is detected from the host, the resume interrupt (WKUPINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is generated and the device suspend bit is automatically cleared.

30.5.3

Peripheral endpoints
The OTG_FS core instantiates the following USB endpoints:

Control endpoint 0: Bidirectional and handles control messages only Separate set of registers to handle in and out transactions Proper control (OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0/OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0), transfer configuration (OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZ0/OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZ0), and status-interrupt (OTG_FS_DIEPINTx/)OTG_FS_DOEPINT0) registers. The available set of bits inside the control and transfer size registers slightly differs from that of other endpoints Each of them can be configured to support the isochronous, bulk or interrupt transfer type Each of them has proper control (OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx), transfer configuration (OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx), and status-interrupt (OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) registers The Device IN endpoints common interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DIEPMSK) is available to enable/disable a single kind of endpoint interrupt source on all of the IN endpoints (EP0 included) Support for incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS), asserted when there is at least one isochronous IN endpoint

3 IN endpoints

1029/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) on which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the end of periodic frame interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS/EOPF).

3 OUT endpoints Each of them can be configured to support the isochronous, bulk or interrupt transfer type Each of them has a proper control (OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx), transfer configuration (OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) and status-interrupt (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) register Device Out endpoints common interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DOEPMSK) is available to enable/disable a single kind of endpoint interrupt source on all of the OUT endpoints (EP0 included) Support for incomplete isochronous OUT transfer interrupt (INCOMPISOOUT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS), asserted when there is at least one isochronous OUT endpoint on which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the end of periodic frame interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS/EOPF).

Endpoint control

The following endpoint controls are available to the application through the device endpoint-x IN/OUT control register (DIEPCTLx/DOEPCTLx): Endpoint enable/disable Endpoint activate in current configuration Program USB transfer type (isochronous, bulk, interrupt) Program supported packet size Program Tx-FIFO number associated with the IN endpoint Program the expected or transmitted data0/data1 PID (bulk/interrupt only) Program the even/odd frame during which the transaction is received or transmitted (isochronous only) Optionally program the NAK bit to always negative-acknowledge the host regardless of the FIFO status Optionally program the STALL bit to always stall host tokens to that endpoint Optionally program the SNOOP mode for OUT endpoint not to check the CRC field of received data

Endpoint transfer
The device endpoint-x transfer size registers (DIEPTSIZx/DOEPTSIZx) allow the application to program the transfer size parameters and read the transfer status. Programming must be done before setting the endpoint enable bit in the endpoint control register. Once the endpoint is enabled, these fields are read-only as the OTG FS core updates them with the current transfer status. The following transfer parameters can be programmed:

Transfer size in bytes Number of packets that constitute the overall transfer size

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1030/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Endpoint status/interrupt
The device endpoint-x interrupt registers (DIEPINTx/DOPEPINTx) indicate the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. The application must read these registers when the OUT endpoint interrupt bit or the IN endpoint interrupt bit in the core interrupt register (OEPINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS or IEPINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS, respectively) is set. Before the application can read these registers, it must first read the device all endpoints interrupt (OTG_FS_DAINT) register to get the exact endpoint number for the device endpoint-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the DAINT and GINTSTS registers The peripheral core provides the following status checks and interrupt generation:

Transfer completed interrupt, indicating that data transfer was completed on both the application (AHB) and USB sides Setup stage has been done (control-out only) Associated transmit FIFO is half or completely empty (in endpoints) NAK acknowledge has been transmitted to the host (isochronous-in only) IN token received when Tx-FIFO was empty (bulk-in/interrupt-in only) Out token received when endpoint was not yet enabled Babble error condition has been detected Endpoint disable by application is effective Endpoint NAK by application is effective (isochronous-in only) More than 3 back-to-back setup packets were received (control-out only) Timeout condition detected (control-in only) Isochronous out packet has been dropped, without generating an interrupt

30.6

USB host
This section gives the functional description of the OTG_FS in the USB host mode. The OTG_FS works as a USB host in the following circumstances:

OTG A-host OTG A-device default state when the A-side of the USB cable is plugged in OTG B-device after HNP switching to the host role If the ID line is present, functional and connected to the A-side of the USB cable, and the HNP-capable bit is cleared in the Global USB Configuration register (HNPCAP bit in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG). Integrated pull-down resistors are automatically set on the DP/DM lines. The force host mode bit in the global USB configuration register (FHMOD bit in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG) forces the OTG_FS core to work as a USB host-only. In this case, the ID line is ignored even if present on the USB connector. Integrated pulldown resistors are automatically set on the DP/DM lines. OTG B-host A-device

Host only (see figure Figure 360: USB host-only connection).

Note:

On-chip 5 V VBUS generation is not supported. For this reason, a charge pump or, if 5 V are available on the application board, a basic power switch must be added externally to drive

1031/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) the 5 V VBUS line. The external charge pump can be driven by any GPIO output. This is required for the OTG A-host, A-device and host-only configurations. The VBUS input ensures that valid VBUS levels are supplied by the charge pump during USB operations while the charge pump overcurrent output can be input to any GPIO pin configured to generate port interrupts. The overcurrent ISR must promptly disable the VBUS generation. The VBUS pin can be freed by disabling the VBUS sensing option. This is done by setting the NOVBUSSENS bit in the OTG_FS_GCCFG register. In this case the VBUS is considered internally to be always at VBUS valid level (5 V). Figure 360. USB host-only connection
VDD
EN

GPIO GPIO+IRQ
Overcurrent

STMPS2141STR
Current limited power distribution switch (1) 5 V Pwr

P 9 OSC_IN PA11 PA12 OSC_OUT

DM DP VSS

USB Std-A connector

MS19906V3

STM32F4xx STM32F4xx

VBUS

1. STMPS2141STR needed only if the application has to support a VBUS powered device. A basic power switch can be used if 5 V are available on the application board. 2. VDD range is between 2 V and 3.6 V.

30.6.1

SRP-capable host
SRP support is available through the SRP capable bit in the global USB configuration register (SRPCAP bit in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG). With the SRP feature enabled, the host can save power by switching off the VBUS power while the USB session is suspended. The SRP host mode program model is described in detail in the A-device session request protocol) section.

30.6.2

USB host states

Host port power
On-chip 5 V VBUS generation is not supported. For this reason, a charge pump or, if 5 V are available on the application board, a basic power switch, must be added externally to drive the 5 V VBUS line. The external charge pump can be driven by any GPIO output. When the application decides to power on VBUS using the chosen GPIO, it must also set the port power bit in the host port control and status register (PPWR bit in OTG_FS_HPRT).

VBUS valid
When HNP or SRP is enabled the VBUS sensing pin (PA9) pin should be connected to VBUS. The VBUS input ensures that valid VBUS levels are supplied by the charge pump

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1032/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

during USB operations. Any unforeseen VBUS voltage drop below the VBUS valid threshold (4.25 V) leads to an OTG interrupt triggered by the session end detected bit (SEDET bit in OTG_FS_GOTGINT). The application is then required to remove the VBUS power and clear the port power bit. When HNP and SRP are both disabled, the VBUS sensing pin (PA9) should not be connected to VBUS. This pin can be can be used as GPIO. The charge pump overcurrent flag can also be used to prevent electrical damage. Connect the overcurrent flag output from the charge pump to any GPIO input and configure it to generate a port interrupt on the active level. The overcurrent ISR must promptly disable the VBUS generation and clear the port power bit.

Host detection of a peripheral connection

If SRP or HNP are enabled, even if USB peripherals or B-devices can be attached at any time, the OTG_FS will not detect any bus connection until VBUS is no longer sensed at a valid level (5 V). When VBUS is at a valid level and a remote B-device is attached, the OTG_FS core issues a host port interrupt triggered by the device connected bit in the host port control and status register (PCDET bit in OTG_FS_HPRT). When HNP and SRP are both disabled, USB peripherals or B-device are detected as soon as they are connected. The OTG_FS core issues a host port interrupt triggered by the device connected bit in the host port control and status (PCDET bit in OTG_FS_HPRT).

Host detection of peripheral a disconnection

The peripheral disconnection event triggers the disconnect detected interrupt (DISCINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS).

Host enumeration
After detecting a peripheral connection the host must start the enumeration process by sending USB reset and configuration commands to the new peripheral. Before starting to drive a USB reset, the application waits for the OTG interrupt triggered by the debounce done bit (DBCDNE bit in OTG_FS_GOTGINT), which indicates that the bus is stable again after the electrical debounce caused by the attachment of a pull-up resistor on DP (FS) or DM (LS). The application drives a USB reset signaling (single-ended zero) over the USB by keeping the port reset bit set in the host port control and status register (PRST bit in OTG_FS_HPRT) for a minimum of 10 ms and a maximum of 20 ms. The application takes care of the timing count and then of clearing the port reset bit. Once the USB reset sequence has completed, the host port interrupt is triggered by the port enable/disable change bit (PENCHNG bit in OTG_FS_HPRT). This informs the application that the speed of the enumerated peripheral can be read from the port speed field in the host port control and status register (PSPD bit in OTG_FS_HPRT) and that the host is starting to drive SOFs (FS) or Keep alives (LS). The host is now ready to complete the peripheral enumeration by sending peripheral configuration commands.

Host suspend
The application decides to suspend the USB activity by setting the port suspend bit in the host port control and status register (PSUSP bit in OTG_FS_HPRT). The OTG_FS core stops sending SOFs and enters the suspended state.

1033/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) The suspended state can be optionally exited on the remote devices initiative (remote wakeup). In this case the remote wakeup interrupt (WKUPINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is generated upon detection of a remote wakeup signaling, the port resume bit in the host port control and status register (PRES bit in OTG_FS_HPRT) self-sets, and resume signaling is automatically driven over the USB. The application must time the resume window and then clear the port resume bit to exit the suspended state and restart the SOF. If the suspended state is exited on the host initiative, the application must set the port resume bit to start resume signaling on the host port, time the resume window and finally clear the port resume bit.

30.6.3

Host channels
The OTG_FS core instantiates 8 host channels. Each host channel supports an USB host transfer (USB pipe). The host is not able to support more than 8 transfer requests at the same time. If more than 8 transfer requests are pending from the application, the host controller driver (HCD) must re-allocate channels when they become available from previous duty, that is, after receiving the transfer completed and channel halted interrupts. Each host channel can be configured to support in/out and any type of periodic/nonperiodic transaction. Each host channel makes us of proper control (HCCHARx), transfer configuration (HCTSIZx) and status/interrupt (HCINTx) registers with associated mask (HCINTMSKx) registers.

Host channel control

The following host channel controls are available to the application through the host channel-x characteristics register (HCCHARx): Channel enable/disable Program the FS/LS speed of target USB peripheral Program the address of target USB peripheral Program the endpoint number of target USB peripheral Program the transfer IN/OUT direction Program the USB transfer type (control, bulk, interrupt, isochronous) Program the maximum packet size (MPS) Program the periodic transfer to be executed during odd/even frames

Host channel transfer

The host channel transfer size registers (HCTSIZx) allow the application to program the transfer size parameters, and read the transfer status. Programming must be done before setting the channel enable bit in the host channel characteristics register. Once the endpoint is enabled the packet count field is read-only as the OTG FS core updates it according to the current transfer status.

The following transfer parameters can be programmed: transfer size in bytes number of packets making up the overall transfer size initial data PID

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1034/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Host channel status/interrupt

The host channel-x interrupt register (HCINTx) indicates the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. The application must read these register when the host channels interrupt bit in the core interrupt register (HCINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read these registers, it must first read the host all channels interrupt (HCAINT) register to get the exact channel number for the host channel-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the HAINT and GINTSTS registers. The mask bits for each interrupt source of each channel are also available in the OTG_FS_HCINTMSK-x register.

The host core provides the following status checks and interrupt generation: Transfer completed interrupt, indicating that the data transfer is complete on both the application (AHB) and USB sides Channel has stopped due to transfer completed, USB transaction error or disable command from the application Associated transmit FIFO is half or completely empty (IN endpoints) ACK response received NAK response received STALL response received USB transaction error due to CRC failure, timeout, bit stuff error, false EOP Babble error fraMe overrun dAta toggle error

30.6.4

Host scheduler
The host core features a built-in hardware scheduler which is able to autonomously re-order and manage the USB transaction requests posted by the application. At the beginning of each frame the host executes the periodic (isochronous and interrupt) transactions first, followed by the nonperiodic (control and bulk) transactions to achieve the higher level of priority granted to the isochronous and interrupt transfer types by the USB specification. The host processes the USB transactions through request queues (one for periodic and one for nonperiodic). Each request queue can hold up to 8 entries. Each entry represents a pending transaction request from the application, and holds the IN or OUT channel number along with other information to perform a transaction on the USB. The order in which the requests are written to the queue determines the sequence of the transactions on the USB interface. At the beginning of each frame, the host processes the periodic request queue first, followed by the nonperiodic request queue. The host issues an incomplete periodic transfer interrupt (IPXFR bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) if an isochronous or interrupt transaction scheduled for the current frame is still pending at the end of the current frame. The OTG HS core is fully responsible for the management of the periodic and nonperiodic request queues.The periodic transmit FIFO and queue status register (HPTXSTS) and nonperiodic transmit

1035/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) FIFO and queue status register (HNPTXSTS) are read-only registers which can be used by the application to read the status of each request queue. They contain:

The number of free entries currently available in the periodic (nonperiodic) request queue (8 max) Free space currently available in the periodic (nonperiodic) Tx-FIFO (out-transactions) IN/OUT token, host channel number and other status information.

As request queues can hold a maximum of 8 entries each, the application can push to schedule host transactions in advance with respect to the moment they physically reach the SB for a maximum of 8 pending periodic transactions plus 8 pending nonperiodic transactions. To post a transaction request to the host scheduler (queue) the application must check that there is at least 1 entry available in the periodic (nonperiodic) request queue by reading the PTXQSAV bits in the OTG_FS_HNPTXSTS register or NPTQXSAV bits in the OTG_FS_HNPTXSTS register.

30.7

SOF trigger
Figure 361. SOF connectivity

STM32F4xx STM32F4xx
SOF pulse output, to external audio control USB mic ro-AB connector
MS19907V2

PA8 PA9 ITR1 SOF pulse PA11 PA12 TIM2 SOFgen PA10

VBUS DD+ ID VSS

The OTG FS core provides means to monitor, track and configure SOF framing in the host and peripheral, as well as an SOF pulse output connectivity feature. Such utilities are especially useful for adaptive audio clock generation techniques, where the audio peripheral needs to synchronize to the isochronous stream provided by the PC, or the host needs to trim its framing rate according to the requirements of the audio peripheral.

30.7.1

Host SOFs
In host mode the number of PHY clocks occurring between the generation of two consecutive SOF (FS) or Keep-alive (LS) tokens is programmable in the host frame interval register (HFIR), thus providing application control over the SOF framing period. An interrupt is generated at any start of frame (SOF bit in OTH_FS_GINTSTS). The current frame

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1036/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

number and the time remaining until the next SOF are tracked in the host frame number register (HFNUM). An SOF pulse signal, generated at any SOF starting token and with a width of 12 system clock cycles, can be made available externally on the SOF pin using the SOFOUTEN bit in the global control and configuration register. The SOF pulse is also internally connected to the input trigger of timer 2 (TIM2), so that the input capture feature, the output compare feature and the timer can be triggered by the SOF pulse. The TIM2 connection is enabled through the ITR1_RMP bits of TIM2_OR register.

30.7.2

Peripheral SOFs
In device mode, the start of frame interrupt is generated each time an SOF token is received on the USB (SOF bit in OTH_FS_GINTSTS). The corresponding frame number can be read from the device status register (FNSOF bit in OTG_FS_DSTS). An SOF pulse signal with a width of 12 system clock cycles is also generated and can be made available externally on the SOF pin by using the SOF output enable bit in the global control and configuration register (SOFOUTEN bit in OTG_FS_GCCFG). The SOF pulse signal is also internally connected to the TIM2 input trigger, so that the input capture feature, the output compare feature and the timer can be triggered by the SOF pulse. The TIM2 connection is enabled through the ITR1_RMP bits the TIM2 option register (TIM2_OR). The end of periodic frame interrupt (GINTSTS/EOPF) is used to notify the application when 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% of the time frame interval elapsed depending on the periodic frame interval field in the device configuration register (PFIVL bit in OTG_FS_DCFG). This feature can be used to determine if all of the isochronous traffic for that frame is complete.

30.8

Power options
The power consumption of the OTG PHY is controlled by three bits in the general core configuration register:

PHY power down (GCCFG/PWRDWN) It switches on/off the full-speed transceiver module of the PHY. It must be preliminarily set to allow any USB operation.

A-VBUS sensing enable (GCCFG/VBUSASEN) It switches on/off the VBUS comparators associated with A-device operations. It must be set when in A-device (USB host) mode and during HNP.

B-VBUS sensing enable (GCCFG/VBUSASEN) It switches on/off the VBUS comparators associated with B-device operations. It must be set when in B-device (USB peripheral) mode and during HNP.

Power reduction techniques are available while in the USB suspended state, when the USB session is not yet valid or the device is disconnected.

Stop PHY clock (STPPCLK bit in OTG_FS_PCGCCTL) When setting the stop PHY clock bit in the clock gating control register, most of the 48 MHz clock domain internal to the OTG full-speed core is switched off by clock

1037/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) gating. The dynamic power consumption due to the USB clock switching activity is cut even if the 48 MHz clock input is kept running by the application Most of the transceiver is also disabled, and only the part in charge of detecting the asynchronous resume or remote wakeup event is kept alive.

Gate HCLK (GATEHCLK bit in OTG_FS_PCGCCTL) When setting the Gate HCLK bit in the clock gating control register, most of the system clock domain internal to the OTG_FS core is switched off by clock gating. Only the register read and write interface is kept alive. The dynamic power consumption due to the USB clock switching activity is cut even if the system clock is kept running by the application for other purposes.

USB system stop When the OTG_FS is in the USB suspended state, the application may decide to drastically reduce the overall power consumption by a complete shut down of all the clock sources in the system. USB System Stop is activated by first setting the Stop PHY clock bit and then configuring the system deep sleep mode in the power control system module (PWR). The OTG_FS core automatically reactivates both system and USB clocks by asynchronous detection of remote wakeup (as an host) or resume (as a device) signaling on the USB.

To save dynamic power, the USB data FIFO is clocked only when accessed by the OTG_FS core.

30.9

Dynamic update of the OTG_FS_HFIR register

The USB core embeds a dynamic trimming capability of micro-SOF framing period in host mode allowing to synchronize an external device with the micro-SOF frames. When the OTG_HS_HFIR register is changed within a current micro-SOF frame, the SOF period correction is applied in the next frame as described in Figure 362.

Figure 362. Updating OTG_FS_HFIR dynamically

Old OTG_FS_HIFR value = 400 periods OTG_FS_HIFR value = 450 periods+HIFR write latency New OTG_FS_HIFR value = 450 periods

SOF reload
Latency

OTG_FS_HFIR write OTG_FS_HFIR value Frame timer

400 450

1 0 450 449

1 0 400 399

1 0 400 399

450 449

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1038/1422

1 0 450 449
ai184

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

30.10

USB data FIFOs

The USB system features 1.25 Kbyte of dedicated RAM with a sophisticated FIFO control mechanism. The packet FIFO controller module in the OTG_FS core organizes RAM space into Tx-FIFOs into which the application pushes the data to be temporarily stored before the USB transmission, and into a single Rx FIFO where the data received from the USB are temporarily stored before retrieval (popped) by the application. The number of instructed FIFOs and how these are organized inside the RAM depends on the devices role. In peripheral mode an additional Tx-FIFO is instructed for each active IN endpoint. Any FIFO size is software configured to better meet the application requirements.

30.11

Peripheral FIFO architecture

Figure 363. Device-mode FIFO address mapping and AHB FIFO access mapping
Single data FIFO IN endpoint Tx FIFO #n DFIFO push access from AHB MAC pop Dedicated Tx FIFO #n control (optional) Tx FIFO #n packet DIEPTXF2[31:16] DIEPTXFx[15:0]

. . .
Dedicated Tx FIFO #1 control (optional)

. . .

. . .
DIEPTXF2[15:0]

IN endpoint Tx FIFO #1 DFIFO push access from AHB MAC pop IN endpoint Tx FIFO #0 DFIFO push access from AHB MAC pop

Tx FIFO #1 packet DIEPTXF1[31:16] DIEPTXF1[15:0]

Dedicated Tx FIFO #0 control (optional)

Tx FIFO #0 packet

GNPTXFSIZ[31:16]

GNPTXFSIZ[15:0]

Any OUT endpoint DFIFO pop access from AHB

Rx FIFO control

Rx packets

GRXFSIZ[31:16] (Rx start A1 = 0 address fixed to 0)

ai15611

MAC push

30.11.1

Peripheral Rx FIFO
The OTG peripheral uses a single receive FIFO that receives the data directed to all OUT endpoints. Received packets are stacked back-to-back until free space is available in the Rx-FIFO. The status of the received packet (which contains the OUT endpoint destination number, the byte count, the data PID and the validity of the received data) is also stored by the core on top of the data payload. When no more space is available, host transactions are NACKed and an interrupt is received on the addressed endpoint. The size of the receive FIFO is configured in the receive FIFO Size register (GRXFSIZ).

1039/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) The single receive FIFO architecture makes it more efficient for the USB peripheral to fill in the receive RAM buffer:

All OUT endpoints share the same RAM buffer (shared FIFO) The OTG FS core can fill in the receive FIFO up to the limit for any host sequence of OUT tokens

The application keeps receiving the Rx-FIFO non-empty interrupt (RXFLVL bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) as long as there is at least one packet available for download. It reads the packet information from the receive status read and pop register (GRXSTSP) and finally pops data off the receive FIFO by reading from the endpoint-related pop address.

30.11.2

Peripheral Tx FIFOs
The core has a dedicated FIFO for each IN endpoint. The application configures FIFO sizes by writing the non periodic transmit FIFO size register (OTG_FS_TX0FSIZ) for IN endpoint0 and the device IN endpoint transmit FIFOx registers (DIEPTXFx) for IN endpoint-x.

30.12

Host FIFO architecture

Figure 364. Host-mode FIFO address mapping and AHB FIFO access mapping
Single data FIFO

Any periodic channel DFIFO push access from AHB MAC pop

Periodic Tx FIFO control (optional)

Periodic Tx packets

HPTXFSIZ[31:16]

HPTXFSIZ[15:0]

Any non-periodic channel DFIFO push access from AHB MAC pop

Periodic Tx packets Non-periodic Tx FIFO control

NPTXFSIZ[31:16]

NPTXFSIZ[15:0]

Rx packets Any channel DFIFO pop access from AHB Rx FIFO control

RXFSIZ[31:16]

MAC push

Rx start address fixed to 0 A1 = 0

ai15610

30.12.1

Host Rx FIFO
The host uses one receiver FIFO for all periodic and nonperiodic transactions. The FIFO is used as a receive buffer to hold the received data (payload of the received packet) from the USB until it is transferred to the system memory. Packets received from any remote IN endpoint are stacked back-to-back until free space is available. The status of each received packet with the host channel destination, byte count, data PID and validity of the received data are also stored into the FIFO. The size of the receive FIFO is configured in the receive FIFO size register (GRXFSIZ).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1040/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

The single receive FIFO architecture makes it highly efficient for the USB host to fill in the receive data buffer:

All IN configured host channels share the same RAM buffer (shared FIFO) The OTG FS core can fill in the receive FIFO up to the limit for any sequence of IN tokens driven by the host software

The application receives the Rx FIFO not-empty interrupt as long as there is at least one packet available for download. It reads the packet information from the receive status read and pop register and finally pops the data off the receive FIFO.

30.12.2

Host Tx FIFOs
The host uses one transmit FIFO for all non-periodic (control and bulk) OUT transactions and one transmit FIFO for all periodic (isochronous and interrupt) OUT transactions. FIFOs are used as transmit buffers to hold the data (payload of the transmit packet) to be transmitted over the USB. The size of the periodic (nonperiodic) Tx FIFO is configured in the host periodic (nonperiodic) transmit FIFO size (HPTXFSIZ/HNPTXFSIZ) register. The two Tx FIFO implementation derives from the higher priority granted to the periodic type of traffic over the USB frame. At the beginning of each frame, the built-in host scheduler processes the periodic request queue first, followed by the nonperiodic request queue. The two transmit FIFO architecture provides the USB host with separate optimization for periodic and nonperiodic transmit data buffer management:

All host channels configured to support periodic (nonperiodic) transactions in the OUT direction share the same RAM buffer (shared FIFOs) The OTG FS core can fill in the periodic (nonperiodic) transmit FIFO up to the limit for any sequence of OUT tokens driven by the host software

The OTG_FS core issues the periodic Tx FIFO empty interrupt (PTXFE bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) as long as the periodic Tx-FIFO is half or completely empty, depending on the value of the periodic Tx-FIFO empty level bit in the AHB configuration register (PTXFELVL bit in OTG_FS_GAHBCFG). The application can push the transmission data in advance as long as free space is available in both the periodic Tx FIFO and the periodic request queue. The host periodic transmit FIFO and queue status register (HPTXSTS) can be read to know how much space is available in both. OTG_FS core issues the non periodic Tx FIFO empty interrupt (NPTXFE bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) as long as the nonperiodic Tx FIFO is half or completely empty depending on the non periodic Tx FIFO empty level bit in the AHB configuration register (TXFELVL bit in OTG_FS_GAHBCFG). The application can push the transmission data as long as free space is available in both the nonperiodic Tx FIFO and nonperiodic request queue. The host nonperiodic transmit FIFO and queue status register (HNPTXSTS) can be read to know how much space is available in both.

30.13
30.13.1

FIFO RAM allocation

Device mode
Receive FIFO RAM allocation: the application should allocate RAM for SETUP Packets: 10 locations must be reserved in the receive FIFO to receive SETUP packets on control endpoint. The core does not use these locations, which are reserved for SETUP packets, to write any other data. One location is to be allocated for Global OUT NAK. Status information

1041/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) is written to the FIFO along with each received packet. Therefore, a minimum space of (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 must be allocated to receive packets. If multiple isochronous endpoints are enabled, then at least two (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 spaces must be allocated to receive back-to-back packets. Typically, two (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 spaces are recommended so that when the previous packet is being transferred to the CPU, the USB can receive the subsequent packet. Along with the last packet for each endpoint, transfer complete status information is also pushed to the FIFO. Typically, one location for each OUT endpoint is recommended. Transmit FIFO RAM allocation: the minimum RAM space required for each IN Endpoint Transmit FIFO is the maximum packet size for that particular IN endpoint.

Note:

More space allocated in the transmit IN Endpoint FIFO results in better performance on the USB.

30.13.2

Host mode
Receive FIFO RAM allocation
Status information is written to the FIFO along with each received packet. Therefore, a minimum space of (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 must be allocated to receive packets. If multiple isochronous channels are enabled, then at least two (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 spaces must be allocated to receive back-to-back packets. Typically, two (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 spaces are recommended so that when the previous packet is being transferred to the CPU, the USB can receive the subsequent packet. Along with the last packet in the host channel, transfer complete status information is also pushed to the FIFO. So one location must be allocated for this.

Transmit FIFO RAM allocation

The minimum amount of RAM required for the host Non-periodic Transmit FIFO is the largest maximum packet size among all supported non-periodic OUT channels. Typically, two Largest Packet Sizes worth of space is recommended, so that when the current packet is under transfer to the USB, the CPU can get the next packet. The minimum amount of RAM required for host periodic Transmit FIFO is the largest maximum packet size out of all the supported periodic OUT channels. If there is at least one Isochronous OUT endpoint, then the space must be at least two times the maximum packet size of that channel. Note: More space allocated in the Transmit Non-periodic FIFO results in better performance on the USB.

30.14

USB system performance

Best USB and system performance is achieved owing to the large RAM buffers, the highly configurable FIFO sizes, the quick 32-bit FIFO access through AHB push/pop registers and, especially, the advanced FIFO control mechanism. Indeed, this mechanism allows the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1042/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS to fill in the available RAM space at best regardless of the current USB sequence. With these features:

The application gains good margins to calibrate its intervention in order to optimize the CPU bandwidth usage: It can accumulate large amounts of transmission data in advance compared to when they are effectively sent over the USB It benefits of a large time margin to download data from the single receive FIFO

The USB Core is able to maintain its full operating rate, that is to provide maximum fullspeed bandwidth with a great margin of autonomy versus application intervention: It has a large reserve of transmission data at its disposal to autonomously manage the sending of data over the USB It has a lot of empty space available in the receive buffer to autonomously fill it in with the data coming from the USB

As the OTG_FS core is able to fill in the 1.25 Kbyte RAM buffer very efficiently, and as 1.25 Kbyte of transmit/receive data is more than enough to cover a full speed frame, the USB system is able to withstand the maximum full-speed data rate for up to one USB frame (1 ms) without any CPU intervention.

30.15

OTG_FS interrupts
When the OTG_FS controller is operating in one mode, either device or host, the application must not access registers from the other mode. If an illegal access occurs, a mode mismatch interrupt is generated and reflected in the Core interrupt register (MMIS bit in the OTG_FS_GINTSTS register). When the core switches from one mode to the other, the registers in the new mode of operation must be reprogrammed as they would be after a power-on reset. Figure 365 shows the interrupt hierarchy.

1043/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 365. Interrupt hierarchy

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Interrupt
OR

Global interrupt mask (Bit 0) AHB configuration register

AND

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18

17:10

9 8

7:3

1 0

Core interrupt register(1)

Core interrupt mask register

Device all endpoints interrupt register 16:9 3:0 OUT endpoints IN endpoints

OTG interrupt register Device all endpoints interrupt mask register

Interrupt sources

Device IN/OUT endpoint interrupt registers 0 to 3

Device IN/OUT endpoints common interrupt mask register

Host port control and status register

Host all channels interrupt register

Host all channels interrupt mask register

Host channels interrupt registers 0 to 7

Host channels interrupt mask registers 0 to 7

ai15616b

1. The core interrupt register bits are shown in OTG_FS core interrupt register (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) on page 1059.

30.16

OTG_FS control and status registers

By reading from and writing to the control and status registers (CSRs) through the AHB slave interface, the application controls the OTG_FS controller. These registers are 32 bits wide, and the addresses are 32-bit block aligned. The OTG_FS registers must be accessed by words (32 bits).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1044/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) CSRs are classified as follows:

RM0090

Core global registers Host-mode registers Host global registers Host port CSRs Host channel-specific registers Device-mode registers Device global registers Device endpoint-specific registers Power and clock-gating registers Data FIFO (DFIFO) access registers

Only the Core global, Power and clock-gating, Data FIFO access, and host port control and status registers can be accessed in both host and device modes. When the OTG_FS controller is operating in one mode, either device or host, the application must not access registers from the other mode. If an illegal access occurs, a mode mismatch interrupt is generated and reflected in the Core interrupt register (MMIS bit in the OTG_FS_GINTSTS register). When the core switches from one mode to the other, the registers in the new mode of operation must be reprogrammed as they would be after a power-on reset.

30.16.1

CSR memory map

The host and device mode registers occupy different addresses. All registers are implemented in the AHB clock domain.

1045/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 366. CSR memory map

0000h

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Core global CSRs (1 Kbyte) 0400h Host mode CSRs (1 Kbyte) 0800h Device mode CSRs (1.5 Kbyte) 0E00h Power and clock gating CSRs (0.5 Kbyte) 1000h Device EP 0/Host channel 0 FIFO (4 Kbyte) 2000h Device EP1/Host channel 1 FIFO (4 Kbyte) 3000h DFIFO push/pop to this region Device EP (x 1)(1)/Host channel (x 1)(1) FIFO (4 Kbyte) Device EP x(1)/Host channel x(1) FIFO (4 Kbyte)

Reserved

2 0000h Direct access to data FIFO RAM for debugging (128 Kbyte) 3 FFFFh

DFIFO debug read/ write to this region

ai15615b

1. x = 3 in device mode and x = 7 in host mode.

Global CSR map

These registers are available in both host and device modes. Table 171. Core global control and status registers (CSRs)
Acronym OTG_FS_GOTGCTL OTG_FS_GOTGINT OTG_FS_GAHBCFG OTG_FS_GUSBCFG OTG_FS_GRSTCTL OTG_FS_GINTSTS OTG_FS_GINTMSK Address offset 0x000 0x004 0x008 0x00C 0x010 0x014 0x018 Register name OTG_FS control and status register (OTG_FS_GOTGCTL) on page 1050 OTG_FS interrupt register (OTG_FS_GOTGINT) on page 1052 OTG_FS AHB configuration register (OTG_FS_GAHBCFG) on page 1054 OTG_FS USB configuration register (OTG_FS_GUSBCFG) on page 1055 OTG_FS reset register (OTG_FS_GRSTCTL) on page 1057 OTG_FS core interrupt register (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) on page 1059 OTG_FS interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_GINTMSK) on page 1063

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1046/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Table 171. Core global control and status registers (CSRs) (continued)
Acronym OTG_FS_GRXSTSR OTG_FS_GRXSTSP OTG_FS_GRXFSIZ OTG_FS_HNPTXFSIZ/ OTG_FS_DIEPTXF0(1) OTG_FS_HNPTXSTS OTG_FS_GCCFG OTG_FS_CID OTG_FS_HPTXFSIZ Address offset 0x01C 0x020 0x024 0x028 Register name

RM0090

OTG_FS Receive status debug read/OTG status read and pop registers (OTG_FS_GRXSTSR/OTG_FS_GRXSTSP) on page 1066 OTG_FS Receive FIFO size register (OTG_FS_GRXFSIZ) on page 1067 OTG_FS Host non-periodic transmit FIFO size register (OTG_FS_HNPTXFSIZ)/Endpoint 0 Transmit FIFO size (OTG_FS_DIEPTXF0) OTG_FS non-periodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_FS_HNPTXSTS) on page 1068 OTG_FS general core configuration register (OTG_FS_GCCFG) on page 1069 OTG_FS core ID register (OTG_FS_CID) on page 1070 OTG_FS Host periodic transmit FIFO size register (OTG_FS_HPTXFSIZ) on page 1071

0x02C 0x038 0x03C 0x100 0x104 0x124 ... 0x138

OTG_FS_DIEPTXFx

OTG_FS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO size register (OTG_FS_DIEPTXFx) (x = 1..3, where x is the FIFO_number) on page 1072

1. The general rule is to use OTG_FS_HNPTXFSIZ for host mode and OTG_FS_DIEPTXF0 for device mode.

Host-mode CSR map

These registers must be programmed every time the core changes to host mode. Table 172. Host-mode control and status registers (CSRs)
Acronym OTG_FS_HCFG OTG_FS_HFIR OTG_FS_HFNUM Offset address 0x400 0x404 0x408 Register name OTG_FS Host configuration register (OTG_FS_HCFG) on page 1072 OTG_FS Host frame interval register (OTG_FS_HFIR) on page 1073 OTG_FS Host frame number/frame time remaining register (OTG_FS_HFNUM) on page 1074 OTG_FS_Host periodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_FS_HPTXSTS) on page 1074 OTG_FS Host all channels interrupt register (OTG_FS_HAINT) on page 1075 OTG_FS Host all channels interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_HAINTMSK) on page 1076 OTG_FS Host port control and status register (OTG_FS_HPRT) on page 1076

OTG_FS_HPTXSTS OTG_FS_HAINT OTG_FS_HAINTMSK OTG_FS_HPRT

0x410 0x414 0x418 0x440

1047/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Table 172. Host-mode control and status registers (CSRs) (continued)

Acronym Offset address 0x500 0x520 ... 0x6E0h 508h 50Ch 510h Register name

OTG_FS_HCCHARx

OTG_FS Host channel-x characteristics register (OTG_FS_HCCHARx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number) on page 1079

OTG_FS_HCINTx OTG_FS_HCINTMSKx OTG_FS_HCTSIZx

OTG_FS Host channel-x interrupt register (OTG_FS_HCINTx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number) on page 1080 OTG_FS Host channel-x interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_HCINTMSKx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number) on page 1081 OTG_FS Host channel-x transfer size register (OTG_FS_HCTSIZx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number) on page 1082

Device-mode CSR map

These registers must be programmed every time the core changes to device mode. Table 173. Device-mode control and status registers
Acronym OTG_FS_DCFG OTG_FS_DCTL OTG_FS_DSTS OTG_FS_DIEPMSK Offset address 0x800 0x804 0x808 0x810 Register name OTG_FS device configuration register (OTG_FS_DCFG) on page 1083 OTG_FS device control register (OTG_FS_DCTL) on page 1084 OTG_FS device status register (OTG_FS_DSTS) on page 1085 OTG_FS device IN endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DIEPMSK) on page 1086 OTG_FS device OUT endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DOEPMSK) on page 1087 OTG_FS device all endpoints interrupt register (OTG_FS_DAINT) on page 1088 OTG_FS all endpoints interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DAINTMSK) on page 1089 OTG_FS device VBUS discharge time register (OTG_FS_DVBUSDIS) on page 1089 OTG_FS device VBUS pulsing time register (OTG_FS_DVBUSPULSE) on page 1090 OTG_FS device IN endpoint FIFO empty interrupt mask register: (OTG_FS_DIEPEMPMSK) on page 1090 OTG_FS device control IN endpoint 0 control register (OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0) on page 1091

OTG_FS_DOEPMSK OTG_FS_DAINT OTG_FS_DAINTMSK OTG_FS_DVBUSDIS

0x814 0x818 0x81C 0x828

OTG_FS_DVBUSPULSE 0x82C OTG_FS_DIEPEMPMSK 0x834

OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0

0x900

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1048/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Table 173. Device-mode control and status registers (continued)
Acronym Offset address 0x920 0x940 ... 0xAE0 0x908 Register name

RM0090

OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx

OTG device endpoint-x control register (OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1092

OTG_FS_DIEPINTx

OTG_FS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) (x = 0..3, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1099 OTG_FS device IN endpoint 0 transfer size register (OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZ0) on page 1101 OTG_FS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO status register (OTG_FS_DTXFSTSx) (x = 0..3, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1104 OTG_FS device OUT endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1104 OTG_FS device control OUT endpoint 0 control register (OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0) on page 1095

OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZ0

0x910

OTG_FS_DTXFSTSx

0x918 0x930 0x950 ... 0xAF0 0xB00 0xB20 0xB40 ... 0xCC0 0xCE0 0xCFD 0xB08

OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx

OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0

OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx

OTG device endpoint-x control register (OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1092

OTG_FS_DOEPINTx

OTG_FS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) (x = 0..3, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1099 OTG_FS device OUT endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1104

OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx

0xB10

Data FIFO (DFIFO) access register map

These registers, available in both host and device modes, are used to read or write the FIFO space for a specific endpoint or a channel, in a given direction. If a host channel is of type IN, the FIFO can only be read on the channel. Similarly, if a host channel is of type OUT, the FIFO can only be written on the channel.

1049/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Table 174. Data FIFO (DFIFO) access register map
FIFO access register section Device IN Endpoint 0/Host OUT Channel 0: DFIFO Write Access Device OUT Endpoint 0/Host IN Channel 0: DFIFO Read Access Device IN Endpoint 1/Host OUT Channel 1: DFIFO Write Access Device OUT Endpoint 1/Host IN Channel 1: DFIFO Read Access ... Address range 0x10000x1FFC Access w r w r ...

0x20000x2FFC ...

w Device IN Endpoint x(1)/Host OUT Channel x(1): DFIFO Write Access 0xX000h0xXFFCh (1) (1) r Device OUT Endpoint x /Host IN Channel x : DFIFO Read Access
1. Where x is 3 in device mode and 7 in host mode.

Power and clock gating CSR map

There is a single register for power and clock gating. It is available in both host and device modes. Table 175. Power and clock gating control and status registers
Register name Power and clock gating control register Reserved Acronym PCGCR Offset address: 0xE000xFFF 0xE00-0xE04 0xE050xFFF

30.16.2

OTG_FS global registers

These registers are available in both host and device modes, and do not need to be reprogrammed when switching between these modes. Bit values in the register descriptions are expressed in binary unless otherwise specified.

OTG_FS control and status register (OTG_FS_GOTGCTL)

Address offset: 0x000 Reset value: 0x0000 0800 The OTG_FS_GOTGCTL register controls the behavior and reflects the status of the OTG function of the core.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HSHNPEN DHNPEN CIDSTS BSVLD ASVLD DBCT 9 HNPRQ 8 HNGSCS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SRQ rw 0 SRQSCS r

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1050/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 BSVLD: B-session valid Indicates the device mode transceiver status. 0: B-session is not valid. 1: B-session is valid. In OTG mode, you can use this bit to determine if the device is connected or disconnected. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 18 ASVLD: A-session valid Indicates the host mode transceiver status. 0: A-session is not valid 1: A-session is valid Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 17 DBCT: Long/short debounce time Indicates the debounce time of a detected connection. 0: Long debounce time, used for physical connections (100 ms + 2.5 s) 1: Short debounce time, used for soft connections (2.5 s) Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 16 CIDSTS: Connector ID status Indicates the connector ID status on a connect event. 0: The OTG_FS controller is in A-device mode 1: The OTG_FS controller is in B-device mode Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 DHNPEN: Device HNP enabled The application sets this bit when it successfully receives a SetFeature.SetHNPEnable command from the connected USB host. 0: HNP is not enabled in the application 1: HNP is enabled in the application Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 10 HSHNPEN: host set HNP enable The application sets this bit when it has successfully enabled HNP (using the SetFeature.SetHNPEnable command) on the connected device. 0: Host Set HNP is not enabled 1: Host Set HNP is enabled Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 9 HNPRQ: HNP request The application sets this bit to initiate an HNP request to the connected USB host. The application can clear this bit by writing a 0 when the host negotiation success status change bit in the OTG_FS_GOTGINT register (HNSSCHG bit in OTG_FS_GOTGINT) is set. The core clears this bit when the HNSSCHG bit is cleared. 0: No HNP request 1: HNP request Note: Only accessible in device mode.

1051/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 8 HNGSCS: Host negotiation success The core sets this bit when host negotiation is successful. The core clears this bit when the HNP Request (HNPRQ) bit in this register is set. 0: Host negotiation failure 1: Host negotiation success Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bits 7:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 SRQ: Session request The application sets this bit to initiate a session request on the USB. The application can clear this bit by writing a 0 when the host negotiation success status change bit in the OTG_FS_GOTGINT register (HNSSCHG bit in OTG_FS_GOTGINT) is set. The core clears this bit when the HNSSCHG bit is cleared. If you use the USB 1.1 full-speed serial transceiver interface to initiate the session request, the application must wait until VBUS discharges to 0.2 V, after the B-Session Valid bit in this register (BSVLD bit in OTG_FS_GOTGCTL) is cleared. This discharge time varies between different PHYs and can be obtained from the PHY vendor. 0: No session request 1: Session request Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 0 SRQSCS: Session request success The core sets this bit when a session request initiation is successful. 0: Session request failure 1: Session request success Note: Only accessible in device mode.

OTG_FS interrupt register (OTG_FS_GOTGINT)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application reads this register whenever there is an OTG interrupt and clears the bits in this register to clear the OTG interrupt.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 DBCDNE 18 ADTOCHG 17 HNGDET 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 HNSSCHG 8 SRSSCHG 7 6 5 4 3 2 SEDET 1 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Res.

rc_ rc_ rc_ w1 w1 w1

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

rc_ w1

Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 DBCDNE: Debounce done The core sets this bit when the debounce is completed after the device connect. The application can start driving USB reset after seeing this interrupt. This bit is only valid when the HNP Capable or SRP Capable bit is set in the OTG_FS_GUSBCFG register (HNPCAP bit or SRPCAP bit in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG, respectively). Note: Only accessible in host mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1052/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 18 ADTOCHG: A-device timeout change The core sets this bit to indicate that the A-device has timed out while waiting for the B-device to connect. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 17 HNGDET: Host negotiation detected The core sets this bit when it detects a host negotiation request on the USB. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bits 16:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 HNSSCHG: Host negotiation success status change The core sets this bit on the success or failure of a USB host negotiation request. The application must read the host negotiation success bit of the OTG_FS_GOTGCTL register (HNGSCS in OTG_FS_GOTGCTL) to check for success or failure. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bits 7:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 SRSSCHG: Session request success status change The core sets this bit on the success or failure of a session request. The application must read the session request success bit in the OTG_FS_GOTGCTL register (SRQSCS bit in OTG_FS_GOTGCTL) to check for success or failure. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 2 SEDET: Session end detected The core sets this bit to indicate that the level of the voltage on VBUS is no longer valid for a BPeripheral session when VBUS < 0.8 V. Bits 1:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1053/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS AHB configuration register (OTG_FS_GAHBCFG)

Address offset: 0x008 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register can be used to configure the core after power-on or a change in mode. This register mainly contains AHB system-related configuration parameters. Do not change this register after the initial programming. The application must program this register before starting any transactions on either the AHB or the USB.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PTXFELVL 7 TXFELVL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GINTMSK rw

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 PTXFELVL: Periodic TxFIFO empty level Indicates when the periodic TxFIFO empty interrupt bit in the OTG_FS_GINTSTS register (PTXFE bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is triggered. 0: PTXFE (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) interrupt indicates that the Periodic TxFIFO is half empty 1: PTXFE (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) interrupt indicates that the Periodic TxFIFO is completely empty Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 7 TXFELVL: TxFIFO empty level In device mode, this bit indicates when IN endpoint Transmit FIFO empty interrupt (TXFE in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx.) is triggered. 0: the TXFE (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) interrupt indicates that the IN Endpoint TxFIFO is half empty 1: the TXFE (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) interrupt indicates that the IN Endpoint TxFIFO is completely empty In host mode, this bit indicates when the nonperiodic Tx FIFO empty interrupt (NPTXFE bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is triggered: 0: the NPTXFE (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) interrupt indicates that the nonperiodic Tx FIFO is half empty 1: the NPTXFE (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) interrupt indicates that the nonperiodic Tx FIFO is completely empty Bits 6:1 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 0 GINTMSK: Global interrupt mask The application uses this bit to mask or unmask the interrupt line assertion to itself. Irrespective of this bits setting, the interrupt status registers are updated by the core. 0: Mask the interrupt assertion to the application. 1: Unmask the interrupt assertion to the application. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1054/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS USB configuration register (OTG_FS_GUSBCFG)

Address offset: 0x00C Reset value: 0x0000 0A00 This register can be used to configure the core after power-on or a changing to host mode or device mode. It contains USB and USB-PHY related configuration parameters. The application must program this register before starting any transactions on either the AHB or the USB. Do not make changes to this register after the initial programming.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CTXPKT FDMOD FHMOD TRDT Reserved rw 9 r/rw HNPCAP 8 r/rw SRPCAP 7 6 PHYSEL 5 4 3 2 1 TOCAL Reserved rw 0

Res.

rw

rw

rw

wo

Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 31 CTXPKT: Corrupt Tx packet This bit is for debug purposes only. Never set this bit to 1. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 30 FDMOD: Force device mode Writing a 1 to this bit forces the core to device mode irrespective of the OTG_FS_ID input pin. 0: Normal mode 1: Force device mode After setting the force bit, the application must wait at least 25 ms before the change takes effect. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 29 FHMOD: Force host mode Writing a 1 to this bit forces the core to host mode irrespective of the OTG_FS_ID input pin. 0: Normal mode 1: Force host mode After setting the force bit, the application must wait at least 25 ms before the change takes effect. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bits 28:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 13:10 TRDT: USB turnaround time Sets the turnaround time in PHY clocks. To calculate the value of TRDT, use the following formula: TRDT = 4 AHB clock + 1 PHY clock Examples: 1. if AHB clock = 72 MHz (PHY Clock is 48), the TRDT is set to 9. 2. if AHB clock = 48 MHz (PHY Clock is 48), the TRDT is set to 5. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 9 HNPCAP: HNP-capable The application uses this bit to control the OTG_FS controllers HNP capabilities. 0: HNP capability is not enabled. 1: HNP capability is enabled. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes.

1055/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 8 SRPCAP: SRP-capable The application uses this bit to control the OTG_FS controllers SRP capabilities. If the core operates as a non-SRP-capable B-device, it cannot request the connected A-device (host) to activate VBUS and start a session. 0: SRP capability is not enabled. 1: SRP capability is enabled. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 PHYSEL: Full Speed serial transceiver select This bit is always 1 with write-only access. Bits5:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 2:0 TOCAL: FS timeout calibration The number of PHY clocks that the application programs in this field is added to the fullspeed interpacket timeout duration in the core to account for any additional delays introduced by the PHY. This can be required, because the delay introduced by the PHY in generating the line state condition can vary from one PHY to another. The USB standard timeout value for full-speed operation is 16 to 18 (inclusive) bit times. The application must program this field based on the speed of enumeration. The number of bit times added per PHY clock is 0.25 bit times.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1056/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS reset register (OTG_FS_GRSTCTL)

Address offset: 0x10 Reset value: 0x2000 0000 The application uses this register to reset various hardware features inside the core.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 AHBIDL 9 8 7 6 5 TXFFLSH 4 RXFFLSH 3 Reserved 2 FCRST 1 HSRST rs 0 CSRST rs

TXFNUM Reserved rw

rs

rs

rs

Bit 31 AHBIDL: AHB master idle Indicates that the AHB master state machine is in the Idle condition. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bits 30:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 10:6 TXFNUM: TxFIFO number This is the FIFO number that must be flushed using the TxFIFO Flush bit. This field must not be changed until the core clears the TxFIFO Flush bit. 00000: Non-periodic TxFIFO flush in host mode Tx FIFO 0 flush in device mode 00001: Periodic TxFIFO flush in host mode TXFIFO 1 flush in device mode 00010: TXFIFO 2 flush in device mode ... 00101: TXFIFO 15 flush in device mode 10000: Flush all the transmit FIFOs in device or host mode. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 5 TXFFLSH: TxFIFO flush This bit selectively flushes a single or all transmit FIFOs, but cannot do so if the core is in the midst of a transaction. The application must write this bit only after checking that the core is neither writing to the TxFIFO nor reading from the TxFIFO. Verify using these registers: ReadNAK Effective Interrupt ensures the core is not reading from the FIFO WriteAHBIDL bit in OTG_FS_GRSTCTL ensures the core is not writing anything to the FIFO. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 4 RXFFLSH: RxFIFO flush The application can flush the entire RxFIFO using this bit, but must first ensure that the core is not in the middle of a transaction. The application must only write to this bit after checking that the core is neither reading from the RxFIFO nor writing to the RxFIFO. The application must wait until the bit is cleared before performing any other operations. This bit requires 8 clocks (slowest of PHY or AHB clock) to clear. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1057/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 2 FCRST: Host frame counter reset The application writes this bit to reset the frame number counter inside the core. When the frame counter is reset, the subsequent SOF sent out by the core has a frame number of 0. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 1 HSRST: HCLK soft reset The application uses this bit to flush the control logic in the AHB Clock domain. Only AHB Clock Domain pipelines are reset. FIFOs are not flushed with this bit. All state machines in the AHB clock domain are reset to the Idle state after terminating the transactions on the AHB, following the protocol. CSR control bits used by the AHB clock domain state machines are cleared. To clear this interrupt, status mask bits that control the interrupt status and are generated by the AHB clock domain state machine are cleared. Because interrupt status bits are not cleared, the application can get the status of any core events that occurred after it set this bit. This is a self-clearing bit that the core clears after all necessary logic is reset in the core. This can take several clocks, depending on the cores current state. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 0 CSRST: Core soft reset Resets the HCLK and PCLK domains as follows: Clears the interrupts and all the CSR register bits except for the following bits: RSTPDMODL bit in OTG_FS_PCGCCTL GAYEHCLK bit in OTG_FS_PCGCCTL PWRCLMP bit in OTG_FS_PCGCCTL STPPCLK bit in OTG_FS_PCGCCTL FSLSPCS bit in OTG_FS_HCFG DSPD bit in OTG_FS_DCFG All module state machines (except for the AHB slave unit) are reset to the Idle state, and all the transmit FIFOs and the receive FIFO are flushed. Any transactions on the AHB Master are terminated as soon as possible, after completing the last data phase of an AHB transfer. Any transactions on the USB are terminated immediately. The application can write to this bit any time it wants to reset the core. This is a self-clearing bit and the core clears this bit after all the necessary logic is reset in the core, which can take several clocks, depending on the current state of the core. Once this bit has been cleared, the software must wait at least 3 PHY clocks before accessing the PHY domain (synchronization delay). The software must also check that bit 31 in this register is set to 1 (AHB Master is Idle) before starting any operation. Typically, the software reset is used during software development and also when you dynamically change the PHY selection bits in the above listed USB configuration registers. When you change the PHY, the corresponding clock for the PHY is selected and used in the PHY domain. Once a new clock is selected, the PHY domain has to be reset for proper operation. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1058/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS core interrupt register (OTG_FS_GINTSTS)

Address offset: 0x014 Reset value: 0x0400 0020 This register interrupts the application for system-level events in the current mode (device mode or host mode). Some of the bits in this register are valid only in host mode, while others are valid in device mode only. This register also indicates the current mode. To clear the interrupt status bits of the rc_w1 type, the application must write 1 into the bit. The FIFO status interrupts are read-only; once software reads from or writes to the FIFO while servicing these interrupts, FIFO interrupt conditions are cleared automatically. The application must clear the OTG_FS_GINTSTS register at initialization before unmasking the interrupt bit to avoid any interrupts generated prior to initialization.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 IPXFR/INCOMPISOOUT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

GOUTNAKEFF

ENUMDNE

GINAKEFF

USBSUSP

ISOODRP

CIDSCHG

HPRTINT

Reserved

IISOIXFR

USBRST

DISCINT

NPTXFE

WKUINT

SRQINT

OTGINT

OEPINT

RXFLVL

ESUSP

PTXFE

IEPINT

HCINT

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rc_w1

rc_w1

Res.

rc_w1

rc_w1

rc_w1

Bit 31 WKUPINT: Resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt In device mode, this interrupt is asserted when a resume is detected on the USB. In host mode, this interrupt is asserted when a remote wakeup is detected on the USB. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 30 SRQINT: Session request/new session detected interrupt In host mode, this interrupt is asserted when a session request is detected from the device. In device mode, this interrupt is asserted when VBUS is in the valid range for a B-peripheral device. Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 29 DISCINT: Disconnect detected interrupt Asserted when a device disconnect is detected. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 28 CIDSCHG: Connector ID status change The core sets this bit when there is a change in connector ID status. Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 PTXFE: Periodic TxFIFO empty Asserted when the periodic transmit FIFO is either half or completely empty and there is space for at least one entry to be written in the periodic request queue. The half or completely empty status is determined by the periodic TxFIFO empty level bit in the OTG_FS_GAHBCFG register (PTXFELVL bit in OTG_FS_GAHBCFG). Note: Only accessible in host mode.

1059/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

CMOD r

EOPF

MMIS

SOF

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 25 HCINT: Host channels interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate that an interrupt is pending on one of the channels of the core (in host mode). The application must read the OTG_FS_HAINT register to determine the exact number of the channel on which the interrupt occurred, and then read the corresponding OTG_FS_HCINTx register to determine the exact cause of the interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the OTG_FS_HCINTx register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 24 HPRTINT: Host port interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate a change in port status of one of the OTG_FS controller ports in host mode. The application must read the OTG_FS_HPRT register to determine the exact event that caused this interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the OTG_FS_HPRT register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bits 23:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 IPXFR: Incomplete periodic transfer In host mode, the core sets this interrupt bit when there are incomplete periodic transactions still pending, which are scheduled for the current frame. INCOMPISOOUT: Incomplete isochronous OUT transfer In device mode, the core sets this interrupt to indicate that there is at least one isochronous OUT endpoint on which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the End of periodic frame interrupt (EOPF) bit in this register. Bit 20 IISOIXFR: Incomplete isochronous IN transfer The core sets this interrupt to indicate that there is at least one isochronous IN endpoint on which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the End of periodic frame interrupt (EOPF) bit in this register. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 19 OEPINT: OUT endpoint interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate that an interrupt is pending on one of the OUT endpoints of the core (in device mode). The application must read the OTG_FS_DAINT register to determine the exact number of the OUT endpoint on which the interrupt occurred, and then read the corresponding OTG_FS_DOEPINTx register to determine the exact cause of the interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the corresponding OTG_FS_DOEPINTx register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 18 IEPINT: IN endpoint interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate that an interrupt is pending on one of the IN endpoints of the core (in device mode). The application must read the OTG_FS_DAINT register to determine the exact number of the IN endpoint on which the interrupt occurred, and then read the corresponding OTG_FS_DIEPINTx register to determine the exact cause of the interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the corresponding OTG_FS_DIEPINTx register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bits 17:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 EOPF: End of periodic frame interrupt Indicates that the period specified in the periodic frame interval field of the OTG_FS_DCFG register (PFIVL bit in OTG_FS_DCFG) has been reached in the current frame. Note: Only accessible in device mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1060/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 14 ISOODRP: Isochronous OUT packet dropped interrupt The core sets this bit when it fails to write an isochronous OUT packet into the RxFIFO because the RxFIFO does not have enough space to accommodate a maximum size packet for the isochronous OUT endpoint. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 13 ENUMDNE: Enumeration done The core sets this bit to indicate that speed enumeration is complete. The application must read the OTG_FS_DSTS register to obtain the enumerated speed. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 12 USBRST: USB reset The core sets this bit to indicate that a reset is detected on the USB. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 11 USBSUSP: USB suspend The core sets this bit to indicate that a suspend was detected on the USB. The core enters the Suspended state when there is no activity on the data lines for a period of 3 ms. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 10 ESUSP: Early suspend The core sets this bit to indicate that an Idle state has been detected on the USB for 3 ms. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bits 9:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 GONAKEFF: Global OUT NAK effective Indicates that the Set global OUT NAK bit in the OTG_FS_DCTL register (SGONAK bit in OTG_FS_DCTL), set by the application, has taken effect in the core. This bit can be cleared by writing the Clear global OUT NAK bit in the OTG_FS_DCTL register (CGONAK bit in OTG_FS_DCTL). Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 6 GINAKEFF: Global IN non-periodic NAK effective Indicates that the Set global non-periodic IN NAK bit in the OTG_FS_DCTL register (SGINAK bit in OTG_FS_DCTL), set by the application, has taken effect in the core. That is, the core has sampled the Global IN NAK bit set by the application. This bit can be cleared by clearing the Clear global non-periodic IN NAK bit in the OTG_FS_DCTL register (CGINAK bit in OTG_FS_DCTL). This interrupt does not necessarily mean that a NAK handshake is sent out on the USB. The STALL bit takes precedence over the NAK bit. Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 5 NPTXFE: Non-periodic TxFIFO empty This interrupt is asserted when the non-periodic TxFIFO is either half or completely empty, and there is space for at least one entry to be written to the non-periodic transmit request queue. The half or completely empty status is determined by the non-periodic TxFIFO empty level bit in the OTG_FS_GAHBCFG register (TXFELVL bit in OTG_FS_GAHBCFG). Note: Accessible in host mode only. Bit 4 RXFLVL: RxFIFO non-empty Indicates that there is at least one packet pending to be read from the RxFIFO. Note: Accessible in both host and device modes.

1061/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 3 SOF: Start of frame In host mode, the core sets this bit to indicate that an SOF (FS), or Keep-Alive (LS) is transmitted on the USB. The application must write a 1 to this bit to clear the interrupt. In device mode, in the core sets this bit to indicate that an SOF token has been received on the USB. The application can read the Device Status register to get the current frame number. This interrupt is seen only when the core is operating in FS. Note: Accessible in both host and device modes. Bit 2 OTGINT: OTG interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate an OTG protocol event. The application must read the OTG Interrupt Status (OTG_FS_GOTGINT) register to determine the exact event that caused this interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the OTG_FS_GOTGINT register to clear this bit. Note: Accessible in both host and device modes. Bit 1 MMIS: Mode mismatch interrupt The core sets this bit when the application is trying to access: A host mode register, when the core is operating in device mode A device mode register, when the core is operating in host mode The register access is completed on the AHB with an OKAY response, but is ignored by the core internally and does not affect the operation of the core. Note: Accessible in both host and device modes. Bit 0 CMOD: Current mode of operation Indicates the current mode. 0: Device mode 1: Host mode Note: Accessible in both host and device modes.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1062/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_GINTMSK)

Address offset: 0x018 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register works with the Core interrupt register to interrupt the application. When an interrupt bit is masked, the interrupt associated with that bit is not generated. However, the Core Interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) register bit corresponding to that interrupt is still set.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 IPXFRM/IISOOXFRM 9 8 7 GONAKEFFM 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ENUMDNEM

GINAKEFFM

USBSUSPM

ISOODRPM

CIDSCHGM

IISOIXFRM

NPTXFEM

RXFLVLM

ESUSPM

USBRST

PTXFEM

DISCINT

EPMISM

OTGINT

OEPINT

EOPFM

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

MMISM rw

SRQIM

IEPINT

PRTIM

SOFM

WUIM

HCIM

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 WUIM: Resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both host and device modes. Bit 30 SRQIM: Session request/new session detected interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both host and device modes. Bit 29 DISCINT: Disconnect detected interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 28 CIDSCHGM: Connector ID status change mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both host and device modes. Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 PTXFEM: Periodic TxFIFO empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 25 HCIM: Host channels interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 24 PRTIM: Host port interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode.

1063/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Reserved

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bits 23:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 IPXFRM: Incomplete periodic transfer mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode. IISOOXFRM: Incomplete isochronous OUT transfer mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 20 IISOIXFRM: Incomplete isochronous IN transfer mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 19 OEPINT: OUT endpoints interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 18 IEPINT: IN endpoints interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 17 EPMISM: Endpoint mismatch interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 EOPFM: End of periodic frame interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 14 ISOODRPM: Isochronous OUT packet dropped interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 13 ENUMDNEM: Enumeration done mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 12 USBRST: USB reset mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1064/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 11 USBSUSPM: USB suspend mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 10 ESUSPM: Early suspend mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bits 9:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 GONAKEFFM: Global OUT NAK effective mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 6 GINAKEFFM: Global non-periodic IN NAK effective mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in device mode. Bit 5 NPTXFEM: Non-periodic TxFIFO empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in Host mode. Bit 4 RXFLVLM: Receive FIFO non-empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 3 SOFM: Start of frame mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 2 OTGINT: OTG interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 1 MMISM: Mode mismatch interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both device and host modes. Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1065/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS Receive status debug read/OTG status read and pop registers (OTG_FS_GRXSTSR/OTG_FS_GRXSTSP)
Address offset for Read: 0x01C Address offset for Pop: 0x020 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 A read to the Receive status debug read register returns the contents of the top of the Receive FIFO. A read to the Receive status read and pop register additionally pops the top data entry out of the RxFIFO. The receive status contents must be interpreted differently in host and device modes. The core ignores the receive status pop/read when the receive FIFO is empty and returns a value of 0x0000 0000. The application must only pop the Receive Status FIFO when the Receive FIFO non-empty bit of the Core interrupt register (RXFLVL bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is asserted.

Host mode:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PKTSTS Reserved r r r r DPID 9 BCNT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CHNUM

Bits 31:21 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 20:17 PKTSTS: Packet status Indicates the status of the received packet 0010: IN data packet received 0011: IN transfer completed (triggers an interrupt) 0101: Data toggle error (triggers an interrupt) 0111: Channel halted (triggers an interrupt) Others: Reserved Bits 16:15 DPID: Data PID Indicates the Data PID of the received packet 00: DATA0 10: DATA1 01: DATA2 11: MDATA Bits 14:4 BCNT: Byte count Indicates the byte count of the received IN data packet. Bits 3:0 CHNUM: Channel number Indicates the channel number to which the current received packet belongs.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1066/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Device mode:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FRMNUM Reserved r r r r r PKTSTS DPID 9 BCNT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EPNUM

Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 24:21 FRMNUM: Frame number This is the least significant 4 bits of the frame number in which the packet is received on the USB. This field is supported only when isochronous OUT endpoints are supported. Bits 20:17 PKTSTS: Packet status Indicates the status of the received packet 0001: Global OUT NAK (triggers an interrupt) 0010: OUT data packet received 0011: OUT transfer completed (triggers an interrupt) 0100: SETUP transaction completed (triggers an interrupt) 0110: SETUP data packet received Others: Reserved Bits 16:15 DPID: Data PID Indicates the Data PID of the received OUT data packet 00: DATA0 10: DATA1 01: DATA2 11: MDATA Bits 14:4 BCNT: Byte count Indicates the byte count of the received data packet. Bits 3:0 EPNUM: Endpoint number Indicates the endpoint number to which the current received packet belongs.

OTG_FS Receive FIFO size register (OTG_FS_GRXFSIZ)

Address offset: 0x024 Reset value: 0x0000 0200 The application can program the RAM size that must be allocated to the RxFIFO.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved r/rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RXFD

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 RXFD: RxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 256 The power-on reset value of this register is specified as the largest Rx data FIFO depth.

1067/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS Host non-periodic transmit FIFO size register (OTG_FS_HNPTXFSIZ)/Endpoint 0 Transmit FIFO size (OTG_FS_DIEPTXF0)
Address offset: 0x028 Reset value: 0x0000 0200
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 NPTXFD/TX0FD r/rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

NPTXFSA/TX0FSA r/rw

Host mode
Bits 31:16 NPTXFD: Non-periodic TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 256 Bits 15:0 NPTXFSA: Non-periodic transmit RAM start address This field contains the memory start address for non-periodic transmit FIFO RAM.

Device mode
Bits 31:16 TX0FD: Endpoint 0 TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 256 Bits 15:0 TX0FSA: Endpoint 0 transmit RAM start address This field contains the memory start address for the endpoint 0 transmit FIFO RAM.

OTG_FS non-periodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_FS_HNPTXSTS)

Address offset: 0x02C Reset value: 0x0008 0200 Note: In Device mode, this register is not valid. This read-only register contains the free space information for the non-periodic TxFIFO and the non-periodic transmit request queue.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved NPTXQTOP r NPTQXSAV r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

NPTXFSAV r

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1068/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:24 NPTXQTOP: Top of the non-periodic transmit request queue Entry in the non-periodic Tx request queue that is currently being processed by the MAC. Bits 30:27: Channel/endpoint number Bits 26:25: 00: IN/OUT token 01: Zero-length transmit packet (device IN/host OUT) 11: Channel halt command Bit 24: Terminate (last entry for selected channel/endpoint) Bits 23:16 NPTQXSAV: Non-periodic transmit request queue space available Indicates the amount of free space available in the non-periodic transmit request queue. This queue holds both IN and OUT requests in host mode. Device mode has only IN requests. 00: Non-periodic transmit request queue is full 01: 1 location available 10: 2 locations available bxn: n locations available (0 n 8) Others: Reserved Bits 15:0 NPTXFSAV: Non-periodic TxFIFO space available Indicates the amount of free space available in the non-periodic TxFIFO. Values are in terms of 32-bit words. 00: Non-periodic TxFIFO is full 01: 1 word available 10: 2 words available 0xn: n words available (where 0 n 256) Others: Reserved

OTG_FS general core configuration register (OTG_FS_GCCFG)

Address offset: 0x038 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 NOVBUSSENS SOFOUTEN VBUSBSEN VBUSASEN .PWRDWN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

1069/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 NOVBUSSENS: VBUS sensing disable option When this bit is set, VBUS is considered internally to be always at VBUS valid level (5 V). This option removes the need for a dedicated VBUS pad, and leave this pad free to be used for other purposes such as a shared functionality. VBUS connection can be remapped on another general purpose input pad and monitored by software. This option is only suitable for host-only or device-only applications. 0: VBUS sensing available by hardware 1: VBUS sensing not available by hardware. Bit 20 SOFOUTEN: SOF output enable 0: SOF pulse not available on PAD 1: SOF pulse available on PAD Bit 19 VBUSBSEN: Enable the VBUS sensing B device 0: VBUS sensing B disabled 1: VBUS sensing B enabled Bit 18 VBUSASEN: Enable the VBUS sensing A device 0: VBUS sensing A disabled 1: VBUS sensing A enabled Bit 17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 16 PWRDWN: Power down Used to activate the transceiver in transmission/reception 0: Power down active 1: Power down deactivated (Transceiver active) Bits 15:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

OTG_FS core ID register (OTG_FS_CID)

Address offset: 0x03C Reset value:0x0000 1100 This is a read only register containing the Product ID.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PRODUCT_ID rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 PRODUCT_ID: Product ID field Application-programmable ID field.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1070/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS Host periodic transmit FIFO size register (OTG_FS_HPTXFSIZ)

Address offset: 0x100 Reset value: 0x0200 0600
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PTXFSIZ r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PTXSA r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w

Bits 31:16 PTXFD: Host periodic TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Bits 15:0 PTXSA: Host periodic TxFIFO start address The power-on reset value of this register is the sum of the largest Rx data FIFO depth and largest non-periodic Tx data FIFO depth.

1071/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO size register (OTG_FS_DIEPTXFx) (x = 1..3, where x is the FIFO_number)
Address offset: 0x104 + (FIFO_number 1) 0x04 Reset value: 0x02000400
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 INEPTXFD r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

INEPTXSA r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w

Bits 31:16 INEPTXFD: IN endpoint TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 The power-on reset value of this register is specified as the largest IN endpoint FIFO number depth. Bits 15:0 INEPTXSA: IN endpoint FIFOx transmit RAM start address This field contains the memory start address for IN endpoint transmit FIFOx. The address must be aligned with a 32-bit memory location.

30.16.3

Host-mode registers
Bit values in the register descriptions are expressed in binary unless otherwise specified. Host-mode registers affect the operation of the core in the host mode. Host mode registers must not be accessed in device mode, as the results are undefined. Host mode registers can be categorized as follows:

OTG_FS Host configuration register (OTG_FS_HCFG)

Address offset: 0x400 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register configures the core after power-on. Do not make changes to this register after initializing the host.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 FSLSS 1 FSLSPCS rw rw 0

Bits 31:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 FSLSS: FS- and LS-only support The application uses this bit to control the cores enumeration speed. Using this bit, the application can make the core enumerate as an FS host, even if the connected device supports HS traffic. Do not make changes to this field after initial programming. 1: FS/LS-only, even if the connected device can support HS (read-only)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1072/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bits 1:0 FSLSPCS: FS/LS PHY clock select When the core is in FS host mode 01: PHY clock is running at 48 MHz Others: Reserved When the core is in LS host mode 00: Reserved 01: Select 48 MHz PHY clock frequency 10: Select 6 MHz PHY clock frequency 11: Reserved Note: The FSLSPCS must be set on a connection event according to the speed of the connected device (after changing this bit, a software reset must be performed).

OTG_FS Host frame interval register (OTG_FS_HFIR)

Address offset: 0x404 Reset value: 0x0000 EA60 This register stores the frame interval information for the current speed to which the OTG_FS controller has enumerated.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

FRIVL

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 FRIVL: Frame interval The value that the application programs to this field specifies the interval between two consecutive SOFs (FS) or Keep-Alive tokens (LS). This field contains the number of PHY clocks that constitute the required frame interval. The application can write a value to this register only after the Port enable bit of the host port control and status register (PENA bit in OTG_FS_HPRT) has been set. If no value is programmed, the core calculates the value based on the PHY clock specified in the FS/LS PHY Clock Select field of the host configuration register (FSLSPCS in OTG_FS_HCFG). Do not change the value of this field after the initial configuration. 1 ms (PHY clock frequency)

1073/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS Host frame number/frame time remaining register (OTG_FS_HFNUM)

Address offset: 0x408 Reset value: 0x0000 3FFF This register indicates the current frame number. It also indicates the time remaining (in terms of the number of PHY clocks) in the current frame.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FTREM r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

FRNUM r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:16 FTREM: Frame time remaining Indicates the amount of time remaining in the current frame, in terms of PHY clocks. This field decrements on each PHY clock. When it reaches zero, this field is reloaded with the value in the Frame interval register and a new SOF is transmitted on the USB. Bits 15:0 FRNUM: Frame number This field increments when a new SOF is transmitted on the USB, and is cleared to 0 when it reaches 0x3FFF.

OTG_FS_Host periodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_FS_HPTXSTS)

Address offset: 0x410 Reset value: 0x0008 0100 This read-only register contains the free space information for the periodic TxFIFO and the periodic transmit request queue.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PTXQTOP r r r r r r r r r r r PTXQSAV r r r r r rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PTXFSAVL rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:24 PTXQTOP: Top of the periodic transmit request queue This indicates the entry in the periodic Tx request queue that is currently being processed by the MAC. This register is used for debugging. Bit 31: Odd/Even frame 0: send in even frame 1: send in odd frame Bits 30:27: Channel/endpoint number Bits 26:25: Type 00: IN/OUT 01: Zero-length packet 11: Disable channel command Bit 24: Terminate (last entry for the selected channel/endpoint)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1074/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bits 23:16 PTXQSAV: Periodic transmit request queue space available Indicates the number of free locations available to be written in the periodic transmit request queue. This queue holds both IN and OUT requests. 00: Periodic transmit request queue is full 01: 1 location available 10: 2 locations available bxn: n locations available (0 n 8) Others: Reserved Bits 15:0 PTXFSAVL: Periodic transmit data FIFO space available Indicates the number of free locations available to be written to in the periodic TxFIFO. Values are in terms of 32-bit words 0000: Periodic TxFIFO is full 0001: 1 word available 0010: 2 words available bxn: n words available (where 0 n PTXFD) Others: Reserved

OTG_FS Host all channels interrupt register (OTG_FS_HAINT)

Address offset: 0x414 Reset value: 0x0000 000 When a significant event occurs on a channel, the host all channels interrupt register interrupts the application using the host channels interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (HCINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). This is shown in Figure 365. There is one interrupt bit per channel, up to a maximum of 16 bits. Bits in this register are set and cleared when the application sets and clears bits in the corresponding host channel-x interrupt register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

HAINT

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 HAINT: Channel interrupts One bit per channel: Bit 0 for Channel 0, bit 15 for Channel 15

1075/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS Host all channels interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_HAINTMSK)

Address offset: 0x418 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The host all channel interrupt mask register works with the host all channel interrupt register to interrupt the application when an event occurs on a channel. There is one interrupt mask bit per channel, up to a maximum of 16 bits.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

HAINTM

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 HAINTM: Channel interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt One bit per channel: Bit 0 for channel 0, bit 15 for channel 15

OTG_FS Host port control and status register (OTG_FS_HPRT)

Address offset: 0x440 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is available only in host mode. Currently, the OTG host supports only one port. A single register holds USB port-related information such as USB reset, enable, suspend, resume, connect status, and test mode for each port. It is shown in Figure 365. The rc_w1 bits in this register can trigger an interrupt to the application through the host port interrupt bit of the core interrupt register (HPRTINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). On a Port Interrupt, the application must read this register and clear the bit that caused the interrupt. For the rc_w1 bits, the application must write a 1 to the bit to clear the interrupt.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PLSTS PPWR 9 8 PRST 7 PSUSP 6 PRES 5 POCCHNG 4 POCA 3 PENCHNG 2 PENA 1 PCDET 0 PCSTS r

PSPD Reserved r r rw

PTCTL

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rs

rw

rc_ w1

rc_ rc_ rc_ w1 w0 w1

Bits 31:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 18:17 PSPD: Port speed Indicates the speed of the device attached to this port. 01: Full speed 10: Low speed 11: Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1076/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bits 16:13 PTCTL: Port test control The application writes a nonzero value to this field to put the port into a Test mode, and the corresponding pattern is signaled on the port. 0000: Test mode disabled 0001: Test_J mode 0010: Test_K mode 0011: Test_SE0_NAK mode 0100: Test_Packet mode 0101: Test_Force_Enable Others: Reserved Bit 12 PPWR: Port power The application uses this field to control power to this port, and the core clears this bit on an overcurrent condition. 0: Power off 1: Power on Bits 11:10 PLSTS: Port line status Indicates the current logic level USB data lines Bit 10: Logic level of OTG_FS_FS_DP Bit 11: Logic level of OTG_FS_FS_DM Bit 9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 PRST: Port reset When the application sets this bit, a reset sequence is started on this port. The application must time the reset period and clear this bit after the reset sequence is complete. 0: Port not in reset 1: Port in reset The application must leave this bit set for a minimum duration of at least 10 ms to start a reset on the port. The application can leave it set for another 10 ms in addition to the required minimum duration, before clearing the bit, even though there is no maximum limit set by the USB standard. Bit 7 PSUSP: Port suspend The application sets this bit to put this port in Suspend mode. The core only stops sending SOFs when this is set. To stop the PHY clock, the application must set the Port clock stop bit, which asserts the suspend input pin of the PHY. The read value of this bit reflects the current suspend status of the port. This bit is cleared by the core after a remote wakeup signal is detected or the application sets the Port reset bit or Port resume bit in this register or the Resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt bit or Disconnect detected interrupt bit in the Core interrupt register (WKUINT or DISCINT in OTG_FS_GINTSTS, respectively). 0: Port not in Suspend mode 1: Port in Suspend mode Bit 6 PRES: Port resume The application sets this bit to drive resume signaling on the port. The core continues to drive the resume signal until the application clears this bit. If the core detects a USB remote wakeup sequence, as indicated by the Port resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (WKUINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS), the core starts driving resume signaling without application intervention and clears this bit when it detects a disconnect condition. The read value of this bit indicates whether the core is currently driving resume signaling. 0: No resume driven 1: Resume driven

1077/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 5 POCCHNG: Port overcurrent change The core sets this bit when the status of the Port overcurrent active bit (bit 4) in this register changes. Bit 4 POCA: Port overcurrent active Indicates the overcurrent condition of the port. 0: No overcurrent condition 1: Overcurrent condition Bit 3 PENCHNG: Port enable/disable change The core sets this bit when the status of the Port enable bit 2 in this register changes. Bit 2 PENA: Port enable A port is enabled only by the core after a reset sequence, and is disabled by an overcurrent condition, a disconnect condition, or by the application clearing this bit. The application cannot set this bit by a register write. It can only clear it to disable the port. This bit does not trigger any interrupt to the application. 0: Port disabled 1: Port enabled Bit 1 PCDET: Port connect detected The core sets this bit when a device connection is detected to trigger an interrupt to the application using the host port interrupt bit in the Core interrupt register (HPRTINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). The application must write a 1 to this bit to clear the interrupt. Bit 0 PCSTS: Port connect status 0: No device is attached to the port 1: A device is attached to the port

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1078/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS Host channel-x characteristics register (OTG_FS_HCCHARx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number)

Address offset: 0x500 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ODDFRM CHENA EPTYP LSDEV CHDIS Reserved EPDIR 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DAD

MCNT

EPNUM

MPSIZ

rs

rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 CHENA: Channel enable This field is set by the application and cleared by the OTG host. 0: Channel disabled 1: Channel enabled Bit 30 CHDIS: Channel disable The application sets this bit to stop transmitting/receiving data on a channel, even before the transfer for that channel is complete. The application must wait for the Channel disabled interrupt before treating the channel as disabled. Bit 29 ODDFRM: Odd frame This field is set (reset) by the application to indicate that the OTG host must perform a transfer in an odd frame. This field is applicable for only periodic (isochronous and interrupt) transactions. 0: Even frame 1: Odd frame Bits 28:22 DAD: Device address This field selects the specific device serving as the data source or sink. Bits 21:20 MCNT: Multicount This field indicates to the host the number of transactions that must be executed per frame for this periodic endpoint. For non-periodic transfers, this field is not used 00: Reserved. This field yields undefined results 01: 1 transaction 10: 2 transactions per frame to be issued for this endpoint 11: 3 transactions per frame to be issued for this endpoint Note: This field must be set to at least 01. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type Indicates the transfer type selected. 00: Control 01: Isochronous 10: Bulk 11: Interrupt Bit 17 LSDEV: Low-speed device This field is set by the application to indicate that this channel is communicating to a lowspeed device. Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1079/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 15 EPDIR: Endpoint direction Indicates whether the transaction is IN or OUT. 0: OUT 1: IN Bits 14:11 EPNUM: Endpoint number Indicates the endpoint number on the device serving as the data source or sink. Bits 10:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size Indicates the maximum packet size of the associated endpoint.

OTG_FS Host channel-x interrupt register (OTG_FS_HCINTx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number)

Address offset: 0x508 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register indicates the status of a channel with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. It is shown in Figure 365. The application must read this register when the host channels interrupt bit in the Core interrupt register (HCINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read this register, it must first read the host all channels interrupt (OTG_FS_HAINT) register to get the exact channel number for the host channel-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the OTG_FS_HAINT and OTG_FS_GINTSTS registers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DTERR 9 FRMOR 8 BBERR 7 TXERR 6 Reserved 5 ACK 4 NAK 3 STALL 2 Reserved 1 CHH 0 XFRC

Reserved

rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ w1 w1 w1 w1

rc_ rc_ rc_ w1 w1 w1

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Bits 31:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 10 DTERR: Data toggle error Bit 9 FRMOR: Frame overrun Bit 8 BBERR: Babble error Bit 7 TXERR: Transaction error Indicates one of the following errors occurred on the USB. CRC check failure Timeout Bit stuff error False EOP Bit 6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 5 ACK: ACK response received/transmitted interrupt Bit 4 NAK: NAK response received interrupt Bit 3 STALL: STALL response received interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1080/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 CHH: Channel halted Indicates the transfer completed abnormally either because of any USB transaction error or in response to disable request by the application. Bit 0 XFRC: Transfer completed Transfer completed normally without any errors.

OTG_FS Host channel-x interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_HCINTMSKx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number)
Address offset: 0x50C + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register reflects the mask for each channel status described in the previous section.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DTERRM 9 FRMORM 8 BBERRM 7 TXERRM 6 NYET 5 ACKM 4 NAKM 3 STALLM 2 Reserved 1 CHHM rw 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 10 DTERRM: Data toggle error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 9 FRMORM: Frame overrun mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 8 BBERRM: Babble error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 7 TXERRM: Transaction error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 6 NYET: response received interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 5 ACKM: ACK response received/transmitted interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 4 NAKM: NAK response received interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 3 STALLM: STALL response received interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

1081/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 CHHM: Channel halted mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

OTG_FS Host channel-x transfer size register (OTG_FS_HCTSIZx) (x = 0..7, where x = Channel_number)
Address offset: 0x510 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved DPID rw rw rw rw rw rw PKTCNT rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

XFRSIZ rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:29 DPID: Data PID The application programs this field with the type of PID to use for the initial transaction. The host maintains this field for the rest of the transfer. 00: DATA0 01: DATA2 10: DATA1 11: MDATA (non-control)/SETUP (control) Bits 28:19 PKTCNT: Packet count This field is programmed by the application with the expected number of packets to be transmitted (OUT) or received (IN). The host decrements this count on every successful transmission or reception of an OUT/IN packet. Once this count reaches zero, the application is interrupted to indicate normal completion. Bits 18:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size For an OUT, this field is the number of data bytes the host sends during the transfer. For an IN, this field is the buffer size that the application has reserved for the transfer. The application is expected to program this field as an integer multiple of the maximum packet size for IN transactions (periodic and non-periodic).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1082/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

30.16.4

Device-mode registers
OTG_FS device configuration register (OTG_FS_DCFG)
Address offset: 0x800 Reset value: 0x0220 0000 This register configures the core in device mode after power-on or after certain control commands or enumeration. Do not make changes to this register after initial programming.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PFIVL

7 DAD

3 Reserved

2 NZLSOHSK

1 DSPD rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 12:11 PFIVL: Periodic frame interval Indicates the time within a frame at which the application must be notified using the end of periodic frame interrupt. This can be used to determine if all the isochronous traffic for that frame is complete. 00: 80% of the frame interval 01: 85% of the frame interval 10: 90% of the frame interval 11: 95% of the frame interval Bits 10:4 DAD: Device address The application must program this field after every SetAddress control command. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 NZLSOHSK: Non-zero-length status OUT handshake The application can use this field to select the handshake the core sends on receiving a nonzero-length data packet during the OUT transaction of a control transfers Status stage. 1: Send a STALL handshake on a nonzero-length status OUT transaction and do not send the received OUT packet to the application. 0: Send the received OUT packet to the application (zero-length or nonzero-length) and send a handshake based on the NAK and STALL bits for the endpoint in the Device endpoint control register. Bits 1:0 DSPD: Device speed Indicates the speed at which the application requires the core to enumerate, or the maximum speed the application can support. However, the actual bus speed is determined only after the chirp sequence is completed, and is based on the speed of the USB host to which the core is connected. 00: Reserved 01: Reserved 10: Reserved 11: Full speed (USB 1.1 transceiver clock is 48 MHz)

1083/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS device control register (OTG_FS_DCTL)

Address offset: 0x804 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 POPRGDNE CGONAK 9 SGONAK 8 CGINAK 7 SGINAK 6 5 TCTL 4 3 GONSTS 2 GINSTS 1 SDIS rw 0 RWUSIG rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 POPRGDNE: Power-on programming done The application uses this bit to indicate that register programming is completed after a wakeup from power down mode. Bit 10 CGONAK: Clear global OUT NAK A write to this field clears the Global OUT NAK. Bit 9 SGONAK: Set global OUT NAK A write to this field sets the Global OUT NAK. The application uses this bit to send a NAK handshake on all OUT endpoints. The application must set the this bit only after making sure that the Global OUT NAK effective bit in the Core interrupt register (GONAKEFF bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is cleared. Bit 8 CGINAK: Clear global IN NAK A write to this field clears the Global IN NAK. Bit 7 SGINAK: Set global IN NAK A write to this field sets the Global non-periodic IN NAK.The application uses this bit to send a NAK handshake on all non-periodic IN endpoints. The application must set this bit only after making sure that the Global IN NAK effective bit in the Core interrupt register (GINAKEFF bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is cleared. Bits 6:4 TCTL: Test control 000: Test mode disabled 001: Test_J mode 010: Test_K mode 011: Test_SE0_NAK mode 100: Test_Packet mode 101: Test_Force_Enable Others: Reserved Bit 3 GONSTS: Global OUT NAK status 0: A handshake is sent based on the FIFO Status and the NAK and STALL bit settings. 1: No data is written to the RxFIFO, irrespective of space availability. Sends a NAK handshake on all packets, except on SETUP transactions. All isochronous OUT packets are dropped.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1084/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 2 GINSTS: Global IN NAK status 0: A handshake is sent out based on the data availability in the transmit FIFO. 1: A NAK handshake is sent out on all non-periodic IN endpoints, irrespective of the data availability in the transmit FIFO. Bit 1 SDIS: Soft disconnect The application uses this bit to signal the USB OTG core to perform a soft disconnect. As long as this bit is set, the host does not see that the device is connected, and the device does not receive signals on the USB. The core stays in the disconnected state until the application clears this bit. 0: Normal operation. When this bit is cleared after a soft disconnect, the core generates a device connect event to the USB host. When the device is reconnected, the USB host restarts device enumeration. 1: The core generates a device disconnect event to the USB host. Bit 0 RWUSIG: Remote wakeup signaling When the application sets this bit, the core initiates remote signaling to wake up the USB host. The application must set this bit to instruct the core to exit the Suspend state. As specified in the USB 2.0 specification, the application must clear this bit 1 ms to 15 ms after setting it.

Table 176 contains the minimum duration (according to device state) for which the Soft disconnect (SDIS) bit must be set for the USB host to detect a device disconnect. To accommodate clock jitter, it is recommended that the application add some extra delay to the specified minimum duration. Table 176. Minimum duration for soft disconnect
Operating speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Suspended Idle Not Idle or Suspended (Performing transactions) Device state Minimum duration 1 ms + 2.5 s 2.5 s 2.5 s

OTG_FS device status register (OTG_FS_DSTS)

Address offset: 0x808 Reset value: 0x0000 0010 This register indicates the status of the core with respect to USB-related events. It must be read on interrupts from the device all interrupts (OTG_FS_DAINT) register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 EERR 2 ENUMSPD r r 1 0 SUSPSTS r

FNSOF Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r Reserved

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 21:8 FNSOF: Frame number of the received SOF Bits 7:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1085/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 3 EERR: Erratic error The core sets this bit to report any erratic errors. Due to erratic errors, the OTG_FS controller goes into Suspended state and an interrupt is generated to the application with Early suspend bit of the OTG_FS_GINTSTS register (ESUSP bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). If the early suspend is asserted due to an erratic error, the application can only perform a soft disconnect recover. Bits 2:1 ENUMSPD: Enumerated speed Indicates the speed at which the OTG_FS controller has come up after speed detection through a chirp sequence. 01: Reserved 10: Reserved 11: Full speed (PHY clock is running at 48 MHz) Others: reserved Bit 0 SUSPSTS: Suspend status In device mode, this bit is set as long as a Suspend condition is detected on the USB. The core enters the Suspended state when there is no activity on the USB data lines for a period of 3 ms. The core comes out of the suspend: When there is an activity on the USB data lines When the application writes to the Remote wakeup signaling bit in the OTG_FS_DCTL register (RWUSIG bit in OTG_FS_DCTL).

OTG_FS device IN endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DIEPMSK)

Address offset: 0x810 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register works with each of the OTG_FS_DIEPINTx registers for all endpoints to generate an interrupt per IN endpoint. The IN endpoint interrupt for a specific status in the OTG_FS_DIEPINTx register can be masked by writing to the corresponding bit in this register. Status bits are masked by default.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 INEPNEM 5 INEPNMM 4 ITTXFEMSK 3 TOM 2 Reserved 1 EPDM rw 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 INEPNEM: IN endpoint NAK effective mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 5 INEPNMM: IN token received with EP mismatch mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 4 ITTXFEMSK: IN token received when TxFIFO empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1086/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 3 TOM: Timeout condition mask (Non-isochronous endpoints) 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 EPDM: Endpoint disabled interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

OTG_FS device OUT endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DOEPMSK)

Address offset: 0x814 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register works with each of the OTG_FS_DOEPINTx registers for all endpoints to generate an interrupt per OUT endpoint. The OUT endpoint interrupt for a specific status in the OTG_FS_DOEPINTx register can be masked by writing into the corresponding bit in this register. Status bits are masked by default.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 OTEPDM 3 STUPM 2 Reserved 1 EPDM rw 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

rw

rw

Bits 31:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 OTEPDM: OUT token received when endpoint disabled mask Applies to control OUT endpoints only. 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 3 STUPM: SETUP phase done mask Applies to control endpoints only. 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 EPDM: Endpoint disabled interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

1087/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS device all endpoints interrupt register (OTG_FS_DAINT)

Address offset: 0x818 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 When a significant event occurs on an endpoint, a OTG_FS_DAINT register interrupts the application using the Device OUT endpoints interrupt bit or Device IN endpoints interrupt bit of the OTG_FS_GINTSTS register (OEPINT or IEPINT in OTG_FS_GINTSTS, respectively). There is one interrupt bit per endpoint, up to a maximum of 16 bits for OUT endpoints and 16 bits for IN endpoints. For a bidirectional endpoint, the corresponding IN and OUT interrupt bits are used. Bits in this register are set and cleared when the application sets and clears bits in the corresponding Device Endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_FS_DIEPINTx/OTG_FS_DOEPINTx).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OEPINT r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IEPINT r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:16 OEPINT: OUT endpoint interrupt bits One bit per OUT endpoint: Bit 16 for OUT endpoint 0, bit 18 for OUT endpoint 3. Bits 15:0 IEPINT: IN endpoint interrupt bits One bit per IN endpoint: Bit 0 for IN endpoint 0, bit 3 for endpoint 3.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1088/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS all endpoints interrupt mask register (OTG_FS_DAINTMSK)

Address offset: 0x81C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The OTG_FS_DAINTMSK register works with the Device endpoint interrupt register to interrupt the application when an event occurs on a device endpoint. However, the OTG_FS_DAINT register bit corresponding to that interrupt is still set.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OEPM rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IEPM rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 OEPM: OUT EP interrupt mask bits One per OUT endpoint: Bit 16 for OUT EP 0, bit 18 for OUT EP 3 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bits 15:0 IEPM: IN EP interrupt mask bits One bit per IN endpoint: Bit 0 for IN EP 0, bit 3 for IN EP 3 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

OTG_FS device VBUS discharge time register (OTG_FS_DVBUSDIS)

Address offset: 0x0828 Reset value: 0x0000 17D7 This register specifies the VBUS discharge time after VBUS pulsing during SRP.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

VBUSDT

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 VBUSDT: Device VBUS discharge time Specifies the VBUS discharge time after VBUS pulsing during SRP. This value equals: VBUS discharge time in PHY clocks / 1 024 Depending on your VBUS load, this value may need adjusting.

1089/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS device VBUS pulsing time register (OTG_FS_DVBUSPULSE)

Address offset: 0x082C Reset value: 0x0000 05B8 This register specifies the VBUS pulsing time during SRP.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DVBUSP

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:0 DVBUSP: Device VBUS pulsing time Specifies the VBUS pulsing time during SRP. This value equals: VBUS pulsing time in PHY clocks / 1 024

OTG_FS device IN endpoint FIFO empty interrupt mask register: (OTG_FS_DIEPEMPMSK)

Address offset: 0x834 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is used to control the IN endpoint FIFO empty interrupt generation (TXFE_OTG_FS_DIEPINTx).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

INEPTXFEM

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 INEPTXFEM: IN EP Tx FIFO empty interrupt mask bits These bits act as mask bits for OTG_FS_DIEPINTx. TXFE interrupt one bit per IN endpoint: Bit 0 for IN endpoint 0, bit 3 for IN endpoint 3 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1090/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS device control IN endpoint 0 control register (OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0)

Address offset: 0x900 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This section describes the OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0 register. Nonzero control endpoints use registers for endpoints 13.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved TXFNUM rw rw rw rw Reserved EPTYP r r Reserved USBAEP NAKSTS EPENA EPDIS STALL CNAK SNAK 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MPSIZ Reserved rw rw

rs

Bit 31 EPENA: Endpoint enable The application sets this bit to start transmitting data on the endpoint 0. The core clears this bit before setting any of the following interrupts on this endpoint: Endpoint disabled Transfer completed Bit 30 EPDIS: Endpoint disable The application sets this bit to stop transmitting data on an endpoint, even before the transfer for that endpoint is complete. The application must wait for the Endpoint disabled interrupt before treating the endpoint as disabled. The core clears this bit before setting the Endpoint disabled interrupt. The application must set this bit only if Endpoint enable is already set for this endpoint. Bits 29:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 27 SNAK: Set NAK A write to this bit sets the NAK bit for the endpoint. Using this bit, the application can control the transmission of NAK handshakes on an endpoint. The core can also set this bit for an endpoint after a SETUP packet is received on that endpoint. Bit 26 CNAK: Clear NAK A write to this bit clears the NAK bit for the endpoint. Bits 25:22 TXFNUM: TxFIFO number This value is set to the FIFO number that is assigned to IN endpoint 0. Bit 21 STALL: STALL handshake The application can only set this bit, and the core clears it when a SETUP token is received for this endpoint. If a NAK bit, a Global IN NAK or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Bit 20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type Hardcoded to 00 for control.

1091/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 17 NAKSTS: NAK status Indicates the following: 0: The core is transmitting non-NAK handshakes based on the FIFO status 1: The core is transmitting NAK handshakes on this endpoint. When this bit is set, either by the application or core, the core stops transmitting data, even if there are data available in the TxFIFO. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 USBAEP: USB active endpoint This bit is always set to 1, indicating that control endpoint 0 is always active in all configurations and interfaces. Bits 14:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 1:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size The application must program this field with the maximum packet size for the current logical endpoint. 00: 64 bytes 01: 32 bytes 10: 16 bytes 11: 8 bytes

OTG device endpoint-x control register (OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset: 0x900 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application uses this register to control the behavior of each logical endpoint other than endpoint 0.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SODDFRM

TXFNUM

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

Stall

MPSIZ Reserved

rs

rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw/ rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 EPENA: Endpoint enable The application sets this bit to start transmitting data on an endpoint. The core clears this bit before setting any of the following interrupts on this endpoint: SETUP phase done Endpoint disabled Transfer completed

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1092/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 30 EPDIS: Endpoint disable The application sets this bit to stop transmitting/receiving data on an endpoint, even before the transfer for that endpoint is complete. The application must wait for the Endpoint disabled interrupt before treating the endpoint as disabled. The core clears this bit before setting the Endpoint disabled interrupt. The application must set this bit only if Endpoint enable is already set for this endpoint. Bit 29 SODDFRM: Set odd frame Applies to isochronous IN and OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to odd frame. Bit 28 SD0PID: Set DATA0 PID Applies to interrupt/bulk IN endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the endpoint data PID (DPID) field in this register to DATA0. SEVNFRM: Set even frame Applies to isochronous IN endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to even frame. Bit 27 SNAK: Set NAK A write to this bit sets the NAK bit for the endpoint. Using this bit, the application can control the transmission of NAK handshakes on an endpoint. The core can also set this bit for OUT endpoints on a Transfer completed interrupt, or after a SETUP is received on the endpoint. Bit 26 CNAK: Clear NAK A write to this bit clears the NAK bit for the endpoint. Bits 25:22 TXFNUM: TxFIFO number These bits specify the FIFO number associated with this endpoint. Each active IN endpoint must be programmed to a separate FIFO number. This field is valid only for IN endpoints. Bit 21 STALL: STALL handshake Applies to non-control, non-isochronous IN endpoints only (access type is rw). The application sets this bit to stall all tokens from the USB host to this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Only the application can clear this bit, never the core. Applies to control endpoints only (access type is rs). The application can only set this bit, and the core clears it, when a SETUP token is received for this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type This is the transfer type supported by this logical endpoint. 00: Control 01: Isochronous 10: Bulk 11: Interrupt

1093/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 17 NAKSTS: NAK status It indicates the following: 0: The core is transmitting non-NAK handshakes based on the FIFO status. 1: The core is transmitting NAK handshakes on this endpoint. When either the application or the core sets this bit: For non-isochronous IN endpoints: The core stops transmitting any data on an IN endpoint, even if there are data available in the TxFIFO. For isochronous IN endpoints: The core sends out a zero-length data packet, even if there are data available in the TxFIFO. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 16 EONUM: Even/odd frame Applies to isochronous IN endpoints only. Indicates the frame number in which the core transmits/receives isochronous data for this endpoint. The application must program the even/odd frame number in which it intends to transmit/receive isochronous data for this endpoint using the SEVNFRM and SODDFRM fields in this register. 0: Even frame 1: Odd frame DPID: Endpoint data PID Applies to interrupt/bulk IN endpoints only. Contains the PID of the packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint. The application must program the PID of the first packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint, after the endpoint is activated. The application uses the SD0PID register field to program either DATA0 or DATA1 PID. 0: DATA0 1: DATA1 Bit 15 USBAEP: USB active endpoint Indicates whether this endpoint is active in the current configuration and interface. The core clears this bit for all endpoints (other than EP 0) after detecting a USB reset. After receiving the SetConfiguration and SetInterface commands, the application must program endpoint registers accordingly and set this bit. Bits 14:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 10:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size The application must program this field with the maximum packet size for the current logical endpoint. This value is in bytes.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1094/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS device control OUT endpoint 0 control register (OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0)

Address offset: 0xB00 Reset value: 0x0000 8000 This section describes the OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0 register. Nonzero control endpoints use registers for endpoints 13.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved EPTYP r r Reserved USBAEP NAKSTS EPENA EPDIS SNPM CNAK SNAK Stall 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MPSIZ Reserved r r

Reserved

rs

rw

Bit 31 EPENA: Endpoint enable The application sets this bit to start transmitting data on endpoint 0. The core clears this bit before setting any of the following interrupts on this endpoint:

SETUP phase done Endpoint disabled Transfer completed

Bit 30 EPDIS: Endpoint disable The application cannot disable control OUT endpoint 0. Bits 29:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 27 SNAK: Set NAK A write to this bit sets the NAK bit for the endpoint. Using this bit, the application can control the transmission of NAK handshakes on an endpoint. The core can also set this bit on a Transfer completed interrupt, or after a SETUP is received on the endpoint. Bit 26 CNAK: Clear NAK A write to this bit clears the NAK bit for the endpoint. Bits 25:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 STALL: STALL handshake The application can only set this bit, and the core clears it, when a SETUP token is received for this endpoint. If a NAK bit or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 20 SNPM: Snoop mode This bit configures the endpoint to Snoop mode. In Snoop mode, the core does not check the correctness of OUT packets before transferring them to application memory. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type Hardcoded to 2b00 for control.

1095/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 17 NAKSTS: NAK status Indicates the following: 0: The core is transmitting non-NAK handshakes based on the FIFO status. 1: The core is transmitting NAK handshakes on this endpoint. When either the application or the core sets this bit, the core stops receiving data, even if there is space in the RxFIFO to accommodate the incoming packet. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 USBAEP: USB active endpoint This bit is always set to 1, indicating that a control endpoint 0 is always active in all configurations and interfaces. Bits 14:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 1:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size The maximum packet size for control OUT endpoint 0 is the same as what is programmed in control IN endpoint 0. 00: 64 bytes 01: 32 bytes 10: 16 bytes 11: 8 bytes

OTG_FS device endpoint-x control register (OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset for OUT endpoints: 0xB00 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application uses this register to control the behavior of each logical endpoint other than endpoint 0.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 SODDFRM/SD1PID SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

Stall

MPSIZ Reserved

Reserved

rs

rs

rw/ rw rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 EPENA: Endpoint enable Applies to IN and OUT endpoints. The application sets this bit to start transmitting data on an endpoint. The core clears this bit before setting any of the following interrupts on this endpoint: SETUP phase done Endpoint disabled Transfer completed

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1096/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Bit 30 EPDIS: Endpoint disable The application sets this bit to stop transmitting/receiving data on an endpoint, even before the transfer for that endpoint is complete. The application must wait for the Endpoint disabled interrupt before treating the endpoint as disabled. The core clears this bit before setting the Endpoint disabled interrupt. The application must set this bit only if Endpoint enable is already set for this endpoint. Bit 29 SD1PID: Set DATA1 PID Applies to interrupt/bulk IN and OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the endpoint data PID (DPID) field in this register to DATA1. SODDFRM: Set odd frame Applies to isochronous IN and OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to odd frame. Bit 28 SD0PID: Set DATA0 PID Applies to interrupt/bulk OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the endpoint data PID (DPID) field in this register to DATA0. SEVNFRM: Set even frame Applies to isochronous OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to even frame. Bit 27 SNAK: Set NAK A write to this bit sets the NAK bit for the endpoint. Using this bit, the application can control the transmission of NAK handshakes on an endpoint. The core can also set this bit for OUT endpoints on a Transfer Completed interrupt, or after a SETUP is received on the endpoint. Bit 26 CNAK: Clear NAK A write to this bit clears the NAK bit for the endpoint. Bits 25:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 STALL: STALL handshake Applies to non-control, non-isochronous OUT endpoints only (access type is rw). The application sets this bit to stall all tokens from the USB host to this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Only the application can clear this bit, never the core. Applies to control endpoints only (access type is rs). The application can only set this bit, and the core clears it, when a SETUP token is received for this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 20 SNPM: Snoop mode This bit configures the endpoint to Snoop mode. In Snoop mode, the core does not check the correctness of OUT packets before transferring them to application memory. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type This is the transfer type supported by this logical endpoint. 00: Control 01: Isochronous 10: Bulk 11: Interrupt

1097/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Bit 17 NAKSTS: NAK status Indicates the following: 0: The core is transmitting non-NAK handshakes based on the FIFO status. 1: The core is transmitting NAK handshakes on this endpoint. When either the application or the core sets this bit: The core stops receiving any data on an OUT endpoint, even if there is space in the RxFIFO to accommodate the incoming packet. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 16 EONUM: Even/odd frame Applies to isochronous IN and OUT endpoints only. Indicates the frame number in which the core transmits/receives isochronous data for this endpoint. The application must program the even/odd frame number in which it intends to transmit/receive isochronous data for this endpoint using the SEVNFRM and SODDFRM fields in this register. 0: Even frame 1: Odd frame DPID: Endpoint data PID Applies to interrupt/bulk OUT endpoints only. Contains the PID of the packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint. The application must program the PID of the first packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint, after the endpoint is activated. The application uses the SD0PID register field to program either DATA0 or DATA1 PID. 0: DATA0 1: DATA1 Bit 15 USBAEP: USB active endpoint Indicates whether this endpoint is active in the current configuration and interface. The core clears this bit for all endpoints (other than EP 0) after detecting a USB reset. After receiving the SetConfiguration and SetInterface commands, the application must program endpoint registers accordingly and set this bit. Bits 14:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 10:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size The application must program this field with the maximum packet size for the current logical endpoint. This value is in bytes.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1098/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) (x = 0..3, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset: 0x908 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0080 This register indicates the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. It is shown in Figure 365. The application must read this register when the IN endpoints interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (IEPINT in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read this register, it must first read the device all endpoints interrupt (OTG_FS_DAINT) register to get the exact endpoint number for the Device endpoint-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the OTG_FS_DAINT and OTG_FS_GINTSTS registers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 TXFE 6 INEPNE 5 4 ITTXFE 3 TOC 2 1 EPDISD 0 XFRC

Reserved

Reserved r

rc_ w1 /rw

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Reserved

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 TXFE: Transmit FIFO empty This interrupt is asserted when the TxFIFO for this endpoint is either half or completely empty. The half or completely empty status is determined by the TxFIFO Empty Level bit in the OTG_FS_GAHBCFG register (TXFELVL bit in OTG_FS_GAHBCFG). Bit 6 INEPNE: IN endpoint NAK effective This bit can be cleared when the application clears the IN endpoint NAK by writing to the CNAK bit in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx. This interrupt indicates that the core has sampled the NAK bit set (either by the application or by the core). The interrupt indicates that the IN endpoint NAK bit set by the application has taken effect in the core. This interrupt does not guarantee that a NAK handshake is sent on the USB. A STALL bit takes priority over a NAK bit. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 ITTXFE: IN token received when TxFIFO is empty Applies to non-periodic IN endpoints only. Indicates that an IN token was received when the associated TxFIFO (periodic/non-periodic) was empty. This interrupt is asserted on the endpoint for which the IN token was received. Bit 3 TOC: Timeout condition Applies only to Control IN endpoints. Indicates that the core has detected a timeout condition on the USB for the last IN token on this endpoint. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 EPDISD: Endpoint disabled interrupt This bit indicates that the endpoint is disabled per the applications request. Bit 0 XFRC: Transfer completed interrupt This field indicates that the programmed transfer is complete on the AHB as well as on the USB, for this endpoint.

1099/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) (x = 0..3, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset: 0xB08 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0080 This register indicates the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. It is shown in Figure 365. The application must read this register when the OUT Endpoints Interrupt bit of the OTG_FS_GINTSTS register (OEPINT bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read this register, it must first read the OTG_FS_DAINT register to get the exact endpoint number for the OTG_FS_DOEPINTx register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the OTG_FS_DAINT and OTG_FS_GINTSTS registers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 B2BSTUP 5 4 OTEPDIS 3 STUP 2 1 EPDISD 0 XFRC

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rc_ w1 /rw

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Reserved

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Bits 31:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 B2BSTUP: Back-to-back SETUP packets received Applies to control OUT endpoint only. This bit indicates that the core has received more than three back-to-back SETUP packets for this particular endpoint. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 OTEPDIS: OUT token received when endpoint disabled Applies only to control OUT endpoints. Indicates that an OUT token was received when the endpoint was not yet enabled. This interrupt is asserted on the endpoint for which the OUT token was received. Bit 3 STUP: SETUP phase done Applies to control OUT endpoint only. Indicates that the SETUP phase for the control endpoint is complete and no more back-toback SETUP packets were received for the current control transfer. On this interrupt, the application can decode the received SETUP data packet. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 EPDISD: Endpoint disabled interrupt This bit indicates that the endpoint is disabled per the applications request. Bit 0 XFRC: Transfer completed interrupt This field indicates that the programmed transfer is complete on the AHB as well as on the USB, for this endpoint.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1100/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS device IN endpoint 0 transfer size register (OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZ0)

Address offset: 0x910 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling endpoint 0. Once endpoint 0 is enabled using the endpoint enable bit in the device control endpoint 0 control registers (EPENA in OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit. Nonzero endpoints use the registers for endpoints 13.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 Reserved rw rw 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 XFRSIZ 2 1 0

PKTCNT

Bits 31:21 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 20:19 PKTCNT: Packet count Indicates the total number of USB packets that constitute the Transfer Size amount of data for endpoint 0. This field is decremented every time a packet (maximum size or short packet) is read from the TxFIFO. Bits 18:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size Indicates the transfer size in bytes for endpoint 0. The core interrupts the application only after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet from the external memory is written to the TxFIFO.

1101/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS device OUT endpoint 0 transfer size register (OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZ0)

Address offset: 0xB10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling endpoint 0. Once endpoint 0 is enabled using the Endpoint enable bit in the OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0 registers (EPENA bit in OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit. Nonzero endpoints use the registers for endpoints 13.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved STUPC NT rw rw PKTCNT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

XFRSIZ Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Reserved

rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:29 STUPCNT: SETUP packet count This field specifies the number of back-to-back SETUP data packets the endpoint can receive. 01: 1 packet 10: 2 packets 11: 3 packets Bits 28:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 PKTCNT: Packet count This field is decremented to zero after a packet is written into the RxFIFO. Bits 18:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size Indicates the transfer size in bytes for endpoint 0. The core interrupts the application only after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet is read from the RxFIFO and written to the external memory.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1102/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS device endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number)
Address offset: 0x910 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling the endpoint. Once the endpoint is enabled using the Endpoint enable bit in the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx registers (EPENA bit in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved MCNT rw/ rw/ r/r r/r rw w w rw rw rw PKTCNT rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

XFRSIZ rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:29 MCNT: Multi count For periodic IN endpoints, this field indicates the number of packets that must be transmitted per frame on the USB. The core uses this field to calculate the data PID for isochronous IN endpoints. 01: 1 packet 10: 2 packets 11: 3 packets Bit 28:19 PKTCNT: Packet count Indicates the total number of USB packets that constitute the Transfer Size amount of data for this endpoint. This field is decremented every time a packet (maximum size or short packet) is read from the TxFIFO. Bits 18:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size This field contains the transfer size in bytes for the current endpoint. The core only interrupts the application after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet from the external memory is written to the TxFIFO.

1103/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

OTG_FS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO status register (OTG_FS_DTXFSTSx) (x = 0..3, where x = Endpoint_number)
Address offset for IN endpoints: 0x918 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) This read-only register contains the free space information for the Device IN endpoint TxFIFO.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

INEPTFSAV

31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. 15:0 INEPTFSAV: IN endpoint TxFIFO space available Indicates the amount of free space available in the Endpoint TxFIFO. Values are in terms of 32-bit words: 0x0: Endpoint TxFIFO is full 0x1: 1 word available 0x2: 2 words available 0xn: n words available Others: Reserved

OTG_FS device OUT endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number)
Address offset: 0xB10 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling the endpoint. Once the endpoint is enabled using Endpoint Enable bit of the OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx registers (EPENA bit in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit.
31 Reserved 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PKTCNT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RXDPID/S TUPCNT

XFRSIZ

rw/r/ rw/r/ rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:29 RXDPID: Received data PID Applies to isochronous OUT endpoints only. This is the data PID received in the last packet for this endpoint. 00: DATA0 01: DATA2 10: DATA1 11: MDATA

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1104/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

STUPCNT: SETUP packet count Applies to control OUT Endpoints only. This field specifies the number of back-to-back SETUP data packets the endpoint can receive. 01: 1 packet 10: 2 packets 11: 3 packets Bit 28:19 PKTCNT: Packet count Indicates the total number of USB packets that constitute the Transfer Size amount of data for this endpoint. This field is decremented every time a packet (maximum size or short packet) is written to the RxFIFO. Bits 18:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size This field contains the transfer size in bytes for the current endpoint. The core only interrupts the application after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet is read from the RxFIFO and written to the external memory.

30.16.5

OTG_FS power and clock gating control register (OTG_FS_PCGCCTL)

Address offset: 0xE00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is available in host and device modes.

31

30

29

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

4 PHYSUSP

3 Reserved

1 GATEHCLK

0 STPPCLK

Reserved

rw

rw rw

Bit 31:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 PHYSUSP: PHY Suspended Indicates that the PHY has been suspended. This bit is updated once the PHY is suspended after the application has set the STPPCLK bit (bit 0). Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 GATEHCLK: Gate HCLK The application sets this bit to gate HCLK to modules other than the AHB Slave and Master and wakeup logic when the USB is suspended or the session is not valid. The application clears this bit when the USB is resumed or a new session starts. Bit 0 STPPCLK: Stop PHY clock The application sets this bit to stop the PHY clock when the USB is suspended, the session is not valid, or the device is disconnected. The application clears this bit when the USB is resumed or a new session starts.

1105/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

30.16.6

OTG_FS register map

The table below gives the USB OTG register map and reset values.

Table 177. OTG_FS register map and reset values

Offset Register
OTG_FS_GOT GCTL Reset value OTG_FS_GOT GINT Reset value OTG_FS_GAH BCFG Reset value HNPCAP CTXPKT FDMOD FHMOD OTG_FS_GUS BCFG Reset value AHBIDL OTG_FS_GRST CTL Reset value TRDT 0 1 0 1 HSHNPEN HNGSCS SRQSCS 0 Reserved 0 0 0 CMOD 0 CSRST 0 GINTMSK 0 PHYSEL TOCAL 0 RXFFLSH Reserved FCRST 0 HSRST 0 MMISM 0 0 0 0 0 0 MMIS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHNPEN CIDSTS HNPRQ BSVLD ASVLD

DBCT

0x000

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0 DBCDNE

0 ADTOCHG

0 HNGDET

1 Reserved

0 HNSSCHG

0 SRSSCHG SEDET 0 TXFELVL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OTGINT SOFM OTGINT SOF

0x004

Reserved

Reserved

0 PTXFELVL

0x008

Reserved

Reserved

0 SRPCAP

0 Reserved

0x00C

Reserved

Reserved

0x010

Reserved 0 IPXFR/INCOMPISOOUT

TXFNUM 0 0 0 0

GOUTNAKEFF

ENUMDNE

GINAKEFF

USBSUSP

ISOODRP

CIDSCHG

HPRTINT

IISOIXFR

USBRST

DISCINT

WKUINT

NPTXFE

SRQINT

OEPINT

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0x014

OTG_FS_GINT STS

Reset value

0 IPXFRM/IISOOXFRM

0 ENUMDNEM

0 USBSUSPM

Reserved

0 GONAKEFFM

0 GINAKEFFM

CIDSCHGM

ISOODRPM

IISOIXFRM

NPTXFEM

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0x018

OTG_FS_GINT MSK

Reset value OTG_FS_GRXS TSR (host mode) 0x01C Reset value OTG_FS_GRXS TSR (Device mode) Reset value OTG_FS_GRXS TSR (host mode) 0x020 Reset value OTG_FS_GRXS TSPR (Device mode) Reset value OTG_FS_GRXF SIZ Reset value

0 DPID

0 BCNT

Reserved

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 FRMNUM 0 0 0 0 FRMNUM 0 0 0 0

PKTSTS 0 0 0

RXFLVLM

ESUSPM

USBRST

PTXFEM

DISCINT

EPMISM

OEPINT

EOPFM

SRQIM

IEPINT

PRTIM

WUIM

HCIM

RXFLVL

ESUSP

PTXFE

IEPINT

HCINT

EOPF

CHNUM 0 0 0 0 0

0 DPID

0 BCNT

PKTSTS 0 0 0

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0

0 BCNT

PKTSTS 0 0 0

DPID 0 DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CHNUM 0 0 0 0 0

0 BCNT 0

PKTSTS 0 0

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0

0x024

Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

RXFD 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1106/1422

SRQ 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Res.

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Table 177. OTG_FS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0x028

RM0090

Register

0x02C

OTG_FS_HNPT XFSIZ/ OTG_FS_DIEP TXF0 Reset value 0 OTG_FS_HNPT XSTS Reset value

Res.

NOVBUSSENS

SOFOUTEN

VBUSBSEN

VBUSASEN

0x038

OTG_FS_ GCCFG

Reserved

Reserved

.PWRDWN

0x03C 0x100

0x104

0x108

0x10C

Reset value OTG_FS_CID Reset value OTG_FS_HPTX FSIZ Reset value OTG_FS_DIEP TXF1 Reset value OTG_FS_DIEP TXF2 Reset value OTG_FS_DIEP TXF3 Reset value OTG_FS_HCFG

0x400

Reserved

0x404 0x408

0x410

0x414

0x418

Reset value OTG_FS_HFIR Reset value OTG_FS_HFNU M Reset value 0 OTG_FS_HPTX STS Reset value 0 OTG_FS_HAIN T Reset value OTG_FS_HAIN TMSK Reset value OTG_FS_HPRT Reset value

0 Reserved FTREM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 FRIVL 1 0 0 1 FRNUM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0

FSLSPCS 0 0 1 1 Y Y 0 0 0 PCDET 0 0 0 0 0 PCSTS 0 0 0 0

PTXQTOP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Y

PTXQSAV Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

PTXFSAVL Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 PSPD 0 ODDFRM 0 LSDEV 0 Reserved 0 0 0 PPWR 0 PLSTS 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0

HAINT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

HAINTM 0 PRST 0 PSUSP 0 PRES 0 POCCHNG 0 POCA 0 PENCHNG 0 PENA

0x440

Reserved

PTCTL 0 EPDIR 0 0

CHENA

0x500

OTG_FS_HCC HAR0 Reset value OTG_FS_HCC HAR1 Reset value OTG_FS_HCC HAR2 Reset value

DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MCNT 0 0 0

EPTYP

CHDIS

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

0 CHENA

0 CHDIS

0 ODDFRM

0 EPTYP

0 LSDEV

0 EPDIR

0x520

MCNT 0 0 0

Reserved

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

0 CHENA

0 CHDIS

0 ODDFRM

0 EPTYP

0 LSDEV

0 EPDIR

0x540

MCNT 0 0 0

Reserved

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

1107/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

FSLSS

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NPTXFD/TX0FD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NPTXFSA/TX0FSA 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NPTXQTOP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NPTQXSAV 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NPTXFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRODUCT_ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PTXFSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 PTXSA 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 INEPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 INEPTXSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INEPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 INEPTXSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INEPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 INEPTXSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Table 177. OTG_FS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset
0x560

Register
OTG_FS_HCC HAR3 Reset value OTG_FS_HCC HAR4 Reset value OTG_FS_HCC HAR5 Reset value OTG_FS_HCC HAR6 Reset value OTG_FS_HCC HAR7 Reset value

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MCNT 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x580

MCNT 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x5A0

MCNT 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x5C0

MCNT 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x5E0

MCNT 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

FRMOR

BBERR

DTERR

TXERR

Reserved

Reserved

STALL

0x508

Reserved

Reset value 0x528 OTG_FS_HCIN T1 Reset value 0x548 OTG_FS_HCIN T2 Reset value 0x568 OTG_FS_HCIN T3 Reset value 0x588 OTG_FS_HCIN T4 Reset value 0x5A8 OTG_FS_HCIN T5 Reset value 0x5C8 OTG_FS_HCIN T6 Reset value 0x5E8 OTG_FS_HCIN T7 Reset value OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK0 Reset value OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK1 Reset value Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

CHH 0 CHH 0 CHH 0 CHH 0 CHH 0 CHH 0 CHH 0 CHH 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0

NAK

ACK

OTG_FS_HCIN T0

Reserved

Reserved

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

Reserved

Reserved

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

Reserved

Reserved

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

Reserved

Reserved

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

Reserved

Reserved

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

Reserved

Reserved

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

Reserved

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0x50C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

Reserved

0x52C

Reserved

Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1108/1422

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

NYET

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Table 177. OTG_FS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0x54C

RM0090

Register
OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK2 Reset value OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK3 Reset value OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK4 Reset value OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK5 Reset value OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK6 Reset value OTG_FS_HCIN TMSK7 Reset value OTG_FS_HCTS IZ0 Reset value

FRMORM

DTERRM

BBERRM

TXERRM

STALLM

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

Reserved

0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DSPD 0

0x56C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

Reserved

0x58C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

Reserved

0x5AC

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

Reserved

0x5CC

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

Reserved

0x5EC

Reserved

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x510

0x530

OTG_FS_HCTS IZ1 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x550

OTG_FS_HCTS IZ2 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x570

OTG_FS_HCTS IZ3 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x590

OTG_FS_HCTS IZ4 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x5B0

OTG_FS_HCTS IZ5 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x5D0

OTG_FS_HCTS IZ6 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x5F0

OTG_FS_HCTS IZ7 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PFIVL 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 NZLSOHSK 0

0x800

OTG_FS_DCFG

Reserved 0

Reset value

DAD

1109/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

XFRCM 0 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

CHHM

NAKM

ACKM

NYET

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Table 177. OTG_FS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset Register
OTG_FS_DCTL POPRGDNE CGONAK SGONAK GONSTS RWUSIG 0 SUSPSTS 0 EPDM 0 Reserved EPDM 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 INEPTFSAV 0 SODDFRM/SD1PID SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFRCM 0 XFRCM 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSI Z CGINAK

SGINAK

GINSTS 0 0 Reserved 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

TCTL

0x804

Reserved

Reset value OTG_FS_DSTS Reset value OTG_FS_DIEP MSK Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP MSK Reset value OTG_FS_DAIN T Reset value 0 OTG_FS_DAIN TMSK Reset value 0 OTG_FS_DVBU SDIS Reset value OTG_FS_DVBU SPULSE Reset value OTG_FS_DIEP EMPMSK Reset value EPENA OTG_FS_DIEP CTL0 FNSOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 EERR

0x808

Reserved

Reserved 0 0 0 0 ITTXFEMSK INEPNMM INEPNEM

0 TOM

0x810

Reserved

0 OTEPDM

0 STUPM

0x814

Reserved

0 OEPINT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IEPINT 0 0 0 0 0

0x818

0x81C

OEPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

IEPM 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x828

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved Reserved TXFNUM 0 0 0 0 Stall EPTY P 0 0 Reserved USBAEP NAKSTS EPDIS CNAK SNAK 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

VBUSDT 1 1 1 0 1 0

0x82C

DVBUSP 1 1 0 1 1 1

0x834

INEPTXFEM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x900

Reserved

0x918

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS0 Reset value

Reserved

0x920

TXFNUM

Stall

OTG_FS_DIEP CTL1

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

Reserved

MPSIZ

0x938

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS1 Reset value

Reserved 0 SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID SODDFRM 0 0 0 0 0

INEPTFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stall

0x940

OTG_FS_DIEP CTL2

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

TXFNUM

Reserved

MPSIZ

0x958

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS2 Reset value

Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0

INEPTFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1110/1422

ENUMSPD

SDIS 0

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Table 177. OTG_FS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset Register
SD0PID/SEVNFRM

RM0090

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

Stall

0x960

OTG_FS_DIEP CTL3

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

0x978

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS3 Reset value EPENA OTG_FS_DOEP CTL0 Reset value

Reserved

0xB00

Reserved

Stall

EPTY P 0 0

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPDIS

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

Stall

0xB20

OTG_FS_DOEP CTL1

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

Stall

0xB40

OTG_FS_DOEP CTL2

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

Stall

0xB60

OTG_FS_DOEP CTL3

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value 0x908 OTG_FS_DIEPI NT0 Reset value 0x928 OTG_FS_DIEPI NT1 Reset value 0x948 OTG_FS_DIEPI NT2 Reset value 0x968 OTG_FS_DIEPI NT3 Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP INT0 Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP INT1 Reset value

INEPNE

Reserved

Reserved

EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0

ITTXFE

Reserved

1 TXFE Reserved

0 INEPNE

0 ITTXFE

0 TOC

Reserved

Reserved

1 TXFE Reserved

0 INEPNE

0 ITTXFE

0 TOC

Reserved

Reserved

1 TXFE Reserved

0 INEPNE

0 ITTXFE

0 TOC

Reserved

Reserved

1 Reserved

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

0xB08

Reserved

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0xB28

Reserved

1111/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

TXFE

TOC

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TXFNUM Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 INEPTFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved MPSI Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Reserved Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Table 177. OTG_FS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset
0xB48

Register
OTG_FS_DOEP INT2 Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP INT3 Reset value OTG_FS_DIEP TSIZ0 Reset value OTG_FS_DIEP TSIZ1 Reset value

B2BSTUP

OTEPDIS

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GATEHCLK

Reserved

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0xB68

Reserved

0x910

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved MCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0

PKTC NT 0 0

Reserved 0 XFRSIZ 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0

0x930

0x950

OTG_FS_DIEP TSIZ2 Reset value

MCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x970

OTG_FS_DIEP TSIZ3 Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP TSIZ0 Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP TSIZ1 Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP TSIZ2 Reset value OTG_FS_DOEP TSIZ3 Reset value OTG_FS_PCG CCTL Reset value

MCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0xB10

STUP CNT 0 0

Reserved

Reserved 0 XFRSIZ 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0

0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0xB30

Reserved

RXDPID/ STUPCNT

Reserved

RXDPID/ STUPCNT

0xB50

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

RXDPID/ STUPCNT

0xB70

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PHYSUSP 0 Reserved 0 0 STPPCLK

0xE00

Reserved

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1112/1422

XFRC 0 0 0

XFRC 0

STUP

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

30.17
30.17.1

OTG_FS programming model

Core initialization
The application must perform the core initialization sequence. If the cable is connected during power-up, the current mode of operation bit in the OTG_FS_GINTSTS (CMOD bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) reflects the mode. The OTG_FS controller enters host mode when an A plug is connected or device mode when a B plug is connected. This section explains the initialization of the OTG_FS controller after power-on. The application must follow the initialization sequence irrespective of host or device mode operation. All core global registers are initialized according to the cores configuration: 1. Program the following fields in the OTG_FS_GAHBCFG register: 2. 3. Global interrupt mask bit GINTMSK = 1 RxFIFO non-empty (RXFLVL bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) Periodic TxFIFO empty level HNP capable bit SRP capable bit FS timeout calibration field USB turnaround time field

Program the following fields in the OTG_FS_GUSBCFG register:

The software must unmask the following bits in the OTG_FS_GINTMSK register: OTG interrupt mask Mode mismatch interrupt mask

4.

The software can read the CMOD bit in OTG_FS_GINTSTS to determine whether the OTG_FS controller is operating in host or device mode.

1113/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

30.17.2

Host initialization
To initialize the core as host, the application must perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Program the HPRTINT in the OTG_FS_GINTMSK register to unmask Program the OTG_FS_HCFG register to select full-speed host Program the PPWR bit in OTG_FS_HPRT to 1. This drives VBUS on the USB. Wait for the PCDET interrupt in OTG_FS_HPRT0. This indicates that a device is connecting to the port. Program the PRST bit in OTG_FS_HPRT to 1. This starts the reset process. Wait at least 10 ms for the reset process to complete. Program the PRST bit in OTG_FS_HPRT to 0. Wait for the PENCHNG interrupt in OTG_FS_HPRT. Read the PSPD bit in OTG_FS_HPRT to get the enumerated speed.

10. Program the HFIR register with a value corresponding to the selected PHY clock 1 11. Program the FSLSPCS field in the OTG_FS_HCFG register following the speed of the device detected in step 9. If FSLSPCS has been changed a port reset must be performed. 12. Program the OTG_FS_GRXFSIZ register to select the size of the receive FIFO. 13. Program the OTG_FS_HNPTXFSIZ register to select the size and the start address of the Non-periodic transmit FIFO for non-periodic transactions. 14. Program the OTG_FS_HPTXFSIZ register to select the size and start address of the periodic transmit FIFO for periodic transactions. To communicate with devices, the system software must initialize and enable at least one channel.

30.17.3

Device initialization
The application must perform the following steps to initialize the core as a device on powerup or after a mode change from host to device. 1. Program the following fields in the OTG_FS_DCFG register: 2. 3. 4. Device speed Non-zero-length status OUT handshake USB reset Enumeration done Early suspend USB suspend SOF

Program the OTG_FS_GINTMSK register to unmask the following interrupts:

Program the VBUSBSEN bit in the OTG_FS_GCCFG register to enable VBUS sensing in B device mode and supply the 5 volts across the pull-up resistor on the DP line. Wait for the USBRST interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS. It indicates that a reset has been detected on the USB that lasts for about 10 ms on receiving this interrupt.

Wait for the ENUMDNE interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS. This interrupt indicates the end of reset on the USB. On receiving this interrupt, the application must read the OTG_FS_DSTS

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1114/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

register to determine the enumeration speed and perform the steps listed in Endpoint initialization on enumeration completion on page 1132. At this point, the device is ready to accept SOF packets and perform control transfers on control endpoint 0.

30.17.4

Host programming model

Channel initialization
The application must initialize one or more channels before it can communicate with connected devices. To initialize and enable a channel, the application must perform the following steps: 1. 2. Program the OTG_FS_GINTMSK register to unmask the following: Channel interrupt Non-periodic transmit FIFO empty for OUT transactions (applicable when operating in pipelined transaction-level with the packet count field programmed with more than one). Non-periodic transmit FIFO half-empty for OUT transactions (applicable when operating in pipelined transaction-level with the packet count field programmed with more than one).

3. 4. 5.

Program the OTG_FS_HAINTMSK register to unmask the selected channels interrupts. Program the OTG_FS_HCINTMSK register to unmask the transaction-related interrupts of interest given in the host channel interrupt register. Program the selected channels OTG_FS_HCTSIZx register with the total transfer size, in bytes, and the expected number of packets, including short packets. The application must program the PID field with the initial data PID (to be used on the first OUT transaction or to be expected from the first IN transaction). Program the OTG_FS_HCCHARx register of the selected channel with the devices endpoint characteristics, such as type, speed, direction, and so forth. (The channel can be enabled by setting the channel enable bit to 1 only when the application is ready to transmit or receive any packet).

6.

Halting a channel
The application can disable any channel by programming the OTG_FS_HCCHARx register with the CHDIS and CHENA bits set to 1. This enables the OTG_FS host to flush the posted requests (if any) and generates a channel halted interrupt. The application must wait for the CHH interrupt in OTG_FS_HCINTx before reallocating the channel for other transactions. The OTG_FS host does not interrupt the transaction that has already been started on the USB. Before disabling a channel, the application must ensure that there is at least one free space available in the non-periodic request queue (when disabling a non-periodic channel) or the periodic request queue (when disabling a periodic channel). The application can simply flush the posted requests when the Request queue is full (before disabling the channel), by programming the OTG_FS_HCCHARx register with the CHDIS bit set to 1, and the CHENA bit cleared to 0. The application is expected to disable a channel on any of the following conditions:

1115/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1.

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) When an STALL, TXERR, BBERR or DTERR interrupt in OTG_FS_HCINTx is received for an IN or OUT channel. The application must be able to receive other interrupts (DTERR, Nak, Data, TXERR) for the same channel before receiving the halt. When a DISCINT (Disconnect Device) interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS is received. (The application is expected to disable all enabled channels). When the application aborts a transfer before normal completion.

2. 3.

Operational model
The application must initialize a channel before communicating to the connected device. This section explains the sequence of operation to be performed for different types of USB transactions.

Writing the transmit FIFO The OTG_FS host automatically writes an entry (OUT request) to the periodic/nonperiodic request queue, along with the last DWORD write of a packet. The application must ensure that at least one free space is available in the periodic/non-periodic request queue before starting to write to the transmit FIFO. The application must always write to the transmit FIFO in DWORDs. If the packet size is non-DWORD aligned, the application must use padding. The OTG_FS host determines the actual packet size based on the programmed maximum packet size and transfer size.

Figure 367. Transmit FIFO write task

Start

Read GNPTXSTS/HPTXFSIZ registers for available FIFO and queue spaces

Wait for NPTXFE/PTXFE interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS

No

1 MPS or LPS FIFO space available?

Yes

Yes

Write 1 packet data to transmit FIFO

More packets to send?

No
MPS: Maximum packet size LPS: Last packet size

Done
ai15673b

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1116/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Reading the receive FIFO The application must ignore all packet statuses other than IN data packet (bx0010).

Figure 368. Receive FIFO read task

Start

No

RXFLVL interrupt ?

Yes

Unmask RXFLVL interrupt

Mask RXFLVL interrupt

Unmask RXFLVL interrupt

Read the received packet from the Receive FIFO

Read OTG_FS_GRXSTSP

PKTSTS 0b0010?

No No

Yes Yes

BCNT > 0?

ai15674

Bulk and control OUT/SETUP transactions A typical bulk or control OUT/SETUP pipelined transaction-level operation is shown in Figure 369. See channel 1 (ch_1). Two bulk OUT packets are transmitted. A control

1117/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) SETUP transaction operates in the same way but has only one packet. The assumptions are:

The application is attempting to send two maximum-packet-size packets (transfer size = 1, 024 bytes). The non-periodic transmit FIFO can hold two packets (128 bytes for FS). The non-periodic request queue depth = 4.

Normal bulk and control OUT/SETUP operations The sequence of operations in (channel 1) is as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Initialize channel 1 Write the first packet for channel 1 Along with the last Word write, the core writes an entry to the non-periodic request queue As soon as the non-periodic queue becomes non-empty, the core attempts to send an OUT token in the current frame Write the second (last) packet for channel 1 The core generates the XFRC interrupt as soon as the last transaction is completed successfully In response to the XFRC interrupt, de-allocate the channel for other transfers Handling non-ACK responses

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1118/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Figure 369. Normal bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions
Application 1
init _reg(ch_2) init_reg(ch _1) Non-Periodic Request Queue Assume that this queue can hold 4 entries.

RM0090

AHB

Host

USB

Device

1 2 2

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

set _ch_en (ch _2)

1 MPS

3
ch_1

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

set _ch_en (ch _2)

1 MPS

ch_2 ch_1 ch_2

OU T

D AT A0 MPS

3
AC K

set _ch_en (ch _2)

IN

4 5
RXFLVL interrupt

D AT A0

read_rx_sts read_rx_fifo set _ch_en (ch _2)

1 MPS

ch_1 ch_2 ch_2 ch_2

ACK
O UT

D AT A1 MPS

7
De-allocate (ch_1)

XFRC interrupt

ACK

6
IN

D AT A1
RXFLVL interrupt

read_rx_stsre ad_rx_fifo

1 MPS
RXFLVL interrupt

ACK

ch_2

read_rx_sts

7 9

XFRC interrupt

Disable (ch _2)

RXFLVL interrupt

read_rx_sts

11

CHH interrupt r

10 12

De-allocate (ch _2)

13
ai15675

The channel-specific interrupt service routine for bulk and control OUT/SETUP transactions is shown in the following code samples.

Interrupt service routine for bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions a) Bulk/Control OUT/SETUP

Unmask (NAK/TXERR/STALL/XFRC) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK

1119/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) De-allocate Channel } else if (STALL) { Transfer Done = 1 Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (NAK or TXERR ) { Rewind Buffer Pointers Unmask CHH Disable Channel if (TXERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask ACK } else { Reset Error Count } } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK } The application is expected to write the data packets into the transmit FIFO as and when the space is available in the transmit FIFO and the Request queue. The application can make use of the NPTXFE interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS to find the transmit FIFO space. b) Bulk/Control IN Unmask (TXERR/XFRC/BBERR/STALL/DTERR) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count Unmask CHH Disable Channel

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1120/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Reset Error Count Mask ACK } else if (TXERR or BBERR or STALL) { Unmask CHH Disable Channel if (TXERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask ACK } } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK } else if (DTERR) { Reset Error Count }

RM0090

The application is expected to write the requests as and when the Request queue space is available and until the XFRC interrupt is received.

Bulk and control IN transactions A typical bulk or control IN pipelined transaction-level operation is shown in Figure 370. See channel 2 (ch_2). The assumptions are: The application is attempting to receive two maximum-packet-size packets (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The receive FIFO can contain at least one maximum-packet-size packet and two status Words per packet (72 bytes for FS). The non-periodic request queue depth = 4.

1121/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 370. Bulk/control IN transactions

Application 1
init _reg(ch_2) init_reg(ch _1)

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

AHB

Host

USB
Non-Periodic Request Queue Assume that this queue can hold 4 entries.

Device

1 2 2

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

set _ch_en (ch _2)

1 MPS

3
ch_1

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

set _ch_en (ch _2)

1 MPS

ch_2 ch_1 ch_2

OU T

D AT A0 MPS

3
AC K

set _ch_en (ch _2)

IN

4 5
RXFLVL interrupt

D AT A0

read_rx_sts read_rx_fifo set _ch_en (ch _2)

1 MPS

ch_1 ch_2 ch_2 ch_2

ACK
O UT

D AT A1 MPS

7
De-allocate (ch_1)

XFRC interrupt

ACK

6
IN

D AT A1
RXFLVL interrupt

read_rx_stsre ad_rx_fifo

1 MPS
RXFLVL interrupt

ACK

ch_2

read_rx_sts

7 9

XFRC interrupt

Disable (ch _2)

RXFLVL interrupt

read_rx_sts

11

CHH interrupt r

10 12

De-allocate (ch _2)

13
ai15675

The sequence of operations is as follows: a) b) c) d) e) Initialize channel 2. Set the CHENA bit in HCCHAR2 to write an IN request to the non-periodic request queue. The core attempts to send an IN token after completing the current OUT transaction. The core generates an RXFLVL interrupt as soon as the received packet is written to the receive FIFO. In response to the RXFLVL interrupt, mask the RXFLVL interrupt and read the received packet status to determine the number of bytes received, then read the receive FIFO accordingly. Following this, unmask the RXFLVL interrupt.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1122/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) f) g) h) i)

RM0090

The core generates the RXFLVL interrupt for the transfer completion status entry in the receive FIFO. The application must read and ignore the receive packet status when the receive packet status is not an IN data packet (PKTSTS in GRXSTSR 0b0010). The core generates the XFRC interrupt as soon as the receive packet status is read. In response to the XFRC interrupt, disable the channel and stop writing the OTG_FS_HCCHAR2 register for further requests. The core writes a channel disable request to the non-periodic request queue as soon as the OTG_FS_HCCHAR2 register is written. The core generates the RXFLVL interrupt as soon as the halt status is written to the receive FIFO. Read and ignore the receive packet status. The core generates a CHH interrupt as soon as the halt status is popped from the receive FIFO. Handling non-ACK responses

j) k) l)

m) In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel for other transfers. n)

Control transactions Setup, Data, and Status stages of a control transfer must be performed as three separate transfers. Setup-, Data- or Status-stage OUT transactions are performed similarly to the bulk OUT transactions explained previously. Data- or Status-stage IN transactions are performed similarly to the bulk IN transactions explained previously. For all three stages, the application is expected to set the EPTYP field in OTG_FS_HCCHAR1 to Control. During the Setup stage, the application is expected to set the PID field in OTG_FS_HCTSIZ1 to SETUP.

Interrupt OUT transactions A typical interrupt OUT operation is shown in Figure 371. The assumptions are: a) b) c) d) e) f) The application is attempting to send one packet in every frame (up to 1 maximum packet size), starting with the odd frame (transfer size = 1 024 bytes) The periodic transmit FIFO can hold one packet (1 KB) Periodic request queue depth = 4 Initialize and enable channel 1. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR1. Write the first packet for channel 1. Along with the last Word write of each packet, the OTG_FS host writes an entry to the periodic request queue. The OTG_FS host attempts to send an OUT token in the next (odd) frame. The OTG_FS host generates an XFRC interrupt as soon as the last packet is transmitted successfully. In response to the XFRC interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer.

The sequence of operations is as follows:

1123/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 371. Normal interrupt OUT/IN transactions

Application 1
init_reg(ch _2) init _reg(ch_1)

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

AHB

Host

USB

Device

1 2 2

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

1 MPS

3
ch_1 ch_2

Periodic Request Queue Assume that this queue can hold 4 entries.

set_ch_en (ch_2)

3
OU T

DATA0 M PS

Odd (micro) frame

5 6
init _reg(ch_1) write_tx_fifo (ch_1)
XFRC interrupt
ACK

4
1 MPS
RXFLVL interrupt

IN

5
DATA0

read_rx_sts read_rx_fifo

1 MPS
RXFLVL interrupt

ACK

read_rx_sts

7 9

XFRC interrupt

ch_1 ch_2

init_reg(ch _2) set_ch_en (ch_2)

OU T

XFRC interrupt

init _reg(ch_1)

DATA1 MPS
ACK
IN

Even (micro) frame

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

1 MPS

DATA1

ai15676

Interrupt service routine for interrupt OUT/IN transactions a) Interrupt OUT

Unmask (NAK/TXERR/STALL/XFRC/FRMOR) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK De-allocate Channel } else if (STALL or FRMOR) { Mask ACK Unmask CHH

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1124/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Disable Channel if (STALL) { Transfer Done = 1 } } else if (NAK or TXERR) { Rewind Buffer Pointers Reset Error Count Mask ACK Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel (in next b_interval - 1 Frame) } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK } The application uses the NPTXFE interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS to find the transmit FIFO space. b) Interrupt IN Unmask (NAK/TXERR/XFRC/BBERR/STALL/FRMOR/DTERR) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK if (OTG_FS_HCTSIZx.PKTCNT == 0) { De-allocate Channel } else { Transfer Done = 1 Unmask CHH Disable Channel

1125/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) } } else if (STALL or FRMOR or NAK or DTERR or BBERR) { Mask ACK Unmask CHH Disable Channel if (STALL or BBERR) { Reset Error Count Transfer Done = 1 } else if (!FRMOR) { Reset Error Count } } else if (TXERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask ACK Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else Re-initialize Channel (in next b_interval - 1 /Frame) } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK }

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1126/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Interrupt IN transactions The assumptions are: The application is attempting to receive one packet (up to 1 maximum packet size) in every frame, starting with odd (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The receive FIFO can hold at least one maximum-packet-size packet and two status Words per packet (1 031 bytes). Periodic request queue depth = 4.

Normal interrupt IN operation The sequence of operations is as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) Initialize channel 2. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR2. Set the CHENA bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR2 to write an IN request to the periodic request queue. The OTG_FS host writes an IN request to the periodic request queue for each OTG_FS_HCCHAR2 register write with the CHENA bit set. The OTG_FS host attempts to send an IN token in the next (odd) frame. As soon as the IN packet is received and written to the receive FIFO, the OTG_FS host generates an RXFLVL interrupt. In response to the RXFLVL interrupt, read the received packet status to determine the number of bytes received, then read the receive FIFO accordingly. The application must mask the RXFLVL interrupt before reading the receive FIFO, and unmask after reading the entire packet. The core generates the RXFLVL interrupt for the transfer completion status entry in the receive FIFO. The application must read and ignore the receive packet status when the receive packet status is not an IN data packet (PKTSTS in GRXSTSR 0b0010). The core generates an XFRC interrupt as soon as the receive packet status is read. In response to the XFRC interrupt, read the PKTCNT field in OTG_FS_HCTSIZ2. If the PKTCNT bit in OTG_FS_HCTSIZ2 is not equal to 0, disable the channel before re-initializing the channel for the next transfer, if any). If PKTCNT bit in OTG_FS_HCTSIZ2 = 0, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer. This time, the application must reset the ODDFRM bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR2.

g)

h) i)

1127/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Isochronous OUT transactions A typical isochronous OUT operation is shown in Figure 372. The assumptions are: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) The application is attempting to send one packet every frame (up to 1 maximum packet size), starting with an odd frame. (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The periodic transmit FIFO can hold one packet (1 KB). Periodic request queue depth = 4. Initialize and enable channel 1. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR1. Write the first packet for channel 1. Along with the last Word write of each packet, the OTG_FS host writes an entry to the periodic request queue. The OTG_FS host attempts to send the OUT token in the next frame (odd). The OTG_FS host generates the XFRC interrupt as soon as the last packet is transmitted successfully. In response to the XFRC interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer. Handling non-ACK responses

The sequence of operations is as follows:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1128/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Figure 372. Normal isochronous OUT/IN transactions
Application 1
init_reg(ch _2) init _reg(ch_1)

RM0090

AHB

Host

USB

Device

1 2 2

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

1 MPS

3
ch_1 ch_2

Periodic Request Queue Assume that this queue can hold 4 entries.

set_ch_en (ch_2)

3
OU T

DATA0 M PS

Odd (micro) frame

5 6
init _reg(ch_1) write_tx_fifo (ch_1)
XFRC interrupt
ACK

4
1 MPS
RXFLVL interrupt

IN

5
DATA0

read_rx_sts read_rx_fifo

1 MPS
RXFLVL interrupt

ACK

read_rx_sts

7 9

XFRC interrupt

ch_1 ch_2

init_reg(ch _2) set_ch_en (ch_2)

OU T

XFRC interrupt

init _reg(ch_1)

DATA1 MPS
ACK
IN

Even (micro) frame

write_tx_fifo (ch_1)

1 MPS

DATA1

ai15676

Interrupt service routine for isochronous OUT/IN transactions Code sample: Isochronous OUT

Unmask (FRMOR/XFRC) if (XFRC) { De-allocate Channel } else if (FRMOR) { Unmask CHH Disable Channel }

1129/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 else if (CHH) { Mask CHH De-allocate Channel }

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

Code sample: Isochronous IN Unmask (TXERR/XFRC/FRMOR/BBERR) if (XFRC or FRMOR) { if (XFRC and (OTG_FS_HCTSIZx.PKTCNT == 0)) { Reset Error Count De-allocate Channel } else { Unmask CHH Disable Channel } } else if (TXERR or BBERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel } }

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1130/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Isochronous IN transactions The assumptions are: a) b) c) d) e) f) The application is attempting to receive one packet (up to 1 maximum packet size) in every frame starting with the next odd frame (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The receive FIFO can hold at least one maximum-packet-size packet and two status Word per packet (1 031 bytes). Periodic request queue depth = 4. Initialize channel 2. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR2. Set the CHENA bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR2 to write an IN request to the periodic request queue. The OTG_FS host writes an IN request to the periodic request queue for each OTG_FS_HCCHAR2 register write with the CHENA bit set. The OTG_FS host attempts to send an IN token in the next odd frame. As soon as the IN packet is received and written to the receive FIFO, the OTG_FS host generates an RXFLVL interrupt. In response to the RXFLVL interrupt, read the received packet status to determine the number of bytes received, then read the receive FIFO accordingly. The application must mask the RXFLVL interrupt before reading the receive FIFO, and unmask it after reading the entire packet. The core generates an RXFLVL interrupt for the transfer completion status entry in the receive FIFO. This time, the application must read and ignore the receive packet status when the receive packet status is not an IN data packet (PKTSTS bit in OTG_FS_GRXSTSR 0b0010). The core generates an XFRC interrupt as soon as the receive packet status is read. In response to the XFRC interrupt, read the PKTCNT field in OTG_FS_HCTSIZ2. If PKTCNT 0 in OTG_FS_HCTSIZ2, disable the channel before re-initializing the channel for the next transfer, if any. If PKTCNT = 0 in OTG_FS_HCTSIZ2, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer. This time, the application must reset the ODDFRM bit in OTG_FS_HCCHAR2.

The sequence of operations is as follows:

g)

h) i)

Selecting the queue depth Choose the periodic and non-periodic request queue depths carefully to match the number of periodic/non-periodic endpoints accessed. The non-periodic request queue depth affects the performance of non-periodic transfers. The deeper the queue (along with sufficient FIFO size), the more often the core is able to pipeline non-periodic transfers. If the queue size is small, the core is able to put in new requests only when the queue space is freed up. The cores periodic request queue depth is critical to perform periodic transfers as scheduled. Select the periodic queue depth, based on the number of periodic transfers scheduled in a microframe. If the periodic request queue depth is smaller than the periodic transfers scheduled in a microframe, a frame overrun condition occurs.

Handling babble conditions OTG_FS controller handles two cases of babble: packet babble and port babble. Packet babble occurs if the device sends more data than the maximum packet size for

1131/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) the channel. Port babble occurs if the core continues to receive data from the device at EOF2 (the end of frame 2, which is very close to SOF). When OTG_FS controller detects a packet babble, it stops writing data into the Rx buffer and waits for the end of packet (EOP). When it detects an EOP, it flushes already written data in the Rx buffer and generates a Babble interrupt to the application. When OTG_FS controller detects a port babble, it flushes the RxFIFO and disables the port. The core then generates a Port disabled interrupt (HPRTINT in OTG_FS_GINTSTS, PENCHNG in OTG_FS_HPRT). On receiving this interrupt, the application must determine that this is not due to an overcurrent condition (another cause of the Port Disabled interrupt) by checking POCA in OTG_FS_HPRT, then perform a soft reset. The core does not send any more tokens after it has detected a port babble condition.

30.17.5

Device programming model

Endpoint initialization on USB reset
1. 2. Set the NAK bit for all OUT endpoints 3. SNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx (for all OUT endpoints) INEP0 = 1 in OTG_FS_DAINTMSK (control 0 IN endpoint) OUTEP0 = 1 in OTG_FS_DAINTMSK (control 0 OUT endpoint) STUP = 1 in DOEPMSK XFRC = 1 in DOEPMSK XFRC = 1 in DIEPMSK TOC = 1 in DIEPMSK Program the OTG_FS_GRXFSIZ register, to be able to receive control OUT data and setup data. If thresholding is not enabled, at a minimum, this must be equal to 1 max packet size of control endpoint 0 + 2 Words (for the status of the control OUT data packet) + 10 Words (for setup packets). Program the OTG_FS_TX0FSIZ register (depending on the FIFO number chosen) to be able to transmit control IN data. At a minimum, this must be equal to 1 max packet size of control endpoint 0. Unmask the following interrupt bits

Set up the Data FIFO RAM for each of the FIFOs

4.

Program the following fields in the endpoint-specific registers for control OUT endpoint 0 to receive a SETUP packet STUPCNT = 3 in OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZ0 (to receive up to 3 back-to-back SETUP packets)

At this point, all initialization required to receive SETUP packets is done.

Endpoint initialization on enumeration completion

1. 2. On the Enumeration Done interrupt (ENUMDNE in OTG_FS_GINTSTS), read the OTG_FS_DSTS register to determine the enumeration speed. Program the MPSIZ field in OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0 to set the maximum packet size. This step configures control endpoint 0. The maximum packet size for a control endpoint depends on the enumeration speed.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1132/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

At this point, the device is ready to receive SOF packets and is configured to perform control transfers on control endpoint 0.

Endpoint initialization on SetAddress command

This section describes what the application must do when it receives a SetAddress command in a SETUP packet. 1. 1. Program the OTG_FS_DCFG register with the device address received in the SetAddress command Program the core to send out a status IN packet

Endpoint initialization on SetConfiguration/SetInterface command

This section describes what the application must do when it receives a SetConfiguration or SetInterface command in a SETUP packet. 1. When a SetConfiguration command is received, the application must program the endpoint registers to configure them with the characteristics of the valid endpoints in the new configuration. When a SetInterface command is received, the application must program the endpoint registers of the endpoints affected by this command. Some endpoints that were active in the prior configuration or alternate setting are not valid in the new configuration or alternate setting. These invalid endpoints must be deactivated. Unmask the interrupt for each active endpoint and mask the interrupts for all inactive endpoints in the OTG_FS_DAINTMSK register. Set up the Data FIFO RAM for each FIFO. After all required endpoints are configured; the application must program the core to send a status IN packet.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

At this point, the device core is configured to receive and transmit any type of data packet.

Endpoint activation
This section describes the steps required to activate a device endpoint or to configure an existing device endpoint to a new type. 1. Program the characteristics of the required endpoint into the following fields of the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx register (for IN or bidirectional endpoints) or the OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx register (for OUT or bidirectional endpoints). 2. Maximum packet size USB active endpoint = 1 Endpoint start data toggle (for interrupt and bulk endpoints) Endpoint type TxFIFO number

Once the endpoint is activated, the core starts decoding the tokens addressed to that endpoint and sends out a valid handshake for each valid token received for the endpoint.

Endpoint deactivation
This section describes the steps required to deactivate an existing endpoint.

1133/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1.

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) In the endpoint to be deactivated, clear the USB active endpoint bit in the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx register (for IN or bidirectional endpoints) or the OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx register (for OUT or bidirectional endpoints). Once the endpoint is deactivated, the core ignores tokens addressed to that endpoint, which results in a timeout on the USB.

2. Note:

The application must meet the following conditions to set up the device core to handle traffic: NPTXFEM and RXFLVLM in the OTG_FS_GINTMSK register must be cleared.

30.17.6

Operational model
SETUP and OUT data transfers
This section describes the internal data flow and application-level operations during data OUT transfers and SETUP transactions.

Packet read

This section describes how to read packets (OUT data and SETUP packets) from the receive FIFO. 1. 2. On catching an RXFLVL interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS register), the application must read the Receive status pop register (OTG_FS_GRXSTSP). The application can mask the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) by writing to RXFLVL = 0 (in OTG_FS_GINTMSK), until it has read the packet from the receive FIFO. If the received packets byte count is not 0, the byte count amount of data is popped from the receive Data FIFO and stored in memory. If the received packet byte count is 0, no data is popped from the receive data FIFO. The receive FIFOs packet status readout indicates one of the following: a) Global OUT NAK pattern: PKTSTS = Global OUT NAK, BCNT = 0x000, EPNUM = Dont Care (0x0), DPID = Dont Care (0b00). These data indicate that the global OUT NAK bit has taken effect. SETUP packet pattern: PKTSTS = SETUP, BCNT = 0x008, EPNUM = Control EP Num, DPID = D0. These data indicate that a SETUP packet for the specified endpoint is now available for reading from the receive FIFO. Setup stage done pattern: PKTSTS = Setup Stage Done, BCNT = 0x0, EPNUM = Control EP Num, DPID = Dont Care (0b00). These data indicate that the Setup stage for the specified endpoint has completed and the Data stage has started. After this entry is popped from the receive FIFO, the core asserts a Setup interrupt on the specified control OUT endpoint. Data OUT packet pattern: PKTSTS = DataOUT, BCNT = size of the received data OUT packet (0 BCNT 1 024), EPNUM = EPNUM on which the packet was received, DPID = Actual Data PID. Data transfer completed pattern: PKTSTS = Data OUT Transfer Done, BCNT = 0x0, EPNUM = OUT EP Num on which the data transfer is complete, DPID = Dont Care (0b00). These data indicate that an OUT data transfer for the specified OUT endpoint has

3.

4.

b)

c)

d)

e)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1134/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

completed. After this entry is popped from the receive FIFO, the core asserts a Transfer Completed interrupt on the specified OUT endpoint. 5. 6. After the data payload is popped from the receive FIFO, the RXFLVL interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) must be unmasked. Steps 15 are repeated every time the application detects assertion of the interrupt line due to RXFLVL in OTG_FS_GINTSTS. Reading an empty receive FIFO can result in undefined core behavior.

Figure 373 provides a flowchart of the above procedure. Figure 373. Receive FIFO packet read

wait until RXFLVL in OTG_FS_GINTSTSG

rd_data = rd_reg (OTG_FS_GRXSTSP);

rd_data.BCNT = 0

rcv_out_pkt ()

N
word_cnt = BCNT[11:2] C + (BCNT[1] | BCNT[1])

packet store in memory

mem[0: word_cnt 1] = rd_rxfifo(rd_data.EPNUM, word_cnt)

ai15677b

SETUP transactions

This section describes how the core handles SETUP packets and the applications sequence for handling SETUP transactions.

Application requirements To receive a SETUP packet, the STUPCNT field (OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) in a control OUT endpoint must be programmed to a non-zero value. When the application programs the STUPCNT field to a non-zero value, the core receives SETUP packets and writes them to the receive FIFO, irrespective of the NAK status and EPENA bit setting in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx. The STUPCNT field is decremented every time the control endpoint receives a SETUP packet. If the STUPCNT field is not programmed to a proper value before receiving a SETUP packet, the core still receives the SETUP packet and decrements the STUPCNT field, but the application may not be able to

1.

1135/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) determine the correct number of SETUP packets received in the Setup stage of a control transfer. 2. STUPCNT = 3 in OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx The application must always allocate some extra space in the Receive data FIFO, to be able to receive up to three SETUP packets on a control endpoint. The space to be reserved is 10 Words. Three Words are required for the first SETUP packet, 1 Word is required for the Setup stage done Word and 6 Words are required to store two extra SETUP packets among all control endpoints. 3 Words per SETUP packet are required to store 8 bytes of SETUP data and 4 bytes of SETUP status (Setup packet pattern). The core reserves this space in the receive data. FIFO to write SETUP data only, and never uses this space for data packets.

3. 4.

The application must read the 2 Words of the SETUP packet from the receive FIFO. The application must read and discard the Setup stage done Word from the receive FIFO. Internal data flow When a SETUP packet is received, the core writes the received data to the receive FIFO, without checking for available space in the receive FIFO and irrespective of the endpoints NAK and STALL bit settings. The core internally sets the IN NAK and OUT NAK bits for the control IN/OUT endpoints on which the SETUP packet was received.

5.

6.

For every SETUP packet received on the USB, 3 Words of data are written to the receive FIFO, and the STUPCNT field is decremented by 1. The first Word contains control information used internally by the core The second Word contains the first 4 bytes of the SETUP command The third Word contains the last 4 bytes of the SETUP command

7.

When the Setup stage changes to a Data IN/OUT stage, the core writes an entry (Setup stage done Word) to the receive FIFO, indicating the completion of the Setup stage. On the AHB side, SETUP packets are emptied by the application. When the application pops the Setup stage done Word from the receive FIFO, the core interrupts the application with an STUP interrupt (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx), indicating it can process the received SETUP packet. The core clears the endpoint enable bit for control OUT endpoints. Application programming sequence Program the OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx register. STUPCNT = 3 Wait for the RXFLVL interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) and empty the data packets from the receive FIFO. Assertion of the STUP interrupt (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) marks a successful completion of the SETUP Data Transfer. On this interrupt, the application must read the OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx register to determine the number of SETUP packets received and process the last received SETUP packet.

8. 9.

1. 2. 3.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1136/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Figure 374. Processing a SETUP packet

Wait for STUP in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx

RM0090

rem_supcnt = rd_reg(DOEPTSIZx)

setup_cmd[31:0] = mem[4 2 * rem_supcnt] setup_cmd[63:32] = mem[5 2 * rem_supcnt]

Find setup cmd type

Read

ctrl-rd/wr/2 stage

Write

2-stage setup_np_in_pkt Data IN phase setup_np_in_pkt Status IN phase rcv_out_pkt Data OUT phase
ai15678

Handling more than three back-to-back SETUP packets

Per the USB 2.0 specification, normally, during a SETUP packet error, a host does not send more than three back-to-back SETUP packets to the same endpoint. However, the USB 2.0 specification does not limit the number of back-to-back SETUP packets a host can send to the same endpoint. When this condition occurs, the OTG_FS controller generates an interrupt (B2BSTUP in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx).

Setting the global OUT NAK When the application sets the Global OUT NAK (SGONAK bit in OTG_FS_DCTL), the core stops writing data, except SETUP packets, to the receive FIFO. Irrespective of the space availability in the receive FIFO, non-isochronous OUT tokens receive a NAK handshake response, and the core ignores isochronous OUT data packets The core writes the Global OUT NAK pattern to the receive FIFO. The application must reserve enough receive FIFO space to write this data pattern. When the application pops the Global OUT NAK pattern Word from the receive FIFO, the core sets the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS). Once the application detects this interrupt, it can assume that the core is in Global OUT NAK mode. The application can clear this interrupt by clearing the SGONAK bit in OTG_FS_DCTL.

Internal data flow: 1.

2. 3. 4.

Application programming sequence

1137/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1.

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) To stop receiving any kind of data in the receive FIFO, the application must set the Global OUT NAK bit by programming the following field: 2. SGONAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DCTL Wait for the assertion of the GONAKEFF interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS. When asserted, this interrupt indicates that the core has stopped receiving any type of data except SETUP packets. The application can receive valid OUT packets after it has set SGONAK in OTG_FS_DCTL and before the core asserts the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS). The application can temporarily mask this interrupt by writing to the GINAKEFFM bit in the OTG_FS_GINTMSK register. 5. GINAKEFFM = 0 in the OTG_FS_GINTMSK register Whenever the application is ready to exit the Global OUT NAK mode, it must clear the SGONAK bit in OTG_FS_DCTL. This also clears the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS). 6.

3.

4.

OTG_FS_DCTL = 1 in CGONAK GINAKEFFM = 1 in GINTMSK

If the application has masked this interrupt earlier, it must be unmasked as follows: Disabling an OUT endpoint

The application must use this sequence to disable an OUT endpoint that it has enabled. Application programming sequence: 1. Before disabling any OUT endpoint, the application must enable Global OUT NAK mode in the core. 2. 3. SGONAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DCTL Wait for the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) Disable the required OUT endpoint by programming the following fields: 4. EPDIS = 1 in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx SNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx

Wait for the EPDISD interrupt (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx), which indicates that the OUT endpoint is completely disabled. When the EPDISD interrupt is asserted, the core also clears the following bits: EPDIS = 0 in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx EPENA = 0 in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx

5.

The application must clear the Global OUT NAK bit to start receiving data from other non-disabled OUT endpoints. SGONAK = 0 in OTG_FS_DCTL Generic non-isochronous OUT data transfers

This section describes a regular non-isochronous OUT data transfer (control, bulk, or interrupt). Application requirements:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1138/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) 1. 2.

RM0090

Before setting up an OUT transfer, the application must allocate a buffer in the memory to accommodate all data to be received as part of the OUT transfer. For OUT transfers, the transfer size field in the endpoints transfer size register must be a multiple of the maximum packet size of the endpoint, adjusted to the Word boundary. transfer size[EPNUM] = n (MPSIZ[EPNUM] + 4 (MPSIZ[EPNUM] mod 4)) packet count[EPNUM] = n n>0

3.

On any OUT endpoint interrupt, the application must read the endpoints transfer size register to calculate the size of the payload in the memory. The received payload size can be less than the programmed transfer size. Payload size in memory = application programmed initial transfer size core updated final transfer size Number of USB packets in which this payload was received = application programmed initial packet count core updated final packet count

Internal data flow: 1. 2. The application must set the transfer size and packet count fields in the endpointspecific registers, clear the NAK bit, and enable the endpoint to receive the data. Once the NAK bit is cleared, the core starts receiving data and writes it to the receive FIFO, as long as there is space in the receive FIFO. For every data packet received on the USB, the data packet and its status are written to the receive FIFO. Every packet (maximum packet size or short packet) written to the receive FIFO decrements the packet count field for that endpoint by 1. OUT data packets received with bad data CRC are flushed from the receive FIFO automatically. After sending an ACK for the packet on the USB, the core discards nonisochronous OUT data packets that the host, which cannot detect the ACK, resends. The application does not detect multiple back-to-back data OUT packets on the same endpoint with the same data PID. In this case the packet count is not decremented. If there is no space in the receive FIFO, isochronous or non-isochronous data packets are ignored and not written to the receive FIFO. Additionally, nonisochronous OUT tokens receive a NAK handshake reply. In all the above three cases, the packet count is not decremented because no data are written to the receive FIFO.

3.

When the packet count becomes 0 or when a short packet is received on the endpoint, the NAK bit for that endpoint is set. Once the NAK bit is set, the isochronous or nonisochronous data packets are ignored and not written to the receive FIFO, and nonisochronous OUT tokens receive a NAK handshake reply. After the data are written to the receive FIFO, the application reads the data from the receive FIFO and writes it to external memory, one packet at a time per endpoint. At the end of every packet write on the AHB to external memory, the transfer size for the endpoint is decremented by the size of the written packet.

4. 5.

1139/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 6.

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) The OUT data transfer completed pattern for an OUT endpoint is written to the receive FIFO on one of the following conditions: 7. The transfer size is 0 and the packet count is 0 The last OUT data packet written to the receive FIFO is a short packet (0 packet size < maximum packet size)

When either the application pops this entry (OUT data transfer completed), a transfer completed interrupt is generated for the endpoint and the endpoint enable is cleared. Program the OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx register for the transfer size and the corresponding packet count. Program the OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics, and set the EPENA and CNAK bits. EPENA = 1 in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx CNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx

Application programming sequence: 1. 2.

3.

Wait for the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) and empty the data packets from the receive FIFO. This step can be repeated many times, depending on the transfer size. Asserting the XFRC interrupt (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) marks a successful completion of the non-isochronous OUT data transfer. Read the OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx register to determine the size of the received data payload. Generic isochronous OUT data transfer

4. 5.

This section describes a regular isochronous OUT data transfer. Application requirements: 1. 2. All the application requirements for non-isochronous OUT data transfers also apply to isochronous OUT data transfers. For isochronous OUT data transfers, the transfer size and packet count fields must always be set to the number of maximum-packet-size packets that can be received in a single frame and no more. Isochronous OUT data transfers cannot span more than 1 frame. The application must read all isochronous OUT data packets from the receive FIFO (data and status) before the end of the periodic frame (EOPF interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). To receive data in the following frame, an isochronous OUT endpoint must be enabled after the EOPF (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) and before the SOF (OTG_FS_GINTSTS). The internal data flow for isochronous OUT endpoints is the same as that for nonisochronous OUT endpoints, but for a few differences. When an isochronous OUT endpoint is enabled by setting the Endpoint Enable and clearing the NAK bits, the Even/Odd frame bit must also be set appropriately. The core receives data on an isochronous OUT endpoint in a particular frame only if the following condition is met: 3. EONUM (in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx) = SOFFN[0] (in OTG_FS_DSTS) When the application completely reads an isochronous OUT data packet (data and status) from the receive FIFO, the core updates the RXDPID field in

3.

4.

Internal data flow: 1. 2.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1140/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx with the data PID of the last isochronous OUT data packet read from the receive FIFO. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. Program the OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx register for the transfer size and the corresponding packet count Program the OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics and set the Endpoint Enable, ClearNAK, and Even/Odd frame bits. 3. EPENA = 1 CNAK = 1 EONUM = (0: Even/1: Odd)

Wait for the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) and empty the data packets from the receive FIFO This step can be repeated many times, depending on the transfer size. The assertion of the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) marks the completion of the isochronous OUT data transfer. This interrupt does not necessarily mean that the data in memory are good. This interrupt cannot always be detected for isochronous OUT transfers. Instead, the application can detect the IISOOXFRM interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS. Read the OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx register to determine the size of the received transfer and to determine the validity of the data received in the frame. The application must treat the data received in memory as valid only if one of the following conditions is met: RXDPID = D0 (in OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) and the number of USB packets in which this payload was received = 1 RXDPID = D1 (in OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) and the number of USB packets in which this payload was received = 2 RXDPID = D2 (in OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx) and the number of USB packets in which this payload was received = 3 The number of USB packets in which this payload was received = Application programmed initial packet count Core updated final packet count The application can discard invalid data packets.

4.

5. 6.

Incomplete isochronous OUT data transfers

This section describes the application programming sequence when isochronous OUT data packets are dropped inside the core. Internal data flow: 1. For isochronous OUT endpoints, the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) may not always be asserted. If the core drops isochronous OUT data packets, the application could fail to detect the XFRC interrupt (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) under the following circumstances: 2. When the receive FIFO cannot accommodate the complete ISO OUT data packet, the core drops the received ISO OUT data When the isochronous OUT data packet is received with CRC errors When the isochronous OUT token received by the core is corrupted When the application is very slow in reading the data from the receive FIFO

When the core detects an end of periodic frame before transfer completion to all isochronous OUT endpoints, it asserts the incomplete Isochronous OUT data interrupt

1141/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) (IISOOXFRM in OTG_FS_GINTSTS), indicating that an XFRC interrupt (in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) is not asserted on at least one of the isochronous OUT endpoints. At this point, the endpoint with the incomplete transfer remains enabled, but no active transfers remain in progress on this endpoint on the USB. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. Asserting the IISOOXFRM interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) indicates that in the current frame, at least one isochronous OUT endpoint has an incomplete transfer. If this occurs because isochronous OUT data is not completely emptied from the endpoint, the application must ensure that the application empties all isochronous OUT data (data and status) from the receive FIFO before proceeding. When all data are emptied from the receive FIFO, the application can detect the XFRC interrupt (OTG_FS_DOEPINTx). In this case, the application must reenable the endpoint to receive isochronous OUT data in the next frame.

3.

When it receives an IISOOXFRM interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS), the application must read the control registers of all isochronous OUT endpoints (OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx) to determine which endpoints had an incomplete transfer in the current microframe. An endpoint transfer is incomplete if both the following conditions are met: EONUM bit (in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx) = SOFFN[0] (in OTG_FS_DSTS) EPENA = 1 (in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx)

4. 5.

The previous step must be performed before the SOF interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) is detected, to ensure that the current frame number is not changed. For isochronous OUT endpoints with incomplete transfers, the application must discard the data in the memory and disable the endpoint by setting the EPDIS bit in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx. Wait for the EPDIS interrupt (in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) and enable the endpoint to receive new data in the next frame. Because the core can take some time to disable the endpoint, the application may not be able to receive the data in the next frame after receiving bad isochronous data.

6.

Stalling a non-isochronous OUT endpoint Put the core in the Global OUT NAK mode. Disable the required endpoint When disabling the endpoint, instead of setting the SNAK bit in OTG_FS_DOEPCTL, set STALL = 1 (in OTG_FS_DOEPCTL). The STALL bit always takes precedence over the NAK bit.

This section describes how the application can stall a non-isochronous endpoint. 1. 2.

3. 4.

When the application is ready to end the STALL handshake for the endpoint, the STALL bit (in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx) must be cleared. If the application is setting or clearing a STALL for an endpoint due to a SetFeature.Endpoint Halt or ClearFeature.Endpoint Halt command, the STALL bit must be set or cleared before the application sets up the Status stage transfer on the control endpoint.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1142/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

Examples
This section describes and depicts some fundamental transfer types and scenarios.

Bulk OUT transaction

Figure 375 depicts the reception of a single Bulk OUT Data packet from the USB to the AHB and describes the events involved in the process. Figure 375. Bulk OUT transaction
Host USB Device Application init_ out_ ep 2
O UT

1 wr_reg (DOEPTSIZx)

XFRSIZ = 64 bytes PKTCNT = 1 EPENA= 1 CNAK = 1

64 bytes

3 4

wr_reg(D OEPCTLx)

AC K

xact _1
D OE P C

RXFLVL iintr

T L x.N A K =1 PKTCN T0

idle until intr

XFRSIZ =0 r
OU T
NA K

rcv_out _pkt()

XF int r RC

On new xfer or RxFIFO not empty

idle until intr

ai15679b

After a SetConfiguration/SetInterface command, the application initializes all OUT endpoints by setting CNAK = 1 and EPENA = 1 (in OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx), and setting a suitable XFRSIZ and PKTCNT in the OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx register. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. host attempts to send data (OUT token) to an endpoint. When the core receives the OUT token on the USB, it stores the packet in the RxFIFO because space is available there. After writing the complete packet in the RxFIFO, the core then asserts the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). On receiving the PKTCNT number of USB packets, the core internally sets the NAK bit for this endpoint to prevent it from receiving any more packets. The application processes the interrupt and reads the data from the RxFIFO. When the application has read all the data (equivalent to XFRSIZ), the core generates an XFRC interrupt (in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx). The application processes the interrupt and uses the setting of the XFRC interrupt bit (in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx) to determine that the intended transfer is complete.

1143/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

IN data transfers

Packet write

This section describes how the application writes data packets to the endpoint FIFO when dedicated transmit FIFOs are enabled. 1. The application can either choose the polling or the interrupt mode. In polling mode, the application monitors the status of the endpoint transmit data FIFO by reading the OTG_FS_DTXFSTSx register, to determine if there is enough space in the data FIFO. In interrupt mode, the application waits for the TXFE interrupt (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) and then reads the OTG_FS_DTXFSTSx register, to determine if there is enough space in the data FIFO. To write a single non-zero length data packet, there must be space to write the entire packet in the data FIFO. To write zero length packet, the application must not look at the FIFO space.

2.

Using one of the above mentioned methods, when the application determines that there is enough space to write a transmit packet, the application must first write into the endpoint control register, before writing the data into the data FIFO. Typically, the application, must do a read modify write on the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx register to avoid modifying the contents of the register, except for setting the Endpoint Enable bit.

The application can write multiple packets for the same endpoint into the transmit FIFO, if space is available. For periodic IN endpoints, the application must write packets only for one microframe. It can write packets for the next periodic transaction only after getting transfer complete for the previous transaction.

Setting IN endpoint NAK When the application sets the IN NAK for a particular endpoint, the core stops transmitting data on the endpoint, irrespective of data availability in the endpoints transmit FIFO. Non-isochronous IN tokens receive a NAK handshake reply Isochronous IN tokens receive a zero-data-length packet reply The core asserts the INEPNE (IN endpoint NAK effective) interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx in response to the SNAK bit in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx. Once this interrupt is seen by the application, the application can assume that the endpoint is in IN NAK mode. This interrupt can be cleared by the application by setting the CNAK bit in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx.

Internal data flow: 1.

2. 3. 4.

Application programming sequence:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1144/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) 1.

RM0090

To stop transmitting any data on a particular IN endpoint, the application must set the IN NAK bit. To set this bit, the following field must be programmed. SNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx Wait for assertion of the INEPNE interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx. This interrupt indicates that the core has stopped transmitting data on the endpoint. The core can transmit valid IN data on the endpoint after the application has set the NAK bit, but before the assertion of the NAK Effective interrupt. The application can mask this interrupt temporarily by writing to the INEPNEM bit in DIEPMSK. INEPNEM = 0 in DIEPMSK To exit Endpoint NAK mode, the application must clear the NAK status bit (NAKSTS) in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx. This also clears the INEPNE interrupt (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx). CNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx INEPNEM = 1 in DIEPMSK If the application masked this interrupt earlier, it must be unmasked as follows: IN endpoint disable

2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

Use the following sequence to disable a specific IN endpoint that has been previously enabled. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. The application must stop writing data on the AHB for the IN endpoint to be disabled. The application must set the endpoint in NAK mode. SNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx Wait for the INEPNE interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx. Set the following bits in the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx register for the endpoint that must be disabled. 5. EPDIS = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx SNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx

Assertion of the EPDISD interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx indicates that the core has completely disabled the specified endpoint. Along with the assertion of the interrupt, the core also clears the following bits: EPENA = 0 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx EPDIS = 0 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx

6. 7.

The application must read the OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx register for the periodic IN EP, to calculate how much data on the endpoint were transmitted on the USB. The application must flush the data in the Endpoint transmit FIFO, by setting the following fields in the OTG_FS_GRSTCTL register: TXFNUM (in OTG_FS_GRSTCTL) = Endpoint transmit FIFO number TXFFLSH in (OTG_FS_GRSTCTL) = 1

The application must poll the OTG_FS_GRSTCTL register, until the TXFFLSH bit is cleared by the core, which indicates the end of flush operation. To transmit new data on this endpoint, the application can re-enable the endpoint at a later point.

1145/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Generic non-periodic IN data transfers Before setting up an IN transfer, the application must ensure that all data to be transmitted as part of the IN transfer are part of a single buffer. For IN transfers, the Transfer Size field in the Endpoint Transfer Size register denotes a payload that constitutes multiple maximum-packet-size packets and a single short packet. This short packet is transmitted at the end of the transfer. To transmit a few maximum-packet-size packets and a short packet at the end of the transfer: Transfer size[EPNUM] = x MPSIZ[EPNUM] + sp If (sp > 0), then packet count[EPNUM] = x + 1. Otherwise, packet count[EPNUM] = x To transmit a single zero-length data packet: Transfer size[EPNUM] = 0 Packet count[EPNUM] = 1 To transmit a few maximum-packet-size packets and a zero-length data packet at the end of the transfer, the application must split the transfer into two parts. The first sends maximum-packet-size data packets and the second sends the zerolength data packet alone. First transfer: transfer size[EPNUM] = x MPSIZ[epnum]; packet count = n; Second transfer: transfer size[EPNUM] = 0; packet count = 1; 3. Once an endpoint is enabled for data transfers, the core updates the Transfer size register. At the end of the IN transfer, the application must read the Transfer size register to determine how much data posted in the transmit FIFO have already been sent on the USB. Data fetched into transmit FIFO = Application-programmed initial transfer size coreupdated final transfer size Data transmitted on USB = (application-programmed initial packet count Core updated final packet count) MPSIZ[EPNUM] Data yet to be transmitted on USB = (Application-programmed initial transfer size data transmitted on USB)

Application requirements: 1. 2.

4.

Internal data flow: 1. 2. 3. The application must set the transfer size and packet count fields in the endpointspecific registers and enable the endpoint to transmit the data. The application must also write the required data to the transmit FIFO for the endpoint. Every time a packet is written into the transmit FIFO by the application, the transfer size for that endpoint is decremented by the packet size. The data is fetched from the memory by the application, until the transfer size for the endpoint becomes 0. After writing the data into the FIFO, the number of packets in FIFO count is incremented (this is a 3-bit count, internally maintained by the core for each IN endpoint transmit FIFO. The maximum number of packets maintained by the core at any time in an IN endpoint FIFO is eight). For zero-length packets, a separate flag is set for each FIFO, without any data in the FIFO. Once the data are written to the transmit FIFO, the core reads them out upon receiving an IN token. For every non-isochronous IN data packet transmitted with an ACK

4.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1146/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

handshake, the packet count for the endpoint is decremented by one, until the packet count is zero. The packet count is not decremented on a timeout. 5. 6. For zero length packets (indicated by an internal zero length flag), the core sends out a zero-length packet for the IN token and decrements the packet count field. If there are no data in the FIFO for a received IN token and the packet count field for that endpoint is zero, the core generates an IN token received when TxFIFO is empty (ITTXFE) Interrupt for the endpoint, provided that the endpoint NAK bit is not set. The core responds with a NAK handshake for non-isochronous endpoints on the USB. The core internally rewinds the FIFO pointers and no timeout interrupt is generated. When the transfer size is 0 and the packet count is 0, the transfer complete (XFRC) interrupt for the endpoint is generated and the endpoint enable is cleared. Program the OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx register with the transfer size and corresponding packet count. Program the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics and set the CNAK and EPENA (Endpoint Enable) bits. When transmitting non-zero length data packet, the application must poll the OTG_FS_DTXFSTSx register (where x is the FIFO number associated with that endpoint) to determine whether there is enough space in the data FIFO. The application can optionally use TXFE (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) before writing the data. Generic periodic IN data transfers

7. 8.

Application programming sequence: 1. 2. 3.

This section describes a typical periodic IN data transfer. Application requirements: 1. Application requirements 1, 2, 3, and 4 of Generic non-periodic IN data transfers on page 1146 also apply to periodic IN data transfers, except for a slight modification of requirement 2. The application can only transmit multiples of maximum-packet-size data packets or multiples of maximum-packet-size packets, plus a short packet at the end. To transmit a few maximum-packet-size packets and a short packet at the end of the transfer, the following conditions must be met: transfer size[EPNUM] = x MPSIZ[EPNUM] + sp (where x is an integer 0, and 0 sp < MPSIZ[EPNUM]) If (sp > 0), packet count[EPNUM] = x + 1 Otherwise, packet count[EPNUM] = x; MCNT[EPNUM] = packet count[EPNUM] The application cannot transmit a zero-length data packet at the end of a transfer. It can transmit a single zero-length data packet by itself. To transmit a single zerolength data packet: transfer size[EPNUM] = 0 packet count[EPNUM] = 1 MCNT[EPNUM] = packet count[EPNUM]

1147/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 2.

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) The application can only schedule data transfers one frame at a time. 3. (MCNT 1) MPSIZ XFERSIZ MCNT MPSIZ PKTCNT = MCNT (in OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx) If XFERSIZ < MCNT MPSIZ, the last data packet of the transfer is a short packet. Note that: MCNT is in OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx, MPSIZ is in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx, PKTCNT is in OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx and XFERSIZ is in OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx

The complete data to be transmitted in the frame must be written into the transmit FIFO by the application, before the IN token is received. Even when 1 Word of the data to be transmitted per frame is missing in the transmit FIFO when the IN token is received, the core behaves as when the FIFO is empty. When the transmit FIFO is empty: A zero data length packet would be transmitted on the USB for isochronous IN endpoints A NAK handshake would be transmitted on the USB for interrupt IN endpoints

Internal data flow: 1. 2. 3. The application must set the transfer size and packet count fields in the endpointspecific registers and enable the endpoint to transmit the data. The application must also write the required data to the associated transmit FIFO for the endpoint. Every time the application writes a packet to the transmit FIFO, the transfer size for that endpoint is decremented by the packet size. The data are fetched from application memory until the transfer size for the endpoint becomes 0. When an IN token is received for a periodic endpoint, the core transmits the data in the FIFO, if available. If the complete data payload (complete packet, in dedicated FIFO mode) for the frame is not present in the FIFO, then the core generates an IN token received when TxFIFO empty interrupt for the endpoint. 5. 6. A zero-length data packet is transmitted on the USB for isochronous IN endpoints A NAK handshake is transmitted on the USB for interrupt IN endpoints For isochronous endpoints, when a zero- or non-zero-length data packet is transmitted For interrupt endpoints, when an ACK handshake is transmitted When the transfer size and packet count are both 0, the transfer completed interrupt for the endpoint is generated and the endpoint enable is cleared.

4.

The packet count for the endpoint is decremented by 1 under the following conditions:

At the Periodic frame Interval (controlled by PFIVL in OTG_FS_DCFG), when the core finds non-empty any of the isochronous IN endpoint FIFOs scheduled for the current frame non-empty, the core generates an IISOIXFR interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1148/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Application programming sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4.

RM0090

Program the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics and set the CNAK and EPENA bits. Write the data to be transmitted in the next frame to the transmit FIFO. Asserting the ITTXFE interrupt (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) indicates that the application has not yet written all data to be transmitted to the transmit FIFO. If the interrupt endpoint is already enabled when this interrupt is detected, ignore the interrupt. If it is not enabled, enable the endpoint so that the data can be transmitted on the next IN token attempt. Asserting the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) with no ITTXFE interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx indicates the successful completion of an isochronous IN transfer. A read to the OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx register must give transfer size = 0 and packet count = 0, indicating all data were transmitted on the USB. Asserting the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx), with or without the ITTXFE interrupt (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx), indicates the successful completion of an interrupt IN transfer. A read to the OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx register must give transfer size = 0 and packet count = 0, indicating all data were transmitted on the USB. Asserting the incomplete isochronous IN transfer (IISOIXFR) interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS with none of the aforementioned interrupts indicates the core did not receive at least 1 periodic IN token in the current frame. Incomplete isochronous IN data transfers

5.

6.

7.

This section describes what the application must do on an incomplete isochronous IN data transfer. Internal data flow: 1. An isochronous IN transfer is treated as incomplete in one of the following conditions: a) The core receives a corrupted isochronous IN token on at least one isochronous IN endpoint. In this case, the application detects an incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). The application is slow to write the complete data payload to the transmit FIFO and an IN token is received before the complete data payload is written to the FIFO. In this case, the application detects an IN token received when TxFIFO empty interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx. The application can ignore this interrupt, as it eventually results in an incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) at the end of periodic frame. The core transmits a zero-length data packet on the USB in response to the received IN token. 2. 3. 4. The application must stop writing the data payload to the transmit FIFO as soon as possible. The application must set the NAK bit and the disable bit for the endpoint. The core disables the endpoint, clears the disable bit, and asserts the Endpoint Disable interrupt for the endpoint.

b)

1149/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Application programming sequence: 1.

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

The application can ignore the IN token received when TxFIFO empty interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx on any isochronous IN endpoint, as it eventually results in an incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS). Assertion of the incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (in OTG_FS_GINTSTS) indicates an incomplete isochronous IN transfer on at least one of the isochronous IN endpoints. The application must read the Endpoint Control register for all isochronous IN endpoints to detect endpoints with incomplete IN data transfers. The application must stop writing data to the Periodic Transmit FIFOs associated with these endpoints on the AHB. Program the following fields in the OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx register to disable the endpoint: SNAK = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx EPDIS = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx

2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

The assertion of the Endpoint Disabled interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx indicates that the core has disabled the endpoint. At this point, the application must flush the data in the associated transmit FIFO or overwrite the existing data in the FIFO by enabling the endpoint for a new transfer in the next microframe. To flush the data, the application must use the OTG_FS_GRSTCTL register.

Stalling non-isochronous IN endpoints

This section describes how the application can stall a non-isochronous endpoint. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. Disable the IN endpoint to be stalled. Set the STALL bit as well. EPDIS = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx, when the endpoint is already enabled 3. 4. STALL = 1 in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx The STALL bit always takes precedence over the NAK bit

Assertion of the Endpoint Disabled interrupt (in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx) indicates to the application that the core has disabled the specified endpoint. The application must flush the non-periodic or periodic transmit FIFO, depending on the endpoint type. In case of a non-periodic endpoint, the application must re-enable the other non-periodic endpoints that do not need to be stalled, to transmit data. Whenever the application is ready to end the STALL handshake for the endpoint, the STALL bit must be cleared in OTG_FS_DIEPCTLx. If the application sets or clears a STALL bit for an endpoint due to a SetFeature.Endpoint Halt command or ClearFeature.Endpoint Halt command, the STALL bit must be set or cleared before the application sets up the Status stage transfer on the control endpoint.

5. 6.

Special case: stalling the control OUT endpoint The core must stall IN/OUT tokens if, during the data stage of a control transfer, the host sends more IN/OUT tokens than are specified in the SETUP packet. In this case, the application must enable the ITTXFE interrupt in OTG_FS_DIEPINTx and the OTEPDIS interrupt in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx during the data stage of the control transfer, after the core has transferred the amount of data specified in the SETUP packet. Then, when the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1150/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

application receives this interrupt, it must set the STALL bit in the corresponding endpoint control register, and clear this interrupt.

30.17.7

Worst case response time

When the OTG_FS controller acts as a device, there is a worst case response time for any tokens that follow an isochronous OUT. This worst case response time depends on the AHB clock frequency. The core registers are in the AHB domain, and the core does not accept another token before updating these register values. The worst case is for any token following an isochronous OUT, because for an isochronous transaction, there is no handshake and the next token could come sooner. This worst case value is 7 PHY clocks when the AHB clock is the same as the PHY clock. When the AHB clock is faster, this value is smaller. If this worst case condition occurs, the core responds to bulk/interrupt tokens with a NAK and drops isochronous and SETUP tokens. The host interprets this as a timeout condition for SETUP and retries the SETUP packet. For isochronous transfers, the Incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR) and Incomplete isochronous OUT transfer interrupt (IISOOXFR) inform the application that isochronous IN/OUT packets were dropped.

Choosing the value of TRDT in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG

The value in TRDT (OTG_FS_GUSBCFG) is the time it takes for the MAC, in terms of PHY clocks after it has received an IN token, to get the FIFO status, and thus the first data from the PFC block. This time involves the synchronization delay between the PHY and AHB clocks. The worst case delay for this is when the AHB clock is the same as the PHY clock. In this case, the delay is 5 clocks. Once the MAC receives an IN token, this information (token received) is synchronized to the AHB clock by the PFC (the PFC runs on the AHB clock). The PFC then reads the data from the SPRAM and writes them into the dual clock source buffer. The MAC then reads the data out of the source buffer (4 deep). If the AHB is running at a higher frequency than the PHY, the application can use a smaller value for TRDT (in OTG_FS_GUSBCFG). Figure 376 has the following signals:

tkn_rcvd: Token received information from MAC to PFC dynced_tkn_rcvd: Doubled sync tkn_rcvd, from PCLK to HCLK domain spr_read: Read to SPRAM spr_addr: Address to SPRAM spr_rdata: Read data from SPRAM srcbuf_push: Push to the source buffer srcbuf_rdata: Read data from the source buffer. Data seen by MAC 4 AHB clock + 1 PHY clock = (2 clock sync + 1 clock memory address + 1 clock memory data from sync RAM) + (1 PHY clock (next PHY clock MAC can sample the 2 clock FIFO outputs)

The application can use the following formula to calculate the value of TRDT:

1151/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 376. TRDT max timing case

0ns 50ns

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

100ns

150ns

200ns

1 HCLK

PCLK

tkn_rcvd

dsynced_tkn_rcvd

spr_read

spr_addr

A1

spr_rdata

D1

srcbuf_push

srcbuf_rdata

D1

5 Clocks
ai15680

30.17.8

OTG programming model

The OTG_FS controller is an OTG device supporting HNP and SRP. When the core is connected to an A plug, it is referred to as an A-device. When the core is connected to a B plug it is referred to as a B-device. In host mode, the OTG_FS controller turns off VBUS to conserve power. SRP is a method by which the B-device signals the A-device to turn on VBUS power. A device must perform both data-line pulsing and VBUS pulsing, but a host can detect either data-line pulsing or VBUS pulsing for SRP. HNP is a method by which the Bdevice negotiates and switches to host role. In Negotiated mode after HNP, the B-device suspends the bus and reverts to the device role.

A-device session request protocol

The application must set the SRP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register. This enables the OTG_FS controller to detect SRP as an A-device.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1152/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Figure 377. A-device SRP

Suspend DRV_VBUS 1 2 VBUS_VALID 5 6

RM0090

A_VALID 4 Data line pulsing

VBUS pulsing 7 Connect

D+

D-

Low
ai15681

1. DRV_VBUS = VBUS drive signal to the PHY VBUS_VALID = VBUS valid signal from PHY A_VALID = A-peripheral VBUS level signal to PHY D+ = Data plus line D- = Data minus line

1.

To save power, the application suspends and turns off port power when the bus is idle by writing the port suspend and port power bits in the host port control and status register. PHY indicates port power off by deasserting the VBUS_VALID signal. The device must detect SE0 for at least 2 ms to start SRP when VBUS power is off. To initiate SRP, the device turns on its data line pull-up resistor for 5 to 10 ms. The OTG_FS controller detects data-line pulsing. The device drives VBUS above the A-device session valid (2.0 V minimum) for VBUS pulsing. The OTG_FS controller interrupts the application on detecting SRP. The Session request detected bit is set in Global interrupt status register (SRQINT set in OTG_FS_GINTSTS).

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

The application must service the Session request detected interrupt and turn on the port power bit by writing the port power bit in the host port control and status register. The PHY indicates port power-on by asserting the VBUS_VALID signal. When the USB is powered, the device connects, completing the SRP process.

7.

1153/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

B-device session request protocol

The application must set the SRP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register. This enables the OTG_FS controller to initiate SRP as a B-device. SRP is a means by which the OTG_FS controller can request a new session from the host. Figure 378. B-device SRP
Suspend VBUS_VALID 6 1

B_VALID

2 3

DISCHRG_VBUS 4

SESS_END

DP

5 Data line pulsing

8 Connect

DM

Low 7 VBUS pulsing

ai15682

CHRG_VBUS

1. VBUS_VALID = VBUS valid signal from PHY B_VALID = B-peripheral valid session to PHY DISCHRG_VBUS = discharge signal to PHY SESS_END = session end signal to PHY CHRG_VBUS = charge VBUS signal to PHY DP = Data plus line DM = Data minus line

1.

To save power, the host suspends and turns off port power when the bus is idle. The OTG_FS controller sets the early suspend bit in the Core interrupt register after 3 ms of bus idleness. Following this, the OTG_FS controller sets the USB suspend bit in the Core interrupt register. The OTG_FS controller informs the PHY to discharge VBUS.

2.

The PHY indicates the sessions end to the device. This is the initial condition for SRP. The OTG_FS controller requires 2 ms of SE0 before initiating SRP. For a USB 1.1 full-speed serial transceiver, the application must wait until VBUS discharges to 0.2 V after BSVLD (in OTG_FS_GOTGCTL) is deasserted. This

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1154/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS)

RM0090

discharge time can be obtained from the transceiver vendor and varies from one transceiver to another. 3. 4. The USB OTG core informs the PHY to speed up VBUS discharge. The application initiates SRP by writing the session request bit in the OTG Control and status register. The OTG_FS controller perform data-line pulsing followed by VBUS pulsing. The host detects SRP from either the data-line or VBUS pulsing, and turns on VBUS. The PHY indicates VBUS power-on to the device. The OTG_FS controller performs VBUS pulsing. The host starts a new session by turning on VBUS, indicating SRP success. The OTG_FS controller interrupts the application by setting the session request success status change bit in the OTG interrupt status register. The application reads the session request success bit in the OTG control and status register. 7. When the USB is powered, the OTG_FS controller connects, completing the SRP process.

5. 6.

A-device host negotiation protocol

HNP switches the USB host role from the A-device to the B-device. The application must set the HNP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register to enable the OTG_FS controller to perform HNP as an A-device. Figure 379. A-device HNP
1 OTG core Host Suspend 2 DP 3 4 5 Reset Device 6 Traffic 7 8 Connect Host

DM

Traffic

DPPULLDOWN

DMPULLDOWN
ai15683

1. DPPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DP line inside the PHY. DMPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DM line inside the PHY.

1.

The OTG_FS controller sends the B-device a SetFeature b_hnp_enable descriptor to enable HNP support. The B-devices ACK response indicates that the B-device supports HNP. The application must set host Set HNP Enable bit in the OTG Control

1155/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) and status register to indicate to the OTG_FS controller that the B-device supports HNP. 2. 3. When it has finished using the bus, the application suspends by writing the Port suspend bit in the host port control and status register. When the B-device observes a USB suspend, it disconnects, indicating the initial condition for HNP. The B-device initiates HNP only when it must switch to the host role; otherwise, the bus continues to be suspended. The OTG_FS controller sets the host negotiation detected interrupt in the OTG interrupt status register, indicating the start of HNP. The OTG_FS controller deasserts the DM pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate a device role. The PHY enables the OTG_FS_DP pull-up resistor to indicate a connect for B-device. The application must read the current mode bit in the OTG Control and status register to determine device mode operation. 4. 5. The B-device detects the connection, issues a USB reset, and enumerates the OTG_FS controller for data traffic. The B-device continues the host role, initiating traffic, and suspends the bus when done. The OTG_FS controller sets the early suspend bit in the Core interrupt register after 3 ms of bus idleness. Following this, the OTG_FS controller sets the USB Suspend bit in the Core interrupt register. 6. In Negotiated mode, the OTG_FS controller detects the suspend, disconnects, and switches back to the host role. The OTG_FS controller asserts the DM pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate its assumption of the host role. The OTG_FS controller sets the Connector ID status change interrupt in the OTG Interrupt Status register. The application must read the connector ID status in the OTG Control and Status register to determine the OTG_FS controller operation as an Adevice. This indicates the completion of HNP to the application. The application must read the Current mode bit in the OTG control and status register to determine host mode operation. The B-device connects, completing the HNP process.

7.

8.

B-device host negotiation protocol

HNP switches the USB host role from B-device to A-device. The application must set the HNP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register to enable the OTG_FS controller to perform HNP as a B-device.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1156/1422

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) Figure 380. B-device HNP

1 OTG core Device Suspend 2 DP 3 4 5 Reset Host 6 Traffic 7 8 Connect Device

RM0090

DM

Traffic

DPPULLDOWN

DMPULLDOWN
ai15684

1. DPPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DP line inside the PHY. DMPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DM line inside the PHY.

1.

The A-device sends the SetFeature b_hnp_enable descriptor to enable HNP support. The OTG_FS controllers ACK response indicates that it supports HNP. The application must set the device HNP enable bit in the OTG Control and status register to indicate HNP support. The application sets the HNP request bit in the OTG Control and status register to indicate to the OTG_FS controller to initiate HNP.

2.

When it has finished using the bus, the A-device suspends by writing the Port suspend bit in the host port control and status register. The OTG_FS controller sets the Early suspend bit in the Core interrupt register after 3 ms of bus idleness. Following this, the OTG_FS controller sets the USB suspend bit in the Core interrupt register. The OTG_FS controller disconnects and the A-device detects SE0 on the bus, indicating HNP. The OTG_FS controller asserts the DP pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate its assumption of the host role. The A-device responds by activating its OTG_FS_DP pull-up resistor within 3 ms of detecting SE0. The OTG_FS controller detects this as a connect. The OTG_FS controller sets the host negotiation success status change interrupt in the OTG Interrupt status register, indicating the HNP status. The application must read the host negotiation success bit in the OTG Control and status register to determine host

1157/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS) negotiation success. The application must read the current Mode bit in the Core interrupt register (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) to determine host mode operation. 3. 4. The application sets the reset bit (PRST in OTG_FS_HPRT) and the OTG_FS controller issues a USB reset and enumerates the A-device for data traffic. The OTG_FS controller continues the host role of initiating traffic, and when done, suspends the bus by writing the Port suspend bit in the host port control and status register. In Negotiated mode, when the A-device detects a suspend, it disconnects and switches back to the host role. The OTG_FS controller deasserts the DP pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate the assumption of the device role. The application must read the current mode bit in the Core interrupt (OTG_FS_GINTSTS) register to determine the host mode operation. The OTG_FS controller connects, completing the HNP process.

5.

6. 7.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1158/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

31

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

31.1

OTG_HS introduction
Portions Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Synopsys, Inc. All rights reserved. Used with permission. This section presents the architecture and the programming model of the OTG_HS controller. The following acronyms are used throughout the section: FS HS LS USB OTG PHY MAC PFC UTMI ULPI full-speed High-speed Low-speed Universal serial bus On-the-go Physical layer Media access controller Packet FIFO controller USB Transceiver Macrocell Interface UTMI+ Low Pin Interface

References are made to the following documents:

USB On-The-Go Supplement, Revision 1.3 Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0 Specification

The OTG_HS is a dual-role device (DRD) controller that supports both peripheral and host functions and is fully compliant with the On-The-Go Supplement to the USB 2.0 Specification. It can also be configured as a host-only or peripheral-only controller, fully compliant with the USB 2.0 Specification. In host mode, the OTG_HS supports high-speed (HS, 480 Mbits/s), full-speed (FS, 12 Mbits/s) and low-speed (LS, 1.5 Mbits/s) transfers whereas in peripheral mode, it only supports high-speed (HS, 480Mbits/s) and full-speed (FS, 12 Mbits/s) transfers. The OTG_HS supports both HNP and SRP. The only external device required is a charge pump for VBUS in OTG mode.

1159/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

31.2

OTG_HS main features

The main features can be divided into three categories: general, host-mode and peripheralmode features.

31.2.1

General features
The OTG_HS interface main features are the following:

It is USB-IF certified in compliance with the Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0 Specification It supports 3 PHY interfaces An on-chip full-speed PHY An I2C Interface for external full-speed I2C PHY An ULPI interface for external high-speed PHY.

It supports the host negotiation protocol (HNP) and the session request protocol (SRP) It allows the host to turn VBUS off to save power in OTG applications, with no need for external components It allows to monitor VBUS levels using internal comparators It supports dynamic host-peripheral role switching It is software-configurable to operate as: An SRP-capable USB HS/FS peripheral (B-device) An SRP-capable USB HS/FS/low-speed host (A-device) An USB OTG FS dual-role device SOF pulse PAD output capability SOF pulse internal connection to timer 2 (TIM2) Configurable framing period Configurable end-of-frame interrupt

It supports HS/FS SOFs as well as low-speed (LS) keep-alive tokens with:

It embeds an internal DMA with shareholding support and software selectable AHB burst type in DMA mode It has power saving features such as system clock stop during USB suspend, switching off of the digital core internal clock domains, PHY and DFIFO power management It features a dedicated 4-Kbyte data RAM with advanced FIFO management: The memory partition can be configured into different FIFOs to allow flexible and efficient use of RAM Each FIFO can contain multiple packets Memory allocation is performed dynamically The FIFO size can be configured to values that are not powers of 2 to allow the use of contiguous memory locations

It ensures a maximum USB bandwidth of up to one frame without application intervention

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1160/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

31.2.2

Host-mode features
The OTG_HS interface features in host mode are the following:

It requires an external charge pump to generate VBUS It has up to 12 host channels (pipes), each channel being dynamically reconfigurable to support any kind of USB transfer It features a built-in hardware scheduler holding: Up to 8 interrupt plus isochronous transfer requests in the periodic hardware queue Up to 8 control plus bulk transfer requests in the nonperiodic hardware queue

It manages a shared RX FIFO, a periodic TX FIFO, and a nonperiodic TX FIFO for efficient usage of the USB data RAM It features dynamic trimming capability of SOF framing period in host mode.

31.2.3

Peripheral-mode features
The OTG_HS interface main features in peripheral mode are the following:

It has 1 bidirectional control endpoint 0 It has 5 IN endpoints (EP) configurable to support bulk, interrupt or isochronous transfers It has 5 OUT endpoints configurable to support bulk, interrupt or isochronous transfers It manages a shared Rx FIFO and a Tx-OUT FIFO for efficient usage of the USB data RAM It manages up to 6 dedicated Tx-IN FIFOs (one for each IN-configured EP) to reduce the application load It features soft disconnect capability

1161/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

31.3

OTG_HS functional description

Figure 381 shows the OTG_HS interface block diagram. Figure 381. USB OTG interface block diagram

CPU

Memory

AHB (application bus)

AHB master interface

Peripheral 1

Interrupt

USB OTG HS core

ULPI interface

ULPI PHY

2.0 USB

AHB slave interface

Peripheral 2
Data FIFO RAM interface

Data FIFO single-port RAM (SPRAM)

ai17107b

1. The USB DMA cannot directly address the internal Flash memory.

31.3.1

High-speed OTG PHY

The USB OTG HS core embeds an ULPI interface to connect an external HS phy.

31.3.2

External Full-speed OTG PHY using the I2C interface

The USB OTG HS core embeds an I2C interface allowing to connect an external FS phy.

31.3.3

Embedded Full-speed OTG PHY

The full-speed OTG PHY includes the following components:

FS/LS transceiver module used by both host and Device. It directly drives transmission and reception on the single-ended USB lines. Integrated ID pull-up resistor used to sample the ID line for A/B Device identification. DP/DM integrated pull-up and pull-down resistors controlled by the OTG_HS core depending on the current role of the device. As a peripheral, it enables the DP pull-up resistor to signal full-speed peripheral connections as soon as VBUS is sensed to be at a valid level (B-session valid). In host mode, pull-down resistors are enabled on both

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1162/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

DP/DM. Pull-up and pull-down resistors are dynamically switched when the peripheral role is changed via the host negotiation protocol (HNP).

Pull-up/pull-down resistor ECN circuit The DP pull-up consists of 2 resistors controlled separately from the OTG_HS as per the resistor Engineering Change Notice applied to USB Rev2.0. The dynamic trimming of the DP pull-up strength allows to achieve a better noise rejection and Tx/Rx signal quality.

VBUS sensing comparators with hysteresis used to detect VBUS_VALID, A-B Session Valid and session-end voltage thresholds. They are used to drive the session request protocol (SRP), detect valid startup and end-of-session conditions, and constantly monitor the VBUS supply during USB operations. VBUS pulsing method circuit used to charge/discharge VBUS through resistors during the SRP (weak drive).

Caution:

To guarantee a correct operation for the USB OTG HS peripheral, the AHB frequency should be higher than 30 MHz.

31.4
31.4.1

OTG dual-role device

ID line detection
The host or peripheral (the default) role depends on the level of the ID input line. It is determined when the USB cable is plugged in and depends on which side of the USB cable is connected to the micro-AB receptacle:

If the B-side of the USB cable is connected with a floating ID wire, the integrated pull-up resistor detects a high ID level and the default peripheral role is confirmed. In this configuration the OTG_HS conforms to the FSM standard described in section 6.8.2. On-The-Go B-device of the USB On-The-Go Supplement, Revision 1.3. If the A-side of the USB cable is connected with a grounded ID, the OTG_HS issues an ID line status change interrupt (CIDSCHG bit in the OTG_HS_GINTSTS register) for host software initialization, and automatically switches to host role. In this configuration the OTG_HS conforms to the FSM standard described by section 6.8.1: On-The-Go ADevice of the USB On-The-Go Supplement, Revision 1.3.

31.4.2

HNP dual role device

The HNP capable bit in the Global USB configuration register (HNPCAP bit in the OTG_HS_ GUSBCFG register) configures the OTG_HS core to dynamically change from A-host to Adevice role and vice-versa, or from B-device to B-host role and vice-versa, according to the host negotiation protocol (HNP). The current device status is defined by the combination of the Connector ID Status bit in the Global OTG control and status register (CIDSTS bit in OTG_HS_GOTGCTL) and the current mode of operation bit in the global interrupt and status register (CMOD bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The HNP programming model is described in detail in Section 31.13: OTG_HS programming model.

31.4.3

SRP dual-role device

The SRP capable bit in the global USB configuration register (SRPCAP bit in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG) configures the OTG_HS core to switch VBUS off for the A-device in

1163/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) order to save power. The A-device is always in charge of driving VBUS regardless of the OTG_HS role (host or peripheral). The SRP A/B-device program model is described in detail in Section 31.13: OTG_HS programming model.

31.5

USB functional description in peripheral mode

The OTG_HS operates as an USB peripheral in the following circumstances:

OTG B-device OTG B-device default state if the B-side of USB cable is plugged in OTG A-device OTG A-device state after the HNP switches the OTG_HS to peripheral role B-Device If the ID line is present, functional and connected to the B-side of the USB cable, and the HNP-capable bit in the Global USB Configuration register (HNPCAP bit in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG) is cleared (see On-The-Go specification Revision 1.3 section 6.8.3).

Peripheral only (see Figure 359: USB peripheral-only connection) The force peripheral mode bit in the Global USB configuration register (FDMOD in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG) is set to 1, forcing the OTG_HS core to operate in USB peripheral-only mode (see On-The-Go specification Revision 1.3 section 6.8.3). In this case, the ID line is ignored even if it is available on the USB connector.

Note:

To build a bus-powered device architecture in the B-Device or peripheral-only configuration, an external regulator must be added to generate the VDD supply voltage from VBUS.

31.5.1

SRP-capable peripheral
The SRP capable bit in the Global USB configuration register (SRPCAP bit in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG) configures the OTG_HS to support the session request protocol (SRP). As a result, it allows the remote A-device to save power by switching VBUS off when the USB session is suspended. The SRP peripheral mode program model is described in detail in Section : B-device session request protocol.

31.5.2

Peripheral states
Powered state
The VBUS input detects the B-session valid voltage used to put the USB peripheral in the Powered state (see USB2.0 specification section 9.1). The OTG_HS then automatically connects the DP pull-up resistor to signal full-speed device connection to the host, and generates the session request interrupt (SRQINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) to notify the Powered state. The VBUS input also ensures that valid VBUS levels are supplied by the host during USB operations. If VBUS drops below the B-session valid voltage (for example because power disturbances occurred or the host port has been switched off), the OTG_HS automatically disconnects and the session end detected (SEDET bit in OTG_HS_GOTGINT) interrupt is generated to notify that the OTG_HS has exited the Powered state.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1164/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

In Powered state, the OTG_HS expects a reset from the host. No other USB operations are possible. When a reset is received, the reset detected interrupt (USBRST in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is generated. When the reset is complete, the enumeration done interrupt (ENUMDNE bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is generated and the OTG_HS enters the Default state.

Soft disconnect
The Powered state can be exited by software by using the soft disconnect feature. The DP pull-up resistor is removed by setting the Soft disconnect bit in the device control register (SDIS bit in OTG_HS_DCTL), thus generating a device disconnect detection interrupt on the host side even though the USB cable was not really unplugged from the host port.

Default state
In Default state the OTG_HS expects to receive a SET_ADDRESS command from the host. No other USB operations are possible. When a valid SET_ADDRESS command is decoded on the USB, the application writes the corresponding number into the device address field in the device configuration register (DAD bit in OTG_HS_DCFG). The OTG_HS then enters the address state and is ready to answer host transactions at the configured USB address.

Suspended state
The OTG_HS peripheral constantly monitors the USB activity. When the USB remains idle for 3 ms, the early suspend interrupt (ESUSP bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is issued. It is confirmed 3 ms later, if appropriate, by generating a suspend interrupt (USBSUSP bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The device suspend bit is then automatically set in the device status register (SUSPSTS bit in OTG_HS_DSTS) and the OTG_HS enters the Suspended state. The device can also exit from the Suspended state by itself. In this case the application sets the remote wakeup signaling bit in the device control register (RWUSIG bit in OTG_HS_DCTL) and clears it after 1 to 15 ms. When a resume signaling is detected from the host, the resume interrupt (WKUPINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is generated and the device suspend bit is automatically cleared.

31.5.3

Peripheral endpoints
The OTG_HS core instantiates the following USB endpoints:

Control endpoint 0 This endpoint is bidirectional and handles control messages only. It has a separate set of registers to handle IN and OUT transactions, as well as dedicated control (OTG_HS_DIEPCTL0/OTG_HS_DOEPCTL0), transfer configuration (OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZ0/OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZ0), and status-interrupt

1165/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx/)OTG_HS_DOEPINT0) registers. The bits available inside the control and transfer size registers slightly differ from other endpoints.

5 IN endpoints They can be configured to support the isochronous, bulk or interrupt transfer type. They feature dedicated control (OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx), transfer configuration (OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx), and status-interrupt (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) registers. The Device IN endpoints common interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DIEPMSK) allows to enable/disable a single endpoint interrupt source on all of the IN endpoints (EP0 included). They support incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). This interrupt is asserted when there is at least one isochronous IN endpoint for which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the end of periodic frame interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS/EOPF). They can be configured to support the isochronous, bulk or interrupt transfer type. They feature dedicated control (OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx), transfer configuration (OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) and status-interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) registers. The Device Out endpoints common interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DOEPMSK) allows to enable/disable a single endpoint interrupt source on all OUT endpoints (EP0 included). They support incomplete isochronous OUT transfer interrupt (INCOMPISOOUT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). This interrupt is asserted when there is at least one isochronous OUT endpoint on which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the end of periodic frame interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS/EOPF).

5 OUT endpoints

Endpoint controls
The following endpoint controls are available through the device endpoint-x IN/OUT control register (DIEPCTLx/DOEPCTLx):

Endpoint enable/disable Endpoint activation in current configuration Program the USB transfer type (isochronous, bulk, interrupt) Program the supported packet size Program the Tx-FIFO number associated with the IN endpoint Program the expected or transmitted data0/data1 PID (bulk/interrupt only) Program the even/odd frame during which the transaction is received or transmitted (isochronous only) Optionally program the NAK bit to always send a negative acknowledge to the host regardless of the FIFO status Optionally program the STALL bit to always stall host tokens to that endpoint Optionally program the Snoop mode for OUT endpoint where the received data CRC is not checked

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1166/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Endpoint transfer
The device endpoint-x transfer size registers (DIEPTSIZx/DOEPTSIZx) allow the application to program the transfer size parameters and read the transfer status. The programming operation must be performed before setting the endpoint enable bit in the endpoint control register. Once the endpoint is enabled, these fields are read-only as the OTG FS core updates them with the current transfer status. The following transfer parameters can be programmed:

Transfer size in bytes Number of packets constituting the overall transfer size.

Endpoint status/interrupt
The device endpoint-x interrupt registers (DIEPINTx/DOPEPINTx) indicate the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. The application must read these registers when the OUT endpoint interrupt bit or the IN endpoint interrupt bit in the core interrupt register (OEPINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS or IEPINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS, respectively) is set. Before the application can read these registers, it must first read the device all endpoints interrupt register (OTG_HS_DAINT) to get the exact endpoint number for the device endpoint-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the DAINT and GINTSTS registers. The peripheral core provides the following status checks and interrupt generation:

Transfer completed interrupt, indicating that data transfer has completed on both the application (AHB) and USB sides Setup stage done (control-out only) Associated transmit FIFO is half or completely empty (in endpoints) NAK acknowledge transmitted to the host (isochronous-in only) IN token received when Tx-FIFO was empty (bulk-in/interrupt-in only) OUT token received when endpoint was not yet enabled Babble error condition detected Endpoint disable by application is effective Endpoint NAK by application is effective (isochronous-in only) More than 3 back-to-back setup packets received (control-out only) Timeout condition detected (control-in only) Isochronous out packet dropped without generating an interrupt

1167/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

31.6

USB functional description on host mode

This section gives the functional description of the OTG_HS in the USB host mode. The OTG_HS works as a USB host in the following circumstances:

OTG A-host OTG A-device default state when the A-side of the USB cable is plugged in OTG B-host OTG B-device after HNP switching to the host role A-device If the ID line is present, functional and connected to the A-side of the USB cable, and the HNP-capable bit is cleared in the Global USB Configuration register (HNPCAP bit in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG). Integrated pull-down resistors are automatically set on the DP/DM lines.

Host only (Figure 360: USB host-only connection). The force host mode bit in the global USB configuration register (FHMOD bit in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG) forces the OTG_HS core to operate in USB host-only mode. In this case, the ID line is ignored even if it is available on the USB connector. Integrated pull-down resistors are automatically set on the OTG_HS_FS_DP/OTG_HS_FS_DM lines.

Note:

On-chip 5 V VBUS generation is not supported. As a result, a charge pump or a basic power switch (if a 5 V supply is available on the application board) must be added externally to drive the 5 V VBUS line. The external charge pump can be driven by any GPIO output. This is required for the OTG A-host, A-device and host-only configurations. The VBUS input ensures that valid VBUS levels are supplied by the charge pump during USB operations while the charge pump overcurrent output can be input to any GPIO pin configured to generate port interrupts. The overcurrent ISR must promptly disable the VBUS generation.

31.6.1

SRP-capable host
SRP support is available through the SRP capable bit in the global USB configuration register (SRPCAP bit in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG). When the SRP feature is enabled, the host can save power by switching off the VBUS power while the USB session is suspended. The SRP host mode program model is described in detail in Section : A-device session request protocol.

31.6.2

USB host states

Host port power
On-chip 5 V VBUS generation is not supported. As a result, a charge pump or a basic power switch (if a 5 V supply voltage is available on the application board) must be added externally to drive the 5 V VBUS line. The external charge pump can be driven by any GPIO output. When the application powers on VBUS through the selected GPIO, it must also set the port power bit in the host port control and status register (PPWR bit in OTG_HS_HPRT).

VBUS valid
When SRP or HNP is enabled the VBUS sensing pin (PB13) pin should be connected to VBUS. The VBUS input ensures that valid VBUS levels are supplied by the charge pump

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1168/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

during USB operations. Any unforeseen VBUS voltage drop below the VBUS valid threshold (4.25 V) generates an OTG interrupt triggered by the session end detected bit (SEDET bit in OTG_HS_GOTGINT). The application must then switch the VBUS power off and clear the port power bit. When HNP and SRP are both disabled, the VBUS sensing pin (PB13) should not be connected to VBUS. This pin can be can be used as GPIO. The charge pump overcurrent flag can also be used to prevent electrical damage. Connect the overcurrent flag output from the charge pump to any GPIO input, and configure it to generate a port interrupt on the active level. The overcurrent ISR must promptly disable the VBUS generation and clear the port power bit.

Detection of peripheral connection by the host

If SRP or HNP are enabled, even if USB peripherals or B-devices can be attached at any time, the OTG_HS does not detect a bus connection until the end of the VBUS sensing (VBUS over 4.75 V). When VBUS is at a valid level and a remote B-device is attached, the OTG_HS core issues a host port interrupt triggered by the device connected bit in the host port control and status register (PCDET bit in OTG_HS_HPRT). When HNP and SRP are both disabled, USB peripherals or B-device are detected as soon as they are connected. The OTG_FS core issues a host port interrupt triggered by the device connected bit in the host port control and status (PCDET bit in OTG_FS_HPRT).

Detection of peripheral disconnection by the host

The peripheral disconnection event triggers the disconnect detected interrupt (DISCINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS).

Host enumeration
After detecting a peripheral connection, the host must start the enumeration process by issuing an USB reset and configuration commands to the new peripheral. Before sending an USB reset, the application waits for the OTG interrupt triggered by the debounce done bit (DBCDNE bit in OTG_HS_GOTGINT), which indicates that the bus is stable again after the electrical debounce caused by the attachment of a pull-up resistor on OTG_HS_FS_DP (full speed) or OTG_HS_FS_DM (low speed). The application issues an USB reset (single-ended zero) via the USB by keeping the port reset bit set in the Host port control and status register (PRST bit in OTG_HS_HPRT) for a minimum of 10 ms and a maximum of 20 ms. The application monitors the time and then clears the port reset bit. Once the USB reset sequence has completed, the host port interrupt is triggered by the port enable/disable change bit (PENCHNG bit in OTG_HS_HPRT) to inform the application that the speed of the enumerated peripheral can be read from the port speed field in the host port control and status register (PSPD bit in OTG_HS_HPRT), and that the host is starting to drive SOFs (full speed) or keep-alive tokens (low speed). The host is then ready to complete the peripheral enumeration by sending peripheral configuration commands.

1169/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Host suspend
The application can decide to suspend the USB activity by setting the port suspend bit in the host port control and status register (PSUSP bit in OTG_HS_HPRT). The OTG_HS core stops sending SOFs and enters the Suspended state. The Suspended state can be exited on the remote device initiative (remote wakeup). In this case the remote wakeup interrupt (WKUPINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is generated upon detection of a remote wakeup event, the port resume bit in the host port control and status register (PRES bit in OTG_HS_HPRT) is set, and a resume signaling is automatically issued on the USB. The application must monitor the resume window duration, and then clear the port resume bit to exit the Suspended state and restart the SOF. If the Suspended state is exited on the host initiative, the application must set the port resume bit to start resume signaling on the host port, monitor the resume window duration and then clear the port resume bit.

31.6.3

Host channels
The OTG_HS core instantiates 12 host channels. Each host channel supports an USB host transfer (USB pipe). The host is not able to support more than 8 transfer requests simultaneously. If more than 8 transfer requests are pending from the application, the host controller driver (HCD) must re-allocate channels when they become available, that is, after receiving the transfer completed and channel halted interrupts. Each host channel can be configured to support IN/OUT and any type of periodic/nonperiodic transaction. Each host channel has dedicated control (HCCHARx), transfer configuration (HCTSIZx) and status/interrupt (HCINTx) registers with associated mask (HCINTMSKx) registers.

Host channel controls

The following host channel controls are available through the host channel-x characteristics register (HCCHARx):

Channel enable/disable Program the HS/FS/LS speed of target USB peripheral Program the address of target USB peripheral Program the endpoint number of target USB peripheral Program the transfer IN/OUT direction Program the USB transfer type (control, bulk, interrupt, isochronous) Program the maximum packet size (MPS) Program the periodic transfer to be executed during odd/even frames

Host channel transfer

The host channel transfer size registers (HCTSIZx) allow the application to program the transfer size parameters, and read the transfer status. The programming operation must be performed before setting the channel enable bit in the host channel characteristics register. Once the endpoint is enabled, the packet count field is read-only as the OTG HS core updates it according to the current transfer status.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1170/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) The following transfer parameters can be programmed:

RM0090

Transfer size in bytes Number of packets constituting the overall transfer size Initial data PID

Host channel status/interrupt

The host channel-x interrupt register (HCINTx) indicates the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. The application must read these register when the host channels interrupt bit in the core interrupt register (HCINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read these registers, it must first read the host all channels interrupt (HCAINT) register to get the exact channel number for the host channel-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the HAINT and GINTSTS registers. The mask bits for each interrupt source of each channel are also available in the OTG_HS_HCINTMSK-x register. The host core provides the following status checks and interrupt generation:

Transfer completed interrupt, indicating that the data transfer is complete on both the application (AHB) and USB sides Channel stopped due to transfer completed, USB transaction error or disable command from the application Associated transmit FIFO half or completely empty (IN endpoints) ACK response received NAK response received STALL response received USB transaction error due to CRC failure, timeout, bit stuff error, false EOP Babble error Frame overrun Data toggle error

31.6.4

Host scheduler
The host core features a built-in hardware scheduler which is able to autonomously re-order and manage the USB the transaction requests posted by the application. At the beginning of each frame the host executes the periodic (isochronous and interrupt) transactions first, followed by the nonperiodic (control and bulk) transactions to achieve the higher level of priority granted to the isochronous and interrupt transfer types by the USB specification. The host processes the USB transactions through request queues (one for periodic and one for nonperiodic). Each request queue can hold up to 8 entries. Each entry represents a pending transaction request from the application, and holds the IN or OUT channel number along with other information to perform a transaction on the USB. The order in which the requests are written to the queue determines the sequence of the transactions on the USB interface. At the beginning of each frame, the host processes the periodic request queue first, followed by the nonperiodic request queue. The host issues an incomplete periodic transfer interrupt (IPXFR bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) if an isochronous or interrupt transaction scheduled for the current frame is still pending at the end of the current frame. The OTG HS core is fully responsible for the management of the periodic and nonperiodic request queues.The periodic transmit FIFO and queue status register (HPTXSTS) and nonperiodic transmit

1171/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) FIFO and queue status register (HNPTXSTS) are read-only registers which can be used by the application to read the status of each request queue. They contain:

The number of free entries currently available in the periodic (nonperiodic) request queue (8 max) Free space currently available in the periodic (nonperiodic) Tx-FIFO (out-transactions) IN/OUT token, host channel number and other status information.

As request queues can hold a maximum of 8 entries each, the application can push to schedule host transactions in advance with respect to the moment they physically reach the USB for a maximum of 8 pending periodic transactions plus 8 pending nonperiodic transactions. To post a transaction request to the host scheduler (queue) the application must check that there is at least 1 entry available in the periodic (nonperiodic) request queue by reading the PTXQSAV bits in the OTG_HS_HNPTXSTS register or NPTQXSAV bits in the OTG_HS_HNPTXSTS register.

31.7

SOF trigger
The OTG FS core allows to monitor, track and configure SOF framing in the host and peripheral. It also features an SOF pulse output connectivity. These capabilities are particularly useful to implement adaptive audio clock generation techniques, where the audio peripheral needs to synchronize to the isochronous stream provided by the PC, or the host needs trimming its framing rate according to the requirements of the audio peripheral.

31.7.1

Host SOFs
In host mode the number of PHY clocks occurring between the generation of two consecutive SOF (FS) or keep-alive (LS) tokens is programmable in the host frame interval register (OTG_HS_HFIR), thus providing application control over the SOF framing period. An interrupt is generated at any start of frame (SOF bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The current frame number and the time remaining until the next SOF are tracked in the host frame number register (OTG_HS_HFNUM). An SOF pulse signal is generated at any SOF starting token and with a width of 12 system clock cycles. It can be made available externally on the SOF pin using the SOFOUTEN bit in the global control and configuration register. The SOF pulse is also internally connected to the input trigger of timer 2 (TIM2), so that the input capture feature, the output compare feature and the timer can be triggered by the SOF pulse. The TIM2 connection is enabled through ITR1_RMP bits of TIM2_OR register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1172/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) SOF trigger output to TIM2 ITR1 connection
OTG_HS_Core

RM0090

SOF output pulse

VBUS DP ITR1 TIM2 SOF pulse DM ID

USB Micro-AB connector

ai16092

31.7.2

Peripheral SOFs
In peripheral mode, the start of frame interrupt is generated each time an SOF token is received on the USB (SOF bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The corresponding frame number can be read from the device status register (FNSOF bit in OTG_HS_DSTS). An SOF pulse signal with a width of 12 system clock cycles is also generated and can be made available externally on the SOF pin by using the SOF output enable bit in the global control and configuration register (SOFOUTEN bit in OTG_HS_GCCFG). The SOF pulse signal is also internally connected to the TIM2 input trigger, so that the input capture feature, the output compare feature and the timer can be triggered by the SOF pulse (see Figure ). The TIM2 connection is enabled through ITR1_RMP bits of TIM2_OR register. The end of periodic frame interrupt (GINTSTS/EOPF) is used to notify the application when 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% of the time frame interval elapsed depending on the periodic frame interval field in the device configuration register (PFIVL bit in OTG_HS_DCFG). This feature can be used to determine if all of the isochronous traffic for that frame is complete.

1173/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

31.8

USB_HS power modes

The power consumption of the OTG PHY is controlled by three bits in the general core configuration register:

PHY power down (GCCFG/PWRDWN) This bit switches on/off the PHY full-speed transceiver module. It must be preliminarily set to allow any USB operation.

A-VBUS sensing enable (GCCFG/VBUSASEN) This bit switches on/off the VBUS comparators associated with A-device operations. It must be set when in A-device (USB host) mode and during HNP.

B-VBUS sensing enable (GCCFG/VBUSASEN) This bit switches on/off the VBUS comparators associated with B-device operations. It must be set when in B-device (USB peripheral) mode and during HNP. Power reduction techniques are available in the USB suspended state, when the USB session is not yet valid or the device is disconnected.

Stop PHY clock (STPPCLK bit in OTG_HS_PCGCCTL) When setting the stop PHY clock bit in the clock gating control register, most of the clock domain internal to the OTG high-speed core is switched off by clock gating. The dynamic power consumption due to the USB clock switching activity is cut even if the clock input is kept running by the application Most of the transceiver is also disabled, and only the part in charge of detecting the asynchronous resume or remote wakeup event is kept alive.

Gate HCLK (GATEHCLK bit in OTG_HS_PCGCCTL) When setting the Gate HCLK bit in the clock gating control register, most of the system clock domain internal to the OTG_HS core is switched off by clock gating. Only the register read and write interface is kept alive. The dynamic power consumption due to the USB clock switching activity is cut even if the system clock is kept running by the application for other purposes.

USB system stop When the OTG_HS is in USB suspended state, the application can decide to drastically reduce the overall power consumption by shutting down all the clock sources in the system. USB System Stop is activated by first setting the Stop PHY clock bit and then configuring the system deep sleep mode in the powercontrol system module (PWR). The OTG_HS core automatically reactivates both system and USB clocks by asynchronous detection of remote wakeup (as an host) or resume (as a Device) signaling on the USB.

31.9

Dynamic update of the OTG_HS_HFIR register

The USB core embeds a dynamic trimming capability of micro-SOF framing period in host mode allowing to synchronize an external device with the micro-SOF frames. When the OTG_HS_HFIR register is changed within a current micro-SOF frame, the SOF period correction is applied in the next frame as described in Figure 382.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1174/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 382. Updating OTG_HS_HFIR dynamically

Old OTG_HS_HIFR value = 400 periods OTG_HS_HIFR value = 450 periods+HIFR write latency New OTG_HS_HIFR value = 450 periods

RM0090

SOF reload
Latency

OTG_HS_HFIR write OTG_HS_HFIR value Frame timer

400 450

1 0 400 399

1 0 400 399

450 449

1 0 450 449

1 0 450 449

ai18439b

31.10
31.10.1

FIFO RAM allocation

Peripheral mode
Receive FIFO RAM
For Receive FIFO RAM, the application should allocate RAM for SETUP packets: 10 locations must be reserved in the receive FIFO to receive SETUP packets on control endpoints. These locations are reserved for SETUP packets and are not used by the core to write any other data. One location must be allocated for Global OUT NAK. Status information are also written to the FIFO along with each received packet. Therefore, a minimum space of (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 must be allocated to receive packets. If a high-bandwidth endpoint or multiple isochronous endpoints are enabled, at least two spaces of (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 must be allotted to receive back-to-back packets. Typically, two (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 spaces are recommended so that when the previous packet is being transferred to AHB, the USB can receive the subsequent packet. Along with each endpoints last packet, transfer complete status information are also pushed to the FIFO. Typically, one location for each OUT endpoint is recommended.

Transmit FIFO RAM

For Transmit FIFO RAM, the minimum RAM space required for each IN Endpoint Transmit FIFO is the maximum packet size for this IN endpoint. Note: More space allocated in the transmit IN Endpoint FIFO results in a better performance on the USB.

31.10.2

Host mode
Receive FIFO RAM
For Receive FIFO RAM allocation, Status information are written to the FIFO along with each received packet. Therefore, a minimum space of (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 must be allocated to receive packets. If a high-bandwidth channel or multiple isochronous channels

1175/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) are enabled, at least two spaces of (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 must be allocated to receive back-to-back packets. Typically, two (Largest Packet Size / 4) + 1 spaces are recommended so that when the previous packet is being transferred to AHB, the USB can receive the subsequent packet. Along with each host channels last packet, transfer complete status information are also pushed to the FIFO. As a consequence, one location must be allocated to store this data.

Transmit FIFO RAM

For Transmit FIFO RAM allocation, the minimum amount of RAM required for the host nonperiodic Transmit FIFO is the largest maximum packet size for all supported nonperiodic OUT channels. Typically, a space corresponding to two Largest Packet Size is recommended, so that when the current packet is being transferred to the USB, the AHB can transmit the subsequent packet. The minimum amount of RAM required for Host periodic Transmit FIFO is the largest maximum packet size for all supported periodic OUT channels. If there is at least one High Bandwidth Isochronous OUT endpoint, then the space must be at least two times the maximum packet size for that channel. Note: More space allocated in the Transmit nonperiodic FIFO results in better performance on the USB. When operating in DMA mode, the DMA address register for each host channel (HCDMAn) is stored in the SPRAM (FIFO). One location for each channel must be reserved for this.

31.11

OTG_HS interrupts
When the OTG_HS controller is operating in one mode, either peripheral or host, the application must not access registers from the other mode. If an illegal access occurs, a mode mismatch interrupt is generated and reflected in the Core interrupt register (MMIS bit in the OTG_HS_GINTSTS register). When the core switches from one mode to the other, the registers in the new mode of operation must be reprogrammed as they would be after a power-on reset. Figure 383 shows the interrupt hierarchy.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1176/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 383. Interrupt hierarchy

OR

RM0090

endp_multi_proc_intrpt AND OR endp_interrupt[31:0]

Interrupt

Global interrupt mask (Bit 0) AHB configuration register

AND

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18

17:10

9 8

7:3

1 0

Core interrupt register(1)

Core interrupt mask register

Device all endpoints interrupt register 21:16 5:0 OUT endpoints IN endpoints

OTG interrupt register Device all endpoints interrupt mask register

Device each endpoint interrupt register 31:16 EP1OUT 15:0 EP1IN Device each endpoint interrupt mask register

Interrupt sources

Device IN/OUT endpoint interrupt registers 0 to 5

Device IN/OUT endpoints common interrupt mask register

Device each IN/OUT endpoint interrupt mask register

Host port control and status register

Host all channels interrupt register

Host all channels interrupt mask register

Host channels interrupt registers 0 to 11

Host channels interrupt mask registers 0 to 11

ai16093b

1. The core interrupt register bits are shown in OTG_HS core interrupt register (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) on page 1194.

31.12

OTG_HS control and status registers

By reading from and writing to the control and status registers (CSRs) through the AHB slave interface, the application controls the OTG_HS controller. These registers are 32 bits

1177/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) wide, and the addresses are 32-bit block aligned. The OTG_HS registers must be accessed by words (32 bits). CSRs are classified as follows:

Core global registers Host-mode registers Host global registers Host port CSRs Host channel-specific registers Device-mode registers Device global registers Device endpoint-specific registers Power and clock-gating registers Data FIFO (DFIFO) access registers

Only the Core global, Power and clock-gating, Data FIFO access, and host port control and status registers can be accessed in both host and peripheral modes. When the OTG_HS controller is operating in one mode, either peripheral or host, the application must not access registers from the other mode. If an illegal access occurs, a mode mismatch interrupt is generated and reflected in the Core interrupt register (MMIS bit in the OTG_HS_GINTSTS register). When the core switches from one mode to the other, the registers in the new mode of operation must be reprogrammed as they would be after a power-on reset.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1178/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

31.12.1

CSR memory map

The host and peripheral mode registers occupy different addresses. All registers are implemented in the AHB clock domain. Figure 384. CSR memory map
0000h Core global CSRs (1 Kbyte) 0400h Host mode CSRs (1 Kbyte) 0800h Device mode CSRs (1.5 Kbyte) 0E00h Power and clock gating CSRs (0.5 Kbyte) 1000h Device EP 0/Host channel 0 FIFO (4 Kbyte) 2000h Device EP1/Host channel 1 FIFO (4 Kbyte) 3000h DFIFO push/pop to this region Device EP (x 1)(1)/Host channel (x 1)(1) FIFO (4 Kbyte) Device EP x(1)/Host channel x(1) FIFO (4 Kbyte)

Reserved

2 0000h Direct access to data FIFO RAM for debugging (128 Kbyte) 3 FFFFh

DFIFO debug read/ write to this region

ai15615b

1. x = 5 in peripheral mode and x = 11 in host mode.

Global CSR map

These registers are available in both host and peripheral modes. Table 178. Core global control and status registers (CSRs)
Acronym OTG_HS_GOTGCTL OTG_HS_GOTGINT OTG_HS_GAHBCFG OTG_HS_GUSBCFG OTG_HS_GRSTCTL Address offset 0x000 0x004 0x008 0x00C 0x010 Register name OTG_HS control and status register (OTG_HS_GOTGCTL) on page 1184 OTG_HS interrupt register (OTG_HS_GOTGINT) on page 1186 OTG_HS AHB configuration register (OTG_HS_GAHBCFG) on page 1187 OTG_HS USB configuration register (OTG_HS_GUSBCFG) on page 1188 OTG_HS reset register (OTG_HS_GRSTCTL) on page 1191

1179/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Table 178. Core global control and status registers (CSRs) (continued)
Acronym OTG_HS_GINTSTS OTG_HS_GINTMSK OTG_HS_GRXSTSR OTG_HS_GRXSTSP OTG_HS_GRXFSIZ OTG_HS_GNPTXFSIZ/ OTG_HS_TX0FSIZ OTG_HS_GNPTXSTS OTG_HS_GCCFG OTG_HS_CID OTG_HS_HPTXFSIZ Address offset 0x014 0x018 0x01C 0x020 0x024 0x028 0x02C 0x038 0x03C 0x100 0x104 0x124 ... 0x13C Register name OTG_HS core interrupt register (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) on page 1194 OTG_HS interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_GINTMSK) on page 1198 OTG_HS Receive status debug read/OTG status read and pop registers (OTG_HS_GRXSTSR/OTG_HS_GRXSTSP) on page 1201 OTG_HS Receive FIFO size register (OTG_HS_GRXFSIZ) on page 1202 OTG_HS nonperiodic transmit FIFO size/Endpoint 0 transmit FIFO size register (OTG_HS_GNPTXFSIZ/OTG_HS_TX0FSIZ) on page 1203 OTG_HS nonperiodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_HS_GNPTXSTS) on page 1203 OTG_HS general core configuration register (OTG_HS_GCCFG) on page 1206 OTG_HS core ID register (OTG_HS_CID) on page 1207 OTG_HS Host periodic transmit FIFO size register (OTG_HS_HPTXFSIZ) on page 1207

OTG_HS_DIEPTXFx

OTG_HS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO size register (OTG_HS_DIEPTXFx) (x = 1..7, where x is the FIFO_number) on page 1207

Host-mode CSR map

These registers must be programmed every time the core changes to host mode. Table 179. Host-mode control and status registers (CSRs)
Acronym OTG_HS_HCFG OTG_HS_HFIR OTG_HS_HFNUM Offset address 0x400 0x404 0x408 Register name OTG_HS host configuration register (OTG_HS_HCFG) on page 1208 OTG_HS Host frame interval register (OTG_HS_HFIR) on page 1209 OTG_HS host frame number/frame time remaining register (OTG_HS_HFNUM) on page 1209 OTG_HS_Host periodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_HS_HPTXSTS) on page 1210 OTG_HS Host all channels interrupt register (OTG_HS_HAINT) on page 1211 OTG_HS host all channels interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_HAINTMSK) on page 1211

OTG_HS_HPTXSTS OTG_HS_HAINT OTG_HS_HAINTMSK

0x410 0x414 0x418

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1180/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 179. Host-mode control and status registers (CSRs) (continued)
Acronym OTG_HS_HPRT Offset address 0x440 0x500 0x520 ... 0x6E0 0x504 0x508 Register name

RM0090

OTG_HS host port control and status register (OTG_HS_HPRT) on page 1212

OTG_HS_HCCHARx

OTG_HS host channel-x characteristics register (OTG_HS_HCCHARx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number) on page 1214

OTG_HS_HCSPLTx OTG_HS_HCINTx

OTG_HS host channel-x split control register (OTG_HS_HCSPLTx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number) on page 1216 OTG_HS host channel-x interrupt register (OTG_HS_HCINTx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number) on page 1217 OTG_HS host channel-x interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_HCINTMSKx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number) on page 1218 OTG_HS host channel-x transfer size register (OTG_HS_HCTSIZx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number) on page 1219 OTG_HS host channel-x DMA address register (OTG_HS_HCDMAx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number) on page 1220

OTG_HS_HCINTMSKx 0x50C OTG_HS_HCTSIZx OTG_HS_HCDMAx 0x510 0x514

Device-mode CSR map

These registers must be programmed every time the core changes to peripheral mode. Table 180. Device-mode control and status registers
Acronym OTG_HS_DCFG OTG_HS_DCTL OTG_HS_DSTS OTG_HS_DIEPMSK Offset address 0x800 0x804 0x808 0x810 Register name OTG_HS device configuration register (OTG_HS_DCFG) on page 1220 OTG_HS device control register (OTG_HS_DCTL) on page 1222 OTG_HS device status register (OTG_HS_DSTS) on page 1224 OTG_HS device IN endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DIEPMSK) on page 1225 OTG_HS device OUT endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DOEPMSK) on page 1226 OTG_HS device all endpoints interrupt register (OTG_HS_DAINT) on page 1227 OTG_HS all endpoints interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DAINTMSK) on page 1227 OTG_HS device VBUS discharge time register (OTG_HS_DVBUSDIS) on page 1228 OTG_HS device VBUS pulsing time register (OTG_HS_DVBUSPULSE) on page 1228

OTG_HS_DOEPMSK OTG_HS_DAINT OTG_HS_DAINTMSK OTG_HS_DVBUSDIS OTG_HS_DVBUSPULSE

0x814 0x818 0x81C 0x828 0x82C

1181/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Table 180. Device-mode control and status registers (continued)

Acronym Offset address 0x834 Register name OTG_HS device IN endpoint FIFO empty interrupt mask register: (OTG_HS_DIEPEMPMSK) on page 1230 OTG_HS device each endpoint interrupt register (OTG_HS_DEACHINT) on page 1230 OTG_HS device each endpoint interrupt register mask (OTG_HS_DEACHINTMSK) on page 1231 OTG_HS device each in endpoint-1 interrupt register (OTG_HS_DIEPEACHMSK1) on page 1231 OTG_HS device each OUT endpoint-1 interrupt register (OTG_HS_DOEPEACHMSK1) on page 1232

OTG_HS_DIEPEMPMSK

OTG_HS_EACHHINT

0x838

OTG_HS_EACHHINTMSK

0x83C

OTG_HS_DIEPEACHMSK1

0x844

OTG_HS_DOEPEACHMSK1

0x884 0x920 0x940 ... 0xAE0 0x908

OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx

OTG device endpoint-x control register (OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx) (x = 0..7, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1233

OTG_HS_DIEPINTx

OTG_HS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) (x = 0..7, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1240 OTG_HS device IN endpoint 0 transfer size register (OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZ0) on page 1243 OTG_HS device endpoint-x DMA address register (OTG_HS_DIEPDMAx / OTG_HS_DOEPDMAx) (x = 1..5, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1247 OTG_HS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO status register (OTG_HS_DTXFSTSx) (x = 0..5, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1246 OTG_HS device endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) (x = 1..5, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1246 OTG_HS device control OUT endpoint 0 control register (OTG_HS_DOEPCTL0) on page 1236

OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZ0

0x910

OTG_HS_DIEPDMAx

0x914

OTG_HS_DTXFSTSx

0x918 0x930 0x950 ... 0xAF0 0xB00 0xB20 0xB40 ... 0xCC0 0xCE0 0xCFD

OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx

OTG_HS_DOEPCTL0

OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx

OTG device endpoint-x control register (OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx) (x = 0..7, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1233

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1182/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 180. Device-mode control and status registers (continued)
Acronym Offset address 0xB08 Register name

RM0090

OTG_HS_DOEPINTx

OTG_HS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) (x = 0..7, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1240 OTG_HS device endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) (x = 1..5, where x = Endpoint_number) on page 1246

OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx

0xB10

Data FIFO (DFIFO) access register map

These registers, available in both host and peripheral modes, are used to read or write the FIFO space for a specific endpoint or a channel, in a given direction. If a host channel is of type IN, the FIFO can only be read on the channel. Similarly, if a host channel is of type OUT, the FIFO can only be written on the channel. Table 181. Data FIFO (DFIFO) access register map
FIFO access register section Device IN Endpoint 0/Host OUT Channel 0: DFIFO Write Access Device OUT Endpoint 0/Host IN Channel 0: DFIFO Read Access Device IN Endpoint 1/Host OUT Channel 1: DFIFO Write Access Device OUT Endpoint 1/Host IN Channel 1: DFIFO Read Access ... Address range 0x10000x1FFC Access w r w r ...

0x20000x2FFC ...

w Device IN Endpoint x(1)/Host OUT Channel x(1): DFIFO Write Access 0xX000h0xXFFCh Device OUT Endpoint x(1)/Host IN Channel x(1): DFIFO Read Access r
1. Where x is 5 in peripheral mode and 11 in host mode.

Power and clock gating CSR map

There is a single register for power and clock gating. It is available in both host and peripheral modes. Table 182. Power and clock gating control and status registers
Register name Power and clock gating control register Reserved Acronym PCGCR Offset address: 0xE000xFFF 0xE00-0xE04 0xE050xFFF

1183/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

31.12.2

OTG_HS global registers

These registers are available in both host and peripheral modes, and do not need to be reprogrammed when switching between these modes. Bit values in the register descriptions are expressed in binary unless otherwise specified.

OTG_HS control and status register (OTG_HS_GOTGCTL)

Address offset: 0x000 Reset value: 0x0000 0800 The OTG control and status register controls the behavior and reflects the status of the OTG function of the core.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 HSHNPEN DHNPEN CIDSTS BSVLD ASVLD DBCT 9 HNPRQ 8 HNGSCS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SRQ rw 0 SRQSCS r

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 BSVLD: B-session valid Indicates the peripheral mode transceiver status. 0: B-session is not valid. 1: B-session is valid. In OTG mode, you can use this bit to determine if the device is connected or disconnected. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 18 ASVLD: A-session valid Indicates the host mode transceiver status. 0: A-session is not valid 1: A-session is valid Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 17 DBCT: Long/short debounce time Indicates the debounce time of a detected connection. 0: Long debounce time, used for physical connections (100 ms + 2.5 s) 1: Short debounce time, used for soft connections (2.5 s) Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 16 CIDSTS: Connector ID status Indicates the connector ID status on a connect event. 0: The OTG_HS controller is in A-device mode 1: The OTG_HS controller is in B-device mode Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 DHNPEN: Device HNP enabled The application sets this bit when it successfully receives a SetFeature.SetHNPEnable command from the connected USB host. 0: HNP is not enabled in the application 1: HNP is enabled in the application Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1184/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 10 HSHNPEN: Host set HNP enable The application sets this bit when it has successfully enabled HNP (using the SetFeature.SetHNPEnable command) on the connected device. 0: Host Set HNP is not enabled 1: Host Set HNP is enabled Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 9 HNPRQ: HNP request The application sets this bit to initiate an HNP request to the connected USB host. The application can clear this bit by writing a 0 when the host negotiation success status change bit in the OTG interrupt register (HNSSCHG bit in OTG_HS_GOTGINT) is set. The core clears this bit when the HNSSCHG bit is cleared. 0: No HNP request 1: HNP request Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 8 HNGSCS: Host negotiation success The core sets this bit when host negotiation is successful. The core clears this bit when the HNP Request (HNPRQ) bit in this register is set. 0: Host negotiation failure 1: Host negotiation success Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bits 7:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 SRQ: Session request The application sets this bit to initiate a session request on the USB. The application can clear this bit by writing a 0 when the host negotiation success status change bit in the OTG Interrupt register (HNSSCHG bit in OTG_HS_GOTGINT) is set. The core clears this bit when the HNSSCHG bit is cleared. If you use the USB 1.1 full-speed serial transceiver interface to initiate the session request, the application must wait until VBUS discharges to 0.2 V, after the B-Session Valid bit in this register (BSVLD bit in OTG_HS_GOTGCTL) is cleared. This discharge time varies between different PHYs and can be obtained from the PHY vendor. 0: No session request 1: Session request Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 0 SRQSCS: Session request success The core sets this bit when a session request initiation is successful. 0: Session request failure 1: Session request success Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode.

1185/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS interrupt register (OTG_HS_GOTGINT)

Address offset: 0x04 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application reads this register whenever there is an OTG interrupt and clears the bits in this register to clear the OTG interrupt.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 DBCDNE 18 ADTOCHG 17 HNGDET 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 HNSSCHG 8 SRSSCHG 7 6 5 4 3 2 SEDET 1 0

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Res.

rc_ rc_ rc_ w1 w1 w1

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

rc_ w1

Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 DBCDNE: Debounce done The core sets this bit when the debounce is completed after the device connect. The application can start driving USB reset after seeing this interrupt. This bit is only valid when the HNP Capable or SRP Capable bit is set in the Core USB Configuration register (HNPCAP bit or SRPCAP bit in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG, respectively). Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 18 ADTOCHG: A-device timeout change The core sets this bit to indicate that the A-device has timed out while waiting for the B-device to connect. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 17 HNGDET: Host negotiation detected The core sets this bit when it detects a host negotiation request on the USB. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bits 16:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 HNSSCHG: Host negotiation success status change The core sets this bit on the success or failure of a USB host negotiation request. The application must read the host negotiation success bit of the OTG Control and Status register (HNGSCS in OTG_HS_GOTGCTL) to check for success or failure. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bits 7:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 SRSSCHG: Session request success status change The core sets this bit on the success or failure of a session request. The application must read the session request success bit in the OTG Control and status register (SRQSCS bit in OTG_HS_GOTGCTL) to check for success or failure. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 2 SEDET: Session end detected The core sets this bit to indicate that the level of the voltage on VBUS is no longer valid for a Bdevice session when VBUS < 0.8 V. Bits 1:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1186/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS AHB configuration register (OTG_HS_GAHBCFG)

Address offset: 0x008 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register can be used to configure the core after power-on or a change in mode. This register mainly contains AHB system-related configuration parameters. Do not change this register after the initial programming. The application must program this register before starting any transactions on either the AHB or the USB.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PTXFELVL 7 TXFELVL 6 Reserved 5 DMAEN 4 3 2 1 0 GINT rw

HBSTLEN

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 8 PTXFELVL: Periodic TxFIFO empty level Indicates when the periodic TxFIFO empty interrupt bit in the Core interrupt register (PTXFE bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is triggered. 0: PTXFE (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) interrupt indicates that the Periodic TxFIFO is half empty 1: PTXFE (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) interrupt indicates that the Periodic TxFIFO is completely empty Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 7 TXFELVL: TxFIFO empty level In peripheral mode, this bit indicates when the IN endpoint Transmit FIFO empty interrupt (TXFE in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx.) is triggered. 0: TXFE (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) interrupt indicates that the IN Endpoint TxFIFO is half empty 1: TXFE (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) interrupt indicates that the IN Endpoint TxFIFO is completely empty Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits5 DMAEN: DMA enable 0: The core operates in slave mode 1: The core operates in DMA mode Bits 4:1 HBSTLEN: Burst length/type 0000 Single 0001 INCR 0011 INCR4 0101 INCR8 0111 INCR16 Others: Reserved Bit 0 GINT: Global interrupt mask This bit is used to mask or unmask the interrupt line assertion to the application. Irrespective of this bit setting, the interrupt status registers are updated by the core. 0: Mask the interrupt assertion to the application. 1: Unmask the interrupt assertion to the application Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes.

1187/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS USB configuration register (OTG_HS_GUSBCFG)

Address offset: 0x00C Reset value: 0x0000 0A00 This register can be used to configure the core after power-on or a changing to host mode or peripheral mode. It contains USB and USB-PHY related configuration parameters. The application must program this register before starting any transactions on either the AHB or the USB. Do not make changes to this register after the initial programming.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ULPIEVBUSD ULPIEVBUSI ULPIFSLS PHYLPCS ULPICSM CTXPKT ULPIIPD FDMOD FHMOD ULPIAR TSDPS 9 HNPCAP 8 SRPCAP 7 6 PHSEL 5 4 3 2 1 0

PCCI

PTCI

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

TRDT

TOCAL Reserved

Reserved

r/rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

r/rw

wo

rw

Bit 31 CTXPKT: Corrupt Tx packet This bit is for debug purposes only. Never set this bit to 1. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 30 FDMOD: Forced peripheral mode Writing a 1 to this bit forces the core to peripheral mode irrespective of the OTG_HS_ID input pin. 0: Normal mode 1: Forced peripheral mode After setting the force bit, the application must wait at least 25 ms before the change takes effect. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 29 FHMOD: Forced host mode Writing a 1 to this bit forces the core to host mode irrespective of the OTG_HS_ID input pin. 0: Normal mode 1: Forced host mode After setting the force bit, the application must wait at least 25 ms before the change takes effect. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bits 28:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 25 ULPIIPD: ULPI interface protect disable This bit controls the circuitry built in the PHY to protect the ULPI interface when the link tristates stp and data. Any pull-up or pull-down resistors employed by this feature can be disabled. Please refer to the ULPI specification for more details. 0: Enables the interface protection circuit 1: Disables the interface protection circuit Bit 24 PTCI: Indicator pass through This bit controls whether the complement output is qualified with the internal VBUS valid comparator before being used in the VBUS state in the RX CMD. Please refer to the ULPI specification for more details. 0: Complement Output signal is qualified with the Internal VBUS valid comparator 1: Complement Output signal is not qualified with the Internal VBUS valid comparator

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1188/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 23 PCCI: Indicator complement This bit controls the PHY to invert the ExternalVbusIndicator input signal, and generate the complement output. Please refer to the ULPI specification for more details. 0: PHY does not invert the ExternalVbusIndicator signal 1: PHY inverts ExternalVbusIndicator signal Bit 22 TSDPS: TermSel DLine pulsing selection This bit selects utmi_termselect to drive the data line pulse during SRP (session request protocol). 0: Data line pulsing using utmi_txvalid (default) 1: Data line pulsing using utmi_termsel Bit 21 ULPIEVBUSI: ULPI external VBUS indicator This bit indicates to the ULPI PHY to use an external VBUS overcurrent indicator. 0: PHY uses an internal VBUS valid comparator 1: PHY uses an external VBUS valid comparator Bit 20 ULPIEVBUSD: ULPI External VBUS Drive This bit selects between internal or external supply to drive 5 V on VBUS, in the ULPI PHY. 0: PHY drives VBUS using internal charge pump (default) 1: PHY drives VBUS using external supply. Bit 19 ULPICSM: ULPI Clock SuspendM This bit sets the ClockSuspendM bit in the interface control register on the ULPI PHY. This bit applies only in the serial and carkit modes. 0: PHY powers down the internal clock during suspend 1: PHY does not power down the internal clock Bit 18 ULPIAR: ULPI Auto-resume This bit sets the AutoResume bit in the interface control register on the ULPI PHY. 0: PHY does not use AutoResume feature 1: PHY uses AutoResume feature Bit 17 ULPIFSLS: ULPI FS/LS select The application uses this bit to select the FS/LS serial interface for the ULPI PHY. This bit is valid only when the FS serial transceiver is selected on the ULPI PHY. 0: ULPI interface 1: ULPI FS/LS serial interface Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 15 PHYLPCS: PHY Low-power clock select This bit selects either 480 MHz or 48 MHz (low-power) PHY mode. In FS and LS modes, the PHY can usually operate on a 48 MHz clock to save power. 0: 480 MHz internal PLL clock 1: 48 MHz external clock In 480 MHz mode, the UTMI interface operates at either 60 or 30 MHz, depending on whether the 8- or 16-bit data width is selected. In 48 MHz mode, the UTMI interface operates at 48 MHz in FS and LS modes. Bit 14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1189/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bits 13:10 TRDT: USB turnaround time Sets the turnaround time in PHY clocks. The formula below gives the value of TRDT: TRDT = 4 AHB clock frequency+ 1 PHY clock frequency. For example: If AHB clock frequency = 72 MHz (PHY Clock frequency = 48 MHz), the TRDT must be set to 9. If AHB clock frequency = 48 Mhz (PHY Clock frequency = 48 MHz), the TRDT must be set to 5. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 9 HNPCAP: HNP-capable The application uses this bit to control the OTG_HS controllers HNP capabilities. 0: HNP capability is not enabled 1: HNP capability is enabled Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 8 SRPCAP: SRP-capable The application uses this bit to control the OTG_HS controllers SRP capabilities. If the core operates as a nonSRP-capable B-device, it cannot request the connected A-device (host) to activate VBUS and start a session. 0: SRP capability is not enabled 1: SRP capability is enabled Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 PHSEL: USB 2.0 high-speed ULPI PHY or USB 1.1 full-speed serial transceiver select 0: USB 2.0 high-speed ULPI PHY 1: USB 1.1 full-speed serial transceiver Bits 5:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 2:0 TOCAL: FS timeout calibration The number of PHY clocks that the application programs in this field is added to the fullspeed interpacket timeout duration in the core to account for any additional delays introduced by the PHY. This can be required, because the delay introduced by the PHY in generating the line state condition can vary from one PHY to another. The USB standard timeout value for full-speed operation is 16 to 18 (inclusive) bit times. The application must program this field based on the speed of enumeration. The number of bit times added per PHY clock is 0.25 bit times.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1190/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS reset register (OTG_HS_GRSTCTL)

Address offset: 0x010 Reset value: 0x2000 0000 The application uses this register to reset various hardware features inside the core.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DMAREQ AHBIDL Reserved 9 8 7 6 5 TXFFLSH 4 RXFFLSH 3 Reserved 2 FCRST 1 HSRST rs 0 CSRST rs

TXFNUM

rw

rs

rs

rs

Bit 31 AHBIDL: AHB master idle Indicates that the AHB master state machine is in the Idle condition. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 30 DMAREQ: DMA request signal This bit indicates that the DMA request is in progress. Used for debug. Bits 29:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:6 TXFNUM: TxFIFO number This is the FIFO number that must be flushed using the TxFIFO Flush bit. This field must not be changed until the core clears the TxFIFO Flush bit. 00000: Nonperiodic TxFIFO flush in host mode Tx FIFO 0 flush in peripheral mode 00001: Periodic TxFIFO flush in host mode TXFIFO 1 flush in peripheral mode 00010: TXFIFO 2 flush in peripheral mode ... 00101: TXFIFO 15 flush in peripheral mode 10000: Flush all the transmit FIFOs in peripheral or host mode. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 5 TXFFLSH: TxFIFO flush This bit selectively flushes a single or all transmit FIFOs, but cannot do so if the core is in the midst of a transaction. The application must write this bit only after checking that the core is neither writing to the TxFIFO nor reading from the TxFIFO. Verify using these registers: Read: the NAK effective interrupt ensures the core is not reading from the FIFO Write: the AHBIDL bit in OTG_HS_GRSTCTL ensures that the core is not writing anything to the FIFO Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes.

1191/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 4 RXFFLSH: RxFIFO flush The application can flush the entire RxFIFO using this bit, but must first ensure that the core is not in the middle of a transaction. The application must only write to this bit after checking that the core is neither reading from the RxFIFO nor writing to the RxFIFO. The application must wait until the bit is cleared before performing any other operation. This bit requires 8 clocks (slowest of PHY or AHB clock) to be cleared. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 2 FCRST: Host frame counter reset The application writes this bit to reset the frame number counter inside the core. When the frame counter is reset, the subsequent SOF sent out by the core has a frame number of 0. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 1 HSRST: HCLK soft reset The application uses this bit to flush the control logic in the AHB Clock domain. Only AHB Clock Domain pipelines are reset. FIFOs are not flushed with this bit. All state machines in the AHB clock domain are reset to the Idle state after terminating the transactions on the AHB, following the protocol. CSR control bits used by the AHB clock domain state machines are cleared. To clear this interrupt, status mask bits that control the interrupt status and are generated by the AHB clock domain state machine are cleared. Because interrupt status bits are not cleared, the application can get the status of any core events that occurred after it set this bit. This is a self-clearing bit that the core clears after all necessary logic is reset in the core. This can take several clocks, depending on the cores current state. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1192/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 0 CSRST: Core soft reset Resets the HCLK and PCLK domains as follows: Clears the interrupts and all the CSR register bits except for the following bits: RSTPDMODL bit in OTG_HS_PCGCCTL GAYEHCLK bit in OTG_HS_PCGCCTL PWRCLMP bit in OTG_HS_PCGCCTL STPPCLK bit in OTG_HS_PCGCCTL FSLSPCS bit in OTG_HS_HCFG DSPD bit in OTG_HS_DCFG All module state machines (except for the AHB slave unit) are reset to the Idle state, and all the transmit FIFOs and the receive FIFO are flushed. Any transactions on the AHB Master are terminated as soon as possible, after completing the last data phase of an AHB transfer. Any transactions on the USB are terminated immediately. The application can write to this bit any time it wants to reset the core. This is a self-clearing bit and the core clears this bit after all the necessary logic is reset in the core, which can take several clocks, depending on the current state of the core. Once this bit has been cleared, the software must wait at least 3 PHY clocks before accessing the PHY domain (synchronization delay). The software must also check that bit 31 in this register is set to 1 (AHB Master is Idle) before starting any operation. Typically, the software reset is used during software development and also when you dynamically change the PHY selection bits in the above listed USB configuration registers. When you change the PHY, the corresponding clock for the PHY is selected and used in the PHY domain. Once a new clock is selected, the PHY domain has to be reset for proper operation. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes.

1193/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS core interrupt register (OTG_HS_GINTSTS)

Address offset: 0x014 Reset value: 0x0400 0020 This register interrupts the application for system-level events in the current mode (peripheral mode or host mode). Some of the bits in this register are valid only in host mode, while others are valid in peripheral mode only. This register also indicates the current mode. To clear the interrupt status bits of the rc_w1 type, the application must write 1 into the bit. The FIFO status interrupts are read-only; once software reads from or writes to the FIFO while servicing these interrupts, FIFO interrupt conditions are cleared automatically. The application must clear the OTG_HS_GINTSTS register at initialization before unmasking the interrupt bit to avoid any interrupts generated prior to initialization.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 IPXFR/INCOMPISOOUT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BOUTNAKEFF

DATAFSUSP

ENUMDNE

GINAKEFF

USBSUSP

ISOODRP

CIDSCHG

HPRTINT

IISOIXFR

USBRST

DISCINT

WKUINT

NPTXFE

SRQINT

OTGINT

OEPINT

RXFLVL

ESUSP

PTXFE

IEPINT

HCINT

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rc_w1

rc_w1

rc_w1

rc_w1

rc_w1

Bit 31 WKUPINT: Resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt In peripheral mode, this interrupt is asserted when a resume is detected on the USB. In host mode, this interrupt is asserted when a remote wakeup is detected on the USB. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 30 SRQINT: Session request/new session detected interrupt In host mode, this interrupt is asserted when a session request is detected from the device. In peripheral mode, this interrupt is asserted when VBUS is in the valid range for a B-device device. Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 29 DISCINT: Disconnect detected interrupt Asserted when a device disconnect is detected. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 28 CIDSCHG: Connector ID status change The core sets this bit when there is a change in connector ID status. Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 PTXFE: Periodic TxFIFO empty Asserted when the periodic transmit FIFO is either half or completely empty and there is space for at least one entry to be written in the periodic request queue. The half or completely empty status is determined by the periodic TxFIFO empty level bit in the Core AHB configuration register (PTXFELVL bit in OTG_HS_GAHBCFG). Note: Only accessible in host mode.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1194/1422

CMOD r

EOPF

MMIS

SOF

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 25 HCINT: Host channels interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate that an interrupt is pending on one of the channels of the core (in host mode). The application must read the host all channels interrupt (OTG_HS_HAINT) register to determine the exact number of the channel on which the interrupt occurred, and then read the corresponding host channel-x interrupt (OTG_HS_HCINTx) register to determine the exact cause of the interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the OTG_HS_HCINTx register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 24 HPRTINT: Host port interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate a change in port status of one of the OTG_HS controller ports in host mode. The application must read the host port control and status (OTG_HS_HPRT) register to determine the exact event that caused this interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the host port control and status register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bits 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 22 DATAFSUSP: Data fetch suspended This interrupt is valid only in DMA mode. This interrupt indicates that the core has stopped fetching data for IN endpoints due to the unavailability of TxFIFO space or request queue space. This interrupt is used by the application for an endpoint mismatch algorithm. For example, after detecting an endpoint mismatch, the application: Sets a global nonperiodic IN NAK handshake Disables IN endpoints Flushes the FIFO Determines the token sequence from the IN token sequence learning queue Re-enables the endpoints Clears the global nonperiodic IN NAK handshake If the global nonperiodic IN NAK is cleared, the core has not yet fetched data for the IN endpoint, and the IN token is received: the core generates an IN token received when FIFO empty interrupt. The OTG then sends a NAK response to the host. To avoid this scenario, the application can check the FetSusp interrupt in OTG_FS_GINTSTS, which ensures that the FIFO is full before clearing a global NAK handshake. Alternatively, the application can mask the IN token received when FIFO empty interrupt when clearing a global IN NAK handshake. Bit 21 IPXFR: Incomplete periodic transfer In host mode, the core sets this interrupt bit when there are incomplete periodic transactions still pending, which are scheduled for the current frame. Note: Only accessible in host mode. INCOMPISOOUT: Incomplete isochronous OUT transfer In peripheral mode, the core sets this interrupt to indicate that there is at least one isochronous OUT endpoint on which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the End of periodic frame interrupt (EOPF) bit in this register. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 20 IISOIXFR: Incomplete isochronous IN transfer The core sets this interrupt to indicate that there is at least one isochronous IN endpoint on which the transfer is not completed in the current frame. This interrupt is asserted along with the End of periodic frame interrupt (EOPF) bit in this register. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode.

1195/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 19 OEPINT: OUT endpoint interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate that an interrupt is pending on one of the OUT endpoints of the core (in peripheral mode). The application must read the device all endpoints interrupt (OTG_HS_DAINT) register to determine the exact number of the OUT endpoint on which the interrupt occurred, and then read the corresponding device OUT Endpoint-x Interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) register to determine the exact cause of the interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the corresponding OTG_HS_DOEPINTx register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 18 IEPINT: IN endpoint interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate that an interrupt is pending on one of the IN endpoints of the core (in peripheral mode). The application must read the device All Endpoints Interrupt (OTG_HS_DAINT) register to determine the exact number of the IN endpoint on which the interrupt occurred, and then read the corresponding device IN Endpoint-x interrupt (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) register to determine the exact cause of the interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the corresponding OTG_HS_DIEPINTx register to clear this bit. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bits 17:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 EOPF: End of periodic frame interrupt Indicates that the period specified in the periodic frame interval field of the device configuration register (PFIVL bit in OTG_HS_DCFG) has been reached in the current frame. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 14 ISOODRP: Isochronous OUT packet dropped interrupt The core sets this bit when it fails to write an isochronous OUT packet into the RxFIFO because the RxFIFO does not have enough space to accommodate a maximum size packet for the isochronous OUT endpoint. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 13 ENUMDNE: Enumeration done The core sets this bit to indicate that speed enumeration is complete. The application must read the device Status (OTG_HS_DSTS) register to obtain the enumerated speed. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 12 USBRST: USB reset The core sets this bit to indicate that a reset is detected on the USB. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 11 USBSUSP: USB suspend The core sets this bit to indicate that a suspend was detected on the USB. The core enters the Suspended state when there is no activity on the data lines for a period of 3 ms. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 10 ESUSP: Early suspend The core sets this bit to indicate that an Idle state has been detected on the USB for 3 ms. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bits 9:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1196/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 7 GONAKEFF: Global OUT NAK effective Indicates that the Set global OUT NAK bit in the Device control register (SGONAK bit in OTG_HS_DCTL), set by the application, has taken effect in the core. This bit can be cleared by writing the Clear global OUT NAK bit in the Device control register (CGONAK bit in OTG_HS_DCTL). Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 6 GINAKEFF: Global IN nonperiodic NAK effective Indicates that the Set global nonperiodic IN NAK bit in the Device control register (SGINAK bit in OTG_HS_DCTL), set by the application, has taken effect in the core. That is, the core has sampled the Global IN NAK bit set by the application. This bit can be cleared by clearing the Clear global nonperiodic IN NAK bit in the Device control register (CGINAK bit in OTG_HS_DCTL). This interrupt does not necessarily mean that a NAK handshake is sent out on the USB. The STALL bit takes precedence over the NAK bit. Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 5 NPTXFE: Nonperiodic TxFIFO empty This interrupt is asserted when the nonperiodic TxFIFO is either half or completely empty, and there is space in at least one entry to be written to the nonperiodic transmit request queue. The half or completely empty status is determined by the nonperiodic TxFIFO empty level bit in the OTG_HS_GAHBCFG register (TXFELVL bit in OTG_HS_GAHBCFG). Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 4 RXFLVL: RxFIFO nonempty Indicates that there is at least one packet pending to be read from the RxFIFO. Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 3 SOF: Start of frame In host mode, the core sets this bit to indicate that an SOF (FS), or Keep-Alive (LS) is transmitted on the USB. The application must write a 1 to this bit to clear the interrupt. In peripheral mode, in the core sets this bit to indicate that an SOF token has been received on the USB. The application can read the Device Status register to get the current frame number. This interrupt is seen only when the core is operating in FS. Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 2 OTGINT: OTG interrupt The core sets this bit to indicate an OTG protocol event. The application must read the OTG Interrupt Status (OTG_HS_GOTGINT) register to determine the exact event that caused this interrupt. The application must clear the appropriate status bit in the OTG_HS_GOTGINT register to clear this bit. Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 1 MMIS: Mode mismatch interrupt The core sets this bit when the application is trying to access: A host mode register, when the core is operating in peripheral mode A peripheral mode register, when the core is operating in host mode The register access is completed on the AHB with an OKAY response, but is ignored by the core internally and does not affect the operation of the core. Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 0 CMOD: Current mode of operation Indicates the current mode. 0: Peripheral mode 1: Host mode Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes.

1197/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_GINTMSK)

Address offset: 0x018 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register works with the Core interrupt register to interrupt the application. When an interrupt bit is masked, the interrupt associated with that bit is not generated. However, the Core Interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) register bit corresponding to that interrupt is still set.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 IPXFRM/IISOOXFRM 9 8 7 GONAKEFFM 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ENUMDNEM

GINAKEFFM

USBSUSPM

ISOODRPM

CIDSCHGM

IISOIXFRM

NPTXFEM

RXFLVLM

ESUSPM

FSUSPM

USBRST

PTXFEM

DISCINT

EPMISM

OTGINT

OEPINT

EOPFM

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

MMISM rw

SRQIM

IEPINT

PRTIM

SOFM

WUIM

HCIM

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 WUIM: Resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 30 SRQIM: Session request/new session detected interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 29 DISCINT: Disconnect detected interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 28 CIDSCHGM: Connector ID status change mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both host and peripheral modes. Bit 27 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 26 PTXFEM: Periodic TxFIFO empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 25 HCIM: Host channels interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 24 PRTIM: Host port interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode. Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1198/1422

Reserved

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 22 FSUSPM: Data fetch suspended mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 21 IPXFRM: Incomplete periodic transfer mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in host mode. IISOOXFRM: Incomplete isochronous OUT transfer mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 20 IISOIXFRM: Incomplete isochronous IN transfer mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 19 OEPINT: OUT endpoints interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 18 IEPINT: IN endpoints interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 17 EPMISM: Endpoint mismatch interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 EOPFM: End of periodic frame interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 14 ISOODRPM: Isochronous OUT packet dropped interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 13 ENUMDNEM: Enumeration done mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 12 USBRST: USB reset mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode.

1199/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 11 USBSUSPM: USB suspend mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 10 ESUSPM: Early suspend mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bits 9:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 7 GONAKEFFM: Global OUT NAK effective mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 6 GINAKEFFM: Global nonperiodic IN NAK effective mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Only accessible in peripheral mode. Bit 5 NPTXFEM: Nonperiodic TxFIFO empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 4 RXFLVLM: Receive FIFO nonempty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 3 SOFM: Start of frame mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 2 OTGINT: OTG interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 1 MMISM: Mode mismatch interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Note: Accessible in both peripheral and host modes. Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1200/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS Receive status debug read/OTG status read and pop registers (OTG_HS_GRXSTSR/OTG_HS_GRXSTSP)
Address offset for Read: 0x01C Address offset for Pop: 0x020 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 A read to the Receive status debug read register returns the contents of the top of the Receive FIFO. A read to the Receive status read and pop register additionally pops the top data entry out of the RxFIFO. The receive status contents must be interpreted differently in host and peripheral modes. The core ignores the receive status pop/read when the receive FIFO is empty and returns a value of 0x0000 0000. The application must only pop the Receive Status FIFO when the Receive FIFO nonempty bit of the Core interrupt register (RXFLVL bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is asserted.

Host mode:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PKTSTS Reserved r r r r DPID 9 BCNT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CHNUM

Bits 31:21 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 20:17 PKTSTS: Packet status Indicates the status of the received packet 0010: IN data packet received 0011: IN transfer completed (triggers an interrupt) 0101: Data toggle error (triggers an interrupt) 0111: Channel halted (triggers an interrupt) Others: Reserved Bits 16:15 DPID: Data PID Indicates the Data PID of the received packet 00: DATA0 10: DATA1 01: DATA2 11: MDATA Bits 14:4 BCNT: Byte count Indicates the byte count of the received IN data packet. Bits 3:0 CHNUM: Channel number Indicates the channel number to which the current received packet belongs.

1201/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Peripheral mode:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FRMNUM Reserved r r r r r PKTSTS DPID 9 BCNT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EPNUM

Bits 31:25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 24:21 FRMNUM: Frame number This is the least significant 4 bits of the frame number in which the packet is received on the USB. This field is supported only when isochronous OUT endpoints are supported. Bits 20:17 PKTSTS: Packet status Indicates the status of the received packet 0001: Global OUT NAK (triggers an interrupt) 0010: OUT data packet received 0011: OUT transfer completed (triggers an interrupt) 0100: SETUP transaction completed (triggers an interrupt) 0110: SETUP data packet received Others: Reserved Bits 16:15 DPID: Data PID Indicates the Data PID of the received OUT data packet 00: DATA0 10: DATA1 01: DATA2 11: MDATA Bits 14:4 BCNT: Byte count Indicates the byte count of the received data packet. Bits 3:0 EPNUM: Endpoint number Indicates the endpoint number to which the current received packet belongs.

OTG_HS Receive FIFO size register (OTG_HS_GRXFSIZ)

Address offset: 0x024 Reset value: 0x0000 0200 The application can program the RAM size that must be allocated to the RxFIFO.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved r/rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RXFD

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 RXFD: RxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 1024 The power-on reset value of this register is specified as the largest Rx data FIFO depth.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1202/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS nonperiodic transmit FIFO size/Endpoint 0 transmit FIFO size register (OTG_HS_GNPTXFSIZ/OTG_HS_TX0FSIZ)
Address offset: 0x028 Reset value: 0x0000 0200

Host mode:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 NPTXFD r/rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NPTXFSA r/rw

Bits 31:16 NPTXFD: Nonperiodic TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 1024 Bits 15:0 NPTXFSA: Nonperiodic transmit RAM start address This field contains the memory start address for nonperiodic transmit FIFO RAM.

Peripheral mode:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 TX0FD r/rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TX0FSA r/rw

Bits 31:16 T0XFD: Endpoint 0 TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 256 Bits 15:0 TX0FSA: Endpoint 0 transmit RAM start address This field contains the memory start address for Endpoint 0 transmit FIFO RAM.

OTG_HS nonperiodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_HS_GNPTXSTS)

Address offset: 0x02C Reset value: 0x0008 0200 Note: In peripheral mode, this register is not valid. This read-only register contains the free space information for the nonperiodic TxFIFO and the nonperiodic transmit request queue.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved NPTXQTOP r NPTQXSAV r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

NPTXFSAV r

1203/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:24 NPTXQTOP: Top of the nonperiodic transmit request queue Entry in the nonperiodic Tx request queue that is currently being processed by the MAC. Bits [30:27]: Channel/endpoint number Bits [26:25]: 00: IN/OUT token 01: Zero-length transmit packet (device IN/host OUT) 10: PING/CSPLIT token 11: Channel halt command Bit [24]: Terminate (last entry for selected channel/endpoint) Bits 23:16 NPTQXSAV: Nonperiodic transmit request queue space available Indicates the amount of free space available in the nonperiodic transmit request queue. This queue holds both IN and OUT requests in host mode. Peripheral mode has only IN requests. 00: Nonperiodic transmit request queue is full 01: dx1 location available 10: dx2 locations available bxn: dxn locations available (0 n dx8) Others: Reserved Bits 15:0 NPTXFSAV: Nonperiodic TxFIFO space available Indicates the amount of free space available in the nonperiodic TxFIFO. Values are in terms of 32-bit words. 00: Nonperiodic TxFIFO is full 01: dx1 word available 10: dx2 words available 0xn: dxn words available (where 0 n dx1024) Others: Reserved

OTG_HS I2C access register (OTG_HS_GI2CCTL)

Address offset: 0x030 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 BSYDNE 29 28 I2CDATSE0 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 I2CEN ACK 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved

I2CDEV ADR rw rw

RW

ADDR

REGADDR

RWDATA

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1204/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 31 BSYDNE: I2C Busy/Done The application sets this bit to 1 to start a request on the I2C interface. When the transfer is complete, the core deasserts this bit to 0. As long as the bit is set indicating that the I2C interface is busy, the application cannot start another request on the interface. Bit 30 RW: Read/Write Indicator This bit indicates whether a read or write register transfer must be performed on the interface. 0: Write 1: Read Note: Read/write bursting is not supported for registers. Bit 29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 28 I2CDATSE0: I2C DatSe0 USB mode This bit is used to select the full-speed interface USB mode. 0: VP_VM USB mode 1: DAT_SE0 USB mode Bits 27:26 I2CDEVADR: I2C Device Address This bit selects the address of the I2C slave on the USB 1.1 full-speed serial transceiver corresponding to the one used by the core for OTG signalling. Bit 25 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 24 ACK: I2C ACK This bit indicates whether an ACK response was received from the I2C slave. It is valid when BSYDNE is cleared by the core, after the application has initiated an I2C access. 0: NAK 1: ACK Bit 23 I2CEN: I2C Enable This bit enables the I2C master to initiate transactions on the I2C interface. Bits 22:16 ADDR: I2C Address This is the 7-bit I2C device address used by the application to access any external I2C slave, including the I2C slave on a USB 1.1 OTG full-speed serial transceiver. Bits 15:8 REGADDR: I2C Register Address These bits allow to program the address of the register to be read from or written to. Bits 7:0 RWDATA: I2C Read/Write Data After a register read operation, these bits hold the read data for the application. During a write operation, the application can use this register to program the data to be written to a register.

1205/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS general core configuration register (OTG_HS_GCCFG)

Address offset: 0x038 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 NOVBUSSENS SOFOUTEN VBUSBSEN VBUSASEN .PWRDWN I2CPADEN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 NOVBUSSENS: VBUS sensing disable option When this bit is set, VBUS is considered internally to be always at VBUS valid level (5 V). This option removes the need for a dedicated VBUS pad, and leave this pad free to be used for other purposes such as a shared functionality. VBUS connection can be remapped on another general purpose input pad and monitored by software. This option is only suitable for host-only or device-only applications. 0: VBUS sensing available by hardware 1: VBUS sensing not available by hardware. Bit 20 SOFOUTEN: SOF output enable 0: SOF pulse not available on PAD 1: SOF pulse available on PAD Bit 19 VBUSBSEN: Enable the VBUS sensing B device 0: VBUS sensing B disabled 1: VBUS sensing B enabled Bit 18 VBUSASEN: Enable the VBUS sensing A device 0: VBUS sensing A disabled 1: VBUS sensing A enabled Bit 17 I2CPADEN: Enable I2C bus connection for the external I2C PHY interface. 0: I2C bus disabled 1: I2C bus enabled Bit 16 PWRDWN: Power down Used to activate the transceiver in transmission/reception 0: Power down active 1: Power down deactivated (Transceiver active) Bits 15:0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1206/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS core ID register (OTG_HS_CID)

Address offset: 0x03C Reset value:0x0000 1200 This is a read only register containing the Product ID.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PRODUCT_ID rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 PRODUCT_ID: Product ID field Application-programmable ID field.

OTG_HS Host periodic transmit FIFO size register (OTG_HS_HPTXFSIZ)

Address offset: 0x100 Reset value: 0x0200 0600
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PTXFD r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PTXSA r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w r/r w

Bits 31:16 PTXFD: Host periodic TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 512 Bits 15:0 PTXSA: Host periodic TxFIFO start address The power-on reset value of this register is the sum of the largest Rx data FIFO depth and largest nonperiodic Tx data FIFO depth.

OTG_HS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO size register (OTG_HS_DIEPTXFx) (x = 1..7, where x is the FIFO_number)
Address offset: 0x104 + (FIFO_number 1) 0x04 Reset value: 0x02000400
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 INEPTXFD 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

INEPTXSA

r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw r/rw

Bits 31:16 INEPTXFD: IN endpoint TxFIFO depth This value is in terms of 32-bit words. Minimum value is 16 Maximum value is 512 The power-on reset value of this register is specified as the largest IN endpoint FIFO number depth.

1207/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bits 15:0 INEPTXSA: IN endpoint FIFOx transmit RAM start address This field contains the memory start address for IN endpoint transmit FIFOx. The address must be aligned with a 32-bit memory location.

31.12.3

Host-mode registers
Bit values in the register descriptions are expressed in binary unless otherwise specified. Host-mode registers affect the operation of the core in the host mode. Host mode registers must not be accessed in peripheral mode, as the results are undefined. Host mode registers can be categorized as follows:

OTG_HS host configuration register (OTG_HS_HCFG)

Address offset: 0x400 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register configures the core after power-on. Do not change to this register after initializing the host.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 FSLSS 1 FSLSPCS rw rw 0

Bits 31:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 FSLSS: FS- and LS-only support The application uses this bit to control the cores enumeration speed. Using this bit, the application can make the core enumerate as an FS host, even if the connected device supports HS traffic. Do not make changes to this field after initial programming. 0: HS/FS/LS, based on the maximum speed supported by the connected device 1: FS/LS-only, even if the connected device can support HS (read-only) Bits 1:0 FSLSPCS: FS/LS PHY clock select When the core is in FS host mode: 01: PHY clock is running at 48 MHz Others: Reserved When the core is in LS host mode: 00: Reserved 01: PHY clock is running at 48 MHz. 10: Select 6 MHz PHY clock frequency 11: Reserved Note: The FSLSPCS bit must be set on a connection event according to the speed of the connected device. A software reset must be performed after changing this bit.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1208/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS Host frame interval register (OTG_HS_HFIR)

Address offset: 0x404 Reset value: 0x0000 EA60 This register stores the frame interval information for the current speed to which the OTG_HS controller has enumerated.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

FRIVL

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 FRIVL: Frame interval The value that the application programs to this field specifies the interval between two consecutive SOFs (FS), micro-SOFs (HS) or Keep-Alive tokens (LS). This field contains the number of PHY clocks that constitute the required frame interval. The application can write a value to this register only after the Port enable bit of the host port control and status register (PENA bit in OTG_HS_HPRT) has been set. If no value is programmed, the core calculates the value based on the PHY clock specified in the FS/LS PHY Clock Select field of the Host configuration register (FSLSPCS in OTG_HS_HCFG): frame duration PHY clock frequency Note: The FRIVL bit can be modified whenever the application needs to change the Frame interval time.

OTG_HS host frame number/frame time remaining register (OTG_HS_HFNUM)

Address offset: 0x408 Reset value: 0x0000 3FFF This register indicates the current frame number. It also indicates the time remaining (in terms of the number of PHY clocks) in the current frame.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 FTREM r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

FRNUM r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:16 FTREM: Frame time remaining Indicates the amount of time remaining in the current frame, in terms of PHY clocks. This field decrements on each PHY clock. When it reaches zero, this field is reloaded with the value in the Frame interval register and a new SOF is transmitted on the USB. Bits 15:0 FRNUM: Frame number This field increments when a new SOF is transmitted on the USB, and is cleared to 0 when it reaches 0x3FFF.

1209/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS_Host periodic transmit FIFO/queue status register (OTG_HS_HPTXSTS)

Address offset: 0x410 Reset value: 0x0008 0100 This read-only register contains the free space information for the periodic TxFIFO and the periodic transmit request queue.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PTXQTOP r r r r r r r r r r r PTXQSAV r r r r r rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

PTXFSAVL rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:24 PTXQTOP: Top of the periodic transmit request queue This indicates the entry in the periodic Tx request queue that is currently being processed by the MAC. This register is used for debugging. Bit [31]: Odd/Even frame 0: send in even (micro) frame 1: send in odd (micro) frame Bits [30:27]: Channel/endpoint number Bits [26:25]: Type 00: IN/OUT 01: Zero-length packet 11: Disable channel command Bit [24]: Terminate (last entry for the selected channel/endpoint) Bits 23:16 PTXQSAV: Periodic transmit request queue space available Indicates the number of free locations available to be written in the periodic transmit request queue. This queue holds both IN and OUT requests. 00: Periodic transmit request queue is full 01: dx1 location available 10: dx2 locations available bxn: dxn locations available (0 dxn PTXFD) Others: Reserved Bits 15:0 PTXFSAVL: Periodic transmit data FIFO space available Indicates the number of free locations available to be written to in the periodic TxFIFO. Values are in terms of 32-bit words 0000: Periodic TxFIFO is full 0001: dx1 word available 0010: dx2 words available bxn: dxn words available (where 0 dxn dx512) Others: Reserved

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1210/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS Host all channels interrupt register (OTG_HS_HAINT)

Address offset: 0x414 Reset value: 0x0000 000 When a significant event occurs on a channel, the host all channels interrupt register interrupts the application using the host channels interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (HCINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). This is shown in Figure 383. There is one interrupt bit per channel, up to a maximum of 16 bits. Bits in this register are set and cleared when the application sets and clears bits in the corresponding host channel-x interrupt register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

HAINT

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 HAINT: Channel interrupts One bit per channel: Bit 0 for Channel 0, bit 15 for Channel 15

OTG_HS host all channels interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_HAINTMSK)

Address offset: 0x418 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The host all channel interrupt mask register works with the host all channel interrupt register to interrupt the application when an event occurs on a channel. There is one interrupt mask bit per channel, up to a maximum of 16 bits.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

HAINTM

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 HAINTM: Channel interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt One bit per channel: Bit 0 for channel 0, bit 15 for channel 15

1211/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS host port control and status register (OTG_HS_HPRT)

Address offset: 0x440 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is available only in host mode. Currently, the OTG host supports only one port. A single register holds USB port-related information such as USB reset, enable, suspend, resume, connect status, and test mode for each port. It is shown in Figure 383. The rc_w1 bits in this register can trigger an interrupt to the application through the host port interrupt bit of the core interrupt register (HPRTINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). On a Port Interrupt, the application must read this register and clear the bit that caused the interrupt. For the rc_w1 bits, the application must write a 1 to the bit to clear the interrupt.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PLSTS PPWR 9 8 PRST 7 PSUSP 6 PRES 5 POCCHNG 4 POCA 3 PENCHNG 2 PENA 1 PCDET 0 PCSTS r

PSPD Reserved r r rw

PTCTL

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rs

rw

rc_ w1

rc_ rc_ rc_ w1 w0 w1

Bits 31:19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 18:17 PSPD: Port speed Indicates the speed of the device attached to this port. 00: High speed 01: Full speed 10: Low speed 11: Reserved Bits 16:13 PTCTL: Port test control The application writes a nonzero value to this field to put the port into a Test mode, and the corresponding pattern is signaled on the port. 0000: Test mode disabled 0001: Test_J mode 0010: Test_K mode 0011: Test_SE0_NAK mode 0100: Test_Packet mode 0101: Test_Force_Enable Others: Reserved Bit 12 PPWR: Port power The application uses this field to control power to this port, and the core clears this bit on an overcurrent condition. 0: Power off 1: Power on Bits 11:10 PLSTS: Port line status Indicates the current logic level USB data lines Bit [10]: Logic level of OTG_HS_FS_DP Bit [11]: Logic level of OTG_HS_FS_DM Bit 9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1212/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 8 PRST: Port reset When the application sets this bit, a reset sequence is started on this port. The application must time the reset period and clear this bit after the reset sequence is complete. 0: Port not in reset 1: Port in reset The application must leave this bit set for a minimum duration of at least 10 ms to start a reset on the port. The application can leave it set for another 10 ms in addition to the required minimum duration, before clearing the bit, even though there is no maximum limit set by the USB standard. High speed: 50 ms Full speed/Low speed: 10 ms Bit 7 PSUSP: Port suspend The application sets this bit to put this port in Suspend mode. The core only stops sending SOFs when this is set. To stop the PHY clock, the application must set the Port clock stop bit, which asserts the suspend input pin of the PHY. The read value of this bit reflects the current suspend status of the port. This bit is cleared by the core after a remote wakeup signal is detected or the application sets the Port reset bit or Port resume bit in this register or the Resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt bit or Disconnect detected interrupt bit in the Core interrupt register (WKUINT or DISCINT in OTG_HS_GINTSTS, respectively). 0: Port not in Suspend mode 1: Port in Suspend mode Bit 6 PRES: Port resume The application sets this bit to drive resume signaling on the port. The core continues to drive the resume signal until the application clears this bit. If the core detects a USB remote wakeup sequence, as indicated by the Port resume/remote wakeup detected interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (WKUINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS), the core starts driving resume signaling without application intervention and clears this bit when it detects a disconnect condition. The read value of this bit indicates whether the core is currently driving resume signaling. 0: No resume driven 1: Resume driven

Bit 5 POCCHNG: Port overcurrent change The core sets this bit when the status of the Port overcurrent active bit (bit 4) in this register changes. Bit 4 POCA: Port overcurrent active Indicates the overcurrent condition of the port. 0: No overcurrent condition 1: Overcurrent condition Bit 3 PENCHNG: Port enable/disable change The core sets this bit when the status of the Port enable bit [2] in this register changes.

1213/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 2 PENA: Port enable A port is enabled only by the core after a reset sequence, and is disabled by an overcurrent condition, a disconnect condition, or by the application clearing this bit. The application cannot set this bit by a register write. It can only clear it to disable the port. This bit does not trigger any interrupt to the application. 0: Port disabled 1: Port enabled Bit 1 PCDET: Port connect detected The core sets this bit when a device connection is detected to trigger an interrupt to the application using the host port interrupt bit in the Core interrupt register (HPRTINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The application must write a 1 to this bit to clear the interrupt. Bit 0 PCSTS: Port connect status 0: No device is attached to the port 1: A device is attached to the port

OTG_HS host channel-x characteristics register (OTG_HS_HCCHARx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number)

Address offset: 0x500 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ODDFRM CHENA LSDEV EPTYP CHDIS Reserved EPDIR 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DAD

MC

EPNUM

MPSIZ

rs

rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 CHENA: Channel enable This field is set by the application and cleared by the OTG host. 0: Channel disabled 1: Channel enabled Bit 30 CHDIS: Channel disable The application sets this bit to stop transmitting/receiving data on a channel, even before the transfer for that channel is complete. The application must wait for the Channel disabled interrupt before treating the channel as disabled. Bit 29 ODDFRM: Odd frame This field is set (reset) by the application to indicate that the OTG host must perform a transfer in an odd frame. This field is applicable for only periodic (isochronous and interrupt) transactions. 0: Even (micro) frame 1: Odd (micro) frame Bits 28:22 DAD: Device address This field selects the specific device serving as the data source or sink.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1214/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bits 21:20 MC: Multi Count (MC) / Error Count (EC) When the split enable bit (SPLITEN) in the host channel-x split control register (OTG_HS_HCSPLTx) is reset (0), this field indicates to the host the number of transactions that must be executed per micro-frame for this periodic endpoint. For nonperiodic transfers, this field specifies the number of packets to be fetched for this channel before the internal DMA engine changes arbitration. 00: Reserved This field yields undefined results 01: 1 transaction b10: 2 transactions to be issued for this endpoint per micro-frame 11: 3 transactions to be issued for this endpoint per micro-frame. When the SPLITEN bit is set (1) in OTG_HS_HCSPLTx, this field indicates the number of immediate retries to be performed for a periodic split transaction on transaction errors. This field must be set to at least 01. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type Indicates the transfer type selected. 00: Control 01: Isochronous 10: Bulk 11: Interrupt Bit 17 LSDEV: Low-speed device This field is set by the application to indicate that this channel is communicating to a lowspeed device. Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 EPDIR: Endpoint direction Indicates whether the transaction is IN or OUT. 0: OUT 1: IN Bits 14:11 EPNUM: Endpoint number Indicates the endpoint number on the device serving as the data source or sink. Bits 10:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size Indicates the maximum packet size of the associated endpoint.

1215/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS host channel-x split control register (OTG_HS_HCSPLTx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number)
Address offset: 0x504 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 COMPLSPLT HUBADDR XACTPOS SPLITEN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 PRTADDR 2 1 0

rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 SPLITEN: Split enable The application sets this bit to indicate that this channel is enabled to perform split transactions. Bits 30:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 16 COMPLSPLT: Do complete split The application sets this bit to request the OTG host to perform a complete split transaction. Bits 15:14 XACTPOS: Transaction position This field is used to determine whether to send all, first, middle, or last payloads with each OUT transaction. 11: All. This is the entire data payload of this transaction (which is less than or equal to 188 bytes) 10: Begin. This is the first data payload of this transaction (which is larger than 188 bytes) 00: Mid. This is the middle payload of this transaction (which is larger than 188 bytes) 01: End. This is the last payload of this transaction (which is larger than 188 bytes) Bits 13:7 HUBADDR: Hub address This field holds the device address of the transaction translators hub. Bits 6:0 PRTADDR: Port address This field is the port number of the recipient transaction translator.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1216/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS host channel-x interrupt register (OTG_HS_HCINTx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number)

Address offset: 0x508 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register indicates the status of a channel with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. It is shown in Figure 383. The application must read this register when the host channels interrupt bit in the Core interrupt register (HCINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read this register, it must first read the host all channels interrupt (OTG_HS_HAINT) register to get the exact channel number for the host channel-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the OTG_HS_HAINT and OTG_HS_GINTSTS registers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DTERR 9 FRMOR 8 BBERR 7 TXERR 6 NYET 5 ACK 4 NAK 3 STALL 2 AHBERR 1 CHH 0 XFRC

Reserved

rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ rc_ w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1 w1

Bits 31:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 10 DTERR: Data toggle error Bit 9 FRMOR: Frame overrun Bit 8 BBERR: Babble error Bit 7 TXERR: Transaction error Indicates one of the following errors occurred on the USB. CRC check failure Timeout Bit stuff error False EOP Bit 6 NYET: Response received interrupt Bit 5 ACK: ACK response received/transmitted interrupt Bit 4 NAK: NAK response received interrupt Bit 3 STALL: STALL response received interrupt Bit 2 AHBERR: AHB error This error is generated only in Internal DMA mode when an AHB error occurs during an AHB read/write operation. The application can read the corresponding DMA channel address register to get the error address. Bit 1 CHH: Channel halted Indicates the transfer completed abnormally either because of any USB transaction error or in response to disable request by the application. Bit 0 XFRC: Transfer completed Transfer completed normally without any errors.

1217/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS host channel-x interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_HCINTMSKx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number)
Address offset: 0x50C + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register reflects the mask for each channel status described in the previous section.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DTERRM 9 FRMORM 8 BBERRM 7 TXERRM 6 NYET 5 ACKM 4 NAKM 3 STALLM 2 AHBERR 1 CHHM rw 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 10 DTERRM: Data toggle error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 9 FRMORM: Frame overrun mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 8 BBERRM: Babble error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 7 TXERRM: Transaction error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 6 NYET: response received interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 5 ACKM: ACK response received/transmitted interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 4 NAKM: NAK response received interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 3 STALLM: STALL response received interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1218/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 2 AHBERR: AHB error This is generated only in Internal DMA mode when there is an AHB error during AHB read/write. The application can read the corresponding channels DMA address register to get the error address. Bit 1 CHHM: Channel halted mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

OTG_HS host channel-x transfer size register (OTG_HS_HCTSIZx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number)
Address offset: 0x510 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved DPID rw rw rw rw rw rw PKTCNT rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

XFRSIZ rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

rw

Bit 31 DOPING: Do ping This bit is used only for OUT transfers. Setting this field to 1 directs the host to do PING protocol. Note: Do not set this bit for IN transfers. If this bit is set for IN transfers it disables the channel. Bits 30:29 DPID: Data PID The application programs this field with the type of PID to use for the initial transaction. The host maintains this field for the rest of the transfer. 00: DATA0 01: DATA2 10: DATA1 11: MDATA (noncontrol)/SETUP (control) Bits 28:19 PKTCNT: Packet count This field is programmed by the application with the expected number of packets to be transmitted (OUT) or received (IN). The host decrements this count on every successful transmission or reception of an OUT/IN packet. Once this count reaches zero, the application is interrupted to indicate normal completion. Bits 18:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size For an OUT, this field is the number of data bytes the host sends during the transfer. For an IN, this field is the buffer size that the application has reserved for the transfer. The application is expected to program this field as an integer multiple of the maximum packet size for IN transactions (periodic and nonperiodic).

1219/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS host channel-x DMA address register (OTG_HS_HCDMAx) (x = 0..11, where x = Channel_number)
Address offset: 0x514 + (Channel_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DMAADDR rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 DMAADDR: DMA address This field holds the start address in the external memory from which the data for the endpoint must be fetched or to which it must be stored. This register is incremented on every AHB transaction.

31.12.4

Device-mode registers
OTG_HS device configuration register (OTG_HS_DCFG)
Address offset: 0x800 Reset value: 0x0220 0000 This register configures the core in peripheral mode after power-on or after certain control commands or enumeration. Do not make changes to this register after initial programming.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PERSCHIVL PFIVL Reserved

3 Reserved

2 NZLSOHSK

1 DSPD rw

Reserved rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

DAD rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 25:24 PERSCHIVL: Periodic scheduling interval This field specifies the amount of time the Internal DMA engine must allocate for fetching periodic IN endpoint data. Based on the number of periodic endpoints, this value must be specified as 25, 50 or 75% of the (micro)frame. When any periodic endpoints are active, the internal DMA engine allocates the specified amount of time in fetching periodic IN endpoint data When no periodic endpoint is active, then the internal DMA engine services nonperiodic endpoints, ignoring this field After the specified time within a (micro)frame, the DMA switches to fetching nonperiodic endpoints 00: 25% of (micro)frame 01: 50% of (micro)frame 10: 75% of (micro)frame 11: Reserved Bits 23:13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1220/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bits 12:11 PFIVL: Periodic (micro)frame interval Indicates the time within a (micro) frame at which the application must be notified using the end of periodic (micro) frame interrupt. This can be used to determine if all the isochronous traffic for that frame is complete. 00: 80% of the frame interval 01: 85% of the frame interval 10: 90% of the frame interval 11: 95% of the frame interval Bits 10:4 DAD: Device address The application must program this field after every SetAddress control command. Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 NZLSOHSK: Nonzero-length status OUT handshake The application can use this field to select the handshake the core sends on receiving a nonzero-length data packet during the OUT transaction of a control transfers Status stage. 1: Send a STALL handshake on a nonzero-length status OUT transaction and do not send the received OUT packet to the application. 0: Send the received OUT packet to the application (zero-length or nonzero-length) and send a handshake based on the NAK and STALL bits for the endpoint in the device endpoint control register. Bits 1:0 DSPD: Device speed Indicates the speed at which the application requires the core to enumerate, or the maximum speed the application can support. However, the actual bus speed is determined only after the chirp sequence is completed, and is based on the speed of the USB host to which the core is connected. 00: High speed 01: Reserved 10: Reserved 11: Full speed (USB 1.1 transceiver clock is 48 MHz)

1221/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device control register (OTG_HS_DCTL)

Address offset: 0x804 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 POPRGDNE CGONAK 9 SGONAK 8 CGINAK 7 SGINAK 6 5 TCTL 4 3 GONSTS 2 GINSTS 1 SDIS rw 0 RWUSIG rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 11 POPRGDNE: Power-on programming done The application uses this bit to indicate that register programming is completed after a wakeup from power down mode. Bit 10 CGONAK: Clear global OUT NAK A write to this field clears the Global OUT NAK. Bit 9 SGONAK: Set global OUT NAK A write to this field sets the Global OUT NAK. The application uses this bit to send a NAK handshake on all OUT endpoints. The application must set the this bit only after making sure that the Global OUT NAK effective bit in the Core interrupt register (GONAKEFF bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is cleared. Bit 8 CGINAK: Clear global IN NAK A write to this field clears the Global IN NAK. Bit 7 SGINAK: Set global IN NAK A write to this field sets the Global nonperiodic IN NAK.The application uses this bit to send a NAK handshake on all nonperiodic IN endpoints. The application must set this bit only after making sure that the Global IN NAK effective bit in the Core interrupt register (GINAKEFF bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is cleared. Bits 6:4 TCTL: Test control 000: Test mode disabled 001: Test_J mode 010: Test_K mode 011: Test_SE0_NAK mode 100: Test_Packet mode 101: Test_Force_Enable Others: Reserved Bit 3 GONSTS: Global OUT NAK status 0: A handshake is sent based on the FIFO Status and the NAK and STALL bit settings. 1: No data is written to the RxFIFO, irrespective of space availability. Sends a NAK handshake on all packets, except on SETUP transactions. All isochronous OUT packets are dropped.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1222/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 2 GINSTS: Global IN NAK status 0: A handshake is sent out based on the data availability in the transmit FIFO. 1: A NAK handshake is sent out on all nonperiodic IN endpoints, irrespective of the data availability in the transmit FIFO. Bit 1 SDIS: Soft disconnect The application uses this bit to signal the USB OTG core to perform a soft disconnect. As long as this bit is set, the host does not see that the device is connected, and the device does not receive signals on the USB. The core stays in the disconnected state until the application clears this bit. 0: Normal operation. When this bit is cleared after a soft disconnect, the core generates a device connect event to the USB host. When the device is reconnected, the USB host restarts device enumeration. 1: The core generates a device disconnect event to the USB host. Bit 0 RWUSIG: Remote wakeup signaling When the application sets this bit, the core initiates remote signaling to wake up the USB host. The application must set this bit to instruct the core to exit the Suspend state. As specified in the USB 2.0 specification, the application must clear this bit 1 ms to 15 ms after setting it.

Table 183 contains the minimum duration (according to device state) for which the Soft disconnect (SDIS) bit must be set for the USB host to detect a device disconnect. To accommodate clock jitter, it is recommended that the application add some extra delay to the specified minimum duration. Table 183. Minimum duration for soft disconnect
Operating speed High speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Device state Not Idle or Suspended (Performing transactions) Suspended Idle Not Idle or Suspended (Performing transactions) Minimum duration 125 s 1 ms + 2.5 s 2.5 s 2.5 s

1223/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device status register (OTG_HS_DSTS)

Address offset: 0x808 Reset value: 0x0000 0010 This register indicates the status of the core with respect to USB-related events. It must be read on interrupts from the device all interrupts (OTG_HS_DAINT) register.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 EERR 2 ENUMSPD r r 1 0 SUSPSTS r

FNSOF Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r Reserved

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 21:8 FNSOF: Frame number of the received SOF Bits 7:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 3 EERR: Erratic error The core sets this bit to report any erratic errors. Due to erratic errors, the OTG_HS controller goes into Suspended state and an interrupt is generated to the application with Early suspend bit of the Core interrupt register (ESUSP bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). If the early suspend is asserted due to an erratic error, the application can only perform a soft disconnect recover. Bits 2:1 ENUMSPD: Enumerated speed Indicates the speed at which the OTG_HS controller has come up after speed detection through a chirp sequence. 00: High speed 01: Reserved 10: Reserved 11: Full speed (PHY clock is running at 48 MHz) Others: reserved Bit 0 SUSPSTS: Suspend status In peripheral mode, this bit is set as long as a Suspend condition is detected on the USB. The core enters the Suspended state when there is no activity on the USB data lines for a period of 3 ms. The core comes out of the suspend: When there is an activity on the USB data lines When the application writes to the Remote wakeup signaling bit in the Device control register (RWUSIG bit in OTG_HS_DCTL).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1224/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS device IN endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DIEPMSK)

Address offset: 0x810 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register works with each of the Device IN endpoint interrupt (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) registers for all endpoints to generate an interrupt per IN endpoint. The IN endpoint interrupt for a specific status in the OTG_HS_DIEPINTx register can be masked by writing to the corresponding bit in this register. Status bits are masked by default.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 TXFURM 7 Reserved 6 INEPNEM 5 INEPNMM 4 ITTXFEMSK 3 TOM 2 Reserved 1 EPDM rw 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

rw

BIM

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 BIM: BNA interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 8 TXFURM: FIFO underrun mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 INEPNEM: IN endpoint NAK effective mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 5 INEPNMM: IN token received with EP mismatch mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 4 ITTXFEMSK: IN token received when TxFIFO empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 3 TOM: Timeout condition mask (nonisochronous endpoints) 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 EPDM: Endpoint disabled interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

1225/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device OUT endpoint common interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DOEPMSK)

Address offset: 0x814 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register works with each of the Device OUT endpoint interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) registers for all endpoints to generate an interrupt per OUT endpoint. The OUT endpoint interrupt for a specific status in the OTG_HS_DOEPINTx register can be masked by writing into the corresponding bit in this register. Status bits are masked by default.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 BOIM 8 OPEM 7 Reserved 6 B2BSTUP 5 Reserved 4 OTEPDM 3 STUPM 2 Reserved 1 EPDM rw 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 BOIM: BNA interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 8 OPEM: OUT packet error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 B2BSTUP: Back-to-back SETUP packets received mask Applies to control OUT endpoints only. 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 OTEPDM: OUT token received when endpoint disabled mask Applies to control OUT endpoints only. 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 3 STUPM: SETUP phase done mask Applies to control endpoints only. 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 EPDM: Endpoint disabled interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1226/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS device all endpoints interrupt register (OTG_HS_DAINT)

Address offset: 0x818 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 When a significant event occurs on an endpoint, a device all endpoints interrupt register interrupts the application using the Device OUT endpoints interrupt bit or Device IN endpoints interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (OEPINT or IEPINT in OTG_HS_GINTSTS, respectively). There is one interrupt bit per endpoint, up to a maximum of 16 bits for OUT endpoints and 16 bits for IN endpoints. For a bidirectional endpoint, the corresponding IN and OUT interrupt bits are used. Bits in this register are set and cleared when the application sets and clears bits in the corresponding Device Endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx/OTG_HS_DOEPINTx).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OEPINT r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IEPINT r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:16 OEPINT: OUT endpoint interrupt bits One bit per OUT endpoint: Bit 16 for OUT endpoint 0, bit 31 for OUT endpoint 15 Bits 15:0 IEPINT: IN endpoint interrupt bits One bit per IN endpoint: Bit 0 for IN endpoint 0, bit 15 for endpoint 15

OTG_HS all endpoints interrupt mask register (OTG_HS_DAINTMSK)

Address offset: 0x81C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The device endpoint interrupt mask register works with the device endpoint interrupt register to interrupt the application when an event occurs on a device endpoint. However, the device all endpoints interrupt (OTG_HS_DAINT) register bit corresponding to that interrupt is still set.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OEPM rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IEPM rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:16 OEPM: OUT EP interrupt mask bits One per OUT endpoint: Bit 16 for OUT EP 0, bit 18 for OUT EP 3 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bits 15:0 IEPM: IN EP interrupt mask bits One bit per IN endpoint: Bit 0 for IN EP 0, bit 3 for IN EP 3 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

1227/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device VBUS discharge time register (OTG_HS_DVBUSDIS)

Address offset: 0x0828 Reset value: 0x0000 17D7 This register specifies the VBUS discharge time after VBUS pulsing during SRP.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

VBUSDT

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 VBUSDT: Device VBUS discharge time Specifies the VBUS discharge time after VBUS pulsing during SRP. This value equals: VBUS discharge time in PHY clocks / 1 024 Depending on your VBUS load, this value may need adjusting.

OTG_HS device VBUS pulsing time register (OTG_HS_DVBUSPULSE)

Address offset: 0x082C Reset value: 0x0000 05B8 This register specifies the VBUS pulsing time during SRP.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DVBUSP

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 11:0 DVBUSP: Device VBUS pulsing time Specifies the VBUS pulsing time during SRP. This value equals: VBUS pulsing time in PHY clocks / 1 024

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1228/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS Device threshold control register (OTG_HS_DTHRCTL)

Address offset: 0x0830 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 RXTHREN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISOTHREN rw rw rw rw 0 NONISOTHREN rw

ARPEN

Reserved

RXTHRLEN

TXTHRLEN Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 27 ARPEN: Arbiter parking enable This bit controls internal DMA arbiter parking for IN endpoints. When thresholding is enabled and this bit is set to one, then the arbiter parks on the IN endpoint for which there is a token received on the USB. This is done to avoid getting into underrun conditions. By default parking is enabled. Bit 26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 25: 17 RXTHRLEN: Receive threshold length This field specifies the receive thresholding size in DWORDS. This field also specifies the amount of data received on the USB before the core can start transmitting on the AHB. The threshold length has to be at least eight DWORDS. The recommended value for RXTHRLEN is to be the same as the programmed AHB burst length (HBSTLEN bit in OTG_HS_GAHBCFG). Bit 16 RXTHREN: Receive threshold enable When this bit is set, the core enables thresholding in the receive direction. Bits 15: 11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:2 TXTHRLEN: Transmit threshold length This field specifies the transmit thresholding size in DWORDS. This field specifies the amount of data in bytes to be in the corresponding endpoint transmit FIFO, before the core can start transmitting on the USB. The threshold length has to be at least eight DWORDS. This field controls both isochronous and nonisochronous IN endpoint thresholds. The recommended value for TXTHRLEN is to be the same as the programmed AHB burst length (HBSTLEN bit in OTG_HS_GAHBCFG). Bit 1 ISOTHREN: ISO IN endpoint threshold enable When this bit is set, the core enables thresholding for isochronous IN endpoints. Bit 0 NONISOTHREN: Nonisochronous IN endpoints threshold enable When this bit is set, the core enables thresholding for nonisochronous IN endpoints.

1229/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device IN endpoint FIFO empty interrupt mask register: (OTG_HS_DIEPEMPMSK)

Address offset: 0x834 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is used to control the IN endpoint FIFO empty interrupt generation (TXFE_OTG_HS_DIEPINTx).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

INEPTXFEM

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 15:0 INEPTXFEM: IN EP Tx FIFO empty interrupt mask bits These bits act as mask bits for OTG_HS_DIEPINTx. TXFE interrupt one bit per IN endpoint: Bit 0 for IN endpoint 0, bit 15 for IN endpoint 15 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

OTG_HS device each endpoint interrupt register (OTG_HS_DEACHINT)

Address offset: 0x0838 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 There is one interrupt bit for endpoint 1 IN and one interrupt bit for endpoint 1 OUT.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OEP1INT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 IEP1INT 0 Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 17 OEP1INT: OUT endpoint 1 interrupt bit Bits 16:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 IEP1INT: IN endpoint 1interrupt bit Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1230/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS device each endpoint interrupt register mask (OTG_HS_DEACHINTMSK)

Address offset: 0x083C Reset value: 0x0000 0000 There is one interrupt bit for endpoint 1 IN and one interrupt bit for endpoint 1 OUT.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OEP1INTM 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 IEP1INTM 7 Reserved 6 INEPNEM 5 INEPNMM 4 ITTXFEMSK 3 TOM 2 Reserved 1 EPDM rw rw rw rw rw 0 Reserved 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

Reserved

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 17 OEP1INTM: OUT Endpoint 1 interrupt mask bit Bits 16:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 1 IEP1INTM: IN Endpoint 1 interrupt mask bit Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

OTG_HS device each in endpoint-1 interrupt register (OTG_HS_DIEPEACHMSK1)

Address offset: 0x844 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 NAKM Reserved 9 8 TXFURM rw

Reserved

rw

rw

Bits 31:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13 NAKM: NAK interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: unmasked interrupt Bit 12:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 9 BIM: BNA interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 8 TXFURM: FIFO underrun mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

1231/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

BIM

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 6 INEPNEM: IN endpoint NAK effective mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 5 INEPNMM: IN token received with EP mismatch mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 4 ITTXFEMSK: IN token received when TxFIFO empty mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 3 TOM: Timeout condition mask (nonisochronous endpoints) 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 EPDM: Endpoint disabled interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

OTG_HS device each OUT endpoint-1 interrupt register (OTG_HS_DOEPEACHMSK1)

Address offset: 0x884 Reset value: 0x0000 0000
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 BERRM NYETM NAKM Reserved 9 8 TXFURM 7 Reserved 6 INEPNEM 5 INEPNMM 4 ITTXFEMSK 3 TOM 2 Reserved 1 EPDM rw 0 XFRCM rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

BIM

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 NYETM: NYET interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: unmasked interrupt Bit 13 NAKM: NAK interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 12 BERRM: Bubble error interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 11:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1232/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 9 BIM: BNA interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 8 OPEM: OUT packet error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bits 7:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 AHBERRM: AHB error mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 1 EPDM: Endpoint disabled interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt Bit 0 XFRCM: Transfer completed interrupt mask 0: Masked interrupt 1: Unmasked interrupt

OTG device endpoint-x control register (OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx) (x = 0..7, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset: 0x900 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application uses this register to control the behavior of each logical endpoint other than endpoint 0.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SODDFRM

TXFNUM

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

Stall

MPSIZ Reserved

rs

rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw/ rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 EPENA: Endpoint enable The application sets this bit to start transmitting data on an endpoint. The core clears this bit before setting any of the following interrupts on this endpoint: SETUP phase done Endpoint disabled Transfer completed Bit 30 EPDIS: Endpoint disable The application sets this bit to stop transmitting/receiving data on an endpoint, even before the transfer for that endpoint is complete. The application must wait for the Endpoint disabled interrupt before treating the endpoint as disabled. The core clears this bit before setting the Endpoint disabled interrupt. The application must set this bit only if Endpoint enable is already set for this endpoint.

1233/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 29 SODDFRM: Set odd frame Applies to isochronous IN and OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to odd frame. Bit 28 SD0PID: Set DATA0 PID Applies to interrupt/bulk IN endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the endpoint data PID (DPID) field in this register to DATA0. SEVNFRM: Set even frame Applies to isochronous IN endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to even frame. Bit 27 SNAK: Set NAK A write to this bit sets the NAK bit for the endpoint. Using this bit, the application can control the transmission of NAK handshakes on an endpoint. The core can also set this bit for OUT endpoints on a Transfer completed interrupt, or after a SETUP is received on the endpoint.

Bit 26 CNAK: Clear NAK A write to this bit clears the NAK bit for the endpoint. Bits 25:22 TXFNUM: TxFIFO number These bits specify the FIFO number associated with this endpoint. Each active IN endpoint must be programmed to a separate FIFO number. This field is valid only for IN endpoints. Bit 21 STALL: STALL handshake Applies to noncontrol, nonisochronous IN endpoints only (access type is rw). The application sets this bit to stall all tokens from the USB host to this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Only the application can clear this bit, never the core. Applies to control endpoints only (access type is rs). The application can only set this bit, and the core clears it, when a SETUP token is received for this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type This is the transfer type supported by this logical endpoint. 00: Control 01: Isochronous 10: Bulk 11: Interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1234/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 17 NAKSTS: NAK status It indicates the following: 0: The core is transmitting nonNAK handshakes based on the FIFO status. 1: The core is transmitting NAK handshakes on this endpoint. When either the application or the core sets this bit: For nonisochronous IN endpoints: The core stops transmitting any data on an IN endpoint, even if there are data available in the TxFIFO. For isochronous IN endpoints: The core sends out a zero-length data packet, even if there are data available in the TxFIFO. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 16 EONUM: Even/odd frame Applies to isochronous IN endpoints only. Indicates the frame number in which the core transmits/receives isochronous data for this endpoint. The application must program the even/odd frame number in which it intends to transmit/receive isochronous data for this endpoint using the SEVNFRM and SODDFRM fields in this register. 0: Even frame 1: Odd frame DPID: Endpoint data PID Applies to interrupt/bulk IN endpoints only. Contains the PID of the packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint. The application must program the PID of the first packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint, after the endpoint is activated. The application uses the SD0PID register field to program either DATA0 or DATA1 PID. 0: DATA0 1: DATA1 Bit 15 USBAEP: USB active endpoint Indicates whether this endpoint is active in the current configuration and interface. The core clears this bit for all endpoints (other than EP 0) after detecting a USB reset. After receiving the SetConfiguration and SetInterface commands, the application must program endpoint registers accordingly and set this bit. Bits 14:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 10:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size The application must program this field with the maximum packet size for the current logical endpoint. This value is in bytes.

1235/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device control OUT endpoint 0 control register (OTG_HS_DOEPCTL0)

Address offset: 0xB00 Reset value: 0x0000 8000 This section describes the device control OUT endpoint 0 control register. Nonzero control endpoints use registers for endpoints 115.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved EPTYP r r Reserved USBAEP NAKSTS EPENA EPDIS SNPM CNAK SNAK Stall 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MPSIZ Reserved r r

Reserved

rs

rw

Bit 31 EPENA: Endpoint enable The application sets this bit to start transmitting data on endpoint 0. The core clears this bit before setting any of the following interrupts on this endpoint: SETUP phase done Endpoint disabled Transfer completed Bit 30 EPDIS: Endpoint disable The application cannot disable control OUT endpoint 0. Bits 29:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 27 SNAK: Set NAK A write to this bit sets the NAK bit for the endpoint. Using this bit, the application can control the transmission of NAK handshakes on an endpoint. The core can also set this bit on a Transfer completed interrupt, or after a SETUP is received on the endpoint. Bit 26 CNAK: Clear NAK A write to this bit clears the NAK bit for the endpoint. Bits 25:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 STALL: STALL handshake The application can only set this bit, and the core clears it, when a SETUP token is received for this endpoint. If a NAK bit or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 20 SNPM: Snoop mode This bit configures the endpoint to Snoop mode. In Snoop mode, the core does not check the correctness of OUT packets before transferring them to application memory. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type Hardcoded to 2b00 for control.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1236/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 17 NAKSTS: NAK status Indicates the following: 0: The core is transmitting nonNAK handshakes based on the FIFO status. 1: The core is transmitting NAK handshakes on this endpoint. When either the application or the core sets this bit, the core stops receiving data, even if there is space in the RxFIFO to accommodate the incoming packet. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 15 USBAEP: USB active endpoint This bit is always set to 1, indicating that a control endpoint 0 is always active in all configurations and interfaces. Bits 14:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 1:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size The maximum packet size for control OUT endpoint 0 is the same as what is programmed in control IN endpoint 0. 00: 64 bytes 01: 32 bytes 10: 16 bytes 11: 8 bytes

OTG_HS device endpoint-x control register (OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset for OUT endpoints: 0xB00 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application uses this register to control the behavior of each logical endpoint other than endpoint 0.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SODDFRM

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

Stall

MPSIZ Reserved

Reserved

rs

rs

rw/ rw rs

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bit 31 EPENA: Endpoint enable Applies to IN and OUT endpoints. The application sets this bit to start transmitting data on an endpoint. The core clears this bit before setting any of the following interrupts on this endpoint: SETUP phase done Endpoint disabled Transfer completed

1237/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Bit 30 EPDIS: Endpoint disable The application sets this bit to stop transmitting/receiving data on an endpoint, even before the transfer for that endpoint is complete. The application must wait for the Endpoint disabled interrupt before treating the endpoint as disabled. The core clears this bit before setting the Endpoint disabled interrupt. The application must set this bit only if Endpoint enable is already set for this endpoint. Bit 29 SODDFRM: Set odd frame Applies to isochronous OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to odd frame. Bit 28 SD0PID: Set DATA0 PID Applies to interrupt/bulk OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the endpoint data PID (DPID) field in this register to DATA0. SEVNFRM: Set even frame Applies to isochronous OUT endpoints only. Writing to this field sets the Even/Odd frame (EONUM) field to even frame. Bit 27 SNAK: Set NAK A write to this bit sets the NAK bit for the endpoint. Using this bit, the application can control the transmission of NAK handshakes on an endpoint. The core can also set this bit for OUT endpoints on a Transfer Completed interrupt, or after a SETUP is received on the endpoint. Bit 26 CNAK: Clear NAK A write to this bit clears the NAK bit for the endpoint. Bits 25:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 21 STALL: STALL handshake Applies to noncontrol, nonisochronous OUT endpoints only (access type is rw). The application sets this bit to stall all tokens from the USB host to this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Only the application can clear this bit, never the core. Applies to control endpoints only (access type is rs). The application can only set this bit, and the core clears it, when a SETUP token is received for this endpoint. If a NAK bit, Global IN NAK, or Global OUT NAK is set along with this bit, the STALL bit takes priority. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 20 SNPM: Snoop mode This bit configures the endpoint to Snoop mode. In Snoop mode, the core does not check the correctness of OUT packets before transferring them to application memory. Bits 19:18 EPTYP: Endpoint type This is the transfer type supported by this logical endpoint. 00: Control 01: Isochronous 10: Bulk 11: Interrupt

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1238/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 17 NAKSTS: NAK status Indicates the following: 0: The core is transmitting nonNAK handshakes based on the FIFO status. 1: The core is transmitting NAK handshakes on this endpoint. When either the application or the core sets this bit: The core stops receiving any data on an OUT endpoint, even if there is space in the RxFIFO to accommodate the incoming packet. Irrespective of this bits setting, the core always responds to SETUP data packets with an ACK handshake. Bit 16 EONUM: Even/odd frame Applies to isochronous IN and OUT endpoints only. Indicates the frame number in which the core transmits/receives isochronous data for this endpoint. The application must program the even/odd frame number in which it intends to transmit/receive isochronous data for this endpoint using the SEVNFRM and SODDFRM fields in this register. 0: Even frame 1: Odd frame DPID: Endpoint data PID Applies to interrupt/bulk OUT endpoints only. Contains the PID of the packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint. The application must program the PID of the first packet to be received or transmitted on this endpoint, after the endpoint is activated. The application uses the SD0PID register field to program either DATA0 or DATA1 PID. 0: DATA0 1: DATA1 Bit 15 USBAEP: USB active endpoint Indicates whether this endpoint is active in the current configuration and interface. The core clears this bit for all endpoints (other than EP 0) after detecting a USB reset. After receiving the SetConfiguration and SetInterface commands, the application must program endpoint registers accordingly and set this bit. Bits 14:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 10:0 MPSIZ: Maximum packet size The application must program this field with the maximum packet size for the current logical endpoint. This value is in bytes.

1239/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) (x = 0..7, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset: 0x908 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0080 This register indicates the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. It is shown in Figure 383. The application must read this register when the IN endpoints interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (IEPINT in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read this register, it must first read the device all endpoints interrupt (OTG_HS_DAINT) register to get the exact endpoint number for the device endpoint-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the OTG_HS_DAINT and OTG_HS_GINTSTS registers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PKTDRPSTS 9 8 TXFIFOUDRN 7 6 INEPNE 5 4 ITTXFE 3 2 1 EPDISD 0

BERR

Reserved

Reserved

rc_ w1 /rw

Reserved

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Reserved

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Bits 31:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 13 NAK: NAK interrupt The core generates this interrupt when a NAK is transmitted or received by the device. In case of isochronous IN endpoints the interrupt gets generated when a zero length packet is transmitted due to unavailability of data in the Tx FIFO. Bit 12 BERR: Babble error interrupt Bit 11 PKTDRPSTS: Packet dropped status This bit indicates to the application that an ISOC OUT packet has been dropped. This bit does not have an associated mask bit and does not generate an interrupt. Bit10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 9 BNA: Buffer not available interrupt The core generates this interrupt when the descriptor accessed is not ready for the Core to process, such as host busy or DMA done. Bit 8 TXFIFOUDRN: Transmit Fifo Underrun (TxfifoUndrn) The core generates this interrupt when it detects a transmit FIFO underrun condition for this endpoint. Dependency: This interrupt is valid only when Thresholding is enabled Bit 7 TXFE: Transmit FIFO empty This interrupt is asserted when the TxFIFO for this endpoint is either half or completely empty. The half or completely empty status is determined by the TxFIFO empty level bit in the Core AHB configuration register (TXFELVL bit in OTG_HS_GAHBCFG).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1240/1422

XFRC

TXFE

TOC

NAK

BNA

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Bit 6 INEPNE: IN endpoint NAK effective This bit can be cleared when the application clears the IN endpoint NAK by writing to the CNAK bit in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx. This interrupt indicates that the core has sampled the NAK bit set (either by the application or by the core). The interrupt indicates that the IN endpoint NAK bit set by the application has taken effect in the core. This interrupt does not guarantee that a NAK handshake is sent on the USB. A STALL bit takes priority over a NAK bit. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 4 ITTXFE: IN token received when TxFIFO is empty Applies to nonperiodic IN endpoints only. Indicates that an IN token was received when the associated TxFIFO (periodic/nonperiodic) was empty. This interrupt is asserted on the endpoint for which the IN token was received. Bit 3 TOC: Timeout condition Applies only to Control IN endpoints. Indicates that the core has detected a timeout condition on the USB for the last IN token on this endpoint. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 1 EPDISD: Endpoint disabled interrupt This bit indicates that the endpoint is disabled per the applications request. Bit 0 XFRC: Transfer completed interrupt This field indicates that the programmed transfer is complete on the AHB as well as on the USB, for this endpoint.

1241/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device endpoint-x interrupt register (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) (x = 0..7, where x = Endpoint_number)

Address offset: 0xB08 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0080 This register indicates the status of an endpoint with respect to USB- and AHB-related events. It is shown in Figure 383. The application must read this register when the OUT Endpoints Interrupt bit of the Core interrupt register (OEPINT bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is set. Before the application can read this register, it must first read the device all endpoints interrupt (OTG_HS_DAINT) register to get the exact endpoint number for the device Endpoint-x interrupt register. The application must clear the appropriate bit in this register to clear the corresponding bits in the OTG_HS_DAINT and OTG_HS_GINTSTS registers.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 NYET 9 8 7 6 B2BSTUP 5 4 OTEPDIS 3 STUP 2 1 EPDISD 0 XFRC

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rc_ w1 /rw

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Reserved

rc_ rc_ w1 w1

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 14 NYET: NYET interrupt The core generates this interrupt when a NYET response is transmitted for a nonisochronous OUT endpoint. Bits 13:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 6 B2BSTUP: Back-to-back SETUP packets received Applies to Control OUT endpoint only. This bit indicates that the core has received more than three back-to-back SETUP packets for this particular endpoint. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 4 OTEPDIS: OUT token received when endpoint disabled Applies only to control OUT endpoint. Indicates that an OUT token was received when the endpoint was not yet enabled. This interrupt is asserted on the endpoint for which the OUT token was received. Bit 3 STUP: SETUP phase done Applies to control OUT endpoints only. Indicates that the SETUP phase for the control endpoint is complete and no more back-toback SETUP packets were received for the current control transfer. On this interrupt, the application can decode the received SETUP data packet. Bit 2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 1 EPDISD: Endpoint disabled interrupt This bit indicates that the endpoint is disabled per the applications request. Bit 0 XFRC: Transfer completed interrupt This field indicates that the programmed transfer is complete on the AHB as well as on the USB, for this endpoint.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1242/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS device IN endpoint 0 transfer size register (OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZ0)

Address offset: 0x910 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling endpoint 0. Once endpoint 0 is enabled using the endpoint enable bit in the device control endpoint 0 control registers (EPENA in OTG_HS_DIEPCTL0), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit. Nonzero endpoints use the registers for endpoints 115.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 Reserved rw rw 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 XFRSIZ 2 1 0

PKTCNT

Bits 31:21 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 20:19 PKTCNT: Packet count Indicates the total number of USB packets that constitute the Transfer Size amount of data for endpoint 0. This field is decremented every time a packet (maximum size or short packet) is read from the TxFIFO. Bits 18:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size Indicates the transfer size in bytes for endpoint 0. The core interrupts the application only after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet from the external memory is written to the TxFIFO.

1243/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device OUT endpoint 0 transfer size register (OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZ0)

Address offset: 0xB10 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling endpoint 0. Once endpoint 0 is enabled using the Endpoint enable bit in the device control endpoint 0 control registers (EPENA bit in OTG_HS_DOEPCTL0), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit. Nonzero endpoints use the registers for endpoints 115.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved STUPC NT rw rw PKTCNT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

XFRSIZ Reserved rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Reserved

rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:29 STUPCNT: SETUP packet count This field specifies the number of back-to-back SETUP data packets the endpoint can receive. 01: 1 packet 10: 2 packets 11: 3 packets Bits 28:20 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 19 PKTCNT: Packet count This field is decremented to zero after a packet is written into the RxFIFO. Bits 18:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 6:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size Indicates the transfer size in bytes for endpoint 0. The core interrupts the application only after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet is read from the RxFIFO and written to the external memory.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1244/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS device endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx) (x = 1..3, where x = Endpoint_number)
Address offset: 0x910 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling the endpoint. Once the endpoint is enabled using the Endpoint enable bit in the device endpoint-x control registers (EPENA bit in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved MCNT rw/ rw/ r/r r/r rw w w rw rw rw PKTCNT rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

XFRSIZ rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:29 MCNT: Multi count For periodic IN endpoints, this field indicates the number of packets that must be transmitted per frame on the USB. The core uses this field to calculate the data PID for isochronous IN endpoints. 01: 1 packet 10: 2 packets 11: 3 packets Bit 28:19 PKTCNT: Packet count Indicates the total number of USB packets that constitute the Transfer Size amount of data for this endpoint. This field is decremented every time a packet (maximum size or short packet) is read from the TxFIFO. Bits 18:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size This field contains the transfer size in bytes for the current endpoint. The core only interrupts the application after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet from the external memory is written to the TxFIFO.

1245/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

OTG_HS device IN endpoint transmit FIFO status register (OTG_HS_DTXFSTSx) (x = 0..5, where x = Endpoint_number)
Address offset for IN endpoints: 0x918 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) This read-only register contains the free space information for the Device IN endpoint TxFIFO.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

INEPTFSAV

31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. 15:0 INEPTFSAV: IN endpoint TxFIFO space avail () Indicates the amount of free space available in the Endpoint TxFIFO. Values are in terms of 32-bit words: 0x0: Endpoint TxFIFO is full 0x1: 1 word available 0x2: 2 words available 0xn: n words available (0 < n < 512) Others: Reserved

OTG_HS device endpoint-x transfer size register (OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) (x = 1..5, where x = Endpoint_number)
Address offset: 0xB10 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0x0000 0000 The application must modify this register before enabling the endpoint. Once the endpoint is enabled using Endpoint Enable bit of the device endpoint-x control registers (EPENA bit in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx), the core modifies this register. The application can only read this register once the core has cleared the Endpoint enable bit.
31 Reserved 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PKTCNT 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RXDPID/S TUPCNT

XFRSIZ

rw/r/ rw/r/ rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 30:29 RXDPID: Received data PID Applies to isochronous OUT endpoints only. This is the data PID received in the last packet for this endpoint. 00: DATA0 01: DATA2 10: DATA1 11: MDATA

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1246/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

STUPCNT: SETUP packet count Applies to control OUT Endpoints only. This field specifies the number of back-to-back SETUP data packets the endpoint can receive. 01: 1 packet 10: 2 packets 11: 3 packets Bit 28:19 PKTCNT: Packet count Indicates the total number of USB packets that constitute the Transfer Size amount of data for this endpoint. This field is decremented every time a packet (maximum size or short packet) is written to the RxFIFO. Bits 18:0 XFRSIZ: Transfer size This field contains the transfer size in bytes for the current endpoint. The core only interrupts the application after it has exhausted the transfer size amount of data. The transfer size can be set to the maximum packet size of the endpoint, to be interrupted at the end of each packet. The core decrements this field every time a packet is read from the RxFIFO and written to the external memory.

OTG_HS device endpoint-x DMA address register (OTG_HS_DIEPDMAx / OTG_HS_DOEPDMAx) (x = 1..5, where x = Endpoint_number)
Address offset for IN endpoints: 0x914 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX Address offset for OUT endpoints: 0xB14 + (Endpoint_number 0x20) Reset value: 0xXXXX XXXX
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 DMAADDR 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 DMAADDR: DMA address This bit holds the start address of the external memory for storing or fetching endpoint data. Note: For control endpoints, this field stores control OUT data packets as well as SETUP transaction data packets. When more than three SETUP packets are received back-toback, the SETUP data packet in the memory is overwritten. This register is incremented on every AHB transaction. The application can give only a DWORD-aligned address.

31.12.5

OTG_HS power and clock gating control register (OTG_HS_PCGCCTL)

Address offset: 0xE00 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 This register is available in host and peripheral modes.

1247/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

31

30

29

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

4 PHYSUSP

3 Reserved

1 GATEHCLK SRQ 0 SEDET 0 0 0 HSRST 0 FCRST 0

0 STPPCLK CSRST 0 GINT 0 SRQSCS 0 0

Reserved

rw

rw rw

Bit 31:5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 4 PHYSUSP: PHY suspended Indicates that the PHY has been suspended. This bit is updated once the PHY is suspended after the application has set the STPPCLK bit (bit 0). Bits 3:2 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 1 GATEHCLK: Gate HCLK The application sets this bit to gate HCLK to modules other than the AHB Slave and Master and wakeup logic when the USB is suspended or the session is not valid. The application clears this bit when the USB is resumed or a new session starts. Bit 0 STPPCLK: Stop PHY clock The application sets this bit to stop the PHY clock when the USB is suspended, the session is not valid, or the device is disconnected. The application clears this bit when the USB is resumed or a new session starts.

31.12.6

OTG_HS register map

The table below gives the USB OTG register map and reset values.

Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values

Offset Register
OTG_HS_GOT GCTL Reset value OTG_HS_GOT GINT Reset value OTG_HS_GAH BCFG Reset value ULPIEVBUSD ULPIEVBUSI ULPIFSLS PHYLPCS ULPICSM HNPCAP CTXPKT ULPIIPD FDMOD FHMOD ULPIAR TSDPS Reserved Reserved PCCI HSHNPEN HNGSCS DHNPEN CIDSTS HNPRQ BSVLD ASVLD

0x000

Reserved

DBCT

HNSSCHG

ADTOCHG

0x004

Reserved

Reserved

SRSSCHG

HNGDET

DBCDNE

PTXFELVL

0x008

Reserved

TXFELVL

SRPCAP

0x00C

OTG_HS_GUS BCFG

Reserved

PHSEL

PTCI

Reset value OTG_HS_GRS TCTL Reset value

RXFFLSH

TXFFLSH

DMAREQ

0x010

Reserved 0

TXFNUM 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Reserved

AHBIDL

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Reserved Res. 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 Reserved TRDT Reserved TOCAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

1248/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset Register
IPXFR/INCOMPISOOUT

RM0090

BOUTNAKEFF

DATAFSUSP

ENUMDNE

GINAKEFF

USBSUSP

CIDSCHG

ISOODRP

HPRTINT

IISOIXFR

USBRST

DISCINT

WKUINT

NPTXFE

SRQINT

OTGINT 0

OEPINT

RXFLVL

ESUSP

PTXFE

IEPINT

HCINT

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

0x014

Reset value

0 IPXFRM/IISOOXFRM

0 ENUMDNEM

0 USBSUSPM

0 GONAKEFFM

0 GINAKEFFM

SOF

OTG_HS_GINT STS

ISOODRPM

CIDSCHGM

IISOIXFRM

NPTXFEM

RXFLVLM

ESUSPM

FSUSPM

USBRST

PTXFEM

DISCINT

EPMISM

OTGINT

OEPINT

EOPFM

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

MMISM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SRQIM

IEPINT

PRTIM

0x018

OTG_HS_GINT MSK

Reset value OTG_HS_GRX STSR (Host mode) 0x01C Reset value OTG_HS_GRX STSR (peripheral mode) Reset value OTG_HS_GRX STSP (Host mode) 0x020 Reset value OTG_HS_GRX STSP (peripheral mode) Reset value OTG_HS_GRX FSIZ Reset value OTG_HS_GNP TXFSIZ (Host mode) Reset value OTG_HS_GNP TXFSIZ (peripheral mode) Reset value OTG_HS_GNP TXSTS Reset value OTG_HS_GI2C CTL Reset value

0 DPID

0 BCNT

Reserved 0 FRMNUM 0 Reserved 0 FRMNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTSTS 0 0 0

CHNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 DPID

0 BCNT

Reserved

PKTSTS 0 0 0

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 BCNT

PKTSTS 0 0 0

DPID 0 DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CHNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 BCNT 0

Reserved

PKTSTS 0 0

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x024

Reserved 0 NPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

RXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NPTXFSA 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x028

TX0FD 0 Res. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

TX0FSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x02C

NPTXQTOP 0 RW 0 Reserved 0 I2CDATSE0 0 I2CDEVADR 0 0 Reserved 0 ACK 0 I2CEN 0

NPTQXSAV 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NPTXFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

BSYDNE

0x030

ADDR

REGADDR

RWDATA

0 NOVBUSSENS

0 SOFOUTEN

0 VBUSBSEN

0 VBUSASEN

0 .I2CPADEN

0 .PWRDWN

0x038

OTG_HS_GCC FG

Reserved

Reserved

0x03C

Reset value OTG_HS_CID Reset value

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0 PRODUCT_ID 0 0 0 0 0 0

1249/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Reserved 0

SOFM

WUIM

HCIM

CMOD 0

EOPF

MMIS

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset
0x100

Register
OTG_HS_HPTX FSIZ Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP TXF1 Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP TXF2 Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP TXF3 Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP TXF4 Reset value OTG_HS_HCF G

0x104

0x108

0x10C

0x110

0x400

Reserved

0x404 0x408

0x410

0x414

0x418

Reset value OTG_HS_HFIR Reset value OTG_HS_HFN UM Reset value 0 OTG_HS_HPTX STS Reset value 0 OTG_HS_HAIN T Reset value OTG_HS_HAIN TMSK Reset value OTG_HS_HPRT Reset value

0 Reserved FTREM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 FRIVL 1 0 0 1 FRNUM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0

FSLSPCS 0 0 1 1 Y Y 0 0 0 PCDET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PCSTS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PTXQTOP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Y

PTXQSAV Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

PTXFSAVL Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 PSPD 0 ODDFRM 0 LSDEV 0 Reserved 0 0 0 PPWR 0 PLSTS 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0

HAINT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

HAINTM 0 PRST 0 PSUSP 0 PRES 0 POCCHNG 0 POCA 0 PENCHNG 0 PENA

0x440

Reserved

PTCTL 0 EPDIR 0 0

CHENA

0x500

OTG_HS_HCC HAR0 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR1 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR2 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR3 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR4 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR5 Reset value

DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MC 0 0 0

EPTYP

CHDIS

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

0 CHENA

0 CHDIS

0 ODDFRM

0 EPTYP

0 LSDEV

0 EPDIR

0x520

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

0 CHENA

0 CHDIS

0 ODDFRM

0 EPTYP

0 LSDEV

0 EPDIR

0x540

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

0 CHENA

0 CHDIS

0 ODDFRM

0 EPTYP

0 LSDEV

0 EPDIR

0x560

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

0 CHENA

0 CHDIS

0 ODDFRM

0 EPTYP

0 LSDEV

0 EPDIR

0x580

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

0 CHENA

0 CHDIS

0 ODDFRM

0 EPTYP

0 LSDEV

0 EPDIR

0x5A0

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1250/1422

FSLSS

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 PTXSA 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 INEPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 INEPTXSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INEPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 INEPTXSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INEPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 INEPTXSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INEPTXFD 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 INEPTXSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0x5C0

RM0090

Register
OTG_HS_HCC HAR6 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR7 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR8 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR9 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR10 Reset value OTG_HS_HCC HAR11 Reset value OTG_HS_HCS PLT0 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T0 Reset value

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 DAD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x5E0

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x600

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x620

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x640

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

ODDFRM

CHENA

EPTYP

LSDEV

CHDIS

0x660

MC 0 0 0

Reserved

EPDIR

COMPLSPLT

XACTPOS

SPLITEN

0x504

AHBERR

FRMOR

BBERR

DTERR

TXERR

STALL

0x508

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x524

OTG_HS_HCS PL1 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T1 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0 CHH 0 0 CHH 0 0

0x528

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x544

OTG_HS_HCS PLT2 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T2 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0x548

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x564

OTG_HS_HCS PLT3 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

1251/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

NYET

CHH

NAK

ACK

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EPNUM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved HUBADDR PRTADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset
0x568

Register
OTG_HS_HCIN T3 Reset value

AHBERR 0

FRMOR

DTERR

BBERR

TXERR

STALL

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x584

OTG_HS_HCS PLT4 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T4 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0 CHH 0 0 CHH 0 0 CHH 0 0 CHH 0 0 CHH 0 0

0x588

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x5A4

OTG_HS_HCS PLT5 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T5 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0x5A8

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x5C4

OTG_HS_HCS PLT6 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T6 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0x5C8

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x5E4

OTG_HS_HCS PLT7 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T7 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0x5E8

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x604

OTG_HS_HCS PLT8 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T8 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0x608

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x624

OTG_HS_HCS PLT9 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1252/1422

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

NYET

CHH

NAK

ACK

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0x628

RM0090

Register
OTG_HS_HCIN T9 Reset value

AHBERR 0

FRMOR

DTERR

BBERR

TXERR

STALL

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x644

OTG_HS_HCS PLT10 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T10 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0 CHH 0 0 CHH 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0

0x648

Reserved

0 COMPLSPLT XACTPOS SPLITEN

0x664

OTG_HS_HCS PLT11 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN T11 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK0 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK1 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK2 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK3 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK4 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK5 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK6 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK7 Reset value

Reserved

HUBADDR

PRTADDR

0 DTERR

0 FRMOR

0 BBERR

0 TXERR

0 NYET

0 ACK

0 NAK

0 STALL

0 AHBERR

0x668

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0x50C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x52C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x54C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x56C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x58C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x5AC

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x5CC

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x5EC

Reserved

1253/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0 0

XFRC 0 0

NYET

CHH

NAK

ACK

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset
0x60C

Register
OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK8 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK9 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK10 Reset value OTG_HS_HCIN TMSK11 Reset value OTG_HS_HCTS IZ0 Reset value

FRMORM

DTERRM

BBERRM

TXERRM

AHBERR 0 AHBERR

STALLM

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 CHHM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x62C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x64C

Reserved

0 DTERRM

0 FRMORM

0 BBERRM

0 TXERRM

0 NYET

0 ACKM

0 NAKM

0 STALLM

0 AHBERR

0x66C

Reserved

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x510

0x530

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ1 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x550

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ2 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x570

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ3 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x590

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ4 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x5B0

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ5 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x5D0

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ6 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x5F0

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ7 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x610

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ8 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x630

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ9 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x650

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ10 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x670

OTG_HS_HCTS IZ11 Reset value

DPID 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x514

OTG_HS_HCD MA0 Reset value

DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1254/1422

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

XFRCM 0

CHHM

NAKM

ACKM

NYET

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0x524

RM0090

Register
OTG_HS_HCD MA1 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA2 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA3 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA4 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA5 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA6 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA7 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA8 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA9 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA10 Reset value OTG_HS_HCD MA11 Reset value OTG_HS_ DCFG Reset value

0x544

0x564

0x584

0x5A4

0x5C4

0x5E4

0x604

0x624

0x644

0x664

PERSCHIVL

Reserved

Reserved

NZLSOHSK

0x800

Reserved 1

Reserved 0

0 POPRGDNE

0 CGONAK

0 SGONAK

0 CGINAK

0 SGINAK

0 TCTL

0 GONSTS

0 GINSTS

0 SDIS 0 ENUMSPD 0 EPDM 0 EPDM 0 0 0

DSPD 0 RWUSIG 0 SUSPSTS 0 XFRCM 0 XFRCM 0 0 0

PFIVL

0x804

OTG_HS_DCTL

Reserved

Reset value OTG_HS_DSTS Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP MSK Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PMSK Reset value OTG_HS_DAIN T Reset value 0 OTG_HS_DAIN TMSK Reset value 0 FNSOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DAD

0x808

Reserved

Reserved 0 0 0 BIM 0 ITTXFEMSK INEPNMM INEPNEM Reserved TXFURM

EERR

0x810

Reserved

0 BOIM

0 OPEM

0 Reserved

0 B2BSTUP

0 Reserved

0 OTEPDM

0 STUPM Reserved

0x814

Reserved

0 OEPINT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x818

IEPINT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x81C

OEPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

IEPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1255/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

Reserved

TOM

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset
0x828

Register
OTG_HS_DVB USDIS Reset value OTG_HS_DVB USPULSE Reset value

0x82C

0x830

OTG_HS_DTH RCTL

Reserved

RXTHRLEN

Reserved

TXTHRLEN

0x834

0x838

Reserved 0 Reserved 0

Reserved 0 Reserved 0 ITTXFEMSK INEPNMM INEPNEM TXFURM Reserved Reserved NAKM EPDM 0 Reserved EPDM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reset value 0x83C OTG_HS_DEA CHINTMSK Reset value

0x844

Reserved

Reserved

Reset value NYETM OTG_HS_DOE PEACHMSK1 Reset value SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID SODDFRM

0 BERRM Reserved NAKM

0 BIM

0 TXFURM Reserved

0 INEPNEM

0 INEPNMM

0 ITTXFEMSK

TOM

OTG_HS_DIEP EACHMSK1

0 TOM

0x884

Reserved

0x900

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL0

TXFNUM

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

STALL

CNAK

SNAK

Reserved

MPSIZ

0x918

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS0 Reset value

Reserved 0 SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID SODDFRM 0 0 0 0 0

INEPTFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stall

0x920

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL1

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

TXFNUM

Reserved

MPSIZ

0x938

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS1 Reset value

Reserved 0 SD0PID/SEVNFRM EONUM/DPID SODDFRM 0 0 0 0 0

INEPTFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Stall

0x940

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL2

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

TXFNUM

Reserved

MPSIZ

0x958

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS2 Reset value

Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0

INEPTFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1256/1422

XFRCM 0 0 0 0

XFRCM 0

BIM

Reserved Reserved

Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP EMPMSK Reset value OTG_HS_DEA CHINT

Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0

INEPTXFEM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NONISOTHREN 0

Reserved

ISOTHREN

RXTHREN

ARPEN

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved 0 Reserved 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 VBUSDT 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 DVBUSP 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset Register
SD0PID/SEVNFRM

RM0090

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

Stall

0x960

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL3

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

0x978

Reset value 0 TG_FS_DTXFS TS3 Reset value

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

Stall

0x980

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL4

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

0x9A0

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL5

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

STALL

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

0x9C0

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL6

TXFNUM

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

STALL

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

0x9E0

OTG_HS_DIEP CTL7

TXFNUM

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

STALL

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PCTL0 Reset value

Reserved

0xB00

Reserved

EPTY P 0 0

Reserved

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPDIS

STALL

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

0xB20

OTG_HS_DOE PCTL1

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

STALL

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value

SD0PID/SEVNFRM

EONUM/DPID

SODDFRM

Stall

0xB40

OTG_HS_DOE PCTL2

USBAEP

NAKSTS

EPENA

EPTYP

EPDIS

SNPM

CNAK

SNAK

Reset value

1257/1422

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TXFNUM Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 INEPTFSAV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TXFNUM Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TXFNUM Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved MPSI Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Reserved Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved MPSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

0x988 0x908

0x968

0x948

0x928

RM0090

Offset

0x9C8

0xB08 0xB60

0x9E8

0x9A8

Register

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT7

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT6

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT5

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT4

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT3

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT2

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT1

OTG_HS_DIEPI NT0

OTG_HS_DOE PINT0 OTG_HS_DOE PCTL3 Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value Reset value 0 EPENA EPDIS SODDFRM SD0PID/SEVNFRM 0 0 SNAK 0 CNAK Reserved 0 0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 Stall 0 SNPM 0 EPTYP 0 0 NAKSTS 0 EONUM/DPID 0 USBAEP

Reset value

Reset value

Reserved

Reserved

Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

0 0 0 0 0 0 NAK 0 0 0 BERR 0 0 0 PKTDRPSTS Reserved 0 0 0 0 BNA 0 0 TXFIFOUDRN 1 1 TXFE 0 0 INEPNE Reserved 0 0 0 ITTXFE 0 TOC Reserved 0 0 EPDISD 0 XFRC Reserved 0 EPDISD XFRC TOC ITTXFE Reserved INEPNE TXFE TXFE INEPNE Reserved 0 ITTXFE 0 TOC Reserved 0 EPDISD 0 XFRC TXFIFOUDRN TXFIFOUDRN BNA BNA Reserved Reserved PKTDRPSTS PKTDRPSTS BERR BERR BERR PKTDRPSTS Reserved 0 BNA 0 TXFIFOUDRN 1 TXFE 0 INEPNE Reserved 0 ITTXFE 0 TOC Reserved 0 EPDISD 0 XFRC NAK NAK NAK NAK 0 BERR 0 PKTDRPSTS Reserved 0 BNA 0 TXFIFOUDRN 1 TXFE 0 INEPNE Reserved 0 ITTXFE 0 TOC Reserved 0 EPDISD 0 XFRC NAK 0 BERR 0 0 0 Reserved BNA 0 0 1 1 TXFE 0 INEPNE Reserved 0 ITTXFE 0 TOC Reserved 0 EPDISD 0 XFRC 0

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

NYET 0 NAK 0 BERR 0 PKTDRPSTS PKTDRPSTS 0 Reserved 0 BNA 0 TXFIFOUDRN TXFIFOUDRN 1 TXFE 0 INEPNE Reserved 0 ITTXFE 0 TOC Reserved 0 EPDISD 0 XFRC

Reserved

NAK

BERR

PKTDRPSTS

Reserved

Reserved

BNA

TXFIFOUDRN

TXFE

B2BSTUP

INEPNE

MPSIZ

Reserved

Reserved

OTEPDIS

ITTXFE

STUP

TOC

Reserved

Reserved

EPDISD

EPDISD

1258/1422

XFRC

XFRC

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)
Offset
0xB28

RM0090

Register
OTG_HS_DOE PINT1 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PINT2 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PINT3 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PINT4 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PINT5 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PINT6 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PINT7 Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP TSIZ0 Reset value OTG_HS_DIEP TSIZ1 Reset value

B2BSTUP

OTEPDIS

Reserved

Reserved

EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 EPDISD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved

Reserved

0 NYET

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

0xB48

Reserved

Reserved

0 NYET

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

0xB68

Reserved

Reserved

0 NYET

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

0xB88

Reserved

Reserved

0 NYET

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

0xBA8

Reserved

Reserved

0 NYET

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

0xBC8

Reserved

Reserved

0 NYET

0 B2BSTUP

0 OTEPDIS

0 STUP

Reserved

Reserved

0xBE8

Reserved

Reserved

0 Reserved Reserved MCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTC NT 0 0 Reserved

0x910

XFRSIZ 0 XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x930

0x934

0x93C

Reserved

0x950

OTG_HS_DIEP DMA1 Reset value 0 0 0 0 OTG_HS_DIEP DMAB1 Reset value 0 0 0 0 OTG_HS_DIEP MCNT TSIZ2 Reset value 0 0 0

DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DMABADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x954

0x95C

Reserved

0x970

OTG_HS_DIEP DMA2 Reset value 0 0 0 0 OTG_HS_DIEP DMAB2 Reset value 0 0 0 0 OTG_HS_DIEP MCNT TSIZ3 Reset value 0 0 0

DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DMABADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0x974

0x97C

OTG_HS_DIEP DMA3 Reset value 0 OTG_HS_DIEP DMAB3 Reset value 0

DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DMABADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1259/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

XFRC 0

NYET

STUP

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Table 184. OTG_HS register map and reset values (continued)

Offset
0xB10

Register
OTG_HS_DOE PTSIZ0 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PTSIZ1 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PDMA1 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PDMAB1 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PTSIZ2 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PDMA2 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PDMAB2 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PTSIZ3 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PDMA3 Reset value OTG_HS_DOE PDMAB3 Reset value OTG_HS_PCG CCTL Reset value

Reserved

STUP CNT 0 0

PKTCNT

Reserved

RXDPID/ STUPCNT

0xB30

0xB34

0xB3C

Reserved

RXDPID/ STUPCNT

0xB50

0xB54

0xB5C

Reserved

RXDPID/ STUPCNT

0xB70

0xB74

0xB7C

GATEHCLK

PHYSUSP

0xE00

Reserved

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

31.13
31.13.1

OTG_HS programming model

Core initialization
The application must perform the core initialization sequence. If the cable is connected during power-up, the current mode of operation bit in the Core interrupt register (CMOD bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) reflects the mode. The OTG_HS controller enters host mode when an A plug is connected or peripheral mode when a B plug is connected. This section explains the initialization of the OTG_HS controller after power-on. The application must follow the initialization sequence irrespective of host or peripheral mode operation. All core global registers are initialized according to the cores configuration:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1260/1422

Reserved

STPPCLK

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Reserved 0 XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMABADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMABADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PKTCNT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFRSIZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMAADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMABADDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) 1.

RM0090

Program the following fields in the Global AHB configuration (OTG_HS_GAHBCFG) register: DMA mode bit AHB burst length field Global interrupt mask bit GINT = 1 RxFIFO nonempty (RXFLVL bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) Periodic TxFIFO empty level HNP capable bit SRP capable bit FS timeout calibration field USB turnaround time field

2.

Program the following fields in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG register:

3.

The software must unmask the following bits in the GINTMSK register: OTG interrupt mask Mode mismatch interrupt mask

4.

The software can read the CMOD bit in OTG_HS_GINTSTS to determine whether the OTG_HS controller is operating in host or peripheral mode.

31.13.2

Host initialization
To initialize the core as host, the application must perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Program the HPRTINT in GINTMSK to unmask Program the OTG_HS_HCFG register to select full-speed host Program the PPWR bit in OTG_HS_HPRT to 1. This drives VBUS on the USB. Wait for the PCDET interrupt in OTG_HS_HPRT0. This indicates that a device is connecting to the port. Program the PRST bit in OTG_HS_HPRT to 1. This starts the reset process. Wait at least 10 ms for the reset process to complete. Program the PRST bit in OTG_HS_HPRT to 0. Wait for the PENCHNG interrupt in OTG_HS_HPRT. Read the PSPD bit in OTG_HS_HPRT to get the enumerated speed.

10. Program the HFIR register with a value corresponding to the selected PHY clock 1. 11. Program the FSLSPCS field in OTG_FS_HCFG register according to the speed of the detected device read in step 9. If FSLSPCS has been changed, reset the port. 12. Program the OTG_HS_GRXFSIZ register to select the size of the receive FIFO. 13. Program the OTG_HS_GNPTXFSIZ register to select the size and the start address of the nonperiodic transmit FIFO for nonperiodic transactions. 14. Program the OTG_HS_HPTXFSIZ register to select the size and start address of the periodic transmit FIFO for periodic transactions. To communicate with devices, the system software must initialize and enable at least one channel.

1261/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

31.13.3

Device initialization
The application must perform the following steps to initialize the core as a device on powerup or after a mode change from host to device. 1. Program the following fields in the OTG_HS_DCFG register: 2. 3. 4. Device speed Nonzero-length status OUT handshake USB reset Enumeration done Early suspend USB suspend SOF

Program the OTG_HS_GINTMSK register to unmask the following interrupts:

Program the VBUSBSEN bit in the OTG_HS_GCCFG register to enable VBUS sensing in B peripheral mode and supply the 5 volts across the pull-up resistor on the DP line. Wait for the USBRST interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS. It indicates that a reset has been detected on the USB that lasts for about 10 ms on receiving this interrupt.

Wait for the ENUMDNE interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS. This interrupt indicates the end of reset on the USB. On receiving this interrupt, the application must read the OTG_HS_DSTS register to determine the enumeration speed and perform the steps listed in Endpoint initialization on enumeration completion on page 1291. At this point, the device is ready to accept SOF packets and perform control transfers on control endpoint 0.

31.13.4

DMA mode
The OTG host uses the AHB master interface to fetch the transmit packet data (AHB to USB) and receive the data update (USB to AHB). The AHB master uses the programmed DMA address (HCDMAx register in host mode and DIEPDMAx/DOEPDMAx register in peripheral mode) to access the data buffers.

31.13.5

Host programming model

Channel initialization
The application must initialize one or more channels before it can communicate with connected devices. To initialize and enable a channel, the application must perform the following steps:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1262/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) 1. 2. Program the GINTMSK register to unmask the following: Channel interrupt

RM0090

Nonperiodic transmit FIFO empty for OUT transactions (applicable for Slave mode that operates in pipelined transaction-level with the packet count field programmed with more than one). Nonperiodic transmit FIFO half-empty for OUT transactions (applicable for Slave mode that operates in pipelined transaction-level with the packet count field programmed with more than one).

3. 4. 5.

Program the OTG_HS_HAINTMSK register to unmask the selected channels interrupts. Program the OTG_HS_HCINTMSK register to unmask the transaction-related interrupts of interest given in the host channel interrupt register. Program the selected channels OTG_HS_HCTSIZx register with the total transfer size, in bytes, and the expected number of packets, including short packets. The application must program the PID field with the initial data PID (to be used on the first OUT transaction or to be expected from the first IN transaction). Program the selected channels in the OTG_HS_HCSPLTx register(s) with the hub and port addresses (split transactions only). Program the selected channels in the HCDMAx register(s) with the buffer start address. Program the OTG_HS_HCCHARx register of the selected channel with the devices endpoint characteristics, such as type, speed, direction, and so forth. (The channel can be enabled by setting the channel enable bit to 1 only when the application is ready to transmit or receive any packet).

6. 7. 8.

Halting a channel
The application can disable any channel by programming the OTG_HS_HCCHARx register with the CHDIS and CHENA bits set to 1. This enables the OTG_HS host to flush the posted requests (if any) and generates a channel halted interrupt. The application must wait for the CHH interrupt in OTG_HS_HCINTx before reallocating the channel for other transactions. The OTG_HS host does not interrupt the transaction that has already been started on the USB. To disable a channel in DMA mode operation, the application does not need to check for space in the request queue. The OTG_HS host checks for space to write the disable request on the disabled channels turn during arbitration. Meanwhile, all posted requests are dropped from the request queue when the CHDIS bit in HCCHARx is set to 1. Before disabling a channel, the application must ensure that there is at least one free space available in the nonperiodic request queue (when disabling a nonperiodic channel) or the periodic request queue (when disabling a periodic channel). The application can simply flush the posted requests when the Request queue is full (before disabling the channel), by programming the OTG_HS_HCCHARx register with the CHDIS bit set to 1, and the CHENA bit cleared to 0. The application is expected to disable a channel on any of the following conditions: 1. 2. When an XFRC interrupt in OTG_HS_HCINTx is received during a nonperiodic IN transfer or high-bandwidth interrupt IN transfer (Slave mode only) When an STALL, TXERR, BBERR or DTERR interrupt in OTG_HS_HCINTx is received for an IN or OUT channel (Slave mode only). For high-bandwidth interrupt INs in Slave mode, once the application has received a DTERR interrupt it must disable the channel

1263/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) and wait for a channel halted interrupt. The application must be able to receive other interrupts (DTERR, NAK, Data, TXERR) for the same channel before receiving the halt. 3. 4. When a DISCINT (Disconnect Device) interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS is received. (The application is expected to disable all enabled channels When the application aborts a transfer before normal completion.

Ping protocol
When the OTG_HS host operates in high speed, the application must initiate the ping protocol when communicating with high-speed bulk or control (data and status stage) OUT endpoints. The application must initiate the ping protocol when it receives a NAK/NYET/TXERR interrupt. When the HS_OTG host receives one of the above responses, it does not continue any transaction for a specific endpoint, drops all posted or fetched OUT requests (from the request queue), and flushes the corresponding data (from the transmit FIFO). This is valid in slave mode only. In Slave mode, the application can send a ping token either by setting the DOPING bit in HCTSIZx before enabling the channel or by just writing the HCTSIZx register with the DOPING bit set when the channel is already enabled. This enables the HS_OTG host to write a ping request entry to the request queue. The application must wait for the response to the ping token (a NAK, ACK, or TXERR interrupt) before continuing the transaction or sending another ping token. The application can continue the data transaction only after receiving an ACK from the OUT endpoint for the requested ping. In DMA mode operation, the application does not need to set the DOPING bit in HCTSIZx for a NAK/NYET response in case of Bulk/Control OUT. The OTG_HS host automatically sets the DOPING bit in HCTSIZx, and issues the ping tokens for Bulk/Control OUT. The HS_OTG host continues sending ping tokens until it receives an ACK, and then switches automatically to the data transaction.

Operational model
The application must initialize a channel before communicating to the connected device. This section explains the sequence of operation to be performed for different types of USB transactions.

Writing the transmit FIFO

The OTG_HS host automatically writes an entry (OUT request) to the periodic/nonperiodic request queue, along with the last DWORD write of a packet. The application must ensure that at least one free space is available in the periodic/nonperiodic request queue before starting to write to the transmit FIFO. The application must always write to the transmit FIFO in DWORDs. If the packet size is nonDWORD aligned, the application must use padding. The OTG_HS host determines the actual packet size based on the programmed maximum packet size and transfer size.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1264/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 385. Transmit FIFO write task
Start

RM0090

Read GNPTXSTS/ HPTXFSIZ registers for available FIFO and queue spaces

W ait for TXFELVL or PTXFELVL interrupt in OTG_FS_GAHBCFG

No

1 MPS or LPS FIFO space available?

Yes

Yes

W rite 1 packet data to Transmit FIFO

More packets to send?

No MPS: Maximum packet size LPS: Last t packet ac et size

Done
ai15673

1265/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Reading the receive FIFO

The application must ignore all packet statuses other than IN data packet (bx0010). Figure 386. Receive FIFO read task
Start

No

RXFLVL interrupt ?

Yes

Unmask RXFLVL interrupt

Mask RXFLVL interrupt

Unmask RXFLVL interrupt

Read the received packet from the Receive FIFO

Read OTG_FS_GRXSTSP

PKTSTS 0b0010?

No No

Yes Yes

BCNT > 0?

ai15674

Bulk and control OUT/SETUP transactions A typical bulk or control OUT/SETUP pipelined transaction-level operation is shown in Figure 387. See channel 1 (ch_1). Two bulk OUT packets are transmitted. A control

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1266/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) SETUP transaction operates in the same way but has only one packet. The assumptions are:

RM0090

The application is attempting to send two maximum-packet-size packets (transfer size = 1, 024 bytes). The nonperiodic transmit FIFO can hold two packets (128 bytes for FS). The nonperiodic request queue depth = 4.

Normal bulk and control OUT/SETUP operations The sequence of operations for channel 1 is as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Initialize channel 1 Write the first packet for channel 1 Along with the last DWORD write, the core writes an entry to the nonperiodic request queue As soon as the nonperiodic queue becomes nonempty, the core attempts to send an OUT token in the current frame Write the second (last) packet for channel 1 The core generates the XFRC interrupt as soon as the last transaction is completed successfully In response to the XFRC interrupt, de-allocate the channel for other transfers Handling nonACK responses

1267/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 387. Normal bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions - DMA mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1268/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Figure 388. Normal bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions - Slave mode

The channel-specific interrupt service routine for bulk and control OUT/SETUP transactions in Slave mode is shown in the following code samples.

Interrupt service routine for bulk/control OUT/SETUP and bulk/control IN transactions

a) Bulk/Control OUT/SETUP Unmask (NAK/TXERR/STALL/XFRC) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count

1269/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Mask ACK De-allocate Channel } else if (STALL) { Transfer Done = 1 Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (NAK or TXERR ) { Rewind Buffer Pointers Unmask CHH Disable Channel if (TXERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask ACK } else { Reset Error Count } } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK } The application is expected to write the data packets into the transmit FIFO as and when the space is available in the transmit FIFO and the Request queue. The application can make use of the NPTXFE interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS to find the transmit FIFO space. b) Bulk/Control IN Unmask (TXERR/XFRC/BBERR/STALL/DTERR) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count Unmask CHH Disable Channel

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1270/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Reset Error Count Mask ACK } else if (TXERR or BBERR or STALL) { Unmask CHH Disable Channel if (TXERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask ACK } } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK } else if (DTERR) { Reset Error Count }

RM0090

The application is expected to write the requests as and when the Request queue space is available and until the XFRC interrupt is received.

Bulk and control IN transactions A typical bulk or control IN pipelined transaction-level operation is shown in Figure 389. See channel 2 (ch_2). The assumptions are: The application is attempting to receive two maximum-packet-size packets (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The receive FIFO can contain at least one maximum-packet-size packet and two status DWORDs per packet (72 bytes for FS). The nonperiodic request queue depth = 4.

1271/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 389. Bulk/control IN transactions - DMA mode

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1272/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 390. Bulk/control IN transactions - Slave mode

RM0090

The sequence of operations is as follows: a) b) c) d) e) Initialize channel 2. Set the CHENA bit in HCCHAR2 to write an IN request to the nonperiodic request queue. The core attempts to send an IN token after completing the current OUT transaction. The core generates an RXFLVL interrupt as soon as the received packet is written to the receive FIFO. In response to the RXFLVL interrupt, mask the RXFLVL interrupt and read the received packet status to determine the number of bytes received, then read the

1273/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) receive FIFO accordingly. Following this, unmask the RXFLVL interrupt. f) g) h) i) The core generates the RXFLVL interrupt for the transfer completion status entry in the receive FIFO. The application must read and ignore the receive packet status when the receive packet status is not an IN data packet (PKTSTS in GRXSTSR 0b0010). The core generates the XFRC interrupt as soon as the receive packet status is read. In response to the XFRC interrupt, disable the channel and stop writing the OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 register for further requests. The core writes a channel disable request to the nonperiodic request queue as soon as the OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 register is written. The core generates the RXFLVL interrupt as soon as the halt status is written to the receive FIFO. Read and ignore the receive packet status. The core generates a CHH interrupt as soon as the halt status is popped from the receive FIFO. Handling nonACK responses

j) k) l)

m) In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel for other transfers. n)

Control transactions in slave mode Setup, Data, and Status stages of a control transfer must be performed as three separate transfers. Setup-, Data- or Status-stage OUT transactions are performed similarly to the bulk OUT transactions explained previously. Data- or Status-stage IN transactions are performed similarly to the bulk IN transactions explained previously. For all three stages, the application is expected to set the EPTYP field in OTG_HS_HCCHAR1 to Control. During the Setup stage, the application is expected to set the PID field in OTG_HS_HCTSIZ1 to SETUP.

Interrupt OUT transactions A typical interrupt OUT operation in Slave mode is shown in Figure 391. The assumptions are: a) b) The application is attempting to send one packet in every frame (up to 1 maximum packet size), starting with the odd frame (transfer size = 1 024 bytes) The periodic transmit FIFO can hold one packet (1 KB) Periodic request queue depth = 4 Initialize and enable channel 1. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR1. Write the first packet for channel 1. For a high-bandwidth interrupt transfer, the application must write the subsequent packets up to MCNT (maximum number of packets to be transmitted in the next frame times) before switching to another channel. Along with the last DWORD write of each packet, the OTG_HS host writes an entry to the periodic request queue. The OTG_HS host attempts to send an OUT token in the next (odd) frame. The OTG_HS host generates an XFRC interrupt as soon as the last packet is transmitted successfully. In response to the XFRC interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer.

The sequence of operations is as follows:

c) d) e) f)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1274/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 391. Normal interrupt OUT/IN transactions - DMA mode

RM0090

1275/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 392. Normal interrupt OUT/IN transactions - Slave mode

Interrupt service routine for interrupt OUT/IN transactions

a) Interrupt OUT Unmask (NAK/TXERR/STALL/XFRC/FRMOR) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK De-allocate Channel } else if (STALL or FRMOR) {

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1276/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Mask ACK Unmask CHH Disable Channel if (STALL) { Transfer Done = 1 } } else if (NAK or TXERR) { Rewind Buffer Pointers Reset Error Count Mask ACK Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel (in next b_interval - 1 Frame) } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK } The application is expected to write the data packets into the transmit FIFO when the space is available in the transmit FIFO and the Request queue up to the count specified in the MCNT field before switching to another channel. The application uses the NPTXFE interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS to find the transmit FIFO space. b) Interrupt IN Unmask (NAK/TXERR/XFRC/BBERR/STALL/FRMOR/DTERR) if (XFRC) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK if (OTG_HS_HCTSIZx.PKTCNT == 0) { De-allocate Channel } else {

1277/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Transfer Done = 1 Unmask CHH Disable Channel }

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

} else if (STALL or FRMOR or NAK or DTERR or BBERR) { Mask ACK Unmask CHH Disable Channel if (STALL or BBERR) { Reset Error Count Transfer Done = 1 } else if (!FRMOR) { Reset Error Count } } else if (TXERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask ACK Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else Re-initialize Channel (in next b_interval - 1 /Frame) } } else if (ACK) { Reset Error Count Mask ACK

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1278/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) }

RM0090

The application is expected to write the requests for the same channel when the Request queue space is available up to the count specified in the MCNT field before switching to another channel (if any).

Interrupt IN transactions The assumptions are: The application is attempting to receive one packet (up to 1 maximum packet size) in every frame, starting with odd (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The receive FIFO can hold at least one maximum-packet-size packet and two status DWORDs per packet (1 031 bytes). Periodic request queue depth = 4.

Normal interrupt IN operation The sequence of operations is as follows: a) b) Initialize channel 2. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR2. Set the CHENA bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 to write an IN request to the periodic request queue. For a high-bandwidth interrupt transfer, the application must write the OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 register MCNT (maximum number of expected packets in the next frame times) before switching to another channel. The OTG_HS host writes an IN request to the periodic request queue for each OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 register write with the CHENA bit set. The OTG_HS host attempts to send an IN token in the next (odd) frame. As soon as the IN packet is received and written to the receive FIFO, the OTG_HS host generates an RXFLVL interrupt. In response to the RXFLVL interrupt, read the received packet status to determine the number of bytes received, then read the receive FIFO accordingly. The application must mask the RXFLVL interrupt before reading the receive FIFO, and unmask after reading the entire packet. The core generates the RXFLVL interrupt for the transfer completion status entry in the receive FIFO. The application must read and ignore the receive packet status when the receive packet status is not an IN data packet (PKTSTS in GRXSTSR 0b0010). The core generates an XFRC interrupt as soon as the receive packet status is read. In response to the XFRC interrupt, read the PKTCNT field in OTG_HS_HCTSIZ2. If the PKTCNT bit in OTG_HS_HCTSIZ2 is not equal to 0, disable the channel before re-initializing the channel for the next transfer, if any). If PKTCNT bit in

c) d) e) f)

g)

h) i)

1279/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) OTG_HS_HCTSIZ2 = 0, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer. This time, the application must reset the ODDFRM bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR2.

Isochronous OUT transactions A typical isochronous OUT operation in Slave mode is shown in Figure 393. The assumptions are: a) b) The application is attempting to send one packet every frame (up to 1 maximum packet size), starting with an odd frame. (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The periodic transmit FIFO can hold one packet (1 KB). Periodic request queue depth = 4. Initialize and enable channel 1. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR1. Write the first packet for channel 1. For a high-bandwidth isochronous transfer, the application must write the subsequent packets up to MCNT (maximum number of packets to be transmitted in the next frame times before switching to another channel. Along with the last DWORD write of each packet, the OTG_HS host writes an entry to the periodic request queue. The OTG_HS host attempts to send the OUT token in the next frame (odd). The OTG_HS host generates the XFRC interrupt as soon as the last packet is transmitted successfully. In response to the XFRC interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer. Handling nonACK responses

The sequence of operations is as follows:

c) d) e) f) g)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1280/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 393. Normal isochronous OUT/IN transactions - DMA mode

RM0090

1281/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 394. Normal isochronous OUT/IN transactions - Slave mode

Interrupt service routine for isochronous OUT/IN transactions

Code sample: Isochronous OUT Unmask (FRMOR/XFRC) if (XFRC) { De-allocate Channel } else if (FRMOR) { Unmask CHH Disable Channel }

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1282/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) else if (CHH) { Mask CHH De-allocate Channel } Code sample: Isochronous IN Unmask (TXERR/XFRC/FRMOR/BBERR) if (XFRC or FRMOR) { if (XFRC and (OTG_HS_HCTSIZx.PKTCNT == 0)) { Reset Error Count De-allocate Channel } else { Unmask CHH Disable Channel } } else if (TXERR or BBERR) { Increment Error Count Unmask CHH Disable Channel } else if (CHH) { Mask CHH if (Transfer Done or (Error_count == 3)) { De-allocate Channel } else { Re-initialize Channel } }

RM0090

1283/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

Isochronous IN transactions The assumptions are: a) b) The application is attempting to receive one packet (up to 1 maximum packet size) in every frame starting with the next odd frame (transfer size = 1 024 bytes). The receive FIFO can hold at least one maximum-packet-size packet and two status DWORDs per packet (1 031 bytes). Periodic request queue depth = 4. Initialize channel 2. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR2. Set the CHENA bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 to write an IN request to the periodic request queue. For a high-bandwidth isochronous transfer, the application must write the OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 register MCNT (maximum number of expected packets in the next frame times) before switching to another channel. The OTG_HS host writes an IN request to the periodic request queue for each OTG_HS_HCCHAR2 register write with the CHENA bit set. The OTG_HS host attempts to send an IN token in the next odd frame. As soon as the IN packet is received and written to the receive FIFO, the OTG_HS host generates an RXFLVL interrupt. In response to the RXFLVL interrupt, read the received packet status to determine the number of bytes received, then read the receive FIFO accordingly. The application must mask the RXFLVL interrupt before reading the receive FIFO, and unmask it after reading the entire packet. The core generates an RXFLVL interrupt for the transfer completion status entry in the receive FIFO. This time, the application must read and ignore the receive packet status when the receive packet status is not an IN data packet (PKTSTS bit in OTG_HS_GRXSTSR 0b0010). The core generates an XFRC interrupt as soon as the receive packet status is read. In response to the XFRC interrupt, read the PKTCNT field in OTG_HS_HCTSIZ2. If PKTCNT 0 in OTG_HS_HCTSIZ2, disable the channel before re-initializing the channel for the next transfer, if any. If PKTCNT = 0 in OTG_HS_HCTSIZ2, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer. This time, the application must reset the ODDFRM bit in OTG_HS_HCCHAR2.

The sequence of operations is as follows:

c) d) e) f)

g)

h) i)

Selecting the queue depth Choose the periodic and nonperiodic request queue depths carefully to match the number of periodic/nonperiodic endpoints accessed. The nonperiodic request queue depth affects the performance of nonperiodic transfers. The deeper the queue (along with sufficient FIFO size), the more often the core is able to pipeline nonperiodic transfers. If the queue size is small, the core is able to put in new requests only when the queue space is freed up. The cores periodic request queue depth is critical to perform periodic transfers as scheduled. Select the periodic queue depth, based on the number of periodic transfers scheduled in a micro-frame. In Slave mode, however, the application must also take into account the disable entry that must be put into the queue. So, if there are two nonhigh-bandwidth periodic endpoints, the periodic request queue depth must be at least 4. If at least one high-bandwidth endpoint is supported, the queue depth must be

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1284/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

8. If the periodic request queue depth is smaller than the periodic transfers scheduled in a micro-frame, a frame overrun condition occurs.

Handling babble conditions OTG_HS controller handles two cases of babble: packet babble and port babble. Packet babble occurs if the device sends more data than the maximum packet size for the channel. Port babble occurs if the core continues to receive data from the device at EOF2 (the end of frame 2, which is very close to SOF). When OTG_HS controller detects a packet babble, it stops writing data into the Rx buffer and waits for the end of packet (EOP). When it detects an EOP, it flushes already written data in the Rx buffer and generates a Babble interrupt to the application. When OTG_HS controller detects a port babble, it flushes the RxFIFO and disables the port. The core then generates a Port disabled interrupt (HPRTINT in OTG_HS_GINTSTS, PENCHNG in OTG_HS_HPRT). On receiving this interrupt, the application must determine that this is not due to an overcurrent condition (another cause of the Port Disabled interrupt) by checking POCA in OTG_HS_HPRT, then perform a soft reset. The core does not send any more tokens after it has detected a port babble condition.

Bulk and control OUT/SETUP transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations is as follows: a) b) Initialize and enable channel 1 as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The HS_OTG host starts fetching the first packet as soon as the channel is enabled. For internal DMA mode, the OTG_HS host uses the programmed DMA address to fetch the packet. After fetching the last DWORD of the second (last) packet, the OTG_HS host masks channel 1 internally for further arbitration. The HS_OTG host generates a CHH interrupt as soon as the last packet is sent. In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel for other transfers. The OTG_HS host sends a bulk OUT transaction. The device responds with NAK or NYET. If the application has unmasked NAK or NYET, the core generates the corresponding interrupt(s) to the application. The application is not required to

c) d) e)

NAK and NYET handling with internal DMA a) b) c)

1285/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) service these interrupts, since the core takes care of rewinding the buffer pointers and re-initializing the Channel without application intervention. d) e) The core automatically issues a ping token. When the device returns an ACK, the core continues with the transfer. Optionally, the application can utilize these interrupts, in which case the NAK or NYET interrupt is masked by the application.

The core does not generate a separate interrupt when NAK or NYET is received by the host functionality.

Bulk and control IN transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations is as follows: a) b) Initialize and enable the used channel (channel x) as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host writes an IN request to the request queue as soon as the channel receives the grant from the arbiter (arbitration is performed in a roundrobin fashion). The OTG_HS host starts writing the received data to the system memory as soon as the last byte is received with no errors. When the last packet is received, the OTG_HS host sets an internal flag to remove any extra IN requests from the request queue. The OTG_HS host flushes the extra requests. The final request to disable channel x is written to the request queue. At this point, channel 2 is internally masked for further arbitration. The OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt as soon as the disable request comes to the top of the queue. In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel for other transfers. Initialize and enable channel x as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host starts fetching the first packet as soon the channel is enabled and writes the OUT request along with the last DWORD fetch. In high-bandwidth

c) d) e) f) g) h)

Interrupt OUT transactions in DMA mode a) b)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1286/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

transfers, the HS_OTG host continues fetching the next packet (up to the value specified in the MC field) before switching to the next channel. c) d) e)

The OTG_HS host attempts to send the OUT token at the beginning of the next odd frame/micro-frame. After successfully transmitting the packet, the OTG_HS host generates a CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer.

Interrupt IN transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations (channelx) is as follows: a) b) Initialize and enable channel x as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host writes an IN request to the request queue as soon as the channel x gets the grant from the arbiter (round-robin with fairness). In highbandwidth transfers, the OTG_HS host writes consecutive writes up to MC times. The OTG_HS host attempts to send an IN token at the beginning of the next (odd) frame/micro-frame. As soon the packet is received and written to the receive FIFO, the OTG_HS host generates a CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer. Initialize and enable channel x as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host starts fetching the first packet as soon as the channel is enabled, and writes the OUT request along with the last DWORD fetch. In highbandwidth transfers, the OTG_HS host continues fetching the next packet (up to the value specified in the MC field) before switching to the next channel. The OTG_HS host attempts to send an OUT token at the beginning of the next (odd) frame/micro-frame. After successfully transmitting the packet, the HS_OTG host generates a CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer.

c) d) e)

Isochronous OUT transactions in DMA mode a) b)

c) d) e)

Isochronous IN transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations ((channel x) is as follows: a) b) Initialize and enable channel x as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host writes an IN request to the request queue as soon as the channel x gets the grant from the arbiter (round-robin with fairness). In high-

1287/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) bandwidth transfers, the OTG_HS host performs consecutive write operations up to MC times. c) d) e)

The OTG_HS host attempts to send an IN token at the beginning of the next (odd) frame/micro-frame. As soon the packet is received and written to the receive FIFO, the OTG_HS host generates a CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, reinitialize the channel for the next transfer.

Bulk and control OUT/SETUP split transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations in (channel x) is as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) Initialize and enable channel x for start split as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host starts fetching the first packet as soon the channel is enabled and writes the OUT request along with the last DWORD fetch. After successfully transmitting start split, the OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, set the COMPLSPLT bit in HCSPLT1 to send the complete split. After successfully transmitting complete split, the OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel.

Bulk/Control IN split transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations (channel x) is as follows: a) b) Initialize and enable channel x as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host writes the start split request to the nonperiodic request after getting the grant from the arbiter. The OTG_HS host masks the channel x internally for the arbitration after writing the request. As soon as the IN token is transmitted, the OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, set the COMPLSPLT bit in HCSPLT2 and reenable the channel to send the complete split token. This unmasks channel x for arbitration. The OTG_HS host writes the complete split request to the nonperiodic request after receiving the grant from the arbiter. The OTG_HS host starts writing the packet to the system memory after receiving the packet successfully. As soon as the received packet is written to the system memory, the OTG_HS host generates a CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel.

c) d)

e) f) g) h)

Interrupt OUT split transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations in (channel x) is as follows: a) b) c) d) Initialize and enable channel 1 for start split as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in HCCHAR1. The HS_OTG host starts reading the packet. The HS_OTG host attempts to send the start split transaction. After successfully transmitting the start split, the OTG_HS host generates the

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1288/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) CHH interrupt. e) f) g)

RM0090

In response to the CHH interrupt, set the COMPLSPLT bit in HCSPLT1 to send the complete split. After successfully completing the complete split transaction, the OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt. In response to CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel.

Interrupt IN split transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations in (channel x) is as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Initialize and enable channel x for start split as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host writes an IN request to the request queue as soon as channel x receives the grant from the arbiter. The OTG_HS host attempts to send the start split IN token at the beginning of the next odd micro-frame. The OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt after successfully transmitting the start split IN token. In response to the CHH interrupt, set the COMPLSPLT bit in HCSPLT2 to send the complete split. As soon as the packet is received successfully, the OTG_HS host starts writing the data to the system memory. The OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt after transferring the received data to the system memory. In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate or reinitialize the channel for the next start split.

Isochronous OUT split transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations (channel x) is as follows: a) Initialize and enable channel x for start split (begin) as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The application must set the ODDFRM bit in HCCHAR1. Program the MPS field. The HS_OTG host starts reading the packet. After successfully transmitting the start split (begin), the HS_OTG host generates the CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, reinitialize the registers to send the start split (end). After successfully transmitting the start split (end), the OTG_HS host generates a CHH interrupt. In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel.

b) c) d) e) f)

Isochronous IN split transactions in DMA mode The sequence of operations (channel x) is as follows: a) b) c) Initialize and enable channel x for start split as explained in Section : Channel initialization. The OTG_HS host writes an IN request to the request queue as soon as channel x receives the grant from the arbiter. The OTG_HS host attempts to send the start split IN token at the beginning of the next odd micro-frame.

1289/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 d) e) f) g)

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) The OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt after successfully transmitting the start split IN token. In response to the CHH interrupt, set the COMPLSPLT bit in HCSPLT2 to send the complete split. As soon as the packet is received successfully, the OTG_HS host starts writing the data to the system memory. The OTG_HS host generates the CHH interrupt after transferring the received data to the system memory. In response to the CHH interrupt, de-allocate the channel or reinitialize the channel for the next start split.

31.13.6

Device programming model

Endpoint initialization on USB reset
1. 2. Set the NAK bit for all OUT endpoints 3. SNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx (for all OUT endpoints) INEP0 = 1 in OTG_HS_DAINTMSK (control 0 IN endpoint) OUTEP0 = 1 in OTG_HS_DAINTMSK (control 0 OUT endpoint) STUP = 1 in DOEPMSK XFRC = 1 in DOEPMSK XFRC = 1 in DIEPMSK TOC = 1 in DIEPMSK Program the OTG_HS_GRXFSIZ register, to be able to receive control OUT data and setup data. If thresholding is not enabled, at a minimum, this must be equal to 1 max packet size of control endpoint 0 + 2 DWORDs (for the status of the control OUT data packet) + 10 DWORDs (for setup packets). Program the OTG_HS_TX0FSIZ register (depending on the FIFO number chosen) to be able to transmit control IN data. At a minimum, this must be equal to 1 max packet size of control endpoint 0. Unmask the following interrupt bits

Set up the Data FIFO RAM for each of the FIFOs

4.

Program the following fields in the endpoint-specific registers for control OUT endpoint 0 to receive a SETUP packet STUPCNT = 3 in OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZ0 (to receive up to 3 back-to-back SETUP packets)

5.

In DMA mode, the DOEPDMA0 register should have a valid memory address to store any SETUP packets received.

At this point, all initialization required to receive SETUP packets is done.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1290/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Endpoint initialization on enumeration completion

1. 2. On the Enumeration Done interrupt (ENUMDNE in OTG_HS_GINTSTS), read the OTG_HS_DSTS register to determine the enumeration speed. Program the MPSIZ field in OTG_HS_DIEPCTL0 to set the maximum packet size. This step configures control endpoint 0. The maximum packet size for a control endpoint depends on the enumeration speed. In DMA mode, program the DOEPCTL0 register to enable control OUT endpoint 0, to receive a SETUP packet. EPENA bit in DOEPCTL0 = 1

3.

At this point, the device is ready to receive SOF packets and is configured to perform control transfers on control endpoint 0.

Endpoint initialization on SetAddress command

This section describes what the application must do when it receives a SetAddress command in a SETUP packet. 1. 1. Program the OTG_HS_DCFG register with the device address received in the SetAddress command Program the core to send out a status IN packet

Endpoint initialization on SetConfiguration/SetInterface command

This section describes what the application must do when it receives a SetConfiguration or SetInterface command in a SETUP packet. 1. When a SetConfiguration command is received, the application must program the endpoint registers to configure them with the characteristics of the valid endpoints in the new configuration. When a SetInterface command is received, the application must program the endpoint registers of the endpoints affected by this command. Some endpoints that were active in the prior configuration or alternate setting are not valid in the new configuration or alternate setting. These invalid endpoints must be deactivated. Unmask the interrupt for each active endpoint and mask the interrupts for all inactive endpoints in the OTG_HS_DAINTMSK register. Set up the Data FIFO RAM for each FIFO. After all required endpoints are configured; the application must program the core to send a status IN packet.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

At this point, the device core is configured to receive and transmit any type of data packet.

Endpoint activation
This section describes the steps required to activate a device endpoint or to configure an existing device endpoint to a new type.

1291/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1.

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Program the characteristics of the required endpoint into the following fields of the OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx register (for IN or bidirectional endpoints) or the OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx register (for OUT or bidirectional endpoints). 2. Maximum packet size USB active endpoint = 1 Endpoint start data toggle (for interrupt and bulk endpoints) Endpoint type TxFIFO number

Once the endpoint is activated, the core starts decoding the tokens addressed to that endpoint and sends out a valid handshake for each valid token received for the endpoint.

Endpoint deactivation
This section describes the steps required to deactivate an existing endpoint. 1. In the endpoint to be deactivated, clear the USB active endpoint bit in the OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx register (for IN or bidirectional endpoints) or the OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx register (for OUT or bidirectional endpoints). Once the endpoint is deactivated, the core ignores tokens addressed to that endpoint, which results in a timeout on the USB.

2. Note:

The application must meet the following conditions to set up the device core to handle traffic: NPTXFEM and RXFLVLM in GINTMSK must be cleared.

31.13.7

Operational model
SETUP and OUT data transfers
This section describes the internal data flow and application-level operations during data OUT transfers and SETUP transactions.

Packet read

This section describes how to read packets (OUT data and SETUP packets) from the receive FIFO in Slave mode. 1. 2. 3. On catching an RXFLVL interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS register), the application must read the Receive status pop register (OTG_HS_GRXSTSP). The application can mask the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) by writing to RXFLVL = 0 (in GINTMSK), until it has read the packet from the receive FIFO. If the received packets byte count is not 0, the byte count amount of data is popped from the receive Data FIFO and stored in memory. If the received packet byte count is 0, no data is popped from the receive data FIFO. The receive FIFOs packet status readout indicates one of the following: a) Global OUT NAK pattern: PKTSTS = Global OUT NAK, BCNT = 0x000, EPNUM = Dont Care (0x0), DPID = Dont Care (0b00). These data indicate that the global OUT NAK bit has taken effect. SETUP packet pattern: PKTSTS = SETUP, BCNT = 0x008, EPNUM = Control EP Num, DPID = D0.

4.

b)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1292/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

These data indicate that a SETUP packet for the specified endpoint is now available for reading from the receive FIFO. c) Setup stage done pattern: PKTSTS = Setup Stage Done, BCNT = 0x0, EPNUM = Control EP Num, DPID = Dont Care (0b00). These data indicate that the Setup stage for the specified endpoint has completed and the Data stage has started. After this entry is popped from the receive FIFO, the core asserts a Setup interrupt on the specified control OUT endpoint. Data OUT packet pattern: PKTSTS = DataOUT, BCNT = size of the received data OUT packet (0 BCNT 1 024), EPNUM = EPNUM on which the packet was received, DPID = Actual Data PID. Data transfer completed pattern: PKTSTS = Data OUT Transfer Done, BCNT = 0x0, EPNUM = OUT EP Num on which the data transfer is complete, DPID = Dont Care (0b00). These data indicate that an OUT data transfer for the specified OUT endpoint has completed. After this entry is popped from the receive FIFO, the core asserts a Transfer Completed interrupt on the specified OUT endpoint.

d)

e)

5. 6.

After the data payload is popped from the receive FIFO, the RXFLVL interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) must be unmasked. Steps 15 are repeated every time the application detects assertion of the interrupt line due to RXFLVL in OTG_HS_GINTSTS. Reading an empty receive FIFO can result in undefined core behavior.

Figure 395 provides a flowchart of the above procedure. Figure 395. Receive FIFO packet read in slave mode

wait until RXFLVL in OTG_FS_GINTSTSG

rd_data = rd_reg (OTG_FS_GRXSTSP);

rd_data.BCNT = 0

rcv_out_pkt ()

N
dword_cnt = BCNT[11:2] C + (BCNT[1] | BCNT[1])

packet store in memory

mem[0:dword_cnt-1] = rd_rxfifo(rd_data.EPNUM, dword_cnt )

ai15677

SETUP transactions

This section describes how the core handles SETUP packets and the applications sequence for handling SETUP transactions.

Application requirements

1293/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1.

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) To receive a SETUP packet, the STUPCNT field (OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) in a control OUT endpoint must be programmed to a nonzero value. When the application programs the STUPCNT field to a nonzero value, the core receives SETUP packets and writes them to the receive FIFO, irrespective of the NAK status and EPENA bit setting in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx. The STUPCNT field is decremented every time the control endpoint receives a SETUP packet. If the STUPCNT field is not programmed to a proper value before receiving a SETUP packet, the core still receives the SETUP packet and decrements the STUPCNT field, but the application may not be able to determine the correct number of SETUP packets received in the Setup stage of a control transfer. 2. STUPCNT = 3 in OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx The application must always allocate some extra space in the Receive data FIFO, to be able to receive up to three SETUP packets on a control endpoint. The space to be reserved is 10 DWORDs. Three DWORDs are required for the first SETUP packet, 1 DWORD is required for the Setup stage done DWORD and 6 DWORDs are required to store two extra SETUP packets among all control endpoints. 3 DWORDs per SETUP packet are required to store 8 bytes of SETUP data and 4 bytes of SETUP status (Setup packet pattern). The core reserves this space in the receive data. FIFO to write SETUP data only, and never uses this space for data packets.

3. 4.

The application must read the 2 DWORDs of the SETUP packet from the receive FIFO. The application must read and discard the Setup stage done DWORD from the receive FIFO. Internal data flow When a SETUP packet is received, the core writes the received data to the receive FIFO, without checking for available space in the receive FIFO and irrespective of the endpoints NAK and STALL bit settings. The core internally sets the IN NAK and OUT NAK bits for the control IN/OUT endpoints on which the SETUP packet was received.

5.

6.

For every SETUP packet received on the USB, 3 DWORDs of data are written to the receive FIFO, and the STUPCNT field is decremented by 1. The first DWORD contains control information used internally by the core The second DWORD contains the first 4 bytes of the SETUP command The third DWORD contains the last 4 bytes of the SETUP command

7.

When the Setup stage changes to a Data IN/OUT stage, the core writes an entry (Setup stage done DWORD) to the receive FIFO, indicating the completion of the Setup stage. On the AHB side, SETUP packets are emptied by the application. When the application pops the Setup stage done DWORD from the receive FIFO, the core interrupts the application with an STUP interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx), indicating it can process the received SETUP packet. The core clears the endpoint enable bit for control OUT endpoints. Application programming sequence

8. 9.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1294/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) 1. 2. 3. Program the OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx register. STUPCNT = 3

RM0090

Wait for the RXFLVL interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) and empty the data packets from the receive FIFO. Assertion of the STUP interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) marks a successful completion of the SETUP Data Transfer. On this interrupt, the application must read the OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx register to determine the number of SETUP packets received and process the last received SETUP packet.

Figure 396. Processing a SETUP packet

Wait for STUP in OTG_FS_DOEPINTx

rem_supcnt = rd_reg(DOEPTSIZx)

setup_cmd[31:0] = mem[4 2 * rem_supcnt] setup_cmd[63:32] = mem[5 2 * rem_supcnt]

Find setup cmd type

Read

ctrl-rd/wr/2 stage

Write

2-stage setup_np_in_pkt Data IN phase setup_np_in_pkt Status IN phase rcv_out_pkt Data OUT phase
ai15678

Handling more than three back-to-back SETUP packets

Per the USB 2.0 specification, normally, during a SETUP packet error, a host does not send more than three back-to-back SETUP packets to the same endpoint. However, the USB 2.0 specification does not limit the number of back-to-back SETUP packets a host can send to the same endpoint. When this condition occurs, the OTG_HS controller generates an interrupt (B2BSTUP in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx).

Setting the global OUT NAK When the application sets the Global OUT NAK (SGONAK bit in OTG_HS_DCTL), the core stops writing data, except SETUP packets, to the receive FIFO. Irrespective of the space availability in the receive FIFO, nonisochronous OUT tokens receive a NAK handshake response, and the core ignores isochronous OUT data packets The core writes the Global OUT NAK pattern to the receive FIFO. The application must reserve enough receive FIFO space to write this data pattern.

Internal data flow: 1.

2.

1295/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 3. 4.

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) When the application pops the Global OUT NAK pattern DWORD from the receive FIFO, the core sets the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS). Once the application detects this interrupt, it can assume that the core is in Global OUT NAK mode. The application can clear this interrupt by clearing the SGONAK bit in OTG_HS_DCTL. To stop receiving any kind of data in the receive FIFO, the application must set the Global OUT NAK bit by programming the following field: 2. SGONAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DCTL Wait for the assertion of the GONAKEFF interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS. When asserted, this interrupt indicates that the core has stopped receiving any type of data except SETUP packets. The application can receive valid OUT packets after it has set SGONAK in OTG_HS_DCTL and before the core asserts the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The application can temporarily mask this interrupt by writing to the GINAKEFFM bit in GINTMSK. 5. GINAKEFFM = 0 in GINTMSK Whenever the application is ready to exit the Global OUT NAK mode, it must clear the SGONAK bit in OTG_HS_DCTL. This also clears the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS). 6.

Application programming sequence 1.

3.

4.

OTG_HS_DCTL = 1 in CGONAK GINAKEFFM = 1 in GINTMSK

If the application has masked this interrupt earlier, it must be unmasked as follows: Disabling an OUT endpoint

The application must use this sequence to disable an OUT endpoint that it has enabled. Application programming sequence: 1. Before disabling any OUT endpoint, the application must enable Global OUT NAK mode in the core. 2. 3. SGONAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DCTL Wait for the GONAKEFF interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) Disable the required OUT endpoint by programming the following fields: 4. EPDIS = 1 in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx SNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx

Wait for the EPDISD interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx), which indicates that the OUT endpoint is completely disabled. When the EPDISD interrupt is asserted, the core also clears the following bits: EPDIS = 0 in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx EPENA = 0 in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx

5.

The application must clear the Global OUT NAK bit to start receiving data from other nondisabled OUT endpoints. SGONAK = 0 in OTG_HS_DCTL Generic nonisochronous OUT data transfers

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1296/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

This section describes a regular nonisochronous OUT data transfer (control, bulk, or interrupt). Application requirements: 1. 2. Before setting up an OUT transfer, the application must allocate a buffer in the memory to accommodate all data to be received as part of the OUT transfer. For OUT transfers, the transfer size field in the endpoints transfer size register must be a multiple of the maximum packet size of the endpoint, adjusted to the DWORD boundary. 3. transfer size[EPNUM] = n (MPSIZ[EPNUM] + 4 (MPSIZ[EPNUM] mod 4)) packet count[EPNUM] = n n>0

On any OUT endpoint interrupt, the application must read the endpoints transfer size register to calculate the size of the payload in the memory. The received payload size can be less than the programmed transfer size. Payload size in memory = application programmed initial transfer size core updated final transfer size Number of USB packets in which this payload was received = application programmed initial packet count core updated final packet count

Internal data flow: 1. 2. The application must set the transfer size and packet count fields in the endpointspecific registers, clear the NAK bit, and enable the endpoint to receive the data. Once the NAK bit is cleared, the core starts receiving data and writes it to the receive FIFO, as long as there is space in the receive FIFO. For every data packet received on the USB, the data packet and its status are written to the receive FIFO. Every packet (maximum packet size or short packet) written to the receive FIFO decrements the packet count field for that endpoint by 1. OUT data packets received with bad data CRC are flushed from the receive FIFO automatically. After sending an ACK for the packet on the USB, the core discards nonisochronous OUT data packets that the host, which cannot detect the ACK, resends. The application does not detect multiple back-to-back data OUT packets on the same endpoint with the same data PID. In this case the packet count is not decremented. If there is no space in the receive FIFO, isochronous or nonisochronous data packets are ignored and not written to the receive FIFO. Additionally, nonisochronous OUT tokens receive a NAK handshake reply. In all the above three cases, the packet count is not decremented because no data are written to the receive FIFO.

3.

When the packet count becomes 0 or when a short packet is received on the endpoint, the NAK bit for that endpoint is set. Once the NAK bit is set, the isochronous or nonisochronous data packets are ignored and not written to the receive FIFO, and nonisochronous OUT tokens receive a NAK handshake reply. After the data are written to the receive FIFO, the application reads the data from the receive FIFO and writes it to external memory, one packet at a time per endpoint. At the end of every packet write on the AHB to external memory, the transfer size for the endpoint is decremented by the size of the written packet.

4. 5.

1297/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 6.

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) The OUT data transfer completed pattern for an OUT endpoint is written to the receive FIFO on one of the following conditions: 7. The transfer size is 0 and the packet count is 0 The last OUT data packet written to the receive FIFO is a short packet (0 packet size < maximum packet size)

When either the application pops this entry (OUT data transfer completed), a transfer completed interrupt is generated for the endpoint and the endpoint enable is cleared. Program the OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx register for the transfer size and the corresponding packet count. Program the OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics, and set the EPENA and CNAK bits. EPENA = 1 in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx CNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx

Application programming sequence: 1. 2.

3.

Wait for the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) and empty the data packets from the receive FIFO. This step can be repeated many times, depending on the transfer size. Asserting the XFRC interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) marks a successful completion of the nonisochronous OUT data transfer. Read the OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx register to determine the size of the received data payload. Generic isochronous OUT data transfer

4. 5.

This section describes a regular isochronous OUT data transfer. Application requirements: 1. 2. All the application requirements for nonisochronous OUT data transfers also apply to isochronous OUT data transfers. For isochronous OUT data transfers, the transfer size and packet count fields must always be set to the number of maximum-packet-size packets that can be received in a single frame and no more. Isochronous OUT data transfers cannot span more than 1 frame. The application must read all isochronous OUT data packets from the receive FIFO (data and status) before the end of the periodic frame (EOPF interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). To receive data in the following frame, an isochronous OUT endpoint must be enabled after the EOPF (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) and before the SOF (OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The internal data flow for isochronous OUT endpoints is the same as that for nonisochronous OUT endpoints, but for a few differences. When an isochronous OUT endpoint is enabled by setting the Endpoint Enable and clearing the NAK bits, the Even/Odd frame bit must also be set appropriately. The core receives data on an isochronous OUT endpoint in a particular frame only if the following condition is met: 3. EONUM (in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx) = SOFFN[0] (in OTG_HS_DSTS) When the application completely reads an isochronous OUT data packet (data and status) from the receive FIFO, the core updates the RXDPID field in

3.

4.

Internal data flow: 1. 2.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1298/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx with the data PID of the last isochronous OUT data packet read from the receive FIFO. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. Program the OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx register for the transfer size and the corresponding packet count Program the OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics and set the Endpoint Enable, ClearNAK, and Even/Odd frame bits. 3. EPENA = 1 CNAK = 1 EONUM = (0: Even/1: Odd)

In Slave mode, wait for the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) and empty the data packets from the receive FIFO This step can be repeated many times, depending on the transfer size. The assertion of the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) marks the completion of the isochronous OUT data transfer. This interrupt does not necessarily mean that the data in memory are good. This interrupt cannot always be detected for isochronous OUT transfers. Instead, the application can detect the IISOOXFRM interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS. Read the OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx register to determine the size of the received transfer and to determine the validity of the data received in the frame. The application must treat the data received in memory as valid only if one of the following conditions is met: RXDPID = D0 (in OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) and the number of USB packets in which this payload was received = 1 RXDPID = D1 (in OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) and the number of USB packets in which this payload was received = 2 RXDPID = D2 (in OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx) and the number of USB packets in which this payload was received = 3 The number of USB packets in which this payload was received = Application programmed initial packet count Core updated final packet count The application can discard invalid data packets.

4.

5. 6.

Incomplete isochronous OUT data transfers

This section describes the application programming sequence when isochronous OUT data packets are dropped inside the core. Internal data flow: 1. For isochronous OUT endpoints, the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) may not always be asserted. If the core drops isochronous OUT data packets, the application could fail to detect the XFRC interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) under the following circumstances: 2. When the receive FIFO cannot accommodate the complete ISO OUT data packet, the core drops the received ISO OUT data When the isochronous OUT data packet is received with CRC errors When the isochronous OUT token received by the core is corrupted When the application is very slow in reading the data from the receive FIFO

When the core detects an end of periodic frame before transfer completion to all isochronous OUT endpoints, it asserts the incomplete Isochronous OUT data interrupt

1299/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) (IISOOXFRM in OTG_HS_GINTSTS), indicating that an XFRC interrupt (in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) is not asserted on at least one of the isochronous OUT endpoints. At this point, the endpoint with the incomplete transfer remains enabled, but no active transfers remain in progress on this endpoint on the USB. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. Asserting the IISOOXFRM interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) indicates that in the current frame, at least one isochronous OUT endpoint has an incomplete transfer. If this occurs because isochronous OUT data is not completely emptied from the endpoint, the application must ensure that the application empties all isochronous OUT data (data and status) from the receive FIFO before proceeding. When all data are emptied from the receive FIFO, the application can detect the XFRC interrupt (OTG_HS_DOEPINTx). In this case, the application must reenable the endpoint to receive isochronous OUT data in the next frame.

3.

When it receives an IISOOXFRM interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS), the application must read the control registers of all isochronous OUT endpoints (OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx) to determine which endpoints had an incomplete transfer in the current micro-frame. An endpoint transfer is incomplete if both the following conditions are met: EONUM bit (in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx) = SOFFN[0] (in OTG_HS_DSTS) EPENA = 1 (in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx)

4. 5.

The previous step must be performed before the SOF interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) is detected, to ensure that the current frame number is not changed. For isochronous OUT endpoints with incomplete transfers, the application must discard the data in the memory and disable the endpoint by setting the EPDIS bit in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx. Wait for the EPDIS interrupt (in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) and enable the endpoint to receive new data in the next frame. Because the core can take some time to disable the endpoint, the application may not be able to receive the data in the next frame after receiving bad isochronous data.

6.

Stalling a nonisochronous OUT endpoint Put the core in the Global OUT NAK mode. Disable the required endpoint When disabling the endpoint, instead of setting the SNAK bit in OTG_HS_DOEPCTL, set STALL = 1 (in OTG_HS_DOEPCTL). The STALL bit always takes precedence over the NAK bit.

This section describes how the application can stall a nonisochronous endpoint. 1. 2.

3. 4.

When the application is ready to end the STALL handshake for the endpoint, the STALL bit (in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx) must be cleared. If the application is setting or clearing a STALL for an endpoint due to a SetFeature.Endpoint Halt or ClearFeature.Endpoint Halt command, the STALL bit must be set or cleared before the application sets up the Status stage transfer on the control endpoint.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1300/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

Examples
This section describes and depicts some fundamental transfer types and scenarios.

Slave mode bulk OUT transaction

Figure 397 depicts the reception of a single Bulk OUT Data packet from the USB to the AHB and describes the events involved in the process. Figure 397. Slave mode bulk OUT transaction
Host USB Device Application init_ out_ ep 2
O UT

1 wr_reg (DOEPTSIZx)

XFRSIZ = 512 bytes PKTCNT = 1 EPENA= 1 CNAK = 1

3 512 bytes 4
AC K

wr_reg(D OEPCTLx)

xact _1
D OE P C

RXFLVL iintr T L x.N A K = 1 PKTCN T0

idle until intr

XFRSIZ =0 r
OU T
NA K

rcv_out _pkt()

XF int r RC

On new xfer or RxFIFO not empty

idle until intr

ai15679

After a SetConfiguration/SetInterface command, the application initializes all OUT endpoints by setting CNAK = 1 and EPENA = 1 (in OTG_HS_DOEPCTLx), and setting a suitable XFRSIZ and PKTCNT in the OTG_HS_DOEPTSIZx register. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Host attempts to send data (OUT token) to an endpoint. When the core receives the OUT token on the USB, it stores the packet in the RxFIFO because space is available there. After writing the complete packet in the RxFIFO, the core then asserts the RXFLVL interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). On receiving the PKTCNT number of USB packets, the core internally sets the NAK bit for this endpoint to prevent it from receiving any more packets. The application processes the interrupt and reads the data from the RxFIFO. When the application has read all the data (equivalent to XFRSIZ), the core generates an XFRC interrupt (in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx). The application processes the interrupt and uses the setting of the XFRC interrupt bit (in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx) to determine that the intended transfer is complete.

1301/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

IN data transfers

Packet write

This section describes how the application writes data packets to the endpoint FIFO in Slave mode when dedicated transmit FIFOs are enabled. 1. The application can either choose the polling or the interrupt mode. In polling mode, the application monitors the status of the endpoint transmit data FIFO by reading the OTG_HS_DTXFSTSx register, to determine if there is enough space in the data FIFO. In interrupt mode, the application waits for the TXFE interrupt (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) and then reads the OTG_HS_DTXFSTSx register, to determine if there is enough space in the data FIFO. To write a single nonzero length data packet, there must be space to write the entire packet in the data FIFO. To write zero length packet, the application must not look at the FIFO space.

2.

Using one of the above mentioned methods, when the application determines that there is enough space to write a transmit packet, the application must first write into the endpoint control register, before writing the data into the data FIFO. Typically, the application, must do a read modify write on the OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx register to avoid modifying the contents of the register, except for setting the Endpoint Enable bit.

The application can write multiple packets for the same endpoint into the transmit FIFO, if space is available. For periodic IN endpoints, the application must write packets only for one micro-frame. It can write packets for the next periodic transaction only after getting transfer complete for the previous transaction.

Setting IN endpoint NAK When the application sets the IN NAK for a particular endpoint, the core stops transmitting data on the endpoint, irrespective of data availability in the endpoints transmit FIFO. Nonisochronous IN tokens receive a NAK handshake reply Isochronous IN tokens receive a zero-data-length packet reply The core asserts the INEPNE (IN endpoint NAK effective) interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx in response to the SNAK bit in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx. Once this interrupt is seen by the application, the application can assume that the endpoint is in IN NAK mode. This interrupt can be cleared by the application by setting the CNAK bit in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx.

Internal data flow: 1.

2. 3. 4.

Application programming sequence:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1302/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) 1.

RM0090

To stop transmitting any data on a particular IN endpoint, the application must set the IN NAK bit. To set this bit, the following field must be programmed. SNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx Wait for assertion of the INEPNE interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx. This interrupt indicates that the core has stopped transmitting data on the endpoint. The core can transmit valid IN data on the endpoint after the application has set the NAK bit, but before the assertion of the NAK Effective interrupt. The application can mask this interrupt temporarily by writing to the INEPNEM bit in DIEPMSK. INEPNEM = 0 in DIEPMSK To exit Endpoint NAK mode, the application must clear the NAK status bit (NAKSTS) in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx. This also clears the INEPNE interrupt (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx). CNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx INEPNEM = 1 in DIEPMSK If the application masked this interrupt earlier, it must be unmasked as follows: IN endpoint disable

2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

Use the following sequence to disable a specific IN endpoint that has been previously enabled. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. The application must stop writing data on the AHB for the IN endpoint to be disabled. The application must set the endpoint in NAK mode. SNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx Wait for the INEPNE interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx. Set the following bits in the OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx register for the endpoint that must be disabled. 5. EPDIS = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx SNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx

Assertion of the EPDISD interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx indicates that the core has completely disabled the specified endpoint. Along with the assertion of the interrupt, the core also clears the following bits: EPENA = 0 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx EPDIS = 0 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx

6. 7.

The application must read the OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx register for the periodic IN EP, to calculate how much data on the endpoint were transmitted on the USB. The application must flush the data in the Endpoint transmit FIFO, by setting the following fields in the OTG_HS_GRSTCTL register: TXFNUM (in OTG_HS_GRSTCTL) = Endpoint transmit FIFO number TXFFLSH in (OTG_HS_GRSTCTL) = 1

The application must poll the OTG_HS_GRSTCTL register, until the TXFFLSH bit is cleared by the core, which indicates the end of flush operation. To transmit new data on this endpoint, the application can re-enable the endpoint at a later point.

Generic nonperiodic IN data transfers

Application requirements:

1303/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 1. 2.

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Before setting up an IN transfer, the application must ensure that all data to be transmitted as part of the IN transfer are part of a single buffer. For IN transfers, the Transfer Size field in the Endpoint Transfer Size register denotes a payload that constitutes multiple maximum-packet-size packets and a single short packet. This short packet is transmitted at the end of the transfer. To transmit a few maximum-packet-size packets and a short packet at the end of the transfer: Transfer size[EPNUM] = x MPSIZ[EPNUM] + sp If (sp > 0), then packet count[EPNUM] = x + 1. Otherwise, packet count[EPNUM] = x To transmit a single zero-length data packet: Transfer size[EPNUM] = 0 Packet count[EPNUM] = 1 To transmit a few maximum-packet-size packets and a zero-length data packet at the end of the transfer, the application must split the transfer into two parts. The first sends maximum-packet-size data packets and the second sends the zerolength data packet alone. First transfer: transfer size[EPNUM] = x MPSIZ[epnum]; packet count = n; Second transfer: transfer size[EPNUM] = 0; packet count = 1; 3. Once an endpoint is enabled for data transfers, the core updates the Transfer size register. At the end of the IN transfer, the application must read the Transfer size register to determine how much data posted in the transmit FIFO have already been sent on the USB. Data fetched into transmit FIFO = Application-programmed initial transfer size coreupdated final transfer size Data transmitted on USB = (application-programmed initial packet count Core updated final packet count) MPSIZ[EPNUM] Data yet to be transmitted on USB = (Application-programmed initial transfer size data transmitted on USB)

4.

Internal data flow: 1. 2. 3. The application must set the transfer size and packet count fields in the endpointspecific registers and enable the endpoint to transmit the data. The application must also write the required data to the transmit FIFO for the endpoint. Every time a packet is written into the transmit FIFO by the application, the transfer size for that endpoint is decremented by the packet size. The data is fetched from the memory by the application, until the transfer size for the endpoint becomes 0. After writing the data into the FIFO, the number of packets in FIFO count is incremented (this is a 3-bit count, internally maintained by the core for each IN endpoint transmit FIFO. The maximum number of packets maintained by the core at any time in an IN endpoint FIFO is eight). For zero-length packets, a separate flag is set for each FIFO, without any data in the FIFO. Once the data are written to the transmit FIFO, the core reads them out upon receiving an IN token. For every nonisochronous IN data packet transmitted with an ACK

4.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1304/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

handshake, the packet count for the endpoint is decremented by one, until the packet count is zero. The packet count is not decremented on a timeout. 5. 6. For zero length packets (indicated by an internal zero length flag), the core sends out a zero-length packet for the IN token and decrements the packet count field. If there are no data in the FIFO for a received IN token and the packet count field for that endpoint is zero, the core generates an IN token received when TxFIFO is empty (ITTXFE) Interrupt for the endpoint, provided that the endpoint NAK bit is not set. The core responds with a NAK handshake for nonisochronous endpoints on the USB. The core internally rewinds the FIFO pointers and no timeout interrupt is generated. When the transfer size is 0 and the packet count is 0, the transfer complete (XFRC) interrupt for the endpoint is generated and the endpoint enable is cleared. Program the OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx register with the transfer size and corresponding packet count. Program the OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics and set the CNAK and EPENA (Endpoint Enable) bits. When transmitting nonzero length data packet, the application must poll the OTG_HS_DTXFSTSx register (where x is the FIFO number associated with that endpoint) to determine whether there is enough space in the data FIFO. The application can optionally use TXFE (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) before writing the data. Generic periodic IN data transfers

7. 8.

Application programming sequence: 1. 2. 3.

This section describes a typical periodic IN data transfer. Application requirements: 1. Application requirements 1, 2, 3, and 4 of Generic nonperiodic IN data transfers on page 1303 also apply to periodic IN data transfers, except for a slight modification of requirement 2. The application can only transmit multiples of maximum-packet-size data packets or multiples of maximum-packet-size packets, plus a short packet at the end. To

1305/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) transmit a few maximum-packet-size packets and a short packet at the end of the transfer, the following conditions must be met: transfer size[EPNUM] = x MPSIZ[EPNUM] + sp (where x is an integer 0, and 0 sp < MPSIZ[EPNUM]) If (sp > 0), packet count[EPNUM] = x + 1 Otherwise, packet count[EPNUM] = x; MCNT[EPNUM] = packet count[EPNUM] The application cannot transmit a zero-length data packet at the end of a transfer. It can transmit a single zero-length data packet by itself. To transmit a single zerolength data packet: transfer size[EPNUM] = 0 packet count[EPNUM] = 1 MCNT[EPNUM] = packet count[EPNUM] 2. The application can only schedule data transfers one frame at a time. 3. (MCNT 1) MPSIZ XFERSIZ MCNT MPSIZ PKTCNT = MCNT (in OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx) If XFERSIZ < MCNT MPSIZ, the last data packet of the transfer is a short packet. Note that: MCNT is in OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx, MPSIZ is in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx, PKTCNT is in OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx and XFERSIZ is in OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx

The complete data to be transmitted in the frame must be written into the transmit FIFO by the application, before the IN token is received. Even when 1 DWORD of the data to be transmitted per frame is missing in the transmit FIFO when the IN token is received, the core behaves as when the FIFO is empty. When the transmit FIFO is empty: A zero data length packet would be transmitted on the USB for isochronous IN endpoints A NAK handshake would be transmitted on the USB for interrupt IN endpoints

4.

For a high-bandwidth IN endpoint with three packets in a frame, the application can program the endpoint FIFO size to be 2 max_pkt_size and have the third packet loaded in after the first packet has been transmitted on the USB. The application must set the transfer size and packet count fields in the endpointspecific registers and enable the endpoint to transmit the data. The application must also write the required data to the associated transmit FIFO for the endpoint. Every time the application writes a packet to the transmit FIFO, the transfer size for that endpoint is decremented by the packet size. The data are fetched from application memory until the transfer size for the endpoint becomes 0. When an IN token is received for a periodic endpoint, the core transmits the data in the FIFO, if available. If the complete data payload (complete packet, in dedicated FIFO mode) for the frame is not present in the FIFO, then the core generates an IN token received when TxFIFO empty interrupt for the endpoint. A zero-length data packet is transmitted on the USB for isochronous IN endpoints A NAK handshake is transmitted on the USB for interrupt IN endpoints

Internal data flow: 1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

The packet count for the endpoint is decremented by 1 under the following conditions:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1306/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) 6.

RM0090

For isochronous endpoints, when a zero- or nonzero-length data packet is transmitted For interrupt endpoints, when an ACK handshake is transmitted When the transfer size and packet count are both 0, the transfer completed interrupt for the endpoint is generated and the endpoint enable is cleared.

At the Periodic frame Interval (controlled by PFIVL in OTG_HS_DCFG), when the core finds nonempty any of the isochronous IN endpoint FIFOs scheduled for the current frame nonempty, the core generates an IISOIXFR interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS. Program the OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx register with the endpoint characteristics and set the CNAK and EPENA bits. Write the data to be transmitted in the next frame to the transmit FIFO. Asserting the ITTXFE interrupt (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) indicates that the application has not yet written all data to be transmitted to the transmit FIFO. If the interrupt endpoint is already enabled when this interrupt is detected, ignore the interrupt. If it is not enabled, enable the endpoint so that the data can be transmitted on the next IN token attempt. Asserting the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) with no ITTXFE interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx indicates the successful completion of an isochronous IN transfer. A read to the OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx register must give transfer size = 0 and packet count = 0, indicating all data were transmitted on the USB. Asserting the XFRC interrupt (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx), with or without the ITTXFE interrupt (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx), indicates the successful completion of an interrupt IN transfer. A read to the OTG_HS_DIEPTSIZx register must give transfer size = 0 and packet count = 0, indicating all data were transmitted on the USB. Asserting the incomplete isochronous IN transfer (IISOIXFR) interrupt in OTG_HS_GINTSTS with none of the aforementioned interrupts indicates the core did not receive at least 1 periodic IN token in the current frame. Incomplete isochronous IN data transfers

Application programming sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

This section describes what the application must do on an incomplete isochronous IN data transfer. Internal data flow: 1. An isochronous IN transfer is treated as incomplete in one of the following conditions: a) The core receives a corrupted isochronous IN token on at least one isochronous IN endpoint. In this case, the application detects an incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). The application is slow to write the complete data payload to the transmit FIFO and an IN token is received before the complete data payload is written to the FIFO. In this case, the application detects an IN token received when TxFIFO empty interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx. The application can ignore this interrupt, as it eventually results in an incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) at the end of periodic frame. The core transmits a zero-length data packet on the USB in response to the received IN token.

b)

1307/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 2. 3. 4.

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) The application must stop writing the data payload to the transmit FIFO as soon as possible. The application must set the NAK bit and the disable bit for the endpoint. The core disables the endpoint, clears the disable bit, and asserts the Endpoint Disable interrupt for the endpoint. The application can ignore the IN token received when TxFIFO empty interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx on any isochronous IN endpoint, as it eventually results in an incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS). Assertion of the incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (in OTG_HS_GINTSTS) indicates an incomplete isochronous IN transfer on at least one of the isochronous IN endpoints. The application must read the Endpoint Control register for all isochronous IN endpoints to detect endpoints with incomplete IN data transfers. The application must stop writing data to the Periodic Transmit FIFOs associated with these endpoints on the AHB. Program the following fields in the OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx register to disable the endpoint: 6. SNAK = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx EPDIS = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx

Application programming sequence 1.

2.

3. 4. 5.

The assertion of the Endpoint Disabled interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx indicates that the core has disabled the endpoint. At this point, the application must flush the data in the associated transmit FIFO or overwrite the existing data in the FIFO by enabling the endpoint for a new transfer in the next micro-frame. To flush the data, the application must use the OTG_HS_GRSTCTL register.

Stalling nonisochronous IN endpoints

This section describes how the application can stall a nonisochronous endpoint. Application programming sequence: 1. 2. Disable the IN endpoint to be stalled. Set the STALL bit as well. EPDIS = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx, when the endpoint is already enabled 3. 4. STALL = 1 in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx The STALL bit always takes precedence over the NAK bit

Assertion of the Endpoint Disabled interrupt (in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx) indicates to the application that the core has disabled the specified endpoint. The application must flush the nonperiodic or periodic transmit FIFO, depending on the endpoint type. In case of a nonperiodic endpoint, the application must re-enable the other nonperiodic endpoints that do not need to be stalled, to transmit data. Whenever the application is ready to end the STALL handshake for the endpoint, the STALL bit must be cleared in OTG_HS_DIEPCTLx. If the application sets or clears a STALL bit for an endpoint due to a SetFeature.Endpoint Halt command or ClearFeature.Endpoint Halt command, the STALL bit must be set or cleared before the application sets up the Status stage transfer on the control endpoint.

5. 6.

Special case: stalling the control OUT endpoint

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1308/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

The core must stall IN/OUT tokens if, during the data stage of a control transfer, the host sends more IN/OUT tokens than are specified in the SETUP packet. In this case, the application must enable the ITTXFE interrupt in OTG_HS_DIEPINTx and the OTEPDIS interrupt in OTG_HS_DOEPINTx during the data stage of the control transfer, after the core has transferred the amount of data specified in the SETUP packet. Then, when the application receives this interrupt, it must set the STALL bit in the corresponding endpoint control register, and clear this interrupt.

31.13.8

Worst case response time

When the OTG_HS controller acts as a device, there is a worst case response time for any tokens that follow an isochronous OUT. This worst case response time depends on the AHB clock frequency. The core registers are in the AHB domain, and the core does not accept another token before updating these register values. The worst case is for any token following an isochronous OUT, because for an isochronous transaction, there is no handshake and the next token could come sooner. This worst case value is 7 PHY clocks when the AHB clock is the same as the PHY clock. When the AHB clock is faster, this value is smaller. If this worst case condition occurs, the core responds to bulk/interrupt tokens with a NAK and drops isochronous and SETUP tokens. The host interprets this as a timeout condition for SETUP and retries the SETUP packet. For isochronous transfers, the Incomplete isochronous IN transfer interrupt (IISOIXFR) and Incomplete isochronous OUT transfer interrupt (IISOOXFR) inform the application that isochronous IN/OUT packets were dropped.

Choosing the value of TRDT in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG

The value in TRDT (OTG_HS_GUSBCFG) is the time it takes for the MAC, in terms of PHY clocks after it has received an IN token, to get the FIFO status, and thus the first data from the PFC block. This time involves the synchronization delay between the PHY and AHB clocks. The worst case delay for this is when the AHB clock is the same as the PHY clock. In this case, the delay is 5 clocks. Once the MAC receives an IN token, this information (token received) is synchronized to the AHB clock by the PFC (the PFC runs on the AHB clock). The PFC then reads the data from the SPRAM and writes them into the dual clock source buffer. The MAC then reads the data out of the source buffer (4 deep). If the AHB is running at a higher frequency than the PHY, the application can use a smaller value for TRDT (in OTG_HS_GUSBCFG). Figure 398 has the following signals:

tkn_rcvd: Token received information from MAC to PFC dynced_tkn_rcvd: Doubled sync tkn_rcvd, from PCLK to HCLK domain spr_read: Read to SPRAM spr_addr: Address to SPRAM spr_rdata: Read data from SPRAM srcbuf_push: Push to the source buffer srcbuf_rdata: Read data from the source buffer. Data seen by MAC

1309/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) The application can use the following formula to calculate the value of TRDT: 4 AHB clock + 1 PHY clock = (2 clock sync + 1 clock memory address + 1 clock memory data from sync RAM) + (1 PHY clock (next PHY clock MAC can sample the 2 clock FIFO outputs) Figure 398. TRDT max timing case
0ns 50ns 100ns 150ns 200ns

1 HCLK

PCLK

tkn_rcvd

dsynced_tkn_rcvd

spr_read

spr_addr

A1

spr_rdata

D1

srcbuf_push

srcbuf_rdata

D1

5 Clocks
ai15680

31.13.9

OTG programming model

The OTG_HS controller is an OTG device supporting HNP and SRP. When the core is connected to an A plug, it is referred to as an A-device. When the core is connected to a B plug it is referred to as a B-device. In host mode, the OTG_HS controller turns off VBUS to conserve power. SRP is a method by which the B-device signals the A-device to turn on VBUS power. A device must perform both data-line pulsing and VBUS pulsing, but a host can detect either data-line pulsing or VBUS pulsing for SRP. HNP is a method by which the Bdevice negotiates and switches to host role. In Negotiated mode after HNP, the B-device suspends the bus and reverts to the device role.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1310/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

A-device session request protocol

The application must set the SRP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register. This enables the OTG_HS controller to detect SRP as an A-device. Figure 399. A-device SRP
Suspend DRV_VBUS 1 2 VBUS_VALID 5 6

A_VALID 4 Data line pulsing

VBUS pulsing 7 Connect

OTG_HS_FS_DP

OTG_HS_FS_DM

Low
ai15681b

1. DRV_VBUS = VBUS drive signal to the PHY VBUS_VALID = VBUS valid signal from PHY A_VALID = A-device VBUS level signal to PHY DP = Data plus line DM = Data minus line

1.

To save power, the application suspends and turns off port power when the bus is idle by writing the port suspend and port power bits in the host port control and status register. PHY indicates port power off by deasserting the VBUS_VALID signal. The device must detect SE0 for at least 2 ms to start SRP when VBUS power is off. To initiate SRP, the device turns on its data line pull-up resistor for 5 to 10 ms. The OTG_HS controller detects data-line pulsing. The device drives VBUS above the A-device session valid (2.0 V minimum) for VBUS pulsing. The OTG_HS controller interrupts the application on detecting SRP. The Session request detected bit is set in Global interrupt status register (SRQINT set in OTG_HS_GINTSTS).

2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

The application must service the Session request detected interrupt and turn on the port power bit by writing the port power bit in the host port control and status register. The PHY indicates port power-on by asserting the VBUS_VALID signal. When the USB is powered, the device connects, completing the SRP process.

7.

1311/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

B-device session request protocol

The application must set the SRP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register. This enables the OTG_HS controller to initiate SRP as a B-device. SRP is a means by which the OTG_HS controller can request a new session from the host. Figure 400. B-device SRP
Suspend VBUS_VALID 1 6

B_VALID

2 3

DISCHRG_VBUS 4 SESS_END 5 Data line pulsing OTG_HS_FS_DP 8 Connect

OTG_HS_FS_DM

Low 7 VBUS pulsing

ai1568b2

CHRG_VBUS

1. VBUS_VALID = VBUS valid signal from PHY B_VALID = B-device valid session to PHY DISCHRG_VBUS = discharge signal to PHY SESS_END = session end signal to PHY CHRG_VBUS = charge VBUS signal to PHY DP = Data plus line DM = Data minus line

1.

To save power, the host suspends and turns off port power when the bus is idle. The OTG_HS controller sets the early suspend bit in the Core interrupt register after 3 ms of bus idleness. Following this, the OTG_HS controller sets the USB suspend bit in the Core interrupt register. The OTG_HS controller informs the PHY to discharge VBUS.

2.

The PHY indicates the sessions end to the device. This is the initial condition for SRP. The OTG_HS controller requires 2 ms of SE0 before initiating SRP. For a USB 1.1 full-speed serial transceiver, the application must wait until VBUS discharges to 0.2 V after BSVLD (in OTG_HS_GOTGCTL) is deasserted. This

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1312/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS)

RM0090

discharge time can be obtained from the transceiver vendor and varies from one transceiver to another. 3. 4. The USB OTG core informs the PHY to speed up VBUS discharge. The application initiates SRP by writing the session request bit in the OTG Control and status register. The OTG_HS controller perform data-line pulsing followed by VBUS pulsing. The host detects SRP from either the data-line or VBUS pulsing, and turns on VBUS. The PHY indicates VBUS power-on to the device. The OTG_HS controller performs VBUS pulsing. The host starts a new session by turning on VBUS, indicating SRP success. The OTG_HS controller interrupts the application by setting the session request success status change bit in the OTG interrupt status register. The application reads the session request success bit in the OTG control and status register. 7. When the USB is powered, the OTG_HS controller connects, completing the SRP process.

5. 6.

A-device host negotiation protocol

HNP switches the USB host role from the A-device to the B-device. The application must set the HNP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register to enable the OTG_HS controller to perform HNP as an A-device. Figure 401. A-device HNP
1 OTG core Host Suspend 2 DP 3 4 5 Reset Device 6 Traffic 7 8 Connect Host

DM

Traffic

DPPULLDOWN

DMPULLDOWN
ai15683b

1. DPPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DP line inside the PHY. DMPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DM line inside the PHY.

1.

The OTG_HS controller sends the B-device a SetFeature b_hnp_enable descriptor to enable HNP support. The B-devices ACK response indicates that the B-device supports HNP. The application must set host Set HNP Enable bit in the OTG Control

1313/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) and status register to indicate to the OTG_HS controller that the B-device supports HNP. 2. 3. When it has finished using the bus, the application suspends by writing the Port suspend bit in the host port control and status register. When the B-device observes a USB suspend, it disconnects, indicating the initial condition for HNP. The B-device initiates HNP only when it must switch to the host role; otherwise, the bus continues to be suspended. The OTG_HS controller sets the host negotiation detected interrupt in the OTG interrupt status register, indicating the start of HNP. The OTG_HS controller deasserts the DM pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate a device role. The PHY enables the OTG_HS_DP pull-up resistor to indicate a connect for B-device. The application must read the current mode bit in the OTG Control and status register to determine peripheral mode operation. 4. 5. The B-device detects the connection, issues a USB reset, and enumerates the OTG_HS controller for data traffic. The B-device continues the host role, initiating traffic, and suspends the bus when done. The OTG_HS controller sets the early suspend bit in the Core interrupt register after 3 ms of bus idleness. Following this, the OTG_HS controller sets the USB Suspend bit in the Core interrupt register. 6. In Negotiated mode, the OTG_HS controller detects the suspend, disconnects, and switches back to the host role. The OTG_HS controller asserts the DM pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate its assumption of the host role. The OTG_HS controller sets the Connector ID status change interrupt in the OTG Interrupt Status register. The application must read the connector ID status in the OTG Control and Status register to determine the OTG_HS controller operation as an Adevice. This indicates the completion of HNP to the application. The application must read the Current mode bit in the OTG control and status register to determine host mode operation. The B-device connects, completing the HNP process.

7.

8.

B-device host negotiation protocol

HNP switches the USB host role from B-device to A-device. The application must set the HNP-capable bit in the Core USB configuration register to enable the OTG_HS controller to perform HNP as a B-device.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1314/1422

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) Figure 402. B-device HNP

1 OTG core Device Suspend 2 DP 3 4 5 Reset Host 6 Traffic 7 8 Connect Device

RM0090

DM

Traffic

DPPULLDOWN

DMPULLDOWN
ai15684b

1. DPPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DP line inside the PHY. DMPULLDOWN = signal from core to PHY to enable/disable the pull-down on the DM line inside the PHY.

1.

The A-device sends the SetFeature b_hnp_enable descriptor to enable HNP support. The OTG_HS controllers ACK response indicates that it supports HNP. The application must set the Device HNP enable bit in the OTG Control and status register to indicate HNP support. The application sets the HNP request bit in the OTG Control and status register to indicate to the OTG_HS controller to initiate HNP.

2.

When it has finished using the bus, the A-device suspends by writing the Port suspend bit in the host port control and status register. The OTG_HS controller sets the Early suspend bit in the Core interrupt register after 3 ms of bus idleness. Following this, the OTG_HS controller sets the USB suspend bit in the Core interrupt register. The OTG_HS controller disconnects and the A-device detects SE0 on the bus, indicating HNP. The OTG_HS controller asserts the DP pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate its assumption of the host role. The A-device responds by activating its OTG_HS_DP pull-up resistor within 3 ms of detecting SE0. The OTG_HS controller detects this as a connect. The OTG_HS controller sets the host negotiation success status change interrupt in the OTG Interrupt status register, indicating the HNP status. The application must read the host negotiation success bit in the OTG Control and status register to determine

1315/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS) host negotiation success. The application must read the current Mode bit in the Core interrupt register (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) to determine host mode operation. 3. 4. The application sets the reset bit (PRST in OTG_HS_HPRT) and the OTG_HS controller issues a USB reset and enumerates the A-device for data traffic. The OTG_HS controller continues the host role of initiating traffic, and when done, suspends the bus by writing the Port suspend bit in the host port control and status register. In Negotiated mode, when the A-device detects a suspend, it disconnects and switches back to the host role. The OTG_HS controller deasserts the DP pull down and DM pull down in the PHY to indicate the assumption of the device role. The application must read the current mode bit in the Core interrupt (OTG_HS_GINTSTS) register to determine the host mode operation. The OTG_HS controller connects, completing the HNP process.

5.

6. 7.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1316/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

32

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family devices, unless otherwise specified.

32.1

FSMC main features

The FSMC block is able to interface with synchronous and asynchronous memories and 16bit PC memory cards. Its main purpose is to:

Translate the AHB transactions into the appropriate external device protocol Meet the access timing requirements of the external devices

All external memories share the addresses, data and control signals with the controller. Each external device is accessed by means of a unique chip select. The FSMC performs only one access at a time to an external device. The FSMC has the following main features:

Interfaces with static memory-mapped devices including: Static random access memory (SRAM) Read-only memory (ROM) NOR Flash memory/OneNAND Flash memory PSRAM (4 memory banks)

Two banks of NAND Flash with ECC hardware that checks up to 8 Kbytes of data 16-bit PC Card compatible devices Supports burst mode access to synchronous devices (NOR Flash and PSRAM) 8- or 16-bit wide databus Independent chip select control for each memory bank Independent configuration for each memory bank Programmable timings to support a wide range of devices, in particular: Programmable wait states (up to 15) Programmable bus turnaround cycles (up to 15) Programmable output enable and write enable delays (up to 15) Independent read and write timings and protocol, so as to support the widest variety of memories and timings

Write enable and byte lane select outputs for use with PSRAM and SRAM devices Translation of 32-bit wide AHB transactions into consecutive 16-bit or 8-bit accesses to external 16-bit or 8-bit devices A Write FIFO, 2-word long (16-word long for STM32F42x and STM32F43x), each word is 32 bits wide, only stores data and not the address. Therefore, this FIFO only buffers AHB write burst transactions. This makes it possible to write to slow memories and free the AHB quickly for other operations. Only one burst at a time is buffered: if a new AHB burst or single transaction occurs while an operation is in progress, the FIFO is drained. The FSMC will insert wait states until the current memory access is complete). External asynchronous wait control

1317/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) The FSMC registers that define the external device type and associated characteristics are usually set at boot time and do not change until the next reset or power-up. However, it is possible to change the settings at any time.

32.2

Block diagram
The FSMC consists of four main blocks:

The AHB interface (including the FSMC configuration registers) The NOR Flash/PSRAM controller The NAND Flash/PC Card controller The external device interface

The block diagram is shown in Figure 403. Figure 403. FSMC block diagram
FSMC interrupt to NVIC

From clock controller HCLK

NOR/PSRAM memory controller

FSMC_NE[4:1] FSMC_NL(or NADV) FSMC_NBL[1:0] FSMC_CLK

NOR/PSRAM signals

Configuration registers

FSMC_A[25:0] FSMC_D[15:0] FSMC_NOE FSMC_NWE FSMC_NWAIT

AHB bus

Shared signals

FSMC_NCE[3:2] FSMC_INT[3:2] NAND/PC Card memory controller FSMC_INTR FSMC_NCE4_1 FSMC_NCE4_2 FSMC_NIORD FSMC_NIOWR FSMC_NREG FSMC_CD

NAND signals

PC Card signals

ai15591b

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1318/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

32.3

AHB interface
The AHB slave interface enables internal CPUs and other bus master peripherals to access the external static memories. AHB transactions are translated into the external device protocol. In particular, if the selected external memory is 16 or 8 bits wide, 32-bit wide transactions on the AHB are split into consecutive 16- or 8-bit accesses. The Chip Select toggles for each access. The FSMC generates an AHB error in the following conditions:

When reading or writing to an FSMC bank which is not enabled When reading or writing to the NOR Flash bank while the FACCEN bit is reset in the FSMC_BCRx register. When reading or writing to the PC Card banks while the input pin FSMC_CD (Card Presence Detection) is low.

The effect of this AHB error depends on the AHB master which has attempted the R/W access:

If it is the Cortex-M4F CPU, a hard fault interrupt is generated If is a DMA, a DMA transfer error is generated and the corresponding DMA channel is automatically disabled.

The AHB clock (HCLK) is the reference clock for the FSMC.

32.3.1

Supported memories and transactions

General transaction rules
The requested AHB transaction data size can be 8-, 16- or 32-bit wide whereas the accessed external device has a fixed data width. This may lead to inconsistent transfers. Therefore, some simple transaction rules must be followed:

AHB transaction size and memory data size are equal There is no issue in this case. AHB transaction size is greater than the memory size In this case, the FSMC splits the AHB transaction into smaller consecutive memory accesses in order to meet the external data width. AHB transaction size is smaller than the memory size Asynchronous transfers may or not be consistent depending on the type of external device. Asynchronous accesses to devices that have the byte select feature (SRAM, ROM, PSRAM). a) FSMC allows write transactions accessing the right data through its byte lanes NBL[1:0] b) Read transactions are allowed. All memory bytes are read and the useless ones are discarded. The NBL[1:0] are kept low during read transactions. Asynchronous accesses to devices that do not have the byte select feature (NOR and NAND Flash 16-bit). This situation occurs when a byte access is requested to a 16-bit wide Flash

1319/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) memory. Clearly, the device cannot be accessed in byte mode (only 16-bit words can be read from/written to the Flash memory) therefore: a) b) Write transactions are not allowed Read transactions are allowed. All memory bytes are read and the useless ones are discarded. The NBL[1:0] are set to 0 during read transactions.

Configuration registers
The FSMC can be configured using a register set. See Section 32.5.6, for a detailed description of the NOR Flash/PSRAM control registers. See Section 32.6.8, for a detailed description of the NAND Flash/PC Card registers.

32.4

External device address mapping

From the FSMC point of view, the external memory is divided into 4 fixed-size banks of 256 Mbytes each (Refer to Figure 404):

Bank 1 used to address up to 4 NOR Flash or PSRAM memory devices. This bank is split into 4 NOR/PSRAM regions with 4 dedicated Chip Select. Banks 2 and 3 used to address NAND Flash devices (1 device per bank) Bank 4 used to address a PC Card device

For each bank the type of memory to be used is user-defined in the Configuration register. Figure 404. FSMC memory banks
Address Banks Supported memory type

6000 0000h Bank 1 4 64 MB 6FF F FFF Fh 7000 0000h Bank 2 4 64 MB 7FF F FFF Fh NAND Flash 8000 0000h Bank 3 4 64 MB 8FF F FFF Fh 9000 0000h Bank 4 PC Card 4 64 MB 9FF F FFF Fh
ai14719

NOR / PSRAM

32.4.1

NOR/PSRAM address mapping

HADDR[27:26] bits are used to select one of the four memory banks as shown in Table 185.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1320/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 185. NOR/PSRAM bank selection
HADDR[27:26](1) 00 01 10 11 Selected bank Bank 1 NOR/PSRAM 1 Bank 1 NOR/PSRAM 2 Bank 1 NOR/PSRAM 3 Bank 1 NOR/PSRAM 4

RM0090

1. HADDR are internal AHB address lines that are translated to external memory.

HADDR[25:0] contain the external memory address. Since HADDR is a byte address whereas the memory is addressed in words, the address actually issued to the memory varies according to the memory data width, as shown in the following table. Table 186. External memory address
Memory width(1) 8-bit 16-bit Data address issued to the memory HADDR[25:0] HADDR[25:1] >> 1 Maximum memory capacity (bits) 64 Mbytes x 8 = 512 Mbit 64 Mbytes/2 x 16 = 512 Mbit

1. In case of a 16-bit external memory width, the FSMC will internally use HADDR[25:1] to generate the address for external memory FSMC_A[24:0]. Whatever the external memory width (16-bit or 8-bit), FSMC_A[0] should be connected to external memory address A[0].

Wrap support for NOR Flash/PSRAM

Wrap burst mode for synchronous memories is not supported. The memories must be configured in linear burst mode of undefined length.

32.4.2

NAND/PC Card address mapping

In this case, three banks are available, each of them divided into memory spaces as indicated in Table 187. Table 187. Memory mapping and timing registers
Start address 0x9C00 0000 0x9800 0000 0x9000 0000 0x8800 0000 0x8000 0000 0x7800 0000 0x7000 0000 End address 0x9FFF FFFF 0x9BFF FFFF Bank 4 - PC card 0x93FF FFFF 0x8BFF FFFF Bank 3 - NAND Flash 0x83FF FFFF 0x7BFF FFFF Bank 2- NAND Flash 0x73FF FFFF Common FSMC_PMEM2 (0x68) Common Attribute FSMC_PMEM3 (0x88) FSMC_PATT2 (0x6C) FSMC Bank Memory space I/O Attribute Common Attribute Timing register FSMC_PIO4 (0xB0) FSMC_PATT4 (0xAC) FSMC_PMEM4 (0xA8) FSMC_PATT3 (0x8C)

1321/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) For NAND Flash memory, the common and attribute memory spaces are subdivided into three sections (see in Table 188 below) located in the lower 256 Kbytes:

Data section (first 64 Kbytes in the common/attribute memory space) Command section (second 64 Kbytes in the common / attribute memory space) Address section (next 128 Kbytes in the common / attribute memory space)

Table 188. NAND bank selections

Section name Address section Command section Data section 1X 01 00 HADDR[17:16] Address range 0x020000-0x03FFFF 0x010000-0x01FFFF 0x000000-0x0FFFF

The application software uses the 3 sections to access the NAND Flash memory:

To send a command to NAND Flash memory: the software must write the command value to any memory location in the command section. To specify the NAND Flash address that must be read or written: the software must write the address value to any memory location in the address section. Since an address can be 4 or 5 bytes long (depending on the actual memory size), several consecutive writes to the address section are needed to specify the full address. To read or write data: the software reads or writes the data value from or to any memory location in the data section.

Since the NAND Flash memory automatically increments addresses, there is no need to increment the address of the data section to access consecutive memory locations.

32.5

NOR Flash/PSRAM controller

The FSMC generates the appropriate signal timings to drive the following types of memories:

Asynchronous SRAM and ROM 8-bit 16-bit 32-bit Asynchronous mode Burst mode Multiplexed or nonmultiplexed Asynchronous mode or burst mode Multiplexed or nonmultiplexed

PSRAM (Cellular RAM)

NOR Flash

The FSMC outputs a unique chip select signal NE[4:1] per bank. All the other signals (addresses, data and control) are shared.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1322/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

For synchronous accesses, the FSMC issues the clock (CLK) to the selected external device only during the read/write transactions. This clock is a submultiple of the HCLK clock. The size of each bank is fixed and equal to 64 Mbytes. Each bank is configured by means of dedicated registers (see Section 32.5.6). The programmable memory parameters include access timings (see Table 189) and support for wait management (for PSRAM and NOR Flash accessed in burst mode). Table 189. Programmable NOR/PSRAM access parameters
Parameter Address setup Address hold Data setup Bust turn Clock divide ratio Function Duration of the address setup phase Access mode Asynchronous Unit AHB clock cycle (HCLK) AHB clock cycle (HCLK) AHB clock cycle (HCLK) Min. 0 1 1 0 Max. 15 15 256 15

Duration of the address hold Asynchronous, phase muxed I/Os Duration of the data setup phase Duration of the bus turnaround phase Asynchronous

Asynchronous and AHB clock cycle synchronous read (HCLK) AHB clock cycle (HCLK) Memory clock cycle (CLK)

Number of AHB clock cycles (HCLK) to build one memory Synchronous clock cycle (CLK) Number of clock cycles to issue to the memory before the first data of the burst Synchronous

16

Data latency

17

32.5.1

External memory interface signals

Table 190, Table 191 and Table 192 list the signals that are typically used to interface NOR Flash, SRAM and PSRAM.

Note:

Prefix N. specifies the associated signal as active low.

NOR Flash, nonmultiplexed I/Os

Table 190. Nonmultipled I/O NOR Flash
FSMC signal name CLK A[25:0] D[15:0] NE[x] NOE NWE NL(=NADV) NWAIT I/O O O I/O O O O O I Function Clock (for synchronous burst) Address bus Bidirectional data bus Chip select, x = 1..4 Output enable Write enable Latch enable (this signal is called address valid, NADV, by some NOR Flash devices) NOR Flash wait input signal to the FSMC

1323/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) NOR Flash memories are addressed in 16-bit words. The maximum capacity is 512 Mbit (26 address lines).

NOR Flash, multiplexed I/Os

Table 191. Multiplexed I/O NOR Flash
FSMC signal name CLK A[25:16] AD[15:0] NE[x] NOE NWE NL(=NADV) NWAIT I/O O O I/O O O O O I Clock (for synchronous burst) Address bus 16-bit multiplexed, bidirectional address/data bus Chip select, x = 1..4 Output enable Write enable Latch enable (this signal is called address valid, NADV, by some NOR Flash devices) NOR Flash wait input signal to the FSMC Function

NOR-Flash memories are addressed in 16-bit words. The maximum capacity is 512 Mbit (26 address lines).

PSRAM/SRAM, nonmultiplexed I/Os

Table 192. Nonmultiplexed I/Os PSRAM/SRAM
FSMC signal name CLK A[25:0] D[15:0] NE[x] NOE NWE NL(= NADV) NWAIT NBL[1] NBL[0] I/O O O I/O O O O O I O O Function Clock (only for PSRAM synchronous burst) Address bus Data bidirectional bus Chip select, x = 1..4 (called NCE by PSRAM (Cellular RAM i.e. CRAM)) Output enable Write enable Address valid only for PSRAM input (memory signal name: NADV) PSRAM wait input signal to the FSMC Upper byte enable (memory signal name: NUB) Lowed byte enable (memory signal name: NLB)

PSRAM memories are addressed in 16-bit words. The maximum capacity is 512 Mbit (26 address lines).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1324/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

PSRAM, multiplexed I/Os

Table 193. Multiplexed I/O PSRAM
FSMC signal name CLK A[25:16] AD[15:0] NE[x] NOE NWE NL(= NADV) NWAIT NBL[1] NBL[0] I/O O O I/O O O O O I O O Clock (for synchronous burst) Address bus 16-bit multiplexed, bidirectional address/data bus Chip select, x = 1..4 (called NCE by PSRAM (Cellular RAM i.e. CRAM)) Output enable Write enable Address valid PSRAM input (memory signal name: NADV) PSRAM wait input signal to the FSMC Upper byte enable (memory signal name: NUB) Lowed byte enable (memory signal name: NLB) Function

PSRAM memories are addressed in 16-bit words. The maximum capacity is 512 Mbit (26 address lines).

32.5.2

Supported memories and transactions

Table 194 below displays an example of the supported devices, access modes and transactions when the memory data bus is 16-bit for NOR, PSRAM and SRAM. Transactions not allowed (or not supported) by the FSMC in this example appear in gray. Table 194. NOR Flash/PSRAM controller: example of supported memories and transactions
Device Mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous NOR Flash (muxed I/Os and nonmuxed Asynchronous I/Os) Asynchronous page Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous R/W R W R W R W R R R R AHB data size 8 8 16 16 32 32 8 16 32 Memory data size 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Allowed/ not allowed Y N Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Split into 2 FSMC accesses Split into 2 FSMC accesses Mode is not supported Comments

1325/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 194. NOR Flash/PSRAM controller: example of supported memories and transactions (continued)
Device Mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous PSRAM (multiplexed I/Os and nonmultiplexed I/Os) Asynchronous Asynchronous page Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous SRAM and ROM Asynchronous R/W R W R W R W R R R R W W R W R AHB data size 8 8 16 16 32 32 8 16 32 8 16/32 8 / 16 8 / 16 32 Memory data size 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Allowed/ not allowed Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Use of byte lanes NBL[1:0] Split into 2 FSMC accesses Split into 2 FSMC accesses. Use of byte lanes NBL[1:0] Use of byte lanes NBL[1:0] Split into 2 FSMC accesses Split into 2 FSMC accesses Mode is not supported Use of byte lanes NBL[1:0] Comments

Asynchronous

32

16

32.5.3

General timing rules

Signals synchronization

All controller output signals change on the rising edge of the internal clock (HCLK) In synchronous mode (read or write), all output signals change on the rising edge of HCLK. Whatever the CLKDIV value, all outputs change as follows: NOEL/NWEL/ NEL/NADVL/ NADVH /NBLL/ Address valid outputs change on the falling edge of FSMC_CLK clock. NOEH/ NWEH / NEH/ NOEH/NBLH/ Address invalid outputs change on the rising edge of FSMC_CLK clock.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1326/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

32.5.4

NOR Flash/PSRAM controller asynchronous transactions

Asynchronous static memories (NOR Flash memory, PSRAM, SRAM)

Signals are synchronized by the internal clock HCLK. This clock is not issued to the memory The FSMC always samples the data before de-asserting the chip select signal NE. This guarantees that the memory data-hold timing constraint is met (chip enable high to data transition, usually 0 ns min.) If the extended mode is enabled (EXTMOD bit is set in the FSMC_BCRx register), up to four extended modes (A, B, C and D) are available. It is possible to mix A, B, C and D modes for read and write operations. For example, read operation can be performed in mode A and write in mode B. If the extended mode is disabled (EXTMOD bit is reset in the FSMC_BCRx register), the FSMC can operate in Mode1 or Mode2 as follows: Mode 1 is the default mode when SRAM/CRAM memory type is selected (MTYP = 0x0 or 0x01 in the FSMC_BCRx register) Mode 2 is the default mode when NOR memory type is selected (MTYP = 0x10 in the FSMC_BCRx register).

Mode 1 - SRAM/PSRAM (CRAM)

Figure 405. Mode1 read accesses

Memory transaction A[25:0]

NBL[1:0]

NEx

NOE

NWE

High

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by memory DATAST HCLK cycles

ai15557

1. NBL[1:0] are driven low during read access.

1327/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 406. Mode1 write accesses

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NBL[1:0]

NEx

NOE 1HCLK NWE

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by FSMC (DATAST + 1) HCLK cycles

ai15558

The one HCLK cycle at the end of the write transaction helps guarantee the address and data hold time after the NWE rising edge. Due to the presence of this one HCLK cycle, the DATAST value must be greater than zero (DATAST > 0). Table 195. FSMC_BCRx bit fields
Bit number 31-20 19 18:16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASYNCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID 0x000 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x0 Set to 1 if the memory supports this feature. Otherwise keep at 0. 0x0 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x1 As needed 0x0 Meaningful only if bit 15 is 1 0x0 0x1 Dont care As needed Value to set

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1328/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 195. FSMC_BCRx bit fields (continued)
Bit number 3-2 1 0 Bit name MTYP MUXE MBKEN Value to set As needed, exclude 0x2 (NOR Flash) 0x0 0x1

RM0090

Table 196. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit number 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x0 Dont care Dont care Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses, DATAST HCLK cycles for read accesses). Dont care Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 0. Value to set

1329/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Mode A - SRAM/PSRAM (CRAM) OE toggling

Figure 407. ModeA read accesses
Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NBL[1:0]

NEx

NOE

NWE

High

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by memory DATAST HCLK cycles

ai15559

1. NBL[1:0] are driven low during read access.

Figure 408. ModeA write accesses

Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NBL[1:0]

NEx

NOE 1HCLK NWE

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by FSMC (DATAST + 1) HCLK cycles

ai15560

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1330/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

The differences compared with mode1 are the toggling of NOE and the independent read and write timings. Table 197. FSMC_BCRx bit fields
Bit number 31-20 19 18:16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 3-2 1 0 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASYNCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID MTYP MUXEN MBKEN 0x000 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x0 Set to 1 if the memory supports this feature. Otherwise keep at 0. 0x1 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x1 As needed 0x0 Meaningful only if bit 15 is 1 0x0 0x1 Dont care As needed As needed, exclude 0x2 (NOR Flash) 0x0 0x1 Value to set

Table 198. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit number 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x0 Dont care Dont care Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses, DATAST HCLK cycles for read accesses). Dont care Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 0. Value to set

1331/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 199. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields

Bit number 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x0 Dont care Dont care

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Value to set

Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses, Dont care Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 0.

Mode 2/B - NOR Flash

Figure 409. Mode2 and mode B read accesses
Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NADV

NEx

NOE

NWE

High

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by memory DATAST HCLK cycles

ai15561

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1332/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Figure 410. Mode2 write accesses
Memory transaction

RM0090

A[25:0]

NADV

NEx

NOE 1HCLK NWE

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by FSMC (DATAST + 1) HCLK cycles

ai15562

Figure 411. ModeB write accesses

Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NADV

NEx

NOE 1HCLK NWE

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by FSMC (DATAST + 1) HCLK cycles

ai15563

The differences with mode1 are the toggling of NWE and the independent read and write timings when extended mode is set (Mode B).

1333/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 200. FSMC_BCRx bit fields

Bit number 31-20 19 18:16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 3-2 1 0 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASYNCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID MTYP MUXEN MBKEN 0x000

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Value to set

0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x0 Set to 1 if the memory supports this feature. Otherwise keep at 0. 0x1 for mode B, 0x0 for mode 2 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x1 As needed 0x0 Meaningful only if bit 15 is 1 0x0 0x1 0x1 As needed 0x2 (NOR Flash memory) 0x0 0x1

Table 201. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit number 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x1 Dont care Dont care Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses, DATAST HCLK cycles for read accesses). Dont care Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 0. Value to set

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1334/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 202. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields
Bit number 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x1 Dont care Dont care Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Value to set

RM0090

Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses, Dont care Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 0.

Note:

The FSMC_BWTRx register is valid only if extended mode is set (mode B), otherwise all its content is dont care.

Mode C - NOR Flash - OE toggling

Figure 412. Mode C read accesses
Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NADV

NEx

NOE

NWE

High

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by memory DATAST HCLK cycles

ai15564

1335/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Figure 413. Mode C write accesses

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NADV

NEx

NOE 1HCLK NWE

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by FSMC (DATAST + 1) HCLK cycles

ai15565

The differences compared with mode1 are the toggling of NOE and the independent read and write timings. Table 203. FSMC_BCRx bit fields
Bit No. 31-20 19 18:16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 3-2 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASYNCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID MTYP 0x000 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x0 Set to 1 if the memory supports this feature. Otherwise keep at 0. 0x1 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x1 As needed 0x0 Meaningful only if bit 15 is 1 0x0 0x1 0x1 As needed 0x2 (NOR Flash memory) Value to set

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1336/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 203. FSMC_BCRx bit fields (continued)
Bit No. 1 0 Bit name MUXEN MBKEN 0x0 0x1 Value to set

RM0090

Table 204. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit number 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x2 0x0 0x0 Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses, DATAST HCLK cycles for read accesses). Dont care Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 0. Value to set

Table 205. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields

Bit number 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x2 Dont care Dont care Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses, Dont care Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 0. Value to set

1337/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Mode D - asynchronous access with extended address

Figure 414. Mode D read accesses
Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NADV

NEx

NOE

NWE

High

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by memory DATAST HCLK cycles

ai15566

ADDHLD HCLK cycles

Figure 415. Mode D write accesses

Memory transaction

A[25:0]

NADV

NEx

NOE 1HCLK NWE

D[15:0] ADDSET HCLK cycles

data driven by FSMC (DATAST+ 1) HCLK cycles

ai15567

ADDHLD HCLK cycles

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1338/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

The differences with mode1 are the toggling of NOE that goes on toggling after NADV changes and the independent read and write timings. Table 206. FSMC_BCRx bit fields
Bit No. 31-20 19 18:16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 3-2 1 0 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASYNCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID MTYP MUXEN MBKEN 0x000 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x0 Set to 1 if the memory supports this feature. Otherwise keep at 0. 0x1 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x1 As needed 0x0 Meaningful only if bit 15 is 1 0x0 0x1 Set according to memory support As needed As needed 0x0 0x1 Value to set

Table 207. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit No. 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x3 Dont care Dont care Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST HCLK cycles) in read. Duration of the middle phase of the read access (ADDHLD HCLK cycles) Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles) in read. Minimum value for ADDSET is 0. Value to set

1339/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 208. FSMC_BWTRx bit fields

Bit No. 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x3 0x0 0x0

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Value to set

Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST+1 HCLK cycles) for writer accesses Duration of the middle phase of the write access (ADDHLD HCLK cycles) Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET+1 HCLK cycles) for write accesses. Minimum value for ADDSET is 0.

Muxed mode - multiplexed asynchronous access to NOR Flash memory

Figure 416. Multiplexed read accesses
Memory transaction

A[25:16]

NADV

NEx

NOE

NWE

High

AD[15:0]

Lower address
ADDSET HCLK cycles ADDHLD HCLK cycles

data driven by memory

DATAST HCLK cycles

ai15568

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1340/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Figure 417. Multiplexed write accesses
Memory transaction

RM0090

A[25:16]

NADV

NEx

NOE 1HCLK NWE

AD[15:0]

Lower address ADDSET HCLK cycles ADDHLD HCLK cycles

data driven by FSMC (DATAST + 1) HCLK cycles

ai15569

The difference with mode D is the drive of the lower address byte(s) on the databus. Table 209. FSMC_BCRx bit fields
Bit No. 31-21 19 18:16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 3-2 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASYNCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID MTYP 0x000 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x0 Set to 1 if the memory supports this feature. Otherwise keep at 0. 0x0 0x0 (no effect on asynchronous mode) 0x1 As needed 0x0 Meaningful only if bit 15 is 1 0x0 0x1 0x1 As needed 0x2 (NOR Flash memory) Value to set

1341/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 209. FSMC_BCRx bit fields (continued)
Bit No. 1 0 Bit name MUXEN MBKEN 0x1 0x1 Value to set

Table 210. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit No. 31:30 29-28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x0 Dont care Dont care Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Duration of the second access phase (DATAST HCLK cycles for read accesses and DATAST+1 HCLK cycles for write accesses). Duration of the middle phase of the access (ADDHLD HCLK cycles). Duration of the first access phase (ADDSET HCLK cycles). Minimum value for ADDSET is 1. Value to set

WAIT management in asynchronous accesses

If the asynchronous memory asserts a WAIT signal to indicate that it is not yet ready to accept or to provide data, the ASYNCWAIT bit has to be set in FSMC_BCRx register. If the WAIT signal is active (high or low depending on the WAITPOL bit), the second access phase (Data setup phase) programmed by the DATAST bits, is extended until WAIT becomes inactive. Unlike the data setup phase, the first access phases (Address setup and Address hold phases), programmed by the ADDSET and ADDHLD bits, are not WAIT sensitive and so they are not prolonged. The data setup phase (DATAST in the FSMC_BTRx register) must be programmed so that WAIT can be detected 4 HCLK cycles before the end of memory transaction. The following cases must be considered:

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1342/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) 1. Memory asserts the WAIT signal aligned to NOE/NWE which toggles: DATAST ( 4 HCLK ) + max_wait_assertion_time 2. Memory asserts the WAIT signal aligned to NEx (or NOE/NWE not toggling): if max_wait_assertion_time > address_phase + hold_phase then

RM0090

DATAST ( 4 HCLK ) + ( max_wait_assertion_time address_phase hold_phase ) otherwise DATAST 4 HCLK where max_wait_assertion_time is the maximum time taken by the memory to assert the WAIT signal once NEx/NOE/NWE is low. Figure 418 and Figure 419 show the number of HCLK clock cycles that are added to the memory access after WAIT is released by the asynchronous memory (independently of the above cases). Figure 418. Asynchronous wait during a read access
Memory transaction

A[25:0] address phase NEx data setup phase

NWAIT

dont care

dont care

NOE

D[15:0]

data driven by memory 4HCLK

1. NWAIT polarity depends on WAITPOL bit setting in FSMC_BCRx register.

1343/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Figure 419. Asynchronous wait during a write access
Memory transaction A[25:0] address phase NEx data setup phase

NWAIT

dont care

dont care 1HCLK

NWE

D[15:0]

data driven by FSMC 3HCLK

ai15797c

1. NWAIT polarity depends on WAITPOL bit setting in FSMC_BCRx register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1344/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

32.5.5

Synchronous burst transactions

The memory clock, CLK, is a submultiple of HCLK according to the value of parameter CLKDIV. NOR Flash memories specify a minimum time from NADV assertion to CLK high. To meet this constraint, the FSMC does not issue the clock to the memory during the first internal clock cycle of the synchronous access (before NADV assertion). This guarantees that the rising edge of the memory clock occurs in the middle of the NADV low pulse.

Data latency versus NOR Flash latency

The data latency is the number of cycles to wait before sampling the data. The DATLAT value must be consistent with the latency value specified in the NOR Flash configuration register. The FSMC does not include the clock cycle when NADV is low in the data latency count. Caution: Some NOR Flash memories include the NADV Low cycle in the data latency count, so the exact relation between the NOR Flash latency and the FMSC DATLAT parameter can be either of:

NOR Flash latency = DATLAT + 2 NOR Flash latency = DATLAT + 3

Some recent memories assert NWAIT during the latency phase. In such cases DATLAT can be set to its minimum value. As a result, the FSMC samples the data and waits long enough to evaluate if the data are valid. Thus the FSMC detects when the memory exits latency and real data are taken. Other memories do not assert NWAIT during latency. In this case the latency must be set correctly for both the FSMC and the memory, otherwise invalid data are mistaken for good data, or valid data are lost in the initial phase of the memory access.

Single-burst transfer
When the selected bank is configured in synchronous burst mode, if an AHB single-burst transaction is requested, the FSMC performs a burst transaction of length 1 (if the AHB transfer is 16-bit), or length 2 (if the AHB transfer is 32-bit) and de-assert the chip select signal when the last data is strobed. Clearly, such a transfer is not the most efficient in terms of cycles (compared to an asynchronous read). Nevertheless, a random asynchronous access would first require to reprogram the memory access mode, which would altogether last longer.

Wait management
For synchronous burst NOR Flash, NWAIT is evaluated after the programmed latency period, (DATALAT+2) CLK clock cycles. If NWAIT is sensed active (low level when WAITPOL = 0, high level when WAITPOL = 1), wait states are inserted until NWAIT is sensed inactive (high level when WAITPOL = 0, low level when WAITPOL = 1). When NWAIT is inactive, the data is considered valid either immediately (bit WAITCFG = 1) or on the next clock edge (bit WAITCFG = 0).

1345/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) During wait-state insertion via the NWAIT signal, the controller continues to send clock pulses to the memory, keeping the chip select and output enable signals valid, and does not consider the data valid. There are two timing configurations for the NOR Flash NWAIT signal in burst mode:

Flash memory asserts the NWAIT signal one data cycle before the wait state (default after reset) Flash memory asserts the NWAIT signal during the wait state

These two NOR Flash wait state configurations are supported by the FSMC, individually for each chip select, thanks to the WAITCFG bit in the FSMC_BCRx registers (x = 0..3). Figure 420. Wait configurations
Memory transaction = burst of 4 half words HCLK

CLK A[25:16] addr[25:16]

NADV NWAIT (WAITCFG = 0) NWAIT (WAITCFG = 1) inserted wait state A/D[15:0] aaddr[15:0] data data data
ai15798b

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1346/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Figure 421. Synchronous multiplexed read mode - NOR, PSRAM (CRAM)
Memory transaction = burst of 4 half words HCLK

RM0090

CLK

A[25:16]

addr[25:16]

NEx

NOE

NWE

High

NADV

NWAIT (WAITCFG=1) (DATALAT + 2) CLK cycles A/D[15:0] Addr[15:0] 1 clock 1 clock cycle cycle data inserted wait state data data data

Data strobes

Data strobes
ai17723c

1. Byte lane outputs BL are not shown; for NOR access, they are held high, and, for PSRAM (CRAM) access, they are held low. 2. NWAIT polarity is set to 0.

Table 211. FSMC_BCRx bit fields

Bit No. 31-20 19 18-16 15 14 13 12 11 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASCYCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG 0x000 No effect on synchronous read 0x0 0x0 0x0 to be set to 1 if the memory supports this feature, to be kept at 0 otherwise. no effect on synchronous read to be set according to memory Value to set

1347/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 211. FSMC_BCRx bit fields (continued)
Bit No. 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 3-2 1 0 Bit name WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID MTYP MUXEN MBKEN 0x0 to be set according to memory 0x1 0x1 Set according to memory support (NOR Flash memory) As needed 0x1 or 0x2 As needed 0x1 Value to set

Table 212. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit No. 31:30 29:28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x0 Data latency 0x0 to get CLK = HCLK (not supported) 0x1 to get CLK = 2 HCLK .. Time between NEx high to NEx low (BUSTURN HCLK) Dont care Dont care Dont care Value to set

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1348/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Figure 422. Synchronous multiplexed write mode - PSRAM (CRAM)
Memory transaction = burst of 2 half words HCLK

RM0090

CLK

A[25:16]

addr[25:16]

NEx Hi-Z NOE

NWE

NADV

NWAIT (WAITCFG = 0) (DATALAT + 2) CLK cycles A/D[15:0] Addr[15:0] 1 clock 1 clock

1. Memory must issue NWAIT signal one cycle in advance, accordingly WAITCFG must be programmed to 0. 2. NWAIT polarity is set to 0. 3. Byte Lane (NBL) outputs are not shown, they are held low while NEx is active.

inserted wait state data data

ai14731e

Table 213. FSMC_BCRx bit fields

Bit No. 31-20 19 18-16 15 14 13 12 11 Bit name Reserved CBURSTRW Reserved ASCYCWAIT EXTMOD WAITEN WREN WAITCFG 0x000 0x1 0x0 0x0 0x0 to be set to 1 if the memory supports this feature, to be kept at 0 otherwise. no effect on synchronous read 0x0 Value to set

1349/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 213. FSMC_BCRx bit fields (continued)
Bit No. 10 9 8 7 6 5-4 3-2 1 0 Bit name WRAPMOD WAITPOL BURSTEN Reserved FACCEN MWID MTYP MUXEN MBKEN 0x0 to be set according to memory no effect on synchronous write 0x1 Set according to memory support As needed 0x1 As needed 0x1 Value to set

Table 214. FSMC_BTRx bit fields

Bit No. 31:30 29:28 27-24 23-20 19-16 15-8 7-4 3-0 Bit name Reserved ACCMOD DATLAT CLKDIV BUSTURN DATAST ADDHLD ADDSET 0x0 0x0 Data latency 0x0 to get CLK = HCLK (not supported) 0x1 to get CLK = 2 HCLK Dont care Dont care Dont care Dont care Value to set

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1350/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

32.5.6

NOR/PSRAM control registers

The NOR/PSRAM control registers have to be accessed by words (32 bits).

SRAM/NOR-Flash chip-select control registers 1..4 (FSMC_BCR1..4)

Address offset: 0xA000 0000 + 8 * (x 1), x = 1...4 Reset value: 0x0000 30DX This register contains the control information of each memory bank, used for SRAMs, ROMs and asynchronous or burst NOR Flash memories.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 CBURSTRW 15 ASCYCWAIT 14 13 12 11 10 WRAPMOD WAITCFG EXTMOD WAITEN WREN 9 WAITPOL 8 BURSTEN 7 6 FACCEN 5 MWID 4 3 MTYP 2 1 MUXEN rw 0 MBKEN rw

Reserved

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31: 20

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 19 CBURSTRW: Write burst enable. For Cellular RAM (PSRAM), the bit enables the synchronous burst protocol during write operations. The enable bit for the synchronous burst protocol during read access is the BURSTEN bit in the FSMC_BCRx register. 0: Write operations are always performed in asynchronous mode 1: Write operations are performed in synchronous mode. Bits 18: 16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 15 ASYNCWAIT: Wait signal during asynchronous transfers This bit enables/disables the FSMC to use the wait signal even during an asynchronous protocol. 0: NWAIT signal is not taken in to account when running an asynchronous protocol (default after reset) 1: NWAIT signal is taken in to account when running an asynchronous protocol Bit 14 EXTMOD: Extended mode enable. This bit enables the FSMC to program the write timings inside the FSMC_BWTR register, thus resulting in different timings for read and write operations. 0: values inside FSMC_BWTR register are not taken into account (default after reset) 1: values inside FSMC_BWTR register are taken into account Bit 13 WAITEN: Wait enable bit. This bit enables/disables wait-state insertion via the NWAIT signal when accessing the Flash memory in synchronous mode. 0: NWAIT signal is disabled (its level not taken into account, no wait state inserted after the programmed Flash latency period) 1: NWAIT signal is enabled (its level is taken into account after the programmed Flash latency period to insert wait states if asserted) (default after reset) Bit 12 WREN: Write enable bit. This bit indicates whether write operations are enabled/disabled in the bank by the FSMC: 0: Write operations are disabled in the bank by the FSMC, an AHB error is reported, 1: Write operations are enabled for the bank by the FSMC (default after reset).

1351/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Bit 11 WAITCFG: Wait timing configuration. The NWAIT signal indicates whether the data from the memory are valid or if a wait state must be inserted when accessing the Flash memory in synchronous mode. This configuration bit determines if NWAIT is asserted by the memory one clock cycle before the wait state or during the wait state: 0: NWAIT signal is active one data cycle before wait state (default after reset), 1: NWAIT signal is active during wait state (not for Cellular RAM). Bit 10 WRAPMOD: Wrapped burst mode support. Defines whether the controller will or not split an AHB burst wrap access into two linear accesses. Valid only when accessing memories in burst mode 0: Direct wrapped burst is not enabled (default after reset), 1: Direct wrapped burst is enabled. Note: This bit has no effect as the CPU and DMA cannot generate wrapping burst transfers. Bit 9 WAITPOL: Wait signal polarity bit. Defines the polarity of the wait signal from memory. Valid only when accessing the memory in burst mode: 0: NWAIT active low (default after reset), 1: NWAIT active high. Bit 8 BURSTEN: Burst enable bit. This bit enables/disables the synchronous burst access during read operations. It is valid only with synchronous burst memories: 0: Burst access mode disabled (default after reset) 1: Burst access mode enable Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 FACCEN: Flash access enable Enables NOR Flash memory access operations. 0: Corresponding NOR Flash memory access is disabled 1: Corresponding NOR Flash memory access is enabled (default after reset) Bits 5:4 MWID: Memory databus width. Defines the external memory device width, valid for all type of memories. 00: 8 bits, 01: 16 bits (default after reset), 10: reserved, do not use, 11: reserved, do not use.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1352/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

Bits 3:2 MTYP: Memory type. Defines the type of external memory attached to the corresponding memory bank: 00: SRAM, ROM (default after reset for Bank 2...4) 01: PSRAM (Cellular RAM: CRAM) 10: NOR Flash/OneNAND Flash (default after reset for Bank 1) 11: reserved Bit 1 MUXEN: Address/data multiplexing enable bit. When this bit is set, the address and data values are multiplexed on the databus, valid only with NOR and PSRAM memories: 0: Address/Data nonmultiplexed 1: Address/Data multiplexed on databus (default after reset) Bit 0 MBKEN: Memory bank enable bit. Enables the memory bank. After reset Bank1 is enabled, all others are disabled. Accessing a disabled bank causes an ERROR on AHB bus. 0: Corresponding memory bank is disabled 1: Corresponding memory bank is enabled

1353/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

SRAM/NOR-Flash chip-select timing registers 1..4 (FSMC_BTR1..4)

Address offset: 0xA000 0000 + 0x04 + 8 * (x 1), x = 1..4 Reset value: 0x0FFF FFFF This register contains the control information of each memory bank, used for SRAMs, ROMs and NOR Flash memories. If the EXTMOD bit is set in the FSMC_BCRx register, then this register is partitioned for write and read access, that is, 2 registers are available: one to configure read accesses (this register) and one to configure write accesses (FSMC_BWTRx registers).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 BUSTURN ACCMOD Reserved DATAST CLKDIV DATLAT 9 8 7 6 ADDHLD 5 4 3 2 ADDSET rw rw rw rw rw 1 0

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:30

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 29:28 ACCMOD: Access mode Specifies the asynchronous access modes as shown in the timing diagrams. These bits are taken into account only when the EXTMOD bit in the FSMC_BCRx register is 1. 00: access mode A 01: access mode B 10: access mode C 11: access mode D Bits 27:24 DATLAT: Data latency for synchronous burst NOR Flash memory For NOR Flash with synchronous burst mode enabled, defines the number of memory clock cycles (+2) to issue to the memory before getting the first data: 0000: Data latency of 2 CLK clock cycles for first burst access 1111: Data latency of 17 CLK clock cycles for first burst access (default value after reset) Note: This timing parameter is not expressed in HCLK periods, but in Flash clock (CLK) periods. In asynchronous NOR Flash, SRAM or ROM accesses, this value is don't care. In the case of CRAM, this field must be set to 0. Bits 23:20 CLKDIV: Clock divide ratio (for CLK signal) Defines the period of CLK clock output signal, expressed in number of HCLK cycles: 0000: Reserved 0001: CLK period = 2 HCLK periods 0010: CLK period = 3 HCLK periods 1111: CLK period = 16 HCLK periods (default value after reset) In asynchronous NOR Flash, SRAM or ROM accesses, this value is dont care.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1354/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

Bits 19:16 BUSTURN: Bus turnaround phase duration These bits are written by software to add a delay at the end of a write/read transaction. This delay allows to match the minimum time between consecutive transactions (tEHEL from NEx high to NEx low) and the maximum time needed by the memory to free the data bus after a read access (tEHQZ): (BUSTRUN + 1)HCLK period tEHELmin and (BUSTRUN + 2)HCLK period tEHQZmax if EXTMOD = 0 (BUSTRUN + 2)HCLK period max (tEHELmin, tEHQZmax) if EXTMOD = 1. 0000: BUSTURN phase duration = 0 HCLK clock cycle added ... 1111: BUSTURN phase duration = 15 HCLK clock cycles (default value after reset) Bits 15:8 DATAST: Data-phase duration These bits are written by software to define the duration of the data phase (refer to Figure 405 to Figure 417), used in SRAMs, ROMs and asynchronous NOR Flash accesses: 0000 0000: Reserved 0000 0001: DATAST phase duration = 1 HCLK clock cycles 0000 0010: DATAST phase duration = 2 HCLK clock cycles ... 1111 1111: DATAST phase duration = 255 HCLK clock cycles (default value after reset) For each memory type and access mode data-phase duration, please refer to the respective figure (Figure 405 to Figure 417). Example: Mode1, write access, DATAST=1: Data-phase duration= DATAST+1 = 2 HCLK clock cycles. Note: In synchronous accesses, this value is don't care. Bits 7:4 ADDHLD: Address-hold phase duration These bits are written by software to define the duration of the address hold phase (refer to Figure 414 to Figure 417), used in mode D and multiplexed accesses: 0000: Reserved 0001: ADDHLD phase duration =1 HCLK clock cycle 0010: ADDHLD phase duration = 2 HCLK clock cycle ... 1111: ADDHLD phase duration = 15 HCLK clock cycles (default value after reset) For each access mode address-hold phase duration, please refer to the respective figure (Figure 414 to Figure 417). Note: In synchronous accesses, this value is not used, the address hold phase is always 1 memory clock period duration. Bits 3:0 ADDSET: Address setup phase duration These bits are written by software to define the duration of the address setup phase (refer to Figure 405 to Figure 417), used in SRAMs, ROMs and asynchronous NOR Flash accesses: 0000: ADDSET phase duration = 0 HCLK clock cycle ... 1111: ADDSET phase duration = 1615 HCLK clock cycles (default value after reset) For each access mode address setup phase duration, please refer to the respective figure (refer to Figure 405 to Figure 417). Note: In synchronous accesses, this value is dont care.

Note:

PSRAMs (CRAMs) have a variable latency due to internal refresh. Therefore these memories issue the NWAIT signal during the whole latency phase to prolong the latency as needed. With PSRAMs (CRAMs) the filed DATLAT must be set to 0, so that the FSMC exits its latency phase soon and starts sampling NWAIT from memory, then starts to read or write

1355/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) when the memory is ready. This method can be used also with the latest generation of synchronous Flash memories that issue the NWAIT signal, unlike older Flash memories (check the datasheet of the specific Flash memory being used).

SRAM/NOR-Flash write timing registers 1..4 (FSMC_BWTR1..4)

Address offset: 0xA000 0000 + 0x104 + 8 * (x 1), x = 1...4 Reset value: 0x0FFF FFFF This register contains the control information of each memory bank, used for SRAMs, ROMs and NOR Flash memories. When the EXTMOD bit is set in the FSMC_BCRx register, then this register is active for write access.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Res. ACCM OD rw rw rw DATLAT rw rw rw rw CLKDIV rw rw rw rw BUSTURN rw rw rw rw rw rw DATAST rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ADDHLD rw rw rw rw

ADDSET rw rw rw

Bits 31:30

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 29:28 ACCMOD: Access mode. Specifies the asynchronous access modes as shown in the next timing diagrams.These bits are taken into account only when the EXTMOD bit in the FSMC_BCRx register is 1. 00: access mode A 01: access mode B 10: access mode C 11: access mode D Bits 27:24 DATLAT: Data latency (for synchronous burst NOR Flash). For NOR Flash with Synchronous burst mode enabled, defines the number of memory clock cycles (+2) to issue to the memory before getting the first data: 0000: (0x0) Data latency of 2 CLK clock cycles for first burst access ... 1111: (0xF) Data latency of 17 CLK clock cycles for first burst access (default value after reset) Note: This timing parameter is not expressed in HCLK periods, but in Flash clock (CLK) periods. In asynchronous NOR Flash, SRAM or ROM accesses, this value is dont care. In case of CRAM, this field must be set to 0 Bits 23:20 CLKDIV: Clock divide ratio (for CLK signal). Defines the period of CLK clock output signal, expressed in number of HCLK cycles: 0000: Reserved 0001 CLK period = 2 HCLK periods 0010 CLK period = 3 HCLK periods 1111: CLK period = 16 HCLK periods (default value after reset) In asynchronous NOR Flash, SRAM or ROM accesses, this value is dont care. Bits 19:16 BUSTURN: Bus turnaround phase duration These bits are written by software to add a delay at the end of a write transaction to match the minimum time between consecutive transactions (tEHEL from ENx high to ENx low): (BUSTRUN + 1) HCLK period tEHELmin. 0000: BUSTURN phase duration = 0 HCLK clock cycle added ... 1111: BUSTURN phase duration = 15 HCLK clock cycles added (default value after reset)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1356/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

Bits 15:8 DATAST: Data-phase duration. These bits are written by software to define the duration of the data phase (refer to Figure 405 to Figure 417), used in SRAMs, ROMs and asynchronous NOR Flash accesses: 0000 0000: Reserved 0000 0001: DATAST phase duration = 1 HCLK clock cycles 0000 0010: DATAST phase duration = 2 HCLK clock cycles ... 1111 1111: DATAST phase duration = 255 HCLK clock cycles (default value after reset) Note: In synchronous accesses, this value is don't care. Bits 7:4 ADDHLD: Address-hold phase duration. These bits are written by software to define the duration of the address hold phase (refer to Figure 414 to Figure 417), used in SRAMs, ROMs and asynchronous multiplexed NOR Flash accesses: 0000: Reserved 0001: ADDHLD phase duration = 1 HCLK clock cycle 0010: ADDHLD phase duration = 2 HCLK clock cycle ... 1111: ADDHLD phase duration = 15 HCLK clock cycles (default value after reset) Note: In synchronous NOR Flash accesses, this value is not used, the address hold phase is always 1 Flash clock period duration. Bits 3:0 ADDSET: Address setup phase duration. These bits are written by software to define the duration of the address setup phase in HCLK cycles (refer to Figure 414 to Figure 417), used in SRAMs, ROMs and asynchronous NOR Flash accessed: 0000: ADDSET phase duration = 0 HCLK clock cycle ... 1111: ADDSET phase duration = 15 HCLK clock cycles (default value after reset) Note: In synchronous NOR Flash accesses, this value is dont care.

32.6

NAND Flash/PC Card controller

The FSMC generates the appropriate signal timings to drive the following types of device:

NAND Flash 8-bit 16-bit

16-bit PC Card compatible devices

The NAND/PC Card controller can control three external banks. Bank 2 and bank 3 support NAND Flash devices. Bank 4 supports PC Card devices. Each bank is configured by means of dedicated registers (Section 32.6.8). The programmable memory parameters include access timings (shown in Table 215) and ECC configuration.

1357/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 215. Programmable NAND/PC Card access parameters
Parameter Memory setup time Memory wait Function Number of clock cycles (HCLK) to set up the address before the command assertion Access mode Read/Write Unit AHB clock cycle (HCLK) AHB clock cycle (HCLK) AHB clock cycle (HCLK) Min. Max. 1 256

Minimum duration (HCLK clock Read/Write cycles) of the command assertion Number of clock cycles (HCLK) to hold the address (and the data Read/Write in case of a write access) after the command de-assertion Number of clock cycles (HCLK) during which the databus is kept in high-Z state after the start of a write access

256

Memory hold

255

Memory databus high-Z

Write

AHB clock cycle (HCLK)

255

32.6.1

External memory interface signals

The following tables list the signals that are typically used to interface NAND Flash and PC Card.

Note:

Prefix N. specifies the associated signal as active low.

8-bit NAND Flash

Table 216. 8-bit NAND Flash
FSMC signal name A[17] A[16] D[7:0] NCE[x] NOE(= NRE) NWE NWAIT/INT[3:2] I/O O O I/O O O O I Function NAND Flash address latch enable (ALE) signal NAND Flash command latch enable (CLE) signal 8-bit multiplexed, bidirectional address/data bus Chip select, x = 2, 3 Output enable (memory signal name: read enable, NRE) Write enable NAND Flash ready/busy input signal to the FSMC
t

There is no theoretical capacity limitation as the FSMC can manage as many address cycles as needed.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1358/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

16-bit NAND Flash

Table 217. 16-bit NAND Flash
FSMC signal name A[17] A[16] D[15:0] NCE[x] NOE(= NRE) NWE NWAIT/INT[3:2] I/O O O I/O O O O I Function NAND Flash address latch enable (ALE) signal NAND Flash command latch enable (CLE) signal 16-bit multiplexed, bidirectional address/data bus Chip select, x = 2, 3 Output enable (memory signal name: read enable, NRE) Write enable NAND Flash ready/busy input signal to the FSMC

There is no theoretical capacity limitation as the FSMC can manage as many address cycles as needed.

16-bit PC Card
Table 218. 16-bit PC Card
FSMC signal name A[10:0] NIORD NIOWR NREG D[15:0] NCE4_1 NCE4_2 NOE NWE NWAIT INTR I/O O O O O I/O O O O O I I Address bus Output enable for I/O space Write enable for I/O space Register signal indicating if access is in Common or Attribute space Bidirectional databus Chip select 1 Chip select 2 (indicates if access is 16-bit or 8-bit) Output enable in Common and in Attribute space Write enable in Common and in Attribute space PC Card wait input signal to the FSMC (memory signal name IORDY) PC Card interrupt to the FSMC (only for PC Cards that can generate an interrupt) PC Card presence detection. Active high. If an access is performed to the PC Card banks while CD is low, an AHB error is generated. Refer to Section 32.3: AHB interface Function

CD

1359/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

32.6.2

NAND Flash / PC Card supported memories and transactions

Table 219 below shows the supported devices, access modes and transactions. Transactions not allowed (or not supported) by the NAND Flash / PC Card controller appear in gray. Table 219. Supported memories and transactions
Device Mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous NAND 8-bit Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous NAND 16-bit Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous W R W 16 32 32 16 16 16 Y Y Y Split into 2 FSMC accesses Split into 2 FSMC accesses W R W R W R 16 32 32 8 8 16 8 8 8 16 16 16 Y Y Y Y N Y Split into 2 FSMC accesses Split into 4 FSMC accesses Split into 4 FSMC accesses R/W R W R AHB Memory Allowed/ data size data size not allowed 8 8 16 8 8 8 Y Y Y Split into 2 FSMC accesses Comments

32.6.3

Timing diagrams for NAND and PC Card

Each PC Card/CompactFlash and NAND Flash memory bank is managed through a set of registers:

Control register: FSMC_PCRx Interrupt status register: FSMC_SRx ECC register: FSMC_ECCRx Timing register for Common memory space: FSMC_PMEMx Timing register for Attribute memory space: FSMC_PATTx Timing register for I/O space: FSMC_PIOx

Each timing configuration register contains three parameters used to define number of HCLK cycles for the three phases of any PC Card/CompactFlash or NAND Flash access, plus one parameter that defines the timing for starting driving the databus in the case of a write. Figure 423 shows the timing parameter definitions for common memory accesses, knowing that Attribute and I/O (only for PC Card) memory space access timings are similar.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1360/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Figure 423. NAND/PC Card controller timing for common memory access

RM0090

HCLK

A[25:0]

NCEx NREG, High NIOW, NIOR MEMxSET + 1 NWE, NOE(1) MEMxHIZ write_data MEMxWAIT + 1 MEMxHOLD + 1

read_data

Valid

i15570b

1. NOE remains high (inactive) during write access. NWE remains high (inactive) during read access.

32.6.4

NAND Flash operations

The command latch enable (CLE) and address latch enable (ALE) signals of the NAND Flash device are driven by some address signals of the FSMC controller. This means that to send a command or an address to the NAND Flash memory, the CPU has to perform a write to a certain address in its memory space. A typical page read operation from the NAND Flash device is as follows: 1. Program and enable the corresponding memory bank by configuring the FSMC_PCRx and FSMC_PMEMx (and for some devices, FSMC_PATTx, see Section 32.6.5: NAND Flash pre-wait functionality on page 1362) registers according to the characteristics of the NAND Flash (PWID bits for the databus width of the NAND Flash, PTYP = 1, PWAITEN = 1, PBKEN = 1, see section Common memory space timing register 2..4 (FSMC_PMEM2..4) on page 1368 for timing configuration). The CPU performs a byte write in the common memory space, with data byte equal to one Flash command byte (for example 0x00 for Samsung NAND Flash devices). The CLE input of the NAND Flash is active during the write strobe (low pulse on NWE), thus the written byte is interpreted as a command by the NAND Flash. Once the command is latched by the NAND Flash device, it does not need to be written for the following page read operations. The CPU can send the start address (STARTAD) for a read operation by writing the required bytes (for example four bytes or three for smaller capacity devices), STARTAD[7:0], STARTAD[15:8], STARTAD[23:16] and finally STARTAD[25:24] for 64 Mb x 8 bit NAND Flash) in the common memory or attribute space. The ALE input of the NAND Flash device is active during the write strobe (low pulse on NWE), thus the written bytes are interpreted as the start address for read operations. Using the

2.

3.

1361/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) attribute memory space makes it possible to use a different timing configuration of the FSMC, which can be used to implement the prewait functionality needed by some NAND Flash memories (see details in Section 32.6.5: NAND Flash pre-wait functionality on page 1362). 4. The controller waits for the NAND Flash to be ready (R/NB signal high) to become active, before starting a new access (to same or another memory bank). While waiting, the controller maintains the NCE signal active (low). The CPU can then perform byte read operations in the common memory space to read the NAND Flash page (data field + Spare field) byte by byte. The next NAND Flash page can be read without any CPU command or address write operation, in three different ways: by simply performing the operation described in step 5 a new random address can be accessed by restarting the operation at step 3 a new command can be sent to the NAND Flash device by restarting at step 2

5. 6.

32.6.5

NAND Flash pre-wait functionality

Some NAND Flash devices require that, after writing the last part of the address, the controller wait for the R/NB signal to go low as shown in Figure 424. Figure 424. Access to non CE dont care NAND-Flash
NCE must stay low NCE

CLE

ALE

NWE High NOE tR I/O[7:0]

0x00 A7-A0 A15-A8 A23-A16 A25-A14

tWB R/NB (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ai17733b

1. CPU wrote byte 0x00 at address 0x7001 0000. 2. CPU wrote byte A7-A0 at address 0x7002 0000. 3. CPU wrote byte A15-A8 at address 0x7002 0000. 4. CPU wrote byte A23-A16 at address 0x7002 0000. 5. CPU wrote byte A25-A24 at address 0x7802 0000: FSMC performs a write access using FSMC_PATT2 timing definition, where ATTHOLD 7 (providing that (7+1) HCLK = 112 ns > tWB max). This guarantees that NCE remains low until R/NB goes low and high again (only requested for NAND Flash memories where NCE is not dont care).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1362/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

When this functionality is needed, it can be guaranteed by programming the MEMHOLD value to meet the tWB timing, however any CPU read or write access to the NAND Flash then has the hold delay of (MEMHOLD + 1) HCLK cycles inserted from the rising edge of the NWE signal to the next access. To overcome this timing constraint, the attribute memory space can be used by programming its timing register with an ATTHOLD value that meets the tWB timing, and leaving the MEMHOLD value at its minimum. Then, the CPU must use the common memory space for all NAND Flash read and write accesses, except when writing the last address byte to the NAND Flash device, where the CPU must write to the attribute memory space.

32.6.6

Error correction code computation ECC (NAND Flash)

The FSMC PC-Card controller includes two error correction code computation hardware blocks, one per memory bank. They are used to reduce the host CPU workload when processing the error correction code by software in the system. These two registers are identical and associated with bank 2 and bank 3, respectively. As a consequence, no hardware ECC computation is available for memories connected to bank 4. The error correction code (ECC) algorithm implemented in the FSMC can perform 1-bit error correction and 2-bit error detection per 256, 512, 1 024, 2 048, 4 096 or 8 192 bytes read from or written to NAND Flash. The ECC modules monitor the NAND Flash databus and read/write signals (NCE and NWE) each time the NAND Flash memory bank is active. The functional operations are:

When access to NAND Flash is made to bank 2 or bank 3, the data present on the D[15:0] bus is latched and used for ECC computation. When access to NAND Flash occurs at any other address, the ECC logic is idle, and does not perform any operation. Thus, write operations for defining commands or addresses to NAND Flash are not taken into account for ECC computation.

Once the desired number of bytes has been read from/written to the NAND Flash by the host CPU, the FSMC_ECCR2/3 registers must be read in order to retrieve the computed value. Once read, they should be cleared by resetting the ECCEN bit to zero. To compute a new data block, the ECCEN bit must be set to one in the FSMC_PCR2/3 registers.

32.6.7

PC Card/CompactFlash operations
Address spaces & memory accesses
The FSMC supports Compact Flash storage or PC Cards in Memory Mode and I/O Mode (True IDE mode is not supported). The Compact Flash storage and PC Cards are made of 3 memory spaces:

Common Memory Space Attribute Space I/O Memory Space

The nCE2 and nCE1 pins (FSMC_NCE4_2 and FSMC_NCE4_1 respectively) select the card and indicate whether a byte or a word operation is being performed: nCE2 accesses

1363/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) the odd byte on D15-8 and nCE1 accesses the even byte on D7-0 if A0=0 or the odd byte on D7-0 if A0=1. The full word is accessed on D15-0 if both nCE2 and nCE1 are low. The memory space is selected by asserting low nOE for read accesses or nWE for write accesses, combined with the low assertion of nCE2/nCE1 and nREG.

If pin nREG=1 during the memory access, the common memory space is selected If pin nREG=0 during the memory access, the attribute memory space is selected

The I/O Space is selected by asserting low nIORD for read accesses or nIOWR for write accesses [instead of nOE/nWE for memory Space], combined with nCE2/nCE1. Note that nREG must also be asserted low during accesses to I/O Space. Three type of accesses are allowed for a 16-bit PC Card:

Accesses to Common Memory Space for data storage can be either 8-bit accesses at even addresses or 16 bit AHB accesses. Note that 8-bit accesses at odd addresses are not supported and will not lead to the low assertion of nCE2. A 32-bit AHB request is translated into two 16-bit memory accesses.

Accesses to Attribute Memory Space where the PC Card stores configuration information are limited to 8-bit AHB accesses at even addresses. Note that a 16-bit AHB access will be converted into a single 8-bit memory transfer: nCE1 will be asserted low, NCE2 will be asserted high and only the even Byte on D7D0 will be valid. Instead a 32-bit AHB access will be converted into two 8-bit memory transfers at even addresses: nCE1 will be asserted low, NCE2 will be asserted high and only the even bytes will be valid.

Accesses to I/O Space can be performed either through AHB 8-bit or 16-bit accesses.

Table 220. 16-bit PC-Card signals and access type

nIORD /nIOWR nOE/nWE nREG

nCE2

nCE1

A7-1

Space

Access Type

Allowed/not Allowed

A10

1 0 0 X X 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

X X X 0 0 X X

X X X 1 0 X X

X-X X-X X-X X-X X-X X-X X-X

A0 X X 0 0

A9

Common Memory Space

Read/Write byte on D7-D0 Read/Write byte on D15-D8 Read/Write word on D15-D0 Read or Write Configuration Registers Read or Write CIS (Card Information Structure) Read or Write (odd address) Read or Write (odd address)

YES Not supported YES YES YES YES YES

Attribute Space 0 1 x Invalid Attribute Space

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1364/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Table 220. 16-bit PC-Card signals and access type (continued)
nIORD /nIOWR nOE/nWE nREG

RM0090

nCE2

nCE1

A7-1

Space

Access Type

Allowed/not Allowed

A10

A9

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X-X X-X X-X X-X X-X X-X X-X X-X

A0 0 1 0 1

Read Even Byte on D7-0 Read Odd Byte on D7-0 Write Even Byte on D7-0 Write Odd Byte on D7-0 I/O space Read Word on D15-0 Write word on D15-0 Read Odd Byte on D15-8 Write Odd Byte on D15-8

YES YES YES YES YES YES Not supported Not supported

0 0 X X

The FSMC Bank 4 gives access to those 3 memory spaces as described in Section 32.4.2: NAND/PC Card address mapping - Table 187: Memory mapping and timing registers

Wait Feature
The CompactFlash Storage or PC Card may request the FSMC to extend the length of the access phase programmed by MEMWAITx/ATTWAITx/IOWAITx bits, asserting the nWAIT signal after nOE/nWE or nIORD/nIOWR activation if the wait feature is enabled through the PWAITEN bit in the FSMC_PCRx register. In order to detect the nWAIT assertion correctly, the MEMWAITx/ATTWAITx/IOWAITx bits must be programmed as follows: xxWAITx >= 4 + max_wait_assertion_time/HCLK Where max_wait_assertion_time is the maximum time taken by NWAIT to go low once nOE/nWE or nIORD/nIOWR is low. After the de-assertion of nWAIT, the FSMC extends the WAIT phase for 4 HCLK clock cycles.

1365/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

32.6.8

NAND Flash/PC Card control registers

The NAND Flash/PC Card control registers have to be accessed by words (32 bits).

PC Card/NAND Flash control registers 2..4 (FSMC_PCR2..4)

Address offset: 0xA0000000 + 0x40 + 0x20 * (x 1), x = 2..4 Reset value: 0x0000 0018
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 ECCEN 5 4 3 PTYP 2 PBKEN 1 PWAITEN rw 0 Reserved

ECCPS Reserved rw rw rw rw

TAR

TCLR Res.

PWID

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:20

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 19:17 ECCPS: ECC page size. Defines the page size for the extended ECC: 000: 256 bytes 001: 512 bytes 010: 1024 bytes 011: 2048 bytes 100: 4096 bytes 101: 8192 bytes Bits 16:13 TAR: ALE to RE delay. Sets time from ALE low to RE low in number of AHB clock cycles (HCLK). Time is: t_ar = (TAR + SET + 2) THCLK where THCLK is the HCLK clock period 0000: 1 HCLK cycle (default) 1111: 16 HCLK cycles Note: SET is MEMSET or ATTSET according to the addressed space. Bits 12:9 TCLR: CLE to RE delay. Sets time from CLE low to RE low in number of AHB clock cycles (HCLK). Time is t_clr = (TCLR + SET + 2) THCLK where THCLK is the HCLK clock period 0000: 1 HCLK cycle (default) 1111: 16 HCLK cycles Note: SET is MEMSET or ATTSET according to the addressed space. Bits 8:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 6 ECCEN: ECC computation logic enable bit 0: ECC logic is disabled and reset (default after reset), 1: ECC logic is enabled. Bits 5:4 PWID: Databus width. Defines the external memory device width. 00: 8 bits (default after reset) 01: 16 bits (mandatory for PC Card) 10: reserved, do not use 11: reserved, do not use

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1366/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

Bit 3 PTYP: Memory type. Defines the type of device attached to the corresponding memory bank: 0: PC Card, CompactFlash, CF+ or PCMCIA 1: NAND Flash (default after reset) Bit 2 PBKEN: PC Card/NAND Flash memory bank enable bit. Enables the memory bank. Accessing a disabled memory bank causes an ERROR on AHB bus 0: Corresponding memory bank is disabled (default after reset) 1: Corresponding memory bank is enabled Bit 1 PWAITEN: Wait feature enable bit. Enables the Wait feature for the PC Card/NAND Flash memory bank: 0: disabled 1: enabled Note: For a PC Card, when the wait feature is enabled, the MEMWAITx/ATTWAITx/IOWAITx bits must be programmed to a value as follows: xxWAITx 4 + max_wait_assertion_time/HCLK Where max_wait_assertion_time is the maximum time taken by NWAIT to go low once nOE/nWE or nIORD/nIOWR is low. Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

FIFO status and interrupt register 2..4 (FSMC_SR2..4)

Address offset: 0xA000 0000 + 0x44 + 0x20 * (x-1), x = 2..4 Reset value: 0x0000 0040 This register contains information about FIFO status and interrupt. The FSMC has a FIFO that is used when writing to memories to store up to16 words of data from the AHB. This is used to quickly write to the AHB and free it for transactions to peripherals other than the FSMC, while the FSMC is draining its FIFO into the memory. This register has one of its bits that indicates the status of the FIFO, for ECC purposes. The ECC is calculated while the data are written to the memory, so in order to read the correct ECC the software must wait until the FIFO is empty.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Reserved 9 8 7 6 FEMPT 5 IFEN 4 ILEN 3 IREN 2 IFS 1 ILS rw 0 IRS rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:7

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 FEMPT: FIFO empty. Read-only bit that provides the status of the FIFO 0: FIFO not empty 1: FIFO empty Bit 5 IFEN: Interrupt falling edge detection enable bit 0: Interrupt falling edge detection request disabled 1: Interrupt falling edge detection request enabled

1367/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Bit 4 ILEN: Interrupt high-level detection enable bit 0: Interrupt high-level detection request disabled 1: Interrupt high-level detection request enabled Bit 3 IREN: Interrupt rising edge detection enable bit 0: Interrupt rising edge detection request disabled 1: Interrupt rising edge detection request enabled Bit 2 IFS: Interrupt falling edge status The flag is set by hardware and reset by software. 0: No interrupt falling edge occurred 1: Interrupt falling edge occurred Bit 1 ILS: Interrupt high-level status The flag is set by hardware and reset by software. 0: No Interrupt high-level occurred 1: Interrupt high-level occurred Bit 0 IRS: Interrupt rising edge status The flag is set by hardware and reset by software. 0: No interrupt rising edge occurred 1: Interrupt rising edge occurred

Common memory space timing register 2..4 (FSMC_PMEM2..4)

Address offset: Address: 0xA000 0000 + 0x48 + 0x20 * (x 1), x = 2..4 Reset value: 0xFCFC FCFC Each FSMC_PMEMx (x = 2..4) read/write register contains the timing information for PC Card or NAND Flash memory bank x, used for access to the common memory space of the 16-bit PC Card/CompactFlash, or to access the NAND Flash for command, address write access and data read/write access.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 MEMHIZx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw MEMHOLDx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw MEMWAITx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MEMSETx rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:24 MEMHIZx: Common memory x databus HiZ time Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles during which the databus is kept in HiZ after the start of a PC Card/NAND Flash write access to common memory space on socket x. Only valid for write transaction: 0000 0000: (0x00) 0 HCLK cycle (for PC Card) 1111 1111: (0xFF) 255 HCLK cycles (for PC Card) - (default value after reset) Bits 23:16 MEMHOLDx: Common memory x hold time Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles to hold address (and data for write access) after the command deassertion (NWE, NOE), for PC Card/NAND Flash read or write access to common memory space on socket x: 0000 0000: reserved 0000 0001: 1 HCLK cycle 1111 1111: 255 HCLK cycles (default value after reset)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1368/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

Bits 15:8 MEMWAITx: Common memory x wait time Defines the minimum number of HCLK (+1) clock cycles to assert the command (NWE, NOE), for PC Card/NAND Flash read or write access to common memory space on socket x. The duration for command assertion is extended if the wait signal (NWAIT) is active (low) at the end of the programmed value of HCLK: 0000 0000: reserved 0000 0001: 2HCLK cycles (+ wait cycle introduced by deasserting NWAIT) 1111 1111: 256 HCLK cycles (+ wait cycle introduced by the Card deasserting NWAIT) (default value after reset) Bits 7:0 MEMSETx: Common memory x setup time Defines the number of HCLK () clock cycles to set up the address before the command assertion (NWE, NOE), for PC Card/NAND Flash read or write access to common memory space on socket x: 0000 0000: 1 HCLK cycle (for PC Card) / HCLK cycles (for NAND Flash) 1111 1111: 256 HCLK cycles (for PC Card) / 257 HCLK cycles (for NAND Flash) - (default value after reset)

Attribute memory space timing registers 2..4 (FSMC_PATT2..4)

Address offset: 0xA000 0000 + 0x4C + 0x20 * (x 1), x = 2..4 Reset value: 0xFCFC FCFC Each FSMC_PATTx (x = 2..4) read/write register contains the timing information for PC Card/CompactFlash or NAND Flash memory bank x. It is used for 8-bit accesses to the attribute memory space of the PC Card/CompactFlash or to access the NAND Flash for the last address write access if the timing must differ from that of previous accesses (for Ready/Busy management, refer to Section 32.6.5: NAND Flash pre-wait functionality).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ATTHIZx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw ATTHOLDx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw ATTWAITx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ATTSETx rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:24 ATTHIZx: Attribute memory x databus HiZ time Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles during which the databus is kept in HiZ after the start of a PC CARD/NAND Flash write access to attribute memory space on socket x. Only valid for write transaction: 0000 0000: 0 HCLK cycle 1111 1111: 255 HCLK cycles (default value after reset) Bits 23:16 ATTHOLDx: Attribute memory x hold time Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles to hold address (and data for write access) after the command deassertion (NWE, NOE), for PC Card/NAND Flash read or write access to attribute memory space on socket x 0000 0000: reserved 0000 0001: 1 HCLK cycle 1111 1111: 255 HCLK cycles (default value after reset)

1369/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Bits 15:8 ATTWAITx: Attribute memory x wait time Defines the minimum number of HCLK (+1) clock cycles to assert the command (NWE, NOE), for PC Card/NAND Flash read or write access to attribute memory space on socket x. The duration for command assertion is extended if the wait signal (NWAIT) is active (low) at the end of the programmed value of HCLK: 0000 0000: reserved 0000 0001: 2 HCLK cycles (+ wait cycle introduced by deassertion of NWAIT) 1111 1111: 256 HCLK cycles (+ wait cycle introduced by the card deasserting NWAIT) (default value after reset) Bits 7:0 ATTSETx: Attribute memory x setup time Defines the number of HCLK (+1) clock cycles to set up address before the command assertion (NWE, NOE), for PC CARD/NAND Flash read or write access to attribute memory space on socket x: 0000 0000: 1 HCLK cycle 1111 1111: 256 HCLK cycles (default value after reset)

I/O space timing register 4 (FSMC_PIO4)

Address offset: 0xA000 0000 + 0xB0 Reset value: 0xFCFCFCFC The FSMC_PIO4 read/write registers contain the timing information used to gain access to the I/O space of the 16-bit PC Card/CompactFlash.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 IOHIZx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw IOHOLDx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw IOWAITx rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

IOSETx rw rw rw rw rw

Bits 31:24 IOHIZx: I/O x databus HiZ time Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles during which the databus is kept in HiZ after the start of a PC Card write access to I/O space on socket x. Only valid for write transaction: 0000 0000: 0 HCLK cycle 1111 1111: 255 HCLK cycles (default value after reset)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1370/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

Bits 23:16 IOHOLDx: I/O x hold time Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles to hold address (and data for write access) after the command deassertion (NWE, NOE), for PC Card read or write access to I/O space on socket x: 0000 0000: reserved 0000 0001: 1 HCLK cycle 1111 1111: 255 HCLK cycles (default value after reset) Bits 15:8 IOWAITx: I/O x wait time Defines the minimum number of HCLK (+1) clock cycles to assert the command (SMNWE, SMNOE), for PC Card read or write access to I/O space on socket x. The duration for command assertion is extended if the wait signal (NWAIT) is active (low) at the end of the programmed value of HCLK: 0000 0000: reserved, do not use this value 0000 0001: 2 HCLK cycles (+ wait cycle introduced by deassertion of NWAIT) 1111 1111: 256 HCLK cycles (+ wait cycle introduced by the Card deasserting NWAIT) (default value after reset) Bits 7:0 IOSETx: I/O x setup time Defines the number of HCLK (+1) clock cycles to set up the address before the command assertion (NWE, NOE), for PC Card read or write access to I/O space on socket x: 0000 0000: 1 HCLK cycle 1111 1111: 256 HCLK cycles (default value after reset)

ECC result registers 2/3 (FSMC_ECCR2/3)

Address offset: 0xA000 0000 + 0x54 + 0x20 * (x 1), x = 2 or 3 Reset value: 0x0000 0000 These registers contain the current error correction code value computed by the ECC computation modules of the FSMC controller (one module per NAND Flash memory bank). When the CPU reads the data from a NAND Flash memory page at the correct address (refer to Section 32.6.6: Error correction code computation ECC (NAND Flash)), the data read from or written to the NAND Flash are processed automatically by ECC computation module. At the end of X bytes read (according to the ECCPS field in the FSMC_PCRx registers), the CPU must read the computed ECC value from the FSMC_ECCx registers, and then verify whether these computed parity data are the same as the parity value recorded in the spare area, to determine whether a page is valid, and, to correct it if applicable. The FSMC_ECCRx registers should be cleared after being read by setting the ECCEN bit to zero. For computing a new data block, the ECCEN bit must be set to one.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 ECCx r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 ECCx: ECC result This field provides the value computed by the ECC computation logic. Table 221 hereafter describes the contents of these bit fields.

1371/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 221. ECC result relevant bits

ECCPS[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

Page size in bytes

ECC bits ECC[21:0] ECC[23:0] ECC[25:0] ECC[27:0] ECC[29:0] ECC[31:0]

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1372/1422

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

RM0090

32.6.9

FSMC register map

The following table summarizes the FSMC registers.

Table 222. FSMC register map

Offset
0xA000 0000

Register

ASYNCWAIT ASYNCWAIT ASYNCWAIT ASYNCWAIT

CBURSTRW CBURSTRW CBURSTRW CBURSTRW

WRAPMOD WRAPMOD WRAPMOD WRAPMOD

BURSTEN

WAITCFG

WAITPOL

Reserved

EXTMOD

FACCEN

WAITEN

MUXEN MUXEN MUXEN MUXEN PWAITEN PWAITEN PWAITEN ILS ILS ILS

FSMC_BCR1

Reserved

Reserved

BURSTEN

WAITCFG

WAITPOL

EXTMOD

Reserved

FACCEN

WAITEN

0xA000 0008

FSMC_BCR2

Reserved

Reserved

BURSTEN

WAITCFG

WAITPOL

Reserved

EXTMOD

FACCEN

WAITEN

0xA000 0010

FSMC_BCR3

Reserved

Reserved

BURSTEN

WAITCFG

WAITPOL

Reserved

EXTMOD

FACCEN

WAITEN

0xA000 0018 0xA000 0004 0xA000 000C 0xA000 0014 0xA000 001C

FSMC_BCR4

Reserved

Reserved

FSMC_BTR1 FSMC_BTR2 FSMC_BTR3 FSMC_BTR4

Res.

ACCM OD

DATLAT DATLAT DATLAT DATLAT DATLAT DATLAT DATLAT DATLAT

CLKDIV CLKDIV CLKDIV CLKDIV CLKDIV CLKDIV CLKDIV CLKDIV

BUSTURN BUSTURN BUSTURN BUSTURN BUSTURN BUSTURN BUSTURN BUSTURN

DATAST DATAST DATAST DATAST DATAST DATAST DATAST DATAST

ADDHLD ADDHLD ADDHLD ADDHLD ADDHLD ADDHLD ADDHLD ADDHLD ECCEN PTYP

ADDSET ADDSET ADDSET ADDSET ADDSET ADDSET ADDSET ADDSET Reserved Reserved Reserved IRS IRS IRS PBKEN IFS IFS IFS PBKEN PBKEN

ACCM Res. OD Res. Res. ACCM OD ACCM OD

0xA000 ACCM FSMC_BWTR1 Res. 0104 OD ACCM 0xA000 FSMC_BWTR2 Res. OD 010C ACCM 0xA000 FSMC_BWTR3 Res. OD 0114 0xA000 ACCM FSMC_BWTR4 Res. 011C OD 0xA000 0060 FSMC_PCR2

Reserved

ECCPS

TAR

TCLR

Res.

PWID

ECCEN

0xA000 0080

FSMC_PCR3

Reserved

ECCPS

TAR

TCLR

Res.

PWID

FEMPT FEMPT FEMPT ECCEN

0xA000 00A0 0xA000 0064 0xA000 0084 0xA000 00A4

FSMC_PCR4

Reserved

ECCPS

TAR

TCLR

Res.

PWID

FSMC_SR2

Reserved

FSMC_SR3

Reserved

FSMC_SR4 MEMHIZx MEMHIZx

Reserved MEMHOLDx MEMHOLDx MEMWAITx MEMWAITx

0xA000 FSMC_PMEM2 0068 0xA000 FSMC_PMEM3 0088

MEMSETx MEMSETx

1373/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

IREN

IFEN

ILEN

IREN

IFEN

ILEN

IREN

IFEN

ILEN

PTYP

PTYP

MBKEN

WREN

MTYP

MWID

MBKEN

WREN

MWID

MTYP

MBKEN

WREN

MTYP

MWID

MBKEN

WREN

MWID

MTYP

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RM0090 Table 222. FSMC register map (continued)

Offset Register
0xA000 FSMC_PMEM4 00A8 0xA000 FSMC_PATT2 006C 0xA000 FSMC_PATT3 008C 0xA000 FSMC_PATT4 00AC 0xA000 00B0 FSMC_PIO4

Flexible static memory controller (FSMC)

0xA000 FSMC_ECCR2 0074 0xA000 FSMC_ECCR3 0094

Refer to Table 2 on page 52 for the register boundary addresses.

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MEMHIZx ATTHIZx ATTHIZx ATTHIZx IOHIZx MEMHOLDx ATTHOLDx ATTHOLDx ATTHOLDx IOHOLDx ECCx ECCx MEMWAITx ATTWAITx ATTWAITx ATTWAITx IOWAITx MEMSETx ATTSETx ATTSETx ATTSETx IOSETx

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1374/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33

Debug support (DBG)

This section applies to the whole STM32F4xx family, unless otherwise specified.

33.1

Overview
The STM32F4xx are built around a Cortex-M4F core which contains hardware extensions for advanced debugging features. The debug extensions allow the core to be stopped either on a given instruction fetch (breakpoint) or data access (watchpoint). When stopped, the cores internal state and the systems external state may be examined. Once examination is complete, the core and the system may be restored and program execution resumed. The debug features are used by the debugger host when connecting to and debugging the STM32F4xx MCUs. Two interfaces for debug are available:

Serial wire JTAG debug port

Figure 425. Block diagram of STM32 MCU and Cortex-M4F-level debug support
STM32F4xx debug support Cortex-M4 debug s uppo rt
Bus matrix

Cortex-M4 core

D
Data

i
JTMS/ SWDIO JTDI JTDO/ TRACESWO NJTRST JTCK/ SWCLK SWJ-DP

DCode interface

System interface

te d

External private peripheral bus (PPB) Trace port Bridge TPIU

TRACESWO TRACECK TRACED[3:0]

AHB-AP

tr ic

Internal private peripheral bus (PPB)

NVIC

DWT

DBGMCU

es

FPB

ITM

MS19908V3

Note:

The debug features embedded in the Cortex-M4F core are a subset of the ARM CoreSight Design Kit.

1375/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG) The ARM Cortex-M4F core provides integrated on-chip debug support. It is comprised of:

SWJ-DP: Serial wire / JTAG debug port AHP-AP: AHB access port ITM: Instrumentation trace macrocell FPB: Flash patch breakpoint DWT: Data watchpoint trigger TPUI: Trace port unit interface (available on larger packages, where the corresponding pins are mapped) ETM: Embedded Trace Macrocell (available on larger packages, where the corresponding pins are mapped) Flexible debug pinout assignment MCU debug box (support for low-power modes, control over peripheral clocks, etc.)

It also includes debug features dedicated to the STM32F4xx:

Note:

For further information on debug functionality supported by the ARM Cortex-M4F core, refer to the Cortex-M4F-r0p1 Technical Reference Manual and to the CoreSight Design Kit-r0p1 TRM (see Section 33.2: Reference ARM documentation).

33.2

Reference ARM documentation

Cortex-M4F r0p1 Technical Reference Manual (TRM) (see Related documents on page 1) ARM Debug Interface V5 ARM CoreSight Design Kit revision r0p1 Technical Reference Manual

33.3

SWJ debug port (serial wire and JTAG)

The STM32F4xx core integrates the Serial Wire / JTAG Debug Port (SWJ-DP). It is an ARM standard CoreSight debug port that combines a JTAG-DP (5-pin) interface and a SW-DP (2pin) interface.

The JTAG Debug Port (JTAG-DP) provides a 5-pin standard JTAG interface to the AHPAP port. The Serial Wire Debug Port (SW-DP) provides a 2-pin (clock + data) interface to the AHP-AP port.

In the SWJ-DP, the two JTAG pins of the SW-DP are multiplexed with some of the five JTAG pins of the JTAG-DP.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1376/1422

Debug support (DBG) Figure 426. SWJ debug port

TRACESWO (asynchronous trace) SWJ-DP JTDO JTDI NJTRST TDO TDI nTRST TDO TDI nTRST TCK TMS SWD/JTAG select SWDITMS JTMS/SWDIO DBGDI SWDO DBGDO SW-DP SWDOEN SWCLKTCK DBGDOEN DBGCLK nPOTRST JTAG-DP

RM0090

nPOTRST DBGRESETn

From power-on reset

JTCK/SWCLK

ai17139

Figure 426 shows that the asynchronous TRACE output (TRACESWO) is multiplexed with TDO. This means that the asynchronous trace can only be used with SW-DP, not JTAG-DP.

33.3.1

Mechanism to select the JTAG-DP or the SW-DP

By default, the JTAG-Debug Port is active. If the debugger host wants to switch to the SW-DP, it must provide a dedicated JTAG sequence on TMS/TCK (respectively mapped to SWDIO and SWCLK) which disables the JTAG-DP and enables the SW-DP. This way it is possible to activate the SWDP using only the SWCLK and SWDIO pins. This sequence is: 1. 2. 3. Send more than 50 TCK cycles with TMS (SWDIO) =1 Send the 16-bit sequence on TMS (SWDIO) = 0111100111100111 (MSB transmitted first) Send more than 50 TCK cycles with TMS (SWDIO) =1

33.4

Pinout and debug port pins

The STM32F4xx MCUs are available in various packages with different numbers of available pins. As a result, some functionality (ETM) related to pin availability may differ between packages.

1377/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.4.1

SWJ debug port pins

Five pins are used as outputs from the STM32F4xx for the SWJ-DP as alternate functions of general-purpose I/Os. These pins are available on all packages. Table 223. SWJ debug port pins
JTAG debug port SWJ-DP pin name Type JTMS/SWDIO JTCK/SWCLK JTDI JTDO/TRACESWO NJTRST I I I O I Description JTAG Test Mode Selection JTAG Test Clock JTAG Test Data Input JTAG Test Data Output JTAG Test nReset Type IO I Debug assignment Serial Wire Data Input/Output Serial Wire Clock TRACESWO if async trace is enabled SW debug port Pin assign ment PA13 PA14 PA15 PB3 PB4

33.4.2

Flexible SWJ-DP pin assignment

After RESET (SYSRESETn or PORESETn), all five pins used for the SWJ-DP are assigned as dedicated pins immediately usable by the debugger host (note that the trace outputs are not assigned except if explicitly programmed by the debugger host). However, the STM32F4xx MCUs offer the possibility of disabling some or all of the SWJ-DP ports and so, of releasing the associated pins for general-purpose IO (GPIO) usage. For more details on how to disable SWJ-DP port pins, please refer to Section 7.3.2: I/O pin multiplexer and mapping. Table 224. Flexible SWJ-DP pin assignment
SWJ IO pin assigned Available debug ports PA13 / PA14 / PA15 / JTMS/ JTCK/ JTDI SWDIO SWCLK X X X X X X Released X X PB3 / JTDO X X PB4/ NJTRST X

Full SWJ (JTAG-DP + SW-DP) - Reset State Full SWJ (JTAG-DP + SW-DP) but without NJTRST JTAG-DP Disabled and SW-DP Enabled JTAG-DP Disabled and SW-DP Disabled

Note:

When the APB bridge write buffer is full, it takes one extra APB cycle when writing the GPIO_AFR register. This is because the deactivation of the JTAGSW pins is done in two cycles to guarantee a clean level on the nTRST and TCK input signals of the core.

Cycle 1: the JTAGSW input signals to the core are tied to 1 or 0 (to 1 for nTRST, TDI and TMS, to 0 for TCK) Cycle 2: the GPIO controller takes the control signals of the SWJTAG IO pins (like controls of direction, pull-up/down, Schmitt trigger activation, etc.).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1378/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33.4.3

Internal pull-up and pull-down on JTAG pins

It is necessary to ensure that the JTAG input pins are not floating since they are directly connected to flip-flops to control the debug mode features. Special care must be taken with the SWCLK/TCK pin which is directly connected to the clock of some of these flip-flops. To avoid any uncontrolled IO levels, the device embeds internal pull-ups and pull-downs on the JTAG input pins:

NJTRST: Internal pull-up JTDI: Internal pull-up JTMS/SWDIO: Internal pull-up TCK/SWCLK: Internal pull-down

Once a JTAG IO is released by the user software, the GPIO controller takes control again. The reset states of the GPIO control registers put the I/Os in the equivalent state:

NJTRST: AF input pull-up JTDI: AF input pull-up JTMS/SWDIO: AF input pull-up JTCK/SWCLK: AF input pull-down JTDO: AF output floating

The software can then use these I/Os as standard GPIOs. Note: The JTAG IEEE standard recommends to add pull-ups on TDI, TMS and nTRST but there is no special recommendation for TCK. However, for JTCK, the device needs an integrated pull-down. Having embedded pull-ups and pull-downs removes the need to add external resistors.

1379/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.4.4

Using serial wire and releasing the unused debug pins as GPIOs
To use the serial wire DP to release some GPIOs, the user software must change the GPIO (PA15, PB3 and PB4) configuration mode in the GPIO_MODER register. This releases PA15, PB3 and PB4 which now become available as GPIOs. When debugging, the host performs the following actions:

Under system reset, all SWJ pins are assigned (JTAG-DP + SW-DP). Under system reset, the debugger host sends the JTAG sequence to switch from the JTAG-DP to the SW-DP. Still under system reset, the debugger sets a breakpoint on vector reset. The system reset is released and the Core halts. All the debug communications from this point are done using the SW-DP. The other JTAG pins can then be reassigned as GPIOs by the user software.

Note:

For user software designs, note that: To release the debug pins, remember that they will be first configured either in input-pull-up (nTRST, TMS, TDI) or pull-down (TCK) or output tristate (TDO) for a certain duration after reset until the instant when the user software releases the pins. When debug pins (JTAG or SW or TRACE) are mapped, changing the corresponding IO pin configuration in the IOPORT controller has no effect.

33.5

STM32F4xx JTAG TAP connection

The STM32F4xx MCUs integrate two serially connected JTAG TAPs, the boundary scan TAP (IR is 5-bit wide) and the Cortex-M4F TAP (IR is 4-bit wide). To access the TAP of the Cortex-M4F for debug purposes: 1. 2. 3. First, it is necessary to shift the BYPASS instruction of the boundary scan TAP. Then, for each IR shift, the scan chain contains 9 bits (=5+4) and the unused TAP instruction must be shifted in using the BYPASS instruction. For each data shift, the unused TAP, which is in BYPASS mode, adds 1 extra data bit in the data scan chain.

Note:

Important: Once Serial-Wire is selected using the dedicated ARM JTAG sequence, the boundary scan TAP is automatically disabled (JTMS forced high).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1380/1422

Debug support (DBG) Figure 427. JTAG TAP connections

STM32F4xxx NJTRST JTMS
SW-DP Selected

RM0090

TMS nTRST

TMS nTRST

JTDI

TDI

TDO

TDI

TDO

Boundary scan TAP IR is 5-bit wide

JTDO

Cortex_M4F TAP
IR is 4-bit wide

MS19929V1

1381/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.6

ID codes and locking mechanism

There are several ID codes inside the STM32F4xx MCUs. ST strongly recommends tools designers to lock their debuggers using the MCU DEVICE ID code located in the external PPB memory map at address 0xE0042000.

33.6.1

MCU device ID code

The STM32F4xx MCUs integrate an MCU ID code. This ID identifies the ST MCU partnumber and the die revision. It is part of the DBG_MCU component and is mapped on the external PPB bus (see Section 33.16 on page 1395). This code is accessible using the JTAG debug port (4 to 5 pins) or the SW debug port (two pins) or by the user software. It is even accessible while the MCU is under system reset.

DBGMCU_IDCODE
Address: 0xE004 2000 Only 32-bits access supported. Read-only.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 REV_ID r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 DEV_ID Reserved r r r r r r r r r r r r r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Bits 31:16 REV_ID(15:0) Revision identifier This field indicates the revision of the device: 0x1000 = Revision A 0x1001 = Revision Z Bits 15:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 11:0 DEV_ID(11:0): Device identifier (STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx) The device ID is 0x413. Bits 11:0 DEV_ID(11:0): Device identifier (STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx) The device ID is 0x419.

33.6.2

Boundary scan TAP

JTAG ID code
The TAP of the STM32F4xx BSC (boundary scan) integrates a JTAG ID code equal to 0x06413041.

33.6.3

Cortex-M4F TAP
The TAP of the ARM Cortex-M4F integrates a JTAG ID code. This ID code is the ARM default one and has not been modified. This code is only accessible by the JTAG Debug Port. This code is 0x4BA00477 (corresponds to Cortex-M4F r0p1, see Section 33.2: Reference ARM documentation).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1382/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

Only the DEV_ID(11:0) should be used for identification by the debugger/programmer tools.

33.6.4

Cortex-M4F JEDEC-106 ID code

The ARM Cortex-M4F integrates a JEDEC-106 ID code. It is located in the 4KB ROM table mapped on the internal PPB bus at address 0xE00FF000_0xE00FFFFF. This code is accessible by the JTAG Debug Port (4 to 5 pins) or by the SW Debug Port (two pins) or by the user software.

33.7

JTAG debug port

A standard JTAG state machine is implemented with a 4-bit instruction register (IR) and five data registers (for full details, refer to the Cortex-M4Fr0p1 Technical Reference Manual (TRM), for references, please see Section 33.2: Reference ARM documentation). Table 225. JTAG debug port data registers
IR(3:0) 1111 1110 Data register BYPASS [1 bit] IDCODE [32 bits] ID CODE 0x4BA00477 (ARM Cortex-M4F r0p1 ID Code) Debug port access register This initiates a debug port and allows access to a debug port register. When transferring data IN: Bits 34:3 = DATA[31:0] = 32-bit data to transfer for a write request Bits 2:1 = A[3:2] = 2-bit address of a debug port register. Bit 0 = RnW = Read request (1) or write request (0). When transferring data OUT: Bits 34:3 = DATA[31:0] = 32-bit data which is read following a read request Bits 2:0 = ACK[2:0] = 3-bit Acknowledge: 010 = OK/FAULT 001 = WAIT OTHER = reserved Refer to Table 226 for a description of the A(3:2) bits Details

1010

DPACC [35 bits]

1383/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 225. JTAG debug port data registers (continued)

IR(3:0) Data register Details

Debug support (DBG)

1011

APACC [35 bits]

Access port access register Initiates an access port and allows access to an access port register. When transferring data IN: Bits 34:3 = DATA[31:0] = 32-bit data to shift in for a write request Bits 2:1 = A[3:2] = 2-bit address (sub-address AP registers). Bit 0 = RnW= Read request (1) or write request (0). When transferring data OUT: Bits 34:3 = DATA[31:0] = 32-bit data which is read following a read request Bits 2:0 = ACK[2:0] = 3-bit Acknowledge: 010 = OK/FAULT 001 = WAIT OTHER = reserved There are many AP Registers (see AHB-AP) addressed as the combination of: The shifted value A[3:2] The current value of the DP SELECT register Abort register Bits 31:1 = Reserved Bit 0 = DAPABORT: write 1 to generate a DAP abort.

1000

ABORT [35 bits]

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1384/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

Table 226. 32-bit debug port registers addressed through the shifted value A[3:2]
Address 0x0 A(3:2) value 00 Description Reserved, must be kept at reset value. DP CTRL/STAT register. Used to: Request a system or debug power-up Configure the transfer operation for AP accesses Control the pushed compare and pushed verify operations. Read some status flags (overrun, power-up acknowledges) DP SELECT register: Used to select the current access port and the active 4-words register window. Bits 31:24: APSEL: select the current AP Bits 23:8: reserved Bits 7:4: APBANKSEL: select the active 4-words register window on the current AP Bits 3:0: reserved DP RDBUFF register: Used to allow the debugger to get the final result after a sequence of operations (without requesting new JTAG-DP operation)

0x4

01

0x8

10

0xC

11

33.8
33.8.1

SW debug port
SW protocol introduction
This synchronous serial protocol uses two pins:

SWCLK: clock from host to target SWDIO: bidirectional

The protocol allows two banks of registers (DPACC registers and APACC registers) to be read and written to. Bits are transferred LSB-first on the wire. For SWDIO bidirectional management, the line must be pulled-up on the board (100 K recommended by ARM). Each time the direction of SWDIO changes in the protocol, a turnaround time is inserted where the line is not driven by the host nor the target. By default, this turnaround time is one bit time, however this can be adjusted by configuring the SWCLK frequency.

33.8.2

SW protocol sequence
Each sequence consist of three phases: 1. 2. 3. Packet request (8 bits) transmitted by the host Acknowledge response (3 bits) transmitted by the target Data transfer phase (33 bits) transmitted by the host or the target

1385/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 227. Packet request (8-bits)

Bit 0 1 2 4:3 5 6 7 Start APnDP RnW A(3:2) Parity Stop Park Name Must be 1 0: DP Access 1: AP Access 0: Write Request 1: Read Request Description

Debug support (DBG)

Address field of the DP or AP registers (refer to Table 226) Single bit parity of preceding bits 0

Not driven by the host. Must be read as 1 by the target because of the pull-up

Refer to the Cortex-M4Fr0p1 TRM for a detailed description of DPACC and APACC registers. The packet request is always followed by the turnaround time (default 1 bit) where neither the host nor target drive the line. Table 228. ACK response (3 bits)
Bit Name 001: FAULT 010: WAIT 100: OK Description

0..2

ACK

The ACK Response must be followed by a turnaround time only if it is a READ transaction or if a WAIT or FAULT acknowledge has been received. Table 229. DATA transfer (33 bits)
Bit 0..31 32 Name Description Write or Read data Single parity of the 32 data bits

WDATA or RDATA Parity

The DATA transfer must be followed by a turnaround time only if it is a READ transaction.

33.8.3

SW-DP state machine (reset, idle states, ID code)

The State Machine of the SW-DP has an internal ID code which identifies the SW-DP. It follows the JEP-106 standard. This ID code is the default ARM one and is set to 0x2BA01477 (corresponding to Cortex-M4F r0p1).

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1386/1422

Debug support (DBG) Note: Note that the SW-DP state machine is inactive until the target reads this ID code.

RM0090

The SW-DP state machine is in RESET STATE either after power-on reset, or after the DP has switched from JTAG to SWD or after the line is high for more than 50 cycles The SW-DP state machine is in IDLE STATE if the line is low for at least two cycles after RESET state. After RESET state, it is mandatory to first enter into an IDLE state AND to perform a READ access of the DP-SW ID CODE register. Otherwise, the target will issue a FAULT acknowledge response on another transactions.

Further details of the SW-DP state machine can be found in the Cortex-M4F r0p1 TRM and the CoreSight Design Kit r0p1 TRM.

33.8.4

DP and AP read/write accesses

Read accesses to the DP are not posted: the target response can be immediate (if ACK=OK) or can be delayed (if ACK=WAIT). Read accesses to the AP are posted. This means that the result of the access is returned on the next transfer. If the next access to be done is NOT an AP access, then the DP-RDBUFF register must be read to obtain the result. The READOK flag of the DP-CTRL/STAT register is updated on every AP read access or RDBUFF read request to know if the AP read access was successful. The SW-DP implements a write buffer (for both DP or AP writes), that enables it to accept a write operation even when other transactions are still outstanding. If the write buffer is full, the target acknowledge response is WAIT. With the exception of IDCODE read or CTRL/STAT read or ABORT write which are accepted even if the write buffer is full. Because of the asynchronous clock domains SWCLK and HCLK, two extra SWCLK cycles are needed after a write transaction (after the parity bit) to make the write effective internally. These cycles should be applied while driving the line low (IDLE state) This is particularly important when writing the CTRL/STAT for a power-up request. If the next transaction (requiring a power-up) occurs immediately, it will fail.

33.8.5

SW-DP registers
Access to these registers are initiated when APnDP=0 Table 230. SW-DP registers
A(3:2) R/W CTRLSEL bit of SELECT register Register Notes The manufacturer code is not set to ST code. 0x2BA01477 (identifies the SW-DP)

00 00

Read Write

IDCODE ABORT

1387/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 230. SW-DP registers (continued)

A(3:2) R/W CTRLSEL bit of SELECT register Register

Debug support (DBG)

Notes

01

Read/Write

Purpose is to: request a system or debug power-up configure the transfer operation for AP accesses DP-CTRL/STAT control the pushed compare and pushed verify operations. read some status flags (overrun, power-up acknowledges) WIRE CONTROL READ RESEND SELECT Purpose is to configure the physical serial port protocol (like the duration of the turnaround time) Enables recovery of the read data from a corrupted debugger transfer, without repeating the original AP transfer. The purpose is to select the current access port and the active 4-words register window This read buffer is useful because AP accesses are posted (the result of a read AP request is available on the next AP transaction). This read buffer captures data from the AP, presented as the result of a previous read, without initiating a new transaction

01

Read/Write

10

Read

10

Write

11

Read/Write

READ BUFFER

33.8.6

SW-AP registers
Access to these registers are initiated when APnDP=1 There are many AP Registers (see AHB-AP) addressed as the combination of:

The shifted value A[3:2] The current value of the DP SELECT register

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1388/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33.9

AHB-AP (AHB access port) - valid for both JTAG-DP and SW-DP
Features:

System access is independent of the processor status. Either SW-DP or JTAG-DP accesses AHB-AP. The AHB-AP is an AHB master into the Bus Matrix. Consequently, it can access all the data buses (Dcode Bus, System Bus, internal and external PPB bus) but the ICode bus. Bitband transactions are supported. AHB-AP transactions bypass the FPB.

The address of the 32-bits AHP-AP resisters are 6-bits wide (up to 64 words or 256 bytes) and consists of: c) d) Bits [7:4] = the bits [7:4] APBANKSEL of the DP SELECT register Bits [3:2] = the 2 address bits of A(3:2) of the 35-bit packet request for SW-DP.

The AHB-AP of the Cortex-M4F includes 9 x 32-bits registers: Table 231. Cortex-M4F AHB-AP registers
Address offset 0x00 0x04 0x0C 0x10 0x14 0x18 0x1C 0xF8 0xFC Register name AHB-AP Control and Status Word AHB-AP Transfer Address AHB-AP Data Read/Write AHB-AP Banked Data 0 AHB-AP Banked Data 1 AHB-AP Banked Data 2 AHB-AP Banked Data 3 AHB-AP Debug ROM Address Base Address of the debug interface AHB-AP ID Register Directly maps the 4 aligned data words without rewriting the Transfer Address Register. Notes Configures and controls transfers through the AHB interface (size, hprot, status on current transfer, address increment type

Refer to the Cortex-M4F r0p1 TRM for further details.

1389/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.10

Core debug
Core debug is accessed through the core debug registers. Debug access to these registers is by means of the Advanced High-performance Bus (AHB-AP) port. The processor can access these registers directly over the internal Private Peripheral Bus (PPB). It consists of 4 registers: Table 232. Core debug registers
Register Description The 32-bit Debug Halting Control and Status Register This provides status information about the state of the processor enable core debug halt and step the processor The 17-bit Debug Core Register Selector Register: This selects the processor register to transfer data to or from. The 32-bit Debug Core Register Data Register: This holds data for reading and writing registers to and from the processor selected by the DCRSR (Selector) register. The 32-bit Debug Exception and Monitor Control Register: This provides Vector Catching and Debug Monitor Control. This register contains a bit named TRCENA which enable the use of a TRACE.

DHCSR

DCRSR

DCRDR

DEMCR

Note:

Important: these registers are not reset by a system reset. They are only reset by a poweron reset. Refer to the Cortex-M4F r0p1 TRM for further details. To Halt on reset, it is necessary to:

enable the bit0 (VC_CORRESET) of the Debug and Exception Monitor Control Register enable the bit0 (C_DEBUGEN) of the Debug Halting Control and Status Register.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1390/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33.11

Capability of the debugger host to connect under system reset

The STM32F4xx MCUs reset system comprises the following reset sources:

POR (power-on reset) which asserts a RESET at each power-up. Internal watchdog reset Software reset External reset

The Cortex-M4F differentiates the reset of the debug part (generally PORRESETn) and the other one (SYSRESETn) This way, it is possible for the debugger to connect under System Reset, programming the Core Debug Registers to halt the core when fetching the reset vector. Then the host can release the system reset and the core will immediately halt without having executed any instructions. In addition, it is possible to program any debug features under System Reset. Note: It is highly recommended for the debugger host to connect (set a breakpoint in the reset vector) under system reset.

33.12

FPB (Flash patch breakpoint)

The FPB unit:

implements hardware breakpoints patches code and data from code space to system space. This feature gives the possibility to correct software bugs located in the Code Memory Space.

The use of a Software Patch or a Hardware Breakpoint is exclusive. The FPB consists of:

2 literal comparators for matching against literal loads from Code Space and remapping to a corresponding area in the System Space. 6 instruction comparators for matching against instruction fetches from Code Space. They can be used either to remap to a corresponding area in the System Space or to generate a Breakpoint Instruction to the core.

1391/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.13

DWT (data watchpoint trigger)

The DWT unit consists of four comparators. They are configurable as:

a hardware watchpoint or a trigger to an ETM or a PC sampler or a data address sampler

The DWT also provides some means to give some profiling informations. For this, some counters are accessible to give the number of:

Clock cycle Folded instructions Load store unit (LSU) operations Sleep cycles CPI (clock per instructions) Interrupt overhead

33.14
33.14.1

ITM (instrumentation trace macrocell)

General description
The ITM is an application-driven trace source that supports printf style debugging to trace Operating System (OS) and application events, and emits diagnostic system information. The ITM emits trace information as packets which can be generated as: Software trace. Software can write directly to the ITM stimulus registers to emit packets. Hardware trace. The DWT generates these packets, and the ITM emits them. Time stamping. Timestamps are emitted relative to packets. The ITM contains a 21-bit counter to generate the timestamp. The Cortex-M4F clock or the bit clock rate of the Serial Wire Viewer (SWV) output clocks the counter. The packets emitted by the ITM are output to the TPIU (Trace Port Interface Unit). The formatter of the TPIU adds some extra packets (refer to TPIU) and then output the complete packets sequence to the debugger host. The bit TRCEN of the Debug Exception and Monitor Control Register must be enabled before you program or use the ITM.

33.14.2

Time stamp packets, synchronization and overflow packets

Time stamp packets encode time stamp information, generic control and synchronization. It uses a 21-bit timestamp counter (with possible prescalers) which is reset at each time stamp packet emission. This counter can be either clocked by the CPU clock or the SWV clock. A synchronization packet consists of 6 bytes equal to 0x80_00_00_00_00_00 which is emitted to the TPIU as 00 00 00 00 00 80 (LSB emitted first). A synchronization packet is a timestamp packet control. It is emitted at each DWT trigger.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1392/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

For this, the DWT must be configured to trigger the ITM: the bit CYCCNTENA (bit0) of the DWT Control Register must be set. In addition, the bit2 (SYNCENA) of the ITM Trace Control Register must be set. Note: If the SYNENA bit is not set, the DWT generates Synchronization triggers to the TPIU which will send only TPIU synchronization packets and not ITM synchronization packets. An overflow packet consists is a special timestamp packets which indicates that data has been written but the FIFO was full. Table 233. Main ITM registers
Address @E0000FB0 Register ITM lock access Details Write 0xC5ACCE55 to unlock Write Access to the other ITM registers Bits 31-24 = Always 0 Bits 23 = Busy Bits 22-16 = 7-bits ATB ID which identifies the source of the trace data. Bits 15-10 = Always 0 Bits 9:8 = TSPrescale = Time Stamp Prescaler Bits 7-5 = Reserved @E0000E80 ITM trace control Bit 4 = SWOENA = Enable SWV behavior (to clock the timestamp counter by the SWV clock). Bit 3 = DWTENA: Enable the DWT Stimulus Bit 2 = SYNCENA: this bit must be to 1 to enable the DWT to generate synchronization triggers so that the TPIU can then emit the synchronization packets. Bit 1 = TSENA (Timestamp Enable) Bit 0 = ITMENA: Global Enable Bit of the ITM Bit 3: mask to enable tracing ports31:24 Bit 2: mask to enable tracing ports23:16 @E0000E40 ITM trace privilege Bit 1: mask to enable tracing ports15:8 Bit 0: mask to enable tracing ports7:0 @E0000E00 ITM trace enable Each bit enables the corresponding Stimulus port to generate trace. Write the 32-bits data on the selected Stimulus Port (32 available) to be traced out.

@E0000000- Stimulus port E000007C registers 0-31

1393/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

Example of configuration
To output a simple value to the TPIU:

Configure the TPIU and assign TRACE I/Os by configuring the DBGMCU_CR (refer to Section 33.17.2: TRACE pin assignment and Section 33.16.3: Debug MCU configuration register) Write 0xC5ACCE55 to the ITM Lock Access Register to unlock the write access to the ITM registers Write 0x00010005 to the ITM Trace Control Register to enable the ITM with Sync enabled and an ATB ID different from 0x00 Write 0x1 to the ITM Trace Enable Register to enable the Stimulus Port 0 Write 0x1 to the ITM Trace Privilege Register to unmask stimulus ports 7:0 Write the value to output in the Stimulus Port Register 0: this can be done by software (using a printf function)

33.15
33.15.1

ETM (Embedded trace macrocell)

General description
The ETM enables the reconstruction of program execution. Data are traced using the Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT) component or the Instruction Trace Macrocell (ITM) whereas instructions are traced using the Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM). The ETM transmits information as packets and is triggered by embedded resources. These resources must be programmed independently and the trigger source is selected using the Trigger Event Register (0xE0041008). An event could be a simple event (address match from an address comparator) or a logic equation between 2 events. The trigger source is one of the fourth comparators of the DWT module, The following events can be monitored:

Clock cycle matching Data address matching

For more informations on the trigger resources refer to Section 33.13: DWT (data watchpoint trigger). The packets transmitted by the ETM are output to the TPIU (Trace Port Interface Unit). The formatter of the TPIU adds some extra packets (refer to Section 33.17: TPIU (trace port interface unit)) and then outputs the complete packet sequence to the debugger host.

33.15.2

Signal protocol, packet types

This part is described in the chapter 7 ETMv3 Signal Protocol of the ARM IHI 0014N document.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1394/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33.15.3

Main ETM registers

For more information on registers refer to the chapter 3 of the ARM IHI 0014N specification. Table 234. Main ETM registers
Address Register Details Write 0xC5ACCE55 to unlock the write access to the other ETM registers. This register controls the general operation of the ETM, for instance how tracing is enabled. This register provides information about the current status of the trace and trigger logic. This register defines the event that will control trigger. This register defines which comparator is selected. This register defines the trace enabling event. This register defines the traces used by the trigger source to start and stop the trace, respectively.

0xE0041FB0 ETM Lock Access 0xE0041000 ETM Control 0xE0041010 ETM Status 0xE0041008 ETM Trigger Event 0xE004101C ETM Trace Enable Control

0xE0041020 ETM Trace Enable Event 0xE0041024 ETM Trace Start/Stop

33.15.4

Configuration example
To output a simple value to the TPIU:

Configure the TPIU and enable the I/IO_TRACEN to assign TRACE I/Os in the STM32F4xxdebug configuration register. Write 0xC5ACCE55 to the ETM Lock Access Register to unlock the write access to the ITM registers Write 0x00001D1E to the control register (configure the trace) Write 0000406F to the Trigger Event register (define the trigger event) Write 0000006F to the Trace Enable Event register (define an event to start/stop) Write 00000001 to the Trace Start/stop register (enable the trace) Write 0000191E to the ETM Control Register (end of configuration)

33.16

MCU debug component (DBGMCU)

The MCU debug component helps the debugger provide support for:

Low-power modes Clock control for timers, watchdog, I2C and bxCAN during a breakpoint Control of the trace pins assignment

33.16.1

Debug support for low-power modes

To enter low-power mode, the instruction WFI or WFE must be executed. The MCU implements several low-power modes which can either deactivate the CPU clock or reduce the power of the CPU.

1395/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG) The core does not allow FCLK or HCLK to be turned off during a debug session. As these are required for the debugger connection, during a debug, they must remain active. The MCU integrates special means to allow the user to debug software in low-power modes. For this, the debugger host must first set some debug configuration registers to change the low-power mode behavior:

In Sleep mode, DBG_SLEEP bit of DBGMCU_CR register must be previously set by the debugger. This will feed HCLK with the same clock that is provided to FCLK (system clock previously configured by the software). In Stop mode, the bit DBG_STOP must be previously set by the debugger. This will enable the internal RC oscillator clock to feed FCLK and HCLK in STOP mode.

33.16.2

Debug support for timers, watchdog, bxCAN and I2C

During a breakpoint, it is necessary to choose how the counter of timers and watchdog should behave:

They can continue to count inside a breakpoint. This is usually required when a PWM is controlling a motor, for example. They can stop to count inside a breakpoint. This is required for watchdog purposes.

For the bxCAN, the user can choose to block the update of the receive register during a breakpoint. For the I2C, the user can choose to block the SMBUS timeout during a breakpoint.

33.16.3

Debug MCU configuration register

This register allows the configuration of the MCU under DEBUG. This concerns:

Low-power mode support Timer and watchdog counter support bxCAN communication support Trace pin assignment

This DBGMCU_CR is mapped on the External PPB bus at address 0xE0042004 It is asynchronously reset by the PORESET (and not the system reset). It can be written by the debugger under system reset. If the debugger host does not support these features, it is still possible for the user software to write to these registers.

DBGMCU_CR
Address: 0xE004 2004 Only 32-bit access supported POR Reset: 0x0000 0000 (not reset by system reset)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1396/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

Reserved 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 TRACE _ IOEN rw 4 3 2 DBG_ STAND BY rw 1 DBG_ STOP rw 0 DBG_ SLEEP rw

Reserved

TRACE_ MODE [1:0] rw rw

Reserved

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bits 7:5 TRACE_MODE[1:0] and TRACE_IOEN: Trace pin assignment control With TRACE_IOEN=0: TRACE_MODE=xx: TRACE pins not assigned (default state) With TRACE_IOEN=1: TRACE_MODE=00: TRACE pin assignment for Asynchronous Mode TRACE_MODE=01: TRACE pin assignment for Synchronous Mode with a TRACEDATA size of 1 TRACE_MODE=10: TRACE pin assignment for Synchronous Mode with a TRACEDATA size of 2 TRACE_MODE=11: TRACE pin assignment for Synchronous Mode with a TRACEDATA size of 4 Bits 4:3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value. Bit 2 DBG_STANDBY: Debug Standby mode 0: (FCLK=Off, HCLK=Off) The whole digital part is unpowered. From software point of view, exiting from Standby is identical than fetching reset vector (except a few status bit indicated that the MCU is resuming from Standby) 1: (FCLK=On, HCLK=On) In this case, the digital part is not unpowered and FCLK and HCLK are provided by the internal RC oscillator which remains active. In addition, the MCU generate a system reset during Standby mode so that exiting from Standby is identical than fetching from reset Bit 1 DBG_STOP: Debug Stop mode 0: (FCLK=Off, HCLK=Off) In STOP mode, the clock controller disables all clocks (including HCLK and FCLK). When exiting from STOP mode, the clock configuration is identical to the one after RESET (CPU clocked by the 8 MHz internal RC oscillator (HSI)). Consequently, the software must reprogram the clock controller to enable the PLL, the Xtal, etc. 1: (FCLK=On, HCLK=On) In this case, when entering STOP mode, FCLK and HCLK are provided by the internal RC oscillator which remains active in STOP mode. When exiting STOP mode, the software must reprogram the clock controller to enable the PLL, the Xtal, etc. (in the same way it would do in case of DBG_STOP=0) Bit 0 DBG_SLEEP: Debug Sleep mode 0: (FCLK=On, HCLK=Off) In Sleep mode, FCLK is clocked by the system clock as previously configured by the software while HCLK is disabled. In Sleep mode, the clock controller configuration is not reset and remains in the previously programmed state. Consequently, when exiting from Sleep mode, the software does not need to reconfigure the clock controller. 1: (FCLK=On, HCLK=On) In this case, when entering Sleep mode, HCLK is fed by the same clock that is provided to FCLK (system clock as previously configured by the software).

1397/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.16.4

Debug MCU APB1 freeze register (DBGMCU_APB1_FZ)

The DBGMCU_APB1_FZ register is used to configure the MCU under Debug. It concerns APB1 peripherals. It is mapped on the external PPB bus at address 0xE004 2008. The register is asynchronously reset by the POR (and not the system reset). It can be written by the debugger under system reset. Address : 0xE004 2008 Only 32-bits access are supported. Power on reset (POR): 0x0000 0000 (not reset by system reset)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23 DBG_I2C3_SMBUS_TIMEOUT

22 DBG_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT

21 DBG_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT

20

19

18

17

16

DBG_CAN2_STOP

DBG_CAN1_STOP

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

rw 15 14 13 12 DBG_IWDG_STOP 11 DBG_WWDG_STOP 10 DBG_RTC_STOP

rw 9 8 DBG_TIM14_STOP

rw 7 DBG_TIM13_STOP

rw 6 DBG_TIM12_STOP

rw 5 DBG_TIM7_STOP 4 DBG_TIM6_STOP 3 DBG_TIM5_STOP 2 DBG_TIM4_STOP 1 DBG_TIM3_STOP 0 DBG_TIM2_STOP rw

Reserved

rw

rw

Reserved

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

rw

Bits 31:27

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 26 DBG_CAN2_STOP: Debug CAN2 stopped when Core is halted 0: Same behavior as in normal mode 1: The CAN2 receive registers are frozen Bit 25 DBG_CAN1_STOP: Debug CAN2 stopped when Core is halted 0: Same behavior as in normal mode 1: The CAN2 receive registers are frozen Bit 24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 23 DBG_I2C3_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: SMBUS timeout mode stopped when Core is halted 0: Same behavior as in normal mode 1: The SMBUS timeout is frozen Bit 22 DBG_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: SMBUS timeout mode stopped when Core is halted 0: Same behavior as in normal mode 1: The SMBUS timeout is frozen Bit 21 DBG_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: SMBUS timeout mode stopped when Core is halted 0: Same behavior as in normal mode 1: The SMBUS timeout is frozen

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1398/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

Bit 20:13

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 12 DBG_IWDG_STOP: Debug independent watchdog stopped when core is halted 0: The independent watchdog counter clock continues even if the core is halted 1: The independent watchdog counter clock is stopped when the core is halted Bit 11 DBG_WWDG_STOP: Debug Window Watchdog stopped when Core is halted 0: The window watchdog counter clock continues even if the core is halted 1: The window watchdog counter clock is stopped when the core is halted Bit 10 DBG_RTC_STOP: RTC stopped when Core is halted 0: The RTC counter clock continues even if the core is halted 1: The RTC counter clock is stopped when the core is halted Bit 9 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 8:0 DBG_TIMx_STOP: TIMx counter stopped when core is halted (x=2..7, 12..14) 0: The clock of the involved Timer Counter is fed even if the core is halted 1: The clock of the involved Timer counter is stopped when the core is halted

33.16.5

Debug MCU APB2 Freeze register (DBGMCU_APB2_FZ)

The DBGMCU_APB2_FZ register is used to configure the MCU under Debug. It concerns APB2 peripherals. This register is mapped on the external PPB bus at address 0xE004 200C It is asynchronously reset by the POR (and not the system reset). It can be written by the debugger under system reset. Address: 0xE004 200C Only 32-bit access is supported. POR: 0x0000 0000 (not reset by system reset)

31

30

29

28

27

26

25 Reserved

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

DBG_TIM11 DBG_TIM10 DBG_TIM9_ _STOP _STOP STOP rw rw 1 rw 0

15

14

13

12

11

10

8 Reserved

DBG_TIM8_ DBG_TIM1_ STOP STOP rw rw

Bits 31:19

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 18:16 DBG_TIMx_STOP: TIMx counter stopped when core is halted (x=9..11) 0: The clock of the involved Timer Counter is fed even if the core is halted 1: The clock of the involved Timer counter is stopped when the core is halted

1399/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

Bits 15:2

Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 1 DBG_TIM8_STOP: TIM8 counter stopped when core is halted 0: The clock of the involved Timer Counter is fed even if the core is halted 1: The clock of the involved Timer counter is stopped when the core is halted Bit 0 DBG_TIM1_STOP: TIM1 counter stopped when core is halted 0: The clock of the involved Timer Counter is fed even if the core is halted 1: The clock of the involved Timer counter is stopped when the core is halted

33.17
33.17.1

TPIU (trace port interface unit)

Introduction
The TPIU acts as a bridge between the on-chip trace data from the ITM and the ETM. The output data stream encapsulates the trace source ID, that is then captured by a trace port analyzer (TPA). The core embeds a simple TPIU, especially designed for low-cost debug (consisting of a special version of the CoreSight TPIU). Figure 428. TPIU block diagram
CLK domain TPIU TRACECLKIN domain

TRACECLKIN ETM Asynchronous FIFO TPIU formatter ITM Asynchronous FIFO Trace out (serializer) TRACECK TRACEDATA [3:0] TRACESWO

External PPB bus

ai17114

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1400/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33.17.2

TRACE pin assignment

Asynchronous mode The asynchronous mode requires 1 extra pin and is available on all packages. It is only available if using Serial Wire mode (not in JTAG mode).

Table 235. Asynchronous TRACE pin assignment

Trace synchronous mode TPUI pin name Type TRACESWO

Description TRACE Async Data Output

STM32F4xx pin assignment PB3

Synchronous mode The synchronous mode requires from 2 to 6 extra pins depending on the data trace size and is only available in the larger packages. In addition it is available in JTAG mode and in Serial Wire mode and provides better bandwidth output capabilities than asynchronous trace.

Table 236. Synchronous TRACE pin assignment

Trace synchronous mode TPUI pin name Type TRACECK TRACED[3:0] O O Description TRACE Clock TRACE Sync Data Outputs Can be 1, 2 or 4. STM32F4xx pin assignment PE2 PE[6:3]

TPUI TRACE pin assignment

By default, these pins are NOT assigned. They can be assigned by setting the TRACE_IOEN and TRACE_MODE bits in the MCU Debug component configuration register. This configuration has to be done by the debugger host. In addition, the number of pins to assign depends on the trace configuration (asynchronous or synchronous).

Asynchronous mode: 1 extra pin is needed Synchronous mode: from 2 to 5 extra pins are needed depending on the size of the data trace port register (1, 2 or 4): TRACECK TRACED(0) if port size is configured to 1, 2 or 4 TRACED(1) if port size is configured to 2 or 4 TRACED(2) if port size is configured to 4 TRACED(3) if port size is configured to 4

To assign the TRACE pin, the debugger host must program the bits TRACE_IOEN and TRACE_MODE[1:0] of the Debug MCU configuration Register (DBGMCU_CR). By default the TRACE pins are not assigned. This register is mapped on the external PPB and is reset by the PORESET (and not by the SYSTEM reset). It can be written by the debugger under SYSTEM reset.

1401/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 237. Flexible TRACE pin assignment

DBGMCU_CR register TRACE_ TRACE_ IOEN MODE[1:0] 0 1 1 1 1 XX 00 01 10 11 TRACE IO pin assigned Pins assigned for: PB3 / JTDO/ TRACESWO Released (1) TRACESWO TRACECK TRACED[0] Released (1)

Debug support (DBG)

PE2 / PE3 / PE4 / PE5 / PE6 / TRACECK TRACED[0] TRACED[1] TRACED[2] TRACED[3]

No Trace (default state) Asynchronous Trace Synchronous Trace 1 bit Synchronous Trace 2 bit Synchronous Trace 4 bit

Released (usable as GPIO)

TRACECK TRACED[0] TRACED[1] TRACECK TRACED[0] TRACED[1] TRACED[2] TRACED[3]

1. When Serial Wire mode is used, it is released. But when JTAG is used, it is assigned to JTDO.

Note:

By default, the TRACECLKIN input clock of the TPIU is tied to GND. It is assigned to HCLK two clock cycles after the bit TRACE_IOEN has been set. The debugger must then program the Trace Mode by writing the PROTOCOL[1:0] bits in the SPP_R (Selected Pin Protocol) register of the TPIU.

PROTOCOL=00: Trace Port Mode (synchronous) PROTOCOL=01 or 10: Serial Wire (Manchester or NRZ) Mode (asynchronous mode). Default state is 01

It then also configures the TRACE port size by writing the bits [3:0] in the CPSPS_R (Current Sync Port Size Register) of the TPIU:

0x1 for 1 pin (default state) 0x2 for 2 pins 0x8 for 4 pins

33.17.3

TPUI formatter
The formatter protocol outputs data in 16-byte frames:

seven bytes of data eight bytes of mixed-use bytes consisting of: 1 bit (LSB) to indicate it is a DATA byte (0) or an ID byte (1). 7 bits (MSB) which can be data or change of source ID trace.

one byte of auxiliary bits where each bit corresponds to one of the eight mixed-use bytes: if the corresponding byte was a data, this bit gives bit0 of the data. if the corresponding byte was an ID change, this bit indicates when that ID change takes effect.

Note:

Refer to the ARM CoreSight Architecture Specification v1.0 (ARM IHI 0029B) for further information

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1402/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33.17.4

TPUI frame synchronization packets

The TPUI can generate two types of synchronization packets:

The Frame Synchronization packet (or Full Word Synchronization packet) It consists of the word: 0x7F_FF_FF_FF (LSB emitted first). This sequence can not occur at any other time provided that the ID source code 0x7F has not been used. It is output periodically between frames. In continuous mode, the TPA must discard all these frames once a synchronization frame has been found.

The Half-Word Synchronization packet It consists of the half word: 0x7F_FF (LSB emitted first). It is output periodically between or within frames. These packets are only generated in continuous mode and enable the TPA to detect that the TRACE port is in IDLE mode (no TRACE to be captured). When detected by the TPA, it must be discarded.

33.17.5

Transmission of the synchronization frame packet

There is no Synchronization Counter register implemented in the TPIU of the core. Consequently, the synchronization trigger can only be generated by the DWT. Refer to the registers DWT Control Register (bits SYNCTAP[11:10]) and the DWT Current PC Sampler Cycle Count Register. The TPUI Frame synchronization packet (0x7F_FF_FF_FF) is emitted:

after each TPIU reset release. This reset is synchronously released with the rising edge of the TRACECLKIN clock. This means that this packet is transmitted when the TRACE_IOEN bit in the DBGMCU_CFG register is set. In this case, the word 0x7F_FF_FF_FF is not followed by any formatted packet. at each DWT trigger (assuming DWT has been previously configured). Two cases occur: If the bit SYNENA of the ITM is reset, only the word 0x7F_FF_FF_FF is emitted without any formatted stream which follows. If the bit SYNENA of the ITM is set, then the ITM synchronization packets will follow (0x80_00_00_00_00_00), formatted by the TPUI (trace source ID added).

33.17.6

Synchronous mode
The trace data output size can be configured to 4, 2 or 1 pin: TRACED(3:0) The output clock is output to the debugger (TRACECK) Here, TRACECLKIN is driven internally and is connected to HCLK only when TRACE is used.

Note:

In this synchronous mode, it is not required to provide a stable clock frequency. The TRACE I/Os (including TRACECK) are driven by the rising edge of TRACLKIN (equal to HCLK). Consequently, the output frequency of TRACECK is equal to HCLK/2.

1403/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.17.7

Asynchronous mode
This is a low cost alternative to output the trace using only 1 pin: this is the asynchronous output pin TRACESWO. Obviously there is a limited bandwidth. TRACESWO is multiplexed with JTDO when using the SW-DP pin. This way, this functionality is available in all STM32F4xx packages. This asynchronous mode requires a constant frequency for TRACECLKIN. For the standard UART (NRZ) capture mechanism, 5% accuracy is needed. The Manchester encoded version is tolerant up to 10%.

33.17.8

TRACECLKIN connection inside the STM32F4xx

In the STM32F4xx, this TRACECLKIN input is internally connected to HCLK. This means that when in asynchronous trace mode, the application is restricted to use to time frames where the CPU frequency is stable.

Note:

Important: when using asynchronous trace: it is important to be aware that: The default clock of the STM32F4xx MCUs is the internal RC oscillator. Its frequency under reset is different from the one after reset release. This is because the RC calibration is the default one under system reset and is updated at each system reset release. Consequently, the trace port analyzer (TPA) should not enable the trace (with the TRACE_IOEN bit) under system reset, because a Synchronization Frame Packet will be issued with a different bit time than trace packets which will be transmitted after reset release.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1404/1422

Debug support (DBG)

RM0090

33.17.9

TPIU registers
The TPIU APB registers can be read and written only if the bit TRCENA of the Debug Exception and Monitor Control Register (DEMCR) is set. Otherwise, the registers are read as zero (the output of this bit enables the PCLK of the TPIU). Table 238. Important TPIU registers
Address Register Description Allows the trace port size to be selected: Bit 0: Port size = 1 Bit 1: Port size = 2 Bit 2: Port size = 3, not supported Bit 3: Port Size = 4 Only 1 bit must be set. By default, the port size is one bit. (0x00000001) Allows the Trace Port Protocol to be selected: Bit1:0= 00: Sync Trace Port Mode 01: Serial Wire Output - manchester (default value) 10: Serial Wire Output - NRZ 11: reserved Bit 31-9 = always 0 Bit 8 = TrigIn = always 1 to indicate that triggers are indicated Bit 7-4 = always 0 Bit 3-2 = always 0 Bit 1 = EnFCont. In Sync Trace mode (Select_Pin_Protocol register bit1:0=00), this bit is forced to 1: the formatter is automatically enabled in continuous mode. In asynchronous mode (Select_Pin_Protocol register bit1:0 <> 00), this bit can be written to activate or not the formatter. Bit 0 = always 0 The resulting default value is 0x102 Note: In synchronous mode, because the TRACECTL pin is not mapped outside the chip, the formatter is always enabled in continuous mode -this way the formatter inserts some control packets to identify the source of the trace packets). Not used in Cortex-M4F, always read as 0x00000008

0xE0040004 Current port size

0xE00400F0

Selected pin protocol

0xE0040304

Formatter and flush control

0xE0040300

Formatter and flush status

1405/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Debug support (DBG)

33.17.10 Example of configuration

Set the bit TRCENA in the Debug Exception and Monitor Control Register (DEMCR) Write the TPIU Current Port Size Register to the desired value (default is 0x1 for a 1-bit port size) Write TPIU Formatter and Flush Control Register to 0x102 (default value) Write the TPIU Select Pin Protocol to select the sync or async mode. Example: 0x2 for async NRZ mode (UART like) Write the DBGMCU control register to 0x20 (bit IO_TRACEN) to assign TRACE I/Os for async mode. A TPIU Sync packet is emitted at this time (FF_FF_FF_7F) Configure the ITM and write the ITM Stimulus register to output a value

33.18

DBG register map

The following table summarizes the Debug registers
.

Table 239. DBG register map and reset values

Addr. Register 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
REV_ID Reserved DEV_ID X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DBG_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT X X X X X X X X X X X X DBG_TIM7_STOP DBG_TIM6_STOP DBG_TIM5_STOP DBG_TIM8_STOP Reserved Reserved 0 DBG_I2C3_SMBUS_TIMEOUT DBG_I2C2_SMBUS_TIMEOUT DBG_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved TRAC E_ MODE [1:0] TR AC E_ IO E N DBG_STANDBY 0 0 DBG_WWDG_STOP DBG_TIM14_STOP DBG_TIM13_STOP DBG_TIM12_STOP DBG_IWDG_STOP DBG_CAN2_STOP DBG_CAN1_STOP DBG_TIM7_STOP DBG_TIM6_STOP DBG_TIM5_STOP DBG_TIM4_STOP DBG_TIM3_STOP 0 DBG_TIM8_STOP 0 Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 DBG_TIM11_STOP DBG_TIM10_STOP DBG_TIM9_STOP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved 0 0 0

0xE004 2000

DBGMCU_IDC ODE

Reset value(1)

0xE004 2004

DBGMCU_CR

Reset value

0xE004 2008

DBGMCU_ APB1_FZ

Reset value

0xE004 200C

DBGMCU_ APB2_FZ

Reset value

1. The reset value is product dependent. For more information, refer to Section 33.6.1: MCU device ID code.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1406/1422

DBG_TIM1_STOP 0

DBG_TIM2_STOP 0

DBG_RTC_STOP

Reserved

Reserved

DBG_SLEEP 0

DBG_STOP

Device electronic signature

RM0090

34

Device electronic signature

The electronic signature is stored in the Flash memory area. It can be read using the JTAG/SWD or the CPU. It contains factory-programmed identification data that allow the user firmware or other external devices to automatically match its interface to the characteristics of the STM32F4xx microcontrollers.

34.1

Unique device ID register (96 bits)

The unique device identifier is ideally suited:

for use as serial numbers (for example USB string serial numbers or other end applications) for use as security keys in order to increase the security of code in Flash memory while using and combining this unique ID with software cryptographic primitives and protocols before programming the internal Flash memory to activate secure boot processes, etc.

The 96-bit unique device identifier provides a reference number which is unique for any device and in any context. These bits can never be altered by the user. The 96-bit unique device identifier can also be read in single bytes/half-words/words in different ways and then be concatenated using a custom algorithm.

Base address: 0x1FFF 7A10

Address offset: 0x00 Read only = 0xXXXX XXXX where X is factory-programmed
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 U_ID(31:0) r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bits 31:0 U_ID(31:0): 31:0 unique ID bits

Address offset: 0x04 Read only = 0xXXXX XXXX where X is factory-programmed

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

U_ID(63:48) r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

U_ID(47:32) r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:0 U_ID(63:32): 63:32 unique ID bits

1407/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Address offset: 0x08 Read only = 0xXXXX XXXX where X is factory-programmed
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21

Device electronic signature

20

19

18

17

16

U_ID(95:80) r 15 r 14 r 13 r 12 r 11 r 10 r 9 r 8 r 7 r 6 r 5 r 4 r 3 r 2 r 1 r 0

U_ID(79:64) r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r

Bits 31:0 U_ID(95:64): 95:64 Unique ID bits.

34.2

Flash size
Base address: 0x1FFF 7A22 Address offset: 0x00 Read only = 0xXXXX where X is factory-programmed

15

14

13

12

11

10

8 F_SIZE

Bits 15:0 F_ID(15:0): Flash memory size This bitfield indicates the size of the device Flash memory expressed in Kbytes. As an example, 0x0400 corresponds to 1024 Kbytes.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1408/1422

RM0090

A
ADC_CCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 ADC_CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ADC_CR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 ADC_CR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ADC_CSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 ADC_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ADC_HTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ADC_JDRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ADC_JOFRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ADC_JSQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ADC_LTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ADC_SMPR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 ADC_SMPR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 ADC_SQR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ADC_SQR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ADC_SQR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ADC_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

CRYP_IV1LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 CRYP_IV1RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 CRYP_K0LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 CRYP_K0RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 CRYP_K1LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 CRYP_K1RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 CRYP_K2LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 CRYP_K2RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 CRYP_K3LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 CRYP_K3RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 CRYP_MISR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 CRYP_RISR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 CRYP_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

D
DAC_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 DAC_DHR12L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 DAC_DHR12L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 DAC_DHR12LD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 DAC_DHR12R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 DAC_DHR12R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 DAC_DHR12RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 DAC_DHR8R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 DAC_DHR8R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 DAC_DHR8RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 DAC_DOR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 DAC_DOR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 DAC_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 DAC_SWTRIGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 DBGMCU_APB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398 DBGMCU_APB2_FZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 DBGMCU_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 DBGMCU_IDCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 DCMI_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 DCMI_CWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 DCMI_CWSTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 DCMI_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 DCMI_ESCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 DCMI_ESUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 DCMI_ICR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 DCMI_IER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 DCMI_MIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 DCMI_RIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 DCMI_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 DMA_HIFCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 DMA_HISR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 DMA_LIFCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 DMA_LISR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 DMA_SxCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 DMA_SxFCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 DMA_SxM0AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

C
CAN_BTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 CAN_ESR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692 CAN_FA1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703 CAN_FFA1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703 CAN_FiRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704 CAN_FM1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 CAN_FMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 CAN_FS1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 CAN_IER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 CAN_MCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 CAN_MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 CAN_RDHxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700 CAN_RDLxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700 CAN_RDTxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699 CAN_RF0R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 CAN_RF1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 CAN_RIxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698 CAN_TDHxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697 CAN_TDLxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697 CAN_TDTxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 CAN_TIxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695 CAN_TSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 CRC_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 CRC_IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 CRYP_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576, 579 CRYP_DIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 CRYP_DMACR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 CRYP_DOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 CRYP_IMSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 CRYP_IV0LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 CRYP_IV0RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588

1409/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 DMA_SxM1AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 DMA_SxNDTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 DMA_SxPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ETH_PTPPPSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 ETH_PTPSSIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 ETH_PTPTSAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 ETH_PTPTSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 ETH_PTPTSHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 ETH_PTPTSHUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 ETH_PTPTSLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 ETH_PTPTSLUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 ETH_PTPTSSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 ETH_PTPTTHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 ETH_PTPTTLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 EXTI_EMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 EXTI_FTSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 EXTI_IMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 EXTI_PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 EXTI_RTSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 EXTI_SWIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

E
ETH_DMABMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1003 ETH_DMACHRBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1017 ETH_DMACHRDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1016 ETH_DMACHTBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1016 ETH_DMACHTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1016 ETH_DMAIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1013 ETH_DMAMFBOCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1015 ETH_DMAOMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1009 ETH_DMARDLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1006 ETH_DMARPDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1005 ETH_DMARSWTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1015 ETH_DMASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1007 ETH_DMATDLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1006 ETH_DMATPDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1005 ETH_MACA0HR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986 ETH_MACA0LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .987 ETH_MACA1HR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .987 ETH_MACA1LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .988 ETH_MACA2HR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .988 ETH_MACA2LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .989 ETH_MACA3HR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .989 ETH_MACA3LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .990 ETH_MACCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .972 ETH_MACDBGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .983 ETH_MACFCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979 ETH_MACFFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .975 ETH_MACHTHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .976 ETH_MACHTLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .977 ETH_MACIMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986 ETH_MACMIIAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .977 ETH_MACMIIDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .978 ETH_MACPMTCSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .982 ETH_MACRWUFFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .981 ETH_MACSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .985 ETH_MACVLANTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .980 ETH_MMCCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .991 ETH_MMCRFAECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .996 ETH_MMCRFCECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .995 ETH_MMCRGUFCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .996 ETH_MMCRIMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .993 ETH_MMCRIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .991 ETH_MMCTGFCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .995 ETH_MMCTGFMSCCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .995 ETH_MMCTGFSCCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .994 ETH_MMCTIMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .994 ETH_MMCTIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .992

F
FLITF_FCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79-80 FLITF_FKEYR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 FLITF_FOPTCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83 FLITF_FOPTKEYR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 FLITF_FSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 FSMC_BCR1..4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351 FSMC_BTR1..4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354 FSMC_BWTR1..4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356

G
GPIOx_AFRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 GPIOx_AFRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 GPIOx_BSRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 GPIOx_IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 GPIOx_LCKR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 GPIOx_MODER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 GPIOx_ODR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 GPIOx_OSPEEDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 GPIOx_OTYPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 GPIOx_PUPDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

H
HASH_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609, 612 HASH_CSRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 HASH_DIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 HASH_HR0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 HASH_HR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617, 619 HASH_HR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618-619 HASH_HR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 HASH_HR4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 HASH_IMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1410/1422

RM0090 HASH_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 HASH_STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 OTG_FS_GRXSTSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066, 1201 OTG_FS_GRXSTSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066, 1201 OTG_FS_GUSBCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055, 1188 OTG_FS_HAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075, 1211 OTG_FS_HAINTMSK . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076, 1211 OTG_FS_HCCHARx . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079, 1214 OTG_FS_HCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072, 1208 OTG_FS_HCINTMSKx . . . . . . . . . . . 1081, 1218 OTG_FS_HCINTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080, 1217 OTG_FS_HCTSIZx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082, 1219 OTG_FS_HFIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073, 1209 OTG_FS_HFNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074, 1209 OTG_FS_HPRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076, 1212 OTG_FS_HPTXFSIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071, 1207 OTG_FS_HPTXSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074, 1210 OTG_FS_PCGCCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105, 1247 OTG_HS_DCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220 OTG_HS_DEACHINTMSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231 OTG_HS_DIEPDMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247 OTG_HS_DOEPDMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247 OTG_HS_DTHRCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229 OTG_HS_HCSPLTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216

I
I2C_CCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .738 I2C_CR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 I2C_CR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 I2C_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733 I2C_OAR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732 I2C_OAR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732 I2C_SR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733 I2C_SR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737 I2C_TRISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739 IWDG_KR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 IWDG_PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 IWDG_RLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 IWDG_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540

O
OTG_FS_CID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1070, 1207 OTG_FS_DAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1088, 1227 OTG_FS_DAINTMSK . . . . . . . . . . . .1089, 1227 OTG_FS_DCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1083 OTG_FS_DCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1084, 1222 OTG_FS_DIEPCTL0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1091 OTG_FS_DIEPEMPMSK . . . . . . . . . .1090, 1230 OTG_FS_DIEPINTx . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1099, 1240 OTG_FS_DIEPMSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1086, 1225 OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZ0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .1101, 1243 OTG_FS_DIEPTSIZx . . . . . . . . . . . . .1103, 1245 OTG_FS_DIEPTXFx . . . . . . . . . . . . .1072, 1207 OTG_FS_DOEPCTL0 . . . . . . . . . . . .1095, 1236 OTG_FS_DOEPCTLx . . . . . . . . . . . .1096, 1237 OTG_FS_DOEPINTx . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100, 1242 OTG_FS_DOEPMSK . . . . . . . . . . . . .1087, 1226 OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZ0 . . . . . . . . . . . .1102, 1244 OTG_FS_DOEPTSIZx . . . . . . . . . . . .1104, 1246 OTG_FS_DSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1085, 1224 OTG_FS_DTXFSTSx . . . . . . . . . . . . .1104, 1246 OTG_FS_DVBUSDIS . . . . . . . . . . . .1089, 1228 OTG_FS_DVBUSPULSE . . . . . . . . . .1090, 1228 OTG_FS_GAHBCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . .1054, 1187 OTG_FS_GCCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1069, 1206 OTG_FS_GINTMSK . . . . . . . . . . . . .1063, 1198 OTG_FS_GINTSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1059, 1194 OTG_FS_GNPTXFSIZ . . . . . . . . . . . .1068, 1203 OTG_FS_GNPTXSTS . . . . . . . . . . . .1068, 1203 OTG_FS_GOTGCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . .1050, 1184 OTG_FS_GOTGINT . . . . . . . . . . . . .1052, 1186 OTG_FS_GRSTCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . .1057, 1191 OTG_FS_GRXFSIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1067, 1202
1411/1422

P
PWR_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-106 PWR_CSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

R
RCC_AHB1ENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 RCC_AHB1LPENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 161 RCC_AHB1RSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 RCC_AHB2ENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 RCC_AHB2LPENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 RCC_AHB2RSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 RCC_AHB3ENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 RCC_AHB3LPENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 RCC_AHB3RSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 RCC_APB1ENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 151 RCC_APB1LPENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 168 RCC_APB1RSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 138 RCC_APB2ENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 156 RCC_APB2LPENR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 173 RCC_APB2RSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 143 RCC_BDCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 RCC_CFGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 RCC_CIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 RCC_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 RCC_CSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 RCC_PLLCFGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 179 RCC_SSCGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 RNG_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 RNG_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 RNG_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596 RTC_ALRMAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 RTC_ALRMBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 RTC_ALRMBSSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 RTC_BKxR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 RTC_CALIBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 RTC_CALR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 RTC_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 RTC_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 RTC_ISR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 RTC_PRER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 RTC_SHIFTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 RTC_SSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 RTC_TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 RTC_TSDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 RTC_TSSSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 RTC_TSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 RTC_WPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 RTC_WUTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649

T
TIM2_OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 TIM5_OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 TIMx_ARR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474, 513, 522, 534 TIMx_BDTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 TIMx_CCER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409, 472, 512, 521 TIMx_CCMR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 405, 468, 509, 519 TIMx_CCMR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408, 471 TIMx_CCR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 475, 514, 523 TIMx_CCR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415, 475, 514 TIMx_CCR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415, 476 TIMx_CCR4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416, 476 TIMx_CNT . . . . . . . . . . .413, 474, 513, 522, 533 TIMx_CR1 . . . . . . . . . . .394, 459, 502, 516, 531 TIMx_CR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395, 461, 503, 532 TIMx_DCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418, 477 TIMx_DIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400, 464, 506, 532 TIMx_DMAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419, 477 TIMx_EGR . . . . . . . . . . .403, 467, 508, 517, 533 TIMx_PSC . . . . . . . . . . .413, 474, 513, 522, 534 TIMx_RCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 TIMx_SMCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398, 462, 504 TIMx_SR . . . . . . . . . . . .402, 465, 507, 516, 533

S
SDIO_CLKCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887 SDIO_DCOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .894 SDIO_DCTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893 SDIO_DLEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .892 SDIO_DTIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .892 SDIO_FIFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .901 SDIO_FIFOCNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .900 SDIO_ICR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .896 SDIO_MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .898 SDIO_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887 SDIO_RESPCMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .891 SDIO_RESPx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .891 SDIO_STA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .895 SPI_CR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .837 SPI_CR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .839 SPI_CRCPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841 SPI_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841 SPI_I2SCFGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .843 SPI_I2SPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .844 SPI_RXCRCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .842 SPI_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .840 SPI_TXCRCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .842 SYSCFG_EXTICR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 SYSCFG_EXTICR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 SYSCFG_EXTICR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 SYSCFG_EXTICR4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 SYSCFG_MEMRMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

U
USART_BRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 USART_CR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 USART_CR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 USART_CR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 USART_DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 USART_GTPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792 USART_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782

W
WWDG_CFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 WWDG_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 WWDG_SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1412/1422

Revision history

RM0090

Revision history
Table 240. Document revision history
Date 15-Sep-2011 Version 1 Initial release. Updated reference documents and added Table 1: Applicable products on cover page. MEMORY: Updated Section 2.3.1: Embedded SRAM. PWR: Updated VDDA and VREF+ decoupling capacitor in Figure 7: Power supply overview. Updated case of no external battery in Section 5.1.2: Battery backup domain. VOSRDY bit changed to read-only in Section 5.4.3: PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR). Removed VDDA in Section 5.2.3: Programmable voltage detector (PVD) and remove VDDA in PVDO bit description (Section 5.4.3: PWR power control/status register (PWR_CSR)). RCC: Updated Figure 12: Simplified diagram of the reset circuit and Changes

19-Oct-2012

minimum reset pulse duration guaranteed by pulse generator restricted to internal reset sources.
GPIOs: Updated Section 7.3.1: General-purpose I/O (GPIO). DMA: Updated direct mode description in Section 9.2: DMA main features. Updated direct mode description in Section : Memory-to-peripheral mode, and Section 9.3.12: FIFO/Direct mode. Modified Stream2 /Channel 2 in Table 35: DMA1 request mapping. Added note related to EN bit in Section 9.5.5: DMA stream x configuration register (DMA_SxCR) (x = 0..7). Updated definition of NDT[15:0] bits in Section 9.5.6: DMA stream x number of data register (DMA_SxNDTR) (x = 0..7). Updated register access in Section 9.5: DMA registers. Interrupts: Updated number of maskable interrupts to 82 in Section 10.1.1: NVIC featuress. EXTI: Updated Section 10.2: External interrupt/event controller (EXTI)

19-Oct-2012

2 (continued)

1413/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version Changes

Revision history

ADC: Changed ADCCLK frequency to 30 MHz in Section 11.5: Channelwise programmable sampling timee. Added recovery from ADC sequence in Section 11.8.1: Using the DMA and Section 11.8.2: Managing a sequence of conversions without using the DMA. Updated AWDIE in Section 11.13.2: ADC control register 1 (ADC_CR1). Added read and write access in Section 11.13: ADC registers. Advanced control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) Updated 16-bit prescaler range in Section 14.2: TIM1&TIM8 main features. Updated OC1 block diagram in Figure 99: Output stage of capture/compare channel (channel 1 to 3). Updated update event generation in Upcounting mode and Downcounting mode in Section 14.3.2: Counter modes and Section 14.3.3: Repetition counter. Updated bits that control the dead-time generation in Section 14.3.11: Complementary outputs and dead-time insertion. Updated ways to generate a break in Section 14.3.12: Using the break function. Changed OCxREF to ETR in the example given in Section 14.3.13: Clearing the OCxREF signal on an external event and changed OCREF_CLR to ETRF in Figure 109: Clearing TIMx OCxREF. Updated configuration for example of counter operation in encoder interface mode in Section 14.3.16: Encoder interface mode. Added register access in Section 14.4: TIM1&TIM8 registers. Changed definition of ARR[15:0] bits in Section 14.4.12: TIM1&TIM8 auto-reload register (TIMx_ARR). Updated BKE definition in Section 14.4.18: TIM1&TIM8 break and dead-time register (TIMx_BDTR).

19-Oct-2012

2 (continued)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1414/1422

Revision history Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version Changes General purpose timers (TIM2 to TIM5)

RM0090

19-Oct-2012

2 (continued)

Removed all references to repetition counter. Added Figure 119: General-purpose timer block diagram. Updated 16-bit prescaler range in Section 15.2: TIM2 to TIM5 main features. External clock mode 2 ETR restricted to TIM2 to TIM4 in Section 15.3.3: Clock selection and Section 15.3.6: PWM input mode. Updated Section 15.3.9: PWM mode and Section 15.3.11: Clearing the OCxREF signal on an external event. Updated Figure 159: Master/Slave timer example to change ITR1 to ITR0. Updated read and write access to registers in Section 15.4: TIM2 to TIM5 registerss. Restored bits 15 to 8 of TIMx_SMCR as well as Table 76: TIMx internal trigger connection in Section 14.4.3. Removed note 1 related to OC1M bits in Section 15.4.13: TIMx capture/compare register 1 (TIMx_CCR1). Updated TIMx_CCER bit description for TIM2 to TIM5 in Section 15.4.9: TIMx capture/compare enable register (TIMx_CCER). General purpose timers (TIM9 to TIM14) Updated 16-bit prescaler range in Section 16.2.1: TIM9/TIM12 main features and Section 16.3: TIM10/TIM11 and TIM13/TIM14 main features. Updated Figure 166: General-purpose timer block diagram (TIM10/11/13/14)) to remove TRGO trigger controller output. Added register access in Section 16.5: TIM9 and TIM12 registers and Section 16.6: TIM10/11/13/14 registers.

Basic timers (TIM6 and TIM7) Removed all references to repetition counter. Updated 16-bit prescaler range in Section 17.2: TIM6&TIM7 main features. HASH: Updated Section 22.3.1: Duration of the processing. RNG: Updated Section 21.1: RNG introduction.

1415/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version RTC: Changes

Revision history

Updated Figure 222: RTC block diagram. Added formula to compute fck_apre in Section 23.3.1: Clock and prescalers. Updated Section 23.3.9: RTC reference clock detection. Updated Section : RTC register write protection. Added RTC_SSR shadow register in Section 23.3.6: Reading the calendar. Updated description of DC[4:0] bits in Section 23.6.7: RTC calibration register (RTC_CALIBR). Renamed RTC_BKxR into RTC_BKPxR in Table 99: RTC register map and reset values. Added power-on reset value and changed reset value to system reset value in Section 23.6.11: RTC sub second register (RTC_SSR). Updated definition of ALARMOUTTYPE in Section 23.6.17: RTC tamper and alternate function configuration register (RTC_TAFCR). I2C: Modified Section 25.3.8: DMA requests. Updated bit 14 description in Section 25.6.3: I2C Own address register 1 (I2C_OAR1)). Updated definition of PE bit and note related to SWRST bit; moved note related to STOP bit to the whole register in Section 25.6.1: I2C Control register 1 (I2C_CR1). USART: Section 26.6.6: Control register 3 (USART_CR3)): removed notes related to UART5 in DMAT and DMAR description. Updated TTable 116: Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 Hz, oversampling by 16 and Table 117: Error calculation for programmed baud rates at fPCLK = 42 MHz or fPCLK = 84 MHz, oversampling by 8. SPI/I2S: Updated Section 27.1: SPI introduction. Changed I2S simplex communication/mode to half-duplex communication/mode. Updated flags in reception/transmission modes in Section 27.2.2: I2S features. Added Frame error flag in Table 126: I2S interrupt requests. Added register access in Section 27.5: SPI and I2S registers. Updated ERRIE definition in Section 27.5.2: SPI control register 2 (SPI_CR2). Renamed TIFRFE to FRE and definition updated in Section 27.5.3: SPI status register (SPI_SR).

19-Oct-2012

2 (continued)

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1416/1422

Revision history Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version SDIO: Changes

RM0090

Updated value and description for bits [45:40] and [7:1] in Table 154: R4 response. Updated value at bits [45:40] in Table 156: R5 response. CAN: Updated Figure 224: Dual CAN block diagram. Modified definition of CAN2SB bits in Section : CAN filter master register (CAN_FMR). Added register access in Section 24.9: CAN registers ETHERNET: Updated standard for precision networked clock synchronization in Section 29.1: Ethernet introduction and Section 29.2.1: MAC core features. Updated CR bit definition in Section : Ethernet MAC MII address register (ETH_MACMIIAR). Replace RTPR by PM bit in Table 167: Source address filtering. 2 (continued) USB OTG FS

19-Oct-2012

Updated remote wakeup signaling bit and the resume interrupt in Section : Suspended state.
Added peripheral register access in Section 30.16: OTG_FS control and status registerss. Updated INEPTXSA description in OTG_FS_DIEPTXFx. Changed PHYSEL from bit 7 to bit 6 of the OTG_FS_GUSBCFG register. USB OTG HS

Updated remote wakeup signaling bit and the resume interrupt in Section : Suspended state.
Added peripheral register access in Section 31.12: OTG_HS control and status registers. Updated INEPTXSA description in OTG_HS_DIEPTXFx. Updated FSLSPCS for LS host mode, added PHYSEL in Section : OTG_HS host configuration register (OTG_HS_HCFG). Renamed PHYSEL into PHSEL and changed from bit 7 to bit 6 of the OTG_HS_GUSBCFG register. Updated OTG_HS_DIEPEACHMSK1 and OTG_HS_DOEPEACHMSK1 reset values.

1417/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version FSMC: Changes

Revision history

19-Oct-2012

2 (continued)

Updated step b) in Section 32.3.1: Supported memories and transactions. Updated Table 196: FSMC_BTRx bit fields, and Table 204: FSMC_BTRx bit fields. Changed Clock divide ration min in Table 215: Programmable NAND/PC Card access parameters. Updated case of synchronous accesses in Section 32.5: NOR Flash/PSRAM controller. Changed minimum value for ADDSET to 0 in Table 203, Table 206, Table 207, Table 209, and Table 210. Move note from Figure 406: Mode1 write accesses and Figure 405: Mode1 read accesses. Move note from Figure 408: ModeA write accesses to Figure 407: ModeA read accesses. Updated Section : WAIT management in asynchronous accesses. Added register access in Section 32.5.6: NOR/PSRAM control registers and Section 32.6.2: NAND Flash / PC Card supported memories and transactions. Removed caution note in Section 32.6.1: External memory interface signalss. Updated Table 218: 16-bit PC Card. Updated step 3 in Section 32.6.4: NAND Flash operations. Updated Figure 424: Access to non CE dont care NAND-Flash and note below in Section 32.6.5: NAND Flash pre-wait functionality. Updated access to I/O Space in Section 32.6.7: PC Card/CompactFlash operationss. Updated Table 220: 16-bit PC-Card signals and access type. Updated BUSTURN bit definition in Section : SRAM/NOR-Flash chip-select timing registers 1..4 (FSMC_BTR1..4)). Changed bits 16 to 19 to BUSTURN in Section : SRAM/NOR-Flash write timing registers 1..4 (FSMC_BWTR1..4) DEBUG: Updated Section 33.4.3: Internal pull-up and pull-down on JTAG pins. Electronic signature Updated Section 34: Device electronic signature introduction. Updated REV_ID[15:0] to add revision Z in Section 33.6.1: MCU device ID code. Updated address and example in Section 34.2: Flash size.

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1418/1422

Revision history Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version Changes

RM0090

13-Nov-2012

Added STM32F42x and STM32F43x devices. Removed reference du Flash programming manual on cover page. Added Section 2.3.2: Flash memory overview and Section 3: Embedded Flash memory interface. Change RTC_50Hz into RTC_REFIN in Section 7.3.2: I/O pin multiplexer and mapping. Modified RTC alternate function naming in Section 7: General-purpose I/Os (GPIO) and Section 23: Real-time clock (RTC). Updated max. input frequency in Section 23.3.1: Clock and prescalers. Changed bit access type from rw to w and bit description updated in Section 9.5.3: DMA low interrupt flag clear register (DMA_LIFCR) and Section 9.5.4: DMA high interrupt flag clear register (DMA_HIFCR). Updated Figure 15: Frequency measurement with TIM5 in Input capture mode. Updated Section : Signals synchronization in Section 32: Flexible static memory controller (FSMC) Section 30: USB on-the-go full-speed (OTG_FS): updated Figure 360: USB host-only connection, Section : VBUS valid, and Section : Host detection of a peripheral connection. Section 31: USB on-the-go high-speed (OTG_HS): updated Section : VBUS valid, and Section : Detection of peripheral connection by the host.

1419/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090 Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version Changes

Revision history

Updated Section 2.3.1: Embedded SRAM. Updated Figure 1: System architecture for STM32F405xx/07xx and STM32F415xx/17xx devices, and Figure 2: System architecture for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx devices. Updated Table 4: Memory mapping vs. Boot mode/physical remap. Updated Figure 4: Sequential 32-bit instruction execution. removed note 1 from Table 7: Number of wait states according to CPU clock (HCLK) frequency and Table 8: Program/erase parallelism. PWR: Updated Figure 7: Power supply overview. Updated Section 5.1.3: Voltage regulator. Added ADCDC1 bit in Section 5.4.2: PWR power control register (PWR_CR) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx. SYSCFG: Added ADCxDC2 bit in Section 8.2.3: SYSCFG peripheral mode configuration register (SYSCFG_PMC) for STM32F42xxx and STM32F43xxx. ADC: Updated Section 11.9.3: Interleaved mode, Section 11.9.4: Alternate trigger mode, and Section 11.9.6: Combined regular simultaneous + alternate trigger mode to describe case of interrupted conversion. Updated Section : Temperature sensor, VREFINT and VBAT internal channels, Section 11.10: Temperature sensor, and Section 11.11: Battery charge monitoring. RTC: Updated BKP[31:0] bit description in Section 23.6.20: RTC backup registers (RTC_BKPxR). I2C: Updated Section 25.3.5: Programmable noise filter.

19-Feb-2013

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1420/1422

Revision history Table 240. Document revision history

Date Version Changes

RM0090

19-Feb-2013

4 (continued)

FSMC: Updated write FIFO size in Section 32.1: FSMC main features. Updated Figure 403: FSMC block diagram. Updated Section 32.5.4: NOR Flash/PSRAM controller asynchronous transactions. Modified differences between Mode B and mode 1 in Section : Mode 2/B - NOR Flash. Modified differences between Mode C and mode 1 in Section : Mode C - NOR Flash - OE toggling. Modified differences between Mode D and mode 1 in Section : Mode D - asynchronous access with extended address. Updated NWAIT signal in Figure 418: Asynchronous wait during a read access, Figure 419: Asynchronous wait during a write access, Figure 420: Wait configurations, Figure 421: Synchronous multiplexed read mode - NOR, PSRAM (CRAM), and Figure 422: Synchronous multiplexed write mode - PSRAM (CRAM). Updated Table 195 to Table 214. Updated Section : SRAM/NOR-Flash chip-select control registers 1..4 (FSMC_BCR1..4). DEBUG Updated Figure 425: Block diagram of STM32 MCU and CortexM4F-level debug support.

1421/1422

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

RM0090

Please Read Carefully:

Information in this document is provided solely in connection with ST products. STMicroelectronics NV and its subsidiaries (ST) reserve the right to make changes, corrections, modifications or improvements, to this document, and the products and services described herein at any time, without notice. All ST products are sold pursuant to STs terms and conditions of sale. Purchasers are solely responsible for the choice, selection and use of the ST products and services described herein, and ST assumes no liability whatsoever relating to the choice, selection or use of the ST products and services described herein. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted under this document. If any part of this document refers to any third party products or services it shall not be deemed a license grant by ST for the use of such third party products or services, or any intellectual property contained therein or considered as a warranty covering the use in any manner whatsoever of such third party products or services or any intellectual property contained therein.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SET FORTH IN STS TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE ST DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE USE AND/OR SALE OF ST PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS UNDER THE LAWS OF ANY JURISDICTION), OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT. UNLESS EXPRESSLY APPROVED IN WRITING BY TWO AUTHORIZED ST REPRESENTATIVES, ST PRODUCTS ARE NOT RECOMMENDED, AUTHORIZED OR WARRANTED FOR USE IN MILITARY, AIR CRAFT, SPACE, LIFE SAVING, OR LIFE SUSTAINING APPLICATIONS, NOR IN PRODUCTS OR SYSTEMS WHERE FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR SEVERE PROPERTY OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE. ST PRODUCTS WHICH ARE NOT SPECIFIED AS "AUTOMOTIVE GRADE" MAY ONLY BE USED IN AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS AT USERS OWN RISK.

Resale of ST products with provisions different from the statements and/or technical features set forth in this document shall immediately void any warranty granted by ST for the ST product or service described herein and shall not create or extend in any manner whatsoever, any liability of ST.

ST and the ST logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of ST in various countries. Information in this document supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics. All other names are the property of their respective owners.

2013 STMicroelectronics - All rights reserved STMicroelectronics group of companies Australia - Belgium - Brazil - Canada - China - Czech Republic - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Philippines - Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - United States of America www.st.com

Doc ID 018909 Rev 4

1422/1422